L319 Discovery 4 SDV6-SCV6 Workshop Manual MY2013-2015

L319 MK4 - Discovery 4 MY2013-2015
Workshop Manual
© 2016 - Outback Engineering Ltd

1: General Information
100: Service Information
100-00: General Information
Description and Operation
About This Manual
How To Use This Manual
Important Safety Instructions
General Service Information
Standard Workshop Practices
Health and Safety Precautions
Solvents, Sealants and Adhesives
Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and Safety Precautions
Road/Roller Testing
Special Tool Glossary
DTC: Air Suspension Control Module
DTC: Anti-Lock Brake System Control Module (ABS)
DTC: Audio Amplifier Module (AAM)
DTC: Audio Head Unit (AHU) - Low Line
DTC: Automatic Temperature Control Module (ATC)
DTC: Blindspot Monitoring Control Module (BMCM) - Left/Right
DTC: Central Junction Box (CJB)
DTC: Digital Radio Control Module (DRCM)
DTC: Driver/Passenger Door Control Module (DDM/PDM)
DTC: Driver/Passenger Seat Module (DSM/PSM)
DTC: Electric Park Brake Control Module (EPBCM)
DTC: Electric Steering Column Lock Control Module (ESCL)
TDV6 3.0L Diesel , DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM)
DTC: V6 3.0L S/C Petrol, DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM)
DTC: Fuel Fired Booster Heater Control Module (FFBH)
DTC: Gateway Module (GWM)
DTC: Headlamp Leveling Control Module (HLCM)
DTC: Instrument Cluster (IC)
DTC: Integrated Audio Module (IAM) - High Line
DTC: Integrated Control Panel (ICP)
DTC: Rear Integrated Control Panel (RICP)
DTC: Keyless Vehicle Module (KVM)
DTC: Multi-Function Display (MFD)
DTC: Navigation Control Module (NCM) - India & Israel
DTC: Navigation Control Module (NCM) - Extended Markets
DTC: Occupant Classification Sensor Control Module (OCSCM)
DTC: Parking Aid Control Module (PACM)
DTC: Proximity Camera Control Module (PCCM)
DTC: Rear Differential Control Module (RDCM)
DTC: Rear Seat Entertainment Control Module (RSECM)
DTC: Rear View Camera (RVC)
DTC: Rear View Mirror
DTC: Restraints Control Module (RCM)
DTC: Satellite Radio Control Module (SRCM)
DTC: Steering Angle Sensor Module (SASM)
DTC: Terrain Response Switchpack (TR)
DTC: Touch Screen (TS)
DTC: Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM)
DTC: Transmission Control Module (TCM)
DTC: Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
DTC: TV Control Module (TVCM) - Digital
DTC: Telephone Interface Module (TIM)
DTC: TV Control Module (TVCM) - Hybrid
DTC: TV Control Module (TVCM) - Conditional Access System
DTC: Wade Aid Control Module (WACM)
100-01: Identification Codes
Identification Codes
Identification Codes
100-02: Jacking and Lifting
Vehicle Recovery
Jacking
Lifting
100-03: Maintenance Schedules
Maintenance Schedules - Gasoline Engines
Maintenance Schedules - Diesel Engines
100-11: Vehicle Transportation Aids and Vehicle Storage
New Vehicle Storage
New Vehicle Storage Form
101: Pre-Delivery Information
101-01: Pre-Delivery Inspection Manual
Preliminary
Vehicle Interior
Vehicle Exterior
Road Test
Quality Assurance Checks
Removal and Installation
SD Memory Card
101-02: Showroom Preparation
Showroom Preparation
101-03: Exterior Body & Paint Pre-Delivery Inspection (PDI) Standards
Introduction
Cosmetic Acceptance Standards
Exterior Surface Zone Identification
Paint Exceptions And Associated Repair Procedures
General Requirements
Identification Of Exceptions
Exterior Pre-Delivery Inspection (PDI) Process
2: Chassis
204: Suspension
204-00: Suspension System - General Information
Specification
Diagnosis and Testing
Suspension System
General Procedures
Four-Wheel Alignment (57.65.04)
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout Check
204-01: Front Suspension
Specification
Front Suspension
Front Suspension
Front Stabilizer Bar (60.10.01)
Front Stabilizer Bar Link (60.10.02/60.10.04)
Upper Arm Ball Joint (60.15.02)
Lower Arm Ball Joint (60.15.03)
Wheel Knuckle (60.25.01)
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub (60.25.14)
Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly (60.21.01) (60.30.25/99)
Upper Arm (60.35.01)
Upper Arm Bushing (60.35.32)
Lower Arm (60.35.02)
Lower Arm Bushing (60.35.33)
Lower Arm Front Bushing (60.35.24)
Lower Arm Rear Bushing (60.35.25) (60.35.36) (60.35.36.47)
Disassembly and Assembly
Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly - TDV6 2.7L Diesel
204-02: Rear Suspension
Specification
Rear Suspension
Rear Suspension
Upper Arm Ball Joint (64.15.07)
Lower Arm Ball Joint (64.15.08)
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub (64.15.14)
Rear Stabilizer Bar (64.35.08)
Upper Arm Bushing (64.35.22)
Rear Stabilizer Bar Link (64.35.24)
Lower Arm (64.35.54)
Upper Arm (64.35.60)
Toe Link (64.35.70)
Lower Arm Bushing (64.35.15)
Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly (64.30.11/99) - TDV6 2.7L Diesel
Wheel Knuckle (64.35.10)
Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly - TDV6 2.7L Diesel
204-04: Wheels and Tires
Specification
Wheels and Tires
Wheels and Tires
Tire Low Pressure Sensor (74.10.05)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna (86.53.16)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna (86.53.17)
204-05: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
Specification
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
General Procedures
Air Suspension System Depressurize and Pressurize (60.50.38)
Ride Height Adjustments (60.90.03)
Air Leaks
Suspension Height Sensor (60.36.01)
Air Suspension Reservoir (60.50.03)
Air Suspension Control Module (60.50.04)
Air Suspension Reservoir Solenoid Valve Block (60.50.05)
Air Suspension Compressor Drier (60.50.09)
Air Suspension Front Solenoid Valve Block (60.50.11)
Rear Air Spring (64.21.01)
Air Suspension Muffler (64.50.01)
Air Suspension Rear Solenoid Valve Block (64.50.11)
Air Suspension Air Filter (64.50.12)
Front Air Shock Absorber (60.30.02.45)
Rear Air Shock Absorber (64.30.02.45)
Front Shock Absorber and Air Spring Assembly (60.21.01.99)
Rear Shock Absorber and Air Spring Assembly (64.21.01.99)
Air Suspension Pressure Sensor
Air Suspension Compressor (60.50.10)
204-06: Ride and Handling Optimization
Ride and Handling Optimization
Ride and Handling Optimization Switch (86.65.11)
Ride and Handling Optimization Switch (86.65.11)
205: Driveline
205-01: Driveshaft
Specification
Driveshaft
Universal Joints
Front Driveshaft - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Front Driveshaft (47.15.02) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Rear Driveshaft (47.15.03)
205-02: Rear Drive Axle/Differential
Specification
Rear Drive Axle and Differential
Rear Drive Axle and Differential
General Procedures
Differential Draining and Filling (51.25.02)
In-Vehicle Repair
Differential Locking Motor (51.15.03)
Rear Axle Oil Temperature Sensor (51.15.06)
Drive Pinion Seal (51.20.01)
Differential Locking Module (51.30.01)
Axle Assembly (51.15.01)
Axle Housing Bushing (51.15.41)
Rear Axle Housing Support Insulator (51.15.44)
205-03: Front Drive Axle/Differential
Specification
Front Drive Axle and Differential
General Procedures
Differential Draining and Filling (54.15.02)
In-Vehicle Repair
Drive Pinion Seal (54.10.20)
Front Axle Housing Support Insulator (54.10.24)
Axle Tube (47.10.42)
Axle Assembly (54.10.01)
Axle Carrier Bushing (54.10.26)
Axle Tube Bushing
Axle Cover Bushing
205-04: Front Drive Halfshafts
Specification
Front Drive Halfshafts
Halfshaft Joint
Front Halfshaft LH (47.10.01)
Front Halfshaft RH (47.10.02)
Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot (47.10.03)
Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint (47.10.04)
Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot (47.10.16)
Halfshaft Seal LH (54.10.18)
Halfshaft Seal RH (54.10.21)
205-05: Rear Drive Halfshafts
Specification
Rear Drive Halfshafts
Rear Halfshaft (47.11.01)
Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot (47.11.03)
Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot (47.11.16)
Halfshaft Bearing (51.10.29)
206: Brake System
206-00: Brake System - General Information
Specification
Brake System
General Procedures
Front Brake Disc Runout Check (70.12.15.01)
Rear Brake Disc Runout Check (70.12.36.01)
Brake System Bleeding (70.25.02)
Brake System Pressure Bleeding (70.25.02)
Component Bleeding
Front Brake Disc Runout Check - With Wheel On
Rear Brake Disc Runout Check - With Wheel On
Brake Pad Bedding-In
206-03: Front Disc Brake
Specification
Front Disc Brake
Front Disc Brake
Brake Disc (70.12.10) - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Brake Pads (70.40.02) - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Brake Caliper (70.55.24) - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
206-04: Rear Disc Brake
Specification
Rear Disc Brake
Rear Disc Brake
Brake Disc (70.12.33)
Brake Pads (70.40.03)
Brake Caliper (70.55.25)
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate (70.55.29)
206-05: Parking Brake and Actuation
Specification
Parking Brake
Parking Brake
Parking Brake
General Procedures
Parking Brake Shoe and Lining Adjustment (70.40.11)
Parking Brake Shoes Bedding-In (70.40.12)
Parking Brake Cable LH
Parking Brake Cable RH
Parking Brake Switch
Parking Brake Actuator (70.35.48)
Parking Brake Shoes (70.40.09)
206-06: Hydraulic Brake Actuation
Specification
Hydraulic Brake Actuation
Brake Fluid Reservoir (70.25.31)
Brake Master Cylinder (70.30.08)
Brake Pedal (70.35.01)
Brake Pedal and Bracket (70.35.03)
206-07: Power Brake Actuation
Specification
Brake Booster
Brake Booster (70.50.01)
Brake Vacuum Pump - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Brake Vacuum Pump - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
206-09A: Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control
Specification
Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control
Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module (70.25.12)
Front Wheel Speed Sensor (70.65.30)
Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (70.65.31)
206-09B: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist
Yaw Rate Sensor (70.70.35)
211: Steering System
211-00: Steering System - General Information
Steering System
General Procedures
Power Steering System Filling and Bleeding
Power Steering System Flushing
211-02: Power Steering
Specification
Power Steering
General Procedures
Power Steering Pressure Test - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Power Steering Pressure Test - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Steering Gear (57.10.01) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Steering Gear (57.10.01) - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (57.15.08) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V6 S/C
3.0L Petrol
Power Steering Fluid Cooler (57.15.11) - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Power Steering Pump (57.20.14) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Power Steering Pump (57.20.14) - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Steering Angle Sensor (57.40.02)
Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line
211-03: Steering Linkage
Specification
Steering Linkage
Tie Rod End (57.55.07)
Steering Gear Boot (57.10.29)
Tie Rod (57.55.09)
211-04: Steering Column
Specification
Steering Column
Steering Column (57.40.01) (57.40.06)
Steering Column Shaft (57.40.22)
Steering Column Lower Shaft (57.40.16 / 57.40.27)
Steering Wheel (57.61.01)
211-05: Steering Column Switches
Specification
Steering Column Switches
Steering Column Lock and Ignition Switch Housing (57.40.31)
Ignition Switch (86.65.02)
Steering Column Multifunction Switch RH (86.65.41)
Steering Column Multifunction Switch LH (86.65.55)
3: Powertrain
303: Engine
303-00: Engine System - General Information
Engine (12.90.09.01) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Engine (12.90.09.01) - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Bearing Inspection
Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter
Camshaft End Play
Camshaft Lobe Lift
Camshaft Surface Inspection
Connecting Rod Cleaning
Connecting Rod Large End Bore
Crankshaft End Play
Cylinder Bore Out-of-Round
Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection
Piston Inspection
Piston Pin Diameter
Piston Pin to Bore Diameter
Piston Ring End Gap
Piston Ring-to-Groove Clearance
Valve Spring Free Length
Valve Stem Diameter
Leakage Test Using Smoke Test Equipment
Cylinder Head Gasket Selection - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Cylinder Head Distortion
Cylinder Compression Test - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
303-01A: Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
System Operation and Component Description
Engine
General Procedures
Engine Oil Draining and Filling (12.60.05)
Engine Oil Vacuum Draining and Filling
Camshaft LH
Camshaft RH
Camshaft Front Seal
Camshaft Rear Seal
Crankshaft Front Seal (12.21.14)
Crankshaft Pulley (12.21.01)
Crankshaft Rear Seal (12.21.20)
Cylinder Head LH
Cylinder Head RH
Engine Mount LH (12.45.11)
Engine Mount RH (12.45.12)
Exhaust Manifold LH
Exhaust Manifold RH
Exhaust Manifold Crossover Pipe
Flexplate (12.53.13)
Oil Cooler (12.60.68)
Oil Filter Element (12.60.02)
Oil Pan (12.60.44)
Oil Pan Extension (12.60.41)
Oil Pump (12.60.26)
Timing Belt (12.65.18)
Timing Cover (12.65.01 or 12.65.43)
Valve Cover LH
Valve Cover RH
Removal
Engine
Installation
Engine
303-01B: Engine - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Specification
Engine
Engine
General Procedures
Engine Oil Draining and Filling (12.60.05)
Engine Oil Vacuum Draining and Filling
Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Check
Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Adjustment
Valve Clearance Check (12.29.73)
Valve Clearance Adjustment (12.29.76)
Camshaft LH
Camshaft RH
Crankshaft Front Seal (12.21.14)
Crankshaft Pulley (12.21.01)
Crankshaft Rear Seal (12.21.20)
Cylinder Head LH
Cylinder Head RH
Engine Mount LH (12.45.11)
Engine Mount RH (12.45.12)
Exhaust Manifold LH
Exhaust Manifold RH
Flexplate (12.53.13)
Oil Cooler (12.60.68)
Oil Filter Element (12.60.02)
Oil Pan Extension (12.60.41)
Oil Pump (12.60.26)
Timing Cover (12.65.01 or 12.65.43)
Timing Drive Components
Valve Cover LH
Valve Cover RH
Fuel Pump Camshaft
Lower Timing Cover
Removal
Engine
Installation
Engine
303-03A: Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Engine Cooling
General Procedures
Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding
Auxiliary Radiator
Coolant Expansion Tank
Coolant Pump
Cooling Fan
Cooling Fan Shroud
Radiator
Thermostat
303-03B: Engine Cooling - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Specification
Engine Cooling
Engine Cooling
General Procedures
Cooling System Draining and Vacuum Filling
Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding
Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding
Coolant Expansion Tank
Cooling Fan
Coolant Pump
Radiator
Thermostat Housing
303-03C: Supercharger Cooling - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Specification
Supercharger Cooling
Supercharger Cooling
Coolant Pump
Radiator
303-04A: Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Fuel Charging and Controls
General Procedures
Fuel Injection Component Cleaning
Fuel Injection Pump
Fuel Injectors LH
Fuel Injectors RH
Fuel Rail LH
Fuel Rail RH
Intake Air Shutoff Throttle
303-04B: Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Turbocharger
Turbocharger LH
Turbocharger RH
Fixed Vane Turbocharger Actuator
Turbocharger Bypass Valve
303-04C: Fuel Charging and Controls - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Specification
General Procedures
Fuel Injection Component Cleaning
Fuel Injection Component Cleaning Using Pressure Cleaner
Fuel Injectors
Fuel Rail LH
Fuel Rail RH
High Pressure Fuel Pump 1
High Pressure Fuel Pump 2
Fuel Pump Driver Module (FPDM)
Throttle Body
303-05A: Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Accessory Drive
Accessory Drive Belt
Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley
Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Fuel Injection Pump Pulley
Rear End Accessory Drive (READ)
303-05B: Accessory Drive - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Specification
Accessory Drive
Accessory Drive
Accessory Drive Belt
Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley
Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Supercharger Belt Idler Pulley
Supercharger Belt Tensioner
Supercharger Belt
303-06A: Starting System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Starting System
Starter Motor
303-06B: Starting System - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Specification
Starting System
Starting System
Starter Motor
303-07A: Glow Plug System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Glow Plug System
Glow Plugs
303-07B: Engine Ignition - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Specification
Engine Ignition
Engine Ignition
Ignition Coil-On-Plug
Spark Plugs
303-08A: Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Engine Emission Control
Crankcase Vent Oil Separator
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve RH
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Outlet Tube LH
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Outlet Tube RH
303-08B: Engine Emission Control - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
303-12A: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering
Air Cleaner
Air Cleaner Element (19.10.10)
Charge Air Cooler
303-12B: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Specification
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T-Connector
Charge Air Cooler
Supercharger
Air Cleaner Element
Air Cleaner LH
Air Cleaner RH
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe LH
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe RH
303-13: Evaporative Emissions - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Evaporative Emissions
Evaporative Emissions
303-14A: Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Electronic Engine Controls
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor (18.30.24)
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor (18.30.12)
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Ring (18.30.14)
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Differential Pressure Sensor
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor (18.30.10)
Engine Control Module (ECM) (18.30.03)
Engine Oil Level Sensor (12.60.51)
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor
Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor RH
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) (19.22.16)
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor (18.30.09)
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor (18.30.56)
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor (19.22.25)
Oil Temperature Sensor (18.30.41)
Post Catalytic Converter Temperature Sensor
Post DPF Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor
Pre Catalytic Converter Temperature Sensor
Pre DPF Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor
303-14B: Electronic Engine Controls - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Specification
General Procedures
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Adjustment
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor LH
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor RH
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor (18.30.12)
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor (18.30.10)
Engine Oil Level Sensor (12.60.51)
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
Knock Sensor (KS) LH
Knock Sensor (KS) RH
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor (18.30.56)
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) Oil Control Solenoid LH
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) Oil Control Solenoid RH
Left Mid catalyst Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Right Mid catalyst Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Pre catalyst Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Post catalyst Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor (19.22.25)
Engine Control Module (ECM) (18.30.03)
307: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle
307-01: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol ,
Vehicles With: 8HP70 8-Speed Automatic Transmission AWD
Specification
Transmission Description
Diagnostics - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol , Vehicles With:
8HP70 8-Speed Automatic Transmission AWD
General Procedures
Transmission Fluid Level Check
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Input Shaft Seal
Extension Housing Seal
Transmission Control Module (TCM) and Main Control Valve Body
Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter
Transmission Support Insulator
Selector Shaft Seal
Removal
Transmission - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Transmission - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Installation
Transmission - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Transmission - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
307-02: Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol ,
Vehicles With: 8HP70 8-Speed Automatic Transmission AWD
Specification
Transmission Cooling
Transmission Cooling
307-05: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V6
S/C 3.0L Petrol , Vehicles With: 8HP70 8-Speed Automatic Transmission AWD
Specification
External Controls
External Controls
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Knob
Emergency Park Position Release Lever
Upshift Paddle Switch
Downshift Paddle Switch
308: Manual Transmission/Transaxle, Clutch and Transfer Case
308-07A: Four-Wheel Drive Systems
Specification
Four-Wheel Drive Systems
Transfer Case Clutch Solenoid
High/Low Range Sensor (41.30.07)
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Control Module
Transfer Case Shift Motor (41.30.03)
308-07B: Transfer Case - Vehicles With: Single Speed Transfer Case
Specification
Transfer Case
Transfer Case
General Procedures
Transfer Case Draining and Filling
Transfer Case Front Output Seal
Transfer Case Front Output Shaft Bearing
Transfer Case Rear Output Seal
Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Bearing
Transfer Case Connecting Sleeve Seals
Transfer Case Differential
Removal
Transfer Case - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Transfer Case - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Installation
Transfer Case - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Transfer Case - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
308-07C: Transfer Case - Vehicles With: Twin Speed Transfer Case
Specification
Transfer Case
Transfer Case
General Procedures
Transfer Case Draining and Filling (41.20.04)
Transfer Case Front Output Seal
Transfer Case Front Output Shaft Bearing
Transfer Case Rear Output Seal
Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Bearing
Transfer Case Connecting Sleeve Seals
Transfer Case Chain
Removal
Transfer Case (41.20.25.99) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Transfer Case (41.20.25.99) - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Installation
Transfer Case (41.20.25) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Transfer Case (41.20.25) - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
309: Exhaust System
309-00A: Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Exhaust System
Exhaust System
Component Location
Diesel Particulate Filter
Exhaust System
General Procedures
Exhaust System Repair
Catalytic Converter (17.50.01)
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Exhaust System (30.10.01)
Front Muffler (30.10.11)
Rear Muffler (30.10.22)
309-00B: Exhaust System - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Specification
Exhaust System
General Procedures
Exhaust System Repair
Catalytic Converter LH
Catalytic Converter RH
Exhaust System (30.10.01)
Front Muffler (30.10.11)
Rear Muffler (30.10.22)
310: Fuel System
310-00: Fuel System - General Information
General Procedures
Diesel Filter Water Drain-Off
Low-Pressure Fuel System Bleeding (19.50.07)
Fuel Tank Draining (19.55.02)
Fuel System Pressure Release (19.50.02) - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
310-01A: Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Fuel Tank and Lines
Fuel Tank and Lines
Fuel Tank and Lines
Fuel Cooler
Fuel Pump and Sender Unit
Fuel Tank (19.55.01)
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe (19.55.07)
Fuel Filter Element (192502)
310-01B: Fuel Tank and Lines - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Specification
Fuel Tank and Lines
Fuel Tank and Lines
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe (19.55.07)
Fuel Pump and Sender Unit
Fuel Tank (19.55.01)
Fuel Filter (19.25.03)
310-02: Acceleration Control
Specification
Accelerator Pedal (19.20.01)
310-03A: Speed Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Speed Control
Speed Control Switch
310-03B: Speed Control - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Speed Control
4: Electrical
412: Climate Control System
412-00: Climate Control System - General Information
Specification
Climate Control System
General Procedures
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
(82.30.02)
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Commissioning
412-01: Air Distribution and Filtering
Air Distribution and Filtering
Driver Side Register Trim Panel (76.46.12)
Passenger Side Register Trim Panel (76.46.13)
Pollen Filter (80.15.42)
Plenum Chamber (80.15.62)
412-02A: Heating and Ventilation
Heating and Ventilation
Heating and Ventilation
Blower Motor (80.20.15)
Heater Core (80.20.29) - LHD AWD
Heater Core (80.20.29) - RHD AWD
412-02B: Auxiliary Heating
Specification
Auxiliary Heater
Fuel Fired Booster Heater
Fuel Fired Booster Heater (80.40.01) - TDV6 2.7L Diesel
Fuel Fired Booster Heater - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Fuel Fired Booster Heater Glow Plug And Burner Assembly - TDV6 2.7L
Diesel
Fuel Fired Booster Heater Glow Plug And Burner Assembly - TDV6 3.0L
Diesel
Fuel Fired Booster Heater Receiver Unit
412-03A: Air Conditioning - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor
Air Conditioning (A/C) Pressure Transducer (82.20.38)
Condenser Core (82.15.07)
Evaporator Core (82.25.20) (82.25.22)
Thermostatic Expansion Valve (82.25.01)
412-03B: Air Conditioning - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Specification
Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor
Condenser Core
Condenser Fan
Evaporator Core (82.25.20) (82.25.22)
Air Conditioning (A/C) Pressure Transducer (82.20.38)
412-03C: Auxiliary Climate Control
Specification
Auxiliary Climate Control
Auxiliary Climate Control
Heater Core (82.26.19)
Evaporator Core (82.26.20)
Auxiliary Climate Control Assembly (82.26.22)
Auxiliary Blower Motor (82.26.33)
Auxiliary Temperature Blend Door Actuator (82.26.34)
Auxiliary Blend Door Actuator (82.26.35)
Auxiliary Blower Motor Control Module (82.26.45)
412-04: Control Components
Control Components
Control Components
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (80.40.31)
Climate Control Assembly
Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator (80.10.36) - LHD AWD
Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator (80.10.36) - RHD AWD
Driver Side Temperature Blend Door Actuator (80.10.37) - LHD AWD
Driver Side Temperature Blend Door Actuator (80.10.37) - RHD AWD
Instrument Panel Blend Door Actuator (80.20.09) - LHD AWD
Instrument Panel Blend Door Actuator (80.20.09) - RHD AWD
In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor (82.20.93)
Passenger Side Temperature Blend Door Actuator (80.10.38) - LHD AWD
Passenger Side Temperature Blend Door Actuator (80.10.38) - RHD AWD
Recirculation Blend Door Actuator - LHD AWD
Recirculation Blend Door Actuator - RHD AWD
Sunload Sensor (82.20.92)
413: Instrumentation and Warning Systems
413-01: Instrument Cluster
Specification
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster (80.20.01.99) (88.20.01)
Instrument Cluster Lens
413-06: Horn
Horn
Horn
Horn
413-08: Information and Message Center
Information and Message Center
Information and Message Center
413-09A: Warning Devices
Specification
Blindspot Monitoring System
Low Tire Pressure Module (86.54.05)
Door Mirror Wade Sensor
General Proximity Sensor Module
Blindspot Monitoring Sensor LH
413-09B: Engine Protection System
Specification
Engine Protection System
413-13: Parking Aid
Specification
Parking Aid
Parking Aid
Parking Aid Camera
Parking Aid Camera Module
Parking Aid Module (86.54.10)
Front Parking Aid Camera
Front Inner Parking Aid Sensor
Front Outer Parking Aid Sensor
Rear Inner Parking Aid Sensor
Rear Outer Parking Aid Sensor
Side Parking Aid Camera
414: Battery and Charging System
414-00: Battery and Charging System - General Information
Specification
Battery Care Requirements
Quiescent Drain
Battery Report Form – In Service Batteries Only
Charging System
414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables
Specification
Battery and Cables
Battery and Cables
Battery
Auxiliary Battery
Auxiliary Battery Tray (76.10.31)
Battery (86.15.01)
Battery Tray (76.10.30)
414-02A: Generator and Regulator - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Specification
Generator
Generator
Generator
414-02B: Generator and Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Generator
Generator
415: Information and Entertainment Systems
415-00: Information and Entertainment System - General Information
Navigation System Map Updates
Cellular Phone
Information and Entertainment System
Navigation System
415-01A: Audio Unit
Specification
Audio System
Audio Unit
Audio Amplifier
415-01B: Information and Entertainment System
Speakers
Intercom System
Component Location
Overview
Digital Audio Module
415-02: Antenna
Antenna
Antenna
415-03: Speakers
Specification
Speakers
Front Door Speaker (86.50.10)
Rear Door Speaker (86.50.12)
Instrument Panel Speaker (86.50.11)
Quarter Panel Speaker (86.50.48)
Tailgate Speaker (86.50.47)
415-07: Video System
Video System
Video System
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) Player
Video Display
417: Lighting
417-01: Exterior Lighting
Specification
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Headlamps
Headlamp Leveling
Stoplamps
Turn Signal, Cornering and Hazard Lamps
Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps
Front Fog Lamps
Rear Fog Lamps
Reversing Lamps
Trailer Lamps
Autolamps
General Procedures
Headlamp Adjustment (86.40.17)
Front Fog Lamp Adjustment
Stoplamp Switch (70.35.42)
Headlamp Assembly
Side Turn Signal Lamp (86.40.53)
Front Fog Lamp
High Mounted Stoplamp (86.41.32)
Adaptive Front Lighting Module (86.54.06)
Headlamp Switch
Approach Lamp - Vehicles With: Parking Aid Camera
Rear Lamp Assembly
417-02: Interior Lighting
Specification
Interior Lighting
Interior Lighting
417-04: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
418: Electrical Distribution
418-00: Module Communications Network
Specification
Communications Network
Battery Junction Box (BJB) (86.70.55) - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Battery Junction Box (BJB) (86.70.55) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Central Junction Box (CJB)
Gateway Module
Quiescent Current Control Module
418-02: Wiring Harnesses
Specification
Wiring Harness
General Procedures
Wiring Harness Repair
Engine Wiring Harness - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Engine Wiring Harness (86.70.17) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Liftgate Wiring Harness (86.70.84)
Frame Wiring Harness
Front Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness - Front Section
Front Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness - Main Body Section
Left Hand Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness
Right Hand Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness
Rear Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness
Suspension Air Supply Unit Wiring Harness
419: Electronic Feature Group
419-01A: Anti-Theft - Active
Specification
Anti-Theft - Active
Hood Switch (86.77.20)
Antenna (86.77.31)
Anti-Theft Alarm Horn with Integral Battery
419-01B: Anti-Theft - Passive
Anti-Theft - Passive
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Module (86.77.07)
419-02: Remote Convenience
Universal Transmitter
Universal Transmitter
419-07: Navigation System
Navigation System
Navigation System
Navigation System Compact Disc (CD) Unit (86.53.01)
Navigation System Display Module
Navigation System Traffic Amplifier (86.53.23)
Navigation System Antenna (86.53.61)
419-08: Cellular Phone
Specification
Cellular Phone
Cellular Phone Antenna (86.53.11) - Vehicles With: Metal Roof Panel
Cellular Phone Antenna (86.53.11) - Vehicles With: Glass Roof Panel
Transceiver Module
419-10: Multifunction Electronic Modules
Driver Door Module (DDM)
Driver Seat Module (DSM)
Driver Seat Module (DSM)
Rear Entertainment Control Module
419-12: Winch
Component Location
Overview
Winch
Winch
Winch Motor
Winch Solenoid
Licence Plate Panel
Winch Cable Roller Assembly
Winch Control Unit
Winch Gear Assembly
5: Body and Paint
501: Body and Paint
501-02: Front End Body Panels
Specification
Fender (76.10.24)
Fender Splash Shield (76.10.48)
Engine Undershield (76.10.50)
501-03: Body Closures
Body Closures
General Procedures
Liftgate Alignment (76.28.31)
Fuel Filler Door Assembly (19.55.04)
Fuel Filler Interlock Catch (19.55.17)
Liftgate (76.28.29)
501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation
Specification
Engine Cover (12.30.50) - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Engine Cover (12.30.50) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Rear Quarter Trim Panel (76.13.12)
Cowl Side Trim Panel (76.13.27)
A-Pillar Trim Panel (76.13.26)
B-Pillar Upper Trim Panel (76.13.28)
B-Pillar Lower Trim Panel (76.13.29)
D-Pillar Trim Panel (76.13.30)
C-Pillar Lower Trim Panel (76.13.34) (76.13.37)
C-Pillar Upper Trim Panel (76.13.35)
Front Door Trim Panel (76.34.01)
Rear Door Trim Panel (76.34.04)
Liftgate Trim Panel (76.34.11)
Tailgate Trim Panel (76.49.23)
Scuff Plate Trim Panel (76.49.54)
Headliner (76.64.15)
Loadspace Trim Panel RH (76.19.22)
Front Door Trim Veneer
Rear Door Trim Veneer
501-08: Exterior Trim and Ornamentation
A-Pillar Moulding LH
Front Fender Moulding (76.43.54)
Rear Quarter Panel Moulding (76.43.55)
Radiator Grille (76.55.03)
Rear Quarter Window Moulding
501-09: Rear View Mirrors
Specification
Rear View Mirrors
Rear View Mirrors
Interior Mirror (76.10.51)
Exterior Mirror (76.11.10) - Vehicles With: Parking Aid Camera
Exterior Mirror (76.11.10) - Vehicles Without: Parking Aid Camera
Exterior Mirror Glass (76.11.08)
Exterior Mirror Cover
Exterior Mirror Motor (76.11.09)
501-10: Seating
Specification
Seats
Seats
Front Seat Cushion (78.10.12/99)
Front Seat (78.10.44/99)
Third Row Seat (78.10.39)
Rear Seat (78.10.70/78.10.71) - Vehicles With: 60/40 Split Seat
Rear Seat (78.10.70/78.10.71) - Vehicles With: 40/20/40 Split Seat
Front Seat Cushion Cover (78.30.01)
Front Seat Cushion Heater Mat (78.30.23)
Third Row Seat Cushion Cover (78.40.06)
Third Row Seat Cushion (78.40.52)
Rear Seat Cushion Cover (78.40.70) - Vehicles With: 60/40 Split Seat
Rear Seat Cushion Cover (78.40.70) - Vehicles With: 40/20/40 Split Seat
Front Seat Track Motor (78.70.25)
Front Seat Height Adjustment Motor (78.70.27)
Front Seat Tilt Motor (78.70.29)
Front Seat Recliner Motor (78.70.34)
Front Seat Control Switch (78.70.89)
Front Seat Backrest Cover (78.90.08)
Third Row Seat Backrest Cover (78.90.17)
Front Seat Backrest Heater Mat (78.90.36)
Rear Seat Backrest Cover (78.90.72) - Vehicles With: 60/40 Split Seat
Rear Seat Backrest Cover (78.90.72) - Vehicles With: 40/20/40 Split Seat
Seat Track - Vehicles Without: Power Seats
Seat Track - Vehicles With: Power Seats
Front Seat Manual Height Adjustment Lever
501-11: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms
Specification
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms
Fixed Window Glass
General Procedures
Door Window Motor Initialization
Front Door Window Glass
Rear Door Window Glass (76.31.02)
Liftgate Window Glass (76.31.22)
Rear Door Fixed Window Glass (76.31.31)
Windshield Glass (76.81.01)
Glass Roof Panel (76.81.05)
Rear Quarter Window Glass (76.81.20)
Front Door Window Regulator and Motor (86.25.03)
Front Door Window Regulator and Motor
Rear Door Window Regulator and Motor (86.25.05)
Front Door Window Control Switch
Rear Door Window Control Switch
501-12: Instrument Panel and Console
Specification
Instrument Panel
Floor Console
Overhead Console
Floor Console (76.25.01)
Floor Console Upper Section
Instrument Panel Upper Section (76.46.04)
Instrument Panel (76.46.23/99)
Instrument Panel Driver Side Reinforcement
Instrument Panel Passenger Side Reinforcement (76.46.32)
Instrument Panel Center Reinforcement
Glove Compartment (76.52.03)
Instrument Panel Console Switch Assembly
Cool Box
501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems
Specification
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems
Locks, Latches and Entry Systems
General Procedures
Tailgate Striker Adjustment (76.28.03)
Liftgate Striker Adjustment (76.37.28)
Ignition Lock Cylinder (57.40.28)
Hood Latch Release Handle (76.16.30)
Front Door Latch (76.37.12)
Rear Door Latch (76.37.13)
Liftgate Latch (76.37.19)
Door Lock Cylinder (76.37.39)
Tailgate Latch (76.37.83)
Exterior Front Door Handle (76.58.07)
Exterior Rear Door Handle (76.58.02)
Liftgate Latch Actuator (86.26.27)
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Module
501-16: Wipers and Washers
Specification
Wipers and Washers
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Washer Reservoir (84.10.03)
Windshield Washer Pump (84.10.21)
Rain Sensor (84.12.11)
Front Wiper Pivot Arm (84.15.02)
Windshield Wiper Motor (84.15.12)
Headlamp Washer Jet (84.20.08)
Headlamp Washer Pump (84.20.21)
Rear Wiper Pivot Arm (84.35.01)
Rear Window Wiper Motor (84.35.12)
501-17: Roof Opening Panel
Specification
Roof Opening Panel
Roof Opening Panel
General Procedures
Roof Opening Panel Blind Rewind Procedure
Roof Opening Panel Alignment (76.84.82)
Power Roof Opening Panel Initialization
Lifter Arms
Roof Opening Panel (76.84.01)
Roof Opening Panel Glass (76.84.03)
Roof Opening Panel Motor (76.84.07)
Roof Opening Panel Module (76.84.46)
Roof Opening Panel Blind
Driver Side Roof Opening Panel Front Drain Hose
Passenger Side Roof Opening Panel Front Drain Hose
501-19: Bumpers
Specification
Front Bumper
Front Bumper Cover
Front Bumper Lower Cover
Rear Bumper Cover
501-20A: Safety Belt System
Specification
Safety Belt System
Safety Belt System
Front Safety Belt Retractor (76.73.13)
Second Row Center Safety Belt Retractor (76.73.20) - Vehicles With:
60/40 Split Seat
Second Row Center Safety Belt Retractor (76.73.20) - Vehicles With:
40/20/40 Split Seat
Second Row Safety Belt Retractor (76.73.23)
Third Row Safety Belt Retractor (76.73.28)
Front Safety Belt Buckle (76.73.30)
Rear Safety Belt Buckle (76.73.30) - Vehicles With: 40/20/40 Split Seat
Rear Safety Belt Buckle LH (76.73.60) - Vehicles With: 60/40 Split Seat
Rear Safety Belt Buckle RH (76.73.62) - Vehicles With: 60/40 Split Seat
Rear Center Safety Belt Buckle (76.73.64) - Vehicles With: 60/40 Split
Seat
501-20B: Supplemental Restraint System
Specification
Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)
Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Driver Air Bag Module (76.74.01)
Passenger Air Bag Module (76.74.02)
Rear Side Air Curtain Module (76.74.04)
Front Impact Severity Sensor (76.74.08)
Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) Switch (76.74.19)
Clockspring (76.74.20)
B-Pillar Side Impact Sensor (76.74.23)
C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor (76.74.24)
Front Door Side Impact Sensor (76.74.25)
Side Air Bag Module (76.74.30)
Side Air Curtain Module (76.74.40)
Restraints Control Module (RCM) (76.74.68)
Occupant Classification Sensor (76.74.76)
501-25A: Body Repairs - General Information
Body Repairs
501-25B: Body Repairs - Corrosion Protection
Corrosion Protection
501-25C: Body Repairs - Water Leaks
Water Leaks
501-26: Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance Checks
Body and Frame
501-27: Front End Sheet Metal Repairs
Specification
Front End Sheet Metal
Hood Latch Panel (76.16.22)
Front Crossmember (77.20.25)
Front Side Member (77.30.22/23)
Front Side Member Section (77.30.20/21)
Fender Apron Panel Reinforcement
Fender Apron Panel
Fender Apron Panel Section
Front Wheelhouse
Front Wheelhouse Reinforcement
Front Wheelhouse Section
Fender Apron Panel Closing Panel
Fender Apron Panel Reinforcement Front Section
Fender Apron Panel Reinforcement Rear Section
501-28: Roof Sheet Metal Repairs
Roof
Roof Panel
501-29: Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs
Specification
Side Panel Sheet Metal
Rocker Panel (77.40.60)
A-Pillar Outer Panel
Side Panel (77.40.01)
B-Pillar Outer Panel
A-Pillar Reinforcement
B-Pillar Reinforcement
Side Panel Front Section
501-30: Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs
Specification
Rear End Sheet Metal
Quarter Panel (77.40.09)
Inner Quarter Panel (77.40.37)
Water Drain Panel
Rear Wheelhouse Outer (77.40.36)
Rear Lamp Mounting Panel (77.80.25)
Back Panel (77.80.20)
Rear Floor Panel Section (77.70.02)
Rear Crossmember
Rear Side Member
Quarter/Side Panel Rear Section LH
Rear Side Member Section (77.70.07)
D-Pillar Inner Lower Panel
D-Pillar Closing Panel
502: Frame and Mounting
502-02: Full Frame and Body Mounting
Specification
General Procedures
Tow Bar Mounting Check
Transmission Support Crossmember (76.10.09 or 76.10.92) - TDV6 3.0L
Diesel
Transmission Support Crossmember (76.10.09 or 76.10.92) - V6 S/C
3.0L Petrol
Rear Crossmember
Body - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Body - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Published: 11-May-2013
General Information - About This Manual
Introduction
This manual has been written in a format that is designed to meet the needs of technicians worldwide. The objective
is to use common formats and include similar content in each manual.
This manual provides general descriptions for accomplishing diagnosis and testing, service and repair work with
tested and effective techniques. Following them will help to ensure reliability.
Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe, reliable operation of all motor
vehicles as well as the personal safety of the individual carrying out the work.
Anyone who departs from the instructions provided in this manual must first establish that personal safety or vehicle
integrity is not compromised by the choice of method, tools or components.
Warnings, Cautions and Notes in This Manual
WARNING: Warnings are used to indicate that failure to follow a procedure correctly may result in personal
injury.
CAUTION: Cautions are used to indicate that failure to follow a procedure correctly may result in damage to the
vehicle or equipment being used.
NOTE: Notes are used to provide additional essential information required to carry out a complete and
satisfactory repair.
Generic warnings or cautions are in their relevant description and operation procedure within section 100-00. If the
generic warnings or cautions are required for a procedure, there will be a referral to the appropriate description and
operation procedure.
If a warning, caution or note only applies to one step, it is placed at the beginning of the specific step.
Trustmark Authoring Standards (TAS) Removal and Installation Procedures
NOTE: TAS style procedures can be identified by steps that have no accompanying step text and the magenta
color of the electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps or clips.
A TAS removal and installation procedure uses a sequence of color illustrations to indicate the order to be followed
when removing/disassembling or installing/assembling a component.
Many of the TAS procedures will have the installation information within the removal steps. These procedures will
have the following note at the beginning of the procedure:
NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.
Items such as O-ring seals, gaskets, seals, self-locking nuts and bolts are to be discarded and new components
installed unless otherwise stated within the procedure. Coated nuts or bolts are to be reused, unless damaged or
otherwise stated within the procedure.
Specification procedures will contain all technical data that are not part of a repair procedure.
TAS Graphics
Colors used in the graphic are as follows:
Blue - Indicates the target item, item to be removed/installed or disassembled/assembled

Green and Brown - Indicates a secondary item that needs to be detached, removed/installed or
disassembled/assembled prior to the target item
Magenta - Indicates electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps or clips
Pale Blue - is for the special tool(s) and general equipment.
There may be multiple steps assigned to one illustration.
Numbered pointers are used to indicate the number of electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts,
clamps or clips.
Items in the illustration can be transparent or use cutouts to show hidden detail(s).
TAS Symbols
Symbols are used inside the graphics and in the text area to enhance the information display. The following
paragraphs describe the various types and categories of symbols.
Prohibition symbols advise on prohibited actions to either avoid damage or health and safety related risks.
Health and Safety symbols recommend the use of particular protection equipment to avoid or at least reduce the risk
or severity of possible injuries.
Warning symbols are used to indicate potential risks resulting from a certain component or area.
Instruction symbols are used to apply sealer, lubricant, weight, tape or cleaning detergent to a component.
Location symbols are used to show the location of a component or system within the vehicle.
Gearshift lever or selector lever position symbols are used to show which gearshift lever or selector lever position is
to be set.
Pointer symbols are used to draw the attention to components and give special instructions such as a required
sequence or number of components. The number of components is reflected by the value inside the luty arrow. A
sequence number is located inside the circle. Numbers inside circles are also used to allocate special information
such as tightening torques or chemicals to a particular component.
Movement arrows are used to show three dimensional or rotational movements. These movements can include
specific values inside the symbol if required.
Standard tool symbols recommend the use of certain standard tools. These tools can include dimension values if
required.
The following graphic illustrates a set of symbols that are used to provide detailed information on where to apply a
material.
Measurement symbols provide detailed information on where to carry out a specific measurement. These symbols
can include specific values if required.
Special Tools and Torque Figure(s)
Special tools will be shown with the tool number in the illustration. The special tool number(s), general equipment,
material(s) and torque figure(s) used for the procedure step will be shown in the text column.
Published: 08-Dec-2012
General Information - How To Use This Manual
How to use This Manual
This manual covers all aspects necessary in order to service the vehicle effectively.
The manual is structured into five main sections, General Information, Chassis, Powertrain, Electrical and Body
and Paint with each section dealing with a specific part of a vehicle system.
Each of the five main sections contain sub-sections dealing with items which form a part of that specific system.
Pages at the start of the manual list all sections available. Each section has a contents list detailing, where
applicable, Specifications, Description and Operation, Diagnosis and Testing, General Procedures and Repair
Procedures.
Where components need to be removed or disassembled in sequence, each operation in the sequence will be
identified numerically and also graphically in an accompanying illustration.
NOTE: Dimensions quoted are to design engineering specifications with service limits quoted, where
applicable.
Workshop Manual Organization
The five main sections, together with the areas which they cover are given below:
Section 1 - General Information.

Section 2 - Chassis.
Section 3 - Powertrain.
Section 4 - Electrical.
Section 5 - Body and Paint.
Sub-section numbers appear after the initial section number, for example, Section 412-03 covers air
conditioning, which is part of the electrical section.
In the number given above, the first digit of the number '4' indicates the section i.e. Electrical.
The second and third digits '12' of the number indicate the vehicle system i.e. Air Conditioning.
The last two digits of the number '03' indicate the part of the system covered by the sub-section i.e. Air
Conditioning Compressor.
General Information - Important Safety Instructions
Safety Notice
Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe, reliable operation of all
motor vehicles, as well as the safety of the person doing the work. This manual provides general directions for
accomplishing service and repair work with tested effective techniques. Following them will help assure reliability.
There are numerous variations in procedures, techniques, tools, and parts for servicing vehicles, as well as in the
skill of the person doing the work. This manual cannot possibly anticipate all such variations and provide advice
or cautions as to each. Accordingly, anyone who departs from the instructions provided in the manual must first
establish that neither personal safety or vehicle integrity is compromised from choices of methods, tools or
parts.
General Information - General Service Information
Introduction
This manual has been written in a format that is designed to meet the needs of Land Rover technicians
worldwide and to assist them in the efficient repair and maintenance of Land Rover vehicles.
This manual provides descriptions and methods for accomplishing adjustment, service and repair work using
tested and effective procedures. Following these procedures will help ensure product reliability.
Special Tools
The Special Tool(s) Table provided at the beginning of each procedure lists the special tool(s) required to carry
out repair operations within that specific procedure. Wherever possible, illustrations are provided which will
assist technicians in identifying the special tool(s) required and also showing such tool(s) in use.
Special tools may be obtained from the manufacturer, SPX Tools, the addresses of their branches will be found in
the Special Tools Glossary contained within this Section.
Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe and reliable operation of all
motor vehicles as well as ensuring the personal safety of the individual carrying out the work.
This manual cannot possibly anticipate all such variations and provide advice or cautions as to each. Any person
who departs from the instructions provided in this manual must first establish that they compromise neither their
personal safety nor the vehicle integrity by their choice of methods, tools or parts.
Individuals who undertake their own repairs should have some skill or training and limit repairs to components
which could not affect the safety of the vehicle or its passengers. Any repairs required to safety critical items
such as steering, brakes, suspension or supplemental restraint system should be carried out by a Land Rover
Dealer. Repairs to such items should NEVER be attempted by untrained individuals.
Warnings, Cautions and Notes which appear in this manual
As you read through this manual, you will come across Warnings, Cautions and Notes. A Warning, Caution or
Note is placed at the beginning of a series of steps. If the warning, caution or note only applies to one step, it is
placed at the beginning of the specific step after the step number.
Warnings, Cautions and Notes have the following meanings:
Warning: Procedures which must be followed to avoid the possibility of personal injury.
Caution: Calls attention to procedures which must be followed to avoid damage to components.
Note: Gives helpful information.
References
References to the Left Hand (LH) or Right Hand (RH) side given in this manual are made when viewing the
vehicle or unit from the rear.
Fault Diagnostic Equipment
The vehicle is equipped with a number of electronic control systems to provide optimum performance of the
vehicle's systems.
Diagnostic Equipment (T4) is available and must be used where specified. The use of this equipment will assist
with the fault diagnostic abilities of the Dealer workshop. In particular, the equipment can be used to interrogate
the electronic systems for diagnosis of faults which may become evident during the life of the vehicle.
This manual is produced as a reference source to supplement T4.
Features of the equipment include:
a. Fully upgradeable support for the technician
b. Structured diagnostics to accommodate all skill levels
c. Direct print-out of screen information and test results
Testing the vehicle
Operations covered in this manual do not include reference to testing the vehicle after repair. It is essential that
work is inspected and tested after completion and if necessary, a road test of the vehicle is carried out,
particularly where safety related items are concerned.
Repairs and Replacement Parts

Land Rover parts are manufactured to the same exacting standards as the original factory fitted components. For
this reason, it is essential that only genuine Land Rover parts are used during maintenance or repair.
Attention is particularly drawn to the following points concerning repairs and the fitting of replacement parts and
accessories.
Safety features and corrosion prevention treatments embodied in the vehicle may be impaired if other than Land
Rover recommended parts are fitted. In certain territories, legislation prohibits the fitting of parts not to
manufacturer's specification. Torque wrench setting figures, where given, must be adhered to and locking
devices, where specified must be used. If the efficiency of a locking device is impaired during removal it must be
replaced.
Owners purchasing accessories whilst travelling abroad must ensure that the accessory and its fitted location on
the vehicle conform to legal requirements.
The terms of the vehicle warranty may be invalidated by the fitting of parts other than those recommended by
Land Rover.
NOTE: The fitting of non-approved Land Rover parts and accessories or the carrying out of non-approved
alterations or conversions may be dangerous. Any of the foregoing could affect the safety of the vehicle and
occupants; also, the terms and conditions of the vehicle warranty may also be invalidated .
All Land Rover recommended parts have the full backing of the vehicle warranty.
Land Rover Dealers are obliged to supply only Land Rover recommended parts.
Specifications
Land Rover are constantly seeking to improve the specification, design and production of their vehicles and
alterations take place accordingly. Whilst every effort is made to ensure the accuracy of this Manual, it should
not be regarded as an infallible guide to current specifications of any particular vehicle.
This Manual does not constitute an offer for sale of any particular vehicle. Land Rover dealers are not agents of
Land Rover and have no authority to bind the manufacturer by any expressed or implied undertaking or
representation.
Published: 05-Jul-2013
General Information - Standard Workshop Practices
Vehicle in Workshop
When working on a vehicle in the workshop always make sure that:
Where practicable, the parking brake is applied and the wheels are securely chocked to prevent the
vehicle moving forwards or backwards.
Whenever possible, the ignition key is removed before any work is carried out on the vehicle.
If the engine is to be run, there is adequate ventilation, or an extraction hose is used to remove exhaust
fumes.
There is adequate room to raise the vehicle and remove the wheels, if necessary.
Fender covers are always installed if any work is to be carried out in the engine compartment.
Where practicable, the battery is disconnected if working on the engine, underneath the vehicle, or if the
vehicle is raised.
Caution: Prior to disconnecting the battery, refer to the Electrical Section of this manual -
Battery disconnection/connection and the following paragraphs.For additional information, refer
to: Specifications (414-00 Battery and Charging System - General Information, Specifications).
CAUTION: When electric arc welding on a vehicle, always disconnect the generator wiring to prevent the
possibility of a surge of current causing damage to the internal components of the generator.
If using welding equipment on the vehicle, a suitable fire extinguisher is readily available.
Battery - General
WARNING: It is essential that a period of 2 minutes elapses after the battery is disconnected
before any work is undertaken on any part of the SRS system.
CAUTION: A discharged battery condition may have been caused by an electrical short circuit. If this
condition exists there will be an apparently live circuit on the vehicle even when all normal circuits are switched
off. This can cause arcing when the jumper cables are connected.
Caution: Prior to carrying out any procedures which involve disconnecting/ or connecting the
battery, refer to the Electrical Section of this manual - Battery disconnection/connection.For
additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00 Battery and Charging System - General
Information, Specifications).
Jump Starting a Vehicle
CAUTIONS:
While it is not recommended that a vehicle is jump started, it is recognized that this may occasionally be
the only practical way to mobilize a vehicle. Reference should be made to the following and also to the Electrical
Section of this manual - Jump Starting.
It is advisable not to use starter/charger sets for jump starting but if this is unavoidable, make sure that
the sets are not used in the 'START' mode.
Always make sure that the jumper cables are adequate for the task.
Always make sure that the slave battery is of the same voltage (12 volts) as the vehicle battery. The
batteries must be connected in parallel.
Make sure that the battery terminals of both batteries are fully tightened.
Where another vehicle is used to jump start a disabled vehicle, make sure that the two vehicles are not
touching.
It is advisable that the engine of the donor vehicle is switched off during jump starting; take care to
make sure that the battery of the donor vehicle does not also become discharged.
Always make sure that switchable electric circuits are OFF before connecting jump cables. This reduces
the risk of arcing occurring when the final connection is made.
Following jump starting of a disabled vehicle, the discharged battery must be checked for serviceability and
recharged as soon as possible to avoid permanent damage.
Do not rely on the generator to restore a discharged battery. For a generator to recharge a battery, it would take
in excess of eight hours continuous driving with no additional loads placed on the battery.
Trickle charging (defined as voltages <16 volts) may be carried out with the battery connected. Make sure that
the battery terminals are fully tightened prior to trickle charging.
CAUTION: Boost charging may only be carried out with the battery disconnected from the vehicle.
Towing the Vehicle
WARNING: When towing is necessary, reference must be made to the Jacking, Lifting and Towing Section
of this Manual.
When the vehicle is being towed the ignition switch must be in position II (steering lock released and warning
lights illuminated). Only then will the steering, turn signal lamps, horn and stop lamps be operational. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury. It must be noted that with the engine not running, the
power steering and brake booster will be inoperative therefore, greater effort will be needed to steer the vehicle
and apply the brakes.
General installation Instructions
Component removal
Whenever possible, clean components and the surrounding area before removal.
Blank off openings exposed by component removal.

Following disconnection, seal fuel, oil or hydraulic lines immediately using suitable blanking plugs or caps.
Seal open ends of exposed oilways using suitable tapered hardwood plugs or conspicuous plastic plugs.
Immediately a component is removed, place it in a suitable container; use a separate container for each
component and its associated parts.
Clean bench and provide marking materials, labels and containers before disassembling components.
Disassembling
Observe scrupulous cleanliness when disassembling components, particularly when brake, fuel, air suspension or
hydraulic system parts are disassembled. A particle of dirt or cloth fragment could cause a serious malfunction if
trapped in these systems.
Blow out all tapped holes, crevices, oilways and fluid passages with dry, compressed air.
WARNING: Suitable eye protection must be worn.
Use suitable marker ink to identify mating parts, do not use a scriber or centre punch as they could
initiate cracks or distortion.
Wire or tape mating parts together where necessary to prevent accidental interchange.
Suitably identify parts which are to be renewed and to those parts requiring further inspection. Keep
these parts separate.
To make sure that the correct replacement part has been obtained, do not discard a part due for renewal
until after comparing it with the new part.
Cleaning components
Always use cleaning agents which are suitable for the work being undertaken and the components being cleaned.
NEVER use gasoline (petrol) as a cleaning agent (degreaser). Always make sure that the component being
cleaned is compatible with the cleaning agent.
Always follow the manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of cleaning agents and make sure that the
environment in which the work is being undertaken is suitable. See Health and Safety Precautions for further
information regarding cleaning.
General inspection of components
All components should be inspected for wear or damage before reassembling.
Always make sure that component to be inspected is clean and free from oil or grease.
When a component is to be checked dimensionally against design specified values, use the appropriate
measuring equipment i.e. micrometers, verniers, surface plates, dial test indicators (DTI).
Always make sure that all measuring equipment is correctly calibrated before use.
Reject a component which is not within specified values/limits or if it appears to be damaged.
A component may be reinstalled if dimensions obtained during checking are at the maximum tolerance
limit and it is in an undamaged condition.
Bearing journal clearances should be checked where necessary using Plastigage.
Gaskets, seals and O-ring seals are to be re-used unless damaged.
Joints and Joint Faces
All gaskets should be installed dry unless stated otherwise. Always apply the specified lubricant to O-rings and
install O-rings using the fingers only.
Use gasket removal spray and/or plastic scrapers to remove traces of old gasket.
CAUTION: DO NOT use metal scrapers or emery cloth as these may damage the sealing surfaces.
Many joints use sealants instead of gaskets as the sealing medium. Where this is the case, the sealant together
with its part number will be found listed in the relevant repair operation and also in the sealants table.
CAUTION: Always remove all traces of the old sealant prior to reassembly. Use plastic scrapers, specified
solvents where available or dry, lint free cloth. DO NOT use metal scrapers or emery cloth as these may damage
the sealing surfaces. Make sure that sealing surfaces are free from oil or grease as sealants will not adhere
properly to contaminated surfaces.
Do not allow sealant to enter tapped holes or oilways.
Locking Devices
Always replace locking devices with one of the same design and of the correct size.
Tab washers
Always release locking tabs before loosening fixings, do not re-use tab washers.
Locknuts
Always use a backing spanner when loosening and tightening locknuts, brake and fuel pipe unions.
Roll pins
Always install new roll pins of the correct size.
Circlips
Always install new circlips ensuring that they are of the correct size for the groove.
Woodruff keys
Woodruff keys may be re-used provided there is no indication of wear or distortion.
Remove any burrs from edges of keyways using a fine file.
Split pins
Never attempt to straighten and re-use a split pin, always make sure that replacement pins are of the correct
size for the hole in which they are to be installed.
Screw Threads
Damaged nuts, bolts and screws must always be discarded. Attempting to recut or repair damaged
threads with a tap or die impairs the strength and fit of the threads and is not recommended.
NOTES:
During certain repair operations, it may be necessary to remove traces of thread locking agents using a
tap. Where this is necessary, the instruction to do so will appear in the relevant operation and it is essential that
a tap of the correct size and thread is used.
New Taptite bolts when used cut their own threads on the first application.
Some bolts are coated with a thread locking agent and unless stated otherwise, they must not be re-
used. New bolts having the same part number as the original must always be installed. When nuts or
bolts are to be discarded, the repair operation and relevant torque chart will include an instruction to that
effect. Do not use proprietary thread locking agents as they may not meet the specification required. See
also Encapsulated ('Patched') Bolts and Screws.
Always make sure that replacement nuts and bolts are at least equal in strength to those that they are
replacing. Castellated nuts must not be loosened to accept a split pin except in recommended cases when
this forms part of an adjustment.
Do not allow oil or grease to enter blind holes, the hydraulic action resulting from tightening the bolt or
stud can split the housing and also give a false torque reading.
Always tighten a nut, bolt or screw to the specified torque figure, damaged or corroded threads can give
a false torque reading.
Nut and bolt loosening and tightening sequences, where given, must ALWAYS be followed. Distortion of
components or faulty sealing of joints will result if the sequences are not followed. Where an instruction is
given to tighten in stages, these stages must be adhered to; do not attempt to combine stages
particularly where certain stages involve tightening by degrees.
To check or re-tighten a fixing to a specified torque, first loosen a quarter of a turn, then retighten to the
specified torque figure.
Unless instructed otherwise, do not lubricate bolt or nut threads prior to installing.
Where it is stated that bolts and screws may be re-used, the following procedures must be carried out:
Check that threads are undamaged.

Remove all traces of locking agent from the threads.
CAUTION: DO NOT use a wire brush; take care that threads are not damaged.
Make sure that threads are clean and free from oil or grease.
Apply the specified locking agent to the bolt threads.
Bolt and Nut Identification
An ISO metric bolt or screw made of steel and larger than 6 mm in diameter can be identified by either of the
symbols ISO M or M embossed or indented on top of the bolt head.
In addition to marks identifying the manufacturer, the top of the bolt head is also marked with symbols
indicating the strength grade e.g. 8.8, 10.9, 12.9, 14.9. Alternatively, some bolts and screws have the M and
strength grade symbol stamped on the flats of the hexagon.
Encapsulated ('Patched') bolts and screws
Encapsulated ('patched') bolts and screws have a thread locking agent applied to the threads during
manufacture. Most thread locking agents are colored, the band of color extending for 360° around the thread.
Some locking agents however, are neutral in color and may not be so easily identified apart from a slightly
darker area of thread where the locking agent has been applied. The locking agent is released and activated by
the tightening process and is then chemically cured to provide the locking action.
Self-locking bolts and screws
Unless stated in a specific repair procedure, self-locking bolts and screws i.e. nylon patched or trilobular thread
can be re-used provided that resistance is felt when the locking portion enters the female thread.
Nylon patched bolts and screws have a locking agent either applied to, or inserted in the threaded portion. They
are identified by the presence of a colored section of thread extending approximately 180° around the thread or
by a colored plug inserted into the bolt.
Trilobular bolts have a special thread form which creates a slight interference with the thread of the hole or nut
into which it is screwed.
CAUTION: Do Not re-use self-locking fasteners in critical locations e.g. drive plates/flywheel or engine
bearings. Do not install non self-locking fasteners where a self-locking fastener is specified.
Trilobular bolts should not be used as a substitute for patched bolts.
Nut identification
A nut with an ISO metric thread is marked on one face or one of the hexagonal flats with the strength grade
symbol 8, 12, 14. Some nuts with the strength grade 4, 5 or 6 are also marked and some have the metric
symbol M on the hexagonal flat opposite the strength grade marking.
A clock face system is sometimes used as an alternative method of indicating the strength grade. The external
chamfers or a face of the nut is marked in a position relative to the appropriate hour mark on a clock face to
indicate the strength grade.
A dot is used to locate the 12 o'clock position and a dash to indicate the strength grade. If the grade is above
12, two dots identify the 12 o'clock position.
When tightening a slotted or castellated nut, never loosen it to insert a split pin except where specified as part
of an adjustment procedure. If difficulty is experienced in correctly positioning the slot, alternative washers or
nuts should be selected.
Where a nut is tightened to adjust or maintain bearing pre-load, the tightening procedure must be adhered to.
Self-locking nuts
Unless stated otherwise, self-locking nuts once removed must be discarded and new nuts of the same type and
strength grade installed.
Air Suspension
Always make sure that suitable eye protection is worn when working on the air suspension system.
Ball and Roller Bearings
When removing and installing bearings, make sure that the following practices are observed to make sure
component serviceability:
CAUTION: Service tools have been developed for removing the majority of bearings; these must always be
used where specified.
Remove all traces from bearing under inspection by cleaning with a suitable degreasant; maintain
absolute cleanliness throughout operations.
Conduct a visual inspection for markings on rolling elements, raceways, outer surfaces of outer or inner
surfaces of inner rings. Reject any bearings found to be marked since marking in these areas indicates
onset of wear.
Hold inner race of bearing between finger and thumb of one hand and rotate outer race to check that it
revolves absolutely smoothly. Repeat holding outer race and rotating inner race. DO NOT spin the
bearing.
Rotate outer ring gently using a reciprocating movement whilst holding inner ring; feel for any check or
obstruction to rotation. Reject bearing if movement is not absolutely smooth.
Check bearing for blueing or signs of overheating.
Lubricate bearing with the specified lubricant.
Inspect bearing surface of shaft and bearing housing for discoloration or other markings which indicate
overheating of bearing or movement between bearing and seating.
Before installing bearing, make sure that shaft and bearing housing are clean and free from burrs.
If one bearing of a pair shows signs of wear, overheating etc., it is advisable to replace bearings as a pair
unless it is suspected that one bearing may have been faulty when installed, was installed incorrectly or
the fault arose due to oil seal failure.
Never reinstall a bearing unless it is in a fully serviceable condition.
When installing a bearing to a shaft, only apply force to the inner ring of the bearing. When installing a
bearing into a housing, only apply force to the outer ring of the bearing.
CAUTION: Service tools have been developed for installing the majority of bearings; these must always be
used where specified.
In the case of grease lubricated bearings, fill the space between the bearing and outer seal with the
recommended grade of grease before installing the seal.
CAUTION: When a waxed oil seal (installed dry) type of oil seal is to be installed, take great care that
grease does not contaminate the running surface of the seal.
Always make suitable reference marks between the components of separable bearings e.g. taper roller
bearings when disassembling to make sure correct location of components when assembling. Never install
new rollers in an outer ring, always install a new bearing assembly.
Brake Pads and Linings
Always install the correct grade and specification of brake pads and linings. When replacing these items, always
replace as complete axle sets.
Brake Hydraulics
Always observe the following recommendations when working on the braking system:
WARNING: Do not intermix brake fluid of different specifications.
Always use two spanners when loosening or tightening brake pipes or hose connections.
Make sure that hoses run in a natural curve and are not kinked or twisted.
Install brake pipes and hoses securely in their retaining clips and make sure that they cannot contact a
potential chafing point.
Containers used for brake fluid must be kept absolutely clean.
Do not store brake fluid in unsealed containers, the fluid will absorb water which will lower the boiling
point of the fluid.
Do not allow brake fluid to be contaminated with other fluids such as mineral oil and do not put brake
fluid in a container which has previously been used for storing other fluids.
Do not re-use brake fluid which has been bled from the system.
Always use brake fluid or a suitable brake cleaning fluid to clean hydraulic components.
Unless stated otherwise, use only clean brake fluid to lubricate hydraulic seals and components.
Always install blanking plugs to hoses, pipes or components immediately after disconnection.
Check thread compatibility of original equipment with replacement components.
Observe absolute cleanliness when working with hydraulic components.
Pipes and Hoses
When removing or installing flexible hydraulic pipes and hoses, make sure that the following procedures are
observed to make sure component serviceability:
Prior to removal, clean area around hose or pipe end which is to be disconnected.
Obtain appropriate blanking plugs or caps before disconnecting hose or pipe end fittings in order that
connections can be plugged immediately following disconnection.
Always install blanking plugs or caps to pipes and unions immediately following disconnection.
Clean hose or pipe and blow through with an air line.
WARNING: Suitable eye protection must be worn.
Check hoses externally for cracks, separation of plies, security of end fittings and external damage;
replace faulty hoses.
Check pipes for signs of corrosion and chafing, replace as necessary.
CAUTION: If pipes are found to be chafed, rectify clips, mounting points etc., to prevent further problems
in service.
When installing hoses, make sure that no unnecessary bends are introduced and that hoses are not
kinked, twisted or positioned close to potential chafing points.
When installing pipes, make sure that pipes are positioned and clipped clear of potential chafing points.
Always replace sealing washers installed to banjo bolts, sealing plugs etc.
Always use a backing spanner when tightening unions and do not overtighten union nuts or banjo bolts.
After engagement of 'quick-fit' connection hoses, perform a 'tug' test to make sure connection is securely
installed.
After any work on hydraulic systems, always check for fluid leaks whilst a second operator applies
working pressure to the brake pedal or operates the system that has been worked on.
Fuel system hoses
Some fuel hoses are made up of two laminations, an armoured rubber outer sleeve and an inner viton core.
Whenever a hose is removed, make sure that the inner bore is inspected to check that the viton lining has not
become separated from the outer sleeve.
WARNING: Never attempt to repair fuel hoses or rectify leaking 'quick-fit' connectors. The fuel hose and
connectors must be replaced as an assembly.
Fuel system hose clips
Certain fuel system hose clips are of the 'break-off head' type where a slot in the screw head shears off when the
clip is tightened to a specific torque. These clips may be removed using a screwdriver and must be replaced with
new clips on reassembly. Clips must be tightened until the portion of the slot shears off. Do not attempt to
tighten clips by any other method, do not install any other type of clip.
'Quick-fit' connections are also installed to certain fuel hoses. After engagement of 'quick-fit' connections,
perform a 'tug' test to make sure connection is securely installed.
Other fuel system hose clips are of the 'Jubilee' type and there may be a tamper proof cover installed over the
screw head. These cover must be carefully removed before slackening the clip and should be replaced after final
tightening, ensuring that the internal hexagon on the cover is correctly located on the clip screw.
Cooling system hoses
CAUTION: The following precautions must be observed to make sure that the integrity of the cooling
system hoses and their connection to the system is maintained.
Hose orientation and connection
Correct orientation of cooling system hoses is important to make sure that hoses do not become fatigued or
damaged through contact with adjacent components.
Where orientation marks are provided on the hose and corresponding component, the marks must be aligned
when the hose is installed. Hoses must be installed fully on to their connection points, usually a moulded form on
a pipe provides a positive indicator.
Hose clips
Markings are usually provided on the hose to indicate the correct clip position. If no markings are provided,
position the clip directly behind the retaining lip at the end of the stub pipe. Worm drive clips should be
orientated with the crimped side of the drive housing facing towards the end of the hose or the hose may
become pinched between the clip and the stub pipe retaining lip. Unless otherwise stated, worm drive clips
should be tightened to 3 Nm (2 lb-ft). Make sure that hose clips do not foul adjacent components.
Oetiker clips may be removed by bending the tag (arrowed) and releasing the free end of the clip. Clips must not
be re-used. When installing new clips, make sure clip is positioned on hose before tightening and make sure that
when clip is tightened, the tag is located in the longitudinal slot in the free end of the clip (arrowed in
illustration).
'Quick-fit' connections are also installed to certain hoses/pipes. Inspect 'quick-fit' connections for damage, prior
to connection. Replace if damaged. After engagement of 'quick-fit' connections, perform a 'tug' test to make sure
connection is securely installed.
Heat protection
Always make sure that heat shields and protective sheathing are in good condition; replace if damage is evident.
Particular care must be taken when routing hoses close to hot engine components such as the exhaust manifolds
and exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) pipes. Hoses will relax and deflect slightly when hot, make sure this
movement is taken into account when routing and securing hoses.
Electrical Precautions
General
The following guidelines are intended to make sure the safety of the operator whilst preventing damage to the
electrical and electronic components of this vehicle.
Equipment
Prior to commencing any test procedure on the vehicle, make sure that the relevant test equipment is working
correctly and that any harness or connectors are in good condition. It is particularly important to check the
condition of all plugs and leads of mains operated equipment.
Polarity
Never reverse connect the vehicle battery and always make sure the correct polarity when connecting test
equipment.
High voltage circuits
Whenever disconnecting live ht circuits, always use insulated pliers and never allow the open end of the ht lead
to contact other components, particularly ECU's.
Vehicles installed with Bi-Xenon headlamp bulbs
WARNING: The following precautions must be observed as failure to comply may result in exposure to
ultra-violet rays, severe electric shock, burns or risk of an explosion.
Safety goggles and gloves must be worn.

Make sure that headlamps are switched off before removing bulbs.
Do not touch the glass portion of the bulb.
On no account should headlamps be switched on with the bulb removed from the headlamp.
Bulb testing may only be carried out with the bulb installed in the headlamp.
Bulbs must be disposed of in accordance with the local authority bye-laws.
Connectors and harnesses
The engine compartment of a vehicle is a particularly hostile environment for electrical components and
connectors. Always observe the following:
Make sure electrically related items are dry and oil free before disconnecting/connecting test equipment.
Make sure that disconnected multiplugs and sensors are protected from any possible oil, coolant or other
liquid contamination. Any such contamination could impair performance or lead to component failure.
Never force connectors apart or pull on the wiring harness.
Always make sure locking tabs are disengaged before disconnecting multiplugs etc. and make sure that
correct orientation is achieved before connection.
Make sure that any protection covers, insulation etc. are replaced if disturbed.
Having confirmed that a component is faulty, carry out the following:
Switch off the ignition and disconnect the battery.

Remove the component and support the disconnected harness.
When replacing electrical components, keep oily hands away from electrical connections and make sure
that locking tabs on connectors are fully engaged.
Battery Disconnection/Connection
Always refer to the Electrical Section of this manual - Battery Connection/Disconnection prior to attempting to
connect or disconnect the battery.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00 Battery and Charging System - General Information,
Specifications).
Fuel Handling Precautions
The following information lists basic precautions which must be observed if fuel is to be handled safely. It also
outlines other areas of risk which must not be ignored. As this information is issued for basic guidance only,
consult your local Fire Department where any doubt as to personal and environmental safety exists - See also
Health and Safety Precautions.
General precautions
Always have the correct type of fire extinguisher containing Foam, CO2, Gas or powder accessible when handling
or draining fuel or dismantling fuel systems. Fire extinguishers must also be located in areas where fuel is
stored.
Make sure that suitable warning signs are exhibited.
Keep all sources of ignition well away from areas where fuel is being handled.
Make sure that any leadlamps are flameproof and kept clear of spillage.
WARNINGS:
Do not disassemble or reassemble fuel system components whilst vehicle is over a pit.
No one should be permitted to repair components associated with fuel without first having specialist
training.
Always disconnect the vehicle battery before carrying out disassembly, reassembly or draining work on a fuel
system.
Fuel tank and system draining
Draining must be carried out in accordance with the procedures given in the relevant Fuel System section of this
manual.
WARNINGS:
Never drain fuel or work on a fuel system while the vehicle is over a pit. Extraction or draining of fuel must
be carried out in a well ventilated area.
Never switch on or operate mobile (cellular) phones in the vicinity of vehicles when operations are being
carried out on the fuel system.
Always attach fuel vapor warning labels to fuel tanks immediately after draining.
Containers used for storing fuel must be clearly marked with the contents and placed in a safe storage area
which meets the requirements of the local authority.
CAUTION: Some fuel lines are now installed with 'quick release' connectors. If a connector is damaged, no
attempt must be made to repair the connector, a new fuel line and connector(s) assembly must be installed.
Always release pipe clips fully before attempting to disconnect fuel pipes.
Fuel tank repairs
CAUTION: No attempt should be made to repair a plastic fuel tank. If the structure of the tank is damaged,
a new tank must be installed.
Oil seals
Never use a seal which has been improperly stored or handled.
Take great care when removing old seals that the sealing surfaces and seal housing are not damaged.
Carefully examine seal before installing to make sure that it is clean and undamaged.
Make sure that the surface on which the seal is to run and also the seal housing is clean and free from
burrs or scratches. Renew the component if the sealing surface cannot be restored.
Special tools and protection sleeves are provided for installing the majority of seals and must be used
when specified.
Many seals are now coated with a protective wax and DO NOT need to be lubricated prior to installing.
Always check the relevant repair procedure which will state if a seal must be installed dry. Never touch
these seals with oily hands as the oil will contaminate the protective coating and affect the sealing
properties of the seal; also, make sure that installing tools and protection sleeves are free from oil and
grease. Seals which must be lubricated prior to installing should have the recommended lubricant applied
to the areas specified in the repair procedure.
Make sure that a seal is installed the correct way round. For example, the lip of the seal must face
towards the lubricant which it is sealing.
When installing an oil seal, make sure that it is positioned square to shaft and housing. Where the seal is
to be installed to a housing prior to installing over a shaft, take care not to allow the weight of an
unsupported shaft to rest on the seal.
Always use the recommended special tool and protection sleeve to install an oil seal. If no tool is
specified, use a suitable mandrel approximately 0.4 mm (0.015 in) smaller than the outside diameter of
the seal. Use adhesive tape on the shaft to protect the sealing lip of the seal.
Press or drift the seal in to the depth of its housing if the housing is shouldered or flush with the face of
the housing where no shoulder is provided. Make sure that the seal is not tilted in the housing when it is
installed.
Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) Precautions
WARNING: Do not install rear facing child seats in the front passenger seat.
The SRS contains components which are potentially hazardous to service personnel if not handled correctly. The
following guidelines and precautions are intended to alert personnel to potential sources of danger and
emphasise the importance of ensuring the integrity of the SRS components installed to the vehicle.
WARNING: The following precautions MUST be adhered to when working on the SRS system:
The correct procedures must always be used when working on SRS components.
Persons working on the SRS system must be fully trained and have been issued with the
safety guidelines.
The airbag modules contain extremely flammable and hazardous compounds. Contact with
water, acids or heavy metals may produce harmful or explosive results. Do not dismantle,
incinerate or bring into contact with electricity before the unit has been deployed.
Always replace a seat belt assembly that has withstood the strain of a severe vehicle impact
or if the webbing shows signs of fraying.
Allow a period of 2 minutes to elapse after disconnecting the battery before undertaking any
work on the SRS system.
Always disconnect the vehicle battery before carrying out any electric welding on a vehicle
installed with an SRS system.
CAUTION: Do not expose airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners to temperatures exceeding 85° C
(185° F).
It should be noted that these precautions are not restricted to operations performed when servicing the SRS
system. The same care should be exercised when working on ancillary systems and components located in the
vicinity of SRS components; these include but are not limited to:
Steering wheel airbag, clock spring.

Passenger front airbag.
Head airbag modules - front and rear.
Seat belt pre-tensioners.
SRS harnesses, link leads and connectors.
Side curtain air bags.
Making the system safe
Before working on or in the vicinity of SRS components, make sure the system is rendered safe by performing
the following operations:
Remove the ignition key.

Disconnect the battery, earth lead first.
Wait 2 minutes for the SRS power circuit to discharge before commencing work.
NOTE: The SRS uses energy reserve capacitors to keep the system active in the event of electrical supply
failure under crash conditions. It is necessary to allow the capacitors sufficient time to discharge (2 minutes) in
order to avoid the risk of accidental deployment.
Installation
In order to make sure system integrity, it is essential that the SRS system is regularly checked and maintained
so that it is ready for effective operation in the event of a collision. Carefully inspect SRS components before
installation. Do not install a part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks
or deformation.
WARNING: The integrity of the SRS systems is critical for safety reasons. Make sure the following
precautions are always adhered to:
Do not install accessories or other objects to trim panels which cover airbags.
Never install used SRS components from another vehicle or attempt to repair an SRS
component.
When repairing an SRS system, only use genuine new parts.
Never apply electrical power to an SRS component unless instructed to do so as part of an
approved test procedure.
Special fixings are necessary for installing an airbag module – do not use other fixings and
make sure that all fixings are tightened to the correct torque.
Always use new fixings when replacing an SRS component.
CAUTIONS:
Take care not to trap airbag modules when installing interior trim components.
Make sure SRS components are not contaminated by oil or grease.
NOTES:
Following seat belt pre-tensioner deployment, the seat belts can still be used as conventional seat belts but
will need to be replaced as soon as possible to make sure full SRS protection.
If the SRS components are to be replaced, the part number/bar code of the new unit must be recorded.
SRS component testing precautions
The SRS components are triggered using relatively low operating currents, always adhere to the following :
WARNING: Never use a multimeter or other general purpose equipment on SRS components. Use only T4
to diagnose system faults.
WARNING: Do not use electrical test equipment on the SRS harness while it is connected to any of the SRS
components, it may cause accidental deployment and injury.
Handling and storage
Always observe the following precautions when handling SRS components:
Never drop an SRS component. The airbag diagnostic control unit is a particularly shock sensitive device
and must be handled with extreme care. Airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners could deploy if
subjected to a strong shock.
Never wrap your arms around an airbag module. If a module has to be carried, hold it by the cover with
the cover uppermost and the base away from your body.
Never transport airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners in the passenger compartment of a vehicle.
Always use the luggage compartment of the vehicle for carrying airbag modules and seat belt pre-
tensioner units.
Never attach anything to an airbag cover or any trim component covering an airbag module. Do not allow
anything to rest on top of an airbag module.
Always keep components cool, dry and free from contamination.
Never apply grease or cleaning solvents to seat belt pre-tensioner units, component failure could result.
Always store an airbag module with the deployment side uppermost. If it is stored deployment side down,
accidental deployment will propel the airbag module with sufficient force to cause serious injury.
Keep new airbag modules in their original packaging until just prior to installing. Place the old module in
the empty packaging for carriage.
WARNINGS:
When handling any SRS component, hold by the gas generator housing, DO NOT hold by the airbag. Do not
wrap the thumb around the gas generator while holding. Do not drape airbag over shoulder or around neck. For
seat buckle type pre-tensioners, hold by the piston tube, with the open end of the piston tube pointing towards
the ground and the buckle facing away from your body. Do not cover the end of the piston tube. DO NOT hold
buckle type pre-tensioners by the bracket assembly or cable. Never point the piston tube towards your body or
other people.
Airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners are classed as explosive devices. For overnight and longer
term storage, they must be stored in a secure steel cabinet which has been approved as suitable for the purpose
and has been registered with the local authority.
Store airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners in a designated storage area. If there is no designated
storage area available, store in the locked luggage compartment of the vehicle and inform the workshop
supervisor.
CAUTION: Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag module making it inoperative. If
you suspect the airbag module has been damaged, install a new module and refer to the deployment/disposal
procedures for disposal of the damaged module.
SRS harness and connectors
Always observe the following precautions with regards to SRS system electrical wiring:
Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring.

Never install electrical equipment such as a mobile telephone, two-way radio or in-car entertainment
system in such a way that it could generate electrical interference in the airbag harness. Seek specialist
advice when installing such equipment.
NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by a special yellow outer sleeve protecting the wires (black with yellow
stripe protective coverings are sometimes used).
WARNING: Always make sure SRS wiring is routed correctly. Be careful to avoid trapping or pinching the
SRS wiring.
WARNING: Do not leave the connectors hanging loose or allow SRS components to hang from their
harnesses. Look for possible chafing points.
Impact crash sensors - inspection
After any degree of side or frontal body damage, inspect the impact crash sensors. Replace a crash sensor if
there is any sign of damage.
CAUTION: Take extra care when painting or carrying out bodywork repairs in the vicinity of the crash
sensors. Avoid direct exposure of the crash sensors or link harnesses to heat guns, welding or spraying
equipment. Take care not to damage sensor or harness when reinstalling components.
Clock spring
CAUTION: Always follow the procedure for installing and checking the clock spring as instructed in the SRS
repairs section. Comply with all safety and installation procedures to make sure the system functions correctly.
Observe the following precautions:
Do not unlock and rotate the clock spring when it is removed from the vehicle.
Do not turn the road wheels when the clock spring is removed from the vehicle.
Always make sure the clock spring is removed and installed in its central position and with the front road
wheels in the straight ahead position - refer to SRS repair section for the correct removal and installation
procedure.
If a new clock spring is being installed, make sure the locking tab holding the spring's rotational position
is not broken; units with a broken locking tab must not be used.
Airbag and pre-tensioner deployment
WARNING: During deployment parts of the airbag module become hot enough to burn you. Wait 30
minutes after deployment before touching the airbag module.
Deployment procedures and precautions as detailed in this manual should be strictly adhered to. Only personnel
who have undergone the appropriate training should undertake deployment of airbag and pre-tensioner modules.
The following precautions must be complied with:
Only use deployment equipment approved for the intended purpose.

Deployment of airbag / pre-tensioner modules must be performed in a well ventilated area which has
been designated for the purpose.
Make sure airbag / pre-tensioner modules are not damaged or ruptured before attempting to deploy.
Where local legislation exists, notify the relevant authorities of intention to deploy airbag and pretensioner
units.
When deploying airbag pre-tensioner units, make sure that all personnel are at least 15 metres (45 feet)
away from the deployment zone.
Make sure deployment tool is connected correctly, in compliance with the instructions detailed in the SRS
section of this manual. In particular, make sure deployment tool is NOT connected to battery supply
before connecting to airbag module connector.
When deploying seat belt pre-tensioners, make sure pre-tensioner unit is secured correctly to the seat.
When removing deployed airbag modules and pre-tensioner units, wear protective clothing. Use gloves
and seal deployed units in a plastic bag.
Following deployment of any component of the SRS system within the vehicle, all SRS components must
be replaced. DO NOT re-use or salvage any parts of the SRS system.
Do not lean over an airbag module when connecting deployment equipment.
If a vehicle is to be scrapped, undeployed airbag modules and pre-tensioner units must be manually deployed.
In this case airbags can be deployed in the vehicle. Before deployment, make sure the airbag module is secure
within its correct mounting position. Deployment of the driver's airbag in the vehicle may damage the steering
wheel; if the vehicle is not being scrapped, deploy the module outside of the vehicle.
SRS Component Replacement Policy
CAUTIONS:
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) will log a crash fault after every impact which is severe enough to
cause airbag deployment. It is possible to have three crashes/impacts logged after one event where,
for example, a front, side and rollover has occurred. After the third fault is logged, the SRS warning
lamp will be illuminated and the restraints control module (RCM) must be replaced.
The SRS side/front impact sensor(s) must be replaced if there are any signs of physical damage or if the
restraints control module (RCM) is registering a fault.
The following information details the policy for replacement of SRS components as a result of a vehicle accident.
Impacts which do not deploy the airbags or pre-tensioners
Check for structural damage in the area of the impact paying particular attention to bumper armatures,
longitudinals and bracketry.
Impacts which deploy the airbags or pre-tensioners
The replacement and inspection policy is dependent on the type and severity of the crash condition. The
following guidelines are the minimum that should be exercised as a result of the deployment of specific SRS
components.
Check for structural damage in the area of impact paying particular attention to bumper armatures,
longitudinals and bracketry.
Front Airbag Deployment - Driver and Passenger
CAUTION: If the front airbags are deployed, the following components must be replaced:
Driver airbag module

Passenger airbag module
Fly leads (where applicable) connecting front airbag modules to SRS harness
Front seat belt buckle pre-tensioner
Rear seat belt pre-tensioners - if installed
Driver's seat belt retractor - if installed
Clock spring
Any front impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
Restraints control module (RCM) if the three crashes/impacts have been stored
Additionally, the following items must be inspected for damage and replaced as necessary:
Front passenger's seat belt retractor and webbing, tongue latching function, 'D' loop and body anchorage
point
Rear seat belt buckles, webbing, buckle covers, body anchorage points and tongue latching function
Instrument panel moulding adjacent to passenger airbag module
Steering wheel
Front seat frames and head restraints
Steering column - if adjustment is lost or if there are signs of collapse
Seat belt height adjusters
Rear seat belts
Side Air Bags
CAUTION: If the side curtain air bags are deployed, the following components must be replaced on the side
of the vehicle on which the deployment occurred:
Side curtain airbag

Any side impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
Restraints Control Module (RCM) if the three crashes/impacts have been stored
Front seat belts, retractors and webbing, tongue latching function, 'D' loop and body anchorage points
Rear seat belt buckles, webbing, buckle covers, tongue latching function, and body anchorage points
Front seat frame and head restraints
Door trim casing
Rear seat belts
Head airbag modules
CAUTION: If the head airbag modules are deployed, the following components must be replaced on the side
of the vehicle on which the deployment occurred:
Head airbag modules

Link lead between airbag gas generator and restraints control module (RCM) harness
Airbag retaining clips
Internal trim finisher
Front seat belt buckle pre-tensioners
Any side impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
Headlining
Component mounting brackets
Adjacent trim components
Rear impacts
CAUTION: If the seat belt pre-tensioners are deployed during a rear impact, the following components must
be replaced:
Seat belt pre-tensioners

Front and rear seat belt retractors used during the impact
(A/C) System Precautions
The A/C system contains fluids and components which could be potentially hazardous to the service engineer or
the environment if not serviced and handled correctly. The following guidelines are intended to alert the service
engineer to potential sources of danger and emphasise the importance of ensuring the integrity of the A/C
operating conditions and components installed to the vehicle.
Where necessary, additional specific precautions are detailed in the relevant sections of this Manual and also in
the Health and Safety Section. These precautions must be referred to prior to commencing repair operations.
The refrigerant used in the A/C system is HC-134a (Hydrofluorocarbon) R134a.
WARNINGS:
Servicing must only be carried out by personnel familiar with both the vehicle system and the charging and
testing equipment. All operations must be carried out in a well ventilated area away from open flame and heat
sources.
R134a is a hazardous liquid and when handled incorrectly can cause serious injury. Suitable protective
clothing, consisting of face protection, heat proof gloves, rubber boots and rubber apron or waterproof overalls,
must be worn when carrying out operations on the A/C system.
Remedial actions
WARNING: Due to its low evaporating temperature, R134a must be handled with care. R134a splashed on
any part of the body will cause immediate freezing of that area. Also, refrigerant cylinders and replenishment
trolleys when discharging will freeze skin to them if contact is made.
If an accident involving R134a should occur, conduct the following remedial actions:
If liquid R134a enters the eye, do not rub it. Gently run large quantities of eye wash over affected eye to
raise the temperature. If an eye wash is not available, cool, clean water may be used to flush the eye.
After rinsing, cover the eye with a clean pad and seek immediate medical attention.
If liquid R134a is splashed onto the skin, run large quantities of water over the affected area to raise the
temperature. Implement the same action if the skin comes in contact with discharging cylinders. Wrap the
contaminated body parts in blankets (or similar materials) and seek immediate medical attention.
If the debilitating effects of inhalation of R134a vapour are suspected, seek fresh air. If the affected
person is unconscious, move them away from the contaminated area to fresh air and apply artificial
respiration and/or oxygen and seek immediate medical attention.
Service precautions
Observe the following precautions when handling components used in the system:
A/C units must not be lifted by their hoses, pipes or capillary lines.
Hoses and lines must not be subjected to any twist or stress; the efficiency of the system will be impaired
by kinks or restrictions. Make sure that hoses are correctly positioned before tightening couplings, and
make sure that all clips and supports are utilised.
Flexible hoses should not be positioned closer than 100 mm (4.0 in) to the exhaust manifold unless
protected by heat shielding.
Completed assemblies must be checked for refrigeration lines touching metal panels. Any direct contact of
components and panels may transmit noise and so must be eliminated.
The appropriate torque wrench must be used when tightening refrigerant connections to the stipulated
value. An additional spanner must be used to hold the union to prevent twisting of the pipe when
tightening connections.
Before connecting any hose or pipe, make sure that refrigerant oil is applied to the seat of the new O-
rings, BUT NOT to the threads of the connection.
All protective plugs or caps must remain in place in the component until immediately prior to connection.
Make sure components are at room temperature before uncapping/unplugging, to prevent condensation of
moisture from the air that enters it.
When disconnecting, immediately plug or cap all pipes to prevent ingress of dirt and moisture into the
system.
Components must not remain uncapped/unplugged, if a system has been left uncapped/unplugged for 24
hours or longer, a new receiver/drier must be installed.
The receiver/drier contains desiccant which absorbs moisture. It must be positively sealed at all times. A
receiver/drier that has been left uncapped for longer than 24 hours must not be used; install a new unit.
The receiver/drier should be the last component connected to the system to make sure optimum
dehydration and maximum moisture protection of the system.
Whenever a component of the refrigeration system is replaced, it will also be necessary to install a new
receiver/drier unit.
Use alcohol and a clean lint-free cloth to clean dirty connections.
Make sure that all new parts installed are marked for use with R134a.
When a major repair has been completed, a leak test should be conducted; refer to the Repairs Section of
this manual for the correct procedure.
Refrigerant oil
CAUTION: Refrigerant oil (ND-8 PAG) easily absorbs water and must not be stored for long periods. Do not
pour unused refrigerant oil back into the container. Always use an approved refrigerant oil.
When replacing components in the system, drain the refrigerant oil from the component being replaced into a
graduated container. On assembly, add the quantity of refrigerant oil drained to the new component - See
Compressor Replacement in this Section.
A/C Compressor
A new compressor is sealed and pressurised with Nitrogen gas. When installing a new compressor, slowly release
the sealing cap; gas pressure should be heard to vent as the seal is broken.
CAUTION: A new compressor should always be sealed and could be pressurised with nitrogen gas. To avoid
possible oil loss, release the sealing cap(s) slowly. Do not remove the cap(s) until immediately prior to
connecting the pipes to the compressor.
Rapid refrigerant discharge
If the A/C system is damaged as a result of an accident and the system is punctured, the refrigerant will
discharge rapidly. The rapid discharge of refrigerant will also result in the loss of most of the oil from the
system. The compressor must be removed and all the remaining oil in the compressor drained and refilled as
instructed in the air conditioning section of this manual.
Precautions for refrigerant recovery, recycling and recharging
When the A/C system is recharged, any existing refrigerant is first recovered from the system and recycled. The
system is then charged with the required weight of refrigerant and volume of refrigerant oil.
WARNING: Refrigerant must always be recycled before re-use to make sure that the purity of the
refrigerant is high enough for safe use in the system. Recycling should always be carried out with equipment
which is design certified by Underwriter Laboratory Inc. for compliance with SAE J1991. Other equipment may
not recycle refrigerant to the required level of purity.
CAUTIONS:
A R134a Refrigerant Recovery Recycling Recharging Station must not be used with any other type of
refrigerant. Refrigerant R134a from domestic and commercial sources must not be used in motor vehicle
systems.
The system must be evacuated immediately before recharging commences. Delay between evacuation and
recharging is not permitted.
A/C Compressor Replacement
A new compressor is supplied filled with a full charge (X cm³) of refrigerant oil.
A calculated quantity of oil must be drained from the new compressor before installing. To calculate the quantity
of oil to be drained:
Remove the drain plug from the old compressor.

Invert the compressor and gravity drain the oil into a calibrated measuring cylinder. Rotate the
compressor clutch to make sure the compressor is completely drained.
Note the quantity of oil drained (Y cm³).
Calculate the quantity of oil to be drained from the new compressor using the following formula:X cm³ —
(Y cm³ + 20 cm³) = Q cm³
Remove the drain plug from the new compressor and drain Q cm³ of oil. install and tighten the
compressor drain plug.
Vehicle Weights
Item kg lb
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) - All models* 3230 7106
Maximum weight of unbraked trailer:
On-road 750 1650
Off-road 750 1650
Maximum towable weight (mass) - Trailers with overrun brakes
On-road 3500 7700
Off-road 1000 2205
Maximum roof rack load (Including the mass of the roof rack):
On-road 75 110
Off-road 75 110
* Weight quoted is the maximum weight possible for vehicles in this model range; weights may be
less for certain variants depending upon trim level, territorial requirements etc.
Vehicle Dimensions
Item mm in
Length - including number plate plinth - All models 4842 190.6
Width - All models:
Mirrors extended 2189 86.2
Mirrors folded 2009 79.1
Coil Suspension - Maximum height - At EEC kerb weight - All models:
With roof rack and rails 1891 74.4
With roof antenna module 1938 76.3
Air Suspension - Maximum height - At normal ride height - All models:
With roof rack and rails 1891 74.4
With roof antenna module 1938 76.3
Wheelbase - All models 2885 113.5
Front overhang - All models 820 32.3
Rear overhang - All models 1130 44.5
Maximum roof load 75 kg 165 lb
Track - All models:
Front 1601 63.0
Rear 1601 63.0
Coil Suspension:
Underbody - Running clearance to exhaust - Minimum - Kerb weight 185 7.3
Front axle to axle undertray clearance 203 7.9
Rear axle to differential casing clearance 214 8.4
Air Suspension:
Underbody - Running clearance to exhaust - Minimum - Kerb weight 185 7.3
Front axle to axle undertray clearance 203 7.9
Rear axle to differential casing clearance 214 8.4
Suspension articulation - All models:
Front 255 10.03
Rear 330 12.9
Coil Suspension:
Wading depth 600 23.6
Approach angle 32.2° 32.2°
Departure angle - Towbar NOT installed:
With full size spare wheel 24.9° 24.9°
With space saver wheel 26.7° 26.7°
Departure angle - Towbar installed - NOT NAS vehicles 15.7° 15.7°
Departure angle - Towbar installed - NAS vehicles 18° 18°
Departure angle - Adjustable height towbar installed 14° 14°
Air Suspension:
Wading depth - Off-road height 700 27.5
Approach angle:
Standard ride height 32.2° 32.2°
Off-road ride height 37.2° 37.2°
Departure angle - Towbar NOT installed - Standard ride height:
With space saver wheel 26.7° 26.7°
Departure angle - Towbar NOT installed - Off-road ride height:
With space saver wheel 29.5° 29.5°.
Departure angle - Towbar installed - NOT NAS vehicles:
Departure angle - Towbar installed - NAS vehicles:
Standard ride height 18° 18°
Off-road ride height 21° 21°
Departure angle - Adjustable height towbar installed:
Standard ride height 14° 14°
Ramp angle - Coil Suspension 22.8°
Ramp angle - Air Suspension
General Information - Health and Safety Precautions
Introduction
Modern vehicles contain many materials and liquids which if not handled with care can be hazardous to both
personal health and the environment. Also, many of the procedures associated with vehicle maintenance and
repair involve physical hazards or other risks to health.
This subsection lists some of these hazardous operations and the materials and equipment associated with them.
Precautions necessary to avoid these hazards are identified.
The list is not exhaustive and all operations and procedures and the handling of materials, should be carried out
with health and safety in mind.
Before using any product the Materials Safety Data Sheet supplied by the manufacturer or supplier should be
consulted.
WARNING: Many liquids and other substances used in motor vehicles are poisonous and should under no
circumstances be consumed and should, as far as possible, be kept from contact with the skin. These liquids and
substances include acid, anti-freeze, brake fluid, fuel, windscreen washer additives, lubricants, refrigerants and
various adhesives.
Acids and Alkalis
For example - alkalis such as caustic soda used in cleaning materials; acids such as sulphuric acid used in
batteries.
Both alkalis and acids are irritant and corrosive to the skin, eyes, nose and throat. They cause burns and can
destroy ordinary protective clothing.
Avoid splashes to the skin, eyes and clothing. Wear suitable protective impervious apron, gloves and goggles. Do
not breath mists.
Make sure access to eye wash bottles, shower and soap are readily available for splashing accidents.
Display Eye Hazard sign.
Air Bags
Highly flammable, explosive – observe No Smoking policy.
Used within the vehicle as safety restraints.
The inflator contains a high-energy propellant which, when ignited, produces a VERY HOT GAS (2500°C).
The gas inflator (generator) used in air bags is Sodium Azide. This material is hermetically sealed in each air bag
module and is completely consumed during deployment. No attempt should be made to open an air bag inflator
as this will lead to the risk of exposure to Sodium Azide. If a gas generator is ruptured, full protective clothing
should be worn when dealing with the spillage.
After normal deployment, gloves and safety goggles should be worn during the handling process.
Deployed air bags should be disposed of in a plastic bag in accordance with local regulations at an approved
chemical waste site.
Following any direct contact with Sodium Azide:
Wash affected areas thoroughly with water.

SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ASSISTANCE.
Air Bags - Do's
Do store modules in an upright position.

Do keep modules dry.
Do carry modules with the cover side pointing away from the body.
Do place modules with their cover side upwards.
Do carefully inspect modules for damage.
Do stand to one side when connecting modules.
Do make sure all test equipment is properly calibrated and maintained.
Do wash hands after handling deployed air bags.
Air Bags - Do Not
Do Not store highly flammable material together with modules or gas generators.
Do Not store gas generators at temperatures exceeding 80°C.
Do Not store modules upside down.
Do Not attempt to open a gas generator housing.
Do Not expose gas generators to open flame or sources of heat.
Do Not place anything on top of a module cover.
Do Not use damaged modules.
Do Not touch a fired module or gas generator for at least 10 minutes after firing.
Do Not use any electrical probes on the wiring circuit.
Air Suspension
Whenever work is being undertaken on the air suspension system, suitable eye protection must be worn.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Highly flammable, combustible – observe No Smoking policy.
Skin contact may result in frostbite.
Instructions given by the manufacturer must be followed. Avoid naked lights, wear suitable protective gloves and
goggles.
If refrigerant comes into contact with the skin or eyes, rinse the affected areas with water immediately. Eyes
should also be rinsed with an appropriate irrigation solution such as a solution of 9% Sodium Chloride and
Purified Water. DO NOT RUB THE EYES AND SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Do Not
Do Not expose refrigerant bottles to sunlight or heat.

Do Not expose refrigerant bottles to frost.
Do Not drop refrigerant bottles.
Do Not vent refrigerant to atmosphere under any circumstance.
Do Not mix refrigerants.
Adhesives and Sealants
Many adhesives and sealants are highly flammable – OBSERVE NO SMOKING POLICY. These items, should be
stored in flameproof cabinets in No Smoking areas. Cleanliness and tidiness in use should be observed, for
example disposable paper covering benches. All adhesives and sealants should be dispensed from applicators
where possible; containers, including secondary containers, should be labelled appropriately.
Anaerobic, Cyanoacrylate (super-glues) and other Acrylic Adhesives
Many are irritant, sensitizing or harmful to the skin and respiratory tract. Some are eye irritants.
Skin and eye contact should be avoided and the manufacturer's instructions followed.
Cyanoacrylate adhesives (super-glues) MUST NOT contact the skin or eyes. If skin or eye tissue is bonded, cover
with a clean moist pad and SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION. Do not attempt to pull skin tissue apart.
Use in well ventilated areas as vapors can cause irritation to the nose and eyes.
For two-pack systems see Resin-based and Isocyanate Adhesives/Sealers.
Solvent-based Adhesives/Sealers - See Solvents
Follow manufacturers instructions.
Water-based Adhesives/Sealers
Those based on polymer emulsions and rubber/latex may contain small amounts of volatile, toxic and harmful
chemicals. Skin and eye contact should be avoided and adequate ventilation provided during use.
Hot Melt Adhesives
In the solid state, they are safe. In the molten state they may cause burns and health hazards may arise from
the inhalation of toxic fumes.
Use appropriate protective clothing and a thermostatically controlled heater with a thermal cut-out and adequate
extraction.
Resin-based Adhesives/Sealers, for example Epoxide and Formaldehyde Resin-based
Mixing should be carried out in well ventilated areas as harmful or toxic volatile chemicals may be released.
Skin contact with uncured resins and hardeners can result in irritation, dermatitis, and absorption of toxic or
harmful chemicals through the skin. Splashes can damage the eyes.
Provide adequate ventilation and avoid skin and eye contact.
Isocyanate (Polyurethane) Adhesives/Sealers
See also Resin-based Adhesives
Individuals suffering from asthma or respiratory allergies should not work with or near these materials as
sensitivity reactions can occur.
Over exposure is irritating to the eyes and respiratory system. Excessive concentrations may produce effects on
the nervous system including drowsiness. In extreme cases, loss of consciousness may result. Long term
exposure to vapour concentrations may result in adverse health effects.
Prolonged contact with the skin may lead to skin irritation and in some cases, dermatitis.
Splashes entering the eye will cause discomfort and possible damage.
Any spraying should preferably be carried out in ventilated booths which incorporate facilities for removing
vapors and spray droplets from the breathing zone.
Wear appropriate gloves, eye and respiratory protection.
Antifreeze
May be flammable when undiluted.
Vapors may be given off from coolant antifreeze when heated. Avoid breathing these vapors.
Antifreeze may be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities. Antifreeze, if swallowed, can be fatal;
SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
Battery Acids
See also Alkalis and Acids.
Gases released during battery charging are explosive. Always remove the battery from the vehicle prior to
charging. Never use naked flames or allow sparks near charging or recently charged batteries. NEVER add acid
to a battery, the chemical reaction produced will be violent and explosive. In cases of eye contact, wash affected
area with copious amounts of water and SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
Make sure there is adequate ventilation during battery charging, observe NO SMOKING POLICY.
Brake Pads and Linings
Always fit the correct grade and specification of brake pads and linings. When renewing pads and linings, always
replace as complete axle sets.
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Splashes to the skin and eyes are irritating and in the long term can be damaging, avoid prolonged skin contact.
In cases of eye contact, wash affected area with copious amounts of water and SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL
ATTENTION.
Chemical Materials
All chemical materials should always be used with caution and stored and handled with care. They may be toxic,
harmful, corrosive, irritant or highly flammable and give rise to hazardous fumes and dusts.
The effects of excessive exposure to chemicals may be immediate or delayed; briefly experienced or permanent;
cumulative; superficial; life threatening; or may reduce life expectancy.
Chemical Materials - Do's
Do carefully read and observe hazard and precaution warnings given on material containers (labels) and
in any accompanying leaflets, posters or other instructions. Material health and safety data sheets can be
obtained from manufacturers.
Do remove chemical materials from the skin and clothing as soon as practicable after soiling. Change
heavily soiled clothing and have it cleaned.
Do organise work practices and protective clothing to avoid soiling of the skin and eyes.
Do avoid breathing vapors, aerosols, dusts or fumes; inadequate container labelling; fire and explosion
hazards.
Do wash before job breaks, before eating, smoking, drinking or using toilet facilities when handling
chemical materials.
Do keep work areas clean, uncluttered and free of spills.
Do store chemical materials according to national and local regulations.
Do keep chemical materials out of the reach of children.
Chemical Materials - Do Not
Do Not mix chemical materials except under the manufacturers instructions; some chemicals can form
other toxic or harmful chemicals, give off toxic or harmful fumes or become explosive when mixed
together.
Do Not spray chemical materials, particularly those based on solvents, in confined spaces, for example
when people are inside a vehicle.
Do Not apply heat or flame to chemical materials except under the manufacturers instructions. Some are
highly flammable and some may release toxic or harmful fumes.
Do Not leave containers open. Fumes given off can build up to toxic, harmful or explosive concentrations.
Some fumes are heavier than air and will accumulate in confined areas such as pits.
Do Not transfer chemical materials to unlabelled containers.
Do Not clean hands or clothing with chemicals. Chemicals, particularly solvents and fuels, will dry skin
and may cause irritation leading to dermatitis or be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful
quantities.
Do Not use emptied containers for other materials except when they have been cleaned under supervised
conditions.
Do Not sniff or smell chemical materials, even brief exposure to high concentrations of fumes can be toxic
or harmful.
Corrosion Protection Materials
Some corrosion protection materials are highly flammable – observe NO SMOKING POLICY.
These materials are varied and the manufacturers instructions must always be followed. The materials may
contain solvents, resins or petroleum products. Skin and eye contact should be avoided. They should only be
sprayed in conditions of adequate ventilation and not in confined spaces.
Dust
Dust or powder produced during repair operations may be irritant, harmful or toxic. Avoid breathing dusts from
powdery chemical materials or those arising from dry abrasion operations. Wear respiratory protection if
ventilation is inadequate.
Fine dusts of combustible material can present an explosion hazard. Avoid explosive limits and sources of
ignition.
Electrical Equipment
Electric shock can result from the use of faulty electrical equipment or from the misuse of equipment in good
condition.
Make sure that electrical equipment is maintained in good condition and frequently tested. Faulty equipment
should be labelled and preferably removed from the work station.
Make sure that flexes, cables, plugs and sockets are not frayed, kinked, cut, cracked or otherwise damaged. If
using cable reel extension equipment, ALWAYS ensure that the cable is fully unwound from the reel.
Make sure that electrical equipment and flexes do not come into contact with water.
Make sure that electrical equipment is protected by the correct rated fuse.
Never misuse electrical equipment and never use equipment which is in any way faulty. The results could be
fatal.
Make sure that the cables of mobile electrical equipment cannot get trapped and damaged, such as in a vehicle
hoist.
Make sure that the designated electrical workers are trained in basic First Aid.
In cases of electrocution:
Switch off the power supply before approaching the victim.

If this is not possible, DO NOT TOUCH THE VICTIM but push or drag the person from the source of
electricity using dry, non-conductive material.
Commence resuscitation if trained to do so.
SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
Exhaust Fumes
These contain asphyxiating, harmful and toxic chemicals and particles such as carbon oxides, nitrogen oxides,
aldehydes, lead and aromatic hydrocarbons. Engines should be run only under conditions of adequate exhaust
extraction or general ventilation and not in confined spaces.
Gasoline (Petrol) engine
There may not be adequate warning of odour or of irritation before toxic or harmful effects arise. These may be
immediate or delayed.
Gas Oil (Diesel engine)
Soot, discomfort and irritation usually give adequate warning of hazardous fume concentrations.
Fibre Insulation
The fibrous nature of surfaces and cut edges can cause skin irritation. This is usually a physical and not a
chemical effect.
Precautions should be taken to avoid excessive skin contact through careful organization of work practices and
the use of gloves.
Fire
Many of the materials found on or associated with the repair of vehicles are highly flammable. Some give off
toxic or harmful fumes if burnt; others such as fluoroelastomers when burnt or damaged by excessive heat can
break down and produce highly corrosive hydrofluoric acid - See Fluoroelastomers.
Should any material be in a burnt or overheated condition, handle with extreme caution and wear protective
clothing when handling such items. Dispose of such material in accordance with local regulations.
Decontaminate and dispose of protective clothing immediately after use.
Observe strict fire safety when storing and handling flammable materials or solvents, particularly near electrical
equipment or welding processes.
Make sure, before using electrical or welding equipment, that there is no fire hazard present.
Have a suitable fire extinguisher available when using welding or heating equipment.
First Aid
Apart from meeting any legal requirements it is desirable for someone in the workshop to be trained in First Aid
procedures.
Splashes in the eye should be flushed carefully with clean water for at least ten minutes.
Soiled skin should be washed with soap and water.
In case of cold burns, from alternative fuels, place affected area in cool to cold water.
Individuals affected by inhalation of gases and fumes should be removed to fresh air immediately. If effects
persist, consult a doctor.
If liquids are swallowed inadvertently, consult a doctor giving him the information on the container or label. Do
not induce vomiting unless this action is indicated on the label.
Fluoroelastomers (Synthetic Rubber)
Many 'O' rings, seals, hoses, flexible pipes and other similar which appear to be manufactured from natural
rubber are, in fact, made of synthetic materials called Fluoroelastomers.
Under normal operating conditions, these materials are safe and do not constitute a health hazard. However, if
the materials are damaged by burning or exposure to excessive heat, they can break down and produce highly
corrosive hydrofluoric acid.
WARNING: Contact with hydrofluoric acid can cause serious burns on contact with the skin. If skin contact
does occur, carry out the following steps immediately:
Remove any contaminated clothing.
SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION
Irrigate affected area of skin with copious amounts of cold water or limewater for 15 to 60 minutes.
Foams - Polyurethane
Used in sound and noise insulation. Cured foams used in seat and trim cushioning.
Unreacted components are irritating and may be harmful to the skin and eyes. Wear gloves and goggles.
Individuals with chronic respiratory diseases, asthma, bronchial medical problems, or histories of allergic diseases
should not work in or near uncured materials.
The components, vapors or spray mists can cause direct irritation, sensitivity reactions and may be toxic or
harmful.
Vapors and spray mists must not be inhaled. These materials must be applied with adequate ventilation and
respiratory protection. Do not remove the respirator immediately after spraying, wait until the vapour/mists have
cleared.
Burning of the uncured components and the cured foams can generate toxic and harmful fumes. Smoking, naked
flames or the use of electrical equipment during foaming operations and until vapors/mists have cleared should
not be allowed. Any heat cutting of cured foams or partially cured foams should be carried out in areas having
suitable fume extraction equipment.
Fuels
Avoid skin contact with fuel where possible. Should contact occur, wash the affected skin with soap and water.
Gasoline (Petrol)
Highly flammable - OBSERVE NO SMOKING POLICY.
Swallowing gasoline (petrol) can result in mouth and throat irritation and absorption from the stomach can result
in drowsiness and unconsciousness. Small amounts can be fatal to children. Inhalation into the lungs, through
vomiting, is a very serious hazard.
Gasoline (petrol) dries the skin and can cause irritation and prolonged or repeated contact may cause dermatitis;
if it is allowed to enter the eyes, it will cause severe smarting. Wash affected area with copious amounts of
water and SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
Gasoline (petrol) may contain appreciable quantities of benzene, which is toxic upon inhalation and the
concentration of vapors must be kept very low. High concentrations will cause eye, nose and throat irritation,
nausea, headache, depression and symptoms of drunkenness. Very high concentrations will result in rapid loss of
consciousness.
Make sure there is adequate ventilation when handling and using gasoline (petrol). Great care must be taken to
avoid the serious consequences of inhalation in the event of vapour build up arising from spillages in confined
spaces.
Special precautions apply to cleaning and maintenance operations on gasoline (petrol) storage tanks.
Gasoline (petrol) should not be used as a cleaning agent. It must not be siphoned by mouth.
Gas-oil (Diesel Fuel)
Combustible.
Prolonged skin contact with high boiling point gas oils (diesel fuel) may cause serious skin disorders including
skin cancer.
Inhalation into the lungs will cause internal bleeding - SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
If swallowed, DO NOT induce vomiting - SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
Kerosene (Paraffin)
Used also as heating fuel, solvent and cleaning agent.
Flammable - OBSERVE NO SMOKING POLICY.
Irritation of the mouth and throat may result from swallowing. The main hazard from swallowing arises if liquid
aspiration into the lungs occurs.
Liquid contact dries the skin and can cause irritation or dermatitis. Splashes in the eye may be slightly irritating.
In normal circumstances the low volatility does not give rise to harmful vapors. Exposure to mists and vapors
from kerosene at elevated temperature should be avoided (mists may arise in dewaxing). Avoid skin and eye
contact and make sure there is adequate ventilation.
If swallowed, DO NOT induce vomiting - SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
Gas Cylinders
Gases such as oxygen, acetylene, argon and propane are normally stored in cylinders at pressures of up to 138
bar (13800 kPa) (2000 lbf/in²) and great care should be taken in handling these cylinders to avoid mechanical
damage to them or to the valve gear attached. The contents of each cylinder should be clearly identified by
appropriate markings.
Cylinders should be stored in well ventilated enclosures, and protected from ice and snow or direct sunlight. Fuel
gases, for example acetylene and propane should not be stored in close proximity to oxygen cylinders.
Care should be exercised to prevent leaks from gas cylinders and lines and also to avoid sources of ignition.
Only trained personnel should undertake work involving gas cylinders.
General Workshop Tools and Equipment
It is essential that all tools and equipment are maintained in good condition and the correct safety equipment is
used where required.
Never use tools or equipment for any purpose other than that for which they were designed. Never overload
equipment such as hoists, jacks, axle and chassis stands or lifting slings. Damage caused by overloading is not
always immediately apparent and may result in a fatal failure the next time that the equipment is used.
Do not use damaged or defective tools or equipment, particularly high speed equipment such as grinding wheels.
A damaged grinding wheel can disintegrate without warning and cause serious injury.
Wear suitable eye protection when using grinding, chiselling or sand blasting equipment.
Wear a suitable breathing mask when using abrasive blasting equipment or using spraying equipment.
Make sure there is adequate ventilation to control dusts, mists and fumes.
High Pressure Air, Lubrication and Oil Test Equipment
Always keep high pressure equipment in good condition, and regularly maintained, particularly at joints and
unions.
Never direct a high pressure nozzle, for example diesel injector, at the skin as the fluid may penetrate to the
underlying tissue and cause serious injury.
Jacking
Always refer to the Jacking and Lifting section of this manual prior to raising the vehicle off the ground.
When vehicle is to be raised by means of a jack, ensure that it is standing on level ground, that parking brake is
applied and wheels are chocked. ALWAYS use the recommended jacking points and ensure that vehicle jack has
sufficient load capacity for the weight of the vehicle.
WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a jack. Always support the vehicle on
safety stands.
Ensure that hoists have sufficient load capacity for the weight of the vehicle.
Legal Aspects
There are many laws and regulations relating to health and safety in the use and disposal of materials and
equipment in a workshop.
For a safe working environment and to avoid environmental pollution, workshops should be familiar, in detail,
with the many health and safety laws and regulations within their country, published by both national and local
authorities.
Lubricants and Greases
Avoid all prolonged and repeated contact with mineral oils. All lubricants and greases may be irritating to the
eyes and skin.
Used Engine Oil
Prolonged and repeated contact with engine oil will result in the removal of natural fats from the skin, leading to
dryness, irritation and dermatitis. In addition, used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which
may cause skin cancer. Adequate means of skin protection and washing facilities must be provided.
Do not employ used engine oils as lubricants or for any application where appreciable skin contact is likely to
occur.
Health Protection Precautions
Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils.
Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable.
Do not put oily rags into pockets.
Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil.
Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned
regularly.
First Aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds.
Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin.
Wash with soap and water to make sure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help).
Preparations containing lanoline replace the natural skin oils which have been removed.
Do not use gasoline (petrol), kerosene (paraffin), diesel fuel (gas oil), thinners or solvents for cleaning
skin.
If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay.
Where practicable, degrease components prior to handling.
Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example chemical goggles or face
shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided.
Environmental Precautions
This section provides general information which can help to reduce the environmental impacts from the activities
carried out in workshops.
Emissions to air
Many of the activities that are carried out in workshops emit gases and fumes which can contribute to global
warming, depletion of the ozone layer and/or the formation of photochemical smog at ground level. By
considering how the workshop activities are carried out, these gases and fumes can be minimised, thus reducing
the impact on the environment.
Exhaust fumes
Running car engines is an essential part of workshop activities and exhaust fumes need to be ventilated to
atmosphere. However, the amount of time engines are running and the position of the vehicle should be carefully
considered at all times, to reduce the release of poisonous gases and minimise the inconvenience to people living
nearby.
Solvents
Some of the cleaning agents used are solvent based and will evaporate rapidly to atmosphere if used carelessly,
or if containers are left unsealed. All containers must be firmly closed when not required and solvent should be
used sparingly. Wherever possible, solvents having a low toxicity and flammability should be selected. Always
follow the instructions supplied by the solvent manufacturer. Similarly, many paints are solvent based and the
spray should be used in such a way as to reduce emissions to a minimum.
Refrigerant
It is illegal to release any refrigerant into the atmosphere. Discharge and replacement of these materials from air
conditioning units should only be carried out using the appropriate equipment.
Discharges to water
Most workshops will have two systems for discharging waste water - storm drains and foul drains. Storm drains
should only receive clean water i.e. rainwater. Foul drains will accept many of the normal waste water i.e.
washing water, detergents and domestic type waste BUT NOT oil, petrol, solvent, acids, hydraulic fluid,
antifreeze and similar fluids. If in doubt, always consult the local authority or water company.
Spillages
Every precaution must be taken to prevent spillage of oil, fuel, solvents etc., reaching the drains. All handling of
such materials must take place well away from drains and preferably in an area with a suitable containing wall to
prevent discharge into drains or watercourses. If a spillage occurs, it must be soaked up immediately using a
spill kit where provided.
Checklist
Spillage prevention:
Store liquids in a secure area.
Make sure that taps on liquid containers are secure and cannot be accidentally turned on.
Protect bulk storage tanks from vandalism by locking the valves.
Transfer liquids from one container to another in an area away from open drains.
Ensure lids are replaced securely on containers.
Have spill kits available near to points of storage and liquid handling areas.
Spill Kits
Special materials are available to absorb a number of different substances. They can be in granular form, ready
to use and are supplied in suitable containers. Disposal of used spill absorbing material is dealt with in Waste
management.
Land contamination
Oils, fuels and solvents etc. can contaminate any soil with which they come into contact. Such materials MUST
never be disposed of by pouring on to soil and every precaution must be taken to avoid spillage reaching soil.
Waste materials stored on open ground could either leak or have contaminating substances washed off them
that would contaminate the land. Always store these materials in suitable skips or similarly robust containers.
Legal compliance
Some sites may have a discharge consent for effluent discharge to the foul drain for a car wash etc. It is
essential to know the types of effluent which are allowed to be discharged into the drain and to check the results
of any monitoring carried out by the Water Company.
Where paint spraying operations are carried out it may be necessary to apply to the Local Authority for an air
emissions licence to operate the plant. If such a licence is necessary, additional precautions will be necessary to
comply with the requirements and the results of any air quality monitoring must be checked regularly.
Checklist
Always adhere to the following:
Know what legal consents and licences apply to the operations.
Check that the emissions and discharges comply with legal requirements.
Waste Management
Pollution can be reduced by careful handling, storage and disposal of all waste materials that occur on sites.
Legislation makes it illegal to dispose of waste materials other than to licensed waste carriers and disposal sites.
This means that it is necessary to not only know what the waste materials are but also to have the necessary
documentation and licences.
Handling and storage of waste
Ensure that waste materials are not poured down the drain or on to soil and are stored in such a way that they
do not escape on to land or soil.
All waste must be segregated into individual types e.g. oils, metals, batteries, scrap components etc. This will
prevent any reaction between different materials and assist in disposal.
Disposal of waste
Dispose of waste in accordance with the following guidelines:
Fuel, hydraulic fluid, anti-freeze and oil: Keep separate and dispose of to specialist contractors.
Refrigerant: Collect in specialist equipment and reuse.
Detergents: Safe to pour down the foul drain if diluted.
Paint, thinners: Keep separate and dispose of to specialist contractor.
Components: Return to supplier for refurbishment or disassemble and reuse any suitable parts. Dispose
of remainder in ordinary waste.
Small parts: Reuse any suitable parts, dispose of the remainder in ordinary waste.
Metals: Can be sold if separate from general waste.
Tyres: Keep separate and dispose of to specialist contractor. DO NOT attempt to dispose of tyres by
burning.
Components/materials containing asbestos: Keep separate and dispose of to specialist contractor.
Oil and fuel wastes (e.g. rags, used spill kit material): Keep separate and dispose of to specialist
contractors.
Air filters: Keep separate and dispose of to specialist contractors.
Rubber/plastics: Dispose of in ordinary waste.
Hoses: Dispose of in ordinary waste.
Batteries: Keep separate and dispose of to specialist contractors.
Air bags - DANGER EXPLOSIVES: Keep separate and dispose of to specialist contractors.
Electrical components: Return to supplier for refurbishment or disassemble and reuse any suitable
components. Dispose of remainder in ordinary waste.
Catalytic converters: May be sold if kept separate from general waste.
Packaging: Compact/recycle as much as possible and dispose of in ordinary waste.
Office/paper waste: Recycle paper and toner and ink cartridges, dispose of remainder in ordinary
waste.
Noise
Car alarm testing, panel beating, running engines, using air tools etc. are operations which invariably produce a
large amount of noise. The location of such activities and also the time of day must be carefully considered
having regard to the proximity of houses schools etc.
Some operations may produce high noise levels which could, in time, damage hearing. In these cases, suitable
ear protection must be worn.
Solder
Solders are mixtures of metals such that the melting point of the mixture is below that of the constituent metals
(normally lead and tin). Solder application does not normally give rise to toxic lead fumes, provided a gas/air
flame is used. Oxy-acetylene flames should not be used, as they are much hotter and will cause lead fumes to
be produced.
Some fumes may be produced by the application of any flame to surfaces coated with grease, and inhalation of
these should be avoided.
Removal of excess solder should be undertaken with care, to make sure that fine lead dust is not produced,
which can give toxic effects if inhaled. Respiratory protection may be necessary.
Solder spillage and filings should be collected and removed promptly to prevent general air contamination by
lead.
High standards of personal hygiene are necessary in order to avoid ingestion of lead or inhalation of solder dust
from clothing.
Solvents
For example acetone, white spirit, toluene, xylene, trichloroethane.
Used in cleaning and dewaxing materials, paints, plastics, resins and thinners.
Some may be highly flammable or flammable.
Skin contact will degrease the skin and may result in irritation and dermatitis following repeated or prolonged
contact. Some can be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities.
Splashes in the eye may cause severe irritation and could lead to loss of vision.
Brief exposure of high concentrations of vapors or mists will cause eye and throat irritation, drowsiness,
dizziness, headaches and, in the worst circumstances, unconsciousness.
Repeated or prolonged exposure to excessive but lower concentrations of vapors or mists, for which there might
not be adequate warning indications, can cause more serious toxic or harmful effects.
Aspiration into the lungs, for example through vomiting, is the most serious consequence of swallowing.
Avoid splashes to the skin, eyes and clothing. Wear protective gloves, goggles and clothing if necessary.
Make sure there is good ventilation when in use, avoid breathing fumes, vapors and spray mists and keep
containers tightly sealed. Do not use in confined spaces.
When spraying materials containing solvents, for example paints, adhesives, and metal coatings, use extraction
ventilation or personal respiratory protection in the absence of adequate general ventilation.
Do not apply heat or flame except under specific and detailed manufacturers instructions.
Suspended Loads
CAUTION: Never improvise lifting tackle.
There is always a danger when loads are lifted or suspended. Never work under an unsupported, suspended or
raised load, for example a suspended engine.
Always make sure that lifting equipment such as jacks, hoists, axle stands and slings are adequate and suitable
for the job, in good condition and regularly maintained.
Viton
In common with many other manufacturers vehicles, some components installed to Land Rover vehicles have
seals, 'O' rings or gaskets which contain a material known as 'Viton'.
Viton is a fluoroelastomer, that is a synthetic rubber type which contains Fluorine. Although Viton is the most
well known fluoroelastomer, there are others, including Fluorel and Tecmoflon.
When used under design conditions fluoroelastomers are perfectly safe. If, however, they are exposed to
temperatures in excess of 400°C, the material will not burn, but will decompose, and one of the products formed
is hydrofluoric acid.
This acid is extremely corrosive and may be absorbed directly, through contact, into the general body system.
WHERE CASES OF SKIN CONTACT OCCUR, SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL HELP.
O-rings, seals or gaskets which have been exposed to very high temperatures will appear charred or as a black
sticky substance.
DO NOT, under any circumstances touch them or the attached components.
Enquiries should be made to determine whether Viton or any other fluoroelastomer has been used in the
affected O-ring, seal or gasket. If they are of natural rubber or nitrile there is no hazard. If in doubt, be cautious
as the material may be Viton or any fluoroelastomer.
If Viton or any other fluoroelastomers have been used, the affected area should be decontaminated before the
commencement of work.
Disposable heavy duty plastic gloves should be worn at all times, and the affected area washed down using wire
wool and a limewater (calcium hydroxide) solution to neutralise the acid before disposing of the decomposed
Viton residue and final cleaning of the area. After use, the plastic gloves should be discarded carefully and safely.
Welding
Welding processes include Resistance Welding (Spot Welding), Arc Welding and Gas Welding.
Resistance Welding
This process may cause particles of molten metal to be emitted at a high velocity, and the eyes and skin must
be protected.
Arc Welding
This process emits a high level of ultra-violet radiation which may cause arc-eye and skin burns to the operator
and to other persons nearby. Gas-shielded welding processes are particularly hazardous in this respect. Personal
protection must be worn, and screens used to shield other people.
CONTACT LENS WEARERS ARE ADVISED TO REVERT TO ORDINARY SPECTACLES WHEN ARC WELDING as the
arc spectrum is believed to emit microwaves which dry out the fluid between the lens and the eye. This may
result in blindness when the lens is removed from the eye.
Metal spatter will also occur, and appropriate eye and skin protection is necessary.
The heat of the welding arc will produce fumes and gases from the metals being welded, the rods and from any
applied coatings or contamination on the surfaces being worked on. These gases and fumes may be toxic and
inhalation of these should be avoided. The use of extraction ventilation to remove the fumes from the working
area may be necessary particularly in cases where the general ventilation is poor, or where considerable welding
work is anticipated. In extreme cases or confined spaces where adequate ventilation cannot be provided, air-fed
respirators may be necessary.
CAUTION: Some of the components installed to the vehicle e.g. the interior cross beam and underbonnet
cross member are manufactured from magnesium alloy. On no account should any welding operations be
attempted on these components.
Gas Welding (and Cutting)
Oxy-acetylene torches may be used for welding and cutting, and special care must be taken to prevent leakage
of these gases, with consequent risk of fire and explosion.
The process will produce metal spatter and eye and skin protection is necessary.
The flame is bright, and eye protection should be used, but the ultra-violet emission is much less than that from
arc welding, and lighter filters may be used.
The process itself produces few toxic fumes, but such fumes and gases may be produced from coatings on the
work, particularly during cutting away of damaged body parts, and inhalation of the fumes should be avoided.
In brazing, toxic fumes may be produced from the metals in the brazing rod, and a severe hazard may arise if
brazing rods containing cadmium are used. In this event particular care must be taken to avoid inhalation of
fumes and expert advice may be required.
SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN BEFORE ANY WELDING OR CUTTING TAKES PLACE ON
VESSELS WHICH HAVE CONTAINED COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS, FOR EXAMPLE BOILING OR STEAMING
OUT OF FUEL TANKS.
Warning Symbols on Vehicles
Decals showing warning symbols will be found on various vehicle components.
These decals must not be removed. The warnings are for the attention of owners/operators and persons carrying
out service or repair operations on the vehicle.
General Information - Solvents, Sealants and Adhesives
Solvents
WARNING: Always handle all solvents, sealers and adhesives with extreme care. Some contain chemicals or
give off fumes which can be dangerous to health. Always follow the manufacturers instructions. If in doubt about
any substance, particularly a solvent, DO NOT use it.
CAUTION: If in doubt about the suitability of any proprietary solvent or sealer for a particular application,
contact the manufacturer of the product for information.
The Health and Safety Precautions subsection refers to some commonly used chemicals and materials, hazards
associated with their use, and safety measures to be taken. Some of these chemicals may be included as an
ingredient in a sealer or adhesive.
Sealers
Certain procedures in this manual involve the use of sealants during installation of components. Where a sealant
is required, the application, together with the Land Rover part number is given in the General Specification at the
start of each section and an instruction that a sealant must be used appears in the relevant repair procedure.
It is essential that the sealant(s) specified for a particular procedure are used, DO NOT use any other sealant.
Always remove traces of old sealant using a plastic scraper or suitable solvent, never use emery cloth or metal
scrapers.
Adhesives
Whenever a procedure involves the use of an adhesive, the adhesive specified must be used and the
manufacturer's instructions regarding application together with any health and safety precautions must be
followed.
General Information - Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health
and Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Fuel may not give adequate warning before toxic or harmful effects arise.
Exposure to fuel can be harmful and can cause severe health damage or death.
Extreme care must be exercised when handling hot fluids. Always wash off spilled fluids from affected areas
of skin immediately.
Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may ignite when working on fuel systems. Do not allow
naked flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near fuel related components.
Fuel must not be used as a cleaning agent.
Keep fuel containers tightly closed, out of direct sunlight and in a cool area. Keep away from heat sources,
ignition sources and oxidizing agents.
SKIN CONTACT: Excessive or prolonged skin contact with diesel fuel may cause serious skin disorders
including skin cancer.
SKIN CONTACT: Fuel is mildly irritating to the skin and may cause dermatitis due to defatting effect.
Remove contaminated clothing. Wash affected areas of skin with soap and water. Seek medical attention for any
persistent skin irritation or abnormality. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse.
EYE CONTACT: Fuel is mildly irritating to the eyes. Flush with plenty of running water, blinking as often as
possible. Do not force the eyelid open. Seek medical attention for any persistent eye irritation or abnormality.
SWALLOWED: Fuel is moderately toxic and tends to foam on vomiting. If drawn into the lungs,
inflammation may develop. Do not induce vomiting. If spontaneous vomiting occurs place the victim in a forward
position to reduce the risk of fuel being drawn into the lungs. Give nothing by mouth. If breathing but
unconscious, place in the recovery position. If breathing has stopped, apply artificial respiration. Seek immediate
medical attention.
INHALED: Fuel is toxic to the respiratory and other body systems. Exposure may result in various
symptoms including drowsiness, unconsciousness or severe health damage. Move a victim to fresh air. Keep a
victim warm and at rest. If unconscious, place in the recovery position. If not breathing, apply artificial
respiration. Give cardiac massage if necessary. Seek immediate medical attention.
CAUTIONS:
Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is essential that
absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components.
Make sure that the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as
possible.
General Information - Road/Roller Testing
Road or rolling road testing may be carried out for various reasons and a procedure detailing pre-test checks,
through engine starting and stopping, pre-driving checks, on-test checks to final checks on completion of the
test are given.
Unless complete vehicle performance is being checked, the full road test procedure need not be carried out.
Instead, those items particularly relevant to the system(s) being checked can be extracted.
Pre-Test Checks
WARNING: If the brake system hydraulic fluid level is low, pedal travel is excessive or a hydraulic leak is
found, do not attempt to road test the vehicle until the reason for the low fluid level, excessive pedal travel or
hydraulic leak is found and rectified.
It is suggested that pre-test and functional tests of those systems/circuits which affect the safe and legal
operations of the vehicle, such as brakes, lights and steering, should always be carried out before the road or
rolling road test.
Engine oil level

Engine coolant level
Tires, for correct pressure, compatible types and tread patterns, and wear within limits.
There is sufficient fuel in the tank to complete the test.
Check all around the engine, transmission and under the vehicle for oil, coolant, hydraulic and fuel leaks.
Make a note of any apparent leaks and wipe off the surrounding areas to make it easier to identify the
extent of the leak on completion of the test.
Starting the Engine
NOTE: On initial drive away from cold and within the first 1.5 km (1 mile), do not depress accelerator pedal
beyond half travel until the vehicle has attained a minimum speed of 25 km/h (15 miles/h). Never operate at
high engine speed or with the accelerator pedal at full travel whilst the engine is cold.
With the ignition switched off, check:
The parking brake is applied.

Manual gearbox: The gear lever is in neutral.
Automatic gearbox: The selector lever is in 'P' - Park
Transfer box: 'H' - High is selected
All instrument gauges read zero.
With the ignition switched on, check:
Ignition controlled warning lights come on.

Engine temperature gauge registers a reading compatible with the engine temperature.
Fuel gauge registers a reading appropriate to the fuel level in the tank.
The operation of the parking brake warning light and fluid level warning indicator light.
On Road Test Check:
CAUTION: At commencement of road testing, check the brake operation while still travelling at low speed
before continuing with the test. If the brakes pull to one side, or appear to be otherwise faulty, do not continue
with the road test until the fault has been found and rectified.
Manual gearbox: Clutch pedal operation is not stiff or heavy.

Manual gearbox: Initial gear engagement is smooth and there is no evidence of clutch drag.
The parking brake releases completely.
Manual gearbox: Clutch takes up the drive smoothly, without slip or judder.
Gear changing is smooth, and there are no abnormal noises or vibrations from the gearbox.
The engine power output is satisfactory, acceleration is smooth and accelerator pedal operation is not stiff
or heavy, and engine speed returns to idle correctly.
There is no excessive or abnormally colored smoke from the engine under normal driving, heavy load or
overrun conditions.
Steering operation is smooth, accurate, not excessively heavy or with excessive free play or vibration.
Does not pull to one side and self centres smoothly after cornering.
All instruments register the correct readings and operate correctly.
Switches and controls operate smoothly and positively, warning or indicator lights operate correctly and
the direction indicator control self cancels when the steering is returned to the straight ahead position.
Heating and ventilation systems work correctly and effectively.
Brakes operate efficiently.
Brake Testing
Avoid brake testing on busy roads where it can cause inconvenience or danger to other road users.
CAUTION: Brake testing which includes heavy brake applications should not be carried out with new brake
pads/discs until the components have bedded-in. New brake friction components will not reach full efficiency
until the bedding-in process is complete. Note that when new parking brake shoes or rear brake discs have been
fitted, it is essential that the 'bedding-in' procedure given in Section 206-05 - Parking Brake Removal and
Installation is carried out.
Test the brakes at several speeds within the normal operating range using both light and heavy pedal pressure.
Note any tendency to snatch, pull or drag, and any undue delay in application or release.
Allow the vehicle to coast and note any tendency to pull to one side, or evidence that the brakes are binding.
After stopping the vehicle (not immediately after a period of heavy braking), carefully check the brake
temperature. A disc which feels appreciably hotter than the others, could indicate that the pads on that disc are
binding.
After completion of the test, check for:
Oil, coolant, hydraulic, air and fuel leaks.

Abnormal temperature of any moving components or assemblies, e.g. wheel hubs, transmission etc.,
which might indicate over tightness or lack of lubrication.
Rolling Road Testing
Four-Wheel Rolling Road
WARNING: Do not operate the footbrake or parking brake whilst the rollers are driving the road wheels.
Ensure that once disconnected, propeller shafts are properly secured and clear of all moving components.
Provided that front and rear rollers are rotating at identical speeds and that normal workshop safety standards
are applied, there is no speed restriction during testing except any that may apply to the tires.
Ensure that the parking brake is released prior to engaging roller driving mechanism.
Two-Wheel Rolling Road
CAUTION: On no account should an attempt be made to carry out any form of testing on a two-wheel
rolling road.
Two-wheel rolling road testing must not be performed on this vehicle.

Published: 10-Feb-2014
General Information - Special Tool Glossary
Service Tools
Special service tools have been developed to facilitate removal, dismantling and assembly of mechanical
components in a cost effective and time efficient manner. The use of such special tools also helps prevent the
potential for damage to components.
Some operations described in this manual cannot be carried out properly without the aid of the relevant service
tools.
See the following list for regional special tool points of contact:
Europe and European countries not in the following list.
Tel: 0049 (0) 6182 959 497
Fax: 0049 (0) 6182 959 226
e-mail: CSS2@bosch-automotive.com
Non-European Export
Tel: 0049 (0) 6182 959 491
Fax: 0049 (0) 6182 959 246
Overseas orders for the following countries should be placed with the local distributor.
United Kingdom
Tel: 0044 (0)1327 303400
Fax: 0044 (0)1327 303499
e-mail: CSS.UK@bosch-automotive.com
Scandinavia and the Baltics
Tel: 0049 (0) 6182 959 495
Fax: 0049 (0) 6182 959 228
Spain and Portugal
Tel: 0034 949 208329
Fax: 0034 949 208327
e-mail: CSS.iberica@bosch-automotive.com
North America
Tel: 001 866 628 5508
Fax: 001 800 578 7375 or 001 586 578 7375
Australia
Tel: 0061 3 9544 6222
Fax: 0061 3 9544 5222
e-mail: customerservice.au@service-solutions.com
Japan and East Asia
Tel: 0081 3 5436 3615
Fax: 0081 3 5436 3622
e-mail: jp.customerservices@service-solutions.com
Italy
Tel: 0039 0521 338170
Fax: 0039 0521 837370
e-mail: CSS.Italy@bosch-automotive.com
Belgium, Netherlands and Luxembourg
Tel: 0031 4645 72716
Fax: 0031 4645 72711
e-mail: CSS.Benelux@bosch-automotive.com
China
Tel: 0086 21 2218 2668
Fax: 0086 21 2218 2677
e-mail: karen.zhai@cn-bosch.com
India
Tel: 0091 20 6725 4823
Fax: 0091 96 2393 1332
e-mail: semi.singh@in.bosch.com
Mexico - LAM Region
Tel: 0052 55 2595 1630
Fax: 0052 55 2595 1639
e-mail: herramientas@service-solutions.com
Brazil
Tel: 0055 (11) 5853 7487
Fax: 0055 (11) 5853 7489
e-mail: ferramentas@service-solutions.com
France
Tel: 0033 2 52 84 00 40
Fax: 0033 2 43 60 43 62
e-mail: css-france@bosch-automotive.com
Korea
Tel: 0082 31 457 9520
Fax: 0082 31 427 9522
e-mail: sungmin.kim@kr.bosch.com / hongyoung.choi@kr.bosch.com

Published: 20-Aug-2013
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Air
Suspension Control Module
Air Suspension Control Module
CAUTIONS:
Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not
guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the
donor vehicle.
When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adapter kit,
part number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
If the control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty,
refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval
programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new module/component.
Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only 5-digit codes. Match the 5 digits from
the scan tool to the first 5 digits of the 7-digit code listed to identify the fault (the last 2 digits give extra
information read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter accurate to three decimal
places, and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance always take the resistance of the
digital multimeter leads into account.
Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.
Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion.
If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an intermittent concern
may be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.
Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSMs which may be valid for the
specific customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as required.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Air Suspension Control
Module. For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in
the workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Diagnosis
and Testing).
DTC Description Possible Causes Action

B1A84- Car Configuration Air suspension control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
55 Data - Not module is not configured system, re-configure the air suspension
configured correctly control module with the latest level software
C112F- Air Spring Valve - Corner valve stuck open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
72 Actuator stuck (fully or partially) system, test the operation of the corner
open Vehicle driven while valves (vehicle ride height interface)
system in "Tight Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Tolerance Mode" system, clear "Tight Tolerance Mode"
C1130- Air Spring Air Air spring or pipe air leak Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
66 Supply - Signal Corner valve stuck open manual and test the air suspension system
has too many (fully or partially) for air leaks
transitions/events Vehicle driven while Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system in "Tight system, test the operation of the corner
Tolerance Mode" valves (vehicle ride height interface)
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, clear "Tight Tolerance Mode"
C1130- Air Spring Air Air spring or pipe air leak Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
7A Supply - Fluid Suspension air supply manual and test the air suspension system
leak or seal unit failure for air leaks
failure Height sensor signal Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
failure system, check for suspension air supply unit
related DTCs
system, check for height sensor related DTCs
C1131- Air Supply - Air spring or pipe air leak Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
92 Performance or Suspension air supply manual and test the air suspension system
incorrect unit failure for air leaks
operation Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, check for suspension air supply unit
related DTCs
C1A01- LED - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

19 current above NOTE: Circuit reference check the suspension status LED ground
threshold LED_NEG circuit for short circuit to power
Suspension status LED

ground circuit short
circuit to power
C1A03- Left Front Height Front left height sensor

1C Sensor - Circuit circuits short circuit to NOTE: The vehicle ride height must be
voltage out of ground, short circuit to calibrated if a new height sensor is installed or any
range power, open circuit, high height sensor fixings loosened/tightened
resistance
Front left height sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
mechanical failure - system, check datalogger signal - Left Front
Linkage bent/broken Height Sensor (0x3B70). Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the front
left height sensor circuits for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance
Install a new front left height sensor

26 Sensor - Signal circuits short circuit to NOTE: The vehicle ride height must be
rate of change ground, short circuit to calibrated if a new height sensor is installed or any
below threshold power, open circuit, high height sensor fixings loosened/tightened
resistance
high resistance

above threshold power, open circuit, high height sensor fixings loosened/tightened
resistance
high resistance
C1A03- Left Front Height Incorrect height Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
29 Sensor - Signal calibration process system, calibrate the vehicle ride height
invalid
78 Sensor - circuits short circuit to NOTE: The vehicle ride height must be
Alignment or ground, short circuit to calibrated if a new height sensor is installed or any
adjustment power, open circuit, high height sensor fixings loosened/tightened
incorrect resistance
high resistance
C1A03- Left Front Height Front left air spring Check the front left air spring for leaks
92 Sensor - leaking Check the front axle valve block pipes for
Performance or Front axle valve block correct installation
incorrect pipes connected Check the gallery pipe for
operation incorrectly blockages/damage/crushing
Gallery pipe Check the front left air spring pipe for
blocked/damaged/crushed blockages/damage/crushing
Front left air spring pipe Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
blocked/damaged/crushed system, test the operation of the front left
Front left corner valve corner valve (vehicle ride height interface)
stuck closed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
(mechanically) system, test the operation of the reservoir
Reservoir valve stuck valve (vehicle ride height interface)
open (mechanically)
C1A04- Right Front Front right height sensor

1C Height Sensor - circuits short circuit to NOTE: The vehicle ride height must be
Circuit voltage ground, short circuit to calibrated if a new height sensor is installed or any
out of range power, open circuit, high height sensor fixings loosened/tightened
resistance
Front right height sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
mechanical failure - system, check datalogger signal - Right Front
right height sensor circuits for short circuit to
high resistance
Install a new front right height sensor

26 Height Sensor - circuits short circuit to NOTE: The vehicle ride height must be
Signal rate of ground, short circuit to calibrated if a new height sensor is installed or any
change below power, open circuit, high height sensor fixings loosened/tightened
threshold resistance
high resistance

Signal rate of ground, short circuit to calibrated if a new height sensor is installed or any
change above power, open circuit, high height sensor fixings loosened/tightened
threshold resistance
high resistance
C1A04- Right Front Incorrect height Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
29 Height Sensor - calibration process system, calibrate the vehicle ride height
Signal invalid
high resistance
C1A04- Right Front Front right air spring Check the front right air spring for leaks
92 Height Sensor - leaking Check the front axle valve block pipes for
Performance or Front axle valve block correct installation
Gallery pipe Check the front right air spring pipe for
Front right air spring pipe Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
blocked/damaged/crushed system, test the operation of the front right
Front right corner valve corner valve (vehicle ride height interface)
open (mechanically)
C1A05- Left Rear Height Rear left height sensor

resistance
Rear left height sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
mechanical failure - system, check datalogger signal - Left Rear
electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear
high resistance
Install a new rear left height sensor

resistance
high resistance

resistance
high resistance
C1A05- Left Rear Height Incorrect height Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
invalid
high resistance
C1A05- Left Rear Height Rear left air spring Check the rear left air spring for leaks
92 Sensor - leaking Check the rear axle valve block pipes for
Performance or Rear axle valve block correct installation
Gallery pipe Check the rear left air spring pipe for
Rear left air spring pipe Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
blocked/damaged/crushed system, test the operation of the rear left
Rear left corner valve corner valve (vehicle ride height interface)
open (mechanically)
C1A06- Right Rear Height Rear right height sensor

resistance
Rear right height sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
mechanical failure - system, check datalogger signal - Right Rear
high resistance
Install a new rear right height sensor

resistance
high resistance

resistance
high resistance
C1A06- Right Rear Height Incorrect height Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
invalid
high resistance
C1A06- Right Rear Height Rear right air spring Check the rear right air spring for leaks
92 Sensor - leaking Check the rear axle valve block pipes for
Performance or Rear axle valve block correct installation
Gallery pipe Check the rear right air spring pipe for
Rear right air spring pipe Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
blocked/damaged/crushed system, test the operation of the rear right
Rear right corner valve corner valve (vehicle ride height interface)
open (mechanically)
C1A07- Cross Articulation Incorrect vehicle ride

62 - Signal compare height calibration. For NOTE: This DTC may be set by a fault relating
failure example, height sensor to any of the height sensors. It will only set if fault
removed and re-installed is present and vehicle speed is greater than 55kph
or renewed without re- (35mph) for more than 25 seconds.
calibrating
Height sensor circuit(s) Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short circuit to ground, system, perform the Vehicle Ride Height
short circuit to power, Calibration routine
open circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
resistance system, check datalogger signals - Left Front
Height sensor mechanical Height Sensor (0x3B70) - Right Front Height
failure - Linkage Sensor (0x3B71) - Left Rear Height Sensor
bent/broken (0x3B72) - Right Rear Height Sensor
(0x3B73). Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the height sensor circuits
for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit, high resistance
Install a new height sensor
C1A08- Pressure Sensor Air suspension pressure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
1C Supply - Circuit sensor supply circuit check the air suspension pressure sensor
voltage out of short circuit to ground supply circuit for short circuit to ground
range
C1A10- Pressure Front axle valve block Check the front axle valve block pipes for
64 Fluctuates When pipes connected correct installation
System Inactive - incorrectly Check the rear axle valve block pipes for
Signal plausibility Rear axle valve block correct installation
failure pipes connected Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
incorrectly system, clear the DTCs and retest
Air suspension pipe Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
disconnected while system, test the operation of the corner
ignition is set to on valves (vehicle ride height interface)
Corner valve stuck open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
(mechanically) check the air suspension pressure sensor
Air suspension pressure circuits for short circuit to ground, short
sensor circuit short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit(s) to ground, short Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit to power, open system, check datalogger signal - Gallery
circuit, high resistance Pressure (0x3B07)
Air suspension pressure Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
sensor fault (calibration manual and test the air suspension system
drift) for air leaks
Air suspension system air
leak
C1A13- Pressure Does Exhaust valve stuck Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Not Decrease closed system, test the operation of the exhaust
When Venting Gallery pipe valve (vehicle ride height interface)
Gallery - Signal blocked/damaged/crushed Check the gallery pipe for
plausibility failure Air suspension exhaust blockages/damage/crushing
silencer blocked/restricted Check the air suspension exhaust silencer for
blockages/restrictions
C1A18- Pressure Increase Reservoir valve stuck Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Too Rapid When closed (mechanically) system, test the operation of the reservoir
Filling Reservoir - Gallery pipe valve (vehicle ride height interface)
Signal plausibility blocked/damaged/crushed Check the gallery pipe for
failure Air reservoir pipe blockages/damage/crushing
blocked/damaged/crushed Check the air reservoir pipe for
blockages/damage/crushing
C1A20- Pressure Increase Suspension air supply Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Too Slow When unit failure system, test the operation of the suspension
Filling Reservoir - Air suspension system air air supply unit (vehicle ride height interface)
Signal plausibility leak Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
failure Air suspension intake manual and test the air suspension system
filter blocked/restricted for air leaks
Corner valve stuck open Check the air suspension intake filter for
(mechanically) blockages/restrictions
system, test the operation of the corner
valves (vehicle ride height interface)
C1A24- No Temperature
64 Increase When NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC is set when the air supply unit
Compressor COMP_TEMP_SIG / is operating but there is no corresponding increase in
Requested - COMP_TEMP_GND temperature
Signal plausibility
failure Suspension air supply Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
unit temperature sensor check the suspension air supply unit
circuit open circuit temperature sensor circuit for open circuit,
Suspension air supply high resistance
unit temperature sensor Check the installation of the suspension air
detached from air supply supply unit temperature sensor
unit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Suspension air supply check the suspension air supply unit circuit
unit not operating when for open circuit, high resistance
demanded
C1A24- No Temperature
67 Increase When NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC is set when the air supply unit
Compressor COMP_TEMP_SIG / is operating but there is no corresponding increase in
Requested - COMP_TEMP_GND temperature
Signal incorrect
after event Suspension air supply Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
unit temperature sensor check the suspension air supply unit
circuit open circuit temperature sensor circuit for open circuit,
Suspension air supply high resistance
unit temperature sensor Check the installation of the suspension air
detached from air supply supply unit temperature sensor
unit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
unit not operating when for open circuit, high resistance
demanded
C1A27- Compressor - Check the operation of the suspension air

12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference supply unit relay
battery COMP_V Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the suspension air supply unit supply
Suspension air supply circuit for short circuit to power
unit relay stuck on
Suspension air supply
unit supply circuit short
circuit to power

14 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference supply unit relay
ground or open COMP_V Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Suspension air supply circuit for short circuit to ground, open
unit relay stuck off circuit, high resistance
circuit to ground, open
circuit, high resistance

29 Signal invalid NOTE: Circuit reference supply unit relay
COMP_V Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Suspension air supply circuit for short circuit to power
unit relay stuck on
circuit to power
C1A28- Wrong Number of Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

64 LEDs Illuminated NOTE: Circuit reference check the suspension status LED circuit(s) for
- Signal LED_NEG / HIGH_LED / short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
plausibility failure STD_HT_LED / CRAWL_LED / open circuit, high resistance
ACCESS_HT_LED / RAISING_LED
/ LOWERING_LED
Suspension status LED

circuit(s) short circuit to
ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit, high
resistance
C1A29- Switch Activation Test the operation of the air suspension

92 Too Long - NOTE: Circuit reference switchpack raise switch
Performance or LOWER_SW / RAISE_SW Test the operation of the air suspension
incorrect switchpack lower switch
operation Air suspension switchpack Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
raise switch stuck active check the air suspension switchpack raise
Air suspension switchpack switch circuit for short circuit to ground
lower switch stuck active Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Air suspension switchpack check the air suspension switchpack lower
raise switch circuit short switch circuit for short circuit to ground
circuit to ground
Air suspension switchpack
lower switch circuit short
circuit to ground
C1A30- Both Switches Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

64 Pressed At Same NOTE: Circuit reference check the air suspension switchpack raise
Time - Signal LOWER_SW / RAISE_SW switch circuit for short circuit to air
plausibility failure suspension switchpack lower switch circuit
Air suspension switchpack Install a new air suspension switchpack
raise switch circuit short
circuit to air suspension
switchpack lower switch
circuit
Air suspension switchpack
internal failure
C1A31- Left Front Corner Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
01 Valve - General NOTE: Circuit reference check the front left corner valve circuit for
electrical failure FL_CV_POS / FL_CV_NEG short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
resistance
Front left corner valve
circuit short circuit to
ground, open circuit, high
resistance
C1A32- Right Front Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

01 Corner Valve - NOTE: Circuit reference check the front right corner valve circuit for
General electrical FR_CV_POS / FR_CV_NEG short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
failure resistance
Front right corner valve
resistance
C1A33- Left Rear Corner Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
01 Valve - General NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear left corner valve circuit for
electrical failure RL_CV_POS / RL_CV_NEG short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
resistance
Rear left corner valve
resistance
C1A34- Right Rear Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

01 Corner Valve - NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear right corner valve circuit for
General electrical RR_CV_POS / RR_CV_NEG short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
failure resistance
Rear right corner valve
resistance
C1A35- Reservoir Valve - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

01 General electrical NOTE: Circuit reference check the air reservoir valve circuit for short
failure RES_V_POS / RES_V_NEG circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance
Air reservoir valve circuit

short circuit to ground,
open circuit, high
resistance
C1A36- Exhaust Valve - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

01 General electrical NOTE: Circuit reference check the pilot exhaust valve circuit for short
failure EXH_V_POS / EXH_V_NEG circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance
Pilot exhaust valve circuit

short circuit to ground,
open circuit, high
resistance
C1A37- Front Cross-Link Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

01 Valve - General NOTE: Circuit reference check the front axle cross link valve circuit for
electrical failure F_XV_POS / F_XV_NEG short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
resistance
Front axle cross link valve
resistance
C1A38- Rear Cross-Link Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

01 Valve - General NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear axle cross link valve circuit for
electrical failure R_XV_POS / R_XV_NEG short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
resistance
Rear axle cross link valve
resistance

1C Sensor Supply - supply circuit short circuit NOTE: The vehicle ride height must be
Circuit voltage to ground, short circuit to calibrated if a new height sensor is installed or any
out of range power height sensor fixings loosened/tightened
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

check the front left height sensor supply
circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
to power

1C Height Sensor supply circuit short circuit NOTE: The vehicle ride height must be
Supply - Circuit to ground, short circuit to calibrated if a new height sensor is installed or any
voltage out of power height sensor fixings loosened/tightened
range
check the front right height sensor supply
to power


check the rear left height sensor supply circuit
power


check the rear right height sensor supply
to power
C1A99- Pressure Sensor - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

1C Circuit voltage NOTE: Circuit reference check the air suspension pressure sensor
out of range PRESSURE_5V / PRESSURE_SIG circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
/ PRESSURE_GND to power, open circuit, high resistance
Air suspension pressure

sensor circuit short circuit
to ground, short circuit to
resistance
C1B18- Module Power Air suspension control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
62 Supplies - Signal module supply circuit check the air suspension control module
compare failure open circuit, high supply circuit for open circuit, high resistance
resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Air suspension control check the air suspension control module
module ignition circuit ignition circuit for open circuit, high resistance
open circuit, high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
resistance check the air suspension sensor/actuator
Air suspension supply circuits circuit for short circuit to
sensor/actuator supply ground
circuit(s) short circuit to
ground
C1B21- Compressor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

1C Brush Card NOTE: Circuit reference check the suspension air supply unit
Temperature MOT_TEMP_SIG / temperature sensor circuit for short circuit to
Sensor - Circuit MOT_TEMP_GND ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
voltage out of high resistance
range Suspension air supply
unit temperature sensor
resistance
U0073- Control Module High speed CAN bus high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
88 Communication circuit short circuit to check the high speed CAN bus high circuit for
Bus 'A' Off - Bus high speed CAN bus low short circuit to the high speed CAN bus low
off circuit circuit
U0100- Lost Engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Communication power or ground circuit check the engine control module power and
With ECM/PCM open circuit, high ground circuits for open circuit, high
"A" - No sub type resistance resistance
information High speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit short circuit to system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
ground, short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
power, open circuit, high check the high speed CAN bus circuit for
resistance short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
Engine system fault open circuit, high resistance
system, check the engine control module for
related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index
U0101- Lost Transmission control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Communication module power or ground check the transmission control module power
With TCM - No circuit open circuit, high and ground circuits for open circuit, high
sub type resistance resistance
circuit short circuit to system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Transmission system fault open circuit, high resistance
system, check the transmission control
module for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
U0102- Lost Transfer case control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Communication module power or ground check the transfer case control module power
With Transfer circuit open circuit, high and ground circuits for open circuit, high
Case Control resistance resistance
Module - No sub High speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
type information circuit short circuit to system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Transfer case system open circuit, high resistance
fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, check the transfer case control
relevant DTC index
U0122- Lost Anti-lock brake system Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Communication control module power or check the anti-lock brake system control
With Vehicle ground circuit open module power and ground circuits for open
Dynamics Control circuit, high resistance circuit, high resistance
Anti-lock brake system open circuit, high resistance
system, check the anti-lock brake system
control module for related DTCs and refer to
the relevant DTC index
U0126- Lost Steering angle sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Communication module power or ground check the steering angle sensor module power
With Steering circuit open circuit, high and ground circuits for open circuit, high
Angle Sensor resistance resistance
Steering angle sensor open circuit, high resistance
system fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, check the steering angle sensor
relevant DTC index
U0128- Lost Electric park brake Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Communication control module power or check the electric park brake control module
With Park Brake ground circuit open power and ground circuits for open circuit,
Control Module - circuit, high resistance high resistance
No sub type High speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information circuit short circuit to system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Electric park brake open circuit, high resistance
system, check the electric park brake control
relevant DTC index
U0133- Lost Dynamic response control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Communication module power or ground check the dynamic response control module
With Active Roll circuit open circuit, high power and ground circuits for open circuit,
Control Module - resistance high resistance
Dynamic response system open circuit, high resistance
system, check the dynamic response control
relevant DTC index
U0136- Lost Rear differential control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Communication module power or ground check the rear differential control module
With Differential circuit open circuit, high power and ground circuits for open circuit,
Control Module - resistance high resistance
Rear - No sub High speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Rear differential system open circuit, high resistance
system, check the rear differential control
relevant DTC index
U0138- Lost Terrain response Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Communication switchpack power or check the terrain response switchpack power
with All Terrain ground circuit open and ground circuits for open circuit, high
Control Module - circuit, high resistance resistance
Terrain response system open circuit, high resistance
system, check the terrain response
switchpack for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
U0140- Lost Central junction box Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Communication power or ground circuit check the central junction box power and
With Body open circuit, high ground circuits for open circuit, high
Control Module - resistance resistance
Central junction box open circuit, high resistance
system, check the central junction box for
index
U0300- Internal Control Air suspension control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
55 Module Software module is not configured system, re-configure the air suspension
Incompatibility - correctly control module with the latest level software
Not configured Instrument cluster is not Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
configured correctly system, re-configure the instrument cluster
High speed CAN bus with the latest level software
circuit short circuit to Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ground, short circuit to system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
power, open circuit, high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
resistance check the high speed CAN bus circuit for
short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit, high resistance
U0416- Invalid Data Missing/invalid data from Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
68 Received From the anti-lock brake system, check the anti-lock brake system
Vehicle Dynamics system control module control module for related DTCs and refer to
Control Module - the relevant DTC index
Event information
68 Received From the electric park brake system, check the electric park brake control
Park Brake control module module for related DTCs and refer to the
Control Module - relevant DTC index
Event information
68 Received From the steering angle sensor system, check the steering angle sensor
Steering Angle module module for related DTCs and refer to the
Sensor Module - relevant DTC index
Event information
U1A14- CAN Initialization Air suspension control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
49 failure- Internal module internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
electronic failure persists, install a new air suspension control
module
U2000- Motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

67 Temperature - NOTE: Circuit reference check the suspension air supply unit
Signal incorrect MOT_TEMP_SIG / temperature sensor circuit for open circuit,
after event MOT_TEMP_GND high resistance
unit temperature sensor for open circuit, high resistance
circuit open circuit
unit not operating when
demanded
U2007- Valve(s) - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 short to ground NOTE: Circuit reference check the air reservoir valve circuit for short
RES_V_NEG / EXH_V_NEG / circuit to ground
FL_CV_NEG / FR_CV_NEG / Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
RL_CV_NEG / RR_CV_NEG / check the pilot exhaust valve circuit for short
F_XV_NEG / R_XV_NEG circuit to ground
Air reservoir valve circuit check the corner valve circuits for short
short circuit to ground circuit to ground
Pilot exhaust valve circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short circuit to ground check the axle cross link valve circuits for
Corner valve circuit short short circuit to ground
circuit to ground
Axle cross link valve
ground
U2007- Valve(s) - Signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

67 incorrect after NOTE: Circuit reference check the air reservoir valve circuit for short
event RES_V_POS / EXH_V_POS / circuit to ground, short circuit to power
FL_CV_POS / FR_CV_POS / Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
RL_CV_POS / RR_CV_POS / check the pilot exhaust valve circuit for short
F_XV_POS / R_XV_POS circuit to ground, short circuit to power
short circuit to ground, circuit to ground, short circuit to power
short circuit to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Pilot exhaust valve circuit check the axle cross link valve circuits for
short circuit to ground, short circuit to ground, short circuit to power
short circuit to power
Corner valve circuit short
circuit to ground, short
circuit to power
power
U210A- Temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

16 Sensor - Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference check the suspension air supply unit
voltage below COMP_TEMP_SIG / temperature sensor circuit for short circuit to
threshold COMP_TEMP_GND ground

unit temperature sensor
ground
U3000- Control Module - Air suspension control

05 System module has been set in NOTE: This DTC is for information only.
programming "Tight Tolerance" mode
failures Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, clear "Tight Tolerance" mode
U3000- Control Module - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

1C Circuit voltage NOTE: Circuit reference system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU
out of range VBATT / GROUND / RES_V_NEG Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer to the
/ EXH_V_NEG / FL_CV_NEG / electrical circuit diagrams and check the air
FR_CV_NEG / RL_CV_NEG / suspension control module power and ground
RR_CV_NEG / F_XV_NEG / circuits for open circuit, high resistance
R_XV_NEG Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
manual and test the battery and charging
Air suspension control system
module power or ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit open circuit, high check the air reservoir valve circuit for short
resistance circuit to ground
Battery/charging system Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
fault check the pilot exhaust valve circuit for short
Air reservoir valve circuit circuit to ground
short circuit to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Pilot exhaust valve circuit check the corner valve circuits for short
short circuit to ground circuit to ground
Corner valve circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to ground check the axle cross link valve circuits for
Axle cross link valve short circuit to ground
ground
U3000- Control Module - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

1D Circuit current NOTE: Circuit reference check the air reservoir valve circuit for short
out of range RES_V_POS / EXH_V_POS / circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance
FL_CV_POS / FR_CV_POS / Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
RL_CV_POS / RR_CV_POS / check the pilot exhaust valve circuit for short
F_XV_POS / R_XV_POS circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance
short circuit to ground, circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance
resistance check the axle cross link valve circuits for
Pilot exhaust valve circuit short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
short circuit to ground, resistance
open circuit, high
resistance
Corner valve circuit short
circuit to ground, open
resistance
U3000- Control Module - Air suspension control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
49 Internal module internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
electronic failure persists, install a new air suspension control
module
U3000- Control Module - Air suspension control

52 Not activated module set to NOTE: This DTC is for information only.
"Manufacturing Mode"
system, clear "Manufacturing Mode"
U3000- Control Module - Air Suspension Deflation

53 Deactivated (0x3004) routine has NOTE: This DTC is for information only.
been performed
system, perform routine - Air Suspension
Deflation (0x3004)
U3000- Control Module - Vehicle Ride Height

54 Missing Calibration routine not NOTE: This DTC is for information only.
calibration completed
system, perform the Vehicle Ride Height
Calibration routine
U3000- Control Module - Vehicle Ride Height

55 Not configured Calibration routine in NOTE: This DTC is for information only.
progress
system, perform the Vehicle Ride Height
Calibration routine
U3002- Vehicle Air suspension control Install the original or a new air suspension
62 Identification module previously control module as necessary. Using the
Number - Signal installed on another manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
compare failure vehicle perform the Vehicle Ride Height Calibration
New instrument cluster routine
installed and not Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
configured correctly system, re-configure the instrument cluster
with the latest level software
U300D- Ignition Input Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

01 On/Start - NOTE: Circuit reference check the ignition signal circuit for open
General electrical IGN circuit, high resistance
failure
Ignition signal circuit
open circuit, high
resistance
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Anti-
Lock Brake System Control Module (ABS)
Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Anti-Lock Braking System
(ABS). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the
workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control (206-09A Anti-Lock Control - Traction
Control, Diagnosis and Testing).

C0030- Left Front Tone Front left wheel
38 Wheel - Signal speed sensor NOTE: After clearing the DTCs, the warning indicator(s)
frequency reluctor ring may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
incorrect damaged 10mph (15kph).
Front left wheel
bearing failure Check the integrity of the front left wheel speed
Front left sensor reluctor ring
wheel/tire size Check the front left wheel bearing
incorrect Check that the wheels and tires comply with the
manufacturer's specification for the vehicle. Check the
front left wheel and tire for condition and balance.
Check and tighten the wheel nuts
C0031- Left Front Wheel Front left wheel

14 Speed Sensor - speed sensor NOTE: After clearing the DTCs, the warning indicator(s)
Circuit short to signal circuit short may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
ground or open circuit to ground, 10mph (15kph).
open circuit, high
resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
front left wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance. Using
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
datalogger signal - Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Input (0x2B06)

Signal signal circuit short may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
shape/waveform circuit to ground 10mph (15kph).
failure
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
front left wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
circuit to ground

2F Speed Sensor - speed sensor NOTE: After clearing the DTCs, the warning indicator(s)
Signal erratic signal circuit short may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
circuit to ground, 10mph (15kph).
short circuit to
power, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
circuit, high front left wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
resistance circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance

No signal signal circuit short may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
short circuit to
circuit, high front left wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
high resistance

Signal compare power circuit short may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
failure circuit to ground, 10mph (15kph).
short circuit to
circuit, high front left wheel speed sensor power circuit for short
Front left wheel high resistance
speed sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
signal circuit short front left wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
circuit to ground, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
short circuit to high resistance
power, open
circuit, high
resistance

Signal plausibility power circuit short may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
short circuit to
circuit, high front left wheel speed sensor power circuit for short
Front left wheel high resistance
signal circuit short front left wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
C0033- Right Front Tone Front right wheel

Front right wheel
bearing failure Check the integrity of the front right wheel speed
Front right sensor reluctor ring
wheel/tire size Check the front right wheel bearing
front right wheel and tire for condition and balance.
C0034- Right Front Front right wheel

14 Wheel Speed speed sensor NOTE: After clearing the DTCs, the warning indicator(s)
Sensor - Circuit signal circuit short may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
short to ground circuit to ground, 10mph (15kph).
or open open circuit, high
front right wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
datalogger signal - Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Input (0x2B07)

Sensor - Signal signal circuit short may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
failure
front right wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
circuit to ground

2F Wheel Speed speed sensor NOTE: After clearing the DTCs, the warning indicator(s)
Sensor - Signal signal circuit short may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
erratic circuit to ground, 10mph (15kph).
short circuit to
circuit, high front right wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
high resistance

Sensor - No signal circuit short may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
signal circuit to ground, 10mph (15kph).
short circuit to
circuit, high front right wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
high resistance

Sensor - Signal power circuit short may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
compare failure circuit to ground, 10mph (15kph).
short circuit to
circuit, high front right wheel speed sensor power circuit for short
Front right wheel high resistance
signal circuit short front right wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
power, open
circuit, high
resistance

Sensor - Signal power circuit short may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
plausibility circuit to ground, 10mph (15kph).
failure short circuit to
circuit, high front right wheel speed sensor power circuit for short
Front right wheel high resistance
signal circuit short front right wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
C0036- Left Rear Tone Rear left wheel

Rear left wheel
bearing failure Check the integrity of the rear left wheel speed
Rear left sensor reluctor ring
wheel/tire size Check the rear left wheel bearing
rear left wheel and tire for condition and balance.
C0037- Left Rear Wheel Rear left wheel

open circuit, high
rear left wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
datalogger signal - Left Rear Wheel Speed Sensor
Input (0x2B08)

failure
rear left wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
circuit to ground

short circuit to
circuit, high rear left wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
high resistance

short circuit to
circuit, high rear left wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
high resistance

short circuit to
circuit, high rear left wheel speed sensor power circuit for short
Rear left wheel high resistance
signal circuit short rear left wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
power, open
circuit, high
resistance

short circuit to
circuit, high rear left wheel speed sensor power circuit for short
Rear left wheel high resistance
signal circuit short rear left wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
C0039- Right Rear Tone Rear right wheel

Rear right wheel
bearing failure Check the integrity of the rear right wheel speed
Rear right sensor reluctor ring
wheel/tire size Check the rear right wheel bearing
rear right wheel and tire for condition and balance.
C003A- Right Rear Wheel Rear right wheel

open circuit, high
rear right wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
datalogger signal - Right Rear Wheel Speed Sensor
Input (0x2B09)

failure
rear right wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
circuit to ground

short circuit to
circuit, high rear right wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
high resistance

short circuit to
circuit, high rear right wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
high resistance

short circuit to
circuit, high rear right wheel speed sensor power circuit for short
Rear right wheel high resistance
signal circuit short rear right wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
power, open
circuit, high
resistance

short circuit to
circuit, high rear right wheel speed sensor power circuit for short
Rear right wheel high resistance
signal circuit short rear right wheel speed sensor signal circuit for short
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
C0051- Steering Wheel Incorrect steering

28 Position Sensor - angle sensor NOTE: After clearing the DTCs, the warning indicator(s)
Signal bias level module installed may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
out of range / Front wheel speed 10mph (15kph).
zero adjustment sensor circuits
failure transposed Check that the correct steering angle sensor module
Rear wheel speed is installed
sensor circuits Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
transposed front wheel speed sensor circuits for correct
Missing/invalid connection to the anti-lock brake system control
data from the module
steering angle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
sensor module rear wheel speed sensor circuits for correct
connection to the anti-lock brake system control
module
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
check the steering angle sensor module for related
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
C0051- Steering Wheel Missing/invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
67 Position Sensor - data from the check the steering angle sensor module for related
Signal incorrect steering angle DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
after event sensor module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Anti-lock brake clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
system control a new anti-lock brake system control module
module internal
failure
C0062- Longitudinal Yaw rate lateral

28 Acceleration acceleration NOTE: After clearing the DTCs, the warning indicator(s)
Sensor - Signal sensor incorrectly may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
bias level out of installed 10mph (15kph).
range / zero Yaw rate lateral
adjustment acceleration Check the installation of the yaw rate lateral
failure sensor internal acceleration sensor
failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
a new yaw rate lateral acceleration sensor. Perform
routine - Calibrate Acceleration Sensor(s) (0x300F)
C0062- Longitudinal Yaw rate lateral Check the installation of the yaw rate lateral
54 Acceleration acceleration acceleration sensor
Sensor - Missing sensor incorrectly Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
calibration installed perform routine - Calibrate Acceleration Sensor(s)
Yaw rate lateral (0x300F)
acceleration
sensor not
calibrated
C0062- Longitudinal Anti-lock brake Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
64 Acceleration system control clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
Sensor - Signal module internal a new anti-lock brake system control module
plausibility failure
failure
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor Yaw rate lateral Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
14 - Circuit short to acceleration yaw rate lateral acceleration sensor power and
ground or open sensor power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
open circuit, high perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
resistance electrical circuit diagrams and check the private high
Private high speed speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
CAN bus circuit open circuit, high resistance
short circuit to Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
ground, open clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
circuit, high a new yaw rate lateral acceleration sensor. Perform
resistance routine - Calibrate Acceleration Sensor(s) (0x300F)
Yaw rate lateral
acceleration
sensor internal
failure
1C - Circuit voltage acceleration yaw rate lateral acceleration sensor power and
out of range sensor power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
ground circuit
open circuit, high
resistance
27 - Signal rate of acceleration yaw rate lateral acceleration sensor power and
change above sensor power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
threshold ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
open circuit, high perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
resistance electrical circuit diagrams and check the private high
Private high speed speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
CAN bus circuit open circuit, high resistance
short circuit to Check the installation of the yaw rate lateral
ground, open acceleration sensor
circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
resistance clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
Yaw rate lateral a new yaw rate lateral acceleration sensor. Perform
acceleration routine - Calibrate Acceleration Sensor(s) (0x300F)
sensor incorrectly Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
installed clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
Yaw rate lateral a new anti-lock brake system control module
acceleration
sensor internal
failure
Anti-lock brake
system control
module internal
failure
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor Yaw rate lateral Check the installation of the yaw rate lateral
28 - Signal bias acceleration acceleration sensor
level out of sensor incorrectly Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
range / zero installed clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
adjustment Yaw rate lateral a new yaw rate lateral acceleration sensor. Perform
failure acceleration routine - Calibrate Acceleration Sensor(s) (0x300F)
sensor internal
failure
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor Yaw rate lateral Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
41 - General acceleration clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
checksum failure sensor internal a new yaw rate lateral acceleration sensor. Perform
failure routine - Calibrate Acceleration Sensor(s) (0x300F)
Anti-lock brake Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
system control clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
module internal a new anti-lock brake system control module
failure
49 - Internal acceleration clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
electronic failure sensor internal a new yaw rate lateral acceleration sensor. Perform
4A - Incorrect acceleration clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
component sensor internal a new yaw rate lateral acceleration sensor. Perform
installed failure routine - Calibrate Acceleration Sensor(s) (0x300F)
failure
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor Yaw rate lateral

64 - Signal acceleration NOTE: This DTC can be set if the vehicle is being tested
plausibility sensor incorrectly on chassis dyno rollers.
failure installed
Missing/invalid Check the installation of the yaw rate lateral
data from the acceleration sensor
steering angle Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
sensor module check the steering angle sensor module for related
Yaw rate lateral DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
acceleration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
sensor internal clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
failure a new yaw rate lateral acceleration sensor. Perform
routine - Calibrate Acceleration Sensor(s) (0x300F)
86 - Signal invalid acceleration clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
sensor internal a new yaw rate lateral acceleration sensor. Perform
failure
95 - Incorrect acceleration clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
assembly sensor internal a new yaw rate lateral acceleration sensor. Perform
failure
96 - Component acceleration yaw rate lateral acceleration sensor power and
internal failure sensor power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
open circuit, high clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
resistance a new yaw rate lateral acceleration sensor. Perform
Yaw rate lateral routine - Calibrate Acceleration Sensor(s) (0x300F).
acceleration Perform routine - Calibrate Acceleration Sensor(s)
sensor internal (0x300F)
failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Anti-lock brake clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
system control a new anti-lock brake system control module
module internal
failure
C0064- Roll Rate Sensor Yaw rate lateral Check the installation of the yaw rate lateral
64 - Signal acceleration acceleration sensor
plausibility sensor incorrectly Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
failure installed clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
sensor internal
failure
C006A- Multi-axis Yaw rate lateral Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
54 Acceleration acceleration perform routine - Calibrate Acceleration Sensor(s)
Sensor - Missing sensor not (0x300F). If the fault persists, install a new yaw rate
calibration calibrated lateral acceleration sensor. Perform routine - Calibrate
Acceleration Sensor(s) (0x300F)
C0072- Brake Excessive use of

4B Temperature Too brakes and/or NOTE: This DTC is for information only.
High - Over traction control
temperature system Allow the vehicle to cool. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
retest
C101F- Generic Valve Anti-lock brake Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
49 Failure - Internal system hydraulic clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
electronic failure control unit a new anti-lock brake system control module
internal failure
C1109- Vehicle Dynamic stability

24 Dynamics control switch NOTE: This DTC may be induced by the driver.
Control Switch - stuck active
Signal stuck high Dynamic stability Test the operation of the dynamic stability control
control switch switch
signal circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
circuit to power dynamic stability control switch signal circuit for short
circuit to power
C1A77- Valve Relay

16 Supply Circuit - NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After clearing the DTCs, the warning indicator(s)
Circuit voltage reference UBVR / GND may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
below threshold 10mph (15kph).
Anti-lock brake
system hydraulic Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
control unit valve anti-lock brake system hydraulic control unit valve
circuit short circuit circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
to ground, open resistance
circuit, high
resistance
C1A90- Wheel Speed Wheel speed Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
12 Sensor Supply - sensor supply wheel speed sensor supply circuits for short circuit to
Circuit short to circuit(s) short power
battery circuit to power
C1A95- Wheel Speed Incorrect wheel Install a new wheel speed sensor as necessary
4A Sensor - speed sensor
Incorrect installed
component
installed
C1A95- Wheel Speed Wheel speed
64 Sensor - Signal sensor circuit(s) NOTE: After clearing the DTCs, the warning indicator(s)
plausibility short circuit to may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
failure ground, short 10mph (15kph).
circuit to power,
open circuit, high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
resistance wheel speed sensor circuits for short circuit to
Wheel speed ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
sensor reluctor resistance
ring fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Wheel bearing check datalogger signals - Left Front Wheel Speed
failure Sensor Input (0x2B06) - Right Front Wheel Speed
Wheel and/or tire Sensor Input (0x2B07) - Left Rear Wheel Speed
size incorrect Sensor Input (0x2B08) - Right Rear Wheel Speed
Sensor Input (0x2B09)
Check the integrity of the wheel bearings
Check that the wheel and tire sizes are correct to the
vehicle specification
C1A96- Brake Light Brake pedal switch

64 Switch - Signal incorrectly NOTE: After clearing the DTCs, the warning indicator(s)
plausibility installed may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
failure Brake pedal switch 10mph (15kph).
circuit short circuit
to ground, short Check the brake pedal switch installation
circuit to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
open circuit, high brake pedal switch circuit for short circuit to ground,
resistance short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
C1A97- Lateral Yaw rate lateral Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
24 Accelerometer - acceleration clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
Signal stuck high sensor internal a new yaw rate lateral acceleration sensor. Perform
C1A98- Yaw Rate Sensor Yaw rate lateral

2F - Signal erratic acceleration NOTE: This DTC is for information only.
sensor signal
erratic (for >2 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
minutes) clear the DTCs and retest
C1A98- Yaw Rate Sensor Yaw rate lateral Check the installation of the yaw rate lateral
96 - Component acceleration acceleration sensor
internal failure sensor incorrectly Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
installed clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
sensor internal
failure
C1B00- Steering Angle Missing/invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
29 Sensor - Signal data from the check the steering angle sensor module for related
invalid steering angle DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
sensor module
49 Sensor - Internal data from the check the steering angle sensor module for related
electronic failure steering angle DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
sensor module
C1B00- Steering Angle Yaw rate lateral Check the installation of the yaw rate lateral
64 Sensor - Signal acceleration acceleration sensor
plausibility sensor incorrectly Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
failure installed check the steering angle sensor module for related
Missing/invalid DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
data from the
steering angle
sensor module
92 Sensor - data from the check the steering angle sensor module for related
Performance or steering angle DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
incorrect sensor module
operation
C1B02- Return Pump -
16 Circuit voltage NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After clearing the DTCs, the warning indicator(s)
below threshold reference UBMR / M GND may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
10mph (15kph).
Anti-lock brake
system hydraulic Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
control unit pump anti-lock brake system hydraulic control unit pump
circuit short circuit circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
to ground, open resistance
circuit, high
resistance
C1B02- Return Pump - Anti-lock brake Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
49 Internal system hydraulic clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
electronic failure control unit a new anti-lock brake system control module
internal failure
C1B22- Hill Descent Hill descent

24 Switch - Signal control switch NOTE: This DTC may be induced by the driver.
stuck high stuck active
Hill descent Test the operation of the hill descent control switch
control switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
signal circuit short hill descent control switch signal circuit for short
circuit to power circuit to power
C2009- Front Axle Wheel Front wheel speed

64 Speed Sensors sensor circuits NOTE: After clearing the DTCs, the warning indicator(s)
Swapped - transposed may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
Signal plausibility 10mph (15kph).
failure
front wheel speed sensor circuits for correct
module
C200A- Rear Axle Wheel Rear wheel speed

64 Speed Sensors sensor circuits NOTE: After clearing the DTCs, the warning indicator(s)
Swapped - transposed may not extinguish until the vehicle speed has exceeded
Signal plausibility 10mph (15kph).
failure
rear wheel speed sensor circuits for correct
module
U0001- High Speed CAN High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
88 Communication bus circuit short perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Bus - Bus off circuit to ground, electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed
short circuit to CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
power, open circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit, high
resistance
U0074- Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
88 Communication NOTE: Circuit private CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
Bus "B" Off - reference CANM2 / short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Bus off CANP2
Private CAN bus

to ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
U0100- Lost Engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Communication module power or engine control module power and ground circuits for
With ECM/PCM ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
"A" - No sub open circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
type information resistance perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
High speed CAN electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed
bus circuit short CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to ground, circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
power, open check the engine control module for related DTCs and
circuit, high refer to the relevant DTC index
resistance
Engine system
fault
U0101- Lost Transmission Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Communication control module transmission control module power and ground
With TCM - No power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
sub type circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
information circuit, high perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
resistance electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed
High speed CAN CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
bus circuit short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit to ground, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
short circuit to check the transmission control module for related
power, open DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
circuit, high
resistance
Transmission
system fault
U0102- Lost Transfer case Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Communication control module transfer case control module power and ground
With Transfer power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Case Control circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Module - No sub circuit, high perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
type information resistance electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed
short circuit to check the transfer case control module for related
circuit, high
resistance
Transfer case
system fault
00 Communication control switch transmission control switch power and ground circuits
With Gear Shift power or ground for open circuit, high resistance
Control Module A circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
- No sub type circuit, high perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
information resistance electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed
short circuit to check the transmission control switch for related
circuit, high
resistance
Transmission
control switch
fault
U0104- Lost Adaptive speed Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Communication control module adaptive speed control module power and ground
With Cruise power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Control Module - circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
No sub type circuit, high perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
short circuit to check the adaptive speed control module for related
circuit, high
resistance
Adaptive speed
control system
fault
U0123- Lost Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Communication NOTE: Circuit yaw rate lateral acceleration sensor power and
With Yaw Rate reference CANM2 / ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Sensor Module - CANP2 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
No sub type private CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
information Yaw rate lateral short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
acceleration
sensor power or
ground circuit
open circuit, high
resistance
Private CAN bus
to ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
U0126- Lost Steering angle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Communication sensor module steering angle sensor module power and ground
With Steering power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Angle Sensor circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Module - No sub circuit, high perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
short circuit to check the steering angle sensor module for related
circuit, high
resistance
Steering angle
sensor system
fault
U0128- Lost Electric park brake Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Communication control module electric park brake control module power and ground
With Park Brake power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
short circuit to check the electric park brake control module for
power, open related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
circuit, high
resistance
Electric park brake
system fault
U0132- Lost Air suspension Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Communication control module air suspension control module power and ground
With Suspension power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Control Module circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
"A" - No sub circuit, high perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
short circuit to check the air suspension control module for related
circuit, high
resistance
Air suspension
system fault
U0133- Lost Dynamic response Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Communication control module dynamic response control module power and ground
With Active Roll power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
short circuit to check the dynamic response control module for
circuit, high
resistance
Dynamic response
system fault
U0136- Lost Rear differential Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Communication control module rear differential control module power and ground
With Differential power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Rear - No sub circuit, high perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
short circuit to check the rear differential control module for related
circuit, high
resistance
Rear differential
system fault
U0138- Lost Terrain response Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Communication switchpack power terrain response switchpack power and ground circuits
With All Terrain or ground circuit for open circuit, high resistance
Control Module - open circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
No sub type resistance perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
information High speed CAN electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed
power, open check the terrain response switchpack for related
circuit, high DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
resistance
Terrain response
system fault
U0140- Lost Central junction Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Communication box power or central junction box power and ground circuits for
With Body ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
No sub type resistance perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
information High speed CAN electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed
power, open check the central junction box for related DTCs and
resistance
Central junction
box system fault
U0300- Internal Control Incorrect anti-lock Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Module Software brake system clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
Incompatibility - control module a new anti-lock brake system control module
No sub type installed
information
U0401- Invalid Data Missing/invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
68 Received from data from the check the engine control module for related DTCs and
ECM/PCM A - engine control refer to the relevant DTC index
Event module
information
68 Received from data from the check the transmission control module for related
TCM - Event transmission DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
information control module
68 Received From data from the check the transfer case control module for related
Transfer Case transfer case DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Control Module - control module
Event
information
68 Received From data from the check the transmission control switch for related
Gear Shift transmission DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Control Module A control switch
- Event
information
68 Received From data from the check the adaptive speed control module for related
Cruise Control adaptive speed DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Module - Event control module
information
68 Received From data from the check the electric park brake control module for
Park Brake electric park brake related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Event
information
68 Received from data from the air check the air suspension control module for related
Suspension suspension control DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Control Module A module
- Event
information
68 Received From data from the check the steering angle sensor module for related
Steering Angle steering angle DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Sensor Module - sensor module
Event
information
68 Received From data from the rear check the rear differential control module for related
Differential differential control DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Control Module- module
Rear - Event
information
68 Received From data from the check the terrain response switchpack for related
All Terrain terrain response DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Control Module - switchpack
Event
information
U1A14- CAN Initialisation Incorrect anti-lock Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Failure - No sub brake system clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
type information control module a new anti-lock brake system control module
installed
U2101- Control Module Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Configuration file mismatch with check and up-date the car configuration file as
Incompatible - vehicle necessary
No sub type specification Install a new anti-lock brake system control module
information Incorrect anti-lock as necessary
brake system
control module
installed
U2101- Control Module Incorrect anti-lock Install a new anti-lock brake system control module
68 Configuration brake system as necessary
Incompatible - control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Event installed clear the DTCs and retest
information New anti-lock
brake system
control module
installed
U3000- Control Module - Incorrect anti-lock Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 No sub type brake system clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
information control module a new anti-lock brake system control module
installed
U3000- Control Module - Anti-lock brake Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
45 Program memory system control clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
failure module internal a new anti-lock brake system control module
failure
U3000- Control Module - Anti-lock brake Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
49 Internal system control clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
electronic failure module internal a new anti-lock brake system control module
failure
U3000- Control Module - Excessive use of Allow the vehicle to cool. Using the manufacturer
4B Over brakes and/or approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
temperature traction control retest
system
U3000- Control Module - Anti-lock brake

53 De-activated system control NOTE: This DTC is for information only.
module
temporarily Anti-lock brake system control module normal
deactivated during operation will resume at next ignition cycle
diagnostic session
U3000- Control Module - Tire pressure(s)

68 Event incorrect NOTE: This DTC is set when the dynamic stability
information Yaw rate lateral control has been active for an unfeasibly long period of time.
acceleration
sensor incorrectly Check and adjust the tire pressures as necessary
installed Check the installation of the yaw rate lateral
Missing/invalid acceleration sensor
data from the Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
steering angle check the steering angle sensor module for related
sensor module DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
U3000- Control Module - Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
87 Missing message file mismatch with check and up-date the car configuration file as
vehicle necessary
specification
U3002- Vehicle Anti-lock brake Install the original or a new anti-lock brake system
81 Identification system control control module as necessary
Number - Invalid module previously Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
serial data installed on perform routine - Learn VIN (0x0404)
received another vehicle
New anti-lock
brake system
control module
installed and VIN
not yet
programmed
U3003- Battery Voltage - Mismatch between Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
62 Signal compare the voltage at the check datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage
failure anti-lock brake (0xD112) - and compare it to battery voltage. Refer
system control to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the anti-
module and the lock brake system control module power and ground
voltage value circuits for open circuit, high resistance
broadcast on the
CAN bus
U3006- Control Module Anti-lock brake Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
16 Input Power "A" system control check datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage
- Circuit voltage module power or (0xD112). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
below threshold ground circuit check the anti-lock brake system control module
open circuit, high power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
resistance resistance
Battery/charging Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
system fault and test the battery and charging system
U3006- Control Module Battery/charging Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
17 Input Power "A" system fault check datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage
- Circuit voltage (0xD112). Refer to the relevant section of the
above threshold workshop manual and test the battery and charging
system
U3006- Control Module Anti-lock brake Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
1C Input Power "A" system control check datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage
- Circuit voltage module power or (0xD112). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
out of range ground circuit check the anti-lock brake system control module
open circuit, high power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC:
Audio Amplifier Module (AAM)
Audio Amplifier Module (AAM)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Audio Amplifier Module
(AAM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the
workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00 Information and
Entertainment System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).

B128A- Speaker #13 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit rear left surround speaker circuit for short circuit to
ground reference L_RS+ / ground. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
L_RS- system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new rear left surround speaker as
Rear left necessary
surround Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
speaker circuit clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
short circuit to a new audio amplifier module
ground
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit rear left surround speaker circuit for short circuit to
battery reference L_RS+ / power. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
L_RS- system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new rear left surround speaker as
Rear left necessary
power
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit rear left surround speaker circuit for open circuit, high
reference L_RS+ / resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
L_RS- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new rear left surround speaker
Rear left as necessary
open circuit, a new audio amplifier module
high resistance
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1A Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit rear left surround speaker circuit for short circuit.
below threshold reference L_RS+ / Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
L_RS- clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
a new rear left surround speaker as necessary
Rear left Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
surround clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
speaker circuit a new audio amplifier module
short circuit
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1E Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit rear left surround speaker circuit for open circuit, high
out of range reference L_RS+ / resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
L_RS- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new rear left surround speaker
Rear left as necessary
surround Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
speaker circuit rear left surround speaker circuit for short circuit.
open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
high resistance clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
Rear left a new rear left surround speaker as necessary
short circuit a new audio amplifier module
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
B128B- Speaker #14 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit rear right surround speaker circuit for short circuit to
ground reference R_RS+ / ground. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
R_RS- system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new rear right surround speaker as
Rear right necessary
ground
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit rear right surround speaker circuit for short circuit to
battery reference R_RS+ / power. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
R_RS- system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new rear right surround speaker as
Rear right necessary
power
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit rear right surround speaker circuit for open circuit,
reference R_RS+ / high resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
R_RS- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new rear right surround speaker
Rear right as necessary
high resistance
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1A Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit rear right surround speaker circuit for short circuit.
below threshold reference R_RS+ / Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
R_RS- clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
a new rear right surround speaker as necessary
Rear right Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
surround clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
speaker circuit a new audio amplifier module
short circuit
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1E Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit rear right surround speaker circuit for open circuit,
out of range reference R_RS+ / high resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
R_RS- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new rear right surround speaker
Rear right as necessary
surround Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
speaker circuit rear right surround speaker circuit for short circuit.
high resistance clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
Rear right a new rear right surround speaker as necessary
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
B128C- Speaker #15 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit front centre speaker circuit for short circuit to ground.
ground reference CENTRE+ / Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
CENTRE- clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
a new front centre speaker
Front centre Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
ground
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit front centre speaker circuit for short circuit to power.
battery reference CENTRE+ / Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
CENTRE- clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
a new front centre speaker
power
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit front centre speaker circuit for open circuit, high
reference CENTRE+ / resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
CENTRE- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new front centre speaker
high resistance
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1A Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit front centre speaker circuit for short circuit. Using the
below threshold reference CENTRE+ / manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
CENTRE- DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
front centre speaker
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1E Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit front centre speaker circuit for open circuit, high
out of range reference CENTRE+ / resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
CENTRE- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new front centre speaker
Front centre Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
speaker circuit front centre speaker circuit for short circuit. Using the
open circuit, manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
high resistance DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Front centre front centre speaker
speaker circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
short circuit clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
Audio amplifier a new audio amplifier module
module internal
failure
B1297- Digital Headphone Headphone

01 Module - General transmitter NOTE: Digital headphones (Whitefire) only
electrical failure circuit short
circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
ground, short headphone transmitter circuit for short circuit to
circuit to power, ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
open circuit, resistance
high resistance
B1297- Digital Headphone Headphone

13 Module - Circuit transmitter NOTE: Digital headphones (Whitefire) only
open circuit open
circuit, high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
resistance headphone transmitter circuit for open circuit, high
resistance
B1A01- Speaker #1 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit front left door tweeter speaker circuit for short circuit
ground reference LF_H+ / to ground. Using the manufacturer approved
LF_H- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new front left door tweeter
Front left door speaker
tweeter speaker Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit short clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
circuit to ground a new audio amplifier module
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit front left door tweeter speaker circuit for short circuit
battery reference LF_H+ / to power. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
LF_H- system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new front left door tweeter speaker
Front left door Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
tweeter speaker clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
circuit short a new audio amplifier module
circuit to power
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit front left door tweeter speaker circuit for open circuit,
reference LF_H+ / high resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
circuit open clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
circuit, high a new audio amplifier module
resistance
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1A Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit front left door tweeter speaker circuit for short circuit.
below threshold reference LF_H+ / Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
LF_H- clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
a new front left door tweeter speaker
Front left door Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1E Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit front left door tweeter speaker circuit for open circuit,
out of range reference LF_H+ / high resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
tweeter speaker Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
circuit open front left door tweeter speaker circuit for short circuit.
Front left door a new front left door tweeter speaker
circuit a new audio amplifier module
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit front left door bass speaker circuit for short circuit to
ground reference LF_L+ / LF_L- ground. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Front left door persists, install a new front left door bass speaker
bass speaker Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit front left door bass speaker circuit for short circuit to
battery reference LF_L+ / LF_L- power. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Front left door persists, install a new front left door bass speaker
circuit to power a new audio amplifier module
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit front left door bass speaker circuit for open circuit,
reference LF_L+ / LF_L- high resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
Front left door fault persists, install a new front left door bass speaker
resistance
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1A Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit front left door bass speaker circuit for short circuit.
below threshold reference LF_L+ / LF_L- Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Front left door a new front left door bass speaker
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1E Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit front left door bass speaker circuit for open circuit,
out of range reference LF_L+ / LF_L- high resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
Front left door fault persists, install a new front left door bass speaker
bass speaker Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
circuit open front left door bass speaker circuit for short circuit.
Front left door a new front left door bass speaker
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit front right door tweeter speaker circuit for short circuit
ground reference RF_H+ / to ground. Using the manufacturer approved
RF_H- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new front right door tweeter
Front right door speaker
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit front right door tweeter speaker circuit for short circuit
battery reference RF_H+ / to power. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
RF_H- system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new front right door tweeter speaker
Front right door Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit to power
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit front right door tweeter speaker circuit for open
reference RF_H+ / circuit, high resistance. Using the manufacturer
RF_H- approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
retest. If the fault persists, install a new front right
Front right door door tweeter speaker
resistance
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1A Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit front right door tweeter speaker circuit for short
below threshold reference RF_H+ / circuit. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
RF_H- system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new front right door tweeter speaker
circuit
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1E Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit front right door tweeter speaker circuit for open
out of range reference RF_H+ / circuit, high resistance. Using the manufacturer
RF_H- approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
Front right door door tweeter speaker
circuit open front right door tweeter speaker circuit for short
circuit, high circuit. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
resistance system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Front right door persists, install a new front right door tweeter speaker
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit front right door bass speaker circuit for short circuit to
ground reference RF_L+ / ground. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
RF_L- system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new front right door bass speaker
bass speaker clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
circuit to ground
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit front right door bass speaker circuit for short circuit to
battery reference RF_L+ / power. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
RF_L- system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new front right door bass speaker
circuit to power
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit front right door bass speaker circuit for open circuit,
reference RF_L+ / high resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
RF_L- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new front right door bass
resistance
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1A Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit front right door bass speaker circuit for short circuit.
below threshold reference RF_L+ / Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
RF_L- clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
a new front right door bass speaker
circuit
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1E Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit front right door bass speaker circuit for open circuit,
out of range reference RF_L+ / high resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
RF_L- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new front right door bass
circuit open front right door bass speaker circuit for short circuit.
Front right door a new front right door bass speaker
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit rear left door tweeter speaker circuit for short circuit
ground reference LR_H+ / to ground. Using the manufacturer approved
LR_H- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new rear left door tweeter
Rear left door speaker
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit rear left door tweeter speaker circuit for short circuit
battery reference LR_H+ / to power. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
LR_H- system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new rear left door tweeter speaker
Rear left door Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit to power
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit rear left door tweeter speaker circuit for open circuit,
reference LR_H+ / high resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
resistance
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1A Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit rear left door tweeter speaker circuit for short circuit.
below threshold reference LR_H+ / Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
LR_H- clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
a new rear left door tweeter speaker
circuit
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1E Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit rear left door tweeter speaker circuit for open circuit,
out of range reference LR_H+ / high resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
circuit open rear left door tweeter speaker circuit for short circuit.
Rear left door a new rear left door tweeter speaker
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit rear left door bass speaker circuit for short circuit to
ground reference LR_L+ / ground. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
LR_L- system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new rear left door bass speaker
circuit to ground
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit rear left door bass speaker circuit for short circuit to
battery reference LR_L+ / power. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
LR_L- system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new rear left door bass speaker
circuit to power
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit rear left door bass speaker circuit for open circuit,
reference LR_L+ / high resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
LR_L- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new rear left door bass speaker
circuit open a new audio amplifier module
circuit, high
resistance
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1A Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit rear left door bass speaker circuit for short circuit.
below threshold reference LR_L+ / Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
LR_L- clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
a new rear left door bass speaker
circuit
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1E Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit rear left door bass speaker circuit for open circuit,
out of range reference LR_L+ / high resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
LR_L- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new rear left door bass speaker
Rear left door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
bass speaker rear left door bass speaker circuit for short circuit.
circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit, high clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
resistance a new rear left door bass speaker
circuit
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit rear right door tweeter speaker circuit for short circuit
ground reference RR_H+ / to ground. Using the manufacturer approved
RR_H- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new rear right door tweeter
Rear right door speaker
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit rear right door tweeter speaker circuit for short circuit
battery reference RR_H+ / to power. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
RR_H- system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new rear right door tweeter speaker
Rear right door Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit to power
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit rear right door tweeter speaker circuit for open circuit,
reference RR_H+ / high resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
resistance
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1A Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit rear right door tweeter speaker circuit for short circuit.
below threshold reference RR_H+ / Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
RR_H- clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
a new rear right door tweeter speaker
circuit
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1E Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit rear right door tweeter speaker circuit for open circuit,
out of range reference RR_H+ / high resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
circuit open rear right door tweeter speaker circuit for short circuit.
Rear right door a new rear right door tweeter speaker
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit rear right door bass speaker circuit for short circuit to
ground reference RR_L+ / ground. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
RR_L- system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new rear right door bass speaker
circuit to ground
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit rear right door bass speaker circuit for short circuit to
battery reference RR_L+ / power. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
RR_L- system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new rear right door bass speaker
circuit to power
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit rear right door bass speaker circuit for open circuit,
reference RR_L+ / high resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
RR_L- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new rear right door bass
resistance
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1A Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit rear right door bass speaker circuit for short circuit.
below threshold reference RR_L+ / Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
RR_L- clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
a new rear right door bass speaker
circuit
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1E Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit rear right door bass speaker circuit for open circuit,
out of range reference RR_L+ / high resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
RR_L- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new rear right door bass
circuit open rear right door bass speaker circuit for short circuit.
Rear right door a new rear right door bass speaker
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit front left door mid-range speaker circuit for short
ground reference LF_M+ / circuit to ground. Using the manufacturer approved
LF_M- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new front left door mid-range
mid-range Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
ground
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit front left door mid-range speaker circuit for short
battery reference LF_M+ / circuit to power. Using the manufacturer approved
LF_M- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new front left door mid-range
power
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit front left door mid-range speaker circuit for open
reference LF_M+ / circuit, high resistance. Using the manufacturer
LF_M- approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
retest. If the fault persists, install a new front left door
Front left door mid-range speaker
high resistance
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1A Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit front left door mid-range speaker circuit for short
below threshold reference LF_M+ / circuit. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
LF_M- system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new front left door mid-range
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1E Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit front left door mid-range speaker circuit for open
out of range reference LF_M+ / circuit, high resistance. Using the manufacturer
LF_M- approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
retest. If the fault persists, install a new front left door
Front left door mid-range speaker
mid-range Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
speaker circuit front left door mid-range speaker circuit for short
open circuit, circuit. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
high resistance system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Front left door persists, install a new front left door mid-range
mid-range speaker
module internal
failure
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit front right door mid-range speaker circuit for short
ground reference RF_M+ / circuit to ground. Using the manufacturer approved
RF_M- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new front right door mid-range
ground
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit front right door mid-range speaker circuit for short
battery reference RF_M+ / circuit to power. Using the manufacturer approved
RF_M- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new front right door mid-range
power
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit front right door mid-range speaker circuit for open
reference RF_M+ / circuit, high resistance. Using the manufacturer
RF_M- approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
Front right door door mid-range speaker
high resistance
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1A Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit front right door mid-range speaker circuit for short
below threshold reference RF_M+ / circuit. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
RF_M- system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new front right door mid-range
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1E Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit front right door mid-range speaker circuit for open
out of range reference RF_M+ / circuit, high resistance. Using the manufacturer
RF_M- approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
Front right door door mid-range speaker
mid-range Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
speaker circuit front right door mid-range speaker circuit for short
open circuit, circuit. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
high resistance system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Front right door persists, install a new front right door mid-range
mid-range speaker
module internal
failure
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit sub-woofer 1 circuit for short circuit to ground. Using
ground reference SW_1+ / the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
SW_1- the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
sub-woofer
Sub-woofer 1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit sub-woofer 1 circuit for short circuit to power. Using
battery reference SW_1+ / the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
sub-woofer
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit sub-woofer 1 circuit for open circuit, high resistance.
reference SW_1+ / Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
SW_1- clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
a new sub-woofer
resistance
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1A Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit sub-woofer 1 circuit for short circuit. Using the
below threshold reference SW_1+ / manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
SW_1- DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
sub-woofer
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1E Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit sub-woofer 1 circuit for open circuit, high resistance.
out of range reference SW_1+ / Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
a new sub-woofer
Sub-woofer 1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
circuit open sub-woofer 1 circuit for short circuit. Using the
circuit, high manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
resistance DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Sub-woofer 1 sub-woofer
circuit short Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
module internal
failure
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit sub-woofer 2 circuit for short circuit to ground. Using
ground reference SW_2+ / the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
sub-woofer
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit sub-woofer 2 circuit for short circuit to power. Using
battery reference SW_2+ / the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
sub-woofer
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit sub-woofer 2 circuit for open circuit, high resistance.
reference SW_2+ / Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
a new sub-woofer
resistance
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1A Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit sub-woofer 2 circuit for short circuit. Using the
below threshold reference SW_2+ / manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
SW_2- DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
sub-woofer
Audio amplifier
module internal
failure
1E Circuit resistance NOTE: Circuit sub-woofer 2 circuit for open circuit, high resistance.
out of range reference SW_2+ / Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
a new sub-woofer
Sub-woofer 2 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
circuit open sub-woofer 2 circuit for short circuit. Using the
circuit, high manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
resistance DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Sub-woofer 2 sub-woofer
circuit clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
module internal
failure
U2300- Central Audio amplifier Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
54 Configuration - module is not re-configure the audio amplifier module with the latest
Missing calibration configured level software
correctly Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Car configuration check and up-date the car configuration file as
file mismatch necessary
with vehicle
specification
U2300- Central Audio amplifier Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
56 Configuration - module is not re-configure the audio amplifier module with the latest
Invalid/incomplete configured level software
configuration correctly Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Car configuration check and up-date the car configuration file as
file mismatch necessary
with vehicle
specification
U2300- Central Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
64 Configuration - file mismatch check and up-date the car configuration file as
Signal plausibility with vehicle necessary
failure specification Install a new audio amplifier module as necessary
Incorrect audio
amplifier module
installed
U3000- Control Module - Audio amplifier Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
55 Not configured module is not re-configure the audio amplifier module with the latest
configured level software
correctly This DTC will occur once if a new module is installed.
New audio Clear the DTC, cycle the ignition state to off. Lock the
amplifier module vehicle (to ensure the infotainment system has reset).
Unlock the vehicle, cycle the ignition state to on.
Retest the system
U3000- Control Module - Audio amplifier Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
96 Component module internal clear the DTCs and perform routine - On Demand Self
internal failure failure Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, install a new audio
amplifier module
U3000- Control Module - Audio amplifier Check that the amplifier module ventilation is not
98 Component or cooling vents obstructed
system over obstructed Rectify speaker related faults first. Clear the DTCs and
temperature Speaker circuit retest
fault Rectify audio amplifier module internal failure related
Audio amplifier faults first. Clear the DTCs and retest
module internal
failure
U3003- Battery Voltage - Audio amplifier Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
16 Circuit voltage module power or check datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage
below threshold ground circuit (0xD110). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
open circuit, check the audio amplifier module power and ground
high resistance circuits for open circuit, high resistance
U3003- Battery Voltage - Battery/charging Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
17 Circuit voltage system fault check datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage
above threshold (0xD110). Refer to the relevant section of the
workshop manual and test the battery and charging
system
Audio Head Unit (AHU) - Low Line
Audio Head Unit (AHU)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Audio Head Unit (AHU). For
additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop
manual.

B11A4- L-Band Antenna - Digital radio L- Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Circuit short to band antenna the digital radio L-band antenna circuit for short
ground circuit short circuit to ground
circuit to ground
B11A4- L-Band Antenna - Digital radio L- Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
15 Circuit short to band antenna the digital radio L-band antenna circuit for short
battery or open circuit short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
B11A5- Band 3 Antenna - Digital radio Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Circuit short to band 3 antenna the digital radio band 3 antenna circuit for short
ground circuit short circuit to ground
circuit to ground
B11A5- Band 3 Antenna - Digital radio Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
15 Circuit short to band 3 antenna the digital radio band 3 antenna circuit for short
battery or open circuit short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
B1A01- Speaker #1 - Circuit Speaker NOTES:

11 short to ground circuit(s) short
circuit to ground
Audio head unit This diagnostic trouble code may be set by a fault
internal failure with any speaker circuit
Use the fade and balance controls to identify the

malfunctioning speaker circuit
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check

the speaker circuits for short circuit to ground
persists, install a new audio head unit
B1A56- Antenna - Circuit AM/FM antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 short to ground amplifier circuit the AM/FM antenna amplifier circuit for short circuit
short circuit to to ground
ground
B1A56- Antenna - Circuit AM/FM antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
15 short to battery or amplifier circuit the AM/FM antenna amplifier circuit for short circuit
open short circuit to to power, open circuit, high resistance
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
B1D55- Antenna#2 - Circuit FM/TMC antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 short to ground amplifier circuit the FM/TMC antenna amplifier circuit for short
short circuit to circuit to ground
ground
B1D55- Antenna#2 - Circuit FM/TMC antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
15 short to battery or amplifier circuit the FM/TMC antenna amplifier circuit for short
open short circuit to circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
U0257- Lost Communication Multi-function Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Front Controls / display power or the multi-function display power and ground
Display Interface ground circuit circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Module - No sub open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
type information high resistance system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Private CAN bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit short the private CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
ground, short resistance
circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
open circuit, system, check the multi-function display for related
high resistance DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Multi-function
display system
fault
U2100- Initial Configuration Audio head unit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Not Complete - No is not configured system, re-configure the audio head unit with the
sub type information correctly latest level software
U2101- Control Module Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Configuration file mismatch system, check and up-date the car configuration
Incompatible - No with vehicle file as necessary
sub type information specification Install a new audio head unit as necessary
Incorrect audio
head unit
installed
U3000- Control Module - Audio head unit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
49 Internal electronic internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure persists, install a new audio head unit
U3006- Control Module Input Audio head unit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
16 Power "A" - Circuit power or ground system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply
voltage below circuit open Voltage (0xDD02). Refer to the electrical circuit
threshold circuit, high diagrams and check the audio head unit power and
resistance ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Battery/charging Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
system fault manual and test the battery and charging system
Automatic Temperature Control Module (ATC)
Automatic Temperature Control Module (ATCM)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Automatic Temperature
Control Module (ATCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and
Testing section in the workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Climate Control System (412-00 Climate Control System - General
Information, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1030- Left Front Seat Heater Front left seat Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
01 - General electrical heater control the front left seat heater control module power and
failure module power ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
or ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit open the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
circuit, high circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
LIN bus circuit the front left heated seat backrest element circuit
short circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
to ground, open circuit, high resistance
short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to power, the front left heated seat cushion element circuit for
open circuit, short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
high circuit, high resistance
Front left the front left heated seat temperature sensor circuit
heated seat for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
backrest open circuit, high resistance
element Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit short clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
circuit to install a new front left seat heater control module
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Front left
heated seat
cushion
element
circuit short
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Front left
heated seat
temperature
sensor circuit
short circuit
to ground,
short circuit
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
Front left seat
heater control
module
internal failure
B1030- Left Front Seat Heater Front left Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
4B - Over temperature heated seat the front left heated seat temperature sensor circuit
temperature for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
sensor circuit open circuit, high resistance
short circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
to ground, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
short circuit install a new front left seat heater control module
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
Front left seat
heater control
module
internal failure
B1030- Left Front Seat Heater Front left seat Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
87 - Missing message heater control the front left seat heater control module power and
module power ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
or ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit open the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
LIN bus circuit clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
to ground,
short circuit
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
Front left seat
heater control
module
internal failure
B1032- Right Front Seat Front right Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
01 Heater - General seat heater the front right seat heater control module power
electrical failure control and ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
module power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
or ground the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
circuit open circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit, high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
resistance the front right heated seat backrest element circuit
LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
short circuit open circuit, high resistance
to ground, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short circuit the front right heated seat cushion element circuit
to power, for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit, open circuit, high resistance
high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
resistance the front right heated seat temperature sensor
Front right circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
heated seat power, open circuit, high resistance
backrest Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
element clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
circuit short install a new front right seat heater control module
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Front right
heated seat
cushion
element
circuit short
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Front right
heated seat
temperature
sensor circuit
short circuit
to ground,
short circuit
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
Front right
seat heater
control
module
internal failure
4B Heater - Over heated seat the front right heated seat temperature sensor
temperature temperature circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
sensor circuit power, open circuit, high resistance
short circuit install a new front right seat heater control module
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
Front right
seat heater
control
module
internal failure
87 Heater - Missing seat heater the front right seat heater control module power
message control and ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
module power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
or ground the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
circuit open circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
resistance clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
LIN bus circuit install a new front right seat heater control module
short circuit
to ground,
short circuit
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
Front right
seat heater
control
module
internal failure
01 Element - General heated seat the front left heated seat backrest element circuit
electrical failure backrest for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
element open circuit, high resistance
circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit to the front left heated seat cushion element circuit for
ground, short short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit to circuit, high resistance
power, open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit, high clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
resistance install a new front left seat heater control module
Front left
heated seat
cushion
element
circuit short
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Front left seat
heater control
module
internal failure
01 Heater Element - heated seat the front right heated seat backrest element circuit
General electrical backrest for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
failure element open circuit, high resistance
circuit to the front right heated seat cushion element circuit
ground, short for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
circuit to open circuit, high resistance
power, open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit, high clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
resistance install a new front right seat heater control module
Front right
heated seat
cushion
element
circuit short
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Front right
seat heater
control
module
internal failure
01 Sensor - General heated seat the front left heated seat temperature sensor circuit
electrical failure temperature for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
sensor circuit open circuit, high resistance
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
Front left seat
heater control
module
internal failure
B103A- Right Front Seat Front right Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
01 Heater Sensor - heated seat the front right heated seat temperature sensor
General electrical temperature circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
failure sensor circuit power, open circuit, high resistance
short circuit install a new front right seat heater control module
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
Front right
seat heater
control
module
internal failure
B1081- Left Temperature Foreign object Check and remove any obstruction in the left
00 Damper Motor - No obstructing temperature blend door
sub type information left Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
temperature the left temperature blend motor circuit for short
blend door circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Left circuit, high resistance
temperature Install a new left temperature blend door as
blend motor necessary
circuit short Install a new left temperature blend motor as
circuit to necessary
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Left
temperature
blend door
damaged
Left
temperature
blend motor
failure
B1081- Left Temperature Left Install a new left temperature blend motor as
49 Damper Motor - temperature necessary
Internal electronic blend motor
failure failure
B1082- Right Temperature Foreign object Check and remove any obstruction in the right
00 Damper Motor - No obstructing temperature blend door
sub type information right Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
temperature the right temperature blend motor circuit for short
Right circuit, high resistance
temperature Install a new right temperature blend door as
circuit short Install a new right temperature blend motor as
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Right
temperature
blend door
damaged
Right
temperature
blend motor
failure
B1082- Right Temperature Right Install a new right temperature blend motor as
49 Damper Motor - temperature necessary
Internal electronic blend motor
failure failure
B1083- Recirculation Damper Foreign object Check and remove any obstruction in the
01 Motor - General obstructing recirculation door
electrical failure recirculation Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
door the recirculation motor circuit for short circuit to
Recirculation ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
motor circuit resistance
short circuit Install a new recirculation door as necessary
to ground, Install a new recirculation motor as necessary
short circuit
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
Recirculation
door damaged
Recirculation
motor failure
B1085- Defroster Damper Foreign object Check and remove any obstruction in the demist
00 Motor - No sub type obstructing distribution door
information demist Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
distribution the demist distribution motor circuit for short circuit
door to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
Demist resistance
distribution Install a new demist distribution door as necessary
motor circuit Install a new demist distribution motor as necessary
short circuit
to ground,
short circuit
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
Demist
distribution
door damaged
Demist
distribution
motor failure
B1085- Defroster Damper Demist Install a new demist distribution motor as necessary
49 Motor - Internal distribution
electronic failure motor failure
B1086- Air Distribution Foreign object Check and remove any obstruction in the face/feet
00 Damper Motor - No obstructing distribution door
sub type information face/feet Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
distribution the face/feet distribution motor circuit for short
door circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Face/feet circuit, high resistance
distribution Install a new face/feet distribution door as
motor circuit necessary
short circuit Install a new face/feet distribution motor as
to ground, necessary
short circuit
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
Face/feet
distribution
door damaged
Face/feet
distribution
motor failure
B1086- Air Distribution Face/feet Install a new face/feet distribution motor as

49 Damper Motor - distribution necessary
Internal electronic motor failure
failure
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Bus off LIN bus circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
88 short circuit the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
to ground, circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
short circuit
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
B1088- LIN Bus "B" - Bus off LIN bus circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
88 short circuit the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
to ground, circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
short circuit
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
B10BE- Solar Sensor - Circuit Sunload Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 short to ground sensor circuit the sunload sensor circuit for short circuit to ground
short circuit
to ground
B11EE- A/C Compressor - Refrigerant Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
01 General electrical solenoid valve the refrigerant solenoid valve circuit for short circuit
failure circuit short to ground, open circuit, high resistance
circuit to
ground, open
circuit, high
resistance
B11F0- Air Intake Damper Recirculation Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Position Sensor - motor position the recirculation motor position sensor circuit for
Circuit short to ground sensor circuit short circuit to ground
short circuit
to ground
B11F0- Air Intake Damper Recirculation Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
15 Position Sensor - motor position the recirculation motor position sensor circuit for
Circuit short to battery sensor circuit short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
or open short circuit
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
B11FF- A/C Refrigerant Insufficient Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
84 Pressure - Signal refrigerant in datalogger test and review Climate control system /
below allowable range system Air conditioning / External ambient temperature. If
Refrigerant the external ambient temperature is < 5°C, this
pressure DTC should be ignored and cleared. If the external
sensor failure ambient temperature shows > 5°C, test the
Automatic refrigerant system using a suitable charging station
temperature Install a new refrigerant pressure sensor as
control necessary
module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
internal failure clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new automatic temperature control module
B11FF- A/C Refrigerant Excessive Test the refrigerant system using a suitable
85 Pressure - Signal refrigerant in charging station
above allowable range system Test the condenser and pipework for damage or
Blockage in restriction
air Test the air conditioning fan for correct operation
conditioning Install a new refrigerant pressure sensor as
system necessary
pipework or Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
condenser clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
Air install a new automatic temperature control module
conditioning
fan
inoperative
Refrigerant
pressure
sensor failure
Automatic
temperature
control
module
internal failure
B12B2- AUX Heater Coolant Auxiliary Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Diverter Valve - Circuit heater coolant the auxiliary heater coolant diverter valve circuit for
short to ground diverter valve short circuit to ground
circuit short
circuit to
ground
B13C2- Front Humidity Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
86 Windscreen/Windshield sensor power the humidity sensor power and ground circuits for
Misting Sensor - or ground open circuit, high resistance
Signal invalid circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit, high the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
resistance circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
LIN bus circuit Install a new humidity sensor
short circuit
to ground,
short circuit
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
Humidity
sensor failure
Missing message circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short circuit
to ground,
short circuit
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
Humidity
sensor failure
Component internal circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
failure circuit, high the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
short circuit
to ground,
short circuit
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
Humidity
sensor failure
B1A59- Sensor 5 Volt Supply - Refrigerant Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Circuit short to ground pressure the refrigerant pressure sensor supply circuit for
sensor supply short circuit to ground
circuit to the recirculation motor position sensor supply circuit
ground for short circuit to ground
Recirculation
motor position
sensor supply
circuit short
circuit to
ground
B1A59- Sensor 5 Volt Supply - Refrigerant Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 Circuit open pressure the refrigerant pressure sensor supply circuit for
sensor supply open circuit, high resistance
circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit, high the recirculation motor position sensor supply circuit
resistance for open circuit, high resistance
Recirculation
motor position
sensor supply
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
B1A60- Pollution Sensor - Pollution Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Hydrocarbon - Circuit sensor the pollution sensor (hydrocarbon) signal circuit for
short to ground (hydrocarbon) short circuit to ground
signal circuit
short circuit
to ground
B1A61- Cabin Temperature In-vehicle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Sensor - Circuit short temperature the in-vehicle temperature sensor signal circuit for
to ground sensor signal short circuit to ground
circuit short
circuit to
ground
B1A61- Cabin Temperature In-vehicle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
15 Sensor - Circuit short temperature the in-vehicle temperature sensor signal circuit for
to battery or open sensor signal short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
B1A63- Right Solar Sensor - Sunload Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Circuit short to ground sensor right the sunload sensor right signal circuit for short
signal circuit circuit to ground
short circuit
to ground
B1A64- Left Solar Sensor - Sunload Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Circuit short to ground sensor left the sunload sensor left signal circuit for short circuit
signal circuit to ground
short circuit
to ground
B1A67- Sensor Ground - In-vehicle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 Circuit open temperature the in-vehicle temperature sensor earth circuit for
sensor earth open circuit, high resistance
circuit, high the sunload sensor earth circuit for open circuit,
resistance high resistance
Sunload Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
sensor earth the refrigerant pressure sensor earth circuit for
circuit open open circuit, high resistance
circuit, high
resistance
Refrigerant
pressure
sensor earth
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
B1A69- Humidity Sensor - Humidity Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Circuit short to ground sensor signal the humidity sensor signal circuit for short circuit to
circuit short ground
circuit to
ground
B1A69- Humidity Sensor - Humidity Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
15 Circuit short to battery sensor signal the humidity sensor signal circuit for short circuit to
or open circuit short power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
B1B62- Pollution Sensor - NOx Pollution Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 - Circuit short to sensor (NOx) the pollution sensor (NOx) signal circuit for short
ground signal circuit circuit to ground
short circuit
to ground
B1B71- Evaporator Evaporator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Temperature Sensor - temperature the evaporator temperature sensor signal circuit for
Circuit short to ground sensor signal short circuit to ground
circuit short
circuit to
ground
B1B71- Evaporator Evaporator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
15 Temperature Sensor - temperature the evaporator temperature sensor signal circuit for
Circuit short to battery sensor signal short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
or open circuit short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
B1B72- LIN Bus #1 Power LIN bus A Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Supply Circuit - Circuit circuit short the LIN bus A circuit for short circuit to ground
short to ground circuit to
ground
B1B73- LIN Bus #2 Power LIN bus B Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Supply Circuit - Circuit circuit short the LIN bus B circuit for short circuit to ground
short to ground circuit to
ground
B1B7B- Left Rear Air Blend Foreign object Check and remove any obstruction in the rear
00 Actuator - No sub type obstructing temperature blend door
information rear Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
temperature the rear temperature blend motor circuit for short
Rear circuit, high resistance
temperature Install a new rear temperature blend door as
circuit short Install a new rear temperature blend motor as
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Rear
temperature
blend door
damaged
Rear
temperature
blend motor
failure
B1B7B- Left Rear Air Blend Rear Install a new rear temperature blend motor as
49 Actuator - Internal temperature necessary
electronic failure blend motor
failure
B1B7D- Rear Air Distribution Foreign object Check and remove any obstruction in rear
00 Actuator - No sub type obstructing distribution door
information rear Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
distribution the rear distribution motor circuit for short circuit to
door ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
Rear resistance
distribution Install a new rear distribution door as necessary
motor circuit Install a new rear distribution motor as necessary
short circuit
to ground,
short circuit
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
Rear
distribution
door damaged
Rear
distribution
motor failure
B1B7D- Rear Air Distribution Rear Install a new rear distribution motor as necessary
49 Actuator - Internal distribution
electronic failure motor failure
B1B81- Rear Evaporator Rear Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Temperature Sensor - evaporator the rear evaporator temperature sensor circuit for
Circuit short to ground temperature short circuit to ground
sensor circuit
short circuit
to ground
B1B81- Rear Evaporator Rear Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
15 Temperature Sensor - evaporator the rear evaporator temperature sensor circuit for
Circuit short to battery temperature short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
or open sensor circuit
short circuit
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
B1C0A- Rear Control panel - Rear Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
88 Bus off integrated the rear integrated control panel power and ground
control panel circuits for open circuit, high resistance
power or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground circuit the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
open circuit, circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
resistance check the rear integrated control panel for related
LIN bus circuit DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
short circuit install a new rear temperature blend motor
to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
open circuit, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
high install a new rear face/feet motor
Rear clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
integrated install a new automatic temperature control module
control panel
fault
Rear
temperature
blend motor
internal failure
Rear face/feet
motor internal
failure
Automatic
temperature
control
module
internal failure
C1B14- Sensor Supply Voltage Recirculation Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 A - Circuit open motor position the recirculation motor position sensor supply circuit
sensor supply for short circuit to ground
circuit to the recirculation motor position sensor signal circuit
ground for open circuit, high resistance
Recirculation
motor position
sensor signal
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
C1B15- Sensor Supply Voltage Recirculation Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 B - Circuit open motor position the recirculation motor position sensor ground
sensor ground circuit for open circuit, high resistance
circuit, high the evaporator position sensor ground circuit for
resistance open circuit, high resistance
Evaporator
temperature
sensor ground
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
P0530- A/C Refrigerant Refrigerant Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Pressure Sensor A pressure the refrigerant pressure sensor signal circuit for
Circuit - Circuit short sensor signal short circuit to ground
to ground circuit short
circuit to
ground
P0530- A/C Refrigerant Refrigerant Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
15 Pressure Sensor A pressure the refrigerant pressure sensor signal circuit for
Circuit - Circuit short sensor signal short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
to battery or open circuit short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
P0645- A/C Clutch Relay Air Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Control Circuit - conditioning the air conditioning compressor clutch relay circuit
Circuit short to ground compressor for short circuit to ground
clutch relay
circuit short
circuit to
ground
U0010- Medium Speed CAN Medium speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
88 Communication Bus - CAN bus perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Bus off circuit short electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium
circuit to speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
ground, short short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
U0140- Lost Communication Central Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
87 With Body Control junction box the central junction box power and ground circuits
Module - Missing power or for open circuit, high resistance
message ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
open circuit, perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
high electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium
resistance speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
Medium speed short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit short check the central junction box for related DTCs and
circuit to refer to the relevant DTC index
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Central
junction box
system fault
U0166- Lost Communication Fuel fired Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
87 With Auxiliary Heater booster heater the fuel fired booster heater power and ground
Control Module - power or circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Missing message ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit short check the fuel fired booster heater for related DTCs
circuit to and refer to the relevant DTC index
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Fuel fired
booster heater
system fault
U0256- Lost Communication Integrated Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
87 With Front Controls control panel the integrated control panel power and ground
Interface Module "A" - power or circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Missing message ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit short check the integrated control panel for related DTCs
circuit to and refer to the relevant DTC index
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Integrated
control panel
fault
U0300- Internal Control Automatic Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Module Software temperature re-configure the automatic temperature control
Incompatibility - No control module with the latest level software
sub type information module is not
configured
correctly
U0422- Invalid Data Received Missing/invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
86 From Body Control data from the check the central junction box for related DTCs and
Module - Signal invalid central refer to the relevant DTC index
junction box
86 From Auxiliary Heater data from the check the fuel fired booster heater for related DTCs
Control Module - fuel fired and refer to the relevant DTC index
Signal invalid booster heater
86 From Front Controls data from the check the integrated control panel for related DTCs
Interface Module "A" - integrated and refer to the relevant DTC index
Signal invalid control panel
U1A14- CAN Initialisation Medium speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
49 failure - Internal CAN bus perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
electronic failure circuit short electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium
circuit to Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
power, open clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
circuit, high install a new automatic temperature control module
resistance
Automatic
temperature
control
module
internal failure
U3000- Control Module - Not Automatic Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
55 configured temperature re-configure the automatic temperature control
control module with the latest level software
module is not
configured
correctly
U3000- Control Module - Missing/invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
87 Missing message data from the check the instrument cluster for related DTCs and
instrument refer to the relevant DTC index
cluster Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Automatic clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
temperature install a new automatic temperature control module
control
module
internal failure
U3002- Vehicle Identification Automatic Install the original or a new automatic temperature
81 Number - Invalid serial temperature control module as necessary
data received control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
module perform routine - Learn VIN (0x0404)
previously
installed on
another
vehicle
New
automatic
temperature
control
module
installed and
VIN not yet
programmed
Published: 05-Nov-2013
Blindspot Monitoring Control Module (BMCM) - Left/Right
Blindspot Monitoring Control Module (BMCM) - Left/Right
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Blindspot Monitoring Control
Module (BMCM) - Left/Right. For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and

B11C9- Driver Display Status Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 LED - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit the door mirror status lamp circuit for short circuit
ground reference to ground
SYSTEM_STATUS_LED
Door mirror
status lamp
circuit short
circuit to ground
B11C9- Driver Display Status Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
15 LED - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit the door mirror status lamp circuit for short circuit
battery or open reference to power, open circuit, high resistance
SYSTEM_STATUS_LED
Door mirror
status lamp
circuit short
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
B11D6- Driver Display Alert Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 LED - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit the door mirror warning lamp circuit for short
ground reference circuit to ground
WARNING_ALERT_LED
Door mirror
warning lamp
circuit short
circuit to ground
B11D6- Driver Display Alert Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
15 LED - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit the door mirror warning lamp circuit for short
battery or open reference circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
WARNING_ALERT_LED
Door mirror
warning lamp
circuit short
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
U0010- Medium Speed CAN Missing message Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
87 Communication Bus - from another system, check the snapshot data to determine the
Missing message control module missing message source control module. Check
via the medium the relevant control module for related DTCs and
speed CAN bus refer to the relevant DTC index
U0010- Medium Speed CAN Medium speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
88 Communication Bus - CAN bus circuit system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Bus off short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground, short the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit
circuit to power, to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
open circuit, high high resistance
resistance
U0300- Internal Control Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Module Software file mismatch system, check and up-date the car configuration
Incompatibility - No with vehicle file as necessary
sub type information specification Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Blindspot system, re-configure the blindspot monitoring
monitoring control module with the latest level software
control module is Install a new blindspot monitoring control module
not configured as necessary
correctly
Incorrect
blindspot
monitoring
control module
installed
U1000- Solid State Driver Blindspot Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Protection Actived - monitoring system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Driver Disabled - No control module persists, install a new blindspot monitoring control
sub type information internal failure module
U1A00- Private Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check

88 Communication NOTE: Circuit the other side blindspot monitoring control module
Network - Bus off reference power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
PRIVATE_CAN_H / resistance
PRIVATE_CAN_L Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the private CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
Other side ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
blindspot resistance
monitoring
control module
power or ground
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
Private CAN bus
circuit short
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
U2100- Initial Configuration Blindspot Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

00 Not Complete - No monitoring system, re-configure the blindspot monitoring
sub type information control module is control module with the latest level software
not configured
correctly
00 Configuration file mismatch system, check and up-date the car configuration
Incompatible - No with vehicle file as necessary
sub type information specification
U2300- Central Configuration Blindspot Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

45 - Program memory monitoring system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure control module persists, install a new blindspot monitoring control
internal failure module

48 - Supervision monitoring system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
software failure control module persists, install a new blindspot monitoring control

96 - Component internal monitoring system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
U3000- Control Module - Blindspot Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

44 Data memory failure monitoring system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
control module persists, install a new blindspot monitoring control

45 Program memory monitoring system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault

46 Calibration/parameter monitoring system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
memory failure control module persists, install a new blindspot monitoring control

48 Supervision software monitoring system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault

49 Internal electronic monitoring system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
U3000- Control Module - Blindspot

78 Alignment or monitoring NOTE: If the DTC is cleared, a test drive of at least
adjustment incorrect control module 40 minutes duration is required in order to confirm that
incorrectly the fault is rectified (DTC will not re-trigger prior to this
mounted interval)
Blindspot
monitoring Check the blindspot monitoring control module for
control module correct mounting
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
persists, install a new blindspot monitoring control
module

96 Component internal monitoring system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Central Junction Box (CJB).
For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the
workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network,
Diagnosis and Testing).

B1009- Ignition Authorization Central junction box is Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 - Not programmed not configured correctly system, re-configure the central junction
box with the latest level software
B1009- Ignition Authorization Central junction box is

62 - Signal compare not configured correctly NOTE: This DTC is only likely to occur
failure Medium speed CAN bus following component replacement applications
circuit short circuit to failing prior to completion.
power, open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
high resistance system, re-configure the central junction
system, perform a CAN network integrity
test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the medium speed CAN bus
circuit for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
B1009- Ignition Authorization Instrument cluster fault

63 - Circuit/component Medium speed CAN bus NOTE: Only diagnose this DTC if the
protection time-out circuit short circuit to customer has reporting a starting fault.
high resistance system, check the instrument cluster for
index
resistance
B1009- Ignition Authorization Instrument cluster fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
81 - Invalid serial data Medium speed CAN bus system, check the instrument cluster for
received circuit short circuit to related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
ground, short circuit to index
high resistance system, perform a CAN network integrity
resistance
B100D- Column Lock Electric steering column Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 Authorization - Not lock is not configured system, re-configure the electric steering
programmed correctly column lock with the latest level software
B100D- Column Lock Engine system fault

64 Authorization - Signal Anti-lock brake system NOTE: Prior to clearing this DTC, carry out
plausibility failure fault the Vehicle Functional Reset application using the
High speed CAN bus manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
ground, short circuit to Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
power, open circuit, system, check the engine control module
high resistance for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index
control module for related DTCs and refer
to the relevant DTC index
and check the high speed CAN bus circuit
B100D- Column Lock Instrument cluster fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
67 Authorization - Signal High speed CAN bus system, check the instrument cluster for
incorrect after event circuit short circuit to related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
ground, short circuit to index
high resistance system, perform a CAN network integrity
B100D- Column Lock Encrypted data NOTES:

81 Authorization - exchange between
Invalid serial data electric steering column
received lock control module and This DTC is only likely to occur following
the central junction box component replacement applications failing prior to
does not match completion.
High speed CAN bus
ground, short circuit to Prior to clearing this DTC, carry out the
power, open circuit, Vehicle Functional Reset application using the
high resistance manufacturer approved diagnostic system.

system, re-configure the central junction
B100D- Column Lock High speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
87 Authorization - circuit short circuit to system, perform a CAN network integrity
Missing message ground, short circuit to test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
power, open circuit, and check the high speed CAN bus circuit
high resistance for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
Electric steering column power, open circuit, high resistance
lock fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Instrument cluster fault system, check the electric steering column
lock control module for related DTCs and
refer to the relevant DTC index
system, check the instrument cluster for
index
B100D- Column Lock Parked position of the

96 Authorization - road wheels exerting a NOTE: Prior to clearing this DTC, carry out
Component internal torque on the steering the Vehicle Functional Reset application using the
failure column, preventing the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
electric steering column
lock mechanism from Turn the steering wheel to ensure that the
moving freely electric steering column lock mechanism is
Electric steering column free to move. Using the manufacturer
lock control module approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs
power or ground circuit and retest
resistance check the electric steering column lock
Electric steering column control module power and ground circuits
lock control module for open circuit, high resistance
system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new electric steering
column lock control module
B1024- Start Control Unit - Central junction box Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
87 Missing message internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new central junction
box
B1026- Steering Column Lock Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference check the electric steering column lock
ground POWER circuit for short circuit to ground
Electric steering column

lock circuit short circuit
to ground
B102B- Passive Key - Signal Encrypted data Re-synchronise ID by reconfiguring the

67 incorrect after event exchange between central junction box as a new module. Re-
keyless vehicle module synchronise ID by reconfiguring the keyless
and central junction vehicle module as a new module
box does not match Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Keyless vehicle module check the keyless vehicle module power and
power or ground circuit ground circuits for open circuit, high
resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Keyless vehicle system system, check the keyless vehicle module
fault for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
Medium speed CAN bus DTC index
circuit short circuit to Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ground, short circuit to system, perform a CAN network integrity
power, open circuit, test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
high resistance and check the medium speed CAN bus
resistance
B102B- Passive Key - Missing Smart key not in

87 message vehicle when stop/start NOTE: The action below is only required if
switch operated this DTC and DTC B1B01-87 have been stored, or
Interference from vehicle start issue has been reported.
spurious RF signal
Smart key battery low Confirm placement of key within vehicle
Smart key internal Check vehicle surroundings for possible
failure sources of interference, move vehicle and
Immobilizer antenna retest
unit LIN bus circuit Install a new smart key battery
short circuit to ground, Test the operation of the other smart
short circuit to power, key(s)
resistance check the immobilizer antenna unit LIN bus
Keyless vehicle module circuit for short circuit to ground, short
power or ground circuit circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
RF receiver power or check the keyless vehicle module power and
ground circuit open ground circuits for open circuit, high
circuit, high resistance resistance
Keyless vehicle system Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
fault check the RF receiver power and ground
Passive antenna circuits for open circuit, high resistance
circuit(s) short circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
to ground, short circuit system, check the keyless vehicle module
to power, open circuit, for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
high resistance DTC index
Medium speed CAN bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit short circuit to check the passive antenna circuits for short
ground, short circuit to circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
power, open circuit, open circuit, high resistance
high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
resistance
B1046- Front Fog Lamp Front fog lamp switch

23 Control Switch - stuck active NOTE: This DTC will set if the switch is active
Signal stuck low Front fog lamp switch for more than 60 seconds.
ground Test the operation of the front fog lamp
switch
check the front fog lamp switch circuit for
short circuit to ground
B1051- Front Washer Switch Front washer pump

23 - Signal stuck low switch stuck active NOTE: This DTC will set if the switch is active
Front washer pump for more than 60 seconds.
switch circuit short
circuit to ground Test the operation of the front washer
pump switch
check the front washer pump switch circuit
for short circuit to ground
B1052- Rear Washer Switch - Rear washer pump

23 Signal stuck low switch stuck active NOTE: This DTC will set if the switch is active
Rear washer pump for more than 60 seconds.
circuit to ground Test the operation of the rear washer pump
switch
check the rear washer pump switch circuit
B108B- Start Button Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 "A" - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference check the stop/start switch circuit 1 for
ground SW1 short circuit to ground
Stop/start switch circuit

1 short circuit to
ground
12 "A" - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference check the stop/start switch circuit 1 for
battery SW1 short circuit to power

1 short circuit to power
13 "A" - Circuit open NOTE: Circuit reference check the stop/start switch circuit 1 for
SW1 open circuit, high resistance

1 open circuit, high
resistance
B108B- Start Button Circuit

23 "A" - Signal stuck low NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC will set if the switch is active
SW1 for more than 30 seconds.
Stop/start switch stuck Test the operation of the stop/start switch

active Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Stop/start switch circuit check the stop/start switch circuit 1 for
1 short circuit to short circuit to ground
ground
B108C- Start Button Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 "B" - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference check the stop/start switch circuit 2 for
ground SW2 short circuit to ground

2 short circuit to
ground
12 "B" - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference check the stop/start switch circuit 2 for
battery SW2 short circuit to power

2 short circuit to power
13 "B" - Circuit open NOTE: Circuit reference check the stop/start switch circuit 2 for
SW2 open circuit, high resistance

2 open circuit, high
resistance
B108C- Start Button Circuit

23 "B" - Signal stuck low NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC will set if the switch is active
SW2 for more than 30 seconds.
Stop/start switch stuck Test the operation of the stop/start switch

active Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Stop/start switch circuit check the stop/start switch circuit 2 for
2 short circuit to short circuit to ground
ground
B1095- Wiper On/Off Relay - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference check the wiper on/off relay circuit for short
ground FR WIPER ON/OFF circuit to ground
Wiper on/off relay

ground
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference check the wiper on/off relay circuit for short
battery FR WIPER ON/OFF circuit to power
Wiper on/off relay

power
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit reference check the wiper on/off relay circuit for open
FR WIPER ON/OFF circuit, high resistance
Wiper on/off relay

circuit open circuit,
high resistance
B1096- Wiper High/Low Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference check the wiper fast/slow relay circuit for
ground FR WIPER SLOW/FAST short circuit to ground
Wiper fast/slow relay
ground
12 - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference check the wiper fast/slow relay circuit for
battery FR WIPER SLOW/FAST short circuit to power

power
13 - Circuit open NOTE: Circuit reference check the wiper fast/slow relay circuit for
FR WIPER SLOW/FAST open circuit, high resistance

high resistance
B1097- Heated Windshield Heated windshield relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Relay - Circuit short circuit short circuit to check the heated windshield relay circuit for
to ground ground short circuit to ground
12 Relay - Circuit short circuit short circuit to check the heated windshield relay circuit for
to battery power short circuit to power
13 Relay - Circuit open circuit open circuit, check the heated windshield relay circuit for
high resistance open circuit, high resistance
B109E- Remote Keyless Entry Keyless vehicle module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 - Not programmed not configured correctly system, re-configure the keyless vehicle
module with the latest level software
B10A2- Crash Input - No Restraints system fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
31 signal Crash signal circuit system, check the restraints control module
short circuit to ground, for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
short circuit to power, DTC index
resistance check the crash signal circuit for short
circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
B10A2- Crash Input - Signal Restraints system fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
38 frequency incorrect Crash signal circuit system, check the restraints control module
short circuit to ground, for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
short circuit to power, DTC index
resistance check the crash signal circuit for short
circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
B10AB- Remote Keyless Entry Keyless vehicle module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 Synchronization - Not not configured correctly system, re-configure the keyless vehicle
programmed module with the latest level software
B10AD- Rain Sensor - Missing Rain/light sensor power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
87 message or ground circuit open check the rain/light sensor power and
circuit, high resistance ground circuits for open circuit, high
LIN bus circuit short resistance
circuit to ground, short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to power, open check the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to
circuit, high resistance ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
Rain/light sensor high resistance
fault persists, install a new rain/light sensor
B10AD- Rain Sensor - Rain/light sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
96 Component internal internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
failure fault persists, install a new rain/light sensor
B10C0- Fuel Pump Power Fuel pump power

53 Supply - Deactivated supply deactivated NOTE: This DTC indicates that the fuel pump
has been disabled diagnostically to protect the in-
tank fuel pump from dry running following
replacement of the fuel tank or replacement of the
central junction box.
Ensure there is sufficient fuel in the fuel

tank to submerge the in-tank fuel pump
(minimum of 10 litres). Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
re-configure the central junction box with
the latest level software
B10E5- PCM Wake-Up Signal Engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 - Circuit short to wake-up signal circuit check the engine control module wake-up
ground short circuit to ground signal circuit for short circuit to ground
B10F2- Sunroof Control - Roof opening panel Test the roof opening panel for smooth
4B Over temperature movement restricted by operation. If the fault persists, install a new
debris or damage roof opening panel control module
Roof opening panel Install a new roof opening panel motor as
temperature sensor not necessary
calibrated/defective
B10F2- Sunroof Control - Roof opening panel Remove the roof opening panel motor and
74 Actuator slipping control motor slipping inspect the cables and mechanism. Test the
due to mechanical roof opening panel for smooth operation
failure and obstructions that would cause the
motor to slip. Install a new roof opening
panel motor as necessary
B10F2- Sunroof Control - No Roof opening panel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
93 operation control module power check the roof opening panel control module
or ground circuit open power and ground circuits for open circuit,
circuit, high resistance high resistance
LIN bus 3 circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to ground, short check the LIN bus 3 circuit for short circuit
circuit to power, open to ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit, high resistance circuit, high resistance
B10F2- Sunroof Control - Roof opening panel

9A Component or motor time out NOTE: This DTC may be set if the roof
system operating opening panel is operated excessively.
conditions
Allow the roof opening panel motor to cool.
system, clear the DTCs and retest
B10F3- Left front position Front left side lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 light - Circuit short to circuit short circuit to check the front left side lamp circuit for
ground ground short circuit to ground
B10F4- Right front position Front right side lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 light - Circuit short to circuit short circuit to check the front right side lamp circuit for
B10F8- Accessory Socket 'A' Accessory relay A Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Relay - Circuit short circuit short circuit to check the accessory relay A circuit for short
to ground ground circuit to ground
12 Relay - Circuit short circuit short circuit to check the accessory relay A circuit for short
to battery power circuit to power
13 Relay - Circuit open circuit open circuit, check the accessory relay A circuit for open
high resistance circuit, high resistance
B10F9- Accessory Socket 'B' Accessory relay B Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Relay - Circuit short circuit short circuit to check the accessory relay B circuit for short
to ground ground circuit to ground
12 Relay - Circuit short circuit short circuit to check the accessory relay B circuit for short
to battery power circuit to power
13 Relay - Circuit open circuit open circuit, check the accessory relay B circuit for open
B1102- Trailer Stop Lamp - Trailer stop lamp circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Circuit short to short circuit to ground check the trailer stop lamp circuit for short
ground circuit to ground
B1118- Left Rear Sidemarker Front left side marker Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 - Circuit short to lamp circuit short check the front left side marker lamp circuit
ground circuit to ground for short circuit to ground
Front right side marker Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
lamp circuit short check the front right side marker lamp
circuit to ground circuit for short circuit to ground
B112B- Steering Wheel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

87 Module - Missing NOTE: Circuit reference check the steering wheel left switchpack
message LIN 1 power and ground circuits for open circuit,
high resistance
Steering wheel left Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
switchpack power or check the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to
ground circuit open ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
LIN bus circuit short Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit to ground, short system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
circuit to power, open fault persists, install a new steering wheel
circuit, high resistance left switchpack
Steering wheel left
switchpack internal
failure
B112C- Interior Motion Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

87 Sensor - Missing NOTE: Circuit reference check the volumetric sensor power and
message BBS LIN ground circuits for open circuit, high
resistance
Volumetric sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
power or ground circuit check the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to
open circuit, high ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
circuit to power, open fault persists, install a new volumetric
circuit, high resistance sensor
Volumetric sensor
internal failure
B112C- Interior Motion Volumetric sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
96 Sensor - Component internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
internal failure fault persists, install a new volumetric
sensor
B113E- External Boot/Trunk Upper tailgate release

23 Release Switch - switch stuck active NOTE: This DTC will set if the switch is active
Signal stuck low Upper tailgate release for more than 60 seconds.
circuit to ground Test the operation of the upper tailgate
release switch
check the upper tailgate release switch
circuit for short circuit to ground
B1140- Engine Crank Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 Authorization - Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference check the engine crank signal circuit for
short to ground CRANK short circuit to ground
Engine crank signal

ground
B1140- Engine Crank Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

15 Authorization - Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference check the engine crank signal circuit for
short to battery or CRANK short circuit to power, open circuit, high
open resistance
Engine crank signal
power, open circuit,
high resistance
B1146- Passive Sounder Passive sounder circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Supply - Circuit short short circuit to ground check the passive sounder circuit for short
to ground circuit to ground
B1146- Passive Sounder Passive sounder circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Supply - Circuit short short circuit to power, check the passive sounder circuit for short
to battery or open open circuit, high circuit to power, open circuit, high
B1182- Tire Pressure Diagnostic test to verify
51 Monitoring System - reception of all tire low NOTE: If additional tire pressure monitoring
Not programmed pressure sensors has system related DTCs are also set, perform the
failed relevant corrective action(s) first.

system, perform routine - Tire Pressure
Monitor Confirmation Application
B123A- Left Front Turn Front left turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Indicator - Circuit indicator circuit short check the front left turn signal indicator
short to ground circuit to ground circuit for short circuit to ground
B123A- Left Front Turn Front left turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Indicator - Circuit indicator circuit short check the front left turn signal indicator
short to battery or circuit to power, open circuit for short circuit to power, open
open circuit, high resistance circuit, high resistance
B123B- Right Front Turn Front right turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Indicator - Circuit indicator circuit short check the front right turn signal indicator
B123B- Right Front Turn Front right turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Indicator - Circuit indicator circuit short check the front right turn signal indicator
B1247- Left Rear Turn Rear left turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Indicator - Circuit indicator circuit short check the rear left turn signal indicator
B1247- Left Rear Turn Rear left turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Indicator - Circuit indicator circuit short check the rear left turn signal indicator
B1248- Right Rear Turn Rear right turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Indicator - Circuit indicator circuit short check the rear right turn signal indicator
B1248- Right Rear Turn Rear right turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Indicator - Circuit indicator circuit short check the rear right turn signal indicator
B124A- Right Daytime Right daytime running Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Running Light - light circuit short circuit check the right daytime running light circuit
Circuit short to to ground for short circuit to ground
ground
B124B- Left Daytime Running Left daytime running Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Light - Circuit short light circuit short circuit check the left daytime running light circuit
to ground to ground for short circuit to ground
B1298- Steering Column Steering column adjust Test the operation of the steering column
73 Adjust Up Switch - switch internal failure - adjust switch
Actuator stuck closed Tilt up switch stuck
active
B1299- Steering Column Steering column adjust Test the operation of the steering column
73 Adjust Down Switch - switch internal failure - adjust switch
Actuator stuck closed Tilt down switch stuck
active
B12A1- Steering Column Steering column adjust Test the operation of the steering column
73 Adjust Out Switch - switch internal failure - adjust switch
Actuator stuck closed Reach out switch stuck
active
B12A2- Steering Column Steering column adjust Test the operation of the steering column
73 Adjust In Switch - switch internal failure - adjust switch
Actuator stuck closed Reach in switch stuck
active
B12A3- Steering Column Steering column adjust Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Adjust Motor Drive A motor drive A circuit check the steering column adjust motor
- Circuit short to short circuit to ground drive A circuit for short circuit to ground
ground
- Circuit short to short circuit to power drive A circuit for short circuit to power
battery
- Circuit short to short circuit to power, drive A circuit for short circuit to power,
battery or open open circuit, high open circuit, high resistance
resistance
11 Adjust Motor Drive B motor drive B circuit check the steering column adjust motor
- Circuit short to short circuit to ground drive B circuit for short circuit to ground
ground
- Circuit short to short circuit to power drive B circuit for short circuit to power
battery
- Circuit short to short circuit to power, drive B circuit for short circuit to power,
battery or open open circuit, high open circuit, high resistance
resistance
B12CB- Start/Stop "Eco- ECO switch stuck active Test the operation of the ECO switch
23 Start" Enable Button ECO switch circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
- Signal stuck low circuit to ground check the ECO switch circuit for short circuit
to ground
B12E8- Liftgate/Tailgate Lower tailgate release

23 Control/Release switch stuck active NOTE: This DTC will set if the switch is active
Switch - Signal stuck Lower tailgate release for more than 60 seconds.
low switch circuit short
circuit to ground Test the operation of the lower tailgate
release switch
check the lower tailgate release switch
B12EE- Tailgate/Trunk Upper tailgate release Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Release - Circuit actuator circuit short check the upper tailgate release actuator
B12EE- Tailgate/Trunk Upper tailgate release Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Release - Circuit actuator circuit short check the upper tailgate release actuator
B12F3- Secondary Tailgate Lower tailgate release Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Release - Circuit actuators circuit short check the lower tailgate release actuators
B12F3- Secondary Tailgate Lower tailgate release Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Release - Circuit actuators circuit short check the lower tailgate release actuators
B12F4- Vehicle Speed Output Accessory road speed Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
12 - Circuit short to signal circuit short check the accessory road speed signal
battery circuit to power circuit for short circuit to power
B12F5- Fridge Relay Control Fridge relay circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
12 - Circuit short to short circuit to power check the fridge relay circuit for short
B130B- Right Rear Fog Lamp Rear right fog lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 - Circuit short to circuit short circuit to check the rear right fog lamp circuit for
B130B- Right Rear Fog Lamp Rear right fog lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 - Circuit short to circuit short circuit to check the rear right fog lamp circuit for
battery or open power, open circuit, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
high resistance resistance
B130E- Left Rear Fog Lamp - Rear left fog lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Circuit short to circuit short circuit to check the rear left fog lamp circuit for short
ground ground circuit to ground
B130E- Left Rear Fog Lamp - Rear left fog lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Circuit short to circuit short circuit to check the rear left fog lamp circuit for short
battery or open power, open circuit, circuit to power, open circuit, high
B1311- Clock Module - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
87 Missing message NOTE: Circuit reference check the clock power and ground circuits
LIN1 for open circuit, high resistance
Clock power or ground check the clock LIN bus circuit for short
circuit open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
Clock LIN bus circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short circuit to ground, system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
short circuit to power, fault persists, install a new clock
open circuit, high
resistance
Clock internal failure
B134E- Switch Illumination Switch illumination Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Adjustment Control - adjustment circuit short check the switch illumination adjustment
Circuit short to circuit to ground circuit for short circuit to ground
ground
12 Adjustment Control - adjustment circuit short check the switch illumination adjustment
Circuit short to circuit to power circuit for short circuit to power
battery
13 Adjustment Control - adjustment circuit open check the switch illumination adjustment
Circuit open circuit, high resistance circuit for open circuit, high resistance
B134F- Headlamp Flash Headlamp flash switch

23 Switch - Signal stuck circuit short circuit to NOTE: This DTC will set if the switch is active
low ground for more than 60 seconds.
Headlamp flash switch
stuck active Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the headlamp flash switch circuit for
Test the operation of the headlamp flash
switch
B136A- Heated Washer Heated washer jet Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Jet/Nozzle Output circuit short circuit to check the heated washer jet circuit for short
Control - Circuit short ground circuit to ground
to ground
12 Jet/Nozzle Output circuit short circuit to check the heated washer jet circuit for short
Control - Circuit short power circuit to power
to battery
13 Jet/Nozzle Output circuit open circuit, check the heated washer jet circuit for open
Control - Circuit open high resistance circuit, high resistance
B136B- Suspension Control Air suspension control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Module Wake-up module wake-up signal check the air suspension control module
Signal - Circuit short circuit short circuit to wake-up signal circuit for short circuit to
to ground ground ground
B136B- Suspension Control Air suspension control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Module Wake-up module wake-up signal check the air suspension control module
Signal - Circuit short circuit short circuit to wake-up signal circuit for short circuit to
to battery or open power, open circuit, power, open circuit, high resistance
high resistance
B137F- Steering Wheel Left Steering wheel left Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
16 Switch Pack - Circuit switchpack internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
voltage below failure fault persists, install a new steering wheel
threshold left switchpack
voltage above failure fault persists, install a new steering wheel
49 Switch Pack - switchpack internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
Internal electronic failure fault persists, install a new steering wheel
failure left switchpack
B1380- Steering Wheel Right Steering wheel left Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
voltage below failure fault persists, install a new steering wheel
voltage above failure fault persists, install a new steering wheel
49 Switch Pack - switchpack internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
Internal electronic failure fault persists, install a new steering wheel
failure left switchpack
B13BD- Steering Wheel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

87 Heater Module - NOTE: Circuit reference check the steering wheel heater control
Missing message LIN 1 module power and ground circuits for open
Steering wheel heater Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
control module power check the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to
or ground circuit open ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
circuit to power, open fault persists, install a new steering wheel
circuit, high resistance heater control module
Steering wheel heater
control module internal
failure
B1A75- Fuel sender No.1 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference check the fuel level sensor A circuit for
ground ACTIVE short circuit to ground
Fuel level sensor A

ground
15 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference check the fuel level sensor A circuit for
battery or open ACTIVE short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
Fuel level sensor A
high resistance
1C Circuit voltage out of NOTE: Circuit reference check the fuel level sensor A circuit for
range ACTIVE short circuit to ground, short circuit to
Fuel level sensor A
high resistance
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference check the fuel level sensor B circuit for
ground PASSIVE short circuit to ground
Fuel level sensor B

ground
15 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference check the fuel level sensor B circuit for
battery or open PASSIVE short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
Fuel level sensor B
high resistance
1C Circuit voltage out of NOTE: Circuit reference check the fuel level sensor B circuit for
range PASSIVE short circuit to ground, short circuit to
Fuel level sensor B
high resistance
B1A84- Car Configuration Central junction box Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 Data - Not not configured correctly system, re-configure the central junction
programmed box with the latest level software
B1A85- Ambient Light Sensor Rain/light sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
96 - Component internal internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
failure fault persists, install a new rain/light sensor
B1A91- Speed/Position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

31 Sensor A - No signal NOTE: Circuit reference check the roof opening panel control module
LIN 3 power and ground circuits for open circuit,
high resistance
Roof opening panel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to ground, short system, perform routine - Sunroof
circuit to power, open Calibration (0x2039). Clear the DTCs and
circuit, high resistance retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Roof opening panel roof opening panel control module
failure
B1A92- Speed/Position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

31 Sensor B - No signal NOTE: Circuit reference check the roof opening panel control module
LIN 3 power and ground circuits for open circuit,
high resistance
circuit to ground, short system, perform routine - Sunroof
circuit to power, open Calibration (0x2039). Clear the DTCs and
circuit, high resistance retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Roof opening panel roof opening panel control module
failure
B1B01- Key Transponder - Keyless vehicle module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
55 Not configured not configured system, configure the keyless vehicle
module
B1B01- Key Transponder - Keyless vehicle module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
64 Signal plausibility power or ground circuit check the keyless vehicle module power and
failure open circuit, high ground circuits for open circuit, high
Medium speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit short circuit to system, perform a CAN network integrity
ground, short circuit to test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
power, open circuit, and check the medium speed CAN bus
high resistance circuit for short circuit to ground, short
Keyless vehicle module circuit to power, open circuit, high
ID not synchronised resistance
system, re-configure the keyless vehicle
module as a new module
B1B01- Key Transponder - Keyless vehicle module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
81 Invalid serial data power or ground circuit check the keyless vehicle module power and
received open circuit, high ground circuits for open circuit, high
ID not synchronised resistance
B1B01- Key Transponder - Keyless vehicle module

87 Missing message power or ground circuit NOTE: This DTC may be set if the engine
open circuit, high start switch is operated without a valid smart key
resistance present.
Medium speed CAN bus
circuit short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground, short circuit to check the keyless vehicle module power and
power, open circuit, ground circuits for open circuit, high
Keyless vehicle module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ID not synchronised system, perform a CAN network integrity
resistance
B1B33- Target ID Transfer - A new engine control Re-synchronise ID by reconfiguring the

51 Not programmed module has been engine control module as a new module.
installed Clear DTC and retest
B1B33- Target ID Transfer - Invalid signal received No action necessary, clear/ignore DTC
64 Signal plausibility from engine control
failure module
B1B33- Target ID Transfer - Invalid serial data No action necessary, clear/ignore DTC
81 Invalid serial data received from engine
received control module
B1B33- Target ID Transfer - Invalid message

87 Missing message received from engine NOTE: Only diagnose this DTC if the
control module customer has reporting a starting fault.

B1B56- Sunroof Module - Roof opening panel Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
46 Calibration/parameter control module internal system, perform routine - Sunroof
memory failure failure Calibration (0x2039). Clear the DTCs and
retest. If the fault persists, install a new
roof opening panel control module
B1B56- Sunroof Module -

87 Missing message NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC is inhibited if the car
LIN3 configuration file is correct.

control module power check the roof opening panel control module
or ground circuit open power and ground circuits for open circuit,
LIN bus circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to ground, short check the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to
circuit to power, open ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
B1C32- Steering Column Tilt Steering column tilt

11 Solenoid - Circuit adjustment motor NOTE: This component is a serviceable item.
short to ground circuit short circuit to
ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the steering column tilt adjustment
motor circuit for short circuit to ground
B1C32- Steering Column Tilt Steering column tilt

15 Solenoid - Circuit adjustment motor NOTE: This component is a serviceable item.
short to battery or circuit short circuit to
open power, open circuit, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
high resistance check the steering column tilt adjustment
motor circuit for short circuit to power,
B1C33- Steering Column Tilt Steering column tilt Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
12 Feedback Signal - adjustment motor check the steering column tilt adjustment
Circuit short to position sensor circuit motor position sensor circuit for short
battery short circuit to power circuit to power
B1C33- Steering Column Tilt Steering column tilt Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
14 Feedback Signal - adjustment motor check the steering column tilt adjustment
Circuit short to position sensor circuit motor position sensor circuit for short
ground or open short circuit to ground, circuit to ground, open circuit, high
resistance
B1C34- Steering Column Steering column reach

11 Telescopic Solenoid - adjustment motor NOTE: This component is a serviceable item.
Circuit short to circuit short circuit to
ground ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the steering column reach adjustment
motor circuit for short circuit to ground
B1C34- Steering Column Steering column reach

15 Telescopic Solenoid - adjustment motor NOTE: This component is a serviceable item.
Circuit short to circuit short circuit to
battery or open power, open circuit, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
high resistance check the steering column reach adjustment
motor circuit for short circuit to power,
B1C35- Steering Column Steering column reach Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
12 Telescopic Feedback adjustment motor check the steering column reach adjustment
Signal - Circuit short position sensor circuit motor position sensor circuit for short
to battery short circuit to power circuit to power
B1C35- Steering Column Steering column reach Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
14 Telescopic Feedback adjustment motor check the steering column reach adjustment
Signal - Circuit short position sensor circuit motor position sensor circuit for short
to ground or open short circuit to ground, circuit to ground, open circuit, high
resistance
B1C36- Steering Column Steering column Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Adjust Switch - adjustment switch check the steering column adjustment
Circuit short to circuit short circuit to switch circuit for short circuit to ground
ground ground
B1C37- Master Lock Switch Interior central locking

23 Stuck - Signal stuck lock switch circuit short NOTE: This DTC will set if the switch is active
low circuit to ground for more than 60 seconds.
Interior central locking
lock switch stuck active Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the interior central locking lock
switches circuits for short circuit to ground
Test the operation of the interior central
locking lock switches
B1C38- Master Unlock Switch Interior central locking

23 Stuck - Signal stuck unlock switch circuit NOTE: This DTC will set if the switch is active
low short circuit to ground for more than 60 seconds.
Interior central locking
unlock switch stuck Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
active check the interior central locking unlock
switches circuits for short circuit to ground
Test the operation of the interior central
locking unlock switches
B1C43- Master Interior Lamp Interior lamp switch

23 Switch Stuck - Signal circuit short circuit to NOTE: This DTC will set if the switch is active
stuck low ground for more than 60 seconds.
Interior lamp switch
stuck active Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the interior lamp switch circuit for
Test the operation of the interior lamp
switch
B1C44- Rear Wiper Park Rear wiper park Ensure motor/mechanism is not jammed or
67 Position Switch Stuck position switch circuit seized. Refer to the electrical circuit
- Signal incorrect short circuit to power, diagrams and check the rear wiper park
after event short circuit to ground, position switch circuit for short circuit to
open circuit ground. Install a new rear wiper motor as
necessary
B1C45- Front Wiper Park Front wiper park Ensure motor/mechanism is not jammed or
67 Position Switch Stuck position switch circuit seized. Refer to the electrical circuit
- Signal incorrect short circuit to power, diagrams and check the front wiper park
after event short circuit to ground, position switch circuit for short circuit to
open circuit ground. Install a new front wiper motor as
necessary
B1C53- Front Wiper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

29 Intermittent Data - NOTE: Circuit reference check the front wiper variable intermittent
Signal invalid DATA 1 / DATA 2 / DATA 3 wipe switch circuits for short circuit to
Front wiper variable high resistance
intermittent wipe switch
circuits short circuit to
high resistance
B1C55- Horn Relay - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
12 short to battery NOTE: Circuit reference check the horn relay / horn switch circuits
HORN for short circuit to power
Horn relay / horn

switch circuits short
circuit to power
B1C77- Rear Wiper Relay - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear wiper relay circuit for short
ground REAR WIPER circuit to ground
Rear wiper relay circuit

12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear wiper relay circuit for short
battery REAR WIPER circuit to power

13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear wiper relay circuit for open
REAR WIPER circuit, high resistance

open circuit, high
resistance
B1C82- Headlamp Washer Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 Relay A - Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference check the headlamp wash relay A circuit for
short to ground POWER WASH L short circuit to ground
Headlamp wash relay A

ground

short to battery POWER WASH L short circuit to power

power

open POWER WASH L open circuit, high resistance

high resistance
B1C90- Auxiliary Driving Auxiliary driving lamps Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Lamps Relay - Circuit relay circuit short check the auxiliary driving lamps relay
12 Lamps Relay - Circuit relay circuit short check the auxiliary driving lamps relay
short to battery circuit to power circuit for short circuit to power
13 Lamps Relay - Circuit relay circuit open check the auxiliary driving lamps relay
open circuit, high resistance circuit for open circuit, high resistance
B1C98- Left Corner Lamp Left cornering lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Circuit - Circuit short circuit short circuit to check the left cornering lamp circuit for
B1C98- Left Corner Lamp Left cornering lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Circuit - Circuit short circuit short circuit to check the left cornering lamp circuit for
to battery or open power, open circuit, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
B1C99- Right Corner Lamp Right cornering lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Circuit - Circuit short circuit short circuit to check the right cornering lamp circuit for
B1C99- Right Corner Lamp Right cornering lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Circuit - Circuit short circuit short circuit to check the right cornering lamp circuit for
to battery or open power, open circuit, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
B1D00- Left Low Beam - Left headlamp low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Circuit short to beam circuit short check the left headlamp low beam circuit
B1D00- Left Low Beam - Left headlamp low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Circuit short to beam circuit short check the left headlamp low beam circuit
battery or open circuit to power, open for short circuit to power, open circuit, high
B1D01- Right Low Beam - Right headlamp low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Circuit short to beam circuit short check the right headlamp low beam circuit
B1D01- Right Low Beam - Right headlamp low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Circuit short to beam circuit short check the right headlamp low beam circuit
B1D02- Left High Beam - Left headlamp high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Circuit short to beam circuit short check the left headlamp high beam circuit
B1D03- Right High Beam - Right headlamp high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Circuit short to beam circuit short check the right headlamp high beam circuit
B1D03- Right High Beam - Right headlamp high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Circuit short to beam circuit short check the right headlamp high beam circuit
B1D08- Left Trailer Direction Trailer left turn signal

11 Indicator Circuit - indicator circuit short NOTE: This DTC may be set by a fault in the
Circuit short to circuit to ground trailer.
ground
check the trailer left turn signal indicator
B1D09- Right Trailer Direction Trailer right turn signal

11 Indicator Circuit - indicator circuit short NOTE: This DTC may be set by a fault in the
Circuit short to circuit to ground trailer.
ground
check the trailer right turn signal indicator
B1D13- Interior Lights Circuit Interior lamps circuits Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 "A" - Circuit short to short circuit to ground check the interior lamps circuits for short
B1D17- Battery Backed Car configuration file

87 Sounder - Missing mismatch with vehicle NOTE: This DTC is inhibited if the car
message specification configuration file is correct.

system, check and up-date the car
configuration file as necessary
B1D17- Battery Backed Battery back-up Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
96 Sounder - sounder internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
Component internal fault persists, install a new battery back-up
failure sounder
B1D35- Hazard Switch Stuck Hazard warning lamp

23 - Signal stuck low switch stuck active NOTE: This DTC will set if the switch is active
Hazard warning lamp for more than 60 seconds.
circuit to ground Test the operation of the hazard warning
lamp switch
check the hazard warning lamp switch
B1D97- Tilt Sensor - Battery back-up Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
96 Component internal sounder internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
failure fault persists, install a new battery back-up
sounder
C111A- Right Stop Lamp - Right stop lamp circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Circuit short to short circuit to ground check the right stop lamp circuit for short
C111A- Right Stop Lamp - Right stop lamp circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Circuit short to short circuit to power, check the right stop lamp circuit for short
battery or open open circuit, high circuit to power, open circuit, high
C111B- Left Stop Lamp - Left stop lamp circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Circuit short to short circuit to ground check the left stop lamp circuit for short
C111B- Left Stop Lamp - Left stop lamp circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Circuit short to short circuit to power, check the left stop lamp circuit for short
battery or open open circuit, high circuit to power, open circuit, high
C1A56- Left Front Tire Front left tire pressure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
16 Pressure Sensor and sensor internal battery system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
Transmitter Assembly voltage low fault persists, install a new front left tire
- Circuit voltage pressure sensor
below threshold
C1A56- Left Front Tire Front left tire pressure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
86 Pressure Sensor and sensor internal failure - system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
Transmitter Assembly Pressure, temperature fault persists, install a new front left tire
- Signal invalid or acceleration signal(s) pressure sensor
out of range
C1A56- Left Front Tire Front left tire pressure Check the installation of the front left tire
93 Pressure Sensor and sensor not installed pressure sensor
Transmitter Assembly Front left tire pressure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
- No operation sensor internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
Front left initiator fault persists, install a new front left tire
circuit short circuit to pressure sensor
power, open circuit, system, check for related DTCs C1A57-12
high resistance and/or C1A57-14 and perform the relevant
Tire pressure corrective actions
monitoring system RF Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
receiver power or check the tire pressure monitoring system
ground circuit open RF receiver power and ground circuits for
circuit, high resistance open circuit, high resistance
Tire pressure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
monitoring system RF system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
receiver internal failure fault persists, install a new tire pressure
Electrical interference monitoring system RF receiver
Check for potential sources of interference
inside the vehicle (for example, power
adapters, laptop/navigation screens, etc)
C1A57- Left Front Initiator - Front left initiator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
12 Circuit short to circuit short circuit to check the front left initiator circuit for short
battery power circuit to power
C1A57- Left Front Initiator - Front left initiator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
14 Circuit short to circuit short circuit to check the front left initiator circuit for short
ground or open ground, open circuit, circuit to ground, open circuit, high
C1A58- Right Front Tire Front right tire pressure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Transmitter Assembly voltage low fault persists, install a new front right tire
below threshold
C1A58- Right Front Tire Front right tire pressure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Transmitter Assembly Pressure, temperature fault persists, install a new front right tire
out of range
C1A58- Right Front Tire Front right tire pressure Check the installation of the front right tire
Transmitter Assembly Front right tire pressure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Front right initiator fault persists, install a new front right tire
C1A59- Right Front Initiator - Front right initiator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
12 Circuit short to circuit short circuit to check the front right initiator circuit for
battery power short circuit to power
C1A59- Right Front Initiator - Front right initiator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
14 Circuit short to circuit short circuit to check the front right initiator circuit for
ground or open ground, open circuit, short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
C1A60- Left Rear Tire Rear left tire pressure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Transmitter Assembly voltage low fault persists, install a new rear left tire
below threshold
C1A60- Left Rear Tire Rear left tire pressure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Transmitter Assembly Pressure, temperature fault persists, install a new rear left tire
out of range
C1A60- Left Rear Tire Rear left tire pressure Check the installation of the rear left tire
Transmitter Assembly Rear left tire pressure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Rear left initiator circuit fault persists, install a new rear left tire
short circuit to ground, pressure sensor
short circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
open circuit, high system, check for related DTCs C1A61-12
resistance and/or C1A61-14 and perform the relevant
C1A61- Left Rear Initiator - Rear left initiator circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
12 Circuit short to short circuit to power check the rear left initiator circuit for short
C1A61- Left Rear Initiator - Rear left initiator circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
14 Circuit short to short circuit to ground, check the rear left initiator circuit for short
ground or open open circuit, high circuit to ground, open circuit, high
C1A62- Right Rear Tire Rear right tire pressure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Transmitter Assembly voltage low fault persists, install a new rear right tire
below threshold
C1A62- Right Rear Tire Rear right tire pressure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Transmitter Assembly Pressure, temperature fault persists, install a new rear right tire
out of range
C1A62- Right Rear Tire Rear right tire pressure Check the installation of the rear right tire
Transmitter Assembly Rear right tire pressure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Rear right initiator fault persists, install a new rear right tire
C1A63- Right Rear Initiator - Rear right initiator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
12 Circuit short to circuit short circuit to check the rear right initiator circuit for short
battery power circuit to power
C1A63- Right Rear Initiator - Rear right initiator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
14 Circuit short to circuit short circuit to check the rear right initiator circuit for short
ground or open ground, open circuit, circuit to ground, open circuit, high
C1D18- Wheel Localization Two or more initiators Check the installation of the initiators
00 Failed - No sub type incorrectly installed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information Tire pressure sensor system, check for related DTCs C1A56-93,
signal(s) missing C1A58-93, C1A60-93 and/or C1A62-93 and
perform the relevant corrective actions
C1D21- Wheel Module - Tire pressure sensor(s) Check the installation of the tire pressure
05 System programming not installed sensors
failures Tire pressure sensor(s) Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
internal failure(s) system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
Initiator circuit(s) short fault persists, install a new tire pressure
circuit to ground, short sensor as necessary
circuit to power, open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit, high resistance system, check for related DTCs C1A57-12,
Tire pressure C1A57-14, C1A59-12, C1A59-14, C1A61-
monitoring system RF 12, C1A61-14, C1A63-12 and/or C1A63-14
receiver power or and perform the relevant corrective actions
ground circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit, high resistance check the tire pressure monitoring system
Tire pressure RF receiver power and ground circuits for
monitoring system RF open circuit, high resistance
receiver internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Electrical interference system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new tire pressure
monitoring system RF receiver
C2004- Headlamp washer Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 relay B - Circuit short NOTE: Circuit reference check the headlamp washer relay B circuit
to ground POWER WASH R for short circuit to ground
Headlamp washer relay

B circuit short circuit to
ground

12 relay B - Circuit short NOTE: Circuit reference check the headlamp washer relay B circuit
to battery POWER WASH R for short circuit to power

B circuit short circuit to
power

13 relay B - Circuit open NOTE: Circuit reference check the headlamp washer relay B circuit
POWER WASH R for open circuit, high resistance

B circuit open circuit,
high resistance
P0230- Fuel Pump Primary Fuel pump relay circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
12 Circuit - Circuit short short circuit to power check the fuel pump relay circuit for short
to battery circuit to power
U0001- High Speed CAN High speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
88 Communication Bus - circuit short circuit to system, perform a CAN network integrity
Bus off ground, short circuit to test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
U0004- High Speed CAN High speed CAN bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Communication Bus high circuit short circuit check the high speed CAN bus high circuit
(+) Low - No sub to ground for short circuit to ground
type information
(+) High - No sub to power for short circuit to power
type information
00 Communication Bus low circuit short circuit check the high speed CAN bus low circuit
(-) High - No sub to power for short circuit to power
type information
(-) shorted to Bus to high speed CAN bus for short circuit to the high speed CAN bus
(+) - No sub type low circuit low circuit
information
U0010- Medium Speed CAN Medium speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
88 Communication Bus - circuit short circuit to system, perform a CAN network integrity
Bus off ground, short circuit to test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
resistance
U0013- Medium Speed CAN Medium speed CAN bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Communication Bus high circuit short circuit check the medium speed CAN bus high
(+) Low - No sub to ground circuit for short circuit to ground
type information
(+) High - No sub to power circuit for short circuit to power
type information
00 Communication Bus low circuit short circuit check the medium speed CAN bus low
(-) High - No sub to power circuit for short circuit to power
type information
(-) shorted to Bus to high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to the medium speed
(+) - No sub type low circuit CAN bus low circuit
information
U0100- Lost Communication Engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With ECM/PCM "A" - power or ground circuit check the engine control module power and
No sub type open circuit, high ground circuits for open circuit, high
information resistance resistance
High speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Engine system fault power, open circuit, high resistance
system, check the engine control module
for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index
U0101- Lost Communication Transmission control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Transmission module power or check the transmission control module
Control Module - No ground circuit open power and ground circuits for open circuit,
sub type information circuit, high resistance high resistance
Transmission system power, open circuit, high resistance
relevant DTC index
U0102- Lost Communication Transfer case control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Transfer Case module power or check the transfer case control module
Transfer case system power, open circuit, high resistance
system, check the transfer case control
relevant DTC index
U0103- Lost communication Transmission control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 with gear shift switch power or ground check the transmission control switch power
control module A - circuit open circuit, and ground circuits for open circuit, high
No sub type high resistance resistance
Transmission control power, open circuit, high resistance
switch system fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
switch for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
U0121- Lost Communication Anti-lock brake system Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Anti-Lock Brake control module power check the anti-lock brake system control
System (ABS) or ground circuit open module power and ground circuits for open
Control Module - No circuit, high resistance circuit, high resistance
sub type information High speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Anti-lock brake system power, open circuit, high resistance
U0126- Lost Communication Steering angle sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Steering Angle module power or check the steering angle sensor module
Sensor Module - No ground circuit open power and ground circuits for open circuit,
Steering angle sensor power, open circuit, high resistance
system, check the steering angle sensor
relevant DTC index
U0128- Lost Communication Electric park brake Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Park Brake control module power check the electric park brake control
Control Module - No or ground circuit open module power and ground circuits for open
sub type information circuit, high resistance circuit, high resistance
Electric park brake power, open circuit, high resistance
system, check the electric park brake
U0132- Lost Communication Air suspension control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Suspension module power or check the air suspension control module
Control Module "A" - ground circuit open power and ground circuits for open circuit,
No sub type circuit, high resistance high resistance
Air suspension system power, open circuit, high resistance
system, check the air suspension control
relevant DTC index
U0138- Lost Communication Terrain response Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 with All Terrain switchpack power or check the terrain response switchpack
Terrain response power, open circuit, high resistance
system, check the terrain response
switchpack for related DTCs and refer to
U0139- Lost Communication Adaptive damping Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Suspension system control module check the adaptive damping system control
Control Module "B" - power or ground circuit module power and ground circuits for open
No sub type open circuit, high circuit, high resistance
information resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
High speed CAN bus system, perform a CAN network integrity
circuit short circuit to test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
ground, short circuit to and check the high speed CAN bus circuit
power, open circuit, for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
high resistance power, open circuit, high resistance
Adaptive damping Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system fault system, check the adaptive damping system
U0151- Lost Communication Restraints control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Restraints module power or check the restraints control module power
Control Module - No ground circuit open and ground circuits for open circuit, high
sub type information circuit, high resistance resistance
Restraints system fault power, open circuit, high resistance
system, check the restraints control module
DTC index
U0155- Lost Communication Instrument cluster Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Instrument power or ground circuit check the instrument cluster power and
Panel Cluster (IPC) open circuit, high ground circuits for open circuit, high
Control Module - No resistance resistance
sub type information High speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Instrument cluster power, open circuit, high resistance
system, check the instrument cluster for
index
U0164- Lost Communication Automatic temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With HVAC Control control module power check the automatic temperature control
Module - No sub type or ground circuit open module power and ground circuits for open
information circuit, high resistance circuit, high resistance
Automatic temperature circuit to power, open circuit, high
control system fault resistance
system, check the automatic temperature
U0184- Lost Communication Integrated audio Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Radio - No sub module / audio head check the integrated audio module / audio
type information unit power or ground head unit power and ground circuits for
circuit open circuit, open circuit, high resistance
Medium speed CAN bus system, perform a CAN network integrity
circuit short circuit to test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
ground, short circuit to and check the medium speed CAN bus
power, open circuit, circuit for short circuit to ground, short
high resistance circuit to power, open circuit, high
Integrated audio resistance
module / audio head Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
unit fault system, check the integrated audio module
/ audio head unit for related DTCs and refer
U0199- Lost communication Driver door module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 with Driver Door power or ground circuit check the driver door module power and
Module (DDM) - No open circuit, high ground circuits for open circuit, high
sub type information resistance resistance
Driver door module circuit to power, open circuit, high
fault resistance
system, check the driver door module for
index
U0200- Lost Communication Passenger door module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With "Door Control power or ground circuit check the passenger door module power
Module "B" - No sub open circuit, high and ground circuits for open circuit, high
type information resistance resistance
Passenger door module circuit to power, open circuit, high
fault resistance
system, check the passenger door module
DTC index
U0208- Lost Communication Driver seat module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With "Seat Control power or ground circuit check the driver seat module power and
Module "A" - No sub open circuit, high ground circuits for open circuit, high
Driver seat module circuit to power, open circuit, high
fault resistance
system, check the driver seat module for
index
U0214- Lost Communication Keyless vehicle module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Remote power or ground circuit check the keyless vehicle module power and
Function Actuation - open circuit, high ground circuits for open circuit, high
No sub type resistance resistance
information Medium speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system fault resistance
system, check the keyless vehicle module
DTC index
U0241- Lost Communication Headlamp leveling Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Headlamp control module power check the headlamp leveling control module
Control Module "A" - or ground circuit open power and ground circuits for open circuit,
No sub type circuit, high resistance high resistance
Headlamp leveling power, open circuit, high resistance
control module fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, check the headlamp leveling
U0242- Lost Communication Rear view mirror power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Headlamp or ground circuit open check the rear view mirror power and
Control Module "B" - circuit, high resistance ground circuits for open circuit, high
No sub type Medium speed CAN bus resistance
information circuit short circuit to Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ground, short circuit to system, perform a CAN network integrity
power, open circuit, test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
high resistance and check the medium speed CAN bus
Rear view mirror fault circuit for short circuit to ground, short
resistance
system, check the rear view mirror for
index
U0257- Lost Communication Touch screen / multi- Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Front Controls / function display power check the touch screen / multi-function
Display Interface or ground circuit open display power and ground circuits for open
Module - No sub type circuit, high resistance circuit, high resistance
Touch screen / multi- circuit to power, open circuit, high
function display fault resistance
system, check the touch screen / multi-
function display for related DTCs and refer
U025D- Lost Communication Integrated control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Front Controls panel power or ground check the integrated control panel power
Interface Module "B" circuit open circuit, and ground circuits for open circuit, high
- No sub type high resistance resistance
Integrated control circuit to power, open circuit, high
panel fault resistance
system, check the integrated control panel
DTC index
U1000- Solid State Driver Central junction box

00 Protection Active - output circuit short NOTE: When this DTC is set the relevant
Driver Disabled - No circuit to ground, short output is disabled.
sub type information circuit to power
Check for other central junction box output
circuit short circuit to ground/power DTCs
and perform the relevant corrective
action(s)
U200D- Control Module Output power A circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Output Power A - short circuit to ground check the output power A circuit for short
Circuit short to circuit to ground
ground
U200E- Control Module Output power B circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Output Power B - short circuit to ground check the output power B circuit for short
Circuit short to circuit to ground
ground
U2010- Switch Illumination - Switch illumination Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Circuit short to circuit short circuit to check the switch illumination circuit for
U2017- Control Module Central junction box is Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 Software #2 - Not not configured correctly system, re-configure the central junction
programmed box with the latest level software
U201B- Control Module Central junction box Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
54 Calibration Data #2 - has not stored the system, perform routine - Calibrate
Missing calibration steering column Steering Column (0x203E)
telescope/tilt position
U201F- External Receiver - Tire pressure

04 System internal monitoring system RF NOTE: Ignore all other tire pressure
failures receiver internal failure monitoring system DTCs if this DTC is set.

fault persists, install a new tire pressure
monitoring system RF receiver
U201F- External Receiver -

11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Ignore all other tire pressure
ground ISO monitoring system DTCs if this DTC is set.
Tire pressure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

monitoring system RF check the tire pressure monitoring system
receiver circuit short RF receiver bus circuit for short circuit to
bus circuit to ground ground

12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Ignore all other tire pressure
battery ISO monitoring system DTCs if this is set.

receiver bus circuit RF receiver bus circuit for short circuit to
short circuit to power power

87 Missing message NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Ignore all other tire pressure
ISO monitoring system DTCs if this is set.

receiver power or RF receiver power and ground circuits for
ground circuit open open circuit, high resistance
circuit, high resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Tire pressure check the tire pressure monitoring system
monitoring system RF RF receiver bus circuit for short circuit to
receiver bus circuit ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
short circuit to ground, high resistance
short circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
open circuit, high system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
resistance fault persists, install a new tire pressure
Tire pressure monitoring system RF receiver
monitoring system RF
receiver internal failure
U2101- Control Module Car configuration file Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Configuration mismatch with vehicle system, check and up-date the car
Incompatible - No specification configuration file as necessary
sub type information
U2104- Trip Meter Reset Steering column left NOTES:
23 Button - Signal stuck multifunction switch
low (trip switch) stuck
active This DTC will set if the switch is active for
Steering column left more than 60 seconds.
multifunction switch
(trip switch) circuit
short circuit to ground The trip computer switch is integral with the
steering column left multifunction switch.
Test the operation of the steering column

left multifunction switch (trip switch)
check the steering column left multifunction
switch (trip switch) circuit for short circuit
to ground
U2300- Central Configuration Car configuration file Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 - Signal plausibility mismatch with vehicle system, check and up-date the car
failure specification - Tire configuration file as necessary
pressure monitoring
system configuration
data is invalid
U3000- Control Module - Central junction box Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
49 Internal electronic internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
failure fault persists, install a new central junction
box
U3001- Control Module Steering column

54 Improper Shutdown - tilt/reach position not NOTE: This DTC is set when the steering
Missing calibration stored column tilt or reach motor is active. The DTC is
cleared when the new steering column position has
been successfully stored.

system, check for steering column
adjustment related DTCs. Clear the DTC and
operate the steering column through the
complete tilt and reach range
Published: 30-Jan-2014
Digital Radio Control Module (DRCM)
Digital Radio Control Module (DRCM)
CAUTION: Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control
modules does not guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being
tested and/or the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Digital Radio Control
Module (DRCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing
section in the workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1A56- Antenna - Circuit Digital radio L- Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 short to ground band antenna digital radio L-band antenna circuit for short circuit
circuit short to ground
circuit to ground Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Digital radio L- digital radio L-band antenna amplifier circuit for
band antenna short circuit to ground
amplifier circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short circuit to system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
ground persists, install a new digital radio L-band antenna
Digital radio L- amplifier
band antenna Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
amplifier system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
internal failure persists, install a new digital radio control module
Digital radio
control module
internal failure
12 short to battery band antenna digital radio L-band antenna circuit for short circuit
circuit short to power
circuit to power Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Digital radio L- digital radio L-band antenna amplifier circuit for
band antenna short circuit to power
power persists, install a new digital radio L-band antenna
Digital radio L- amplifier
Digital radio
control module
internal failure
13 open band antenna digital radio L-band antenna circuit for open circuit,
circuit open high resistance
circuit, high Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
resistance digital radio L-band antenna amplifier circuit for
Digital radio L- open circuit, high resistance
amplifier circuit system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
open circuit, persists, install a new digital radio L-band antenna
high resistance amplifier
Digital radio L- Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
band antenna system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
amplifier persists, install a new digital radio control module
internal failure
Digital radio
control module
internal failure
B1D55- Antenna #2 - Circuit Digital radio Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 short to ground band 3 antenna digital radio band 3 antenna circuit for short circuit
circuit short to ground
circuit to ground Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Digital radio digital radio band 3 antenna amplifier circuit for
band 3 antenna short circuit to ground
ground persists, install a new digital radio band 3 antenna
Digital radio amplifier
band 3 antenna Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Digital radio
control module
internal failure
12 short to battery band 3 antenna digital radio band 3 antenna circuit for short circuit
circuit short to power
circuit to power Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Digital radio digital radio band 3 antenna amplifier circuit for
band 3 antenna short circuit to power
power persists, install a new digital radio band 3 antenna
Digital radio amplifier
Digital radio
control module
internal failure
13 open band 3 antenna digital radio band 3 antenna circuit for open circuit,
circuit open high resistance
circuit, high Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
resistance digital radio band 3 antenna amplifier circuit for
Digital radio open circuit, high resistance
amplifier circuit system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
open circuit, persists, install a new digital radio band 3 antenna
high resistance amplifier
Digital radio Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
band 3 antenna system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
amplifier persists, install a new digital radio control module
internal failure
Digital radio
control module
internal failure
U2100- Initial Configuration Car Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

00 Not Complete - No configuration system, re-configure the digital radio control
sub type information data not loaded module with the latest level software
(new module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
installed to system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
vehicle and not persists, install a new digital radio control module
initialized)
Digital radio
control module
internal failure
U2101- Control Module Central car Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Configuration configuration system, re-configure the digital radio control
Incompatible - No parameter module with the latest level software
sub type information missing or
corrupted
U3000- Control module - Digital radio Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
46 Calibration/parameter control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
memory failure internal failure persists, install a new digital radio control module
U3000- Control Module - Digital radio Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
49 Internal electronic control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure internal failure persists, install a new digital radio control module
U3000- Control Module - Digital radio Check that the digital radio control module cooling
98 Component or control module vents / air circulation are not obstructed. Cool the
system over cooling vents vehicle interior down by ensuring it is in the shade
temperature obstructed and have the air conditioning on cool. Using the
Digital radio manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest
persists, install a new digital radio control module
U3003- Battery voltage - Mismatch Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

62 Signal compare between the system, check datalogger signal - ECU Power
failure voltage at the Supply Voltage (0xD111) - and compare it to
digital radio battery voltage. Refer to the electrical circuit
control module diagrams and check the digital radio control module
and the voltage power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
value broadcast resistance
on the CAN bus
Driver/Passenger Door Control Module (DDM/PDM)
Driver/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM)
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Driver/Passenger Door
Module (DDM/PDM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing
For additional information, refer to: Driver Door Module (DDM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules,

B108F- Cabin Lock/Unlock Central door locking
23 Switch - Signal lock/unlock switch stuck NOTE: This DTC may be induced by the driver
stuck low active
Central door locking Test the operation of the central door locking
lock/unlock switch signal lock/unlock switch
ground check the central door locking lock/unlock
switch signal circuit for short circuit to
ground
B109C- Front Courtesy Front courtesy light Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Light - Circuit circuit short circuit to check the front courtesy light circuit for
short to ground ground short to ground
B109C- Front Courtesy Front courtesy light Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Light - Circuit circuit short circuit to check the front courtesy light circuit for
short to battery or power, open circuit, high short circuit to power, open circuit, high
open resistance resistance
B10EB- Driver Door Double Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Locking Motor - NOTE: Circuit reference check the front driver side door double
Circuit short to LOCK M3 locking motor circuit for short circuit to
ground ground
Front driver side door
double locking motor
ground
B10EB- Driver Door Double Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Locking Motor - NOTE: Circuit reference check the front driver side door double
Circuit short to LOCK M3 locking motor circuit for short circuit to
battery or open power, open circuit, high resistance
resistance
B10EC- Passenger Door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 Double Locking NOTE: Circuit reference D check the front passenger side door double
Motor - Circuit LOCK locking motor circuit for short circuit to
short to ground ground
Front passenger side door
ground
B10EC- Passenger Door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

15 Double Locking NOTE: Circuit reference D check the front passenger side door double
short to battery or power, open circuit, high resistance
open Front passenger side door
resistance
B10ED- Rear Door Driver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Side Double NOTE: Circuit reference D check the rear driver side door double
Locking Motor - LOCK locking motor circuit for short circuit to
Circuit short to ground
ground Rear driver side door
ground
B10ED- Rear Door Driver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Side Double NOTE: Circuit reference D check the rear driver side door double
Circuit short to power, open circuit, high resistance
battery or open Rear driver side door
resistance
B10EE- Rear Door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 Passenger Side NOTE: Circuit reference D check the rear passenger side door double
Double Locking LOCK locking motor circuit for short circuit to
Motor - Circuit ground
short to ground Rear passenger side door
ground
B10EE- Rear Door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

15 Passenger Side NOTE: Circuit reference D check the rear passenger side door double
Double Locking LOCK locking motor circuit for short circuit to
Motor - Circuit power, open circuit, high resistance
short to battery or Rear passenger side door
open double locking motor
resistance
B1108- Driver Door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 Central Locking NOTE: Circuit reference C check the front driver side door central
central locking motor
ground
B1108- Driver Door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

15 Central Locking NOTE: Circuit reference C check the front driver side door central
open Front driver side door
resistance
B1109- Passenger Door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 Central Locking NOTE: Circuit reference C check the front passenger side door central
Front passenger side door
ground
B1109- Passenger Door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

15 Central Locking NOTE: Circuit reference C check the front passenger side door central
open Front passenger side door
resistance
B110A- Rear Door Driver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Side Central NOTE: Circuit reference C check the rear driver side door central
Circuit short to ground
ground Rear driver side door
ground
B110A- Rear Door Driver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Side Central NOTE: Circuit reference C check the rear driver side door central
Circuit short to power, open circuit, high resistance
battery or open Rear driver side door
resistance
B110B- Rear Door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 Passenger Side NOTE: Circuit reference C check the rear passenger side door central
Central Locking LOCK locking motor circuit for short circuit to
Motor - Circuit ground
short to ground Rear passenger side door
ground
B110B- Rear Door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

15 Passenger Side NOTE: Circuit reference C check the rear passenger side door central
Central Locking LOCK locking motor circuit for short circuit to
Motor - Circuit power, open circuit, high resistance
short to battery or Rear passenger side door
open central locking motor
resistance
B1163- Left Mirror Heater Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Output Short To NOTE: Circuit reference check the left door mirror heater circuit for
Ground - Circuit MIRROR HEATING short circuit to ground
short to ground
Left door mirror heater
ground
B1163- Left Mirror Heater Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Output Short To NOTE: Circuit reference check the left door mirror heater circuit for
Power - Circuit MIRROR HEATING short circuit to power, open circuit, high
short to battery or resistance
open Left door mirror heater
resistance
B1164- Right Mirror Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 Heater Output NOTE: Circuit reference check the right door mirror heater circuit for
Short To Ground - MIRROR HEATING short circuit to ground
Circuit short to
ground Right door mirror heater
ground
B1164- Right Mirror Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

15 Heater Output NOTE: Circuit reference check the right door mirror heater circuit for
Short To Power - MIRROR HEATING short circuit to power, open circuit, high
Circuit short to resistance
battery or open Right door mirror heater
resistance
B1165- Left Front Puddle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Lamp Output NOTE: Circuit reference check the left puddle lamp circuit for short
Short To Ground - APPROACH LAMP circuit to ground
Circuit short to
ground Left puddle lamp circuit
B1165- Left Front Puddle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Lamp Output Open NOTE: Circuit reference check the left puddle lamp circuit for short
Load Or Short To APPROACH LAMP circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Power - Circuit
short to battery or Left puddle lamp circuit
open short circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
B1166- Right Front Puddle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Lamp Output NOTE: Circuit reference check the right puddle lamp circuit for short
Short To Ground - APPROACH LAMP circuit to ground
Circuit short to
ground Right puddle lamp circuit
B1166- Right Front Puddle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Lamp Output Open NOTE: Circuit reference check the right puddle lamp circuit for short
Load Or Short To APPROACH LAMP circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Battery - Circuit
short to battery or Right puddle lamp circuit
open short circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
B117C- Rear Power Set when window is Check for mechanical problems with the
07 Window Up - reversed during window window operation. Check for obstructions in
Mechanical failures up due to mechanical the window channels and that the glass is
problems, window not restricted in the full range of travel
channel restriction
preventing window
closure or window
mechanism fault
B117C- Rear Power Door module internal Renew the relevant rear door module
72 Window Up - relay sticking open
Actuator stuck
open
B117C- Rear Power Door module internal Renew the relevant rear door module
73 Window Up - relay sticking closed
Actuator stuck
closed
B117C- Rear Power Set when auto window up Check the window operation. Clear the DTC
92 Window Up - was interrupted (e.g. by and retest
Performance or pressing local switch)
incorrect operation
B117D- Rear Power Door module internal Renew the relevant rear door module
72 Window Down - relay sticking open
Actuator stuck
open
B117D- Rear Power Door module internal Renew the relevant rear door module
73 Window Down - relay sticking closed
Actuator stuck
closed
B117E- Front Power Set when window is Check for mechanical problems with the
07 Window Up - reversed during window window operation. Check for obstructions in
Mechanical failures up due to mechanical the window channels and that the glass is
problems, window not restricted in the full range of travel
channel restriction
preventing window
closure or Window
mechanism fault
B117E- Front Power Door module internal Renew the relevant front door module
72 Window Up - relay sticking open
Actuator stuck
open
B117E- Front Power Door module internal Renew the relevant front door module
73 Window Up - relay sticking closed
Actuator stuck
closed
B117E- Front Power Set when auto window up Check the window operation. Clear the DTC
92 Window Up - was interrupted (e.g. by and retest
Performance or pressing local switch)
incorrect operation
B117F- Front Power Door module internal Renew the relevant front door module
72 Window Down - relay sticking open
Actuator stuck
open
B117F- Front Power Door module internal Renew the relevant front door module
73 Window Down - relay sticking closed
Actuator stuck
closed
B1189- Front Window Front window regulator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
29 Position Sensor - motor position sensor check the front window regulator motor
Signal invalid signal circuit(s) short position sensor signal circuits for short
circuit to ground, short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
circuit to power, open open circuit, high resistance
B118A- Rear Window Rear window regulator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
29 Position Sensor - motor position sensor check the rear window regulator motor
Signal invalid signal circuit(s) short position sensor signal circuits for short
circuit to ground, short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
circuit to power, open open circuit, high resistance
B11D1- LIN Bus "C" - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
83 Value of signal NOTE: Circuit reference LIN check the driver door switchpack power and
protection ground circuits for open circuit, high
calculation Driver door switchpack resistance
incorrect power or ground circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
open circuit, high check the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to
resistance ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
LIN bus circuit short high resistance
circuit to ground, short Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit to power, open system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
circuit, high resistance fault persists, install a new driver door
Driver door switchpack switchpack
internal failure
86 Signal invalid NOTE: Circuit reference LIN check the driver door switchpack power and
ground circuits for open circuit, high
Driver door switchpack resistance
power or ground circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
internal failure
87 Missing message NOTE: Circuit reference LIN check the driver door switchpack power and
Driver door switchpack resistance
power or ground circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
internal failure
B11F6- Driver Folding Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 Mirror Motor - NOTE: Circuit reference check the driver powerfold door mirror
Circuit short to MIRROR FOLD IN / MIRRORS actuator circuit for short circuit to ground
ground Y/FOLDOUT
Driver powerfold door

mirror actuator circuit
B11F6- Driver Folding Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

15 Mirror Motor - NOTE: Circuit reference check the driver powerfold door mirror
Circuit short to MIRROR FOLD IN / MIRRORS actuator circuit for short circuit to power,
battery or open Y/FOLDOUT open circuit, high resistance
Driver powerfold door

short circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
B11F7- Passenger Folding Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 Mirror Motor - NOTE: Circuit reference check the passenger powerfold door mirror
Circuit short to MIRROR FOLD IN / MIRRORS actuator circuit for short circuit to ground
ground Y/FOLDOUT
Passenger powerfold door

B11F7- Passenger Folding Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

15 Mirror Motor - NOTE: Circuit reference check the passenger powerfold door mirror
Circuit short to MIRROR FOLD IN / MIRRORS actuator circuit for short circuit to power,
battery or open Y/FOLDOUT open circuit, high resistance
Passenger powerfold door

short circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
B1A98- LIN Bus Circuit #1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
83 - Value of signal NOTE: Circuit reference LIN check the rear door module power and
protection ground circuits for open circuit, high
calculation Rear door module power resistance
incorrect or ground circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit, high resistance check the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to
LIN bus circuit short ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
circuit to ground, short high resistance
circuit, high resistance system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
Rear door module internal fault persists, install a new rear door module
failure
86 - Signal invalid NOTE: Circuit reference LIN check the rear door module power and
Rear door module power resistance
or ground circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
failure
87 - Missing message NOTE: Circuit reference LIN check the rear door module power and
Rear door module power resistance
or ground circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
failure
B1C09- Driver Left/Right Driver door mirror Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Mirror Motor left/right motor circuit check the driver door mirror left/right motor
Circuit - Circuit short circuit to ground circuit for short circuit to ground
short to ground
15 Mirror Motor left/right motor circuit check the driver door mirror left/right motor
Circuit - Circuit short circuit to power, circuit for short circuit to power, open
short to battery or open circuit, high circuit, high resistance
open resistance
B1C10- Driver Up/Down Driver door mirror Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Mirror Motor up/down motor circuit check the driver door mirror up/down motor
Circuit - Circuit short circuit to ground circuit for short circuit to ground
short to ground
15 Mirror Motor up/down motor circuit check the driver door mirror up/down motor
Circuit - Circuit short circuit to power, circuit for short circuit to power, open
short to battery or open circuit, high circuit, high resistance
open resistance
B1C11- Passenger Passenger door mirror Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Left/Right Mirror left/right motor circuit check the passenger door mirror left/right
Motor Circuit - short circuit to ground motor circuit for short circuit to ground
Circuit short to
ground
15 Left/Right Mirror left/right motor circuit check the passenger door mirror left/right
Motor Circuit - short circuit to power, motor circuit for short circuit to power, open
Circuit short to open circuit, high circuit, high resistance
battery or open resistance
11 Up/Down Mirror up/down motor circuit check the passenger door mirror up/down
Motor Circuit - short circuit to ground motor circuit for short circuit to ground
Circuit short to
ground
15 Up/Down Mirror up/down motor circuit check the passenger door mirror up/down
Motor Circuit - short circuit to power, motor circuit for short circuit to power, open
Circuit short to open circuit, high circuit, high resistance
battery or open resistance
11 Mirror Motor up/down motor position check the driver door mirror up/down motor
Feedback Circuit - sensor circuit short circuit position sensor circuit for short circuit to
Circuit short to to ground ground
ground
15 Mirror Motor up/down motor position check the driver door mirror up/down motor
Circuit short to to power, open circuit, power, open circuit, high resistance
battery or open high resistance
11 Mirror Motor left/right motor position check the driver door mirror left/right motor
Circuit short to to ground ground
ground
15 Mirror Motor left/right motor position check the driver door mirror left/right motor
Circuit short to to power, open circuit, power, open circuit, high resistance
11 Up/Down Mirror up/down motor position check the passenger door mirror up/down
Motor Feedback sensor circuit short circuit motor position sensor circuit for short circuit
Circuit - Circuit to ground to ground
short to ground
15 Up/Down Mirror up/down motor position check the passenger door mirror up/down
Circuit - Circuit to power, open circuit, to power, open circuit, high resistance
short to battery or high resistance
open
11 Left/Right Mirror left/right motor position check the passenger door mirror left/right
Circuit - Circuit to ground to ground
short to ground
15 Left/Right Mirror left/right motor position check the passenger door mirror left/right
Circuit - Circuit to power, open circuit, to power, open circuit, high resistance
short to battery or high resistance
open
B1C39- Key Lock Switch - Emergency key barrel
29 Signal invalid lock/unlock switch stuck NOTE: This DTC may be induced by the driver
active
Emergency key barrel Test the operation of the emergency key
lock/unlock switch circuit barrel lock/unlock switch
check the emergency key barrel lock/unlock
switch circuit for short circuit to ground
B1D06- Left Turn Indicator Left turn signal circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 - Circuit short to short circuit to ground check left turn signal circuit for short circuit
ground to ground
B1D06- Left Turn Indicator Left turn signal circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 - Circuit short to short circuit to power, check the left turn signal circuit for short
battery or open open circuit, high circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
resistance
B1D07- Right Turn Right turn signal circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Indicator - Circuit short circuit to ground check right turn signal circuit for short
short to ground circuit to ground
B1D07- Right Turn Right turn signal circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Indicator - Circuit short circuit to power, check the right turn signal circuit for short
short to battery or open circuit, high circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
open resistance
C1B14- Sensor Supply Front window regulator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Voltage A - Circuit motor position sensor check the front window regulator motor
short to ground supply circuit short circuit position sensor supply circuit for short circuit
to ground to ground
C1B14- Sensor Supply Front window regulator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Voltage A - Circuit motor position sensor check the front window regulator motor
short to battery or supply circuit short circuit position sensor supply circuit for short circuit
open to power, open circuit, to power, open circuit, high resistance
high resistance
C1B15- Sensor Supply Rear window regulator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Voltage B - Circuit motor position sensor check the rear window regulator motor
short to ground supply circuit short circuit position sensor supply circuit for short circuit
to ground to ground
C1B15- Sensor Supply Rear window regulator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Voltage B - Circuit motor position sensor check the rear window regulator motor
short to battery or supply circuit short circuit position sensor supply circuit for short circuit
open to power, open circuit, to power, open circuit, high resistance
high resistance
U0010- Medium speed Medium speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 CAN circuit short circuit to system, perform a CAN network integrity
communication ground, short circuit to test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Bus - No sub type power, open circuit, high and check the medium speed CAN bus
information resistance circuit for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
00 Communication power or ground circuit check the central junction box power and
With CJB - No sub open circuit, high ground circuits for open circuit, high
power, open circuit, high and check the medium speed CAN bus
resistance circuit for short circuit to ground, short
Central junction box circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
system, check the central junction box for
index
U0208- Lost Driver seat module power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Communication or ground circuit open check the driver seat module power and
With Driver Seat circuit, high resistance ground circuits for open circuit, high
Module (DSM) - No Medium speed CAN bus resistance
sub type circuit short circuit to Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information ground, short circuit to system, perform a CAN network integrity
power, open circuit, high test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
resistance and check the medium speed CAN bus
Driver seat system fault circuit for short circuit to ground, short
system, check the driver seat module for
index
U0300- Internal Control Car configuration file

00 Module Software mismatch with vehicle NOTE: After updating the car configuration
Incompatibility - specification file, set the ignition to on and wait 30 seconds
No sub type before clearing the DTCs
information
system, check and up-date the car
configuration file as necessary
U2002- Switch - Signal Passenger door window

24 stuck high up/down switch stuck NOTE: This DTC may be induced by the driver
active
Passenger door window Test the operation of the passenger door
up/down switch circuit window up/down switch
check the passenger door window up/down
switch circuit for short circuit to ground
U2004- Auxiliary Switch Rear door window

24 Pack - Signal stuck up/down switch stuck NOTE: This DTC may be induced by the driver
high active
Rear door window Test the operation of the rear door window
up/down switch circuit up/down switch
check the rear door window up/down switch
U2010- Switch Illumination Front/rear door window Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 - Circuit short to switch illumination circuit check the front/rear door window switch
ground short circuit to ground illumination circuit for short circuit to ground
U2012- Car Configuration Car configuration file Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
08 Parameter(s) - Bus mismatch with vehicle system, check and up-date the car
signal/message specification configuration file as necessary
failures Incorrect door module Install a new door module as necessary
installed
U2013- Switch Pack - Driver door switchpack Test the operation of the driver door
24 Signal stuck high switch stuck active switchpack switches. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs
and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
driver door switchpack
U2014- Control Module Driver/passenger door Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
44 Hardware - Data module internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
memory failure fault persists, install a new driver/passenger
door module
U2100- Initial Driver/passenger door Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

00 Configuration Not module is not configured system, re-configure the driver/passenger
Complete - No sub correctly door module with the latest level software
type information
sub type
information
U3003- Battery Voltage - Mismatch between the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
62 Signal compare voltage at the check the driver/passenger door module
failure driver/passenger door power and ground circuits for open circuit,
module and the voltage high resistance
value broadcast on the
CAN bus
Driver/Passenger Seat Module (DSM/PSM)
Driver Seat Module (DSM) / Passenger Seat Module (PSM)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Driver Seat Module (DSM) /
Passenger Seat Module (PSM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis
and Testing section in the workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1060- Seat Headrest Motor Head restraint Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Output - Circuit short motor circuit short check the head restraint motor circuit for short
to ground circuit to ground circuit to ground
15 Output - Circuit short motor circuit short check the head restraint motor circuit for short
to battery or open circuit to power, circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
open circuit, high
resistance
31 Sensor - No signal motor position check the head restraint motor position sensor
sensor circuit short circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
circuit to ground, to power, open circuit, high resistance
short circuit to
high resistance
B106D- Headrest Up Switch - Head restraint up Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
24 Signal stuck high switch circuit short check the head restraint up switch circuit for
circuit to power short circuit to power
Head restraint up Test the operation of the head restraint up
switch stuck active switch
B106E- Headrest Down Head restraint down Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
24 Switch - Signal stuck switch circuit short check the head restraint down switch circuit for
high circuit to power short circuit to power
Head restraint down Test the operation of the head restraint down
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Value Seat memory Install a new seat memory switchpack
83 of signal protection switchpack internal
calculation incorrect failure
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Signal Seat memory Install a new seat memory switchpack
86 invalid switchpack internal
failure
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Missing Seat memory Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
87 message switchpack power or check the seat memory switchpack power and
ground circuit open ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
circuit, high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
resistance check the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to
circuit to ground, high resistance
short circuit to Install a new seat memory switchpack
high resistance
Seat memory
switchpack internal
failure
B1B86- Seat Height Motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Relay - Circuit short NOTE: Circuit check the seat height motor circuit for short
to ground reference HEIGHT MOTOR circuit to ground
UP / HEIGHT MOTOR
DOWN
Seat height motor

to ground
15 Relay - Circuit short NOTE: Circuit check the seat height motor circuit for short
to battery or open reference HEIGHT MOTOR circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
UP / HEIGHT MOTOR
DOWN
Seat height motor

to power, open
circuit, high
resistance
31 Speed/Position NOTE: Circuit check the seat height motor position sensor
Sensor - no signal reference HEIGHT MOTOR circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
SENSE / HEIGHT HALL to power, open circuit, high resistance
SENS GND
Seat height motor

position sensor
to ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
B1B88- Seat Slide Motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Relay - Circuit short NOTE: Circuit check the seat forward/rearward motor circuit
to ground reference SLIDE MOTOR for short circuit to ground
FORWARD / SLIDE MOTOR
REARWARD
Seat
forward/rearward
motor circuit short
circuit to ground
15 Relay - Circuit short NOTE: Circuit check the seat forward/rearward motor circuit
to battery or open reference SLIDE MOTOR for short circuit to power, open circuit, high
FORWARD / SLIDE MOTOR resistance
REARWARD
Seat
forward/rearward
motor circuit short
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
31 Speed/Position NOTE: Circuit check the seat forward/rearward motor position
Sensor - No signal reference SLIDE MOTOR sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short
SENSE / SLIDE HALL SENS circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
GND
Seat
forward/rearward
motor position
sensor circuit short
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
high resistance
B1B90- Seat Tilt Motor Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit check the seat tilt motor circuit for short circuit
ground reference TILT MOTOR UP to ground
/ TILT MOTOR DOWN
Seat tilt motor

to ground
B1B90- Seat Tilt Motor Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit check the seat tilt motor circuit for short circuit
battery or open reference TILT MOTOR UP to power, open circuit, high resistance
/ TILT MOTOR DOWN
Seat tilt motor

to power, open
circuit, high
resistance
B1B91- Seat Tilt Motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
31 Speed/Position NOTE: Circuit check the seat tilt motor position sensor circuit
Sensor - No signal reference TILT MOTOR for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
SENSE / TILT HALL SENS power, open circuit, high resistance
GND
Seat tilt motor

position sensor
to ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
B1B92- Seat Recline Motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Relay - Circuit short NOTE: Circuit check the seat backrest recline motor circuit
to ground reference SQUAB MOTOR for short circuit to ground
INCLINE / SQUAB MOTOR
RECLINE
Seat backrest
recline motor circuit
short circuit to
ground
15 Relay - Circuit short NOTE: Circuit check the seat backrest recline motor circuit
to battery or open reference SQUAB MOTOR for short circuit to power, open circuit, high
INCLINE / SQUAB MOTOR resistance
RECLINE
Seat backrest
recline motor circuit
short circuit to
high resistance
31 Speed/Position NOTE: Circuit check the seat backrest recline motor position
Sensor - No signal reference SQUAB MOTOR sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short
SENSE / SQUAB HALL circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
SENS GND
Seat backrest
recline motor
position sensor
to ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
B1B94- Seat Height Up Seat height up Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
24 Switch - Signal stuck switch circuit short check the seat height up switch circuit for short
high circuit to power circuit to power
Seat height up Test the operation of the seat height up switch
switch stuck active
B1B95- Seat Height Down Seat height down Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
24 Switch - Signal stuck switch circuit short check the seat height down switch circuit for
Seat height down Test the operation of the seat height down
B1B96- Seat Slide Forward Seat slide forward Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
24 Switch - Signal stuck switch circuit short check the seat slide forward switch circuit for
Seat slide forward Test the operation of the seat slide forward
B1B97- Seat Slide Backward Seat slide rearward Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
24 Switch - Signal stuck switch circuit short check the seat slide rearward switch circuit for
Seat slide rearward Test the operation of the seat slide rearward
B1B98- Seat Tilt Up Switch - Seat tilt up switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
24 Signal stuck high circuit short circuit check the seat tilt up switch circuit for short
to power circuit to power
Seat tilt up switch Test the operation of the seat tilt up switch
stuck active
B1B99- Seat Tilt Down Seat tilt down Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
24 Switch - Signal stuck switch circuit short check the seat tilt down switch circuit for short
high circuit to power circuit to power
Seat tilt down Test the operation of the seat tilt down switch
switch stuck active
B1C00- Seat Recline Up Seat backrest Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
24 Switch - Signal stuck recline up switch check the seat backrest recline up switch circuit
high circuit short circuit for short circuit to power
to power Test the operation of the seat backrest recline
Seat backrest up switch
recline up switch
stuck active
B1C01- Seat Recline Down Seat backrest Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
24 Switch - Signal stuck recline down switch check the seat backrest recline down switch
high circuit short circuit circuit for short circuit to power
to power Test the operation of the seat backrest recline
Seat backrest down switch
recline down switch
stuck active
B1C02- Memory Store Switch Memory store Test the operation of the memory store switch
24 - Signal stuck high switch stuck active
B1C03- Memory #1 Switch - Memory 1 switch Test the operation of the memory 1 switch
24 Signal stuck high stuck active
U0010- Medium speed CAN Medium speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
88 Communication Bus - bus circuit short system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Bus off circuit to ground, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short circuit to check the medium speed CAN bus circuit for
power, open circuit, short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
U0140- Lost Communication Central junction box Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Body Control power or ground check the central junction box power and
Module - No sub type circuit open circuit, ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
information high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Medium speed CAN system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
bus circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to ground, check the medium speed CAN bus circuit for
short circuit to short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
Central junction box system, check the central junction box for
system fault related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index
Module "B" - No sub circuit open circuit, ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
type information high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
index
00 With Instrument power or ground check the instrument cluster power and ground
Panel Cluster (IPC) circuit open circuit, circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Control Module - No high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
sub type information Medium speed CAN system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Instrument cluster system, check the instrument cluster for
index
U0199- Lost Communication Driver door module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With "Door Control power or ground check the driver door module power and
Module A" - No sub circuit open circuit, ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
type information high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Driver door module system, check the driver door module for
fault related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index
U0300- Software Driver/passenger Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

00 Incompatibility - No seat module is not system, re-configure the driver/passenger seat
sub type information configured correctly module with the latest level software
U1A14- CAN Initialization Driver/passenger Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

49 Failure - Internal seat module system, re-configure the driver/passenger seat
electronic failure internal failure module with the latest level software. Clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
new driver/passenger seat module
U1A4C- Build / End of Line Error/mismatch in Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 mode Active - No sub car configuration system, check and up-date the car
type information file configuration file as necessary. Clear the DTC
and re-test
U3000- Control Module - Driver/passenger Install a new driver/passenger seat module
49 Internal electronic seat module
failure internal failure
U3001- Control Module Driver/passenger

46 Improper Shutdown - seat module power NOTE: This DTC is for information only
Calibration/parameter has been
memory failure disconnected whilst Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
in manufacturing system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
mode persists, re-configure the driver/passenger seat
U3002- Vehicle Identification Driver/passenger Install the original or a new driver/passenger

81 Number - Invalid seat module seat module as necessary
serial data received previously installed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
on another vehicle system, perform routine - Learn VIN (0x0404)
New
driver/passenger
seat module
installed and VIN
not yet
programmed
U3003- Battery Voltage - Driver/passenger Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

16 Circuit voltage below seat module power system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU
threshold or ground circuit Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer to the
open circuit, high electrical circuit diagrams and check the
resistance driver/passenger seat module power and
Battery/charging ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
system fault Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
system
U3003- Battery Voltage - Battery/charging Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

17 Circuit voltage above system fault system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU
threshold Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer to the relevant
section of the workshop manual and test the
battery and charging system
Electric Park Brake Control Module (EPBCM)
Electric Park Brake Control Module (EPBCM)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Electric Park Brake Control
Module (EPBCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing
For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake (206-05, Diagnosis and Testing).

C0062- Longitudinal Electric park
01 Acceleration Sensor brake control NOTE: The longitudinal acceleration sensor is integral
- General electrical module internal with the electric park brake control module
failure failure
clear the DTCs. Perform Drive Cycle 2. If the fault
persists, install a new electric park brake control
module
C0062- Longitudinal Electric park

02 Acceleration Sensor brake control NOTE: The longitudinal acceleration sensor is integral
- General signal module internal with the electric park brake control module
failure failure
module
C0062- Longitudinal Longitudinal

54 Acceleration Sensor acceleration NOTE: The longitudinal acceleration sensor is integral
- Missing calibration sensor with the electric park brake control module
calibration failure
perform routine - Sensor Calibration (0x211D)
C1104- Brake Bedding Electric park

68 Mode - Event brake control NOTE: This DTC is for information only
information module in brake
bedding mode Cycle the ignition to exit brake bedding mode
C1A43- Motor Supply - Electric park

01 General electrical brake control NOTE: The electric park brake actuator is integral with
failure module internal the electric park brake control module
failure
module

19 Circuit current brake actuator NOTE: The electric park brake actuator is integral with
above threshold current above the electric park brake control module
threshold
Check for mechanical failures causing the electric
park brake to jam on

67 Signal incorrect brake control NOTE: The electric park brake actuator is integral with
after event module internal the electric park brake control module
failure
Test the functionality of the electric park brake.
check for related DTCs. Clear the DTCs and retest. If
the fault persists, install a new electric park brake
control module
C1A46- Mismatch Between Electric park Test the functionality of the electric park brake.
01 Motor Drive Current brake control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
and Resultant Force module internal check for related DTCs. Clear the DTCs and retest. If
- General electrical failure the fault persists, install a new electric park brake
failure control module
C1A46- Mismatch Between Electric park Test the functionality of the electric park brake.
64 Motor Drive Current brake control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
and Resultant Force module internal check for related DTCs. Clear the DTCs and retest. If
- Signal plausibility failure the fault persists, install a new electric park brake
failure control module
C1A47- Force Sensor - Electric park

01 General electrical brake control NOTE: The force sensor is integral with the electric
failure module internal park brake control module
failure
module

02 General signal brake control NOTE: The force sensor is integral with the electric
failure module internal park brake control module
failure
module

54 Missing calibration brake control NOTE: The force sensor is integral with the electric
module internal park brake control module
failure
module
C1A48- Warning Lamp - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
01 General electrical NOTE: Circuit electric park brake warning lamp circuit for short
failure reference STATUS LAMP circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Electric park Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
brake warning clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
lamp circuit a new electric park brake control module
ground, short clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
circuit to power, a new instrument cluster
open circuit,
high resistance
Electric park
brake control
module internal
failure
Instrument
cluster internal
failure
C1A53- Manual Emergency Electric park Check that the electric park brake emergency
68 Release Activated - brake release cable is not permanently pulled (or stuck).
Event information emergency Attempt to re-engage the electric park brake by
release cable has operating the apply switch twice. If successful, clear
been activated the DTCs and test by operating the emergency
or is release and re-engaging the electric park brake
stuck/damaged Check the integrity of the park brake cables
Park brake Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
cables clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
seized/damaged a new electric park brake control module
Electric park
brake control
module internal
failure
U0073- Control Module High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
88 Communication Bus bus circuit short perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
"A" Off - Bus off circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed
ground, short CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
open circuit,
high resistance
U0100- Lost Engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Communication module power or engine control module power and ground circuits for
With ECM/PCM "A" ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
- No sub type open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
information high resistance perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
circuit to circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
ground, short Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit to power, check the engine control module for related DTCs
open circuit, and refer to the relevant DTC index
high resistance
Engine system
fault
00 Communication control module transmission control module power and ground
with TCM - No sub power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
type information circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit, high perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
resistance electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed
ground, short check the transmission control module for related
circuit to power, DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
open circuit,
high resistance
Transmission
system fault
00 Communication control module transfer case control module power and ground
With Transfer Case power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
ground, short check the transfer case control module for related
circuit to power, DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
open circuit,
high resistance
Transfer case
system fault
U0121- Lost Anti-lock brake Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Communication system control anti-lock brake system control module power and
With Anti-Lock module power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Brake System ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
(ABS) Control open circuit, perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Module - No sub high resistance electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed
type information High speed CAN CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
ground, short check the anti-lock brake system control module for
circuit to power, related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
open circuit,
high resistance
Anti-lock brake
system fault
With Body Control ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
Module - No sub open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
type information high resistance perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
circuit to circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit to power, check the central junction box for related DTCs and
open circuit, refer to the relevant DTC index
high resistance
Central junction
box system fault
U0300- Internal Control Electric park Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
55 Module Software brake control re-configure the electric park brake control module
Incompatibility - module is not with the latest level software
Not configured configured
correctly
00 Received From data from the check the engine control module for related DTCs
ECM/PCM A - No engine control and refer to the relevant DTC index
sub type module
information
68 Received from data from the check the engine control module for related DTCs
ECM/PCM A - Event engine control and refer to the relevant DTC index
information module
U0402- Invalid data Missing/invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 received from the data from the check the transmission control module for related
TCM - No sub type transmission DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
00 Received From The data from the check the transfer case control module for related
Transfer Case transfer case DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
No sub type
information
00 Received From data from the check the anti-lock brake system control module for
Anti-Lock Brake anti-lock brake related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
System (ABS) system control
Control Module - module
No sub type
information
00 Received From data from the check the central junction box for related DTCs and
Body Control central junction refer to the relevant DTC index
Module - No sub box
type information
68 Received From data from the check the central junction box for related DTCs and
Body Control central junction refer to the relevant DTC index
Module - Event box
information
68 Received From data from the check the restraints control module for related DTCs
Restraints Control restraints control and refer to the relevant DTC index
Module - Event module
information
U1A14- CAN Initialization Electric park Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
49 Failure - Internal brake control clear the DTCs. Perform Drive Cycle 1. If the fault
electronic failure module internal persists, install a new electric park brake control
failure module
U2002- Switch - General

01 electrical failure NOTE: Circuit NOTE: This DTC can be set by operating the electric
reference SW1 / SW2 / park brake switch very slowly
SW3 / SW4
Electric park electric park brake switch circuits for short circuit to
brake switch ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
circuits short resistance
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U2002- Switch - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
12 short to battery NOTE: Circuit electric park brake switch circuit for short circuit to
reference SW1 / SW2 / power
SW3 / SW4
Electric park
brake switch
circuit short
circuit to power
U2002- Switch - Signal

2F erratic NOTE: Circuit NOTE: This DTC can be set by operating the electric
reference SW1 / SW2 / park brake switch very slowly
SW3 / SW4
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U2002- Switch -
92 Performance or NOTE: Circuit NOTE: This DTC can be set by operating the electric
incorrect operation reference SW1 / SW2 / park brake switch very slowly
SW3 / SW4
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U2012- Car Configuration Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Parameter(s) - No file mismatch check and up-date the car configuration file as
sub type with vehicle necessary
information specification
U3000- Control Module - Electric park Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 No sub type brake control clear the DTCs and retest
information module internal
failure
U3000- Control Module - Electric park Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
16 Circuit voltage brake control check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage
below threshold module power or (0xDD02). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
ground circuit and check the electric park brake control module
open circuit, power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
U3000- Control Module - Battery/charging Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
17 Circuit voltage system fault check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage
above threshold (0xDD02). Refer to the relevant section of the
workshop manual and test the battery and charging
system
U3000- Control Module - Electric park Allow the electric park brake control module to cool,
4B Over temperature brake control clear the DTC and retest. Do not renew the electric
module internal park brake control module as this is a protection
temperature function to ensure no internal damage occurs
above threshold
U300A- Ignition Switch - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
64 Signal plausibility NOTE: Circuit ignition sense circuit for short circuit to ground,
failure reference IGN short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Ignition sense
circuit short
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
Electric Steering Column Lock Control Module (ESCL)
Electric Steering Column Lock Control Module (ESCL)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Electric Steering Column
Lock Control Module (ESCL). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and

B100D- Column Lock Electric Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the electric
16 Authorisation - steering steering column lock circuit for short circuit to ground, open
Circuit voltage column lock circuit, high resistance. If the fault persists, install a new
below circuit short electric steering column lock
threshold circuit to
ground,
open circuit,
high
resistance
B100D- Column Lock Electric Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
29 Authorisation - steering DTCs and perform routine - On Demand Self Test (0x0202).
Signal invalid column lock If the fault persists, install a new electric steering column lock
control
module
internal
failure
B100D- Column Lock Electric Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
42 Authorisation - steering DTCs and perform routine - On Demand Self Test (0x0202).
General column lock If the fault persists, install a new electric steering column lock
memory failure control
module
internal
failure
B100D- Column Lock Electric Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
51 Authorisation - steering configure the electric steering column lock control module
Not column lock with the latest level software
programmed control
module is
not
configured
correctly
B100D- Column Lock Encrypted Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
62 Authorisation - data configure the electric steering column lock control module
Signal compare exchange with the latest level software. Re-configure the instrument
failure does not cluster with the latest level software. If the fault persists,
match perform a CAN network integrity test. Perform routine - On
between Demand Self Test (0x0202)
electric
steering
column lock
and the
instrument
cluster
B100D- Column Lock Incorrect Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
64 Authorisation - conditions to DTCs and perform a CAN network integrity test. Perform
Signal allow locking routine - On Demand Self Test (0x0202). Check the anti-lock
plausibility action to brake system control module for related DTCs and refer to
failure continue the relevant DTC index. Check the engine control module for
related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
B100D- Column Lock Electric Ensure that the vehicle battery supply voltage is between 9
72 Authorisation - steering and 16volts. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Actuator stuck column lock system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU Voltage Supply
open unable to (0xDD02). Clear the DTCs. Perform a CAN network integrity
reach locked test. Perform routine - On Demand Self Test (0x0202). If the
state fault persists, install a new electric steering column lock
Actuator stuck column lock system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU Voltage Supply
closed unable to (0xDD02). Clear the DTCs. Ensure that the column lock bolt
reach movement is not obstructed or restricted (the parked position
unlocked of the road wheels may be exerting a turning force through
state the steering column, preventing the lock from releasing. The
steering wheel may need to be held against the force to
allow the column lock to release). Perform a CAN network
integrity test. Perform routine - On Demand Self Test
(0x0202). If the fault persists, install a new electric steering
column lock
Commanded column lock system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU Voltage Supply
position not unable to (0xDD02). Clear the DTCs. Ensure that the column lock bolt
reachable reach movement is not obstructed or restricted (the parked position
unlocked or of the road wheels may be exerting a turning force through
locked state the steering column, preventing the lock from releasing. The
(0x0202). If the fault persists, install a new electric steering
column lock
Performance or column lock system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU Voltage Supply
incorrect mechanism (0xDD02). Clear the DTCs. Ensure that the column lock bolt
operation jammed, movement is not obstructed or restricted (the parked position
obstructed of the road wheels may be exerting a turning force through
the steering column, preventing the lock from releasing. The
(0x0202). If the problem persists, install a new electric
steering column lock
Unexpected column lock system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU Voltage Supply
operation mechanism (0xDD02). Clear the DTCs. Ensure that the column lock bolt
jammed, movement is not obstructed or restricted (the parked position
Component column lock system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU Voltage Supply
internal failure mechanism (0xDD02). Clear the DTCs. Ensure that the column lock bolt
jammed, movement is not obstructed or restricted (the parked position
U0001- High Speed High speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform
88 CAN CAN bus a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Communication circuit short diagrams and check the high speed CAN bus circuit for short
Bus - Bus off circuit to circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
ground, resistance
short circuit
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
U0300- Internal Electric Ensure that the vehicle battery supply voltage is between 9
00 Control Module steering and 16volts. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Software column lock system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU Voltage Supply
Incompatibility is not (0xDD02). Clear the DTCs. Ensure that the column lock bolt
- No sub type configured movement is not obstructed or restricted (the parked position
information correctly of the road wheels may be exerting a turning force through
allow the column lock to release). Re-configure the electric
steering column lock with the latest level software Perform a
CAN network integrity test. Perform routine - On Demand Self
Test (0x0202). If the problem persists, install a new electric
U3002- Vehicle Electric Install the original or a new electric steering column lock as
81 Identification steering necessary
Number - column lock Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform
Invalid serial previously routine - Learn VIN (0x0404)
data received installed on
another
vehicle
New electric
steering
column lock
installed and
VIN not yet
programmed
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index TDV6 3.0L
Diesel , DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM)
Engine Control Module (ECM) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Engine Control Module
(ECM) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel. For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and
Testing Section in the workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L
Diesel, Diagnosis and Testing).
(ECM) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel. For additional Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) diagnosis and testing information, refer to
the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section in the workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Diesel Particulate Filter (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,

B1087- LIN Bus "A" - No operation Generator LIN bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
93 communication circuit and check the generator LIN bus
failure circuit, for short circuit to power, short
circuit to ground, open circuit. Repair
wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
and retest
B10A2- Crash Input - Signal low This DTC is set when the 'airbag
32 time < minimum NOTE: - Circuit deployed' signal supplied by the
SRS_INPUT - restraints control module is outside the
specification expected by the engine
Restraints control control module
module fault Check the restraints control module for
Auxiliary junction box DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
fault index
Harness fault Check auxiliary junction box for DTCs
and refer to the relevant DTC index
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
check the supplementary restraints
system input circuit for faults. This
circuit is a single wire which connects
the restraints control module to the
auxiliary junction box and the engine
control module. Check this circuit for
short circuit to power or ground, open
circuit including intermittent faults.
Repair wiring as required. Clear DTC
and retest
B10A2- Crash Input - Signal high This DTC is set when the 'airbag
35 time > maximum NOTE: - Circuit deployed' signal supplied by the
Restraints control control module
module fault Check the restraints control module for
Auxiliary junction box DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
fault index
Harness fault Check auxiliary junction box for DTCs
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
check the supplementary restraints
system input circuit for faults. This
circuit is a single wire which connects
the restraints control module to the
and retest
B10A2- Crash Input - Signal This DTC is set when the 'airbag
36 frequency too low NOTE: - Circuit deployed' signal supplied by the
The engine control control module
module detected Check the restraints control module for
excessive duration for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
one cycle of the index
output across a Check auxiliary junction box for DTCs
specified sample size and refer to the relevant DTC index
Restraints control Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
module fault check the supplementary restraints
Auxiliary junction box system input circuit for faults. This
fault circuit is a single wire which connects
Harness fault the restraints control module to the
and retest
B10A2- Crash Input - Signal This DTC is set when the 'airbag
37 frequency too high NOTE: - Circuit deployed' signal supplied by the
The engine control control module
module detected Check the restraints control module for
insufficient duration DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
for one cycle of the index
output across a Check auxiliary junction box for DTCs
specified sample size and refer to the relevant DTC index
Restraints control Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
module fault check the supplementary restraints
Auxiliary junction box system input circuit for faults. This
fault circuit is a single wire which connects
Harness fault the restraints control module to the
and retest
B11D9- Vehicle Battery - No sub Harness fault This DTC is set when the battery
00 type information Battery fault monitoring system fails a diagnostic
Battery monitoring check
system module fault Refer to the battery care manual and
verify that the vehicle battery is fully
charged and serviceable before
continuing with further diagnostic tests.
If a battery fault is indicated Refer to
the warranty policy and procedures
manual, or determine if any prior
approval programme is in operation,
prior to the installation of a new
module/component
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the connections between the
battery and the battery monitoring
module are clean and secure
Ensure that full battery voltage is
present on the monitor line pin at the
battery monitoring system module
connector. Ensure the battery ground
connection is clean and secure
Check the LIN bus connections to the
battery monitoring system module.
Check LIN bus integrity. If no fault
found in wiring harness suspect battery
monitoring system module failure.
Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or determine if any
prior approval programme is in
operation, prior to the installation of a
new module/component
B11DB- Battery Monitoring Module Harness fault This DTC is set when the engine control
87 - Missing message Battery monitoring module has lost communication with
system module fault the battery monitoring system module
Refer to the battery care manual and
verify that the vehicle battery is fully
charged and serviceable before
continuing with further diagnostic tests.
If a battery fault is indicated Refer to
module/component
and check the connections between the
battery and the battery monitoring
module are clean and secure
Ensure that full battery voltage is
present on the monitor line pin at the
battery monitoring system module
connector. Ensure the battery ground
connection is clean and secure
Check the LIN bus connections to the
battery monitoring system module.
Check LIN bus integrity. If no fault
found in wiring harness suspect battery
monitoring system module failure.
B1206- Crash Occurred - Event Event information - This DTC is set if the restraints control
68 information the engine control module has deployed the restraints
module has received a systems following activation of the
crash signal from the crash sensors. Check the restraints
restraints control control module for DTCs and refer to
module the relevant DTC index
P0030- HO2S Heater Control Using the manufacturer approved

11 Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor 1) NOTE: - Circuit LPPH_A diagnostic system check datalogger
- Circuit short to ground - signals, Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater
Duty Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 1 (0x03A1).
The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
module has detected a and check the pre catalyst oxygen
ground measurement sensor heater control (heater ground)
for a period longer circuit for short circuit to ground. This
than expected or has circuit runs from the engine control
detected a ground module through the transmission
measurement when harness to the exhaust system. Check
another value was for external harness damage due to
expected chafing or heat. Repair harness as
Harness fault - Pre required. Clear DTC and retest
catalyst oxygen sensor Suspect sensor failure if DTC resets.
heater control circuit Heater circuit resistance measured at
short circuit to ground the component connector at
Pre catalyst oxygen approximately 20ºC ambient
sensor failure temperature should be 2.4 - 4.0 Ohms.

- Circuit short to battery - signals, Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater
module has detected a and check the pre catalyst oxygen
vehicle power sensor heater control (heater ground)
measurement for a circuit for short circuit to power. This
period longer than circuit runs from the engine control
expected or has module through the transmission
detected a vehicle harness to the exhaust system. Check
power measurement for external harness damage due to
when another value chafing or heat. Repair harness as
was expected required. Clear DTC and retest
Harness fault - Pre Suspect sensor failure if DTC resets.
catalyst oxygen sensor Heater circuit resistance measured at
heater control circuit the component connector at
short circuit to power approximately 20ºC ambient
Pre catalyst oxygen temperature should be 2.4 - 4.0 Ohms.
sensor failure Refer to the warranty policy and

- Circuit open - signals, Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater
module has and check the pre catalyst oxygen
determined an open sensor heater control (heater ground)
circuit via lack of bias circuit for open circuit. This circuit runs
voltage, low current from the engine control module through
flow, no change in the the transmission harness to the
state of an input in exhaust system. Check for external
response to an output harness damage due to chafing or
Harness fault - Pre heat. Repair harness as required. Clear
catalyst oxygen sensor DTC and retest
heater control circuit Suspect sensor failure if DTC resets.
open circuit Heater circuit resistance measured at
Pre catalyst oxygen the component connector at
sensor failure approximately 20ºC ambient
temperature should be 2.4 - 4.0 Ohms.
P0030- HO2S Heater Control Harness fault - Pre Using the manufacturer approved
4B Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor 1) catalyst oxygen sensor diagnostic system check datalogger
- Over temperature heater control circuit signals, Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater
short circuit to power Duty Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 1 (0x03A1).
Pre catalyst oxygen Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
sensor failure and check the pre catalyst oxygen
sensor heater control (heater ground)
circuit for short circuit to power. This
circuit runs from the engine control
module through the transmission
harness to the exhaust system. Check
for external harness damage due to
chafing or heat. Repair harness as
required. Clear DTC and retest
Suspect sensor failure if DTC resets.
Heater circuit resistance measured at
the component connector at
approximately 20ºC ambient
temperature should be 2.4 - 4.0 Ohms.
P0033- Turbocharger/Supercharger Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

00 Bypass Valve Control NOTE: - Circuit CRV - and check the boost air recirculation
Circuit / Open - No sub solenoid control circuit between the
type information Harness fault - Boost engine control module and the control
air recirculation valve for open circuit. Check the power
solenoid control circuit supply to the control valve. Repair any
open circuit wiring faults found. Clear DTC and
Boost air recirculation retest
solenoid failure If no fault found in wiring harness
suspect boost air recirculation solenoid
failure. Refer to the warranty policy
and procedures manual, or determine if
any prior approval programme is in

Circuit Low - No sub type solenoid circuit between the engine
information Harness fault - Boost control module and the control valve
air recirculation for a short circuit to ground. Check the
solenoid circuit short power supply to the control valve.
circuit to ground Repair any wiring faults found. Clear
Boost air recirculation DTC and retest

Circuit High - No sub type solenoid circuit between the engine
information Harness fault - Boost control module and the control valve
air recirculation for a short circuit to power. Check the
solenoid circuit short power supply to the control valve.
circuit to power Repair any wiring faults found. Clear
Boost air recirculation DTC and retest
P0039- Turbocharger/Supercharger Harness fault - Boost Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
4B Bypass Valve Control air recirculation and check the boost air recirculation
Circuit Range/Performance solenoid circuit short solenoid circuit between the engine
- Over temperature to ground, short control module and the control valve
circuit to power, high for a short circuit to ground, short
resistance circuit to power, high resistance. Check
Boost air recirculation the power supply to the control valve.
solenoid failure Repair any wiring faults found. Clear
DTC and retest
If no fault found in wiring harness
P004A- Turbocharger/Supercharger Using the manufacturer approved
00 Boost Control B Circuit / NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Open - No sub type VGT_POS - VGT_NEG - signals, Commanded Boost Actuator
information Control Bank 2 (0x0533), Boost
Harness fault - Pressure Actuator Bank 2 - controller
Variable geometry output (0x03DE). Refer to the electrical
turbocharger actuator circuit diagrams and check the variable
vane control circuit geometry turbocharger actuator vane
open circuit control circuit for open circuit. This
circuit consists of a twisted pair of
wires between the engine control
module and the variable geometry
turbocharger actuator vane control
unit. Check both of the circuits for
open circuit. Repair wiring as required.
Clear DTC and retest
P004A- Turbocharger/Supercharger Using the manufacturer approved

71 Boost Control B Circuit / NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Open - Actuator stuck VGT_POS - VGT_NEG - signals, Commanded Boost Actuator
Control Bank 2 (0x0533), Boost
Harness fault - Pressure Actuator Bank 2 - controller
Variable geometry output (0x03DE). Refer to the electrical
turbocharger actuator circuit diagrams and check the variable
vane control circuit geometry turbocharger actuator vane
open circuit control circuit for open circuit. This
Variable geometry circuit consists of a twisted pair of
turbocharger actuator wires between the engine control
vane failure module and the variable geometry
turbocharger actuator vane control
unit. Check both of the circuits for
open circuit. Repair wiring as required.
Check and install new turbocharger
actuator vane control unit as required.
P004B- Turbocharger/Supercharger Using the manufacturer approved

16 Boost Control B Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - VGT_POS - VGT_NEG - signals, Commanded Boost Actuator
Circuit Voltage Below Control Bank 2 (0x0533). Refer to the
Threshold The engine control electrical circuit diagrams and check
module measured a the variable geometry turbocharger
voltage below a actuator vane control circuit for high
specified range but resistance or short circuits to another
not necessarily a short circuit. This circuit consists of a twisted
circuit to ground pair of wires between the engine
Harness fault - control module and the variable
Variable geometry geometry turbocharger actuator vane
turbocharger actuator control unit. Check both of the circuits
vane control circuit for faults. Repair wiring as required.
Variable geometry Clear DTC and retest
turbocharger actuator If no fault found in wiring harness
vane control unit suspect variable geometry turbocharger
failure control module failure. Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures
module/component

Circuit Current Above Control Bank 2 (0x0533). Refer to the
Threshold Harness fault - electrical circuit diagrams and check
Variable geometry the variable geometry turbocharger
turbocharger actuator actuator vane control circuit for short
vane control circuit circuit to ground, short circuit to
short circuit to power, high resistance. This circuit
ground, short circuit consists of a twisted pair of wires
to power, high between the engine control module and
resistance the variable geometry turbocharger
Variable geometry actuator vane control unit. Check both
turbocharger actuator of the circuits for faults. Repair wiring
vane control unit as required. Clear DTC and retest
failure If no fault found in wiring harness
suspect variable geometry turbocharger
control module failure. Refer to the
module/component

1D Boost Control B Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit Current Out Of Control Bank 2 (0x0533). Refer to the
Range Harness fault - electrical circuit diagrams and check
vane control circuit circuits to another circuit. This circuit
Variable geometry consists of a twisted pair of wires
turbocharger actuator between the engine control module and
vane control unit the variable geometry turbocharger
failure actuator vane control unit. Check both
Mechanical fault on of the circuits for faults. Repair wiring
actuator mechanism as required. Clear DTC and retest
check variable geometry turbocharger
control module for failure
Check for mechanical fault on actuator
mechanism. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual, or
determine if any prior approval
programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new
module/component
P004B- Turbocharger/Supercharger Harness fault - Using the manufacturer approved

4B Boost Control B Circuit Variable geometry diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - Over turbocharger actuator signals, Commanded Boost Actuator
temperature vane control circuit Control Bank 2 (0x0533). Refer to the
short circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground, short circuit the variable geometry turbocharger
to power, high actuator vane control circuit for short
resistance. circuit to ground, short circuit to
Variable geometry power, high resistance. This circuit
turbocharger actuator consists of a twisted pair of wires
vane control unit between the engine control module and
failure the variable geometry turbocharger
Mechanical fault on actuator vane control unit. Check both
actuator mechanism of the circuits for faults. Repair wiring
as required. Clear DTC and retest
check variable geometry turbocharger
control module for failure
Check for mechanical fault on actuator
mechanism. Refer to the warranty
module/component
P004C- Turbocharger/Supercharger Using the manufacturer approved

00 Boost Control B Circuit Low NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
- No sub type information VGT_POS - VGT_NEG - signals, Commanded Boost Actuator
Control Bank 2 (0x0533). Refer to the
Harness fault - electrical circuit diagrams and check
vane control circuit circuit to ground. This circuit consists
short circuit to ground of a twisted pair of wires between the
engine control module and the variable
geometry turbocharger actuator vane
control unit. Check both sides of this
circuit. Repair wiring as required. Clear
DTC and retest

- Circuit short to ground VGT_POS - VGT_NEG - signals, Commanded Boost Actuator
The engine control electrical circuit diagrams and check
module has detected a the variable geometry turbocharger
ground measurement actuator vane control circuit for short
for a period longer circuit to ground. This circuit consists
than expected or has of a twisted pair of wires between the
detected a ground engine control module and the variable
measurement when geometry turbocharger actuator vane
another value was control unit. Repair wiring as required.
expected Clear DTC and retest
Harness fault -
Variable geometry
turbocharger actuator
vane control circuit

circuit - Short to battery VGT_POS - VGT_NEG - signals, Commanded Boost Actuator
The engine control electrical circuit diagrams and check
module has detected a the variable geometry turbocharger
vehicle power actuator vane control circuit for short
measurement for a circuit to power. This circuit consists of
period longer than a twisted pair of wires between the
expected or has engine control module and the variable
detected a vehicle geometry turbocharger actuator vane
power measurement control unit. Repair wiring as required.
when another value Clear DTC and retest
was expected
Harness fault -
Variable geometry
turbocharger actuator
vane control circuit
P004C- Turbocharger/Supercharger Harness fault - Using the manufacturer approved

77 Boost Control B Circuit Low Variable geometry diagnostic system check datalogger
- Commanded position not turbocharger actuator signals, Commanded Boost Actuator
reachable vane control circuit Control Bank 2 (0x0533). Refer to the
short circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground, high the variable geometry turbocharger
resistance, open actuator vane control circuit for short
circuit circuit to ground, high resistance, open
Harness fault - circuit. This circuit consists of a twisted
Variable geometry pair of wires between the engine
turbocharger sensor control module and the variable
circuit, short circuit to geometry turbocharger actuator vane
ground, high control unit. Repair wiring as required.
resistance, open Clear DTC and retest
circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Variable geometry and check the variable geometry
turbocharger actuator turbocharger sensor circuit for short
vane control unit circuit to ground, high resistance, open
failure circuit
control module failure or mechanical
fault on actuator mechanism. Refer to
module/component
P004D- Turbocharger/Supercharger Using the manufacturer approved

High - No sub type VGT_POS - VGT_NEG - signals, Commanded Boost Actuator
information Control Bank 2 (0x0533). Refer to the
Harness fault - electrical circuit diagrams and check
Variable geometry the boost control circuit for short circuit
turbocharger actuator to power. This circuit consists of a
vane control circuit twisted pair of wires between the
short circuit to power engine control module and the variable
geometry turbocharger actuator vane
control unit. Check both sides of this
DTC and retest
P004D- Turbocharger/Supercharger Harness fault - Using the manufacturer approved
77 Boost Control B Circuit Variable geometry diagnostic system check datalogger
High - Commanded turbocharger actuator signals, Commanded Boost Actuator
Position Not Reachable vane control circuit Control Bank 2 (0x0533). Refer to the
short circuit to power electrical circuit diagrams and check
Harness fault - the variable geometry turbocharger
Variable geometry actuator vane control circuit for short
turbocharger sensor circuit to power. This circuit consists of
circuit, short circuit to a twisted pair of wires between the
power engine control module and the variable
Variable geometry geometry turbocharger actuator vane
turbocharger actuator control unit. Repair wiring as required.
vane control unit Clear DTC and retest
failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the variable geometry
turbocharger sensor circuit for short
circuit to power
control module failure or mechanical
fault on actuator mechanism. Refer to
module/component
P006A- MAP - Mass or Volume Air Intake air system, If this DTC is logged with P1247-00,
00 Flow Correlation - No sub high pressure boost P0402-00 & P00BF-07, suspect intake
type information leak bank A air system, high pressure boost leak
Intake air system, bank A
high pressure boost If this DTC is logged with P1247-00,
leak bi-turbo mode suspect intake air system, high
bank B pressure boost leak bi-turbo mode bank
Intake air system, low B
pressure boost leak If this DTC is logged with P00BE-07 &
bank A P0401-00, suspect intake air system,
Intake air system, low low pressure boost leak bank A
pressure boost leak If this DTC is logged with P00BC-00,
bank B suspect intake air system, low pressure
boost leak bank B
Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
P006A- MAP - Mass or Volume Air The engine control Check for other DTCs associated with
22 Flow Correlation - Signal module measured a intake and boost airflow control
Amplitude > Maximum signal voltage above a actuators, refer to the relevant DTC
specified range but index and act on those DTCs first
not necessarily a short Refer to workshop manual and check
circuit to power, gain intake air circuit, boost air circuit and
too high associated control valves, intercooler
Error path indicating and air filter for leaks, blockages,
whether over boost restrictions and control valve actuator
monitoring is active or malfunctions
not Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Fault in induction air and check both mass air flow sensor
circuit circuits for short circuit to ground,
Fault in boost air short circuit to power, high resistance,
circuit open circuit. Repair wiring as required.
Mass air flow sensor Clear DTC and retest
circuit short circuit to Check manifold absolute pressure
ground, short circuit sensor wiring circuits for short circuit
to power, high to ground, short circuit to power, high
resistance, open resistance, open circuit. Repair wiring
circuit as required. Clear DTC and retest
Manifold absolute If no fault found in wiring harness
pressure sensor circuit suspect mass air flow sensor or
short circuit to manifold absolute pressure sensor.
ground, short circuit Check and install new mass air flow or
to power, high manifold absolute pressure sensor as
resistance, open required. Refer to the warranty policy
circuit and procedures manual, or determine if
Mass air flow sensor any prior approval programme is in
failure operation, prior to the installation of a
Manifold absolute new module/component
pressure sensor failure
P0070- Ambient Air Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

16 Sensor Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Voltage Below Threshold AMBIENT_AIR_TEMP - signals, Ambient Air Temperature
Sensor Voltage (0x03BA), Ambient Air
The engine control Temperature (0xF466). This DTC is set
module measured a when the ambient air temperature
voltage below a sensor signal line voltage at the engine
specified range but control module is less than the
not necessarily a short threshold value. The ambient air
circuit to ground temperature sensor thermistor is
Harness fault - mounted in the left door mirror and the
ambient air circuit consists of a ambient air
temperature sensor temperature sensor signal line and a
circuit sensor ground circuit. Refer to the
Ambient air electrical circuit diagrams and check
temperature sensor both sides of the circuit for high
fault resistance or short circuits. Repair
wiring as required
If no faults are found in the wiring
circuits suspect the ambient air
temperature sensor, refer to the
relevant section of the workshop
manual and check the sensor
operation. Refer to the warranty policy
P0070- Ambient Air Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

17 Sensor Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Voltage Above Threshold AMBIENT_AIR_TEMP - signals, Ambient Air Temperature
Sensor Voltage (0x03BA), Ambient Air
The engine control Temperature (0xF466). This DTC is set
module measured a when the ambient air temperature
voltage above a sensor signal line voltage at the engine
specified range but control module is greater than the
not necessarily a short threshold value. The ambient air
circuit to power temperature sensor thermistor is
Harness fault - mounted in the left door mirror and the
ambient air circuit consists of a ambient air
temperature sensor temperature sensor signal line and a
circuit sensor ground circuit. Refer to the
Ambient air electrical circuit diagrams and check
wiring as required
circuits suspect the ambient air
P007A- Charge Air Cooler Using the manufacturer approved

16 Temperature Sensor NOTE: - Circuit ACT - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit (Bank 1) - Circuit signals, Charge Air Temperature
Voltage Below Threshold The engine control Voltage (0x03EE). This DTC is set when
module measured a the air charge temperature sensor
voltage below a signal line voltage at the engine control
specified range but module is less than the threshold value.
not necessarily a short The air charge temperature sensor
circuit to ground thermistor is located in the air intake
Harness fault - air system downstream of the intercooler
charge temperature and consists of a signal line and a
sensor circuit sensor ground circuit. Refer to the
Air charge electrical circuit diagrams and check
wiring as required
circuits suspect the air charge
P007A- Charge Air Cooler Using the manufacturer approved

17 Temperature Sensor NOTE: - Circuit ACT - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit (Bank 1) - Circuit signals, Air Charge Temperature
Voltage Above Threshold The engine control (0x051C). This DTC is set when the air
module measured a charge temperature sensor signal line
voltage above a voltage at the engine control module is
specified range but greater than the threshold value. The
not necessarily a short air charge temperature sensor
circuit to power thermistor is located in the air intake
Harness fault - air system downstream of the intercooler
charge temperature and consists of a signal line and a
sensor circuit sensor ground circuit. Refer to the
Air charge electrical circuit diagrams and check
wiring as required
P007A- Charge Air Cooler Harness fault - air Using the manufacturer approved
62 Temperature Sensor charge temperature diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit (Bank 1) - Signal sensor circuit short signals, Charge Air Temperature
Compare Failure circuit to ground, Voltage (0x03EE). Refer to the
short circuit to power, electrical circuit diagrams and check air
high resistance, open charge temperature sensor circuit for
circuit short circuit to ground, short circuit to
Air charge power, high resistance, open circuit.
temperature sensor Repair wiring as required
fault If no faults are found in the wiring
P0087- Fuel Rail/System Pressure Low level fuel Check the fuel volume available in the
00 - Too Low - No sub type condition fuel tank is sufficient, add fuel as
information Fuel gauge sender unit required. Clear DTC and retest
sticking Check the fuel gauge sender units for
Fuel rail pressure correct operation
sensor signal circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
short circuit to power and check fuel rail pressure sensor
Fuel lines restricted circuit for short circuit to power
Fuel lines leaking Check fuel lines for restriction
Fuel pump failure Check fuel lines for leakage
Fuel rail pressure Check for fuel pump related DTCs and
sensor signal circuit refer to the relevant DTC index
short circuit to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Fuel rail pressure and check fuel rail pressure sensor
sensor signal circuit circuit for short circuit to ground, open
open circuit circuit, high resistance
Fuel rail pressure Repair wiring as required. If no wiring
sensor circuit high faults are found suspect fuel rail
resistance pressure sensor. Refer to the warranty
Fuel rail pressure policy and procedures manual, or
sensor failure determine if any prior approval
module/component
P0087- Fuel Rail/System Pressure The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
16 - Too Low - Circuit Voltage module measured a and check fuel rail pressure sensor
Below Threshold voltage below a circuit for short circuit to ground, open
specified range but circuit, high resistance
not necessarily a short Repair wiring as required. If no wiring
circuit to ground faults are found suspect fuel rail
Fuel rail pressure pressure sensor. Refer to the warranty
sensor circuit, short policy and procedures manual, or
circuit to ground, determine if any prior approval
open circuit, high programme is in operation, prior to the
resistance installation of a new
Fuel rail pressure module/component
sensor failure
P0087- Fuel Rail/System Pressure The engine control Check fuel lines for restriction
21 - Too Low - Signal module measured a Check fuel lines for leakage
Amplitude < Minimum signal voltage below a Check fuel injector's for stuck open,
specified range but leakage
not necessarily a short Check for fuel pump related DTCs and
circuit to ground, gain refer to the relevant DTC index
low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Fuel lines restricted and check fuel rail pressure sensor
Fuel lines leaking circuit for short circuit to ground, open
Fuel injector's stuck circuit, high resistance
open, leaking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Fuel pump failure and check fuel pressure control valve
Fuel rail pressure circuit for short circuit to ground, open
sensor circuit short circuit, high resistance
circuit to ground, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
open circuit, high and check fuel volume control valve
resistance circuit for short circuit to ground, open
Fuel pressure control circuit, high resistance
valve circuit short If no wiring faults are found suspect
circuit to ground, fuel rail pressure sensor. Refer to the
open circuit, high warranty policy and procedures
resistance manual, or determine if any prior
Fuel volume control approval programme is in operation,
valve circuit short prior to the installation of a new
circuit to ground, module/component
open circuit, high If no wiring faults are found suspect
resistance fuel pressure control valve. Refer to
Fuel rail pressure the warranty policy and procedures
sensor failure manual, or determine if any prior
Fuel pressure control approval programme is in operation,
valve failure prior to the installation of a new
Fuel volume control module/component
valve failure If no wiring faults are found suspect
fuel volume control valve. Refer to the
module/component
P0088- Fuel Rail/System Pressure Fuel gauge sender unit Check the fuel gauge sender units for
00 - Too High - No sub type sticking correct operation
information Fuel rail pressure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
sensor signal circuit and check fuel rail pressure sensor
short circuit to power circuit for short circuit to power
Fuel rail pressure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
sensor ground circuit and check fuel rail pressure sensor
high resistance ground circuit for high resistance
sensor ground circuit and check fuel rail pressure sensor
open circuit ground circuit for open circuit
Fuel pressure control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
valve circuit short and check fuel pressure control valve
circuit to power, circuit for short circuit to power,
ground, open circuit, ground, open circuit, high resistance
high resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Fuel volume control and check fuel volume control valve
valve circuit short circuit for short circuit to power,
circuit to power, ground, open circuit, high resistance
ground, open circuit, If no wiring faults are found suspect
high resistance fuel rail pressure sensor. Refer to the
Fuel rail pressure warranty policy and procedures
Fuel pressure control approval programme is in operation,
valve failure prior to the installation of a new
Fuel volume control module/component
valve failure If no wiring faults are found suspect
fuel pressure control valve. Refer to
module/component
If no wiring faults are found suspect
fuel volume control valve. Refer to the
module/component
P0088- Fuel Rail/System Pressure The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
17 - Too High - circuit voltage module measured a and check fuel rail pressure sensor
above threshold voltage above a circuit for short circuit to power
specified range but
not necessarily a short
circuit to power
Fuel rail pressure
sensor signal circuit
P0088- Fuel Rail/System Pressure The engine control Check the fuel gauge sender units for
22 - Too High - Signal module measured a correct operation
Amplitude > Maximum signal voltage above a Check fuel lines for restriction
specified range but Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
not necessarily a short and check fuel rail pressure sensor
circuit to power, gain circuit for short circuit to power,
too high ground, open circuit, high resistance
Fuel gauge sender unit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
sticking and check fuel pressure control valve
Fuel lines restricted circuit for short circuit to power,
Fuel rail pressure ground, open circuit, high resistance
sensor circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit to power, and check fuel volume control valve
ground, open circuit, circuit for short circuit to power,
high resistance ground, open circuit, high resistance
Fuel pressure control If no wiring faults are found suspect
valve circuit short fuel rail pressure sensor. Refer to the
circuit to power, warranty policy and procedures
ground, open circuit, manual, or determine if any prior
high resistance approval programme is in operation,
Fuel volume control prior to the installation of a new
valve circuit short module/component
circuit to power, If no wiring faults are found suspect
ground, open circuit, fuel pressure control valve. Refer to
high resistance the warranty policy and procedures
Fuel rail pressure manual, or determine if any prior
sensor failure approval programme is in operation,
Fuel pressure control prior to the installation of a new
valve failure module/component
Fuel volume control If no wiring faults are found suspect
valve failure fuel volume control valve. Refer to the
Fuel pump failure warranty policy and procedures
module/component
Check for fuel pump related DTCs and
P0089- Fuel Pressure Regulator The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
21 Performance - Signal module measured a and check fuel pressure regulator
Amplitude < Minimum signal voltage below a circuit for short circuit to ground
not necessarily a short and check fuel pressure regulator
circuit to ground, gain circuit for open circuit
Fuel pressure and check fuel pressure regulator
regulator signal circuit reference voltage circuit for high
short circuit to ground resistance
Fuel pressure If no wiring faults are found suspect
regulator signal circuit fuel rail pressure sensor. Refer to the
open circuit warranty policy and procedures
Fuel pressure manual, or determine if any prior
regulator reference approval programme is in operation,
voltage circuit high prior to the installation of a new
resistance module/component
Fuel pressure
regulator failure
P0089- Fuel Pressure Regulator The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
22 Performance - Signal module measured a and check fuel pressure regulator
Amplitude > Maximum signal voltage above a circuit for short circuit to power
specified range but If no wiring faults are found suspect
not necessarily a short fuel rail pressure sensor. Refer to the
circuit to power, gain warranty policy and procedures
too high manual, or determine if any prior
Fuel pressure approval programme is in operation,
regulator signal circuit prior to the installation of a new
short circuit to power module/component
Fuel pressure
regulator failure
P0090- Fuel Pressure Regulator 1 Using the manufacturer approved

13 Control Circuit/Open - NOTE: - Circuit PCV - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit open signals, Fuel Pressure Relief Control
The engine control Valve Duty Cycle (0x03C3). Refer to
module has the electrical circuit diagrams and
determined an open check the fuel pressure control valve
circuit via lack of bias control circuit for open circuit. Repair
voltage, low current wiring as required. Clear DTC and
flow, no change in the retest
state of an input in
response to an output
Harness fault - Fuel
pressure control valve
control circuit open
circuit
P0090- Fuel Pressure Regulator 1 Fuel pressure control Using the manufacturer approved
4B Control Circuit/Open - valve signal circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Over temperature short circuit to power, signals, Fuel Pressure Relief Control
open circuit Valve Duty Cycle (0x03C3). Refer to
Fuel pressure the electrical circuit diagrams and
regulator failure check fuel pressure control valve circuit
for short circuit to power, open circuit
fuel rail pressure sensor. Refer to the
module/component

11 Control Circuit Low - NOTE: - Circuit PCV - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit short to ground signals, Fuel Pressure Relief Control
module has detected a the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground measurement check the fuel pressure control valve
for a period longer circuit for short circuit to ground.
than expected or has Check harness from engine control
detected a ground module to control valve connector for
measurement when external damage caused by chafing or
another value was heat. Check power supply circuit to
expected control valve. Repair wiring as
Harness fault - fuel required. Clear DTC and retest
pressure control valve If no wiring faults are found suspect
circuit short circuit to the fuel pressure control valve. Refer
ground to the warranty policy and procedures
Fuel pressure control manual, or determine if any prior
valve failure approval programme is in operation,
module/component

16 Control Circuit Low - NOTE: - Circuit PCV - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit Voltage Below signals, Fuel Pressure Relief Control
Threshold The engine control Valve Duty Cycle (0x03C3). This DTC is
module measured a set when the voltage on the fuel
voltage below a pressure control valve circuit is less
specified range but than the threshold expected by the
not necessarily a short engine control module. Check harness
circuit to ground from engine control module to control
Harness fault - fuel valve connector for external damage
pressure control valve caused by chafing or heat. Refer to the
circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check
Fuel pressure control the power supply circuit to the control
valve failure valve. Check the control circuit
between the engine control module and
the fuel pressure control valve for
faults such as high resistance, short
circuit to ground, intermittent open
DTC and retest
the fuel pressure control valve. Refer
to the warranty policy and procedures
module/component

12 Control Circuit High - NOTE: - Circuit PCV - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit short to battery signals, Fuel Pressure Relief Control
module has detected a the electrical circuit diagrams and
vehicle power check the fuel pressure control valve
measurement for a circuit for short circuit to power. Check
period longer than harness from engine control module to
expected or has control valve connector for external
detected a vehicle damage caused by chafing or heat.
power measurement Check power supply circuit to control
when another value valve. Repair wiring as required. Clear
was expected DTC and retest
Harness fault - fuel
pressure control valve
power

17 Control Circuit High - NOTE: - Circuit PCV - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit Voltage Above signals, Fuel Pressure Relief Control
Threshold The engine control Valve Duty Cycle (0x03C3). This DTC is
module measured a set when the voltage on the fuel
voltage above a pressure control valve circuit is more
specified range but than the threshold expected by the
not necessarily a short engine control module. Check harness
circuit to power from engine control module to fuel
Harness fault - fuel pressure control valve connector for
pressure control valve external damage caused by chafing or
circuit heat. Refer to the electrical circuit
Fuel pressure control diagrams and check the control circuit
valve failure between the engine control module and
the fuel pressure control valve for
faults such as high resistance, short
circuit to power. Repair wiring as
the fuel pressure control valve. Refer
module/component
P00AA- Intake Air Temperature NOTES: Using the manufacturer approved

16 Sensor 1 Circuit (Bank 2) - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit Voltage Below signals, Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Threshold - Circuit (0x1279), Intake Air Temperature
AIR_INTAKE_TEMP - (0xF40F). This DTC is set when the
voltage on the intake air temperature
sensor circuit is less than the threshold
Circuit diagram expected by the engine control module.
component name maf/iat The intake air temperature sensor is
sensor integrated into the electronics package
of the mass air flow. The sensor circuit
The engine control consists of a thermistor exposed to air
module measured a passing through the mass air flow
voltage below a sensor, the engine control module
specified range but signal line voltage passes though the
not necessarily a short thermistor and shares the same ground
circuit to ground circuit as the mass air flow element of
Harness fault - Intake the sensor. Check the harness between
air temperature sensor the engine control module and the
circuit mass airflow sensor for damage caused
Intake air temperature by chaffing or heat. Refer to the
sensor fault (part of electrical circuit diagrams and check all
mass air flow sensor) the circuits connected to the mass air
flow sensor for open circuits, short
circuits, high resistance and
intermittent connections. Check mass
airflow sensor 2 circuits as both
sensors share the ground connection.
Repair wiring as required, clear the
DTC and retest the system
If the DTC resets and there are no
harness faults suspect the intake air
temperature sensor fault (part of mass
air flow sensor). Refer to the warranty
module/component
P00AA- Intake Air Temperature NOTES: Using the manufacturer approved

17 Sensor 1 Circuit (Bank 2) - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit Voltage Above signals, Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Threshold - Circuit (0x1279), Intake Air Temperature
AIR_INTAKE_TEMP - (0xF40F). This DTC is set when the
voltage on the intake air temperature
sensor circuit is greater than the
Circuit diagram threshold expected by the engine
component name maf/iat control module. The intake air
sensor temperature sensor is integrated into
the electronics package of the mass air
The engine control flow. The sensor circuit consists of a
module measured a thermistor exposed to air passing
voltage above a through the mass air flow sensor, the
specified range but engine control module signal line
not necessarily a short voltage passes though the thermistor
circuit to power and shares the same ground circuit as
Harness fault - Intake the mass air flow element of the
air temperature sensor sensor. Check the harness between the
circuit engine control module and the mass
Intake air temperature airflow sensor for damage caused by
sensor fault (part of chaffing or heat. Refer to the electrical
mass air flow sensor) circuit diagrams and check all the
circuits connected to the mass air flow
sensor for open circuits, short circuits,
high resistance and intermittent
connections. Check mass airflow sensor
2 circuits as both sensors share the
ground connection. Repair wiring as
required, clear the DTC and retest the
system
module/component
P00AA- Intake Air Temperature Harness fault - Intake Check the harness between the engine
62 Sensor 1 Circuit (Bank 2) - air temperature sensor control module and the mass airflow
Signal Compare Failure circuit sensor for damage caused by chaffing
Intake air temperature or heat. Refer to the electrical circuit
sensor fault (part of diagrams and check all the circuits
mass air flow sensor) connected to the mass air flow sensor
for open circuit, short circuit, high
resistance and intermittent connections.
Check mass airflow sensor 2 circuits as
both sensors share the ground
connection. Repair wiring as required,
clear the DTC and retest the system
module/component
P00BC- Mass or Volume Air Flow A Boost air solenoid If this DTC is logged with P1247-00,
00 Circuit Range/Performance stuck shut bi-turbo suspect boost air solenoid stuck shut
- Air Flow Too Low - No mode bi-turbo mode
sub type information Turbine intake If this DTC is logged with P22D3-77 &
solenoid stuck shut P22CF-71, suspect turbine intake
Intake system low solenoid stuck shut
pressure boost leak If this DTC is logged with P006A-00,
bank 2 suspect intake system low pressure
boost leak bank 2
P00BC- Mass or Volume Air Flow A This DTC is set if the mass air flow
07 Circuit Range/Performance NOTE: Circuit diagram signal from sensor 1 is less than the
- Air Flow Too Low - component name maf/iat value expected by the engine control
Mechanical Failures sensor module. Refer to the relevant sections
of the workshop manual and check the
Airflow disruption at induction system for air leaks, and
sensing element of obstructions to flow. Check the
mass air flow sensor condition of the air filter and examine
Mass air flow sensor the induction pipes for debris which
failure could disrupt air flow at the sensing
element. Clear the DTC and retest the
system
harness faults suspect the mass air
flow sensor . Refer to the warranty
module/component
P00BD- Mass or Volume Air Flow A Refer to the relevant sections of the
00 Circuit Range/Performance NOTE: Circuit diagram workshop manual and check the
- Air Flow Too High - No component name maf/iat induction system for air leaks
sub type information sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check mass air flow sensor for
Air leak at air intake short circuit to power. Repair wiring as
system A required, clear the DTC and retest the
Harness fault - Mass system
air flow sensor circuit If the DTC resets and there are no
short circuit to power harness faults suspect the mass air
Mass air flow sensor flow sensor . Refer to the warranty
failure policy and procedures manual, or
module/component
P00BD- Mass or Volume Air Flow A Boost air solenoid If this DTC is logged with P0235-94
07 Circuit Range/Performance stuck open mono suspect, boost air solenoid stuck open
- Air Flow Too High - turbo mode mono turbo mode
Mechanical Failures Turbine intake If this DTC is logged with P0235-94
solenoid leakage when suspect, turbine intake solenoid leakage
closed when closed
Turbine intake If this DTC is logged with P0235-94,
solenoid stuck open P22D2-77, P1247-00 & P22CF-71
Intake air system, suspect, turbine intake solenoid stuck
blocked low pressure open
air intake. This failure If this DTC is logged with P0235-94,
mode can be caused P22D2-77, P1247-00 & P22CF-71
by snow packing in suspect, intake air system, blocked low
the intake system. pressure air intake
Symptoms often If this DTC is logged with P00BE-07 &
disappear after the P1247-00 suspect, primary
vehicle has been turbocharger seized
warmed and heat Using the manufacturer approved
soaked. Similar diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
symptoms to seized EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
primary turbo
Primary turbo charger
seized
P00BE- Mass or Volume Air Flow B If this DTC is logged with P1247-00,
00 Circuit Range/Performance NOTE: Circuit diagram suspect boost air recirculation solenoid
- Air Flow Too Low - No component name maf/iat stuck open. Refer to the relevant
sub type information sensor sections of the workshop manual and
check the boost air recirculation
Boost air recirculation solenoid circuit for short circuit to
solenoid stuck open power, ground, open circuit. Check and
bi-turbo mode install a new boost air recirculation
Airflow disruption at solenoid as required. Refer to the
sensing element of warranty policy and procedures
mass air flow sensor 2 manual, or determine if any prior
Harness fault - Mass approval programme is in operation,
air flow sensor circuit prior to the installation of a new
short circuit to module/component. Refer to the
ground, high relevant sections of the workshop
resistance, open manual and check the induction system
circuit for air leaks, and obstructions to flow.
Mass air flow sensor 2 Check the condition of the air filter and
failure examine the induction pipes for debris
which could disrupt air flow at the
sensing element
and check mass air flow sensor 2 for
short circuit to ground, high resistance,
open circuit. Repair wiring as required,
clear the DTC and retest the system
If the DTC resets suspect the mass air
flow sensor. Check and install a new
mass air flow sensor 2 as required.
P00BE- Mass or Volume Air Flow B This DTC is set if the mass air flow
- Air Flow Too Low - component name maf/iat value expected by the engine control
Mechanical Failures sensor module. Refer to the relevant sections
mass air flow condition of the air filter and examine
Mass air flow failure the induction pipes for debris which
could disrupt air flow at the sensing
element. Clear the DTC and retest the
system
mass air flow as required. Refer to the
module/component
P00BF- Mass or Volume Air Flow B Air leak at air intake If this DTC is logged with P00BE-00,
00 Circuit Range/Performance system B suspect boost air recirculation solenoid
- Air Flow Too High - No Harness fault - Mass stuck open. Refer to the relevant
sub type information air flow sensor circuit sections of the workshop manual and
short circuit to power check the boost air recirculation
Mass air flow sensor 2 solenoid circuit for short circuit to
failure power, ground, open circuit. Check and
install a new boost air recirculation
solenoid as required. Refer to the
module/component. Refer to the
relevant sections of the workshop
manual and check the induction system
for air leaks
and check mass air flow sensor 2 for
short circuit to power. Repair wiring as
system
P00BF- Mass or Volume Air Flow B Intake air system, If this DTC is logged with P1247-00,
07 Circuit Range/Performance high pressure boost P006A-00 & P00BF-07, suspect intake
- Air Flow Too High - leak bank A air system, high pressure boost leak
Mechanical Failures bank A
P00CF- Secondary Compressor Boost air circuit leak This DTC is set when the engine control
62 Outlet Pressure Sensor - or blockage module detects a signal compare failure
Signal compare failure Boost air recirculation on the boost air pressure sensor signal.
solenoid fault Check the sensor hose for blockages or
Boost air solenoid fault leaks. Check the sensor and harness
Mechanical fault - for mechanical damage caused by heat
sensor hose blocked or chaffing. Check for DTCs relating to
or leaking faults on the Accelerator Pedal Position
Harness fault - Boost sensor as these sensors share power
air pressure sensor supply and ground connections
circuit The boost air pressure sensor has
Boost air pressure three circuits, a 5 volt supply, a sensor
sensor failure ground, and an analogue voltage signal
line. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the sensor voltage
and ground supplies for open circuits or
short circuit to ground. Check the
signal line for open circuit, short circuit
to power, short circuit to ground.
Repair the wiring harness as required
suspect boost air pressure sensor
failure. The sensor provides an
analogue voltage output in response to
the pressure applied at the sensing
orifice. The output voltage range is
between 0.2 and 4.8 volts. Refer to the
module/component
P0101- Mass or Volume Air Flow A This DTC is set if the mass air flow
- Signal Amplitude < component name maf/iat value expected by the engine control
Minimum sensor module. Refer to the relevant sections
The engine control induction system for air leaks, and
module measured a obstructions to flow. Check the
signal voltage below a condition of the air filter and examine
specified range but the induction pipes for debris which
not necessarily a short could disrupt air flow at the sensing
circuit to ground, gain element
Airflow disruption at and check mass air flow sensor for
sensing element of short circuit to ground, high resistance,
mass air flow sensor open circuit. Repair wiring as required,
Harness fault - Mass clear the DTC and retest the system
air flow sensor circuit If the DTC resets suspect the mass air
short circuit to flow sensor. Check and install a new
ground, high mass air flow sensor as required. Refer
resistance, open to the warranty policy and procedures
circuit manual, or determine if any prior
Mass air flow sensor approval programme is in operation,
failure prior to the installation of a new
module/component
P0101- Mass or Volume Air Flow A This DTC is set if the mass air flow
- Signal Amplitude > component name maf/iat value expected by the engine control
Maximum sensor module. Refer to the relevant sections
signal voltage above a condition of the air filter and examine
circuit to power, gain element
too high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Airflow disruption at and check mass air flow sensor for
sensing element of short circuit to power. Repair wiring as
mass air flow sensor required, clear the DTC and retest the
short circuit to power flow sensor. Check and install a new
Mass air flow sensor mass air flow sensor as required. Refer
failure to the warranty policy and procedures
module/component
P0101- Mass or Volume Air Flow Airflow disruption at This DTC is set if the mass air flow
92 Sensor "A" Circuit sensing element of signal from sensor 1 is less than the
Range/Performance - mass air flow sensor value expected by the engine control
Performance or incorrect Harness fault - Mass module. Refer to the relevant sections
operation air flow sensor circuit of the workshop manual and check the
short circuit to induction system for air leaks, and
ground, short circuit obstructions to flow. Check the
to power, open circuit, condition of the air filter and examine
high resistance the induction pipes for debris which
Mass air flow sensor could disrupt air flow at the sensing
failure element
and check mass air flow sensor for
short circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit, high resistance.
mass air flow sensor as required. Refer
module/component
P0102- Mass or Volume Air Flow A NOTES: Using the manufacturer approved
00 Circuit Low - No sub type diagnostic system check datalogger
information signals, Air Flow Rate From mass air
- Circuit MAFS_B - flow Sensor Bank 1 (0x0504). This DTC
is set if the mass air flow signal from
sensor 1 is less than the value
component name maf/iat Refer to the relevant sections of the
sensor workshop manual and check the
induction system for air leaks, and
Airflow disruption at obstructions to flow. Check the
sensing element of condition of the air filter and examine
mass air flow sensor the induction pipes for debris which
Harness fault - Mass could disrupt air flow at the sensing
air flow sensor circuits element
Mass air flow sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
failure and check the power and ground
circuits for the mass air flow sensors
for high resistance, short circuits to
power or ground, check the mass air
flow signal line between the engine
control module and the mass air flow
sensor for high resistance, and
intermittent faults. Repair wiring as
system
flow sensor. Refer to the warranty
module/component
P0103- Mass or Volume Air Flow A NOTES: Using the manufacturer approved
00 Circuit High - No sub type diagnostic system check datalogger
information signals, Air Flow Rate From Mass Air
- Circuit MAFS_B - Flow Sensor Bank 1 (0x0504). This
DTC is set if the mass air flow signal
from sensor 1 is greater than the value
mass air flow sensor the induction pipes for debris which
air flow sensor circuits element. Refer to the electrical circuit
Mass air flow sensor diagrams and check the power and
failure ground circuits for the mass air flow
sensors for high resistance, short
circuits to power or ground, check the
mass air flow signal line between the
engine control module and the mass air
flow sensor for high resistance, and
system. If the DTC resets suspect the
mass air flow sensor. Refer to the
module/component
diagnostic system check datalogger
signals, Air Flow Rate From Mass Air
Flow Sensor Bank 1 (0x0504). This
expected by the engine control module.
Refer to the relevant sections of the
workshop manual and check the
obstructions to flow. Check the
condition of the air filter and examine
the induction pipes for debris which
could disrupt air flow at the sensing
element
and check the power and ground
system
module/component
P0105- Manifold Absolute Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

16 Pressure/BARO circuit - NOTE: - Circuit MAP - and check the 5 volt supply circuit for
Circuit voltage below open circuits, high resistance, short
threshold The engine control circuit to ground. Check the sensor
module measured a ground for open circuit, short circuit to
voltage below a power. Check the signal circuit for
specified range but short circuit to ground, high resistance.
not necessarily a short Repair wiring as required, clear the
circuit to ground DTC and retest the system
Harness fault - . If the DTC resets and there are no
Manifold absolute harness faults suspect the manifold
pressure sensor absolute pressure sensor. Refer to the
circuits warranty policy and procedures
Manifold absolute manual, or determine if any prior
pressure sensor failure approval programme is in operation,
Blockage or leak prior to the installation of a new
between the intake module/component
manifold and the Using the manufacturer approved
manifold absolute diagnostic system check datalogger
pressure sensor signals, Corrected Intake Manifold
Absolute Pressure (0x0322), Manifold
Absolute Pressure Sensor Voltage
(0x0301), Manifold Absolute Pressure
Bank 1 (0x052C). This DTC is set when
the voltage on the manifold absolute
pressure sensor signal circuit is less
than the threshold expected by the
engine control module. This sensor is a
pressure transducer with a 5 volt
sensor supply, a sensor ground, and a
signal circuit. Refer to the workshop
manual and check the manifold
absolute pressure sensor is correctly
connected to the air intake manifold
and there are no blockages or air leaks
preventing communication of pressure
changes between the manifold and the
sensor. Check for DTCs associated with
the throttle position sensor which has a
common power supply

17 Pressure/BARO circuit - NOTE: - Circuit MAP - and check the 5 volt supply circuit for
Circuit voltage above short circuit to power. Check the
threshold The engine control sensor ground for open circuit, short
module measured a circuit to power. Check the signal
voltage above a circuit for short circuit to power. Repair
specified range but wiring as required, clear the DTC and
not necessarily a short retest the system
circuit to power If the DTC resets and there are no
Harness fault - harness faults suspect the manifold
Manifold absolute absolute pressure sensor. Refer to the
pressure sensor warranty policy and procedures
circuits manual, or determine if any prior
Manifold absolute approval programme is in operation,
pressure sensor failure prior to the installation of a new
Blockage or leak module/component
between the intake Using the manufacturer approved
manifold and the diagnostic system check datalogger
manifold pressure signals, Corrected Intake Manifold
sensor Absolute Pressure (0x0504), Manifold
pressure sensor signal circuit is greater
signal circuit. The sensing element is
connected to intake manifold pressure
downstream of the throttle plate. Refer
to the workshop manual and check the
manifold absolute pressure sensor is
correctly connected to the air intake
manifold and there are no blockages or
air leaks preventing communication of
pressure changes between the manifold
and the sensor. Check for DTCs
associated with the throttle position
sensor which has a common power
supply

65 Pressure/Barometric NOTE: - Circuit MAP - and check the 5 volt supply circuit for
Pressure Sensor Circuit - short circuit to power. Check the
Signal has too few Harness fault - sensor ground for open circuit, short
transitions / events Manifold absolute circuit to power. Check the signal
pressure sensor circuit for short circuit to power. Repair
circuits wiring as required, clear the DTC and
Manifold absolute retest the system
pressure sensor failure If the DTC resets and there are no
Blockage or leak harness faults suspect the manifold
between the intake absolute pressure sensor. Refer to the
manifold and the warranty policy and procedures
manifold pressure manual, or determine if any prior
sensor approval programme is in operation,
module/component
signals, Corrected Intake Manifold
connected to Intake Manifold Pressure
supply

Pressure Sensor Circuit short circuit to power. Check the
Low - No sub type Harness fault - sensor ground for open circuit, short
information Manifold absolute circuit to power. Check the signal
pressure sensor circuit for short circuit to power. Repair
circuits wiring as required, clear the DTC and
Manifold absolute retest the system
pressure sensor failure If the DTC resets and there are no
Blockage or leak harness faults suspect the manifold
between the intake absolute pressure sensor. Refer to the
manifold and the warranty policy and procedures
manifold pressure manual, or determine if any prior
sensor approval programme is in operation,
module/component
connected to Intake Manifold Pressure
supply

Pressure Sensor Circuit open circuit, short circuit to power,
Low - Circuit voltage below The engine control short circuit to ground. Check the
threshold module measured a sensor ground for open circuit, short
voltage below a circuit to power. Check the signal
specified range but circuit for open circuit, short circuit to
not necessarily a short power, short circuit to ground. Repair
circuit to ground wiring as required, clear the DTC and
Harness fault - retest the system
Manifold absolute If the DTC resets and there are no
pressure sensor harness faults suspect the manifold
circuits absolute pressure sensor. Refer to the
Manifold absolute warranty policy and procedures
pressure sensor failure manual, or determine if any prior
Blockage or leak approval programme is in operation,
between the intake prior to the installation of a new
manifold and the module/component
manifold pressure Using the manufacturer approved
sensor diagnostic system check datalogger
the manifold absolute pressure sensor
signal voltage is lower than expected
by the engine control module. This
sensor is a pressure transducer with a
5 volt sensor supply, a sensor ground,
and a signal circuit. The sensing
element is connected to intake manifold
pressure downstream of the throttle
plate. Refer to the workshop manual
and check the manifold absolute
pressure sensor is correctly connected
to the air intake manifold and there are
no blockages or air leaks preventing
communication of pressure changes
between the manifold and the sensor

High - No sub type Harness fault - short circuit to ground. Check the
information Manifold absolute sensor ground for open circuit, short
pressure sensor circuit to power. Check the signal
circuits circuit for open circuit, short circuit to
Manifold absolute power, short circuit to ground. Repair
pressure sensor failure wiring as required, clear the DTC and
Blockage or leak retest the system
between the intake If the DTC resets and there are no
manifold and the harness faults suspect the manifold
manifold pressure absolute pressure sensor. Refer to the
sensor warranty policy and procedures
module/component
signal voltage is greater than expected
element is connected to Intake
Manifold Pressure downstream of the
throttle plate. Refer to the workshop
manual and check the manifold
absolute pressure sensor is corrected
connected to the air intake manifold
and there are no blockages or air leaks
preventing communication of pressure
changes between the manifold and the
sensor
High - Circuit voltage The engine control short circuit to ground. Check the
above threshold module measured a sensor ground for open circuit, short
voltage above a circuit to power. Check the signal
specified range but circuit for open circuit, short circuit to
not necessarily a short power, short circuit to ground. Repair
circuit to power wiring as required, clear the DTC and
Harness fault - retest the system
Manifold absolute If the DTC resets and there are no
pressure sensor harness faults suspect the manifold
circuits absolute pressure sensor. Refer to the
Manifold absolute warranty policy and procedures
pressure sensor failure manual, or determine if any prior
Blockage or leak approval programme is in operation,
between the intake prior to the installation of a new
manifold and the module/component
manifold pressure Using the manufacturer approved
sensor diagnostic system check datalogger
signal voltage is greater than expected
element is connected to intake manifold
pressure downstream of the throttle
plate. Refer to the workshop manual
and check the manifold absolute
pressure sensor is corrected connected
to the air intake manifold and there are
no blockages or air leaks preventing
communication of pressure changes
between the manifold and the sensor
P010A- Mass or Volume Air Flow This DTC is set if the mass air flow
92 Sensor "B" Circuit - NOTE: Circuit diagram signal from sensor 2 is greater than the
Performance or incorrect component name maf/iat value expected by the engine control
operation sensor module. Refer to the relevant sections
mass air flow condition of the air filter and examine
Harness fault - Mass the induction pipes for debris which
air flow sensor circuit could disrupt air flow at the sensing
short circuit to element
ground, short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
to power, open circuit, and check mass air flow sensor 2 for
high resistance short circuit to ground, short circuit to
Mass air flow failure power, open circuit, high resistance.
P010B- Mass or Volume Air Flow B This DTC is set if the mass air flow
- Signal Amplitude < component name maf/iat value expected by the engine control
Minimum sensor module. Refer to the relevant sections
signal voltage below a condition of the air filter and examine
circuit to ground, gain element
Airflow disruption at and check mass air flow sensor 2 for
sensing element of short circuit to ground, high resistance,
mass air flow open circuit. Repair wiring as required,
Harness fault - Mass clear the DTC and retest the system
short circuit to flow sensor. Check and install a new
ground, high mass air flow sensor 2 as required.
resistance, open Refer to the warranty policy and
circuit procedures manual, or determine if any
Mass air flow failure prior approval programme is in
P010B- Mass or Volume Air Flow B This DTC is set if the mass air flow
- Signal Amplitude > component name maf/iat value expected by the engine control
Maximum sensor module. Refer to the relevant sections
signal voltage above a condition of the air filter and examine
circuit to power, gain element
too high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Airflow disruption at and check mass air flow sensor 2 for
sensing element of short circuit to power. Repair wiring as
mass air flow sensor 2 required, clear the DTC and retest the
short circuit to power flow sensor. Check and install a new
Mass air flow failure mass air flow sensor 2 as required.
P010C- Mass or Volume Air Flow B NOTES: Using the manufacturer approved
00 Circuit Low - No sub type diagnostic system check datalogger
- Circuit MAFS_A - Flow Sensor Bank 2 (0x0505). This
from sensor 2 is less than the value
mass air flow the induction pipes for debris which
Mass air flow failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
system
module/component
P010D- Mass or Volume Air Flow B NOTES: Using the manufacturer approved
00 Circuit High - No sub type diagnostic system check datalogger
- Circuit MAFS_A - Flow Sensor Bank 2 (0x0505). This
mass air flow the induction pipes for debris which
Mass air flow failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
system
module/component
P0116- Engine Coolant Using the manufacturer approved

00 Temperature Sensor 1 NOTE: - Circuit ECT - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit Range/Performance signals, Engine Coolant Temperature
- No sub type information Engine coolant level or Sensor (0x0357), Engine Coolant
flow fault Temperature (0xF405). This DTC is set
Harness fault - engine if the engine coolant temperature value
coolant temperature fails plausibility checks by the engine
sensor circuits control module. Refer to the workshop
Engine coolant manual and check the engine cooling
temperature sensor system to ensure the coolant condition
failure and level is correct
and check the engine coolant
temperature sensor circuits for high
resistance, short circuit to other
circuits, intermittent faults. Repair
wiring as required, clear the DTC and
retest the system
If the DTC resets suspect the engine
coolant temperature sensor. Refer to
module/component

- Circuit Voltage Below The engine control Sensor (0x0357), Engine Coolant
Threshold module measured a Temperature (0xF405). This DTC is set
voltage below a if the engine coolant temperature
specified range but sensor signal voltage is less than the
not necessarily a short value expected by the engine control
circuit to ground module. Refer to the workshop manual
Engine coolant level or and check the engine cooling system to
flow fault ensure the coolant condition and level
Harness fault - engine is correct
coolant temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
sensor circuits and check the engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuits for high
temperature sensor resistance, short circuit to other
failure circuits, intermittent faults. Repair
retest the system
module/component
- Circuit Voltage Above The engine control Sensor (0x0357), Engine Coolant
Threshold module measured a Temperature (0xF405). This DTC is set
voltage above a if the engine coolant temperature
specified range but sensor signal voltage is greater than
not necessarily a short the value expected by the control
circuit to power module. Refer to the workshop manual
Engine coolant level or and check the engine cooling system to
flow fault ensure the coolant condition and level
Harness fault - engine is correct
coolant temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
sensor circuits and check the engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuits for high
temperature sensor resistance, short circuit to other
failure circuits, intermittent faults. Repair
retest the system
module/component
P0116- Engine Coolant The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
21 Temperature Sensor 1 module measured a diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit Range/Performance signal voltage below a signals, Engine Coolant Temperature
- Signal Amplitude < specified range but Sensor (0x0357), Engine Coolant
Minimum not necessarily a short Temperature (0xF405). This DTC is set
circuit to ground, gain if the engine coolant temperature
low sensor signal amplitude is lower than
Engine coolant level or the value expected by the control
flow fault module. Refer to the workshop manual
Harness fault - engine and check the engine cooling system to
coolant temperature ensure the coolant condition and level
sensor circuit short is correct
circuit to ground, high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
resistance, open and check the engine coolant
circuit temperature sensor for short circuit to
Engine coolant ground, high resistance, open circuit.
temperature sensor Repair wiring as required, clear the
failure DTC and retest the system
coolant temperature sensor. Check and
install a new engine coolant
temperature sensor as required
P0116- Engine Coolant The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
22 Temperature Sensor 1 module measured a diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit Range/Performance signal voltage above a signals, Engine Coolant Temperature
- Signal Amplitude > specified range but Sensor (0x0357), Engine Coolant
Maximum not necessarily a short Temperature (0xF405). This DTC is set
circuit to power, gain if the engine coolant temperature
too high sensor signal amplitude is greater than
Engine coolant level or the value expected by the control
flow fault module. Refer to the workshop manual
Harness fault - engine and check the engine cooling system to
coolant temperature ensure the coolant condition and level
sensor circuit short is correct
circuit to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Engine coolant and check the engine coolant
temperature sensor temperature sensor circuit for short
failure circuit to power. Repair wiring as
system
coolant temperature sensor. Check and
install a new engine coolant
P0130- O2 Sensor Circuit (Bank 1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

00 Sensor 1) - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit LPV_A - and check the pre catalyst oxygen
information LPPC_A sensor circuits for open circuit. Repair
Harness fault - Pre and retest
catalyst oxygen sensor If no fault found in wiring harness
circuit open circuit suspect pre catalyst oxygen sensor.
Pre catalyst oxygen Refer to the warranty policy and
sensor component procedures manual, or determine if any
fault prior approval programme is in
P0130- O2 Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

11 1) - Circuit short to ground NOTE: - Circuit LPV_A - and check the pre catalyst oxygen
sensor circuits for short circuit to
The engine control ground. Repair wiring harness as
module has detected a required. Clear DTC and retest
ground measurement If no fault found in wiring harness
for a period longer suspect pre catalyst oxygen sensor.
than expected or has Refer to the warranty policy and
detected a ground procedures manual, or determine if any
measurement when prior approval programme is in
another value was operation, prior to the installation of a
expected new module/component
Harness fault - Pre
catalyst oxygen sensor
ground
Pre catalyst oxygen
sensor component
fault

12 1) - Circuit short to battery NOTE: - Circuit LPV_A - and check the pre catalyst oxygen
sensor circuits for short circuit to
The engine control power. Repair wiring harness as
vehicle power If no fault found in wiring harness
measurement for a suspect pre catalyst oxygen sensor.
period longer than Refer to the warranty policy and
expected or has procedures manual, or determine if any
detected a vehicle prior approval programme is in
power measurement operation, prior to the installation of a
when another value new module/component
was expected
Harness fault - Pre
power
Pre catalyst oxygen
sensor component
fault

13 1) - Circuit open NOTE: - Circuit LPPC_A and check the pre catalyst oxygen
- LPV_A - sensor circuits for open circuit. Repair
The engine control and retest
module has If no fault found in wiring harness
determined an open suspect pre catalyst oxygen sensor.
circuit via lack of bias Refer to the warranty policy and
voltage, low current procedures manual, or determine if any
flow, no change in the prior approval programme is in
state of an input in operation, prior to the installation of a
response to an output new module/component
Harness fault - Pre
Pre catalyst oxygen
sensor component
fault
P0130- O2 Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor This DTC is set when the pre catalyst
1A 1) - Circuit Resistance NOTE: - Circuit LPTR_A oxygen sensor internal trim resistance
Below Threshold - value is less than that expected by the
engine control module. Refer to the
Harness fault - Pre electrical circuit diagrams and check
catalyst oxygen sensor the pre catalyst oxygen sensor circuits
circuit fault for short circuits. Repair wiring harness
Pre catalyst oxygen as required. Clear DTC and retest
sensor component If no fault found in wiring harness
fault suspect pre catalyst oxygen sensor
P0130- O2 Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor This DTC is set when the oxygen
1B 1) - Circuit Resistance NOTE: - Circuit LPTR_A sensor internal trim resistance value is
Above Threshold - greater than that expected by the
engine control module. Refer to the
Harness fault - Pre electrical circuit diagrams and check
catalyst oxygen sensor the pre catalyst oxygen sensor circuits
circuit fault for short circuits, open circuits. Repair
Pre catalyst oxygen wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
sensor component and retest
fault If no fault found in wiring harness
suspect pre catalyst oxygen sensor
failure. refer to the new
module/component installation note at
the top of the DTC index
P0130- O2 Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor The signal transitions Check for and rectify any exhaust leak
26 1) - Signal Rate Of Change more slowly than is between cylinder head and catalytic
Below Threshold reasonably allowed converter. Check pre catalyst oxygen
Exhaust system leak sensor is correctly installed in exhaust
Fuel control system manifold
fault Check fuel control system for related
Pre catalyst oxygen DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
sensor to engine index
control module circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
short circuit to and check pre catalyst oxygen sensor
ground, short circuit to engine control module circuit for
to power, high short circuit to ground, short circuit to
resistance power, high resistance, open circuit
Pre catalyst oxygen Check and install a new pre catalyst
sensor failure oxygen sensor as required
P0133- O2 Circuit Slow Response Exhaust system leak Check for and rectify any exhaust leak
00 (Bank 1, Sensor 1) - No Fuel control system between cylinder head and catalytic
sub type information fault converter. Check pre catalyst oxygen
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor is correctly installed in exhaust
sensor to engine manifold
control module wiring Check fuel control system for related
shield high resistance DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Pre catalyst oxygen index
sensor failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check pre catalyst oxygen sensor
to engine control module wiring shield
for high resistance
Check and install a new pre catalyst
oxygen sensor as required. Refer to
module/component
P0135- O2 Sensor Heater Circuit Check fuel control system for related
16 (Bank 1 Sensor 1) - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit LPPH_A DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
voltage below threshold - index
Pre catalyst oxygen and check pre catalyst oxygen sensor
sensor to engine to engine control module circuit for
control module circuit short circuit to ground, open circuit
short circuit to Check and install a new pre catalyst
ground, open circuit oxygen sensor as required. Refer to
Pre catalyst oxygen the warranty policy and procedures
module/component
P0148- Fuel Delivery Error - No This DTC is set after Check high pressure fuel pump for
00 sub type information the engine control mechanical damage and excessive wear
module internal Using the manufacturer approved
monitoring function diagnostic system, clear DTC and retest
has evaluated high Check and install a new high pressure
pressure fuel pump fuel pump as required. Refer to the
fatigue and wear warranty policy and procedures
against fuel rail manual, or determine if any prior
pressure approval programme is in operation,
module/component
P0181- Fuel Temperature Sensor A Using the manufacturer approved

16 Circuit Range/Performance NOTE: - Circuit IFTS - diagnostic system check datalogger
- Circuit Voltage Below signals, Fuel Temperature "A"
Threshold The engine control (0x0522), Fuel Rail Temperature
module measured a Sensor Voltage (0x033F). This DTC is
voltage below a set when the voltage on the fuel
specified range but temperature sensor circuit is less than
not necessarily a short that expected by the engine control
circuit to ground module. The fuel temperature sensor is
Harness fault - fuel a thermistor type sensor with a signal
temperature sensor and ground circuit. Refer to the
circuit fault electrical circuit diagrams and check
Sensor component the fuel temperature sensor signal
fault circuit for short circuit to ground.
Repair wiring harness as required.
suspect fuel temperature sensor failure.

17 Circuit Range/Performance NOTE: - Circuit IFTS - diagnostic system check datalogger
- Circuit Voltage Above signals, Fuel Temperature "A"
Threshold The engine control (0x0522), Fuel Rail Temperature
module measured a Sensor Voltage (0x033F). This DTC is
voltage above a set when the voltage on the fuel
specified range but temperature sensor circuit is greater
not necessarily a short than that expected by the engine
circuit to power control module. The fuel temperature
Harness fault - fuel sensor is a thermistor type sensor with
temperature sensor a signal and ground circuit. Refer to
circuit fault the electrical circuit diagrams and
Sensor component check the fuel temperature sensor
fault signal and ground circuits for open
circuit or high resistance. Repair wiring
harness as required. Clear DTC and
retest

00 Circuit Low - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit IFTS - diagnostic system check datalogger
information signals, Fuel Temperature "A"
Harness fault - fuel (0x0522), Fuel Rail Temperature
temperature sensor Sensor Voltage (0x033F). This DTC is
circuit fault set when the voltage on the fuel
Sensor component temperature sensor circuit is less than
fault that expected by the engine control
module. The fuel temperature sensor is
a thermistor type sensor with a signal
and ground circuit. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check
the fuel temperature sensor signal
circuit for short circuit to ground.

00 Circuit High - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit IFTS - diagnostic system check datalogger
information signals, Fuel Temperature "A"
Harness fault - fuel (0x0522), Fuel Rail Temperature
temperature sensor Sensor Voltage (0x033F). This DTC is
circuit fault set when the voltage on the fuel
Sensor component temperature sensor circuit is greater
fault than that expected by the engine
control module. The fuel temperature
sensor is a thermistor type sensor with
a signal and ground circuit. Refer to
the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the fuel temperature sensor
signal and ground circuits for open
circuit or high resistance. Repair wiring
retest
P0191- Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Using the manufacturer approved

16 A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit RPS - diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - signals, Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
Circuit voltage below The engine control (0x0324), Fuel Rail Pressure (0xF423).
threshold module measured a The fuel rail pressure sensor is a
voltage below a pressure transducer mounted on the
specified range but fuel rail, it has three circuits: a 5volt
not necessarily a short supply, a sensor ground, and the
circuit to ground sensor output signal line. This DTC is
Fuel supply system set when the voltage on the signal line
fault is less than that expected by the
Harness fault - fuel engine control module. Refer to the
rail pressure sensor workshop manual and ensure that the
circuit fault fuel supply system is working correctly
Sensor component Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
fault and check the sensor supply, signal
and ground connections for intermittent
faults, open circuits, short circuits, high
resistance. Repair wiring harness as
suspect fuel rail pressure sensor failure.

17 A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit RPS - diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - signals, Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
Circuit voltage above The engine control (0x0324), Fuel Rail Pressure (0xF423).
threshold module measured a The fuel rail pressure sensor is a
voltage above a pressure transducer mounted on the
circuit to power sensor output signal line. This DTC is
fault is greater than that expected by the

16 A Circuit Low - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit RPS - diagnostic system check datalogger
Voltage Below Threshold signals, Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
The engine control (0x0324), Fuel Rail Pressure (0xF423).
module measured a The fuel rail pressure sensor is a
voltage below a pressure transducer mounted on the
circuit to ground sensor output signal line. This DTC is
fault is less than that expected by the

17 A Circuit High - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit RPS - diagnostic system check datalogger
Voltage Above Threshold signals, Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
The engine control (0x0324), Fuel Rail Pressure (0xF423).
module measured a The fuel rail pressure sensor is a
voltage above a pressure transducer mounted on the
circuit to power sensor output signal line. This DTC is
fault is greater than that expected by the
P0194- Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Fuel supply system Using the manufacturer approved
00 A Circuit fault diagnostic system check datalogger
Intermittent/Erratic - No Harness fault - fuel signals, Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
sub type information rail pressure sensor (0x0324), Fuel Rail Pressure (0xF423).
circuit fault The fuel rail pressure sensor is a
Sensor component pressure transducer mounted on the
fault fuel rail, it has three circuits: a 5volt
supply, a sensor ground, and the
sensor output signal line. Refer to the
workshop manual and ensure that the
fuel supply system is working correctly
and check the sensor supply, signal
P0195- Engine Oil Temperature Check the oil level is correct and the oil
00 Sensor Circuit - No sub NOTE: - Circuit OTL - does not appear contaminated. Renew
type information or top up oil as required
Oil contaminated or The oil temperature sensor has three
level incorrect circuits, a supply voltage, a sensor
Harness fault - oil ground, and a signal line. Refer to the
temperature sensor electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuits the sensor voltage and ground supplies
Oil temperature sensor for open circuits or short circuit to
failure ground. Check the signal line for open
circuit, short circuit to power or
ground, high resistance and
intermittent connections. Repair the
wiring harness as required
suspect engine oil temperature sensor
P0195- Engine Oil Temperature Check the oil level is correct and the oil
23 Sensor Circuit - Signal NOTE: - Circuit OTL - does not appear contaminated. Renew
Stuck Low or top up oil as required
The engine control The oil temperature sensor has three
module measures a circuits, a supply voltage, a sensor
signal that remains ground, and a signal line. Refer to the
low when transitions electrical circuit diagrams and check
are expected the sensor voltage and ground supplies
Oil contaminated or for open circuits or short circuit to
level incorrect ground. Check the signal line for open
Harness fault - oil circuit, short circuit to power or
temperature sensor ground, high resistance and
circuits intermittent connections. Repair the
Oil temperature sensor wiring harness as required
suspect engine oil temperature sensor
P0195- Engine Oil Temperature Oil contaminated or Check the oil does not appear
62 Sensor Circuit - Signal level incorrect contaminated and the level is correct.
Compare Failure Harness fault - oil Renew or top up oil as required
temperature sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit short circuit to and check oil temperature sensor signal
ground, short circuit circuit for short circuit to ground, short
to power, high circuit to power, high resistance, open
resistance, open circuit, disconnected
circuit, disconnected Start the engine from cold and allow to
Oil temperature sensor idle, check and record Sump Oil
failure Temperature - Measured (0x03F3)
datalogger signal. Continue to warm up
at idle, after approximately 10 minutes
check and record Sump Oil
Temperature - Measured (0x03F3)
signal. If value of signal has not
increased by 5°C suspect oil
temperature sensor failure. Check and
install a new oil temperature sensor as
required. Refer to the warranty policy
P0201- Cylinder 1 Injector This DTC is set when the engine control
00 Circuit/Open - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit module detects open circuit on the
information INJ_1_PWR_OUT_LOW - cylinder 1 injector control circuit. Refer
INJ_1_PWR_OUT_HIGH - to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the two control circuits between
Harness fault - the engine control module and the fuel
cylinder 1 injector injector for high resistance, open
circuit open circuit circuits or intermittent connections.
cylinder 1 injector Repair the wiring harness as required
suspect the fuel injector, refer to the
manual and check the internal
resistance of the fuel injector. Refer to
module/component
module/component
module/component
module/component
module/component
module/component
P0216- Injector/Injection timing Internal engine control Refer to the workshop manual and the
00 Control Circuit - No sub module power supply battery care manual, inspect the
type information is unable to supply the vehicle battery and ensure it is fully
fuel injectors with the charged and serviceable before
maximum number of performing further tests
injections required Check the vehicle charging system
Internal engine control performance to ensure the voltage
module monitoring has regulation is correct
detected a fuel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
pressure not able to and check engine control module power
meet the demand for and ground circuits
the number of fuel Check fuel control system for related
injections DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
At high engine speeds index
the internal engine Using the manufacturer approved
control module diagnostic system, clear DTC and retest
monitoring has
detected that the
computing time
available for the
desired number of
injections is not
sufficient
P0219- Engine Overspeed Camshaft or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

00 Condition - No sub type Crankshaft position and check camshaft and crankshaft
information sensor circuit short position sensor circuits for short circuit
circuit to ground, to ground, short circuit to power, open
short circuit to power, circuit
open circuit Check for engine oil ingestion to
Camshaft or sensors. Check and install new
crankshaft position camshaft and crankshaft position
sensor failure sensor as required. Refer to the
module/component
P0235- Turbocharger/Supercharger Using the manufacturer approved

16 Boost Sensor A Circuit - NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit Voltage Below SCOP_SENSOR - signals, Turbocharger/Supercharger
Threshold Boost Sensor A Circuit (0x033C), Boost
The engine control Absolute Pressure - Raw Value
module measured a (0x033E). This DTC is set when the
voltage below a engine control module detects a signal
specified range but voltage from the boost air pressure
not necessarily a short sensor signal line which is less than the
circuit to ground threshold value. Check the sensor hose
Mechanical fault - for blockages or leaks
sensor hose blocked Check the intake air and boost air
or leaking circuits for faults including leaks,
Fault affecting intake blockages, control valve actuator
air circuit or boost air malfunctions
circuit control valves Check the sensor and harness for
or actuators mechanical damage caused by heat or
Harness fault - Boost chaffing. Check for DTCs relating to
air pressure sensor faults on the Accelerator Pedal Position
circuit sensor as these sensors share power
Boost air pressure supply and ground connections. The
sensor failure boost air pressure sensor has three
circuits, a 5 volt supply, a sensor
ground, and an analogue voltage
output signal line. Refer to the
the sensor voltage and ground supplies
for open circuits or short circuit to
ground. Check the signal line for open
circuit, short circuit to ground, high
resistance and intermittent connections.
P0235- Turbocharger/Supercharger Using the manufacturer approved

17 Boost Sensor A Circuit - NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit Voltage Above SCOP_SENSOR - signals, Turbocharger/Supercharger
Threshold Boost Sensor A Circuit (0x033C), Boost
The engine control Absolute Pressure - Raw Value
module measured a (0x033E). This DTC is set when the
voltage above a engine control module detects a signal
specified range but voltage from the boost air pressure
not necessarily a short sensor signal line which is greater than
circuit to power the threshold value. Check the sensor
Mechanical fault - hose for blockages or leaks
sensor hose blocked Check the intake air and boost air
or leaking circuits for faults including leaks,
Fault affecting intake blockages, control valve actuator
air circuit or boost air malfunctions
circuit control valves Check the sensor and harness for
or actuators mechanical damage caused by heat or
Harness fault - Boost chaffing. Check for DTCs relating to
air pressure sensor faults on the Accelerator Pedal Position
circuit sensor as these sensors share power
Boost air pressure supply and ground connections. The
sensor failure boost air pressure sensor has three
circuits, a 5 volts supply, a sensor
ground, and an analogue voltage
output signal line. Refer to the
the sensor voltage and ground supplies
for open circuits or short circuit to
ground. Check the signal line for open
circuit, short circuit to power. Repair
the wiring harness as required
P0235- Turbocharger/Supercharger If this DTC is logged with P00BD-07

94 Boost Sensor A Circuit - NOTE: - Circuit suspect, boost air solenoid stuck open
Unexpected operation SCOP_SENSOR - mono turbo mode
If this DTC is logged with P00BD-07
Boost air solenoid suspect, turbine intake solenoid leakage
stuck open mono when closed
turbo mode If this DTC is logged with P00BD-07,
Turbine intake P22D2-77, P1247-00 & P22CF-71
solenoid leakage when suspect, turbine intake solenoid stuck
closed open
Turbine intake If this DTC is logged with P00BD-07,
solenoid stuck open P22D2-77, P1247-00 & P22CF-71
Intake air system, suspect, intake air system, blocked low
blocked low pressure pressure air intake
air intake. This failure Using the manufacturer approved
mode can be caused diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
by snow packing in EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
the intake system.
Symptoms often
disappear after the
vehicle has been
warmed and heat
soaked. Similar
symptoms to seized
primary turbo
P023D- Manifold Absolute Induction system air Check induction system for leaks,
00 Pressure- leak or blockage blockages
Turbocharger/Supercharger Boost air system leak Check boost air system for leaks,
Boost Sensor A Correlation or blockage blockages. Check for related DTCs and
- No sub type information Manifold absolute refer to the relevant DTC index
pressure sensor A Check and install a new manifold
failure absolute pressure sensor as required.
Variable geometry Refer to the warranty policy and
turbocharger actuator procedures manual, or determine if any
A sticking, failure prior approval programme is in
Turbocharger A failure operation, prior to the installation of a
Check and install a new variable
geometry turbocharger actuator as
Check turbocharger rod connection and
oil seals. Refer to the warranty policy
P0251- Injection Pump Fuel Using the manufacturer approved

13 Metering Control A - NOTE: - Circuit MEU - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit open signals, Fuel Volume Control Valve
The engine control Duty Cycle (0x03C2), Fuel Volume
module has Control Valve Current - Measured
determined an open (0x03EA). Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit via lack of bias diagrams and check the fuel volume
voltage, low current control valve circuit between the engine
flow, no change in the control module and the fuel volume
state of an input in control valve for open circuit. Check
response to an output power supply to fuel volume control
Harness fault - fuel valve. Repair wiring harness as
volume control valve required. Clear DTC and retest
circuit open circuit If no fault found in wiring harness
Fuel volume control suspect fuel volume control valve.
valve failure Refer to the warranty policy and
P0251- Injection Pump Fuel Harness fault - fuel Using the manufacturer approved
4B Metering Control A - Over volume control valve diagnostic system check datalogger
temperature circuit short circuit to signals, Fuel Volume Control Valve
ground, short circuit Duty Cycle (0x03C2), Fuel Volume
to power, high Control Valve Current - Measured
resistance (0x03EA). Refer to the electrical circuit
Fuel volume control diagrams and check the fuel volume
valve failure control valve circuit between the engine
control module and the fuel volume
control valve for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, high
resistance. Check power supply to fuel
volume control valve. Repair wiring
retest
suspect fuel volume control valve.

16 Metering Control A NOTE: - Circuit MEU - diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - signals, Fuel Volume Control Valve
Circuit Voltage Below The engine control Duty Cycle (0x03C2), Fuel Volume
Threshold module measured a Control Valve Current - Measured
voltage below a (0x03EA). This DTC is set when the
specified range but voltage on the signal circuit to the fuel
not necessarily a short volume control valve is less than that
circuit to ground expected by the engine control module.
Harness fault - fuel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
volume control valve and check the fuel volume control
circuit valve circuit between the engine control
Fuel volume control module and the fuel volume control
valve failure valve for an intermittent open circuit,
high resistance, or short circuit to
ground. Check the power supply to fuel
volume control valve. Repair wiring
retest

17 Metering Control A NOTE: - Circuit MEU - diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - signals, Fuel Volume Control Valve
Circuit Voltage Above The engine control Duty Cycle (0x03C2), Fuel Volume
Threshold module measured a Control Valve Current - Measured
voltage above a (0x03EA). This DTC is set when the
specified range but voltage on the signal circuit to the fuel
not necessarily a short volume control valve is greater than
circuit to power that expected by the engine control
Harness fault - fuel module. Refer to the electrical circuit
volume control valve diagrams and check the fuel volume
circuit control valve circuit between the engine
Fuel volume control control module and the volume control
valve failure valve for a short circuit to power.
Check the power supply to fuel volume
control valve. Repair wiring harness as

00 Metering Control A Low - NOTE: - Circuit MEU - diagnostic system check datalogger
No sub type information signals, Fuel Volume Control Valve
Harness fault - fuel Duty Cycle (0x03C2), Fuel Volume
volume control valve Control Valve Current - Measured
circuit short circuit to (0x03EA). This DTC is set when the
ground, open circuit voltage on the signal circuit to the fuel
Fuel volume control volume control valve is greater than
valve failure that expected by the engine control
module. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the fuel volume
control valve circuit between the engine
control valve for a short circuit to
ground, open circuit. Repair wiring
retest

00 Metering Control A High - NOTE: - Circuit MEU - diagnostic system check datalogger
No sub type information signals, Fuel Volume Control Valve
Harness fault - fuel Duty Cycle (0x03C2), Fuel Volume
volume control valve Control Valve Current - Measured
circuit short circuit to (0x03EA). This DTC is set when the
power voltage on the signal circuit to the fuel
Fuel volume control volume control valve is greater than
valve failure that expected by the engine control
module. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the fuel volume
control valve circuit between the engine
control valve for a short circuit to
power. Repair wiring harness as
P0255- Injection Pump Fuel Harness fault - fuel Using the manufacturer approved
00 Metering Control A volume control valve diagnostic system check datalogger
Intermittent - No sub type circuit intermittent signals, Fuel Volume Control Valve
information short circuit to Duty Cycle (0x03C2), Fuel Volume
ground, short circuit Control Valve Current - Measured
to power, high (0x03EA). Refer to the electrical circuit
resistance diagrams and check the fuel volume
Fuel volume control control valve circuit between the engine
valve intermittent control module and the fuel volume
failure control valve for an intermittent short
circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, high resistance. Repair wiring
retest
P0261- Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

00 Low - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit and check the injector control circuit
information INJ_1_PWR_OUT_LOW - between the engine control module and
INJ_1_PWR_OUT_HIGH - the cylinder 1 injector for short circuit
to ground or short between the two
Harness fault - injector wires. This circuit is a twisted pair,
control circuit short check both hi and low sides for short
circuit circuit to power. Repair wiring harness
Injector failure as required. Clear DTC and retest
suspect fuel injector. Refer to the
module/component

11 Low - Circuit short to NOTE: - Circuit and check the injector control circuit
ground INJ_1_PWR_OUT_LOW - between the engine control module and
The engine control wires. This circuit is a twisted pair,
module has detected a check both hi and low sides for short
ground measurement circuit to ground. Repair wiring harness
for a period longer as required. Clear DTC and retest
than expected or has If no fault found in wiring harness
detected a ground suspect fuel injector. Refer to the
measurement when warranty policy and procedures
another value was manual, or determine if any prior
expected approval programme is in operation,
Harness fault - injector prior to the installation of a new
control circuit short module/component
circuit to ground
P0261- Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit Check injector/engine wiring harness

23 Low - Signal Stuck Low NOTE: - Circuit for damage due to chaffing or heat.
INJ_1_PWR_OUT_LOW - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
INJ_1_PWR_OUT_HIGH - and check the injector control circuits
The engine control the cylinder 1 injector for short to
module measures a other injector control circuits. Repair
signal that remains wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
low when transitions and retest
are expected
Harness fault - short
circuit between
injector control circuits
on different cylinders

module/component

11 Low - Circuit short To NOTE: - Circuit and check the injector control circuit
Ground INJ_2_PWR_OUT_LOW - between the engine control module and
circuit to ground

are expected
circuit between

module/component

11 Low - Circuit short To NOTE: - Circuit and check the injector control circuit
Ground INJ_3_PWR_OUT_LOW - between the engine control module and
circuit to ground

are expected
circuit between

module/component

circuit to ground

23 Low - Signal stuck low NOTE: - Circuit for damage due to chaffing or heat.
are expected
circuit between

module/component

circuit to ground

are expected
circuit between

module/component

circuit to ground

are expected
circuit between
P02CD- Cylinder 1 Fuel Injector Corrected set point Check for other related DTCs and refer
00 Offset Learning at Max voltage of the piezo to the relevant DTC index. Clear the
Limit - No sub type actuator violates the DTC and retest
information On Board Diagnostic If DTC persists suspect fuel injector.
limit Refer to the warranty policy and
P02CF- Cylinder 2 Fuel Injector Corrected set point Check for other related DTCs and refer
P02D1- Cylinder 3 Fuel Injector Corrected set point Check for other related DTCs and refer
P02EE- Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit This DTC is set when the engine control
17 Range/Performance - NOTE: - Circuit module monitors a voltage on the
Circuit Voltage Above INJ_1_PWR_OUT_LOW - cylinder 1 injector control circuit that is
Threshold INJ_1_PWR_OUT_HIGH - above the diagnostic threshold. The
injector control circuit consists of a
The engine control twisted pair of wires between the
module measured a engine control module and the Piezo
voltage above a actuator within the injector. Refer to
specified range but the electrical circuit diagrams and
not necessarily a short check both the control circuits (high
circuit to power and low) for open circuit, short circuit
Harness fault - injector to ground, short circuit to power,
control circuit intermittent connections, high
Fuel injector failure resistance, short to or interference
from other circuits. Repair wiring
harness as required
If there are no wiring harness faults
suspect the fuel injector. Refer to the
workshop manual and check/replace
the fuel injector. Refer to the warranty
module/component
1C Range/Performance - NOTE: - Circuit module monitors a voltage on the
Circuit Voltage Out Of INJ_1_PWR_OUT_LOW - cylinder 1 injector control circuit that is
Range INJ_1_PWR_OUT_HIGH - out of range. The injector control circuit
consists of a twisted pair of wires
The engine control between the engine control module and
module measured a the Piezo actuator within the injector.
voltage outside of the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
expected range, but and check both the control circuits
not identified as too (high and low) for open circuit, short
high or too low circuit to ground, short circuit to
Harness fault - injector power, intermittent connections, high
control circuit resistance, short to or interference
Fuel injector failure from other circuits. Repair wiring
harness as required
module/component
Event information INJ_1_PWR_OUT_LOW - cylinder 1 injector control circuit that is
INJ_1_PWR_OUT_HIGH - out of range. The injector control circuit
Harness fault - injector between the engine control module and
control circuit the Piezo actuator within the injector.
Fuel injector failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check both the control circuits
(high and low) for open circuit, short
power, intermittent connections, high
resistance, short to or interference
harness as required
module/component
P02EF- Cylinder 2 Injector Circuit This DTC is set when the engine control
Circuit Voltage Above INJ_2_PWR_OUT_LOW - cylinder2 injector control circuit that is
harness as required
module/component
harness as required
module/component
harness as required
module/component
P02F0- Cylinder 3 Injector Circuit This DTC is set when the engine control
harness as required
module/component
harness as required
module/component
harness as required
module/component
harness as required
module/component
harness as required
module/component
harness as required
module/component
harness as required
module/component
harness as required
module/component
harness as required
module/component
harness as required
module/component
harness as required
module/component
harness as required
module/component
P0300- Random Misfire Detected - Fuel injector circuit Check for cylinder mis-fire, glow plug
00 No sub type information fault(s) (injector DTCs and injector DTCs and refer to the
also flagged) relevant DTC index. Refer to the
Fuel system fault electrical circuit diagrams and check
injector circuit for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit. Repair wiring harness as
Check for fuel system failure. Repair
and retest
P0301- Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected Fuel injector electrical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
00 - No sub type information circuit fault(s) and check injector circuit for short
(injector DTCs also circuit to ground, short circuit to
flagged) power, open circuit. Repair wiring
Fuel injector fault harness as required. Clear DTC and
Cylinder compression retest
low Check for cylinder mis-fire, glow plug
and injector DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
Check for fuel injector fault or
blockage. Carry out cylinder
compression tests
relevant DTC index
compression tests
relevant DTC index
compression tests
relevant DTC index
compression tests
relevant DTC index
compression tests
relevant DTC index
compression tests
P0336- Crankshaft Position Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams.

31 A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit CPS - Check the wiring harness between the
Range/Performance - No engine control module and the
Signal Harness fault - crankshaft position sensor for damage
Crankshaft position due to chaffing or heat. Check the 5
sensor circuits volt power supply and ground circuits
Crankshaft position to the sensor, check the signal circuit
sensor failure for open circuits, short circuit to power,
Crankshaft position and short circuit to ground. Repair
sensor or reference wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
target positioning and retest
incorrect If no fault found in wiring harness and
sensor/target installation is correct
suspect sensor failure. Refer to the
module/component
Refer to the relevant section of the
workshop manual. Check the sensor
and crankshaft target for damage,
contamination, and correct mounting
P0336- Crankshaft Position Sensor Crankshaft position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
64 A Circuit sensor circuit for short and check crankshaft position sensor
Range/Performance - circuit to ground, circuit for short circuit to ground, short
Signal Plausibility Failure short circuit to power, circuit to power, open circuit,
open circuit, disconnected. Repair wiring harness as
disconnected required. Clear DTC and retest
Crankshaft position Check and install new crankshaft
sensor circuit shielding position sensor circuit shielding as
failure required
Crankshaft Position Check crankshaft position sensor for
sensor failure foreign matter on crankshaft position
Crankshaft position sensor face. Check crankshaft position
sensor foreign matter sensor air gap (check at 90° intervals,
on sensor face, gap should be no greater than 4.5mm)
incorrect Check and install a new crankshaft
Target wheel failure position sensor as required. Check and
install a new target wheel as required.
P0341- Camshaft Position Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams.

31 A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit CID - Check the wiring harness between the
Range/Performance (Bank engine control module and the
1 or single sensor) - No Harness fault - camshaft position sensor for damage
Signal camshaft position due to chaffing or heat. Check the 5
sensor circuits volt power supply and ground circuits
Camshaft position to the sensor, check the signal circuit
sensor failure for open circuits, short circuit to power,
Camshaft position and short circuit to ground. Repair
sensor or reference wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
target positioning and retest
incorrect Refer to the relevant section of the
and camshaft target for damage,
contamination, and correct mounting
If no fault found in wiring harness and
module/component
P0341- Camshaft Position Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams.

3A A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit CID - Check the wiring harness between the
Range/Performance (Bank engine control module and the
1 or single sensor) - Harness fault - camshaft position sensor for damage
Incorrect Has Too Many camshaft position due to chaffing or heat. Check the 5
Pulses sensor circuits volt power supply and ground circuits
Camshaft position to the sensor, check the signal circuit
sensor failure for intermittent faults such as open
Camshaft position circuits, short circuit to power, and
sensor or reference short circuit to ground. Repair wiring
target positioning harness as required. Clear DTC and
incorrect retest
and camshaft target for damage,
contamination, and correct mounting.
Check camshaft timing is to
specification
module/component
P0342- Camshaft Position Sensor Harness fault - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
64 A Circuit Low (Bank 1 or camshaft position and check the wiring harness between
single sensor) - Signal sensor circuit the engine control module and the
Plausibility Failure Camshaft position camshaft position sensor for damage
sensor failure due to chaffing or heat. Check the 5
Camshaft position volt power supply and ground circuits
sensor or reference to the sensor, check the signal circuit
target positioning for intermittent faults such as open
incorrect circuits, short circuit to power, and
short circuit to ground. Repair wiring
retest
Check the sensor and camshaft target
for damage, contamination, and correct
mounting. Check camshaft timing is to
specification
module/component
P0380- Glow Plug/Heater Circuit A Using the manufacturer approved

11 - Circuit short to ground NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
GLOWPLUG_CTRL - signal, Glow Plug Coil Duty Cycle
(0x9A04). Refer to the electrical circuit
The engine control diagrams and check the control circuit
module has detected a from the engine control module to the
ground measurement glow plug control module for short
for a period longer circuit to ground. Repair wiring harness
than expected or has as required. Clear DTC and retest
detected a ground If no fault found in wiring harness
measurement when suspect glow plug control module.
another value was Refer to the warranty policy and
expected procedures manual, or determine if any
Harness fault between prior approval programme is in
engine control module operation, prior to the installation of a
and glow plug control new module/component
module - short circuit
to ground
Component fault -
glow plug control
module failure

12 - Circuit short to battery NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
(0x9A04). Refer to the electrical circuit
The engine control diagrams and check the control circuit
module has detected a from the engine control module to the
vehicle power glow plug control module for short
measurement for a circuit to ground. Repair wiring harness
period longer than as required. Clear DTC and retest
expected or has If no fault found in wiring harness
detected a vehicle suspect glow plug control module.
power measurement Refer to the warranty policy and
when another value procedures manual, or determine if any
was expected prior approval programme is in
Harness fault between operation, prior to the installation of a
engine control module new module/component
and glow plug control
module - short circuit
to power
Component fault -
glow plug control
module failure

13 - Circuit open NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
(0x9A04)
module has and check the control circuit from the
determined an open engine control module to the glow plug
circuit via lack of bias control module for short circuit to
voltage, low current ground. Repair wiring harness as
flow, no change in the required. Clear DTC and retest
state of an input in If no fault found in wiring harness
response to an output suspect glow plug control module.
Harness fault between Refer to the warranty policy and
engine control module procedures manual, or determine if any
and glow plug control prior approval programme is in
module - open circuit operation, prior to the installation of a
Component fault - new module/component
glow plug control
module failure
P0380- Glow Plug/Heater Circuit A Harness fault - glow Using the manufacturer approved
4B - Over temperature plug heater circuit A diagnostic system check datalogger
short circuit to signal, Glow Plug Coil Duty Cycle
ground, short circuit (0x9A04)
to power, high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
resistance and check the glow plug heater circuit
A for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, high resistance. Repair
and retest
P0401- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Intake air system, low If this DTC is logged with P00BE-07 &
00 A Flow Insufficient pressure boost leak P006A-00, suspect intake air system,
Detected - No sub type bank A low pressure boost leak bank A
information Exhaust gas Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
recirculation valve A and check exhaust gas recirculation
circuit short circuit to valve A circuit for short circuit to
ground, high ground, high resistance, open circuit,
resistance, open disconnected. Repair wiring harness as
circuit, disconnected required. Clear DTC and retest
Exhaust gas Check and install a new exhaust gas
recirculation valve A recirculation valve A as required
failure
P0402- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Intake air system, If this DTC is logged with P1247-00,
00 A Flow Excessive Detected high pressure boost P006A-00 & P00BF-07, suspect intake
- No sub type information leak bank A air system, high pressure boost leak
Exhaust gas bank A
recirculation valve A Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit short circuit to and check exhaust gas recirculation
power, high valve A circuit for short circuit to
resistance, open power, high resistance, open circuit,
circuit, disconnected disconnected. Repair wiring harness as
Exhaust gas required. Clear DTC and retest
recirculation valve A Check and install a new exhaust gas
failure recirculation valve A as required
P0403- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Using the manufacturer approved

13 A Control Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
open EGR_A_NEG - EGR_A_POS - signals, EGR Bank 1 - Commanded
(0x03FB)
module has and check the bank 1 exhaust gas
determined an open recirculation control circuit for open
circuit via lack of bias circuit. This circuit consists of two wires
voltage, low current connected between the engine control
flow, no change in the module and the exhaust gas
state of an input in recirculation valve motor. Check both
response to an output wires for open circuit, inspect the
Exhaust gas harness for signs of chaffing due to
recirculation valve A vibration or heat damage. Repair wiring
circuit high resistance harness as required. Clear DTC and
Exhaust gas retest
recirculation valve A If no fault found in wiring harness
circuit open circuit suspect exhaust gas recirculation
Exhaust gas control actuator failure. Refer to the
recirculation valve A warranty policy and procedures
circuit disconnected manual, or determine if any prior
Exhaust gas approval programme is in operation,
recirculation valve A prior to the installation of a new
failure module/component

16 A Control Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
voltage below threshold EGR_A_NEG - EGR_A_POS - signals, EGR Bank 1 - Commanded
(0x03FB)
module measured a and check exhaust gas recirculation
voltage below a valve A circuit for short circuit to
specified range but ground. Repair wiring harness as
not necessarily a short required. Clear DTC and retest
circuit to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Exhaust gas and check exhaust gas recirculation
recirculation valve A valve A circuit for high resistance.
circuit short circuit to Repair wiring harness as required.
ground Clear DTC and retest
Exhaust gas Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit high resistance valve A circuit for open circuit. Repair
Exhaust gas wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
recirculation valve A and retest
circuit open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
recirculation valve A valve A circuit for disconnected. Repair
circuit disconnected wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
Exhaust gas and retest
failure recirculation valve A as required. Refer
module/component
P0403- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust gas Using the manufacturer approved
19 A Control Circuit - Circuit recirculation valve A diagnostic system check datalogger
current above threshold circuit short circuit to signals, EGR Bank 1 - Commanded
power (0x03FB). Refer to the electrical circuit
Exhaust gas diagrams and check exhaust gas
recirculation valve A recirculation valve A circuit for short
failure power. Repair wiring harness as
Check and install a new exhaust gas
recirculation valve A as required. Refer
module/component

1D A Control Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
current out of range EGR_A_NEG - EGR_A_POS - signals, EGR Bank 1 - Commanded
(0x03FB)
ground ground. Repair wiring harness as
power valve A circuit for short circuit to
Exhaust gas power. Repair wiring harness as
recirculation valve A required. Clear DTC and retest
circuit high resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit open circuit Repair wiring harness as required.
Exhaust gas Clear DTC and retest
circuit disconnected and check exhaust gas recirculation
Exhaust gas valve A circuit for open circuit. Repair
recirculation valve A wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
failure and retest
and check exhaust gas recirculation
valve A circuit for disconnected. Repair
and retest
module/component

4B A Control Circuit - Over NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
temperature EGR_A_NEG - EGR_A_POS - signals, EGR Bank 1 - Commanded
(0x03FB)
circuit open circuit Repair wiring harness as required.
circuit disconnected and check exhaust gas recirculation
Exhaust gas valve A circuit for open circuit. Repair
failure and retest
and retest
module/component
P0403- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

71 "A" Control Circuit / Open NOTE: - Circuit and check exhaust gas recirculation
- Actuator stuck EGR_A_NEG - EGR_A_POS - valve A circuit for open circuit. Repair
circuit open circuit and check exhaust gas recirculation
Exhaust gas valve A circuit for disconnected. Repair
circuit disconnected and retest
recirculation valve A recirculation valve A as required. Refer
failure to the warranty policy and procedures
module/component

19 A Control Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - EGR_A_NEG - EGR_A_POS - signals, EGR Bank 1 - Commanded
Circuit current above (0x03FB)
threshold Exhaust gas Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
failure Repair wiring harness as required.
module/component

00 Sensor A Circuit Low - No NOTE: - Circuit EVP_A - and check exhaust gas recirculation
sub type information valve A circuit for short circuit to
Exhaust gas ground. Repair wiring harness as
circuit short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
ground and check exhaust gas recirculation
Exhaust gas valve A circuit for high resistance.
recirculation valve A Repair wiring harness as required.
circuit high resistance Clear DTC and retest
circuit open circuit valve A circuit for open circuit. Repair
circuit disconnected Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
failure wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
and retest
module/component

11 Sensor A Circuit Low - NOTE: - Circuit EVP_A - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit short to ground signals, EGR Valve Position Bank 1
The engine control (0x052E)
module has detected a Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
ground measurement and check the bank A exhaust gas
for a period longer recirculation sensor signal circuit for
than expected or has short circuit to ground. Check the
detected a ground harness between the engine control
measurement when module and the exhaust gas
another value was recirculation valve for signs of chaffing
expected or heat damage. Check the three
Exhaust gas circuits which supply the sensor. 5 volts
recirculation valve A supply, sensor signal, and sensor
position sensor circuit ground. Repair wiring harness as
short circuit to ground required. Clear DTC and retest
Exhaust gas If no fault found in wiring harness
recirculation valve A suspect exhaust gas recirculation
failure sensor failure. Refer to the warranty
module/component
P0405- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust gas Using the manufacturer approved
77 Sensor A Circuit Low - recirculation valve A diagnostic system check datalogger
Commanded position not position sensor circuit signals, EGR Valve Position Bank 1
reachable short circuit to ground (0x052E)
recirculation valve A and check the bank A exhaust gas
failure recirculation sensor signal circuit for
harness between the engine control
module and the exhaust gas
recirculation valve for signs of chaffing
or heat damage. Check the three
circuits which supply the sensor. 5 volts
supply, sensor signal, and sensor
ground. Repair wiring harness as
suspect exhaust gas recirculation
sensor failure. Refer to the warranty
module/component

00 Sensor A Circuit High - No NOTE: - Circuit EVP_A - and check exhaust gas recirculation
sub type information valve bank A circuits for short circuit to
Exhaust gas power. Repair Wiring as required, clear
recirculation valve A the DTC and retest system
circuit short circuit to If no fault found in wiring harness
power suspect exhaust gas recirculation
Exhaust gas sensor failure. Refer to the warranty
recirculation valve A policy and procedures manual, or
failure determine if any prior approval
module/component

12 Sensor A Circuit High - NOTE: - Circuit EVP_A - and check the bank A exhaust gas
Circuit short to battery recirculation sensor signal circuit for
The engine control short circuit to power. Check the
module has detected a harness between the engine control
vehicle power module and the exhaust gas
measurement for a recirculation valve for signs of chaffing
period longer than or heat damage. Check the three
expected or has circuits which supply the sensor. 5 volts
detected a vehicle supply, sensor signal, and sensor
power measurement ground. Repair wiring harness as
when another value required. Clear DTC and retest
was expected If no fault found in wiring harness
Exhaust gas suspect exhaust gas recirculation
recirculation valve A sensor failure. Refer to the warranty
circuit short circuit to policy and procedures manual, or
power determine if any prior approval
Exhaust gas programme is in operation, prior to the
recirculation valve A installation of a new
P0406- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust gas Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
77 Sensor A Circuit High - recirculation valve A and check the bank A exhaust gas
Commanded position not circuit short circuit to recirculation sensor signal circuit for
reachable power short circuit to power. Check the
Exhaust gas harness between the engine control
recirculation valve A module and the exhaust gas
failure recirculation valve for signs of chaffing
or heat damage. Check the three
circuits which supply the sensor. 5 volts
supply, sensor signal, and sensor
ground. Repair wiring harness as
suspect exhaust gas recirculation
sensor failure. Refer to the warranty
module/component

00 Sensor B Circuit Low - No NOTE: - Circuit TPS - and check the throttle position sensor
sub type information circuits for short circuit to ground,
Harness fault - open circuit. Repair wiring as required,
Throttle position clear the DTC and retest system
sensor circuit If no fault found in wiring harness
Throttle position suspect throttle position sensor failure.

00 Sensor B Circuit High - No NOTE: - Circuit TPS - and check the throttle position sensor
sub type information circuits for short circuit to ground,
Harness fault - open circuit. Repair wiring as required,
Throttle position clear the DTC and retest system
sensor circuit If no fault found in wiring harness
Throttle position suspect throttle position sensor failure.

13 Sensor A Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit EVP_A - and check the bank 1 exhaust gas
open recirculation sensor signal circuit for
The engine control open circuit. Check the harness
module has between the engine control module and
determined an open the exhaust gas recirculation valve for
circuit via lack of bias signs of chaffing or heat damage.
voltage, low current Check the three circuits which supply
flow, no change in the the sensor. 5 volts supply, sensor
state of an input in signal, and sensor ground. Repair
response to an output wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
Harness fault - and retest
recirculation valve A suspect exhaust gas recirculation
circuit sensor failure. Refer to the warranty
Exhaust gas policy and procedures manual, or
recirculation valve A determine if any prior approval
failure programme is in operation, prior to the
module/component

16 Sensor A Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit EVP_A - and check exhaust gas recirculation
voltage below threshold valve A circuit for short circuit to
module measured a required. Clear DTC and retest
voltage below a Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
specified range but and check exhaust gas recirculation
not necessarily a short valve A circuit for high resistance.
circuit to ground Repair wiring harness as required.
ground valve A circuit for open circuit. Repair
circuit open circuit wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
circuit disconnected recirculation valve A as required. Refer
Exhaust gas to the warranty policy and procedures
recirculation valve A manual, or determine if any prior
failure approval programme is in operation,
module/component

17 Sensor A Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit EVP_A - and check exhaust gas recirculation
voltage above threshold valve A circuit for short circuit to
voltage above a Check and install a new exhaust gas
specified range but recirculation valve A as required. Refer
not necessarily a short to the warranty policy and procedures
circuit to power manual, or determine if any prior
recirculation valve A prior to the installation of a new
circuit short circuit to module/component
power
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve A
failure
P0409- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust gas Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
92 Sensor A Circuit - recirculation valve A and check exhaust gas recirculation
Performance or incorrect circuit short circuit to valve A circuit for short circuit to
operation ground ground. Repair wiring harness as
circuit high resistance and check exhaust gas recirculation
Exhaust gas valve A circuit for high resistance.
recirculation valve A Repair wiring harness as required.
circuit open circuit Clear DTC and retest
circuit disconnected valve A circuit for open circuit. Repair
failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and retest
module/component
P042E- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust gas Check for other related DTCs and refer
77 A Control Stuck Open - recirculation valve A to the relevant DTC index
Commanded position not circuit short circuit to Using the manufacturer approved
reachable ground diagnostic system, operate the Exhaust
Exhaust gas Recirculation Valve through the full
recirculation valve A operating range whilst monitoring the
circuit short circuit to position sensor signal value. If the
power position signal does not change
Exhaust gas smoothly in proportion to the
recirculation valve A commands check the operation of the
circuit high resistance valve
circuit open circuit valve A circuit for short circuit to
recirculation valve A valve A circuit for short circuit to
valve A circuit for high resistance.
valve A circuit for open circuit. Repair
and retest
and retest
module/component
P042F- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust gas Check for other related DTCs and refer
77 A Control Stuck Closed - recirculation valve A to the relevant DTC index
recirculation valve A operating range whilst monitoring the
recirculation valve A commands check the operation of the
circuit open circuit valve A circuit for short circuit to
recirculation valve A valve A circuit for short circuit to
valve A circuit for high resistance.
valve A circuit for open circuit. Repair
and retest
and retest
module/component
P0435- Catalyst Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor Circuit (Bank 2, NOTE: - Circuit CCCIT_B diagnostic system check datalogger
Sensor Circuit 1) - No sub - signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank
type information 1 Sensor 1 Voltage (0x03BF), Exhaust
Catalyst temperature Gas Temperature Bank 2 Sensor 1
sensor bank 2, sensor (0x03F7)
1 circuit short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
to ground and check catalyst temperature sensor
Catalyst temperature bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for short circuit
sensor bank 2, sensor to ground. Repair wiring harness as
1 circuit short circuit required. Clear DTC and retest
to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Catalyst temperature and check catalyst temperature sensor
sensor bank 2, sensor bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for short circuit
1 circuit high to power. Repair wiring harness as
resistance required. Clear DTC and retest
Catalyst temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
sensor bank 2, sensor and check catalyst temperature sensor
1 circuit open circuit bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for high
Catalyst temperature resistance. Repair wiring harness as
sensor bank 2, sensor required. Clear DTC and retest
1 circuit disconnected Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
sensor bank 2, sensor bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for open
1 failure circuit. Repair wiring harness as
and check catalyst temperature sensor
bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for
disconnected. Repair wiring harness as
Check and install a new catalyst
temperature sensor - bank 2, sensor 1
as required. Refer to the warranty
module/component

00 Sensor Circuit NOTE: - Circuit CCCIT_B diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance (Bank - signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank
2, Sensor Circuit 1) - No 1 Sensor 1 Voltage (0x03BF), Exhaust
sub type information Catalyst temperature Gas Temperature Bank 2 Sensor 1
module/component

00 Sensor Circuit Low (Bank NOTE: - Circuit CCCIT_B diagnostic system check datalogger
2, Sensor Circuit 1) - No - signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank
sub type information 1 Sensor 1 Voltage (0x03BF), Exhaust
1 circuit high required. Clear DTC and retest
resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
sensor bank 2, sensor bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for high
1 circuit open circuit resistance. Repair wiring harness as
Catalyst temperature required. Clear DTC and retest
sensor bank 2, sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
1 circuit disconnected and check catalyst temperature sensor
Catalyst temperature bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for open
sensor bank 2, sensor circuit. Repair wiring harness as
1 failure required. Clear DTC and retest
module/component

00 Sensor Circuit High (Bank NOTE: - Circuit CCCIT_B diagnostic system check datalogger
2, Sensor Circuit 1) - No - signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank
sub type information 1 Sensor 1 Voltage (0x03BF), Exhaust
sensor bank 2, sensor (0x03F7). Refer to the electrical circuit
1 circuit short circuit diagrams and check catalyst
to power temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 1
Catalyst temperature circuit for short circuit to power. Repair
sensor bank 2, sensor wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
1 failure and retest
module/component
P043A- Catalyst Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor Circuit (Bank 2, NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Sensor Circuit 2) - No sub CCCOT_B - signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank
type information 2 Sensor 2 (0x03F8), Exhaust Gas
Catalyst temperature Temperature Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 2
sensor bank 2, sensor Voltage (0x03E9)
module/component
P043B- Catalyst Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance (Bank CCCOT_B - signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank
2, Sensor Circuit 2) - No 2 Sensor 2 (0x03F8), Exhaust Gas
sub type information Catalyst temperature Temperature Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 2
module/component
P043C- Catalyst Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor Circuit Low (Bank NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
2, Sensor Circuit 2) - No CCCOT_B - signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank
sub type information 2 Sensor 2 (0x03F8), Exhaust Gas
2 circuit high required. Clear DTC and retest
sensor bank 2, sensor bank 2, sensor 2 circuit for high
2 circuit open circuit resistance. Repair wiring harness as
Catalyst temperature required. Clear DTC and retest
sensor bank 2, sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
2 circuit disconnected and check catalyst temperature sensor
Catalyst temperature bank 2, sensor 2 circuit for open
sensor bank 2, sensor circuit. Repair wiring harness as
module/component
P043D- Catalyst Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor Circuit High (Bank NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
2, Sensor Circuit 2) - No CCCOT_B - signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank
sub type information 2 Sensor 2 (0x03F8), Exhaust Gas
to power and check catalyst temperature sensor
sensor bank 2, sensor to power. Repair wiring harness as
module/component
P044A- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Using the manufacturer approved

13 Sensor C Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit EVP_B - diagnostic system check datalogger
open signals, EGR Valve Position Bank 2
The engine control (0x052F)
module has Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
determined an open and check the bank B exhaust gas
circuit via lack of bias recirculation sensor signal circuit for
voltage, low current open circuit. Check the harness
flow, no change in the between the engine control module and
state of an input in the exhaust gas recirculation valve for
response to an output signs of chaffing or heat damage.
Exhaust gas Check the three circuits which supply
recirculation valve the sensor. 5 volts supply, sensor
bank B circuit high signal, and sensor ground. Repair
resistance wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
recirculation valve If no fault found in wiring harness
bank B circuit open suspect exhaust gas recirculation
circuit sensor failure. Refer to the warranty
Exhaust gas policy and procedures manual, or
recirculation valve determine if any prior approval
bank B circuit programme is in operation, prior to the
disconnected installation of a new
Exhaust gas module/component
recirculation valve
bank B failure

voltage below threshold signals, EGR Valve Position Bank 2
The engine control (0x052F)
module measured a Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
voltage below a and check exhaust gas recirculation
specified range but valve bank B circuit for short circuit to
not necessarily a short ground. Repair wiring harness as
circuit to ground required. Clear DTC and retest
recirculation valve and check exhaust gas recirculation
bank B circuit short valve bank B circuit for high resistance.
circuit to ground Repair wiring harness as required.
recirculation valve Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
bank B circuit high and check exhaust gas recirculation
resistance valve bank B circuit for disconnected.
Exhaust gas Repair wiring harness as required.
recirculation valve Clear DTC and retest
bank B circuit Check and install a new exhaust gas
disconnected recirculation valve bank B as required.
Exhaust gas Refer to the warranty policy and
recirculation valve procedures manual, or determine if any
bank B failure prior approval programme is in

voltage above threshold signals, EGR Valve Position Bank 2
The engine control (0x052F). Refer to the electrical circuit
module measured a diagrams and check exhaust gas
voltage above a recirculation valve bank B circuit for
specified range but short circuit to power. Repair wiring
not necessarily a short harness as required. Clear DTC and
circuit to power retest
recirculation valve recirculation valve bank B as required.
bank B circuit short Refer to the warranty policy and
circuit to power procedures manual, or determine if any
Exhaust gas prior approval programme is in
recirculation valve operation, prior to the installation of a
bank B failure new module/component

92 Sensor C Circuit - NOTE: - Circuit EVP_B - diagnostic system check datalogger
Performance or incorrect signals, EGR Valve Position Bank 2
operation Exhaust gas (0x052F)
bank B circuit short and check exhaust gas recirculation
circuit to ground valve bank B circuit for short circuit to
recirculation valve required. Clear DTC and retest
bank B circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit to power and check exhaust gas recirculation
Exhaust gas valve bank B circuit for short circuit to
recirculation valve power. Repair wiring harness as
bank B circuit open required. Clear DTC and retest
recirculation valve valve bank B circuit for open circuit.
bank B circuit high Repair wiring harness as required.
resistance Clear DTC and retest
bank B circuit valve bank B circuit for high resistance.
disconnected Repair wiring harness as required.
bank B failure and check exhaust gas recirculation
valve bank B circuit for disconnected.
recirculation valve bank B as required.
P044C- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor C Circuit Low - No NOTE: - Circuit EVP_B - diagnostic system check datalogger
sub type information signals, EGR Valve Position Bank 2
Exhaust gas (0x052F)
circuit to ground valve bank B circuit for short circuit to
bank B circuit high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
resistance and check exhaust gas recirculation
Exhaust gas valve bank B circuit for high resistance.
recirculation valve Repair wiring harness as required.
bank B circuit open Clear DTC and retest
recirculation valve valve bank B circuit for open circuit.
bank B circuit Repair wiring harness as required.
disconnected Clear DTC and retest
bank B failure valve bank B circuit for disconnected.
P044D- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor C Circuit High - No NOTE: - Circuit EVP_B - diagnostic system check datalogger
sub type information signals, EGR Valve Position Bank 2
Exhaust gas (0x052F)
circuit to power valve bank B circuit for short circuit to
bank B failure Check and install a new exhaust gas

13 B Control Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
open EGR_B_NEG - EGR_B_POS - signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
(0x0525)
module has and check the bank B exhaust gas
determined an open recirculation control circuit for open
circuit via lack of bias circuit. This circuit consists of two wires
voltage, low current connected between the engine control
flow, no change in the module and the exhaust gas
state of an input in recirculation valve motor. Check both
response to an output wires for open circuit, inspect the
Exhaust gas harness for signs of chaffing due to
recirculation valve vibration or heat damage. Repair wiring
bank B circuit open harness as required. Clear DTC and
circuit retest
recirculation valve and check the bank B exhaust gas
bank B circuit recirculation control circuit for
disconnected disconnected
recirculation valve suspect exhaust gas recirculation
bank B failure control actuator failure. Refer to the
module/component

voltage below threshold EGR_B_NEG - EGR_B_POS - signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
(0x0525)
module measured a and check exhaust gas recirculation
voltage below a valve bank B circuit for short circuit to
specified range but ground
not necessarily a short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit to ground and check exhaust gas recirculation
Exhaust gas valve bank B circuit for high resistance
circuit to ground valve bank B circuit for open circuit
bank B circuit high valve bank B circuit for disconnected
resistance Check and install a new exhaust gas
Exhaust gas recirculation valve bank B as required.
recirculation valve Refer to the warranty policy and
bank B circuit open procedures manual, or determine if any
circuit prior approval programme is in
Exhaust gas operation, prior to the installation of a
recirculation valve new module/component
bank B circuit
disconnected
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank B failure

current above threshold EGR_B_NEG - EGR_B_POS - signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
(0x0525)
bank B circuit short valve bank B circuit for short circuit to
circuit to ground ground
circuit to power power
bank B circuit high valve bank B circuit for high resistance
recirculation valve valve bank B circuit for open circuit
bank B circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit and check exhaust gas recirculation
Exhaust gas valve bank B circuit for disconnected
recirculation valve Check and install a new exhaust gas
bank B circuit recirculation valve bank B as required.
disconnected Refer to the warranty policy and
Exhaust gas procedures manual, or determine if any
recirculation valve prior approval programme is in
bank B failure operation, prior to the installation of a

1D B Control Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
current out of range EGR_B_NEG - EGR_B_POS - signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
(0x0525)

4B B Control Circuit - Over NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
temperature EGR_B_NEG - EGR_B_POS - signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
(0x0525)
resistance Check and install a new exhaust gas
Exhaust gas recirculation valve bank B as required.
recirculation valve Refer to the warranty policy and
bank B failure procedures manual, or determine if any

71 B Control Circuit - Actuator NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
stuck EGR_B_NEG - EGR_B_POS - signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
(0x0525)
bank B circuit open valve bank B circuit for open circuit
recirculation valve valve bank B circuit for high resistance
bank B circuit high Check and install a new exhaust gas
resistance recirculation valve bank B as required.
recirculation valve procedures manual, or determine if any
bank B failure prior approval programme is in
P045B- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust gas Using the manufacturer approved
19 B Control Circuit recirculation valve diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - bank B circuit short signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
Circuit current above circuit to ground (0x0525)
threshold Exhaust gas Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit to power ground
bank B circuit high valve bank B circuit for short circuit to
resistance power
bank B circuit open valve bank B circuit for high resistance
bank B circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
disconnected and check exhaust gas recirculation
bank B failure recirculation valve bank B as required.

00 B Control Circuit Low - No NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
sub type information EGR_B_NEG - EGR_B_POS - signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
(0x0525)

11 B Control Circuit Low - NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit short to ground EGR_B_NEG - EGR_B_POS - signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
(0x0525). Refer to the electrical circuit
The engine control diagrams and check exhaust gas
module has detected a recirculation valve bank B circuit for
ground measurement short circuit to ground. Repair wiring
for a period longer harness as required. Clear DTC and
than expected or has retest
detected a ground Check and install a new exhaust gas
measurement when recirculation valve bank B as required.
another value was Refer to the warranty policy and
expected procedures manual, or determine if any
bank B circuit short new module/component
circuit to ground
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank B failure
P045C- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust gas Using the manufacturer approved
77 B Control Circuit Low - recirculation valve diagnostic system check datalogger
Commanded position not bank B circuit short signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
reachable circuit to ground (0x0525). Refer to the electrical circuit
recirculation valve recirculation valve bank B circuit for
bank B failure short circuit to ground. Repair wiring
retest

00 B Control Circuit High - No NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
sub type information EGR_B_NEG - EGR_B_POS - signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
bank B circuit short short circuit to power. Repair wiring
circuit to power harness as required. Clear DTC and
Exhaust gas retest
bank B failure recirculation valve bank B as required.

12 B Control Circuit High - NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit short to battery EGR_B_NEG - EGR_B_POS - signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
The engine control diagrams and check exhaust gas
module has detected a recirculation valve bank B circuit for
vehicle power short circuit to power. Repair wiring
measurement for a harness as required. Clear DTC and
period longer than retest
expected or has Check and install a new exhaust gas
detected a vehicle recirculation valve bank B as required.
power measurement Refer to the warranty policy and
when another value procedures manual, or determine if any
was expected prior approval programme is in
Exhaust gas operation, prior to the installation of a
recirculation valve new module/component
bank B circuit short
circuit to power
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank B failure
P045D- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust gas Using the manufacturer approved
77 B Control Circuit High - recirculation valve diagnostic system check datalogger
Commanded position not bank B circuit short signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
reachable circuit to power (0x0525). Refer to the electrical circuit
bank B failure short circuit to power. Repair wiring
retest
P045E- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust gas Check for other related DTCs and refer
77 B Control Stuck Open - recirculation valve B to the relevant DTC index
recirculation valve B operating range whilst monitoring the
recirculation valve B commands check the operation of the
recirculation valve B and check exhaust gas recirculation
circuit open circuit valve B circuit for short circuit to
recirculation valve B required. Clear DTC and retest
recirculation valve B valve B circuit for short circuit to
valve B circuit for high resistance.
valve B circuit for open circuit. Repair
and retest
valve B circuit for disconnected. Repair
and retest
recirculation valve B as required. Refer
module/component
P045F- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust gas Check for other related DTCs and refer
77 B Control Stuck Closed - recirculation valve B to the relevant DTC index
recirculation valve B operating range whilst monitoring the
recirculation valve B commands check the operation of the
recirculation valve B and check exhaust gas recirculation
circuit open circuit valve B circuit for short circuit to
recirculation valve B required. Clear DTC and retest
recirculation valve B valve B circuit for short circuit to
valve B circuit for high resistance.
valve B circuit for open circuit. Repair
and retest
valve B circuit for disconnected. Repair
and retest
recirculation valve B as required. Refer
module/component
P046E- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

00 Sensor "B" Circuit NOTE: - Circuit TPS - and check throttle position sensor for
Range/Performance - No short circuit to ground, short circuit to
sub type information Throttle position power, open circuit, high resistance.
sensor short circuit to Clear DTC and retest
ground, short circuit Check and install a new throttle
to power, open circuit, position sensor as required. Refer to
high resistance the warranty policy and procedures
Throttle position manual, or determine if any prior
module/component
P0480- Fan 1 Control Circuit - Using the manufacturer approved

11 Circuit short to ground NOTE: - Circuit VCFC - diagnostic system check datalogger
signals, Electric Fan PWM Control -
The engine control Commanded (0x03F9). Refer to the
module has detected a electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground measurement the cooling fan control circuit from the
for a period longer engine control module to the cooling
than expected or has fan fly lead for short circuit to ground
detected a ground Check power and ground supplies to
measurement when cooling fan control module, repair any
another value was wiring faults found. Clear DTC and
expected retest
Wiring harness fault -
Cooling fan component
fault

12 Circuit short to battery NOTE: - Circuit VCFC - diagnostic system check datalogger
module has detected a electrical circuit diagrams and check
vehicle power the cooling fan control circuit from the
measurement for a engine control module to the cooling
period longer than fan fly lead for short circuit to power
expected or has Check power and ground supplies to
detected a vehicle cooling fan control module, repair any
power measurement wiring faults found. Clear DTC and
when another value retest
was expected
fault

13 Circuit open NOTE: - Circuit VCFC - diagnostic system check datalogger
module has electrical circuit diagrams and check
determined an open the cooling fan control circuit from the
circuit via lack of bias engine control module to the cooling
voltage, low current fan fly lead for open circuit
flow, no change in the Check power and ground supplies to
state of an input in cooling fan control module, repair any
response to an output wiring faults found. Clear DTC and
Wiring harness fault - retest
open circuit
fault
P0483- Fan Performance - Signal Engine cooling fan Refer to relevant section of workshop
27 rate of change above acceleration manual and check the viscous fan unit
threshold plausibility defect
This DTC is set if the
calculated engine
cooling fan
acceleration value is
greater than a
calibrated value
P0483- Fan Performance - Signal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and

36 frequency too low NOTE: - Circuit VCFC - check the viscous fan circuit for short
CFM - circuit to ground, short circuit to
The engine control
module detected
excessive duration for
one cycle of the
output across a
specified sample size
Engine cooling fan
speed below
maximum threshold
Viscous fan circuit
short circuit to
ground, short circuit
to power, open circuit,
high resistance
P0483- Fan Performance - Signal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and

37 frequency too high NOTE: - Circuit VCFC - check the viscous fan circuit for short
CFM - circuit to ground, short circuit to
The engine control
module detected
insufficient duration
for one cycle of the
output across a
specified sample size
Engine cooling fan
speed above
maximum threshold
Viscous fan circuit
short circuit to
high resistance
P0486- Exhaust Gas Recirculation This DTC is set when the engine control
13 Sensor B Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit TPS - module detects a no load error on the
open intake air shut off throttle position
The engine control sensor circuit. This sensor is a
module has potentiometer. Refer to the electrical
determined an open circuit diagrams and check the sensor 5
circuit via lack of bias volt supply and ground circuits. Check
voltage, low current the sensor circuits for open circuits,
flow, no change in the short circuit to ground, short circuit to
state of an input in power. Repair wiring harness as
response to an output required. Clear DTC and retest
Harness fault - Intake If no fault found in wiring harness
air shut off throttle suspect intake air shut off throttle
position sensor circuit position sensor failure. Refer to the
open circuit warranty policy and procedures
Intake air shut off manual, or determine if any prior
throttle position approval programme is in operation,
sensor failure prior to the installation of a new
module/component

16 Sensor B Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit TPS - and check exhaust gas recirculation
voltage below threshold valve B circuit for short circuit to
The engine control ground
module measured a Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
voltage below a and check exhaust gas recirculation
specified range but valve B circuit high resistance
circuit to ground and check exhaust gas recirculation
Exhaust gas valve B circuit open circuit
circuit to ground valve B circuit disconnected
recirculation valve recirculation valve B as required. Refer
bank B circuit high to the warranty policy and procedures
resistance manual, or determine if any prior
recirculation valve prior to the installation of a new
bank B circuit open module/component
circuit
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank B circuit
disconnected
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank B failure

17 Sensor B Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit TPS - and check exhaust gas recirculation
voltage above threshold valve bank B circuit for short circuit to
voltage above a Check and install a new exhaust gas
specified range but recirculation valve bank B as required.
not necessarily a short Refer to the warranty policy and
circuit to power procedures manual, or determine if any
bank B circuit short new module/component
circuit to power
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank B failure

92 Sensor B Circuit - NOTE: - Circuit TPS - and check throttle position sensor
Performance or incorrect circuit for short circuit to ground
operation Throttle position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
sensor circuit short and check throttle position sensor
circuit to ground circuit for short circuit to power
Throttle position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
sensor circuit short and check throttle position sensor
circuit to power circuit high resistance
sensor circuit high and check throttle position sensor
resistance circuit open circuit
sensor circuit open and check throttle position sensor
circuit circuit disconnected
Throttle position Check and install a new throttle
sensor circuit position sensor as required. Refer to
disconnected the warranty policy and procedures
Throttle position manual, or determine if any prior
module/component

00 Throttle Control Circuit A / NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Open - No sub type TPA_POS - TPA_NEG - signals, Commanded Throttle Actuator
information Control (0xF44C). This DTC is set when
Harness fault - Intake the engine control module detects an
air shut off throttle open load error on the intake air shut
control circuit off throttle control circuit. Refer to the
Intake air shut off electrical circuit diagrams and check
throttle failure the Throttle Plate Actuator control
circuits for open circuits, short circuit
to ground, short circuit to power.
suspect intake air shut off throttle
control actuator failure. Refer to the
module/component

19 Throttle Control Circuit A / NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Open - Circuit current TPA_POS - TPA_NEG - signals, Commanded Throttle Actuator
above threshold Control (0xF44C). This DTC is set when
Harness fault - Intake the engine control module detects
air shut off throttle current out of range on the intake air
control circuit short shut off throttle control circuit. Refer to
circuit to ground, high the electrical circuit diagrams and
resistance, open check the Throttle Plate Actuator
circuit control circuit for short circuit to
Intake air shut off ground, high resistance, open circuit.
throttle failure Repair wiring harness as required.
module/component

1D Throttle Control Circuit A / NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Open - Circuit current out TPA_POS - TPA_NEG - signals, Commanded Throttle Actuator
of range Control (0xF44C). This DTC is set when
air shut off throttle current out of range on the intake air
control circuit shut off throttle control circuit. Refer to
Intake air shut off the electrical circuit diagrams and
throttle failure check the Throttle Plate Actuator
control circuits for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, short to
other circuit. Repair wiring harness as
module/component

16 Throttle Control Circuit A NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - TPA_POS - TPA_NEG - signals, Commanded Throttle Actuator
Circuit voltage below Control (0xF44C). This DTC is set when
threshold The engine control the engine control module detects
module measured a voltage on the intake air shut off
voltage below a throttle control circuit below threshold.
not necessarily a short and check the Throttle Plate Actuator
circuit to ground control circuits for high resistance,
Harness fault - Intake open circuit, short circuit to ground,
air shut off throttle short circuit to power, short to other
control circuit circuit. Repair wiring harness as
Intake air shut off required. Clear DTC and retest
throttle failure If no fault found in wiring harness
module/component
P0488- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Harness fault - Intake Using the manufacturer approved
19 Throttle Control Circuit A air shut off throttle diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - control circuit short signals, Commanded Throttle Actuator
Circuit current above circuit to ground, high Control (0xF44C). This DTC is set when
threshold resistance the engine control module detects
Intake air shut off current out of range on the intake air
throttle failure shut off throttle control circuit. Refer to
the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the Throttle Plate Actuator
control circuit for short circuit to
ground, high resistance. Repair wiring
retest
module/component

1D Throttle Control Circuit A NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - TPA_POS - TPA_NEG - signals, Commanded Throttle Actuator
Circuit current out of range Control (0xF44C). This DTC is set when
air shut off throttle current on the intake air shut off
control circuit throttle control circuit out of range.
Intake air shut off Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
throttle failure and check the Throttle Plate Actuator
control circuits for high resistance,
open circuit, short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, short to other
module/component
P0488- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Harness fault - Intake Using the manufacturer approved
4B Throttle Control Circuit A air shut off throttle diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - Over control circuit short signals, Commanded Throttle Actuator
temperature circuit to ground, Control (0xF44C). Refer to the
short circuit to power, electrical circuit diagrams and check
high resistance the intake air shut off throttle control
Intake air shut off circuit for short circuit to ground, short
throttle failure circuit to power, high resistance. Repair
and retest
module/component
P0488- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Harness fault - EGR Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
72 Throttle Control Circuit A throttle inlet control and check the EGR throttle inlet control
Range/Performance - circuit short circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short
Actuator stuck open ground, short circuit circuit to power, high resistance, open
to power, high circuit. Repair wiring harness as
resistance, open required. Clear DTC and retest
circuit If no fault found in wiring harness
EGR throttle inlet suspect EGR throttle inlet control
control actuator failure actuator failure. Refer to the warranty
module/component
P0488- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Harness fault - EGR Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
73 Throttle Control Circuit A throttle inlet control and check the EGR throttle inlet control
Range/Performance - circuit short circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short
Actuator stuck closed ground, short circuit circuit to power, high resistance, open
to power, high circuit. Repair wiring harness as
resistance, open required. Clear DTC and retest
EGR throttle inlet suspect EGR throttle inlet control
control actuator failure actuator failure. Refer to the warranty
module/component
P0489- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Check for related DTCs and refer to the
77 Control Circuit Low - NOTE: - Circuit relevant DTC index
Commanded position not SENSOR_GND_5 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
reachable and check the throttle position sensor
Throttle position circuit for open circuit
sensor circuit, open
circuit
P0490- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Throttle position Check for related DTCs and refer to the
77 A Control Circuit High - sensor circuit, short relevant DTC index
Commanded position not circuit to ground, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
reachable short circuit to power, and check the throttle position sensor
open circuit circuit for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, open circuit
P049D- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Harness fault - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
00 A Control Position Exhaust gas and check the bank 1 exhaust gas
Exceeded Learning Limit - recirculation valve recirculation control circuit for short
No sub type information bank 1 control circuit circuit to ground, short circuit to
short circuit to power, high resistance, open circuit.
ground, short circuit Repair wiring harness as required.
to power, high Clear DTC and retest
resistance, open If no fault found in wiring harness
circuit suspect exhaust gas recirculation
recirculation valve warranty policy and procedures
bank 1 actuator failure manual, or determine if any prior
module/component
P049E- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Harness fault - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
00 B Control Position Exhaust gas and check the bank 2 exhaust gas
Exceeded Learning Limit - recirculation valve recirculation control circuit for short
No sub type information bank 2 control circuit circuit to ground, short circuit to
short circuit to power, high resistance, open circuit.
ground, short circuit Repair wiring harness as required.
to power, high Clear DTC and retest
resistance, open If no fault found in wiring harness
circuit suspect exhaust gas recirculation
recirculation valve warranty policy and procedures
bank 2 actuator failure manual, or determine if any prior
module/component
P0504- Brake Switch A / B Check for related brake pressure DTCs

27 Correlation - Signal rate of NOTE: - Circuit within the anti-lock braking control
change above threshold BRAKE_SW_1 - BRAKE_SW_2 module
- Check brake pedal switch is fitted
correctly
Brake pedal switch Check and install a new brake switch
plunger failure as required. Clear DTC, start the engine
Brake pedal switch not press the brake pedal, using maximum
fitted correctly travel for greater than 1 second taking
Brake switch A failure care not to press the accelerator pedal.
P0504- Brake Switch A / B Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

62 Correlation - Signal NOTE: - Circuit and check brake pedal switch circuit for
compare failure BRAKE_SW_1 - BRAKE_SW_2 short circuit to power, open circuit
-
Error check for Brake

Plausibility
Brake pedal switch
power, open circuit
P050E- Cold Start Engine Exhaust Engine coolant Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
00 Temperature Too Low - No temperature sensor and check engine coolant temperature
sub type information circuit short circuit to sensor circuit for short circuit to
ground, short circuit ground, short circuit to power, open
to power, open circuit, circuit, disconnected. Repair wiring
disconnected harness as required. Clear DTC and
Engine coolant retest
temperature sensor Check and install a new engine coolant
failure temperature sensor as required. Refer
module/component
P0512- Starter Request Circuit - This DTC is set when the engine control
24 Signal stuck high NOTE: - Circuit CRANK - module detects the engine crank signal
from the central junction box is stuck
The engine control high. If this DTC is logged on its own
module measures a clear the DTC using the manufacturer
signal that remains approved diagnostic system. Select
high when transitions PARK position. Set ignition OFF, wait 2
are expected minutes for post drive to complete. Set
Harness fault - starter ignition ON but do NOT crank. Wait 25
request circuit fault seconds. Crank engine and check if
Central junction box DTC is cleared. If this DTC is logged
fault with lost communication DTCs refer to
Post drive cycle not electrical circuit diagrams and check
completed CAN circuit. If the engine cannot be
Harness fault - CAN cranked read the DTCs stored in the
circuit central junction box and refer to the
relevant DTC index. Check the engine
crank signal input circuit for open
circuits, short circuit to power, short
circuit to ground, short circuit to other
circuits. Repair wiring harness as
P0513- Incorrect Immobilizer Key Security key invalid Check for CAN network
00 - No sub type information interference/engine control module
related error. Re-configure the engine
control module using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system. Re-
configure the instrument panel control
module using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system
P0528- Fan Speed Sensor Circuit Using the manufacturer approved

00 No Signal - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit CFM - diagnostic system check datalogger
information signals, Fan Speed Indicated (0x0702).
Harness fault - cooling This DTC is set when the engine control
fan monitor circuit module does not receive a signal on the
cooling fan monitor circuit. Check the
cooling fan monitor signal input circuit
for open circuits, short circuit to power,
short circuit to ground or other circuits.
P052F- Glow Plug Control Module Glow plug control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
00 System Voltage - No sub module circuit short and check glow plug control module
type information circuit to ground, circuit for short circuit to ground, short
short circuit to power, circuit to power, open circuit,
open circuit, disconnected
disconnected Check and install a new glow plug
Glow plug control control module as required. Refer to
module failure the warranty policy and procedures
module/component
P0544- Exhaust Gas Temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

00 Sensor Circuit - Bank 1 NOTE: - Circuit STOT - and check exhaust gas temperature
Sensor 1 - No sub type sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for
information Exhaust gas short circuit to ground
temperature sensor, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
bank 1 sensor 1 circuit and check exhaust gas temperature
short circuit to ground sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for
Exhaust gas short circuit to power
short circuit to power sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for high
Exhaust gas resistance
high resistance sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for open
Exhaust gas circuit
open circuit sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for
Exhaust gas disconnected. Repair wiring harness as
temperature sensor, required. Clear DTC and retest
bank 1 sensor 1 circuit Check and install a new exhaust gas
disconnected temperature sensor, bank1 sensor 1 as
Exhaust gas required. Refer to the warranty policy
temperature sensor, and procedures manual, or determine if
bank 1 sensor 1 failure any prior approval programme is in

00 Sensor Circuit Low - Bank NOTE: - Circuit STOT - and check exhaust gas temperature
1 Sensor 1 - No sub type sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for
information Exhaust gas short circuit to ground
short circuit to ground sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for high
Exhaust gas resistance
high resistance sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for open
Exhaust gas circuit
open circuit sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for
Exhaust gas disconnected. Repair wiring harness as
temperature sensor, required. Clear DTC and retest
bank 1 sensor 1 circuit Check and install a new exhaust gas
disconnected temperature sensor, bank1 sensor 1 as
Exhaust gas required. Refer to the warranty policy
temperature sensor, and procedures manual, or determine if
bank 1 sensor 1 failure any prior approval programme is in

00 Sensor Circuit High - Bank NOTE: - Circuit STOT - and check exhaust gas temperature
1 Sensor 1 - No sub type sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for
information Exhaust gas short circuit to power. Repair wiring
temperature sensor, harness as required. Clear DTC and
bank 1 sensor 1 circuit retest
short circuit to power Check and install a new exhaust gas
Exhaust gas temperature sensor, bank1 sensor 1 as
temperature sensor, required. Refer to the warranty policy
bank 1 sensor 1 failure and procedures manual, or determine if
P0571- Brake Switch A Circuit - The brake switch Using the manufacturer approved
62 Signal compare failure signal received over diagnostic system carry out network
CAN is defective integrity test
Brake switch Check for related DTCs and refer to the
(footbrake switch) relevant DTC index
failure Check and install a new brake switch
module/component
P0571- Brake Switch A Circuit - Brake pedal pressed Ensure driver has not lightly pressed
68 Event information by driver at same time brake pedal and accelerator pedal at
as accelerator pedal the same time
pressed Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Brake pedal switch - and check Brake switch - Circuit
Circuit Brake_SW_1 - Brake_SW_1 - for short circuit to
short circuit to power power. Repair wiring harness as
Brake switch required, Clear the DTCs, drive the
(footbrake switch) vehicle at greater than 11mph (17kph)
failure with a throttle pedal greater than 10%
for greater than 3 seconds. Press the
brake pedal, using maximum travel for
greater than 3 seconds, with the
vehicle stationary, press the brake
pedal using maximum travel for greater
than 1 second
Check and install a new brake switch
module/component
P0575- Cruise Control Input Circuit The DTC sets Check speed control buttons are not
81 - Invalid serial data whenever the cancel, jammed/contaminated/damaged. Check
received set minus, set plus, speed control module for related DTCs
resume, headway and refer to the relevant DTC index
increase and headway
decrease speed
control buttons have
been pressed for
longer than a
calibrated period of
time. The system then
assumes a
stuck/damaged button
and will cancel and/or
disable cruise. The
failure will be healed
in the next driving
cycle if the fault is
removed
P0602- Powertrain Control Module Mismatch between car Using the manufacturer approved
00 Programming Error - No configuration file and diagnostic system re-configure the
sub type information engine control module engine control module. Clear the DTC
calibration for and retest the system
expected engine power
output
Incorrect engine
control module
calibration for vehicle
specification
P0605- Internal Control Module Corrupt engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 Read Only Memory (ROM) module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the
Error - No sub type Engine control module engine control module
information power supply fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Engine control module and check the engine control module
ground supply fault power supply for open circuit. Repair
Engine control module wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
failure and retest
and check the engine control module
ground supply for open circuit. Repair
and retest
Check and install a new engine control
module as required. Refer to the
module/component
P0606- Control Module Processor - Corrupt engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 No sub type information module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the
Engine control module engine control module
power supply fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
failure and retest
and retest
module/component
44 Data memory failure module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the
failure and retest
and retest
module/component
49 Internal electronic failure module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the
failure and retest
and retest
module/component
P0607- Control Module Corrupt engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 Performance - No sub type module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the
information Engine control module engine control module
failure power supply for open circuit. Repair
and retest
module/component
P060A- Internal Control Module Engine control module Check engine control module power
00 Monitoring Processor has reset due to and ground supply circuits for open
Performance - No sub type hardware fault circuits. Re-configure the engine
information control module using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module. Refer to the warranty
module/component
P060A- Internal Control Module The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
16 Monitoring Processor module measured a diagnostic system re-configure the
Performance - Circuit voltage below a engine control module
voltage below threshold specified range but Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
not necessarily a short and check the engine control module
circuit to ground power supply for open circuit. Repair
Corrupt engine control wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
module software flash and retest
Engine control module Check and install a new engine control
power supply fault module as required. Refer to the
Engine control module warranty policy and procedures
failure manual, or determine if any prior
module/component
P060A- Internal Control Module The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
17 Monitoring Processor module measured a diagnostic system re-configure the
Performance - Circuit voltage above a engine control module
voltage above threshold specified range but Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit to power power supply for open circuit. Repair
Engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
power supply fault and check the engine control module
Engine control module ground supply for open circuit. Repair
ground supply fault wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
Engine control module and retest
failure Check and install a new engine control
module/component
P060B- Internal Control Module Corrupt engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 A/D Processing module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the
Performance - No sub type Engine control module engine control module
information power supply fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
failure and retest
and retest
module/component
P060B- Internal Control Module The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
16 A/D Processing module measured a diagnostic system re-configure the
Performance - Circuit voltage below a engine control module
voltage below threshold specified range but Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit to ground power supply for open circuit. Repair
module/component
P060B- Internal Control Module The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
17 A/D Processing module measured a diagnostic system re-configure the
Performance - Circuit voltage above a engine control module
voltage above threshold specified range but Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
module/component
Performance - Calibration / Engine control module engine control module
parameter memory failure power supply fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
failure and retest
and retest
module/component
Performance - Internal Engine control module engine control module
electronic failure power supply fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
failure and retest
and retest
module/component
Performance - Circuit / Engine control module engine control module
component protection power supply fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
time-out Engine control module and check the engine control module
failure and retest
and retest
module/component
P060C- Internal Control Module Engine control module Clear DTC and road test vehicle
00 Main Processor has reset due to including at least 5 ignition cycles. Re-
Performance - No sub type hardware or software check DTC and repeat above
information fault procedure. If DTC resets suspect engine
control module. Check and install a
new engine control module as required.
P060D- Internal Control Module Accelerator pedal The Accelerator Pedal Position sensor
00 Accelerator Pedal Position position sensor circuit, consists of two potentiometer circuits
Performance - No sub type short circuit to feeding independent pedal demand
information ground, short circuit signals to the engine control module.
to power, high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
resistance, open and check the reference voltage and
circuit ground connections to the Accelerator
Accelerator pedal pedal position sensor. Check signal
position sensor failure circuits for high resistance, open
Engine control module circuits, short circuit to power, short
failure circuit to ground. clear DTC and retest
system
If there are no wiring faults suspect the
accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer
module/component
module/component
P0610- Control Module Vehicle Corrupt engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 Options Error - No sub module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the
type information Engine control module engine control module
failure and retest
and retest
module/component
P0615- Starter Relay Circuit - No Using the manufacturer approved

00 sub type information NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system re-configure the
STARTER_RELAY_HIGH - engine control module
STARTER_RELAY_LOW - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Corrupt engine control power supply for open circuit. Repair
module software flash wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
ground supply fault ground supply for open circuit. Repair
failure and retest
module/component
P061A- Internal Control Module Manifold air flow Check and install a new manifold air
00 Torque Performance - No sensor failure flow sensor as required
sub type information Electric throttle unit Check and install a new electric throttle
failure unit as required. Refer to the warranty
module/component
P061B- Internal Control Module Manifold air flow Check and install a new manifold air
00 Torque Calculation sensor failure flow sensor as required
Performance - No sub type Electric throttle unit Check and install a new electric throttle
information failure unit as required. Refer to the warranty
module/component
P061C- Internal Control Module Corrupt engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 Engine RPM Performance - module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the
No sub type information Engine control module engine control module
failure and retest
and retest
module/component
P061C- Internal Control Module The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
11 Engine RPM Performance - module has detected a and check the power and ground
Circuit short to ground ground measurement supplies to the engine control module
for a period longer
than expected or has
detected a ground
measurement when
another value was
expected
Internal fault within
engine control module
- engine speed output
short to ground
12 Engine RPM Performance - module has detected a and check the power and ground
Circuit short to battery vehicle power supplies to the engine control module
measurement for a
period longer than
expected or has
detected a vehicle
power measurement
when another value
was expected
short to power
13 Engine RPM Performance - module has and check the power and ground
Circuit open determined an open supplies to the engine control module
circuit via lack of bias
voltage, low current
flow, no change in the
open circuit
P0620- Generator Control Circuit - Electrical fault has Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
00 No sub type information been detected by the and check the generator circuit, for
generator and short circuit to power, short circuit to
reported to the engine ground, open circuit. Repair wiring
control module by LIN harness as required. Clear DTC and
bus retest
Generator failure Check and install a new generator as
P0627- Fuel Pump A Control

13 Circuit / Open - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit NOTE: When this DTC is set the engine
open LIFT_PUMP_RELAY_CTRL - control module limits engine torque to protect
the engine and avoid pulling air into the fuel
The engine control system under high load
module has
determined an open Check the operation of the lift pump
circuit via lack of bias relay. Replace if required. Refer to the
voltage, low current electrical circuit diagrams and check
flow, no change in the the fuel lift pump relay control circuit
state of an input in between the engine control module and
response to an output the rear junction box for open circuit.
Wiring harness fault Repair wiring harness as required.
between engine Clear DTC and retest
control module and
auxiliary junction box
Lift pump relay fault

11 Circuit Low - Circuit short NOTE: - Circuit NOTE: When this DTC is set the fuel lift
to ground LIFT_PUMP_RELAY_CTRL - pump will run continuously when the ignition
is on, even when the engine is stopped
The engine control
module has detected a Check the operation of the lift pump
ground measurement relay. Replace if required. Refer to the
for a period longer electrical circuit diagrams and check
than expected or has the fuel lift pump relay control circuit
detected a ground between the engine control module and
measurement when the auxiliary junction box for a short
another value was circuit to ground. Repair wiring harness
expected as required. Clear DTC and retest
Wiring harness fault
between engine
control module and

12 Circuit High - Circuit short NOTE: - Circuit NOTE: When this DTC is set the engine
to battery LIFT_PUMP_RELAY_CTRL - control module limits engine torque to protect
the engine and avoid pulling air into the fuel
The engine control system under high load
module has detected a
vehicle power Check the operation of the lift pump
measurement for a relay. Replace if required. Refer to the
period longer than electrical circuit diagrams and check
expected or has the fuel lift pump relay control circuit
detected a vehicle between the engine control module and
power measurement the auxiliary junction box for a short
when another value circuit to power. Repair wiring harness
was expected as required. Clear DTC and retest
Wiring harness fault
between engine
control module and
P062A- Fuel Pump A Control Lift pump relay has Check for related DTCs within the rear
92 Circuit Range/Performance been driven by the junction box
- Performance or incorrect auxiliary junction, but Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
operation has not been and check fuel lift pump relay circuit
requested by the for short circuit to ground, short circuit
engine control module to power, open circuit. Refer to the
Lift pump relay has electrical circuit diagrams and check
been requested by the between the engine control module and
engine control module, the auxiliary junction box for short
but has not been circuit to ground
driven by the auxiliary Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
junction box and check the rear junction box to low
Wiring harness fault pressure in tank fuel pump relay for
lift pump monitor short circuit to power
circuit Check and install a new fuel lift pump
Lift pump relay relay as required. Clear DTC and retest
P062B- Internal Control Module Injector failure(s) Check for related injector DTCs and
00 Fuel Injector Control Corrupt engine control repair these first. Clear DTCs and
Performance - No sub type module software flash retest
information Engine control module Using the manufacturer approved
power supply fault diagnostic system re-configure the
ground supply fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and retest
and retest
module/component
Performance - General module software flash retest
checksum failure Engine control module Using the manufacturer approved
and retest
and retest
module/component
Performance - Supervision module software flash retest
software failure Engine control module Using the manufacturer approved
and retest
and retest
module/component
Performance - Internal module software flash retest
electronic failure Engine control module Using the manufacturer approved
and retest
and retest
module/component
Performance - Signal module software flash retest
calculation failure Engine control module Using the manufacturer approved
and retest
and retest
module/component
compare failure Engine control module Using the manufacturer approved
and retest
and retest
module/component
plausibility failure Engine control module Using the manufacturer approved
and retest
and retest
module/component
incorrect after event Engine control module Using the manufacturer approved
and retest
and retest
module/component
Performance - Parametric module software flash retest
Engine control module Using the manufacturer approved
and retest
and retest
module/component
Performance - Performance module software flash retest
or incorrect operation Engine control module Using the manufacturer approved
and retest
and retest
module/component
Performance - Unexpected module software flash retest
operation Engine control module Using the manufacturer approved
and retest
and retest
module/component
9A Fuel Injector Control Corrupt engine control repair these first. Clear DTCs and
Performance - Component module software flash retest
or system operating Engine control module Using the manufacturer approved
conditions power supply fault diagnostic system re-configure the
and retest
and retest
module/component
P062D- Fuel Injector Driver Circuit Bank 1 injector Check for related Injector DTCs. Check
00 Performance Bank 1 - No circuit(s) high injector connections to Bank 1
sub type information resistance, short cylinders. Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to ground, diagrams and check Bank 1 injector
short circuit to power, circuits for short circuit to ground,
high resistance, open short circuit to power, open circuit,
circuit, disconnected high resistance. Clear DTC and retest.
Injector bank 1 failure If DTC remains, disconnect engine
control module connector, and with
injector(s) connected check resistance
across injector pins, this should be no
higher than the injector resistance
Check and install new injector(s) as
P062D- Fuel Injector Driver Circuit The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
11 Performance Bank 1 - module has detected a and check the wiring harness between
Circuit short to ground ground measurement engine control module and bank 1 fuel
for a period longer injectors for short circuit to ground
detected a ground
measurement when
another value was
expected
P062D- Fuel Injector Driver Circuit The engine control Check for related injector DTCs. Check
16 Performance Bank 1 - module measured a injector connections to Bank 1
Circuit voltage below voltage below a cylinders. Refer to the electrical circuit
threshold specified range but diagrams and check Bank 1 injector
not necessarily a short circuits for short circuit to ground,
circuit to ground open circuit, high resistance. Clear DTC
Bank 1 injector and retest. If DTC remains, disconnect
circuit(s) high engine control module connector, and
resistance, short with injector(s) connected check
circuit to ground, high resistance across injector pins, this
resistance, open should be no higher than the injector
circuit, disconnected resistance
Injector bank 1 failure Check and install new injector(s) as
P062D- Fuel Injector Driver Circuit The engine control Check for related injector DTCs. Check
Circuit voltage above voltage above a cylinders. Refer to the electrical circuit
not necessarily a short circuits for short circuit to power. Clear
circuit to power DTC and retest. If DTC remains,
Bank 1 injector disconnect engine control module
circuit(s) short circuit connector, and with injector(s)
to power connected check resistance across
Injector bank 1 failure injector pins, this should be no higher
than the injector resistance
P062E- Fuel Injector Driver Circuit Bank 2 injector Check for related injector DTCs. Check
00 Performance Bank 2 - No circuit(s) high injector connections to Bank 2
sub type information resistance, short cylinders. Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to ground, diagrams and check Bank 2 injector
short circuit to power, circuits for short circuit to ground,
high resistance, open short circuit to power, open circuit,
circuit, disconnected high resistance. Clear DTC and retest.
Injector bank 2 failure If DTC remains, disconnect engine
control module connector, and with
injector(s) connected check resistance
across injector pins, this should be no
higher than the injector resistance
P062E- Fuel Injector Driver Circuit The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
11 Performance Bank 2 - module has detected a and check the wiring harness between
Circuit short to ground ground measurement engine control module and bank 2 fuel
for a period longer injectors for short circuit to ground
detected a ground
measurement when
another value was
expected
P062E- Fuel Injector Driver Circuit The engine control Check for related injector DTCs. Check
Circuit voltage above voltage above a cylinders. Refer to the electrical circuit
not necessarily a short circuits for short circuit to power. Clear
circuit to power DTC and retest. If DTC remains,
Bank 2 injector disconnect ECM connector, and with
circuit(s) short circuit injector(s) connected check resistance
to power across injector pins, this should be no
Injector bank 2 failure higher than the injector resistance
P0633- Immobilizer Key Not Security key not Check for CAN network
00 Programmed - ECM/PCM - programmed interference/engine control module
No sub type information related error. Re-configure the engine
control module using the manufacturer
configure the instrument panel control
P0634- Control Module Internal Engine control module Clear DTC, wait 10 minutes and re-
1B Temperature "A" Too High internal temperature check
- Circuit resistance above too high Check and install a new engine control
threshold Engine control module module as required. Refer to the
failure warranty policy and procedures
module/component
P064C- Glow Plug Control Module - Glow plug control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
00 No sub type information module circuit short and check glow plug control module
circuit to ground, circuit for short circuit to ground, short
short circuit to power, circuit to power, open circuit,
open circuit, disconnected
disconnected Check and install a new glow plug
Glow plug control control module as required. Refer to
module failure the warranty policy and procedures
module/component
P064D- Internal Control Module O2 Pre catalyst oxygen Check and repair related Heated
00 Sensor Processor sensor circuit short Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor DTCs.
Performance - Bank 1 - No circuit to ground, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
sub type information short circuit to power, and check Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen
high resistance, open sensor for short circuit to ground, short
circuit circuit to power, high resistance, open
Pre catalyst oxygen circuit
sensor failure Check and install a new Heated
Engine control module Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor as
failure required. Clear DTC and recheck
If DTC remains, suspect engine control
module fault. Refer to the warranty
module/component
P064D- Internal Control Module O2 The engine control Check and repair related Heated
16 Sensor Processor module measured a Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor DTCs.
Performance - Bank 1 - voltage below a Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Circuit voltage below specified range but and check Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen
threshold not necessarily a short sensor for short circuit to ground, high
circuit to ground resistance, open circuit
Pre catalyst oxygen Check and install a new Heated
sensor circuit short Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor as
circuit to ground, high required. Clear DTC and recheck
resistance, open If DTC remains, suspect engine control
circuit module fault. Refer to the warranty
Pre catalyst oxygen policy and procedures manual, or
sensor failure determine if any prior approval
Engine control module programme is in operation, prior to the
failure installation of a new
module/component
P0658- Actuator Supply Voltage A Actuator supply circuit Using the manufacturer approved
00 Circuit Low - No sub type voltage below diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
information threshold EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
and check engine control module power
and ground supplies for short circuit to
ground, open circuit
P0659- Actuator Supply Voltage A Actuator supply circuit Using the manufacturer approved
00 Circuit High - No sub type voltage above diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
information threshold EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
and check engine control module power
and ground supplies for short circuit to
power
P065A- Generator System Generator circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
00 Performance - No sub type circuit to ground, high and check generator circuit for short
information resistance, open circuit to ground, high resistance, open
circuit circuit. Repair wiring harness as
Generator mechanical required. Clear DTC and retest
failure Check and install a new generator as
P065B- Generator Control Circuit The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
16 Range/Performance - module measured a and check charging circuit for short
Circuit voltage below voltage below a circuit to ground, short circuit to
threshold specified range but power, open circuit. Clear DTC and
not necessarily a short repeat automated diagnostic procedure
circuit to ground using the manufacturer approved
Charging circuit short diagnostic system
circuit to ground, If DTC remains check battery is in fully
short circuit to power, charged and serviceable condition using
open circuit the Midtronics battery tester and
Quiescent current high battery care manual. If ok suspect the
Battery failure/worn generator
out Check and install a new generator as
Generator failure required. Refer to the warranty policy
P065B- Generator Control Circuit The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
17 Range/Performance - module measured a and check generator circuit for short
Circuit voltage above voltage above a circuit to ground, high resistance, open
threshold specified range but circuit. Repair wiring harness as
not necessarily a short required. Clear DTC and retest
circuit to power Check and install a new generator as
Generator circuit short required. Refer to the warranty policy
circuit to ground, high and procedures manual, or determine if
resistance, open any prior approval programme is in
circuit operation, prior to the installation of a
Generator mechanical new module/component
failure
P0668- PCM / ECM / TCM Internal Engine control module Check and install a new engine control
00 Temperature Sensor A internal temperature module as required. Refer to the
Circuit Low - No sub type sensor failure warranty policy and procedures
information manual, or determine if any prior
module/component
P0669- PCM / ECM / TCM Internal Engine control module Check and install a new engine control
00 Temperature Sensor A internal temperature module as required. Refer to the
Circuit High - No sub type sensor failure warranty policy and procedures
information manual, or determine if any prior
module/component
P066A- Cylinder 1 Glow Plug The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
00 Control Circuit Low - No module has detected a and check the glow plug control circuit
sub type information ground measurement between the glow plug control module
for a period longer and the glow plug connector for short
than expected or has circuit to ground, check the power
detected a ground supply and ground connections to the
measurement when glow plug control module, ensure that
another value was the harness is checked for intermittent
expected faults. Repair harness as required.
Harness fault - Refer to relevant section of workshop
cylinder 1 glow plug manual, check cylinder 1 glow plug for
circuit short circuit to internal short circuit to ground. Replace
ground glow plug if required. clear DTC and
Component fault - retest system
glow plug failure If DTC resets suspect glow plug control
Component fault - module. Refer to the warranty policy
glow plug control and procedures manual, or determine if
module failure any prior approval programme is in
P066C- Cylinder 2 Glow Plug The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
P066E- Cylinder 3 Glow Plug The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
P0671- Cylinder 1 Glow Plug Cylinder 1 glow plug Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
00 Circuit / Open - No sub control circuit high and check cylinder 1 glow plug circuit
type information resistance for high resistance. Repair wiring
Cylinder 1 glow plug harness as required. Clear DTC and
control circuit retest
disconnected Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Cylinder 1 glow plug and check cylinder 1 glow plug circuit
failure for high resistance. Repair wiring
retest
Check and install a new cylinder 1 glow
plug as required. Refer to the warranty
module/component
retest
module/component
retest
module/component
retest
module/component
retest
module/component
retest
module/component
P067A- Cylinder 4 Glow Plug The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
P067C- Cylinder 5 Glow Plug The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
P067E- Cylinder 6 Glow Plug The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
P0683- Glow Plug Control Module This DTC is set when the data
00 to PCM Communication NOTE: - Circuit transmission on the control circuit
Circuit - No sub type GLOWPLUG_CTRL - between the engine control module and
information the glow plug control module has an
Harness fault - Engine error. Check for other related DTCs and
control module to refer to the relevant DTC index table.
glow plug control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
module and check the glowplug control signal
Glow plug control line from the engine control module to
module failure the glow plug control module for faults
Engine control module such as intermittent open circuits, high
failure resistance, short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power. Check the
glowplug monitor signal line from the
glowplug control module to the engine
control module for intermittent open
circuits, high resistance, short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power
and check power and ground supplies
to the glowplug control module. Repair
and retest
module/component
P068A- ECM/PCM Power Relay De- Vehicle battery This DTC is set when the engine
00 Energized - Too Early - No disconnected before management system high current relay
sub type information engine management contacts open early - indicating a
system relay has power hold fault. Check the vehicle
powered down battery has not been disconnected
Engine management before the engine management system
system high current relay has powered down. Check the
relay fault operation of the engine management
Central junction box system high current relay. Refer to the
fault electrical circuit diagrams and check
Harness fault - relay the engine management system high
control circuit current relay supply and control circuits
for open circuits, high resistance, short
power, short circuit to other circuits.
Repair the wiring harness
Check and install a new relay or central
junction box as required. Refer to the
module/component
P06AF- Torque Management Injection cut off Check for related engine control
00 System - Forced Engine demand for shut off module DTCs and repair these first.
Shutdown - No sub type coordinator Clear the DTC and retest
information The DTC sets when
the engine speed has
exceeded the hard
engine speed limiter.
When this DTC sets, a
request to the shut-off
coordinator is made
for a reversible shut-
off of the injection
power stages,
ensuring no injections
take place. It gets
reset when engine
speed falls less than
or equal to the hard
limiter
Engine run away
Excessive injected fuel
Over boost from a
turbocharger
P0700- Transmission Control MIL request by Check transmission control module for
00 System (MIL Request) - No automatic gearbox DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
sub type information index. Clear DTC and retest
P0850- Park / Neutral Switch Input Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
64 Circuit - Signal plausibility NOTE: - Circuit and check the park neutral switch
failure PARK/NEUTRAL SW - circuit between the engine control
module and the transmission control
Park neutral switch module and control valve body for
circuit short circuit to short circuit to ground, short circuit to
ground, short circuit power, open circuit, high resistance
high resistance
P0A09- DC/DC Converter Status The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
16 Circuit Low - Circuit module measured a and check the engine control module
voltage below threshold voltage below a power supply for open circuit. Repair
specified range but wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
not necessarily a short and retest
circuit to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
power supply fault ground supply for open circuit. Repair
ground supply fault and retest
Engine control module Check and install a new engine control
failure module as required. Refer to the
module/component
P0A0F- Engine Failed to Start - No Engine control module Check for related engine control
00 sub type information has logged an module DTCs and repair these first.
extended crank with Clear the DTC and retest. If this DTC
no engine start remains alone suspect engine control
Engine control module module failure
module/component
P0A10- DC/DC Converter Status The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
17 Circuit High - Circuit module measured a diagnostic system re-configure the
voltage above threshold voltage above a engine control module
module/component
P0A14- Engine Mount Control A Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

13 Circuit / Open - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit AEM1 - and check the engine mount A control
open circuit for open circuit. Repair wiring
The engine control harness as required. Clear DTC and
module has retest
determined an open
circuit via lack of bias
engine mount control
A circuit

11 Circuit Low - Circuit short NOTE: - Circuit AEM1 - and check the engine mount A control
to ground circuit for short circuit to ground.
The engine control Repair wiring harness as required.
module has detected a Clear DTC and retest
ground measurement
for a period longer
detected a ground
measurement when
another value was
expected
A circuit

12 Circuit High - Circuit short NOTE: - Circuit AEM1 - and check the engine mount A control
to battery circuit for short circuit to power. Repair
The engine control wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
module has detected a and retest
vehicle power
measurement for a
period longer than
expected or has
detected a vehicle
power measurement
when another value
was expected
A circuit
P0A16- Engine Mount Control A Engine mount control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
4B Circuit High - Over A circuit short circuit and check engine mount control A
temperature to ground, short circuit for short circuit to ground,
circuit to power power. Repair wiring harness as
Engine mount control required. Clear DTC and retest
A failure Check and install a new engine mount
control A as required. Refer to the
module/component
P0A1A- Generator Control Module - Generator to engine Check for good/clean contact at
00 No sub type information control module LIN generator and engine control module
circuit, open circuit LIN circuit connectors/pins. Refer to the
Generator/engine electrical circuit diagrams and check
control module failure generator to engine control module LIN
circuit for open circuit. Check for
engine control module hardware DTCs
and refer to relevant DTC index. Clear
DTCs and repeat automated diagnostic
procedure using the manufacturer
Check and install a new generator /
engine control module as required.
P0A1A- Generator Control Module - Generator to engine Check for good/clean contact at
87 Missing message control module LIN generator and engine control module
circuit open circuit LIN circuit connectors/pins. Refer to the
generator to engine control module LIN
circuit for open circuit. Check for
engine control module hardware DTCs
and refer to relevant DTC index. Clear
DTCs and repeat automated diagnostic
procedure using the manufacturer
P0A3B- Generator Over Generator Check the generator wiring and

00 Temperature - No sub type wiring/connectors heat connectors for heat damage
information damaged Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Generator circuit short and check generator wiring for short
circuit to ground, high circuit to ground, high resistance.
resistance Repair wiring harness as required.
Generator failure Clear DTC and retest
Check and install a new generator as
P0A94- DC/DC Converter Using the manufacturer approved

00 Performance - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system re-configure the
information SENSOR_SUPPLY_10 - engine control module
SENSOR_SUPPLY_9 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
SENSOR_SUPPLY_8 - and check the engine control module
5V_SENSOR_SUPPLY_1 - power supply for open circuit. Repair
5V_SENSOR_SUPPLY_4 - wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
5V_SENSOR_SUPPLY_5 - and retest
5V_SENSOR_SUPPLY_6 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
5V_SENSOR_SUPPLY_2 - and check the engine control module
5V_SENSOR_SUPPLY_8 ground supply for open circuit. Repair
Corrupt engine control and retest
module software flash Check and install a new engine control
Engine control module module as required. Refer to the
power supply fault warranty policy and procedures
Engine control module manual, or determine if any prior
ground supply fault approval programme is in operation,
Engine control module prior to the installation of a new
P115A- Low Fuel Level - Forced Low level fuel Check the fuel level, add fuel if
00 Limited Power - No sub condition required and clear the DTC
type information Critical fuel level If there is sufficient fuel, refer to the
switch signal circuit - electrical circuit diagrams and check
short circuit to the critical fuel level switch circuits for
ground, short circuit short, open circuit. Repair wiring
to power, open circuit harness as required. Clear DTC and
Critical fuel level retest
switch failure Check and install a new critical fuel
Fuel level sensor level switch as required. Refer to the
signal circuit - short warranty policy and procedures
circuit to ground, manual, or determine if any prior
short circuit to power, approval programme is in operation,
open circuit prior to the installation of a new
Fuel level sensor module/component
failure If there is sufficient fuel, refer to the
the fuel level sensor circuits for short,
open circuit. Repair wiring harness as
Check and install a new fuel level
sensor as required. Refer to the
module/component
P115A- Low Fuel Level - Forced Low level fuel Check the fuel level, add fuel if
68 Limited Power - Event condition required and clear the DTC
information Critical fuel level If there is sufficient fuel, refer to the
switch signal circuit - electrical circuit diagrams and check
short circuit to the critical fuel level switch circuits for
ground, short circuit short, open circuit. Repair wiring
to power, open circuit harness as required. Clear DTC and
Critical fuel level retest
switch failure Check and install a new critical fuel
Fuel level sensor level switch as required. Refer to the
signal circuit - short warranty policy and procedures
circuit to ground, manual, or determine if any prior
short circuit to power, approval programme is in operation,
open circuit prior to the installation of a new
Fuel level sensor module/component
failure If there is sufficient fuel, refer to the
module/component
P115B- Low Fuel Level - Forced Low level fuel Check the fuel level, add fuel if
00 Engine Shutdown - No sub condition enabling run required and clear the DTC
type information dry strategy If there is sufficient fuel, refer to the
Critical fuel level electrical circuit diagrams and check
switch signal circuit - the critical fuel level switch circuits for
short circuit to short, open circuit. Repair wiring
ground, short circuit harness as required. Clear DTC and
to power, open circuit retest
Critical fuel level Check and install a new critical fuel
switch failure level switch as required. Refer to the
Fuel level sensor warranty policy and procedures
signal circuit - short manual, or determine if any prior
circuit to ground, approval programme is in operation,
short circuit to power, prior to the installation of a new
open circuit module/component
Fuel level sensor If there is sufficient fuel, refer to the
failure electrical circuit diagrams and check
module/component
P115F- Electronic Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

11 Cooling Fan Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit EFC - and check the engine control module
short to ground cooling fan circuit for short circuit to
ground measurement Check and install new cooling fan as
for a period longer required. Refer to the warranty policy
than expected or has and procedures manual, or determine if
detected a ground any prior approval programme is in
measurement when operation, prior to the installation of a
another value was new module/component
expected
Harness fault - Engine
control module cooling
fan circuits
Cooling fan fault

short to battery cooling fan circuit for short circuit to
module has detected a required. Clear DTC and retest. Repair
vehicle power wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
measurement for a and retest
period longer than
expected or has
detected a vehicle
power measurement
when another value
was expected
fan circuits

open cooling fan circuit for open circuit.
The engine control Repair wiring harness as required.
module has Clear DTC and retest
determined an open Check and install new cooling fan as
circuit via lack of bias required. Refer to the warranty policy
voltage, low current and procedures manual, or determine if
flow, no change in the any prior approval programme is in
state of an input in operation, prior to the installation of a
response to an output new module/component
fan circuits
Cooling fan fault
P115F- Electronic Control Module Engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
19 Cooling Fan Circuit - Circuit cooling fan circuit and check the engine control module
current above threshold short circuit to ground cooling fan circuit for short circuit to
Engine control module ground. Repair wiring harness as
cooling fan failure or required. Clear DTC and retest
obstructed Check engine control module cooling
fan for obstruction. Check and install a
new engine control module cooling fan
module/component
P120F- Fuel Pressure Regulator Fuel pressure Using the manufacturer approved
00 Excessive Variation - No regulator signal circuit diagnostic system check for fuel pump
sub type information short circuit to related DTCs
ground, short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
to power, open circuit and check the fuel pressure regulator
Fuel pressure signal circuit for short circuit to
regulator VREF circuit ground, short circuit to power, open
high resistance circuit. Repair wiring harness as
Fuel pressure required, clear DTC and retest system
regulator failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the fuel pressure regulator
VREF circuit for high resistance. Repair
wiring harness as required, clear DTC
and retest system
Check and install new Fuel pressure
regulator as required. Refer to the
module/component
P1247- Turbocharger Boost Boost air recirculation If this DTC is logged with P00BE-00,
00 Pressure Low - No sub solenoid stuck open in suspect boost air recirculation solenoid
type information bi-turbo mode stuck open in bi-turbo mode
Boost air solenoid If this DTC is logged with P00BC-00,
stuck closed in bi- suspect boost air solenoid stuck closed
turbo mode in bi-turbo mode
solenoid stuck open P00BD-07, P22D2-77 & P22CF-71
Air intake system, suspect turbine intake solenoid stuck
boost air system high open
pressure boost air leak If this DTC is logged with P006A-00,
on bank 1 P0402-00 & P00BF-07 suspect air
Air intake system, intake system, boost air system high
boost air system high pressure boost air leak on bank 1
pressure boost air leak If this DTC is logged with P006A-00
in bi-turbo mode on suspect air intake system, boost air
bank 2 system high pressure boost air leak in
Variable geometry bi-turbo mode on bank 2
turbocharger If this DTC is logged with P00BE-07 &
compressor wheel P00BD-07 suspect variable geometry
seized turbocharger compressor wheel seized
Air intake system, low If this DTC is logged with P0235-94,
pressure intake P00BD-07, P22D2-77 & P22CF-71
blocked or restricted suspect Air intake system, low pressure
intake blocked or restricted
P1334- EGR Throttle Position Exhaust gas Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
00 Sensor Minimum/Maximum recirculation throttle and check exhaust gas recirculation
Stop Performance - No sub position sensor circuit throttle position sensor circuit for short
type information short circuit to circuit to ground, short circuit to
ground, short circuit power, high resistance, open circuit.
to power, high Repair wiring harness as required.
resistance, open Clear DTC and retest
circuit Check and install a new exhaust gas
Exhaust gas recirculation throttle position sensor as
recirculation throttle required. Refer to the warranty policy
position sensor failure and procedures manual, or determine if
Engine control module any prior approval programme is in
failure operation, prior to the installation of a
module/component
P151B- Idle Speed Control - RPM Indicated torque at Using the manufacturer approved
00 Lower Than Expected - No idle < minimum diagnostic system check for additional
sub type information DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index. Check engine oil level. Carry out
cylinder compression tests. Check for
mechanical failure of engine
P151C- Idle Speed Control - RPM Indicated torque at Using the manufacturer approved
00 Higher Than Expected - No idle > maximum diagnostic system check for additional
sub type information DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index. Check engine oil level. Carry out
cylinder compression tests. Check for
mechanical failure of engine
P1551- Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit This DTC is set when the engine control
32 Range/Performance - NOTE: - Circuit module detects that the injector signal
Signal low time < INJ_1_PWR_OUT_LOW - low time is less than the minimum
minimum INJ_1_PWR_OUT_HIGH - value. Check the injector wiring
harness for damage caused by chaffing
Harness fault - injector or heat. Refer to the electrical circuit
control circuit fault diagrams and check the injector control
Injector failure circuits for intermittent faults, open
failure circuit to ground, short circuit to other
required
If there are no wiring faults refer to the
injector is to specification and has been
installed correctly. Replace the injector
module/component
If there are no injector faults suspect
the engine control module. Refer to the
module/component
Signal high time > INJ_1_PWR_OUT_LOW - low time is greater than the maximum
maximum INJ_1_PWR_OUT_HIGH - value. Check the injector wiring
required
module/component
module/component
required
module/component
module/component
required
module/component
module/component
required
module/component
module/component
required
module/component
module/component
required
module/component
module/component
required
module/component
module/component
required
module/component
module/component
required
module/component
module/component
required
module/component
module/component
required
module/component
module/component
P1575- Pedal Position Out Of Self Brake pedal switch - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
00 Test Range - No sub type Circuit Brake_SW_2 - and check brake pedal switch - Circuit
information short circuit to power Brake_SW_2 - for short circuit to
Brake pedal switch - power
Circuit Brake_SW_2 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
open circuit and check brake pedal switch - Circuit
Brake switch failure Brake_SW_2 - for open circuit
Check and install a new brake switch
as required. Clear the DTCs, drive the
vehicle at greater than 11mph (17kph)
with a throttle pedal greater than 10%
for greater than 3 seconds. Press the
greater than 3 seconds, with the
vehicle stationary, press the brake
pedal using maximum travel for greater
than 1 second
P1627- Module Supply Voltage Out Refer to the workshop manual and the
16 Of Range - Circuit voltage NOTE: - Circuit battery care manual, inspect the
below threshold SWITCHED_SUPPLY_1 - vehicle battery and ensure it is fully
SWITCHED_SUPPLY_2 - charged and serviceable before
performing further tests
The engine control Check the vehicle charging system
module measured a performance to ensure the voltage
voltage below a regulation is correct
specified range but Using the manufacturer approved
not necessarily a short diagnostic system check datalogger
circuit to ground signals, Control module voltage
Vehicle battery fault (0xF442). This DTC is set when the
Charging system fault engine control module supply voltage is
harness fault - Engine below the threshold value. Refer to the
control module power electrical circuit diagrams and check
or ground supply the four engine control module power
Central junction box ground circuits for high resistance or
fault open circuits
Power distribution Check the switched power supply feeds
fault to the engine control module which
come from the central junction box
though the engine management system
relay. Repair wiring harness as
P1627- Module Supply Voltage Out Refer to the workshop manual and the
17 Of Range - Circuit voltage NOTE: - Circuit battery care manual, inspect the
above threshold SWITCHED_SUPPLY_1 - vehicle battery and ensure it is fully
SWITCHED_SUPPLY_2 - charged and serviceable before
performing further tests
The engine control Check the vehicle charging system
module measured a performance to ensure the voltage
voltage above a regulation is correct
specified range but Using the manufacturer approved
not necessarily a short diagnostic system check datalogger
circuit to power signals, Control module voltage
Vehicle battery fault (0xF442). This DTC is set when the
Charging system fault engine control module supply voltage is
harness fault - Engine greater than the threshold value. Refer
control module power to the electrical circuit diagrams and
or ground supply check the four engine control module
Central junction box power ground circuits for high
fault resistance or open circuits
Power distribution Check the switched power supply feeds
fault to the engine control module which
come from the central junction box
though the engine management system
relay. Repair wiring harness as
P1631- Main Relay (power hold) - This DTC is set when the engine
00 No sub type information NOTE: - Circuit management system high current relay
EMS_RELAY_CTRL - contacts open early - indicating a
power hold fault. Check the vehicle
Vehicle battery battery has not been disconnected
disconnected before before the engine management system
engine management relay has powered down. Check the
system relay has operation of the engine management
powered down system high current relay
Harness fault - relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
control circuit and check the engine management
Engine management system high current relay supply and
system high current control circuits for open circuits, high
relay fault resistance, short circuit to ground,
Central junction box short circuit to power, short circuit to
fault other circuits. Repair the wiring
Harness fault - relay harness
control circuit Check and install a new relay as
Check and install a new central junction
box as required. Refer to the warranty
module/component
P1631- Main Relay (power hold) - This DTC is set when the engine
73 Actuator stuck closed NOTE: - Circuit management system high current relay
EMS_RELAY_CTRL - contacts are detected stuck closed by
the engine control module. Check the
Engine management operation of the engine management
system high current system high current relay. Refer to the
relay fault electrical circuit diagrams and check
Harness fault - relay the engine management system high
control circuit current relay supply and control circuits
for open circuits, high resistance, short
power, short circuit to other circuits.
Repair the wiring harness
Check and install a new relay as
P1695- CAN Link Injection Pump The engine control Check engine control module for DTCs
00 Control Module/Engine module internal and refer to the relevant DTC index.
Control Module - No sub powerstage is Clear DTC and retest
type information overheated Check the engine control module is
sufficiently able to be cooled
P1703- Brake Switch Out Of Self Brake switch circuit, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
00 Test Range - No sub type short circuit to and check the brake switch for short to
information ground, short circuit ground, short circuit to power, high
to power, high resistance, open circuit. Repair wiring
resistance, open harness as required, clear DTC and
circuit retest system
Brake switch incorrect Check and adjust brake switch as
adjustment required
Brake switch internal Check and install a new brake switch
fault as required. Refer to the warranty
module/component
P1712- Transmission Torque Unintended torque Check transmission control module for
00 Reduction Request Signal - request signal sent related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
No sub type information over CAN from index, clear the DTC and retest the
transmission control system
module to engine
control module. The
recognises it is
unintended and
applies a torque limit
and set the DTC
P1719- Engine Torque Signal - Working limitation Check engine control module for
68 Event information information related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
The DTC sets as a index
result of an engine Refer to the workshop manual and
torque limitation check the cooling system is functioning
caused by an engine correctly
overheat situation
P2002- Diesel Particulate Filter Diesel particulate filter Using the manufacturer approved
68 Efficiency Below Threshold regeneration disabled diagnostic system, check for related
(Bank 1) - Event by other DTCs logged DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
information index. Carry out a diesel particulate
filter regeneration
P2031- Exhaust Gas Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor Circuit Bank 1 NOTE: - Circuit PFIT - diagnostic system check datalogger
Sensor 2 - No sub type signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank
information Harness fault - 1 Sensor 2 Voltage (0x03C4), Exhaust
Particulate filter inlet Gas Temperature Bank 1 Sensor 2
exhaust gas (0x03F5). This DTC is set if the
temperature sensor particulate filter inlet exhaust gas
Particulate filter inlet temperature sensor fails a plausibility
exhaust gas check at cold start. Refer to the
temperature sensor workshop manual and check the
failure particulate filter inlet exhaust gas
temperature sensor and wiring harness
for obvious signs of mechanical
damage due to chaffing or heat. The
particulate filter inlet exhaust gas
temperature sensor is a thermistor
located in the inlet to the particulate
filter housing with a signal and ground
connection. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the signal
circuit for open circuit, short circuit to
power, short circuit to ground, high
resistance. Check the ground circuit for
open circuit, high resistance, short
circuit to power. Repair the wiring
harness as required
If there are no wiring faults, refer to
the workshop manual and check the
sensor resistance value. Replace the
sensor if required. Refer to the
module/component

00 Sensor Circuit Low Bank 1 NOTE: - Circuit PFIT - diagnostic system check datalogger
Particulate filter inlet temperature sensor fails a diagnostic
exhaust gas check due to the circuit voltage being
temperature sensor less than the expected value. Refer to
failure the workshop manual and check the
harness as required
module/component

00 Sensor Circuit High Bank 1 NOTE: - Circuit PFIT - diagnostic system check datalogger
Particulate filter inlet temperature sensor fails a diagnostic
exhaust gas check due to the circuit voltage being
temperature sensor greater than the expected value. Refer
failure to the workshop manual and check the
harness as required
module/component
P2080- Exhaust Gas Temperature This DTC is set when there is a

00 Sensor Circuit NOTE: - Circuit STOT - plausibility error on the signal from the
Range/Performance Bank 1 secondary turbo outlet temperature
Sensor 1 - No sub type Harness fault - sensor. Refer to the workshop manual
information Secondary turbo outlet and check the secondary turbo outlet
temperature sensor temperature sensor and wiring harness
Secondary turbo outlet for obvious signs of mechanical
temperature sensor damage due to chaffing or heat. The
failure secondary turbo outlet temperature
sensor is a thermistor with a signal and
ground connection. Refer to the
the signal circuit for open circuit, short
circuit to power, short circuit to
ground, high resistance. Check the
ground circuit for open circuit, high
resistance, short circuit to power.
module/component
P2084- Exhaust Gas Temperature This DTC is set when there is a

00 Sensor Circuit NOTE: - Circuit PFIT - plausibility error on the signal from the
Range/Performance Bank 1 close coupled catalyst outlet
Sensor 2 - No sub type Harness fault - close temperature sensor. Refer to the
information coupled catalyst outlet workshop manual and check the close
temperature sensor coupled catalyst outlet temperature
Close coupled catalyst sensor and wiring harness for obvious
outlet temperature signs of mechanical damage due to
sensor failure chaffing or heat. The close coupled
catalyst outlet temperature sensor is a
thermistor with a signal and ground
harness as required
module/component
P2121- Throttle/Pedal Position Using the manufacturer approved

1F Sensor/Switch D Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - PED_DEMAND_1 - signals, Accelerator Pedal Position D
Circuit intermittent (0xF449), Pedal Position Sensor
Harness fault - Voltage - Sensor 2 (0x0195). The
accelerator pedal accelerator pedal position sensor
position sensor circuit consists of two potentiometer circuits
Accelerator pedal feeding independent pedal demand
position sensor failure signals to the engine control module.
This DTC is set when the engine control
module detects noise on the pedal
demand 1 signal circuit. Refer to the
the reference voltage and ground
connections to the accelerator pedal
position sensor. Check signal circuits
for high resistance, open circuits, short
ground. Check all accelerator pedal
position sensor circuits for intermittent
faults. Repair wiring as required. Clear
DTC and retest
accelerator pedal position sensor Refer
module/component

00 Sensor/Switch D Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Low - No sub type PED_DEMAND_1 - signals, Accelerator Pedal Position D
information (0xF449), Pedal Position Sensor
accelerator pedal Accelerator Pedal Position sensor
module detects the pedal demand 1
signal range is low. Refer to the
ground. Repair wiring as required.
module/component

00 Sensor/Switch D Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
High - No sub type PED_DEMAND_1 - signals, Accelerator Pedal Position D
information (0xF449), Pedal Position Sensor
signal range is high. Refer to the
module/component

1F Sensor/Switch E Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - PED_DEMAND_2 - signals, Accelerator Pedal Position E
Circuit intermittent (0xF44A), Pedal Position Sensor
module detects noise on the pedal
demand 2 signal circuit. Refer to the
ground. Check all accelerator pedal
position sensor circuits for intermittent
faults. Repair wiring as required. Clear
DTC and retest
module/component

00 Sensor/Switch E Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Low - No sub type PED_DEMAND_2 - signals, Accelerator Pedal Position E
information (0xF44A), Pedal Position Sensor
signal range is low. Refer to the
module/component

00 Sensor/Switch E Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
High - No sub type PED_DEMAND_2 - signals, Accelerator Pedal Position E
information (0xF44A), Pedal Position Sensor
signal range is high. Refer to the
module/component
P2138- Throttle/Pedal Position Accelerator pedal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
00 Sensor/Switch D / E position sensor circuit and check accelerator pedal position
Voltage Correlation - No short circuit to sensor 1 circuit for short circuit to
sub type information ground, short circuit ground, short circuit to power, open
to power, open circuit circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit
Accelerator pedal diagrams and check accelerator pedal
position sensor failure position sensor 2 circuit for short circuit
to ground, short circuit to power, open
Check and install a new accelerator
pedal position sensor as required Refer
module/component
Voltage Correlation - Signal short circuit to sensor 1 circuit for short circuit to
plausibility failure ground, short circuit ground, short circuit to power, open
module/component
Voltage Correlation - Signal short circuit to sensor 1 circuit for short circuit to
incorrect after event ground, short circuit ground, short circuit to power, open
module/component
P213E- Fuel Injection System Fault Quantity shut-off of Check for fuel / injector related DTCs
01 - Forced Engine Shutdown the dual-mass and repair these first. Clear DTC and
- General electrical failure flywheel retest
00 Throttle Control Circuit A NOTE: - Circuit module detects a short circuit to
Low - No sub type TPA_POS - TPA_NEG - ground on the intake air shut off
information throttle control circuit. Refer to the
Harness fault - Intake electrical circuit diagrams and check
air shut off throttle both the Throttle Plate Actuator control
control circuit circuits for short circuit to ground.
Intake air shut off Repair wiring harness as required.
throttle failure Clear DTC and retest
module/component
00 Throttle Control Circuit A NOTE: - Circuit module detects a short circuit to power
High - No sub type TPA_POS - TPA_NEG - on the intake air shut off throttle
information control circuit. Refer to the electrical
Harness fault - Intake circuit diagrams and check both the
air shut off throttle Throttle Plate Actuator control circuits
control circuit for short circuit to power. Repair wiring
Intake air shut off harness as required. Clear DTC and
throttle failure retest
module/component
P2177- System Too Lean Off Idle - Oxygen concentration Check for excess fuel at exhaust
00 Bank 1 - No sub type implausibly high manifold, downpipe, pre catalyst
information Pre catalyst oxygen oxygen sensor
sensor circuit short Check for fuel / injector related DTCs
circuit to ground, and repair these first. Clear DTC and
short circuit to power, retest
high resistance, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit and check pre catalyst oxygen sensor
Pre catalyst oxygen for short circuit to ground, high
sensor failure resistance, open circuit. Repair wiring
retest
module/component
P2178- System Too Rich Off Idle - Oxygen concentration Check for air leaks at exhaust manifold,
00 Bank 1 - No sub type implausibly low downpipe, pre catalyst oxygen sensor
information Pre catalyst oxygen Check for fuel / injector related DTCs
sensor circuit short and repair these first. Clear DTC and
circuit to ground, retest
short circuit to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
high resistance, open and check pre catalyst oxygen sensor
circuit for short circuit to ground, high
Pre catalyst oxygen resistance, open circuit. Repair wiring
sensor failure harness as required. Clear DTC and
retest
module/component
P2191- System Too Lean at Higher Oxygen concentration Check for excess fuel at exhaust
00 Load - Bank 1 - No sub implausibly high manifold, downpipe, pre catalyst
type information Pre catalyst oxygen oxygen sensor
sensor circuit short Check for fuel / injector related DTCs
circuit to ground, and repair these first. Clear DTC and
short circuit to power, retest
high resistance, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit and check pre catalyst oxygen sensor
Pre catalyst oxygen for short circuit to ground, high
sensor failure resistance, open circuit. Repair wiring
retest
module/component
P2192- System Too Rich at Higher Oxygen concentration Check for air leaks at exhaust manifold,
00 Load - Bank 1 - No sub implausibly low downpipe, pre catalyst oxygen sensor
type information Pre catalyst oxygen Check for fuel / injector related DTCs
sensor circuit short and repair these first. Clear DTC and
circuit to ground, retest
high resistance, open and check pre catalyst oxygen sensor
circuit for short circuit to ground, high
Pre catalyst oxygen resistance, open circuit. Repair wiring
sensor failure harness as required. Clear DTC and
retest
module/component
P2195- O2 Sensor Signal Air leak at exhaust Check for fuel / injector related DTCs
00 Biassed/Stuck Lean - Bank manifold, downpipe, and repair these first. Clear DTC and
1, Sensor 1 - No sub type pre catalyst oxygen retest
information sensor bank 1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Pre catalyst oxygen and check pre catalyst oxygen sensor
sensor circuit short for short circuit to ground, high
circuit to ground, resistance, open circuit. Repair wiring
short circuit to power, harness as required. Clear DTC and
high resistance, open retest
circuit Check for air leaks at exhaust manifold,
Pre catalyst oxygen downpipe, pre catalyst oxygen sensor.
sensor failure Check and install a new pre catalyst
module/component
P2196- O2 Sensor Signal Fuel injection system Check for fuel / injector related DTCs
00 Biassed/Stuck Rich - Bank fault and repair these first. Clear DTC and
1, Sensor 1 - No sub type Pre catalyst oxygen retest
information sensor circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit to ground, and check pre catalyst oxygen sensor
short circuit to power, for short circuit to ground, high
high resistance, open resistance, open circuit. Repair wiring
circuit harness as required. Clear DTC and
Pre catalyst oxygen retest
sensor failure Check for air leaks at exhaust manifold,
downpipe, pre catalyst oxygen sensor.
module/component
P2226- Barometric Pressure The engine control Check the engine control module is
62 Sensor A Circuit - Signal module has been clean and dry
compare failure submersed in water or Check the engine control module is not
mud sealed by any non approved covering
The engine control If the DTC does not clear install a new
module has been engine control module as required.
sealed in a non Refer to the warranty policy and
approved covering procedures manual, or determine if any
P2228- Barometric Pressure Corrupt engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 Sensor A Circuit Low - No module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the
sub type information Engine control module engine control module
Engine control module and check engine control module power
ground supply fault supply circuits for open circuit. Repair
failure and retest
and check engine control module
ground supply circuits for open circuit.
module/component
P2229- Barometric Pressure Corrupt engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 Sensor A Circuit High - No module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the
sub type information Engine control module engine control module
Engine control module and check engine control module power
ground supply fault supply circuits for open circuit. Repair
failure and retest
and check engine control module
ground supply circuits for open circuit.
module/component
P2238- O2 Sensor Positive Current Pre catalyst oxygen Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
00 Control Circuit Low - Bank sensor positive current and check pre catalyst oxygen sensor
1, Sensor 1 - No sub type control circuit short for short circuit to ground, high
information circuit to ground, high resistance, open circuit. Repair wiring
resistance, open harness as required. Clear DTC and
circuit retest
Pre catalyst oxygen Check and install a new pre catalyst
sensor failure oxygen sensor as required. Refer to
module/component
P2245- O2 Sensor Reference This DTC is set if the engine control

00 Voltage Circuit Low - Bank NOTE: - Circuit LPV_A - module detects the bank 1, pre catalyst
1, Sensor 1 - No sub type oxygen sensor 1 reference voltage is
information Harness fault - Pre lower than expected. Refer to the
catalyst oxygen sensor electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit the pre catalyst oxygen sensor harness
Oxygen sensor failure for signs of damage caused by chaffing
or heat. Check the pre catalyst oxygen
sensor circuits for open circuits, high
resistance, short circuit to ground.
pre catalyst oxygen sensor. Refer to
module/component
P2246- O2 Sensor Reference This DTC is set if the engine control

00 Voltage Circuit High - Bank NOTE: - Circuit LPV_A - module detects the bank 1, pre catalyst
1, Sensor 1 - No sub type oxygen sensor 1 reference voltage is
information Harness fault - Pre greater than expected. Refer to the
catalyst oxygen sensor electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit the pre catalyst oxygen sensor harness
Oxygen sensor failure for signs of damage caused by chaffing
or heat. Check the pre catalyst oxygen
sensor circuits for open circuits, high
resistance, short circuit to power.
pre catalyst oxygen sensor. Refer to
module/component
P2261- Turbocharger/Supercharger Boost air recirculation This DTC is set when the engine control
73 Bypass Valve "A" - solenoid stuck shut module detects that the turbocharger
Mechanical - Actuator during transition from bypass valve is not operating. Refer to
stuck closed mono turbo to bi- the workshop manual and inspect the
turbo mode boost air recirculation solenoid for
sticking shut during transition from
mono turbo to bi-turbo mode
P2263- Turbocharger/Supercharger The engine control Check induction system for leaks,
21 Boost System Performance module measured a blockages
- Signal amplitude < signal voltage below a Check boost air system for leaks,
minimum specified range but blockages. Check for related DTCs
circuit to ground, gain and check manifold absolute pressure
low sensor circuit for short circuit to power,
Induction system air ground, open circuit
leak or blockage Check and install a new manifold
Boost air system leak absolute pressure sensor as required
or blockage Check turbocharger rod connection and
Manifold absolute oil seals
pressure sensor circuit Check and install a new variable
short circuit to power, geometry turbocharger actuator as
ground, open circuit required. Check install a new
Manifold absolute turbocharger as required. Refer to the
pressure sensor failure warranty policy and procedures
Variable geometry manual, or determine if any prior
turbocharger actuator approval programme is in operation,
A sticking, failure prior to the installation of a new
Turbocharger A failure module/component
P2263- Turbocharger/Supercharger The engine control Check induction system for leaks,
22 Boost System Performance module measured a blockages
- Signal amplitude > signal voltage above a Check boost air system for leaks,
maximum specified range but blockages. Check for related DTCs
not necessarily a short Using the manufacturer approved
circuit to power, gain diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
too high EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
Induction system air Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
leak or blockage and check manifold absolute pressure
Boost air system leak sensor circuit for short circuit to power,
or blockage ground, open circuit
Manifold absolute Check and install a new manifold
pressure sensor circuit absolute pressure sensor as required
short circuit to power, Check turbocharger rod connection and
ground, open circuit oil seals
Manifold absolute Check and install a new variable
pressure sensor failure geometry turbocharger actuator as
Variable geometry required. Check install a new
turbocharger actuator turbocharger as required. Refer to the
A sticking, failure warranty policy and procedures
Turbocharger A failure manual, or determine if any prior
module/component
P2264- Water in Fuel Sensor This DTC is set if the engine control
00 Circuit - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit module receives information indicating
information WIF_SENSOR - an implausible fuel level. Refer to the
workshop manual and check the fuel
Fuel supply system to ensure there is an adequate
incorrect/contaminated fuel level in the tank and the system is
Harness fault - Water not leaking fuel or suffering from air
in fuel sensor circuit ingress. Check the fuel for
Water in fuel sensor contamination by other fluids (petrol or
fault water etc)
Central junction box Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams
power distribution and check the water in fuel sensor
fault signal circuit between the sensor and
the engine control module for high
resistance, open circuit, short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power,
intermittent faults. Repair the wiring
harness as required
water in fuel sensor. Refer to the
module/component
Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams
and check the water in fuel sensor
power supply from the central junction
box for high resistance, open circuit,
water in fuel sensor ground supply
circuit for high resistance, open circuit,
short circuit to power. Check the
voltage supply from the central junction
box, check and replace fuses as
required. Replace central junction box if
there is no voltage supply to the water
in fuel sensor. Refer to the warranty
module/component
P2269- Water in Fuel Condition - Water in fuel Drain water from fuel filter housing.
68 Event information Water in fuel sensor Clear DTC and wait 30 seconds and re-
circuit short circuit to check DTC has cleared
power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Water in fuel sensor and check water in fuel sensor circuit
failure for short circuit to power, open circuit
Check and install a new water in fuel
module/component
P226B- Turbocharger/Supercharger Error path indicating Check for turbocharging related DTCs
00 Boost Pressure Too High - whether over boost and repair these first. Clear DTC and
Mechanical - No sub type shut down is active or retest
information not
This DTC is set when
overboost shut down
is active. This means
that the vehicle has
lost control of boost.
The engine is shut
down as a safety
precaution. The engine
control module checks
for an overboost by
system monitoring and
also monitors vehicle
acceleration, if in gear
and engine
acceleration at idle, if
in neutral
P228C- Fuel Pressure Regulator 1 Fuel pressure control Check fuel pressure control valve for
00 Exceeded Control Limits - valve, fuel leak from fuel leakage from the high pressure
Pressure Too Low - No sub the high pressure side side
type information Fuel injector stuck Check for fuel injector stuck open /
open / leaking leaking
Blocked fuel filter Check for blocked fuel filter
Low pressure fuel pipe Check for low pressure fuel pipe
leaking from the fuel leakage from the fuel tank fuel pump
tank fuel pump Using the manufacturer approved
Fuel supply system diagnostic system check datalogger
fault signals, Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
Harness fault - fuel (0x0324), Fuel Rail Pressure (0xF423).
rail pressure sensor A Check for related fuel system DTCs and
circuit high resistance refer to the relevant DTC index
sensor A failure and check fuel pump circuit for high
Fuel lift pump failure resistance. Check fuel rail pressure
sensor A circuit for high resistance
Check and install a new fuel rail
pressure sensor A as required. Refer to
module/component
Check and install a new fuel lift pump
module/component
P2297- O2 Sensor Out of Range Pre catalyst oxygen Check for fuel / injector related DTCs
00 During Deceleration Bank sensor circuit short and repair these first. Clear DTC and
1, Sensor 1 - No sub type circuit to ground, retest. Refer to the electrical circuit
information short circuit to power, diagrams and check pre catalyst
high resistance, open oxygen sensor for short circuit to
circuit ground, high resistance, open circuit.
Pre catalyst oxygen Repair wiring harness as required.
sensor failure Clear DTC and retest
module/component
P2299- Brake Pedal Brake pedal switch - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
68 Position/Accelerator Pedal Circuit Brake_SW_1 - and check brake pedal switch - Circuit
Position Incompatible - short circuit to ground Brake_SW_1 - for short circuit to
Event information Brake pedal switch - ground
open circuit and check brake pedal switch - Circuit
Brake pedal switch - Brake_SW_1 - for open circuit
short circuit to ground and check brake pedal switch - Circuit
Brake pedal switch Brake_SW_2 - for short circuit to
incorrect adjustment ground
Brake pedal switch Repair wiring harness as required, clear
failure DTC. Start the engine press the brake
Brake pedal pressed pedal, using maximum travel for
by driver at same time greater than 1 second taking care not
as accelerator pedal to press the accelerator pedal. Check
pressed the system is operating correctly and
the DTC does not return
Check and adjust brake switch as
required
Check and install a new brake pedal
switch as required
Clear the DTCs, drive the vehicle at
greater than 11mph (17kph) with a
throttle pedal greater than 10% for
greater than 3 seconds. Press the
greater than 3 seconds. Check the
system is operating correctly and the
DTC does not return
P22C5- Turbocharger Compressor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

11 Outlet Valve Control Circuit NOTE: - Circuit CSOV - and check the turbocharger boost air
/ Open - Circuit short to solenoid circuit between the engine
ground The engine control control module and the control valve
module has detected a for a short circuit to ground. Check
ground measurement power supply to the control valve.
for a period longer Repair any wiring faults found. Clear
than expected or has DTC and retest
detected a ground
measurement when
another value was
expected
Harness fault -
turbocharger boost air
solenoid circuit short
circuit to ground

/ Open - Circuit short to solenoid circuit between the engine
battery The engine control control module and the control valve
module has detected a for a short circuit to power. Check
vehicle power power supply to the control valve.
measurement for a Repair any wiring faults found. Clear
period longer than DTC and retest
expected or has If no fault found in wiring harness
detected a vehicle suspect turbocharger boost air solenoid
power measurement failure. Refer to the warranty policy
when another value and procedures manual, or determine if
was expected any prior approval programme is in
Harness fault - operation, prior to the installation of a
turbocharger boost air new module/component
circuit to power
Turbocharger boost air
solenoid fault

/ Open - Circuit open solenoid circuit between the engine
The engine control control module and the control valve
module has for open circuit. Check power supply to
determined an open the control valve. Repair any wiring
circuit via lack of bias faults found. Clear DTC and retest
voltage, low current If no fault found in wiring harness
flow, no change in the suspect turbocharger boost air solenoid
state of an input in failure. Refer to the warranty policy
response to an output and procedures manual, or determine if
Harness fault - any prior approval programme is in
turbocharger boost air operation, prior to the installation of a
solenoid circuit open new module/component
circuit
Turbocharger boost air
solenoid fault
P22C5- Turbocharger Compressor Harness fault - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
4B Outlet Valve Control Circuit turbocharger boost air and check the turbocharger boost air
/ Open - Over temperature solenoid circuit open solenoid circuit between the engine
circuit control module and the control valve
Turbocharger boost air for open circuit. Check power supply to
solenoid failure the control valve. Repair any wiring
faults found. Clear DTC and retest
suspect turbocharger boost air solenoid
failure. Check and install a new
turbocharger boost air solenoid as
P22CF- Turbocharger Turbine Inlet Using the manufacturer approved

00 Valve Control Circuit / NOTE: - Circuit TSOV - diagnostic system check datalogger
Open - No sub type signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
information Harness fault - Turbine Position - Commanded (0x03F0). Refer
intake solenoid circuit to the electrical circuit diagrams and
open circuit check the turbine intake solenoid circuit
Turbine intake between the engine control module and
solenoid fault the control valve for open circuit.
Check power supply to the control
valve. Repair any wiring faults found.
suspect turbine intake solenoid failure.

16 Valve Control Circuit / NOTE: - Circuit TSOV - diagnostic system check datalogger
Open - Circuit voltage signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
below threshold The engine control Position - Commanded (0x03F0). Refer
module measured a to the electrical circuit diagrams and
voltage below a check the turbine intake solenoid circuit
specified range but between the engine control module and
not necessarily a short the control valve for a high resistance,
circuit to ground intermittent open circuit, short circuit
Harness fault - Turbine to ground. Check power supply to the
intake solenoid circuit control valve. Repair any wiring faults
fault found. Clear DTC and retest
Turbine intake If no fault found in wiring harness
solenoid fault suspect turbine intake solenoid failure.
P22CF- Turbocharger Turbine Inlet Harness fault - Turbine Using the manufacturer approved
19 Valve Control Circuit / intake solenoid circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Open - Circuit current fault signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
above threshold Turbine intake Position - Commanded (0x03F0). Refer
solenoid fault to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the turbine intake valve control
Check power supply to the solenoid.
Repair any wiring faults found. Clear
DTC and retest

1D Valve Control Circuit / NOTE: - Circuit TSOV - diagnostic system check datalogger
Open - Circuit current out signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
of range Harness fault - Turbine Position - Commanded (0x03F0). Refer
fault check the turbine intake solenoid
Turbine intake control circuit for short circuit to
solenoid fault ground. Check power supply to the
solenoid. Repair any wiring faults
found. Clear DTC and retest
P22CF- Turbocharger Turbine Inlet Harness fault - Turbine Using the manufacturer approved
4B Valve Control Circuit / intake solenoid circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Open - Over temperature fault signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
Turbine intake Position - Commanded (0x03F0). Refer
solenoid fault to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the turbine intake valve control
Check power supply to the solenoid.
Repair any wiring faults found. Clear
DTC and retest
P22CF- Turbocharger Turbine Inlet Turbine intake If this DTC is logged with P22D3-77 &
71 Valve Control Circuit / solenoid sticking P00BC-00 suspect, turbine intake
Open - Actuator stuck closed solenoid sticking closed
solenoid sticking open P00BD-07, P22D2-77 & P1247-00
Intake air system, suspect, turbine intake solenoid sticking
blocked low pressure open
air intake. This failure If this DTC is logged with P00BD-07,
mode can be caused P22D2-77, P1247-00 & P0235-94
by snow packing in suspect, intake air system, blocked low
the intake system. pressure air intake
Symptoms often Using the manufacturer approved
disappear after the diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
vehicle has been EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
warmed and heat
soaked. Similar
symptoms to seized
primary turbo
P22D0- Turbocharger Turbine Inlet Using the manufacturer approved

00 Valve Control Circuit Low - NOTE: - Circuit TSOV - diagnostic system check datalogger
No sub type information signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
Harness fault - Turbine Position - Commanded (0x03F0). Refer
fault check the turbine intake solenoid
solenoid failure ground. Check power supply to the

Circuit short to ground signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
The engine control Position - Commanded (0x03F0). Refer
module has detected a to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground measurement check the turbine intake solenoid
for a period longer control circuit on bank 2 for short
than expected or has circuit to ground. Check power supply
detected a ground to the solenoid. Repair any wiring
measurement when faults found. Clear DTC and retest
another value was If no fault found in wiring harness
expected suspect turbine intake solenoid failure.
Harness fault - Turbine Refer to the warranty policy and
intake solenoid bank 2 procedures manual, or determine if any
circuit short circuit to prior approval programme is in
ground operation, prior to the installation of a
Turbine intake new module/component
solenoid failure

Circuit short to battery signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
The engine control Position - Commanded (0x03F0). Refer
module has detected a to the electrical circuit diagrams and
vehicle power check the turbine intake solenoid
measurement for a control circuit on bank 2 for short
period longer than circuit to power. Check power supply to
expected or has the solenoid. Repair any wiring faults
detected a vehicle found. Clear DTC and retest
power measurement If no fault found in wiring harness
when another value suspect turbine intake solenoid failure.
was expected Refer to the warranty policy and
Harness fault - Turbine procedures manual, or determine if any
intake solenoid bank 2 prior approval programme is in
circuit short circuit to operation, prior to the installation of a
power new module/component
Turbine intake
solenoid failure

00 Valve Control Circuit High NOTE: - Circuit TSOV - diagnostic system check datalogger
- No sub type information signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
Harness fault - Turbine Position - Commanded (0x03F0). Refer
short circuit to power check the turbine intake solenoid
solenoid failure power. Check power supply to the
P22D2- Turbocharger Turbine Inlet Turbine intake Using the manufacturer approved
77 Valve Stuck Open - solenoid sticking open diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
Commanded position not Blocked low pressure EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
reachable air intake Using the manufacturer approved
signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
Position - Commanded (0x03F0) and
Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening Position -
Measured (0x03F1). Refer to the
the turbine intake solenoid control
circuit for short circuit to power. Check
power supply to the solenoid. Repair
any wiring faults found. Clear DTC and
retest
If this DTC is logged with P0235-94,
P00BD-07, P1247-00 & P22CF-71,
suspect turbine intake solenoid sticking
open
If this DTC is logged with P1247-00,
P0235-94, P00BD-07, & P22CF-71,
suspect blocked low pressure air intake
P22D3- Turbocharger Turbine Inlet Turbine intake Using the manufacturer approved
77 Valve Stuck Closed - solenoid sticking diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
Commanded position not closed EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
reachable Using the manufacturer approved
signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
Position - Commanded (0x03F0) and
Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening Position -
Measured (0x03F1). Refer to the
the turbine intake solenoid control
circuit for short circuit to power. Check
power supply to the solenoid. Repair
any wiring faults found. Clear DTC and
retest
If this DTC is logged with P00BC-00, &
P22CF-71, suspect turbine intake
solenoid sticking closed

13 Valve Position Sensor NOTE: - Circuit TSVP - diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
Circuit - Circuit open EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
module has and check turbine intake valve position
determined an open sensor circuit for open circuit, high
circuit via lack of bias resistance
Turbine intake valve
position sensor circuit
open circuit, high
resistance
P22D4- Turbocharger Turbine Inlet Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

16 Valve Position Sensor NOTE: - Circuit TSVP - and check turbine intake valve position
Circuit - Circuit voltage sensor circuit short circuit to ground
below threshold The engine control
module measured a
voltage below a
specified range but
not necessarily a short
circuit to ground

Circuit - circuit voltage sensor circuit for short circuit to power
above threshold - Actuator The engine control Check and install a new turbine intake
stuck module measured a valve position sensor as required. Refer
voltage above a to the warranty policy and procedures
specified range but manual, or determine if any prior
not necessarily a short approval programme is in operation,
circuit to power prior to the installation of a new
This is the long term module/component
adaption limit
diagnostic. It
diagnoses that the
adapted values for the
actuator end stops is
outside of tolerance.
This could be caused
by sensor drift over
time
position sensor stuck
P22D4- Turbocharger Turbine Inlet This is the long term Check and install a new turbine intake
71 Valve Position Sensor adaption limit valve position sensor as required. Refer
Circuit - Actuator stuck diagnostic. It to the warranty policy and procedures
diagnoses that the manual, or determine if any prior
adapted values for the approval programme is in operation,
actuator end stops is prior to the installation of a new
outside of tolerance. module/component
time
Circuit - Performance or diagnostic. It to the warranty policy and procedures
incorrect operation diagnoses that the manual, or determine if any prior
adapted values for the approval programme is in operation,
time
Circuit Range/Performance diagnostic. It to the warranty policy and procedures
- Performance or incorrect diagnoses that the manual, or determine if any prior
operation adapted values for the approval programme is in operation,
time

Circuit Low - Circuit short sensor circuit for short circuit to ground
to ground The engine control
ground measurement
for a period longer
detected a ground
measurement when
another value was
expected

Circuit High - Circuit short sensor circuit for short circuit to power
to battery The engine control
vehicle power
measurement for a
period longer than
expected or has
detected a vehicle
power measurement
when another value
was expected
P242A- Exhaust Gas Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor Circuit Bank 1 NOTE: - Circuit PFOT - diagnostic system check datalogger
information Harness fault - 1 Sensor 3 (0x03F6), Exhaust Gas
particulate filter outlet Temperature Bank 1 Sensor 3 Voltage
temperature sensor (0x03F8). This DTC is set if the
Particulate filter outlet Particulate filter outlet temperature
temperature sensor sensor fails a cold start diagnostic
failure check by the engine control module.
Refer to the workshop manual and
check the particulate filter and sensor
for obvious signs of damage. Check the
sensor harness for chaffing or heat
damage. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the particulate
filter outlet temperature sensor signal
ground, short circuit to other circuits.
Check the sensor ground circuit for
open circuit, short circuit to power,
high resistance. Repair wiring as
required
particulate filter outlet temperature
sensor. Refer to the warranty policy
P242B- Exhaust Gas Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor Circuit NOTE: - Circuit PFOT - diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance Bank 1 signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank
Sensor 3 - No sub type Harness fault - 1 Sensor 3 (0x03F6), Exhaust Gas
information particulate filter outlet Temperature Bank 1 Sensor 3 Voltage
temperature sensor sensor fails a plausibility check by the
failure engine control module. Refer to the
particulate filter and sensor for obvious
signs of damage. Check the sensor
harness for chaffing or heat damage.
and check the particulate filter outlet
temperature sensor signal circuit for
short circuit to other circuits. Check the
sensor ground circuit for open circuit,
short circuit to power, high resistance.
Repair wiring as required
P242C- Exhaust Gas Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor Circuit Low Bank 1 NOTE: - Circuit PFOT - diagnostic system check datalogger
temperature sensor sensor signal voltage is less than the
failure engine control module was expecting.
filter outlet temperature sensor signal
ground, short circuit to other circuits.
Check the sensor ground circuit for
open circuit, short circuit to power,
required
P242D- Exhaust Gas Temperature Using the manufacturer approved
00 Sensor Circuit High Bank 1 NOTE: - Circuit PFOT - diagnostic system check datalogger
temperature sensor sensor signal voltage is greater than
failure the engine control module was
expecting. Refer to the workshop
manual and check the particulate filter
and sensor for obvious signs of
damage. Check the sensor harness for
chaffing or heat damage. Refer to the
the particulate filter outlet temperature
sensor signal circuit for open circuit,
other circuits. Check the sensor ground
power, high resistance. Repair wiring as
required
P242F- Diesel Particulate Filter Maximum ash load

00 Restriction - Ash NOTE: The setting value of this DTC is
Accumulation (Bank 1) - inhibited
no sub type information
Contact dealer technical support
P244A- Diesel Particulate Filter Diagnostic fault check Using the manufacturer approved
00 Differential Pressure Too for minimum pressure diagnostic system, check for related
Low(Bank1) - no sub type differential DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
information characteristics index
Clear DTC and re-test
P244A- Diesel Particulate Filter Destroyed particulate Refer to the relevant pinpoint test in
96 Differential Pressure Too filter section 309-00
Low(Bank1) - Component
internal failure
P244B- Diesel Particulate Filter Engine protection back
68 Differential Pressure Too pressure high NOTE: This DTC when logged on its own
High (Bank 1) - event Sudden increases in is advisory only and no further action should
information differential pressure be taken
across the diesel
particulate filter Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, check for related
DTCs. If this DTC exists with any other
diesel particulate filter differential
pressure sensor DTCs, follow the advise
given for that DTC
P244E- Exhaust Temperature Too Error path for not Using the manufacturer approved
00 Low For Particulate Filter reaching the setpoint diagnostic system check for related
Regeneration, Bank 2 - No of the inner loop with DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
sub type information maximal control index. Clear DTC and re-test. This DTC
variable has been calibrated not to flag
P244F- Exhaust Temperature Too Error path for not Using the manufacturer approved
00 High For Particulate Filter reaching the setpoint diagnostic system check for related
Regeneration, Bank 2 - No of the inner loop with DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
sub type information minimal control index. Clear DTC and re-test. This DTC
variable has been calibrated not to flag
P2452- Diesel Particulate Filter Differential pressure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
23 Pressure Sensor A Circuit - sensor circuit, short and check the differential pressure
signal stuck low circuit to ground sensor circuit, for short circuit to
Diesel particulate filter ground
pressure sensor A Using the manufacturer approved
circuit, hose line error diagnostic system, check for related
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Index
P2452- Diesel Particulate Filter Diagnostic fault check Using the manufacturer approved
29 Pressure Sensor A Circuit - for frozen differential diagnostic system check for related
Signal invalid pressure sensor DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index
P2452- Diesel Particulate Filter Diesel particulate filter

95 Pressure Sensor A Circuit - pressure sensor hoses NOTE: If a new diesel particulate filter
Incorrect assembly connected incorrectly pressure sensor or hose lines have been
Diesel particulate filter installed or incorrectly routed, or any pressure
pressure sensor hoses sensor circuit repairs carried out, the engine
crushed, blocked, split control module must learn and store the new
diesel particulate filter pressure sensor offset
value. The following conditions must be met to
allow the diesel particulate filter pressure
sensor offset value to be learnt and stored:
system, clear DTCs from engine control
module, then monitor the datalogger signal
'sump oil temperature - measured' ensuring a
minimum of 50 degrees C is achieved. Start
engine, run above 500RPM for 2 minutes, then
a further 30 seconds at idle. Ensure the engine
cooling fan is not running. Set vehicle in park
and set ignition status to off. Wait 30 seconds
for the engine control module to power down,
learn and store diesel particulate filter
pressure sensor offset value. This process
must be carried out six times, to allow a large
negative offset value to adapt back to 0 Hpa

signals, Particulate Filter Differential
Pressure Sensor Voltage - Bank 1
(0x03DB). Refer to the workshop
manual and check diesel particulate
filter pressure sensor hoses are
installed correctly
Check diesel particulate filter pressure
sensor hoses for crushed, blockage,
split
P2453- Diesel Particulate Filter

00 Pressure Sensor A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit NOTE: If a new diesel particulate filter
Range/Performance - No DPF_PRESSURE_SENSOR - pressure sensor or hose lines have been
sub type information installed or incorrectly routed, or any pressure
Harness fault - sensor circuit repairs carried out, the engine
Particulate filter control module must learn and store the new
pressure sensor diesel particulate filter pressure sensor offset
Particulate filter value. The following conditions must be met to
pressure sensor failure allow the diesel particulate filter pressure

(0x03DB). This DTC is set when the
particulate pressure sensor fails a
plausibility check. Refer to the
and check the particulate filter pressure
power, high resistance. Check the
sensor power supply circuit for open
resistance. Repair wiring as required
particulate filter pressure sensor. Refer
module/component
P2453- Diesel Particulate Filter Using the manufacturer approved

16 Pressure Sensor A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check for related
Range/Performance - DPF_PRESSURE_SENSOR - DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Circuit voltage below index
threshold Diagnostic fault check Using the manufacturer approved
for signal range check diagnostic system check datalogger
low in flow resistance signals, Particulate Filter Differential
Harness fault - Pressure Sensor Voltage - Bank 1
Particulate filter (0x03DB). This DTC is set when the
pressure sensor particulate pressure sensor fails a
Particulate filter plausibility check. Refer to the
pressure sensor failure workshop manual and check the
module/component
P2453- Diesel Particulate Filter Using the manufacturer approved

17 Pressure Sensor A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check for related
Range/Performance - DPF_PRESSURE_SENSOR - DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Circuit voltage above index
threshold Diagnostic fault check Using the manufacturer approved
for signal range check diagnostic system check datalogger
high in flow resistance signals, Particulate Filter Differential
Harness fault - Pressure Sensor Voltage - Bank 1
Particulate filter (0x03DB). This DTC is set when the
pressure sensor particulate pressure sensor fails a
Particulate filter plausibility check. Refer to the
pressure sensor failure workshop manual and check the
module/component

Low - No sub type DPF_PRESSURE_SENSOR - pressure sensor or hose lines have been
information installed or incorrectly routed, or any pressure
engine, run above 500rpm for 2 minutes, then

particulate pressure sensor voltage is
less than the threshold set in the
engine control module diagnostic check.
filter pressure sensor signal circuit for
Check the sensor power supply circuit
for open circuit, short circuit to ground,
required
module/component

High - No sub type DPF_PRESSURE_SENSOR - pressure sensor or hose lines have been
information installed or incorrectly routed, or any pressure

particulate pressure sensor voltage is
greater than the threshold set in the
engine control module diagnostic check.
filter pressure sensor signal circuit for
Check the sensor power supply circuit
for open circuit, short circuit to ground,
required
module/component
P2456- Diesel Particulate Filter Diesel particulate filter

00 Pressure Sensor A Circuit pressure sensor hoses NOTE: If a new diesel particulate filter
Intermittent/Erratic - No crushed, blocked, split pressure sensor or hose lines have been
sub type information Diesel particulate filter installed or incorrectly routed, or any pressure
differential pressure sensor circuit repairs carried out, the engine
sensor failure control module must learn and store the new
diesel particulate filter pressure sensor offset
value. The following conditions must be met to
allow the diesel particulate filter pressure
Check diesel particulate filter pressure

sensor hoses for crushed, blocked, split
Check and replace diesel particulate
filter differential pressure sensor as
P2458- Diesel Particulate Filter Permanent

66 Regeneration Duration regeneration NOTE: This code is enabled for JLR
(Bank 1) - Signal has too engineering detailed diagnostics only. No
many transitions / events further action should be taken

index
P2459- Diesel Particulate Filter Blocked regeneration

65 Regeneration Frequency Customer driving NOTE: If DTC is P2459-65 or AMBER DPF
(Bank 1) - Signal has too routine does not allow FULL REFER TO HANDBOOK message is
few transitions / events the system to clean displayed with no other reported messages.
the particulate filter No repair is required, if the vehicle is driven
on a highway AS DIRECTED IN THE
HANDBOOK then the light will be extinguished
and the system self healed, nothing more than
this is required
Refer to the diesel particulate filter

regeneration procedure and carry out a
diesel particulate filter regeneration
Advise customer of driving routine
required to regenerate diesel
particulate filter as stated in the vehicle
handbook
P2459- Diesel Particulate Filter Regeneration

66 Regeneration Frequency frequency NOTE: This code is enabled for JLR
(Bank 1) - Signal has too engineering detailed diagnostics only. No
many transitions / events further action should be taken

index

11 Cooler Bypass Control NOTE: - Circuit EGRCBV diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit - Circuit short to - signals, EGR Cooler Bypass Valve Duty
ground Cycle (0x03C5). Refer to the electrical
The engine control circuit diagrams and check the exhaust
module has detected a gas recirculation cooling bypass valve
ground measurement solenoid circuit for short circuit to
for a period longer ground. Check power supply to the
than expected or has solenoid. Repair any wiring faults
detected a ground found. Clear DTC and retest
measurement when
another value was
expected
Harness fault -
Exhaust gas
recirculation cooling
bypass valve solenoid
ground

Circuit - Circuit short to - signals, EGR Cooler Bypass Valve Duty
battery Cycle (0x03C5). Refer to the electrical
module has detected a gas recirculation cooling bypass valve
vehicle power solenoid circuit for short circuit to
measurement for a power. Check power supply to the
period longer than solenoid. Repair any wiring faults
expected or has found. Clear DTC and retest
detected a vehicle If no fault found in wiring harness
power measurement suspect exhaust gas recirculation
when another value cooling bypass valve solenoid failure.
was expected Refer to the warranty policy and
Harness fault - procedures manual, or determine if any
recirculation cooling operation, prior to the installation of a
bypass valve solenoid new module/component
power
Exhaust gas
failure

Circuit - Circuit open - signals, EGR Cooler Bypass Valve Duty
Cycle (0x03C5). Refer to the electrical
module has gas recirculation cooling bypass valve
determined an open solenoid circuit for open circuit. Check
circuit via lack of bias power supply to the solenoid. Repair
voltage, low current any wiring faults found. Clear DTC and
flow, no change in the retest
state of an input in If no fault found in wiring harness
response to an output suspect exhaust gas recirculation
Harness fault - cooling bypass valve solenoid failure.
recirculation cooling procedures manual, or determine if any
bypass valve solenoid prior approval programme is in
circuit open circuit operation, prior to the installation of a
Exhaust gas new module/component
failure
P245B- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Harness fault - Using the manufacturer approved
19 Cooler Bypass Control Exhaust gas diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit Range/Performance recirculation cooling signals, EGR Cooler Bypass Valve Duty
- Circuit current above bypass valve solenoid Cycle (0x03C5). Refer to the electrical
threshold circuit short circuit to circuit diagrams and check the exhaust
ground, high gas recirculation cooling bypass valve
resistance solenoid circuit for short circuit to
Exhaust gas ground, high resistance. Repair any
recirculation cooling wiring faults found. Clear DTC and
bypass valve solenoid retest
failure Check and install a new exhaust gas
recirculation cooling bypass valve
solenoid as required. Refer to the
module/component
P2463- Diesel Particulate Filter Maximum soot mass Refer to the relevant pinpoint test in
00 Restriction - Soot section 309-00
Accumulation (Bank 1) -
No sub type information
P246C- Diesel Particulate Filter Diagnostic fault check Using the manufacturer approved
00 Restriction - Forced Limited for maximum pressure diagnostic system check for related
Power (Bank 1) - No sub differential DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
type information characteristics index
P250A- Engine Oil Level Sensor Using the manufacturer approved

36 Circuit - Signal frequency NOTE: - Circuit OTL - diagnostic system check datalogger
too low signals, Engine Oil Level - Measured
The engine control (0x03E6), Engine Oil Volume -
module detected Calculated (0x03F2), Sump Oil
excessive duration for Temperature - Measured (0x03F3).
one cycle of the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
output across a and check oil temperature level sensor
specified sample size circuit for short circuit to ground, high
Oil temperature level resistance, open circuit. Repair wiring
sensor circuit short harness as required. Clear DTC and
circuit to ground, high retest
resistance, open Check and install a new oil temperature
circuit level sensor as required. Refer to the
Oil temperature level warranty policy and procedures
module/component

too high signals, Engine Oil Level - Measured
The engine control (0x03E6), Engine Oil Volume -
module detected Calculated (0x03F2), Sump Oil
insufficient duration Temperature - Measured (0x03F3).
for one cycle of the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
output across a and check oil temperature level sensor
specified sample size circuit for short circuit to power. Repair
Oil temperature level wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
sensor circuit short and retest
circuit to power Check and install a new oil temperature
Oil temperature level level sensor as required. Refer to the
sensor failure warranty policy and procedures
module/component

incorrect signals, Engine Oil Level - Measured
Oil temperature level (0x03E6), Engine Oil Volume -
sensor circuit short Calculated (0x03F2), Sump Oil
circuit to ground, Temperature - Measured (0x03F3).
high resistance, open and check oil temperature level sensor
circuit circuit for short circuit to ground, short
Oil temperature level circuit to power, high resistance, open
sensor failure circuit. Repair wiring harness as
Check and install a new oil temperature
level sensor as required. Refer to the
module/component
P250A- Engine Oil Level Sensor Oil temperature level Using the manufacturer approved
47 Circuit - Watchdog / safety sensor circuit short diagnostic system check datalogger
Micro Controller failure circuit to ground, signals, Engine Oil Level - Measured
short circuit to power, (0x03E6), Engine Oil Volume -
high resistance, open Calculated (0x03F2), Sump Oil
circuit Temperature - Measured (0x03F3).
Oil temperature level Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
sensor failure and check oil temperature level sensor
circuit to power, high resistance, open
module/component
P250A- Engine Oil Level Sensor Oil temperature level Using the manufacturer approved
92 Circuit - Performance or sensor circuit short diagnostic system check datalogger
incorrect operation circuit to ground, signals, Engine Oil Level - Measured
short circuit to power, (0x03E6), Engine Oil Volume -
high resistance, open Calculated (0x03F2), Sump Oil
circuit Temperature - Measured (0x03F3).
Oil temperature level Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
sensor failure and check oil temperature level sensor
circuit to power, high resistance, open
module/component
P2586- Turbocharger Boost Using the manufacturer approved

13 Control Position Sensor B NOTE: - Circuit VGT_FB diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit - Circuit open - signal, Boost Pressure Actuator Bank 2
- Measured Position (0x0347). Refer to
The engine control the electrical circuit diagrams and
module has check the variable geometry
determined an open turbocharger actuator vane on bank 1
circuit via lack of bias for open circuit. This circuit consists of
voltage, low current three wires between the engine control
flow, no change in the module and the variable geometry
state of an input in turbocharger control module. The three
response to an output sensor wires are a 5 volt sensor supply,
Harness fault - a sensor ground and a signal line.
Variable geometry Check signal line for open circuit and
turbocharger actuator power and ground supply to sensor.
vane open circuit Repair wiring as required. Clear DTC
Variable geometry and retest
turbocharger actuator If no fault found in wiring harness
vane failure suspect variable geometry turbocharger
position sensor failure. Refer to the
module/component

Circuit - Signal low time < - signal, Boost Pressure Actuator Bank 2
minimum - Measured Position (0x0347). Refer to
Harness fault - the electrical circuit diagrams and
Variable geometry check the variable geometry
turbocharger actuator turbocharger actuator vane on bank 1
vane circuit short for short circuit to ground, high
circuit to ground, high resistance, open circuit. Repair wiring
resistance, open as required. Clear DTC and retest
Variable geometry check and install a new variable
turbocharger actuator geometry turbocharger position sensor
vane failure as required. Refer to the warranty
module/component

Circuit - Signal high time > - signal, Boost Pressure Actuator Bank 2
maximum - Measured Position (0x0347). Refer to
Harness fault - the electrical circuit diagrams and
Variable geometry check the variable geometry
turbocharger actuator turbocharger actuator vane on bank 1
vane for open circuit. This circuit consists of
Variable geometry three wires between the engine control
turbocharger actuator module and the variable geometry
vane failure turbocharger control module. The three
sensor wires are a 5 volt sensor supply,
a sensor ground and a signal line.
Check signal line for open circuit, short
ground. Check power and ground
supply to sensor. Repair wiring as
module/component

Circuit - Signal frequency - signal, Boost Pressure Actuator Bank 2
too low - Measured Position (0x0347). Refer to
module detected check the variable geometry
excessive duration for turbocharger actuator vane on bank 1
one cycle of the for open circuit. This circuit consists of
output across a three wires between the engine control
specified sample size module and the variable geometry
Harness fault - turbocharger control module. The three
Variable geometry sensor wires are a 5 volt sensor supply,
turbocharger actuator a sensor ground and a signal line.
vane Check signal line for open circuit, short
Variable geometry circuit to power, short circuit to
turbocharger actuator ground. Check power and ground
vane failure supply to sensor. Repair wiring as
module/component

Circuit - Signal frequency - signal, Boost Pressure Actuator Bank 2
too high - Measured Position (0x0347). Refer to
module detected check the variable geometry
insufficient duration turbocharger actuator vane on bank 1
for one cycle of the for open circuit. This circuit consists of
output across a three wires between the engine control
specified sample size module and the variable geometry
Harness fault - turbocharger control module. The three
Variable geometry sensor wires are a 5 volt sensor supply,
turbocharger actuator a sensor ground and a signal line.
vane Check signal line for open circuit, short
Variable geometry circuit to power, short circuit to
turbocharger actuator ground. Check power and ground
vane failure supply to sensor. Repair wiring as
actuator vane failure. Refer to the
module/component
P2587- Turbocharger Boost Harness fault - Using the manufacturer approved

92 Control Position Sensor B Variable geometry diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit Range/Performance turbocharger actuator signal, Boost Pressure Actuator Bank 2
- Performance or incorrect vane - Measured Position (0x0347). Refer to
operation Variable geometry the electrical circuit diagrams and
turbocharger actuator check the variable geometry
vane failure turbocharger actuator vane on bank 1
for open circuit. This circuit consists of
three wires between the engine control
module and the variable geometry
turbocharger control module. The three
sensor wires are a 5 volt sensor supply,
a sensor ground and a signal line.
Check signal line for open circuit, short
ground. Check power and ground
supply to sensor. Repair wiring as
module/component

Circuit Low - No sub type - signal, Boost Pressure Actuator Bank 2
information - Measured Position (0x0347). This DTC
Harness fault - is set when the engine control module
Variable geometry detects a low circuit voltage on the
turbocharger actuator signal line from the variable geometry
vane turbocharger actuator vane. This circuit
Variable geometry consists of three wires between the
turbocharger actuator engine control module and the variable
vane circuit short geometry turbocharger control module.
circuit to ground The three sensor wires are a 5 volt
Variable geometry sensor supply, a sensor ground and a
turbocharger actuator signal line. Check signal line for short
vane failure circuit to ground. Check power and
ground supply to sensor. Repair wiring
and check variable geometry
turbocharger actuator vane circuit for
module/component

Circuit High - No sub type - signal, Boost Pressure Actuator Bank 2
information - Measured Position (0x0347). This DTC
Harness fault - is set when the engine control module
Variable geometry detects a high circuit voltage on the
turbocharger actuator signal line from the variable geometry
vane turbocharger actuator vane. This circuit
Variable geometry consists of three wires between the
turbocharger actuator engine control module and the variable
vane circuit short geometry turbocharger control module.
circuit to power The three sensor wires are a 5 volt
Variable geometry sensor supply, a sensor ground and a
turbocharger actuator signal line. Check signal line for short
vane failure circuit to power. Check power and
ground supply to sensor. Repair wiring
and check variable geometry
turbocharger actuator vane circuit for
module/component
P268C- Cylinder 1 Injector Data Cylinder 1 injector Using the manufacturer approved
00 Incompatible - No sub type calibration data held in diagnostic system reprogram injector
information the engine control codes. Clear DTC and re-check. Re-
module is different to configure the engine control module
that read from the Check and install a new engine control
injector module as required. Refer to the
Cylinder 1 injector warranty policy and procedures
calibration data not manual, or determine if any prior
stored / programmed approval programme is in operation,
P268C- Cylinder 1 Injector Data Cylinder 1 injector Using the manufacturer approved
51 Incompatible - Not calibration data not diagnostic system reprogram injector
programmed stored / programmed codes. Clear DTC and re-check. Re-
Engine control module configure the engine control module
module/component
P268D- Cylinder 2 Injector Data Cylinder 2 injector Using the manufacturer approved
P268D- Cylinder 2 Injector Data Cylinder 2 injector Using the manufacturer approved
module/component
P268E- Cylinder 3 Injector Data Cylinder 3 injector Using the manufacturer approved
P268E- Cylinder 3 Injector Data Cylinder 3 injector Using the manufacturer approved
module/component
P268F- Cylinder 4 Injector Data Cylinder 4 injector Using the manufacturer approved
P268F- Cylinder 4 Injector Data Cylinder 4 injector Using the manufacturer approved
module/component
P2690- Cylinder 5 Injector Data Cylinder 5 injector Using the manufacturer approved
module/component
module/component
P2A00- O2 Circuit Range / This DTC is set when the engine control
16 Performance (Bank 1, NOTE: - Circuit LPTR_A module detects the voltage on the trim
Sensor 1) - Circuit voltage - resistor circuit of the pre catalyst
below threshold oxygen sensor is less than the voltage
The engine control threshold. This may be caused by the
module measured a pre catalyst oxygen sensor being too
voltage below a hot to operate correctly. Refer to the
specified range but workshop manual and check the
not necessarily a short exhaust system and pre catalyst
circuit to ground oxygen sensor harness for sign of
Harness fault - Pre mechanical damage. Refer to the
catalyst oxygen sensor electrical circuit diagrams and check all
fault the pre catalyst oxygen sensor circuits
Pre catalyst oxygen for open circuits, short circuit to power,
sensor failure short circuit to ground, short circuit to
other circuits. Check all engine control
module power and ground supplies.
and retest
Sensor 1) - Circuit voltage - resistor circuit of the pre catalyst
above threshold oxygen sensor is greater than the
The engine control voltage threshold. This may be caused
module measured a by the pre catalyst oxygen sensor
voltage above a being too hot to operate correctly.
specified range but Refer to the workshop manual and
not necessarily a short check the exhaust system and pre
circuit to power catalyst oxygen sensor harness for sign
Harness fault - Pre of mechanical damage. Refer to the
catalyst oxygen sensor electrical circuit diagrams and check all
fault the pre catalyst oxygen sensor circuits
Pre catalyst oxygen for open circuits, short circuit to power,
sensor failure short circuit to ground, short circuit to
and retest
Sensor 1) - Signal rate of - resistor circuit of the pre catalyst
change below threshold oxygen sensor is greater than the
Harness fault - Pre voltage threshold. This may be caused
catalyst oxygen sensor by the pre catalyst oxygen sensor
fault being too hot to operate correctly.
Pre catalyst oxygen Refer to the workshop manual and
sensor failure check the exhaust system and pre
catalyst oxygen sensor harness for sign
of mechanical damage. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check all
the pre catalyst oxygen sensor circuits
for open circuits, short circuit to power,
and retest
U0001- High Speed CAN High speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved
00 Communication Bus - No failure diagnostic system carry out network
sub type information High speed CAN bus integrity test
circuit, short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
ground, short circuit and check high speed CAN network for
to power, open circuit short circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit
U0001- High Speed CAN High speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved
88 Communication Bus - Bus failure diagnostic system carry out network
off High speed CAN bus integrity test
circuit, short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
ground, short circuit and check high speed CAN network for
to power, open circuit short circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit
U0101- Lost Communication with The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 TCM - No sub type module has not diagnostic system, check transmission
information received the expected control module for DTCs and refer to
CAN signal from the the relevant DTC index
transmission control Using the manufacturer approved
module within the diagnostic system carry out network
specified time interval integrity test. Refer to the electrical
CAN harness link circuit diagrams and check
between engine transmission control module power and
control module and ground circuits for open circuit. Check
transmission control CAN harness between engine control
module network module and transmission control
malfunction module, repair as necessary
26 TCM - Signal rate of module has not diagnostic system, check transmission
change below threshold received the expected control module for DTCs and refer to
transmission control Using the manufacturer approved
CAN harness link circuit diagrams and check
between engine transmission control module power and
transmission control CAN harness between engine control
module network module and transmission control
00 Transfer Case Control module has not diagnostic system, check transfer case
Module - No sub type received the expected control module for DTCs and refer to
information CAN signal from the the relevant DTC index
transfer case control Using the manufacturer approved
CAN harness link circuit diagrams and check transfer
between engine case control module power and ground
control module and circuits for open circuit. Check CAN
transfer case control harness between engine control module
module network and transfer case control module,
malfunction repair as necessary
U0103- Lost Communication With The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 Gear Shift Control Module module has not diagnostic system, check gear shift
A - No sub type received the expected module (automatic transmission
information CAN signal from the selector) for DTCs and refer to the
gear shift module relevant DTC index
(automatic Using the manufacturer approved
transmission selector) diagnostic system carry out network
within the specified integrity test. Refer to the electrical
time interval circuit diagrams and check gear shift
CAN harness link module (automatic transmission
between engine selector) power and ground circuits for
control module and open circuit. Check CAN harness
gear shift module between engine control module and
(automatic gear shift module (automatic
transmission selector) transmission selector), repair as
network malfunction necessary
00 Cruise Control Module - No module has not diagnostic system, check speed control
sub type information received the expected module for DTCs and refer to the
CAN signal from the relevant DTC index
speed control module Using the manufacturer approved
within the specified diagnostic system carry out network
time interval integrity test. Refer to the electrical
CAN harness link circuit diagrams and check speed
between engine control module power and ground
speed control module harness between engine control module
network malfunction and speed control module, repair as
necessary
00 Starter/ Generator Control module has not diagnostic system, check anti-lock
Module - No sub type received the expected brake system control module for DTCs
information CAN signal from the and refer to the relevant DTC index
anti-lock brake system Using the manufacturer approved
control module within diagnostic system carry out network
the specified time integrity test. Refer to the electrical
interval circuit diagrams and check anti-lock
CAN harness link brake system control module power
between engine and ground circuits for open circuit.
control module and Check CAN harness between engine
anti-lock brake system control module and anti-lock brake
control module system control module, repair as
00 Anti-Lock Brake System module has not diagnostic system, check anti-lock
(ABS) Control Module - No received the expected brake system control module for DTCs
sub type information CAN signal from the and refer to the relevant DTC index
anti-lock brake system Using the manufacturer approved
control module within diagnostic system carry out network
the specified time integrity test. Refer to the electrical
interval circuit diagrams and check anti-lock
CAN harness link brake system control module power
between engine and ground circuits for open circuit.
control module and Check CAN harness between engine
anti-lock brake system control module and anti-lock brake
control module system control module, repair as
00 Steering Angle Sensor module has not diagnostic system, check Steering
Module - No sub type received the expected Angle Sensor for DTCs and refer to the
information CAN signal from the relevant DTC index
Steering Angle Sensor Using the manufacturer approved
CAN harness link circuit diagrams and check Steering
between engine Angle Sensor power and ground circuits
control module and for open circuit. Check CAN harness
Steering Angle Sensor between engine control module and
network malfunction Steering Angle Sensor, repair as
necessary
00 Park Brake Control Module module has not diagnostic system, check parking brake
- No sub type information received the expected control module for DTCs and refer to
parking brake control Using the manufacturer approved
CAN harness link circuit diagrams and check parking
between engine brake control module power and
parking brake control CAN harness between engine control
module network module and parking brake control
00 Active Roll Control Module module has not diagnostic system, check active roll
active roll control Using the manufacturer approved
CAN harness link circuit diagrams and check active roll
active roll control harness between engine control module
module network and active roll control module, repair
malfunction as necessary
00 All Terrain Control Module module has not diagnostic system, check all terrain
all terrain control Using the manufacturer approved
CAN harness link circuit diagrams and check all terrain
control module and all circuits for open circuit. Check CAN
terrain control module harness between engine control module
network malfunction and all terrain control module, repair as
necessary
00 Central Body Control module has not diagnostic system, check central
Module - No sub type received the expected junction box for DTCs and refer to the
information CAN signal from the relevant DTC index
central junction box Using the manufacturer approved
CAN harness link circuit diagrams and check central
between engine junction box power and ground circuits
control module and for open circuit. Check CAN harness
central junction box between engine control module and
network malfunction central junction box, repair as
necessary
00 Restraints Control Module - module has not diagnostic system, check restraints
No sub type information received the expected control module for DTCs and refer to
restraints control Using the manufacturer approved
CAN harness link circuit diagrams and check restraints
restraints control harness between engine control module
module network and restraints control module, repair as
malfunction necessary
08 Restraints Control Module - module has not diagnostic system, check restraints
Bus Signal / Message received the expected control module for DTCs and refer to
Failures CAN signal from the the relevant DTC index
restraints control Using the manufacturer approved
CAN harness link circuit diagrams and check restraints
restraints control harness between engine control module
module network and restraints control module, repair as
malfunction necessary
00 Instrument Panel Cluster module has not diagnostic system, check instrument
(IPC) Control Module - No received the expected cluster for DTCs and refer to the
sub type information CAN signal from the relevant DTC index
instrument cluster Using the manufacturer approved
CAN harness link circuit diagrams and check instrument
between engine cluster power and ground circuits for
control module and open circuit. Check CAN harness
instrument cluster between engine control module and
network malfunction instrument cluster, repair as necessary
U0164- Lost Communication With Power distribution This DTC is set if the engine control
00 HVAC Control Module - No system fault - fuse module loses communication with the
sub type information fault heating ventilation air and conditioning
CAN network fault control module. Check the heating
Heating ventilation air ventilation air and conditioning control
and conditioning module for DTCs and refer to the
control module fault relevant DTC index
and check the power supply and ground
connections to the heating ventilation
air and conditioning control module
diagnostic system carry out a network
integrity test. Refer to electrical circuit
diagrams and check CAN circuits if
required. Repair wiring harness as
required
If there are no faults in the wiring
harness and network communications
suspect the heating ventilation air and
conditioning control module. Refer to
module/component
U0167- Lost Communication With engine control module Check the immobilizer control module
00 Vehicle Immobilizer identity transfer failed for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Control Module - No sub index. Refer to the electrical circuit
type information diagrams and check the power supply
and ground connections to the
immobilizer control module. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic
system carry out a network integrity
test. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
and check CAN circuits if required.
Repair wiring harness as required
suspect the immobilizer control module.
U0300- Internal Control Module CAN network fault Using the manufacturer approved
00 Software Incompatibility - Central junction box diagnostic system carry out a network
No sub type information fault integrity test. Refer to electrical circuit
Car configuration file diagrams and check CAN circuits if
incorrect required. Repair wiring as required
Car configuration signal not received.
Check central junction box for DTCs
diagnostic system check and up-date
the car configuration file as required
U0405- Invalid Data Received Speed control system Check speed control module for related
68 From Cruise Control fault DTCs and refer to relevant DTC index
Module - Event information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
connections to the speed control
module
required. Repair wiring as required
If no wiring or network faults found
suspect speed control module. Refer to
module/component
U0405- Invalid Data Received Speed control system Check speed control buttons are not
82 From Cruise Control fault jammed/contaminated/damaged. Check
Module - Alive/sequence Harness fault - CAN speed control module for related DTCs
counter incorrect/not circuits and refer to the relevant DTC index
updated Harness fault - Speed Using the manufacturer approved
control module power diagnostic system carry out a network
supply or ground integrity test. Refer to electrical circuit
failure diagrams and check CAN circuits if
module
module/component
U0405- Invalid Data Received Speed control system Check speed control module for related
84 From Cruise Control fault DTCs and refer to relevant DTC index
Module - Signal below Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
allowable range and check the power supply and ground
module
module/component
U0405- Invalid Data Received Speed control system Check speed control buttons are not
86 From Cruise Control fault jammed/contaminated/damaged. Check
Module - Signal invalid speed control module for related DTCs
U0407- Invalid Data Received This DTC is set when Check the correct glow plug module is
00 From Glow Plug Control the glow plug module installed to the vehicle
Module - No sub type does not match what
information is expected by the
engine control module.
Detection of the
coding word is
complete when 2 of 3
coding words match.
This process is a one
time operation and
will be completed
during assembly of the
vehicle
U0407- Invalid Data Received Glow plug control Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
81 From Glow Plug Control system fault check the power supply and ground
Module - Invalid serial data connections to the glow plug control
received module. Check the diagnostic circuit
the glow plug control module for
intermittent faults, short circuits, open
circuits. Clear the DTC and recheck the
system
If the DTC recurs suspect the glow plug
control module. Refer to the warranty
module/component
U0415- Invalid Data Received Signal error for vehicle Using the manufacturer approved
68 From Anti-Lock Brake speed over CAN diagnostic system, check anti-lock
System (ABS) Control brake system control module for DTCs
Module - Event information and refer to the relevant DTC index
U0416- Invalid Data Received Anti-lock brake system Using the manufacturer approved
46 From Vehicle Dynamics fault diagnostic system, check anti-lock
Control Module - brake system control module for DTCs
Calibration / parameter and refer to the relevant DTC index
memory failure
U0416- Invalid Data Received The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
68 From Vehicle Dynamics module has received diagnostic system, check anti-lock
Control Module - Event the default brake brake system control module for DTCs
information pressure signal value and refer to the relevant DTC index
over CAN from the Using the manufacturer approved
anti-lock brake system diagnostic system carry out network
control module for a integrity test. Refer to the electrical
specified time interval circuit diagrams and check anti-lock
Anti-lock brake system brake system control module power
fault and ground circuits for open circuit.
CAN harness link Check CAN harness between engine
between engine control module and anti-lock brake
control module and system control module, repair as
anti-lock brake system necessary
control module Clear the DTCs, drive the vehicle at
network malfunction greater than 11mph (17kph) with a
throttle pedal greater than 10% for
greater than 1 second. Press the brake
pedal, using maximum travel for
greater than 1 second. Check the
system is operating correctly and the
DTC does not return
U0416- Invalid Data Received Difference between Check the anti-lock brake system control
92 From Vehicle Dynamics anti-lock brake system module for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Control Module - speed signal value and index
Performance or incorrect instrument cluster
operation speed value at low
vehicle speeds
U0424- Invalid Data Received Power distribution This DTC is set if the engine control
68 From HVAC Control Module system fault - fuse module loses communication with the
- Event information fault heating ventilation air and conditioning
CAN network fault control module. Check the heating
Heating ventilation air ventilation air and conditioning control
and conditioning module for DTCs and refer to the
control module fault relevant DTC index
connections to the heating ventilation
air and conditioning control module
required
suspect the heating ventilation air and
conditioning control module. Refer to
module/component
U0426- Invalid Data Received Immobilizer control Using the manufacturer approved
00 From Vehicle Immobilizer module has received diagnostic system carry out a network
Control Module - No sub an invalid identity integrity test. Refer to electrical circuit
type information response diagrams and check CAN circuits if
Module substituted required. Repair wiring harness as
required. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system check and
up-date the car configuration file as
required
Ensure all modules installed in the
vehicle which store vehicle identity are
valid for this vehicle and are not
substitutes from a donor vehicle
U0A1A- LIN Bus "A" - Missing Generator LIN bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
87 message communication circuit and check the generator LIN bus
failure circuit, for short circuit to power, short
circuit to ground, open circuit. Repair
and retest
U1A14- CAN Initialization Failure - Harness fault - CAN Using the manufacturer approved
00 No sub type information circuit fault diagnostic system carry out a network
required
U2005- Vehicle Speed - Signal Anti-lock brake system This DTC is set when the engine control
64 plausibility failure fault module has recognised a vehicle speed
signal plausibility fault. Check the anti-
lock brake system module for related
index. Check the instrument cluster for
related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system carry out a
network integrity test. Refer to
CAN circuits if required. Repair wiring
harness as required
U2005- Vehicle Speed - Below Anti-lock brake system This DTC is set when the engine control
84 allowable range fault module has recognised a vehicle speed
signal which is below the allowable
range. Check the anti-lock brake
system module for related DTCs and
refer to the relevant DTC index. Check
the instrument cluster for related DTCs
and refer to the relevant DTC index.
required
U2005- Vehicle Speed - Above Anti-lock brake system This DTC is set when the engine control
85 allowable range fault module has recognised a vehicle speed
signal which is above the allowable
range. Check the anti-lock brake
system module for related DTCs and
refer to the relevant DTC index. Check
the instrument cluster for related DTCs
and refer to the relevant DTC index.
required
U2108- Adaptive Cruise Control - Adaptive speed control Check adaptive speed control for DTCs
00 No sub type information system fault - error and refer to the relevant DTC index.
indicating adaptive Using the manufacturer approved
speed control fault diagnostic system carry out a network
flag set integrity test. Refer to electrical circuit
required
U2108- Adaptive Cruise Control - The engine control Check adaptive speed control for DTCs
24 Signal stuck high module measures a and refer to the relevant DTC index.
signal that remains Using the manufacturer approved
high when transitions diagnostic system carry out a network
are expected integrity test. Refer to electrical circuit
Adaptive speed control diagrams and check CAN circuits if
system fault - required. Repair wiring harness as
Adaptive speed control required
follow speed error
64 Signal plausibility failure system fault - and refer to the relevant DTC index.
Adaptive speed control Using the manufacturer approved
follow speed range diagnostic system carry out a network
error integrity test. Refer to electrical circuit
required
68 Event information system fault - error and refer to the relevant DTC index.
indicating adaptive Using the manufacturer approved
speed control follow diagnostic system carry out a network
speed check when integrity test. Refer to electrical circuit
stationary diagrams and check CAN circuits if
required
86 Signal invalid system fault - error and refer to the relevant DTC index.
when invalid adaptive Using the manufacturer approved
speed control resume diagnostic system carry out a network
requests are present integrity test. Refer to electrical circuit
required
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: V6
3.0L S/C Petrol, DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM)
Engine Control Module (ECM) - V6 3.0L S/C Petrol
WARNING: Fuel injector voltage will reach 65Volts during operation and have a high current requirement.
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adapter kit, part
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
If the control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer
to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in
operation, prior to the installation of a new module/component.
(ECM) - V6 3.0L S/C Petrol. For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and
For additional information, refer to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V6 S/C 3.0L
Petrol, Diagnosis and Testing).

B10A2- Crash Input - Signal low This DTC is set when the 'airbag
32 time < minimum NOTE: Circuit reference deployed' signal supplied by the
I_F_CRASH restraints control module is
outside the specification
The engine control module expected by the engine control
detected the low pulse is too module
narrow with respect to time Check the restraints control
This DTC is set when the engine module for DTCs and refer to
control module detects that the the relevant DTC index
signal low time is less than the If this DTC is logged with
minimum value U0151-00 & U0151-08, check
Restraints control module for fuse failure, restraints
failure control module power and
Auxiliary junction box failure ground circuits for open circuit.
Harness failure Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check CAN
harness
If this DTC is logged with
U0151-08, or on its own refer to
the electrical circuit diagrams
and check restraints control
module crash signal circuit for
short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance
Check auxiliary junction box for
DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index
Refer to electrical circuit
diagrams and check the
supplementary restraints system
input circuit for failures. This
circuit is a single wire which
connects the restraints control
module to the auxiliary junction
box and the engine control
module. Check this circuit for
short circuit to power, short
circuit to ground, open circuit.
Repair harness as required
Clear the DTC and retest
B10A2- Crash Input - Signal high This DTC is set when the 'airbag
35 time > maximum NOTE: Circuit reference deployed' signal supplied by the
I_F_CRASH restraints control module is
outside the specification
This DTC is set when the engine expected by the engine control
control module detects that the module
signal high time is greater than Check the restraints control
the maximum value module for DTCs and refer to
This DTC is set when the engine the relevant DTC index
control module detects that the Check auxiliary junction box for
signal high time is greater than DTCs and refer to the relevant
the maximum value DTC index
Restraints control module Refer to electrical circuit
failure diagrams and check the
Auxiliary junction box failure supplementary restraints system
Harness failure input circuit for failures. This
circuit is a single wire which
connects the restraints control
module to the auxiliary junction
box and the engine control
module. Check this circuit for
circuit to ground, open circuit.
Repair harness as required
B1206- Crash Occurred - Event This DTC is set if the restraints Using the manufacturer
68 information control module has deployed approved diagnostic system
the restraints systems following check the restraints control
activation of the crash sensors module for DTCs and refer to
Event information. The engine the relevant DTC index
control module has received a
crash signal from the restraints
control module
B1A75- Fuel Sender No.1 - No sub The fuel tank active side fuel
00 type information level sensor is stuck NOTE: Monitor description.
Within the engine control module
software a fuel level model is created.
If the error between the fuel level
model and the measured fuel level has
gone over a threshold, and no change
in fuel level is detected a DTC is set
Check the fuel level sensor for

correct movement across the
entire range
B1A76- Fuel Sender No.2 - No sub The fuel tank passive side fuel
00 type information level sensor is stuck NOTE: Monitor description.
Within the engine control module
software a fuel level model is created.
If the error between the fuel level
model and the measured fuel level has
gone over a threshold, and no change
in fuel level is detected a DTC is set
Check the fuel level sensor for

correct movement across the
entire range
P000A- Intake (A) Camshaft Oil level is low

00 Position Slow Response Variable camshaft timing NOTE: Monitor description. Inlet
Bank 1 - No sub type solenoid circuit intake and camshaft is unable to achieve the
information exhaust connectors swapped desired set point angle. The camshaft is
Variable camshaft timing stuck
solenoid circuit short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, Check the oil level is correct
open circuit, high resistance Check variable camshaft timing
Oil pressure is low solenoid circuit intake and
Variable camshaft timing exhaust connectors are not
actuator mechanical failure swapped
Excessive camshaft friction Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check variable
camshaft timing solenoid circuit
for short circuit to ground, short
high resistance
Refer to the relevant sections of
the workshop manual and check
the oil pressure is within
specification. Check oil supply to
camshaft is correct and that oil
gallery is free from debris
Check and install new variable
camshaft timing actuator as
required
the camshaft operation
P000B- Exhaust (B) Camshaft Oil level is low

00 Position Slow Response Variable camshaft timing NOTE: Monitor description.
Bank 1 - No sub type solenoid circuit intake and Exhaust camshaft is unable to achieve
information exhaust connectors swapped the desired set point angle. The
Variable camshaft timing camshaft is stuck
Excessive camshaft friction, Refer to the electrical circuit
restricted movement or stuck diagrams and check variable
high resistance
required
P000C- Intake (A) Camshaft Oil level is low

00 Position Slow Response Variable camshaft timing NOTE: Monitor description. Inlet
Bank 2 - No sub type solenoid circuit intake and camshaft is unable to achieve the
information exhaust connectors swapped desired set point angle. The camshaft is
high resistance
required
P000D- Exhaust (B) Camshaft Oil level is low

00 Position Slow Response Variable camshaft timing NOTE: Monitor description.
Bank 2 - No sub type solenoid circuit intake and Exhaust camshaft is unable to achieve
information exhaust connectors swapped the desired set point angle. The
high resistance
required
P0010- Intake (A) Camshaft Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Position Actuator Circuit / NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check variable
Open (Bank 1) - No sub O_T_CASICA camshaft timing solenoid circuit
type information for open circuit, high resistance
Variable camshaft timing Clear the DTC and retest
solenoid circuit open circuit, Check and install new variable
high resistance camshaft timing solenoid as
Variable camshaft timing required
solenoid failure
P0011- Intake (A) Camshaft Oil level is low

00 Position Timing - Over- Variable camshaft timing NOTE: Monitor description. Inlet
Advanced (Bank 1) - No solenoid circuit intake and camshaft is unable to achieve the
sub type information exhaust connectors swapped desired set point angle. The camshaft is
high resistance
required
P0013- Exhaust (B) Camshaft Refer to the electrical circuit

Open (Bank 1) - No sub O_T_CASECA camshaft timing solenoid circuit
solenoid failure
P0014- Exhaust (B) Camshaft Oil level is low

00 Position Timing - Over- Variable camshaft timing NOTE: Monitor description.
Advanced (Bank 1) - No solenoid circuit intake and Exhaust camshaft is unable to achieve
sub type information exhaust connectors swapped the desired set point angle. The
high resistance
required
P0016- Crankshaft Position - Loose camshaft position sensor Check camshaft position sensor
00 Camshaft Position Loose crankshaft position is installed correctly
Correlation - Bank 1 sensor Check crankshaft position sensor
Sensor A - No sub type Camshaft position sensor circuit is installed correctly
information short circuit to ground, short Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to power, open circuit, diagrams and check camshaft
high resistance position sensor circuit for short
Crankshaft position sensor circuit to ground, short circuit to
circuit short circuit to ground, power, open circuit, high
short circuit to power, open resistance. Check crankshaft
circuit, high resistance position sensor circuit for short
Camshaft or crankshaft position circuit to ground, short circuit to
sensor reluctor ring air gap power, open circuit, high
excessive resistance
Timing chain stretch beyond a Check reluctor ring to sensor
tolerable limit runout and air gap are within
Valve timing incorrect specification
Refer to the relevant section of
valve timing is within
specification
P0016- Crankshaft Position - The engine control module has

76 Camshaft Position detected incorrectly installed NOTE: Monitor description.
Correlation - Bank 1 components Initial reference adaption of cam wheel
Sensor A - Wrong Loose camshaft position sensor edges to determine system is OK post
mounting position Loose crankshaft position
engine rebuild or valve timing overhaul
sensor
Camshaft or crankshaft position Check camshaft position sensor
sensor reluctor ring air gap is installed correctly
excessive Check crankshaft position sensor
Engine assembled incorrectly is installed correctly
Valve timing incorrect Refer to the relevant section of
specification
Check reluctor ring to sensor
runout and air gap are within
specification
P0016- Crankshaft Position - Camshaft locking pin is not

79 Camshaft Position engaged during start NOTE: Monitor description.
Correlation - Bank 1 Loose camshaft position sensor Correct engagement of camshaft
Sensor A - Mechanical Camshaft position sensor locking pin. The average camshaft
linkage failure disturbed signal position is outside of the allowable limit
Oil pressure to variable during engine start. The engine will
camshaft timing actuator is low start poorly
Camshaft chain tensioner failure
Check variable camshaft timing
actuator for mechanical damage
Check camshaft position sensor
is installed correctly
variable camshaft timing
actuator is correct and that oil
the camshaft chain tensioner is
operating correctly
Sensor B - No sub type Camshaft position sensor circuit is installed correctly
specification

Sensor B - Wrong Loose camshaft position sensor edges to determine system is OK post
mounting position Loose crankshaft position engine rebuild or valve timing overhaul
sensor
specification
specification

Sensor B - Mechanical Camshaft position sensor locking pin. The average camshaft
operating correctly
Sensor A - No sub type Camshaft position sensor circuit is installed correctly
specification

Sensor A - wrong Loose camshaft position sensor edges to determine system is OK post
sensor
specification
specification

Sensor A - mechanical Camshaft position sensor locking pin. The average camshaft
operating correctly
Sensor B - No sub type Camshaft position sensor circuit is installed correctly
specification

Sensor B - Wrong Loose camshaft position sensor edges to determine system is OK post
sensor
specification
specification

Sensor B - Mechanical Camshaft position sensor locking pin. The average camshaft
operating correctly
P0020- Intake (A) Camshaft Refer to the electrical circuit

Open (Bank 2) - No sub O_T_CASICB camshaft timing solenoid circuit
solenoid failure
P0021- Intake (A) Camshaft Oil level is low
00 Position Timing - Over- Variable camshaft timing NOTE: Monitor description. Inlet
Advanced (Bank 2) - No solenoid circuit intake and camshaft is unable to achieve the
sub type information exhaust connectors swapped desired set point angle. The camshaft is
high resistance
required
P0023- Exhaust (B) Camshaft Refer to the electrical circuit

Open (Bank 2) - No sub O_T_CASECB camshaft timing solenoid circuit
solenoid failure
P0024- Exhaust (B) Camshaft Oil level is low

00 Position Timing - Over- Variable camshaft timing NOTE: Monitor description.
Advanced (Bank 2) - No solenoid circuit intake and Exhaust camshaft is unable to achieve
sub type information exhaust connectors swapped the desired set point angle. The
high resistance
required
P0030- HO2S Heater Control

00 Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor 1) NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
- No sub type information O_T_LSHUP1 Heated oxygen sensor heater duty
cycle maintains a constant value
Heated oxygen sensor heater
control circuit short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit
ground, short circuit to power, diagrams and check heated
open circuit, high resistance oxygen sensor heater control
Connector is disconnected, circuit for short circuit to
connector pin is backed out, ground, short circuit to power,
connector pin corrosion open circuit, high resistance
Heated oxygen sensor failure Inspect connectors for signs of
water ingress, and pins for
damage and/or corrosion
Check and install new heated
oxygen sensor as required

00 Circuit Low (Bank 1, NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
Sensor 1) - No sub type O_T_LSHUP1 Heated oxygen sensor heater duty
information cycle below a threshold
P0032- HO2S Heater Control Heated oxygen sensor heater

00 Circuit High (Bank 1, control circuit short circuit to NOTE: Monitor description.
Sensor 1) - No sub type ground, short circuit to power, Heated oxygen sensor heater duty
information open circuit, high resistance cycle above a threshold
Connector is disconnected,
connector pin is backed out, Refer to the electrical circuit
connector pin corrosion diagrams and check heated
Heated oxygen sensor failure oxygen sensor heater control
circuit for short circuit to
Inspect connectors for signs of
P0033- Turbocharger/Supercharger Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Bypass Valve "A" Control NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check
Circuit / Open - No sub O_T_CBPPOS & O_T_CBPNEG supercharger bypass valve
type information actuator circuit for short circuit
Supercharger bypass valve to ground, short circuit to
actuator circuit short circuit to power, open circuit, high
ground, short circuit to power, resistance
open circuit, high resistance Inspect connectors for signs of
Supercharger bypass valve water ingress, and pins for
actuator failure damage and/or corrosion
Check and install new
supercharger bypass valve
actuator as required

00 Bypass Valve "A"Control NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check
Circuit Low - No sub type O_T_CBPPOS & O_T_CBPNEG supercharger bypass valve
information actuator circuit for short circuit
P0036- HO2S Heater Control Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor 2) diagrams and check heated
NOTE: Circuit reference
- No sub type information O_S_LSFH3 oxygen sensor heater circuit for
Heated oxygen sensor heater circuit to power, open circuit,
circuit short circuit to ground, high resistance
short circuit to power, open Inspect connectors for signs of
circuit, high resistance water ingress, and pins for
Connector is disconnected, damage and/or corrosion
connector pin is backed out, Clear the DTC and retest
connector pin corrosion Check and install new heated
Heated oxygen sensor failure oxygen sensor as required

00 Circuit Low (Bank 1, NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check heated
Sensor 2) - No sub type O_S_LSFH3 oxygen sensor heater circuit for
information short circuit to ground, short

00 Circuit High (Bank 1, NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check heated

00 Bypass Valve "A" Control NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check
Circuit Range/Performance O_T_CBPPOS & O_T_CBPNEG supercharger bypass valve
- No sub type information actuator circuit for short circuit
P003A- Turbocharger/Supercharger The engine control module Inspect supercharger mechanical

21 Boost Control A Position measured a signal voltage end stop for correct adjustment
Exceeded Learning Limit - below a specified range but not Check for correct assembly of
Signal amplitude < necessarily a short circuit to bypass blade and end stop
minimum ground, gain low Clear the DTC and retest
Supercharger mechanical end Check and install new
stop incorrect adjustment supercharger actuator as
Supercharger bypass blade and required
end stop assembly failure
Supercharger actuator failure
P003A- Turbocharger/Supercharger The engine control module Inspect supercharger mechanical

22 Boost Control A Position measured a signal voltage end stop for correct adjustment
Exceeded Learning Limit - above a specified range but not Check for correct assembly of
Signal amplitude > necessarily a short circuit to bypass blade and for sign of
maximum power, gain too high restriction due to debris or
Supercharger mechanical end fouling
stop incorrect adjustment Clear the DTC and retest
Bypass blade restriction due to Check and install new
debris or fouling supercharger actuator as
Supercharger bypass blade and required
end stop assembly failure
Supercharger actuator failure
P0040- Oxygen Sensor Signals Heated oxygen sensor is Check and install the heated
00 Swapped Bank 1 Sensor 1 installed in the wrong bank oxygen sensor to the correct
/ Bank 2 Sensor 1 - No sub position in the exhaust system
type information
P0041- Oxygen Sensor Signals Heated oxygen sensor is Check and install the heated
00 Swapped Bank 1 Sensor 2 installed in the wrong bank oxygen sensor to the correct
/ Bank 2 Sensor 2 - No sub position in the exhaust system
type information
P0042- HO2S Heater Control Heated oxygen sensor heater Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor 3) circuit short circuit to ground, diagrams and check heated
- No sub type information short circuit to power, open oxygen sensor heater circuit for
circuit, high resistance short circuit to ground, short
Connector is disconnected, circuit to power, open circuit,
connector pin is backed out, high resistance
connector pin corrosion Inspect connectors for signs of
Heated oxygen sensor failure water ingress, and pins for

Sensor 3) - No sub type O_T_LSFH1 oxygen sensor heater circuit for

Sensor 3) - No sub type O_T_LSFH1 oxygen sensor heater circuit for

00 Circuit (Bank 2, Sensor 1) NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
- No sub type information O_T_LSHUP2 Heated oxygen sensor heater duty
cycle maintains a constant value
P0051- HO2S Heater Control Heated oxygen sensor heater

00 Circuit Low (Bank 2, control circuit short circuit to NOTE: Monitor description.
Sensor 1) - No sub type ground, short circuit to power, Heated oxygen sensor heater duty
information open circuit, high resistance cycle below a threshold
Heated oxygen sensor failure oxygen sensor heater control
00 Circuit High (Bank 2, NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
Sensor 1) - No sub type O_T_LSHUP2 Heated oxygen sensor heater duty
information cycle above a threshold
P0054- HO2S Heater Resistance Heated oxygen sensor heater

00 (Bank 1, Sensor 2) - No circuit short circuit to ground, NOTE: Monitor description.
sub type information short circuit to power, open Heated oxygen sensor heater not
circuit, high resistance heating enough
Heated oxygen sensor failure oxygen sensor heater circuit for
high resistance
P0055- HO2S Heater Resistance Heated oxygen sensor heater Refer to the electrical circuit
00 (Bank 1, Sensor 3) - No circuit short circuit to ground, diagrams and check heated
sub type information short circuit to power, open oxygen sensor heater circuit for

00 Circuit (Bank 2, Sensor 2) NOTE: Circuit reference OS_ISF4 diagrams and check heated
- No sub type information oxygen sensor heater circuit for
Heated oxygen sensor heater short circuit to ground, short
circuit short circuit to ground, circuit to power, open circuit,
short circuit to power, open high resistance
circuit, high resistance Inspect connectors for signs of
Connector is disconnected, water ingress, and pins for
connector pin is backed out, damage and/or corrosion
connector pin corrosion Clear the DTC and retest
Heated oxygen sensor failure Check and install new heated

00 Circuit Low (Bank 2, NOTE: Circuit reference OS_ISF4 diagrams and check heated
Sensor 2) - No sub type oxygen sensor heater circuit for
information Heated oxygen sensor heater short circuit to ground, short

00 Circuit High (Bank 2, NOTE: Circuit reference OS_ISF4 diagrams and check heated
Sensor 2) - No sub type oxygen sensor heater circuit for
information Heated oxygen sensor heater short circuit to ground, short

00 Circuit (Bank 2, Sensor 3) NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check heated
- No sub type information O_S_LSFH2 oxygen sensor heater circuit for


P0069- MAP - Barometric Pressure The engine control module

64 Correlation - Signal detected plausibility failures NOTE: The sensor is installed
plausibility failure Engine control module failure within the engine control module and is
not serviceable
Check and install new engine

control module as required
P0071- Ambient Air Temperature The engine control module Using the manufacturer
21 Sensor Circuit "A" measured a signal voltage approved diagnostic system
Range/Performance - below a specified range but not check datalogger signals -
Signal amplitude < necessarily a short circuit to Ambient Air Temperature -
minimum ground, gain low (0xF446)
Rapid temperature change of - Check that a plausible
ambient air temperature sensor value is displayed
Connector is disconnected, Refer to the electrical circuit
connector pin is backed out, diagrams and check ambient air
connector pin corrosion temperature sensor circuit for
Ambient air temperature sensor short circuit to ground, short
failure circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance
Check and install new ambient
air temperature sensor as
required
P0071- Ambient Air Temperature The engine control module Using the manufacturer
22 Sensor Circuit "A" measured a signal voltage approved diagnostic system
Range/Performance - above a specified range but not check datalogger signals -
Signal amplitude > necessarily a short circuit to Ambient Air Temperature -
maximum power, gain too high (0xF446)
Rapid temperature change of - Check that a plausible
ambient air temperature sensor value is displayed
connector pin is backed out, diagrams and check ambient air
connector pin corrosion temperature sensor circuit for
Ambient air temperature sensor short circuit to ground, short
failure circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance
Check and install new ambient
required
P0071- Ambient Air Temperature The engine control module Leave vehicle turned off for a
23 Sensor Circuit "A" measures a signal that remains minimum of 8 hours and allow
Range/Performance - low when transitions are to soak to a stable temperature.
Signal stuck low expected Using the manufacturer
Battery disconnection resulting approved diagnostic system
in errors in engine off time check datalogger signals -
(short soaks may look like long Ambient Air Temperature -
soaks) (0xF446) - Engine Coolant
Electric block heater applied Temperature (0xF405) - Boost
and not detected Air Temperature - Raw physical
Connector is disconnected, value (0x0341) - Intake Air
connector pin is backed out, Temperature (0xF40F) - Engine
connector pin corrosion Coolant Temperature #2
Ambient air temperature sensor (0x0489). All sensors should be
failure within 20 degºC of each other
Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check connections
are secure and wiring integrity
Check and install a new sensor
that is biased higher or lower
than the other sensors
P0071- Ambient Air Temperature The engine control module Leave vehicle turned off for a
24 Sensor Circuit "A" measures a signal that remains minimum of 8 hours and allow
Range/Performance - high when transitions are to soak to a stable temperature.
Signal stuck high expected Using the manufacturer
that is biassed higher or lower
P0072- Ambient Air Temperature Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Sensor Circuit "A" Low - NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_ATS diagrams and check ambient air
No sub type information temperature sensor circuit for
Ambient air temperature sensor short circuit to ground
circuit, short circuit to ground Inspect connectors for signs of
Ambient air temperature sensor Check and install new ambient
failure air temperature sensor as
required
P0073- Ambient Air Temperature Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Sensor Circuit "A" High - NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_ATS diagrams and check ambient air
No sub type information temperature sensor circuit for
Ambient air temperature sensor short circuit to power, open
circuit, short circuit to power, circuit, high resistance
Ambient air temperature sensor Check and install new ambient
failure air temperature sensor as
required
P007B- Charge Air Cooler Inspect connectors for signs of

00 Temperature Sensor NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_BTS water ingress, and pins for
Circuit Range/Performance damage and/or corrosion
(Bank 1) - No sub type Connector is disconnected, Refer to electrical circuit
information connector pin is backed out, diagrams and check the
connector pin corrosion manifold absolute pressure and
Manifold absolute pressure and temperature sensor circuit for
temperature sensor circuit, short circuit to ground, short
short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance Check and install a new manifold
Manifold absolute pressure and absolute pressure and
temperature sensor failure temperature sensor as required

Circuit Range/Performance damage and/or corrosion
(Bank 1) - Signal The engine control module Refer to electrical circuit
amplitude > maximum measured a signal voltage diagrams and check the
above a specified range but not manifold absolute pressure and
necessarily a short circuit to temperature sensor circuit for
power, gain too high short circuit to ground, short
connector pin corrosion Check and install a new manifold
temperature sensor circuit, temperature sensor as required
high resistance
Manifold absolute pressure and
temperature sensor failure
P007B- Charge Air Cooler The engine control module Leave vehicle turned off for a
23 Temperature Sensor measures a signal that remains minimum of 8 hours and allow
Circuit Range/Performance low when transitions are to soak to a stable temperature.
(Bank 1) -Signal stuck low expected Using the manufacturer

24 Temperature Sensor NOTE: Jaguar circuit reference water ingress, and pins for
Circuit Range/Performance IC_COOLANT_PMP_CTRL & damage and/or corrosion
(Bank 1) -Signal stuck high BOOST_PRESS_SENSOR_TEMP_SIG. Refer to electrical circuit
Land Rover circuit reference diagrams and check for fuse
O_S_CACWPR & I_A_BTS failure, install new fuse as
required
Connector is disconnected, Refer to electrical circuit
connector pin is backed out, diagrams and check the
connector pin corrosion temperature and manifold
Fuse failure absolute pressure sensor circuit
Temperature and manifold for short circuit to ground, short
absolute pressure sensor circuit, circuit to power, open circuit,
short circuit to ground, short high resistance
circuit to power, open circuit, Check and install a new
high resistance temperature and manifold
Temperature and manifold absolute pressure sensor as
absolute pressure sensor failure required
Air charge coolant pump and Refer to electrical circuit
control circuit, short circuit to diagrams and check the air
ground, short circuit to power, charge coolant pump and
open circuit, high resistance control circuit for short circuit to
Air charge coolant pump relay ground, short circuit to power,
failure open circuit, high resistance
Air charge coolant pump failure Refer to electrical circuit
diagrams and check the air
charge coolant pump for open
the air charge coolant pump for
correct operation. Check and
install a new air charge coolant
pump as required
P007C- Charge Air Cooler Inspect connectors for signs of

Circuit Low (Bank 1) - No damage and/or corrosion
sub type information Connector is disconnected, Refer to electrical circuit
P007D- Charge Air Cooler Inspect connectors for signs of

Circuit High (Bank 1) - No damage and/or corrosion
sub type information Connector is disconnected, Refer to electrical circuit
P007E- Charge Air Cooler Connector is disconnected, Inspect connectors for signs of
1F Temperature Sensor connector pin is backed out, water ingress, and pins for
Circuit Intermittent/Erratic connector pin corrosion damage and/or corrosion
(Bank 1) - Circuit Manifold absolute pressure and Refer to electrical circuit
intermittent temperature sensor circuit, diagrams and check the
short circuit to ground, short manifold absolute pressure and
circuit to power, open circuit, temperature sensor circuit for
high resistance short circuit to ground, short
Manifold absolute pressure and circuit to power, open circuit,
temperature sensor failure high resistance
Check and install a new manifold
absolute pressure and
P0087- Fuel Rail/System Pressure Fuel leaking outside of the fuel

77 - Too Low - Commanded system NOTE: Monitor description. To
position not reachable Fuel leaking into the low detect under pressure in the fuel rail.
pressure system The high pressure fuel pump signal is
below a threshold
Check for fuel leaks external of

the fuel rail
Check high pressure fuel pumps
are not leaking from the high
pressure system into the low
pressure system
P0087- Fuel Rail/System Pressure The engine control module has

84 - Too Low - Signal below determined failures where some NOTE: Monitor description. The
allowable range circuit quantity, reported via fuel rail pressure is below a threshold
serial data, is below a specified
range Refer to the electrical circuit
Fuel rail pressure sensor circuit diagrams and check fuel rail
short circuit to ground pressure sensor circuit for short
Fuel rail pressure sensor failure circuit to ground
Check and install new fuel rail
pressure sensor as required
P0088- Fuel Rail/System Pressure Fuel leaking outside of the fuel

77 - Too High - Commanded system NOTE: Monitor description. To
position not reachable Fuel leaking into the low detect over pressure in the fuel rail.
pressure system The high pressure fuel pump signal is
above a threshold
Check for fuel leaks external of

the fuel rail
Check high pressure fuel pumps
are not leaking from the high
pressure system into the low
pressure system
P0088- Fuel Rail/System Pressure The engine control module has

85 - Too High - Signal above determined failures where some NOTE: Monitor description. The
allowable range circuit quantity, reported via fuel rail pressure is above a threshold
serial data, is above a specified
range Check fuel pressure relief valve
Fuel pressure relief valve stuck for correct operation
Fuel rail pressure sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
short circuit to power diagrams and check fuel rail
Fuel rail pressure sensor failure pressure sensor circuit for short
circuit to power
P0089- Fuel Pressure Regulator The engine control module

64 Performance - Signal detected plausibility failures NOTE: Monitor description. The
plausibility failure Fuel system leakage from the command signal to the fuel pump
fuel tank and lines driver module is above a threshold
Low pressure fuel pump failure
Check for fuel system leakage
from the fuel tank and lines both
internal and external of the fuel
tank
Check and install new low
pressure fuel pump as required
P0089- Fuel Pressure Regulator The engine control module has
92 Performance - Performance detected that the component NOTE: Monitor description. The
or incorrect operation performance is outside its command signal to the fuel pump
expected range or operating in driver module is below a threshold
an incorrect way
Fuel system leakage from the Check for fuel system leakage
fuel tank and lines from the fuel tank and lines both
Low pressure fuel pump failure internal and external of the fuel
tank
P008A- Low Pressure Fuel System Fuel low pressure sensor circuit,
07 Pressure - Too Low - high resistance NOTE: Monitor description. The
Mechanical Failures Fuel low pressure sensor failure monitor checks the low pressure fuel is
not below the expected range

diagrams and check fuel low
pressure sensor circuit for high
resistance
Check and install new fuel low
P008A- Low Pressure Fuel System

84 Pressure - Too Low - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description. Low
Signal below allowable O_V_5VFLPS pressure fuel signal is below the
range threshold
The engine control module has
determined failures where some Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit quantity, reported via diagrams and check fuel low
serial data, is below a specified pressure sensor circuit for short
range circuit to ground, short circuit to
Fuel low pressure sensor circuit power, open circuit, high
short circuit to ground, short resistance
circuit to power, open circuit, Inspect connectors for signs of
high resistance water ingress, and pins for
Fuel system leakage from the damage and/or corrosion
fuel tank and lines Check for fuel system leakage
Low pressure fuel pump failure from the fuel tank and lines both
tank
P008B- Low Pressure Fuel System Fuel low pressure sensor circuit
07 Pressure - Too High - short circuit to ground, high NOTE: Monitor description. The
Mechanical Failures resistance monitor checks the low pressure fuel is
Fuel low pressure sensor failure not above the expected range

diagrams and check fuel low
pressure sensor circuit for short
circuit to ground, high resistance
P008B- Low Pressure Fuel System The engine control module has
85 Pressure - Too High - determined failures where some NOTE: Monitor description. Low
Signal above allowable circuit quantity, reported via pressure fuel signal is above the
range serial data, is above a specified threshold
range
Fuel low pressure sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
short circuit to ground, short diagrams and check fuel low
circuit to power, open circuit, pressure sensor circuit for short
high resistance circuit to ground, short circuit to
Fuel system leakage from the power, open circuit, high
fuel tank and lines resistance
Low pressure fuel pump failure Inspect connectors for signs of
Check for fuel system leakage
from the fuel tank and lines both
tank
P0096- Intake Air Temperature Connector is disconnected, Using the manufacturer

00 Sensor 2 Circuit connector pin is backed out, approved diagnostic system
Range/Performance (Bank connector pin corrosion check datalogger signal Boost
1) - No sub type Charge air cooler temperature Air Temperature - Raw physical
information sensor circuit, short circuit to value (0x0341)
ground, short circuit to power, Inspect connectors for signs of
open circuit, high resistance water ingress, and pins for
Charge air cooler temperature damage and/or corrosion
sensor failure Refer to the electrical circuit
Ambient air temperature sensor diagrams and check connections
failure are secure and wiring integrity
Check and install a new charge
required
Check and install a new air
P0096- Intake Air Temperature The engine control module Leave vehicle turned off for a
23 Sensor 2 Circuit measures a signal that remains minimum of 8 hours and allow
Range/Performance (Bank low when transitions are to soak to a stable temperature.
1) - Signal stuck low expected Using the manufacturer
Electric block heater applied Ambient Air Temperature -
and not detected (0xF446) - Engine Coolant
Connector is disconnected, Temperature (0xF405) - Boost
connector pin is backed out, Air Temperature - Raw physical
connector pin corrosion value (0x0341) - Intake Air
Charge air cooler temperature Temperature (0xF40F) - Engine
sensor circuit, short circuit to Coolant Temperature #2
ground, open circuit, high (0x0489). All sensors should be
resistance within 20 degºC of each other
Charge air cooler temperature Inspect connectors for signs of
sensor failure water ingress, and pins for
Ambient air temperature sensor damage and/or corrosion
failure Refer to the electrical circuit
Check and install new sensor
Range/Performance (Bank high when transitions are to soak to a stable temperature.
1) - Signal stuck high expected Using the manufacturer
Electric block heater applied Ambient Air Temperature -
and not detected (0xF446) - Engine Coolant
Connector is disconnected, Temperature (0xF405) - Boost
connector pin is backed out, Air Temperature - Raw physical
connector pin corrosion value (0x0341) - Intake Air
Charge air cooler temperature Temperature (0xF40F) - Engine
sensor circuit, short circuit to Coolant Temperature #2
power, open circuit, high (0x0489). All sensors should be
resistance within 20 degºC of each other
Charge air cooler temperature Inspect connectors for signs of
Ambient air temperature sensor damage and/or corrosion
Check and install new sensor
P0097- Intake Air Temperature Inspect connectors for signs of

00 Sensor 2 Circuit Low (Bank NOTE: Circuit reference - water ingress, and pins for
1) - No sub type I_A_CACTS and G_R_SEN - damage and/or corrosion
information Refer to electrical circuit
Connector is disconnected, diagrams and check the charge
connector pin is backed out, air cooler temperature sensor
connector pin corrosion circuit for short circuit to
Charge air cooler temperature ground, short circuit to power,
sensor circuit, short circuit to open circuit, high resistance
ground, short circuit to power, Check and install a new charge
open circuit, high resistance air cooler temperature sensor as
Charge air cooler temperature required
sensor failure

00 Sensor 2 Circuit High NOTE: Circuit reference - water ingress, and pins for
(Bank 1) - No sub type G_R_SEN - damage and/or corrosion
information Refer to electrical circuit
sensor failure

1F Sensor 2 Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference - water ingress, and pins for
Intermittent/Erratic (Bank I_A_CACTS & G_R_SEN - damage and/or corrosion
1) - Circuit intermittent Refer to electrical circuit
sensor failure
P00BC- "Mass or Volume Air Flow Blocked air filter

00 A Circuit Other related DTCs NOTE: Monitor description.
Range/Performance - Air Air induction system, incorrectly Rationality. Mass air flow sensor flow to
Flow Too Low" - No sub installed components, loose low
type information hose clips or air leakage
Mass air flow sensor Check air filter is serviceable
contamination by oil or debris Using the manufacturer
Electric throttle blade approved diagnostic system
contamination by oil or debris check the engine control module
Mass air flow sensor circuit, for related DTCs and refer to the
short circuit to ground, short relevant DTC index
circuit to power, open circuit, Refer to the relevant sections of
high resistance the workshop manual and check
Throttle adaption failure the induction system for
correctly installed components,
loose hose clips or air leakage
Check mass air flow sensor for
contamination by oil or debris
clean as required
Check electric throttle blade for
clean as required
diagrams and check mass air
flow sensor circuit for short
resistance
Using the manufacturer
carry out throttle adaption
routine
P00BD- "Mass or Volume Air Flow Blocked air filter

00 A Circuit Other related DTCs NOTE: Monitor description.
Range/Performance - Air Air induction system, incorrectly Rationality. Mass air flow sensor flow
Flow Too High" - No sub installed components, loose excessive
clean as required
clean as required
resistance
routine
P00BE- "Mass or Volume Air Flow Blocked air filter

00 B Circuit Other related DTCs NOTE: Monitor description.
Range/Performance - Air Air induction system, incorrectly Rationality. Mass air flow sensor flow to
Flow Too Low" - No sub installed components, loose low
clean as required
clean as required
resistance
routine
P00BF- "Mass or Volume Air Flow Blocked air filter

00 B Circuit Other related DTCs NOTE: Monitor description.
Range/Performance - Air Air induction system, incorrectly Rationality. Mass air flow sensor flow
Flow Too High" - No sub installed components, loose excessive
clean as required
clean as required
resistance
routine
P00C6- Fuel Rail Pressure Too Low Fuel rail has been removed
00 - Engine Cranking - No sub High pressure fuel pump NOTE: Monitor description. The
type information mechanical failure fuel rail pressure is checked against a
threshold after a number of engine
rotations from the start of cranking. A
DTC is set if the fuel rail pressure is
below the threshold

check the fuel rail pressure
during cranking. Clear the DTC
and attempt another start
Check and install new high
P00D1- HO2S Heater Control Heated oxygen sensor circuit

00 Circuit Range/Performance short circuit to ground, short NOTE: Monitor description. The
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) - No circuit to power, open circuit, value of the correction factor of the
sub type information high resistance heated oxygen sensor calibration
Connector is disconnected, resistor is checked against a threshold.
connector pin is backed out, A DTC is set if the value is above the
connector pin corrosion threshold
Heated oxygen sensor failure
diagrams and check heated
oxygen sensor circuit for short
resistance
P00D1- HO2S Heater Control The value of the signal

29 Circuit Range/Performance measured by the engine control NOTE: Monitor description. The
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) - signal module is not plausible given engine control module monitors the
invalid the operating conditions ceramic temperature of the heated
Heated oxygen sensor circuit oxygen sensor nernst cell to ensure it
short circuit to ground, short is sufficiently heated after engine start
high resistance Refer to the electrical circuit
Connector is disconnected, diagrams and check heated
connector pin is backed out, oxygen sensor circuit for short
connector pin corrosion circuit to ground, short circuit to
Heated oxygen sensor failure power, open circuit, high
resistance
P00D3- HO2S Heater Control Heated oxygen sensor circuit

04 Circuit Range/Performance short circuit to ground, short NOTE: Monitor description. The
(Bank 2 Sensor 1) - circuit to power, open circuit, value of the correction factor of the
System Internal Failures high resistance heated oxygen sensor calibration
Connector is disconnected, resistor is checked against a threshold.
connector pin is backed out, A DTC is set if the value is above the
connector pin corrosion threshold
resistance
P00D3- HO2S Heater Control The engine control module

64 Circuit Range/Performance detected plausibility failures NOTE: Monitor description. The
(Bank 2 Sensor 1) - Signal Heated oxygen sensor circuit engine control module monitors the
plausibility failure short circuit to ground, short ceramic temperature of the heated
circuit to power, open circuit, oxygen sensor nernst cell to ensure it
high resistance is sufficiently heated after engine start
Heated oxygen sensor failure oxygen sensor circuit for short
resistance
P0100- Mass or Volume Air Flow

00 Sensor "A" Circuit - No sub NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
type information I_F_AMS1 Engine control module monitors the
input frequency signal from the sensor
Mass air flow sensor connector and sets the DTC if there is electrical
is not correctly latched failure
Power feed to mass air flow
sensor, open circuit Using the manufacturer
Mass air flow sensor circuit, approved diagnostic system
short circuit to ground, short check datalogger signal - Mass
circuit to power, open circuit, Air Flow Sensor Frequency -
high resistance (0x033D)
Mass air flow sensor failure Using the manufacturer
check datalogger signal - Air
Flow Rate from Mass Air Flow
Sensor - (0xF410)
Check mass air flow sensor
connector is correctly latched
diagrams and check power feed
to mass air flow sensor for open
circuit
diagrams and check the mass
air flow sensor circuit for short
resistance
Check and install a new mass air
flow sensor as required
P0101- Mass or Volume Air Flow Mass air flow sensor Using the manufacturer
00 Sensor "A" Circuit contamination by oil or debris approved diagnostic system
Range/Performance - No Mass air flow sensor connector check datalogger signal - Mass
sub type information is not correctly latched Air Flow Sensor Frequency -
Power feed to mass air flow (0x033D)
short circuit to ground, short check datalogger signal - Air
circuit to power, open circuit, Flow Rate from Mass Air Flow
high resistance Sensor - (0xF410)
Mass air flow sensor failure - Verify signal is
operational when engine
is idling
clean as required
circuit
resistance

00 Sensor "A" Circuit Low - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
No sub type information I_F_AMS1 Engine control module monitors the
short circuit to ground check datalogger signal - Mass
Mass air flow sensor failure Air Flow Sensor Frequency -
(0x033D)
Sensor - (0xF410)
circuit
circuit to ground

85 Sensor "A" Circuit High - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
Signal above allowable I_F_AMS1 Engine control module monitors the
range input frequency signal from the sensor
The engine control module has and sets the DTC if there is electrical
determined failures where some failure
circuit quantity, reported via
serial data, is above a specified Using the manufacturer
range approved diagnostic system
Mass air flow sensor connector check datalogger signal - Mass
is not correctly latched Air Flow Sensor Frequency -
short circuit to power check datalogger signal - Air
Mass air flow sensor failure Flow Rate from Mass Air Flow
Sensor - (0xF410)
circuit
circuit to power
P010A- Mass or Volume Air Flow

00 Sensor "B" Circuit - No sub NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
type information I_F_AMS2 Engine control module monitors the
short circuit to ground, short check datalogger signal - Mass
circuit to power, open circuit, Air Flow Sensor Frequency -
high resistance (0x033D)
Mass air flow sensor failure Using the manufacturer
Sensor - (0xF410)
circuit
resistance
P010B- Mass or Volume Air Flow Mass air flow sensor Using the manufacturer
00 Sensor "B" Circuit contamination by oil or debris approved diagnostic system
Range/Performance - No Mass air flow sensor connector check datalogger signal - Mass
sub type information is not correctly latched Air Flow Sensor Frequency -
short circuit to ground, short check datalogger signal - Air
circuit to power, open circuit, Flow Rate from Mass Air Flow
high resistance Sensor - (0xF410)
Mass air flow sensor failure - Verify signal is
operational when engine
is idling
clean as required
circuit
resistance
P010C- Mass or Volume Air Flow

00 Sensor "B" Circuit Low - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
Mass air flow sensor circuit, and sets the DTC if there is electrical
short circuit to ground failure
Mass air flow sensor failure
check datalogger signal - Mass
Air Flow Sensor Frequency -
(0x033D)
Sensor - (0xF410)
circuit to ground
P010D- Mass or Volume Air Flow

00 Sensor "B" Circuit High - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
Mass air flow sensor circuit, and sets the DTC if there is electrical
short circuit to power failure
Mass air flow sensor failure
check datalogger signal - Mass
Air Flow Sensor Frequency -
(0x033D)
Sensor - (0xF410)
circuit to power
P0111- Intake Air Temperature The engine control module Using the manufacturer
21 Sensor 1 Circuit measured a signal voltage approved diagnostic system
Range/Performance (Bank below a specified range but not check datalogger signals -
1) - Signal amplitude < necessarily a short circuit to Charge Air Temperature Voltage
minimum ground, gain low - (0x03EE) & Intake Air
Connector is disconnected, Temperature Sensor Voltage -
connector pin is backed out, (0x1279)
Harness failure - Wiring water ingress, and pins for
integrity damage and/or corrosion
P0111- Intake Air Temperature The engine control module Using the manufacturer
22 Sensor 1 Circuit measured a signal voltage approved diagnostic system
Range/Performance (Bank above a specified range but not check datalogger signals -
1) - Signal amplitude > necessarily a short circuit to Charge Air Temperature Voltage
maximum power, gain too high - (0x03EE) & Intake Air
Connector is disconnected, Temperature Sensor Voltage -
connector pin is backed out, (0x1279)
Harness failure - Wiring water ingress, and pins for
integrity damage and/or corrosion
Range/Performance (Bank low when transitions are to soak to a stable temperature.
1) - Signal stuck low expected Using the manufacturer
Range/Performance (Bank high when transitions are to soak to a stable temperature.
1) - Signal stuck high expected Using the manufacturer
P0112- Intake Air Temperature Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_IAT1 diagrams and check intake air
1) - No sub type temperature sensor circuit for
information Intake air temperature sensor short circuit to ground
circuit, short circuit to ground Inspect connectors for signs of
Intake air temperature sensor Check and install new intake air
failure temperature sensor as required
P0113- Intake Air Temperature Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Sensor 1 Circuit High NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_IAT1 diagrams and check intake air
(Bank 1) - No sub type temperature sensor circuit for
information Intake air temperature sensor open circuit, short circuit to
circuit open circuit, short circuit power
to power Inspect connectors for signs of
Intake air temperature sensor Check and install new intake air
failure temperature sensor as required
P0114- Intake Air Temperature Intake air temperature sensor Refer to the electrical circuit
1F Sensor 1 circuit open circuit, short circuit diagrams and check intake air
Intermittent/Erratic (Bank to power, short circuit to temperature sensor circuit for
1) - Circuit intermittent ground open circuit, short circuit to
Connector is disconnected or power, short circuit to ground
loose, connector pin is backed Inspect connectors for signs of
out, connector pin corrosion water ingress, and pins for
Intake air temperature sensor damage and/or corrosion
failure Clear the DTC and retest
Check and install new intake air
P0116- Engine Coolant Connector is disconnected, Inspect connectors for signs of

00 Temperature Sensor 1 connector pin is backed out, water ingress, and pins for
Circuit Range/Performance connector pin corrosion damage and/or corrosion
- No sub type information Engine coolant temperature Refer to the electrical circuit
sensor circuit short circuit to diagrams and check engine
ground, short circuit to power, coolant temperature sensor
open circuit, high resistance circuit for short circuit to
Engine coolant temperature ground, short circuit to power,
sensor failure open circuit, high resistance
coolant temperature sensor as
required
P0116- Engine Coolant The engine control module Inspect connectors for signs of
22 Temperature Sensor 1 measured a signal voltage water ingress, and pins for
Circuit Range/Performance above a specified range but not damage and/or corrosion
- Signal amplitude > necessarily a short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit
maximum power, gain too high diagrams and check engine
Connector is disconnected, coolant temperature sensor
connector pin is backed out, circuit for short circuit to
connector pin corrosion ground, short circuit to power,
Engine coolant temperature open circuit, high resistance
sensor circuit short circuit to Clear the DTC and retest
ground, short circuit to power, Check and install new engine
open circuit, high resistance coolant temperature sensor as
Engine coolant temperature required
sensor failure
P0116- Engine Coolant The engine control module Leave vehicle turned off for a
23 Temperature Sensor 1 measures a signal that remains minimum of 8 hours and allow
Circuit Range/Performance low when transitions are to soak to a stable temperature.
- Signal stuck low expected Using the manufacturer
Engine coolant temperature (0x0489). All sensors should be
sensor failure within 20 degºC of each other
P0116- Engine Coolant The engine control module Leave vehicle turned off for a
24 Temperature Sensor 1 measures a signal that remains minimum of 8 hours and allow
Circuit Range/Performance high when transitions are to soak to a stable temperature.
- Signal stuck high expected Using the manufacturer
Engine coolant temperature (0x0489). All sensors should be
sensor failure within 20 degºC of each other
P0117- Engine Coolant Inspect connectors for signs of

00 Temperature Sensor 1 NOTE: Circuit reference water ingress, and pins for
Circuit Low - No sub type I_A_ENGTS damage and/or corrosion
information Refer to the electrical circuit
Connector is disconnected, diagrams and check engine
connector pin is backed out, coolant temperature sensor
sensor circuit short circuit to open circuit, high resistance
ground, short circuit to power, Clear the DTC and retest
open circuit, high resistance Check and install new engine
Engine coolant temperature coolant temperature sensor as
sensor failure required
P0118- Engine Coolant Inspect connectors for signs of

00 Temperature Sensor 1 NOTE: Circuit reference water ingress, and pins for
Circuit High - No sub type I_A_ENGTS damage and/or corrosion
connector pin is backed out, coolant temperature sensor
sensor circuit short circuit to open circuit, high resistance
ground, short circuit to power, Clear the DTC and retest
open circuit, high resistance Check and install new engine
Engine coolant temperature coolant temperature sensor as
sensor failure required

1F Temperature Sensor 1 connector pin is backed out, water ingress, and pins for
Circuit Intermittent/Erratic connector pin corrosion damage and/or corrosion
- Circuit intermittent Engine coolant temperature Refer to the electrical circuit
required
P0121- Throttle/Pedal Position Electric throttle position sensor Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Sensor A Circuit circuit short circuit to power, diagrams and check electric
Range/Performance - No short circuit to ground, high throttle position sensor circuit
sub type information resistance for short circuit to power, short
Electric throttle position sensor circuit to ground, high resistance
failure Inspect connectors for signs of
approved diagnostic system,
with ignition on but engine off,
check electric throttle position
sensor signal A is aligned to
electric throttle position sensor
signal B
Check and install new electric
throttle as required
P0121- Throttle/Pedal Position Engine control module failure Check and install new engine
04 Sensor A Circuit control module as required
Range/Performance -
System Internal Failures
P0122- Throttle/Pedal Position Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Sensor A Circuit Low - No NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_TVA1 diagrams and check electric
sub type information throttle position sensor circuit
Electric throttle position sensor for open circuit, short circuit to
circuit is below the valid ground
electrical range Inspect connectors for signs of
Electric throttle position sensor water ingress, and pins for
circuit open circuit, short circuit damage and/or corrosion
to ground Clear the DTC and retest
Electric throttle position sensor Check and install new electric
failure throttle as required

85 Sensor A Circuit High - NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_TVA1 diagrams and check electric
Signal above allowable throttle position sensor circuit
range The engine control module has for short circuit to power
determined failures where some Inspect connectors for signs of
circuit quantity, reported via water ingress, and pins for
serial data, is above a specified damage and/or corrosion
range Clear the DTC and retest
circuit is above the valid throttle as required
electrical range
Electric throttle position sensor
circuit short circuit to power
failure
P0126- Insufficient Coolant Temp Connector is disconnected, Inspect connectors for signs of
00 For Stable Operation - No connector pin is backed out, water ingress, and pins for
sub type information connector pin corrosion damage and/or corrosion
Engine coolant temperature Refer to the electrical circuit
required
P0128- Coolant Thermostat Thermostat stuck open or Check and install new
00 (Coolant Temp Below partially open thermostat
Thermostat Regulating Thermostat failure
Temperature) - No sub
type information
P012B- Turbocharger/Supercharger The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit
21 Inlet Pressure Sensor measured a signal voltage diagrams and check manifold
Circuit Range/Performance below a specified range but not absolute pressure sensor circuit
- Signal amplitude < necessarily a short circuit to for short circuit to ground, short
minimum ground, gain low circuit to power, open circuit,
Manifold absolute pressure high resistance
sensor circuit, for short circuit Inspect connectors for signs of
to ground, short circuit to water ingress, and pins for
power, open circuit, high damage and/or corrosion
resistance Using the manufacturer
Intake manifold air leak approved diagnostic system
Throttle adaption failure check throttle position voltage at
Blocked air filter ignition on
Engine breather leakage Check intake manifold for
Carbon obstruction around leakage, loose or missing
throttle blade components
Manifold absolute pressure Check air filter for blockage or
sensor failure restriction
Damaged catalytic converter Check engine breather system
Blocked exhaust system for leakage
Check throttle blade for carbon
obstruction
Check and install new manifold
absolute pressure sensor as
required
Check catalytic converter for
damage
Check exhaust system for
blockage
22 Inlet Pressure Sensor measured a signal voltage diagrams and check manifold
Circuit Range/Performance above a specified range but not absolute pressure sensor circuit
- Signal amplitude > necessarily a short circuit to for short circuit to ground, short
maximum power, gain too high circuit to power, open circuit,
obstruction
required
damage
blockage
23 Inlet Pressure Sensor measures a signal that remains diagrams and check manifold
Circuit Range/Performance low when transitions are absolute pressure sensor circuit
- Signal stuck low expected for short circuit to ground, short
Manifold absolute pressure circuit to power, open circuit,
sensor circuit, for short circuit high resistance
to ground, short circuit to Inspect connectors for signs of
power, open circuit, high water ingress, and pins for
resistance damage and/or corrosion
Intake manifold air leak Using the manufacturer
Throttle adaption failure approved diagnostic system
Blocked air filter check throttle position voltage at
Engine breather leakage ignition on
Carbon obstruction around Check intake manifold for
throttle blade leakage, loose or missing
Manifold absolute pressure components
sensor failure Check air filter for blockage or
Damaged catalytic converter restriction
Blocked exhaust system Check engine breather system
for leakage
obstruction
required
damage
blockage
24 Inlet Pressure Sensor measures a signal that remains diagrams and check manifold
Circuit Range/Performance high when transitions are absolute pressure sensor circuit
- Signal stuck high expected for short circuit to power
Manifold absolute pressure Inspect connectors for signs of
sensor circuit, for short circuit water ingress, and pins for
to power damage and/or corrosion
Throttle adaption failure Using the manufacturer
Blocked air filter approved diagnostic system
Engine breather leakage check throttle position voltage at
Carbon obstruction around ignition on
throttle blade Check air filter for blockage or
Manifold absolute pressure restriction
sensor failure Check engine breather system
Damaged catalytic converter for leakage
Blocked exhaust system Check throttle blade for carbon
obstruction
required
damage
blockage
P012B- Turbocharger/Supercharger The value of the signal Refer to the electrical circuit
29 Inlet Pressure Sensor measured by the engine control diagrams and check manifold
Circuit Range/Performance module is not plausible given absolute pressure sensor circuit
- Signal invalid the operating conditions for short circuit to ground, short
for leakage
obstruction
required
damage
blockage
P012B- Turbocharger/Supercharger The engine control module has Refer to the electrical circuit
84 Inlet Pressure Sensor determined failures where some diagrams and check manifold
Circuit Range/Performance circuit quantity, reported via absolute pressure sensor circuit
- Signal below allowable serial data, is below a specified for short circuit to ground, short
range range circuit to power, open circuit,
obstruction
required
damage
blockage
P012B- Turbocharger/Supercharger The engine control module has Refer to the electrical circuit
85 Inlet Pressure Sensor determined failures where some diagrams and check manifold
Circuit Range/Performance circuit quantity, reported via absolute pressure sensor circuit
- Signal above allowable serial data, is above a specified for short circuit to ground, short
range range circuit to power, open circuit,
obstruction
required
damage
blockage
P012C- Turbocharger/Supercharger Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Inlet Pressure Sensor NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check manifold
Circuit Low - No sub type O_V_5VRAILPS absolute pressure sensor circuit
information for short circuit to ground, short
Connector is disconnected, Check and install new manifold
connector terminal is backed absolute pressure sensor as
out, connector terminal required
corrosion Clear the DTC and retest
Manifold absolute pressure
sensor failure
P012D- Turbocharger/Supercharger Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Inlet Pressure Sensor NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_IMPS diagrams and check manifold
Circuit High - No sub type & G_R_IMPS absolute pressure sensor circuit
information for short circuit to ground, short
Connector is disconnected, Check and install new manifold
connector terminal is backed absolute pressure sensor as
out, connector terminal required
corrosion Clear the DTC and retest
Manifold absolute pressure
sensor failure
P0130- O2 Sensor Circuit (Bank 1 Heated oxygen sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Sensor 1) - No sub type short circuit to ground, short diagrams and check heated
information circuit to power, open circuit, oxygen sensor circuit for short
Connector is disconnected, power, open circuit, high
connector pin is backed out, resistance
P0131- O2 Sensor Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check heated
- No sub type information I_A_LSCP1 oxygen sensor circuit for short
Heated oxygen sensor circuit power, open circuit, high
P0132- O2 Sensor Circuit High Refer to the electrical circuit

-Signal above allowable I_A_LSCP1 oxygen sensor circuit for short
range circuit to ground, short circuit to
The engine control module has power, open circuit, high
determined failures where some resistance
circuit quantity, reported via Inspect connectors for signs of
serial data, is above a specified water ingress, and pins for
range damage and/or corrosion
Heated oxygen sensor circuit Clear the DTC and retest
short circuit to ground, short Check and install new heated
circuit to power, open circuit, oxygen sensor as required
high resistance
connector pin is backed out,
connector pin corrosion
P0133- O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Heated oxygen sensor degraded Check engine control module for
00 Response (Bank 1 Sensor Heated oxygen sensor related misfire DTCs and refer to
1) - No sub type contamination by incorrect fuel this DTC index. Rectify these
information or oil first
Heated oxygen sensor failure Check heated oxygen sensor for
age degradation
Check heated oxygen sensor for
contamination by incorrect fuel
or oil
P0134- O2 Sensor Circuit No Check heated oxygen sensor is

00 Activity Detected (Bank 1 NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_LSF1 correctly installed
Sensor 1) - No sub type Refer to the electrical circuit
information Heated oxygen sensor diagrams and check heated
incorrectly installed or missing oxygen sensor circuit for short
Heated oxygen sensor circuit circuit to ground, short circuit to
short circuit to ground, short power, open circuit, high
circuit to power, open circuit, resistance
high resistance Inspect connectors for signs of
P0135- O2 Sensor Heater Circuit Heated oxygen sensor circuit

00 (Bank 1 Sensor 1) - No short circuit to ground, short NOTE: Monitor description. The
sub type information circuit to power, open circuit, heated oxygen sensor heater duty cycle
high resistance is at its maximum value but the sensor
Connector is disconnected, does not reach operating temperature
connector pin corrosion Refer to the electrical circuit
Heated oxygen sensor failure diagrams and check heated
resistance
P0136- O2 Sensor Circuit (Bank 1 Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Sensor 2) - No sub type NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_LSF3 diagrams and check heated
information oxygen sensor circuit for short

84 Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2) NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_LSF3 diagrams and check heated
- Signal below allowable oxygen sensor circuit for short
range The engine control module has circuit to ground, short circuit to
determined failures where some power, open circuit, high
circuit quantity, reported via resistance
serial data, is below a specified Inspect connectors for signs of
range water ingress, and pins for
Heated oxygen sensor circuit damage and/or corrosion
short circuit to ground, short Clear the DTC and retest
circuit to power, open circuit, Check and install new heated
high resistance oxygen sensor as required

-Signal above allowable oxygen sensor circuit for short
range The engine control module has circuit to ground, short circuit to
determined failures where some power, open circuit, high
circuit quantity, reported via resistance
serial data, is above a specified Inspect connectors for signs of
Heated oxygen sensor circuit damage and/or corrosion
circuit to power, open circuit, Check and install new heated
high resistance oxygen sensor as required
P013A- O2 Sensor Slow Response Exhaust system leakage Check exhaust system for
00 - Rich to Lean (Bank 1 and Incorrectly installed heated leakage
Sensor 2) - No sub type oxygen sensor Check heated oxygen sensors
information Heated oxygen sensor circuit, are installed correctly into the
short circuit to ground, short exhaust system
circuit to power, open circuit, Using the manufacturer
high resistance approved diagnostic system
Connector is disconnected, check datalogger signals -
connector pin is backed out, Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Voltage
connector pin corrosion Bank 1 Sensor 2 - (0x035F)
Heated oxygen sensor failure Refer to the electrical circuit
oxygen sensor heater circuit for
high resistance
P013C- O2 Sensor Slow Response Exhaust system leakage Check exhaust system for
00 - Rich to Lean (Bank 2, Incorrectly installed heated leakage
Sensor 2) - No sub type oxygen sensor Check heated oxygen sensors
information Heated oxygen sensor circuit, are installed correctly into the
connector pin corrosion Bank 2 Sensor 2 - (0x0362)
high resistance
P013E- O2 Sensor Delayed Exhaust system leakage Check exhaust system for
00 Response - Rich to Lean Incorrectly installed heated leakage
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) - No oxygen sensor Check heated oxygen sensors
sub type information Heated oxygen sensor circuit, are installed correctly into the
connector pin corrosion Bank 1 Sensor 2 - (0x035F)
high resistance
P0141- O2 Sensor Heater Circuit Heated oxygen sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
00 (Bank 1 Sensor 2) - No short circuit to ground, short diagrams and check heated
sub type information circuit to power, open circuit, oxygen sensor circuit for short


- No sub type information oxygen sensor circuit for short

- No sub type information G_R_LSF1 oxygen sensor circuit for short
P014A- O2 Sensor Delayed Exhaust system leakage Check exhaust system for
00 Response - Rich to Lean Incorrectly installed heated leakage
(Bank 2 Sensor 2) - No oxygen sensor Check heated oxygen sensors
sub type information Heated oxygen sensor circuit, are installed correctly into the
connector pin corrosion Bank 2 Sensor 2 - (0x0362)
high resistance
P0150- O2 Sensor Circuit (Bank 2 Heated oxygen sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Sensor 1) - No sub type short circuit to ground, short diagrams and check heated
information circuit to power, open circuit, oxygen sensor circuit for short
Heated oxygen sensor water ingress, and pins for

- No sub type information O_R_LSVG2 oxygen sensor circuit for short
Heated oxygen sensor oxygen sensor as required

-Circuit voltage above O_R_LSVG2 oxygen sensor circuit for short
threshold circuit to ground, short circuit to
The engine control module power, open circuit, high
measured a voltage above a resistance
specified range but not Inspect connectors for signs of
necessarily a short circuit to water ingress, and pins for
power damage and/or corrosion
high resistance
Heated oxygen sensor
P0153- O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Heated oxygen sensor degraded Check engine control module for
00 Response (Bank 2 Sensor Heated oxygen sensor related misfire DTCs and refer to
1) - No sub type contamination by incorrect fuel this DTC index. Rectify these
information or oil first
Heated oxygen sensor failure Check heated oxygen sensor for
age degradation
contamination by incorrect fuel
or oil
P0154- O2 Sensor Circuit No Heated oxygen sensor Check heated oxygen sensor is
00 Activity Detected (Bank 2 incorrectly installed or missing correctly installed
Sensor 1) - No sub type Heated oxygen sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
information short circuit to ground, short diagrams and check heated
circuit to power, open circuit, oxygen sensor circuit for short
P0155- O2 Sensor Heater Circuit The engine control module has

85 (Bank 2 Sensor 1) - Signal determined failures where some NOTE: Monitor description. The
above allowable range circuit quantity, reported via heated oxygen sensor heater duty cycle
serial data, is above a specified is at its maximum value but the sensor
range does not reach operating temperature
Heated oxygen sensor circuit
short circuit to ground, short Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to power, open circuit, diagrams and check heated
high resistance oxygen sensor circuit for short
Connector is disconnected, circuit to ground, short circuit to
connector pin is backed out, power, open circuit, high
connector pin corrosion resistance

00 Sensor 2 - No sub type NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_LSF4 diagrams and check heated
P0157- O2 Sensor Circuit Low Heated oxygen sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Voltage (Bank 2 Sensor 2) short circuit to ground, short diagrams and check heated
- No sub type information circuit to power, open circuit, oxygen sensor circuit for short


P0163- O2 Sensor Circuit Low Heated oxygen sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Voltage (Bank 2 Sensor 3) short circuit to ground, short diagrams and check heated
- No sub type information circuit to power, open circuit, oxygen sensor circuit for short

P0169- Incorrect Fuel Composition Desired fuelling control limits Refer to the electrical circuit
00 - No sub type information implausible. Engine control diagrams and check the power
module software error and ground connections to the
Engine control module failure module
check and install latest relevant
level of software to the engine
control module
P0169- Incorrect Fuel Composition Desired lambda was not found Refer to the electrical circuit
42 - General memory failure plausible. Engine control diagrams and check the power
control module
P0169- Incorrect Fuel Composition Predicted fuel mass was found Refer to the electrical circuit
43 - Special memory failure not plausible. Engine control diagrams and check the power
control module
P0170- Fuel Trim (Bank 1) - No Exhaust system leakage NOTES:

00 sub type information Post catalyst heated oxygen
sensor incorrectly installed
Pre catalyst heated oxygen Monitor description. Detects
sensor circuit short circuit to when secondary fuelling adaptation
ground, short circuit to power, control signal is not plausible
Post catalyst heated oxygen
sensor circuit short circuit to Operational requirements needed
ground, short circuit to power, to allow the monitor to be fully tested.
open circuit, high resistance Drive vehicle under steady state
Pre catalyst heated oxygen conditions for up to 20 minutes
sensor contamination or failure
Post catalyst heated oxygen Check exhaust system for
sensor contamination or failure leakage. Rectify as required
Check post catalyst heated
oxygen sensor is correctly
installed
diagrams and check pre catalyst
heated oxygen sensor circuit for
high resistance
diagrams and check post
catalyst heated oxygen sensor
Check and install new pre
as required
Check and install new post
as required
P0170- Fuel Trim (Bank 1) - Signal The value of the signal NOTES:
29 invalid measured by the engine control
module is not plausible given
the operating conditions Monitor description. Detects
Exhaust system leakage when secondary fuelling adaptation
Post catalyst heated oxygen offset is too large to maintain
sensor incorrectly installed emissions within limits
Pre catalyst heated oxygen
sensor circuit short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, Operational requirements needed
open circuit, high resistance to allow the monitor to be fully tested.
Drive vehicle under steady state
sensor circuit short circuit to conditions for up to 20 minutes
open circuit, high resistance Check exhaust system for
Pre catalyst heated oxygen leakage. Rectify as required
sensor contamination or failure Check post catalyst heated
Post catalyst heated oxygen oxygen sensor is correctly
sensor contamination or failure installed
high resistance
as required
as required
P0170- Fuel Trim (Bank 1) - Signal The engine control module NOTES:
64 plausibility failure detected plausibility failures
Exhaust system leakage
Post catalyst heated oxygen Monitor description. Detects
sensor incorrectly installed when secondary fuelling adaptation
Pre catalyst heated oxygen offset is too large to maintain
sensor circuit short circuit to emissions within limits
Post catalyst heated oxygen Operational requirements needed
sensor circuit short circuit to to allow the monitor to be fully tested.
ground, short circuit to power, Drive vehicle under steady state
open circuit, high resistance conditions for up to 20 minutes
sensor contamination or failure Check exhaust system for
Post catalyst heated oxygen leakage. Rectify as required
installed
high resistance
as required
as required
P0173- Fuel Trim (Bank 2) - No Exhaust system leakage NOTES:

00 sub type information Post catalyst heated oxygen
sensor incorrectly installed
Pre catalyst heated oxygen Monitor description. Detects
ground, short circuit to power, control signal is not plausible
sensor circuit short circuit to Operational requirements needed
ground, short circuit to power, to allow the monitor to be fully tested.
open circuit, high resistance Drive vehicle under steady state
Pre catalyst heated oxygen conditions for up to 20 minutes
sensor contamination or failure
Post catalyst heated oxygen Check exhaust system for
sensor contamination or failure leakage. Rectify as required
installed
high resistance
as required
as required
P0173- Fuel Trim (Bank 2) - Signal The value of the signal NOTES:
29 invalid measured by the engine control
module is not plausible given
the operating conditions Monitor description. Detects
Exhaust system leakage when secondary fuelling adaptation
Post catalyst heated oxygen offset is too large to maintain
sensor incorrectly installed emissions within limits
Post catalyst heated oxygen Drive vehicle under steady state
sensor circuit short circuit to conditions for up to 20 minutes
open circuit, high resistance Check exhaust system for
Pre catalyst heated oxygen leakage. Rectify as required
Post catalyst heated oxygen oxygen sensor is correctly
sensor contamination or failure installed
high resistance
as required
as required
P0173- Fuel Trim (Bank 2) - Signal The engine control module NOTES:
64 plausibility failure detected plausibility failures
Exhaust system leakage
Post catalyst heated oxygen Monitor description. Detects
sensor incorrectly installed when secondary fuelling adaptation
Pre catalyst heated oxygen offset is too small to maintain
sensor circuit short circuit to emissions within limits
Post catalyst heated oxygen Operational requirements needed
sensor circuit short circuit to to allow the monitor to be fully tested.
ground, short circuit to power, Drive vehicle under steady state
open circuit, high resistance conditions for up to 20 minutes
Post catalyst heated oxygen leakage. Rectify as required
installed
high resistance
as required
as required
P0181- Fuel Temperature Sensor A The engine control module Using the manufacturer
21 Circuit Range/Performance measured a signal voltage approved diagnostic system
- Signal amplitude < below a specified range but not check datalogger signals - Fuel
minimum necessarily a short circuit to Temperature "A" - Raw -
ground, gain low (0x0429)
Connector is disconnected, Inspect connectors for signs of
connector pin is backed out, water ingress, and pins for
connector pin corrosion damage and/or corrosion
Fuel temperature sensor circuit, Refer to the electrical circuit
short circuit to ground, short diagrams and check fuel
Fuel temperature sensor failure circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance
Check and install new fuel
P0181- Fuel Temperature Sensor A The engine control module Using the manufacturer
22 Circuit Range/Performance measured a signal voltage approved diagnostic system
- Signal amplitude > above a specified range but not check datalogger signals - Fuel
maximum necessarily a short circuit to Temperature "A" - Raw -
power, gain too high (0x0429)
Fuel temperature sensor circuit, Refer to the electrical circuit
short circuit to ground, short diagrams and check fuel
Fuel temperature sensor failure circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance
P0182- Fuel Temperature Sensor A Inspect connectors for signs of

00 Circuit Low - No sub type NOTE: Circuit reference water ingress, and pins for
information O_V_5VRAILPS & I_A_FTS damage and/or corrosion
Connector is disconnected, diagrams and check fuel
connector pin is backed out, temperature sensor circuit for
connector pin corrosion short circuit to ground, short
Fuel temperature sensor circuit, circuit to power, open circuit,
circuit to power, open circuit, Check fuel rail pressure sensor 5
high resistance volt power supply circuit for
Fuel rail pressure sensor 5 volt open circuit, high resistance
power supply circuit, open Clear the DTC and retest
circuit, high resistance Check and install new fuel
Fuel temperature sensor failure temperature sensor as required
P0183- Fuel Temperature Sensor A Check engine control module for

00 Circuit High - No sub type NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_FTS related DTCs and refer to this
information & G_R_RAILPS DTC index. Rectify these first
Fuel temperature sensor circuit, diagrams and check fuel
short circuit to ground, short temperature sensor circuit for
circuit to power, open circuit, short circuit to ground, short
high resistance circuit to power, open circuit,
Fuel temperature sensor failure high resistance
P0191- Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit
21 A Circuit measured a signal voltage diagrams and check fuel rail
Range/Performance - below a specified range but not pressure sensor circuit for short
Signal amplitude < necessarily a short circuit to circuit to ground, short circuit to
minimum ground, gain low power, open circuit, high
Fuel rail pressure sensor circuit resistance
circuit to power, open circuit, Check and install new fuel rail
high resistance pressure sensor as required
Fuel rail pressure sensor failure
P0191- Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit
64 A Circuit detected plausibility failures diagrams and check fuel rail
Range/Performance - Fuel rail pressure sensor circuit pressure sensor circuit for short
Signal plausibility failure short circuit to ground, short circuit to ground, short circuit to
circuit to power, open circuit, power, open circuit, high
Fuel rail pressure sensor failure Clear the DTC and retest
P0191- Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Fuel rail pressure sensor failure
71 A Circuit NOTE: Monitor description. The
Range/Performance - fuel rail pressure is sampled over 3
Actuator stuck injections, if no difference is seen then
the DTC is set

P0192- Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Check connector is not

84 A Circuit Low - Signal NOTE: Circuit reference disconnected, connector pin is
below allowable range I_A_RAILPS & O_V_5VRAILPS not backed out
The engine control module has water ingress, and pins for
determined failures where some damage and/or corrosion
circuit quantity, reported via Refer to the electrical circuit
serial data, is below a specified diagrams and check fuel rail
range pressure sensor circuit for short
Connector is disconnected, circuit to ground
connector pin is backed out, Check fuel rail pressure sensor 5
connector pin corrosion volt power supply circuit for
Fuel rail pressure sensor circuit, open circuit, high resistance
short circuit to ground Clear the DTC and retest
Fuel rail pressure sensor 5 volt Check and install new fuel rail
power supply circuit, open pressure sensor as required
P0193- Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Check connector is not

85 A Circuit High - Signal disconnected, connector pin is
NOTE: Circuit reference
above allowable range I_A_RAILPS & G_R_RAILPS not backed out
serial data, is above a specified diagrams and check fuel rail
Connector is disconnected, circuit to power
connector pin is backed out, Check fuel rail pressure sensor
connector pin corrosion ground supply circuit for open
Fuel rail pressure sensor circuit, circuit, high resistance
short circuit to power Clear the DTC and retest
Fuel rail pressure sensor ground Check and install new fuel rail
supply circuit, open circuit, high pressure sensor as required
resistance
P0219- Engine Overspeed Incorrect gear was selected

00 Condition - No sub type Automatic transmission failure NOTE: Monitor description. The
information DTC is set if the engine speed is greater
than 7100rpm for greater than 1
second
Check engine control module for

related DTCs and refer to this
DTC index. Rectify these first
Check transmission control
module for related DTCs and
P0221- Throttle/Pedal Position Electric throttle position sensor Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Sensor/Switch B Circuit circuit short circuit to power, diagrams and check electric
Range/Performance - No short circuit to ground, high throttle position sensor circuit
sub type information resistance for short circuit to power, short
Electric throttle position sensor circuit to ground, high resistance
failure Inspect connectors for signs of
with ignition on but engine off,
check electric throttle position
sensor signal B is aligned to
electric throttle position sensor
signal A
throttle as required

00 Sensor/Switch B Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_TVA2 diagrams and check electric
Low - No sub type throttle position sensor circuit
information Electric throttle position sensor for open circuit, short circuit to
circuit is below the valid ground
electrical range Inspect connectors for signs of
Electric throttle position sensor water ingress, and pins for
circuit open circuit, short circuit damage and/or corrosion
to ground Clear the DTC and retest
failure throttle as required

85 Sensor/Switch B Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_TVA2 diagrams and check electric
High - Signal above throttle position sensor circuit
allowable range The engine control module has for short circuit to power
determined failures where some Inspect connectors for signs of
circuit quantity, reported via water ingress, and pins for
serial data, is above a specified damage and/or corrosion
range Clear the DTC and retest
circuit is above the valid throttle as required
electrical range
failure
P0234- Turbocharger/Supercharger Intake manifold pressure

00 A Overboost Condition - No sensors incorrect readings NOTE: Monitor description. If
sub type information the pressure ratio across the
supercharger and bypass is above the
expected amount the DTC is set

check datalogger signals - Boost
Absolute Pressure - Raw Value -
(0x033E)
P0236- Turbocharger/Supercharger The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit
21 Boost Sensor A Circuit measured a signal voltage diagrams and check manifold
Range/Performance - below a specified range but not absolute pressure sensor circuit
Signal amplitude < necessarily a short circuit to for short circuit to ground, short
minimum ground, gain low circuit to power, open circuit,
obstruction
required
damage
blockage
22 Boost Sensor A Circuit measured a signal voltage diagrams and check manifold
Range/Performance - above a specified range but not absolute pressure sensor circuit
Signal amplitude > necessarily a short circuit to for short circuit to ground, short
maximum power, gain too high circuit to power, open circuit,
obstruction
required
damage
blockage
23 Boost Sensor A Circuit measures a signal that remains diagrams and check manifold
Range/Performance - low when transitions are absolute pressure sensor circuit
Signal stuck low expected for short circuit to ground, short
for leakage
obstruction
required
damage
blockage
24 Boost Sensor A Circuit measures a signal that remains diagrams and check manifold
Range/Performance - high when transitions are absolute pressure sensor circuit
Signal stuck high expected for short circuit to ground, short
for leakage
obstruction
required
damage
blockage
P0236- Turbocharger/Supercharger The value of the signal Refer to the electrical circuit
29 Boost Sensor A Circuit measured by the engine control diagrams and check manifold
Range/Performance - module is not plausible given absolute pressure and
Signal invalid the operating conditions temperature sensor circuit for
Manifold absolute pressure and short circuit to ground, short
temperature sensor circuit, for circuit to power, open circuit,
Intake manifold air leak damage and/or corrosion
Throttle adaption failure Using the manufacturer
Blocked air filter approved diagnostic system
Engine breather leakage check throttle position voltage at
Carbon obstruction around ignition on
throttle blade Check intake manifold for
Manifold absolute pressure and leakage, loose or missing
temperature sensor failure components
Damaged catalytic converter Check air filter for blockage or
restriction
Check engine breather system
for leakage
obstruction
damage
P0236- Turbocharger/Supercharger The engine control module has Refer to the electrical circuit
84 Boost Sensor A Circuit determined failures where some diagrams and check manifold
Range/Performance - circuit quantity, reported via absolute pressure and
Signal below allowable serial data, is below a specified temperature sensor circuit for
range range short circuit to ground
Manifold absolute pressure and Inspect connectors for signs of
temperature sensor circuit, for water ingress, and pins for
short circuit to ground damage and/or corrosion
Manifold absolute pressure and components
temperature sensor failure Check air filter for blockage or
for leakage
obstruction
damage
P0236- Turbocharger/Supercharger The engine control module has Refer to the electrical circuit
85 Boost Sensor A Circuit determined failures where some diagrams and check manifold
Range/Performance - circuit quantity, reported via absolute pressure and
Signal above allowable serial data, is above a specified temperature sensor circuit for
range range short circuit to power
Manifold absolute pressure and Inspect connectors for signs of
temperature sensor circuit, for water ingress, and pins for
short circuit to power damage and/or corrosion
Manifold absolute pressure and components
temperature sensor failure Check air filter for blockage or
for leakage
obstruction
damage
P0237- Turbocharger/Supercharger Inspect connectors for signs of

00 Boost Sensor A Circuit Low NOTE: Circuit reference water ingress, and pins for
- No sub type information O_V_5VBPS & I_A_BPS damage and/or corrosion
Connector is disconnected, diagrams and check connections
connector pin is backed out, are secure and wiring integrity
Harness failure - Wiring
integrity
P0238- Turbocharger/Supercharger Inspect connectors for signs of

00 Boost Sensor A Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference G_R_BPS water ingress, and pins for
High - No sub type damage and/or corrosion
information Connector is disconnected, Refer to the electrical circuit
connector pin is backed out, diagrams and check connections
connector pin corrosion are secure and wiring integrity
Harness failure - Wiring Clear the DTC and retest
integrity
P023A- Charge Air Cooler Coolant Inspect connectors for signs of

13 Pump Control Circuit/Open NOTE: Circuit reference water ingress, and pins for
- Circuit open O_S_CACWPR damage and/or corrosion
The engine control module has diagrams and check air charge
determined an open circuit via coolant pump relay circuit for
lack of bias voltage, low current open circuit, high resistance
flow, no change in the state of Clear the DTC and retest
an input in response to an Check and install new air charge
output coolant pump relay as required
Air charge coolant pump relay
circuit open circuit, high
resistance
failure
P023B- Charge Air Cooler Coolant Inspect connectors for signs of

11 Pump Control Circuit Low - NOTE: Circuit reference water ingress, and pins for
Circuit short to ground O_S_CACWPR damage and/or corrosion
detected a ground coolant pump relay circuit for
measurement for a period short circuit to ground
longer than expected or has Clear the DTC and retest
detected a ground Check and install new air charge
measurement when another coolant pump relay as required
value was expected
circuit short circuit to ground
failure
P023C- Charge Air Cooler Coolant Inspect connectors for signs of

12 Pump Control Circuit High NOTE: Circuit reference water ingress, and pins for
- Circuit short to battery O_S_CACWPR damage and/or corrosion
detected a vehicle power coolant pump relay circuit for
measurement for a period short circuit to power
longer than expected or has Clear the DTC and retest
detected a vehicle power Check and install new air charge
measurement when another coolant pump relay as required
value was expected
failure
P0251- Injection Pump Fuel Inspect connectors for signs of

13 Metering Control A - NOTE: Circuit reference water ingress, and pins for
Circuit open O_P_FSCVH1 & O_P_FSCVL1 damage and/or corrosion
The engine control module has diagrams and check fuel pump
determined an open circuit via circuit for open circuit
lack of bias voltage, low current Clear the DTC and retest
flow, no change in the state of Check and install new fuel pump
an input in response to an as required
output
Fuel pump circuit, open circuit
Fuel pump failure
P0252- Injection Pump Fuel The engine control module has

11 Metering Control A detected a ground NOTE: Monitor description. To
Range/Performance - measurement for a period diagnose an internal serial peripheral
Circuit short to ground longer than expected or has interface communication failure
detected a ground between the main central processing
measurement when another unit and the pump control module
value was expected
Engine control module failure Check engine control module for
additional DTCs and refer to
relevant DTC index. Rectify
these first

11 Metering Control A Low - NOTE: Circuit reference water ingress, and pins for
Circuit short to ground O_P_FSCVH1 damage and/or corrosion
detected a ground circuit for short circuit to ground
measurement for a period Clear the DTC and retest
longer than expected or has Check and install new fuel pump
detected a ground as required
measurement when another
value was expected
Fuel pump circuit, short circuit
to ground
Fuel pump failure

12 Metering Control A High - NOTE: Circuit reference water ingress, and pins for
Circuit short to battery O_P_FSCVL1 damage and/or corrosion
detected a vehicle power circuit for short circuit to power
detected a vehicle power as required
value was expected
to power
Fuel pump failure

13 Metering Control B - NOTE: Circuit reference water ingress, and pins for
Circuit open O_P_FSCVH2 & O_P_FSCVL2 damage and/or corrosion
determined an open circuit via circuit for open circuit
flow, no change in the state of Check and install new fuel pump
an input in response to an as required
output
Fuel pump circuit, open circuit
Fuel pump failure
P0257- Injection Pump Fuel The engine control module has

11 Metering Control B detected a ground NOTE: Monitor description. To
Range/Performance - measurement for a period diagnose an internal serial peripheral
Circuit short to ground longer than expected or has interface communication failure
detected a ground between the main central processing
measurement when another unit and the pump control module
value was expected
these first

11 Metering Control B Low - NOTE: Circuit reference water ingress, and pins for
Circuit short to ground O_P_FSCVH2 damage and/or corrosion
detected a ground circuit for short circuit to ground
detected a ground as required
value was expected
to ground
Fuel pump failure

12 Metering Control B High - NOTE: Circuit reference water ingress, and pins for
Circuit short to battery O_P_FSCVL2 damage and/or corrosion
detected a vehicle power circuit for short circuit to power
detected a vehicle power as required
value was expected
to power
Fuel pump failure
P025A- Fuel Pump Module "A" The engine control module has
13 Control Circuit/Open - determined an open circuit via NOTE: Monitor description. To
Circuit open lack of bias voltage, low current diagnose a failure on the signal line to
flow, no change in the state of the fuel pump driver module
an input in response to an
output Inspect connectors for signs of
Fuel pump driver module diagrams and check fuel pump
circuit, open circuit, high driver module circuit for open
resistance circuit, high resistance
P025C- Fuel Pump Module "A"

11 Control Circuit Low - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description. To
Circuit short to ground O_T_FPMC diagnose a failure on the signal line to
the fuel pump driver module
detected a ground Inspect connectors for signs of
measurement for a period water ingress, and pins for
longer than expected or has damage and/or corrosion
detected a ground Refer to the electrical circuit
measurement when another diagrams and check fuel pump
value was expected driver module circuit for short
Fuel pump driver module
circuit, short circuit to ground
P025D- Fuel Pump Module "A"

12 Control Circuit High - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description. To
Circuit short to battery O_T_FPMC diagnose a failure on the signal line to
the fuel pump driver module
detected a vehicle power Inspect connectors for signs of
measurement for a period water ingress, and pins for
longer than expected or has damage and/or corrosion
detected a vehicle power Refer to the electrical circuit
measurement when another diagrams and check fuel pump
value was expected driver module circuit for short
Connector is disconnected, circuit to power
Fuel pump driver module
circuit, short circuit to power
P0261- Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit The engine control module has

11 Low - Circuit short to detected a ground NOTE: Monitor description.
ground measurement for a period Fault detected by the injector control
longer than expected or has module's power stage diagnostic then
detected a ground passed to the main central processing
measurement when another unit
value was expected
Fuel injector circuit, short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
to ground diagrams and check fuel injector
Fuel injector failure circuit for short circuit to ground
Check fuel injector resistance
injector as required

12 Low - Circuit short to detected a vehicle power NOTE: Monitor description.
battery measurement for a period Fault detected by the injector control
detected a vehicle power passed to the main central processing
value was expected
to power diagrams and check fuel injector
Fuel injector failure circuit for short circuit to power

13 Low - Circuit open determined an open circuit via NOTE: Monitor description.
lack of bias voltage, low current Fault detected by the injector control
flow, no change in the state of module's power stage diagnostic then
an input in response to an passed to the main central processing
output unit
connector pin is backed out, Inspect connectors for signs of
connector pin corrosion water ingress, and pins for
Fuel injector circuit, open damage and/or corrosion
circuit, high resistance Refer to the electrical circuit
Fuel injector failure diagrams and check fuel injector
circuit for open circuit, high
resistance

11 High - Circuit short to detected a ground NOTE: Monitor description.
value was expected

12 High - Circuit short to detected a vehicle power NOTE: Monitor description.
detected a vehicle power
passed to the main central processing
value was expected

value was expected

value was expected

output unit
resistance

value was expected

value was expected

value was expected

value was expected

output unit
resistance
value was expected

value was expected
P026A- Charge Air Cooler Loss of coolant Check the engine coolant level is
00 Efficiency Below Threshold Air charge coolant pump relay correct
- No sub type information Connector is disconnected, Inspect connectors for signs of
Air charge coolant pump circuit Check and install new air charge
Air charge coolant pump failure coolant pump relay as required
diagrams and check air charge
coolant pump circuit for short
resistance
Check and install new air charge
coolant pump as required
- Is the impeller damaged.
Does the impeller rotate
and pump coolant

value was expected

value was expected

output unit
resistance

value was expected

value was expected

value was expected

value was expected

output unit
resistance

value was expected

value was expected
value was expected

value was expected

output unit
resistance

value was expected

value was expected
P0299- Turbocharger/Supercharger Air intake system, boost air Test air intake system, boost air
00 A Underboost Condition - system high pressure boost air system for air leaks
No sub type information leak Check air intake system, low
Air intake system, low pressure pressure intake for blockages or
intake blocked or restricted restriction
Supercharger rotors worn or Check condition of supercharger
damaged and rotors
Air intake system pressure Check engine control module for
sensors incorrect readings related air intake system
Supercharger failure pressure sensor DTCs and refer
to this DTC index
supercharger as required
P02EE- "Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit Fuel injector control circuits Refer to the electrical circuit
01 Range/Performance" - (high and low) short circuit to diagrams and check both the
General Electrical Failure each other fuel injector control circuits
Connector is disconnected, (high and low) for short circuit
connector pin is backed out, to each other
Fuel injector failure water ingress, and pins for
P02EE- Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit The engine control module has

1C Range/Performance - detected a voltage outside of NOTE: Monitor description. The
Circuit voltage out of range the expected range, but not fuel injector control within the engine
identified as too high or too low control module monitors the current
Fuel injector circuit short circuit that the fuel injector uses to open, if
to ground, short circuit to the expected opening current is not
power, open circuit, high seen within a set time the DTC is set
resistance
connector pin is backed out, diagrams and check fuel injector
Fuel injector failure ground, short circuit to power,
P02EF- "Cylinder 2 Injector Circuit Fuel injector control circuits Refer to the electrical circuit
P02EF- Cylinder 2 Injector Circuit The engine control module has

seen within a set time the DTC is set
resistance
P02F0- Cylinder 3 Injector Circuit Fuel injector circuit short circuit

00 Range/Performance - No to ground, short circuit to NOTE: Monitor description. The
sub type information power, open circuit, high fuel injector control within the engine
resistance control module monitors the current
Connector is disconnected, that the fuel injector uses to open, if
connector pin is backed out, the expected opening current is not
connector pin corrosion seen within a set time the DTC is set
Fuel injector failure
diagrams and check fuel injector
P02F0- "Cylinder 3 Injector Circuit Fuel injector control circuits Refer to the electrical circuit
P02F1- Cylinder 4 Injector Circuit The engine control module has

resistance
P02F2- Cylinder 5 Injector Circuit The engine control module has

resistance
P02F3- Cylinder 6 Injector Circuit Fuel injector circuit short circuit

00 Range/Performance - No to ground, short circuit to NOTE: Monitor description. The
sub type information power, open circuit, high fuel injector control within the engine
resistance control module monitors the current
Connector is disconnected, that the fuel injector uses to open, if
connector pin is backed out, the expected opening current is not
connector pin corrosion seen within a set time the DTC is set
Fuel injector failure
P0300- Random Misfire Detected - Poor fuel quality

00 No sub type information Catalyst/exhaust system NOTE: Monitor description.
blockage Misfire detection
Spark plug(s) fouled or failed
Injector(s) circuit short circuit Check engine control module for
to ground, short circuit to related misfire DTCs and refer to
power, open circuit this DTC index. Rectify these
Connector is disconnected, first
connector pin corrosion Check the fuel system for
Injector(s) failure blockages, repair as required
Fuel system excessively too Check the catalyst/exhaust
lean or too rich system for blockage, repair as
Camshaft position sensor failure required
Reluctor ring Check and install a new spark
Crankshaft position sensor plug(s) as required
Low cylinder compression diagrams and check injector(s)
open circuit
Check and install a new
injector(s) as required
Check for air leaks within the
intake system
camshaft position sensor as
required
Inspect reluctor ring for damage
crankshaft position sensor as
required
Carry out cylinder compression
checks as required
P0301- Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected Poor fuel quality

00 - No sub type information Catalyst/exhaust system NOTE: Monitor description.
blockage Misfire detected on this cylinder
open circuit
intake system
required
required
checks as required

open circuit
intake system
required
required
checks as required

open circuit
intake system
required
required
checks as required

open circuit
intake system
required
required
checks as required

open circuit
intake system
required
required
checks as required

open circuit
intake system
required
required
checks as required
P0324- Knock Control System Crankshaft position sensor Check engine control module for
00 Error - No sub type signal is corrupted crankshaft position sensor DTCs
information Engine control module software and refer to this DTC index
failure Using the manufacturer
Engine control module hardware approved diagnostic system
failure check and install latest relevant
control module
Check and install a new engine
P0327- Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit

00 (Bank1) - No sub type NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check knock
information I_A_KS1B & I_A_KS1A sensor circuit for short circuit to
Knock sensor circuit short open circuit, high resistance
circuit to ground, short circuit Measure knock sensor circuit for
to power, open circuit, high correct resistance
resistance - 1 to 1.8 Mega Ohms
Knock sensor Inspect connectors for signs of
Check and install new knock
sensor as required

11 (Bank1) - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check knock
ground I_A_KS1B & I_A_KS1A sensor circuit for short circuit to
ground
The engine control module has Measure knock sensor circuit for
detected a ground correct resistance
measurement for a period - 1 to 1.8 Mega Ohms
longer than expected or has Inspect connectors for signs of
detected a ground water ingress, and pins for
measurement when another damage and/or corrosion
value was expected Clear the DTC and retest
Knock sensor circuit short Check and install new knock
circuit to ground sensor as required
Knock sensor
P0327- Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low

21 (Bank1) - Signal amplitude NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
< minimum I_A_KS1B & I_A_KS1A Plausibility of sensor output against
engine speed
The engine control module
measured a signal voltage Check engine control module for
below a specified range but not related misfire DTCs and refer to
necessarily a short circuit to this DTC index. Rectify these
ground, gain low first
Engine misfire Refer to the electrical circuit
Knock sensor circuit short diagrams and check knock
circuit to ground, short circuit sensor circuit for short circuit to
to power ground, short circuit to power
Knock sensor Measure knock sensor circuit for
correct resistance
- 1 to 1.8 Mega Ohms
sensor as required
P0328- Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit

00 High (Bank 1) - No sub NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check knock
type information I_A_KS1B & I_A_KS1A sensor circuit for short circuit to
sensor as required

12 High (Bank 1) - Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check knock
short to battery I_A_KS1B & I_A_KS1A sensor circuit for short circuit to
power
detected a vehicle power correct resistance
detected a vehicle power water ingress, and pins for
circuit to power sensor as required
Knock sensor
P0328- Knock Sensor 1 Circuit

22 High (Bank 1) - Signal NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
amplitude > maximum I_A_KS1B & I_A_KS1A Plausibility of sensor output against
engine speed
measured a signal voltage Refer to the electrical circuit
above a specified range but not diagrams and check knock
necessarily a short circuit to sensor circuit for short circuit to
power, gain too high power
Knock sensor circuit short Measure knock sensor circuit for
circuit to power correct resistance
Knock sensor - 1 to 1.8 Mega Ohms
Excessive mechanical noise Inspect connectors for signs of
from the engine water ingress, and pins for
Check for abnormal engine noise
that may corrupt the knock
sensor signal
sensor as required
P032C- Knock Sensor 3 Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit

00 (Bank1) - No sub type NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check knock
sensor as required

11 (Bank1) - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check knock
ground
Knock sensor
P032C- Knock Sensor 3 Circuit Low

21 (Bank1) - Signal amplitude NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
< minimum I_A_KS3B & I_A_KS3A Plausibility of sensor output against
engine speed
correct resistance
sensor as required
P032D- Knock Sensor 3 Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit

00 High (Bank1) - No sub NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check knock
sensor as required

12 High (Bank1) - Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check knock
power
Knock sensor
P032D- Knock Sensor 3 Circuit

22 High (Bank1) - Signal NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
engine speed
sensor signal
sensor as required

00 (Bank 2) - No sub type NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check knock
sensor as required

11 (Bank 2) - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check knock
ground
Knock sensor
P0332- Knock Sensor 2 Circuit Low

21 (Bank 2) - Signal NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
amplitude < minimum I_A_KS2B & I_A_KS2A Plausibility of sensor output against
engine speed
correct resistance
sensor as required

sensor as required

power
Knock sensor
P0333- Knock Sensor 2 Circuit

engine speed
sensor signal
sensor as required
P0335- Crankshaft Position Sensor

00 A Circuit - No sub type NOTE: Circuit reference O_V_CRS NOTE: Monitor description.
information Missing frequency input signal detected
Crankshaft position sensor from the crankshaft position sensor
circuit, short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, open Refer to electrical circuit
circuit, high resistance diagrams and check the
Crankshaft position sensor air crankshaft position sensor circuit
gap to target rotor excessive for short circuit to ground, short
Crankshaft position sensor circuit to power, open circuit,
failure high resistance
Check crankshaft position sensor
air gap to target rotor is correct
required
P0336- Crankshaft Position Sensor Crankshaft position sensor

00 A Circuit circuit, short circuit to ground, NOTE: Monitor description.
Range/Performance - No short circuit to power, open Disturbance detected on the crankshaft
sub type information circuit, high resistance frequency input signal
Crankshaft position sensor air
gap to target rotor excessive Refer to electrical circuit
Crankshaft position sensor diagrams and check the
failure crankshaft position sensor circuit
high resistance
required
P0336- Crankshaft Position Sensor Crankshaft position sensor Refer to electrical circuit
03 A Circuit circuit, short circuit to ground, diagrams and check the
Range/Performance - FM short circuit to power, open crankshaft position sensor circuit
(Frequency Modulated) / circuit, high resistance for short circuit to ground, short
PWM (Pulse Width Crankshaft position sensor air circuit to power, open circuit,
Modulated) Failures gap to target rotor excessive high resistance
Crankshaft position sensor Inspect connectors for signs of
failure water ingress, and pins for
required

00 (Bank 2) - No sub type NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check knock
sensor as required

11 (Bank 2) - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check knock
ground
Knock sensor
P033C- Knock Sensor 4 Circuit Low

21 (Bank 2) - Signal NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
amplitude < minimum I_A_KS4B & I_A_KS4A Plausibility of sensor output against
engine speed
correct resistance
sensor as required

sensor as required

power
Knock sensor
P033D- Knock Sensor 4 Circuit

engine speed
sensor signal
sensor as required
P0341- Camshaft Position Sensor Loose camshaft position sensor

00 A Circuit Camshaft position sensor circuit NOTE: Monitor description.
Range/Performance (Bank short circuit to ground, short Disturbance detected on the camshaft
1 or single sensor) - No circuit to power, open circuit, input signal
sub type information high resistance
Camshaft position sensor Check camshaft position sensor
reluctor ring air gap excessive is installed correctly
diagrams and check camshaft
position sensor circuit for short
resistance
specification

00 A Circuit Low (Bank 1 or Camshaft position sensor circuit NOTE: Monitor description.
single sensor) - No sub short circuit to ground, short Missing input signal detected from the
type information circuit to power, open circuit, camshaft position sensor. No rise or
high resistance falling edge detected from the camshaft
Camshaft position sensor position sensor. Input signal from the
reluctor ring air gap excessive camshaft position sensor is low

resistance
specification

00 A Circuit High (Bank 1 or Camshaft position sensor circuit NOTE: Monitor description.
single sensor) - No sub short circuit to ground, short Missing input signal detected from the
type information circuit to power, open circuit, camshaft position sensor. No rise or
high resistance falling edge detected from the camshaft
Camshaft position sensor position sensor. Input signal from the
reluctor ring air gap excessive camshaft position sensor is high
resistance
specification

00 A Circuit Camshaft position sensor circuit NOTE: Monitor description.
2) - No sub type circuit to power, open circuit, input signal
information high resistance
resistance
specification
P0347- Camshaft Position Sensor

00 A Circuit Low (Bank 2) - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
No sub type information I_P_CASIB Missing input signal detected from the
camshaft position sensor. No rise or
Loose camshaft position sensor falling edge detected from the camshaft
Camshaft position sensor circuit position sensor. Input signal from the
short circuit to ground, short camshaft position sensor is low
high resistance Check camshaft position sensor
Camshaft position sensor is installed correctly
reluctor ring air gap excessive Refer to the electrical circuit
resistance
specification

00 A Circuit High (Bank 2) - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
No sub type information I_P_CASIB Missing input signal detected from the
short circuit to ground, short camshaft position sensor is high
resistance
specification
P0350- Ignition Coil Power and ground connections Check engine control module for
04 Primary/Secondary Circuit to the engine control module additional DTCs and refer to
- System Internal Failures open circuit relevant DTC index. Rectify
Engine control module failure these first
diagrams and check the power
module
P0350- Ignition Coil The engine control module Check engine control module for
64 Primary/Secondary Circuit detected plausibility failures additional DTCs and refer to
- Signal plausibility failure Power and ground connections relevant DTC index. Rectify
to the engine control module these first
open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
Engine control module failure diagrams and check the power
module
P0350- Ignition Coil The engine control module has Check engine control module for
85 Primary/Secondary Circuit determined failures where some additional DTCs and refer to
- Signal above allowable circuit quantity, reported via relevant DTC index. Rectify
range serial data, is above a specified these first
range Refer to the electrical circuit
Power and ground connections diagrams and check the power
to the engine control module and ground connections to the
open circuit module
Engine control module failure Check and install new engine
P0351- Ignition Coil "A" Primary

13 Control Circuit / Open - NOTE: Circuit reference IGN COIL NOTE: Monitor description.
Circuit open 1 Open circuit detected by the ignition
control module, passed to main CPU
The engine control module has within engine control module and sets
determined an open circuit via the DTC
lack of bias voltage, low current
flow, no change in the state of Check ignition coil connector is
an input in response to an not disconnected, connector pin
output is not backed out
Ignition coil connector is Inspect connectors for signs of
disconnected, connector pin is water ingress, and pins for
backed out, connector pin damage and/or corrosion
corrosion Refer to the electrical circuit
Ignition coil fuse supply failure diagrams and check ignition coil
Ignition coil circuit open circuit circuit for open circuit
P0352- Ignition Coil "B" Primary

P0353- Ignition Coil "C" Primary

P0354- Ignition Coil "D" Primary

P0355- Ignition Coil "E" Primary

P0356- Ignition Coil "F" Primary


00 B Circuit Camshaft position sensor circuit NOTE: Monitor description.
resistance
specification
00 B Circuit Low (Bank 1) - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
No sub type information I_P_CASEA Missing input signal detected from the
resistance
specification

00 B Circuit High (Bank 1) - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
No sub type information I_P_CASEA Missing input signal detected from the
resistance
specification

00 B Circuit Camshaft position sensor circuit NOTE: Monitor description.
resistance
specification

00 B Circuit Low (Bank 2) - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
No sub type information I_P_CASEB Missing input signal detected from the
resistance
specification

00 B Circuit High (Bank 2) - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
No sub type information G_R_CAS2 Missing input signal detected from the
resistance
specification
P0420- Catalyst System Efficiency Exhaust system leakage

00 Below Threshold (Bank 1) - Catalytic converter failed, NOTE: Monitor description.
No sub type information caused by lean combustion Oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst
Catalytic converter failed, too low
caused by misfire
Catalytic converter failed, Using the manufacturer
caused by excessive oil approved diagnostic system,
consumption check engine control module, for
Catalytic converter failed, related DTCs and refer to the
caused by contaminated fuel relevant DTC index
leakage
the induction system for air
leaks
the ignition system for causes of
misfire
the workshop manual and carry
out oil consumption checks
Confirm with the customer that
the correct fuel has been used
P0430- Catalyst System Efficiency Exhaust system leakage

00 Below Threshold (Bank 2) - Catalytic converter failed, NOTE: Monitor description.
No sub type information caused by lean combustion Oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst
Catalytic converter failed, too low
caused by misfire
Catalytic converter failed, Using the manufacturer
caused by excessive oil approved diagnostic system,
consumption check engine control module, for
Catalytic converter failed, related DTCs and refer to the
caused by contaminated fuel relevant DTC index
leakage
the induction system for air
leaks
the ignition system for causes of
misfire
the workshop manual and carry
out oil consumption checks
Confirm with the customer that
the correct fuel has been used
P043E- Evaporative Emission Diagnostic module tank leakage Using the manufacturer
00 System Leak Detection failure approved diagnostic system
Reference Orifice Low Flow carry out large leak self test
- No sub type information Check and install new diagnostic
module tank leakage as required
P043F- Evaporative Emission Diagnostic module tank leakage Using the manufacturer
00 System Leak Detection failure approved diagnostic system
Reference Orifice High carry out large leak self test
Flow - No sub type Check and install new diagnostic
information module tank leakage as required
P0442- Evaporative Emission Leak detected in evaporative Using the manufacturer

00 System Leak Detected emissions system approved diagnostic system
(small leak) - No sub type Fuel filler cap not carry out purge valve self test
information sealing/missing Check evaporative emission
Purge valve stuck open system for leak using
Harness failure - Purge valve appropriate smoke/leak tester
circuit Check fuel filler cap is not
Evaporative emissions canister missing
pipework Check fuel filler cap is sealing
Diagnostic module tank leakage correctly
pump failure Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check purge valve
Visually inspect purge canister,
purge pipes, fuel tank and filler
neck for any obvious damage.
Replace as required
Check and install new diagnostic
module tank leakage pump as
required
P0444- Evaporative Emission Check connector is not

00 System Purge Control NOTE: Circuit reference disconnected, connector pin is
Valve "A" Circuit Open - O_T_PCSV not backed out
No sub type information Inspect connectors for signs of
Purge control valve connector is water ingress, and pins for
disconnected, connector pin is damage and/or corrosion
backed out, connector pin Refer to the electrical circuit
corrosion diagrams and check purge
Purge control valve circuit open control valve circuit for open
circuit circuit
Purge control valve failure Check and install a new purge
control valve as required
P0456- Evaporative Emission Fuel filler cap not Check fuel tank filler cap for
00 System Leak Detected sealing/missing sealing/missing. Check and
(very small leak) - No sub Diagnostic module tank leakage install a new fuel tank filler cap
type information connector not sealed as required
Diagnostic module tank leakage Check evaporative emission
wiring connector not sealed system for leak using
Evaporative emission system appropriate smoke/leak tester
leak Carry out a purge valve self test
Fuel tank, filler neck leak to clean the purge valve
Diagnostic module tank leakage Check fuel tank and filler neck
module failure for leakage, replace as required
Check purge valve canister and
pipes for leakage, replaced as
required
diagnostic module tank leakage
module as required
P0457- Evaporative Emission The engine control module has Check fuel filler cap is sealing
76 System Leak Detected detected incorrectly installed correctly
(fuel cap loose/off) - components Check fuel tank and fuel filler
Wrong mounting position Fuel filler cap not fitted neck for leaks using appropriate
correctly smoke/leak tester
Fuel tank or fuel filler neck leak Using the manufacturer
Fuel filler cap failure approved diagnostic system
carry out small leak self test
Check and install new fuel filler
cap as required

Valve Circuit Low - No sub O_T_PCSV not backed out
type information Inspect connectors for signs of
Purge control valve circuit short control valve circuit for short
circuit to ground circuit to ground

Valve Circuit High - No sub O_T_PCSV not backed out
type information Inspect connectors for signs of
Purge control valve circuit short control valve circuit for short
circuit to power circuit to power
P0460- Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit The value of the signal

29 - Signal invalid measured by the engine control NOTE: Monitor description.
module is not plausible given Open circuit detected by the instrument
the operating conditions cluster of the active fuel level sensor.
Connector is disconnected, The instrument cluster will transmit the
connector pin is backed out, failure over CAN to the engine control
connector pin corrosion module. The engine control module sets
Fuel level sensor circuit, short the DTC
circuit to ground, short circuit
to power, open circuit, high Check connector is not
resistance disconnected, connector pin is
Fuel level sensor failure not backed out
diagrams and check fuel level
sensor circuit for short circuit to
Check and install new fuel level
sensor as required
P0480- Fan 1 Control Circuit - The engine control module has Inspect connectors for signs of
11 Circuit short to ground detected a ground water ingress, and pins for
measurement for a period damage and/or corrosion
longer than expected or has Refer to the electrical circuit
detected a ground diagrams and check engine
measurement when another cooling fan circuit for short
value was expected circuit to ground
Connector is disconnected, Clear the DTC and retest
connector pin is backed out, Check and install new engine
connector pin corrosion cooling fan as required
Engine cooling fan circuit short
circuit to ground
Engine cooling fan failure
12 Circuit short to battery detected a vehicle power water ingress, and pins for
detected a vehicle power diagrams and check engine
value was expected circuit to power
circuit to power
13 Circuit open determined an open circuit via water ingress, and pins for
lack of bias voltage, low current damage and/or corrosion
flow, no change in the state of Refer to the electrical circuit
an input in response to an diagrams and check engine
output cooling fan circuit for open
Connector is disconnected, circuit, high resistance
connector pin corrosion Check and install new engine
Engine cooling fan circuit open cooling fan as required
11 Circuit short to ground detected a ground water ingress, and pins for
detected a ground diagrams and check engine
value was expected circuit to ground
circuit to ground
12 Circuit short to battery detected a vehicle power water ingress, and pins for
detected a vehicle power diagrams and check engine
value was expected circuit to power
circuit to power
13 Circuit open determined an open circuit via water ingress, and pins for
an input in response to an diagrams and check engine
output cooling fan circuit for open
Connector is disconnected, circuit, high resistance
connector pin corrosion Check and install new engine
Engine cooling fan circuit open cooling fan as required
P0483- Fan Performance - Signal Engine cooling fan partially Confirm if customer has been
36 frequency too low stalled deep water wading
Engine cooling fan stalling Check for damage to or
caused by deep water wading blockages in fan and fouling of
Engine cooling fan stalling fan cowling. Rectify as required
caused by obstruction in fan Refer to the electrical circuit
cowling diagrams and check engine
Engine cooling fan circuit short cooling fan circuit for short
circuit to ground, short circuit circuit to ground, short circuit to
to power, open circuit, high power, open circuit, high
P0483- Fan Performance - Signal The engine control module Check and install new engine
37 frequency too high detected insufficient duration cooling fan as required
for one cycle of the output Clear the DTC and retest
across a specified sample size
P0493- Fan Overspeed (clutch Engine cooling fan partially Confirm if customer has been
00 locked) - No sub type stalled deep water wading
information Engine cooling fan stalling Check for damage to or
caused by deep water wading blockages in fan and fouling of
Engine cooling fan stalling fan cowling. Rectify as required
caused by obstruction in fan Refer to the electrical circuit
cowling diagrams and check engine
Engine cooling fan circuit short cooling fan circuit for short
circuit to ground, short circuit circuit to ground, short circuit to
to power, open circuit, high power, open circuit, high
P0496- Evaporative Emission Purge valve stuck open Using the manufacturer
00 System High Purge Flow - Harness failure - Purge valve approved diagnostic system
No sub type information circuit carry out purge valve self test
Purge valve failure Refer to the electrical circuit
Check and install new purge
valve as required
P0497- Evaporative Emission Purge valve stuck closed Using the manufacturer
00 System Low Purge Flow - Harness failure - Purge valve approved diagnostic system
No sub type information circuit carry out purge valve self test
Purge valve failure Refer to the electrical circuit
Check and install new purge
valve as required
P0501- Vehicle Speed Sensor A Anti-lock brake system control Using the manufacturer
00 Range/Performance - No module fault approved diagnostic system,
sub type information Crankshaft position sensor check anti-lock brake system
damaged control module, for related DTCs
Blocked or damaged air intake and refer to the relevant DTC
system and mass air flow index
sensors Inspect crankshaft position
sensor for signs of damage
and/or corrosion
Check for damage to or
blockages in air intake system
and mass air flow sensors.
Rectify as required
P0504- Brake Switch A / B The signal transitions more Check for related brake pressure
27 Correlation - Signal rate of quickly than is reasonably DTCs within the anti-lock
change above threshold allowed braking control module
Brake pedal switch plunger Check brake pedal switch is
failure fitted correctly. Clear DTC, start
Brake pedal switch not fitted the engine and press the brake
correctly pedal, using maximum travel,
Brake pedal switch failure for greater than 1 minute taking
care not to press the accelerator
pedal
Check and install new brake
pedal switch as required
P0505- Idle Control System - No Intake air system blockage

00 sub type information Front end accessory drive NOTE: Monitor description.
overload, failed or seized Engine idle oscillation greater than
component maximum deviation allowed during
Power steering pump overload, catalyst operation
failed or seized component
Check air filter is not blocked
Check the intake air system is
free from restrictions
Check front end accessory drive
belt and driven components for
overload failure or seized
Check power steering pump for
overload, failed or seized
component
P0505- Idle Control System - The signal transitions more

27 Signal rate of change quickly than is reasonably NOTE: Monitor description.
above threshold allowed Engine idle oscillation greater than
Intake air system blockage maximum deviation allowed during
Front end accessory drive normal (warm) operation
component Check air filter is not blocked
Power steering pump overload, Check the intake air system is
failed or seized component free from restrictions
component
P0506- Idle Control System - RPM Intake air system blockage

00 Lower Than Expected - No Front end accessory drive NOTE: Monitor description.
sub type information overload, failed or seized Engine idle speed lower than minimum
component deviation allowed during normal (warm)
Power steering pump overload, operation
failed or seized component
Check air filter is not blocked
Check the intake air system is
free from restrictions
component
P0506- Idle Control System - RPM The engine control module

24 Lower Than Expected - measures a signal that remains NOTE: Monitor description.
Signal stuck high high when transitions are Engine idle speed lower than minimum
expected deviation allowed during catalyst
Intake air system blockage operation
Front end accessory drive
overload, failed or seized Check air filter is not blocked
component Check the intake air system is
Power steering pump overload, free from restrictions
failed or seized component Check front end accessory drive
component
P0507- Idle Control System - RPM Intake air system leakage

00 Higher Than Expected - No Intake air system components NOTE: Monitor description.
sub type information incorrectly installed, loose or Engine idle speed greater than
damaged pipework maximum deviation allowed during
Engine crankcase breather normal (warm) operation
system leakage
Engine crankcase breather Using the manufacturer
system components incorrectly approved smoke test system
installed check the intake air system is
free from leakage, components
are correctly installed, not loose
or that damaged pipework is
allowing leakage
Check Engine crankcase
breather system is free from
leakage, components are
correctly installed, not loose or
that damaged pipework is
allowing leakage
P0507- Idle Control System - RPM The engine control module

23 Higher Than Expected - measures a signal that remains NOTE: Monitor description.
Signal stuck low low when transitions are Engine idle speed greater than
expected maximum deviation allowed during
Intake air system leakage catalyst operation
Intake air system components
incorrectly installed, loose or Using the manufacturer
damaged pipework approved smoke test system
Engine crankcase breather check the intake air system is
system leakage free from leakage, components
Engine crankcase breather are correctly installed, not loose
system components incorrectly or that damaged pipework is
installed allowing leakage
Check Engine crankcase
breather system is free from
leakage, components are
correctly installed, not loose or
that damaged pipework is
allowing leakage
P050B- Cold Start Ignition Timing The engine control module has
92 Performance - Performance detected that the component NOTE: Monitor description.
or incorrect operation performance is outside its Monitor ignition timing during catalyst
expected range or operating in heating while in drive
an incorrect way
Engine control module failure Check and install new engine
P050B- Cold Start Ignition Timing Engine control module failure

93 Performance - No NOTE: Monitor description.
operation Actual ignition timing different to
commanded ignition timing during
catalyst heating

P050F- Brake Assist Vacuum Too

01 Low - General Electrical NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description. The
Failure I_S_BRKVAC engine control module checks there is
brake vacuum greater than 60kPa
Brake vacuum sensor open gauge pressure after 45 seconds. After
circuit, high resistance engine is running, the atmospheric
Connector is disconnected, pressure is greater than 75kPa, the
connector pin is backed out, coolant is greater than 20'C, and the
connector pin corrosion brake pedal is released
Brake vacuum pump air leakage
Brake vacuum pump failure Check brake vacuum is
available. Deplete vacuum with
engine off until the brake pedal
goes hard. With brake pedal still
applied start engine, if the pedal
drops then vacuum is available
diagrams and check brake
vacuum sensor circuit for open
If the brake pedal does not drop
check under bonnet for air leaks
and brake vacuum pump
operation
vacuum pump as required
P0512- Starter Request Circuit -

12 Circuit short to battery NOTE: Circuit reference I_S_T50 NOTE: Monitor description. The
engine control module checks that the
The engine control module has hard wired crank request from the body
detected a vehicle power control module matches the powermode
measurement for a period CAN signal
longer than expected or has
measurement when another water ingress, and pins for
value was expected damage and/or corrosion
connector pin is backed out, diagrams and check starter
connector pin corrosion request circuit for short circuit
Starter request circuit short to power
circuit to power Clear the DTC and retest
P0512- Starter Request Circuit -

14 Circuit short to ground or NOTE: Circuit reference I_S_T50 NOTE: Monitor description. The
open engine control module checks that the
The engine control module has hard wired crank request from the body
detected a ground control module matches the powermode
measurement or open circuit CAN signal
for a period longer than
expected or has detected a Inspect connectors for signs of
ground measurement or open water ingress, and pins for
circuit when another value was damage and/or corrosion
expected Refer to the electrical circuit
Connector is disconnected, diagrams and check starter
connector pin is backed out, request circuit for open circuit,
connector pin corrosion short circuit to ground
Starter request circuit open Clear the DTC and retest
P0512- Starter Request Circuit - Inspect connectors for signs of

72 Actuator stuck open NOTE: Circuit reference I_S_T50R water ingress, and pins for
Starter relay stuck open If engine starts turning, refer to
Connector is disconnected, the electrical circuit diagrams
connector pin is backed out, and check starter request circuit
connector pin corrosion for open circuit
Starter request diagnostic Clear the DTC and retest
circuit open circuit Check and install new start relay
Starter relay failure as required
P0512- Starter Request Circuit - Inspect connectors for signs of

73 Actuator stuck closed NOTE: Circuit reference I_S_T50R water ingress, and pins for
Starter relay stuck closed If engine starts turning, refer to
Connector is disconnected, the electrical circuit diagrams
connector pin is backed out, and check starter request circuit
connector pin corrosion for short circuit to power
Starter request diagnostic Clear the DTC and retest
circuit short circuit to power Check and install new start relay
Starter relay failure as required
P0513- Incorrect Immobilizer Key Invalid signal from central Check for CAN network and
00 - No sub type information junction box Immobilizer engine control module related
DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index.
Check the central junction box
for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index.
Re-configure the engine control
Re-configure the central junction
box using the manufacturer
P0528- Fan Speed Sensor Circuit Connector is disconnected, Inspect connectors for signs of
00 No Signal - No sub type connector pin is backed out, water ingress, and pins for
information connector pin corrosion damage and/or corrosion
Engine cooling fan stalling Check for damage to or
caused by obstruction in fan blockages in fan and fouling of
cowling fan cowling. Rectify as required
Engine cooling fan circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to ground, short circuit diagrams and check engine
to power, open circuit, high cooling fan circuit for short
resistance circuit to ground, short circuit to
Engine cooling fan failure power, open circuit, high
resistance
cooling fan as required
P052A- Cold Start Intake (A) Oil level is low

00 Camshaft Position Timing Variable camshaft timing NOTE: Monitor description. Inlet
Over-Advanced (Bank 1) - solenoid circuit intake and camshaft target versus actual deviation
No sub type information exhaust connectors swapped exceeds allowable limit during catalyst
Variable camshaft timing heating phase
high resistance
required
P052C- Cold Start Intake (A) Oil level is low

00 Camshaft Position Timing Variable camshaft timing NOTE: Monitor description. Inlet
Over-Advanced (Bank 2) - solenoid circuit intake and camshaft target versus actual deviation
No sub type information exhaust connectors swapped exceeds allowable limit during catalyst
Variable camshaft timing heating phase
high resistance
required
P053F- Cold Start Fuel Pressure The engine control module

23 Performance - Signal stuck measures a signal that remains NOTE: Monitor description. The
low low when transitions are high pressure fuel pump signal is below
expected a threshold during catalyst heating
External fuel leak from high
pressure fuel system Check for external fuel leaks
Internal fuel leak into low from the high pressure fuel
pressure fuel system pump and fuel rail
Check for internal fuel leaks
from high pressure fuel pump
into the low pressure fuel
system
P053F- Cold Start Fuel Pressure The engine control module

24 Performance - Signal stuck measures a signal that remains NOTE: Monitor description. The
high high when transitions are high pressure fuel pump signal is above
expected a threshold during catalyst heating
External fuel leak from high
pressure fuel system Check for external fuel leaks
Internal fuel leak into low from the high pressure fuel
pressure fuel system pump and fuel rail
Check for internal fuel leaks
from high pressure fuel pump
into the low pressure fuel
system
P054A- Cold Start Exhaust (B) Oil level is low

00 Camshaft Position Timing Variable camshaft timing NOTE: Monitor description.
Over-Advanced (Bank 1) - solenoid circuit intake and Exhaust camshaft target versus actual
No sub type information exhaust connectors swapped deviation exceeds allowable limit during
Variable camshaft timing catalyst heating phase
high resistance
required
P054C- Cold Start Exhaust (B) Oil level is low

00 Camshaft Position Timing Variable camshaft timing NOTE: Monitor description.
Over-Advanced (Bank 2) - solenoid circuit intake and Exhaust camshaft target versus actual
No sub type information exhaust connectors swapped deviation exceeds allowable limit during
Variable camshaft timing catalyst heating phase
high resistance
required
P0561- System Voltage Unstable - Power and ground connections Refer to the workshop manual
00 No sub type information to the engine control module, and the battery care manual,
open circuit, high resistance inspect the vehicle battery and
Connector is disconnected, ensure it is fully charged and
connector pin is backed out, serviceable before performing
connector pin corrosion further tests
Engine control module failure Refer to the electrical circuit
module
Check the vehicle charging
system performance to ensure
the voltage regulation is correct
P0562- System Voltage Low - No Vehicle battery under charged Refer to the workshop manual
00 sub type information Charging system fault - under and the battery care manual,
charging inspect the vehicle battery and
ensure it is fully charged and
serviceable before performing
further tests
module
P0562- System Voltage Low - The engine control module
16 Circuit voltage below measured a voltage below a NOTE: Monitor description.
threshold specified range but not Engine control module internal 5 Volt
necessarily a short circuit to supply below the minimum hardcoded
ground threshold value
Power and ground connections
to the engine control module, Check engine control module for
open circuit, high resistance additional DTCs and refer to
Connector is disconnected, relevant DTC index. Rectify
connector pin is backed out, these first
Engine control module failure water ingress, and pins for
module
P0563- System Voltage High - No Vehicle battery over charged Check the vehicle charging
00 sub type information Charging system fault - over system performance to ensure
charging the voltage regulation is correct
P0563- System Voltage High - The engine control module

17 Circuit voltage above measured a voltage above a NOTE: Monitor description.
threshold specified range but not Engine control module internal 5 Volt
necessarily a short circuit to supply above the upper hardcoded
power threshold value
Charging system fault - over
charging Check the vehicle charging
Engine control module failure system performance to ensure
P0571- Brake Switch A Circuit - The engine control module Using the manufacturer
62 Signal compare failure detected failure when approved diagnostic system
comparing two or more input carry out network integrity test
parameters for plausibility Check for related DTCs and refer
The brake pedal switch signal to the relevant DTC index
received over CAN is defective Inspect brake switch connectors
Brake pedal switch detached for signs of water ingress, and
from pedal box whilst pins for damage and/or
electrically connected corrosion
Brake pedal switch adjustment Refer to the electrical circuit
incorrect diagrams and check the brake
Brake pedal switch harness pedal switch circuits for open
failure circuit, short circuit to ground,
Brake pedal switch failure short circuit to power
P0575- Cruise Control Input Circuit The DTC sets if the cancel, set Check speed control buttons are
81 - Invalid serial data minus, set plus, resume, not
received headway increase and headway jammed/contaminated/damaged.
decrease speed control buttons Check speed control module for
have been pressed for longer related DTCs and refer to the
than a calibrated period of time. relevant DTC index
The system then assumes a Check steering wheel clock
stuck/damaged button and will spring and connections to
cancel and/or disable cruise. button pack for damage
The failure will be healed in the Check and install new cruise
next driving cycle if the failure control button pack as required
is removed
P0597- Thermostat Heater Control Inspect connectors for signs of

13 Circuit / Open - Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference O_T_CTH water ingress, and pins for
open damage and/or corrosion
The engine control module has Refer to the electrical circuit
determined an open circuit via diagrams and check coolant
lack of bias voltage, low current thermostat heater circuit for
flow, no change in the state of short circuit to ground, short
an input in response to an circuit to power, open circuit,
output high resistance
connector terminal is backed Check and install new coolant
out, connector terminal thermostat heater as required
corrosion
Coolant thermostat heater
circuit, open circuit, high
resistance
failure

11 Circuit Low - Circuit short NOTE: Circuit reference O_T_CTH water ingress, and pins for
to ground damage and/or corrosion
detected a ground diagrams and check coolant
measurement for a period thermostat heater circuit for
longer than expected or has short circuit to ground
detected a ground Clear the DTC and retest
measurement when another Check and install new coolant
value was expected thermostat heater as required
connector terminal is backed
out, connector terminal
corrosion
failure

12 Circuit High - Circuit short NOTE: Circuit reference O_T_CTH water ingress, and pins for
to battery damage and/or corrosion
detected a vehicle power diagrams and check coolant
measurement for a period thermostat heater circuit for
longer than expected or has short circuit to power
detected a vehicle power Clear the DTC and retest
measurement when another Check and install new coolant
value was expected thermostat heater as required
connector terminal is backed
out, connector terminal
corrosion
circuit, short circuit to power
failure
P0606- Control Module Processor - Engine control module failure Check and install new engine
00 No sub type information control module as required
02 General signal failure control module as required
P0606- Control Module Processor - The engine control module Check and install new engine
17 Circuit voltage above measured a voltage above a control module as required
threshold specified range but not
necessarily a short circuit to
power
Engine control module failure
48 Supervision software control module as required
failure
P0606- Control Module Processor - The engine control module has Check and install new engine
86 Signal invalid determined failures where some control module as required
circuit quantity, reported via
serial data, is not plausible
given the operating conditions
P0606- Control Module Processor - The engine control module has

92 Performance or incorrect detected that the component NOTE: Monitor description. DTC
operation performance is outside its is set if a software reset has occurred
expected range or operating in for an abnormal reason
an incorrect way
Software reset has occurred Check battery is in fully charged
Low battery reset during start and in a serviceable condition
attempt using a battery tester and
battery care manual
module
Clear the DTC and test drive the
vehicle including at least five
ignition cycles. Check for DTCs.
If DTC is not present return to
customer. If DTC repeatedly
returns check and install new
engine control module as
required
P0606- Control Module Processor - Software reset has occurred

94 Unexpected operation NOTE: Monitor description. DTC
is set if a software reset has occurred
for an abnormal reason
Check battery is in fully charged

and in a serviceable condition
using a battery tester and
battery care manual
module
Clear the DTC and test drive the
vehicle including at least five
ignition cycles. Check for DTCs.
If DTC is not present return to
customer. If DTC repeatedly
returns check and install new
engine control module as
required
P060A- Internal Control Module Engine control module failure Check and install new engine
00 Monitoring Processor control module as required
Performance - No sub type
information
P060B- Internal Control Module Engine control module failure Check and install new engine
00 A/D Processing control module as required
Performance - No sub type
information
P060B- Internal Control Module Engine control module failure Check and install new engine
02 A/D Processing control module as required
Performance - General
signal failure
P060C- Internal Control Module Engine speed calculation not Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Main Processor plausible. Engine control diagrams and check the power
Performance - No sub type module software error and ground connections to the
information Engine control module failure module
control module
P060D- Internal Control Module Monitoring level 1 accelerator Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Accelerator Pedal Position pedal diagnostics have not diagrams and check the power
Performance - No sub type captured a synchronisation fault and ground connections to the
information of the accelerator pedal. Engine module
control module software error Using the manufacturer
Engine control module failure approved diagnostic system
control module
P0615- Starter Relay Circuit - Engine control module failure Refer to the electrical circuit
04 System Internal Failures diagrams and check the power
module
control module
P0615- Starter Relay Circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit

13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check starter
O_S_STRTL & O_S_STRTH motor relay control circuit for
open circuit
The engine control module has Check and install new starter
determined an open circuit via motor relay as required
flow, no change in the state of
output
Starter motor relay control
Starter motor relay
disconnected/missing
Starter motor relay failure
P0615- Starter Relay Circuit - Check starter motor fuse

72 Actuator stuck open NOTE: Circuit reference Refer to the electrical circuit
O_S_STRTL & O_S_STRTH diagrams and check starter
motor relay control circuit for
Starter motor fuse has blown open circuit, short circuit to
Starter motor relay is stuck ground, short circuit to power,
open high resistance
Starter motor relay control Check and install new starter
circuit failure motor relay as required
P0615- Starter Relay Circuit - Engine control module failure Check engine control module for
81 Invalid serial data received additional DTCs and refer to
these first
module
control module
P0616- Starter Relay Circuit Low - Refer to the electrical circuit

00 No sub type information NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check starter
O_S_STRTL & O_S_STRTH motor relay circuit for short
Starter motor relay failure power, open circuit, high
Starter motor relay circuit short resistance
circuit to ground, short circuit Check and install new starter
to power, open circuit, high motor relay as required
resistance Clear the DTC and retest
P0616- Starter Relay Circuit Low - Refer to the electrical circuit

11 Circuit short to ground NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check starter
circuit to ground
detected a ground motor relay as required
detected a ground
value was expected
Starter motor relay circuit short
circuit to ground
P0617- Starter Relay Circuit High - Refer to the electrical circuit

00 No sub type information NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check starter
Starter motor relay failure power, open circuit, high
Starter motor relay circuit short resistance
circuit to ground, short circuit Check and install new starter
to power, open circuit, high motor relay as required
resistance Clear the DTC and retest
P0617- Starter Relay Circuit High - Refer to the electrical circuit
12 Circuit short to battery NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check starter
circuit to power
detected a vehicle power motor relay as required
value was expected
Starter motor relay circuit short
circuit to power
P061A- Internal Control Module Delivered torque is calculated Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Torque Performance - No as being above requested diagrams and check the power
sub type information torque within monitoring and ground connections to the
system. Engine control module module
software error Using the manufacturer
Engine control module failure approved diagnostic system
control module
P061B- Internal Control Module The engine control module Check and install new engine
64 Torque Calculation detected plausibility failures control module as required
Performance - Signal Engine control module failure
P061C- Internal Control Module Desired ignition angle not Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Engine RPM Performance - plausible. Engine control diagrams and check the power
No sub type information module software error and ground connections to the
control module
P061D- Internal Control Module Fuel ethanol content correction Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Engine Air Mass factor applied by control system diagrams and check the power
Performance - No sub type is not plausible to monitoring and ground connections to the
information calculation. Engine control module
module software error Using the manufacturer
Oil evaporation content of fuel approved diagnostic system
mass is calculated erroneously check and install latest relevant
low within control system when level of software to the engine
compared to rational check control module
within monitoring system. Check and install new engine
Engine control module software control module as required
error
P061D- Internal Control Module Injector cut off patterns found Refer to the electrical circuit
42 Engine Air Mass not plausible. Engine control diagrams and check the power
Performance - General module software error and ground connections to the
memory failure Engine control module failure module
control module
P061D- Internal Control Module Desired fuelling control limits Refer to the electrical circuit
43 Engine Air Mass implausible. Engine control diagrams and check the power
Performance - Special module software error and ground connections to the
memory failure Engine control module failure module
control module
P061D- Internal Control Module The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit
62 Engine Air Mass detected failure when diagrams and check the power
Performance - Signal comparing two or more input and ground connections to the
compare failure parameters for plausibility module
Predicted air mass was found Using the manufacturer
not plausible. Engine control approved diagnostic system
module software error check and install latest relevant
Engine control module failure level of software to the engine
control module
P061F- Internal Control Module

00 Throttle Actuator Controller NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Monitor description.
Performance - No sub type O_T_TVAPOS Engine control module monitors the
information measured throttle position against the
Other throttle related DTCs requested position and sets the DTC if
Blockages/restriction preventing they deviate excessively
free motion of the throttle blade
Throttle actuator failure Check engine control module for
related DTCs and refer to
these first
Inspect throttle for signs of
blockage or restriction that
prevent free motion of the
throttle blade
P0627- Fuel Pump A Control Connector is disconnected, Inspect connectors for signs of
07 Circuit / Open - Mechanical connector pin is backed out, water ingress, and pins for
Failures connector pin corrosion damage and/or corrosion
Harness failure between fuel Refer to the electrical circuit
pump driver module and low diagrams and check low
pressure fuel pump pressure fuel pump control
Low pressure fuel pump control circuit for short circuit to
circuit short circuit to ground, ground, short circuit to power,
short circuit to power, open open circuit, high resistance
circuit, high resistance Clear the DTC and retest
Low pressure fuel pump failure Check and install new low
P062A- Fuel Pump A Control Inspect connectors for signs of

31 Circuit Range/Performance NOTE: Circuit reference water ingress, and pins for
- No signal O_T_FPMC damage and/or corrosion
Connector is disconnected, diagrams and check fuel pump
connector pin is backed out, driver module signal circuit for
Fuel pump driver module signal circuit to power, open circuit,
short circuit to power, open Clear the DTC and retest
circuit, high resistance Check and install new fuel pump
Fuel pump driver module failure driver module as required
P062F- Internal Control Module Engine control module failure

00 EEPROM Error - No sub NOTE: Monitor description.
type information Engine control module monitors for
hardware error of the EEPROM and sets
the DTC when at least three blocks
cannot be read


43 EEPROM Error - Special NOTE: Monitor description.
memory failure Engine control module monitors for
the DTC when one block can not be
written more than 3 times


96 EEPROM Error - NOTE: Monitor description.
Component internal failure Engine control module monitors for
the DTC if the sector erase cannot be
performed or successfully completed

P0633- Immobilizer Key Not Power is lost from the engine Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Programmed - ECM/PCM - control module or the central diagrams and check the power
No sub type information junction box during the and ground connections to the
immobilizer learn routine engine control module and
central junction box
carry out the immobilisation
procedure
Check for CAN network
interference/engine control
module related errors
control module
P0633- Immobilizer Key Not Security key not programmed Using the manufacturer
42 Programmed - ECM/PCM - Engine control module failure approved diagnostic system,
General memory failure carry out the immobilisation
procedure
module related errors. Re-
configure the engine control
configure the instrument panel
control module using the
manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
control module
P0634- Control Module Internal Engine control module internal

00 Temperature "A" Too High temperature too high NOTE: Monitor description. The
- No sub type information Engine control module cooling internal temperature of the engine
fan failure control module is above the specified
Engine control module failure limit

these first
Check the engine control module
cooling fan is operational
control module cooling fan as
required
P0642- Sensor Reference Voltage Power and ground connections

00 A Circuit Low - No sub to the engine control module, NOTE: Monitor description.
type information open circuit, high resistance Engine control module internal 5 Volt
Connector is disconnected, supply below the minimum hardcoded
connector pin is backed out, threshold value
these first
module
P0643- Sensor Reference Voltage Charging system fault - over

00 A Circuit High - No sub charging NOTE: Monitor description.
type information Engine control module failure Engine control module internal 5 Volt
supply above the upper hardcoded
threshold value

P064A- Fuel Pump Control Module Inspect connectors for signs of

38 - Signal frequency NOTE: Circuit reference water ingress, and pins for
incorrect I_T_FPMD damage and/or corrosion
Connector is disconnected, diagrams and check fuel pump
connector pin is backed out, driver module diagnostic circuit
connector pin corrosion for open circuit, short circuit to
Fuel pump driver module power, short circuit to ground
diagnostic line circuit open Clear the DTC and retest
circuit, short circuit to power, Check and install new fuel pump
short circuit to ground driver module as required
Fuel pump driver module failure
P064D- Internal Control Module O2 Engine control module failure Check and install new engine
08 Sensor Processor control module as required
Performance - Bank 1 -
Bus Signal / Message
Failures
P064D- Internal Control Module O2 The engine control module Check and install new engine
16 Sensor Processor measured a voltage below a control module as required
Performance - Bank 1 - specified range but not
Circuit voltage below necessarily a short circuit to
threshold ground
P064D- Internal Control Module O2 The engine control module Check and install new engine
17 Sensor Processor measured a voltage above a control module as required
Circuit voltage above necessarily a short circuit to
threshold power
P064D- Internal Control Module O2 The engine control module has Check and install new engine
86 Sensor Processor determined failures where some control module as required
Performance - Bank 1 - circuit quantity, reported via
Signal invalid serial data, is not plausible
P064E- Internal Control Module O2 Engine control module failure Check and install new engine
08 Sensor Processor control module as required
Performance - Bank 2 -
Bus Signal / Message
Failures
P064E- Internal Control Module O2 The engine control module Check and install new engine
16 Sensor Processor measured a voltage below a control module as required
Circuit voltage below necessarily a short circuit to
threshold ground
P064E- Internal Control Module O2 The engine control module Check and install new engine
17 Sensor Processor measured a voltage above a control module as required
Circuit voltage above necessarily a short circuit to
threshold power
P064E- Internal Control Module O2 The engine control module has Check and install new engine
86 Sensor Processor determined failures where some control module as required
Performance - Bank 2 - circuit quantity, reported via
Signal invalid serial data, is not plausible
P0652- Sensor Reference Voltage Power and ground connections

00 B Circuit Low - No sub to the engine control module, NOTE: Monitor description.
type information open circuit, high resistance Engine control module internal 5 Volt
Connector is disconnected, supply below the minimum hardcoded
connector pin is backed out, threshold value
these first
module
P0653- Sensor Reference Voltage Charging system fault - over

00 B Circuit High - No sub charging NOTE: Monitor description.
type information Engine control module failure Engine control module internal 5 Volt
supply above the upper hardcoded
threshold value

P0657- Actuator Supply Voltage A The engine control module has Inspect connectors for signs of
13 Circuit Open - Circuit open determined an open circuit via water ingress, and pins for
an input in response to an diagrams and check connections
output are secure and wiring integrity
connector pin is backed out, Check and install new sound
connector pin corrosion symposer as required
integrity
Sound symposer failure
11 Circuit Low - Circuit short detected a ground water ingress, and pins for
to ground measurement for a period damage and/or corrosion
detected a ground diagrams and check connections
measurement when another are secure and wiring integrity
Connector is disconnected, Check and install new sound
connector pin is backed out, symposer as required
integrity
12 Circuit High - Circuit short detected a vehicle power water ingress, and pins for
to battery measurement for a period damage and/or corrosion
detected a vehicle power diagrams and check connections
measurement when another are secure and wiring integrity
Connector is disconnected, Check and install new sound
connector pin is backed out, symposer as required
integrity
P0666- Control Module Internal Engine control module internal Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Temperature Sensor "A" communication error diagrams and check the power
Circuit - No sub type Engine control module failure and ground connections to the
information module
P0667- Control Module Internal The engine control module has Refer to the electrical circuit
85 Temperature Sensor "A" determined failures where some diagrams and check the power
Range/Performance - circuit quantity, reported via and ground connections to the
Signal above allowable serial data, is above a specified module
range range Clear the DTC and retest
Engine control module internal Check and install new engine
temperature sensor greater control module as required
than specified limit
P0686- ECM/PCM Power Relay Refer to the electrical circuit

11 Control Circuit Low - NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check engine
Circuit short to ground O_S_MRLY control module power relay
The engine control module has Clear the DTC and retest
detected a ground
measurement for a period
detected a ground
value was expected
Engine control module power
relay circuit short circuit to
ground
P0687- ECM/PCM Power Relay Check engine control module for

24 Control Circuit High - NOTE: Circuit reference additional DTCs and refer to
Signal stuck high G_G_BAT1 / G_G_BAT2 / G_G_BAT3 relevant DTC index. Rectify
these first
The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit
measures a signal that remains diagrams and check engine
high when transitions are control module power relay
expected circuit for short circuit to power,
Engine control module power short circuit to another circuit
relay circuit short circuit to
power, short circuit to another
circuit
P0688- ECM/PCM Power Relay Engine control module supply Check the vehicle charging
00 Sense Circuit - No sub voltage greater than 16 volts system performance to ensure
type information Charging system fault - over the voltage regulation is correct
charging Check battery is in fully charged
Use of battery charger with and in a serviceable condition
boost setting producing greater using a battery tester and
than 16 volts battery care manual
Use of 24 volt charging or jump
starting system
P068A- ECM/PCM Power Relay De- This DTC is set when the engine
00 Energized - Too Early - No NOTE: Circuit reference management system high
sub type information V_V_BAT_1R & V_V_BAT_2R & current relay contacts open
V_V_BAT_3R early - Indicating a power hold
failure. Check the vehicle battery
Engine control module main has not been disconnected
power relay de-energised before the engine management
before normal shutdown system relay has powered down.
processes Check the operation of the
Power and ground connections engine management system high
to the engine control module, current relay. Refer to the
open circuit, high resistance electrical circuit diagrams and
Battery disconnection or relay check the engine management
control circuit intermittent system high current relay supply
harness failure and control circuits for open
Engine control module power circuits, high resistance, short
relay failure circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, short circuit to other
circuits. Repair harness as
required
Check and install new relay as
required
P0691- Fan 1 Control Circuit Low - The engine control module has Refer to the electrical circuit
11 Circuit short to ground detected a ground diagrams and check engine
measurement for a period cooling fan circuit for short
longer than expected or has circuit to ground
detected a ground Inspect connectors for signs of
Engine cooling fan circuit short Check and install new engine
circuit to ground cooling fan as required
P0692- Fan 1 Control Circuit High The engine control module has Refer to the electrical circuit
12 - Circuit short to battery detected a vehicle power diagrams and check engine
measurement for a period cooling fan circuit for short
longer than expected or has circuit to power
Engine cooling fan circuit short Check and install new engine
circuit to power cooling fan as required
P06A6- Sensor Reference Voltage Engine control module sensor 5 Refer to electrical circuit
00 A Circuit volt supply circuit short circuit diagrams and check the engine
Range/Performance - No to ground, short circuit to control module sensor 5 volt
sub type information power, open circuit supply circuit for short circuit to
Connector is disconnected, ground, short circuit to power,
connector pin is backed out, open circuit
00 B Circuit volt supply circuit short circuit diagrams and check the engine
00 C Circuit volt supply circuit short circuit diagrams and check the engine
P0700- Transmission Control MIL request by automatic Check transmission control

00 System (MIL Request) - No gearbox module for DTCs and refer to
sub type information HS CAN network, short circuit the relevant DTC index
to power, short circuit to Clear the DTC and retest
ground, open circuit If this DTC is logged with other
HS CAN related DTCs refer to
the electrical circuit diagrams
and check HS CAN network for
circuit to ground, open circuit
P0703- Brake Switch B Circuit - The engine control module Using the manufacturer
62 Signal compare failure detected failure when approved diagnostic system
comparing two or more input carry out network integrity test
parameters for plausibility Check for related DTCs and refer
The brake pedal switch signal to the relevant DTC index
received over CAN is defective Inspect brake switch connectors
Brake pedal switch detached for signs of water ingress, and
from pedal box whilst pins for damage and/or
electrically connected corrosion
Brake pedal switch adjustment Refer to the electrical circuit
incorrect diagrams and check the brake
Brake pedal switch harness pedal switch circuits for open
failure circuit, short circuit to ground,
Brake pedal switch failure short circuit to power
P0817- Starter Disable Circuit / Refer to the electrical circuit

13 Open - Circuit open NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check starter
O_S_STRPL & O_S_STRPH motor pinion relay circuit for
determined an open circuit via motor pinion relay as required
flow, no change in the state of
output
Starter motor pinion relay
failure
circuit short circuit open circuit,
high resistance
P081A- Starter Disable Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit

11 - Circuit short to ground NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check starter
detected a ground motor pinion relay as required
detected a ground
value was expected
failure
P081A- Starter Disable Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit

12 - Circuit short to battery NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check starter
detected a vehicle power motor pinion relay as required
value was expected
failure
P081A- Starter Disable Circuit Low The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit
4B - Over temperature detected an internal diagrams and check starter
temperature above the motor pinion relay circuit for
expected range short circuit to ground, short
Starter motor pinion relay circuit to power, open circuit,
Starter motor pinion relay Check and install new starter
circuit short circuit to ground, motor pinion relay as required
short circuit to power, open Using the manufacturer
circuit, high resistance approved diagnostic system
Engine control module failure check and install latest relevant
control module
P081B- Starter Disable Circuit High Refer to the electrical circuit

11 - Circuit short to ground NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check starter
detected a ground motor pinion relay as required
detected a ground
value was expected
failure
P081B- Starter Disable Circuit High Refer to the electrical circuit

12 - Circuit short to battery NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check starter
detected a vehicle power motor pinion relay as required
value was expected
failure
P081B- Starter Disable Circuit High The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit
4B - Over temperature detected an internal diagrams and check starter
temperature above the motor pinion relay circuit for
expected range short circuit to ground, short
Starter motor pinion relay circuit to power, open circuit,
Starter motor pinion relay Check and install new starter
circuit short circuit to ground, motor pinion relay as required
short circuit to power, open Using the manufacturer
circuit, high resistance approved diagnostic system
Engine control module failure check and install latest relevant
control module
P0850- Park / Neutral Switch Input Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Circuit - No sub type NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check the
information I_S_TNSW park/neutral switch circuit, for
Hardwired park/neutral switch circuit to ground, open circuit
does not match the information If this DTC is logged with other
within the CAN signal HS CAN related DTCs refer to
Park/neutral switch circuit, the electrical circuit diagrams
short circuit to power, short and check HS CAN network for
circuit to ground, open circuit short circuit to power, short
HS CAN network failure circuit to ground, open circuit
P0A0F- Engine Failed to Start - Using the manufacturer

07 Mechanical failures NOTE: Circuit reference approved diagnostic system
O_S_STRPH check and up-date the car
configuration file as required
Car configuration file incorrect Inspect connectors for signs of
for stop/start system water ingress, and pins for
Harness failure - Wiring damage and/or corrosion
integrity starter motor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
Tandem solenoid starter motor diagrams and check connections
failure are secure and wiring integrity
Tandem solenoid starter motor Clear the DTC and retest
pinion not operating
integrity camshaft sensor circuit
integrity crankshaft sensor
circuit
P0A1A- Generator Control Module - Generator to engine control Check for good/clean contact at
00 No sub type information module LIN circuit, open circuit generator and engine control
Generator/engine control module LIN circuit
module failure connectors/pins. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and
check generator to engine
control module LIN circuit for
open circuit. Check for engine
control module hardware DTCs
and refer to relevant DTC index.
Clear DTCs and repeat
automated diagnostic procedure
using the manufacturer
Check and install new generator
/ engine control module as
required
P115D- Mass Air Flow Circuit Blocked air filter

00 Offset - No sub type Other related DTCs NOTE: Monitor description.
information Air induction system, incorrectly Mass air flow sensor signal failure
installed components, loose
hose clips or air leakage Check air filter is serviceable
Mass air flow sensor Using the manufacturer
contamination by oil or debris approved diagnostic system
Electric throttle blade check the engine control module
contamination by oil or debris for related DTCs and refer to the
Mass air flow sensor circuit, relevant DTC index
short circuit to ground, short Refer to the relevant sections of
circuit to power, open circuit, the workshop manual and check
high resistance the induction system for
Throttle adaption failure correctly installed components,
clean as required
clean as required
resistance
routine
P115D- Mass Air Flow Circuit The engine control module

21 Offset - Signal amplitude < measured a signal voltage NOTE: Monitor description.
minimum below a specified range but not Mass air flow sensors left/right flow to
necessarily a short circuit to low
ground, gain low
Blocked air filter Check air filter is serviceable
Other related DTCs Using the manufacturer
Air induction system, incorrectly approved diagnostic system
installed components, loose check the engine control module
hose clips or air leakage for related DTCs and refer to the
Mass air flow sensor relevant DTC index
contamination by oil or debris Refer to the relevant sections of
Electric throttle blade the workshop manual and check
contamination by oil or debris the induction system for
Mass air flow sensor circuit, correctly installed components,
short circuit to ground, short loose hose clips or air leakage
circuit to power, open circuit, Check mass air flow sensor for
high resistance contamination by oil or debris
Throttle adaption failure clean as required
clean as required
resistance
routine

22 Offset - Signal amplitude > measured a signal voltage NOTE: Monitor description.
maximum above a specified range but not Mass air flow sensors left/right flow to
necessarily a short circuit to high
power, gain too high
Blocked air filter Check air filter is serviceable
Other related DTCs Using the manufacturer
Air induction system, incorrectly approved diagnostic system
installed components, loose check the engine control module
hose clips or air leakage for related DTCs and refer to the
Mass air flow sensor relevant DTC index
Electric throttle blade the workshop manual and check
contamination by oil or debris the induction system for
Mass air flow sensor circuit, correctly installed components,
short circuit to ground, short loose hose clips or air leakage
circuit to power, open circuit, Check mass air flow sensor for
high resistance contamination by oil or debris
Throttle adaption failure clean as required
clean as required
resistance
routine

64 Offset - Signal plausibility detected plausibility failures NOTE: Monitor description.
failure Blocked air filter Mass air flow sensor plausibility failure
Other related DTCs
Air induction system, incorrectly Check air filter is serviceable
installed components, loose Using the manufacturer
hose clips or air leakage approved diagnostic system
Mass air flow sensor check the engine control module
contamination by oil or debris for related DTCs and refer to the
Electric throttle blade relevant DTC index
Mass air flow sensor circuit, the workshop manual and check
short circuit to ground, short the induction system for
circuit to power, open circuit, correctly installed components,
high resistance loose hose clips or air leakage
Throttle adaption failure Check mass air flow sensor for
clean as required
clean as required
resistance
routine
P1315- Persistent Misfire - No sub Other related DTCs Using the manufacturer
00 type information Fuel level, poor fuel approved diagnostic system
quality/incorrect grade, fuel check the engine control module
contaminated for related DTCs and refer to the
Spark plugs damaged/worn relevant DTC index. Rectify
Incorrect position or damaged these first
crank shaft position sensor. Check the fuel level, add fuel if
Reluctor ring/toothed wheel required
damaged Check for poor quality or
Excessive engine wear contaminated fuel
Catalyst blocked/restriction in Check spark plugs for poor
exhaust system condition and replace as
Driveline imbalance necessary
Check for damaged or
incorrectly positioned crank shaft
position sensor, reluctor
ring/toothed wheel
Check for poor cylinder
compression, incorrect valve
clearance and excessive engine
wear
Check for driveline imbalances,
front end ancillary drives and
transmission mounts
P131A- Low Fuel Level Detection - Other fuel related DTCs are set
00 No sub type information Low level fuel condition NOTE: Monitor description. The
engine control module sets the DTC
when other DTCs are set and when the
fuel level is low

check for related DTCs and refer
Check the fuel level, add fuel if
required
P132B- Turbocharger/Supercharger Using the manufacturer

36 Boost Control A NOTE: Circuit reference approved diagnostic system
Performance - Signal O_T_CBPPOS check for related DTCs and refer
frequency too low to the relevant DTC index
Restriction of bypass blade due Check for unrestricted
to debris, fouling or incorrect movement of the bypass blade
assembly Check for correct assembly of
Bypass blade actuator failure bypass blade and end stop
Bypass blade failure mechanism
Check and install new bypass
blade actuator as required
blade as required
P132B- Turbocharger/Supercharger Restriction of bypass blade due Using the manufacturer

77 Boost Control A to debris, fouling or incorrect approved diagnostic system
Performance - Commanded assembly check for related DTCs and refer
position not reachable Bypass blade actuator failure to the relevant DTC index
Bypass blade failure Check for unrestricted
movement of the bypass blade
Check for correct assembly of
bypass blade and end stop
mechanism
blade actuator as required
blade as required
P1500- Vehicle Speed Sensor -No Signal error for vehicle speed Using the manufacturer
31 signal over CAN approved diagnostic system,
check anti-lock brake system
control module for DTCs and
P1592- Vehicle Data Recorder Battery disconnected during

42 Data Available - General flight recorder data write NOTE: Monitor description.
memory failure sequence Engine control module fails to write
Power and ground connections flight recorder data to internal memory
to the engine control module,
module
P1592- Vehicle Data Recorder Battery disconnected during

81 Data Available - Invalid flight recorder data write NOTE: Monitor description.
serial data received sequence Engine control module fails to write
Power and ground connections flight recorder data to internal memory
to the engine control module,
module
P162F- Starter Motor Disabled - Vehicle battery failure Refer to the workshop manual
00 Engine Crank Time Too Other starting related failures and the battery care manual,
Long - No sub type inspect the vehicle battery and
information ensure it is fully charged and
serviceable before performing
further tests
check the engine control
module, for related DTCs and
P1655- Starter Disable Circuit - Engine control module failure Check engine control module for
04 System Internal Failures additional DTCs and refer to
these first
control module
P1655- Starter Disable Circuit - Engine control module failure Check engine control module for
49 Internal electronic failure additional DTCs and refer to
these first
control module
P167F- Non-OEM Calibration Non-OEM calibration has been No dealer action required - DTC
00 Detected - No sub type flashed into the engine control sets when an unauthorised
information module calibration has been flashed into
the engine control module
P168F- Cold Start Injection Other related DTCs NOTES:

00 System Performance - No Fuel injector failure
sub type information Engine control module failure
Monitor description. Split
injection during cold start emissions
reduction not achieved
Operational requirements needed

to allow the monitor to be fully tested.
Allow an overnight soak and carry out a
cold start, let vehicle idle until catalyst
heating has finished (idle speed drops
to below 1000rpm)

these first
connections are secure and
wiring integrity
Allow an overnight soak and
carry out a cold start. Check
engine control module for this
DTC
control module as required if the
DTC has reset post the cold start
P2065- Fuel Level Sensor B Circuit The value of the signal

29 - Signal invalid measured by the engine control NOTE: Monitor description.
module is not plausible given Open circuit detected by the instrument
the operating conditions cluster of the passive fuel level sensor.
Connector is disconnected, The instrument cluster will transmit the
connector pin is backed out, failure over CAN to the engine control
connector pin corrosion module. The engine control module sets
Fuel level sensor circuit, short the DTC
circuit to ground, short circuit
to power, open circuit, high Check connector is not
resistance disconnected, connector pin is
Fuel level sensor failure not backed out
diagrams and check fuel level
Check and install new fuel level
sensor as required
P2088- A Camshaft Position Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Actuator Control Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check variable
Low Bank 1 - No sub type O_T_CASICA camshaft timing solenoid circuit
information for short circuit to ground
solenoid circuit short circuit to Check and install new variable
ground camshaft timing solenoid as
solenoid failure

High Bank 1 - No sub type O_T_CASICA camshaft timing solenoid circuit
information for short circuit to power
power camshaft timing solenoid as
solenoid failure
P2090- B Camshaft Position Refer to the electrical circuit

Low Bank 1 - No sub type O_T_CASECA camshaft timing solenoid circuit
solenoid failure

High Bank 1 - Signal above O_T_CASECA camshaft timing solenoid circuit
allowable range for short circuit to power
determined failures where some Check and install new variable
circuit quantity, reported via camshaft timing solenoid as
serial data, is above a specified required
range
Variable camshaft timing
power
solenoid failure

Low Bank 2 - No sub type O_T_CASICB camshaft timing solenoid circuit
solenoid failure

High Bank 2 - No sub type O_T_CASICB camshaft timing solenoid circuit
information for short circuit to power
power camshaft timing solenoid as
solenoid failure

Low Bank 2 - No sub type O_T_CASECB camshaft timing solenoid circuit
solenoid failure

High Bank 2 - Signal above O_T_CASECB camshaft timing solenoid circuit
allowable range for short circuit to power
determined failures where some Check and install new variable
circuit quantity, reported via camshaft timing solenoid as
serial data, is above a specified required
range
power
solenoid failure
P2100- Throttle Actuator A Control Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Motor Circuit /Open - No NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check electric
sub type information O_T_TVAPOS & O_T_TVANEG throttle actuator power and
ground circuits for open circuit
Electric throttle actuator control Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit open circuit diagrams and check for open
Electric throttle actuator failure circuit across electric throttle
power and ground connections
with harness disconnected
throttle actuator as required
P2101- Throttle Actuator A Control Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Motor Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check electric
Range/Performance - No O_T_TVAPOS & O_T_TVANEG throttle actuator power and
sub type information ground circuits for short circuit
Electric throttle actuator control to each other
power and ground circuits short Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to each another diagrams and check for short
Electric throttle actuator failure circuit across electric throttle
P2103- Throttle Actuator A Control The engine control module has Refer to the electrical circuit
85 Motor Circuit High - Signal determined failures where some diagrams and check electric
above allowable range circuit quantity, reported via throttle actuator circuits for
serial data, is above a specified short circuit to power, short
range circuit to ground
Electric throttle control circuits Refer to the electrical circuit
short circuit to power, short diagrams and check electric
circuit to ground throttle actuator power and
Electric throttle actuator control ground circuits for short circuit
power and ground circuits short to each other
circuit to each another Refer to the electrical circuit
Electric throttle actuator failure diagrams and check for short
circuit across electric throttle
P2108- Throttle Actuator, A, Electric throttle control circuits Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Control Module short circuit to power, short diagrams and check electric
Performance - No sub type circuit to ground throttle actuator circuits for
information Electric throttle actuator control short circuit to power, short
power and ground circuits short circuit to ground
circuit to each another Refer to the electrical circuit
Electric throttle actuator failure diagrams and check electric
throttle actuator power and
ground circuits for short circuit
to each other
diagrams and check for short
P2111- Throttle Actuator "A" Electric throttle blocked or Check electric throttle for
00 Control System - Stuck restricted blockages or obstruction that
Open - No sub type Electric throttle control circuits prevent correct movement
information short circuit to power, short Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to ground diagrams and check electric
Electric throttle actuator control throttle actuator circuits for
power and ground circuits short short circuit to power, short
circuit to each another circuit to ground
Electric throttle actuator failure Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check electric
throttle actuator power and
ground circuits for short circuit
to each other
P2112- Throttle Actuator "A" The engine control module has Check electric throttle for
85 Control System - Stuck determined failures where some blockages or obstruction that
Closed - Signal above circuit quantity, reported via prevent correct movement
allowable range serial data, is above a specified Refer to the electrical circuit
range diagrams and check electric
Electric throttle blocked or throttle actuator circuits for
restricted short circuit to power, short
Electric throttle control circuits circuit to ground
short circuit to power, short Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to ground diagrams and check electric
Electric throttle actuator control throttle actuator power and
power and ground circuits short ground circuits for short circuit
circuit to each another to each other
Electric throttle actuator failure Refer to the electrical circuit
P2119- Throttle Actuator "A" Other related DTCs Check engine control module for
00 Control Throttle Body Electric throttle return spring additional DTCs and refer to
Range/Performance - No failure relevant DTC index. Rectify
sub type information Electric throttle blocked or these first
restricted Check electric throttle return
Electric throttle actuator failure spring for correct operation
Check electric throttle for
blockages or obstruction that
prevent correct movement
P2119- Throttle Actuator "A" The engine control module has Check engine control module for
92 Control Throttle Body detected that the component additional DTCs and refer to
Range/Performance - performance is outside its relevant DTC index. Rectify
Performance or incorrect expected range or operating in these first
operation an incorrect way Check electric throttle for
Other related DTCs blockages or obstruction that
Electric throttle blocked or prevent correct movement
restricted Clear the DTC and retest
Electric throttle actuator failure Check and install new electric
P2119- Throttle Actuator "A" Other related DTCs Check engine control module for
97 Control Throttle Body Electric throttle blocked or additional DTCs and refer to
Range/Performance - restricted relevant DTC index. Rectify
Component or system Electric throttle actuator failure these first
operation obstructed or Check electric throttle for
blocked blockages or obstruction that
prevent correct movement
P2122- Throttle/Pedal Position This DTC is set when the engine

00 Sensor/Switch D Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_APP1 control module detects the pedal
Low - No sub type demand 1 signal range is low.
information Harness failure - Accelerator Refer to the electrical circuit
pedal position sensor circuit diagrams and check the
Accelerator pedal position reference voltage and ground
sensor failure connections to the accelerator
pedal position sensor. Check
signal circuits for high
resistance, open circuit, short
ground. Repair harness as
required. Clear the DTC and
retest
accelerator pedal position sensor
as required

00 Sensor/Switch D Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_APP1 control module detects the pedal
High - No sub type demand 1 signal range is high.
retest
as required

00 Sensor/Switch E Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_APP2 control module detects the pedal
Low - No sub type demand 2 signal range is low.
resistance, open circuits, short
retest
as required

00 Sensor/Switch E Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_APP2 control module detects the pedal
High - No sub type demand 2 signal range is high.
resistance, open circuits, short
retest
as required
P2135- Throttle/Pedal Position Check engine control module for

00 Sensor/Switch A / B NOTE: Circuit reference additional DTCs and refer to
Voltage Correlation - No O_V_5VTVA relevant DTC index. Rectify
sub type information these first
Harness failure - Electric Check and install new electric
throttle position sensor circuit throttle as required
failure

00 Sensor/Switch D / E NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_APP2 control module detects an
Voltage Correlation - No & I_A_APP1 excessive difference between the
sub type information pedal demand signal 1 and
Harness failure - Accelerator signal 2. Refer to the electrical
pedal position sensor circuit circuit diagrams and check the
pedal position sensors. Check
retest
as required
P2146- Fuel Injector Group A Engine control module failure

04 Supply Voltage Circuit / NOTE: Monitor description. To
Open - System Internal diagnose an internal serial peripheral
Failures interface communication failure
between the main central processing
unit and the injector control module

these first
P2146- Fuel Injector Group A The engine control module has Check engine control module for
13 Supply Voltage Circuit determined an open circuit via additional DTCs and refer to
Open - Circuit open lack of bias voltage, low current relevant DTC index. Rectify
flow, no change in the state of these first
an input in response to an Inspect connectors for signs of
output water ingress, and pins for
connector terminal is backed Refer to the electrical circuit
out, connector terminal diagrams and check the power
corrosion and ground connections to the
Power and ground connections module
to the engine control module Clear the DTC and retest
open circuit Check and install new engine
Engine control module failure control module as required
P2147- Fuel Injector Group A Engine control module failure

04 Supply Voltage Circuit Low NOTE: Monitor description. To
- System Internal Failures diagnose an internal serial peripheral
interface communication failure

these first
P2149- Fuel Injector Group B Engine control module failure


these first
P2149- Fuel Injector Group B The engine control module has Check engine control module for
P2150- Fuel Injector Group B Engine control module failure

04 Supply Voltage Circuit Low NOTE: Monitor description. To
- System Internal Failures diagnose an internal serial peripheral
interface communication failure

these first
P2152- Fuel Injector Group C Engine control module failure


these first
P2152- Fuel Injector Group C The engine control module has Check engine control module for
P2155- Fuel Injector Group D Engine control module failure


these first
P2155- Fuel Injector Group D The engine control module has Check engine control module for
P2169- Exhaust Pressure The engine control module has Refer to the electrical circuit
13 Regulator Vent Solenoid determined an open circuit via diagrams and check active
Control Circuit / Open - lack of bias voltage, low current exhaust solenoid valve circuit for
Circuit open flow, no change in the state of open circuit
an input in response to an Check and install new active
output exhaust solenoid as required
Active exhaust solenoid valve
Active exhaust solenoid failure
11 Regulator Vent Solenoid detected a ground diagrams and check active
Control Circuit Low - measurement for a period exhaust solenoid valve circuit for
Circuit short to ground longer than expected or has short circuit to ground
detected a ground Check and install new active
measurement when another exhaust solenoid as required
value was expected
P2170- Exhaust Pressure The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit
4B Regulator Vent Solenoid detected an internal diagrams and check active
Control Circuit Low - Over temperature above the exhaust solenoid valve circuit for
temperature expected range open circuit
Active exhaust solenoid valve Check and install new active
circuit short circuit to power, exhaust solenoid as required
12 Regulator Vent Solenoid detected a vehicle power diagrams and check active
Control Circuit high - measurement for a period exhaust solenoid valve circuit for
Circuit short to battery longer than expected or has short circuit to power
detected a vehicle power Check and install new active
measurement when another exhaust solenoid as required
value was expected
P2176- Throttle Actuator "A" Electric throttle actuator Allow engine control module to
00 Control System - Idle adaption routine not completed power down. Turn on ignition
Position Not Learned - No Replacement throttle fitted but and wait for 60 seconds. Start
sub type information adaption routine not completed engine, this will allow new
throttle adaption data to be
stored
P2176- Throttle Actuator "A" Voltage too low to perform Check battery is in fully charged
51 Control System - Idle electric throttle actuator and in a serviceable condition
Position Not Learned - Not adaption routine using a battery tester and
programmed Electric throttle actuator battery care manual
adaption routine not completed Allow engine control module to
power down. Turn on ignition
and wait for 60 seconds. Start
engine, this will allow new
stored
P2176- Throttle Actuator "A" Electric throttle actuator Check engine control module for
52 Control System - Idle adaption routine entry additional DTCs and refer to
Position Not Learned - Not conditions are not met relevant DTC index. Rectify
activated Electric throttle actuator these first
adaption routine not completed Check battery is in fully charged
Replacement throttle fitted but and in a serviceable condition
adaption routine not completed using a battery tester and
battery care manual
Allow engine control module to
stored
P2176- Throttle Actuator "A" Electric throttle actuator Check engine control module for
54 Control System - Idle adaption routine entry additional DTCs and refer to
Position Not Learned - conditions are not met relevant DTC index. Rectify
Missing calibration Electric throttle actuator these first
adaption routine not completed Check battery is in fully charged
Replacement throttle fitted but and in a serviceable condition
adaption routine not completed using a battery tester and
Electric throttle actuator failure battery care manual
Allow engine control module to
stored
P2177- System Too Lean Off Idle - Air intake system leakage
00 Bank 1 - No sub type Mass air flow sensor NOTE: Operational requirements
information contamination needed to allow the monitor to be fully
Exhaust system leakage tested. Fully warmed-up engine, drive
Incorrect fuel pressure off-idle for a minimum of 10 minutes
with several periods of steady operation
for more than 20 seconds (no gear
shifts, steady accelerator position)
Check for air intake system

leakage
Check for mass air flow sensor
contamination
Check for exhaust system
leakage
fuel pressure is to specification
P2178- System Too Rich Off Idle - Blocked air filter
00 Bank 1 - No sub type Air intake system restriction NOTE: Operational requirements
information Mass air flow sensor needed to allow the monitor to be fully
contamination tested. Fully warmed-up engine, drive
Exhaust system restriction off-idle for a minimum of 10 minutes
Incorrect fuel pressure with several periods of steady operation
Check for blocked air filter

restriction
contamination
restriction
P2179- System Too Lean Off Idle - Air intake system leakage
00 Bank 2 - No sub type Mass air flow sensor NOTE: Operational requirements
information contamination needed to allow the monitor to be fully
Exhaust system leakage tested. Fully warmed-up engine, drive
Incorrect fuel pressure off-idle for a minimum of 10 minutes
with several periods of steady operation

leakage
contamination
leakage
P2180- System Too Rich Off Idle - Blocked air filter

00 Bank 2 - No sub type Air intake system restriction NOTE: Operational requirements
information Mass air flow sensor needed to allow the monitor to be fully
contamination tested. Fully warmed-up engine, drive
Exhaust system restriction off-idle for a minimum of 10 minutes
Incorrect fuel pressure with several periods of steady operation
Check for blocked air filter

restriction
contamination
restriction
P2183- Engine Coolant Blockage in coolant system

00 Temperature Sensor 2 Insufficient mixture of NOTE: Monitor description.
Circuit Range/Performance antifreeze creating possibility of Engine coolant sensor 2 long term
- No sub type information icing in coolant system average stuck. No movement in sensor
Connector is disconnected, value during drive cycle
connector pin corrosion Check coolant system for
Engine coolant temperature blockages or restrictions that
sensor circuit short circuit to prevent coolant flow
power, short circuit to ground, Check for the correct level of
open circuit, high resistance antifreeze within the coolant
Engine coolant temperature Inspect connectors for signs of
diagrams and check engine
coolant temperature sensor for
circuit to ground, open circuit,
high resistance
required
P2183- Engine Coolant The engine control module Check coolant system for
21 Temperature Sensor 2 measured a signal voltage blockages or restrictions that
Circuit Range/Performance below a specified range but not prevent coolant flow
- Signal amplitude < necessarily a short circuit to Check for the correct level of
minimum ground, gain low antifreeze within the coolant
Blockage in coolant system Inspect connectors for signs of
Insufficient mixture of water ingress, and pins for
antifreeze creating possibility of damage and/or corrosion
icing in coolant system Refer to the electrical circuit
connector pin is backed out, coolant temperature sensor for
connector pin corrosion short circuit to power, short
Engine coolant temperature circuit to ground, open circuit,
sensor circuit short circuit to high resistance
power, short circuit to ground, Check and install new engine
sensor failure
P2183- Engine Coolant The engine control module Check coolant system for
22 Temperature Sensor 2 measured a signal voltage blockages or restrictions that
Circuit Range/Performance above a specified range but not prevent coolant flow
- Signal amplitude > necessarily a short circuit to Check for the correct level of
maximum power, gain too high antifreeze within the coolant
Blockage in coolant system Inspect connectors for signs of
Insufficient mixture of water ingress, and pins for
antifreeze creating possibility of damage and/or corrosion
icing in coolant system Refer to the electrical circuit
connector pin is backed out, coolant temperature sensor for
connector pin corrosion short circuit to power, short
Engine coolant temperature circuit to ground, open circuit,
sensor circuit short circuit to high resistance
power, short circuit to ground, Check and install new engine
sensor failure

Circuit Low - No sub type connector pin corrosion damage and/or corrosion
information Engine coolant temperature Refer to the electrical circuit
ground, open circuit coolant temperature sensor for
Engine coolant temperature short circuit to ground, open
sensor failure circuit
required

Circuit High - No sub type connector pin corrosion damage and/or corrosion
information Engine coolant temperature Refer to the electrical circuit
power, open circuit coolant temperature sensor for
Engine coolant temperature short circuit to power, open
sensor failure circuit
required
P2187- System Too Lean at Idle - Air intake system leakage Check for air intake system
00 Bank 1 - No sub type Pipe detached/union leakage leakage
information between intake manifold and Check intake manifold to
cylinder head cylinder head union for air leaks
Fuel pressure too low or pipe disconnected
Mass air flow sensor Refer to the relevant section of
contaminated the workshop manual and check
Exhaust system leakage fuel pressure is to specification
contamination
leakage
Check all heated oxygen sensors
are installed correctly
P2188- System Too Rich at Idle - Air filter blocked Check air filter is not blocked
00 Bank 1 - No sub type Air intake system restriction Check the intake air system is
information Fuel pressure too high free from restrictions
Exhaust system blocked fuel pressure is to specification
contamination
blockage
P2189- System Too Lean at Idle - Air intake system leakage Check for air intake system
00 Bank 2 - No sub type Pipe detached/union leakage leakage
information between intake manifold and Check intake manifold to
cylinder head cylinder head union for air leaks
Fuel pressure too low or pipe disconnected
Exhaust system leakage fuel pressure is to specification
contamination
leakage
Check all heated oxygen sensors
are installed correctly
P2190- System Too Rich at Idle - Air filter blocked Check air filter is not blocked
00 Bank 2 - No sub type Air intake system restriction Check the intake air system is
information Fuel pressure too high free from restrictions
Exhaust system blocked fuel pressure is to specification
contamination
blockage
P2195- O2 Sensor Signal Exhaust system leakage NOTES:

00 Biased/Stuck Lean - Bank Post catalyst heated oxygen
1, Sensor 1 - No sub type sensor incorrectly installed
information Pre catalyst heated oxygen Monitor description. Detects
ground, short circuit to power, offset is too large for fuel mixture
open circuit, high resistance control to be maintained
Pre catalyst heated oxygen Drive vehicle under steady state
sensor contamination or failure conditions for up to 20 minutes
leakage. Rectify as required
installed
high resistance
as required
as required
P2196- O2 Sensor Signal Exhaust system leakage NOTES:

00 Biased/Stuck Rich - Bank Post catalyst heated oxygen
1, Sensor 1 - No sub type sensor incorrectly installed
information Pre catalyst heated oxygen Monitor description. Detects
ground, short circuit to power, offset is too small for fuel mixture
open circuit, high resistance control to be maintained
Pre catalyst heated oxygen Drive vehicle under steady state
sensor contamination or failure conditions for up to 20 minutes
leakage. Rectify as required
installed
high resistance
as required
as required
P2197- O2 Sensor Signal Exhaust system leak

00 Biased/Stuck Lean - Bank Post catalyst oxygen sensor NOTE: Monitor description.
2, Sensor 1 - No sub type incorrectly installed or harness Detects when secondary fuelling
information failure adaptation offset is too large for fuel
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor mixture control to be maintained
incorrectly installed or harness
failure Check the exhaust system for
Post catalyst oxygen sensor leaks. Repair as necessary
damaged or contaminated Check pre and post catalyst
internally oxygen sensors for damaged
Post catalyst oxygen sensor and correct installation
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor diagrams and check post
failure catalyst oxygen sensor circuits
for open circuit short circuit to
power, short circuit to ground,
high resistance
oxygen sensor circuits for open
circuit short circuit to power,
short circuit to ground, high
resistance
catalyst oxygen sensor as
required
required
P2198- O2 Sensor Signal Exhaust system leak
00 Biased/Stuck Rich - Bank Post catalyst oxygen sensor NOTE: Monitor description.
2, Sensor 1 - No sub type incorrectly installed or harness Detects when secondary fuelling
information failure adaptation offset is too small for fuel
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor mixture control to be maintained
incorrectly installed or harness
failure Check the exhaust system for
Post catalyst oxygen sensor leaks. Repair as necessary
damaged or contaminated Check pre and post catalyst
internally oxygen sensors for damaged
Post catalyst oxygen sensor and correct installation
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor diagrams and check post
failure catalyst oxygen sensor circuits
for open circuit short circuit to
power, short circuit to ground,
high resistance
oxygen sensor circuits for open
circuit short circuit to power,
short circuit to ground, high
resistance
required
required
P219A- Bank 1 Air-Fuel Ratio The engine control module has NOTES:
84 Imbalance - Signal below determined failures where some
allowable range circuit quantity, reported via
serial data, is below a specified Monitor description. Inferred
range mixture strength (lambda) below
Intake air system blockage, threshold, (richer mixture). Monitors
restricting air from entering cylinder specific fuelling errors which
cylinders may not be detected by the overall fuel
Specified cylinder, localised system monitor
damage/restriction of fuel rail
Specified cylinder, localised
blockage/restriction within Operational requirements needed
exhaust manifold to allow the monitor to be fully tested.
Fuel injector failure Engine coolant temperature greater
Damage/friction in valve train than 50°C, drive vehicle at steady load
components in 6th gear to achieve an engine speed
Camshaft profile switching of 1200-2400rpm, maintain these
system failure conditions for 10 minutes (highway
cruise)

check engine control module for
related misfire DTCs and refer to
this DTC index. Rectify these
first
Check condition of airpath from
throttle to cylinder. Check for
intake air system blockage,
restricting air from entering
cylinders
Check for damage/restriction of
fuel rail
Check for blockage/restriction
within exhaust manifold
related camshaft profile
switching system DTCs and refer
to this DTC index
P219A- Bank 1 Air-Fuel Ratio The engine control module has NOTES:
85 Imbalance - Signal above determined failures where some
serial data, is above a specified Monitor description. Inferred
range mixture strength (lambda) above
Fuel injector connector is threshold, (leaner mixture). Monitors
disconnected, connector pin is cylinder specific fuelling errors which
backed out, connector pin may not be detected by the overall fuel
corrosion system monitor
Specified cylinder, localised air
leak on intake manifold to
cylinder head connection Operational requirements needed
External fuel leak at fuel to allow the monitor to be fully tested.
injector Engine coolant temperature greater
Fuel restriction within fuel than 50°C, drive vehicle at steady load
injector in 6th gear to achieve an engine speed
Specified cylinder, localised of 1200-2400rpm, maintain these
damage/restriction of fuel rail conditions for 10 minutes (highway
Air leak around spark plug cruise)
Air leak around fuel injector
Fuel injector failure Using the manufacturer
Ignition coil failure approved diagnostic system
first
Check for air leak on intake
manifold to cylinder head
connection
Check for external fuel leak at
fuel injector
Check for fuel restriction within
fuel injector
fuel rail
Check for air leak around spark
plug
Check for air leak around fuel
injector
Check and install new ignition
coil as required
P219B- Bank 2 Air-Fuel Ratio The engine control module has NOTES:
cruise)

first
cylinders
fuel rail
to this DTC index
P219B- Bank 2 Air-Fuel Ratio The engine control module has NOTES:
first
connection
fuel injector
fuel injector
fuel rail
plug
injector
coil as required
P219C- Cylinder 1 Air-Fuel Ratio The engine control module has NOTES:
cruise)
first
cylinders
fuel rail
to this DTC index
P219C- Cylinder 1 Air-Fuel Ratio The engine control module has NOTES:
first
connection
fuel injector
fuel injector
fuel rail
plug
injector
coil as required
P219D- Cylinder 2 Air-Fuel Ratio The engine control module has NOTES:
cruise)

first
cylinders
fuel rail
to this DTC index
P219D- Cylinder 2 Air-Fuel Ratio The engine control module has NOTES:
first
connection
fuel injector
fuel injector
fuel rail
plug
injector
coil as required
P219E- Cylinder 3 Air-Fuel Ratio The engine control module has NOTES:
cruise)

first
cylinders
fuel rail
to this DTC index
P219E- Cylinder 3 Air-Fuel Ratio The engine control module has NOTES:
first
connection
fuel injector
fuel injector
fuel rail
plug
injector
coil as required
P219F- Cylinder 4 Air-Fuel Ratio The engine control module has NOTES:
cruise)

first
cylinders
fuel rail
to this DTC index
P219F- Cylinder 4 Air-Fuel Ratio The engine control module has NOTES:
first
connection
fuel injector
fuel injector
fuel rail
plug
injector
coil as required
P21A0- Cylinder 5 Air-Fuel Ratio The engine control module has NOTES:
cruise)

first
cylinders
fuel rail
to this DTC index
first
connection
fuel injector
fuel injector
fuel rail
plug
injector
coil as required
cruise)

first
cylinders
fuel rail
to this DTC index
first
connection
fuel injector
fuel injector
fuel rail
plug
injector
coil as required
P2227- Barometric Pressure Engine control module failure

00 Sensor A Circuit NOTE: The sensor is installed
Range/Performance - No within the engine control module and is
sub type information not serviceable


00 Sensor A Circuit Low - No NOTE: The sensor is installed
sub type information within the engine control module and is
not serviceable

00 Sensor A Circuit High - No NOTE: The sensor is installed
sub type information within the engine control module and is
not serviceable

P2231- O2 Sensor Signal Circuit Heated oxygen sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Shorted to Heater Circuit - short circuit to ground, short diagrams and check heated
Bank 1, Sensor 1 - No sub circuit to power, open circuit, oxygen sensor circuit for short
type information high resistance circuit to ground, short circuit to
P2234- O2 Sensor Signal Circuit Heated oxygen sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Shorted to Heater Circuit - short circuit to ground, short diagrams and check heated
P2237- O2 Sensor Positive Current The engine control module has Refer to the electrical circuit
13 Control Circuit / Open - determined an open circuit via diagrams and check heated
Bank 1, Sensor 1 - Circuit lack of bias voltage, low current oxygen sensor circuit for short
open flow, no change in the state of circuit to ground, short circuit to
an input in response to an power, open circuit, high
output resistance
Heated oxygen sensor circuit Inspect connectors for signs of
short circuit to ground, short water ingress, and pins for
circuit to power, open circuit, damage and/or corrosion
high resistance Clear the DTC and retest
Connector is disconnected, Check and install new heated
connector pin is backed out, oxygen sensor as required
Heated oxygen sensor
P2237- O2 Sensor Positive Current The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit
64 Control Circuit / Open - detected plausibility failures diagrams and check heated
Bank 1, Sensor 1 - Signal Heated oxygen sensor circuit oxygen sensor circuit for short
plausibility failure short circuit to ground, short circuit to ground, short circuit to
Heated oxygen sensor failure Clear the DTC and retest
P2237- O2 Sensor Positive Current Refer to the electrical circuit

85 Control Circuit / Open - NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check heated
Bank 1, Sensor 1 - Signal I_A_LSCP1 oxygen sensor circuit for short
above allowable range circuit to ground, short circuit to
determined failures where some resistance
circuit quantity, reported via Inspect connectors for signs of
serial data, is above a specified water ingress, and pins for
range damage and/or corrosion
high resistance
P2240- O2 Sensor Positive Current Heated oxygen sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Control Circuit / Open - short circuit to ground, short diagrams and check heated
P2240- O2 Sensor Positive Current Refer to the electrical circuit

19 Control Circuit / Open - NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check heated
Bank 2, Sensor 1 - Circuit I_A_LSCP2 oxygen sensor circuit for short
current above threshold circuit to ground, short circuit to
measured current flow above a resistance
specified range Inspect connectors for signs of
Heated oxygen sensor circuit water ingress, and pins for
short circuit to ground, short damage and/or corrosion
circuit to power, open circuit, Clear the DTC and retest
high resistance Check and install new heated
Connector is disconnected, oxygen sensor as required
P2240- O2 Sensor Positive Current The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit
64 Control Circuit / Open - detected plausibility failures diagrams and check heated
Bank 2, Sensor 1 - Signal Heated oxygen sensor circuit oxygen sensor circuit for short
plausibility failure short circuit to ground, short circuit to ground, short circuit to
Heated oxygen sensor failure Clear the DTC and retest
P2243- O2 Sensor Reference Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Voltage Circuit / Open - NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check heated
Bank 1, Sensor 1 - No sub I_A_LSVN1 oxygen sensor circuit for short
type information circuit to ground, short circuit to
P2247- O2 Sensor Reference Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Voltage Circuit / Open - NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check heated
Bank 2, Sensor 1 - No sub I_A_LSVN2 oxygen sensor circuit for short
type information circuit to ground, short circuit to
P2251- O2 Sensor Negative Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Current Control Circuit / NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check heated
Open - Bank 1, Sensor 1 - O_R_LSVG1 oxygen sensor circuit for short
No sub type information circuit to ground, short circuit to
P2254- O2 Sensor Negative Heated oxygen sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Current Control Circuit / short circuit to ground, short diagrams and check heated
Open - Bank 2, Sensor 1 - circuit to power, open circuit, oxygen sensor circuit for short
No sub type information high resistance circuit to ground, short circuit to
P2270- O2 Sensor Signal Stuck Heated oxygen sensor circuit, Using the manufacturer
00 Lean - Bank 1, Sensor 2 - short circuit to ground, short approved diagnostic system
No sub type information circuit to power, open circuit, check datalogger signal -
high resistance Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Voltage
Air leakage between heated Bank 1 Sensor 2 - (0x035F)
oxygen sensor and catalyst - Heated oxygen sensor
Heated oxygen sensor tip signal for correct
damaged operation
Heated oxygen sensor tip Refer to electrical circuit
blocked diagrams and check the heated
Heated oxygen sensor tip oxygen sensor circuit for short
contaminated by excessive oil circuit to ground, short circuit to
consumption power, open circuit, high
Heated oxygen sensor tip resistance
contaminated by poor or Check heated oxygen sensor is
incorrect fuel correctly installed
tip damage
tip blocked
tip contamination by excessive
oil consumption. Carry out oil
consumption check
tip contamination by poor or
incorrect fuel. Check customer is
using correct grade of fuel
00 Rich - Bank 1, Sensor 2 - short circuit to ground, short approved diagnostic system
Air leakage between heated Bank 1 Sensor 2 - (0x035F)
damaged operation
tip damage
tip blocked
consumption check
Air leakage between heated Bank 2 Sensor 2 - (0x0362)
damaged operation
tip damage
tip blocked
consumption check
damaged operation
tip damage
tip blocked
consumption check
damaged operation
tip damage
tip blocked
consumption check
damaged operation
tip damage
tip blocked
consumption check
damaged operation
tip damage
tip blocked
consumption check
damaged operation
tip damage
tip blocked
consumption check
P2281- Air Leak Between MAF and The engine control module
21 Throttle Body - Signal measured a signal voltage NOTE: Monitor description. Air
amplitude < minimum below a specified range but not leak between mass air flow sensor and
necessarily a short circuit to electric throttle
ground, gain low
Air intake system leakage Check for air intake system
between the mass air flow leakage between the mass air
sensor and the electric throttle flow sensor and the electric
throttle, left bank and right bank
P2281- Air Leak Between MAF and The engine control module
22 Throttle Body - Signal measured a signal voltage NOTE: Monitor description. Air
amplitude > maximum above a specified range but not leak between mass air flow sensor and
necessarily a short circuit to electric throttle
power, gain too high
Air intake system blockage Check for air intake system
between the mass air flow blockage between the mass air
sensor and the electric throttle flow sensor and the electric
throttle, left bank and right bank
P228E- "Fuel Pressure Regulator 1 The engine control module has Check engine control module for
84 Exceeded Learning Limits - determined failures where some related DTCs and refer to
Too Low" - Signal below circuit quantity, reported via relevant DTC index
allowable range serial data, is below a specified Check for a damaged or worn
range high pressure fuel pump
Damaged/worn high pressure Check timing and condition of
fuel pump the fuel pump drive chain
Fuel pump incorrect Check and install new high
assembly/timing pressure fuel pump as required
High pressure fuel pump failure
P228F- Fuel Pressure Regulator 1 The engine control module has Check engine control module for
85 Exceeded Learning Limits - determined failures where some related DTCs and refer to
Too High - Signal above circuit quantity, reported via relevant DTC index
allowable range serial data, is above a specified Check for damaged or worn high
range pressure fuel pump
Damaged/worn high pressure Check timing and condition of
fuel pump the fuel pump drive chain
Fuel pump incorrect Check and install new high
assembly/timing pressure fuel pump as required
High pressure fuel pump failure
P2299- Brake Pedal The engine control module

23 Position/Accelerator Pedal measures a signal that remains NOTE: Monitor description. If
Position Incompatible - low when transitions are the driver is braking and producing a
Signal stuck low expected high brake line pressure whilst not
Brake pedal switch detached pressing the accelerator pedal then
from mounting bracket/pedal both brake pedal switches should be
box whilst electrically connected on/active. If the brake pedal switches
Brake pedal switch mounting are off/inactive in this condition then
position incorrectly adjusted the switches have failed and the DTC is
Brake pedal switch plunger set
partially stuck in
Brake pedal switch 1 circuit Check engine control module for
open circuit, short circuit to related DTCs and refer to
power, short circuit to ground relevant DTC index
Brake pedal switch 2 circuit Check that the brake pedal
open circuit, short circuit to switch is mounted and correctly
power, short circuit to ground positioned on the mounting
bracket/pedal box
Check for smooth operation of
the brake pedal switch plunger
diagrams and check brake pedal
switch 1 circuit for open circuit,
circuit to ground
circuit to ground
P2299- Brake Pedal The engine control module

24 Position/Accelerator Pedal measures a signal that remains NOTE: Monitor description. If
Position Incompatible - high when transitions are the driver is pressing the accelerator
Signal stuck high expected pedal and the vehicle is accelerating
Brake pedal switch detached and the brake pressure is low both
from mounting bracket/pedal brake pedal switches should be
box whilst electrically connected off/inactive. If the switches are
Brake pedal switch mounting on/active in this condition then the
position incorrectly adjusted brake pedal switches have failed and
Brake pedal switch plunger the DTC is set
partially stuck out
Brake pedal switch 1 circuit Check engine control module for
open circuit, short circuit to related DTCs and refer to
power, short circuit to ground relevant DTC index
Brake pedal switch 2 circuit Check that the brake pedal
open circuit, short circuit to switch is mounted and correctly
power, short circuit to ground positioned on the mounting
bracket/pedal box
Check for smooth operation of
the brake pedal switch plunger
circuit to ground
circuit to ground
P2300- Ignition Coil A Primary

11 Control Circuit Low - NOTE: Circuit reference IGN COIL NOTE: Monitor description.
Circuit short to ground 1 Short circuit detected by the ignition
detected a ground the DTC
longer than expected or has Check ignition coil connector is
detected a ground correctly installed
measurement when another Inspect connectors for signs of
value was expected water ingress, and pins for
Ignition coil circuit, short circuit damage and/or corrosion
to ground, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check ignition coil
P2301- Ignition Coil A Primary

12 Control Circuit High - NOTE: Circuit reference IGN COIL NOTE: Monitor description.
Circuit short to battery 1 Short circuit detected by the ignition
detected a vehicle power the DTC
detected a vehicle power correctly installed
to power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit for short circuit to power
P2303- Ignition Coil B Primary

P2304- Ignition Coil B Primary

P2306- Ignition Coil C Primary

P2307- Ignition Coil C Primary

P2309- Ignition Coil D Primary

P2310- Ignition Coil D Primary

P2312- Ignition Coil E Primary

P2313- Ignition Coil E Primary

P2315- Ignition Coil F Primary

P2316- Ignition Coil F Primary

P2400- Evaporative Emission

00 System Leak Detection NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Operational requirements
Pump Control Circuit / O_S_TDMP needed to allow the monitor to be fully
Open - No sub type tested. Ignition on and engine running
information Connector is disconnected,
Diagnostic monitoring tank damage and/or corrosion
leakage pump circuit, open Refer to electrical circuit
Diagnostic monitoring tank diagnostic monitoring tank
leakage pump failure leakage pump circuit for open
diagnostic monitoring tank
leakage pump as required

Pump Control Circuit Low - O_S_TDMP needed to allow the monitor to be fully
No sub type information tested. Ignition on and engine running
leakage pump circuit, short Refer to electrical circuit
circuit to ground diagrams and check the
leakage pump failure leakage pump circuit for short
circuit to ground
P2402- Evaporative Emission The engine control module has

85 System Leak Detection determined failures where some NOTE: Operational requirements
Pump Control Circuit High circuit quantity, reported via needed to allow the monitor to be fully
- Signal above allowable serial data, is above a specified tested. Ignition on and engine running
range range
Diagnostic monitoring tank Refer to electrical circuit
leakage pump circuit, short diagrams and check the
circuit to power diagnostic monitoring tank
Diagnostic monitoring tank leakage pump circuit for short
leakage pump failure circuit to power
P2404- Evaporative Emission Diagnostic monitoring tank

00 System Leak Detection leakage module circuit, short NOTE: Operational requirements
Pump Sense Circuit circuit to ground, short circuit needed to allow the monitor to be fully
Range/Performance - No to power, open circuit, high tested. Ensure that the vehicle has a
sub type information resistance fuel level between 15 and 85%,
Diagnostic monitoring tank ambient temperature is between 32°F
leakage module failure and 95°F, Ignition is on. Using the
system carry out a "large leak test".
Allow the diagnostic monitoring tank
leakage test to complete, refer to
diagnostic monitoring tank leakage test
results

leakage module circuit for short
resistance
leakage module as required

Pump Sense Circuit Low - circuit to ground, short circuit needed to allow the monitor to be fully
No sub type information to power, open circuit, high tested. Ensure that the vehicle has a
resistance fuel level between 15 and 85%,
Diagnostic monitoring tank ambient temperature is between 32°F
leakage module failure and 95°F, Ignition is on. Using the
results

resistance

Pump Sense Circuit High - circuit to ground, short circuit needed to allow the monitor to be fully
No sub type information to power, open circuit, high tested. Ensure that the vehicle has a
resistance fuel level between 15 and 85%,
Blocked pipework ambient temperature is between 32°F
Diagnostic monitoring tank and 95°F, Ignition is on. Using the
leakage module failure manufacturer approved diagnostic
results

resistance
Check for blocked pipework
P2407- Evaporative Emission Water or fuel moisture detected

00 System Leak Detection in the diagnostic monitoring NOTE: Operational requirements
Pump Sense Circuit tank leakage module needed to allow the monitor to be fully
Intermittent/Erratic - No Diagnostic monitoring tank tested. Ensure that the vehicle has a
sub type information leakage module circuit, short fuel level between 15 and 85%,
circuit to ground, short circuit ambient temperature is between 32°F
to power, open circuit, high and 95°F, Ignition is on. Using the
resistance manufacturer approved diagnostic
Diagnostic monitoring tank system carry out a "large leak test".
leakage module failure Allow the diagnostic monitoring tank
results
Check for water or fuel moisture

in the diagnostic monitoring tank
leakage module
resistance
P240A- Evaporative Emission

Pump Heater Circuit / O_S_TDMH needed to allow the monitor to be fully
P240B- Evaporative Emission Connector is disconnected,

00 System Leak Detection connector pin is backed out, NOTE: Operational requirements
Pump Heater Circuit Low - connector pin corrosion needed to allow the monitor to be fully
No sub type information Diagnostic monitoring tank tested. Ignition on and engine running
leakage pump circuit, short
circuit to ground Inspect connectors for signs of
Diagnostic monitoring tank water ingress, and pins for
leakage pump failure damage and/or corrosion
leakage pump circuit for short
circuit to ground
P240C- Evaporative Emission The engine control module has

85 System Leak Detection determined failures where some NOTE: Operational requirements
Pump Heater Circuit High - circuit quantity, reported via needed to allow the monitor to be fully
Signal above allowable serial data, is above a specified tested. Ignition on and engine running
range range

00 Control System Switching NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: Operational requirements
Valve Control Circuit / O_S_TDMV needed to allow the monitor to be fully
P2419- Evaporative Emission Connector is disconnected,

00 Control System Switching connector pin is backed out, NOTE: Operational requirements
Valve Control Circuit Low - connector pin corrosion needed to allow the monitor to be fully
No sub type information Diagnostic monitoring tank tested. Ignition on and engine running
leakage pump circuit, short
circuit to ground Inspect connectors for signs of
Diagnostic monitoring tank water ingress, and pins for
leakage pump failure damage and/or corrosion
leakage pump circuit for short
circuit to ground
P2420- Evaporative Emission The engine control module has

85 Control System Switching determined failures where some NOTE: Operational requirements
Valve Control Circuit High circuit quantity, reported via needed to allow the monitor to be fully
- Signal above allowable serial data, is above a specified tested. Ignition on and engine running
range range
P250A- Engine Oil Level Sensor The engine control module has Refer to the electrical circuit
12 Circuit - Circuit short to detected a vehicle power diagrams and check oil level
battery measurement for a period sensor circuit for short circuit
longer than expected or has power
Oil level sensor circuit short Clear the DTC and retest
circuit to power
P250B- Engine Oil Level Sensor Oil level sensor circuit short
00 Circuit Range/Performance circuit to ground, short circuit NOTE: Monitor description.
- No sub type information to power, open circuit, high Engine control module monitors the oil
resistance temperature from the sensor and sets
Oil level sensor failure the DTC if the temperature is not
plausible

diagrams and check oil level
Check and install new oil level
sensor as required
P250B- Engine Oil Level Sensor

25 Circuit Range/Performance NOTE: Circuit reference I_T_OCS NOTE: Monitor description.
- Signal shape/waveform Engine control module monitors the
failure Oil level sensor circuit short PWM signal from the sensor and sets
circuit to ground, short circuit the DTC if an out of range signal is
to power, open circuit, high detected
resistance
Oil level sensor failure Refer to the electrical circuit
sensor as required
P250B- Engine Oil Level Sensor Oil level sensor circuit short
41 Circuit Range/Performance circuit to ground, short circuit NOTE: Monitor description.
- General checksum failure to power, open circuit, high Engine control module monitors the
resistance PWM signal from the sensor and sets
Oil level sensor failure the DTC if a checksum or watchdog
error is detected

sensor as required
P250C- Engine Oil Level Sensor The engine control module

23 Circuit Low - Signal stuck measures a signal that remains NOTE: Monitor description.
low low when transitions are Engine control module monitors the
expected input pin from the oil level sensor and
Oil level sensor circuit short sets the DTC if the input is low
circuit to ground, high
resistance Refer to the electrical circuit
ground, high resistance
P250D- Engine Oil Level Sensor

24 Circuit High - Signal stuck NOTE: Circuit reference I_T_OCS NOTE: Monitor description.
high Engine control module monitors the
The engine control module input pin from the oil level sensor and
measures a signal that remains sets the DTC if the input is high
high when transitions are
expected Refer to the electrical circuit
Oil level sensor circuit short diagrams and check oil level
circuit to power sensor circuit for short circuit to
power
P252B- Engine Oil Quality Sensor Oil level sensor circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Circuit Range/Performance circuit to ground, short circuit diagrams and check oil level
- No sub type information to power, open circuit, high sensor circuit for short circuit to
resistance ground, short circuit to power,
P252B- Engine Oil Quality Sensor The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit
62 Circuit Range/Performance detected failure when diagrams and check oil level
- Signal compare failure comparing two or more input sensor circuit for short circuit to
parameters for plausibility ground, short circuit to power,
Oil level sensor circuit short open circuit, high resistance
circuit to ground, short circuit Inspect connectors for signs of
to power, open circuit, high water ingress, and pins for
P2541- Low Pressure Fuel System Check connector is not

84 Sensor Circuit Low - Signal NOTE: Circuit reference I_A_FLPS disconnected, connector pin is
below allowable range & O_V_5VFLPS not backed out
serial data, is below a specified diagrams and check fuel low
connector pin is backed out, Check fuel low pressure sensor 5
connector pin corrosion volt power supply circuit for
Fuel low pressure sensor circuit, open circuit, high resistance
short circuit to ground Clear the DTC and retest
Fuel low pressure sensor 5 volt Check and install new fuel low
power supply circuit, open pressure sensor as required
Fuel low pressure sensor failure
P2542- Low Pressure Fuel System The engine control module has Check connector is not
85 Sensor Circuit High - determined failures where some disconnected, connector pin is
Signal above allowable circuit quantity, reported via not backed out
range serial data, is above a specified Inspect connectors for signs of
connector pin corrosion diagrams and check fuel low
Fuel low pressure sensor circuit, pressure sensor circuit for short
short circuit to power circuit to power
Fuel low pressure sensor ground Check fuel low pressure sensor
supply circuit, open circuit, high ground supply circuit for open
Fuel low pressure sensor failure Clear the DTC and retest
P2564- Turbocharger Boost Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Control Position Sensor A NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check
Circuit Low - No sub type G_R_CBPP & I_A_CBPP & O_V_5VCBPP supercharger bypass valve
P2565- Turbocharger Boost Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Control Position Sensor A NOTE: Circuit reference diagrams and check
Circuit High - No sub type G_R_CBPP & I_A_CBPP & O_V_5VCBPP supercharger bypass valve
P25A2- Brake System Control Anti-lock brake system failure

00 Module Requested MIL High speed CAN bus failure NOTE: Monitor description.
Illumination - No sub type Fuse failure Anti-lock brake system control module
information High speed CAN bus circuit, is indicating a fault to the engine
short circuit to ground, short control module that could have
circuit to power, open circuit emission failure conditions therefore
Anti-lock brake system control requests the MIL
module power circuit failure
Anti-lock brake system control Check anti-lock brake system
module ground circuit failure control module for additional
DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
index. Rectify these first
complete a CAN network
integrity test
diagrams and check high speed
CAN network for short circuit to
open circuit
diagrams and check anti-lock
brake system control module
power and ground circuits for
open circuit
P2601- Coolant Pump "A" Control Inspect connectors for signs of

00 Circuit performance / NOTE: Circuit reference water ingress, and pins for
Stuck Off - No sub type O_S_CACWPR damage and/or corrosion
Connector is disconnected, diagrams and check air charge
connector pin is backed out, coolant pump relay circuit for
Air charge coolant pump relay circuit to power, open circuit,
short circuit to power, open Clear the DTC and retest
circuit, high resistance Check and install new air charge
Air charge coolant pump relay coolant pump relay as required
failure
P2610- ECM/PCM Engine Off Timer CAN network failure

00 Performance - No sub type Invalid CAN data received from NOTE: Monitor description.
information central junction box Engine control module monitors the
global time and checks if it plausible

integrity test. Refer to electrical
circuit diagrams and check CAN
circuits if required. Repair
harness as required
Check central junction box for
relevant DTC index
P2610- ECM/PCM Engine Off Timer The engine control module has
84 Performance - Signal below determined failures where some NOTE: Monitor description. The
allowable range circuit quantity, reported via engine control module will set a DTC if
serial data, is below a specified the engine off time calculated from the
range global time in the instrument
Vehicle battery has been cluster/central junction box is less than
isolated and the global time 1hr, when the shutdown temperature
does not increment. Warm was fully warm, and the coolant 1
coolant has been replaced with temperature at start is significantly
cold coolant cooled down to ambient temp
Rapid engine temperature
cooling with rapid ambient Check engine control module for
temperature rise additional DTCs and refer to
these first
module
for coolant temperature sensor
and ambient temperature sensor
P2610- ECM/PCM Engine Off Timer CAN network failure

87 Performance - Missing Central junction box not NOTE: Monitor description.
message transmitting CAN data Engine control module monitors the
global time on CAN. If global time is
not received then this DTC is set

harness as required
Check central junction box for
relevant DTC index
P2626- O2 Sensor Positive Current The engine control module has Refer to the electrical circuit
13 Trim Circuit / Open Bank 1 determined an open circuit via diagrams and check heated
Sensor 1 - Circuit open lack of bias voltage, low current oxygen sensor circuit for short
flow, no change in the state of circuit to ground, short circuit to
an input in response to an power, open circuit, high
output resistance
Heated oxygen sensor circuit Inspect connectors for signs of
short circuit to ground, short water ingress, and pins for
circuit to power, open circuit, damage and/or corrosion
high resistance Clear the DTC and retest
Connector is disconnected, Check and install new heated
connector pin is backed out, oxygen sensor as required
P2629- O2 Sensor Positive Current Heated oxygen sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Trim Circuit / Open Bank 2 short circuit to ground, short diagrams and check heated
Sensor 1 - No sub type circuit to power, open circuit, oxygen sensor circuit for short
information high resistance circuit to ground, short circuit to
U0001- High Speed CAN The engine control module has Using the manufacturer
88 Communication Bus - Bus determined failures where a approved diagnostic system
off data bus is not available carry out network integrity test
High speed CAN bus failure Refer to the electrical circuit
High speed CAN bus circuit, diagrams and check high speed
short circuit to ground, short CAN network for short circuit to
circuit to power, open circuit ground, short circuit to power,
The engine control module has open circuit
not received the expected CAN Using the manufacturer
signal from the terrain response approved diagnostic system,
switchpack within the specified check terrain response
time interval switchpack for DTCs and refer to
CAN harness link between the relevant DTC index
engine control module and Using the manufacturer
terrain response switchpack approved diagnostic system,
network malfunction complete a CAN network
integrity test. Refer to the
check terrain response
switchpack power and ground
circuits for open circuit. Check
CAN harness between engine
control module and terrain
response switchpack, repair as
necessary
U0002- High Speed CAN High speed CAN short circuit to

00 Communication Bus ground NOTE: Engine control module will
Performance - No sub type High speed CAN short circuit to use default CAN signal values
information power
CAN for short circuit to ground
CAN for short circuit to power
U0010- Medium Speed CAN The engine control module has Using the manufacturer
88 Communication Bus - Bus determined failures where a approved diagnostic system
off data bus is not available carry out network integrity test
Medium speed CAN bus failure Refer to the electrical circuit
Medium speed CAN bus circuit, diagrams and check medium
short circuit to ground, short speed CAN network for short
circuit to power, open circuit circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit
U0101- Lost Communication with The engine control module has Using the manufacturer
00 TCM - No sub type not received the expected CAN approved diagnostic system,
information signal from the transmission check transmission control
control module within the module for DTCs and refer to
specified time interval the relevant DTC index
CAN harness link between Using the manufacturer
engine control module and approved diagnostic system,
transmission control module complete a CAN network
network malfunction integrity test. Refer to the
check transmission control
module power and ground
control module and transmission
control module, repair as
necessary
U0102- Lost Communication with The engine control module has Using the manufacturer
00 Transfer Case Control not received the expected CAN approved diagnostic system,
Module - No sub type signal from the transfer case check transfer case control
information control module within the module for DTCs and refer to
transfer case control module complete a CAN network
check transfer case control
control module and transfer case
necessary
U0103- Lost Communication With The engine control module has Using the manufacturer
00 Gear Shift Control Module not received the expected CAN approved diagnostic system,
A - No sub type signal from the transmission check transmission control
information control switch within the switch for DTCs and refer to the
specified time interval relevant DTC index
transmission control switch complete a CAN network
check transmission control
switch power and ground circuits
for open circuit. Check CAN
harness between engine control
module and transmission control
switch, repair as necessary
00 Cruise Control Module - No not received the expected CAN approved diagnostic system,
sub type information signal from the speed control check speed control module for
module within the specified DTCs and refer to the relevant
time interval DTC index
speed control module network complete a CAN network
malfunction integrity test. Refer to the
check speed control module
open circuit. Check CAN harness
between engine control module
and speed control module,
repair as necessary
00 Anti-Lock Brake System not received the expected CAN approved diagnostic system,
(ABS) Control Module - No signal from the anti-lock brake check anti-lock brake system
sub type information system control module within control module for DTCs and
the specified time interval refer to the relevant DTC index
engine control module and anti- approved diagnostic system,
lock brake system control complete a CAN network
module network malfunction integrity test. Refer to the
control module power and
ground circuits for open circuit.
Check CAN harness between
engine control module and anti-
lock brake system control
module, repair as necessary
00 Park Brake Control Module not received the expected CAN approved diagnostic system,
- No sub type information signal from the parking brake check parking brake control
control module within the module for DTCs and refer to
parking brake control module complete a CAN network
check parking brake control
control module and parking
brake control module, repair as
necessary
U012A- Lost Communication with The engine control module has Using the manufacturer
00 Chassis Control Module "A" not received the expected CAN approved diagnostic system,
- No sub type information signal from the integrated check integrated suspension
suspension control module control module for DTCs and
within the specified time refer to the relevant DTC index
interval Using the manufacturer
CAN harness link between approved diagnostic system,
engine control module and complete a CAN network
integrated suspension control integrity test
module network malfunction Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check integrated
suspension control module
open circuit
engine control module and
integrated suspension control
U012B- Lost Communication with The engine control module has Using the manufacturer
00 Chassis Control Module "B" not received the expected CAN approved diagnostic system,
- No sub type information signal from the integrated check integrated suspension
suspension control module control module for DTCs and
within the specified time refer to the relevant DTC index
interval Using the manufacturer
CAN harness link between approved diagnostic system,
engine control module and complete a CAN network
integrated suspension control integrity test
module network malfunction Refer to the electrical circuit
open circuit
integrated suspension control
00 Body Control Module - No not received the expected CAN approved diagnostic system,
sub type information signal from the central junction check central junction box for
box within the specified time DTCs and refer to the relevant
interval DTC index
central junction box network complete a CAN network
check central junction box power
and ground circuits for open
circuit. Check CAN harness
and central junction box, repair
as necessary
00 Gateway "A" - No sub type not received the expected CAN approved diagnostic system,
information signal from the gateway control check gateway control module
module within the specified for DTCs and refer to the
time interval relevant DTC index
gateway control module complete a CAN network
network malfunction integrity test
diagrams and check gateway
control module power and
ground circuits for open circuit
gateway control module, repair
as necessary
U0151- Lost Communication With Using the manufacturer

00 Restraints Control Module - NOTE: Circuit reference approved diagnostic system,
No sub type information I_F_CRASH check restraints control module
for DTCs and refer to the
The engine control module has relevant DTC index
not received the expected CAN Using the manufacturer
signal from the restraints approved diagnostic system,
control module within the complete a CAN network
specified time interval integrity test. Refer to the
CAN harness link between electrical circuit diagrams and
engine control module and check restraints control module
restraints control module power and ground circuits for
network malfunction open circuit. Check CAN harness
and restraints control module,
repair as necessary
U0151- Lost Communication With If this DTC is logged with

08 Restraints Control Module - NOTE: Circuit reference U0151-00 & B10A2-32, check
Bus Signal / Message I_F_CRASH for fuse failure, restraints
Failures control module power and
The engine control module has ground circuits for open circuit.
not received the expected CAN Refer to the electrical circuit
signal from the restraints diagrams and check CAN
control module within the harness
specified time interval If this DTC is logged with
CAN harness link between B10A2-32, or on its own refer to
engine control module and the electrical circuit diagrams
restraints control module and check restraints control
network malfunction module crash signal circuit for
high resistance
check restraints control module
for DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
integrity test. Refer to the
check restraints control module
and restraints control module,
repair as necessary
00 Instrument Panel Cluster not received the expected CAN approved diagnostic system,
(IPC) Control Module - No signal from the instrument check instrument cluster for
sub type information cluster within the specified time DTCs and refer to the relevant
interval DTC index
instrument cluster network complete a CAN network
check instrument cluster power
and ground circuits for open
circuit. Check CAN harness
and instrument cluster, repair as
necessary
U0167- Lost Communication With Power is lost from the engine Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Vehicle Immobilizer control module or the central diagrams and check the power
Control Module - No sub junction box during the and ground connections to the
type information Immobilizer learn routine engine control module and
carry out the immobilisation
procedure
module related errors
U0300- Internal Control Module The engine control module has Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Software Incompatibility - not received the expected diagrams and check CAN
No sub type information master configuration data network circuit for short circuit
transmitted from the vehicle to ground, short circuit to
Engine control module hardware power, open circuit, high
part incorrect for application resistance
Engine control module software Check engine control module
part incorrect for application hardware part is correct for
application
Check engine control module
software part is correct for
application
U0402- Invalid Data Received from Engine control module relay Refer to the electrical circuit
00 TCM - No sub type circuit short circuit to ground, diagrams and check engine
information short circuit to power, open control module relay circuit for
Stop/ start failure indicated to circuit to power, open circuit,
the engine control module by high resistance
the transmission control module Check transmission control
refer to relevant DTC index
harness as required
U0402- Invalid Data Received from The value of the signal

29 TCM - Signal invalid measured by the engine control NOTE: Monitor description.
module is not plausible given Integrity check of transmission control
the operating conditions module CAN signal
CAN network failure
Implausible CAN data received Check transmission control
from transmission control module for related DTCs and
module refer to relevant DTC index
switch for related DTCs and
harness as required
U0402- Invalid Data Received from CAN network failure

41 TCM - General checksum Implausible CAN data received NOTE: Monitor description.
failure from transmission control Monitors transmission control module
module CAN data for erroneous alive counter,
checksum, complement information

harness as required
U0402- Invalid Data Received from The engine control module

62 TCM - Signal compare detected failure when NOTE: Monitor description.
failure comparing two or more input
Integrity check of transmission control
parameters for plausibility module CAN signal
CAN network failure
Implausible CAN data received Check transmission control
from transmission control module for related DTCs and
module refer to relevant DTC index
harness as required

67 TCM - Signal incorrect Implausible CAN data received NOTE: Monitor description.
after event from transmission control Integrity check of transmission control
module module CAN signal

harness as required

82 TCM - Alive / sequence Implausible CAN data received NOTE: Monitor description.
counter incorrect / not from transmission control Integrity check of transmission control
updated module module CAN signal

harness as required

83 TCM - Value of signal Implausible CAN data received NOTE: Monitor description.
protection calculation from transmission control Integrity check of transmission control
incorrect module module CAN signal

harness as required
U0404- Invalid Data Received from CAN network failure Using the manufacturer
00 Gear Shift Control Module Invalid CAN data received from approved diagnostic system,
A - No sub type transmission control module complete a CAN network
information integrity test. Refer to electrical
harness as required
these first
transmission control switch
A - General checksum transmission control module complete a CAN network
failure integrity test. Refer to electrical
harness as required
these first
A - Alive / sequence transmission control switch complete a CAN network
counter incorrect / not integrity test. Refer to electrical
updated circuit diagrams and check CAN
harness as required
these first
A - Value of signal transmission control switch complete a CAN network
protection calculation integrity test. Refer to electrical
incorrect circuit diagrams and check CAN
harness as required
these first
U0405- Invalid Data Received Speed control system failure Check speed control module for
68 From Cruise Control Speed control buttons additional DTCs and refer to
Module - Event information jammed/contaminated/damaged relevant DTC index
Clock spring failure Check speed control buttons and
clock spring are not
jammed/contaminated/damaged
supply and ground connections
to the speed control module
U0405- Invalid Data Received Speed control system failure Check speed control module for
82 From Cruise Control Speed control buttons additional DTCs and refer to
Module - Alive / sequence jammed/contaminated/damaged relevant DTC index
counter incorrect / not Clock spring failure Check speed control buttons and
updated clock spring are not
jammed/contaminated/damaged
U0405- Invalid Data Received The engine control module has Check speed control module for
84 From Cruise Control determined failures where some additional DTCs and refer to
Module - Signal below circuit quantity, reported via relevant DTC index
allowable range serial data, is below a specified Check speed control buttons and
range clock spring are not
Speed control system failure jammed/contaminated/damaged
Speed control buttons Inspect connectors for signs of
jammed/contaminated/damaged water ingress, and pins for
Clock spring failure damage and/or corrosion
U0405- Invalid Data Received The engine control module has Check speed control module for
86 From Cruise Control determined failures where some additional DTCs and refer to
Module - Signal invalid circuit quantity, reported via relevant DTC index
serial data, is not plausible Check speed control buttons and
given the operating conditions clock spring are not
Speed control system failure jammed/contaminated/damaged
Speed control buttons Inspect connectors for signs of
jammed/contaminated/damaged water ingress, and pins for
Clock spring failure damage and/or corrosion
U0415- Invalid Data Received Other anti-lock brake system

02 From Anti-Lock Brake control module DTCs are set NOTE: Monitor description. The
System (ABS) Control High speed CAN bus failure anti-lock brake system control module
Module - General signal Fuse failure CAN messages are being updated on
failure High speed CAN bus circuit, the CAN bus. If the data is not updated
short circuit to ground, short and correctly formatted periodically a
circuit to power, open circuit DTC is set. The monitor is operational
Anti-lock brake system control when the ignition is ON
integrity test
open circuit
open circuit
U0415- Invalid Data Received The value of the signal

29 From Anti-Lock Brake measured by the engine control NOTE: Monitor description. The
System (ABS) Control module is not plausible given anti-lock brake system control module
Module - Signal invalid the operating conditions CAN messages are being updated on
High speed CAN bus failure the CAN bus. If the data is not updated
Fuse failure and correctly formatted periodically a
High speed CAN bus circuit, DTC is set. The monitor is operational
short circuit to ground, short when the ignition is ON
Anti-lock brake system control Using the manufacturer
module power circuit failure approved diagnostic system,
Anti-lock brake system control complete a CAN network
module ground circuit failure integrity test
open circuit
open circuit
U0415- Invalid Data Received Other anti-lock brake system

41 From Anti-Lock Brake control module DTCs are set NOTE: Monitor description. The
System (ABS) Control High speed CAN bus failure anti-lock brake system control module
Module - General Fuse failure CAN messages are being updated on
checksum failure High speed CAN bus circuit, the CAN bus. If the data is not updated
short circuit to ground, short and correctly formatted periodically a
circuit to power, open circuit DTC is set. The monitor is operational
integrity test
open circuit
open circuit
U0415- Invalid Data Received The engine control module

62 From Anti-Lock Brake detected failure when NOTE: Monitor description.
System (ABS) Control comparing two or more input Monitors the compliment of the anti-
Module - Signal compare parameters for plausibility lock brake system control module CAN
failure Stop/ start system failure signal engine running request
integrity anti-lock brake system Using the manufacturer
control module approved diagnostic system,
control module for DTCs and
U0415- Invalid Data Received High speed CAN bus failure

82 From Anti-Lock Brake Fuse failure NOTE: Monitor description. The
System (ABS) Control High speed CAN bus circuit, anti-lock brake system control module
Module - Alive / sequence short circuit to ground, short CAN messages are being updated on
counter incorrect / not circuit to power, open circuit the CAN bus. If the data is not updated
updated Anti-lock brake system control and correctly formatted periodically a
module power circuit failure DTC is set. The monitor is operational
module ground circuit failure
integrity test
open circuit
open circuit
U0415- Invalid Data Received High speed CAN bus failure

83 From Anti-Lock Brake Fuse failure NOTE: Monitor description. The
System (ABS) Control High speed CAN bus circuit, anti-lock brake system control module
Module - Value of signal short circuit to ground, short CAN messages are being updated on
protection calculation circuit to power, open circuit the CAN bus. If the data is not updated
incorrect Anti-lock brake system control and correctly formatted periodically a
module power circuit failure DTC is set. The monitor is operational
module ground circuit failure
integrity test
open circuit
open circuit
U0416- Invalid Data Received CAN network failure Using the manufacturer
46 From Vehicle Dynamics Invalid CAN data received from approved diagnostic system,
Control Module - anti-lock brake system control complete a CAN network
Calibration / parameter module integrity test. Refer to electrical
memory failure circuit diagrams and check CAN
harness as required
these first
Check anti-lock brake system
control module for related DTCs
and refer to relevant DTC index
anti-lock brake system control
module
U0416- Invalid Data Received The engine control module has Using the manufacturer
68 From Vehicle Dynamics received the default brake approved diagnostic system,
Control Module - Event pressure signal value over CAN check anti-lock brake system
information from the anti-lock brake system control module for DTCs and
control module for a specified refer to the relevant DTC index
time interval Using the manufacturer
Anti-lock brake system failure approved diagnostic system
CAN harness link between carry out network integrity test.
engine control module and anti- Refer to the electrical circuit
lock brake system control diagrams and check anti-lock
module network malfunction brake system control module
and anti-lock brake system
necessary
U0426- Invalid Data Received Electric steering column lock Using the manufacturer
00 From Vehicle Immobilizer has received an invalid identity approved diagnostic system,
Control Module - No sub response complete a CAN network
type information Module substituted integrity test. Refer to electrical
harness as required. Using the
manufacturer approved
diagnostic system check and up-
date the car configuration file as
required
Ensure all modules installed in
the vehicle which store vehicle
identity are valid for this vehicle
and are not substitutes from a
donor vehicle
U042B- Invalid Data Received from The value of the signal

29 Chassis Control Module, A measured by the engine control NOTE: Operational requirements
- Signal invalid module is not plausible given needed to allow the monitor to be fully
the operating conditions tested. Ignition on
Fuse failure
High speed CAN bus failure Refer to the electrical circuit
High speed CAN bus circuit, diagrams and check integrated
short circuit to ground, short suspension control module
circuit to power, open circuit power and ground circuits for
Integrated suspension control open circuit
module failure Check integrated suspension
control module for additional
integrity test
open circuit
U042B- Invalid Data Received from Fuse failure

68 Chassis Control Module, A High speed CAN bus failure NOTE: Operational requirements
- Event information High speed CAN bus circuit, needed to allow the monitor to be fully
short circuit to ground, short tested. Ignition on
open circuit
Check integrated suspension
integrity test
open circuit
U042B- Invalid Data Received from Fuse failure

82 Chassis Control Module, A High speed CAN bus failure NOTE: Operational requirements
- Alive/sequence counter High speed CAN bus circuit, needed to allow the monitor to be fully
incorrect/not updated short circuit to ground, short tested. Ignition on
Integrated suspension control Refer to the electrical circuit
module failure diagrams and check integrated
open circuit
Check integrated suspension
integrity test
open circuit
U0447- Invalid Data Received Connector is disconnected,

00 From Gateway "A" - No connector pin is backed out, NOTE: Monitor description.
sub type information connector pin corrosion Engine control module has been
Harness failure - Wiring informed of a failure within the dual
integrity dual battery system battery system
integrity gateway module Inspect connectors for signs of
U0452- Invalid Data Received Connector is disconnected,

00 From Restraints Control connector pin is backed out, NOTE: Monitor description.
Module - No sub type connector pin corrosion Engine control module has been
information Harness failure - Wiring informed of a failure within the seat
integrity seat belt sensor belt sensor
integrity gateway module Inspect connectors for signs of
U0592- Invalid Data Received CAN network failure Using the manufacturer
00 From Gear Shift Control Invalid CAN data received from approved diagnostic system,
Module B - No sub type transmission control module complete a CAN network
information integrity test. Refer to electrical
harness as required
these first
U1A14- CAN Initialisation Failure - Harness fault - CAN circuit Using the manufacturer
00 No sub type information Engine control module failure approved diagnostic system,
integrity test
circuits. Repair wiring harness
as required
Check and install a new engine
U2012- Car Configuration Car configuration signal not

00 Parameter(s) - No sub received NOTE: Monitor description. Car
type information Car configuration file incorrect configuration parameter received from
Harness fault - CAN circuit central junction box is outside the
Central junction box not designated limits allowed
transmitting some or all of the
car configuration CAN data Using the manufacturer
check and up-date the car
configuration file as required
circuits. Repair wiring harness
as required
Check the central junction box
for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
Clear the DTC and re-test
U2108- Adaptive Cruise Control - Adaptive speed control system Check adaptive speed control
00 No sub type information failure - Error indicating module for DTCs and refer to
adaptive speed control failure the relevant DTC index. Using
flag set the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, complete a
CAN network integrity test.
diagrams and check CAN circuits
if required. Repair wiring
harness as required
U2108- Adaptive Cruise Control - The engine control module Check adaptive speed control
24 Signal stuck high measures a signal that remains module for DTCs and refer to
high when transitions are the relevant DTC index. Using
expected the manufacturer approved
Adaptive speed control system diagnostic system, complete a
failure - Adaptive speed control CAN network integrity test.
follow speed error Refer to electrical circuit
harness as required
U2108- Adaptive Cruise Control - The engine control module Check adaptive speed control
64 Signal plausibility failure detected plausibility failures module for DTCs and refer to
Adaptive speed control system the relevant DTC index. Using
failure - Adaptive speed control the manufacturer approved
follow speed range error diagnostic system, complete a
harness as required
U2108- Adaptive Cruise Control - Adaptive speed control system Check adaptive speed control
68 Event information failure - Error indicating module for DTCs and refer to
adaptive speed control follow the relevant DTC index. Using
speed check when stationary the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, complete a
harness as required
U2108- Adaptive Cruise Control - The engine control module has Check adaptive speed control
86 Signal invalid determined failures where some module for DTCs and refer to
circuit quantity, reported via the relevant DTC index. Using
serial data, is not plausible the manufacturer approved
given the operating conditions diagnostic system, complete a
Adaptive speed control system CAN network integrity test.
failure - Error when invalid Refer to electrical circuit
adaptive speed control resume diagrams and check CAN circuits
requests are present if required. Repair wiring
harness as required
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Fuel
Fired Booster Heater Control Module (FFBH)
Fuel Fired Booster Heater (FFBH)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Fuel Fired Booster Heater
(FFBH). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Fired Booster Heater (412-02B, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1206- Crash Occurred Crash signal
53 - Deactivated received from NOTE: Fuel fired booster heater operation is inhibited when
restraints this DTC is set.
control module
check the restraints control module for related DTCs and
B1D22- Coolant Fuel fired Install a new fuel fired booster heater coolant
11 Temperature booster heater temperature sensor as necessary. Using the manufacturer
Sensor - coolant approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and perform
Circuit short to temperature routine - AHCM Operation Check (0x9013)
ground sensor circuit
short circuit to
ground
B1D22- Coolant Fuel fired Install a new fuel fired booster heater coolant
15 Temperature booster heater temperature sensor as necessary. Using the manufacturer
Sensor - coolant approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and perform
Circuit short to temperature routine - AHCM Operation Check (0x9013)
battery or sensor circuit
open short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
B1D23- Overheat Fuel fired Install a new fuel fired booster heater coolant
13 Sensor - booster heater temperature sensor as necessary. Using the manufacturer
Circuit open coolant approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and perform
temperature routine - AHCM Operation Check (0x9013)
sensor circuit
open circuit,
high resistance
B1D24- Glow Plug - Fuel fired Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuel
11 Circuit short to booster heater fired booster heater glow plug circuit for short circuit to
ground glow plug circuit ground. Install a new fuel fired booster heater glow plug
short circuit to as necessary. Using the manufacturer approved
ground diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and perform routine -
AHCM Operation Check (0x9013)
B1D24- Glow Plug - Fuel fired Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuel
15 Circuit short to booster heater fired booster heater glow plug circuit for short circuit to
battery or glow plug circuit power, open circuit, high resistance. Install a new fuel
open short circuit to fired booster heater glow plug as necessary. Using the
power, open manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs
circuit, high and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check (0x9013)
resistance
B1D25- Heater Fuel Fuel fired Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuel
11 Pump - Circuit booster heater fired booster heater fuel pump circuit for short circuit to
short to fuel pump ground
ground circuit short
circuit to ground
B1D25- Heater Fuel Fuel fired Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuel
15 Pump - Circuit booster heater fired booster heater fuel pump circuit for short circuit to
short to fuel pump power, open circuit, high resistance
battery or circuit short
open circuit to
battery, open
circuit, high
resistance
B1D26- Combustion Air Fuel fired Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
11 Blower - Circuit booster heater the DTCs and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check
short to internal failure (0x9013). If the fault persists, install a new fuel fired
ground booster heater
15 Blower - Circuit booster heater the DTCs and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check
short to internal failure (0x9013). If the fault persists, install a new fuel fired
battery or booster heater
open
92 Blower - booster heater the DTCs and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check
Performance or internal failure (0x9013). If the fault persists, install a new fuel fired
incorrect booster heater
operation
93 Blower - No booster heater the DTCs and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check
operation internal failure (0x9013). If the fault persists, install a new fuel fired
booster heater
B1D27- Heater Coolant Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuel
11 Pump - Circuit NOTE: Circuit fired booster heater coolant pump circuit for short circuit
short to reference + to ground
ground
Fuel fired
booster heater
coolant pump
circuit short
circuit to ground
B1D27- Heater Coolant Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuel
15 Pump - Circuit NOTE: Circuit fired booster heater coolant pump circuit for short circuit
short to reference + to power, open circuit, high resistance
battery or
open Fuel fired
booster heater
coolant pump
circuit short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
B1D28- Fuel Pre-heater Fuel fired

11 - Circuit short booster heater NOTE: The pre heat is performed by the ignition glow plug
to ground glow plug circuit
short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuel
ground fired booster heater glow plug circuit for short circuit to
ground. Install a new fuel fired booster heater glow plug
as necessary. Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and perform routine -
AHCM Operation Check (0x9013). If the fault persists,
install a new fuel fired booster heater
B1D28- Fuel Pre-heater Fuel fired

15 - Circuit short booster heater NOTE: The pre heat is performed by the ignition glow plug
to battery or glow plug circuit
open short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuel
power, open fired booster heater glow plug circuit for short circuit to
circuit, high power, open circuit, high resistance. Install a new fuel
resistance fired booster heater glow plug as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs
and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check (0x9013).
If the fault persists, install a new fuel fired booster heater
B1D29- No Start, Even No fuel present Check vehicle fuel level. Check fuel lines to fuel fired
93 After Restart at fuel fired booster heater module for blockage, kinking or damage.
Attempt - No booster heater Check fuel for aeration and correct fuel delivery. Check
operation module that the vehicle is not parked on an incline when the fuel
Fuel fired fired booster heater is operated. Using the manufacturer
booster heater approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and perform
air intake routine - AHCM Operation Check (0x9013)
blocked Check the fuel fired booster heater air intake for
Fuel fired blockage, kinking or damage. Using the manufacturer
exhaust system routine - AHCM Operation Check (0x9013)
blocked Check the fuel fired booster heater exhaust system for
blockage, kinking or damage. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and perform
routine - AHCM Operation Check (0x9013)
B1D30- No Start In No fuel present Check vehicle fuel level. Check fuel lines to fuel fired
93 Test Mode - No at fuel fired booster heater module for blockage, kinking or damage.
operation booster heater Check fuel for aeration and correct fuel delivery. Check
module that the vehicle is not parked on an incline when the fuel
Fuel fired fired booster heater is operated. Using the manufacturer
air intake routine - AHCM Operation Check (0x9013)
B1D31- Flame Fuel fired

94 Detected Prior booster heater NOTE: The glow plug and flame sensor are a combined unit
to Normal glow plug circuit
Operation - short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuel
Unexpected ground, short fired booster heater glow plug circuit for short circuit to
operation circuit to power, ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
open circuit, resistance. Install a new fuel fired booster heater glow
high resistance plug as necessary. Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and perform routine -
AHCM Operation Check (0x9013)
B1D32- Multiple Flame No fuel present Check vehicle fuel level. Check fuel lines to fuel fired
92 Interruption at fuel fired booster heater module for blockage, kinking or damage.
During Heating booster heater Check fuel for aeration and correct fuel delivery. Check
Cycle - module that the vehicle is not parked on an incline when the fuel
Performance or Fuel fired fired booster heater is operated. Using the manufacturer
incorrect booster heater approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and perform
operation air intake routine - AHCM Operation Check (0x9013)
B1D33- Flame No fuel present Check vehicle fuel level. Check fuel lines to fuel fired
92 Interruption at fuel fired booster heater module for blockage, kinking or damage.
During Normal booster heater Check fuel for aeration and correct fuel delivery. Check
Operation - module that the vehicle is not parked on an incline when the fuel
Performance or Fuel fired fired booster heater is operated. Using the manufacturer
incorrect booster heater approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and perform
operation air intake routine - AHCM Operation Check (0x9013)
B1D34- Heater In Lock Fuel fired

68 Out Mode - booster heater NOTE: This DTC is for information only. Diagnose and
Event system fault rectify other fuel fired booster heater DTCs first
information
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
the DTCs and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check
(0x9013)
B1D63- External Fuel fired Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
11 Control Relay - booster heater the DTCs and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check
Circuit short to internal failure (0x9013). If the fault persists, install a new fuel fired
ground booster heater
B1D63- External Fuel fired Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
15 Control Relay - booster heater the DTCs and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check
Circuit short to internal failure (0x9013). If the fault persists, install a new fuel fired
battery or booster heater
open
U0010- Medium Speed Medium speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 CAN CAN bus circuit perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Communication short circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium speed
Bus - No sub ground, short CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
type circuit to power, power, open circuit, high resistance
information open circuit,
high resistance
U0028- Vehicle Medium speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
08 Communication CAN bus circuit perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Bus A - Bus short circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium speed
signal/message ground, short CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
failures circuit to power, power, open circuit, high resistance
open circuit,
high resistance
U0300- Internal Fuel fired Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
00 Control Module booster heater configure the fuel fired booster heater with the latest
Software is not configured level software
Incompatibility correctly
- No sub type
information
U2101- Control Module Car Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Configuration configuration file check and up-date the car configuration file as necessary
Incompatible - mismatch with
No sub type vehicle
U3000- Control Module Fuel fired Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
16 - Circuit booster heater check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage
voltage below power or ground (0xDD02). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
threshold circuit open check the fuel fired booster heater power and ground
circuit, high circuits for open circuit, high resistance
resistance Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Battery/charging test the battery and charging system
system fault
U3000- Control Module Battery/charging Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
17 - Circuit system fault check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage
voltage above (0xDD02). Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
threshold manual and test the battery and charging system
U3000- Control Module Fuel fired Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
43 - Special booster heater the DTCs and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check
memory failure internal failure (0x9013). If the fault persists, install a new fuel fired
booster heater
U3000- Control Module Fuel fired Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
49 - Internal booster heater the DTCs and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check
electronic internal failure (0x9013). If the fault persists, install a new fuel fired
failure booster heater
U3003- Battery Voltage Mismatch Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
62 - Signal between the check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage
compare failure voltage at the (0xDD02) - and compare it to battery voltage. Refer to
fuel fired the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuel fired
booster heater booster heater power and ground circuits for open circuit,
and the voltage high resistance
value broadcast
on the CAN bus
Gateway Module (GWM)
Gateway Module (GWM)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Gateway Module (GWM).
workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Charging System (414-00 Battery and Charging System - General
Information, Diagnosis and Testing).

B11DB- Battery Monitoring Battery
49 Module "A" - Internal monitoring NOTE: Disconnect the primary battery for 60
electronic failure system control seconds before continuing
module -
Internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
persists, install a new battery monitoring system
B11DB- Battery Monitoring Check the integrity of the battery monitoring

87 Module "A" - Missing NOTE: Circuit system control module connector and rectify as
message reference LIN 1 required. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the power supply circuit between the
LIN bus circuit battery positive terminal and the battery
fault monitoring system control module for short circuit
to ground, open circuit, high resistance. Repair
circuit as required. Clear DTC and retest
If fault persists, refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the LIN bus circuit between
the gateway module and the battery monitoring
system control module for short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance.
Repair circuit as required. Clear DTC and retest
If the fault persists, install a new battery
monitoring system control module as required
B13C5- Secondary Battery - Check the integrity of the secondary battery circuit
92 Performance or NOTE: Circuit connections at the battery terminals and at the
incorrect operation reference V BATT 2 power supply distribution box. Rectify as required
Secondary the power supply distribution box circuit for open
battery circuit, high resistance. Repair circuit as required.
connectors Clear DTC and retest
insecure Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
Power supply manual and test the secondary battery with the
distribution box manufacturer approved battery health testing tool.
circuit - Open Charge the secondary battery if necessary and
circuit, high retest. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
resistance system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Secondary persists, install a new power supply distribution
battery system box as required
fault
Charging system
fault
B1404- Charging System - Battery/charging Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

13 Circuit open system fault system, clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine
- Power Supply System Service Mode (0x2027). If
the fault persists, install a new generator
B1412- Quiescent Relay Box Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
09 - Component failures NOTE: Circuit the quiescent current control module power and
reference LIN 1 ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Quiescent the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
current control circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
module power Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
or ground system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
circuit(s) - Open persists, install a new quiescent current control
circuit, high module
resistance
LIN bus circuit -
Short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
Quiescent
current control
module -
Internal failure
B1412- Quiescent Relay Box Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
87 - Missing message NOTE: Circuit the LIN bus circuit between the gateway module
reference LIN 1 and the quiescent current control module for short
circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
LIN bus circuit - circuit, high resistance. Repair circuit as required.
Short circuit to Clear DTC and retest
ground, short If the fault persists, install a new quiescent current
circuit to power, control module as required
open circuit,
high resistance
Quiescent
current control
module -Internal
failure
B1412- Quiescent Relay Box Quiescent Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
96 - Component internal current control system, carry out the guided diagnostic routine -
failure module - Special applications/Battery/Quiescent relay box
Internal failure internal check diagnostic (0x2054) - Clear the DTC
and retest
If the fault persists, install a new quiescent current
B1479- Power Supply Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
08 Distribution Box - NOTE: Circuit the LIN bus circuit between the gateway module
Bus signal/message reference LIN 2 and the power supply distribution box for short
failures circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
LIN bus circuit - circuit, high resistance. Repair circuit as required
Short circuit to Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ground, short system, clear the DTCs, lock the vehicle and wait 2
circuit to power, minutes. Unlock the vehicle and retest. If the fault
open circuit, persists, install a new power supply distribution
high resistance box as required
Power supply
distribution box
- Internal failure
14 Distribution Box - NOTE: Circuit the power supply distribution box circuit for short
Circuit short to reference V BATT 2 circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance.
ground or open Repair circuit as required
Power supply Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
distribution box system, clear the DTCs, lock the vehicle and wait 2
circuit - Short minutes. Unlock the vehicle and retest. If the fault
circuit to persists, install a new power supply distribution
ground, open box as required
circuit, high
resistance
Power supply
distribution box
- Internal failure
Actuator stuck open reference V BATT 2 circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance.
Repair circuit as required
circuit, high
resistance
Power supply
distribution box
- Internal failure
Actuator stuck closed reference V BATT 2 circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance.
Repair circuit as required
circuit, high
resistance
Power supply
distribution box
- Internal failure
Component internal reference V BATT 2 circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance.
failure Repair circuit as required
circuit, high
resistance
Power supply
distribution box
- Internal failure
B1479- Power Supply Power supply Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
98 Distribution Box - distribution box the power supply distribution box circuit for short
Component or - Over circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance.
system over temperature Repair circuit as required
temperature event Allow the vehicle to cool. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs, lock
the vehicle and wait 2 minutes. Unlock the vehicle
and run the engine for 5 minutes with all electrical
loads on. If the fault persists, install a new power
supply distribution box as required
P0620- Generator Control Check the primary drive belt tension and rectify as
00 Circuit - No Sub Type NOTE: Circuit required
Information reference LIN 3 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the LIN bus circuit between the gateway module
Primary drive and the generator for short circuit to ground, short
belt - Incorrect circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance.
tension Repair circuit as required
LIN bus circuit - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Short circuit to system, perform routine - Power Supply System
ground, short Service Mode (0x2027). Clear the DTCs and retest.
circuit to power, If the fault persists, install a new generator as
open circuit, required
high resistance
Generator -
Internal failure
P065B- Generator Control

16 Circuit NOTE: Circuit NOTE: If P0620-00, P065C-01, P0A1A-87 or P0A3B-
Range/Performance - reference LIN 3 68 is/are also set, perform the relevant corrective
Circuit Voltage Below action(s) first
Threshold Primary battery
fault Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
LIN bus circuit - manual and test the primary battery
Short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground, short the LIN bus circuit between the gateway module
circuit to power, and the generator for short circuit to ground, short
open circuit, circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance.
high resistance Repair circuit as required. Clear DTC and retest
P065B- Generator Control NOTES:

17 Circuit NOTE: Circuit
Range/Performance - reference LIN 3
Circuit Voltage Above If P0620-00, P065C-01, P0A1A-87 or P0A3B-68
Threshold Primary battery is/are also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
connectors first
insecure
Generator
connectors This DTC may be set during jump starting and/or
insecure battery starting
LIN bus circuit -
Short circuit to Check the integrity of the primary battery
ground, short connectors and rectify as required
circuit to power, Check the integrity of the generator connectors
open circuit, and rectify as required
high resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the LIN bus circuit between the gateway module
and the generator for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance.
Repair circuit as required. Clear DTC and retest
P065C- Generator Mechanical Primary drive Check the primary drive belt tension and rectify as
01 Performance - belt - Incorrect required
General Electrical tension
Failure
P0A1A- Generator Control Check the integrity of the primary battery
87 Module - Missing NOTE: Circuit connectors and rectify as required
message reference LIN 3 Check the integrity of the generator connectors
and rectify as required
Primary battery Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
connectors the LIN bus circuit between the gateway module
insecure and the generator for short circuit to ground, short
Generator circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance.
connectors Repair circuit as required. Clear DTC and retest
insecure If the fault persists, install a new generator as
LIN bus circuit - required. Clear DTC and retest
Short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
Generator -
Internal failure
P0A3B- Generator Over Generator - Check generator wiring and connectors for
68 Temperature - Event Over evidence of heat damage. Investigate the cause of
information temperature generator over temperature event. Using the
event manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
the DTCs and retest
U0001- High Speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

88 Communication Bus - NOTE: Circuit system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Bus off reference HS CAN H / Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
HS CAN L the high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
High speed CAN resistance. Repair circuit as required. Clear DTC
bus circuit - and retest
Short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0010- Medium Speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

88 Communication Bus - NOTE: Circuit system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Bus off reference MS CAN H / Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
MS CAN L the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit
to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
Medium speed resistance. Repair circuit as required. Clear DTC
CAN bus circuit and retest
- Short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0300- Internal Control Gateway module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
46 Module Software is not configured system, reconfigure the gateway module with the
Incompatibility - correctly latest level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If
Calibration/parameter the fault persists, clear the DTCs, lock the vehicle
memory failure and wait 2 minutes. Unlock the vehicle and retest.
If the fault persists, install a new gateway module
as required
U1A14- CAN Initialisation Gateway module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Failure - No sub type power or ground the gateway module power and ground circuits for
information circuit(s) - Open open circuit, high resistance. Repair circuit as
circuit, high required. Clear DTC and retest
High speed CAN system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
bus circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Short circuit to the high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
ground, short ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
circuit to power, resistance. Repair circuit as required
open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
high resistance system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Medium speed Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
CAN bus circuit the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit
- Short circuit to to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
ground, short resistance. Repair circuit as required
open circuit, system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
high resistance persists, install a new gateway module as required
Gateway module
- Internal failure
U2100- Initial Configuration Central junction Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Not Complete - No box is not system, reconfigure the central junction box with
sub type information configured the latest level software
correctly Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Gateway module system, reconfigure the gateway module with the
is not configured latest level software
correctly
U3000- Control Module - Gateway module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
04 System internal - Internal failure system, reconfigure the gateway module with the
failures latest level software. Clear the DTCs, lock the
vehicle and wait 2 minutes. Unlock the vehicle and
retest. If the fault persists, install a new gateway
module as required
Headlamp Leveling Control Module (HLCM)
Headlamp Leveling Control Module (HLCM)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Headlamp Leveling Control
Module (HLCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing
For additional information, refer to: Headlamp Leveling (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1041- Leveling Headlamp Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
04 Control - leveling control the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
System module internal headlamp leveling control module
internal failure
failures
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Headlamp Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
83 Value of signal leveling control the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
protection module internal headlamp leveling control module
calculation failure
incorrect
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Headlamp Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
86 Signal invalid leveling control the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
module internal headlamp leveling control module
failure
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - LIN bus circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the LIN
88 bus off short circuit to bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
ground, short power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
B10AE- Headlamp Headlamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
11 Leveling Motor leveling motors headlamp leveling motors control circuit for short circuit
- Circuit short control circuit to ground
to ground short circuit to
ground
B10AE- Headlamp Headlamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
12 Leveling Motor leveling motors headlamp leveling motors control circuit for short circuit
- Circuit short control circuit to power
to battery short circuit to
power
B10AE- Headlamp Headlamp Disconnect both headlamps. Using the manufacturer

64 Leveling Motor leveling circuits approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest.
- Signal open circuit, DTC B10AE-64 set: Refer to the electrical circuit
plausibility high resistance diagrams and test the headlamp leveling control circuit
failure for open circuit, high resistance. DTC B10AE-64 not set:
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
headlamp leveling actuator power and ground circuits for
B1D64- Left Headlamp Left headlamp Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
01 Swivelling swivelling motor the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, temporarily
Motor - internal failure swap the headlamps. Clear the DTCs and retest. If DTC
General B1D65-01 is now set, install a new left headlamp
electrical
failure
Motor - System internal failure swap the headlamps. Clear the DTCs and retest. If DTC
internal B1D65-04 is now set, install a new left headlamp
failures
B1D64- Left Headlamp Left headlamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the left
87 Swivelling swivelling motor headlamp swivelling motor power and ground circuits for
Motor - Missing power or ground open circuit, high resistance
message circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
circuit, high the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, temporarily
resistance swap the headlamps. Clear the DTCs and retest. If DTC
Left headlamp B1D65-87 is now set, install a new left headlamp
swivelling motor
internal failure
B1D65- Right Right headlamp Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
01 Headlamp swivelling motor the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, temporarily
Swivelling internal failure swap the headlamps. Clear the DTCs and retest. If DTC
Motor - B1D64-01 is now set, install a new right headlamp
General
electrical
failure
Motor - System B1D64-04 is now set, install a new right headlamp
internal
failures
B1D65- Right Right headlamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the right
87 Headlamp swivelling motor headlamp swivelling motor power and ground circuits for
Swivelling power or ground open circuit, high resistance
Motor - Missing circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
message circuit, high the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, temporarily
resistance swap the headlamps. Clear the DTCs and retest. If DTC
Right headlamp B1D64-87 is now set, install a new right headlamp
swivelling motor
internal failure
Feedback internal failure swap the headlamps. Clear the DTCs and retest. If DTC
Sensor - No B1D69-00 is now set, install a new left headlamp
sub type
information
Feedback B1D68-00 is now set, install a new right headlamp
Sensor - No
sub type
information
U0001- High Speed High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
88 CAN bus circuit short perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Communication circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed CAN
Bus - Bus off ground, short bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
circuit to power, power, open circuit, high resistance
open circuit,
high resistance
00 Communication control module transmission control module power and ground circuits
with power or ground for open circuit, high resistance
Transmission circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Control Module circuit, high perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
- No sub type resistance electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed CAN
information High speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
bus circuit short power, open circuit, high resistance
ground, short check the transmission control module for related DTCs
circuit to power, and refer to the relevant DTC index
open circuit,
high resistance
Transmission
system fault
00 Communication control module transfer case control module power and ground circuits
with Transfer power or ground for open circuit, high resistance
Case Control circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Module - No circuit, high perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
sub type resistance electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed CAN
ground, short check the transfer case control module for related DTCs
open circuit,
high resistance
Transfer case
system fault
U0121- Lost Anti-lock brake Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Communication system control anti-lock brake system control module power and ground
With ABS module power circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Control Module or ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
- No sub type open circuit, perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
information high resistance electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed CAN
High speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
ground, short check the anti-lock brake system control module for
circuit to power, related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
open circuit,
high resistance
Anti-lock brake
system fault
U0126- Lost Steering angle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Communication sensor module steering angle sensor module power and ground circuits
With Steering power or ground for open circuit, high resistance
Angle Sensor circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Module - No circuit, high perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
sub type resistance electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed CAN
ground, short check the steering angle sensor module for related DTCs
open circuit,
high resistance
Steering angle
sensor system
fault
U0132- Lost Air suspension Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the air
00 Communication control module suspension control module power and ground circuits for
With power or ground open circuit, high resistance
Suspension circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Control Module circuit, high perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
"A" - No sub resistance electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed CAN
type High speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
information bus circuit short power, open circuit, high resistance
ground, short check the air suspension control module for related DTCs
open circuit,
high resistance
Air suspension
system fault
00 Communication box power or central junction box power and ground circuits for open
With Body ground circuit circuit, high resistance
Control Module open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
- No sub type high resistance perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
information High speed CAN electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed CAN
bus circuit short bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
circuit to power, check the central junction box for related DTCs and refer
open circuit, to the relevant DTC index
high resistance
Central junction
box system fault
U0300- Internal Car Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,

00 Control Module configuration file check and up-date the car configuration file as necessary
Software mismatch with Install a new headlamp leveling control module as
Incompatibility vehicle necessary
- No sub type specification Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
information Incorrect configure the headlamp leveling control module and the
headlamp central junction box with the latest level software. If the
leveling control software levels are already correct, install a new
module installed headlamp leveling control module
Headlamp
leveling control
module or
central junction
box is not
configured
correctly
00 Received From data from the check the transmission control module for related DTCs
Transmission transmission and refer to the relevant DTC index
Control Module control module
- No sub type
information
00 Received From data from the check the transfer case control module for related DTCs
Transfer Case transfer case and refer to the relevant DTC index
- No sub type
information
00 Received From data from the check the anti-lock brake system control module for
Anti-Lock anti-lock brake related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Braking system control
System Control module
Module - No
sub type
information
00 Received from data from the check the air suspension control module for related DTCs
Suspension air suspension and refer to the relevant DTC index
A - No sub
type
information
00 Received From data from the check the central junction box for related DTCs and refer
Body Control central junction to the relevant DTC index
Module - No box
sub type
information
00 Received From data from the check the steering angle sensor module for related DTCs
Steering Angle steering angle and refer to the relevant DTC index
Sensor Module sensor module
- No sub type
information
U2100- Initial Car Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Not Complete - information not
No sub type received
information completely
Incompatible - information
No sub type incompatible
information with the
headlamp
leveling control
module
U3002- Vehicle Stored vehicle Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
81 Identification identification check and up-date the car configuration file as necessary
Number - number does
Invalid serial not match most
data received recent vehicle
identification
number
U3003- Battery Voltage Headlamp Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
16 - Circuit leveling control check datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage
voltage below module power (0xD111). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
threshold or ground circuit the headlamp leveling control module power and ground
open circuit, circuits for open circuit, high resistance
high resistance Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Battery/charging test the battery and charging system
system fault
U3003- Battery Voltage Battery/charging Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
17 - Circuit system fault check datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage
voltage above (0xD111). Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
62 - Signal between the check datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage
compare failure voltage at the (0xD111) - and compare it to battery voltage. Refer to
headlamp the electrical circuit diagrams and check the headlamp
leveling control leveling control module power and ground circuits for
module and the open circuit, high resistance
voltage value
broadcast on
the CAN bus
Instrument Cluster (IC)
Instrument Cluster (IC)
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Instrument Cluster (IC). For
manual.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1009- Ignition Authorisation Instrument Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 - Not programmed cluster is not system, re-configure the instrument cluster with
configured the latest level software
correctly
B1009- Ignition Authorisation Instrument Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

87 - Missing message cluster is not system, re-configure the instrument cluster with
configured the latest level software
correctly
B100D- Column Lock Request to lock Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Authorisation - Signal or unlock system, check the engine control module for
plausibility failure electric steering related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
column lock has
failed due to
engine speed or
vehicle speed
B1026- Steering Column Lock Electric steering Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
12 - Circuit short to column lock the electric steering column lock ground circuit for
battery ground circuit short circuit to power
short circuit to
power
B1026- Steering Column Lock Electric steering Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
63 - Circuit/component column lock the electric steering column lock ground circuit for
protection time-out ground circuit short circuit to power
short circuit to
power
B1A14- RCM Warning Lamp - Instrument Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
96 Component internal cluster internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure failure - persists, install a new instrument cluster
Supplementary
restraint system
light emitting
diode circuit
failure
B1A68- Ambient Temperature Instrument Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

86 Sensor - Signal cluster internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
invalid failure - Internal persists, install a new instrument cluster
temperature
sensor signal is
out of
range/invalid
B1A85- Ambient Light Sensor Instrument Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
96 - Component internal cluster internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure failure - Internal persists, install a new instrument cluster
light sensor
failure
P0610- Control Module Instrument Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

55 Vehicle Options Error cluster is not system, re-configure the instrument cluster with
- Not configured configured the latest level software
correctly
U0001- High Speed CAN High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
88 Communication Bus - bus circuit short system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Bus off circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground, short the high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
circuit to power, ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
high resistance
circuit to power, to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
high resistance
U0100- Lost Communication Engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With ECM/PCM "A" - module power the engine control module power and ground
No sub type or ground circuit circuits for open circuit, high resistance
information open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
High speed CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
bus circuit short the high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
open circuit, system, check the engine control module for
high resistance related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Engine system
fault
U0101- Lost Communication Transmission Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 with TCM - No sub control module the transmission control module power and ground
type information power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit, high system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
High speed CAN the high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
bus circuit short ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
circuit to resistance
ground, short Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit to power, system, check the transmission control module for
open circuit, related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
high resistance
Transmission
system fault
U0102- Lost Communication Transfer case Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 with Transfer Case control module the transfer case control module power and ground
Control Module - No power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
sub type information circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit to power, system, check the transfer case control module for
high resistance
Transfer case
system fault
U0104- Lost Communication Speed control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Cruise Control module power the speed control module power and ground
Module - No sub type or ground circuit circuits for open circuit, high resistance
open circuit, system, check the speed control module for related
Speed control
system fault
U0121- Lost Communication Anti-lock brake Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Anti-Lock Brake system control the anti-lock brake system control module power
System (ABS) module power and ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Control Module - No or ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
sub type information open circuit, system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
circuit to power, system, check the anti-lock brake system control
open circuit, module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
Anti-lock brake
system fault
U0126- Lost Communication Steering angle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Steering Angle sensor module the steering angle sensor module power and
Sensor Module - No power or ground ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
circuit to power, system, check the steering angle sensor module for
high resistance
Steering angle
sensor system
fault
U0128- Lost Communication Electric park Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Park Brake brake control the electric park brake control module power and
Control Module - No module power ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
sub type information or ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
open circuit, system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
circuit to power, system, check the electric park brake control
Electric park
brake system
fault
U0132- Lost Communication Air suspension Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Suspension control module the air suspension control module power and
Control Module "A" - power or ground ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
No sub type circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information circuit, high system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
circuit to power, system, check the air suspension control module
open circuit, for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
high resistance index
Air suspension
system fault
U0133- Lost Communication Dynamic Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Active Roll response control the dynamic response control module power and
Control Module - No module power ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
sub type information or ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit to power, system, check the dynamic response control
Dynamic
response system
fault
U0136- Lost Communication Rear differential Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Differential control module the rear differential control module power and
Control Module - power or ground ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Rear - No sub type circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit to power, system, check the rear differential control module
open circuit, for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
high resistance index
Rear differential
system fault
U0138- Lost Communication Terrain response Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 with All Terrain switchpack the terrain response switchpack power and ground
circuit to power, system, check the terrain response switchpack for
high resistance
Terrain response
system fault
U0139- Lost Communication Adaptive Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
08 With Suspension damping system the adaptive damping system control module
Control Module "B" - control module power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
Bus signal/message power or ground resistance
failures circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit to power, system, check the adaptive damping system
open circuit, control module for related DTCs and refer to the
high resistance relevant DTC index
Adaptive
damping system
fault
U0140- Lost Communication Central junction Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Body Control box power or the central junction box power and ground circuits
Module - No sub type ground circuit for open circuit, high resistance
short circuit to to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
open circuit, system, check the central junction box for related
Central junction
box system fault
Module "A" - No sub ground circuit for open circuit, high resistance
type information open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
open circuit, system, check the central junction box for related
Central junction
box system fault
U0151- Lost Communication Restraints Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Restraints control module the restraints control module power and ground
circuit to power, system, check the restraints control module for
high resistance
Restraints
system fault
U0159- Lost Communication Parking aid Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Parking Assist control module the parking aid control module power and ground
Control Module "A" - power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
No sub type circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Medium speed the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit
CAN bus circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
short circuit to resistance
circuit to power, system, check the parking aid control module for
high resistance
Parking aid
system fault
U0164- Lost Communication Automatic Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With HVAC Control temperature the automatic temperature control module power
Module - No sub type control module and ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
information power or ground Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit open system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
resistance the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit
Medium speed to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
CAN bus circuit resistance
short circuit to Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ground, short system, check the automatic temperature control
circuit to power, module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
open circuit, DTC index
high resistance
Automatic
temperature
control system
fault
U0184- Lost Communication Integrated audio Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Radio - No sub module / audio the integrated audio module / audio head unit
type information head unit power power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
or ground circuit resistance
open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
open circuit, system, check the integrated audio module / audio
high resistance head unit for related DTCs and refer to the
Integrated audio relevant DTC index
module / audio
head unit
system fault
U0208- Lost Communication Driver seat Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With "Seat Control control module the driver seat control module power and ground
Module A" - No sub power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
type information circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit to power, system, check the driver seat control module for
high resistance
Driver seat
system fault
U0214- Lost Communication Keyless vehicle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Remote module power the keyless vehicle module power and ground
Function Actuation - or ground circuit circuits for open circuit, high resistance
No sub type open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information high resistance system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
open circuit, system, check the keyless vehicle module for
high resistance related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Keyless vehicle
system fault
U0241- Lost Communication Headlamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Headlamp leveling control the headlamp leveling control module power and
Control Module "A" - module power ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
No sub type or ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information open circuit, system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
circuit to power, system, check the headlamp leveling control
Headlamp
leveling system
fault
U0242- Lost Communication Rear view Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Headlamp mirror power or the rear view mirror power and ground circuits for
Control Module "B" - ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
No sub type open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information high resistance system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
open circuit, system, check the rear view mirror for related
Rear view
mirror fault
U025D- Lost Communication Integrated Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Front Controls control panel the integrated control panel power and ground
Interface Module "B" power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
- No sub type circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit to power, system, check the integrated control panel for
high resistance
Integrated
control panel
fault
U0264- Lost Communication Proximity Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Camera Module- camera control the proximity camera control module power and
Rear - No sub type module power ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
information or ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit to power, system, check the proximity camera control
Proximity
camera system
fault
U0300- Internal Control Instrument Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

00 Module Software cluster system, check for other modules reporting CAN
Incompatibility - No expulsion from bus off or lost communication faults. If other
sub type information network modules report problems, check the software
management version in the central junction box. If no other
modules report problems, re-configure the
instrument cluster with the latest level software
U0402- Invalid Data Received Missing/invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
68 from TCM - Event data from the system, check the transmission control module for
information transmission related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
control module
U2013- Switch Pack - General Steering wheel Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
02 signal failure left switchpack system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
internal failure persists, install a new steering wheel left
switchpack
U2013- Switch Pack - Bus Steering wheel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
08 signal/message left switchpack the steering wheel left switchpack power and
failures power or ground ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
LIN bus circuit
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U3000- Control Module - Instrument Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

46 Calibration/parameter cluster internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
memory failure failure - persists, install a new instrument cluster
Odometer
storage
corrupted

49 Internal electronic cluster internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure failure - Internal persists, install a new instrument cluster
memory
corrupted
U3000- Control Module - Not Incorrect Install the correct wheels and tires
55 configured wheels/tires Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
installed system, check and up-date the car configuration
Tire size file as necessary
compensation is
incorrectly
configured
U3000- Control Module - Car Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

87 Missing message configuration file system, check and up-date the car configuration
mismatch with file as necessary
vehicle
specification
U3002- Vehicle Identification Instrument Install the original or a new instrument cluster as
81 Number - Invalid cluster necessary
serial data received previously Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
installed on system, perform routine - Learn VIN (0x0404)
another vehicle
New instrument
cluster installed
and VIN not yet
programmed

16 Circuit voltage below cluster power or system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply
threshold ground circuit Voltage (0xDD02). Refer to the electrical circuit
open circuit, diagrams and check the instrument cluster power
high resistance and ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
U3003- Control Module - Battery/charging Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

17 Circuit voltage above system fault system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply
threshold Voltage (0xDD02). Refer to the relevant section of
the workshop manual and test the battery and
charging system
U3003- Control Module - Mismatch Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

62 Signal compare between the system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply
failure voltage at the Voltage (0xDD02) - and compare it to battery
instrument voltage. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
cluster and the check the instrument cluster power and ground
voltage value circuits for open circuit, high resistance
broadcast on
the CAN bus
Integrated Audio Module (IAM) - High Line
Integrated Audio Module (IAM)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adaptor kit,
NOTES:
places, and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Integrated Audio Module
(IAM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the
workshop manual.

B119F- GPS Antenna - Circuit Confirm that the navigation antenna is connected to
11 short to ground NOTE: Circuit the integrated audio module
reference Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
GPS_SIGNAL navigation antenna circuit for short circuit to ground
Navigation
antenna not
connected to
the integrated
audio module
Navigation
antenna circuit
short circuit to
ground
B119F- GPS Antenna - Circuit

13 open NOTE: Circuit NOTE: This DTC may be set even though no fault
reference condition is present and should be ignored unless the
GPS_SIGNAL customer has reported a navigation system concern. Clear
the DTC and retest. Verify the customer concern prior to
Navigation diagnosis
antenna not
connected to Confirm that the navigation antenna is connected to
the integrated the integrated audio module
audio module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Navigation navigation antenna circuit for open circuit, high
antenna circuit resistance
open circuit,
high resistance
B11A3- Gyroscope - Internal Integrated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
49 electronic failures audio module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
internal a new integrated audio module
gyroscope
failure
B121C- Hard Drive - Circuit Integrated

13 open audio module NOTE: This DTC may be set even though no fault
internal hard condition is present and should be ignored unless the
drive customer has reported a navigation system concern. Clear
communication the DTC and retest. Verify the customer concern prior to
failure diagnosis

clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, re-
configure the integrated audio module with the latest
level software. Insert a CD and copy one track to
the hard drive to confirm correct operation. Return
vehicle to standard settings and delete the file. If
the fault persists, install a new integrated audio
module
B121C- Hard Drive - Internal Integrated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
49 electronic failures audio module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, re-
internal hard configure the integrated audio module with the latest
drive failure level software. Insert a CD and copy one track to
the hard drive to confirm correct operation. Return
vehicle to standard settings and delete the file. If
the fault persists, install a new integrated audio
module
B1252- USB Port - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
09 Component failures NOTE: Circuit USB circuits for short circuit to ground, short circuit
reference USB_5B / to power, open circuit, high resistance. Using the
USB_DATA_POS / manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
USB_DATA_NEG / DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
USB_DATA_GND / integrated audio module
USB_SCR
No USB
function
B1252- USB Port - Circuit Excessive Disconnect all universal serial bus devices. Connect a
19 current above current drawn test universal serial bus memory stick. Using the
threshold by a universal manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform
serial bus routine - USB Connector Test (0x6018). If the fault
device persists, install a new integrated audio module
B1296- Navigation Map Data Navigation

4A - Incorrect map does not NOTE: This DTC may be set even though no fault
component installed match the condition is present and should be ignored unless the
market of the customer has reported a navigation system concern. Clear
vehicle the DTC and retest. Verify the customer concern prior to
diagnosis
Update the map data as necessary. Using the

manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
level software. Check and up-date the car
configuration file as necessary. Clear the DTCs and
retest. If the fault persists, install a new integrated
audio module
B1A56- Antenna - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 short to ground NOTE: Circuit AM/FM antenna amplifier circuit for short circuit to
reference AM_FM ground. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
AM/FM persists, install a new integrated audio module
antenna
amplifier
circuit short
circuit to
ground
B1A56- Antenna - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
13 open NOTE: Circuit AM/FM antenna amplifier circuit for open circuit, high
reference AM_FM resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
AM/FM fault persists, install a new integrated audio module
antenna
amplifier
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
B1D50- Digital Disk Player - Integrated

07 Mechanical failures audio module NOTE: This DTC may be set even though no fault
internal failure condition is present and should be ignored unless the
customer has reported a navigation system concern. Clear
diagnosis
Perform basic visual inspection for foreign matter

inside disk player. Remove foreign matter if
possible. Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest with
multiple disks. If the fault persists, install a new
integrated audio module
B1D55- Antenna#2 - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 short to ground NOTE: Circuit FM/TMC antenna amplifier circuit for short circuit to
reference FM2 ground. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
FM/TMC persists, install a new integrated audio module
antenna
amplifier
circuit short
circuit to
ground
B1D55- Antenna#2 - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
13 open NOTE: Circuit FM/TMC antenna amplifier circuit for open circuit,
reference FM2 high resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
FM/TMC fault persists, install a new integrated audio module
antenna
amplifier
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
B1D57- Antenna#4 Circuit - VICS antenna

11 Circuit short to circuit short NOTE: Vehicle Information and Communication
ground circuit to System (VICS) is a type of Traffic Message Channel system
ground used in the Japan market only

VICS antenna circuit for short circuit to ground.
a new integrated audio module
B1D57- Antenna#4 Circuit - VICS antenna

13 Circuit open circuit open NOTE: Vehicle Information and Communication
circuit, high System (VICS) is a type of Traffic Message Channel system
resistance used in the Japan market only

VICS antenna circuit for open circuit, high
resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
fault persists, install a new integrated audio module
B1D78- Auxiliary Input - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit auxiliary input 1 circuit for short circuit to ground.
ground reference AUX1 L+ / Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
AUX1 R+ / AUX1 LR- clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
Auxiliary input
1 circuit short
circuit to
ground
B1D78- Auxiliary Input - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit auxiliary input 1 circuit for open circuit, high
reference AUX1 L+ / resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
AUX1 R+ / AUX1 LR- diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
Auxiliary input
1 circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
B1D79- Microphone Input - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit microphone 1 circuit for short circuit to ground.
ground reference MIC_1_POS Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
/ MIC_1_NEG clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
Microphone 1
circuit short
circuit to
ground
B1D79- Microphone Input - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit microphone 1 circuit for open circuit, high resistance.
reference MIC_1_POS Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
/ MIC_1_NEG clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
Microphone 1
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
P150E- Electronic Control Integrated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Module Cooling Fan audio module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
Circuit - No sub type internal failure a new integrated audio module
information
U2005- Vehicle Speed - Anti-lock brake NOTES:
62 Signal compare system control
failure module power
or ground This DTC may be set when the vehicle is being
circuit open transported
circuit, high
resistance
High speed This DTC may be set even though no fault condition is
CAN bus present and should be ignored unless the customer has
circuit short reported a navigation system concern. Clear the DTC and
circuit to retest. Verify the customer concern prior to diagnosis
ground, short
circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
power, open anti-lock brake system control module power and
circuit, high ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
MOST network perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
failure - Speed electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed
signal CAN bus circuits for short circuit to ground, short
broadcast is circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
not received Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
by the manual and test the MOST network
integrated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
audio module check the anti-lock brake system control module for
Anti-lock brake related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index.
system fault Clear the DTCs and retest
U200D- Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 Output Power A - NOTE: Circuit AM/FM antenna amplifier circuit for short circuit to
Circuit short to reference ground. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ground ANTENNA_AMP system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new integrated audio module
AM/FM
antenna
amplifier
circuit short
circuit to
ground
U200D- Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
13 Output Power A - AM/FM antenna amplifier circuit for open circuit, high
NOTE: Circuit
Circuit open reference resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
ANTENNA_AMP diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
AM/FM
antenna
amplifier
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
U2100- Initial Configuration Medium speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Not Complete - No CAN bus perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
sub type information circuit short electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium
power, open check the touch screen for related DTCs and refer to
circuit, high the relevant DTC index
resistance Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
Touch screen manual and test the MOST network
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
MOST network check and up-date the car configuration file as
failure necessary
Integrated
audio module
is not
configured
correctly
U2101- Control Module Medium speed NOTES:

00 Configuration CAN bus
Incompatible - No circuit short
sub type information circuit to Only applicable to the Japanese market
ground, short
circuit to
power, open This DTC may be set even though no fault condition is
circuit, high present and should be ignored unless the customer has
resistance reported a navigation system concern. Clear the DTC and
Touch screen retest. Verify the customer concern prior to diagnosis
internal failure
MOST network Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
failure perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Integrated electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium
audio module speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
is not short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
configured Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
correctly check the touch screen for related DTCs and refer to
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
manual and test the MOST network
check and up-date the car configuration file as
necessary
U2200- Control Module Integrated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
41 Configuration audio module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, re-
Memory Corrupt - internal failure configure the integrated audio module with the latest
General checksum level software. If the fault persists, install a new
failure integrated audio module
U2200- Control Module Integrated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
44 Configuration audio module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, re-
Memory Corrupt - internal failure configure the integrated audio module with the latest
Data memory failure level software. If the fault persists, install a new
U3000- Control Module - Integrated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
41 General checksum audio module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, re-
failure internal failure configure the integrated audio module with the latest
level software. If the fault persists, install a new
45 Program memory audio module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, re-
U3000- Control Module - Integrated

46 Calibration/parameter audio module NOTE: This DTC may be set even though no fault
memory failure internal failure condition is present and should be ignored unless the
customer has reported a navigation system concern. Clear
diagnosis

49 Internal electronic audio module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, re-
U3000- Control Module - Incorrect Check that the installed hardware is correct
4A Incorrect component hardware or Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
installed software re-configure the integrated audio module with the
detected latest level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If
Integrated the fault persists, install a new integrated audio
audio module module
internal failure
U3000- Control Module - Ventilation

98 Component or ducts NOTE: Allow vehicle to cool before performing any
system over obstructed diagnostic steps. Move vehicle into shade and operate
temperature Integrated climate control on a cool setting
audio module
internal failure Check the ventilation ducts for obstructions
U3003- Battery Voltage - Mismatch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
62 Signal compare between the integrated audio module power and ground circuits
failure voltage at the for open circuit, high resistance
integrated
audio module
and the
voltage value
broadcast on
the CAN bus
Integrated Control Panel (ICP)
Integrated Control Panel (ICP)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Integrated Control Panel
(ICP). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the
workshop manual.

U0010- Medium Speed CAN Medium speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
88 Communication Bus CAN bus circuit perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
- Bus off short circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium
ground, short speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
circuit to power, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
open circuit,
high resistance
With Body Control ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
Module - No sub open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
type information high resistance perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Medium speed electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium
CAN bus circuit speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
short circuit to short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
high resistance
Central junction
box system fault
U0155- Lost Instrument Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Communication cluster power or instrument cluster power and ground circuits for
With Instrument ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
Panel Cluster (IPC) open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Control Module - No high resistance perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
sub type Medium speed electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium
information CAN bus circuit speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
circuit to power, check the instrument cluster for related DTCs and
high resistance
Instrument
cluster system
fault
U0164- Lost Automatic Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Communication temperature automatic temperature control module power and
With HVAC Control control module ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Module - No sub power or ground Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
type information circuit open perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
circuit, high electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium
CAN bus circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
short circuit to check the automatic temperature control module for
ground, short related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
Automatic
temperature
control system
fault
U0166- Lost Car Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,

00 Communication configuration file check and up-date the car configuration file as
With Auxiliary mismatch with necessary
Heater Control vehicle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Module - No sub specification fuel fired booster heater power and ground circuits
type information Fuel fired for open circuit, high resistance
booster heater Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
power or ground perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
circuit open electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium
circuit, high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
Medium speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
CAN bus circuit check the fuel fired booster heater for related DTCs
short circuit to and refer to the relevant DTC index
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
Fuel fired
booster heater
system fault
U0300- Internal Control Car Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Module Software configuration file check and up-date the car configuration file as
Incompatibility - No mismatch with necessary
sub type vehicle Install a new integrated control panel as necessary
Incorrect
integrated
control panel
installed
68 Received From data from the check the automatic temperature control module for
HVAC Control automatic related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Module - Event temperature
U2002- Switch - Signal Integrated Test the operation of the integrated control panel
24 stuck high control panel switches
switch stuck Install a new integrated control panel as necessary
active
Integrated
control panel
internal failure
U2100- Initial Configuration Integrated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Not Complete - No control panel is re-configure the integrated control panel with the
sub type not configured latest level software
information correctly
00 Configuration configuration file check and up-date the car configuration file as
Incompatible - No mismatch with necessary
sub type vehicle Install a new integrated control panel as necessary
Incorrect
integrated
control panel
installed
41 General checksum control panel clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
failure internal failure a new integrated control panel
U3003- Battery Voltage - Mismatch Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
62 Signal compare between the check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage
failure voltage at the (0xDD02) - and compare it to battery voltage. Refer
integrated to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
control panel integrated control panel power and ground circuits
and the voltage for open circuit, high resistance
value broadcast
on the CAN bus
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Rear
Integrated Control Panel (RICP)
Integrated Control Panel B (ICPB)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Integrated Control Panel B
(ICPB). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in

B1A85- Ambient Light Ambient light
11 Sensor - sensor failure NOTE: The ambient light sensor and circuits are integral to
Circuit short to the integrated control panel B
ground
Clear the DTC and re-test. Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, check datalogger signal - Ambient Sensor
Voltage (0x721C). Check that the voltage decreases when
the sensor is covered and increases when a light source is
directed into the sensor. If the sensor voltage does not
change with varying light intensity install a new integrated
control panel B as necessary
B1A85- Ambient Light Ambient light

12 Sensor - sensor failure NOTE: The ambient light sensor and circuits are integral to
Circuit short to the integrated control panel B
battery
Clear the DTC and re-test. Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, check datalogger signal - Ambient Sensor
Voltage (0x721C). Check that the voltage decreases when
the sensor is covered and increases when a light source is
directed into the sensor. If the sensor voltage does not
change with varying light intensity install a new integrated
control panel B as necessary
U0010- Medium Speed Medium Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform
88 CAN speed CAN a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Communication bus circuit diagrams and check the medium speed CAN bus circuit for
Bus - Bus off short circuit short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
to ground, high resistance
short circuit
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
U0140- Lost Central Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the central
00 communication junction box junction box power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
with body power or resistance
control module ground Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform
- No sub type circuit open a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
information circuit, high diagrams and check the medium speed CAN bus circuit for
resistance short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
Medium high resistance
speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
bus circuit the central junction box for related DTCs and refer to the
short circuit relevant DTC index
to ground,
short circuit
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
Central
junction box
system fault
U0256- Lost Integrated

00 Communication control panel NOTE: This DTC relates to the compact disc eject switch
With Front power or
Controls ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Interface circuit open integrated control panel power and ground circuits for open
Module "A" - circuit, high circuit, high resistance
No sub type resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform
information Medium a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
speed CAN diagrams and check the medium speed CAN bus circuit for
bus circuit short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
short circuit high resistance
to ground, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
short circuit the integrated control panel for related DTCs and refer to the
to power, relevant DTC index
open circuit,
high
resistance
Integrated
control panel
system fault
U0300- Internal Incorrect Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
00 Control Module integrated the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Software control panel integrated control panel B
Incompatibility B installed
- No sub type
information
U2002- Switch - Signal Integrated Test operation of all integrated control panel B switches.
24 stuck high control panel Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
B switch integrated control panel B
stuck active
U3000- Control Module Integrated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
41 - General control panel the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
checksum B internal integrated control panel B
failure failure
U3003- Battery Voltage Mismatch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
62 - Signal between the integrated control panel B power and ground circuits for
compare failure voltage at open circuit, high resistance
the
integrated
control panel
B and the
voltage value
broadcast on
the CAN bus
Keyless Vehicle Module (KVM)
Keyless Vehicle Module (KVM)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Keyless Vehicle Module
(KVM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the
workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).

B102B- Passive Key - No Smart key is not
00 sub type configured NOTE: This DTC is set if an invalid smart key is
information correctly detected when the stop/start switch is operated

configure the smart key with the latest level software
B10A9- Remote Keyless Secret key has Clear DTC and retest. If the fault persists, configure
00 Entry Less Than 2 been the key fobs using the manufacturers approved
Keys Programmed programmed to diagnostic system
- No sub type the vehicle but
information less than 2 key
fobs have been
programmed
B10C1- Left Front Unlock Front left Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
15 Pull Switch - Short exterior door front left exterior door handle power and ground
circuit to battery handle power or circuits for open circuit, high resistance
or open ground circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
open circuit, front left exterior door handle unlock switch circuit for
high resistance short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Front left Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
exterior door clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
handle unlock a new front left exterior door handle
switch circuit
short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Front left
exterior door
handle internal
failure
B10C1- Left Front Unlock Front left Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Pull Switch - exterior door front left exterior door handle unlock switch circuit for
Signal stuck low handle unlock short circuit to ground
switch circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
short circuit to clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
ground a new front left exterior door handle
Front left
exterior door
handle internal
failure
B10C2- Left Rear Unlock Rear left exterior Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
15 Pull Switch - Short door handle rear left exterior door handle power and ground
circuit to battery power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
or open circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
circuit, high rear left exterior door handle unlock switch circuit for
Rear left exterior Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
door handle clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
unlock switch a new rear left exterior door handle
circuit short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
Rear left exterior
door handle
internal failure
B10C2- Left Rear Unlock Rear left exterior Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Pull Switch - door handle rear left exterior door handle unlock switch circuit for
Signal stuck low unlock switch short circuit to ground
circuit to ground clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
Rear left exterior a new rear left exterior door handle
door handle
internal failure
B10C3- Right Front Unlock Front right Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
15 Pull Switch - Short exterior door front right exterior door handle power and ground
open circuit, front right exterior door handle unlock switch circuit
high resistance for short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Front right Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
handle unlock a new front right exterior door handle
switch circuit
short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Front right
exterior door
handle internal
failure
B10C3- Right Front Unlock Front right Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Pull Switch - exterior door front right exterior door handle unlock switch circuit
Signal stuck low handle unlock for short circuit to ground
ground a new front right exterior door handle
Front right
exterior door
handle internal
failure
B10C4- Right Rear Unlock Rear right Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
15 Pull Switch - Short exterior door rear right exterior door handle power and ground
open circuit, rear right exterior door handle unlock switch circuit
high resistance for short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Rear right Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
handle unlock a new rear right exterior door handle
switch circuit
short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Rear right
exterior door
handle internal
failure
B10C4- Right Rear Unlock Rear right Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Pull Switch - exterior door rear right exterior door handle unlock switch circuit
Signal stuck low handle unlock for short circuit to ground
ground a new rear right exterior door handle
Rear right
exterior door
handle internal
failure
B10C5- Trunk Unlock Pull Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Switch - Signal NOTE: Circuit upper tailgate exterior switch circuit for short circuit
stuck low reference EXT BOOT to ground
RELEASE SW Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Upper tailgate a new upper tailgate exterior switch
exterior switch
circuit short
circuit to ground
Upper tailgate
exterior switch
internal failure
B10C6- Exterior Trunk Tailgate exterior

00 Antenna - No sub low frequency NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit
type information antenna circuit to power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective
short circuit to action(s) first
ground, short
circuit to power Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On
Demand Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer
to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
tailgate exterior low frequency antenna circuit for
short circuit to ground, short circuit to power

11 Antenna - Circuit low frequency NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit
short to ground antenna circuit to power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective
short circuit to action(s) first
ground, short
circuit between Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
positive and clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On
negative Demand Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer
short circuit to ground, short circuit between positive
and negative
B10C6- Exterior Trunk Tailgate exterior Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
12 Antenna - Circuit low frequency clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On
short to battery antenna circuit Demand Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer
short circuit to to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
power tailgate exterior low frequency antenna circuit for

13 Antenna - Circuit low frequency NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit
open antenna circuit to power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective
open circuit, action(s) first
high resistance
B10C7- Interior Trunk Passenger

00 Antenna - No sub compartment NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit
type information left low to power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective
frequency action(s) first
antenna circuit
ground, short clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On
circuit to power Demand Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer
passenger compartment left low frequency antenna
circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
power

11 Antenna - Circuit compartment NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit
short to ground left low to power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective
antenna circuit
circuit between Demand Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer
positive and to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
negative passenger compartment left low frequency antenna
between positive and negative
B10C7- Interior Trunk Passenger Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
12 Antenna - Circuit compartment clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On
short to battery left low Demand Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer
frequency to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
antenna circuit passenger compartment left low frequency antenna
short circuit to circuit for short circuit to power
power

open left low to power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective
antenna circuit
high resistance clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On
passenger compartment left low frequency antenna
circuit for open circuit, high resistance
B10C8- Interior Center Passenger

type information right low to power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective
antenna circuit
passenger compartment right low frequency antenna
power

short to ground right low to power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective
antenna circuit
negative passenger compartment right low frequency antenna
B10C8- Interior Center Passenger Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
short to battery right low Demand Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer
antenna circuit passenger compartment right low frequency antenna
power

open right low to power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective
antenna circuit
passenger compartment right low frequency antenna
B10C9- Interior Front Passenger

type information front low to power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective
antenna circuit
passenger compartment front low frequency antenna
power

short to ground front low to power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective
antenna circuit
negative passenger compartment front low frequency antenna
B10C9- Interior Front Passenger Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
short to battery front low Demand Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer
antenna circuit passenger compartment front low frequency antenna
power

open front low to power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective
antenna circuit
passenger compartment front low frequency antenna
B10CA- Left rear door Rear left door

00 handle Antenna - exterior handle NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit
No sub type low frequency to power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective
information antenna circuit action(s) first
short circuit to
circuit to power clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On
to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear
left door exterior handle low frequency antenna circuit
for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power

Circuit short to low frequency to power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective
ground antenna circuit action(s) first
short circuit to
circuit between clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On
positive and Demand Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer
negative to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear
for short circuit to ground, short circuit between
positive and negative
B10CA- Left rear door Rear left door Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
12 handle Antenna - exterior handle clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On
Circuit short to low frequency Demand Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer
battery antenna circuit to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear
short circuit to left door exterior handle low frequency antenna circuit
power for short circuit to power

Circuit open low frequency to power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective
antenna circuit action(s) first
open circuit,
high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
for open circuit, high resistance
B10CB- Right rear door Rear right door

short circuit to
right door exterior handle low frequency antenna
power

short circuit to
negative to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear
B10CB- Right rear door Rear right door Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
12 handle Antenna - exterior handle clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On
battery antenna circuit to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear
short circuit to right door exterior handle low frequency antenna
power circuit for short circuit to power

open circuit,
B10CC- Left Front Latch Front left door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Clutch Switch - latch clutch front left door latch clutch switch circuit for short
Signal stuck low switch circuit circuit to ground
short circuit to
ground
B10CD- Left Rear Latch Rear left door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Clutch Switch - latch clutch rear left door latch clutch switch circuit for short
short circuit to
ground
B10CE- Right Front Latch Front right door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Clutch Switch - latch clutch front right door latch clutch switch circuit for short
short circuit to
ground
B10CF- Right Rear Latch Rear right door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Clutch Switch - latch clutch rear right door latch clutch switch circuit for short
short circuit to
ground
B10D1- Left Front Lock Front left door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Button - Signal exterior handle front left door exterior handle lock switch circuit for
stuck low lock switch short circuit to ground
circuit short
circuit to ground
B10D2- Left Rear Lock Rear left door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Button - Signal exterior handle rear left door exterior handle lock switch circuit for
circuit short
circuit to ground
B10D3- Right Front Lock Front right door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Button - Signal exterior handle front right door exterior handle lock switch circuit for
circuit short
circuit to ground
B10D4- Right Rear Lock Rear right door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Button - Signal exterior handle rear right door exterior handle lock switch circuit for
circuit short
circuit to ground
B12D5- Door Handle Door handle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
16 Proximity Sensor - proximity sensor door handle proximity sensor circuit for short circuit
Circuit voltage circuit short to ground
below threshold circuit to ground Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Keyless vehicle check datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage
module power or (0xD111). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground circuit check the keyless vehicle module power and ground
open circuit, circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Keyless vehicle clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
module internal a new keyless vehicle module
failure
B12D6- Fast Door Door E latch

11 Unlock/Open circuit(s) short NOTE: Faults on individual terminals/circuits cannot be
Actuator - Circuit circuit to ground detected
short to ground
door E latch circuits for short circuit to ground
B12D6- Fast Door Door E latch

12 Unlock/Open circuit(s) short NOTE: Faults on individual terminals/circuits cannot be
Actuator - Circuit circuit to power detected
short to battery
door E latch circuits for short circuit to power
B12EA- Radio Frequency RF receiver Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
96 (RF) Receiver - internal failure clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
Component a new RF receiver
internal failure
B1334- Tailgate Glass Tailgate glass
23 Release Switch - switch circuit NOTE: This circuit/switch is available as an option
Signal stuck low short circuit to
ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Tailgate glass tailgate glass switch circuit for short circuit to ground
switch stuck Test the operation of the tailgate glass switch
active
B1335- Front Luggage

00 Triangulation / compartment NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit
Loadspace right low to power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective
Antenna - No sub frequency action(s) first
type information antenna circuit
luggage compartment right low frequency antenna
power

Antenna - Circuit frequency action(s) first
short to ground antenna circuit
negative luggage compartment right low frequency antenna
B1335- Front Luggage Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,

12 Triangulation / compartment clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On
Loadspace right low Demand Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer
Antenna - Circuit frequency to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
short to battery antenna circuit luggage compartment right low frequency antenna
power

Antenna - Circuit frequency action(s) first
open antenna circuit
luggage compartment right low frequency antenna
B1336- Left Front Door Front left door

00 External Antenna - exterior handle NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit
short circuit to
to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the front
for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power

short circuit to
negative to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the front
for short circuit to ground, short circuit between
positive and negative
B1336- Left Front Door Front left door Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
12 External Antenna - exterior handle clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On
battery antenna circuit to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the front
short circuit to left door exterior handle low frequency antenna circuit
power for short circuit to power

open circuit,
for open circuit, high resistance
B1337- Right Front Door Front right door

short circuit to
power

short circuit to
negative to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the front
B1337- Right Front Door Front right door Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
12 External Antenna - exterior handle clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On
battery antenna circuit to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the front
short circuit to right door exterior handle low frequency antenna

open circuit,
B133D- Loadspace/Interior Luggage

00 Boot Antenna - No compartment NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit
sub type left low to power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective
information frequency action(s) first
antenna circuit
luggage compartment left low frequency antenna
power

11 Boot Antenna - compartment NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit
Circuit short to left low to power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective
ground frequency action(s) first
antenna circuit
negative luggage compartment left low frequency antenna
B133D- Loadspace/Interior Luggage Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,

12 Boot Antenna - compartment clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On
Circuit short to left low Demand Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer
battery frequency to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
antenna circuit luggage compartment left low frequency antenna
power

13 Boot Antenna - compartment NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit
Circuit open left low to power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective
antenna circuit
luggage compartment left low frequency antenna
C1017- Boot/Trunk Tailgate lock

23 Primary Switch - switch circuit NOTE: This circuit/switch is available as an option
Signal stuck low short circuit to
ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
tailgate lock switch circuit for short circuit to ground
Communication short circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium
Bus - Bus off ground, short speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0300- Internal Control Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Module Software file mismatch check and up-date the car configuration file as
Incompatibility - with vehicle necessary
No sub type specification
information
U201F- External Receiver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 - No sub type NOTE: Circuit RF receiver power and ground circuits for open circuit,
information reference RX SERIAL high resistance
DATA Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
RF receiver to power, open circuit, high resistance
power or ground Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit, high a new RF receiver
LIN bus circuit clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
short circuit to a new keyless vehicle module
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
RF receiver
internal failure
Keyless vehicle
module internal
failure
U201F- External Receiver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
31 - No signal NOTE: Circuit RF receiver power and ground circuits for open circuit,
reference RX SERIAL high resistance
DATA Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
RF receiver to power, open circuit, high resistance
power or ground Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit, high a new RF receiver
LIN bus circuit clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
short circuit to a new keyless vehicle module
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
RF receiver
internal failure
Keyless vehicle
module internal
failure
U201F- External Receiver Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
95 - Incorrect file mismatch check and up-date the car configuration file as
assembly with vehicle necessary
specification - RF Install a new RF receiver as necessary
receiver
frequency
Incorrect RF
receiver installed
U2100- Initial Keyless vehicle Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Configuration Not module is not re-configure the keyless vehicle module with the
Complete - No sub configured latest level software
type information correctly
00 Configuration file mismatch check and up-date the car configuration file as
Incompatible - No with vehicle necessary
sub type specification
information
U3000- Control Module - Keyless vehicle Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
49 Internal electronic module internal clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
failure failure a new keyless vehicle module
U3000- Control Module - Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
95 Incorrect file mismatch check and up-date the car configuration file as
assembly with vehicle necessary
specification - Install a new keyless vehicle module as necessary
Passive entry /
passive start or
passive start
only
Incorrect keyless
vehicle module
installed
U3002- Vehicle Keyless vehicle Install the original or a new keyless vehicle module as
81 Identification module necessary
Number - Invalid previously Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
serial data installed on perform routine - Learn VIN (0x0404)
received another vehicle
New keyless
vehicle module
installed and
VIN not yet
programmed
Multi-Function Display (MFD)
Multi-Function Display (MFD)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle
part number 3548-1358-00
NOTES:
refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval
programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new module/component
information read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system)
places and with a current calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the digital
multimeter leads into account
Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests
Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion
If diagnostic trouble codes are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an
intermittent concern may be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals
Where an 'on demand self-test' is referred to, this can be accessed via the 'diagnostic trouble code monitor'
tab on the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
specific customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as required
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the multi-function display
module, for additional diagnosis and testing information refer to the relevant diagnosis and testing section.

B108E- Display - General Internal multi- Install new multi-function display as necessary
01 electrical failure function
display
connection
failure
B10BD- Multifunctional Steering Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
11 Switch - Circuit wheel left steering wheel left switchpack circuit for short circuit to
short to ground switchpack ground
circuit short
circuit to
ground
B10BD- Multifunctional Steering Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
13 Switch - Circuit wheel left steering wheel left switchpack circuit for open circuit
open switchpack
circuit open
circuit
B10BD- Multifunctional Steering Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install
23 Switch - Activation wheel left a new steering wheel left switchpack
too long - Signal switchpack
stuck low input active
continuously
for more than
two minutes
U0010- Medium Speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,

88 CAN NOTE: Circuit complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Communication reference MS CAN H electrical circuit diagrams and test the medium speed
Bus - BMS Bus Off / MS CAN L CAN circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
- Bus off power, open circuit, high resistance
Medium speed
CAN bus
circuit short
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
U0074- Control Module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,

88 Communication NOTE: Circuit complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Bus "B" Off - Bus reference CAN H / electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN circuit for
off CAN L short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
CAN bus
circuit short
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
U0184- Lost Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 communication NOTE: Circuit audio head unit power and ground circuits for open
with Radio - No reference CAN H / circuit, high resistance
sub type CAN L Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
information complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Audio head electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN circuit for
unit power or short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
ground circuit circuit, high resistance
open circuit,
high
resistance
CAN bus
circuit short
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
U0195- Lost Audio head Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 Communication unit power or audio head unit power and ground circuits for open
With Subscription ground circuit circuit, high resistance
Entertainment open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Receiver Module - high complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
No sub type resistance electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN circuit for
information CAN bus short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit short circuit, high resistance
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
U0422- Invalid Data Invalid data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
68 Received From received from check the central junction box for related DTCs and
Body Control the central refer to the relevant DTC index
Module (BCM) - junction box
Event information - Clock
data
U2100- Initial Multi-function Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
00 Configuration Not display configure the multi-function display with the latest level
Complete - No sub configuration software
type information not complete Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install
Multi-function a new multi-function display
display
internal failure
U2101- Control Module Invalid car Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Configuration configuration check and up-date the car configuration file as
Incompatible - No received from necessary
sub type central
information junction box
U3000- Control Module - Multi-function Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install
00 No sub type display a new multi-function display
information software
corrupted
Multi-function
display
internal failure
U3006- Control Module The power Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
16 Input Power "A" - supply to the and test the battery. Refer to the relevant section of the
Circuit voltage multi-function workshop manual and test the charging system. Clear
below threshold display has the DTC and retest. Refer to the electrical circuit
been below 9 diagrams and test the multi-function display power and
Volts for more ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
than 1000
milliseconds
U3006- Control Module The power Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
17 Input Power "A" - supply to the and test the battery. Refer to the relevant section of the
Circuit voltage multi-function workshop manual and test the charging system
above threshold display has
been above 16
Volts for more
than 1000
milliseconds
Navigation Control Module (NCM) - India & Israel
Navigation Control Module (NCM) -India & Israel
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Navigation Control Module
(NCM) - India & Israel, for additional diagnosis and testing information refer to the relevant diagnosis and testing
section.
For additional information, refer to: Navigation System (419-07 Navigation System, Diagnosis and Testing).

B119F- GPS Antenna - No GPS Antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
31 Signal circuit short the GPS Antenna circuit for short circuit to
circuit to ground, ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
B1A89- Satellite Antenna - Roof pod circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Circuit short to to GPS satellite the roof pod circuits from the navigation control
ground antenna - Short module to the GPS satellite antenna for short
circuit to ground circuit to ground. Repair circuit as required, clear
DTC and retest
B1A89- Satellite Antenna - Roof pod circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 Circuit open to GPS satellite the roof pod circuits from the navigation control
antenna - Open module to the GPS satellite antenna for open
circuit, high circuit, high resistance. Repair circuit as required,
resistance clear DTC and retest
B1296- Navigation Map Data SD memory card Install the correct SD memory card
4A Mismatch With map data
Market - Incorrect incorrect to
component installed market
B1A81- Internal Trip Switch - Navigation Allow the navigation control module to cool, clear
4B Over temperature control module the DTC and retest if the fault persists install a
internal new navigation control module as required
temperature
above threshold
circuit to power, to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
open circuit, high high resistance
resistance
U0011- Medium Speed CAN Invalid data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
82 Communication Bus received from system, check the snapshot data to determine the
Performance - another control invalid data source control module. Check the
Alive/sequence module via the relevant control module for related DTCs and refer
counter incorrect/not medium speed to the relevant DTC index
updated CAN bus
87 Communication Bus from another system, check the snapshot data to determine the
Performance - Missing control module missing message source control module. Check
message via the medium the relevant control module for related DTCs and
speed CAN bus refer to the relevant DTC index
Navigation Control Module (NCM) - Extended Markets
Navigation Control Module (NCM)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Navigation Control Module
(NCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in
For additional information, refer to: Navigation System (419-07 Navigation System, Diagnosis and Testing).

B119F- GPS Antenna - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 short to ground NOTE: Circuit the GPS antenna circuit for short circuit to
reference GPS-SIGNAL ground
GPS antenna
to ground
B119F- GPS Antenna - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 open NOTE: Circuit the GPS antenna circuit for open circuit, high
reference GPS-SIGNAL resistance
GPS antenna
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
B1296- Navigation Map Data SD memory card Install the correct SD memory card
4A Mismatch With map data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Market - Incorrect incorrect to system, check and up-date the car configuration
component installed market file as necessary
Incorrect market
set in car
configuration file
B12A0- Auxiliary Input 2 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit the audio positive circuit for short circuit to
ground reference AUDIO POS / ground
AUDIO NEG Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the audio negative circuit for short circuit to
Audio positive ground
to ground
Audio negative
to ground
B1300- Video Output "A" - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit the low voltage differential signalling positive
ground reference LVDS IN1 / circuit for short circuit to ground
LVDS IN2 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the low voltage differential signalling negative
Low voltage circuit for short circuit to ground
differential
signalling positive
to ground
Low voltage
differential
signalling negative
to ground
B1A81- Internal Trip Switch - Navigation control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
4B Over temperature module internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure persists, install a new navigation control module
B1A84- Car Configuration Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
56 Data - file mismatch with system, check and up-date the car configuration
Invalid/incomplete vehicle file as necessary
configuration specification
ground, short the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short
circuit to power, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
open circuit, high circuit, high resistance
resistance
82 Communication Bus received from system, check the snapshot data to determine
Performance - another control the invalid data source control module. Check the
Alive/sequence module via the relevant control module for related DTCs and
counter incorrect / medium speed refer to the relevant DTC index
not updated CAN bus
87 Communication Bus from another system, check the snapshot data to determine
Performance - Missing control module via the missing message source control module.
message the medium speed Check the relevant control module for related
CAN bus DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
00 Module Software file mismatch with system, check and up-date the car configuration
Incompatibility - No vehicle file as necessary
sub type information specification Install a new navigation control module as
Incorrect necessary
navigation control
module installed
U0400- Invalid Data Received Touch screen Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
92 - Performance or private CAN bus the touch screen private CAN bus circuit for short
incorrect operation circuit short circuit circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
to ground, short circuit, high resistance
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
Occupant Classification Sensor Control Module (OCSCM)
Occupant Classification Sensor Control Module (OCSCM)
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER
SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS. TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT ONE MINUTE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Occupant Classification
Sensor Control Module (OCSCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis
and Testing section in the workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B Supplemental
Restraint System, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1193- Crash Event Crash event occurred Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
53 Storage Full system, clear the DTCs and perform routine -
and Locked - On Demand Self Test (0x0202)
Deactivated
B1A54- Occupant Belt Seatbelt tension sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
01 Tension Sensor internal failure system, clear the DTCs and perform routine -
- General On Demand Self Test (0x0202). If the problem
electrical persists, install a new seatbelt tension sensor
failure as necessary
B1A54- Occupant Belt Seatbelt tension sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
02 Tension Sensor signal circuit short circuit check the seatbelt tension sensor signal circuit
- General to ground, short circuit to for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
signal failure power, open circuit, high power, open circuit, high resistance
resistance
- Circuit short to ground for short circuit to ground
to ground
- Circuit short to power for short circuit to power
to battery
13 Tension Sensor signal circuit open circuit, check the seatbelt tension sensor signal circuit
- Circuit open high resistance for open circuit, high resistance
B1A62- Pressure Occupant detection sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
02 Sensor - signal circuit short circuit check the occupant detection sensor circuit for
General signal to ground, short circuit to short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
failure power, open circuit, high open circuit, high resistance
resistance
11 Sensor - signal circuit short circuit check the occupant detection sensor signal
Circuit short to to ground circuit for short circuit to ground
ground
12 Sensor - signal circuit short circuit check the occupant detection sensor signal
Circuit short to to power circuit for short circuit to power
battery
13 Sensor - signal circuit open circuit, check the occupant detection sensor signal
Circuit open high resistance circuit for open circuit, high resistance
B1A62- Pressure Occupant classification Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

7B Sensor - Low sensor control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
fluid level internal failure persists, install a new occupant classification
sensor control module
U0001- High Speed High speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
88 CAN circuit short circuit to system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Communication ground, short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Bus - Bus off power, open circuit, high check the high speed CAN bus circuit for short
resistance circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
U0151- Lost Restraints control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Communication power or ground circuit check the restraints control module power and
With Restraints open circuit, high ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Control Module resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
- No sub type High speed CAN bus system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
information circuit short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground, short circuit to check the high speed CAN bus circuit for short
power, open circuit, high circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Restraints system fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, check the restraints control module for
index
U0300- Internal Master car configuration Check that the correct the occupant
00 Control Module file ID does not classification sensor control module is installed
Software correspond for vehicle specification. Using the
Incompatibility manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
- No sub type check the central junction box for related DTCs
information and refer to the relevant DTC index
U2016- Control Module Occupant classification Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 Main Software sensor control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
- Not internal failure persists, install a new occupant classification
programmed sensor control module
U201A- Control Module Occupant classification Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 Main sensor control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Calibration internal failure persists, install a new occupant classification
Data - Not sensor control module
programmed
U3000- Control Module Occupant classification Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
04 - System sensor control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
internal internal failure persists, install a new occupant classification
failures sensor control module
U3000- Control Module This diagnostic trouble Check the following criteria have all been
54 - Missing code is set if routine - achieved:
calibration Calibrate OCS Empty Seat - Ignition status set to RUN/START
Offset (0x5000) - is - Verify seat is always empty after power-
requested and fails due to up before re-zero is requested
one of the pre-conditions - The occupant classification sensor
to execute the routine control module has gone through the
seat assembly plant calibration
- No collision event received from the
restraints control module during the
current ignition cycle
- No faults present in the current ignition
cycle
- The trigger message for calibrate empty
seat offset has been received from the
diagnostic tool
- Occupant classification sensor control
module has enough time to begin
classification
- Temperature is between 6°C (42°F) and
36°C (97°F)
U3003- Battery Voltage Occupant classification Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
16 - Circuit sensor control module system, check datalogger signal - ECU Power
voltage below power or ground circuit Supply Voltage (0xD111). Refer to the
threshold open circuit, high electrical circuit diagrams and check the
resistance occupant classification sensor control module
Battery/charging system power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
fault resistance
system
U3003- Battery Voltage Battery/charging system Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
17 - Circuit fault system, check datalogger signal - ECU Power
voltage above Supply Voltage (0xD111). Refer to the relevant
threshold section of the workshop manual and test the
Parking Aid Control Module (PACM)
Parking Aid Control Module (PACM)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Parking Aid Control Module
(PACM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in
For additional information, refer to: Parking Aid (413-13 Parking Aid, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1B36- Front Right Outer Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
12 Sensor - Circuit fault front bumper harness for damage. Check sensor
short to battery Front right outer circuit for short circuit to power. Repair or replace
parking aid any wiring harness as required
sensor - Check the connector for integrity and damage, then
Component re-connect sensor to confirm connection
internal failure Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
clear the DTC and run the on demand self test
If the problem persists remove the suspect sensor
from the bumper. Inspect the sensor connector for
signs of water ingress/corrosion. Exchange the
suspect sensor with another sensor within the
bumper that is not reporting a fault. Clear the DTC
and run the on demand self test to confirm if the
fault code now appears for the new position of the
suspect sensor. Renew the faulty sensor
B1B36- Front Right Outer Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
14 Sensor - Circuit fault front bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check
short to ground Front right outer sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit.
or open parking aid Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
B1B36- Front Right Outer Wiring harness

96 Sensor - fault NOTE: This DTC will log if the local ground of the
Component Front right outer sensor is open circuit
internal failure parking aid
sensor - Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
Component front bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check
internal failure sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit.
Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
Check the connector for integrity and damage, then
re-connect sensor to confirm connection
Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
B1B38- Front Right Inner Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
short to battery Front right inner circuit for short circuit to power. Repair or replace
B1B38- Front Right Inner Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
short to ground Front right inner sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit.
B1B38- Front Right Inner Wiring harness

Component Front right inner sensor is open circuit
B1B40- Front Left Outer Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
short to battery Front left outer circuit for short circuit to power. Repair or replace
B1B40- Front Left Outer Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
short to ground Front left outer sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit.
B1B40- Front Left Outer Wiring harness

Component Front left outer sensor is open circuit
B1B42- Front Left Inner Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
short to battery Front left inner circuit for short circuit to power. Repair or replace
B1B42- Front Left Inner Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
short to ground Front left inner sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit.
B1B42- Front Left Inner Wiring harness

Component Front left inner sensor is open circuit
B1B44- Rear Right Outer Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
12 Sensor - Circuit fault bumper harness for damage. Check sensor circuit for
short to battery Rear right outer short circuit to power. Repair or replace any wiring
parking aid harness as required
B1B44- Rear Right Outer Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
14 Sensor - Circuit fault bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
short to ground Rear right outer circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit. Repair
or open parking aid or replace any wiring harness as required
B1B44- Rear Right Outer Wiring harness

Component Rear right outer sensor is open circuit
sensor - Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
Component bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
internal failure circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit. Repair or replace any wiring
harness as required
B1B46- Rear Right Inner Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
short to battery Rear right inner short circuit to power. Repair or replace any wiring
B1B46- Rear Right Inner Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
short to ground Rear right inner circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit. Repair
B1B46- Rear Right Inner Wiring harness

Component Rear right inner sensor is open circuit
harness as required
B1B48- Rear Left Outer Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
short to battery Rear left outer short circuit to power. Repair or replace any wiring
B1B48- Rear Left Outer Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
short to ground Rear left outer circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit. Repair
B1B48- Rear Left Outer Wiring harness

Component Rear left outer sensor is open circuit
harness as required
B1B50- Rear Left Inner Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
short to battery Rear left inner short circuit to power. Repair or replace any wiring
B1B50- Rear Left Inner Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
short to ground Rear left inner circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit. Repair
B1B50- Rear Left Inner Wiring harness

Component Rear left inner sensor is open circuit
harness as required
B1B54- Function LED - Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
11 Park Aid - Circuit fault parking aid LED circuit for short circuit to ground.
short to ground Switch/LED - Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
Component Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
internal failure clear the DTC and run the on demand self test. If the
problem persists, suspect the switch/LED
12 Park Aid - Circuit fault parking aid LED circuit for short circuit to power.
short to battery Switch/LED - Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
Control module - problem persists, suspect the switch/LED
Component
internal failure
13 Park Aid - Circuit fault parking aid LED circuit for open circuit, high
open Switch/LED - resistance. Repair or replace any wiring harness as
Component required
Control module - clear the DTC and run the on demand self test. If the
Component problem persists, suspect the switch/LED
internal failure
B1B57- Front Sensors Wiring harness Check front and rear bumper harness for signs of
11 Power Circuit- fault damage and security of connections
Circuit short to Control module - Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
ground Component parking assist front sensor power circuit and rear
internal failure sensor power circuit for short circuit to ground.
clear the DTC and run the on demand self test. If the
problem persists, suspect the control module
Cycle the ignition off, then on, to power up parking
aid system and check corrective action
B1B58- Rear Sensors Wiring harness Check rear and front (if front PDC fitted) bumper
11 Power Circuit - fault harness for signs of damage and security of
Circuit short to Control module - connections
ground Component Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
internal failure parking assist rear sensor power circuit and front
sensor power circuit (if front PDC fitted) for short
circuit to ground. Repair or replace any wiring
harness as required
clear the DTC and run the on demand self test. If the
problem persists, suspect the control module
Cycle the ignition off, then on, to power up parking
aid system and check corrective action
B1C30- Disable Switch - Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
73 Actuator stuck fault parking assist switch and switch circuit. Repair or
closed Control switch - replace any wiring harness as required
problem persists, suspect the control switch
Check the switch function
U0001- High speed CAN Invalid data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
81 Communication received from check the snapshot data to determine the invalid
Bus - Invalid another control data source control module. Check the relevant
serial data module via the control module for related DTCs and refer to the
received high speed CAN relevant DTC index. Clear DTC and retest
bus
Bus - another control data source control module. Check the relevant
Alive/sequence module via the control module for related DTCs and refer to the
counter incorrect high speed CAN relevant DTC index. Clear DTC and retest
/ not updated bus
Bus - Value of another control data source control module. Check the relevant
signal protection module via the control module for related DTCs and refer to the
calculation high speed CAN relevant DTC index. Clear DTC and retest
incorrect bus
U0001- High speed CAN Missing message Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
87 Communication from another check the snapshot data to determine the missing
Bus - Missing control module message source control module. Check the relevant
message via the high control module for related DTCs and refer to the
speed CAN bus relevant DTC index. Clear DTC and retest
circuit, high
resistance
U0300- Internal Control Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
57 Module Software file stored in check the snapshot data to determine car
Incompatibility - parking aid configuration details
Invalid/incomplete control module Check the components installed on the vehicle were
software does not match installed by the factory or a dealer
component the master car Install the original component or a new one as
configuration file required
Master car
configuration file
not being
transmitted by
master control
module
U2100- Initial Parking aid Check car configuration file master node to ensure
56 Configuration Not control module that the car configuration data blocks that the
Complete - No not configured parking aid control module subscribes to have been
sub type transmitted at least once within 3 full CCF
information transmission cycles
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
check and update the car configuration file as
required. Clear the DTC and retest
U2101- Control Module Parking aid Check local snapshot data (DID 0xE103) to
56 Configuration control module - determine the non-valid CCF values
Incompatible - No Configuration If all values in 0xE103 are set to zero then all
sub type error parameter values are valid but the combination of
information parameter values is invalid
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
check and update the car configuration file as
required. Clear the DTC and retest
U3000- Control Module - Parking aid Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
47 Watchdog/safety control module - clear the DTC, cycle the ignition off, then on, and
Micro-Controller Internal failure check if the DTC is still logged
failure If the DTC is still logged suspect the parking aid
control module
49 Internal electronic control module - clear the DTC, cycle the ignition off, then on, and
failure Internal failure check if the DTC is still logged
If the DTC is still logged suspect the parking aid
control module
55 Not configured control module - download and install the latest released calibration
Configuration file for the hardware and software part numbers
error installed to the vehicle. Clear DTC and retest
No calibration file If the DTC is still logged suspect the parking aid
loaded control module
56 Invalid / control module - download and install the latest released calibration
incomplete Configuration file for the vehicle. Clear DTC and retest
configuration error If the DTC is still logged suspect the parking aid
No calibration file control module
loaded
U3000- Control Module - Parking aid

63 Circuit/component control module NOTE: This DTC is only logged if the control module
protection time- internal circuit has detected persistent parking aid sensor short circuit
out protection routine faults. Ensure that all circuit faults have been resolved
has deactivated before proceeding with the reset short protection routine
the module
following Check for related parking aid sensor circuit fault
detection of DTCs and ensure all parking aid sensor faults are
repeated parking resolved
aid sensor short Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit faults clear the DTCs and perform routine - Reset/Clear
Specified Function (Reset Short Protection) (0x040E)
Proximity Camera Control Module (PCCM)
Proximity Camera Control Module (PCCM)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Proximity Camera Control
Module (PCCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing

B100E- Video Input "A" Video out circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
29 signal - Signal short circuit to video out circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit,
invalid ground, open high resistance
circuit, high
resistance
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - LIN bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the LIN
00 No sub type circuit(s) short bus circuits for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
information circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
B12BD- Rear Camera - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear
19 Circuit current NOTE: Circuit proximity camera circuit for short circuit to ground, short
above reference V+ / SHIELD circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
threshold
Rear proximity
camera circuit
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
B12BD- Rear Camera -

31 No signal NOTE: Circuit NOTE: When checking LVDS circuits, DO NOT probe the
reference LVDS+ / LVDS cables. Visual checks ONLY should be performed at the
LVDS- cable inter-connect points
Rear proximity Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear
camera LVDS proximity camera LVDS circuits for open circuit, high
circuit(s) open resistance
circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
resistance the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Rear proximity rear proximity camera
camera internal
failure
B12BD- Rear Camera - Rear proximity Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
49 Internal camera internal the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
electronic failure rear proximity camera
failure
B12BD- Rear Camera - Rear proximity Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
54 Missing camera not calibrate the rear proximity camera
calibration calibrated Check the rear proximity camera is fitted and aligned
Rear proximity correctly
camera not
installed
correctly
B12BE- Left Front Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
19 Camera - NOTE: Circuit front left proximity camera circuit for short circuit to
Circuit current reference V+ / SHIELD ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
above resistance
threshold Front left
proximity
camera circuit
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
B12BE- Left Front

31 Camera - No NOTE: Circuit NOTE: When checking LVDS circuits, DO NOT probe the
signal reference LVDS+ / LVDS cables. Visual checks ONLY should be performed at the
Front left Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
proximity front left proximity camera LVDS circuits for open circuit,
camera LVDS high resistance
circuit(s) open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
circuit, high the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
resistance front left proximity camera
Front left
proximity
camera internal
failure
B12BE- Left Front Front left Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
49 Camera - proximity the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Internal camera internal front left proximity camera
electronic failure
failure
B12BE- Left Front Front left Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
54 Camera - proximity calibrate the front left proximity camera
Missing camera not Check the front left proximity camera is fitted and aligned
calibration calibrated correctly
Front left
proximity
camera not
installed
correctly
B12BF- Right Front Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
19 Camera - NOTE: Circuit front right proximity camera circuit for short circuit to
above resistance
threshold Front right
proximity
camera circuit
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
B12BF- Right Front

Front right Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
proximity front right proximity camera LVDS circuits for open
camera LVDS circuit, high resistance
resistance front right proximity camera
Front right
proximity
camera internal
failure
B12BF- Right Front Front right Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
Internal camera internal front right proximity camera
electronic failure
failure
B12BF- Right Front Front right Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
54 Camera - proximity calibrate the front right proximity camera
Missing camera not Check the front right proximity camera is fitted and
calibration calibrated aligned correctly
Front right
proximity
camera not
installed
correctly
B12C0- Left Mirror Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the left
19 Camera - NOTE: Circuit mirror proximity camera circuit for short circuit to
above resistance
threshold Left mirror
proximity
camera circuit
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
B12C0- Left Mirror

Left mirror Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the left
proximity mirror proximity camera LVDS circuits for open circuit,
circuit, high the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new left
resistance mirror proximity camera
Left mirror
proximity
camera internal
failure
B12C0- Left Mirror Left mirror Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
49 Camera - proximity the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new left
Internal camera internal mirror proximity camera
electronic failure
failure
B12C0- Left Mirror Left mirror Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
54 Camera - proximity calibrate the left mirror proximity camera
Missing camera not Check the left mirror proximity camera is fitted and
Left mirror
proximity
camera not
installed
correctly
B12C1- Right Mirror Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the right
19 Camera - NOTE: Circuit mirror proximity camera circuit for short circuit to
above resistance
threshold Right mirror
proximity
camera circuit
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
B12C1- Right Mirror

Right mirror Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the right
proximity mirror proximity camera LVDS circuits for open circuit,
resistance right mirror proximity camera
Right mirror
proximity
camera internal
failure
B12C1- Right Mirror Right mirror Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
Internal camera internal right mirror proximity camera
electronic failure
failure
B12C1- Right Mirror Right mirror Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
54 Camera - proximity calibrate the right mirror proximity camera
Missing camera not Check the right mirror proximity camera is fitted and
Right mirror
proximity
camera not
installed
correctly
P1603- EEPROM Proximity Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
00 Malfunction - camera control the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
No sub type module internal proximity camera control module
information failure
Communication short circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium speed
Bus - Bus off ground, short CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
open circuit,
high resistance
U0300- Internal Incorrect Check for other modules reporting CAN bus off or lost
00 Control Module software loaded communication faults. If other modules report problems,
Software Lost CAN signal check the software version in the central junction box
Incompatibility using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system. If
- No sub type no other modules report problems, check the software
information version in the park distance control module. Update as
necessary
U1A4B- Control Module Proximity Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
49 Processor B - camera control the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Internal module internal proximity camera control module
electronic failure
failure
U201A- Control Module Proximity Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
51 Main camera control configure the proximity camera control module with the
Calibration module is not latest level software
Data - Not configured
programmed correctly
00 Configuration configuration check and up-date the car configuration file as necessary
Not Complete - file mismatch
No sub type with vehicle
00 Configuration configuration check and up-date the car configuration file as necessary
Incompatible - file mismatch
No sub type with vehicle
U3000- Control Module Proximity Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
46 - Calibration / camera control the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
parameter module internal proximity camera control module
memory failure failure
47 - Watchdog / camera control the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
safety module internal proximity camera control module
MicroController failure
failure
49 - Internal camera control the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
electronic module internal proximity camera control module
failure failure
U3000- Control Module Component or Consider the environmental conditions before suspecting
98 - Component system over the proximity camera control module. Allow the proximity
or system over temperature camera control module to cool, clear DTC, wait for a
temperature minimum of 2 minutes, then retest
62 - Signal between the check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage
compare failure voltage at the (0xDD02) - and compare it to battery voltage. Refer to
proximity the electrical circuit diagrams and check the proximity
camera control camera control module power and ground circuits for
module and the open circuit, high resistance
voltage value
broadcast on
the CAN bus
Differential Control Module (RDCM)
Rear Differential Control Module (RDCM)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Rear Differential Control
Module (RDCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing
For additional information, refer to: Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential,

P0562- System Voltage Rear differential Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
16 Low - Circuit control module check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage
voltage below power or ground (0xD018). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
threshold circuit open test the rear differential control module power and
resistance
P0563- System Voltage Battery/charging Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
17 High - Circuit system fault check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage
voltage above (0xD018). Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
P0604- Internal Control Rear differential Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
00 Module Random control module configure the rear differential control module with the
Access Memory internal failure latest level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the
(RAM) Error - fault persists, install a new rear differential control
No sub type module
information
P0605- Internal Control Rear differential Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
00 Module Read control module configure the rear differential control module with the
Only Memory internal failure latest level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the
(ROM) Error - fault persists, install a new rear differential control
No sub type module
information
P0606- Control Module Rear differential Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
47 Processor - control module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
Watchdog/safety internal failure new rear differential control module
MicroController
failure
P0607- Control Module Rear differential Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
49 Performance - control module check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage
Internal power or ground (0xD018). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
electronic failure circuit open test the rear differential control module power and
Rear differential clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
control module new rear differential control module
internal failure
P062F- Internal Control Rear differential Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Module EEPROM control module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
Error - No sub internal failure new rear differential control module
type information
P0652- Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
16 Reference NOTE: Circuit differential actuator position sensor supply circuit for
Voltage B Circuit reference HALL_Vsupp short circuit to ground
Low - Circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
voltage below Rear differential clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
threshold actuator position new rear differential control module
sensor supply
circuit short
circuit to ground
Rear differential
control module
internal failure
P0653- Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
17 Reference NOTE: Circuit differential actuator position sensor supply circuit for
Voltage B Circuit reference HALL_Vsupp short circuit to power
High - Circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
voltage above Rear differential clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
threshold actuator position new rear differential control module
sensor supply
circuit short
circuit to power
Rear differential
control module
internal failure
P0657- Actuator Supply

13 Voltage A Circuit NOTE: Circuit NOTE: Ignore P0657-13 if P0605-00 is also set (perform
/ Open - Open reference MOT+ / MOT- the corrective action for P0605-00)
circuit
Rear differential Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
actuator power differential actuator power and ground circuits for open
or ground circuit circuit, high resistance
open circuit,
high resistance
P0658- Actuator Supply Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
11 Voltage A Circuit NOTE: Circuit differential actuator power and ground circuits for short
/ Low - Circuit reference MOT+ / MOT- circuit to ground
short to ground
Rear differential
actuator power
or ground circuit
short circuit to
ground
P0659- Actuator Supply Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
12 Voltage A Circuit NOTE: Circuit differential actuator power and ground circuits for short
/ High - Circuit reference MOT+ / MOT- circuit to power
short to battery
Rear differential
actuator power
or ground circuit
short circuit to
power
P080A- Clutch Position Rear differential
54 Not Learned - control module NOTE: The rear differential control module performs a
Missing internal failure calibration routine every 500km. If any rear differential control
calibration module faults are present this routine will not run and P080A
will set. Investigate other rear differential control module
related DTCs first. P080A will also set if the rear differential
control module connector has been removed and reconnected
Investigate other rear differential control module related

DTCs first. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, perform routine - Control Module Calibration.
Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
new rear differential control module
P0810- Clutch Position Rear differential Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
62 Control Error - actuator circuit differential actuator circuit for short circuit to ground,
Signal compare short circuit to short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
failure ground, short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
circuit to power, differential actuator position sensor circuit for short
open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance high resistance
Rear differential Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
actuator position perform routine - Control Module Calibration. Clear the
sensor circuit DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new rear
short circuit to differential actuator
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
Rear differential
actuator
mechanical
failure
P0CBC- Drive Motor "A" Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
11 Temperature NOTE: Circuit differential actuator temperature sensor circuit for short
Sensor Circuit - reference TEMP1+ circuit to ground
Circuit short to
ground Rear differential
actuator
temperature
sensor circuit
short circuit to
ground
P0CBC- Drive Motor "A" Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
15 Temperature NOTE: Circuit differential actuator temperature sensor circuit for short
Sensor Circuit - reference TEMP1+ / circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Circuit short to TEMP-
battery or open
Rear differential
actuator
temperature
sensor circuit
short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
P186A- Differential Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
13 Lock-up NOTE: Circuit differential actuator brake circuit for open circuit, high
Actuator Brake reference MAG+ / resistance
Control Circuit / MAG-
Open - Circuit
open Rear differential
actuator brake
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
P186B- Differential Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
11 Lock-up NOTE: Circuit differential actuator brake circuit for short circuit to
Actuator Brake reference MAG+ / ground
Control Circuit MAG-
Low - Circuit
short to ground Rear differential
actuator brake
circuit short
circuit to ground
P186C- Differential Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
12 Lock-up NOTE: Circuit differential actuator brake circuit for short circuit to
Actuator Brake reference MAG+ / power
Control Circuit MAG-
High - Circuit
short to battery Rear differential
actuator brake
circuit short
circuit to power
P186D- Clutch Actuator

97 Stuck - NOTE: Circuit NOTE: If additional rear differential related DTCs are also
Component or reference MOT+ / MOT- set, perform the relevant corrective action(s) first
system
operation Rear differential Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
obstructed or actuator circuit differential actuator circuit for short circuit to ground,
blocked short circuit to short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
ground, short (>1.8 Ohms)
circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
open circuit, perform the guided diagnostic routine. Clear the DTCs
high resistance and retest. If fault persists, install a new rear differential
Rear differential actuator
actuator
mechanical
failure
P1888- Differential Oil Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
11 Temperature NOTE: Circuit differential oil temperature sensor signal circuit for short
Sensor Circuit reference TEMP2+ circuit to ground
Failure - Circuit
short to ground Rear differential
oil temperature
sensor signal
circuit short
circuit to ground
P1888- Differential Oil Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
15 Temperature NOTE: Circuit differential oil temperature sensor signal and earth
Sensor Circuit reference TEMP2+ / circuits for short circuit to power, open circuit, high
Failure - Circuit TEMP2- resistance
short to battery
or open Rear differential
oil temperature
sensor signal or
earth circuit
short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
P188A- Differential Oil Insufficient rear NOTES:

98 Temperature differential oil
Too High/Too Incorrect rear
Low - differential oil This DTC is set when the rear differential oil temperature
Component or specification exceeds 160°C
system over Rear differential
temperature oil temperature
sensor signal If P0605-00 is also set, perform the relevant corrective
circuit short action(s) first
circuit to ground
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
and check the rear differential oil quantity
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
and check the rear differential oil specification
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
differential oil temperature sensor signal circuit for short
circuit to ground
P18A5- Motion Position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
12 Sensor "A" NOTE: Circuit differential actuator position sensor signal 1 circuit for
Signal Circuit - reference HALL_in1 / short circuit to power
Circuit short to HALL_in2 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
battery differential actuator position sensor signal 2 circuit for
Rear differential short circuit to power
actuator position
sensor signal 1
circuit short
circuit to power
Rear differential
actuator position
sensor signal 2
circuit short
circuit to power
P18A5- Motion Position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
14 Sensor "A" NOTE: Circuit differential actuator position sensor signal 1 circuit for
Signal Circuit - reference HALL_in1 / short circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance
Circuit short to HALL_in2 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
ground or open differential actuator position sensor signal 2 circuit for
Rear differential short circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance
actuator position
sensor signal 1
circuit short
circuit to
ground, open
circuit, high
resistance
Rear differential
actuator position
sensor signal 2
circuit short
circuit to
ground, open
circuit, high
resistance
P18A8- Differential Rear differential Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
74 Actuator Brake actuator brake perform the guided diagnostic routine. Clear the DTCs
Control - mechanical and retest. If fault persists, install a new rear differential
Actuator slipping failure actuator
P2787- Clutch Rear differential NOTES:

4B Temperature actuator active
Too High - Over for prolonged
temperature duration due to This DTC is set when the rear differential clutch pack
driving style or calculated temperature exceeds 200°C
terrain
If P0605-00 is also set, perform the relevant corrective

action(s) first
If additional rear differential temperature related DTCs are

also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s) first
Allow the rear differential to cool. Using the

manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest
U0001- High Speed CAN Invalid data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
81 Communication received from check the snapshot data to determine the invalid data
Bus - Invalid another control source control module. Check the relevant control
serial data module via the module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
received high speed CAN index
bus
U0001- High Speed CAN Missing message Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
speed CAN bus relevant DTC index
- Bus off circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and test the high speed CAN
ground, short bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
open circuit,
high resistance
U0300- Internal Control Rear differential Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
00 Module Software control module configure the rear differential control module with the
Incompatibility - is not configured latest level software
No sub type correctly
information
U1A14- CAN Rear differential Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
49 Initialization control module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
Failure - internal failure new rear differential control module
Internal
electronic failure
U2000- Motor Rear differential NOTES:
4B Temperature - actuator
Over temperature
temperature sensor circuit This DTC is set when the rear differential actuator
short circuit to temperature exceeds 150°C
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit, If P0605-00 is also set, perform the relevant corrective
high resistance action(s) first
Rear differential
control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
internal failure differential actuator temperature sensor circuit for short
circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance
clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
new rear differential control module
U2011- Motor - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
1C voltage out of NOTE: Circuit differential actuator positive circuit for short circuit to
range reference MOT+ / MOT- the actuator negative circuit
Rear differential clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
actuator positive new rear differential control module
circuit short
circuit to
actuator
negative circuit
Rear differential
control module
internal failure
U210A- Temperature Mismatch Allow the rear differential to cool (1 hour minimum).
62 Sensor - Signal between rear Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
compare failure differential oil check datalogger signals - Motor Temperature (0xD11C)
temperature - Rear Differential Sump Oil Temperature (0x1E8A).
sensor signal Difference should be <25°C
and rear Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
differential and check the rear differential oil quantity
actuator Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
temperature and check the rear differential oil specification
sensor signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
Insufficient rear differential oil temperature sensor circuit for short circuit
differential oil to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
Incorrect rear resistance
differential oil Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
specification differential actuator temperature sensor circuit for short
Rear differential circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
oil temperature high resistance
sensor circuit
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
Rear differential
actuator
temperature
sensor circuit
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U3000- Control Module - Rear differential

4B Over control module NOTE: This DTC is set when the rear differential control
temperature insecurely module internal temperature exceeds 105°C
installed
Rear differential Check the security and integrity of the rear differential
control module control module fixings
internal failure Allow the rear differential control module to cool (1 hour
minimum). Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new rear differential control module
Seat Entertainment Control Module (RSECM)
Rear Seat Entertainment Control Module (RSECM)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Rear Seat Entertainment
Control Module (RSECM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and

B100F- Video Input "B" -
29 Signal invalid NOTE: Circuit reference AUX NOTE: This DTC can only set when routine -
PANEL VIDEO IN / AUX PANEL Test Composite Video Blanking and Synchronisation
VIDEO GND Input (0x6015) - is run and fails
Auxiliary video in circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

short circuit to ground, check the auxiliary video in circuit for short
short circuit to power, circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit, high open circuit, high resistance
resistance Connect a known functional video signal
Auxiliary device internal source to the audio video input/output panel
failure and select this source using the rear seat
Rear seat entertainment entertainment remote control. Check the
control module internal left/right rear seat entertainment screen for
failure a valid signal
fault persists, install a new rear seat
entertainment control module
B1010- Video Input "C" -
29 Signal invalid NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC can only set when routine -
HLDF_CVBS_VIDEO_IN / Test Composite Video Blanking and Synchronisation
HLDF_CVBS_VIDEO_GND Input (0x6015) - is run and fails
Touch screen video in Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

circuit short circuit to check the touch screen video in circuit for
ground, short circuit to short circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit, high power, open circuit, high resistance
Touch screen internal system, check the touch screen for related
failure DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Rear seat entertainment Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
control module internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
failure fault persists, install a new rear seat
B1252- USB Port - A USB device is detected

57 Invalid/incomplete but the content format of NOTE: This DTC can only set when routine -
software the USB device is not USB Interface Self Test (0x602E) - is run and fails
component supported
system, clear the DTCs, remove and
reconnect the USB device, and retest. If
fault persists, replace the content of the
USB device with content that is correctly
formatted
B1252- USB Port - No

93 operation NOTE: Circuit reference AUX NOTE: This DTC can only set when routine -
PANEL USB DATA POS / AUX USB Interface Self Test (0x602E) - is run and fails
PANEL USB DATA NEG
USB device circuit short check the USB circuit for short circuit to
circuit to ground, short ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
circuit to power, open high resistance
circuit, high resistance Connect a known functional USB device to
USB device internal failure the audio video input/output panel and
Rear seat entertainment select this source using the rear seat
control module internal entertainment remote control. Check the
failure left/right rear seat entertainment screen for
a valid signal
B125E- Left Rear Display

4A - Incorrect NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC is set when the rear seat
component SUPPLY_HLDR_L_R / entertainment control module has not read a valid
installed HLDR_MS_CAN_POS / serial number from the left rear seat entertainment
HLDR_MS_CAN_NEG / HLDR_GND screen within 25 seconds
Rear seat entertainment Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

left screen power or check the rear seat entertainment left
ground circuit open circuit, screen power and ground circuits for open
CAN bus circuit short check the rear seat entertainment CAN bus
circuit to ground, short circuit for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, open circuit to power, open circuit, high
Incorrect rear seat Check that the rear seat entertainment left
entertainment left screen screen has not been substituted
installed
B125E- Left Rear Display Rear seat entertainment Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
96 - Component left screen internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
internal failure fault persists, install a new rear seat
entertainment left screen
B125E- Left Rear Display Rear seat entertainment Allow the system to cool. Using the
98 - Component or left screen over manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
system over temperature condition clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
temperature persists, install a new rear seat
entertainment left screen
B125F- Right Rear

4A Display - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC is set when the rear seat
Incorrect SUPPLY_HLDR_L_R / entertainment control module has not read a valid
component HLDR_MS_CAN_POS / serial number from the right rear seat
installed HLDR_MS_CAN_NEG / HLDR_GND entertainment screen within 25 seconds

right screen power or check the rear seat entertainment right
ground circuit open circuit, screen power and ground circuits for open
CAN bus circuit short check the rear seat entertainment CAN bus
circuit to ground, short circuit for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, open circuit to power, open circuit, high
Incorrect rear seat Check that the rear seat entertainment right
entertainment right screen screen has not been substituted
installed
B125F- Right Rear Rear seat entertainment Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
96 Display - right screen internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
Component failure fault persists, install a new rear seat
internal failure entertainment right screen
B125F- Right Rear Rear seat entertainment Allow the system to cool. Using the
98 Display - right screen over manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Component or temperature condition clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
system over persists, install a new rear seat
temperature entertainment right screen
B1285- Video Input "D" - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
88 Bus off NOTE: Circuit reference check the TV control module low-voltage
TV_LVDS_POS / TV_LVDS_NEG differential signalling circuit for short circuit
TV control module low- circuit, high resistance
voltage differential Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
signalling circuit short system, check the TV control module for
circuit to ground, short related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
circuit to power, open index
circuit, high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Television system fault system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
Rear seat entertainment fault persists, install a new rear seat
control module internal entertainment control module
failure
B12A0- Auxiliary Input 2 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference AUX check the right auxiliary audio in circuit for
ground PANEL AUDIO IN RIGHT short circuit to ground
Right auxiliary audio in

ground
B12A0- Auxiliary Input 2 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference AUX check the right auxiliary audio in circuit for
battery PANEL AUDIO IN RIGHT short circuit to power
Right auxiliary audio in

power
B12ED- Video Input "F" - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
88 Bus off NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear seat entertainment left
L_HLDR_LVDS_VIDEO_OUT_POS screen low-voltage differential signalling
/ circuit for short circuit to ground, short
L_HLDR_LVDS_VIDEO_OUT_NEG circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
Rear seat entertainment
left screen low-voltage
differential signalling
resistance
B12F8- Video Input "G" - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
88 Bus off NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear seat entertainment right
R_HLDR_LVDS_VIDEO_OUT_POS screen low-voltage differential signalling
/ circuit for short circuit to ground, short
R_HLDR_LVDS_VIDEO_OUT_NEG circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
right screen low-voltage
differential signalling
resistance
B1D21- Remote Control

02 Switch - General NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC can only set when routine -
signal failure SUPPLY_REMOTE / TSRC (Touch Screen Remote Control Interface Self
REMOTE_DATA_IN / Test (0x602F) - is run and fails
REMOTE_DATA_OUT /
REMOTE_GND Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the rear seat entertainment remote
Rear seat entertainment control docking station power and ground
remote control docking circuits for open circuit, high resistance
station power or ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit open circuit, high check the rear seat entertainment remote
resistance control data bus circuit for short circuit to
Rear seat entertainment ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
remote control data bus high resistance
circuit short circuit to Place the rear seat entertainment remote
ground, short circuit to control in the docking station. Using the
power, open circuit, high manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
resistance clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Rear seat entertainment persists, install a new rear seat
remote control internal entertainment remote control
failure
B1D21- Remote Control Rear seat entertainment Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
08 Switch - Bus remote control fault system, re-configure the rear seat
signal/message entertainment remote control with the latest
failures level software
B1D21- Remote Control Rear seat entertainment

1C Switch - Circuit remote control fault NOTE: This DTC can only set when routine -
voltage out of TSRC (Touch Screen Remote Control Interface Self
range Test (0x602F) - is run and fails
Install a new rear seat entertainment

remote control battery

57 Switch - remote control fault NOTE: This DTC can only set when routine -
Invalid/incomplete TSRC (Touch Screen Remote Control Interface Self
software Test (0x602F) - is run and fails
component
system, re-configure the rear seat
entertainment remote control with the latest
level software

71 Switch - Actuator remote control fault NOTE: This DTC can only set when routine -
stuck TSRC (Touch Screen Remote Control Interface Self
Test (0x602F) - is run and fails
Test the operation of the rear seat

entertainment remote control switches
B1D78- Auxiliary Input - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference AUX check the left auxiliary audio in circuit for
ground PANEL AUDIO IN LEFT short circuit to ground
Left auxiliary audio in

ground
B1D78- Auxiliary Input - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference AUX check the left auxiliary audio in circuit for
battery PANEL AUDIO IN LEFT short circuit to power
Left auxiliary audio in

power
U0196- Lost Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

31 Communication NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear seat entertainment left
With SUPPLY_HLDR_L_R / screen power and ground circuits for open
Entertainment HLDR_MS_CAN_POS / circuit, high resistance
Control Module - HLDR_MS_CAN_NEG / HLDR_GND Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Rear "A" - No check the rear seat entertainment CAN bus
signal Rear seat entertainment circuit for short circuit to ground, short
left screen power or circuit to power, open circuit, high
ground circuit open circuit, resistance
high resistance
CAN bus circuit short
circuit to power, open
U0249- Lost Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

31 Communication NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear seat entertainment right
With SUPPLY_HLDR_L_R / screen power and ground circuits for open
Entertainment HLDR_MS_CAN_POS / circuit, high resistance
Control Module - HLDR_MS_CAN_NEG / HLDR_GND Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Rear "B" - No check the rear seat entertainment CAN bus
signal Rear seat entertainment circuit for short circuit to ground, short
right screen power or circuit to power, open circuit, high
ground circuit open circuit, resistance
high resistance
CAN bus circuit short
circuit to power, open
U1009- Invalid Data

00 Received From NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC indicates that unexpected
Right Rear SUPPLY_HLDR_L_R / data was received from the rear seat entertainment
Display Module - HLDR_MS_CAN_POS / right screen. This could be due to a reset, harness
No sub type HLDR_MS_CAN_NEG / fault, incorrect programming or random corruption
information R_HLDR_LVDS_VIDEO_OUT_POS
/ Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
R_HLDR_LVDS_VIDEO_OUT_NEG check the rear seat entertainment CAN bus
/ HLDR_GND circuit for short circuit to ground, short
Rear seat entertainment resistance
CAN bus circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to ground, short check the rear seat entertainment right
circuit to power, open screen low-voltage differential signalling
circuit, high resistance circuit for short circuit to ground, short
Rear seat entertainment circuit to power, open circuit, high
right screen low-voltage resistance
differential signalling Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit short circuit to check the rear seat entertainment right
ground, short circuit to screen power and ground circuits for open
power, open circuit, high circuit, high resistance
Rear seat entertainment system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
right screen power or fault persists, install a new rear seat
ground circuit open circuit, entertainment right screen
high resistance
right screen internal
failure
U100A- Invalid Data

00 Received From NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC indicates that unexpected
Left Rear Display SUPPLY_HLDR_L_R / data was received from the rear seat entertainment
Module - No sub HLDR_MS_CAN_POS / left screen. This could be due to a reset, harness
type information HLDR_MS_CAN_NEG / fault, incorrect programming or random corruption
L_HLDR_LVDS_VIDEO_OUT_POS
/ Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
L_HLDR_LVDS_VIDEO_OUT_NEG check the rear seat entertainment CAN bus
/ HLDR_GND circuit for short circuit to ground, short
Rear seat entertainment resistance
CAN bus circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to ground, short check the rear seat entertainment left
circuit to power, open screen low-voltage differential signalling
circuit, high resistance circuit for short circuit to ground, short
Rear seat entertainment circuit to power, open circuit, high
left screen low-voltage resistance
differential signalling Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit short circuit to check the rear seat entertainment left
ground, short circuit to screen power and ground circuits for open
power, open circuit, high circuit, high resistance
Rear seat entertainment system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
left screen power or fault persists, install a new rear seat
ground circuit open circuit, entertainment left screen
high resistance
left screen internal failure
U200D- Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 Output Power A - NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear seat entertainment left/right
Circuit short to SUPPLY_HLDR_L_R screen circuit for short circuit to ground
ground
left/right screen circuit
U200D- Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

12 Output Power A - NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear seat entertainment left/right
Circuit short to SUPPLY_HLDR_L_R screen circuit for short circuit to power
battery
left/right screen circuit
U200D- Control Module

19 Output Power A - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC is logged when the combined
Circuit current SUPPLY_HLDR_L_R / HLDR_GND total current consumption of the rear screens
above threshold exceeds 1.35 amps
left/right screen circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short circuit to ground, check the rear seat entertainment left/right
short circuit to power screen circuit for short circuit to ground,
Rear seat entertainment short circuit to power
control module internal Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
U200E- Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 Output Power B - NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear seat entertainment remote
Circuit short to SUPPLY_REMOTE control docking station supply circuit for
ground short circuit to ground
remote control docking
station supply circuit short
circuit to ground
U200E- Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

12 Output Power B - NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear seat entertainment remote
Circuit short to SUPPLY_REMOTE control docking station supply circuit for
battery short circuit to power
remote control docking
station supply circuit short
circuit to power
U200E- Control Module

19 Output Power B - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: If this DTC is set, install a new rear
Circuit current SUPPLY_REMOTE/ REMOTE_GND seat entertainment control module even if a circuit
above threshold fault has been found and rectified
remote control docking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
station circuit short circuit check the rear seat entertainment remote
to ground, short circuit to control docking station circuit for short
power circuit to ground, short circuit to power
Rear seat entertainment Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
control module internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the
failure fault persists, install a new rear seat
U2014- Control Module Rear seat entertainment Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
56 Hardware - control module is not system, re-configure the rear seat
Invalid/incomplete configured correctly entertainment control module with the latest
configuration level software
U2100- Initial Rear seat entertainment Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Configuration Not control module is not system, re-configure the rear seat
Complete - No configured correctly entertainment control module with the latest
sub type level software
information
sub type Incorrect rear seat Install a new rear seat entertainment
information entertainment control control module as necessary
module installed
U3000- Control Module - Rear seat entertainment

19 Circuit current control module internal NOTE: If this DTC is set, install a new rear
above threshold failure seat entertainment control module even if a circuit
fault has been found and rectified

U3000- Control Module - Rear seat entertainment Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
55 Not configured control module is not system, re-configure the rear seat
configured correctly entertainment control module with the latest
level software
U3000- Control Module - Rear seat entertainment Allow the vehicle to cool. Check the rear
98 Component or control module over seat entertainment control module
system over temperature ventilation ducts for obstructions. Using the
temperature manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new rear seat
U3003- Battery Voltage - Mismatch between the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
62 Signal compare voltage at the rear seat check the rear seat entertainment control
failure entertainment control module power and ground circuits for open
module and the voltage circuit, high resistance
value broadcast on the
CAN bus
View Camera (RVC)
Rear View Camera (RVC)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Rear View Camera (RVC).
workshop manual.

Communication short circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium
Bus - Bus off ground, short speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
open circuit, high
resistance
U0012- Medium Speed Medium speed Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
13 CAN CAN bus high medium speed CAN bus high circuit for open circuit,
Communication circuit open high resistance
Bus (+) Open - circuit, high
Circuit open resistance
11 CAN CAN bus high medium speed CAN bus high circuit for short circuit
Communication circuit short circuit to ground
Bus (+) Low - to ground
Circuit short to
ground
Communication circuit short circuit to power
Bus (+) High - to power
Circuit short to
battery
13 CAN CAN bus low medium speed CAN bus low circuit for open circuit,
Communication circuit open high resistance
Bus (-) Open - circuit, high
Circuit open resistance
11 CAN CAN bus low medium speed CAN bus low circuit for short circuit to
Communication circuit short circuit ground
Bus (-) Low - to ground
Circuit short to
ground
12 CAN CAN bus low medium speed CAN bus low circuit for short circuit to
Communication circuit short circuit power
Bus (-) High - to power
Circuit short to
battery
Communication circuit short circuit to the medium speed CAN bus low circuit
Bus (-) shorted to medium speed
to Bus (+) - Bus CAN bus low
off circuit
With Body ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
Bus resistance perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
signal/message Medium speed electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium
failures CAN bus circuit speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
open circuit, high refer to the relevant DTC index
resistance
Central junction
box system fault
U3000- Control Module - Rear view camera Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
96 Component internal failure clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
internal failure a new rear view camera
View Mirror
Rear View Mirror
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Rear View Mirror. For
manual.
For additional information, refer to: Autolamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1286- Interior mirror - Auto high beam control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
16 Circuit voltage module power or system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU
below threshold ground circuit open Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer to the electrical
circuit, high resistance circuit diagrams and check the auto high beam
Battery/charging control module power and ground circuits for
system fault open circuit, high resistance
system
B1286- Interior mirror - Battery/charging Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

17 Circuit voltage system fault system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU
above threshold Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer to the relevant
44 Data memory module internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure persists, install a new rear view mirror
47 Watchdog/safety module internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
micro controller persists, install a new rear view mirror
failure
49 Internal electronic module internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure persists, install a new rear view mirror
B1286- Interior mirror – Auto high beam control Allow the vehicle interior temperature to
60 Reserved by module temperature increase
document below lower operating
threshold (-20°C)
B1286- Interior mirror - Auto high beam

78 Alignment or sensitivity has been NOTE: This DTC is for event information only.
adjustment reduced using the
incorrect instrument cluster Increased sensitivity mode is cancelled when
service menu settings the ignition is cycled
96 Component module internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
internal failure persists, install a new rear view mirror
B1286- Interior mirror - Auto high beam Check for obstructions in front of the auto high
97 Component or camera view blocked beam camera
system operation
obstructed or
blocked
B1286- Interior mirror - Auto high beam control Allow the vehicle interior temperature to
98 Component or module temperature decrease
system over above upper operating
temperature threshold (65°C)
B12AC- Electrochromic Electrochromic door Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 door mirror - mirror output circuit both door mirrors circuit for short circuit to
Circuit short to short circuit to ground ground
ground
B12AC- Electrochromic Electrochromic door Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
12 door mirror - mirror output circuit both door mirrors circuit for short circuit to
Circuit short to short circuit to power power
battery
B12EB- Camera horizontal Auto high beam control Check accuracy of mirror attachment and
78 alignment - module camera windscreen button
Alignment or misaligned in the Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
adjustment horizontal direction. system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
incorrect Windscreen button and persists, install a new rear view mirror
mirror attachment
alignment incorrect
Auto high beam control
module internal failure
B12EC- Camera vertical Rear view mirror Check accuracy of mirror attachment and
78 alignment - camera misaligned in windscreen button
Alignment or the horizontal Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
adjustment direction. Windscreen system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
incorrect button and mirror persists, install a new rear view mirror
attachment alignment
incorrect
B134A- Target aim Rear view mirror Check accuracy of mirror attachment and
78 verification - camera misaligned in windscreen button
camera horizontal the horizontal Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
alignment - direction. Windscreen system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Alignment or button and mirror persists, install a new rear view mirror
adjustment attachment alignment
incorrect incorrect
B134B- Target aim Rear view mirror Check accuracy of mirror attachment and
78 vertical - camera camera misaligned in windscreen button
horizontal the horizontal Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
alignment - direction. Windscreen system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Alignment or button and mirror persists, install a new rear view mirror
adjustment attachment alignment
incorrect incorrect
U0010- Medium speed Medium speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
88 CAN bus circuit short circuit system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
communication to ground, short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
bus - Bus off to power, open circuit, check the medium speed CAN bus circuit for
high resistance short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
00 communication power or ground circuit check the central junction box power and
with body control open circuit, high ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
module - No sub resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
type information Medium speed CAN system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
bus circuit short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
to ground, short circuit check the medium speed CAN bus circuit for
to power, open circuit, short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
Central junction box Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system fault system, check the central junction box for
index
U0300- Internal control Auto high beam control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 module software module is not system, re-configure the rear view mirror with
incompatibility - configured correctly the latest level software
No sub type
information
U201A- Control module Auto high beam control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
57 main calibration module is not system, re-configure the rear view mirror with
data - configured correctly the latest level software
Invalid/incomplete Car configuration file Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
software mismatch with vehicle system, check and up-date the car configuration
component specification file as necessary
U2100- Initial Car configuration file Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 configuration not mismatch with vehicle system, check and up-date the car configuration
complete - No sub specification file as necessary
type information
U2101- Control module Car configuration file Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 configuration mismatch with vehicle system, check and up-date the car configuration
incompatible - No specification file as necessary
sub type
information
Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Restraints Control Module (RCM)
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER
SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS. TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT ONE MINUTE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
NOTES:
Given the legal implications of a restraints system failure, harness repairs to the restraints control module
circuits are not acceptable. Where the text refers to "REPAIR the circuit", this will normally mean the
replacement of a harness.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Restraints Control Module
(RCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the
workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B Supplemental
Restraint System, Diagnosis and Testing).

B0001- Driver Frontal Stage Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 1 Deployment NOTE: Circuit the driver airbag (stage 1) circuit for short circuit
Control - Circuit reference DR AIRBAG F1 / to ground. Rotate the steering wheel during the
short to ground DR AIRBAG R1 tests to check for intermittent circuit faults within
the clockspring
Driver airbag (stage
1) circuit short
circuit to ground
Control - Circuit reference DR AIRBAG F1 / to power. Rotate the steering wheel during the
short to battery DR AIRBAG R1 tests to check for intermittent circuit faults within
the clockspring
1) circuit short
circuit to power
1A 1 Deployment NOTE: Circuit the driver airbag (stage 1) circuit for short
Control - Circuit reference DR AIRBAG F1 / circuit. Test connector security at clockspring and
resistance below DR AIRBAG R1 airbag. Rotate the steering wheel during the
threshold tests to check for intermittent circuit faults within
Driver airbag (stage the clockspring
1) circuit short
circuit
1B 1 Deployment NOTE: Circuit the driver airbag (stage 1) circuit for open
Control - Circuit reference DR AIRBAG F1 / circuit, high resistance. Rotate the steering wheel
resistance above DR AIRBAG R1 during the tests to check for intermittent circuit
threshold faults within the clockspring
1) circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
B0001- Driver Frontal Stage Restraints control

64 1 Deployment module is not NOTE: This DTC is set when the output is switched
Control - Signal configured correctly off but the airbag is actually installed.
system, re-configure the restraints control
95 1 Deployment NOTE: Circuit the driver airbag (stage 1) circuit for faults.
Control - Incorrect reference DR AIRBAG F1 / Rotate the steering wheel during the tests to
assembly DR AIRBAG R1 check for intermittent circuit faults within the
clockspring
1) incorrect
assembly. Short
circuit between two
different circuits (at
least two faults)
Control - Circuit reference DR AIRBAG F2 / to ground. Rotate the steering wheel during the
short to ground DR AIRBAG R2 tests to check for intermittent circuit faults within
the clockspring
2) circuit short
circuit to ground
Control - Circuit reference DR AIRBAG F2 / to power. Rotate the steering wheel during the
short to battery DR AIRBAG R2 tests to check for intermittent circuit faults within
the clockspring
2) circuit short
circuit to power
1A 2 Deployment NOTE: Circuit the driver airbag (stage 2) circuit for short
Control - Circuit reference DR AIRBAG F2 / circuit. Test connector security at clockspring and
resistance below DR AIRBAG R2 airbag. Rotate the steering wheel during the
threshold tests to check for intermittent circuit faults within
Driver airbag (stage the clockspring
2) circuit short
circuit
1B 2 Deployment NOTE: Circuit the driver airbag (stage 2) circuit for open
Control - Circuit reference DR AIRBAG F2 / circuit, high resistance. Rotate the steering wheel
resistance above DR AIRBAG R2 during the tests to check for intermittent circuit
threshold faults within the clockspring
2) circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
B0002- Driver Frontal Stage Restraints control
64 2 Deployment module is not NOTE: This DTC is set when the output is switched
95 2 Deployment NOTE: Circuit the driver airbag (stage 2) circuit for faults.
Control - Incorrect reference DR AIRBAG F2 / Rotate the steering wheel during the tests to
assembly DR AIRBAG R2 check for intermittent circuit faults within the
clockspring
2) incorrect
assembly. Short
circuit between two
least two faults)
B0010- Passenger Frontal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Stage 1 Deployment NOTE: Circuit the passenger airbag (stage 1) circuit for short
Control - Circuit reference PASS AIRBAG F1 circuit to ground
short to ground / PASS AIRBAG R1
Passenger airbag
(stage 1) circuit
short circuit to
ground
Control - Circuit reference PASS AIRBAG F1 circuit to power
short to battery / PASS AIRBAG R1
Passenger airbag
(stage 1) circuit
short circuit to
power
1A Stage 1 Deployment NOTE: Circuit the passenger airbag (stage 1) circuit for short
Control - Circuit reference PASS AIRBAG F1 circuit. Test connectors for security
resistance below / PASS AIRBAG R1
threshold
Passenger airbag
(stage 1) circuit
short circuit
1B Stage 1 Deployment NOTE: Circuit the passenger airbag (stage 1) circuit for open
Control - Circuit reference PASS AIRBAG F1 circuit, high resistance
resistance above / PASS AIRBAG R1
threshold
Passenger airbag
(stage 1) circuit
open circuit, high
resistance
B0010- Passenger Frontal Restraints control

64 Stage 1 Deployment module is not NOTE: This DTC is set when the output is switched
95 Stage 1 Deployment NOTE: Circuit the passenger airbag (stage 1) circuit for faults
Control - Incorrect reference PASS AIRBAG F1
assembly / PASS AIRBAG R1
Passenger airbag
(stage 1) incorrect
assembly. Short
circuit between two
least two faults)
Control - Circuit reference PASS AIRBAG F2 circuit to ground
short to ground / PASS AIRBAG R2
Passenger airbag
(stage 2) circuit
short circuit to
ground
Control - Circuit reference PASS AIRBAG F2 circuit to power
short to battery / PASS AIRBAG R2
Passenger airbag
(stage 2) circuit
short circuit to
power
1A Stage 2 Deployment NOTE: Circuit the passenger airbag (stage 2) circuit for short
Control - Circuit reference PASS AIRBAG F2 circuit. Test connectors for security
resistance below / PASS AIRBAG R2
threshold
Passenger airbag
(stage 2) circuit
short circuit
1B Stage 2 Deployment NOTE: Circuit the passenger airbag (stage 2) circuit for open
Control - Circuit reference PASS AIRBAG F2 circuit, high resistance
resistance above / PASS AIRBAG R2
threshold
Passenger airbag
(stage 2) circuit
open circuit, high
resistance
B0011- Passenger Frontal Restraints control

64 Stage 2 Deployment module is not NOTE: This DTC is set when the output is switched
95 Stage 2 Deployment NOTE: Circuit the passenger airbag (stage 2) circuit for faults
Control - Incorrect reference PASS AIRBAG F2
assembly / PASS AIRBAG R2
Passenger airbag
(stage 2) incorrect
assembly. Short
circuit between two
least two faults)
B0020- Left Side Air Bag Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Deployment Control NOTE: Circuit the left side airbag (seat) circuit for short circuit
- Circuit short to reference LH SIDE A/BAG to ground
ground F1 / LH SIDE A/BAG R1
Left side airbag

(seat) circuit short
circuit to ground
12 Deployment Control NOTE: Circuit the left side airbag (seat) circuit for short circuit
- Circuit short to reference LH SIDE A/BAG to power
battery F1 / LH SIDE A/BAG R1
Left side airbag

circuit to power
1A Deployment Control the left side airbag (seat) circuit for short circuit.
NOTE: Circuit
- Circuit resistance reference LH SIDE A/BAG Test connectors for security
below threshold F1 / LH SIDE A/BAG R1
Left side airbag

circuit
1B Deployment Control NOTE: Circuit the left side airbag (seat) circuit for open circuit,
- Circuit resistance reference LH SIDE A/BAG high resistance
above threshold F1 / LH SIDE A/BAG R1
Left side airbag

(seat) circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
B0020- Left Side Air Bag Restraints control

64 Deployment Control module is not NOTE: This DTC is set when the output is switched
- Signal plausibility configured correctly off but the airbag is actually installed.
failure
B0020- Left Side Airbag Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
95 Deployment Control NOTE: Circuit the left side airbag (seat) circuit for faults
- Incorrect reference LH SIDE A/BAG
assembly F1 / LH SIDE A/BAG R1
Left side airbag

(seat) incorrect
assembly. Short
circuit between two
least two faults)
B0021- Left Curtain Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Deployment Control NOTE: Circuit the left side air curtain (rows 1 and 2) circuit for
1 - Circuit short to reference LH SIDE CUR F1 short circuit to ground
ground / LH SIDE CUR R1
Left side air curtain

(rows 1 and 2)
to ground
1 - Circuit short to reference LH SIDE CUR F1 short circuit to power
battery / LH SIDE CUR R1

(rows 1 and 2)
to power
1A Deployment Control NOTE: Circuit the left side air curtain (rows 1 and 2) circuit for
1 - Circuit reference LH SIDE CUR F1 short circuit. Test connectors for security
resistance below / LH SIDE CUR R1
threshold
(rows 1 and 2)
1B Deployment Control NOTE: Circuit the left side air curtain (rows 1 and 2) circuit for
1 - Circuit reference LH SIDE CUR F1 open circuit, high resistance
resistance above / LH SIDE CUR R1
threshold
(rows 1 and 2)
high resistance
B0021- Left Curtain Restraints control

1 - Signal configured correctly off but the airbag is actually installed.
1 - Incorrect reference LH SIDE CUR F1 faults
assembly / LH SIDE CUR R1

(rows 1 and 2)
incorrect assembly.
Short circuit
between two
least two faults)
B0022- Left Curtain Left side air curtain

11 Deployment Control 2 (row 3) circuit NOTE: Applicable to seven seat vehicles.
2 - Circuit short to short circuit to
ground ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the left side air curtain 2 (row 3) circuit for short
circuit to ground

12 Deployment Control 2 (row 3) circuit NOTE: Applicable to seven seat vehicles.
2 - Circuit short to short circuit to
battery power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the left side air curtain 2 (row 3) circuit for short
circuit to power

1A Deployment Control 2 (row 3) circuit NOTE: Applicable to seven seat vehicles.
2 - Circuit short circuit
resistance below Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
threshold the left side air curtain 2 (row 3) circuit for short
circuit. Test connectors for security

1B Deployment Control 2 (row 3) circuit NOTE: Applicable to seven seat vehicles.
2 - Circuit open circuit, high
resistance above resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
threshold the left side air curtain 2 (row 3) circuit for open
B0022- Left Curtain Restraints control NOTES:

64 Deployment Control module is not
2 - Signal configured correctly
plausibility failure Applicable to seven seat vehicles.
This DTC is set when the output is switched off but

the airbag is actually installed.


95 Deployment Control 2 (row 3) incorrect NOTE: Applicable to seven seat vehicles.
2 - Incorrect assembly. Short
assembly circuit between two Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
different circuits (at the left side air curtain 2 (row 3) circuit for faults
least two faults)
B0028- Right Side Air Bag Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Deployment Control NOTE: Circuit the right side airbag (seat) circuit for short
- Circuit short to reference RH SIDE A/BAG circuit to ground
ground F1 / RH SIDE A/BAG R1
Right side airbag

circuit to ground
12 Deployment Control NOTE: Circuit the right side airbag (seat) circuit for short
- Circuit short to reference RH SIDE A/BAG circuit to power
battery F1 / RH SIDE A/BAG R1
Right side airbag

circuit to power
1A Deployment Control NOTE: Circuit the right side airbag (seat) circuit for short
- Circuit resistance reference RH SIDE A/BAG circuit. Test connectors for security
below threshold F1 / RH SIDE A/BAG R1
Right side airbag

circuit
1B Deployment Control NOTE: Circuit the right side airbag (seat) circuit for open
- Circuit resistance reference RH SIDE A/BAG circuit, high resistance
above threshold F1 / RH SIDE A/BAG R1
Right side airbag

(seat) circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
B0028- Right Side Air Bag Restraints control

- Signal plausibility configured correctly off but the airbag is actually installed.
failure
B0028- Right Side Airbag Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
95 Deployment Control NOTE: Circuit the right side airbag (seat) circuit for faults
- Incorrect reference RH SIDE A/BAG
assembly F1 / RH SIDE A/BAG R1
Right side airbag

(seat) incorrect
assembly. Short
circuit between two
least two faults)
B0029- Right Curtain Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Deployment Control NOTE: Circuit the right side air curtain (rows 1 and 2) circuit
1 - Circuit short to reference RH SIDE CUR F1 for short circuit to ground
ground / RH SIDE CUR R1
Right side air

curtain (rows 1 and
2) circuit short
circuit to ground
1 - Circuit short to reference RH SIDE CUR F1 for short circuit to power
battery / RH SIDE CUR R1
Right side air

curtain (rows 1 and
2) circuit short
circuit to power
1A Deployment Control NOTE: Circuit the right side air curtain (rows 1 and 2) circuit
1 - Circuit reference RH SIDE CUR F1 for short circuit. Test connectors for security
resistance below / RH SIDE CUR R1
threshold
Right side air
curtain (rows 1 and
2) circuit short
circuit
1B Deployment Control NOTE: Circuit the right side air curtain (rows 1 and 2) circuit
1 - Circuit reference RH SIDE CUR F1 for open circuit, high resistance
resistance above / RH SIDE CUR R1
threshold
Right side air
curtain (rows 1 and
2) circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
B0029- Right Curtain Restraints control

1 - Signal configured correctly off but the airbag is actually installed.
1 - Incorrect reference RH SIDE CUR F1 for faults
assembly / RH SIDE CUR R1
Right side air

curtain (rows 1 and
2) incorrect
assembly. Short
circuit between two
least two faults)
B002A- Right Curtain Right side air

11 Deployment Control curtain 2 (row 3) NOTE: Applicable to seven seat vehicles.
2 - Circuit short to circuit short circuit
ground to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the right side air curtain 2 (row 3) circuit for

2 - Circuit short to circuit short circuit
battery to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the right side air curtain 2 (row 3) circuit for

1A Deployment Control curtain 2 (row 3) NOTE: Applicable to seven seat vehicles.
2 - Circuit circuit short circuit
resistance below Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
threshold the right side air curtain 2 (row 3) circuit for
short circuit. Test connectors for security

1B Deployment Control curtain 2 (row 3) NOTE: Applicable to seven seat vehicles.
2 - Circuit circuit open circuit,
resistance above high resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
threshold the right side air curtain 2 (row 3) circuit for
B002A- Right Curtain Restraints control NOTES:

64 Deployment Control module is not
2 - Signal configured correctly
plausibility failure Applicable to seven seat vehicles.
This DTC is set when the output is switched off but

the airbag is actually installed.


2 - Incorrect incorrect assembly.
assembly Short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
between two the right side air curtain 2 (row 3) circuit for
different circuits (at faults
least two faults)
B0050- Driver Seatbelt Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Sensor - Circuit NOTE: Circuit the driver seatbelt buckle switch circuit for short
short to ground reference BUCKLE circuit to ground
SWITCH-DR
Driver seatbelt
buckle switch circuit
short circuit to
ground
12 Sensor - Circuit NOTE: Circuit the driver seatbelt buckle switch circuit for short
short to battery reference BUCKLE circuit to power
SWITCH-DR
Driver seatbelt
short circuit to
power
1D Sensor - Circuit NOTE: Circuit the driver seatbelt buckle switch circuit for fault
current out of range reference BUCKLE
SWITCH-DR
Driver seatbelt
current out of range
B0050- Driver Seatbelt Restraints control

64 Sensor - Signal module is not NOTE: This DTC is set when the input is switched
plausibility failure configured correctly off but the sensor is actually installed.

B0090- Left Frontal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Restraints Sensor - NOTE: Circuit the left front impact sensor circuit for short
Circuit short to reference LH CRASH SENS circuit to ground
ground F / LH CRASH SENS R
Left front impact

circuit to ground
12 Restraints Sensor - NOTE: Circuit the left front impact sensor circuit for short
Circuit short to reference LH CRASH SENS circuit to power
battery F / LH CRASH SENS R
Left front impact

circuit to power
B0090- Left Frontal Restraints control

64 Restraints Sensor - module is not NOTE: This DTC is set when the input is switched
Signal plausibility configured correctly off but the sensor is actually installed.
failure
81 Restraints Sensor - NOTE: Circuit the left front impact sensor circuit for open
Invalid serial data reference LH CRASH SENS circuit
received F / LH CRASH SENS R Install a new left front impact sensor as
necessary
Left front impact
sensor circuit open
circuit
Left front impact
sensor internal
failure
B0090- Left Frontal Check left front impact sensor fixings for security
92 Restraints Sensor - NOTE: Circuit Install a new left front impact sensor as
Performance or reference LH CRASH SENS necessary
incorrect operation F / LH CRASH SENS R
Left front impact

sensor fixings
insecure
Left front impact
sensor internal
failure
B0090- Left Frontal Install a new left front impact sensor as

96 Restraints Sensor - NOTE: Circuit necessary
Component internal reference LH CRASH SENS
failure F / LH CRASH SENS R
Left front impact

sensor internal
failure
B0091- Left Side Restraints Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Sensor 1 - Circuit NOTE: Circuit the left side impact sensor 1 (door) circuit for
short to ground reference LH SIDE SENS short circuit to ground
F1 / LH SIDE SENS R1
Left side impact

sensor 1 (door)
to ground
12 Sensor 1 - Circuit NOTE: Circuit the left side impact sensor 1 (door) circuit for
short to battery reference LH SIDE SENS short circuit to power
Left side impact

sensor 1 (door)
to power
B0091- Left Side Restraints Restraints control

64 Sensor 1 - Signal module is not NOTE: This DTC is set when the input is switched

81 Sensor 1 - Invalid NOTE: Circuit the left side impact sensor 1 (door) circuit for
serial data received reference LH SIDE SENS open circuit
F1 / LH SIDE SENS R1 Install a new left side impact sensor 1 (door) as
necessary
Left side impact
sensor 1 (door)
Left side impact
sensor 1 (door)
internal failure
B0091- Left Side Restraints Check left side impact sensor 1 (door) fixings for
92 Sensor 1 - NOTE: Circuit security
Performance or reference LH SIDE SENS Install a new left side impact sensor 1 (door) as
incorrect operation F1 / LH SIDE SENS R1 necessary
Left side impact

sensor 1 (door)
fixings insecure
Left side impact
sensor 1 (door)
internal failure
B0091- Left Side Restraints Install a new left side impact sensor 1 (door) as
96 Sensor 1 - NOTE: Circuit necessary
Component internal reference LH SIDE SENS
failure F1 / LH SIDE SENS R1
Left side impact

sensor 1 (door)
internal failure
11 Sensor 2 - Circuit NOTE: Circuit the left side impact sensor 2 (B pillar) circuit for
Left side impact

sensor 2 (B pillar)
to ground
12 Sensor 2 - Circuit NOTE: Circuit the left side impact sensor 2 (B pillar) circuit for
Left side impact

sensor 2 (B pillar)
to power


81 Sensor 2 - Invalid NOTE: Circuit the left side impact sensor 2 (B pillar) circuit for
F1 / LH SIDE SENS R1 Install a new left side impact sensor 2 (B pillar)
as necessary
Left side impact
sensor 2 (B pillar)
Left side impact
sensor 2 (B pillar)
internal failure
B0092- Left Side Restraints Check left side impact sensor 2 (B pillar) fixings
92 Sensor 2 - NOTE: Circuit for security
Performance or reference LH SIDE SENS Install a new left side impact sensor 2 (B pillar)
incorrect operation F1 / LH SIDE SENS R1 as necessary
Left side impact

sensor 2 (B pillar)
fixings insecure
Left side impact
sensor 2 (B pillar)
internal failure
B0092- Left Side Restraints Install a new left side impact sensor 2 (B pillar)
96 Sensor 2 - NOTE: Circuit as necessary
Left side impact

sensor 2 (B pillar)
internal failure
11 Sensor 3 - Circuit NOTE: Circuit the left side impact sensor 3 (C pillar) circuit for
Left side impact

sensor 3 (C pillar)
to ground
12 Sensor 3 - Circuit NOTE: Circuit the left side impact sensor 3 (C pillar) circuit for
Left side impact

sensor 3 (C pillar)
to power


81 Sensor 3 - Invalid NOTE: Circuit the left side impact sensor 3 (C pillar) circuit for
F2 / LH SIDE SENS R2 Install a new left side impact sensor 3 (C pillar)
as necessary
Left side impact
sensor 3 (C pillar)
Left side impact
sensor 3 (C pillar)
internal failure
B0093- Left Side Restraints Check left side impact sensor 3 (C pillar) fixings
92 Sensor 3 - NOTE: Circuit for security
Performance or reference LH SIDE SENS Install a new left side impact sensor 3 (C pillar)
incorrect operation F2 / LH SIDE SENS R2 as necessary
Left side impact

sensor 3 (C pillar)
fixings insecure
Left side impact
sensor 3 (C pillar)
internal failure
B0093- Left Side Restraints Install a new left side impact sensor 3 (C pillar)
96 Sensor 3 - NOTE: Circuit as necessary
Left side impact

sensor 3 (C pillar)
internal failure
B0095- Right Frontal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Restraints Sensor - NOTE: Circuit the right front impact sensor circuit for short
Circuit short to reference RH CRASH SENS circuit to ground
ground F / RH CRASH SENS R
Right front impact

circuit to ground
12 Restraints Sensor - NOTE: Circuit the right front impact sensor circuit for short
Circuit short to reference RH CRASH SENS circuit to power
battery F / RH CRASH SENS R
Right front impact

circuit to power
B0095- Right Frontal Restraints control

64 Restraints Sensor - module is not NOTE: This DTC is set when the input is switched
Signal plausibility configured correctly off but the sensor is actually installed.
failure
81 Restraints Sensor - NOTE: Circuit the right front impact sensor circuit for open
Invalid serial data reference RH CRASH SENS circuit
received F / RH CRASH SENS R Install a new right front impact sensor as
necessary
Right front impact
sensor circuit open
circuit
Right front impact
sensor internal
failure
B0095- Right Frontal Check right front impact sensor fixings for
92 Restraints Sensor - NOTE: Circuit security
Performance or reference RH CRASH SENS Install a new right front impact sensor as
incorrect operation F / RH CRASH SENS R necessary
Right front impact

sensor fixings
insecure
Right front impact
sensor internal
failure
B0095- Right Frontal Install a new right front impact sensor as

96 Restraints Sensor - NOTE: Circuit necessary
Component internal reference RH CRASH SENS
failure F / RH CRASH SENS R
Right front impact

sensor internal
failure
B0096- Right Side Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Restraints Sensor 1 NOTE: Circuit the right side impact sensor 1 (door) circuit for
- Circuit short to reference RH SIDE SENS short circuit to ground
ground F1 / RH SIDE SENS R1
Right side impact

sensor 1 (door)
to ground
- Circuit short to reference RH SIDE SENS short circuit to power
battery F1 / RH SIDE SENS R1
Right side impact

sensor 1 (door)
to power
B0096- Right Side Restraints control

64 Restraints Sensor 1 module is not NOTE: This DTC is set when the input is switched
- Signal plausibility configured correctly off but the sensor is actually installed.
failure
- Invalid serial data reference RH SIDE SENS open circuit
received F1 / RH SIDE SENS R1 Install a new right side impact sensor 1 (door) as
necessary
Right side impact
sensor 1 (door)
Right side impact
sensor 1 (door)
internal failure
B0096- Right Side Check right side impact sensor 1 (door) fixings
92 Restraints Sensor 1 NOTE: Circuit for security
- Performance or reference RH SIDE SENS Install a new right side impact sensor 1 (door) as
incorrect operation F1 / RH SIDE SENS R1 necessary
Right side impact

sensor 1 (door)
fixings insecure
Right side impact
sensor 1 (door)
internal failure
B0096- Right Side Install a new right side impact sensor 1 (door) as
96 Restraints Sensor 1 NOTE: Circuit necessary
- Component reference RH SIDE SENS
internal failure F1 / RH SIDE SENS R1
Right side impact

sensor 1 (door)
internal failure
11 Restraints Sensor 2 NOTE: Circuit the right side impact sensor 2 (B pillar) circuit
- Circuit short to reference RH SIDE SENS for short circuit to ground
Right side impact

sensor 2 (B pillar)
to ground
- Circuit short to reference RH SIDE SENS for short circuit to power
Right side impact

sensor 2 (B pillar)
to power

failure
- Invalid serial data reference RH SIDE SENS for open circuit
received F1 / RH SIDE SENS R1 Install a new right side impact sensor 2 (B pillar)
as necessary
Right side impact
sensor 2 (B pillar)
Right side impact
sensor 2 (B pillar)
internal failure
B0097- Right Side Check right side impact sensor 2 (B pillar) fixings
- Performance or reference RH SIDE SENS Install a new right side impact sensor 2 (B pillar)
incorrect operation F1 / RH SIDE SENS R1 as necessary
Right side impact

sensor 2 (B pillar)
fixings insecure
Right side impact
sensor 2 (B pillar)
internal failure
B0097- Right Side Install a new right side impact sensor 2 (B pillar)
96 Restraints Sensor 2 NOTE: Circuit as necessary
Right side impact

sensor 2 (B pillar)
internal failure
11 Restraints Sensor 3 NOTE: Circuit the right side impact sensor 3 (C pillar) circuit
- Circuit short to reference RH SIDE SENS for short circuit to ground
Right side impact

sensor 3 (C pillar)
to ground
- Circuit short to reference RH SIDE SENS for short circuit to power
Right side impact
sensor 3 (C pillar)
to power

failure
- Invalid serial data reference RH SIDE SENS for open circuit
received F2 / RH SIDE SENS R2 Install a new right side impact sensor 3 (C pillar)
as necessary
Right side impact
sensor 3 (C pillar)
Right side impact
sensor 3 (C pillar)
internal failure
B0098- Right Side Check right side impact sensor 3 (C pillar) fixings
- Performance or reference RH SIDE SENS Install a new right side impact sensor 3 (C pillar)
incorrect operation F2 / RH SIDE SENS R2 as necessary
Right side impact

sensor 3 (C pillar)
fixings insecure
Right side impact
sensor 3 (C pillar)
internal failure
B0098- Right Side Install a new right side impact sensor 3 (C pillar)
96 Restraints Sensor 3 NOTE: Circuit as necessary
Right side impact

sensor 3 (C pillar)
internal failure
B00A0- Occupant Occupant Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

49 Classification classification sensor system, check the occupant classification sensor
System - Internal system fault control module for related DTCs and refer to the
electronic failure relevant DTC index
B00A0- Occupant Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

64 Classification module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
System - Signal configured correctly module with the latest level software
B00A0- Occupant High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
88 Classification bus circuit short system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
System - Bus off circuit to ground, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short circuit to the high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
power, open circuit, ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
B00A0- Occupant Occupant Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

92 Classification classification system, check the occupant classification sensor
System - system fault control module for related DTCs and refer to the
Performance or relevant DTC index
incorrect operation
B00B5- Driver Seat Track Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Position Restraints NOTE: Circuit the driver seat track position sensor circuit for
Sensor - Circuit reference DR SEAT TRACK short circuit to ground
short to ground POS F
Driver seat track

position sensor
to ground
15 Position Restraints NOTE: Circuit the driver seat track position sensor circuit for
Sensor - Circuit reference DR SEAT TRACK short circuit to power, open circuit, high
short to battery or POS F resistance
open
Driver seat track
position sensor
to power, open
circuit, high
resistance
1D Position Restraints NOTE: Circuit the driver seat track position sensor circuit for
Sensor - Circuit reference DR SEAT TRACK short circuit to ground, short circuit to power
current out of range POS F
Driver seat track

position sensor
to ground, short
circuit to power
B00B5- Driver Seat Track Restraints control

64 Position Restraints module is not NOTE: This DTC is set when the input is switched
Sensor - Signal configured correctly off but the sensor is actually installed.
B00C0- Passenger Seat Occupant Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

96 Occupant classification system, check the occupant classification sensor
Classification Sensor system fault control module for related DTCs and refer to the
"A" - Component relevant DTC index
internal failure
B00D2- Restraint System Instrument cluster Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
68 Malfunction fault system, check the instrument cluster for related
Indicator 1 - Event DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
information
B00D2- Restraint System High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
87 Malfunction bus circuit short system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Indicator 1 - Missing circuit to ground, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
message short circuit to the high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
B00D5- Restraint System Passenger airbag Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
14 Passenger Disable deactivation the passenger airbag deactivation warning
Indicator - Circuit warning indicator indicator circuit for short circuit to ground, open
short to ground or circuit short circuit circuit, high resistance
open to ground, open
circuit, high
resistance
B00D5- Restraint System Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
55 Passenger Disable module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
Indicator - Not configured correctly module with the latest level software
configured
B00DF- Passenger Passenger airbag Test the operation of the passenger airbag
00 Restraints Disable deactivation switch deactivation switch
Switch - No sub stuck mid-way Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
type information between 'enabled' the passenger airbag deactivation switch circuit
and 'disabled' for open circuit, high resistance
Passenger airbag
deactivation switch
high resistance
B00DF- Passenger Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

54 Restraints Disable module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
Switch - Missing configured correctly module with the latest level software
calibration
B00DF- Passenger Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Restraints Disable module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
Switch - Signal configured correctly module with the latest level software
B1211- Driver Seatbelt Driver seatbelt Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Retractor retractor and the driver seatbelt retractor and pretensioner
Pretensioner pretensioner circuit circuit for short circuit to ground
Deployment Control short circuit to
- Circuit short to ground
ground
Pretensioner pretensioner circuit circuit for short circuit to power
Deployment Control short circuit to
- Circuit short to power
battery
1A Retractor retractor and the driver seatbelt retractor and pretensioner
Pretensioner pretensioner circuit circuit for short circuit
Deployment Control short circuit
- Circuit resistance
below threshold
1B Retractor retractor and the driver seatbelt retractor and pretensioner
Pretensioner pretensioner circuit circuit for open circuit, high resistance
Deployment Control open circuit, high
- Circuit resistance resistance
above threshold
B1211- Driver Seatbelt Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Retractor module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
Pretensioner configured correctly module with the latest level software
Deployment Control
- Signal plausibility
failure
Pretensioner pretensioner short circuit for faults
Deployment Control circuit between two
- Incorrect different circuits (at
assembly least two faults)
11 Buckle Pretensioner NOTE: Circuit the driver seatbelt pretensioner circuit for short
Deployment Control reference DR PRETEN F1 / circuit to ground
- Circuit short to DR PRETEN R1
ground
Driver seatbelt
pretensioner circuit
short circuit to
ground
12 Buckle Pretensioner NOTE: Circuit the driver seatbelt pretensioner circuit for short
Deployment Control reference DR PRETEN F1 / circuit to power
- Circuit short to DR PRETEN R1
battery
Driver seatbelt
short circuit to
power
1A Buckle Pretensioner NOTE: Circuit the driver seatbelt pretensioner circuit for short
Deployment Control reference DR PRETEN F1 / circuit
- Circuit resistance DR PRETEN R1
below threshold
Driver seatbelt
short circuit
1B Buckle Pretensioner NOTE: Circuit the driver seatbelt pretensioner circuit for open
Deployment Control reference DR PRETEN F1 / circuit, high resistance
- Circuit resistance DR PRETEN R1
above threshold
Driver seatbelt
open circuit, high
resistance
B1212- Driver Seatbelt Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Buckle Pretensioner module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
Deployment Control configured correctly module with the latest level software
failure
95 Buckle Pretensioner NOTE: Circuit the driver seatbelt pretensioner circuit for faults
Deployment Control reference DR PRETEN F1 /
- Incorrect DR PRETEN R1
assembly
Driver seatbelt
pretensioner short
circuit between two
least two faults)
B1213- Passenger Seatbelt Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Buckle Pretensioner NOTE: Circuit the passenger seatbelt pretensioner circuit for
Deployment Control reference PASS PRETEN F1 short circuit to ground
- Circuit short to / PASS PRETEN R1
ground
Passenger seatbelt
short circuit to
ground
Deployment Control reference PASS PRETEN F1 short circuit to power
- Circuit short to / PASS PRETEN R1
battery
Passenger seatbelt
short circuit to
power
1A Buckle Pretensioner NOTE: Circuit the passenger seatbelt pretensioner circuit for
Deployment Control reference PASS PRETEN F1 short circuit
- Circuit resistance / PASS PRETEN R1
below threshold
Passenger seatbelt
short circuit
1B Buckle Pretensioner NOTE: Circuit the passenger seatbelt pretensioner circuit for
Deployment Control reference PASS PRETEN F1 open circuit, high resistance
- Circuit resistance / PASS PRETEN R1
above threshold
Passenger seatbelt
open circuit, high
resistance
B1213- Passenger Seatbelt Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Buckle Pretensioner module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
Deployment Control configured correctly module with the latest level software
failure
Deployment Control reference PASS PRETEN F1 faults
- Incorrect / PASS PRETEN R1
assembly
Passenger seatbelt
pretensioner short
circuit between two
least two faults)
B1A00- Control Module - Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
16 Circuit voltage module power or system, check datalogger signal - ECU Power
below threshold ground circuit open Supply Voltage (0xD111). Refer to the electrical
circuit, high circuit diagrams and check the restraints control
resistance module power and ground circuits for open
Battery/charging circuit, high resistance
manual and test the battery and charging system
B1A00- Control Module - Battery/charging Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

17 Circuit voltage system fault system, check datalogger signal - ECU Power
above threshold Supply Voltage (0xD111). Refer to the relevant
B1A00- Control Module - Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
49 Internal electronic module internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure failure persists, install a new restraints control module
B1A17- Driver Stage 1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
95 Airbag Squib Short NOTE: Circuit the driver airbag (stage 1) circuit for short circuit
Circuit To Ignition reference DR AIRBAG F1 / to another circuit
Loop - Incorrect DR AIRBAG R1
assembly
1) circuit short
circuit to another
circuit
B1A19- Driver Stage 2 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
95 Airbag Squib Short NOTE: Circuit the driver airbag (stage 2) circuit for short circuit
Circuit To Ignition reference DR AIRBAG F2 / to another circuit
Loop - Incorrect DR AIRBAG R2
assembly
2) circuit short
circuit to another
circuit
B1A21- Passenger Stage 1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
95 Airbag Squib Short NOTE: Circuit the passenger airbag (stage 1) circuit for short
Circuit To Ignition reference PASS AIRBAG F1 circuit to another circuit
Loop - Incorrect / PASS AIRBAG R1
assembly
Passenger airbag
(stage 1) circuit
short circuit to
another circuit
B1A23- Passenger Stage 2 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
95 Airbag Squib Short NOTE: Circuit the passenger airbag (stage 2) circuit for short
Circuit To Ignition reference PASS AIRBAG F2 circuit to another circuit
Loop - Incorrect / PASS AIRBAG R2
assembly
Passenger airbag
(stage 2) circuit
short circuit to
another circuit
B1A29- Left Side Airbag Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
95 Squib Short Circuit NOTE: Circuit the left side airbag (seat) circuit for short circuit
To Ignition Loop - reference LH SIDE A/BAG to another circuit
Incorrect assembly F1 / LH SIDE A/BAG R1
Left side airbag

circuit to another
circuit
B1A31- Right Side Airbag Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
95 Squib Short Circuit NOTE: Circuit the right side airbag (seat) circuit for short
To Ignition Loop - reference RH SIDE A/BAG circuit to another circuit
Incorrect assembly F1 / RH SIDE A/BAG R1
Right side airbag

circuit to another
circuit
B1A33- Left Curtain Airbag Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
95 Squib Short Circuit NOTE: Circuit the left side air curtain (rows 1 and 2) circuit for
To Ignition Loop - reference LH SIDE CUR F1 short circuit to another circuit
Incorrect assembly / LH SIDE CUR R1

(rows 1 and 2)
to another circuit
B1A35- Right Curtain Airbag Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
95 Squib Short Circuit NOTE: Circuit the right side air curtain (rows 1 and 2) circuit
To Ignition Loop - reference RH SIDE CUR F1 for short circuit to another circuit
Incorrect assembly / RH SIDE CUR R1
Right side air

curtain (rows 1 and
2) circuit short
circuit to another
circuit
B1A37- Left Curtain #2 Left side air curtain

95 Airbag Squib Short 2 (row 3) circuit NOTE: Applicable to seven seat vehicles.
Circuit To Ignition short circuit to
Loop - Incorrect another circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
assembly the left side air curtain 2 (row 3) circuit for short
circuit to another circuit
B1A39- Right Curtain #2 Right side air

95 Airbag Squib Short curtain 2 (row 3) NOTE: Applicable to seven seat vehicles.
Circuit To Ignition circuit short circuit
Loop - Incorrect to another circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
assembly the right side air curtain 2 (row 3) circuit for
short circuit to another circuit
B1A40- Left Side (pelvic) 2 - Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
11 Circuit short to module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
ground configured correctly module with the latest level software
12 Circuit short to module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
battery configured correctly module with the latest level software
1A Circuit resistance module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
below threshold configured correctly module with the latest level software
1B Circuit resistance module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
above threshold configured correctly module with the latest level software
64 Signal plausibility module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
failure configured correctly module with the latest level software
95 Incorrect assembly module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
configured correctly module with the latest level software
B1A41- Left Side (pelvic) 2 Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
95 Short circuit To module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
Ignition Loop – configured correctly module with the latest level software
Incorrect assembly
B1A55- Crash Record
14 Output - Circuit NOTE: Circuit NOTE: If this DTC is set after re-configuring the
short to ground or reference CRASH OUTPUT restraints control module, disconnect the battery for 1
open minute and retest.
Crash signal circuit
short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground, open the crash signal circuit for short circuit to
circuit, high ground, open circuit, high resistance
resistance
B1A55- Crash Record Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Output - Signal module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
plausibility failure configured correctly module with the latest level software
B1D60- Right Side (pelvic) 2 Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
11 - Circuit short to module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
ground configured correctly module with the latest level software
12 - Circuit short to module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
battery configured correctly module with the latest level software
1A - Circuit resistance module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
below threshold configured correctly module with the latest level software
1B - Circuit resistance module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
above threshold configured correctly module with the latest level software
64 - Signal plausibility module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
failure configured correctly module with the latest level software
95 - Incorrect module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
assembly configured correctly module with the latest level software
B1D74- Passenger Airbag Passenger airbag Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Cutoff Enable deactivation switch the passenger airbag deactivation switch enable
Switch - Circuit enable circuit short circuit for short circuit to ground
Switch - Circuit enable circuit short circuit for short circuit to power
short to battery circuit to power
Switch - Circuit enable circuit open circuit for open circuit, high resistance
open circuit, high
resistance
11 Cutoff Disable deactivation switch the passenger airbag deactivation switch disable
Switch - Circuit disable circuit short circuit for short circuit to ground
Switch - Circuit disable circuit short circuit for short circuit to power
short to battery circuit to power
Switch - Circuit disable circuit open circuit for open circuit, high resistance
open circuit, high
resistance
88 Communication Bus bus circuit short system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
- Bus off circuit to ground, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
87 With Vehicle system control the anti-lock brake system control module power
Dynamics Control module power or and ground circuits for open circuit, high
Module - Missing ground circuit open resistance
message circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
resistance system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
high resistance system, check the anti-lock brake system control
Anti-lock brake module for related DTCs and refer to the
system fault relevant DTC index
U0300- Internal Control Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
55 Module Software module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
Incompatibility - configured correctly module with the latest level software
Not configured
U1A02- Permanent Memory Restraints control Install a new restraints control module (not
66 Store Full – Signal module memory full warrantable)
has too many
transitions/events
U1A03- Car Configuration Central junction box Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
87 Parameter – Missing power or ground the central junction box power and ground
message circuit open circuit, circuits for open circuit, high resistance
High speed CAN system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
bus circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit to ground, the high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
power, open circuit, resistance
system fault related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
U1A14- CAN Initialization Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
55 Failure - Not module internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
configured failure persists, install a new restraints control module
U201A- Control Module Main Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
4A Calibration Data - module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
Incorrect configured correctly module with the latest level software. Clear the
component installed DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
new restraints control module
U201A- Control Module Main Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 Calibration Data - module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
Not programmed configured correctly module with the latest level software
U201B- Control Module Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
4A Calibration Data #2 module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
- Incorrect configured correctly module with the latest level software. Clear the
U201B- Control Module Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 Calibration Data #2 module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
- Not programmed configured correctly module with the latest level software. Clear the
U201C- Control Module Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
4A Calibration Data #3 module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
- Incorrect configured correctly module with the latest level software. Clear the
U201C- Control Module Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 Calibration Data #3 module is not system, re-configure the restraints control
- Not programmed configured correctly module with the latest level software. Clear the
U3000- Control Module - Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
49 Internal electronic module internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure failure persists, install a new restraints control module
U3002- Vehicle Restraints control Install the original or a new restraints control
81 Identification module previously module as necessary
Number - Invalid installed on another Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
serial data received vehicle system, perform routine - Learn VIN (0x0404)
New restraints
control module
installed and VIN
not yet
programmed
Satellite Radio Control Module (SRCM)
Satellite Radio Control Module (SRCM)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Satellite Radio Control
Module (SRCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing

B1A89- Satellite Digital radio antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
01 Antenna - circuit short circuit digital radio antenna circuit for short circuit to ground,
General to ground, short short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
electrical circuit to power, If fault persists, install a new satellite radio control
failure open circuit, high module
resistance
Satellite radio
control module
internal failure
U3000- Control Car configuration file Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
4A Module - mismatch check and up-date the car configuration file as
Incorrect necessary. Clear the diagnostic trouble code and re-
component test
installed
U3000- Control Satellite radio Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
55 Module - Not control module not re-configure the satellite radio control module with the
configured configured latest level software
U3000- Control Satellite radio Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
87 Module - control module re-configure the satellite radio control module with the
Missing configuration latest level software
message incomplete/corrupted
U3000- Control Satellite radio Check that the satellite radio control module cooling
98 Module - control module vents / air circulation are not obstructed. Cool the
Component cooling vents vehicle interior down by ensuring it is in the shade and
or system obstructed have the A/C on cool. Using the manufacturer
over Satellite radio approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest
temperature control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
internal failure clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
new satellite radio control module
Steering Angle Sensor Module (SASM)
Steering Angle Sensor Module (SASM)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Steering Angle Sensor
Module (SASM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing
For additional information, refer to: Steering System (211-00 Steering System - General Information, Diagnosis
and Testing).

C0051- Steering Wheel Steering angle Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
04 Position Sensor - sensor module perform routine - Calibrate Steering Angle Centre
System internal not calibrated Position (0x200E)
failures correctly Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Steering angle clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
sensor module install a new steering angle sensor module
internal failure
Signal compare not calibrated Position (0x200E)
failure correctly Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
Steering manual and check and adjust the steering geometry
geometry Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
incorrect clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
Steering angle install a new steering angle sensor module
sensor module
internal failure
Signal plausibility not calibrated Position (0x200E)
failure correctly Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
Steering manual and check and adjust the steering geometry
geometry Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
incorrect clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
Steering angle install a new steering angle sensor module
sensor module
internal failure
circuit, high
resistance
U0122- Lost Anti-lock brake Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Communication system control the anti-lock brake system control module power
With Vehicle module power or and ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Dynamics Control ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Module - No sub open circuit, high perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
short circuit to check the anti-lock brake system control module for
circuit, high
resistance
Anti-lock brake
system fault
U0140- Lost Central junction Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Communication box power or the central junction box power and ground circuits
With Body Control ground circuit for open circuit, high resistance
Module - No sub open circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
type information resistance perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
power, open check the central junction box for related DTCs and
resistance
Central junction
box system fault
U0300- Internal Control Mismatch Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
55 Module Software between vehicle re-configure the steering angle sensor module with
Incompatibility - and steering the latest level software. If the fault persists, re-
Not configured angle sensor configure the central junction box with the latest
module software level software
levels
U1A14- CAN Initialization Steering angle Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
49 failure- Internal sensor module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
electronic failure internal failure install a new steering angle sensor module
U3002- Vehicle Steering angle Install the original or a new steering angle sensor
62 Identification sensor module module as necessary
Number - Signal previously
compare failure installed on
another vehicle
Terrain Response Switchpack (TR)
Terrain Response Switchpack (TR)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
There are references to "power latch" within the DTC index. This is where the module must be reset by
means of a complete power down and power up.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Terrain Response
Switchpack (TR). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing
For additional information, refer to: Ride and Handling Optimization (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization,

C1A00- Control Module - The terrain response Rectify this DTC before attempting to rectify
46 Calibration/parameter switchpack has others. Record all DTCs logged and clear
memory failure indicated a them. With ignition on select a terrain
calibration/parameter response special program, turn off the ignition,
memory failure for then turn back on the ignition and verify the
embedded systems selected special program is still active. If the
using FLASH selected terrain response special program is
memory. This is still not active and has returned to the general
equivalent to program, confirm if DTC has returned. Repeat
EEPROM in procedure again once more. If DTC is still
RAM/ROM/EEPROM present install a new terrain response
embedded systems switchpack
Corruption in the
non-volatile memory
storage system
(EEPROM) in the
terrain response
switchpack
C1A01- LED - Component Terrain response

96 internal failure switchpack internal NOTE: If the system is in 'failsafe default' mode
failure due to another issue, no LEDs will illuminate. This
fault does not cause the system to go to 'failsafe
default' mode.

system, clear the DTCs. Operate the terrain
response switchpack to select each special
programme. Check each LED illuminates as
appropriate. If the fault persists, install a new
terrain response switchpack
C1A02- Rotary Encoder Stuck The terrain response

94 In Intermediate switchpack is held in NOTE: Suspect driver error do not replace the
Position - Unexpected an intermediate terrain response switchpack
operation position (between
the special Check for foreign object preventing correct
programmes) for operation of terrain response switchpack. Start
more than 60 the vehicle engine, rotate the terrain response
seconds switchpack until it has located a genuine
Foreign object detent, wait 60 seconds. Stop the vehicle
preventing correct engine, clear the DTC and retest
operation of terrain
response switchpack
Mechanical damage
to the terrain
response switchpack
88 Communication Bus circuit short circuit to system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Off - Bus off ground, short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
to power, open check the high speed CAN bus circuit for short
circuit, high circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
U0100- Lost Communication Engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With The ECM/PCM module power or check the engine control module power and
'A' - No sub type ground circuit open ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
information circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
High speed CAN bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit short circuit to check the high speed CAN bus circuit for short
ground, short circuit circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
resistance system, check the engine control module for
Engine system fault related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index
00 With The TCM - No module power or check the transmission control module power
sub type information ground circuit open and ground circuits for open circuit, high
High speed CAN bus system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
ground, short circuit check the high speed CAN bus circuit for short
to power, open circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit, high circuit, high resistance
Transmission system system, check the transmission control module
fault for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index
U0102- Lost Communication Transfer case control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With The Transfer module power or check the transfer case control module power
Case Control Module ground circuit open and ground circuits for open circuit, high
- No sub type circuit, high resistance
information resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Transfer case system system, check the transfer case control
fault module for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
U0121- Lost Communication Anti-lock brake Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Anti-Lock Brake system control check the anti-lock brake system control
System (ABS) module power or module power and ground circuits for open
Control Module - No ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
sub type information circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
resistance system, check the anti-lock brake system
Anti-lock brake control module for related DTCs and refer to
system fault the relevant DTC index
U0132- Lost Communication Air suspension Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Suspension control module check the air suspension control module power
Control Module 'A' - power or ground and ground circuits for open circuit, high
No sub type circuit open circuit, resistance
Air suspension system, check the air suspension control
system fault module for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
U0139- Lost Communication Adaptive damping Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Suspension system control check the adaptive damping system control
Control Module 'B' - module power or module power and ground circuits for open
No sub type ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
resistance system, check the adaptive damping system
Adaptive damping control module for related DTCs and refer to
index
U0300- Internal Control Terrain response Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Module Software switchpack is not system, re-configure the terrain response
Incompatibility - No configured correctly switchpack with the latest level software
sub type information
U0401- Invalid Data Received Missing/invalid data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
68 From The ECM/PCM from the engine system, check the engine control module for
'A' - Event control module related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
information index
68 from TCM - Event from the system, check the transmission control module
information transmission control for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
module index
68 From The Transfer from the transfer system, check the transfer case control
Case Control Module case control module module for related DTCs and refer to the
- Event information relevant DTC index
68 From Anti-Lock Brake from the anti-lock system, check the anti-lock brake system
System (ABS) brake system control control module for related DTCs and refer to
Control Module - module the relevant DTC index
Event information
68 From Suspension from the air system, check the air suspension control
Control Module 'A' - suspension control module for related DTCs and refer to the
Event information module relevant DTC index
68 From Body Control from the central system, check the central junction box for
Module - Event junction box related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
information index
U043A- Invalid Data Received Missing/invalid data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
68 From Suspension from the adaptive system, check the adaptive damping system
Control Module "B" - damping system control module for related DTCs and refer to
Event information control module the relevant DTC index
00 Configuration mismatch with system, check and up-date the car
Incompatible - No vehicle specification configuration file as necessary
sub type information Incorrect terrain Install a new terrain response switchpack as
response switchpack necessary
installed
Published: 27-Sep-2012
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code Index: Touch
Screen DTC: Touch Screen (TS)
Touch Screen (TS)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle
part number 3548-1358-00
NOTES:
refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval
information read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system)
places and with a current calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the digital
multimeter leads into account
Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests
Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion
If diagnostic trouble codes are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an
intermittent concern may be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals
Where an 'on demand self-test' is referred to, this can be accessed via the 'diagnostic trouble code monitor'
tab on the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the touch screen, for additional
diagnosis and testing information refer to the relevant diagnosis and testing section.
DTC Description Possible Cause Action

B1087- LIN Bus "A" - LIN bus to the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the LIN
83 Value of signal rear view bus circuit to the rear view camera for short circuit to
protection camera circuit ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
calculation short circuit to resistance
incorrect ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
86 Signal invalid rear view bus circuit to the rear view camera for short circuit to
camera circuit ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
87 Missing rear view bus circuit to the rear view camera for short circuit to
message camera circuit ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
88 Bus off rear view bus circuit to the rear view camera for short circuit to
camera circuit ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
B1D21- Remote control Steering wheel No steering wheel remote in-car entertainment switchpack
13 switch - Circuit switchpack functionality. This DTC is logged if the module detects an
open fault open circuit on the steering wheel audio switch signal line.
Clockspring Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the signal
fault line running from the steering wheel audio switchpack
Wiring harness through the clockspring to the touch screen for insecure
fault connectors, open circuits, including intermittent faults
(rotate steering wheel during checks). Also test ground
connections to the control module for open circuits. Repair
or replace wiring harness as required
U0010- Medium speed Medium speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 CAN CAN bus complete a CAN network integrity test
communication circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
bus - No sub circuit to medium speed CAN circuit for short circuit to ground,
type ground, short short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
information circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
U0010- Medium speed Medium speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
48 CAN CAN bus complete a CAN network integrity test
communication circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
bus - circuit to medium speed CAN circuit for short circuit to ground,
Supervised ground, short short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
software failure circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
U0140- Lost Lost Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,

00 communication communication complete a CAN network integrity test
with central with the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power
junction box - central and ground connections to the central junction box
No sub type junction box Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN
information circuit between the touch screen and the central junction
box for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,

with body with the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power
control module central and ground connections to the central junction box
"B" - No sub junction box Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN
type circuit between the touch screen and the central junction
information box for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,

with instrument with the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power
panel cluster - instrument and ground connections to the instrument cluster
No sub type cluster Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN
information circuit between the touch screen and the instrument
cluster for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,

with parking with the park Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power
assist control distance and ground connections to the park distance control
module A - No control module module
sub type Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN
information circuit between the touch screen and the park distance
control module for short circuit to ground, short circuit to

00 communications communication complete a CAN network integrity test
with HVAC with the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power
control module automatic and ground connections to the automatic temperature
- No sub type temperature control module
information control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN
circuit between the touch screen and the automatic
temperature control module for short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance

00 Communication communication complete a CAN network integrity test
With Auxiliary with the fuel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power
Heater Control fired booster and ground connections to the fuel fired booster heater
Module - No heater Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN
sub type circuit between the touch screen and the fuel fired booster
information heater for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
U0184- Lost Lost

00 communications communication NOTE: This DTC may be stored even though no fault
with radio - No with the condition is present and should be ignored unless the customer
sub type integrated has reported an information and entertainment system concern.
information audio module Clear the DTC and retest. Verify the customer concern prior to
diagnosis

complete a MOST network integrity test
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power
and ground connections to the integrated audio module
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the MOST
circuit between the touch screen and the integrated audio
module
U0184- Lost The serial Check the serial number of the part is valid (as installed at
4A communications number of the the factory). If the part has been installed by a dealer the
with radio - component installation routine has not been performed correctly,
Incorrect does not install the component using the manufacturer approved
component match the diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and retest the system
installed serial number
stored in the
master module
U0186- Lost Lost

00 communication communication NOTE: This DTC may be stored even though no fault
with audio with the audio condition is present and should be ignored unless the customer
amplifier A - No amplifier has reported an information and entertainment system concern.
sub type module Clear the DTC and retest. Verify the customer concern prior to
information diagnosis

complete a CAN network integrity test
and ground connections to the audio amplifier module
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN
circuit between the touch screen and the audio amplifier
module for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
4A communication number of the the factory). If the part has been installed by a dealer the
with audio component installation routine has not been performed correctly,
amplifier A - does not install the component using the manufacturer approved
Incorrect match the diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and retest the system
component serial number
installed stored in the
master module
U0191- Lost Lost

with television - with the TV condition is present and should be ignored unless the customer
No sub type control module has reported an information and entertainment system concern.
information Clear the DTC and retest. Verify the customer concern prior to
diagnosis
and ground connections to the TV control module
circuit between the touch screen and the TV control
module for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
with television - component installation routine has not been performed correctly,
Incorrect does not install the component using the manufacturer approved
component match the diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and retest the system
installed serial number
stored in the
master module
U0193- Lost Lost

with digital with the condition is present and should be ignored unless the customer
audio control satellite radio has reported an information and entertainment system concern.
module A - No control module Clear the DTC and retest. Verify the customer concern prior to
sub type diagnosis
information
and ground connections to the satellite radio control
module
circuit between the touch screen and the satellite radio
with digital component installation routine has not been performed correctly,
audio control does not install the component using the manufacturer approved
module A - match the diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and retest the system
Incorrect serial number
component stored in the
installed master module
U0194- Lost Lost

with digital with the digital condition is present and should be ignored unless the customer
audio control radio control has reported an information and entertainment system concern.
module B - No module Clear the DTC and retest. Verify the customer concern prior to
sub type diagnosis
information
and ground connections to the digital radio control module
circuit between the touch screen and the digital radio
with digital component installation routine has not been performed correctly,
audio control does not install the component using the manufacturer approved
module B - match the diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and retest the system
Incorrect serial number
component stored in the
installed master module
U0196- Lost Lost

with with the rear condition is present and should be ignored unless the customer
entertainment seat has reported an information and entertainment system concern.
control module entertainment Clear the DTC and retest. Verify the customer concern prior to
- Rear A - No control module diagnosis
sub type
information Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
and ground connections to the rear seat entertainment
control module
circuit between the touch screen and the rear seat
entertainment control module for short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
with component installation routine has not been performed correctly,
entertainment does not install the component using the manufacturer approved
control module match the diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and retest the system
- Rear A - serial number
Incorrect stored in the
component master module
installed
With "Seat with the driver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power
Control Module seat module and ground connections to the driver seat module
A" - No sub Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN
type circuit between the touch screen and the driver seat
information module for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,

With "Seat with the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power
Control Module passenger seat and ground connections to the passenger seat module
B" - No sub module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN
type circuit between the touch screen and the passenger seat
information module for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
U023B- Lost Lost Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,

with image with the rear Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power
processing view camera and ground connections to the rear view camera
module B - No Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN
sub type circuit between the touch screen and the rear view camera
information for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
U025D- Lost Lost Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,

with front with the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power
controls integrated and ground connections to the integrated control panel
interface control panel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN
module - No circuit between the touch screen and the integrated
sub type control panel for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
information power, open circuit, high resistance
U0300- Internal control Touch screen Check the touch screen part number. Install the correct
00 module is not part as necessary. Check that the correct software is
software compatible installed
incapability - with the
No sub type vehicle
information
U0300- Internal control Touch screen Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
51 module software the part numbers of the software installed. Re-configure
software incorrect or the touch screen with the latest level software as
incapability - missing necessary
Not
programmed
U1A24- MOST ring MOST ring
87 complete. No complete NOTE: This DTC may be stored even though no fault
Communication MOST ring condition is present and should be ignored unless the customer
- Missing node internal has reported an information and entertainment system concern.
message fault Clear the DTC and retest. Verify the customer concern prior to
diagnosis
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the MOST

ring for fault, bypass each MOST module in turn to isolate
faulty node
U2003- Fibre optic MOST ring Check MOST ring for disconnected modules or fibreoptic
87 communication incomplete cable concerns
bus - Missing
message
U3000- Control module Touch screen Allow the system to cool, clear the diagnostic trouble code
4B - Over panel backlight and check/monitor system for re-occurrence, if DTC re-
temperature - High occurs, check and install a new touch screen as necessary
temperature
detected
U3000- Control module System shut This DTC is logged if the touch screen display control
98 - Component or down request module receives a system shut down request from another
system over from another MOST module that is registering as over temperature.
temperature module on Allow the system to cool, clear the diagnostic trouble code
MOST ring and check/monitor system for re-occurrence
MOST module If DTC re-occurs, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
- Internal and check each MOST module for signs of overheating and
temperature related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
over limit
U3003- Battery voltage Mis-match Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power
62 - Signal between the and ground circuits to the touch screen compared to
compare failure supply voltage battery voltage
to the touch
screen and the
battery voltage
value
broadcast on
the CAN bus
Published: 31-Oct-2013
Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM)
Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Transfer Case Control
Module (TCCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing
section in the workshop manual
For additional information, refer to: Transfer Case (308-07C Transfer Case - Vehicles With: Twin Speed Transfer
Case, Diagnosis and Testing).

P0560- System Voltage - Transfer case control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 No sub type module power or system, check datalogger signal - ECU Power
information ground circuit open Supply Voltage (0xD111). Refer to the electrical
circuit, high circuit diagrams and check the transfer case
resistance control module power and ground circuits for
Battery/charging open circuit, high resistance
Transfer case control manual and test the battery and charging
module internal system
failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
persists, install a new transfer case control
module and perform routine - Transfer Case
Replacement
P0561- System Voltage Transfer case control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Unstable - No sub module power or system, check datalogger signal - ECU Power
type information ground circuit open Supply Voltage (0xD111). Refer to the electrical
Replacement
P0562- System Voltage Transfer case control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Low - No sub type module power or system, check datalogger signal - ECU Power
information ground circuit open Supply Voltage (0xD111). Refer to the electrical
Replacement
P0563- System Voltage Battery/charging

00 High - No sub type system fault NOTE: This DTC may be set when the vehicle is
information jump started.

system, check datalogger signal - ECU Power
Supply Voltage (0xD111). Refer to the relevant
P0607- Control Module Transfer case control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Performance - No module internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
sub type failure persists, install a new transfer case control
information module and perform routine - Transfer Case
Replacement
P0634- PCM / ECM / TCM Transfer case motor NOTES:

00 Internal circuit short circuit to
Temperature A Too ground, short circuit
High - No sub type to power, open Transfer case motor resistance should be 0.2
information circuit, high ohms to 10.0 ohms.
resistance
Transfer case control
module internal This DTC may be induced by excessive high/low
failure range changes.
This DTC may be induced by prolonged off-road

driving.
Allow the vehicle to cool. Using the

manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, refer
transfer case motor circuit for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
Replacement
P0641- Sensor Reference Transfer case motor

00 Voltage A Circuit - position sensor NOTE: Transfer case motor position sensor voltage
No sub type circuit short circuit to (sensor supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V,
information ground, short circuit resistance (signal A circuit to ground circuit) should be
to power, open 16.0k ohms to 20.0k ohms and resistance (signal B
circuit, high circuit to ground circuit) should be 16.0k ohms to
resistance 20.0k ohms.
module internal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
failure the transfer case motor position sensor circuit
Replacement

00 Voltage A Circuit position sensor NOTE: Transfer case motor position sensor voltage
Low - No sub type circuit short circuit to (sensor supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V,
information ground resistance (signal A circuit to ground circuit) should be
Transfer case control 16.0k ohms to 20.0k ohms and resistance (signal B
module internal circuit to ground circuit) should be 16.0k ohms to
failure 20.0k ohms.

the transfer case motor position sensor circuit
Replacement

00 Voltage A Circuit position sensor NOTE: Transfer case motor position sensor voltage
High - No sub type circuit short circuit to (sensor supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V,
information power resistance (signal A circuit to ground circuit) should be
failure 20.0k ohms.

for short circuit to power
Replacement
P0652- Sensor Reference Transfer case

00 Voltage B Circuit selector fork position NOTE: Transfer case selector fork position sensor
Low - No sub type sensor circuit short voltage (supply circuit to ground circuit) should be 4.0V
information circuit to ground to 6.0V.
Manual transmission
gear position sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit short circuit to the transfer case selector fork position sensor
ground circuit for short circuit to ground
Transfer case control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
module internal the manual transmission gear position sensor
failure circuit for short circuit to ground
Replacement
P0653- Sensor Reference Transfer case

00 Voltage B Circuit selector fork position NOTE: Transfer case selector fork position sensor
High - No sub type sensor circuit short voltage (supply circuit to ground circuit) should be 4.0V
information circuit to power to 6.0V.
Manual transmission
gear position sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit short circuit to the transfer case selector fork position sensor
module internal the manual transmission gear position sensor
failure circuit for short circuit to power
Replacement
P0666- PCM/ECM/TCM Transfer case

00 Internal solenoid circuit short NOTE: Transfer case solenoid resistance should be
Temperature circuit to ground 0.2 ohms to 10.0 ohms.
Sensor 'A' Circuit - Transfer case control
No sub type module internal Allow the vehicle to cool. Using the
information failure manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, refer
transfer case solenoid circuit for short circuit to
ground
Replacement
P0698- Sensor Reference Manual transmission

00 Voltage C Circuit output speed sensor NOTE: Manual transmission output speed sensor
Low - No sub type circuit short circuit to voltage (supply circuit to ground circuit) should be 8.0V
information ground to 11.0V, signal should be approximately 5 times
engine speed in 1st gear when the clutch is fully
engaged.

system, check datalogger signal - Manual
Transmission Output Shaft Speed (0x11B5).
the manual transmission output speed sensor
P0699- Sensor Reference Manual transmission

00 Voltage C Circuit output speed sensor NOTE: Manual transmission output speed sensor
High - No sub type circuit short circuit to voltage (supply circuit to ground circuit) should be 8.0V
information power, open circuit, to 11.0V, signal should be approximately 5 times
high resistance engine speed in 1st gear when the clutch is fully
engaged.

circuit for short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance
P0702- Transmission Transfer case control

00 Control System module power or NOTE: This DTC may be set during a forced reset
Electrical - No sub ground circuit open by the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
type information circuit, high
Battery/charging system, check datalogger signal - ECU Power
system fault Supply Voltage (0xD111). Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the transfer case
control module power and ground circuits for
system
P0712- Transmission Fluid Transfer case motor

00 Temperature temperature sensor NOTE: Transfer case motor temperature sensor
Sensor A Circuit circuit short circuit to (temperature signal circuit to motor position sensor
Low - No sub type ground ground circuit) resistance should be 1.0k ohms to 30.0k
information Transfer case control ohms.
module internal
failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the transfer case motor temperature sensor
Replacement
P0713- Transmission Fluid Transfer case motor

00 Temperature temperature sensor NOTE: Transfer case motor temperature sensor
Sensor A Circuit circuit short circuit to (temperature signal circuit to motor position sensor
High - No sub type power ground circuit) resistance should be 1.0k ohms to 30.0k
information Transfer case control ohms.
module internal
the transfer case motor temperature sensor
Replacement
P0715- Turbine/Input Manual transmission

00 Shaft Speed output speed sensor NOTE: Manual transmission output speed sensor
Sensor A Circuit - circuit short circuit to voltage (supply circuit to ground circuit) should be 8.0V
No sub type ground, short circuit to 11.0V, signal should be approximately 5 times
information to power, open engine speed in 1st gear when the clutch is fully
circuit, high engaged.
resistance

Sensor A Circuit circuit short circuit to voltage (supply circuit to ground circuit) should be 8.0V
Range/Performance ground, short circuit to 11.0V, signal should be approximately 5 times
- No sub type to power, open engine speed in 1st gear when the clutch is fully
information circuit, high engaged.
resistance

Sensor A Circuit No circuit short circuit to voltage (supply circuit to ground circuit) should be 8.0V
Signal - No sub ground, short circuit to 11.0V, signal should be approximately 5 times
type information to power, open engine speed in 1st gear when the clutch is fully
circuit, high engaged.
resistance
P0780- Shift Malfunction - Transfer case motor NOTES:

00 No sub type circuit short circuit to
information ground, short circuit
to power, open Transfer case motor resistance should be 0.2
circuit, high ohms to 10.0 ohms.
resistance
Transfer case motor
position sensor Transfer case motor position sensor voltage
circuit short circuit to (sensor supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V,
ground, short circuit resistance (signal A circuit to ground circuit) should be
to power, open 16.0k ohms to 20.0k ohms and resistance (signal B
circuit, high circuit to ground circuit) should be 16.0k ohms to
resistance 20.0k ohms.
failure the transfer case motor circuit for short circuit
Transfer case internal to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
Replacement
persists, install a new transfer case and perform
routine - Transfer Case Replacement
P0806- Clutch Position Transfer case NOTES:

00 Sensor Circuit selector fork position
Range/Performance sensor not calibrated
- No sub type Transfer case motor If additional transfer case circuit fault related DTCs
information circuit short circuit to are also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
ground, short circuit first and retest.
to power, open
circuit, high
resistance Transfer case motor resistance should be 0.2
Transfer case motor ohms to 10.0 ohms.
position sensor
Transfer case motor position sensor voltage
to power, open
(sensor supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V,
circuit, high
resistance (signal A circuit to ground circuit) should be
resistance
16.0k ohms to 20.0k ohms and resistance (signal B
Transfer case
circuit to ground circuit) should be 16.0k ohms to
selector fork position
20.0k ohms.
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
Transfer case selector fork position sensor voltage
(supply circuit to ground circuit) should be 4.0V to
high resistance
6.0V.
Manual transmission
output speed sensor
ground, short circuit Manual transmission output speed sensor voltage
to power, open (supply circuit to ground circuit) should be 8.0V to
circuit, high 11.0V, signal should be approximately 5 times engine
resistance speed in 1st gear when the clutch is fully engaged.
Manual transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
gear position sensor system, perform routine - Transfer Case
circuit short circuit to Replacement. Clear the DTCs and retest
ground, short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to power, open the transfer case motor circuit for short circuit
circuit, high to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
Transfer case motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Transfer case for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
selector fork position power, open circuit, high resistance
sensor failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Transfer case control the transfer case selector fork position sensor
module internal circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
failure power, open circuit, high resistance
Transfer case internal Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
failure system, check datalogger signal - Manual
Gearshift Position (0x1985) - and select gears.
the manual transmission gear position sensor
persists, install a new transfer case motor and
perform routine - Transfer Case Replacement
persists, install a new transfer case selector fork
position sensor and perform routine - Transfer
Case Replacement
Replacement
P0807- Clutch Position Transfer case motor

00 Sensor Circuit Low position sensor NOTE: Transfer case motor position sensor voltage
- No sub type circuit short circuit to (sensor supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V,
failure 20.0k ohms.

Replacement
P0808- Clutch Position Transfer case motor

00 Sensor Circuit High position sensor NOTE: Transfer case motor position sensor voltage
- No sub type circuit short circuit to (sensor supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V,
failure 20.0k ohms.

Replacement
P0820- Gear Lever X-Y Manual transmission NOTES:

00 Position Sensor gear position sensor
Circuit - No sub calibration lost due
type information to driver riding the Manual transmission output speed sensor voltage
clutch - Transmission (supply circuit to ground circuit) should be 8.0V to
input and output 11.0V, signal should be approximately 5 times engine
speeds incorrect for speed in 1st gear when the clutch is fully engaged.
selected gear ratio
Clutch slip due to
wear - Transmission This DTC may be induced by the driver.
input and output
speeds incorrect for Calibrate the manual transmission gear position
selected gear ratio sensor
Manual transmission Check the clutch for slipping
output speed sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit short circuit to system, check datalogger signal - Manual
ground, short circuit Transmission Output Shaft Speed (0x11B5).
to power, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit, high the manual transmission output speed sensor
resistance circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
P0826- Up and Down Transfer case NOTES:

00 Switch Circuit - No high/low range
sub type switch stuck active
information Transfer case This DTC will be set if the switch signal is active
high/low range for > 255 seconds.
switch signal circuit
Transfer case control This DTC may be induced by the driver.
module internal
failure Check the operation of the transfer case
high/low range switch
system, check datalogger signal - TCCM Input
Status (0x1983). Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the transfer case high/low
range switch signal circuits for short circuit to
power
Replacement
P0900- Clutch Actuator Transfer case motor

00 Circuit/Open - No circuit short circuit to NOTE: Transfer case motor resistance should be
sub type ground, short circuit 0.2 ohms to 10.0 ohms.
information to power, open
resistance the transfer case motor circuit for short circuit
Transfer case control to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
module internal high resistance
Replacement

00 Circuit - No sub circuit short circuit to NOTE: Transfer case motor resistance should be
type information ground, short circuit 0.2 ohms to 10.0 ohms.
to power, open
Replacement

00 Circuit - No sub circuit short circuit to NOTE: Transfer case motor resistance should be
type information ground, short circuit 0.2 ohms to 10.0 ohms.
to power, open
Replacement
P0915- Gear Shift Position Transfer case motor NOTES:

00 Circuit position sensor
Range/Performance circuit short circuit to
- No sub type ground, short circuit If additional transfer case circuit fault related DTCs
information to power, open are also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
circuit, high first and retest.
resistance
Transfer case
selector fork position Transfer case motor position sensor voltage
sensor circuit short (sensor supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V,
circuit to ground, resistance (signal A circuit to ground circuit) should be
short circuit to 16.0k ohms to 20.0k ohms and resistance (signal B
power, open circuit, circuit to ground circuit) should be 16.0k ohms to
high resistance 20.0k ohms.
Transfer case
selector fork position
sensor failure
Transfer case selector fork position sensor voltage
Transfer case motor
(supply circuit to ground circuit) should be 4.0V to
failure
6.0V.
the transfer case selector fork position sensor
persists, install a new transfer case selector fork
position sensor and perform routine - Transfer
Case Replacement
Replacement
P0916- Gear Shift Position Transfer case

00 Circuit Low - No selector fork position NOTE: Transfer case selector fork position sensor
sub type sensor circuit short voltage (supply circuit to ground circuit) should be 4.0V
information circuit to ground to 6.0V.
failure the transfer case selector fork position sensor
Replacement
P0917- Gear Shift Position Transfer case

00 Circuit High - No selector fork position NOTE: Transfer case selector fork position sensor
sub type sensor circuit short voltage (supply circuit to ground circuit) should be 4.0V
information circuit to power to 6.0V.
failure the transfer case selector fork position sensor
Replacement
P173A- Clutch Actuator Transfer case motor NOTES:

00 Position Sensor circuit short circuit to
Circuit ground, short circuit
Range/Performance to power, open If additional transfer case circuit fault related DTCs
- No sub type circuit, high are also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
information resistance first and retest.
Transfer case motor
position sensor
circuit short circuit to Transfer case motor resistance should be 0.2
ground, short circuit ohms to 10.0 ohms.
to power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Transfer case motor
failure
module internal
failure
20.0k ohms.

the transfer case motor circuit for short circuit
to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance
Replacement
P173B- Clutch Actuator Transfer case motor

00 Position Sensor position sensor NOTE: Transfer case motor position sensor voltage
Circuit Low - No circuit short circuit to (sensor supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V,
sub type ground resistance (signal A circuit to ground circuit) should be
information Transfer case control 16.0k ohms to 20.0k ohms and resistance (signal B
failure 20.0k ohms.

Replacement
P173C- Clutch Actuator Transfer case motor

00 Position Sensor position sensor NOTE: Transfer case motor position sensor voltage
Circuit High - No circuit short circuit to (sensor supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V,
sub type power resistance (signal A circuit to ground circuit) should be
information Transfer case control 16.0k ohms to 20.0k ohms and resistance (signal B
failure 20.0k ohms.

for short circuit to power
Replacement
P174A- Gear Lever X Manual transmission Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Position Sensor gear position sensor the manual transmission gear position sensor X
Circuit Low - No X axis signal circuit axis signal circuit for short circuit to ground
sub type short circuit to
information ground
P174B- Gear Lever X Manual transmission Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Position Sensor gear position sensor the manual transmission gear position sensor X
Circuit High - No X axis signal circuit axis signal circuit for short circuit to power
sub type short circuit to power
information
P174C- Gear Lever Y Manual transmission Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Position Sensor gear position sensor the manual transmission gear position sensor Y
Circuit Low - No Y axis signal circuit axis signal circuit for short circuit to ground
sub type short circuit to
information ground
P174D- Gear Lever Y Manual transmission Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Position Sensor gear position sensor the manual transmission gear position sensor Y
Circuit High - No Y axis signal circuit axis signal circuit for short circuit to power
sub type short circuit to power
information
P1804- 4-Wheel Drive High Transfer case high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Indicator Circuit range LED circuit the transfer case high range LED circuit for short
Failure - No sub short circuit to circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance
type information ground, open circuit,
high resistance
00 Indicator Short range LED circuit the transfer case high range LED circuit for short
Circuit To Battery - short circuit to power circuit to power
No sub type
information
00 Indicator Short range LED circuit the transfer case high range LED circuit for short
Circuit To Ground - short circuit to circuit to ground
No sub type ground
information
P1808- 4-Wheel Drive Low Transfer case low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Indicator Circuit range LED circuit the transfer case low range LED circuit for short
Failure - No sub short circuit to circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance
type information ground, open circuit,
high resistance
P1810- 4-Wheel Drive Low Transfer case low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Indicator Short range LED circuit the transfer case low range LED circuit for short
Circuit To Battery - short circuit to power circuit to power
No sub type
information
P181B- Clutch Actuator Transfer case
00 Changeover solenoid circuit short NOTE: Transfer case solenoid resistance should be
Solenoid Low - No circuit to ground 0.2 ohms to 10.0 ohms.
sub type Transfer case control
information module internal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
failure the transfer case solenoid circuit for short circuit
to ground
Replacement
P181C- Clutch Actuator Transfer case

00 Changeover solenoid circuit short NOTE: Transfer case solenoid resistance should be
Solenoid High - No circuit to power 0.2 ohms to 10.0 ohms.
sub type Transfer case control
information module internal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
failure the transfer case solenoid circuit for short circuit
to power
Replacement
P181D- Clutch Actuator Transfer case motor NOTES:

00 Changeover position sensor
Solenoid circuit short circuit to
Range/Performance ground, short circuit If additional transfer case circuit fault related DTCs
- No sub type to power, open are also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
information circuit, high first and retest.
resistance
Transfer case
solenoid circuit short Transfer case motor position sensor voltage
circuit to ground, (sensor supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V,
short circuit to resistance (signal A circuit to ground circuit) should be
power, open circuit, 16.0k ohms to 20.0k ohms and resistance (signal B
high resistance circuit to ground circuit) should be 16.0k ohms to
Transfer case motor 20.0k ohms.
failure
Transfer case
solenoid failure
Transfer case solenoid resistance should be 0.2
ohms to 10.0 ohms.
module internal
Transfer case internal the transfer case motor position sensor circuit
failure for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
the transfer case solenoid circuit for short circuit
high resistance
persists, install a new transfer case solenoid and
Replacement
P181E- Clutch Actuator Transfer case motor NOTES:

00 Range/Performance circuit short circuit to
- No sub type ground, short circuit
information to power, open If additional transfer case circuit fault related DTCs
circuit, high are also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
resistance first and retest.
Transfer case motor
position sensor
to power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Transfer case
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
20.0k ohms.
high resistance
Transfer case motor
failure
Transfer case
ohms to 10.0 ohms.
solenoid failure
module internal the transfer case motor circuit for short circuit
failure to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
Transfer case internal high resistance
high resistance
Replacement
P181F- Clutch Control Transfer case motor NOTES:

00 System circuit short circuit to
Performance - No ground, short circuit
sub type to power, open If additional transfer case circuit fault related DTCs
information circuit, high are also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
Transfer case motor
position sensor
to power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Transfer case
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
20.0k ohms.
high resistance
module internal
failure
ohms to 10.0 ohms.
Transfer case motor
Transfer case the transfer case motor circuit for short circuit
solenoid failure to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
Transfer case internal high resistance
high resistance
Replacement
P183A- Range Change Transfer case motor NOTES:

00 Mechanism Failure circuit short circuit to
- No sub type ground, short circuit
information to power, open If additional transfer case circuit fault related DTCs
Transfer case motor
position sensor
circuit short circuit to If any transmission control module DTCs are also
ground, short circuit set, perform the relevant corrective action(s) first and
to power, open retest.
circuit, high
resistance
Transfer case motor
Transfer case motor resistance should be 0.2
failure
ohms to 10.0 ohms.
module internal
failure
Transfer case internal
failure
Transmission fault -
High drag torque in
Neutral
20.0k ohms.

high resistance
Replacement
manual and test the transmission
P186D- Clutch Actuator Transfer case motor NOTES:

00 Stuck - No sub circuit short circuit to
type information ground, short circuit
to power, open If additional transfer case circuit fault related DTCs
Transfer case motor
position sensor
ohms to 10.0 ohms.
to power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Transfer case
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
20.0k ohms.
high resistance
Transfer case motor
failure
ohms to 10.0 ohms.
module internal
Transfer case internal the transfer case motor circuit for short circuit
failure to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance
high resistance
Replacement
P2711- Unexpected Transfer case motor NOTES:

00 Mechanical Gear circuit short circuit to
Disengagement - ground, short circuit
No sub type to power, open If additional transfer case circuit fault related DTCs
information circuit, high are also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
Transfer case motor
position sensor
circuit short circuit to If any transmission control module DTCs are also
ground, short circuit set, perform the relevant corrective action(s) first and
to power, open retest.
circuit, high
resistance
Transfer case motor
Transfer case motor resistance should be 0.2
failure
ohms to 10.0 ohms.
module internal
failure
Transfer case internal
failure
Transmission fault -
High drag torque in
Neutral
20.0k ohms.

high resistance
Replacement
manual and test the transmission
P2785- Clutch Actuator Transfer case motor NOTES:

00 Temperature Too temperature too high
High - No sub type (> 150°C)
information Transfer case motor Transfer case motor resistance should be 0.2
circuit short circuit to ohms to 10.0 ohms.
to power, open
circuit, high This DTC may be induced by prolonged off-road
resistance driving.
module internal Allow the vehicle to cool. Using the
failure manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
the DTCs and retest
high resistance
Replacement
P2787- Clutch Transfer case clutch

00 Temperature Too temperature too high NOTE: This DTC may be induced by prolonged off-
High - No sub type Incorrect road driving.
wheels/tires installed Allow the vehicle to cool. Using the
- Mismatch between manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
axle speeds the DTCs and retest
Front/rear driveshaft Check the wheel and tire specifications
failure Check the integrity of the front and rear
Front/rear differential driveshafts
failure Check the integrity of the front and rear
Front/rear left/right differentials
halfshaft failure Check the integrity of the halfshafts
P2789- Clutch Adaptive Transfer case clutch NOTES:

00 Learning at Limit - not calibrated
No sub type Transfer case motor
information position sensor If additional transfer case circuit fault related DTCs
circuit short circuit to are also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
ground, short circuit first and retest.
to power, open
circuit, high
resistance Transfer case motor position sensor voltage
Transfer case (sensor supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V,
solenoid circuit short resistance (signal A circuit to ground circuit) should be
circuit to ground, 16.0k ohms to 20.0k ohms and resistance (signal B
short circuit to circuit to ground circuit) should be 16.0k ohms to
power, open circuit, 20.0k ohms.
high resistance
Transfer case fluid
contaminated with
water
ohms to 10.0 ohms.
Transfer case clutch
worn/burnt Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Transfer case control system, perform routine - Transfer Case
module internal Replacement
high resistance
manual and check the transfer case fluid
level/condition. If water is present in the fluid,
check the integrity of the transfer case breather
and install a new transfer case and perform
Check the integrity of the driveshafts,
differentials and half shafts. Rectify as necessary
and install a new transfer case and perform
system, perform routine - Transfer Case
Replacement. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new transfer case control
Replacement
P2806- Transmission Manual transmission Calibrate the manual transmission gear position
00 Range Sensor gear position sensor sensor
Alignment - No sub not calibrated
type information
88 Communication circuit short circuit to system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Bus - Bus off ground, short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to power, open the high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit
circuit, high to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
U0100- Lost Engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Communication module power or the engine control module power and ground
With ECM/PCM "A" ground circuit open circuits for open circuit, high resistance
- No sub type circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information resistance system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
High speed CAN bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit short circuit to the high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit
ground, short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
to power, open high resistance
Engine system fault related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
U0101- Lost Transmission control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Communication module power or the transmission control module power and
with TCM - No sub ground circuit open ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
type information circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
High speed CAN bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
resistance system, check the transmission control module
Transmission system for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
fault index
U0121- Lost Anti-lock brake Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Communication system control the anti-lock brake system control module power
With Anti-Lock module power or and ground circuits for open circuit, high
Brake System ground circuit open resistance
(ABS) Control circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Module - No sub resistance system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
type information High speed CAN bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
resistance system, check the anti-lock brake system control
Anti-lock brake module for related DTCs and refer to the
U0126- Lost Steering angle sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Communication module power or the steering angle sensor module power and
With Steering ground circuit open ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Angle Sensor circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Module - No sub resistance system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
type information High speed CAN bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
resistance system, check the steering angle sensor module
Steering angle sensor for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
system fault index
U0128- Lost Electric park brake Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Communication control module power the electric park brake control module power
With Park Brake or ground circuit and ground circuits for open circuit, high
Control Module - open circuit, high resistance
No sub type resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information High speed CAN bus system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
circuit short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground, short circuit the high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit
to power, open to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
circuit, high high resistance
Electric park brake system, check the electric park brake control
system fault module for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
U0132- Lost Air suspension Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Communication control module power the air suspension control module power and
With Suspension or ground circuit ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Control Module "A" open circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
- No sub type resistance system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
information High speed CAN bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
resistance system, check the air suspension control module
Air suspension for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
system fault index
U0136- Lost Rear differential Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Communication control module power the rear differential control module power and
With Differential or ground circuit ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Control Module - open circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Rear - No sub type resistance system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
resistance system, check the rear differential control
Rear differential module for related DTCs and refer to the
U0138- Lost Terrain response Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Communication switchpack power or the terrain response switchpack power and
with All Terrain ground circuit open ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Control Module - circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
No sub type resistance system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
resistance system, check the terrain response switchpack
Terrain response for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
system fault index
U0140- Lost Central junction box Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Communication power or ground the central junction box power and ground
With Body Control circuit open circuit, circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Module - No sub high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
type information High speed CAN bus system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
circuit short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground, short circuit the high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit
to power, open to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
system fault related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
U0300- Internal Control Transfer case control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Module Software module is not system, re-configure the transfer case control
Incompatibility - configured correctly module with the latest level software
No sub type Incorrect transfer Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information case control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
installed persists, install a new transfer case control
Replacement
U0401- Invalid Data Missing/invalid data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Received From from the engine system, check the engine control module for
ECM/PCM A - No control module related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
sub type
information
00 Received from TCM from the system, check the transmission control module
- No sub type transmission control for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
information module index
00 Received From from the anti-lock system, check the anti-lock brake system control
Anti-Lock Brake brake system control module for related DTCs and refer to the
System (ABS) module relevant DTC index
Control Module -
No sub type
information
00 Received From from the electric park system, check the electric park brake control
Park Brake Control brake control module module for related DTCs and refer to the
Module - No sub relevant DTC index
type information
00 Received From from the steering system, check the steering angle sensor module
Steering Angle angle sensor module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Sensor Module - index
No sub type
information
U3000- Control Module - Car configuration file Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
55 Not configured mismatch with system, check and up-date the car configuration
vehicle specification file as necessary
Incorrect transfer Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
case control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
installed persists, install a new transfer case control
Replacement
U3003- Battery Voltage - Mismatch between Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
62 Signal compare the voltage at the system, check datalogger signal - ECU Power
failure transfer case control Supply Voltage (0xD111) - and compare it to
module and the battery voltage. Refer to the electrical circuit
voltage value diagrams and check the transfer case control
broadcast on the module power and ground circuits for open
CAN bus circuit, high resistance
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
If a failure condition is reported indicating the need to renew the transmission assembly on a vehicle that
remains under manufacturer warranty, an authorisation request must first go through the warranty prior
approval programme before any work is begun
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Transmission Control
Module (TCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing
For additional information, refer to: Diagnostics (307-01A, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1087- LIN Bus "A" - LIN bus circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
41 General checksum short circuit to the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
failure ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Circuit LIN bus circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
63 / component short circuit to the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
protection time-out ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Signal Missing/invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 plausibility failure data from the system, check the transmission control switch for
transmission related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
control switch
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Alive / LIN bus circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
82 sequence counter short circuit to the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
incorrect / not ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
updated circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Signal Missing/invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
83 plausibility failure - data from the system, check the transmission control switch for
value of signal transmission related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
protection calculation control switch
incorrect
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Bus off LIN bus circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
88 short circuit to the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
B108E- Display - General Gear display Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
02 signal failure signal failure system, clear the DTCs. Road test the vehicle and
check that the displayed gear matches the engaged
gear. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module
C1A88- High Pressure Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

64 Switching Valve #1 - control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Signal plausibility internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
failure
P0121- Throttle/Pedal Invalid data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
86 Position Sensor A received from system, check the engine control module for
Circuit the engine related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Range/Performance - control module
Signal invalid
P0219- Engine Overspeed Invalid data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Condition - Signal received from system, check the engine control module for
plausibility failure the engine related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
control module
P0560- System Voltage - Battery/charging Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
21 Signal amplitude < system fault manual and test the battery and charging system
minimum Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
control module system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply
power or ground Voltage (0xDD02). Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit open diagrams and check the transmission control
circuit, high module power and ground circuits for open circuit,
P0562- System Voltage Low Battery/charging Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
1C - Circuit voltage out system fault manual and test the battery and charging system
of range Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
P0562- System Voltage Low Battery/charging Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
21 - Signal amplitude < system fault manual and test the battery and charging system
minimum Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
P0563- System Voltage High Battery/charging Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
22 - Signal amplitude > system fault system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply
maximum Voltage (0xDD02). Refer to the relevant section of
the workshop manual and test the battery and
charging system
P0601- Internal Control Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

41 Module Memory control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Checksum Error- internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
General checksum
failure
P0606- Control Module Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
04 Processor - System control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Internal Failures internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module

11 Processor - Circuit control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
short to ground internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module

62 Processor - Signal control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
compare failure internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module

64 Processor - Signal control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
plausibility failure internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
P0613- TCM Processor - Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

04 System internal control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failures internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module

06 Algorithm based control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failures internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module

11 Circuit short to control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
ground internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module

battery internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module

13 Circuit open control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module

battery or open internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module

18 Circuit current below control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
threshold internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
P061B- Internal Control Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

02 Module Torque control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Calculation internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
Performance -
General signal failure
P061B- Internal Control Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Module Torque control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Calculation internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
Performance - Signal
P062F- Internal Control Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
04 Module EEPROM control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Error - System internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
internal failures
P0641- Sensor Reference Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Voltage A control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Circuit/Open - Signal internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
21 Voltage A Circuit control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Low - Signal internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
amplitude <
minimum
High - Signal internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
amplitude >
maximum
P0657- Actuator Supply Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
13 Voltage A Circuit / control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Open - Circuit open internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module

64 Voltage A Circuit / control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Open - Signal internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
Low - Circuit short internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
to ground
High - Circuit short internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
to battery
P0666- Control Module Transmission
64 Internal control module NOTE: Consider environmental conditions before
Temperature Sensor internal failure condemning the transmission control module
"A" Circuit - Signal
plausibility failure Allow the transmission control module to cool.
persists, install a new transmission control module
P0667- PCM / ECM / TCM Transmission

A
Range/Performance - Allow the transmission control module to cool.
General electrical Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault

A Circuit Low -
Signal amplitude < Allow the transmission control module to cool.
minimum Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

A Circuit High -
Signal amplitude > Allow the transmission control module to cool.
maximum Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
P06AC- PCM / ECM / TCM Transmission

B
General electrical Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
P06AC- PCM / ECM / TCM Transmission

B
Signal plausibility Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
P06AD- PCM / ECM / TCM Transmission

B Circuit Low -
Signal amplitude > Allow the transmission control module to cool.
maximum Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
P06AE- PCM / ECM / TCM Transmission

B Circuit High -
Signal amplitude < Allow the transmission control module to cool.
minimum Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
P0700- Transmission Control Transmission Investigate other DTCs first. Clear the DTCs and
02 System (MIL system fault road test the vehicle. Re-read DTCs
Request) - General
signal failure
P0700- Transmission Control Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
83 System (MIL control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Request) - Value of internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
signal protection
calculation incorrect
P0702- Transmission Control Insufficient Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
98 System Electrical - transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
Component or cooling level and quality. Check the automatic transmission
system over cooling system
temperature
P0710- Transmission Fluid Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
04 Temperature Sensor control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
A Circuit - System internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
internal failures
P0710- Transmission Fluid Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
13 Temperature Sensor control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
A Circuit - Circuit internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
open
P0710- Transmission Fluid Transmission
27 Temperature Sensor control module NOTE: Consider environmental conditions before
A Circuit - Signal internal failure condemning the transmission control module
rate of change
above threshold Allow the transmission control module to cool.

A Circuit - Signal internal failure condemning the transmission control module
Allow the transmission control module to cool.

A Circuit Low - internal failure condemning the transmission control module
Circuit short to
ground Allow the transmission control module to cool.

A Circuit High - internal failure condemning the transmission control module
Circuit short to
battery Allow the transmission control module to cool.
P0715- Turbine/Input Shaft Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

12 Speed Sensor A control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Circuit - Circuit short internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
to battery
P0715- Turbine/Input Shaft Turbine sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Speed Sensor A signal plausibility system, clear the DTCs and retest. Check
Circuit - Signal failure datalogger signals - Turbine Speed (0x1E72) -
plausibility failure Transmission Output Shaft Speed (0x1E68) - for
plausibility. If the fault persists, install a new

Circuit internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
Range/Performance -
Circuit short to
ground or open
Range/Performance -
Signal rate of
change above
threshold
P0720- Output Shaft Speed Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
12 Sensor Circuit - control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Circuit short to internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
battery
14 Sensor Circuit - control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
ground or open
02 Sensor Circuit control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Range/Performance - internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
P0721- Output Shaft Speed Signal rate of
27 Sensor Circuit change above NOTE: This DTC may be set by an anti-lock braking
Range/Performance - threshold system fault allowing the brakes to lock during braking
Signal rate of
change above Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
threshold system, check the anti-lock brake system control
module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index. Using the manufacturer approved
fault persists, install a new transmission control
module
P0721- Output Shaft Speed Anti-lock brake Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
62 Sensor Circuit system fault system, check the anti-lock brake system control
Range/Performance - Transmission module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
Signal compare control module DTC index
failure internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, clear the DTCs and road test the vehicle. If
the fault persists, install a new transmission control
module
64 Sensor Circuit control module system, clear the DTCs and road test the vehicle. If
Range/Performance - internal failure the fault persists, install a new transmission control
Signal plausibility module
failure
P0725- Engine Speed Input Missing/invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
83 Circuit - Value of data from the system, check the engine control module for
signal protection engine control related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
calculation incorrect module
P0729- Gear 6 Incorrect Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
07 Ratio - Mechanical transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
failures internal failure level and quality. Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and road test the
vehicle. If the fault persists, install a new
automatic transmission
P0730- Incorrect Gear Ratio Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
00 - No sub type transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
information internal failure level and quality. Using the manufacturer approved
P0736- Reverse Incorrect Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
P0736- Reverse Incorrect Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
64 Ratio - Signal transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
plausibility failure internal failure level and quality. Using the manufacturer approved
P0741- Torque Converter Torque converter Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
07 Clutch Solenoid or automatic manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
Circuit transmission level and quality. Using the manufacturer approved
Performance/Stuck internal failure diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and road test the
Off - Mechanical vehicle. If the fault persists, install a new torque
failures converter. Clear the DTCs and road test the
P0745- Pressure Control Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

11 Solenoid A - Circuit control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
short to ground internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module

short to battery internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module

open internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module

short to ground or internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
open
64 Solenoid A - Signal control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
plausibility failure internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module

93 Solenoid A - No control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
operation internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module

94 Solenoid A - control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Unexpected internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
operation
11 Solenoid A Electrical control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
- Circuit short to internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
ground
battery
- Circuit open internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
P076F- Gear 7 Ratio Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
07 Incorrect - transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
Mechanical failures internal failure level and quality. Using the manufacturer approved
P077E- Transmission Fluid Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

02 Temperature control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Measurement internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
System - Multiple
Sensor Correlation -
P0780- Shift Malfunction - Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
62 Signal compare control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module

93 No operation control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module

94 Unexpected control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault

04 Solenoid C - System control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
P07AD- Transmission Friction Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

07 Element "F" Stuck control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
On - Mechanical internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
failures
P07D9- Gear 8 Incorrect Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
P07DC- Incorrect Shift from Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
07 Gear 1 - Mechanical transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
P07DD- Incorrect Shift from Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
P07DE- Incorrect Shift from Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
P07DF- Incorrect Shift from Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
P07E0- Incorrect Shift from Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
P0801- Reverse Inhibit Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

94 Control Circuit - control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
operation
P0810- Clutch Position Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
04 Control Error - control module system, clear the DTCs and road test the vehicle.
System Internal internal failure Ensure the displayed gear matches the engaged
Failures gear. If the fault persists, install a new
P0826- Up and Down Switch Upshift/downshift Test the operation of the upshift/downshift paddle
01 Circuit - General paddle switch switches
Electrical Failure stuck active Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Upshift/downshift the upshift/downshift paddle switch circuits for
paddle switch short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
circuit short open circuit, high resistance
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
2A Circuit - Signal stuck paddle switch switches
in range stuck active Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
64 Circuit - Signal paddle switch switches
plausibility failure stuck active Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
P084F- Park / neutral Switch Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
11 Output Circuit - control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
ground
battery
Circuit open internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
ground or open
P084F- Park / neutral Switch Park/neutral Check for correct output signal at transmission
29 Output Circuit - switch output control module pin 1 to transmission plug (check in
Signal invalid circuit signal all positions). If the signal appears normal, then
invalid check wiring and connectors to the module. If no
signal present, renew the transmission control
module as required
P0850- Park / neutral Switch Park/neutral Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
02 Input Circuit - switch output system, clear the DTCs and road test the vehicle.
General signal failure circuit failure Test the parklock mechanism by engaging and
disengaging the parking lock several times. If fault
persists, renew parklock components as necessary.
If the fault persists, install a new transmission
control module
P0850- Park / neutral Switch Starter inhibit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
29 Input Circuit - Signal signal invalid system, clear the DTCs and road test the vehicle.
invalid Test the parklock mechanism by engaging and
disengaging the parking lock several times. If fault
control module
P0851- Park / neutral Switch Switch input Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
01 Input Circuit Low - circuit general system, clear the DTCs and road test the vehicle.
General electrical signal failure Test the parklock mechanism by engaging and
failure disengaging the parking lock several times. If fault
control module
P0852- Park / neutral Switch Switch input Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
01 Input Circuit High - circuit general system, clear the DTCs and road test the vehicle.
General electrical signal failure Test the parklock mechanism by engaging and
failure disengaging the parking lock several times. If fault
control module
P0942- Hydraulic Pressure Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
07 Unit - Mechanical transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
P0942- Hydraulic Pressure Hydraulic Perform ECO-start and monitor engine speed and
62 Unit - Signal pressure unit engine/transmission start stop and position signals.
compare failure signal compare Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
failure renew the transmission control module as required

64 Solenoid B Control control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Range/Performance -
Signal plausibility
failure
Range/Performance -
No operation
Range/Performance -
Unexpected
operation
Circuit Low - Circuit internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
short to ground
short to battery
short to ground or
open
P0972- Shift Solenoid A Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
13 Control Circuit control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Circuit open
Signal plausibility
failure
No operation
Unexpected
operation
11 Control Circuit Low - control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
ground
circuit Current below internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
threshold
12 Control Circuit High control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
battery
- Circuit current internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
above threshold
P0975- Shift Solenoid B Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Circuit open
Signal plausibility
failure
No operation
Unexpected
operation
ground
Circuit current below internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
threshold
battery
above threshold
P0978- Shift Solenoid C Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Signal amplitude <
minimum
Signal plausibility
failure
No operation
Unexpected
operation
ground
ground or open
battery
above threshold
P0981- Shift Solenoid D Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Signal plausibility
failure
No operation
Unexpected
operation
ground
ground or open
threshold
battery
above threshold
P0984- Shift Solenoid E Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Signal plausibility
failure
No operation
Unexpected
operation
ground
ground or open
threshold
battery
above threshold
P164C- Internal Control Transmission Perform ECO-start and monitor engine speed and
62 Module Start-Stop control module engine/transmission start stop and position signals.
Performance - Signal internal failure Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
compare failure renew the transmission control module as required
P1706- High Vehicle Speed Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
94 Observed in Park - control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
operation
P1707- Transfer Case Emergency park Test the operation of the emergency park release
72 Neutral or release has been Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Park/Neutral operated / is system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Indication Circuit - sticking persists, install a new transmission control module
Actuator stuck open Parking lock
mechanical
failure
P1707- Transfer Case Emergency park Test the operation of the emergency park release
77 Neutral or release has been Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Park/Neutral operated / is system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Indication Circuit - sticking persists, install a new transmission control module
Commanded position Parking lock
not reachable mechanical
failure
P177A- Transmission Friction Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
07 Element A or B - transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
Mechanical Failures internal failure level and quality. Using the manufacturer approved
P177B- Transmission Friction Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
07 Element A or C - transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
P177C- Transmission Friction Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
07 Element A or D - transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
P177D- Transmission Friction Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
07 Element A or E - transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
P177E- Transmission Friction Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
07 Element B or C - transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
P177F- Transmission Friction Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
07 Element B or D - transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
P178A- Transmission Friction Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
07 Element B or E - transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
P178B- Transmission Friction Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
07 Element C or D - transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
P178C- Transmission Friction Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
07 Element C or E - transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
P178D- Transmission Friction Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
07 Element D or E - transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
P2159- Vehicle Speed Missing/invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

02 Sensor B data from the system, check the anti-lock brake system control
Range/Performance - anti-lock brake module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
General signal failure system control DTC index
module
P215B- Vehicle Speed / Missing/invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

62 Output Shaft Speed data from the system, check the anti-lock brake system control
Correlation - Signal anti-lock brake module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
compare failure system control DTC index
module
P258F- Torque Management Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

02 Request Output control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Signal - General internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
signal failure
P2700- Transmission Friction Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
07 Element A Apply transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
Time internal failure level and quality. Using the manufacturer approved
Range/Performance - diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and road test the
Mechanical failures vehicle. If the fault persists, install a new
07 Element B Apply transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
07 Element C Apply transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
07 Element D Apply transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
07 Element E Apply transmission manual and check the automatic transmission fluid
P2711- Unexpected Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

94 Mechanical Gear control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Disengagement - internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
Unexpected
operation
04 Solenoid D - System control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault

04 Solenoid E - System control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
P2757- Torque Converter Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

93 Clutch Pressure control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Control Solenoid internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
Control Circuit Perf
or Stuck Off - No
operation
Control Circuit Perf
or Stuck Off -
Unexpected
operation
Electrical - Circuit
short to ground
Electrical - Circuit
short to battery
Control Circuit /
Open - Circuit open
Control Circuit
Range / Perf - Signal
P2784- Input / Turbine Sensor general Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
02 Speed Sensor A / B signal failure, system, check the engine control module for
Correlation - General multiple input related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
signal failure speed signal Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
faults system, check the anti-lock brake system control
module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index
P2787- Clutch Temperature Clutch over Allow the transmission to cool, clear the DTC and
4B Too High - Over temperature retest. Check transmission oil level and check for
temperature excessive gear changes during normal driving.
Check paddle switch for intermittent operation and
renew as required
P2787- Clutch Temperature Component or Allow the transmission to cool, clear the DTC and
98 Too High - system over retest. Check transmission oil level and check for
Component or temperature excessive gear changes during normal driving.
system over Check paddle switch for intermittent operation
temperature Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer
to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
Clear the DTC and test drive the vehicle using all
gears in drive and reverse. Clear the DTC and
retest. If the problem persists, or if any other gear
ratio related DTCs are logged, renew the
transmission
P2793- Gear Shift Direction Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
92 Circuit - Performance control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
or incorrect internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
operation
P2793- Gear Shift Direction Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
94 Circuit - Unexpected control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
P279D- Four Wheel Drive Transfer case Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
02 (4WD) Range Signal control module the transfer case control module power and ground
Circuit - General power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
signal failure circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit to ground, resistance
power, open system, check the transfer case control module for
circuit, high related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
resistance
Transfer case
system fault
P279D- Four Wheel Drive Transfer case Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
64 (4WD) Range Signal control module the transfer case control module power and ground
Circuit - Signal power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
plausibility failure circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
resistance
Transfer case
system fault
88 Communication CAN bus circuit short system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Bus - Bus off circuit to ground, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
power, open ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
U0100- Lost Communication Engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
63 With ECM/PCM "A" - module power or the engine control module power and ground
Circuit / component ground circuit circuits for open circuit, high resistance
protection time-out open circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
power, open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit, high system, check the engine control module for
resistance related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Engine system
fault
U0102- Lost Communication Transfer case Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
63 with transfer box control module the transfer case control module power and ground
control module - power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Circuit / component circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
protection time-out circuit, high system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
resistance
Transfer case
system fault
U0103- Lost Communication Transmission Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
63 With Gear Shift control switch the transmission control switch power and ground
Control Module A - power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
power, open system, check the transmission control switch for
resistance
Transmission
control switch
system fault
63 With Anti-Lock Brake system control the anti-lock brake system control module power
System (ABS) module power or and ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Control Module - ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Circuit / component open circuit, high system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
protection time-out resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
power, open system, check the anti-lock brake system control
circuit, high module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
resistance DTC index
Anti-lock brake
system fault
U0126- Lost Communication Steering angle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
63 With Steering Angle sensor module the steering angle sensor module power and
Sensor Module - power or ground ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
power, open system, check the steering angle sensor module for
resistance
Steering angle
sensor system
fault
U0128- Lost Communication Electric park Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
63 With Park Brake brake control the electric park brake control module power and
Control Module - module power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Circuit / component ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
protection time-out open circuit, high system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
power, open system, check the electric park brake control
circuit, high module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
resistance DTC index
Electric park
brake system
fault
U0138- Lost Communication Terrain response Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
63 with All Terrain switchpack the terrain response switchpack power and ground
Control Module - power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
power, open system, check the terrain response switchpack for
resistance
Terrain response
system fault
Module - Circuit / ground circuit for open circuit, high resistance
component open circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
protection time-out resistance system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
power, open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit, high system, check the central junction box for related
resistance DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Central junction
box system fault
57 Module Software file mismatch system, check and up-date the car configuration
Incompatibility - with vehicle file as necessary
Invalid / incomplete specification
software component
U0401- Invalid Data Missing/invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
02 Received from data from the system, check the engine control module for
ECM/PCM A - engine control related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
General signal failure module

ECM/PCM A - Signal engine control related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
invalid module

ECM/PCM A - engine control related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
General checksum module
failure
ECM/PCM A - Signal engine control related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
plausibility failure module

ECM/PCM A - Alive / engine control related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
sequence counter module
incorrect / not
updated
ECM/PCM A - Value engine control related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
of signal protection module
calculation incorrect
41 Received from Gear data from the system, check the transmission control switch for
Shift Control Module transmission related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
A - General control switch
checksum failure
A - Signal plausibility control switch
failure
A - Alive / sequence control switch
counter incorrect /
not updated
A - Value of signal control switch
protection calculation
incorrect
29 Received From Anti- data from the system, check the anti-lock brake system control
Lock Brake System anti-lock brake module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
(ABS) Control system control DTC index
Module - Signal module
invalid
Module - General module
checksum failure
Module - Alive / module
sequence counter
incorrect / not
updated
98 Received From data from the system, check the anti-lock brake system control
Vehicle Dynamics anti-lock brake module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
Control Module - system control DTC index
Component or module
system over
temperature
41 Received From Body data from the system, check the central junction box for related
Control Module - central junction DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
General checksum box
failure
Alive / sequence box
counter incorrect /
not updated
Value of signal box
incorrect
U101B- Lost Communication Transmission Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
87 With GSM - Multiple control switch the transmission control switch power and ground
Bus - Missing power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
message circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
power, open the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
LIN bus circuit system, check the transmission control switch for
short circuit to related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
Transmission
control switch
system fault
U2101- Control Module Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

56 Configuration control module is system, re-configure the transmission control
Incompatible - not configured module with the latest level software. Check and
Invalid / incomplete correctly up-date the car configuration file as necessary.
configuration Clear the DTC and re-test
U3000- Control Module - Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
56 Invalid / incomplete control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
configuration internal failure persists, install a new transmission control module
U3001- Control Module Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

94 Improper Shutdown control module system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply
- Unexpected power or ground Voltage (0xDD02). Refer to the electrical circuit
operation circuit open diagrams and check the transmission control
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Transmission Control Switch
(TCS). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the
workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External
Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel/V8 5.0L Petrol, Vehicles With: 6HP28 6-Speed Automatic Transmission, Diagnosis
and Testing).

B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
08 signal/message NOTE: Circuit check the transmission control module power
failures reference LIN and ground circuits for open circuit, high
resistance
Transmission control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
module power or check the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to
LIN bus circuit short system, check the transmission control module
circuit to ground, for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
short circuit to index
high resistance
Transmission system
fault
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Invalid Transmission system Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
81 serial data received fault system, check the transmission control module
for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Transmission system Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
82 Alive/sequence fault system, check the transmission control module
counter incorrect / for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
not updated index
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Value Transmission system Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
83 of signal protection fault system, check the transmission control module
calculation incorrect for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Missing Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
87 message NOTE: Circuit check the transmission control module power
reference LIN and ground circuits for open circuit, high
resistance
Transmission control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
module power or check the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to
LIN bus circuit short system, check the transmission control module
circuit to ground, for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
short circuit to index
high resistance
Transmission system
fault
B1142- Ignition Status 1 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

62 Signal compare NOTE: Circuit check the ignition sense circuit for short circuit
failure reference IGN to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance
Ignition sense circuit
short circuit to
to power, open
circuit, high
resistance - Power
mode differs to that
broadcast on high
speed CAN
B123C- Dynamic Stability Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
01 Control Status switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Indicator - General persists, install a new transmission control
electrical failure switch
B123D- Dynamic Stability Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Control Button - switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Signal plausibility persists, install a new transmission control
failure switch
B123F- Adaptive Speed Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
01 Limiter Mode switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
B1241- Adaptive Speed Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Limiter Button - switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Signal plausibility persists, install a new transmission control
failure switch
B1242- Winter Button - Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Signal plausibility switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure persists, install a new transmission control
switch
B1243- Winter Button Mode Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
01 Indicator - General switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
electrical failure persists, install a new transmission control
switch
B1244- Dynamic / Sport Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Button - Signal switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
plausibility failure persists, install a new transmission control
switch
B1245- Dynamic / Sport Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
01 Button Mode switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
C113A- Wakeup Control - Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
62 Signal compare switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure persists, install a new transmission control
switch
P0603- Internal Control Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
44 Module Keep Alive switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Memory (KAM) Error persists, install a new transmission control
- Data memory switch
failure
44 Module Random switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Access Memory persists, install a new transmission control
(RAM) Error - Data switch
memory failure
45 Module Read Only switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Memory (ROM) Error persists, install a new transmission control
- Program memory switch
failure
P0606- ECM / PCM Processor Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
2F - Signal erratic switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new transmission control
switch
P0606- ECM / PCM Processor Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
47 - Watchdog/safety switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
microcontroller failure persists, install a new transmission control
switch
P0705- Transmission Range Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
09 Sensor A Circuit switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
(PRNDL Input) - persists, install a new transmission control
Component failures switch
Calibration/parameter switch
memory failure
Signal invalid switch
01 Display Circuit - switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
General electrical persists, install a new transmission control
failure switch
P081C- Park Input Circuit - Hardwired park and Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
64 Signal plausibility transmission control check the park signal circuit for short circuit to
failure switch position ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
display signals are high resistance. Using the manufacturer
not consistent approved diagnostic system, check the
transmission control module for related DTCs
P084F- Park / Neutral Switch Park/neutral signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Output Circuit - circuit short circuit to check the park/neutral signal circuit for short
Circuit short to ground circuit to ground
ground
P084F- Park / Neutral Switch Park/neutral signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Output Circuit - circuit short circuit to check the park/neutral signal circuit for short
Circuit short to power, open circuit, circuit to battery, open circuit, high resistance
P176A- Transmission Range Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
01 Selector Up and switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Down Position Circuit persists, install a new transmission control
- General electrical switch
failure
- Circuit open switch
- Circuit current switch
above threshold
- Unexpected switch
operation
P176B- Transmission Range Transmission control
71 Selector Up and switch internal failure NOTE: This DTC may be set by resisting the
Down Position - Raise/lower failure raising/lowering of the transmission control switch
Control Error -
Actuator stuck Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
switch
P176C- Transmission Range Transmission control

07 Selector Lock Control switch internal failure NOTE: This DTC may be set by releasing the
Error - Mechanical - Rotation detected brake pedal whilst rotating the transmission control
failures while locked switch

switch
P176C- Transmission Range Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
11 Selector Lock Control switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Error - Circuit short - Lock solenoid persists, install a new transmission control
to ground circuit short circuit to switch
ground
P176C- Transmission Range Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
12 Selector Lock Control switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Error - Circuit short - Lock solenoid persists, install a new transmission control
to battery circuit short circuit to switch
power
P176C- Transmission Range Transmission control

73 Selector Lock Control switch internal failure NOTE: This DTC may be set by attempting to
Error - Actuator stuck - Lock solenoid rotate the transmission control switch as it unlocks
closed circuit failure
switch
88 Communication Bus - circuit short circuit to system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Bus off ground, short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
to power, open check the high speed CAN bus circuit for short
circuit, high circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
U0100- Lost Communication Engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With ECM/PCM "A" - module power or check the engine control module power and
No sub type ground circuit open ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Engine system fault related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index
U0100- Lost Communication Missing/invalid data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
87 With ECM/PCM "A" - from the engine system, check the engine control module for
Missing message control module - related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Engine speed index
00 with TCM - No sub module power or check the transmission control module power
type information ground circuit open and ground circuits for open circuit, high
Transmission system system, check the transmission control module
fault for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index
87 with TCM - Missing from the system, check the transmission control module
message transmission control for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
module - index
TCM_PosDisp
U0121- Lost Communication Anti-lock brake Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Anti-Lock Brake system control check the anti-lock brake system control
System (ABS) module power or module power and ground circuits for open
Control Module - No ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
sub type information circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
resistance system, check the anti-lock brake system
Anti-lock brake control module for related DTCs and refer to
87 With Anti-Lock Brake from the anti-lock system, check the anti-lock brake system
Control Module - module - Steering the relevant DTC index
Missing message angle
index
00 With Instrument power or ground check the instrument cluster power and
Panel Cluster (IPC) circuit open circuit, ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Control Module - high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Missing message High speed CAN bus system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Instrument cluster system, check the instrument cluster for
index
U0300- Internal Control Invalid master Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Module Software configuration ID system, re-configure the central junction box
Incompatibility - No received with the latest level software. Clear the DTCs
sub type information and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
92 From ECM/PCM - from the engine system, check the engine control module for
Performance or control module related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
incorrect operation index
64 from Transmission from the system, check the transmission control module
control module - transmission control for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Signal plausibility module - Implausible index
failure lock request received
Invalid serial data module - index
received TCM_PosDisp /
TCM_LockReq
Alive/sequence module - Alive index
counter incorrect / counter
not updated
Value of signal module - Checksum index
incorrect
Performance or module index
incorrect operation
92 From Anti-Lock Brake from the anti-lock system, check the anti-lock brake system
Control Module - module the relevant DTC index
Performance or
incorrect operation
Module - Bus junction box related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
signal/message index
failures
Module - Invalid junction box - Invalid related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
serial data received power mode index
Module - Performance junction box related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
or incorrect operation index
92 From Instrument from the instrument system, check the instrument cluster for
Panel Control Module cluster related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
- Performance or index
incorrect operation
U043A- Invalid Data Received Missing/invalid data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
92 From Suspension from the adaptive system, check the adaptive damping control
Control Module "B" - damping control module for related DTCs and refer to the
Performance or module relevant DTC index
incorrect operation
U101A- Lost Communication CAN and LIN bus
86 With Transmission failure NOTE: Ignore this DTC if no other CAN or LIN
Control Module DTCs are set
(Multiple Bus) -
Signal invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, check the transmission control module
for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index
U1A14- CAN Initialization Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
04 Failure - System switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
internal failures persists, install a new transmission control
switch
U2012- Car Configuration Car configuration file Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
4A Parameter(s) - mismatch with system, check and up-date the car
Incorrect component vehicle specification configuration file as necessary
installed Incorrect Install a new transmission control switch as
transmission control necessary
switch installed
U2100- Initial Configuration Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Not Complete - No switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
sub type information persists, install a new transmission control
switch
U3003- Battery Voltage - Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
16 Circuit voltage below switch power or system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU
threshold ground circuit open Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer to the
circuit, high electrical circuit diagrams and check the
resistance transmission control switch power and ground
Battery/charging circuits for open circuit, high resistance
system
U3003- Battery Voltage - Battery/charging Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

17 Circuit voltage above system fault system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU
threshold Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer to the
relevant section of the workshop manual and
test the battery and charging system
U3003- Battery Voltage - Mismatch between Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
62 Signal compare the voltage at the system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU
failure transmission control Supply Voltage (0xDD02) - and compare it to
switch and the battery voltage. Refer to the electrical circuit
voltage value diagrams and check the transmission control
broadcast on the switch power and ground circuits for open
CAN bus circuit, high resistance
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: TV
Control Module (TVCM) - Digital
Television Control Module (TVCM) - Digital
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Television Control Module
(TVCM) - Digital. For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing

B1A56- Antenna - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit antenna 1 signal circuit for short circuit to ground
ground reference - TV1 SIG
Antenna 1 signal
circuit short
circuit to ground
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit antenna 1 signal circuit for short circuit to power
battery reference - TV1 SIG
Antenna 1 signal
circuit short
circuit to power
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit antenna 1 signal circuit for open circuit, high resistance
reference - TV1 SIG
Antenna 1 signal
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
B1D55- Antenna #2 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit antenna 2 signal circuit for short circuit to ground
ground reference - TV2 SIG
Antenna 2 signal
circuit short
circuit to ground
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit antenna 2 signal circuit for short circuit to power
battery reference - TV2 SIG
Antenna 2 signal
circuit short
circuit to power
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit antenna 2 signal circuit for open circuit, high resistance
reference - TV2 SIG
Antenna 2 signal
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
B1D56- Antenna #3 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 Circuit - Circuit NOTE: Circuit antenna 3 signal circuit for short circuit to ground
short to reference - TV3 SIG
ground
Antenna 3 signal
circuit short
circuit to ground
12 Circuit - Circuit NOTE: Circuit antenna 3 signal circuit for short circuit to power
battery
Antenna 3 signal
circuit short
circuit to power
13 Circuit - Circuit NOTE: Circuit antenna 3 signal circuit for open circuit, high resistance
open reference - TV3 SIG
Antenna 3 signal
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
11 Circuit - Circuit NOTE: Circuit antenna 4 signal circuit for short circuit to ground
ground
Antenna 4 signal
circuit short
circuit to ground
12 Circuit - Circuit NOTE: Circuit antenna 4 signal circuit for short circuit to power
battery
Antenna 4 signal
circuit short
circuit to power
13 Circuit - Circuit NOTE: Circuit antenna 4 signal circuit for open circuit, high resistance
open reference - TV4 SIG
Antenna 4 signal
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
B1D58- Television Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 Output - NOTE: Circuit CVBS signal circuit for short circuit to ground
Circuit short to reference - CVBS OUT
ground
CVBS signal
circuit short
circuit to ground
12 Output - NOTE: Circuit CVBS circuit for short circuit to power
Circuit short to reference - CVBS OUT
battery
CVBS signal
circuit short
circuit to power
13 Output - NOTE: Circuit CVBS circuit for open circuit, high resistance
Circuit open reference - CVBS OUT
CVBS signal
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
U2100- Initial Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Configuration file mismatch check and up-date the car configuration file as necessary
Not Complete with vehicle Install a new TV control module as necessary
- No sub type specification
information Incorrect TV
control module
installed
00 Configuration file mismatch check and up-date the car configuration file as necessary
Incompatible - with vehicle Install a new TV control module as necessary
No sub type specification
information Incorrect TV
control module
installed
U3000- Control Module TV control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
46 - Calibration / module is not configure the TV control module with the latest level
parameter configured software
memory failure correctly
U3000- Control Module TV control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
49 - Internal module failure check and install the latest relevant level of software to
electronic the TV control module
failure Clear the DTCs and retest. If fault persists, check and
install new TV control module as required
U3000- Control Module TV control Check airflow to the TV control module. Using the
98 - Component module over manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs
or system over temperature and retest. If the fault persists, install a new TV control
temperature module
U3003- Battery Mismatch Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,

62 Voltage - between the check datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage
Signal voltage at the TV (0xD111) - and compare it to battery voltage. Refer to
compare control module the electrical circuit diagrams and check the TV control
failure and the voltage module power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
value broadcast resistance
on the CAN bus
Telephone Interface Module (TIM)
Telephone Interface Module (TIM)
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
places, and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Telephone Interface Module
(TIM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the
workshop manual.

B100E- Video Input "A" - Navigation video Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
25 Signal signal circuit short the navigation video signal circuit for short circuit
shape/waveform circuit to ground, to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
failure short circuit to high resistance
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
B1183- Video Encoder - Telephone Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

96 Component internal interface module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure internal failure persists, install a new telephone interface module
U0001- High Speed CAN Invalid data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
81 Communication Bus - received from the system, check the touch screen for related DTCs
Invalid serial data touch screen and refer to the relevant DTC index
received Invalid data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
received from the system, check the navigation control module for
navigation control related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
module
U0001- High Speed CAN Invalid data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
82 Communication Bus - received from the system, check the touch screen for related DTCs
Alive/sequence touch screen and refer to the relevant DTC index
counter incorrect / Invalid data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
not updated received from the system, check the navigation control module for
navigation control related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
module
U0001- High Speed CAN Missing message Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
87 Communication Bus - from the touch system, check the snapshot data for details of
Missing message screen the missing message. Check the touch screen for
Missing message related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
from the Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
navigation control system, check the snapshot data for details of
module the missing message. Check the navigation
control module for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
U0001- High Speed CAN Private high speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ground, short the private high speed CAN bus circuit for short
resistance
ground, short the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short
resistance
82 Communication Bus received from system, check the snapshot data to determine
Performance - another control the invalid data source control module. Check the
Alive/sequence module via the relevant control module for related DTCs and
counter incorrect / medium speed refer to the relevant DTC index
not updated CAN bus
87 Communication Bus from another system, check the snapshot data to determine
Performance - control module the missing message source control module.
Missing message via the medium Check the relevant control module for related
speed CAN bus DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
00 Module Software file mismatch with system, check and up-date the car configuration
Incompatibility - No vehicle file as necessary
U0400- Invalid Data Invalid road speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
92 Received - signal received system, check the anti-lock brake system control
Performance or module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
incorrect operation DTC index
U1A01- Communication Link Telephone Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

82 - Alive/sequence interface module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
counter incorrect / internal failure persists, install a new telephone interface module
not updated
U1A01- Communication Link Telephone Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
88 - Bus off interface module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
internal failure persists, install a new telephone interface module
U1A4B- Control Module Telephone Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

47 Processor B - interface module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Watchdog/safety internal failure persists, install a new telephone interface module
MicroController
failure
U2015- Control Module Boot Telephone Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
57 Software - interface module system, re-configure the telephone interface
Invalid/incomplete is not configured module with the latest level software
software component correctly
U2017- Control Module Telephone Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

57 Software #2 - interface module system, re-configure the telephone interface
Invalid/incomplete is not configured module with the latest level software
software component correctly
U201A- Control Module Main Telephone Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
54 Calibration Data - interface module system, re-configure the telephone interface
Missing calibration is not configured module with the latest level software
correctly
U2020- Phone Holder Audio video Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
14 Baseplate Detection - input/output panel the audio video input/output panel circuits for
Circuit short to circuit short short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
ground or open circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance
short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
U2100- Initial Configuration Telephone Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

00 Not Complete - No interface module system, re-configure the telephone interface
sub type information is not configured module with the latest level software
correctly
U2100- Initial Configuration Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
56 Not Complete - file mismatch with system, check and up-date the car configuration
Invalid/incomplete vehicle file as necessary
00 Configuration file mismatch with system, check and up-date the car configuration
Incompatible - No vehicle file as necessary
Control Module (TVCM) - Hybrid
TV Control Module (TVCM) - Hybrid
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the TV Control Module (TVCM) -
Hybrid. For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in

B1A56- Antenna - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Circuit short NOTE: Circuit reference the antenna 1 signal circuit for short circuit to
to ground ANTENNA_1_SIG ground
Antenna 1 signal circuit


to battery ANTENNA_1_SIG power


13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit reference the antenna 1 signal circuit for open circuit, high
ANTENNA_1_SIG resistance

open circuit, high
resistance
B1D55- Antenna #2 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check

to ground ANTENNA_2_SIG ground


to battery ANTENNA_2_SIG power


13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit reference the antenna 2 signal circuit for open circuit, high
ANTENNA_2_SIG resistance

open circuit, high
resistance
B1D56- Antenna #3 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check

11 Circuit - NOTE: Circuit reference the antenna 3 signal circuit for short circuit to
Circuit short ANTENNA_3_SIG ground
to ground

Circuit short ANTENNA_3_SIG power
to battery

13 Circuit - NOTE: Circuit reference the antenna 3 signal circuit for open circuit, high
Circuit open ANTENNA_3_SIG resistance

open circuit, high
resistance

Circuit short ANTENNA_4_SIG ground
to ground

Circuit short ANTENNA_4_SIG power
to battery

13 Circuit - NOTE: Circuit reference the antenna 4 signal circuit for open circuit, high
Circuit open ANTENNA_4_SIG resistance

open circuit, high
resistance
B1D58- Television Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check

11 Output - NOTE: Circuit reference the CVBS signal circuit for short circuit to
Circuit short CVBS OUT / CVBS GND ground
to ground
CVBS signal circuit short
circuit to ground
B1D58- Television CVBS signal circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
12 Output - circuit to power the CVBS circuit for short circuit to power
Circuit short
to battery
B1D58- Television CVBS signal circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 Output - circuit, high resistance the CVBS circuit for open circuit, high resistance
Circuit open
U3000- Control TV control module internal Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
49 Module - failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Internal persists, install a new TV control module
electronic
failure
U3000- Control TV control module over Check airflow to the TV control module. Using
4B Module - temperature the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Over clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
temperature install a new TV control module
U3000- Control TV control module is not Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 Module - Not configured correctly system, re-configure the TV control module with
programmed the latest level software
U3000- Control TV control module is not Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
54 Module - configured correctly system, re-configure the TV control module with
Missing the latest level software
calibration
U3003- Battery Mismatch between the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
62 Voltage - voltage at the TV control the TV control module power and ground circuits
Signal module and the voltage for open circuit, high resistance
compare value broadcast on the
failure CAN bus
Control Module (TVCM) - Conditional Access System
TV Control Module (TVCM) - Conditional Access System
CAUTIONS:
donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the TV Control Module (TVCM) -
Conditional Access System. For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and

B147C- Conditional Access Conditional
00 System (Video access system NOTE: This DTC is applicable to Japan market
Encryption) - No sub card not vehicles only
type information authorised or
expired Subscription required
Conditional Install a new conditional access system card
access system
card fault
B1A56- Antenna - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 short to ground NOTE: Circuit the antenna 1 signal circuit for short circuit to
reference TV1 SIG ground
Antenna 1
signal circuit
short circuit to
ground
12 short to battery NOTE: Circuit the antenna 1 signal circuit for short circuit to power
reference TV1 SIG
Antenna 1
signal circuit
short circuit to
power
13 open NOTE: Circuit the antenna 1 signal circuit for open circuit, high
reference TV1 SIG resistance
Antenna 1
signal circuit
open circuit,
high resistance
B1D55- Antenna #2 - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 short to ground NOTE: Circuit the antenna 2 signal circuit for short circuit to
reference TV2 SIG ground
Antenna 2
signal circuit
short circuit to
ground
12 short to battery NOTE: Circuit the antenna 2 signal circuit for short circuit to power
reference TV2 SIG
Antenna 2
signal circuit
short circuit to
power
13 open NOTE: Circuit the antenna 2 signal circuit for open circuit, high
Antenna 2
signal circuit
open circuit,
high resistance
B1D56- Antenna #3 Circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit the antenna 3 signal circuit for short circuit to
ground reference TV3 SIG ground
Antenna 3
signal circuit
short circuit to
ground
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit the antenna 3 signal circuit for short circuit to power
battery reference TV3 SIG
Antenna 3
signal circuit
short circuit to
power
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit the antenna 3 signal circuit for open circuit, high
Antenna 3
signal circuit
open circuit,
high resistance
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit the antenna 4 signal circuit for short circuit to
ground reference TV4 SIG ground
Antenna 4
signal circuit
short circuit to
ground
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit the antenna 4 signal circuit for short circuit to power
battery reference TV4 SIG
Antenna 4
signal circuit
short circuit to
power
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit the antenna 4 signal circuit for open circuit, high
Antenna 4
signal circuit
open circuit,
high resistance
B1D58- Television Output - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit the CVBS signal circuit for short circuit to ground
ground reference CVBS OUT
CVBS signal
circuit short
circuit to
ground
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit the CVBS circuit for short circuit to power
battery reference CVBS OUT
CVBS signal
circuit short
circuit to power
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit the CVBS circuit for open circuit, high resistance
reference CVBS OUT
CVBS signal
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
U2100- Initial Configuration Car Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Not Complete - No configuration check and up-date the car configuration file as
sub type information file mismatch necessary
with vehicle Install a new TV control module as necessary
specification
Incorrect TV
control module
installed
00 Configuration configuration check and up-date the car configuration file as
Incompatible - No file mismatch necessary
sub type information with vehicle Install a new TV control module as necessary
specification
Incorrect TV
control module
installed
U3000- Control Module - TV control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
46 Calibration/parameter module is not re-configure the TV control module with the latest
memory failure configured level software
correctly
U3000- Control Module - TV control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
49 Internal electronic module internal clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
failure failure install a new TV control module
U3000- Control Module - TV control Check airflow to the TV control module. Using the
98 Component or module over manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
system over temperature DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
temperature TV control module
U3003- Battery Voltage - Mismatch Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
62 Signal compare between the check datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage
failure voltage at the (0xD111) - and compare it to battery voltage. Refer
TV control to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the TV
module and the control module power and ground circuits for open
voltage value circuit, high resistance
broadcast on
the CAN bus
Wade Aid Control Module (WACM)
General Proximity Sensor Module (GPSM)
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the General Proximity Sensor
Module (GPSM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing

B143A- Proximity Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
12 #1 - Circuit short NOTE: Circuit left proximity sensor signal circuit for short circuit to
to battery reference SIG LEFT power
Left proximity
sensor signal
circuit short
circuit to power
B143A- Proximity Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
14 #1 - Circuit short NOTE: Circuit left proximity sensor signal circuit for short circuit to
to ground or open reference SIG LEFT ground, open circuit, high resistance
Left proximity
sensor signal
circuit short
circuit to
ground, open
circuit, high
resistance
B143A- Proximity Sensor Left proximity Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
96 #1 - Component sensor internal clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
internal failure failure new left proximity sensor
B143B- Proximity Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
12 #2 - Circuit short NOTE: Circuit right proximity sensor signal circuit for short circuit to
to battery reference SIG RIGHT power
Right proximity
sensor signal
circuit short
circuit to power
B143B- Proximity Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
14 #2 - Circuit short NOTE: Circuit right proximity sensor signal circuit for short circuit to
to ground or open reference SIG RIGHT ground, open circuit, high resistance
Right proximity
sensor signal
circuit short
circuit to
ground, open
circuit, high
resistance
B143B- Proximity Sensor Right proximity Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
96 #2 - Component sensor internal clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
internal failure failure new right proximity sensor
B145D- Proximity Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
12 Supply - Circuit NOTE: Circuit left proximity sensor ground circuit for short circuit to
#1 - Circuit short reference GND LEFT power
to battery
Left proximity
sensor ground
circuit short
circuit to power
B145D- Proximity Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
14 Supply - Circuit NOTE: Circuit left proximity sensor power supply circuit for short
#1 - Circuit short reference IGN LEFT circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance
to ground or open
Left proximity
sensor power
supply circuit
short circuit to
ground, open
circuit, high
resistance
B145E- Proximity Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
12 Supply - Circuit NOTE: Circuit right proximity sensor ground circuit for short circuit to
#2 - Circuit short reference GND RIGHT power
to battery
Right proximity
sensor ground
circuit short
circuit to power
B145E- Proximity Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
14 Supply - Circuit NOTE: Circuit right proximity sensor power supply circuit for short
#2 - Circuit short reference IGN RIGHT circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance
to ground or open
Right proximity
sensor power
supply circuit
short circuit to
ground, open
circuit, high
resistance
Bus - Invalid another control source control module. Check the relevant control
serial data module via the module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
received medium speed index
CAN bus
Bus - another control source control module. Check the relevant control
Alive/sequence module via the module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
counter incorrect high speed CAN index
/ not updated bus
U0001- High Speed CAN Missing message Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
speed CAN bus relevant DTC index
Bus - Bus off circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed
ground, short CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
circuit to power, to power, open circuit, high resistance
open circuit,
high resistance
U0300- Internal Control Car Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
57 Module Software configuration file clear the DTCs and retest. Check DTCs in all control
Incompatibility - mismatch with modules. U0300-57 set in multiple control modules on
Invalid/incomplete vehicle the high speed CAN bus: Re-configure the central
software specification junction box with the latest level software. U0300-57
component set in general proximity sensor module only: Re-
configure the general proximity sensor module with
the latest level software. If the fault persists, install a
new general proximity sensor module

56 Configuration Not configuration file check and up-date the car configuration file as
Complete - mismatch with necessary
Invalid/incomplete vehicle
56 Configuration configuration file check datalogger signal - Number of Invalid Car
Incompatible - mismatch with Configuration Parameter Values Received (0xE103) -
Invalid/incomplete vehicle to determine invalid parameters. Check and up-date
configuration specification the car configuration file as necessary
U3000- Control Module - General Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
47 Watchdog/safety proximity sensor clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
MicroController module internal new general proximity sensor module
failure failure
49 Internal electronic proximity sensor clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
failure module internal new general proximity sensor module
failure
55 Not configured proximity sensor check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage
module power (0xDD02). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
or ground circuit check the general proximity sensor module power and
open circuit, ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
high resistance Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
Battery/charging and test the battery and charging system
system fault
Identification Codes - Identification Codes
VIN Number
The VIN number will be found in three locations:
1. Stamped on the side of the RH longitudinal member, rearward of the body front mounting.
2. At the bottom of the windshield glass on the LH side of the vehicle and visible from the outside.
3. UK, Europe and ROW - Not NAS/Canada -On the VIN plate attached to the bonnet locking
platform.
4. NAS/Canada - On the Tire Data/Specification label attached to the front of the LH B-pillar.
Longitudinal Member VIN
Windscreen VIN - ROW
Windscreen VIN - China

VIN number - UK, EU and ROW
VIN Position Character Identifies

1 - 3 - World identifier SAL Jaguar Land Rover Limited
4,5 - Vehicle type LA Land Rover - Discovery
6 - Class A Standard
6 - Class J Japan
7 - Body style A 4 Door
7 - Body style D Commercial 2 seat
7 - Body style E Commercial 5 seat
7 - Body style K Armoured
8 - Engine 1 276DT - V6 2.7 Diesel
8 - Engine D 508PN - V8 5.0 NA Petrol
8 - Engine F 306DT - V6 3.0 High power diesel without cDPF
8 - Engine G 306DT - V6 3.0 High power diesel with cDPF
8 - Engine M 306DT - V6 3.0 Low power diesel with cDPF
8 - Engine N 306DT - V6 3.0 Low power diesel without cDPF
8 - Engine V 306PS - V6 3.0 SC Petrol
9- Steering and transmission 3 RHD - 6 Speed automatic
9- Steering and transmission 4 LHD - 6 Speed automatic
9- Steering and transmission 5 RHD - 8 Speed automatic
10- Model year C 2012
10- Model year D 2013
10- Model year E 2014
11 - Plant A Solihull
11 - Plant G CKD Russia
12 - 17 - Serial number 123456 Unique six digit serial number
VIN number - NAS, Canada, Mexico, China & Korea (gasoline).
NOTE: # Manual belts with driver and passenger frontal air bags and side inflatable restraint ( 1st,2nd (&
3rd) row when fitted).
VIN Position Character Identifies

1 - 3 - World identifier SAL Jaguar Land Rover Limited
4 - Make / Model A Land Rover - LR4
5 - Class / Nas restraint type B TL "S" / LR4 Base 5 Seats #
5 - Class / Nas restraint type C TL "S" / LR4 Base 7 Seats #
5 - Class / Nas restraint type D TL "SE" 5 Seats #
5 - Class / Nas restraint type E TL "SE" 7 Seats #
5 - Class / Nas restraint type F TL "HSE" 5 Seats #
5 - Class / Nas restraint type G TL "HSE" 7 Seats #
5 - Class / Nas restraint type K TL "HSE" Lux 7 Seats #
5 - Class / Nas restraint type N China
6 - Body style 2 4 Door Station Wagon
7 - Engine 1 276DT - V6 2.7 Diesel
7 - Engine D 508PN - V8 5.0 NA
7 - Engine F 306DT - V6 3.0 High power diesel without cDPF
7 - Engine N 306DT - V6 3.0 Low power diesel without cDPF
7 - Engine V 306PS - V6 3.0 SC Petrol
9 - Check digit * Derived by calculation
10- Model year C 2012
10- Model year D 2013
10- Model year E 2014
11 - Plant A Solihull
12 -17 - Serial number 123456 Unique six digit serial number
Bonnet locking platform VIN plate - Not NAS/Canada
The VIN plate contains the following information:
A - Reserved
B - Engine Description
C - Country
D - Diesel Indicator
E - Reserved
F - Headlamp Code/initial aim value - If shown
G - Colour code/group
H - Type/Approval Number - If shown
I - VIN Number
J - Gross Vehicle Weight
K - Gross Train Weight
L - Front Axle Weight
M - Rear Axle Weight
VIN/Certification/Tire Data Label - NAS only
The Certification Label contains the following VIN information:
A - * Vehicle VIN Number

B - Bar code identification
VIN/Tire Pressure Specification Label - Canada only
The Tire Pressure Certification Label contains the following VIN information:
A - Vehicle VIN Number

B - Vehicle Type
Unit/Assembly Serial Number Locations
3.0 litre V6 Diesel Engine Serial Number

3.0 Litre V6 Diesel Engine Serial Number is stamped on the RH side of the cylinder block.
2.7 Litre V6 Diesel Engine Serial Number
The 2.7 Litre V6 Diesel Engine Serial Number is stamped on the RH side of the cylinder block.
5.0 Litre NA V8 and 3.0 Litre SC Petrol Engine Serial Number
The 5.0 Litre NA V8 and 3.0 Litre SC Petrol Engine Serial Number is stamped on the LH side of the cylinder
block.
Automatic Gearbox Serial Number
Tha Automatic Gearbox Serial Number is stamped on the rear LH side of the gearbox casing.
Front Differential Serial Number
The Front Differential Serial Number is stamped on the underside of the differential casing and is located above
the removable cross member.
Rear Differential Serial Number
The Rear Differential Serial Number is stamped on the underside of the differential casing adjacent to the front
mounting.
Twin Speed Transfer Case Serial Number
The twin speed transfer case serial number is stamped on the right side of the transfer case and may also be on
a bar coded self-adhesive label attached to the case.
Single Speed Transfer Case Serial Number

The Single Speed Transfer Case serial number is stamped on the lower right side of the transfer case and may
also be on a bar coded self-adhesive label attached to the case.
Identification Codes - Identification Codes
Commission plate
The commission plate is mounted on the locking platform of the engine compartment lid.
The plate contains the:
contact details for Land Rover Special Vehicles

paint code
contract number
commission date of the vehicle.
Jacking and Lifting - Vehicle Recovery
Towing/Lashing eyes
CAUTION: The single towing/lashing eyes at the front and rear of the vehicle are designed for vehicle
recovery purposes only and MUST not be used to tow a trailer or caravan.
The front towing/lashing eye is accessible after releasing the 9 toggle fasteners securing the towing eye access
panel and removing the panel.
CAUTION: Ensure that during towing, the towing attachment does not contact the bumper.
The rear towing/lashing eye 'A' is accessible after releasing the 2 fasteners securing the access panel to the
bumper and removing the panel.
CAUTION: This towing/lashing eye should only be used for towing another vehicle or for recovery purposes
to enable this vehicle to be positioned in order that the front towing eye may be used for recovery/towing.
4 Wheel Towing
CAUTIONS:
Suspended towing of this vehicle MUST NOT be attempted, if 4 wheel towing is not possible, vehicle must
be recovered on a suitable trailer.
The vehicle may be towed for a maximum of 3 hours or 90 miles (150 km) at a maximum speed of 30 mph
(50 km/h), these limits MUST NOT be exceeded.
The following procedures must be followed to ensure that the vehicle is towed in a safe condition and
damage to the vehicle transmission system is prevented.
1. Remove the front towing/lashing eye access panel.
2. Secure the towing attachment from the recovery vehicle to the towing/lashing eye.
CAUTION: Ensure that the towing attachment will not contact the front bumper during towing.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Insert ignition key and turn the ignition switch to position 'II'.
5. Manual gearbox: Apply the footbrake and position the gear lever in 'N' - Neutral.
CAUTION: If 'N' - Neutral cannot be selected, front and rear propeller shafts must be removed before
vehicle is towed.
6. Automatic gearbox: Apply the footbrake and move the selector lever to the 'N' Neutral position.
NOTE: If electrical power is not available, use the manual interlock release tab on the selector lever to
move the selector lever to the Neutral position.
All vehicles
7. Select 'H' - HIGH on the transfer box.
CAUTION: If electrical power is not available, and 'H' - HIGH cannot be selected, the vehicle may not be
towed but must be recovered on a suitable trailer. If, however, transfer box was in 'H' - HIGH when electrical
power was lost, vehicle may still be towed.
8. Release the parking brake.
NOTE: If electrical power is not available, it will be necessary to release the parking brake manually using
the following procedures:
NOTE: Left hand drive illustrated, right hand drive on opposite side of centre console.
9. Lift out the coin tray from the centre console
10. Remove the access panel from the centre console.
11. Locate the electric parking brake release cable, insert a suitable tool through the cable eye and pull the cable
upwards to release the parking brake.
CAUTION: The electric parking brake will not function until electrical power is restored it will, therefore, be
necessary to chock the wheels when vehicle is at a standstill.
WARNING: Do not release the parking brake until towing is about to commence. Whilst towing, do not
attempt to remove the ignition key and do not turn the key to any position other than 'II'. With the engine
switched off, the power assisted steering system and brake booster will be inoperative thereby resulting in an
increase in the effort required to turn the steering wheel and apply the brakes.
CAUTION: The vehicle tow connections should only be used in normal road conditions, 'snatch' recovery
must be avoided.
On completion of 4 wheel towing
1. Apply the parking brake or if electrical power is not available, securely chock the wheels.
2. Detach towing equipment from towing/lashing eyes.
3. Fit the towing eye access panel and secure the toggle fasteners.
Transporting by trailer
CAUTION: Use the towing/lashing eyes at the front and rear of the vehicle, DO NOT secure lashing hooks or
restraints to any other part of the vehicle.
Position the vehicle, apply the parking brake and select 'N' - Neutral on the manual or automatic gearbox
selector lever
CAUTION: If electrical power is not available and the parking brake is released, it will not be possible to re-
apply the parking brake. It will, therefore be necessary to select 1st gear - manual gearbox or 'P' Park -
automatic gearbox and ensure that the vehicle wheels are adequately chocked to prevent vehicle movement.
Jacking and Lifting - Jacking
General
WARNING: The following instructions must be adhered to before raising the vehicle off the ground:
Position vehicle on a solid, level surface.

Apply the parking brake.
Select 'P' - PARK on automatic transmission selector or 1st gear on manual transmission and 'H' High on
transfer case.
WARNING: If the drive shaft(s) are to be disconnected, it will be necessary to raise all four wheels off the
ground in order that the shaft(s) can be rotated. DO NOT use the customer jack and ensure that the vehicle is
adequately supported on axle stands. With the vehicle raised, it will be necessary to release the park brake and
select Neutral - 'N' in the main transmission to enable the drive shaft(s) to be rotated
CAUTIONS:
To avoid damage to the underbody components of the vehicle, the following instructions must be adhered to:
Do not position jacks or axle stands under the following components:
Body structure other than any approved jacking or lifting points

Bumpers
Fuel lines
Fuel tank
Brake lines
Front or rear suspension arms
Steering linkage
Transfer case
Front or rear differential units
Transmission
Engine oil pan - See note below
NOTE: For certain repair operations, it may be necessary to support the engine under the oil pan. In this case,
a block of hardwood or a rubber pad must be positioned on the jack lifting pad to protect the oil pan.
Vehicle jack
The jack provided with the vehicle is only intended for use in an emergency such as changing a tire. DO NOT use the
jack for any other purpose. Refer to the Owner's Handbook for the vehicle jack location points and jacking
procedures.
WARNING: Never work under a vehicle supported solely by the vehicle jack.
Hydraulic jack
A hydraulic jack with a minimum lifting capacity of 1500 kg, (3,300 lbs) must be used.
WARNINGS:
Do not commence work on the underside of the vehicle until suitable axle stands have been placed in the
correct position.
Always chock the wheels when jacking. The parking brake may be ineffective when the wheel(s) are off the
ground.
Raising and Supporting the Vehicle
To assist in raising the vehicle, jacking points are provided as shown in the following illustrations.
Raising the Front of the Vehicle

Select 'P' - PARK on automatic transmission selector.
WARNING: Always chock the rear wheels when jacking the front of the vehicle.
Position the lifting pad of the hydraulic jack in the centre of the recess in the engine undershield.
NOTE: If the engine undershield has been removed, position the jack lifting pad in the centre of the front cross
beam.
With the vehicle raised to the desired height, position axle stands at positions shown.
CAUTION: Position suitable material between axle stands and longitudinal members to prevent damage to the
longitudinal members.
Carefully lower jack until vehicle rests on axle stands.
WARNING: Before commencing work on the underside of the vehicle, ensure that axle stands are correctly
positioned and vehicle is securely supported.
Reverse procedure when removing vehicle from stands.
Raising the Rear of the Vehicle
WARNING: Always chock the front wheels when jacking the rear of the vehicle.
Position the lifting pad of the hydraulic jack under the centre of the rear cross member as shown.
CAUTION: Take care that the lifting pad of the jack is of a suitable size to avoid damaging the heat shield. It is
not advisable to use a spacer block between the lifting pad and the rear cross member as this may result in some
vehicle instability.
With vehicle raised to desired height, position axle stands at positions shown.
WARNING: Before commencing work on underside of vehicle, ensure that axle stands are correctly positioned
and vehicle is securely supported.
Raising Vehicle - One Wheel/side
WARNING: Always chock the wheels which are not to be raised.

One front wheel - position lifting pad of hydraulic jack beneath longitudinal member on the side to be raised
at Point 'A'
One rear wheel - position lifting pad of jack beneath longitudinal member on the side to be raised at Point
'B'
Front and rear wheels - ONE SIDE - position lifting pad of jack beneath longitudinal member on the side
to be raised at Point 'C'
NOTE: Point 'C' is in line with number 3 body mounting.
With vehicle at desired height, position axle stand(s) beneath longitudinal members and adjacent to the lifting pad of
the jack at appropriate point(s) D.
WARNING: Before commencing work on underside of vehicle, ensure that axle stands are correctly positioned
and vehicle is securely supported.

Jacking and Lifting - Lifting
Vehicle on Wheels - Four Post Ramp
WARNING: If the drive shaft(s) are to be disconnected, it will be necessary to raise all four wheels off the ramp
in order that the shaft(s) can be rotated. If the wheel free facility is not to be used, raise the vehicle off the ramp
using suitable equipment. With the vehicle raised, position axle stands in the positions shown for the front and rear
support blocks - see illustration in Jacking. With the axle stands positioned, release the parking brake and select
NEUTRAL 'N' in the transmission.
WARNING: Do not push the vehicle backwards and forwards along the ramp in order to gain access to the drive
shaft fixings.
Position the vehicle on the ramp with the front and rear of the vehicle equidistant from the ends of the ramp. Chock
the wheels, select NEUTRAL in the transmission and where practicable, apply the parking brake.
Wheel Free Lift - Four Post Ramp
NOTE: To enable the vehicle to be supported correctly on the wheel free longitudinals, it will be necessary to
produce 2 off each of the support blocks to the dimensions given in the accompanying illustrations. The supporting
part of each block must be manufactured from suitable hardwood or metal and the 'U' shaped base of each block
must be manufactured from metal. Note that it is essential to ensure that the 'U' shaped base of each block is wide
enough to fit over the wheel free longitudinals.
Front Support Block Dimensions
'A' = 127.0 mm (5.0 in)

'B' = 146.0 mm (5.75 in)
'C' = 89.0 mm (3.5 in)
Rear support block dimensions
'A' = 152.0 mm (6.0 in)

'B' = 101.0 mm (4.0 in)
'C' = 76.0 mm (3.0 in)
Raising and Supporting the Vehicle
1. Position vehicle on ramp.
2. Position suspension in 'off-road' height.
3. Apply parking brake.

4. Raise ramp to desired height.
5. Align the wheel free longitudinals beneath the body frame longitudinals and position the support blocks beneath
the longitudinals in the positions shown.
CAUTION: Ensure that the front and rear support blocks are correctly oriented to front and rear of vehicle.
6. Engage wheel free and lower ramp slowly until weight of vehicle rests on support blocks and road wheels are just
clear of ramp.
7. Ensure that the vehicle is correctly supported on all four support blocks, that blocks are still correctly positioned
and are in full contact with the body frame longitudinals.
8. Lower the ramp.
WARNING: Make sure that the vehicle is stable before commencing work.
NOTE: Return the suspension to 'normal ride height' when the vehicle is removed from the ramp.
Two Post Lift
CAUTION: If the drive shaft(s) are to be removed, release the parking brake and select NEUTRAL 'N' in the
transmission in order that the shaft(s) can be rotated when the vehicle is raised to the desired height.
1. Position the vehicle with the centre of the lift pillars aligned approximately with the front of the driver/passenger
seat cushions.
2. Extend the lifting arms and position the pad of each lifting arm beneath the body frame longitudinal lifting points.
3. Raise the vehicle until the wheels are just clear of the ground and check that the pads of each lifting arm are still
correctly positioned.
4. Raise the vehicle to the desired height.
5. Ensure that vehicle is correctly supported on all four lifting pads, that pads are still correctly positioned and are in
full contact with the body frame longitudinals.
WARNING: Make sure that the vehicle is stable before commencing work.
Maintenance Schedules - Maintenance Schedules - Gasoline Engines
CAUTIONS:
Always refer to the correct market Maintenance check sheet for the correct service scheduling.
Unless stated otherwise, the following operations must be carried out at every service interval. Note that the 'A'
and 'B' Service Intervals listed on the 'Maintenance Check Sheet' for vehicles operating under arduous conditions,
vary from those specified for vehicles operating under normal conditions. Reference must therefore, always be made
to the 'Arduous Conditions Maintenance Check Sheet' for vehicles operating under these conditions.
NOTES:
Note that the A and B Services listed on the Maintenance Check Sheet, applicable to vehicles operating under
arduous conditions, vary both in period and mileage (kilometres) to the intervals specified for those vehicles
operating under normal conditions. Reference must therefore, always be made to the 'Arduous Conditions section' for
vehicles operating under these conditions.
Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.
Torque Specifications
Description Nm lb-ft
Seat frame fixing Torx screws 40 30
Seat belt fixing Torx screws 40 30
Road wheel nuts 140 103
Underbonnet View - 3.0 Litre
1. Engine oil filler cap

2. Brake fluid reservoir (LH drive illustrated - RH drive on opposite side)
3. Power steering fluid reservoir
4. Windshield washer reservoir
5. Coolant expansion tank
Maintenance Operations
Seats and Safety Belts

Front seat frame fixings
1. Carefully remove the trim panels covering the seat frame fixing Torx screws.
2. Check that the front seat frame fixing Torx screws are secure and that the seat frames show no signs of
movement.
3. Reinstall the trim panels on completion.
4. Check that the rear seat frame front fixings are secure and that the seat frames show no signs of movement.

5. Fold the seat cushions forwards and check that the rear seat frame rear fixings are secure and that the seat
frames show no signs of movement.
6. Fold the seat cushions back on completion.
Front seat controls
7. Check operation of all seat controls.
Safety belts
8. Fully extend each safety belt and check that it returns unassisted; repeat for all belts.
9. Check entire length of safety belt webbing for signs of fraying or damage; repeat for all belts.
10. Connect each safety belt to the correct buckle, check safety belt buckle and tongue are secure; check that
buckle releases tongue correctly.
11. Check all safety belt and buckle mountings and fixings for security.
12. Check front safety belt height adjusters for correct operation.
Lamps, Horns and Warning Indicators
1. Check side, head, fog, reversing and tail lamps for correct operation.
2. Check operation of headlamp automatic levelling system - if installed.
3. Check turn signals and hazard warning lamps for correct operation.
4. Check brake (stop) lamps for correct operation.
5. Check all exterior lamp lenses for clarity and condition; pay particular attention to headlamp and fog lamp lenses
for stone chips or damage.
6. Check horn for loud, clear sound.
7. Switch on headlamps and check that side/headlamp reminder warning sounds when door is opened.
8. Check operation of interior courtesy lamps.
9. Check operation of all instrument pack warning and indicator lamps.
Washers and Wipers

1. Check all wiper blades for condition and signs of splits or damage.
2. Check security of wiper arms.
3. Operate front and rear windshield washers, check that jets are clear and correctly aimed.
4. Operate front and rear wipers at all speeds and check for smooth, smear free operation.
Check High/Low Gear Engagement
1. Select LOW range gear, drive vehicle forwards 3 to 4 vehicle lengths, stop vehicle and select HIGH range gear -
gears must engage smoothly.
Pollen Filter
1. Replace pollen filter.

For additional information, refer to: Pollen Filter (412-01 Air Distribution and Filtering, Removal and Installation).
Corrosion/Cosmetic Inspection
1. Carry out the annual corrosion/cosmetic inspection using the Annual Corrosion Inspection Sheet.
Wheels and Tires
1. Check that tires comply with manufacturer's specification.

For additional information, refer to: Wheels and Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Description and Operation).
2. Check/adjust tire pressures including spare.

3. Vehicles with Uni-directional tires installed: Mark the wheel to stud relationship of each road wheel and note
location of each road wheel to its respective hub.
4. Loosen road wheel nuts. Raise vehicle to a wheel free condition.

For additional information, refer to: Lifting (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation).
5. Remove the road wheels.
6. Visually check tires for condition, lumps or bulges. Check tread depth across the width of the tire and around the
circumference; make sure that remaining tread depth does not contravene local legislative requirements.
NOTE: Do not install wheels at this stage.
Braking System
1. Inspect front brake pads for wear.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Specifications).
2. Inspect rear brake pads for wear.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Specifications).
3. Check brake calipers for signs of fluid leaks.
4. Check brake discs for condition.
5. Check all brake booster and brake system pipes and hoses for condition, chafing and leaks.
6. Clean road wheel hub spigots and apply grease, Land Rover Part Number RYL 105020 to the wheel mating surface
of each spigot.
7. Vehicles with Uni-directional tires installed: Install road wheels to their respective hubs ensuring that stud to
wheel relationship is maintained.
8. Vehicles with NON uni-directional tires installed: Install wheels on the opposite side of the vehicle but make
sure that they on the same axle as they were originally installed.
9. Install road wheel nuts and tighten to 140 Nm (103 lb-ft).
10. Replace brake fluid.

For additional information, refer to: Brake System Pressure Bleeding (206-00 Brake System - General Information,
General Procedures).
11. Replace all flexible brake hoses.
Electric Parking Brake
1. Check the adjustment of the electric parking brake.

For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake Shoe and Lining Adjustment (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation,
2. Vehicles operating under arduous conditions: Check the condition of the electric parking brake system.
Road Wheel Speed Sensors
1. Inspect the road wheel speed sensor harnesses for damage.
Door Locks and Hinges
1. Check operation of all door locks, bonnet lock and fuel filler flap.
2. Lubricate all door check straps, bonnet catch and fuel filler flap catch.
Radiator and Cooling Fan
1. Vehicles operating under arduous conditions: Visually check radiator for external obstructions, check cooling
fan blades for damage.
Cooling System
1. Check specific gravity of coolant using a hydrometer.
NOTE: A suitable hydrometer is available from the Equipment Programme under Part Number 511 3302 001 00.
2. Top-up cooling system if necessary.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (303-03B Engine Cooling - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol, Specifications).
CAUTION: Anti-freeze concentration must be maintained at 50%.
Cooling system - Check/Top-up
WARNING: Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping steam or coolant, do not
remove the filler cap from the coolant expansion tank whilst the system is hot.
CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage the paint finished surfaces. If coolant is spilled, immediately
remove the coolant and wash the area with water.
1. Check the level of coolant in the expansion tank. With the engine cold, the coolant level must be to the 'UPPER
LEVEL' indicator mark above the 'COLD FILL RANGE' text on the side of the expansion tank. Ignore any coolant
which may be visible in the top section of the tank.
2. If topping-up is required, remove expansion tank filler cap and top-up coolant level to the 'UPPER LEVEL'
indicator mark.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (303-03B Engine Cooling - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol, Specifications).
CAUTION: Always top-up with a 50% mixture of anti-freeze and water.
3. Install expansion tank filler cap, tighten cap until ratchet is heard to 'click'.
Coolant - Replace
1. Replace the coolant.

For additional information, refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03B Engine Cooling -
V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
Ignition System
1. Replace spark plugs.

For additional information, refer to: Spark Plugs (303-07B Engine Ignition - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
Air Filtering
1. Replace the air filter element.

For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner Element (303-12B Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V6 S/C 3.0L
Petrol, Removal and Installation).
Ancillary Drive Belt
1. Check the condition of the ancillary drive belt.
2. Remove all traces of mud and dirt from the drive belt and pulleys.
3. Check the drive belt for signs of splitting and wear.
4. Replace the ancillary drive belt.

For additional information, refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05B Accessory Drive - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
Fluid Levels
Brake fluid reservoir
1. Remove the auxiliary battery box cover.
2. Check the fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir, the level must be to the 'MAX' mark on the reservoir; top-up if
necessary.
3. Clean the area around the reservoir filler cap, remove cap.
4. If necessary, top-up using the recommended fluid to the 'MAX' mark on the reservoir.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (206-00 Brake System - General Information, Specifications).
5. Install the reservoir filler cap.
6. Install the auxiliary battery box cover.
Power steering fluid reservoir

CAUTION: To prevent over filling, check/top-up the system with the engine switched off and the system cold.
Make sure that the steering wheel is in the straight ahead position, do not turn the steering wheel prior to checking
the fluid level.
1. Check that the fluid level is to the mid-way mark between the 'MAX' and 'MIN' marks on the fluid reservoir, top-
up if necessary.
2. Clean the area around the reservoir filler cap, remove cap.
3. If necessary, top-up using the recommended fluid to the mid-way mark on the reservoir.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (211-02 Power Steering, Specifications).
.
CAUTION: Do not fill reservoir above the 'MAX' mark.
Windshield washer reservoir
1. Remove the windshield washer reservoir filler cap.
2. Top-up the reservoir using a mixture of an approved windshield washer fluid and water until the level is to the
bottom of the gauze filter in the reservoir filler neck.
Engine Oil and Filter
1. Renew engine oil and filter - 3.0 litre engine.

For additional information, refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01B Engine - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol, General
Procedures) /
Specifications (303-01B Engine - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol, Specifications).
Automatic Transmission
1. Renew automatic transmission fluid.

For additional information, refer to: Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle -
TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol , Vehicles With: 8HP70 8-Speed Automatic Transmission AWD, General
Procedures).
Transfer Case
1. Renew transfer case fluid.

For additional information, refer to: Transfer Case Draining and Filling (308-07B Transfer Case - Vehicles With: Single
Speed Transfer Case, General Procedures) /
Transfer Case Draining and Filling (308-07C Transfer Case - Vehicles With: Twin Speed Transfer Case, General
Procedures).
Differential Assemblies
1. Renew front differential oil.

For additional information, refer to: Differential Draining and Filling (205-03 Front Drive Axle/Differential, General
Procedures) /
Specifications (205-03 Front Drive Axle/Differential, Specifications).
2. Renew rear differential oil.

For additional information, refer to: Differential Draining and Filling (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, General
Procedures) /
Specifications (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Specifications).
Suspension and Body Mountings
1. Check for free play in all suspension and body mounting rubbers.
2. Check condition of suspension rubber boots and gaiters.
3. Lift the vehicle so that front wheels are clear of ground/ramp to enable insertion of a suitable lever (e.g. a
1200mm long steel tube). Check the lower ball joints for free play by placing the lever between the ground/ramp and
the tire, and lifting the wheel assembly with the lever. A second person will be required to check simultaneously for
any ball joint lift. If free play (knock) is noted in the ball joint, replacement is required.
Removable Tow Bar
1. Check condition of removable tow bar.

For additional information, refer to: Tow Bar Mounting Check (502-02 Full Frame and Body Mounting, General
Procedures).
Fuel System
1. Check fuel system pipes, hoses and unions for chafing, leaks and corrosion.
Electrical Harnesses
1. Check all electrical harnesses for chafing.
Oil/Fluid Leaks
1. Check for oil/fluid leaks.
Exhaust System
1. Check exhaust system for leaks, security and damage.
Power Steering
1. Check power steering rod ball joint fixings, gaiters and condition of ball joints and dust covers.
2. Check power steering pipes, hoses and unions for chafing, leaks and corrosion.
Fault Lamp(s)
1. If fault lamp(s) are illuminated, test the associated system using approved Land Rover diagnositc equipment and
report findings.
Road Test
1. Carry out road test of vehicle.

For additional information, refer to: Road/Roller Testing (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
General
1. Endorse Service Record.
2. Report any unusual features of vehicle condition and any additional work required.
Additional Items That May Require Attention
It is recommended that:
1. All brake fluid hydraulic seals are replaced.
NOTE: This is in addition to the maintenance requirement that flexible brake hoses MUST be replaced at this
service interval.
2. After 50 miles (80 km) continuous use in severe off-road conditions i.e. wading, deep mud and
abrasive grit/slurry: The electric parking brake should be cleaned and inspected.
abrasive grit/slurry: The ancillary drive belt should be cleaned and inspected.
4. Vehicles used in dusty or field conditions or deep wading: More frequent attention to the air cleaner will be
required.
Maintenance Schedules - Maintenance Schedules - Diesel Engines
CAUTIONS:
Always refer to the correct market Maintenance check sheet for the correct service scheduling.
Unless stated otherwise, the following operations must be carried out at every service interval. Note that the 'A'
and 'B' Service Intervals listed on the 'Maintenance Check Sheet' for vehicles operating under arduous conditions,
vary from those specified for vehicles operating under normal conditions. Reference must therefore, always be made
to the 'Arduous Conditions Maintenance Check Sheet' for vehicles operating under these conditions.
NOTES:
Note that the A and B Services listed on the Maintenance Check Sheet, applicable to vehicles operating under
arduous conditions, vary both in period and mileage (kilometres) to the intervals specified for those vehicles
operating under normal conditions. Reference must therefore, always be made to the 'Arduous Conditions section' for
vehicles operating under these conditions.
Seat frame fixing Torx screws 40 30
Seat belt fixing Torx screws 40 30
Underbonnet View - 3.0 Litre

1. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (RH drive illustrated - LH drive on opposite side)
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Windshield washer reservoir
4. Coolant expansion tank
5. Power steering fluid reservoir
Maintenance Operations
Seats and Safety Belts

1. Carefully remove the trim panels covering the seat frame fixing Torx screws.
2. Check that the front seat frame fixing Torx screws are secure and that the seat frames show no signs of
movement.
3. Reinstall the trim panels on completion.
4. Check that the rear seat frame front fixings are secure and that the seat frames show no signs of movement.

5. Fold the seat cushions forwards and check that the rear seat frame rear fixings are secure and that the seat
frames show no signs of movement.
6. Fold the seat cushions back on completion.
Front seat controls
7. Check operation of all seat controls.
Safety belts
8. Fully extend each safety belt and check that it returns unassisted; repeat for all belts.
9. Check entire length of safety belt webbing for signs of fraying or damage; repeat for all belts.
10. Connect each safety belt to the correct buckle, check safety belt buckle and tongue are secure; check that
buckle releases tongue correctly.
11. Check all safety belt and buckle mountings and fixings for security.
12. Check front safety belt height adjusters for correct operation.
Lamps, Horns and Warning Indicators
1. Check side, head, fog, reversing and tail lamps for correct operation.
2. Check operation of headlamp automatic levelling system - if installed.
3. Check turn signals and hazard warning lamps for correct operation.
4. Check brake (stop) lamps for correct operation.
5. Check all exterior lamp lenses for clarity and condition; pay particular attention to headlamp and fog lamp lenses
for stone chips or damage.
6. Check horn for loud, clear sound.
7. Switch on headlamps and check that side/headlamp reminder warning sounds when door is opened.
8. Check operation of interior courtesy lamps.
9. Check operation of all instrument pack warning and indicator lamps.
Washers and Wipers

1. Check all wiper blades for condition and signs of splits or damage.
2. Check security of wiper arms.
3. Operate front and rear windshield washers, check that jets are clear and correctly aimed.
4. Operate front and rear wipers at all speeds and check for smooth, smear free operation.
Check High/Low Gear Engagement
1. Select LOW range gear, drive vehicle forwards 3 to 4 vehicle lengths, stop vehicle and select HIGH range gear -
gears must engage smoothly.
Pollen Filter
1. Replace pollen filter.

For additional information, refer to: Pollen Filter (412-01 Air Distribution and Filtering, Removal and Installation).
Corrosion/Cosmetic Inspection
1. Carry out the annual corrosion/cosmetic inspection using the Annual Corrosion Inspection Sheet.
Wheels and Tires
1. Check that tires comply with manufacturer's specification.

2. Check/adjust tire pressures including spare.

3. Vehicles with Uni-directional tires installed: Mark the wheel to stud relationship of each road wheel and note
location of each road wheel to its respective hub.
4. Loosen road wheel nuts. Raise vehicle to a wheel free condition.

For additional information, refer to: Lifting (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation).
5. Remove the road wheels.
6. Visually check tires for condition, lumps or bulges. Check tread depth across the width of the tire and around the
circumference; make sure that remaining tread depth does not contravene local legislative requirements.
NOTE: Do not install wheels at this stage.
Braking System
1. Inspect front brake pads for wear.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Specifications).
2. Inspect rear brake pads for wear.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Specifications).
3. Check brake calipers for signs of fluid leaks.
4. Check brake discs for condition.
5. Check all brake booster and brake system pipes and hoses for condition, chafing and leaks.
6. Clean road wheel hub spigots and apply grease, Land Rover Part Number RYL 105020 to the wheel mating surface
of each spigot.
7. Vehicles with Uni-directional tires installed: Install road wheels to their respective hubs ensuring that stud to
wheel relationship is maintained.
8. Vehicles with NON uni-directional tires installed: Install wheels on the opposite side of the vehicle but make
sure that they on the same axle as they were originally installed.
9. Install road wheel nuts and tighten to 140 Nm (103 lb-ft).
10. Replace brake fluid.

For additional information, refer to: Brake System Pressure Bleeding (206-00 Brake System - General Information,
11. Replace all flexible brake hoses.
Electric Parking Brake
1. Check the adjustment of the electric parking brake.

For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake Shoe and Lining Adjustment (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation,
2. Vehicles operating under arduous conditions: Check the condition of the electric parking brake system.
Road Wheel Speed Sensors
1. Inspect the road wheel speed sensor harnesses for damage.
Fuel Filter Element
1. Replace fuel filter element. For additional information, refer to: Fuel Filter Element (310-01A Fuel Tank and Lines -
TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
Fuel Sedimentor
1. Drain the fuel sedimentor.

For additional information, refer to: Diesel Filter Water Drain-Off (310-00 Fuel System - General Information, General
Procedures).
Radiator/intercooler and Cooling Fan
1. Visually check the radiator/intercooler for external obstructions, check cooling fan blades for damage.
2. Remove any debris from the intercooler using a low pressure hose.
Door Locks and Hinges
1. Check operation of all door locks, bonnet lock and fuel filler flap.
2. Lubricate all door check straps, bonnet catch and fuel filler flap catch.
Cooling System
1. Check specific gravity of coolant using a hydrometer.
NOTE: A suitable hydrometer is available from the Equipment Programme under Part Number 511 3302 001 00.
2. Top-up cooling system if necessary.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (303-03A Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Specifications).
CAUTION: Anti-freeze concentration must be maintained at 50%.

Cooling system - Check/Top-up
WARNING: Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping steam or coolant, do not
remove the filler cap from the coolant expansion tank whilst the system is hot.
CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage the paint finished surfaces. If coolant is spilled, immediately
remove the coolant and wash the area with water.
1. Check the level of coolant in the expansion tank. With the engine cold, the coolant level must be to the'UPPER
LEVEL' indicator mark above the 'COLD FILL RANGE' text on the side of the expansion tank. Ignore any coolant
2. If topping-up is required, remove expansion tank filler cap and top-up coolant level to the 'UPPER LEVEL'
indicator mark.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (303-03A Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Specifications).
CAUTION: Always top-up with a 50% mixture of anti-freeze and water.
3. Fit expansion tank filler cap, tighten cap until ratchet is heard to 'click'.
Coolant - Replace
1. Replace the coolant.

For additional information, refer to: Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03A Engine Cooling - TDV6
3.0L Diesel, General Procedures).
Air Filtering
1. Replace the air filter element.

For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner Element (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L
Diesel, Removal and Installation).
Ancillary Drive Belt
1. Check the condition of the ancillary drive belt.
2. Remove all traces of mud and dirt from the drive belt and pulleys.
3. Check the drive belt for signs of splitting and wear.
4. Replace the ancillary drive belt.

For additional information, refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05A Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
Camshaft Timing Belt and High Pressure Fuel Pump Drive Belt/Rear End Accessory Drive
(READ) Belt
1. Replace camshaft timing belt.

For additional information, refer to: Timing Belt (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
Replace the High pressure fuel pump drive belt.
For additional information, refer to: Rear End Accessory Drive (READ) (303-05A Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,
Removal and Installation).
Fluid Levels
Brake/clutch fluid reservoir

1. Remove the auxiliary battery box cover.
2. Check the fluid level in the brake/clutch fluid reservoir, the level must be to the 'MAX' mark on the reservoir; top-
up if necessary.
3. Clean the area around the reservoir filler cap, remove the cap.
4. If necessary, top-up using the recommended fluid to the 'MAX' mark on the reservoir.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (206-00 Brake System - General Information, Specifications).
5. Reinstall the reservoir filler cap.
6. Install the auxiliary battery box cover.
Power steering fluid reservoir
CAUTION: To prevent over filling, check/top-up the system with the engine switched off and the system cold.
Make sure that the steering wheel is in the straight ahead position, do not turn the steering wheel prior to checking
the fluid level.
1. Check that the fluid level is to the mid-way mark between the 'MAX' and 'MIN' marks on the fluid reservoir, top-
up if necessary.
2. Clean the area around the reservoir filler cap, remove the cap.
3. If necessary, top-up using the recommended fluid to the mid-way mark on the reservoir.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (211-02 Power Steering, Specifications).
.
CAUTION: Do not fill reservoir above the 'MAX' mark.
Windshield washer reservoir

1. Remove the windshield washer reservoir filler cap.
2. Top-up the reservoir using a mixture of an approved windshield washer fluid and water until the level is to the
bottom of the gauze filter in the reservoir filler neck.
Engine Oil and Filter
1. Renew engine oil and filter.

For additional information, refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, General
Procedures).
Automatic Transmission
1. Renew automatic transmission fluid.

For additional information, refer to: Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle -
TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol , Vehicles With: 8HP70 8-Speed Automatic Transmission AWD, General
Procedures).
Transfer Case
1. Renew transfer case fluid.

For additional information, refer to: Transfer Case Draining and Filling (308-07B Transfer Case - Vehicles With: Single
Speed Transfer Case, General Procedures) /
Transfer Case Draining and Filling (308-07C Transfer Case - Vehicles With: Twin Speed Transfer Case, General
Procedures).
Differential Assemblies
1. Renew front differential oil.

For additional information, refer to: Differential Draining and Filling (205-03 Front Drive Axle/Differential, General
Procedures) /
Specifications (205-03 Front Drive Axle/Differential, Specifications).
2. Renew rear differential oil.

For additional information, refer to: Differential Draining and Filling (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, General
Procedures) /
Specifications (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Specifications).
Suspension and Body Mountings
1. Check for free play in all suspension and body mounting rubbers.
2. Check condition of suspension rubber boots and gaiters.
3. Lift the vehicle so that front wheels are clear of ground/ramp to enable insertion of a suitable lever (e.g. a
1200mm long steel tube). Check the lower ball joints for free play by placing the lever between the ground/ramp and
the tire, and lifting the wheel assembly with the lever. A second person will be required to check simultaneously for
any ball joint lift. If free play (knock) is noted in the ball joint, replacement is required.
Removable Tow Bar
1. Check condition of removable tow bar.

For additional information, refer to: Tow Bar Mounting Check (502-02 Full Frame and Body Mounting, General
Procedures).
Fuel System
1. Check fuel system pipes, hoses and unions for chafing, leaks and corrosion.
Electrical Harnesses
1. Check all electrical harnesses for chafing.
Oil/Fluid Leaks
1. Check for oil/fluid leaks.
Exhaust System
1. Check exhaust system for leaks, security and damage.
Power Steering
1. Check power steering rod ball joint fixings, gaiters and condition of ball joints and dust covers.
2. Check power steering pipes, hoses and unions for chafing, leaks and corrosion.
Clutch
1. Check clutch pipes and unions for chafing, leaks and corrosion.
Fault Lamp(s)
1. If fault lamp(s) are illuminated, test the associated system using approved Land Rover diagnostic equipment and
report findings.
Road Test
1. Carry out road test of vehicle.

For additional information, refer to: Road/Roller Testing (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
General
1. Endorse Service Record.
2. Report any unusual features of vehicle condition and any additional work required.
Additional Items That May Require Attention
It is recommended that:
1. All brake fluid hydraulic seals are replaced.
NOTE: This is in addition to the maintenance requirement that flexible brake hoses MUST be replaced at this
service interval.
abrasive grit/slurry: The electric parking brake should be cleaned and inspected.
abrasive grit/slurry: The ancillary drive belt should be cleaned and inspected.
4. Vehicles used in dusty or field conditions or deep wading: More frequent attention to the air cleaner will be
required.
5. Vehicles used in areas where fuel quality is poor: Where vehicles are used in these areas, the fuel
sedimentor may require draining at more frequent intervals.
Vehicle Transportation Aids and Vehicle Storage - New Vehicle Storage
INTRODUCTION
Standards
Vehicles may require storage for varying periods of time before the customer takes delivery. It is essential that a
new Land Rover vehicle is stored correctly, in order to ensure total customer satisfaction after the car is removed
from storage and prepared for sale.
This document establishes the MINIMUM STANDARDS required of franchise holders and appointed vehicle storage
companies by Land Rover for the storage of new vehicles, and may only be deviated from with the Company’s
agreement. Any concerns should be discussed with your Franchise Regional Manager.
This information should be used in conjunction with the relevant Pre-Delivery Inspection (PDI) information.
AREAS OF RESPONSIBILITY
Preventative Measures
Adequate preventative measures must be taken to ensure that each vehicle in stock is maintained in peak condition.
ARRIVAL
It is your responsibility to notify delivery companies immediately of any losses and/or transit damage identified on
receipt of the vehicle.
Where applicable, Vehicle Condition Reports (VCR’s) must be endorsed accordingly, otherwise it is unlikely that the
transit insurance company will accept any claims for missing items or damage rectification.
STORAGE
Correct preparation of vehicles for storage is essential. The majority of new vehicles leaving Land Rover are provided
with the appropriate protection for transit. It is your responsibility to ensure that a vehicle storage department, or
specialist company, is sufficiently equipped to undertake the storage requirements endorsed in this publication.
Whilst vehicles are in storage, any deterioration or damage sustained is the sole responsibility of the
storage operator and must NOT be made the subject of a warranty claim.
DISPATCH
When removing vehicles from storage, you are responsible for procedures that ensure they are in a safe and
roadworthy condition.
VEHICLE STORAGE
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION UPON ARRIVAL
1. A New Vehicle Storage History Sheet must be raised for every new vehicle upon arrival and should
remain inside the vehicle until despatch. This must contain a record of the vehicle condition and
any rectification work carried out during the storage period (see Storage History Sheet).
2. Vehicles must be checked for correct specification and/or shortages. Where this is incorrect the required parts
should be procured through normal channels and costs claimed back via the DDW system using the
appropriate shortage or misbuild program code.
- Claims for rectifying incorrect specification items and/or shortages must be made in accordance with
the conditions detailed in Section C of the Warranty Policy and Procedures Manual.
- NOTE: All missing items should be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage History Sheet and
countersigned by an authorized person.
3. Vehicles must be inspected for transit damage.
- Delivery damage is not the responsibility of Land Rover and must not be made the subject of a
warranty claim. It is the responsibility of the Dealer/Retailer or vehicle storage company to identify any
such damage at the time of the new vehicle receipt and to ensure that the full details are recorded on
the Delivery Receipt. Claims for rectification of such damage must be directed to the Delivery
Company.
- Failure to notify the Delivery Company of damage details at the time of vehicle delivery will result in
claims for subsequent rectification being rejected.
- Warranty claims for damage repairs may only be submitted where Land Rover's responsibility is clearly
indicated. Examples falling into this category are paintwork damage during the fitment of trim or
outward facing dents on the door skin.
- Warranty claims will not be accepted for any transit damage repaired or identified after the vehicle has
been placed into service.
4. A label should be suitably affixed to the inside of the windshield indicating the date of vehicle arrival. Labels
must not be stuck directly to the windshield but placed in a transparent licence holder, or alternatively stuck
to a piece of cling film and attached to the inside of the windshield. This will avoid damage to the windshield
when removing labels.
5. Ignition and door keys must be suitably labelled and when the vehicle is locked, they must be held in a
suitably identified and secure office. All key numbers must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage History
Sheet. All keys, including spares, must be removed from the vehicle during storage for security reasons.
VEHICLE INSPECTION
The entire vehicle exterior must be inspected and, if necessary, washed thoroughly, including the underside and
wheel arches, to remove all dirt and mud deposits.
Any defects found during inspection must be rectified before the vehicle is stored.
Ensure that bumper and body side protectors are correctly located.
There are two main methods of vehicle storage:
1. Collective storage of several vehicles in an open compound.

2. Collective storage of a small number of vehicles, normally at the dealership/retailer and possibly under cover.
IDEALLY ALL VEHICLES SHOULD BE STORED IN A WELL VENTILATED AND TEMPERATURE-CONTROLLED BUILDING.
However, it is recognised that the majority of all vehicle storage is done in an open compound. Therefore, the
following site requirements must be observed and should be authorised with your Regional Manager.
1. The site should have a well-drained hard standing surface, preferably concrete or tarmac, which is free from
undergrowth.
2. The site and driveways must be kept clean and clear of any obstruction at all times.
3. The site must be enclosed by a secure intruder-proof perimeter fence and the gates securely locked. The site
should be under daily surveillance, with unauthorised access prevented at all times.
4. The site should be located away from areas subject to industrial fallout, sea spray or wind-blown dust and
sand. Where fallout conditions are unavoidable it will be necessary to monitor the exterior condition of all cars
and wash as necessary. Heavy contamination may require vehicles to have the transit protection coating
removed and problems arising from the contamination rectified. Once the transit coating has been removed,
the vehicle must not be returned to outdoor storage unless it is fully covered to provide the necessary
protection against deterioration.
5. Mains water, tyre inflation and battery charging facilities must be available on site.
6. Hedges, shrubs and trees adjacent to the site should be kept trimmed and clear of parked vehicles.
7. Vehicles must not be parked under trees, overhead cables or other overhanging structures as bird droppings
or other types of contamination could occur.
VEHICLE PARKING
Vehicles must be parked tidily with a minimum of 600 mm (2 feet) between bumpers, front and rear.
There must be a full doors width clearance between the driver’s door and any adjacent vehicle or obstruction.
Vehicles must be parked at least 1.2 metres (4 feet) away from any interior wall or, for outside storage, at least 2
metres (6 feet) away from any perimeter fence.
Vehicles must be moved on a first-in-first-out basis, subject to specification.

Item Part Number Description
A - Storage Outside
B - Storage Inside
FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT
Car wash facilities.
Tyre inflation equipment with calibrated gauge 0 - 4.05 bar (0 - 60lbf/in²).
All equipment used must be functionally capable of meeting the compliance requirements. Please refer to the
approved equipment document.
Jacking equipment.
Wheel brace.
The following materials must be available and must meet Land Rover specifications:
Engine oil.
Transmission fluid.
Brake fluid.
Distilled water.
Windscreen washer fluid.
Anti-freeze.
Access to trailer/recovery vehicle (Vehicles should not be towed).
Comprehensive filing system for vehicle records.

NOTE: Tools supplied with the vehicle must not be used for any rectification work prior to the prospective
purchaser.
OPERATIONS REQUIRED DURING STORAGE PERIOD
REFERENCE CHART
The following chart gives a quick reference to the requirements necessary during the time a vehicle is in storage. A
detailed explanation of each operation is provided on subsequent pages.
If a vehicle remains in storage after 150 days from receipt of vehicle, a new form must be started.
UPON 30 days 60 days 90 days 120 days 150 days

OPERATION RECEIPT from receipt from receipt from receipt from receipt from receipt
1. IDENTIFICATION X . . . . .
2. INSPECTION X X X X X X
3. BATTERIES X X X X X X
4. COOLING SYSTEM X X X X X X
5. ENGINE X X X X X X
6. AIR CONDITIONING X X X X X X
7. TIRES X X X X X X
8. PARKING BRAKE X X X X X X
9. DOORS, WINDOWS AND X . . X . .
VEHICLE INTERIOR
10. WINDSHIELD WIPER X . . X . .
BLADES
11. PAINTWORK .
All markets REMOVE 'WRAPGUARD' AFTER 180 DAYS
STORAGE OPERATIONS
BATTERIES
To make sure the correct standard of battery care, please see the ‘Battery Care Requirements for New Vehicles
(Dealer and Retailer).
For requirements for receipt of a new vehicle, new vehicle storage and replacement batteries please see the battery
care requirements for new vehicles (dealer and service)
Place a label on the vehicle (or on New Vehicle Storage History Sheet) to indicate when a recharge will be required.
The battery condition should be checked prior to starting and/or moving the vehicle.
For additional information, refer to: Battery Care Requirements (414-00 Battery and Charging System - General
Information, Description and Operation).
The storage, handling and charging of batteries is not dangerous provided that the relevant battery manufacturers’
recommendations are followed. However, a suitable storage and charging facility must be available and should be in
accordance with local legal requirements.
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV) BATTERY PACK
CAUTION: Always keep the high voltage battery charged, failure to do so may cause damage to the battery.
NOTE: In extreme cold climate conditions (circa -30°C), store the vehicle in a warmer area to protect it from the
environment.
If the vehicle is not used for 30 days or more, it is essential that the high voltage battery is charged. For longer
storage periods, charge the high voltage battery every 30 days.
Charge the HEV battery pack as follows:
Start the vehicle (using the engine Start/Stop button and brake pedal sequence).
To view the Tachometer, open the instrument cluster menu, then select Instrument Display, Hybrid Content
and Reduced Hybrid Display.
Raise the engine to approximately 1500 rpm.
When the battery charge level has reached the position indicated in the following graphic, the vehicle may be
switched off.
COOLING SYSTEM
It is ESSENTIAL to maintain the concentration of anti-freeze at the factory-fill condition. Failure to do so may cause
oxidisation of the cooling system leading to corrosion of the engine and heater.
The coolant mixture specification is 50% plain water and 50% Land Rover anti-freeze, Coolant and Corrosion
Inhibitor for frost protection down to -36°C (-33°F).
Coolant specific gravity must be checked monthly using a high quality hydrometer with an appropriate range. At a
coolant temperature of 15°C (60°F), the correct specific gravity reading is 1.074. If the coolant is above or below
this temperature, the following corrections will enable accurate specific gravity readings to be taken:
For higher temperatures: add 0.004 to the specific gravity for each 5°C (10°F).
For lower temperatures: deduct 0.004 from the specific gravity for each 5°C (10°F).
If the specific gravity is correct but the cooling system requires additional coolant, mix anti-freeze and water to the
correct proportions and to the correct volume, then add to the system. Examine for leaks from the radiator and
hoses and rectify as necessary.
If the check shows that the coolant contains less than the required anti-freeze content, proceed as follows:
1. Carefully examine the radiator and all hoses for leaks and security of hose clamps.
2. Remove the header tank pressure cap and drain the cooling system as instructed in the relevant service
manual.
3. Mix anti-freeze and water in the correct proportions and to the correct volume.
4. Close the drain plug and add the coolant until the level in the header tank is steady at ‘MAX’.
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE THE HEADER TANK PRESSURE CAP WHILE THE ENGINE IS HOT.
CAUTION: DO NOT use radiator anti-freeze solution in the windshield washer equipment or paint work will be
damaged.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Where fitted, remove the dipstick and check the engine oil level. If necessary, top up with the approved grade of
engine oil.
On vehicles with an electronic oil level and temperature sensor, check the engine oil level using the procedures
described in the applicable Workshop Manual.
ENGINE AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
If the vehicle is stored for 30 days or more, the engine and air conditioning system should be operated using the
following process:
Set the ignition to power mode 6

Ensure the air conditioning system is switched off
Start the engine and run for 1 minutes at idle
Raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM for 5 minutes
Return the engine speed to idle
Set the air conditioning temperature to 22° and the fan blower speed to 75% of the maximum blower speed
Switch on the air conditioning system
Ensure all the instrument panel air ducts are open
Run the air conditioning system for minimum of 5 continuous minutes with the engine at idle
TIRES
For storage purposes, tires on fitted wheels must be inflated to and maintained at a maximum pressure of 3.60 bar
(52 lbf/in2).
NOTE: Wheels must be rotated through 90 degrees in the forward direction monthly, to ensure that the tread is
rotated evenly during the storage period.
The spare wheel tire pressure must be maintained at the appropriate pressure specified in the Owners Handbook.
Tire condition should be inspected and defective tires replaced prior to removal from storage.
Guidance for Rotation of Tires
To ensure tires are rotated through a minimum of 90 degrees, apply a chalk mark on a front wheel tire wall at the
current centre contact point with the road surface. Move the car forwards until the chalk mark is at the horizontal
position. This process can be applied to a single car or to a row of vehicles and should ensure that all four wheels on
each vehicle is rotated by 90 degrees.
PARKING BRAKE
Vehicles with Manual Park Brake
The parking brake must NOT remain ‘on’ during storage.
After parking:
Manual transmission vehicles: select first or reverse gear and release the parking brake
Automatic transmission vehicles: select ‘P’ and release the parking brake.
Vehicles with Electric Park Brake (EPB)
For vehicles with EPB, the park brake will remain locked onto the brake disc during storage. Refer to the Workshop
Manual, General Procedures, Parking Brake and Actuation for EPB release procedure.
NOTE: For all vehicles with an Electronic Parking Brake (EPB), on manual transmission vehicles, first or reverse
gear must be selected before releasing the EPB. On automatic transmission vehicles 'Park' (P) must be selected
before releasing the EPB.
Where possible the EPB must not remain on during storage. If, for any reason, it is not possible to perform the
release procedure, the operation of the EPB must be checked/monitored monthly during the road wheel rotation
procedure.
AIR SUSPENSION (IF FITTED)
During storage the air suspension system should be left in the transit mode. No other checks are necessary during
storage for this system.
DOORS, WINDOWS AND VEHICLE INTERIOR
Doors, windows, bonnet, boot lid and fuel filler flap must be closed and locked to prevent water and moisture
ingress. A check should be done each month for any signs of water ingress into the cars interior and luggage
compartment. Any water ingress points should be rectified immediately.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Depending on the model, where possible move the wiper arms and blades away from the windshield and leave in the
extended position.
PAINTWORK
Paintwork can be damaged if the protective coating remains on the vehicle for an extended period of time. In
markets with high levels of ultraviolet light (tropical or semi-tropical conditions), the protective coating MUST be
removed after six months. For all other markets the protective coating MUST be removed after nine months.
If storage is subsequently continued, the vehicle must be kept under cover and should be washed regularly (at least
every month).
REMOVAL FROM STORAGE
PROCEDURES
Before removal from storage area, all fluid levels including coolant, hydraulic fluids and lubricating oils must be
checked and replenished where necessary. Where a substantial loss has occurred the cause must be traced prior to
moving the vehicle.
The New Vehicle Storage History Sheet must be checked and safety related faults rectified before the vehicle is
moved from the storage site. These checks are essential to ensure that the vehicle is safe to drive.
Tires must be adjusted to the pressures recommended in the relevant service manual or owners handbook.
Reconnect the battery negative terminal (when applicable).
Check the operation of the lighting and signalling equipment.
TRANSIT PROTECTION COATING (WHERE FITTED)

REMOVAL OF TRANSIT PROTECTION COATING
During storage, the protective coating will collect airborne dirt and grit. Great care must be taken when removing the
transit coating so that damage to the paint film and exterior trim is avoided.
Removal of the transit protection coating should be carried out in accordance with the procedure detailed in the Pre-
Delivery Inspection (PDI) information.
When the vehicle is dispatched from the storage area, remove the New Vehicle Storage History Sheet and file in the
vehicle records.
STORAGE HISTORY SHEET
STORAGE HISTORY SHEET (Continued)

Published: 07-Mar-2014
Vehicle Transportation Aids and Vehicle Storage - New Vehicle Storage
Form
Before carrying out any battery assessments. refer to the battery care requirements.
NOTE: If the vehicle has been started within the previous 24 hours the surface charge must be removed
prior to any battery assessment
This form is to be used to record the battery condition for vehicles and parts by the dealer / retailer prior to
handover to the customer. If the vehicle is kept in storage longer than 150 days, a new form must be started.
For AGM batteries Midtronics EXP 1080 / GR1 tester must be used.
Follow the instructions on the Midtronics EXP 1080 / GR1 tester to assess battery condition.
TESTER RESULTS ACTION

GOOD BATTERY Return to service.
GOOD RE-CHARGE Fully charge battery and return to service.
CHARGE AND RE-TEST Fully charge battery. Remove surface charge. Re-test battery. If same result replace
battery.
REPLACE BATTERY OR Verify surface charge removed. Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test. If result
BAD CELL BATTERY repeats after surface charge removal, replace battery. DO NOT RECHARGE.
UNABLE TO DO TEST Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test.
Voltage Date Signature

Vehicle Arrival
Initial battery voltage and date of reading Midtronics Code
taken
Battery Voltage
Recharge Details (if any)
Post Charge Voltage
30 days from initial battery reading Midtronics Code
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Pre Delivery Inspection (PDI) Midtronics Code
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Customer Handover The battery voltage MUST be 12.55 volts or
above
Please make sure that any transit relays are refitted and / or the vehicle is put into transportation mode if the
vehicle is stored
Transit relay removal / vehicle placed in normal mode should only be completed a maximum of 72 hours prior to
handover to customer
STORAGE HISTORY SHEET

MODEL: COLOR: ARRIVAL DATE:
KEY NUMBER:
VIN:
DOORS,
WINDOWS
PARKING AND
BRAKE - VEHICLE
OPERATIONS IDENTIFICATION INSPECTION COOLING SYSTEM ENGINE TIRES OFF INTERIOR
UPON . . . . . . .
RECEIPT
30 DAYS . . . . . . .
60 DAYS . . . . . . .
90 DAYS . . . . . . .
120 DAYS . . . . . . .
150 DAYS . . . . . . .
OPERATIONS WINDSHIELD PAINTWORK COMMENTS ON INSPECTORS
WIPER BLADES VEHICLE CONDITION SIGNATURE
AND DATE
UPON . . NOTE: RECORD ANY .
RECEIPT VEHICLE BODY DAMAGE
ON SILHOUETTES THAT
FOLLOW
30 DAYS . . . .
60 DAYS . . . .
90 DAYS . . . .
120 DAYS . . . .
150 DAYS . . . .
Pre-Delivery Inspection Manual - Preliminary
1. Transportation: Make sure that the vehicle has arrived with the transportation seals intact. Remove and
discard the transportation seals.
1.1 During production of the vehicle, a transportation relay is fitted to the battery positive terminal. This is to
minimize battery drain during vehicle storage and delivery. To start the vehicle when a transit relay is fitted,
press the hazard warning switch. This activates the transit relay to power-up and allow the engine to be started.
If the ignition is turned on but the engine is not started the vehicle will return to transport mode after 15
seconds. After parking the vehicle in a work bay, remove the keys.
1.2 Check the integrity of factory fitted door and tailgate closure seals. Should a seal be broken or missing,
make sure the tool kit and spare wheel are present. Also check that no internal damage to trim has occurred.
1.3 Remove door and tailgate closure seals.
1.4 Open bonnet for access.
2. Vehicle Transportation Relay: A transit relay is fitted to the battery. This allows the vehicle to be driven
when necessary, but isolates the vehicle during transit and storage to prevent the battery becoming discharged.
2.1 To remove the transit relay:
2.1.1 Disconnect the battery negative lead from the battery negative terminal.
2.1.2 Disconnect the electrical connector (1) from the transit relay. Secure the electrical connector to the
stowage position (2) provided on the main wiring harness.
2.1.3 Remove the bolt (3), that secures the battery positive cables to the top of the transit relay. Discard this
bolt.
2.1.4 Remove the two bolts (4), and (5), that secure the transit relay to the mega-fuse assembly (7). Discard
the transit relay (6).
2.1.5 Replace the bolts (4), and (5), to the mega-fuse (7). Make sure that all the positive leads removed from
the top of the transit relay (6), are reconnected to the top of the mega-fuse (7). Tighten the bolts finger tight at
this point.
2.1.6 Loosen the battery positive terminal pinch bolt (8), twist the mega-fuse clockwise until it stops hard
against the battery.
2.1.7 Torque the bolts (4), and (5), to 12 Nm (9 lb.ft).
2.1.8 Twist the mega-fuse back to the straight position, and torque the battery positive terminal pinch bolt (8),
to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft).
2.1.9 Reconnect the battery negative terminal, and torque to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft). Make sure this is carried out in one
clean connection, this will avoid creating electrical ‘spikes’ in the system.
2.1.10 After the transit relay has been removed and the battery re-connected, a Battery Monitor System (BMS),
reset will need to be carried out using SDD.
NOTE: Information regarding the BMS reset can be found in the Battery Care Manual on GTR.
CAUTIONS:
Damage to battery. The battery terminal posts have a rotational torque threshold of 9 Nm (6 lb.ft). Extreme
care MUST be observed when torquing the bolts (4), and (5), to 12 Nm (9 lb.ft).
Damage to equipment. Failure to remove the transit relay before carrying out the PDI checks may result in
damage to the SDD equipment.
Damage to vehicle. Do not disconnect the battery while the ignition is switched on:
Electrical modules will not be allowed to shut down correctly and will result in fault codes being stored
and spurious faults being induced.
Permanent damage to the instrument cluster may also result if the battery is disconnected with the
ignition switched on.
3. Battery Care Requirements
Make sure the correct standard of battery care is applied to the battery,
NOTES:
All equipment used must be functionally capable of meeting the compliance requirements.
The vehicle may need to be taken out of transit mode to carry out the preconditions.
3.1. Carry out the battery test process shown below.
It is recommended that this test is conducted at least 24 hours after the vehicle engine has been run or the
battery charged to avoid the need of surface charge removal. If time constraints make this unacceptable then
the surface charge must be removed.
Surface Charge Removal
A vehicle which has had its battery charged or been driven in a 24 hour period before the test, must have its
surface charge removed.
Turn on the ignition but do not start the vehicle

Switch on the headlamps on high beam for a minimum 3 minutes
Switch off the headlamps
Wait a minimum of 5 minutes before recording test results for any battery measurements
Battery Test
The battery may be tested either on a bench or on the vehicle.
The battery condition must be checked in accordance with the battery test process utilizing an appropriate tester
as outlined in the equipment section (Section 5)
NOTE: The midtronics code must be recorded on the form.
Any actions must be carried out in accordance with the table shown in the determining battery condition
section (Section 6)
. The details must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage Form which is part of the new vehicle storage
document.
For additional information, refer to: New Vehicle Storage Form (100-11 Vehicle Transportation Aids and Vehicle
Storage, Description and Operation).
CAUTION: DO NOT connect the tester to any other circuit or chassis point other than the battery negative
terminal.
3.2. If the battery is disconnected again after conducting the PDI, certain vehicle electrical systems that are
calibrated during the PDI will lose the calibration and will require resetting again once the battery is reconnected.
This may include the PDI application and Market configurations shown in section 11.
3.3. The battery must be tested to determine that the battery is in good condition, and there is sufficient charge
to carry out the PDI. Certain electrical systems require a precise voltage to operate correctly.
Check the battery positive terminal cable and BMS clamp pinch bolts are tightened to 6 Nm.
NOTE: It is imperative, to make sure correct vehicle functionality, that the battery terminal is pushed fully
home and is tightened to the specified torque figure.
Connect the Land Rover recommended battery tester to the battery.

Check and record on the PDI check sheet, the battery condition as indicated by the Land Rover
recommended battery tester.
NOTE: The voltage check must be carried out before connecting the diagnostic equipment. Failure to do this
may result in vehicle configuration failure.
3.4.Check security of battery carrier clamp and that it is tightened to a torque of 5 Nm (4 lb.ft).
4. Check/top-up the level in the windscreen washer reservoir. Top-up the reservoir using a mixture of an
approved windscreen washer fluid and water until the level is to the bottom of the gauze filter in the reservoir
filler neck.
5. Check/top-up all under-hood fluid levels. Investigate cause of any low level readings.
5.1 The engine must be switched off and allowed to stand for a period of at least 10 minutes for petrol engines,
and 20 minutes for diesel engines, before checking the oil level. Checking the oil level soon after the engine has
been run will provide a false low level reading, which may result in overfilling. To allow for the actual oil level to
be verified, a service mode exists to give access to live oil readings. In order to have a correct reading, the
following conditions must be met:
The vehicle MUST be parked on a level area of ground. The sensor installation is very sensitive to vehicle
tilt in the fore-aft direction: 0.5 degree vehicle tilt corresponds to an up to 0.5 liter measurement error.
The gear selector must be in the ‘PARK’ (P) position and the hood must be open.
A minimum time of 10 minutes for petrol engines, and 20 minutes for diesel engines, MUST be
allowed to pass after running the engine. This drain-down time is to allow the oil to return to the sump.
NOTE: If the Oil Level Display on the Message Center displays: ‘not available’, not enough time has elapsed
to allow the oil to drain back into the sump.
To access service mode, the following procedure should be followed:
1 With the ignition ‘ON’, engine not running, use the controls on the steering wheel, select on the Message
Center: Service Menu > Oil Level Display
2 Press the cruise control CANCEL button twice within 2 seconds.
3 The instrument pack display will revert back to the normal display in the trip computer.
4 Using the controls on the steering wheel, access the Oil Level Display again.
Messages to the right of the guage will advise of any action that may need to be taken. If the oil level is below
the required operating range, a message advising how much oil to add will be displayed; i.e., ‘Add 0.5 liters’. If
necessary, add the recommended quantity of oil then re-check the level.
CAUTION: Serious damage to the engine and components will result from overfilling engine with oil. When
filling the engine with oil, make sure any spilt oil is immediately cleaned from the engine, components or
bodywork.
5 With the ignition ‘ON’, engine not running, remove the oil filler cap.
NOTE: Petrol Engines: SAE 5W-20 meeting Land Rover specification WSS M2C925-A (Castrol SLX
Professional OE 5W-20).
Diesel Engines: SAE 5W-30 meeting Land Rover specification WSS M2C934-B (Castrol SLX Professional OE 5W-
20).
6 If the oil level is within the required operating range, the message ‘Level OK’ will be displayed.
7 If indicated by the Message Center oil level display, add the appropriate quantity of oil (as advised). Wait 5
minutes to let the oil level stabilise and re-check the level.
8 Clean up any oil spilt during the top-up process.
9 Install the oil filler cap.
CAUTION: The ignition must be left on during the top-up, so that the electronic dipstick can register and
display the new oil level. This enables an accurate level recheck.
NOTE: Investigate the cause of any low fluid levels.
5.2 Remove the auxiliary battery box cover. Check the fluid level in the brake/clutch fluid reservoir. The level
must be to the 'MAX' mark on the reservoir, top-up if necessary. Top-up the fluid level using Shell Donax YB
DOT4 ESL brake/ clutch fluid to the 'MAX' mark on the reservoir. Install the auxiliary battery box cover.

5.3 Check that the power steering fluid level is midway between the 'MAX' and 'MIN' marks on the fluid
reservoir, top-up if necessary. Top-up the fluid level using Texaco cold climate fluid 14315.
5.4 Check the coolant level in the expansion tank. With the engine cold, the coolant level must be to the upper
level of the cold fill range indicator mark, above the text on the side of the expansion tank. Ignore any coolant
5.5 Top-up the coolant to the upper level mark on the tank using a 50% mixture of water and Havoline
Extended Life Coolant (XLC) or any ethylene glycol based anti-freeze containing no methanol with only Organic
Acid Technology (OAT) corrosion inhibitors. Install the expansion tank filler cap, tighten the cap until the ratchet
is heard to 'click'.
NOTES:
Anti-freeze concentration MUST be maintained at 50%.
Investigate the cause of any low fluid levels.
5.6 Check/record the specific gravity of the coolant using a hydrometer. The specific gravity of the coolant at
20oC (68oF) must be 1.068:
Loosen the expansion tank filler cap to relieve pressure in the cooling system.
Tighten the expansion tank filler cap.
Remove the expansion tank bleed screw.
Extract enough coolant to enable the gravity to be checked.
Install the expansion tank bleed screw.
Top-up the coolant.
WARNING: Risk of injury. Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping steam or coolant, do
not remove, or loosen, the filler cap from the coolant expansion tank while the system is hot.
NOTE: A suitable hydrometer is available from the Equipment Program, Part Number FT 2030.
6. Make sure that the cold air deflector has been fitted on vehicles with the 3.0L supercharged engines, that
operate in severe cold markets: (Russia and Nordic countries).
6.1 The cold air deflector should be secured to both of the multi-stage thermostat (MST) hoses and visually flat
to the front of the engine. If necessary, push on the center of the deflector to firmly seat between both MST
hoses. Make sure the deflector is retained, and is flat to the front of the engine.
7. Connect the approved Land Rover battery power supply, then connect the Land Rover approved diagnostic
equipment to the vehicle diagnostic socket. Use the latest version of SDD available.
NOTE: To charge the battery, connect the positive booster cable to the positive terminal on the battery. The
negative booster cable MUST be connected to a suitable earth point on the vehicle. The earth point should be at
least 0.5 meters, (20 inches) away from the battery and as far away as possible from any fuel pipes, brake pipes
and moving parts.
CAUTION: Damage to vehicle. Failure to charge the battery in this manner will cause the BMS, to NOT
register the charge increase. This can cause certain systems to be inhibited during the first few days of driving
while the BMS recalibrates.
8. Using the diagnostic equipment, run the PDI application:
Switch the ignition ON.

Enter VIN and vehicle details into diagnostic equipment.
Select the correct model year.
Select ‘Vehicle Configuration’ icon.
Select ‘Special Applications’.
Select the ‘Pre-delivery Inspection’ Application.
Follow the on-screen instructions. This will take the vehicle out of transit mode, sets the Service Interval
Announcer (SIA), on petrol models ‘flight recorder’ data, and the EMS adaption values.
9. Using the diagnostic equipment, clear any fault codes:
Select ‘Diagnostic Trouble Code Monitor’ icon.

Confirm vehicle features.
Select ‘Diagnostic Trouble Code Monitor’ icon.
Select ‘Complete Vehicle’ to clear fault codes.
10. Check the doors, door locks and child safety locks for correct operation. Install the door lock cover.
10.1 Check operation of the internal ‘master lock’ and ‘unlock switch’ on the door pad.
10.2 Check the hood release and safety catch for correct operation.
10.3 Check the operation of every button on both the supplied key fobs, to make sure the expected functionality
is carried out as indicated by each buttons legend.
To check the Passive Entry system, perform the following additional tests:
Make sure both Smart Keys are taken at least 3 meters away from the vehicle.
Lock the vehicle by pressing the lock button on one of the Smart Keys. Make sure that the locking process
has been completed as evidenced by the door mirrors folding in.
Wait 5 seconds.
Take one Smart Key and bring it within close proximity (1 meter), of the drivers door, pull the door
handle and make sure the vehicle unlocks.
Close the drivers door and press the exterior lock button on the drivers door handle, whilst keeping the
Smart Key in close proximity of the drivers door.
Make sure the locking process has been completed as evidenced by the door mirrors folding in.
Remove the Smart Key to at least 3 meters from the vehicle.
Take the second Smart Key and bring it within close proximity (1 meter), of the drivers door, pull the
door handle and make sure the vehicle unlocks.
Enter the vehicle, place the first Smart Key on the center console and press both the start button and the
brake pedal simultaneously. Repeat this process for the second Smart Key.
If the vehicle starts with both Smart Keys, the Passive Entry and both Smart Keys are operating correctly.
10.4 Check for correct operation of the vehicle alarm system:
Make sure all doors, windows and sunroofs are closed.

Press the lock button on the Smart Key once. This will ‘superlock’ the vehicle (interior and exterior vehicle
protection). Check that the indicator triple flashes for 10 seconds then continues to single flash.
Press the unlock button and make sure the alarm has been disarmed.
Press the lock button twice within three seconds. This will activate the perimetric alarm but NOT the
interior space protection.
Check that the indicator double flashes for 10 seconds, then continues to single flash.
Press the unlock button and make sure the alarm has been disarmed.
NOTE: To carry out this procedure in the correct manner the battery charger should be removed.
Pre-Delivery Inspection Manual - Vehicle Interior
NOTE: The battery charger should be reconnected whilst carring out the sections 11- 23 of this PDI manual.
To charge the battery, connect the positive booster cable to the positive terminal on the battery. The negative
booster cable MUST be connected to a suitable earth point on the vehicle. The earth point should be at least 0.5
meters, (20 inches) away from the battery and as far away as possible from any fuel pipes, brake pipes and
moving parts.
CAUTION: Damage to vehicle. Failure to charge the battery in this manner will cause the BMS, to NOT
register the charge increase. This can cause certain systems to be inhibited during the first few days of driving
while the BMS recalibrates.
11. Touchscreen Audio System: Using the Touch Screen Display (TSD), set the clock, date, voice language
and the Satellite Navigation, specific to the Market unless otherwise instructed on the Customer Configurations
Sheet.
11.1 Clock Setting - With the vehicle ignition system switched on in convenience mode and the TSD switched
on, select the HOME MENU by pressing the hard button on the left side of the audio controls:
1. Touch the Audio settings soft-button.

2. At the settings menu, touch the Clock adjust soft-button.
3. Touch the arrow up or arrow down softbuttons to adjust the hours or minutes.
4. Touch the 12/24 soft-buttons to set the hours for the 12 or 24 hour clock display. With the 12 hour
display selected, am/pm is also displayed as appropriate.
5. Touch the Set soft-button to confirm the clock settings.
6. Return to the Home menu screen by touching the arrow soft-button at the top left of the screen, or
press the HOME MENU hard-button on the audio controls.
NOTE: The displayed clock time will not be set and displayed correctly until the Set soft-button is touched.
If the Set soft-button is not touched the clock will not be reset on exiting the Clock adjust screen.
11.2 Date Setting - With the vehicle ignition system switched on in convenience mode and the TSD switched

2. At the settings menu, touch the Clock adjust soft-button.
3. Touch the Date soft-button then touch the arrow up or arrow down soft-buttons to adjust the days or
months.
4. Touch the dd/mm or mm/dd soft-buttons to set the date format setting.
5. Touch Set to confirm the date settings.
NOTE: The displayed date will not be set and displayed correctly until the Set soft-button is touched. If the
Set soft-button is not touched the date will not be reset on exiting the Clock Adjust screen.
11.3 Language Setting - With the vehicle ignition system switched on in convenience mode and the TSD
switched on, select the HOME MENU by pressing the hard button on the left side of the audio controls:
2. At the settings menu, touch the Language softbutton. Select and change the specified language on the
customer configurations sheet.
3. Set the voice language (if option is available).
4. Set the system voice feedback, Male or Female (if option is available).
12. Navigation system - Check the Navigation screen, make sure that the correct country map has been
uploaded onto the Navigation hard drive. To set the Naviagtion search area the following must be done:
Select ‘Navigation’.
Select ‘Enter destination’.
Select ‘More’.
Select ‘Search area’.
Then select the local country or state specific to the Market unless otherwise instructed on the Customer
Configurations Sheet.
13. Bluetooth® - Using a Bluetooth® capable phone:
1 Switch the ignition ON and make sure that the Touch Screen is active.
2 From the Home menu, select Phone.
3 A menu will appear. If no phone is connected, select Search new, otherwise select Change phone and then
select Search new.
NOTE: There are two ways of pairing the Bluetooth® device and the vehicle. Detailed below is pairing to
the vehicle, the other method is using the vehicle 'Vehicle to device' to pair to the device. If you use the 'Vehicle
to device' method, follow the instructions on screen. Select Device to vehicle option. The vehicles Bluetooth®
system is discoverable for only 3 minutes.
5 Using the mobile phone, search for Bluetooth® devices. On some phones, this is referred to as new paired
device. See your phone’s operating instructions for further information.
6 When the vehicle’s Bluetooth® system is discovered, begin the pairing process and follow the on-screen
instructions.
7 When requested, enter the Land Rover Bluetooth® access pin (2121) into the phone and vehicle system.
8 Once your phone is paired it may automatically connect to the vehicle system. If not, use the device list shown
on the touch screen or use the mobile phone.
NOTE: Make sure that the device is enabled for Bluetooth®
When the customer configures a Bluetooth® phone, this will overwrite the last configured phone.
14. Rear Seat Entertainment - The Rear Seat Entertainment headphones will be in the transit items bag and
the Touchscreen Remote Control (TsRC) will be in the docking station. The following MUST be carried out:
Fit the AAA batteries to both sets of headphones. Each set of headphones requires 2 AAA batteries.
Place the headphones in the rear door cards - one in each side.
Fit and connect the TsRC battery into the remote by removing the rear battery cover, and connecting the
battery.
Replace and re-secure the battery cover. Put the 2 black rubber bung screw head covers supplied directly
over the screw heads on the battery cover.
Dock the TsRC unit back into the docking station, observe until at least 2 charge segments are
illuminated.
NOTE: The TsRC is docked by locating its bottom edge onto the locating pins in the docking station, then
pushing down on the ‘raised blip’ on the top centre of the TsRC. A positive lock will be denoted by a ‘click’ from
the TsRC and docking connector.
15. Satellite navigation
If prompted, insert the Navigation SD card into the Navigation unit.

For additional information, refer to: SD Memory Card (101-01 Pre-Delivery Inspection Manual, Removal and
Installation).
Place the SD card instructions into the literature pack.
Check operation of the system:
Driving the vehicle will automatically establish global position.

If global position has not been established, the navigation screen will display a ‘GPS’ icon with a line
through it. Make sure no obstructions, such as tall buildings or trees, are close-by.
16. Set the Radio and DAB, specific to the Market unless otherwise instructed on the Customer Configurations
Sheet.
17. Radio system - With the vehicle ignition system switched on in convenience mode and the TSD switched

2. At the Radio menu, set 6 radio stations for each wavelength as specified on the customer configuration
sheet. Touch the Radio (1) soft button to select a waveband.
3. Short touch the Auto Seek soft-button (3) to search for the next chosen radio station (Shown in the
display (2).
4. Touch and hold the Preset soft button (4) to store the current station on the chosen preset (the radio will
mute while the station is stored then beep to confirm).
5. Repeat these steps until all wavelengths have 6 preset radio stations.
6. Touch the Settings soft-button (5) to activate/ deactivate the RDS, Traffic, News, AF and Reg functions;
according to the Market unless otherwise specified on the 'New Vehicle Configurations Options' sheet.
7. Return to the Home menu screen by pressing the arrow soft-button at the top left of the screen, or,
CAUTION: Due to radio reception constrains, it may be necessary to set the radio presets outside of the
workshop.
18. DAB Radio system - With the vehicle ignition system switched on in convenience mode and the TSD
switched on, select the HOME MENU by pressing the hard button on the left side of the audio controls:

2. At the DAB Radio menu, set 6 radio stations for each DAB band (DAB 1, 2, or 3) as specified on the
customer configuration sheet. Touch the DAB Radio (1) soft button to select a DAB band.
3. Short touch the Auto Seek soft-button (3) to search for the next chosen DAB radio station (Shown in the
display (2)).
4. Touch and hold the Preset soft button (4) to store the current station on the chosen preset (the DAB
radio will mute while the station is stored).
5. Repeat these steps until all DAB bands have 6 preset radio stations.
6. Touch the Settings soft-button (5) to activate/ deactivate the FM Traffic, Announcements, Link DAB (auto
search when signal strength drops), DAB format (DAB regions) and DAB country functions; according to
the Market unless otherwise specified on the 'New Vehicle Configurations Options' sheet.
7. Return to the Home menu screen by pressing the arrow soft-button at the top left of the screen, or,
CAUTION: Due to radio reception constrains, it may be necessary to set the radio presets outside of the
workshop.
19. For vehicles with the Standard Audio System: To set/change the time and date, turn ON the audio
system using the ON/OFF button (2).
20. Time:
Using the navigation up and down arrow buttons (3), navigate to ‘Clock’ on the menu display (1).
Navigate to Set Time to set the time.
Use the navigation buttons to increase or decrease the hours and minutes. Once the correct time has
been set, press the ‘OK’ button (4), to confirm.
Navigate to the ‘24h Mode’ to select the time format, press the ‘OK’ button (4), to confirm the change.
21. Date:
Using the navigation up and down arrow buttons (3), navigate to ‘Clock’ on the menu display (1).
Navigate to Set Date to set the date.
Use the navigation buttons to increase or decrease the year, month and date. Once the correct date has
been set, press the ‘OK’ button (4), to confirm.
Navigate to ‘Set Date Format’ to select the date format, press the ‘OK’ button (4), to confirm the change.
22. For vehicles with the Standard Audio System: The radio seek up/down buttons (3) or (4), are used to
search for radio stations, and these can be stored as pre-sets.
Select a waveband (1) and briefly press one of the seek buttons (3) or (4). The search will stop at the
first radio station it finds in the direction chosen.
Save the radio stations as pre-sets by holding down a numbered button (2),for approximately three
seconds. After a short delay the station name will be displayed at that pre-set location.
Manual tuning can be done if necessary by holding the seek up/down button (3) or (4), for more than 4
seconds. Manual tuning mode exits after a 10 second timeout period.
Repeat this process for all the pre-set radio stations.
23. If requested on the ‘New Vehicles Configurations Options’ sheet, place the iPod™ lead into the glovebox.
24. The automatic headlamp system has an additional feature called HBA (High Beam Assist). The ‘Hand of
Traffic’ must be set in the Message Center and the feature enabled to make sure of correct operation of the
system. To set the HBA the following steps must be followed in order:
With the ignition ‘ON’, engine not running, use the controls on the steering wheel to select on the
instrument cluster menu:
Main Menu > Vehicle Set-up > High Beam Assist.
Configure the ‘Hand of Traffic’ setting by selecting the appropriate Drive on Left (of road) or Drive on
Right (of road) to Market condition.
‘Enable’ the feature by setting Activate Assist.
Carry out a visual check to make sure that there are no stickers, or labels, directly in view of the HBA
camera sensor.
NOTE: The HBA feature can be enabled (or disabled) by selecting (or de-selecting) Activate Assist.
Enabling or disabling HBA will not affect previous ‘Hand of Traffic’ settings.
25. Reset the oil level indicator. To reset the oil level indicator the following steps must be followed in order:
With the ignition ‘ON’, engine not running, use the controls on the steering wheel to select on the
instrument cluster menu: Service Menu > Oil Level Display.
Press the cruise control CANCEL button twice within 2 seconds.
The instrument pack display will revert to the normal display in the trip computer.
Using the controls on the steering wheel, access the Oil Level Display again.
Press and hold the cruise control CANCEL button for 10 seconds to reset the oil level indicator.
The trip menu display will revert to the normal display mode on the Message Center.
Turn the ignition OFF.
26. Emergency Park Release System.
In the event of a vehicle transmission failure, a mechanical means of selecting neutral is now available.
An Emergency Park Release (EPR) provides this functionality.
In an emergency, the EPR hand lever can be operated to release the park pawl within the transmission.
The park pawl will not be allowed to re-engage until the hand lever is locked down in the closed position.
The EPR lever is exposed while in transit. Actuation of the EPR requires the operator to be seated in the
driver’s seat with the foot brake applied. Turn the locking device 90 degrees anti-clockwise and lift using
the pull strap.
Ensure that the EPR lever locking device is locked down securely, then fit the finisher panel and cup
holders. The cup holders are despatched in the glovebox.
27. Remove battery charger: Disconnect the approved battery charger/power supply from the vehicle.
28. Make sure that the interior of the vehicle is undamaged. Refer to the Cosmetic Standards Manual on
Topix.
Pre-Delivery Inspection Manual - Vehicle Exterior
29. Check operation of fuel flap and lock.
30. Inspect the road wheels and tires for damage. Check the wheel retaining nuts for correct torque, 140 Nm (103
lb.ft).
31. The vehicle is delivered with the tire pressures set higher than the normal operating pressures. Set the tire
pressures to 2.0 bar (29psi) for the road test.
CAUTION: When the tire pressures are reduced from the high transit / storage pressure to the road test
pressures, the final pressure will rise. The initial high drop in pressure from transit / storage pressure to normal
pressure will cause the tire pressure to rise after 2 minutes, giving incorrect tire pressures by up to 0.4 bar (6psi).
Initially drop each tire pressure to approximately 0.1-0.3 bar (2-4psi) below the recommended pressure and then
inflate the tires to the desired pressure.
CAUTION: If the vehicle is returned to storage after the PDI, the tire pressures must be raised to
3.60 bar (52psi).
32. Remove all internal and external transit protection. Stow the rear outer seat belts in the stowage clips.
33. Check that the vehicle exterior is clean and undamaged. Refer to the ‘Cosmetics Standards Manual’ on TOPIx, for
further details.
34. Apply lubricant to the door seals on vehicles that operate in severe cold markets: (Russia and Nordic
countries).
Front door seals
34.1 Vehicles operated in severe cold markets (Russia and Nordic countries): Apply the Carboflo pen, Land
Rover Part No. CYK500010 to the primary and secondary front door seals as illustrated above.
Rear door seals

34.2 Vehicles operated in severe cold markets (Russia and Nordic countries): Apply the Carboflo pen, Land
Rover Part No. CYK500010 to the primary and secondary rear door seals as illustrated above
Pre-Delivery Inspection Manual - Road Test
NOTE: Before driving the vehicle, check the operation of:
Lights, indicators, wipers, wash/wipe and hazard warning.

Seats and seat belts.
Fascia switches.
Electric park brake.
35. Make sure that the automatic transmission starter isolator, operates in all gears with the exception of 'P' -
Park and 'N' - Neutral.
36. Check for the correct operation of all the driver controls and systems. Including the Terrain Response
indicators, wheel direction/ differential locking indicators and the low tire pressure monitoring system, if fitted.
36.1 Start vehicle and check operation of:
CAUTION: Make sure the climate control is set in the off position.
Starter/Inhibitor switch.
Electric mirrors, including power fold.
36.2 During the road test, make sure the transfer box range change functionality is tested by using the following
method.
With engine running and parking brake applied, select neutral on automatic gearbox.
Request range change for low gear with switch - wait until change is complete.
Request range change into high gear with switch - wait until change is complete.
Repeat 5 times.
Make sure high range is left selected.
36.3 Make sure the correct operation of the shift interlock (where applicable).
CAUTION: Risk of injury. Apply the parking brake, chock the wheels and make sure that all personnel are
clear of the vehicle before carrying out the above procedure.
36.4 Check the electric windows for correct operation. Open and close all the windows fully. Check that the rear
window isolation switch is operational.
36.5 If the battery is disconnected, becomes discharged or the power supply is interrupted, the one-touch
‘window up’ operation is disabled until the window position is reset.
To reset the window position:
Close the window fully.

Release the switch, the pull up and hold for one second.
Repeat the procedure on each window.
36.6 Check the sunroof for correct operation. Make sure both sunroof open/close and sunroof tilt are fully
operational.
36.7 Check operation of the air conditioning (A/C) system.
When the vehicle is at operating temperature, set the heater control to 22ºC and run the fan speed at
75%.
Switch on the A/C system and run for 5 minutes.
36.8 Check for correct operation of the cruise control or adaptive cruise control (ACC) system.
WARNING: Damage to vehicle. Adaptive cruise control is not a collision warning or avoidance system.
Risk of injury. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all
times.
Only use cruise control when conditions are favourable, e.g. on straight, dry, open roads with light traffic.
36.9 The cruise control and ACC system are operated by switches mounted on the steering wheel. The driver
can also intervene at any time by use of the brake or accelerator pedals. The Forward Alert function can be
manually turned on or off in the Message Centre. Using the Message Centre steering wheel controls select:
Vehicle Set-up and then Forward Alert from the menu; using the OK button will turn the function on or off.
36.10 Controls - all cruise control switches are located on the steering wheel switch-pack:
1. SET + : Set the speed (+) or increase.

2. SET - : Set the speed (-) or decrease.
3. GAP: Gap decrease (ACC only).
4. GAP: Gap increase (ACC only).
5. RESUME: Resume set speed.
6. CANCEL: Cancels without erasing memorised speed.
36.11 Setting a speed:
Accelerate as normal until required speed is reached.

Press the ‘SET’ button (1). The vehicle speed will be stored in the memory and cruise control should be
engaged.
The message centre will display the selected speed - ‘SETSPEED 80KM/H 50MPH’.
36.12 Checking the ACC gap: After the ignition is switched on a default gap will be automatically selected
(setting No 3). There are 4 gaps available to select.
After selecting cruise control, check that the vehicle slows when a vehicle ahead is detected by the
system.
WARNING: If the adaptive cruise control system predicts that its maximum braking level will not be
sufficient, then an audible warning will sound while the system continues to brake. ‘DRIVER INTERVENE’ will also
be displayed on the message centre.
When a vehicle ahead is detected the vehicle will be in ‘follow mode’.
WARNING: When in ‘follow mode’ the vehicle will not decelerate automatically to a stop, nor will the vehicle
always decelerate quickly enough to avoid a collision without driver intervention.
Check that when in ‘follow mode’ a warning light in the instrument pack is illuminated and the message
centre displays ‘CRUISE GAP’.
36.13 Altering the cruise gap to the vehicle ahead:
Press, the top part of the switch (3) to decrease the gap, and the bottom part of the switch (4) to
increase the gap.
Check ‘follow mode’ functions correctly.
36.14 Check the operation of the ‘Forward Alert’ system. Make sure that the ACC system is disengaged: this will
allow the GAP buttons to be used to adjust the Forward Alert.
Switch on ‘Forward Alert’
Set the ‘Forward Alert’ gap.

Using the GAP increase button (4), on the steering wheel switch-pack, select the largest gap available.
Check that when a vehicle is detected close ahead, an audible warning sounds and the message centre displays:
‘FORWARD ALERT’.
This is easiest to achieve by following a lead vehicle as it slows down.
WARNING: The ‘Forward Alert’ system DOES NOT provide vehicle braking.
NOTE: The ‘Forward Alert’ system provides warnings if a vehicle is detected close ahead.
36.15 Set the ‘Forward Alert’ gap:
Using the GAP decrease button (3), on the steering wheel switch-pack, select the smallest gap available.
36.16 Switch OFF the Forward Alert system so that the customer receives the vehicle set in this condition.
37. Check for any unusual noises from the power train, suspension or braking systems.
38. Check for any squeaks or rattles from the vehicle interior.
39. Check the operation of the satellite navigation system (if fitted).
Pre-Delivery Inspection Manual - Quality Assurance Checks
40. On completion of road test:
Position the vehicle on lift.

Raise the vehicle on lift.
Visually check beneath the vehicle for leaks from the powertrain components.
Lower the vehicle.
41. Install the front towing eye cover, secure with the 4 toggle fasteners. Install the rear towing eye cover, tighten
the fixings.
42. Reconnect the approved Land Rover battery power supply and IDS, use SDD to read fault codes, rectify any
logged faults.
43. Check the register of Service Action Bulletins - make sure a fault free delivery to the customer.
44. If fault lamp(s) are illuminated, interrogate that system using IDS, report findings and clear faults.
44.1Disconnect IDS and the approved Land Rover battery power supply.
45. Retain copy of this schedule in the Customer/ Vehicle History file.
46. Make sure the vehicle details are included in the Service Portfolio and endorse with the dealer stamp.
47. Record locking wheel nut code and place in Customer/Vehicle History file, (If applicable).
48. Record the Bluetooth code and place in Customer/Vehicle History file, (If applicable).
49. Make sure vehicle literature pack and security item contents are correct.
50. Place vehicle literature pack, mats and security items in the vehicle, (If applicable).
51. Make sure the tire pressures are set to the correct pressure.
51.1 For vehicles that will be delivered to the customer: Set all tire pressures (including spare) with the tires
cold to the recommended tire pressures for 'normal' conditions (up to 100mph [160kph]). The recommended tire
pressures are provided on a label attached to the 'B' pillar.
51.2 For vehicles being returned to storage: Set all tire pressures with the tires cold to 3.6 bar (52psi).
52. Valet vehicle prior to customer release.
53. Attach correct type approval labels to the handsets (where applicable).
NOTE: A vehicle must not be left without a transportation switch/relay installed for longer than two days, prior
to customer handover.
If the transit relay has been refitted prior to release to customer; step 2 will need to be repeated, to remove the
transit relay. Step 9 will need to be repeated, using the necessary diagnostic equipment, to clear DTC's.
Pre-Delivery Inspection Manual - SD Memory Card
Removal
1.
2. Position the LH front seat fully forwards.
Installation
1.
Showroom Preparation - Showroom Preparation
NOTE: The information given in this document is subject to change for different model years.
Prior to the vehicle being placed into the showroom, the following components must be removed.
Function Fuse Rating Location

Starter motor (All variants) 14E 40amp Engine junction box (EJB)
Horn FE31 15amp EJB
Wipers 29E 30amp EJB
Washers 43P & 38P 15amp Central junction box (CJB)
Power washers 7E 30amp EJB
Exterior Body & Paint Pre-Delivery Inspection (PDI) Standards -
Introduction
General
This document describes the processes and methodology that must be applied to carry out a quality inspection of
the exterior body and paint on all Jaguar and Land Rover vehicles, except Defender, at Pre-Delivery Inspection
(PDI). This quality inspection is required to determine if there are any defects (hereafter called exceptions)
affecting the exterior finish of the vehicle. These exceptions can be attributed to factory related defects in
materials or workmanship, damage in transit or damage in storage.
Defining exterior body and paint related exceptions requires a high level of technical expertise. This manual has
been compiled so that an inspector can determine if an exception should be repaired or noted as
Commercially/Customer Acceptable (CA).
Cosmetic Acceptance Standards
General
This section defines the paint and body acceptance standards for each of the exterior surface zones.
For additional information, refer to: Exterior Surface Zone Identification (101-03 Exterior Body & Paint Pre-
Delivery Inspection (PDI) Standards, Description and Operation).
A Zone - Medium to High Visibility
Paint
Scratches
Characteristic PDI
Scratch Not Down To Primer (Light Surface
Scratch In Top Layer - Not Through To Color
Coat)
1 scratch greater than 20mm length Not permissible
Cluster of scratches - more than 2 in an area of Not permissible
10x10cm
Up to 2 scratches less than 20mm length Acceptable if not easily visible from 1m viewing distance.
Up to 2 per panel not greater than 20mm length
Scratch Down To Primer (Color Coat Visible)
Any scratch where primer is visible Unacceptable
Chips
Characteristic PDI
Chip Not Down To Bare Metal But Primer (Color Coat Visible)
Any chip where primer is visible Not permissible
Dirt In Paint
NOTE: * Pieces of dirt that are less than 1mm in diameter that give a distinct tactile feedback should be
classed as a repair.
Characteristic PDI
Dirt Has same Color As Body Color
2 or more small pieces of dirt less than 1mm, and less than 250mm apart Unacceptable
1 or more pieces of dirt more than 1mm* Unacceptable
Faint exceptions which are 250mm or greater apart. Exceptions must be 1mm or less diameter Acceptable
and not exceed four on any one panel
Flatting Marks
Characteristic PDI
If easily visible from 1m viewing distance Not permissible
If not easily visible from 1m viewing distance Acceptable
Polishing Marks
Characteristic PDI
Polishing Compound
Characteristic PDI
Not permissible
Overspray - Color
Characteristic PDI
Not permissible
Overspray - Clear Coat
Characteristic PDI
Not permissible
Craters
Characteristic PDI
Not permissible
Runs and Sags
Characteristic PDI
Not permissible
Color Mismatch
Characteristic PDI
Not permissible
Flaking/Peeling
Characteristic PDI
Not permissible
Poor Color/Poor Coverage/Thin Paint/Shady
Characteristic PDI
Not permissible
Body
Dent
Characteristic PDI
Not permissible
Ding
Characteristic PDI
Not permissible
Panel Profile, Gaps and Flushness
Characteristic PDI
Under/over profile or flushness not greater than 1mm Acceptable
Tapered gaps not greater than 1mm over a length of 1m Acceptable
B Zone - Low to Hidden Visibility
Paint
Scratches
Characteristic PDI
Scratch Not Down To Primer (Light Surface Scratch In Top Layer - Not Through To
Color Coat)
4 or more scratches greater than 60mm length Not
permissible
Cluster of scratches - more than 2 greater than 60mm length in an area of 100cm² (10x10cm) Not
permissible
Up to 3 scratches less than 60mm length Acceptable
Scratch Down To Primer (Color Coat Visible)
Any scratch where primer is visible Unacceptable
Chips
Characteristic PDI
Chip Not Down To Bare Metal But Primer (Color Coat Visible)
Any chip where primer is visible Unacceptable
Dirt In Paint
Characteristic PDI
Dirt Has same Color As Body Color
1 or more large pieces of dirt 2mm to 4mm (diameter or length) Unacceptable
6 or more small pieces of dirt 1 to 2mm Unacceptable
High accumulation of clearly visible pieces of dirt less than 1mm in a square of 25cm² (5cm x Unacceptable
5cm)
Less than 5 small pieces of dirt 1 to 2mm in diameter more than 50mm apart Acceptable
Flatting Marks
Characteristic PDI
Any flatting mark greater than 50mm² and not more than three in a 250mm radius. If easily visible Not
from 1m viewing distance permissible
Any flatting mark not greater than 50mm² and not more than three in a 250mm radius. If not easily Acceptable
visible from 1m viewing distance
Polishing Marks
Characteristic PDI
Any polishing mark greater than 50mm² and not more than three in a 250mm radius. If easily Not
visible from 1m viewing distance permissible
Any polishing mark not greater than 50mm² and not more than three in a 250mm radius. If not Acceptable
easily visible from 1m viewing distance
Polishing Compound
Characteristic PDI
Not permissible
Overspray - Color
Characteristic PDI
Not permissible
Overspray - Clear Coat
Characteristic PDI
Not permissible
Craters
Characteristic PDI
Any craters, not greater than 250mm apart, greater than 1.5mm in diameter and more than three Not
in any panel permissible
Any craters, greater than 250mm apart, not greater than 1.5mm in diameter and not more than Acceptable
three in any panel
Runs and Sags
Characteristic PDI
A single run or sag more than 4mm long or wide Not permissible
A single run or sag not more than 4mm long or wide Acceptable
Color Mismatch
Characteristic PDI
Not permissible
Flaking/Peeling
Characteristic PDI
Not permissible
Poor Color/Poor Coverage/Thin Paint/Shady
Characteristic PDI
Body
Dent
Characteristic PDI
Not permissible
Ding
Characteristic PDI
Not permissible
Panel Profile, Gaps and Flushness
Characteristic PDI
Under/over profile or flushness not greater than 1.5mm Acceptable
Tapered gaps not greater than 1.5mm over a length of 1m Acceptable
Exterior Body & Paint Pre-Delivery Inspection (PDI) Standards - Exterior
Surface Zone Identification
A = Medium to High visibility; B = Low to Hidden visibility

Exterior Body & Paint Pre-Delivery Inspection (PDI) Standards - Paint
Exceptions And Associated Repair Procedures
Fine Blistering
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Micro-blisters, pimples, bubbles, pop-ups and snail trails.
Description
Fine blisters are from 0.5 to 1.0 mm (0.020 to 0.040 in.) in diameter and may appear in patches or cover large
areas. Their disposition may resemble a ring formation, an irregular, wandering snail-like trail, or be presented
in an unmistakable fingerprint outline.
Blisters may contain water and close inspection will reveal whether they are in the clear coat, color coats,
intermediate coats or penetrate to bare metal. Color coat blisters are often very thin and more prominent than
the flatter, larger to metal or to primer blisters. Recognition of depth or source is aided by breaking with a pin
and viewing with a low-power magnifying lens.
Warranty Related Cause
Fault(s) in vehicle manufacturer's or Original Equipment Manufacturer's (OEM) paint finish process or off-
line repair process.
Non-warranty Related Cause(s)
External contamination (for example: bird droppings, industrial fall-out, etc.)

Contamination of the painted surfaces by airborne contaminates.
Rectification Process
1. Determine if exception is permissible or not permissible.

For additional information, refer to: Cosmetic Acceptance Standards (101-03 Exterior Body & Paint Pre-
2. Permissible exception does not require a repair so should be passed as CA.
3. Repair not permissible exceptions as follows:
- Fine blisters in clear coat only: Polish or flat and polish to remove concern.
- Fine blisters extending down into color base coat, primer coats or bare metal: Flat to remove
concern then re-paint as required.
Blowing
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Bubbles and bridging.

Description
Large air bubbles or blisters formed by detachment of the surface paint film. This exception is generally
associated with the application of paint across sealed seams, boxed-in corner panels, plastic substrates or where
bridging has occurred.
Surface contamination on bare metal panel or solvent retention in sealant prior to paint application.
None.

3. Repair any not permissible exceptions by flatting, to remove blow/bubble down to the substrate, then re-
painting as required.
Chipped Paint/Scratches
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Stone-bruising.
Description
Broken surface finish of varying size and shape. Extent and severity will depend upon cause.
Damage caused during manufacturing build process or in factory transit.

Only considered to be warranty when found on door or other opening panel edges where transit labels are
intact.
Vehicle transit damage.

Damage resulting from inadequate security of vehicle during transit or storage.
Accidental damage during vehicle movement at Port of Entry.

3. Repair any not permissible exceptions as follows:
- Most exceptions can be repaired using a brush touch up then polish.
- For exceptions in high visibility areas, flat to remove evidence of exception and re-paint as
required.
Cissing
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Fish eyes, craters, pits, saucering, crackling and poor wetting.
Description
Cissing is identified by the presence of small crater-like depressions in the paint finish, which may vary in size
and depth according to cause, from individual craters of pin-hole size in densely packed groups to isolated
craters of up to 10 mm (0.4 in.) in diameter.
Craters will often reveal small impurities at base when inspected with a low-powered lens. The exception may be
uniform and densely arrayed but in most cases occurs as individual fish eye type craters.
Faults in vehicle manufacturer's original paint finish.
None.

3. Repair any not permissible exceptions by flatting, to remove evidence of crater and any residual
contaminate, then re-paint as required.
Contamination
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Rust specks, industrial fallout, cement dust, airborne contamination,
spotting, spots, specks and splashes.
Description
Any foreign substance or chemicals which adhere to the surface or become embedded in the paint by chemical
action. Excessive exposure to unfavorable atmospheric conditions. Contamination may appear as spots, speckles
or splash-like deposits, this is often associated with stains, especially on metallic paint films.
Industrial Fallout/Acid Spotting/Rust Specks:
Airborne particles from industrial activities can contaminate paint film surfaces and may consist of various
deposits. The paint surface is usually dusted with particles, tiny colored spots, minute stains, greasy or tacky
spots and feels 'gritty'. When closely examined with a low-powered magnifying lens the particles may be seen
embedded into or adhering to the paint, possibly with a stain surrounding it or rust, if it is ferrous, from the
particle.
Cement Deposit/Dust
Easily recognizable by the deposit. Severe staining in the form of spots or streaks will result if the deposits are
allowed to remain on the paint film.
Leaves/Berries
Wet leaves, tree sap and resins allowed to remain on the paint film and exposed to strong sunlight will cause
discoloration and staining of the surface. Berries or fruits will stain paints if they are allowed to decompose on
the paint film.
Salt Deposits
Salt deposits from handling, water or other fluids allowed to remain on the paint surface can result in
detachment of the paint film from the underlying surface.
Not normally an exception arising from manufacturing process. This is not normally a warranty related
exception, but should this exception be apparent at PDI report the exception through EPQR.
Poor storage of new vehicles.

Failure to refinish vehicles properly.
Refinished surfaces subjected to careless handling.
Defective oven or drying room.
Prevention
Store vehicles as detailed in the New Vehicle Storage Manual.

Do not expose soft paint finishes to atmospheres likely to cause contamination
1. Wash with a mild detergent solution.

2. Rinse with a 10% oxalic acid solution.
3. Remove any remaining stains by polishing, or by light compounding and polishing.
Dirt/Dust On Basecoat
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Seediness, nibs, spikes, bits, specks, grains and dirt inclusions.
Description
Particles embedded below the clear coat at the surface of the basecoat color or in the basecoat become
magnified or exaggerated. If the exception appears to be extensive, close examination will reveal whether it is
dirt or dry-sprayed basecoat particles that have been re-dissolved into the clear coat resulting in a spiky effect.
Condition arising during manufacture.
None.

3. Repair any not permissible exceptions by flatting and polishing, or flatting and re-painting.
Dirt In Clear Coat
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Grittiness, seediness, specks, nibs and dirt inclusions.
Description
Dirt embedded in the surface of the clear coat.
None.

3. Repair any not permissible exceptions by polishing, or flatting and polishing. If more than 50% of the
clear coat film thickness has to be removed to clear the exception, re-paint the clear coat as required.
Dirt Under Basecoat
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Dirt nibs, nibs, knobs, hills, lumps, coarse blisters, bumps and basecoat
imperfections.
Description
Dirt under basecoat is often mistaken as blisters: the effect is similar, appearing as hard lumps or bumps in the
finish. The exception will not deteriorate neither will it result in film failure. The contamination is of no defined
size. The exception is hard and will not give way when probed with a blunt object or fingernail, unlike soft
blisters.
None.

3. Repair any not permissible exceptions by polishing, or flatting and polishing. If dirt/inclusions are showing
through the base color coat, re-paint as required.
Dull Finish/Abnormal Loss Of Gloss
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: dulling back, poor gloss, deadening, hazing, loss of gloss and low gloss.
Description
This exception relates to a paint surface which is smooth and evenly applied but lacks reflective ability. Unlike
dry spray the surface will not be roughened. Close inspection may reveal whether it is the result of surface
contamination or a film defect. It may cover large or small areas. Small patches are often the result of
contamination.
NOTE: Dulling will occur on exposure to strong sunlight over lengthy periods, resulting in off-shading of
the color.
Manufacturer's defect in paint material or process.
Airborne deposits such as water or salt staining.
1. Polish only or clean and polish.
Etching
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Bird droppings, acid attack, windshield-wash attack, strong detergent
attack, industrial fallout, splashes and solvent attack.
Description
Small or large areas of the paint surface roughened and partly removed or disintegrated, often with traces of the
cause and staining around the area. The severity of the exception will vary depending on the exposure and the
nature of the attacking substance. In severe cases the paint film may exhibit signs of crazing.
Not an exception arising from manufacturing process.
Incorrect or poor storage of new vehicles.

Poor handling or carelessness with corrosive chemicals.
Exposing soft or new paint finishes to strong chemicals or failure to protect from airborne contaminants.
Prevention

Take care with finishes and protect. Do not expose uncured or improperly hardened finishes to conditions
likely to cause etching.
Avoid washing recently finished areas or soft cellulose with detergents or allowing detergents to stay on
the surface.
1. Check severity of exception.

2. If mild, exception can be fine flatted and compounded/polished out.
3. If severe, exception will require local refinish. Make sure all traces of the contaminant are removed.
Flaking/Delaminationg
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Peeling off, peel back, blowing off, shelling, poor bond, loss of adhesion,
intercoat adhesion failure and poor adhesion.
Clear Coat and Basecoat Flaking From Surface
Clear Coat Flaking From Basecoat
Clear Coat Flaking From Clear Coat

Description
The clear coat or both basecoat and clear coat layers are partially or completely detached from the underlying
surfaces over large or small areas depending on severity. The exception may exhibit flaking or may only be
apparent from portions of the clear coat having previously been removed. The exception is confined to a clear
coat only, or to both the clear coat and the basecoat layers.
Defective original process or materials.
None.

3. Repair any not permissible exceptions by flatting to below the layer where the flaking has occurred, then
re-painting as necessary.
Haloes
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Contours, rings, edges, dry edges, peeling back, poor fade-out and poor
wetting.
Description
Color transition of localized refinished area is not imperceptibly graduated into surrounding finish resulting in a
dark edge, light shadow or difference in surface finish around the periphery of a repair.
Manufacturer's defect in paint application process.

None.

3. Repair any not permissible exceptions by re-painting as required.
Off Shade
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Discoloration, mismatch, off-color and fading.
Description
Color shade of adjacent panels does not match or areas with break lines appear to be off-color or differing in
shade. This term normally applies to off-color of complete adjacent panels. Local off-shade areas are likely to be
the result of contaminants.
Manufacturer's process fault.
None.

Opacity/Inadequate Color Coverage
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Rub-through, grinning-through, poor hiding, poor coverage, thin paint,
transparent film, undercoat showing through, undersprayed, lack of paint and poor build.
Description
This exception usually occurs in hard-to-spray areas, sharp contours/edges or lower panels and is evident as
insufficient paint coverage and application. The exception will be more defined on dark colors and some metallic
colors.
Manufacturer's process defect, lack of paint application.
None.

Orange Peel
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Pebbling, poor flow and poor leveling.
Description
A paint finish which has an undulated surface resembling an orange skin. Impaired reflective ability is
characteristic of this defect.
Manufacturer's paint application process.
None.

3. Repair any not permissible exceptions by polishing, or flatting and polishing.
Overspray
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Masking lines, inconsistency and hazing.
Description
Overspray may appear as areas of dust-like paint particles adhering to the paint surface, or as paint particles
only partially absorbed into the finish, reducing the gloss and hazing or misting the reflective ability of the
surface.
Defective application process by manufacturer.
None.
Rectification Process - Overspray Clear Coat

Rectification Process - Overspray Color Coat Plus Clear Coat

3. Not permissible exceptions must be repaired as follows:
- Attempt removal of concern by either polishing or flat and polishing.
- If polishing does not remove concern, flat and re-paint affected area.
Polishing Compound
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Residue and debris.
Description
Polishing compound will take the form of either small round specks or hazy patches on body panels or trim
components.
Polishing compound on vehicles is the result of factory polish repairs done to rectify minor paint defects.
Appropriate protection and subsequent cleaning after polishing not carried out satisfactorily.
None.
1. Clean affected area by applying an alcohol based spirit wipe on a soft cloth.
Polishing Witness Marks (Circular Fine Scratches)
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Swirls, dull finish, blooming and haloing.
Description
Localized areas of circular fine scratching which may have a dull hazy appearance. This effect is a result of
inadequate fine flatting and polishing to remove small surface defects.
Defective application process by manufacturer.

Final polishing has not been done effectively, therefore the area shows a low gloss appearance with a
bloom/hazy finish.
None.
1. Polish area to remove scratches and restore gloss.

2. De-bloom panel to remove all evidence of polishing.
Poor Metal Finish
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Disc marks, file marks, weld spatter and weld splashes.
Description
The paint film has sunk into and repeated the outlines of scratches, grooves or lines in the metal. This exception
will be characterized by a pattern of short curved grooves, criss-cross lines or very short deep grooves at the
surface. The marks in the finish will be more pronounced and severe than flatting marks. When the exception
arises from weld spatter or pieces of metal under the finish, it will be seen as jagged intrusions in the paint or
globules located adjacent to a welded seam.
Poor metal finish in production process.
None.

3. Repair any not permissible exceptions by polishing, or flatting and polishing. In severe cases re-paint as
required.
Runs
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Drips, gun spits and sags.
Description
An accumulation of paint which gathers to form a thickened fold, often accompanied by individual tear-like runs
or a sagging drapery of runs.
Incorrect paint application by manufacturer.
None.

Sanding Scratches
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Sand scratches, scratches in basecoat, dark lines, flatting marks and lining
up.
Description
Parallel scratch marks or fine dark lines apparent only in the basecoat color, following the direction and extent of
the manual flatting operation. The severity and effect depends on the location and direction of view (i.e. the lines
may not be apparent when viewed directly into the paint film).
Defect occurring during manufacturer's process.
None.

3. Repair any not permissible exceptions by polishing, or flatting and polishing. In severe cases, re-paint as
required.
Shadiness/Sheary
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Shear, sheariness, flotation, mottle, banding, streaks, gun streaking,
shadows and blotches.
Description
The paint color appears variegated or in patches of darker and/or lighter shades, arranged in a cloud-like
manner. The cloudy pattern usually follows the direction of application according to the stroke of the spray gun.
Defect arising from manufacturer's process.
None.

Solvent Retention
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Boil, pits, bubbles, pin-holes, boiling, solvent boil, solvent shock and air
bubbles.
Description
Bubbles of solvent retained in the clear coat, usually close to the surface and in localized areas, of a size
between 0.5 and 1 mm (0.020 and 0.040 in.) diameter. May initially be apparent as black dots, but close
examination will reveal the depth at which they are held in the clear coat.
Fault with manufacturing process.
None.

Staining/Discoloration
NOTE: Alternative Terminology: Water spotting, tree sap/leaves/road tar/glue stains, bleeding, excess
adhesive, darkening, rain spotting, brown spots and acid staining.
Description
Staining is a general term used to describe a condition where the paint surface is discolored or dyed. The stain
may arise from under the film, i.e. bleeding, or penetrate into the film from external contamination. Traces of the
contaminant will indicate the nature of the staining. Water spotting is recognized as a pattern of light colored
spots or marks on the surface of the paint film. These may be accompanied by traces of salt or lime-like
deposits. The exception is most common on horizontal surfaces and results from formation of water globules,
which with subsequent evaporation leaves salt deposits to stain or attack the paint.
Not a warranty related concern.

Poor storage conditions.

Oil in air line.
Contamination of surface by fumes from oven heating system.
Alcohol or anti-freeze spillage.
Road tar.
Windshield-wash fluid attack.
Acid attack.
Water left to dry on surface.
Prevention

Exterior Body & Paint Pre-Delivery Inspection (PDI) Standards - General
Requirements
Facility Minimum Requirements (For PDI Centers)
NOTE: The maximum time taken to inspect the vehicle should not normally exceed 5 minutes.
1. A covered well ventilated area providing ample room to drive vehicles into and out of without restrictions.
2. A separate vehicle wash/dry area should be available.
3. Vehicles should be processed down a single line flow process.
4. The flow line should be clearly marked using floor marking set to a minimum required width.
5. Sidewalk ways should be clearly marked and must incorporate the provision for doors fully open down the
line.
6. All inspection areas should be clearly marked with adequate natural tone florescent lighting that illuminates
the vehicle in a consistent way across all exterior surfaces. The lighting levels should be between 1000 and
2000 lux.
7. The inspection area should consist of a box, line marked on the floor, clearly defining the inspection viewing
position 1 m (39 in.) from the vehicle. The floor surface where possible should be finished in a light gray to
reflect light. Use suitable stable platforms to allow the roof inspection of high sided vehicles.
8. All possible contact points down the line should be protected using soft foam. This foam should be regularly
checked and renewed if required.
9. Portable/Mobile units should have soft foam protection installed to all edges. These should be checked
regularly and installed if required.
10. No electrical cables, airlines or pipes should be used across the vehicles.
11. All accessory fitting should be done in an off-line location.
12. Personnel should wear appropriate clothing, which removes any risk of damaging the vehicles.
13. Personnel should be devoid of the following items, which could potentially cause vehicle damage:
- Exposed metal items such as belt buckles, jean rivets, buttons or zippers.
- Exposed jewellery, watches, chains or rings. Fully covering these items with soft protection is
advisable.
- Tools or other objects sticking out of pockets.
- Grease, oil or solvents.
14. The line should be kept clean at all times. All dirt, debris or fluid spillages should be cleaned up immediately.
Exterior Inspection Viewing Position
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.
Conduct Of Personnel
1. There should be no smoking in the working area. Areas where smoking is allowed should be clearly marked
and be the only locations where smoking is permitted.
2. There should be no eating or drinking in the working area. Locations for taking refreshments should be
allocated.
3. Do not lean on or sit in or on vehicles.
4. Do not place objects on, by or in vehicles.
5. Do not operate the vehicle in any unnecessary manner, e.g. listening to the radio, unauthorized
driving/moving of the vehicle, etc.
6. When the vehicle is not being worked on make sure all windows, doors and other openings are kept closed.
7. Do not use clipboards or any other writing materials by or on the vehicle. All written work associated with
processing the vehicle should be done in an off-line location.
Identification Of Exceptions
Exception Types
Exceptions identified while carrying out a vehicle exterior surface inspection fall into three cause categories:
Transportation.
Warranty.
Internal.
Transportation
Where applicable, all of the transportation exceptions will have been already identified during the Marine Survey,
also known as the First Point of Rest Survey. This survey must be carried out immediately after the cars leave
the ship in an area on the dockside. Vehicles should not be moved to a holding compound and then inspected for
transportation exceptions. If for any reason vehicles cannot be inspected on the dockside and have to be moved
to a compound, prior agreement must be obtained from the carrier that they will still accept liability for any
transit related damage found.
Examples of transportation exceptions:
Damage caused by physical impact, abrasion or forced entry.

Damage or soiling of the drivers area to include seat and interior components, door inner and apertures
and door trims. Obvious vandalism or abuse of the interior.
Wheel rim damage - the rim has rotary cut or abrasion marks.
Damage to undercarriage.
Vehicle exterior glass surface, scratched, chipped or broken.
Paint chips noted on driver's door rear edge or the drivers side rear door leading edge. Any paint damage
or trim damage found on doors whereby the transit door seal is broken.
Undercarriage exceptions must be declared within seven workings days from receipt of the vehicle.
Water, tire, glass and exterior body fallout damage are managed risks subject to separate negotiations.
Warranty
Warranty related exceptions are those that relate to the fit, functionality and workmanship of parts or materials.
Determining warranty related exceptions is done via the PDI process. Please refer to the applicable vehicle line
Warranty Policy and Procedures Manual for a more comprehensive explanation of the warranty process
requirements.
Examples of warranty related exceptions:
Poor metal condition on body panels such as distorted, wavy or creased. Only acceptable if outside of
factory quality build standard.
Poor finish on body panels such as file, grinder or weld marks. Only acceptable if outside of factory
quality build standard.
Outwards facing dents in body panels.
Poor paint finish due to the following:
- Dirt/Inclusions.
- Runs/Sags.
- Blisters, including solvent popping.
- Peeling/Flaking
- Base color coat bruising/blemishes.
- Mottle/Shading of color coat.
- Over spray or dry spray.
- Chipped paint - only allowed on panels covered by transit coatings or where transit labels are
applied.
- Any defect found under the transit coating, except where there is evidence that the transit coating
has been breached.
Tire damage caused by production related debris (e.g. screws, bolts, etc.).
Cracks in glass or plastic panels deemed to be defective material.
Improperly installed or mis-aligned panels, mouldings, badges, emblems or weather strips.
Wheel rim damage found inboard of the rim or noted in or around the wheel nut location holes.
Water ingress/leakage - damaged or contaminated components due to poor body seam sealing or
incorrectly installed/damaged body weather seals.
Internal
Any damage related exceptions found subsequent to the Marine Survey will be considered as internal. It is
therefore the responsibility of the port processor to repair any such damages and absorb all associated costs.
The only deviation from this is the possibility of finding hidden transportation damage during the PDI inspection.
Exterior Pre-Delivery Inspection (PDI) Process
General
All exterior PDI should be carried out inside the PDI facility.
For additional information, refer to: General Requirements (101-03 Exterior Body & Paint Pre-Delivery Inspection
(PDI) Standards, Description and Operation).
Conducting the Inspection
All inspections should be undertaken in a manner that minimizes contact with the vehicles, to avoid damaging
them.
The vehicle's outer surfaces should be clean, if necessary having been washed and dried prior to the inspection
process.
All inspections shall be entirely impartial and be based on the following instructions, developed to make sure all
vehicle inspections are conducted in a consistent systematic manner:
All exterior surfaces and components not covered by transit protection should be inspected.
All exterior surfaces and components not covered by transit protection should be inspected.
Start inspection at center front of vehicle, then move down the right side, across the rear and up the left
side, finishing at your start point.
All exceptions noted must be clearly visible at 1 m (39 in.) standing upright at right angles to the
inspected surface/component or up to 30 degrees each side of center. Most surface defects are visible at
right angles to the vehicle. Dents/Dings are most visible when the surface of the vehicle is viewed at the
30 degrees angle offset.
Close inspection, viewing surfaces/components at less than 1 m (39 in.), is not permitted when carrying
out this inspection. Close inspection must only be used to confirm an exception is present. Close
inspection is a means of exception verification, not a detection technique.
Determine the acceptability of any exceptions found on the vehicle in accordance with the criteria given in
the acceptance standards tables.
Inspection Process - Description Of the Work Element
1. View each panel as described above. You may occasionally have to lightly touch the surface of the vehicle
to confirm the presence of an exception. At the end of the inspection all exceptions should be recorded on
a worksheet. Include a fault code description and a vehicle silhouette.
For additional information, refer to: Exterior Surface Zone Identification (101-03 Exterior Body & Paint
Pre-Delivery Inspection (PDI) Standards, Description and Operation).
2. Inspect the front area of the hood, the radiator grille, header panel, headlamps, front body panels,
bumper assy. View across front of vehicle to make sure gaps and alignments are acceptable.
3. Using the reflection from the overhead lights, scan the panel to detect any dents/dings.
4. At the right side of the vehicle inspect the front fender, hood, bumper side and wheel assy. Viewing down
the vehicle from a 30 deg angle check for dents/dings.
5. Inspect right side of windscreen, A-pillar, roof above front door, front door, door handle, door glass and
sill area. Look down the vehicle from 30 degrees angle and check for dents/dings.
6. Inspect the roof above the rear door, rear door, door handle, door glass, B/C-pillar trim and sill area. Look
down the vehicle from 30 degrees angle and check for dents/dings.
7. Inspect the right hand rear fender, luggage compartment, D/E-pillar, side bumper assembly and wheel
assembly.
8. Look along the right hand side of the vehicle and check that all of the panel gaps and alignments are
acceptable.
9. At the rear of the vehicle inspect the luggage compartment lid/tailgate to make sure panel gaps and
alignments are correct. Inspect tail lamps and rear fender around lamp assemblies. Inspect the complete
rear bumper assembly including any finishers, badges, emblems or lamps. Make sure their alignment is
correct.
10. 10. In reverse order fully inspect the left side of the vehicle.
Reporting Warranty Inspection Data
Each warranty exception must be recorded by using the Jaguar or Land Rover warranty code system. Refer to
the appropriate Repair Time Searcher (RTS) to find the correct warranty code. Direct reporting of exceptions
found on vehicles should be done via the Electronic Product Quality Reporting (EPQR) system.
Suspension System - General Information -
Coil Spring Suspension
Item Specification
Type:
Front Independent with single rate coil spring, twin tube damper and high stress anti-roll bar
Rear Independent with dual rated coil spring, twin tube damper and anti-roll bar
Air Spring Suspension
Item Specification
Type Independent with twin tube damper, anti-roll bars and air springs with multiple, driver selectable ride
heights - Standard, off-road and access.
Wheel Alignment Specification (All Markets) - Front - LHD
CAUTION: When checking or adjusting front or rear steering geometry, the vehicle must either have a full
fuel tank or have sufficient weight placed in the vehicle's load space to give the equivalent weight of a full fuel
tank. The weight must be evenly distributed at the front and the right hand side of the load space. The fuel tank
capacity is 86.3 litres (18.9 Imperial gallons) (22.7 US gallons). Depending on the amount of fuel in the tank,
calculate the amount of weight which must be added:
1 litre of fuel weighs 0.8 kg (1.7 pounds)

1 Imperial gallon of fuel weighs 3.6 kg (8.0 pounds)
1 US gallon of fuel weighs 3.0 kg (6.7 pounds)
NOTE: All figures are with vehicle at 'Showroom' ride height - full fluids, full tank of fuel, no
occupants/luggage, tires inflated to normal pressures
Item Left-hand Right-hand Total/Balance

Camber Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance
Decimal degrees -0.15° ± 0.75° -0.50° ± 0.75° 0.35° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -9' ± 45' -30' ± 45' 21' ± 45'
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
Decimal degrees -0.90° 0.60° -1.25° 0.25° -0.40° 1.10°
Degrees/minutes -54' 36' -1°15' 15' -24' 1°6'
Castor Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance

Decimal degrees 3.86° ± 0.75° 4.17° ± 0.75° -0.31° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes 3°52' ± 45' 4°10' ± 45' -19' ± 45'
Decimal degrees 3.11° 4.61° 3.42° 4.92° -1.06° 0.44°
Degrees/minutes 3°7' 4° 37' 3°25' 4° 55' -1°4' 26'
Toe Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance

Decimal degrees 0.08° ±0.10° 0.08° ±0.10° 0.16° ± 0.20°
Degrees/minutes 5' ±6' 5' ±6' 10' ± 12'
Decimal degrees -0.02° 0.18° -0.02° 0.18° -0.04° 0.36°
Degrees/minutes -1' 11' -1' 11' -2' 22'
Wheel Alignment Specification (All Markets) - Front - RHD
Item Left-hand Right-hand Total/Balance

Camber Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance
Decimal degrees -0.50° ± 0.75° -0.50° ± 0.75° 0.00° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -30' ± 45' -30' ± 45' 0' ± 45'
Decimal degrees -1.25° 0.25° -1.25° 0.25° -0.75° 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -1°15' 15' -1°15' 15' -45' 45'
Castor Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance

Decimal degrees 4.02° ± 0.75° 4.02° ± 0.75° 0.00° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes 4°1' ± 45' 4°1' ± 45' 0' ± 45'
Decimal degrees 3.27° 4.77° 3.27° 4.77° -0.75° 0.75°
Degrees/minutes 3°16' 4°46' 3°16' 4°46' -45' 45'
Toe Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance

Decimal degrees 0.08° ±0.10° 0.08° ±0.10° 0.16° ± 0.20°
Degrees/minutes 5' ±6' 5' ±6' 10' ± 12'
Decimal degrees -0.02° 0.18° -0.02° 0.18° -0.04° 0.36°
Degrees/minutes -1' 11' -1' 11' -2' 22'
Wheel Alignment Specification (All Markets) - Rear - vehicles with air suspension
Item Left-hand Right-hand Total/Balance Thrust Angle

Camber Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance
Decimal degrees -0.75° ± 0.75° -0.75° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -45' ± 45' -45' ± 45'
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
Decimal degrees -1.50° 0.00° -1.50° 0.00°
Degrees/minutes -1°30' 0' -1°30' 0'
Toe Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance

Decimal degrees 0.12° ± 0.10° 0.12° ± 0.10° 0.24° ± 0.14° 0° ± 0.14°
Degrees/minutes 7' ± 6' 7' ± 6' 14' ± 8' 0' ± 8'
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
Decimal degrees 0.02° 0.22° 0.02° 0.22° 0.10° 0.38° -0.14° 0.14°
Degrees/minutes 1' 13' 1' 13' 6' 23' -8' 8'
Wheel Alignment Specification (All Markets) - Rear - vehicles without air suspension
Item Left-hand Right-hand Total/Balance Thrust Angle

Camber Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance
Decimal degrees -0.50° ± 0.75° -0.50° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -30' ± 45' -30' ± 45'
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
Decimal degrees -1.25° 0.25° -1.25° 0.25°
Degrees/minutes -1°15' 15' -1°15' 15'
Toe Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance

Decimal degrees 0.12° ± 0.10° 0.12° ± 0.10° 0.24° ± 0.14° 0° ± 0.14°
Degrees/minutes 7' ± 6' 7' ± 6' 14' ± 8' 0' ± 8'
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
Decimal degrees 0.02° 0.22° 0.02° 0.22° 0.10° 0.38° -0.14° 0.14°
Degrees/minutes 1' 13' 1' 13' 6' 23' -8' 8'
Suspension System - General Information - Suspension System
Principle of Operation
For a detailed description of the Suspension System and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to:
Front Suspension (204-01 Front Suspension, Description and Operation),

Rear Suspension (204-02 Rear Suspension, Description and Operation).
Inspection and Verification
WARNING: Before carrying out a road test, make sure the vehicle is safe to do so. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in personal injury.
modules does not guarantee confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being
checked and/or the donor vehicle.
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.
1. Gather as much information from the driver as possible and verify the customer concern by carrying out a
road test, as closely as possible reproducing the conditions under which the fault occurs.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage.

Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Tire pressures
Damaged wheels or tires
Wheel bearing(s)
Loose or damaged front or rear suspension components
Loose, damaged or missing suspension fastener(s)
Damaged or leaking air suspension components
Worn or damaged suspension bushing(s)
Loose, worn or damaged steering system components
Damaged axle components
Damaged chassis
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported condition is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the symptom chart.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively
check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Possible Causes Action

Crabbing Incorrect rear thrust angle Check the rear alignment
Front or rear suspension Check the front and rear suspension for signs
components of damage or wear
Drift/pull/wander Tire pressures Check and adjust the tire pressures (see visual
Uneven tire wear inspection)
Damaged steering Check for uneven tire wear, investigate the
components cause and rectify as necessary
Wheel alignment Check the steering for wear/damage
Brake drag Check and adjust the wheel alignment as
Unevenly loaded or necessary
overloaded vehicle Check for binding brakes, rectify as necessary
Advise the driver of the load issues
Front bottoming or Damaged suspension Check the suspension components for damage
riding low components Check the dynamic suspension
Air spring fault
Uneven tire wear Incorrect tire pressure Check and adjust the tire pressures (see visual
(rapid centre rib or inner inspection)
and outer edge wear) Check and adjust the wheel alignment as
Incorrect front or rear toe necessary
(rapid inner or outer edge Balance the wheels and tires as necessary
wear)
Incorrect camber (rapid
inner or outer edge wear)
Tires out of balance (tires
cupped or dished)
Harsh ride Damaged suspension Check the suspension components for damage
components Check the dynamic suspension
Air spring fault
Shimmy or wheel Wheels/tires Check the wheels and tires for condition and
tramp Loose wheel nut(s) balance
Loose front suspension Check and tighten the wheel nuts and
fasteners suspension fasteners to specification
Front wheel bearing(s) fault Check the front wheel bearings, suspension
Worn or damaged bushings, ball joints and steering components
suspension component for wear or damage
bushing Check and adjust the wheel alignment as
Loose, worn or damaged necessary
ball joint(s)
Loose, worn or damaged
steering components
Front wheel alignment
Poor return ability of Steering column Check the steering column universal joints, etc
the steering (self- Ball joints Check the ball joints and other steering
centering) Steering components components
Sway or roll Loose front or rear stabilizer Check the stabilizer bar security and condition.
bar Rectify as necessary
Worn lower suspension arm Check the function of the active stabilization
stabilizer bar insulators system (where installed)
Air spring fault Check the air springs
Vehicle leans to one Front or rear suspension Check the front and rear suspension
side components Check the air springs
Air spring fault
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Air Suspension Control Module (100-00, Description and
Operation).
Published: 27-Jun-2011
Suspension System - General Information - Four-Wheel Alignment
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
204-805
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the vehicle is on a flat level surface.
Make sure the tire pressures are within specification.
Make sure that only the manufacturers' recommended four wheel alignment equipment is used.
Make sure the vehicles fuel tank is full, if not distribute extra weight evenly over the fuel tank area to
represent a full tank of fuel.
Make sure there are no heavy objects in the vehicle.
Make sure the air suspension is set to NORMAL ride height.
Make sure the steering is in the straight ahead position.
Make sure the slip plates (turntables) are free to move before adjusting the geometry.
NOTE: This procedure can be used for vehicles with either air or coil spring suspension.
1. Check the tie rod ends, suspension joints, wheel bearings

and wheels and tires for damage, wear and free play.
Adjust or repair any worn, damaged or incorrectly
adjusted components.
2. Check and adjust tire pressures.
3. Position the vehicle on a calibrated, level, vehicle lift.
4. Release the vehicle parking brake.
5. Vehicles with dynamic suspension: Using the approved

diagnostic tool, check the air suspension control module for
fault codes and clear as required.
6. Vehicles with dynamic suspension: Using the diagnostic

tool, set vehicle to 'Geometry Set Mode', using the
instructions below. Putting the vehicle into this mode will
make sure that the ride heights are controlled more
accurately.
1. Select the 'Configuration' tab
2. Select 'Set up and Configure'.
3. Select 'Air Suspension'.
4. Select 'Suspension Geometry Set Up'.
5. Select 'Tight Tolerance Mode'.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions until the set up
process has finished.
7. NOTE: If rear camber adjustment is required, loosen

the rear camber adjustment bolts enough to allow
adjustment before starting any other wheel alignment
adjustments. Do not fully loosen the rear camber
adjustment bolts.
Using only four wheel alignment equipment approved by

Land Rover, check and adjust the wheel alignment.
8. CAUTION: Make sure the toe link anti-

rotation tang is fully seated in the integrated
body frame before tightening the toe link
retaining nut. Failure to follow this instruction
will result in damage to the toe link or
integrated body frame.
NOTE: This step is only required if the toe

links have been removed or replaced.
Adjust the rear bump steer.

Loosen the toe link inner ball joint
retaining nut.
Set the gap, between the underside of
the toe link rubber boot and the
integrated body frame bracket, to 10
mm (0.473 in).
Tighten the toe link inner ball joint
retaining nut to 133 Nm (98 lb.ft)
Repeat the above procedure for the
other side.
9. Adjust the rear camber.

Loosen the rear camber adjusting bolts.
Rotate the rear camber adjusting bolt
until the correct value is obtained.
other side.
Tighten the rear camber adjusting bolts.
10. Install the special tool and a suitable socket to

the rear camber adjusting bolt retaining nut.
11. NOTES:
The torque wrench must be installed in a

direct line with the special tool, as shown.
Calculate the torque wrench setting

using the formula below.
Key to letters:
A = Effective length of the torque

wrench, measured in mm.
Formula:
Torque wrench setting (Nm) =

(133xA)/(A+100)
Using the special tool, a suitable extension bar
and a torque wrench, fully tighten the camber
adjusting bolt retaining nut.
Use the torque wrench setting
calculated above.
other side.
12. Adjust the rear toe.

Loosen the toe link adjustment locking
nut.
Rotate the toe link inner ball joint until
the correct rear toe value is obtained.
Tighten the toe link adjustment locking
nut to 130 Nm (96 lb.ft).
other side.
Repeat the rear toe measurement.
13. CAUTION: Make sure the slip plates

(turntables) are free to move before adjusting
the geometry.
Adjust the front camber.

Loosen the lower arm front camber
adjusting bolt.
Rotate the front camber adjusting bolt
until the correct value is obtained.
Tighten the lower arm front camber
adjusting bolt to 275 Nm (203 lb.ft).
other side.
14. Adjust the front castor.

Loosen the lower arm rear castor
adjusting bolt.
Rotate the castor adjusting bolt until the
correct value is obtained.
Tighten the lower arm rear castor
adjusting bolt.
other side.
Repeat the castor measurement.
Repeat the above procedure until both
castors achieve the correct value.
Tighten the lower arm rear castor
adjusting bolts to 275 Nm (203 lb.ft).
15. Align the steering to straight ahead.

Measure the length of the exposed
thread on each track rod.
If the exposed thread lengths differ by
more than two millimetres:
Stage one: Loosen one track rod end
locking nut.
Stage two: Rotate the track rod until
the lengths of the exposed threads on
both track rods are equal.
Stage three: Tighten the track rod end
locking nut.
Stage four: Rotate the steering wheel
until both front toe measurements are
equal.
16. Adjust the front toe.

Loosen the track rod end locking nuts.
Rotate the track rods to adjust each
individual front toe to the correct value.
Tighten the track rod end locking nuts
to 53 Nm (39 lb.ft).
17. Vehicles with dynamic suspension: Using the diagnostic
tool, return the vehicle to 'Normal Mode'.
1. Select the 'Configuration' tab
2. Select 'Set up and Configure'.
3. Select 'Air Suspension'.
4. Select 'Suspension Geometry Set Up'.
5. Select 'Normal Mode'.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions until the normal
mode process has finished.
18. Calibrate the steering angle sensor using the diagnostic tool.
Suspension System - General Information - Front Wheel Bearing and
Wheel Hub Runout Check
General Procedures
NOTES:
LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
1. WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle

stands.
Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the road wheel.
3. CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the brake caliper to hang on

the brake hose.
LH side: Do not allow the brake caliper to

hang on the brake pad wear warning sensor
lead.
NOTE: Models with standard brakes

shown, models with high performance brakes
similar.
Release the brake caliper and tie aside.
4. Remove the front brake disc.

Remove the Allen screw.
5. Thoroughly clean the hub mounting face.
6. Using special tool (100-053) mount a Dial Test

Indicator (DTI) to and secure to the backplate
using the upper backplate fixing.
7. CAUTION: Make sure the DTI is positioned clear of the
wheel studs.
Position the DTI probe on the outer edge of the hub face.
8. Zero the DTI and rotate the hub one complete revolution to
measure hub runout.
The hub runout limit is 0.0135 mm.
9. NOTE: If the hub runout exceeds the limit replace the

hub.
For additional information, refer to: Front Wheel Bearing

and Wheel Hub (204-01, Removal and Installation).
10. Remove the DTI.
11. Install the brake disc.

Tighten the Torx screw to 35 Nm (26 lb.ft).
12. Install the brake caliper and tighten the bolts. TORQUE: 275
Nm
13. Install the road wheel and tighten nuts to 140Nm (103 lb-
ft).
14. Repeat the above procedure on the opposite side.
15. Depress the brake pedal several times to set brake pads.
16. Lower the vehicle.

Front Suspension -
Item Specification
Road spring color coding:
YELLOW/BLUE
YELLOW/GREY
YELLOW
Note: The first color indicates the fitted position of the spring on the vehicle i.e. front. The secondary
color identifies the thickness of the isolator which is fitted to a particular spring to ensure that the
vehicle ride height is maintained within specified limits. Replacement springs will be supplied with
the appropriate isolator fitted.
* Stabilizer bar link nuts 115 85
Stabilizer bar clamp nuts 115 85
Front axle crossmember bolts 115 85
Shock absorber and spring assembly to lower arm bolt 300 221
Shock absorber top mounting nuts 70 52
* Shock absorber upper bush rebound plate nut 98 72
Heat shield bolts 10 7
* Upper arm and wheel knuckle nut 70 52
* Tie-rod end ball joint nut 76 56
Brake hose retaining bracket to wheel knuckle bolt 22 16
*+ Halfshaft retaining nut 230 169
Brake hose to upper arm bolt 22 16
Upper arm nuts and bolts 175 129
Radiator access panel bolts 10 7
Wheel hub bolts 115 85
Brake disc dust shield bolts 10 7
Lower arm bolts 275 203
Lower arm ball joint retaining nut 115 85
Lower arm front camber adjusting bolt 275 203
Lower arm rear castor adjusting bolts 275 203
Toe link inner ball joint retaining nut 133 98
Rear camber adjusting bolts 133 98
Track rod end locking nuts 53 39
Wheel speed sensor bolt 10 7
Axle carrier bushing bolt - M14 105 77
Axle carrier bracket bolts 80 59
* New nut/bolts must be fitted
+ Stake nut on completion

Front Suspension - Front Suspension
COMPONENT LOCATION
NOTE: Air suspension version shown

1 - Flanged bolt (Upper control arm forward bush)
2 - Bush - forward (Upper control arm)
3 - Nut (Upper control arm forward bush)
4 - Flanged bolt (Upper control arm rearward bush)
5 - Nut (Stabilizer link to upper control arm)
6 - Bush - rearward (Upper control arm)
7 - Nut (Upper control arm rearward bush)
8 - Upper control arm
9 - Ball joint (Upper control arm to swivel hub)
10 - Nut (Ball joint to swivel hub attachment)
11 - Cam washer - integral to bolt (Lower control arm rearward bush)
12 - Bolt (Lower control arm rearward bush)
13 - Rearward hydrabush (Lower control arm)
14 - Cam washer
15 - Nut (Lower control arm rearward bush)
16 - Nut (Shock absorber assembly lower attachment)
17 - Wheel hub bolt (4 off)
18 - Wheel knuckle
19 - Wheel hub and bearing assembly
20 - Steering gear attachment
21 - Nut (Ball joint to swivel hub attachment)
22 - Ball joint (Lower control arm to swivel hub)
23 - Lower control arm (air suspension version shown)
24 - Bolt (Shock absorber assembly lower attachment)
25 - Shock absorber assembly (air suspension vehicles)
26 - Shock absorber assembly (coil spring vehicles)
27 - Nut (Lower control arm forward bush)
28 - Cam washer
29 - Lower control arm forward bush
31 - Cam washer - integral to bolt (Lower control arm rearward bush)
32 - Stabilizer bar bush
33 - Stabilizer bar bracket
34 - Nut (Stabilizer bar bracket)
35 - Nut (Stabilizer link to Stabilizer bar)
36 - Stabilizer bar
37 - Stabilizer link
OVERVIEW
The front suspension is a fully independent design which offers a reduction in unsprung weight over the beam axle
design fitted to previous Land Rover models. The front suspension comprises an upper control arm, a lower control
arm, a wheel knuckle and hub, an stabilizer bar and links assembly and a shock absorber assembly. The shock
absorber can have a coil spring or air spring, both shock absorber types use a similar design. The suspension
components are common to both coil and air spring versions.
The suspension control arms have been designed for maximum ground clearance and also allow for adjustment of
the camber and castor using cam adjusters.
Shock Absorber Assembly - Air Suspension

1 - Rebound washer*
2 - O-ring - shock absorber rod (2 off)*
3 - Self-locking nut*
4 - Spacer - shock absorber rod*
5 - Bump washer
6 - Spring aid*
7 - O-ring - air spring sleeve support (2 off)*
8 - Shock absorber*
9 - Voss air fitting
10 - Shock absorber rod
11 - Self-locking nut (3 off)
12 - Top mount
13 - Bush
14 - Retaining pin - air spring assembly*
15 - Air spring assembly*
NOTE: * shows service items
The shock absorber module comprises an air spring assembly, top mount and a shock absorber. The shock absorber
and air spring are only serviceable as complete assemblies.
Shock Absorber
The shock absorber assembly is a twin tube design with the conventional coil spring replaced by the air spring. The
lower end of the shock absorber is fitted with a bush and is attached to the lower control arm with a bolt and nut.
The shock absorber functions by restricting the flow of hydraulic fluid through internal galleries within the shock
absorber. The shock absorber rod moves axially within the shock absorber, its movement limited by the flow of fluid
through the galleries, providing damping of undulations in the terrain. The shock absorber rod is sealed at its exit
point from the shock absorber body to maintain the fluid within the unit and to prevent the ingress of dirt and
moisture. The seal also incorporates a wiper to keep the rod clean.
Air Spring
The air spring comprises an aluminium restraining cylinder, top mount, spring aid, air sleeve and an inner support
sleeve.
The air sleeve is made from a flexible rubber material which allows the sleeve to roll up and down the air spring
piston as the vehicle changes height. The air sleeve is attached to the restraining cylinder and support sleeve by
crimp rings which provide an air tight seal. The support sleeve contains a seal carrier which has two O-rings sealing
the support sleeve and two O-rings sealing to the shock absorber body. The top of the air sleeve is crimped to the
top mount which attaches to the chassis frame with 3 integral studs and self-locking nuts.
A spring aid is fitted to the shock absorber rod and prevents the top mount contacting the top of the shock absorber
during full suspension compression and assists the suspension tune. The lower end of the air spring is located over
the shock absorber body and seats on a fabricated seat on the shock absorber body. The air sleeve is positively
attached to the seat with a retaining pin. The shock absorber rod is located through a central hole in the top mount.
The rod is threaded at its outer end. A self-locking nut secures the air spring to the shock absorber rod.
The top mount is an integral part of the air spring and is fitted with a bush and rebound washer. A bump washer is
located between the top mount plate and the shock absorber rod. The top mount is secured to the shock absorber
rod with a self-locking nut. The top mount attaches to a housing on the chassis with 3 integral studs and self-locking
nuts. The top mount also incorporates a 6 mm Voss air fitting which allows for the attachment of the air harness.
A gaitor is available as a dealer fit component. The gaitor is similar to the one fitted to the rear air shock absorber
module and is available if a customer experiences dirt and debris becoming trapped between the air sleeve and the
restraining cylinder under certain terrain conditions.
Shock Absorber Assembly - Coil Spring Suspension

1 - Self-locking nut
2 - Rebound washer
3 - Top mount assembly
4 - Spring spacer (selective)
5 - Spring isolator
6 - Bump washer
7 - Spring aid
8 - Dust tube
9 - Bump cup
10 - Coil spring
11 - Shock absorber
14 - Bush
The coil spring shock absorber assembly comprises a shock absorber, coil spring and top mount.
Shock Absorber
The shock absorber assembly is a twin tube design with the conventional coil spring located on a welded spring seat
on the shock absorber tube. The lower end of the shock absorber is fitted with a bush and is attached to the lower
control arm with a bolt and nut.
The shock absorber rod is located through a central hole in the top mount. The rod is threaded at its outer end. A
self-locking nut secures the top mount to the shock absorber rod.
during full suspension compression and also assists the suspension tune.
Spring and Top Mount
The coil spring fitted differs with vehicle specification. Each spring is color coded to identify its rating and fitment
requirements.
The coil spring is located in a spring seat which is an integral part of the shock absorber body. The design of the
spring seat prevents the spring rotating. The opposite end of the coil spring is located in a spring isolator which is
fitted in the top mount. The spring isolator is made from rubber and prevents any noise produced during shock
absorber and spring compression/extension from being transmitted to the vehicle body.
The top mount is fitted with a bush and rebound washer which are located between the top mount plate and the
shock absorber rod, a self-locking nut secures the shock absorber rod to the top mount. The top mount attaches to a
housing on the chassis with 3 integral studs and self-locking nuts.
The spring is fitted with spring spacers which are located between the spring isolator and the top mount. The spring
spacers control the length of the spring to maintain the correct trim height. The spring spacers are color coded and
are supplied with a replacement spring.
Stabilizer Bar

1 - Nut - link to stabilizer bar (2 off)
2 - Link (2 off)
3 - Nut - link to upper control arm (2 off)
4 - Right upper control arm
5 - Nut (4 off)
6 - Bush (2 off)
7 - Left upper control arm
8 - Stabilizer bar
9 - Bracket (2 off)
The stabilizer bar is fabricated from induction hardened, solid spring steel bar. The stabilizer bar operates, via a pair
of links, from their attachment to the upper control arm.
The stabilizer bar is attached to the forward face of the chassis front cross member. The stabilizer bar is attached to
the cross member with two, Teflon lined bushes. Brackets, which are pressed onto the bushes, are attached to the
cross member with nuts, screwed onto studs in the cross member. The stabilizer bar has crimped, 'anti-shuffle'
collars pressed in position on the inside edges of the bushes. The collars prevent sideways movement of the stabilizer
bar.
The ends of the stabilizer bar are attached to the upper control arms via links. This allows the stabilizer bar to move
with the wheel travel providing maximum effectiveness. Each link has a ball joint at each end. The top ball joint is
attached to the link, parallel with the link axis. The ball joint is located in a hole in the upper control arm and
secured with a self-locking nut. The bottom ball joint is attached to the link at 90 degrees to the link axis. The ball
joint is located in a hole in the end of the stabilizer bar and secured with a self-locking nut. The links are not handed
and therefore can be fitted to either side of the stabilizer bar.
Upper Control Arm

1 - Flanged bolt
2 - Bush
4 - Flanged bolt
5 - Bush
7 - Stabilizer link attachment hole
8 - Ball joint
9 - Ball joint circlip
11 - Timing marks
The upper control arm assembly comprises, the control arm, two bushes and a ball joint. The upper control arm is a
pressed steel fabrication. Its outer end has a hole to accept the ball joint. A small indentation is located adjacent to
the ball joint hole and is used to obtain the correct orientation of the ball joint. A smaller hole near the ball joint
provides for the attachment of the stabilizer link. The underside of the upper control arm has a bracket for
attachment of the height sensor link arm and two further brackets which secure the brake hose, pad wear sensor
and wheel speed sensor cables.
The inner end of the arm has two fabricated bush housings which are welded to the arm pressing. A bush is pressed
into each housing. The bushes are located between lugs on the chassis and are secured with bolts and self-locking
nuts through metal inserts in the center of the bushes.
The ball joint in pressed into the upper control arm. The ball joint is an interference fit in the hole which prevents the
ball joint from moving. A circlip is fitted to the ball joint to retain it in the hole. The top face of the ball joint has two
semi-circular cut-outs. One of these cut-outs must be aligned with the small indentation in the upper control arm to
ensure the correct operation of the ball joint.
Lower Control Arm

2 - Cam washer
3 - Bush
4 - Special bolt
5 - Cam washer - integral to bolt
6 - Cam washer - integral to bolt
7 - Special bolt
8 - hydrabush
9 - Cam washer
11 - Jacking bracket (vehicles with coil springs only)
12 - Self-locking nut - shock absorber lower attachment
13 - Ball joint
15 - Lower control arm
16 - Bolt - shock absorber lower attachment
The lower control arm assembly comprises, the control arm, two bushes and a ball joint. The lower control arm is a
pressed steel fabrication with a hole at its outer end to accept the ball joint.
The inner end of the arm has two fabricated bush housings which are welded to the arm pressing. A bush is pressed
into each housing. The rear bush is a hydrabush which provides a progressive increase in the hardness of the bush
as the deflection of the wheel increases. The bushes are located between lugs on the chassis and are secured with
bolts and self-locking nuts through metal inserts in the center of the bushes. The forward bush, self-locking nut, has
a cam washer located beneath it. The cam washer is located between lugs on the chassis bracket and its orientation
can be adjusted to set the front camber. The rear bush, self-locking nut, also has a cam washer located beneath it.
The cam washer is located between lugs on the chassis bracket and its orientation can be adjusted to set the front
castor.
On vehicles fitted with coil springs only, a jacking bracket is located on the lower control arm.
A central aperture in the arm provides for the attachment of the shock absorber module lower bush. The shock
absorber is secured with a long bolt which is positioned through holes in the arm and secured with a self-locking nut.
The ball joint is pressed into the lower control arm. The ball joint is an interference fit in the hole which prevents the
ball joint from moving. A circlip is fitted to the ball joint to retain it in the hole.
Wheel Knuckle, Hub and Bearing Assembly

1 - Upper control arm attachment
2 - Brake caliper attachment holes
3 - Brake hose bracket attachment point
4 - Wheel speed sensor location
5 - Wheels studs
6 - Wheel hub
7 - Brake disc dust shield attachment holes
8 - Lower control arm ball joint attachment
9 - Steering gear ball joint attachment
10 - Wheel hub bolts (4 off)
The wheel knuckle is a machined casting which is located between the ball joints of the upper and lower control
arms. The knuckle has four clearance holes which allow for the fitment of four bolts which secure the wheel hub
housing. A cast boss on the forward edge of the knuckle provides for attachment of the steering gear, tie rod ball
joint.
The wheel hub and bearing assembly comprises the wheel hub housing, wheel hub and taper roller bearing. The
wheel hub and bearing assembly is a non-serviceable component. Five M14 studs are pressed into the wheel hub and
provide for the attachment of the road wheel with wheel nuts.
The wheel hub housing is a machined forging which houses a taper roller bearing. The housing has four threaded
holes which provide for the attachment to the wheel knuckle with four bolts.
The wheel hub has a splined center bore which mates with corresponding splines on the halfshaft. Rotation of the
halfshaft is passed, via the splines, to the wheel hub which rotates on the taper roller bearing.
Front Suspension - Front Suspension
In comparison with the standard vehicle, the additional weight of the armour and consequently the change in vehicle
geometry has dictated the following changes to the front suspension of the armoured vehicle:
new wheel knuckle

new upper and lower control arms
new stabilizer bar
new stabilizer bar links
modified air springs
modified dampers.
New suspension components

2 - Wheel knuckle
Although visually similar to the standard vehicle, changes have been made internally to the air springs and dampers:
The air springs incorporate a volume displacer which increases the spring rate in comparison to those fitted to
the standard vehicle.
The dampers feature revised internal valves to complement the revised spring rates and vehicle weight.
Software changes have also been made to the air suspension control module to restrict the 'Off-Road' height setting.
For additional information, refer to: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension (204-05, Description and Operation).
The stabilizer bar features serviceable bushes, which are not bonded to the stabilizer bar. This allows the bushes to
be replaced without removing the stabilizer bar from the vehicle. Clamp plates surrounding the bushes secure the
stabilizer bar to the vehicle. Anti-shuffle collars are fitted to prevent lateral movement of the stabilizer bar.
Due to the additional weight of the armoured vehicle a reinforcement plate has been fitted to provide further rigid
support to the right-hand-side clamp of the stabilizer bar.
Reinforcement plate for stabilizer bar right-hand clamp

1 - Reinforcement plate
2 - Stabilizer bar
3 - Right-hand clamp
Front Suspension - Front Stabilizer Bar
Removal
1. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle

supported only by a jack. Always support the vehicle on
safety stands.
2. Remove the wheels and tires.
3. Disconnect both the stabilizer bar links from

the stabilizer bar.
Remove and discard the 2 nuts.
4. NOTE: RH side only.
Remove the fender splash shield lower

extension panel.
Remove the 2 screws.
Remove the 2 clips.
5. Remove the engine undershield.

For additional information, refer to: Engine Undershield
(501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
6. Remove the front axle crossmember.

Remove the 4 bolts.
7. Remove the stabilizer bar bushing.

Remove the 4 nuts.
Remove the stabilizer bar clamps.
8. Remove the stabilizer bar.
Remove the stabilizer bar out through the LH side
wheel arch.
Installation
1. Install the stabilizer bar.
Install the stabilizer bar through the LH side wheel
arch.
2. Install the stabilizer bar bushing and clamps.

Tighten fixings 1 to 115 Nm (85 lb.ft).
3. Install the front axle crossmember.

Tighten the 4 bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb.ft).
4. Install the engine undershield.

5. NOTE: RH side only.
Install the fender splash shield lower extension panel.

Install the 2 screws.
Install the 2 clips.
6. Connect both stabilizer bar links to the stabilizer bar.

Install new nuts and tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb.ft).
7. Install the wheels and tires.

Tighten the wheel nuts to 140 Nm (103 lb.ft).
Front Suspension - Front Stabilizer Bar Link
Removal

safety stands.
2. Remove the wheel and tire.
3. CAUTION: Use a wrench on the hexagon

provided to prevent the ball joint rotating.
Remove the stabilizer bar link.

Installation
1. Install the stabilizer bar link.
Tighten the nuts to 115 Nm (85 lb.ft).
2. Install the wheel and tire.

Front Suspension - Upper Arm Ball Joint
Special Tool(s)
Ball joint remover
204-516/3 (LRT 64-026/3)
Ball joint remover
204-530-2
Ball joint installer
204-530-3
Ball joint installer
204-530-1
Removal
NOTE: This procedures shows removal and installation of the upper arm ball joint.
1. Remove the upper arm.

For additional information, refer to: Upper Arm (204-01
Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the dust seal.

Remove the seal retainer.
Remove the circlip.
3. Using the special tools, remove the ball joint.

Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the timing marks

are aligned.
Using the special tools, install the ball joint.
2. CAUTION: Circlip holes to be 90 degrees

rotated from timing marks.
Install the circlip.
3. Install the upper arm.

Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).
Front Suspension - Lower Arm Ball Joint
Special Tool(s)
Remover/installer front lower arm ball joint
204-531/3
204-531/2
204-531/1
204-753
204-754
Removal
All vehicles

safety stands.
3. Remove the lower arm.

For additional information, refer to: Lower Arm (204-01,
4. Remove the circlip.

5. Inspect the installed ball joint to determine if a
radius is present.
Ball joint without radius

Ball joint with radius

Installation
All vehicles
1. Clean the components.
2. Inspect the new ball joint to determine if a

radius is present.
Ball joint without radius

3. Using the special tools, install the ball joint.
Ball joint with radius
4. Using the special tools, install the ball joint.
All vehicles
5. Install the circlip.
6. Install the lower arm.

For additional information, refer to: Lower Arm (204-01,

Front Suspension - Wheel Knuckle
Special Tool(s)
Halfshaft remover/replacer
204-506/1(LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/2(LRT-60-030/2)
204-506/3(LRT-60-030/3)
Retainers - halfshaft remover/replacer
204-506/5(LRT-60-030/5)
Halfshaft installer adapter
204-506-01(LRT-60-030/4)
Ball joint separator
205-754(LRT-54-027)
Removal

safety stands.
3. Loosen the halfshaft retaining nut.
4. Release the brake hose bracket from the wheel

knuckle.
Remove the bolt.
5. Release the wheel speed sensor from the wheel

knuckle.
Remove the bolt.
6. CAUTIONS:

the brake hose.

lead.
Remove the brake caliper and anchor plate.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Tie the brake caliper and brake caliper
anchor plate assembly aside.
7. Remove the brake disc.
Remove the Torx screw.
8. Remove the halfshaft retaining nut.

Discard the nut.
9. Loosen the tie-rod end ball joint retaining nut.
10. Using the special tool, release the tie-rod end

ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
Discard the nut.
11. CAUTION: Use a wrench on the hexagon provided to

prevent the ball joint rotating.
Remove and discard the stabilizer bar link nut.
12. Loosen the upper arm retaining nut.
13. Using the special tool, release the upper arm

ball joint.
14. CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to
detach the halfshaft from the hub assembly,
failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the halfshaft.
Using the special tools, release the halfshaft

from the drive flange.
15. Remove the lower ball joint retaining nut.
16. Using the special tool, release the lower ball

joint from the steering knuckle.
17. CAUTION: The lower arm ball joint can be damaged by

excessive articulation. The wheel knuckle must be fully
supported at all times. Do not allow the wheel knuckle to
hang on the lower arm. Failure to follow this instruction will
result in damage to vehicle.
Remove the upper arm retaining nut.

Discard the nut.
18. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is

removed for access only.
Remove the wheel knuckle.
19. Remove the brake disc dust shield.

Remove the four retaining bolts.
20. Remove the wheel hub.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Installation
2. Install the wheel hub.

3. Install the brake disc dust shield.


excessive articulation. The wheel knuckle must be fully
supported at all times. Do not allow the wheel knuckle to
hang on the lower arm. Failure to follow this instruction will
With assistance, install the wheel knuckle.
5. Using the special tools, install the halfshaft in

the wheel hub.
6. Connect the upper arm and wheel knuckle.

Install a new nut and tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb.ft).
7. Secure the stabilizer bar link.

8. Tighten the lower arm ball joint retaining nut to 115 Nm (85
lb.ft).
9. Connect the tie-rod end ball joint.

10. CAUTION: Install the halfshaft nut finger tight.
Install a new halfshaft retaining nut and lightly tighten.
11. Make sure the brake disc and hub mating surfaces are
clean.

13. Install the brake caliper and anchor plate.

Clean the brake caliper anchor plate using brake
cleaning fluid.
Tighten the bolts to 275 Nm (203 lb.ft).
14. CAUTION: Do not use air tools to install the nut.

Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the component.
Tighten the new halfshaft retaining nut to 230 Nm (170

lb.ft).
Stake the nut to the halfshaft.
15. Install the wheel speed sensor.

Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
16. Secure the brake hose retaining bracket to the wheel

knuckle.
17. Depress the brake pedal several times, check the fluid level
in the brake fluid reservoir and top-up with brake fluid if
necessary.

Front Suspension - Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Special Tool(s)
204-506/1(LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/2(LRT-60-030/2)
204-506/3(LRT-60-030/3)
204-506/5(LRT-60-030/5)
204-506-01(LRT-60-030/4)
Removal

safety stands.

knuckle.
Remove the bolt.
5. Remove the wheel speed sensor retaining bolt.
6. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang on

the brake hose.
Release the brake caliper anchor plate from the wheel

knuckle and tie the caliper aside.
Tie aside complete with the wheel speed sensor.


Discard the nut.


from the wheel hub.
10. Remove the wheel hub.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Installation
2. Install the wheel hub.

Using the special tools, install the
halfshaft in the wheel hub.
3. Install a new halfshaft retaining nut and lightly tighten.
clean.


Install the wheel speed sensor.
7. Install the wheel speed sensor retaining bolt.

knuckle.

the component.

lb.ft).
necessary.

Front Suspension - Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly
Removal
1. For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension System
Depressurize and Pressurize (204-05, General Procedures).

safety stands.
4. Remove the fender splash shield.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Splash Shield
(501-02, Removal and Installation).
5. Disconnect the shock absorber and spring

assembly from the lower arm.
Remove the nut and bolt.
6. Release the heat shield for access to the shock

absorber and spring assembly upper mounting
inner nut.
Remove the three retaining bolts.
7. Remove the shock absorber and spring

assembly.
Remove the three retaining bolts.
Installation
1. Install the shock absorber and spring assembly.
Make sure the spring and shock absorber assembly
top mounting to body mating faces are clean.
Fit the nuts and tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb.ft).
2. Secure the heat shield.

Install the three retaining bolts and tighten to 10
Nm (7 lb.ft).
3. Connect the shock absorber and spring assembly to the

lower arm.
Tighten the nut and bolt to 300 Nm (221 lb.ft).
4. Install the fender splash shield.



Front Suspension - Upper Arm
Special Tool(s)
205-754(LRT-54-027)
Removal

safety stands.
3. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force to

disconnect the height sensor link.
Disconnect the height sensor link arm.
4. Remove the upper arm and brake line heat

shields for access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 3 bolts.

Remove the stabilizer bar link nut.

Discard the nut.
6. Release the brake hose and wheel speed sensor
leads from the upper arm.
Remove the bolt.
7. CAUTION: To prevent the wheel knuckle

falling outwards and disconnection of the halfshaft
inner joint, support the wheel knuckle.
Loosen the upper arm retaining nut.
8. Using the special tool, release the upper arm ball

joint.
Remove and discard the nut.

Installation
Fit the bolts but do not fully tighten at this stage.
Install new nuts.

3. Secure the brake hose and wheel speed sensor leads to the
upper arm.
5. Install the upper arm and brake line heat shields.

Install the 3 bolts.
Install the 3 nuts.
6. Connect the height sensor link.
7. Set the height distance between the centre of

the halfshaft end and the edge of the fender
trim to 466 mm (18.34'').
8. Tighten the 2 upper arm nuts and bolts to 175 Nm (129

lb.ft).

10. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, calibrate

the suspension ride height.
For additional information, refer to: Ride Height
Adjustments (204-05, General Procedures).
Front Suspension - Upper Arm Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Receiver cup upper arm bushes
204-532/1
Remover upper arm bushes
204-532/2
Installer upper arm front bush
204-532/3
Installer upper arm rear bush
204-532/4
Removal
NOTE: The bushings must be replaced in pairs, LH and RH sides.

safety stands.
2. Remove the front wheels and tires.
3. Remove the LH upper arm.

For additional information, refer to: Upper Arm (204-01,
4. Release the heat shield for access to the upper

arm bolts.
Remove the nut.
Remove the forward bolt and loosen the
rearward bolt.
5. Loosen the upper arm bolts.
6. Disconnect the height sensor link arm.
7. CAUTION: Use a wrench on the hexagon provided to

prevent the ball joint rotating.

Discard the nut.
8. CAUTION: To prevent the wheel knuckle

falling outwards and disconnection of the
halfshaft inner joint, support the wheel
knuckle.
9. Using the special tool, release the upper arm

ball joint.
Remove and discard the retaining nut.
10. Release the brake hose from the upper arm.

11. Release the wheel speed sensor lead from the upper arm.
12. Remove the RH upper arm.
13. Note the position of the bushing in relation to the upper

arm.
14. CAUTION: The bush flanges need to be

removed to allow bush removal.
Using a suitable tool, bend over the bush

flanges.
15. Using a hacksaw, remove the flange from the bushing,

making sure the upper arm is not damaged.
16. Using the special tools, remove and discard the

upper arm bushings.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the correct special

tool is used to install the bushings to the
correct depth.
Using the special tools, install the upper arm

rear bushings.
Align the arrow on the bush with the
mark, previously made on the upper
arm.
2. Using the special tools, install the upper arm
front bushings.
Align the arrow on the bush with the
mark, previously made on the upper
arm.
3. Install the RH upper arm.

4. Secure the brake hose to the upper arm.

5. Secure the wheel speed sensor lead to the upper arm.


8. Connect the height sensor link arm.
9. Set the height distance between the centre of the halfshaft

end and the edge of the fender trim to 466 mm (18.34'').
10. Tighten the 2 upper arm nuts and bolts to 175 Nm (129
lb.ft).
11. Secure the heat shield.
12. Install the LH upper arm.

For additional information, refer to: Upper Arm (204-01,
13. Install the front wheels and tires.

Front Suspension - Lower Arm
Special Tool(s)
205-754(LRT-54-027)
Removal
1. Place vehicle into access mode.

safety stands.
4. Remove the lower ball joint retaining nut.
5. Using the special tool, release the lower ball

joint from the steering knuckle.
6. Mark the position of the bolts in relation to the

chassis brackets.
Remove the 2 bolts.
8. CAUTION: Only displace the wheel knuckle sufficiently

outboard to release the lower arm past the undertray. This
will prevent the inboard driveshaft joint from separating.
the vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure the steering is in the straight ahead

position.
Remove the lower arm.

Release the lower arm from the subframe and
reposition downwards.
Rotate the lower arm and position forward to release
from the wheel knuckle.
Installation

excessive articulation. Do not over articulate the ball joint.
Failure to follow this instruction will result in damage to
vehicle.
Connect the lower arm to the wheel knuckle.

Tighten the lower arm ball joint retaining nut to 115
Nm (85 lb.ft).
3. Set the height distance between the centre of

the halfshaft end and the edge of the fender
trim to 466 mm (18.34'').
4. Tighten the lower arm bolts to 275 Nm (203 lb.ft).
Align the bolts to the marks made previously.
5. Connect the shock absorber and spring

assembly to the lower arm.
Tighten the nut and bolt to 300 Nm
(221 lb.ft).

7. Carry out the wheel alignment procedure.

Front Suspension - Lower Arm Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Hydraulic cylinder 10t
204-598
Receiver front lower arm front bush
204-536/1
Remover front lower arm front bush
204-536/2
Remover front lower arm rear bush
204-535/2
Installer front lower arm front bush
205-536/3
205-754(LRT-54-027)
Receiver lower arm rear bush
204-535/1
Remover plate front lower arm rear bush
204-535/4
Installer lower arm rear bush
204-535/3
Installer/depth setter front lower arm rear bush
204-535/5
Removal
NOTES:
If installing the front bushes, both front bushes must be replaced.
If installing the rear bushes, both rear bushes must be replaced.
Note the orientation of the bush.
Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details
1. Make sure that the tire pressures are correct and that the
vehicle is at the correct ride height.
For additional information, refer to: Ride Height Adjustments
(204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, General Procedures).
2. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported

only by a jack. Always support the vehicle on safety stands.
3. Remove the clips and trim for access to the lower

arm camber bolts
4. For additional information, refer to: Lower Arm (204-01 Front
Suspension, Removal and Installation).
5. Secure lower arm in a suitable vice or similar to carry out the

following steps.
6. NOTE: Mark the new bush to aid correct

orientation on installation.
Mark alignment of original bush prior to removal.

Remove the lower arm front bushing flanges.
8. CAUTION: Make sure correct alignment is maintained

whilst carrying out the step.
Using the special tools, remove the bush.
9. Mark alignment of original bush before removing,

new bush to be installed with the same orientation
10.
Installation

Using the special tools install the bush.
2.
4. Refit the trim.

Front Suspension - Lower Arm Front Bushing
Special Tool(s)
204-598
204-536/1
Remover front lower arm front bush
204-536/2
Installer front lower arm front bush
204-536/3
Removal
NOTES:
If installing the front bushes, both front bushes must be installed.
Note orientation of the bush.


arm camber bolts.
5. Secure lower arm in a suitable vice or similar to carry out the

following steps.


Remove the lower arm front bushing flanges.

Installation


3. Refit the trim.

Front Suspension - Lower Arm Rear Bushing
Special Tool(s)
204-598
Remover front lower arm rear bush
204-535/2
204-535/1
Remover plate front lower arm rear bush
204-535/4
Installer front lower arm rear bush
204-535/3
Installer/depth setter front lower arm rear bush
204-535/5
Removal
NOTES:
If installing the rear bushes, both rear bushes must be installed.
Take note of the fitted position of the bush.

arm camber bolts.
4. Mark the position of the bolts in relation to the chassis brackets

making note of the original position.
5. CAUTION: Make sure the lower arm is

supported. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the ball joint.
Remove lower arm camber bolts and the lower

damper bolt and rotate arm downwards for access.
6. Using a suitable transmission jack, support the
lower arm in the position illustrated.


Installation


2. NOTE: Do not tighten the bolts at this stage.
Install the lower front arm.
3. Set the height distance between the centre of the

half shaft end and the edge of the fender trim to
466 mm (18.34") before tightening lower arm bolts.
4. Attach the lower arm.
Align the bolts to the marks made
previously.
Tighten the lower arm camber bolts to 275
Nm.
Tighten the shock absorber and spring
assembly to lower arm bolt to 300 Nm.
5. Refit the trim.

Front Suspension - Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly TDV6 2.7L
Diesel
Disassembly
WARNINGS:
Ensure the spring compressor Safe Working Load (SWL) meets or exceeds the spring rating quoted in the
Specifcations section.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (204-00, Specifications).
Always follow the spring compressor manufacturer's instructions.

safety stands.
2. Remove the shock absorber and spring assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Shock Absorber and
Spring Assembly (204-01, Removal and Installation).
3. Install a suitable spring compressor in a vise.
4. Install the shock absorber and spring assembly in the spring

compressor.
Compress the spring just sufficiently to relieve the
spring tension.
5. Remove the shock absorber.

Restrain the shock absorber spindle,
remove and discard the nut.
Remove the upper bush rebound plate
and upper bush.
Remove the upper mounting assembly.
Remove the dust tube and rebound
plate assembly.
Remove the spring aid.
6. Remove the spring from the spring compressor.
7. Clean and inspect the components for

deterioration.
To aid reassembly, mark the position of
the rubber insulator in relation to the
upper mounting plate.
Remove the rubber insulator.
Remove the spacer.
Remove the rebound plate from the dust
tube.
Assembly
1. Install the spring in the spring compressor.
Make sure the spring is installed with the
close coils positioned towards the top of the
shock absorber.
2. Install the spring aid.
3. Install the dust tube.

Install the rebound plate into the dust tube.
4. Install the shock absorber.

Make sure the spring is correctly located in the
spring seat.
5. Install the upper mounting.

Install the spacer and rubber insulator, making sure
the spacer drops over the stud heads and the
insulator is aligned with the mark made previously.
Install the upper bush and upper bush rebound
plate.

Rear Suspension -
Item Specification
Road spring color coding - 5 Seat Model:
BROWN/WHITE
BROWN/GREEN
BROWN/ORANGE
BROWN
Road spring color coding - 7 Seat Model:
RED/WHITE
RED/GREEN
RED/ORANGE
RED
Note: The first color indicates the fitted position of the spring on the vehicle i.e. rear. The secondary
color identifies the thickness of the isolator which is fitted to a particular spring to ensure that the
vehicle ride height is maintained within specified limits. Replacement springs will be supplied with
the appropriate isolator fitted.
General Specifications
Item Specification
Gap between underside of the toe link rubber boot and the integrated body frame bracket 10.0 mm (0.394 in)
Height between the center of the halfshaft end and the edge of the fender trim 485 mm (19.10 in)
Toe link bolt 175 129
* Toe link inner ball joint retaining nut 133 98
Stabilizer bar clamp bolts 62 46
Body mount retaining bolts 133 83
Shock absorber to the lower suspension arm nut and bolt 300 221
Shock absorber to suspension turret nuts 70 52
Lower arm to wheel knuckle bolt 175 129
Lower arm bolts 275 203
*+ Halfshaft nut 420 311
Upper arm to wheel knuckle nut 133 98
Upper arm front bolt 175 129
Upper arm rear bolt 275 203
Brake tube unions 18 13
Wheel speed sensor 9 7
Parking brake cable coupling 8 6
Road wheel nuts Stage 1: 4 Stage 1: -
Stage 2: 70 Stage 2: 52
* New nut must be installed
+ Nut must be staked after tightening

Rear Suspension - Rear Suspension
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Bolt (Stabilizer bar bracket) (2 off)
2 - Stabilizer bar bush
3 - Stabilizer bar bracket
4 - Self-locking nut (Stabilizer bar link to Stabilizer bar)
5 - Stabilizer link
6 - Special nut (Adjustable transverse toe link)
7 - Shock absorber assembly (Air suspension)
8 - Shock absorber assembly (Coil spring suspension)
9 - Adjustable transverse toe link
10 - Wheel knuckle and bearing assembly
11 - Washer (Adjustable transverse toe link)
12 - Bolt (Adjustable transverse toe link)
13 - Wheel bearing
14 - Circlip
15 - Wheel hub
16 - Self-locking nut (Wheel knuckle lower ball joint)
17 - Ball joint (Wheel knuckle lower)
18 - Circlip (Wheel knuckle lower ball joint)
19 - Self-locking nut (Shock absorber)
21 - Bolt (Shock absorber)
22 - Self-locking nut (Lower control arm forward bush)
23 - Bumpstop clip
24 - Bush - Forward (Lower control arm)
25 - Bumpstop clip
26 - Bolt (Lower control arm forward bush)
27 - Nut and retainer (Lower control arm rearward bush)
28 - Bush - Rearward (Lower control arm)
30 - Ball joint (Wheel knuckle upper)
31 - Cam bolt (Wheel knuckle upper ball joint)
32 - Eccentric washer (Wheel knuckle upper ball joint)
33 - Nut (Wheel knuckle upper ball joint)
34 - Self-locking nut (Stabilizer bar link to lower control arm)
35 - Caged nut (Upper control arm rearward bush)
36 - Bush - Rearward (Upper control arm)
37 - Bumpstop clip
39 - Bumpstop clip
40 - Bolt (Upper control arm forward bush)
41 - Bush - Forward (Upper control arm)
OVERVIEW
The independent rear suspension offers a reduction in unsprung weight over the beam axle design fitted to previous
Land Rover models. The rear suspension comprises an upper control arm, a lower control arm, a wheel knuckle and
wheel hub, two shock absorber assemblies and a stabilizer bar and links assembly. The shock absorber assemblies
use a similar design of Shock absorber which can be fitted with either a coil spring or an air spring.
The rear suspension control arms have been designed to give maximum ground clearance and also allow for the
adjustment of the camber using a cam bolt and adjustment of toe and bump steer via an adjustable transverse link.
SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY - AIR SUSPENSION

1 - Strap*
2 - Upper gaitor*
3 - Self-locking nut*
4 - Rebound washer*
5 - O-ring - Shock absorber rod*
6 - Spacer - Shock absorber rod*
7 - Air spring*
8 - Retaining pin - Air spring sleeve support*
9 - Bump washer*
10 - Spring aid*
11 - O-ring - Air sleeve support (2 off)*
13 - Shock absorber assembly
14 - Strap*
15 - Lower gaitor*
16 - Strap*
19 - Bush
20 - Voss connector
NOTE: * Shows service items
The shock absorber assembly comprises an air spring assembly, top mount and a shock absorber assembly. The
shock absorber and air spring are only serviceable as complete assemblies.
Shock Absorber
The shock absorber assembly is a twin tube design with the conventional coil spring replaced by the air spring. The
lower end of the shock absorber is fitted with a bush and is attached to the lower control arm with a bolt and nut.
Air Spring
The air spring is similar in design to the air spring used on the front suspension.
The air spring comprises an aluminium restraining cylinder, top mount, spring aid, air sleeve and an inner support
sleeve.
The air sleeve is made from a flexible rubber material which allows the sleeve to roll up and down the air spring
piston as the vehicle changes height. The air sleeve is attached to the restraining cylinder and the support sleeve
with crimp rings which provide an air tight seal. The support sleeve contains a seal carrier which has two O-rings
sealing the support sleeve and two O-rings sealing to the Shock absorber body. The top of the air sleeve is crimped
to the top mount which attaches to a mounting on the chassis with 3 integral studs and self-locking nuts.
during full suspension compression and assists the suspension tune. The lower end of the air spring is located over
the shock absorber body and seats on a fabricated seat on the shock absorber body. The air sleeve is positively
attached to the seat with a retaining pin. The shock absorber rod is located through a central hole in the top mount.
The rod is threaded at its outer end and accepts a self-locking nut which secures the air spring to the shock absorber
rod.
The top mount is an integral part of the air spring and is fitted with a bush and rebound washer which are located
between the top mount plate and the shock absorber rod. A self-locking nut secures the Shock absorber rod to the
top mount. The top mount attaches to a housing on the chassis with 3 integral studs and self-locking nuts. The top
mount also incorporates a 6 mm Voss air fitting which allows for the attachment of the air harness.
The air spring is fitted with two gaitors. The upper gaitor is fitted between the top mount and the air spring
restraining cylinder. The lower gaitor is secured to the lower end of the restraining cylinder and the Shock absorber
body with metal straps. The gaitors prevent dirt and debris becoming trapped between the air sleeve and the
restraining cylinder.
SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY - COIL SPRING SUSPENSION

2 - Rebound washer
4 - Spring spacer (selective)
5 - Spring isolator
6 - Bump washer
7 - Spring aid
8 - Dust tube
9 - Bump cup
10 - Coil spring
11 - Shock absorber
14 - Bush
The coil spring shock absorber assembly comprises a shock absorber, a coil spring and a top mount.
Shock Absorber
The shock absorber assembly is a similar design to the front suspension shock absorber, with a twin tube design with
an spring seat attached to the shock absorber body. The lower end of the shock absorber is fitted with a bush and is
attached to the lower control arm with a bolt and self-locking nut. The shock absorber functions by restricting the
flow of hydraulic fluid through internal galleries within the shock absorber.
The shock absorber rod moves axially within the Shock absorber, its movement limited by the flow of fluid through
the galleries, providing damping of undulations in the terrain. The shock absorber rod is sealed at its exit point from
the shock absorber body to maintain the fluid within the unit and to prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture. The
seal also incorporates a wiper to keep the rod clean.
The shock absorber rod is located through a central hole in the top mount. The rod is threaded at its outer end and a
self-locking nut secures the top mount to the Shock absorber rod.
during full suspension compression and assists the suspension tune.
Spring and Top Mount
The coil spring fitted differs with vehicle specification. Each spring is color coded to identify its rating and fitment
requirements.
The coil spring is located in a spring seat which is an integral part of the shock absorber body. The design of the
spring seat prevents the spring rotating. The opposite end of the coil spring is located in a spring isolator which is
fitted in the top mount. The spring isolator is made from rubber and prevents any noise produced during spring and
Shock absorber compression/extension from being transmitted to the vehicle body. Three types of spring isolator are
available which allow for differences in vehicle specification.
The top mount is fitted with a bush and a rebound washer which are located between the top mount plate and the
shock absorber rod. The top mount is secured to the shock absorber rod with a self-locking nut. The top mount
attaches to a housing on the vehicle chassis with three integral studs and self-locking nuts.
The spring is fitted with spring spacers which are located between the spring isolator and the top mount. The spring
spacers control the length of the spring to maintain the correct trim height. The spring spacers are color coded and
are supplied with a replacement spring.
STABILIZER BAR
1 - Right stabilizer link
2 - Stabilizer bar bush (2 off)
3 - Left stabilizer link
4 - Stabilizer bar bracket (2 off)
5 - Bolt (Stabilizer bar bracket) (2 off)
6 - Stabilizer bar
The stabilizer bar is fabricated from heat treated, solid, spring steel bar. The stabilizer bar operates, via a pair of
links, from its attachment to the lower control arms.
The stabilizer bar is located on the upper face of a combined body mount and stabilizer bar bracket which is welded
to each chassis side member. The stabilizer bar is attached to the brackets with two, Teflon lined bushes. The bushes
are fitted with brackets, which are pressed onto the bushes and secured to the chassis brackets with bolts.
The stabilizer bar has crimped, 'anti-shuffle' collars pressed into position on the inside edges of the bushes. The
collars prevent sideways movement of the stabilizer bar.
The ends of the stabilizer bar are attached to the lower control arms via links. This allows the stabilizer bar to move
with the wheel travel providing maximum effectiveness. Each link has a ball joint at each end. The top ball joint is
attached to the link at 90 degrees to the link axis and is located in a hole in the end of the stabilizer bar and secured
with a self-locking nut. The bottom ball joint is also attached to the link at 90 degrees to the axis of the link and is
located a hole in a bracket on the lower control and arm and secured with a self-locking nut. The links are not
handed and therefore can be fitted to either side of the stabilizer bar.
UPPER CONTROL ARM

1 - Bolt
2 - Bumpstop clip
3 - Forward bush
4 - Bumpstop clip
5 - Rearward bush
6 - Caged nut
7 - Self-locking nut - upper wheel knuckle ball joint
8 - Eccentric washer - upper wheel knuckle ball joint
9 - Ball joint (Wheel knuckle upper)
10 - Cam bolt - upper knuckle ball joint
The upper control arm locates in brackets on the upper surface of each chassis side member. The upper control arm
assembly comprises the control arm and two bushes. The upper control arm is a pressed and tubular steel
fabrication. Its outer end has two brackets with slotted holes which locate the upper ball joint of the wheel knuckle.
The ball joint is secured in the upper control arm with a cam bolt, eccentric washer and a self-locking nut. The cam
bolt and the eccentric washer allow for the adjustment of the wheel camber.
Two fabricated tubular housings provide the location for the forward and rearward bushes. The bushes, which are
pressed into the housings, locate between brackets on the chassis side members and are secured with bolts and
caged nuts through metal inserts in the center of the bushes.
LOWER CONTROL ARM

2 - Forward bush
4 - Bumpstop clip
5 - Bolt
6 - Nut and retainer
7 - Rearward bush
8 - Bolt
9 - Stabilizer link bracket
10 - Self-locking nut - shock absorber assembly lower attachment
11 - Bolt - shock absorber assembly lower attachment
12 - Bumpstop clip
The lower control arm locates in brackets on the lower surface of each chassis side member. The lower control arm
assembly comprises the control arm and two bushes. The lower control arm is a pressed steel fabrication. Its outer
end has two brackets which locate the lower ball joint of the wheel knuckle. The ball joint is secured with a bolt and
self-locking nut. The lower control arm also provides for the attachment of the shock absorber bush which is secured
with a bolt and a self-locking nut.
A bracket, welded to the upper surface of the lower control arm, allows for the attachment of the stabilizer bar link,
bottom ball joint which is secured with a self-locking nut.
Two fabricated tubular housings provide the location for the forward and rearward bushes. The bushes, which are
pressed into the housings, locate between brackets on the chassis side members. The forward bush is secured to the
chassis bracket with a bolt and self-locking nut. The rearward bush is secured to the chassis bracket with a bolt and
a nut and retainer. The nut and retainer allows for easy installation or removal of the bolt by removing the
requirement to hold the self-locking nut when installing or removing the bolt.
On vehicles fitted with coil springs only, a jacking bracket is located on the lower control arm.
WHEEL KNUCKLE, WHEEL HUB AND BEARING ASSEMBLY

1 - Ball joint - upper
2 - Wheel knuckle
3 - Park brake assembly attachment holes
4 - Brake caliper attachment holes
5 - Wheel bearing
6 - Circlip - wheel bearing retention
7 - Wheel hub
8 - Ball joint - lower
9 - Circlip - lower ball joint
10 - Wheel speed sensor location
11 - Wheel speed sensor cable bracket attachment
The wheel knuckle is a machined casting which is located between the upper and lower control arms. The wheel
knuckle is fitted with two ball joints which are pressed into the wheel knuckle, with the lower ball joint being secured
with a circlip. The ball joints are positioned between brackets on the upper and lower control arms and secured to
the arms with a bolt and self-locking nut.
The wheel knuckle provides the location for the rear wheel taper roller bearing, which is pressed into a machined
bore and retained with a circlip. The wheel bearing is a serviceable item. The wheel knuckle has a machined bore
which provides the location for the wheel speed sensor. Three threaded holes allow for the attachment of the park
brake assembly. A cast boss on the wheel knuckle provides positive location for the park brake assembly. Two bosses
on the wheel knuckle casting provide the attachment points for the rear brake caliper.
The wheel hub is a machined forging which is pressed into the wheel bearing in the wheel knuckle. The hub has a
splined center bore which mates with corresponding splines on the halfshaft. Five M14 studs are pressed into the
wheel hub and provide for the attachment of the road wheel with wheel nuts. Rotation of the halfshaft is passed, via
the splines, to the wheel hub which rotates on the taper roller bearing.
Rear Suspension - Rear Suspension
In comparison with the standard vehicle, the additional weight of the armour and consequently change in vehicle
geometry has dictated the following changes to the rear suspension:
new wheel knuckle

new stabilizer bar
modified air springs
modified dampers.
New wheel knuckle
Although visually similar to the standard vehicle, changes have been made internally to the air springs and
dampers:
The air springs incorporate a volume displacer which increases the spring rate in comparison to those
fitted to the standard vehicle.
The dampers feature revised internal valves to complement the revised spring rates and vehicle weight.
Software changes have also been made to the air suspension control module to restrict the 'Off-Road' height
setting.
For additional information, refer to: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension (204-05, Description and Operation).
The stabilizer bar features serviceable bushes, which are not bonded to the stabilizer bar. This allows the bushes
to be replaced without removing the stabilizer bar from the vehicle. Clamp plates surrounding the bushes secure
the stabilizer bar to the vehicle. Anti-shuffle collars are fitted to prevent lateral movement of the stabilizer bar.
Rear Suspension - Upper Arm Ball Joint
Special Tool(s)
Remover/installer rear upper arm ball joint
204-525/1
204-525/2
204-525/3
Removal

stands.
2. Remove the wheel knuckle.

For additional information, refer to: Wheel Knuckle (204-02
Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).

Position machined face against the
special tool.
Installation
2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the ball joint seal is not

damaged. A damaged seal will lead to the
premature failure of the joint.
If the push in force is less than 10 kN the
wheel knuckle must be replaced.
Using the special tools, install the ball joint.

Position machined face against the
special tool.
3. Install the wheel knuckle.


Rear Suspension - Lower Arm Ball Joint
Special Tool(s)
Ball joint remover/installer
204-516/1 (LRT-64-026/1)
204-516/2 (LRT-64-026/2)
204-516/3 (LRT-64-026/3)
204-516/4 (LRT-64-026/4)
204-506/1 (LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/3 (LRT-60-030/3)
204-506-01
204-506/5 (LRT-60-030/5)
Removal
CAUTION: The bolt securing the toe link to the wheel knuckle must not be used more than 5 times. Mark
the bolt head with a suitable centre punch.

safety stands.
4. Disconnect the toe link.

Remove the bolt.
5. Release the parking brake cable from the lower

arm.
7. Release the knuckle from the lower arm.

Remove the bolt.
8. Using the special tools, release the halfshaft

from the wheel hub.
9. Using the special tool, remove the lower arm

ball joint.
Support the wheel knuckle to give
access to the lower ball joint.
Remove and discard the snap ring.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
If the push in force is less than 17 kN the

wheel knuckle must be replaced.
Make sure the ball joint in installed from

the chamfered side of the wheel knuckle.
Using the special tool, install the lower arm ball

joint.
Install the snap ring.

the wheel hub.
3. CAUTION: Ensure the ball joint seal is not damaged. A
damaged seal will lead to the premature failure of the joint.

4. Install a new halfshaft retaining nut and lightly tighten.
5. Secure the parking brake cable.
6. CAUTION: Do not use a bolt that has been installed

more than 5 times. Check the bolt head for centre punch
marks. A bolt head with 4 centre punch marks indicates the
bolt has been installed 5 times and must be replaced.
Connect the toe link.

Mark the bolt head with a centre punch, to indicate
the number of times it has been used.
7. Tighten the halfshaft retaining nut to 350 Nm (258 lb.ft).


Rear Suspension - Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Special Tool(s)
Rear wheel bearing remover/installer
204-509/10(LRT-60-033/10)
205-802/1
205-802/2
205-802/3
205-802/4
205-802/5
Removal

safety stands.

2. Remove the wheel knuckle.
3. Remove the adjuster and return spring.
4. Remove the primary brake shoe.

Remove the hold-down spring and
retaining pin.
Pivot the shoe to release it from the
spreader plate and return spring.
5. Remove the spreader plate and spring.
6. Remove the return spring.
7. Remove the secondary brake shoe.

Remove the hold-down spring and
retaining pin.
Disconnect the parking brake cable
retaining spring from the brake shoe
lever.
8. Using the special tools, remove the drive
flange.
9. Remove the brake disc dust shield.

10. Using the special tools, remove the wheel

bearing.
Remove the circlip.
Installation
2. Using the special tools, install the wheel

bearing.
3. CAUTION: Make sure that the bearing seal

is not damaged when installing the circlip.
Install the circlip.
4. Install the brake disc dust shield.

5. WARNING: Do not use compressed air to clean brake

components. Dust from friction materials can be harmful if
inhaled.
Clean the backing plate and apply grease to the brake shoe
contacts.
6. Clean the adjuster and set it to its minimum extension.
7. Install the secondary brake shoe.

Connect the parking brake cable retaining spring to
the brake shoe lever, making sure the spring is not
twisted.
Install the hold-down spring and retaining pin.
8. Install the primary brake shoe.

Install the spreader plate and the spring.
Install the return spring.
Install the hold-down spring and retaining pin.
9. Install the return spring.
10. Install the brake shoe adjuster.
11. Using the special tools, install the drive

flange.
12. Install the wheel knuckle.

Rear Suspension - Rear Stabilizer Bar
Removal
CAUTION: It is possible to install the stabilizer bar incorrectly. Note the position of the stabilizer bar before
removal.

safety stands.
3. Remove the rear bumper cover.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper Cover
(501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
4. Remove the spare wheel and tire.
5. Raise the vehicle.
6. Remove the rear wheels and tires.

Release both stabilizer bar links.

8. Remove the body mount retaining bolts.

Remove the 8 bolts.
9. CAUTION: Only raise the body sufficiently to remove

the body mount.
Carefully raise the body.

Using suitable stands, raise the body to release the
body mounts.
10. Remove the 2 rear body mounts.

Remove the stabilizer bar clamps.
Remove the 4 bolts.
12. CAUTION: Mark the position of the

stabilizer bar.
Remove the stabilizer bar.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the stabilizer bar is correctly

installed.
Install the stabilizer bar.
2. Install the stabilizer bar bushing.
3. Install the stabilizer bar bushing and clamps.

4. Install the body mounts.
5. Lower the body.

Remove the stands.
6. Install the body mount retaining bolts.

Tighten the 8 retaining bolts to 133 Nm (98 lb.ft).
7. Attach both stabilizer bar links.


10. Install the spare wheel and tire.
11. Install the rear bumper cover.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper Cover
(501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
Rear Suspension - Upper Arm Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Remover/installer - rear suspension upper arm front bushing
204-528/1
204-528/2
204-528/3
Remover/installer rear suspension upper arm rear bushing
204-527/1
204-527/2
204-527/3
Removal

safety stands.
3. CAUTION: Always plug any open connections to

prevent contamination.
Remove the brake tube.

Disconnect the 2 brake tube unions.
Remove the brake hose clips and release the hoses.
Release the brake tube from the clip.
4. Disconnect the height sensor link.
5. Release the wheel speed sensor lead.
6. Remove the LH upper arm.

Loosen the upper arm bolts.
Mark the position of the bolt in relation
to the upper arm.
Disconnect the upper arm from the
wheel knuckle.
Remove the upper arm bolts.
7. Remove the RH upper arm.

8. Mark the position of the bushing in relation to the upper

arm.
9. Using the special tools, remove and discard the rear upper
arm front bushing.
10. Using the special tools, remove and discard the rear upper
arm rear bushing.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the bush is correctly aligned.
Make sure the correct special tool is used to install the

bushings to the correct depth.
Using the special tools, install the rear upper arm front
bushing.
2. CAUTION: Make sure the bush is correctly aligned.
Using the special tools, install the rear upper arm rear
bushing.
3. CAUTION: Make sure that bumpstop

inserts are fitted on both sides of the
front bushing prior to installation of the
arm. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the bushing.
NOTE: Bumpstop inserts are installed to

both sides of the bushing.
Check the bumpstop inserts are correctly

installed.
4. Install the LH upper arm.

5. Set the height between the center of the

halfshaft end and the edge of the fender trim
to 485 mm (19.10'').
Support with an axle stand.
6. CAUTION: Make sure the ball joint seal is not

damaged. A damaged seal will lead to the premature failure
of the joint.
Connect the upper arm and wheel knuckle.

Align the bolt to the marks made previously.
7. Tighten the upper arm front bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
8. Tighten the upper arm rear bolt to 275 Nm (203 lb.ft).
9. Secure the wheel speed sensor lead.
10. Secure the brake pad wear indicator sensor lead.
12. Install the brake tube.

Tighten the brake tube unions to 18 Nm (13 lb.ft).
13. Install the RH upper arm.


Rear Suspension - Rear Stabilizer Bar Link
Removal

safety stands.

Remove the stabilizer bar link.

Installation

Rear Suspension - Lower Arm
Removal

safety stands.

Release the stabilizer bar link.

4. Loosen the 2 lower arm bolts.
5. Disconnect the shock absorber and spring assembly from

the lower arm.
6. Release the parking brake cable.
7. Remove the 2 lower arm bolts.

Release the knuckle from the lower arm.

Remove the bolt.
9. Remove the lower arm.
Installation


installed.




lower arm.
5. Set the height between the center of the

halfshaft end and the edge of the fender trim
to 485 mm (19.10'').
6. Tighten the lower arm bolts to 275 Nm (203 lb.ft).
7. Secure the parking brake cable.
8. Connect the stabilizer link.



Rear Suspension - Upper Arm
Removal

safety stands.

Remove the brake tube.

Disconnect the 2 brake tube unions.
Remove the brake hose clips and release the hoses.
Release the brake tube from the clip.
4. Disconnect the height sensor link.
5. Release the wheel speed sensor lead.
6. RH side only: Release the brake pad wear

indicator sensor lead.

Loosen the upper arm bolts.
to the upper arm.
Remove the nut and bolt, then release
the upper arm from the wheel knuckle.
Remove the upper arm bolts.
Installation



installed.

3. Set the height, between the center of the

halfshaft end and the edge of the fender trim,
to 463 mm (18.23 inches).
Support with an axle stand.
of the joint.
Connect the upper arm and wheel knuckle.

5. Tighten the upper arm front bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
6. Tighten the upper arm rear bolt to 275 Nm (203 lb.ft).
7. Secure the wheel speed sensor lead.
8. Secure the brake pad wear indicator sensor lead.
10. Install the brake tube.

11. Bleed the brake system.

For additional information, refer to: Component Bleeding
(206-00 Brake System - General Information, General
Procedures).


Rear Suspension - Toe Link
Removal

safety stands.

Remove and discard the bolt.
4. Remove the toe link.

Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the toe link anti-rotation tang is

fully seated in the integrated body frame before tightening
the toe link retaining nut. Failure to follow this instruction
will result in damage to the toe link or integrated body
frame.
Install the toe link.

Install a new nut and lightly tighten.
2. Connect the toe link.

Using a M14 X 2 tap, cean the threads of the knuckle
fixing hole. Blow out debris with an air-line.
Tighten the new bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
3. Set the gap, between the underside of the toe

link rubber boot and the integrated body frame
bracket, to 10 mm (0.473 in).
Tighten the toe link inner ball joint
retaining nut to 133 Nm (98 lb.ft)


Rear Suspension - Lower Arm Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Receiver rear lower arm front bush
204-526/1
Remover rear lower arm front bush
204-526/2
Installer rear lower arm front bush
204-526/3
Receiver rear lower arm rear bush
204-540/1
Remover rear lower arm rear bush
204-540/2
Installer rear lower arm rear bush
204-540/3
Removal

safety stands.
3. Remove the LH lower arm.

For additional information, refer to: Lower Arm (204-02
4. Remove the RH lower arm.
5. Note the position of the bushing in relation to the lower

arm.
6. CAUTION: The bush flanges need to be removed to

allow bush removal.
NOTE: Take note of the fitted position of the bush.
Using a suitable tool, bend over the bush flanges.
7. Using a hacksaw, remove the flange from the

bushing, making sure the upper arm is not
damaged.

lower arm rear bushings.

lower arm front bushings.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the bush is correctly aligned.
Make sure the correct special tool is used

to install the bushings to the correct depth.
Using the special tools, install the lower arm

front bushings
2. CAUTION: Make sure the bush is correctly

aligned.
Using the special tools, install the lower arm

rear bushings.



installed.
4. Install the LH lower arm.

For additional information, refer to: Lower Arm (204-02
5. Install the RH lower arm.


Rear Suspension - Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly TDV6 2.7L
Diesel
Removal

safety stands.

Using a jack and a block of wood,
support the base of the shock absorber.
5. Remove the shock absorber and spring

assembly retaining nuts.
Installation

lower arm.


Rear Suspension - Wheel Knuckle
Special Tool(s)
204-506/1(LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/2(LRT-60-030/2)
204-506/3(LRT-60-030/3)
204-506/5(LRT-60-030/5)
204-506-01(LRT-60-030/4)
Removal
NOTE: If a new knuckle is installed a new wheel bearing must be installed.

safety stands.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Disc (206-04
Rear Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
5. Release the parking brake cable.

Disconnect the parking brake cable from
the brake shoe lever.
Disconnect the parking brake cable from
the backplate.
Release the cable from the lower arm.

knuckle.

9. CAUTION: Make sure the ball joint seal is

not damaged. A damaged seal will lead to the

Remove the bolt.


from the wheel hub.

Disconnect the upper arm from the wheel

knuckle.
to the upper arm.
Discard the nut.

of the joint.
Remove the wheel knuckle.

Installation

of the joint.
Install the wheel knuckle.

Locate the halfshaft.


the wheel hub.

of the joint.



9. Locate the parking brake cable to the backplate.

Connect the cable to the brake shoe lever.
Tighten the coupling to 8 Nm (6 lb.ft).
Secure the parking brake cable to the lower arm.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Disc (206-04
Rear Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).

the component.

lb.ft).

Tighten the wheel nuts in the sequence
shown:
1. 1. Stage 1: 4 Nm
2. 2. Stage 2: 70 Nm
3. 3. Stage 3: 140 Nm
Rear Suspension - Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly TDV6 2.7L
Diesel
Disassembly
WARNING: Ensure the spring compressor Safe Working Load (SWL) meets or exceeds the spring rating
quoted in the Specifcations section.
1. Raise and support the vehicle.

4. Install a suitable spring compressor in a vise.
5. Install the shock absorber and spring assembly in the spring

compressor.
Compress the spring just sufficiently to relieve the
spring tension.
6. Remove the shock absorber.

Restrain the shock absorber spindle,
remove and discard the nut.
Remove the upper bush rebound plate
and upper bush.
Remove the upper mounting assembly.
Remove the dust tube and rebound
plate assembly.
Remove the spring aid.
7. Remove the spring from the spring compressor.
Assembly
1. Clean and inspect the components for
deterioration.
Remove the rubber insulator.
Remove the spacer.
Remove the rebound plate from the dust
tube.
2. Install the spring in the spring compressor.
Make sure the spring is installed with
the close coils positioned towards the
top of the shock absorber.
3. Install the spring aid.
4. Install the dust tube.

Install the rebound plate into the dust tube.
5. Install the shock absorber.

Make sure the spring is correctly located in the
spring seat.
6. Install the upper mounting.

Install the spacer and rubber insulator,
making sure the spacer drops over the
stud heads.
Install the upper bush and upper bush
rebound plate.
Install a new nut and tighten to 98 Nm
(72 lb.ft).


Wheels and Tires -
Wheels
Wheel type Wheel size
Alloy wheel 7J x 17
Alloy wheel 8J x 18
Alloy wheel 8J x 19
Alloy wheel 8.5J x 20
Reduced size spare wheel - Steel 5.5J x 19
CAUTIONS:
With reduced size spare wheel fitted, do not exceed 50 mph (80 kph) and replace with standard size wheel
at earliest opportunity.
Do not use power tools when operating the spare wheel winch, raise and lower winch manually using hand
tools only.
Tire Sizes - Standard Fit
Wheel size Tire size Tire load index
7J x 17 - Alloy 235/70 R17H - All terrain 111
8J x 18 - Alloy 255/60 R18V - All terrain 112
8J x 19 - Alloy 255/55 R19V - All terrain 111
8.5J x 20 - Alloy 255/50 R20Y - All terrain 109
CAUTION: Inner tubes must not be fitted with any of these tires.
Tire Sizes - Accessory Fit
Wheel size Tire size Tire load index
8J x 19 - Alloy 255/55 R19 - Mud terrain 111
8J x 19 - Alloy 255/55 R19 - Sand 111
CAUTION: Inner tubes must not be fitted with any of these tires.
Tire Pressures - Not NAS/Gulf/Brazil Vehicles
Loading condition bars lbf/in² kPa
Normal operating conditions - Up to 4 people:
Front 2.3 33 230
Rear 2.5 36 250
Vehicle loaded to maximum gross vehicle weight:
Front 2.5 36 250
Rear 2.9 42 290
Reduced size spare wheel 4.2 60 420
* Standard size spare wheel 2.9 42 290
CAUTION: * The standard size spare wheel tire should be inflated to the maximum gross vehicle weight
pressure and the pressure for the front or rear wheel locations must be adjusted accordingly if the wheel is to be
used under conditions other than with the vehicle loaded to maximum gross vehicle weight.
Tire Pressures - NAS/Gulf/Brazil Vehicles
Loading condition bars lbf/in² kPa
All conditions
Front 2.5 36 250
Rear 2.9 42 290
Reduced size spare wheel 4.2 60 420
* Standard size spare wheel 2.9 42 290
CAUTION: The standard size spare tyre should be inflated to the highest recommended pressure when
stored on the vehicle. The inflation pressure must be adjusted to suit the axle location when the spare is used to
replace a punctured road tyre."
General Specification
Item Make Location
Tire low pressure sensor Continental/Siemens On inside of wheel rim
Tire pressure sensor
initiator:
Front Continental/Siemens Attached to the fender splash shield adjacent to the front
bumper
Rear Continental/Siemens Attached to the fender splash shield adjacent to the rear
bumper
Recommended Lubricant
Application Land Rover Part No.
Wheel hub spigot RYL 105020
* Road wheel nuts 140 103
Tire low pressure sensor 8 6
* Wheel nuts must be tightened by diagonal selection
Wheels and Tires - Wheels and Tires
TIRES
NOTE: The TPMS valve should be serviced using the suitable service kit, each time the tyre is dismounted, to
ensure an air tight seal. Attention should be made to the detail of fitting this kit.
Care must be taken when removing and refitting tires to ensure that the tire pressure sensor is not damaged.

1 - Tire valve and pressure sensor
2 - Tire fitting/removal tool initial start position
3 - High tire and bead tension area
4 - Low tire and bead tension area
When removing the tire, the bead breaker must not be used within 90 degrees of the tire valve in each direction.
When using the tire removal machine, the fitting arm start position must be positioned as shown in the tire changing
illustration. The wheel can then be rotated through 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction. This will relieve the
high tension from the tire bead allowing the remaining 180 degrees of the tire to be manually pulled from the rim.
When refitting the tire, position the fitting arm as shown. Rotate the tire and take care that the bead on the low
tension side of the tire does not damage the sensor.
Tread Act - NAS Only
Vehicles supplied to the North American markets must comply with the legislation of the Transport Recall
Enhancement, Accountability and Documentation (TREAD) act. Part of the requirement of the TREAD act is for the
vehicle to display a label, positioned on the driver's side B-pillar, which defines the recommended tire inflation
pressure, load limits and maximum load of passengers and luggage weight the vehicle can safely carry. This label
will be specific to each individual vehicle and will be installed on the production line.
This label must not be removed from the vehicle. The label information will only define the specification of the vehicle
as it came off the production line. It will not include dealer or owner fitted accessory wheels and tires of differing size
from the original fitment.
NOTE: If tires and wheels of a non-standard size are fitted to the vehicle, the car configuration file must be
updated using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
If the label is damaged or removed for body repair, it must be replaced with a new label specific to that vehicle. A
new label is requested from Land Rover parts and will be printed specifically for the supplied VIN of the vehicle.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System - Component Location

1 - RH (right-hand) front initiator
2 - Instrument cluster
3 - TPMS RF receiver
4 - RH rear tire pressure sensor
5 - RH rear initiator
6 - Spare tire pressure sensor
7 - LH (left-hand) rear initiator
8 - LH rear tire pressure sensor
9 - CJB (central junction box)
10 - EJB (engine junction box)
11 - LH front tire pressure sensor
12 - LH front initiator
13 - RH front tire pressure sensor
The purpose of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is to assist the driver in maintaining the vehicle’s tire
pressures at the optimum level in order to:
improve fuel consumption

maintain ride and handling characteristics
reduce the risk of rapid tire deflation – which may be caused by under inflated tires
comply with legislation in relevant markets.
The TPMS measures the pressure in each of the tires on the vehicle (including the spare, if required) and issues
warnings to the driver if any of the pressures deviate from defined tolerances.
NOTES:
During a ‘blow out’ a very rapid reduction in pressure is experienced. The system is not intended to warn the
driver of a ‘blow out’, since it is not possible to give the driver sufficient warning that such an event is occurring, due
to its short duration. The design of the TPMS is to assist the driver in keeping the tires at the correct pressure, which
will tend to reduce the likelihood of a tire ‘blow out’ occurring.
TPMS is inhibited when the vehicle is in Delivery mode. For more details on Delivery mode refer to the PDI
manual.
A single TPMS hardware configuration is used. TPMS status information is relayed to the driver with a message
displayed in the instrument cluster message center and a amber warning indicator.
Tire Location
Because of the requirement for different pressure targets and thresholds for the front and rear tires, the CJB can
identify the location of the tires on the vehicle, and assign a received tire pressure sensor identification to a specific
position on the vehicle (i.e. FL (front left), FR (front right), RL (rear left) or RR (rear right)).
Tire location is performed automatically by the CJB using an auto-location function. This function requires no manual
intervention by the driver. The CJB can automatically learn the position of tires on the vehicle if the tire pressure
sensors or their positions are changed on the vehicle.
The tire learn and location process is ready to commence when the vehicle has been stationary or is traveling at less
than 12 mph (20 km/h) for 15 minutes. This is known as 'parking mode'. The learn/locate process requires the
vehicle to be driven at speeds of more than 12 mph (20 km/h) for 15 minutes. If the vehicle speed reduces to below
12 mph (20 km/h), the learn process timer is suspended until the vehicle speed increases to more than 12 mph (20
km/h), after which time the timer is resumed. If the vehicle speed remains below 12 mph (20 km/h) for more than
15 minutes, the timer is set to zero and process starts again.
The CJB can automatically detect, under all operating conditions, the following:
one or more tire pressure sensors have been replaced

one or more tire pressure sensor identifications are missing
one or more ‘alien’ identifications are being received, i.e. the CJB can reject identifications from tire pressure
sensors that do not belong to the vehicle
the spare tire and one of the tires in use on the vehicle have exchanged position on the vehicle.
If the tire pressure sensors fitted to the running wheels (not the spare) are changed, the CJB can learn the new
sensor identifications automatically. The learn function requires no manual intervention by the driver.
If a new sensor is fitted to the spare tire it must have its identification code programmed into the CJB using a Land
Rover approved diagnostic system, or used on the vehicle as a 'running' wheel and the vehicle driven for 15 minutes
at more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h).
Spare Tire Identification
Depending on the vehicle specification, the spare tire may or may not be fitted with a tire pressure sensor.
NOTE: Tire pressure sensors cannot be fitted to steel space saver spare wheels.
If the spare tire is fitted with a tire pressure sensor, the CJB can detect it, determine that it is the spare tire and
monitor its pressure and issue warnings to the driver accordingly. If the CJB expects the spare tire to be fitted with a
tire pressure sensor and it does not, the CJB will not show a fault to the driver, however a fault code will be stored in
the CJB.
If the spare tire is being monitored and the driver replaces a flat ‘running’ tire with the spare tire, the CJB will not
continually warn the driver that the original flat tire (now in the spare position) is flat. This prevents distraction of the
driver by constant pressure warnings being issued. The driver is reminded by a message displayed for 20 seconds at
each ignition on cycle that the spare tire is flat.
System Operation
Each time the vehicle is driven, the CJB transmits a Low Frequency (LF) (125 KHz) signal to each initiator in turn.
This is received by the tire pressure sensor which transmits a Radio Frequency (RF) (315 or 433 MHz depending on
market) signal to the RF receiver. This signal contains coded data which corresponds to sensor identification, air
pressure, air temperature and acceleration data. This signal is communicated to the CJB via a K-bus line.
The system enters 'parking mode' after the vehicle speed has been less than 12.5 mph (20 km/h) for 12 minutes. In
parking mode the tire pressure sensors transmit a coded signal to the CJB once every 13 hours. If the tire pressure
decreases by more than 1 lbf/in2 (0.6 bar) the sensor will transmit more often if pressure is being lost.
The spare tire sensor transmits a signal every 13 hours in the same manner as the road wheels when in parking
mode. If the tire pressure decreases by more than 1 lbf/in2 (0.6 bar) the sensor will transmit more often if pressure
is being lost.
As each wheel responds to the LF signal from the CJB, it is assigned a position on the vehicle and is monitored for
the remainder of that drive cycle in that position.
When the vehicle has been parked for more than 15 minutes and then driven at a speed of more than 12.5 mph (20
km/h), the initiators fire in turn for 18 seconds in the following order:
Front left
6 second pause (for the to detect a response from the tire pressure sensor)
Front right
6 second pause
Rear right
6 second pause
Rear left
6 second pause.
Each tire pressure sensor responds in turn so the CJB can establish the sensor positions at the start of the drive
cycle. This process is repeated up to three times but less if the sensor positions are already known in the CJB. The
process is known as 'Auto Location' and takes 7 to 8 minutes to complete. During this period the tire sensors
transmit at regular intervals, once every 15 seconds. For the remainder of the drive cycle the tire sensors transmit
once every 60 seconds or if a change in tire pressure is sensed until the vehicle stops and the system returns to
parking mode.
Once the wheel position is established, the initiators stop firing a signal and do not fire again until the vehicle has
been parked for more than 15 minutes. The signal transmissions from each wheel sensor continue at 1 minute
intervals whilst the vehicle is being driven. This transmission is to monitor the tire pressure.
At 25% deflation the amber warning indicator in the instrument cluster is illuminated and an appropriate message
displayed in the message center.
RF Receiver
The RF receiver is mounted behind the overhead console and connects to the vehicle harness via a fly lead.
The RF receiver receives transmissions from each of the tire pressure sensors via an internal antenna. This
information is then communicated to the CJB via a dedicated Local Interconnect Network (K-bus).
Initiator
The initiators are located at the front of the front wheel arches and at the rear of the rear wheel arches and are
secured with two scrivets. The TPMS has four initiators and each has a connector which connects with the body
harness.
The initiator is a passive, Low Frequency (LF) transmitter. Each initiator provides an auto-location feature to identify
tire positions on the vehicle and transmit that data to the CJB.
The CJB energizes each initiator in turn using LF drivers. The corresponding tire pressure sensor detects the resulting
LF transmission and responds by initiating an RF transmission of its data. This data is received by the RF receiver
and communicated to the CJB via a K-bus. The CJB can then determine which sensor is transmitting and its location
on the vehicle.
Tire Pressure Sensor
The TPMS system uses ‘active’ tire pressure sensors which are mounted on each wheel, inside the tire cavity. The
sensor is retained in position by the valve attachment to the wheel structure. The sensors transmit their RF signals at
either 315 MHz or 433 MHz dependent on market requirements.
The sensors periodically measure the pressure and temperature of the air inside the tire plus the centripetal
acceleration acting on the sensor. These measurements are transmitted periodically to the RF receiver located behind
the overhead console.
The tire pressure sensors are self-contained units which have no electrical connections into or out of the sensor.
The care points detailed in the 'Tires' section of this chapter must be followed to avoid damage to the sensor. If the
sensor is replaced, the nut, seal and washer must also be replaced and the sensor tightened to the correct torque
value as given in the Service Repair manual.
The RF transmission from the sensor contains a unique identification code in its transmission data, so that the CJB
can identify the tire on the vehicle. If the sensor is replaced on a 'running' wheel, the new sensor identification will
be learnt when the vehicle is first driven at a speed of more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h) for 15 minutes. If a new
sensor is fitted to the spare wheel, the identification for that sensor must be programmed into the CJB using a Land
Rover approved diagnostic system or that wheel will not be monitored. The code is provided on a label with the
complete wheel and tire assembly when new and is also printed on the casing of each sensor.
The replacement spare wheel may also be programmed to the vehicle by using it as a 'running' wheel for 15 minutes
at more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h), then replacing it to the spare wheel position.
In order to conserve battery power, the tire sensor module uses different transmission rates when the wheel is
stationary or moving. The wheel speed required to change between the stationary and moving transmission rates is
very low to allow for the requirement for slow off-road driving.
Instrument Cluster Indications

1 - Message center
2 - Amber warning indicator
The warning indications to the driver are common on all vehicles fitted with TPMS. Warnings are conveyed by an
amber light emitting diode (LED) warning indicator and a text message displayed in the message center.
The warning indicator and message center are driven by CAN messages from the CJB. The warning indicator is
illuminated by the cluster software for 3 seconds when the vehicle is in power mode 6 for a bulb check.
For additional information, refer to: Information and Message Center (413-08, Description and Operation).
Controller Area Network (CAN)
The CJB sends and receives a number of digital messages via the medium speed controller area network (CAN). The
received messages are used for the operation of the TPMS. The transmitted messages comprise of TPMS status and
requests to the instrument cluster to illuminate warnings indicators and/or display messages in the message center.
Transmitted Messages
The CJB transmits the messages shown in the following table.
Message Received By
TPMS diagnostic response A Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
TPMS amber warning indicator request at 25% tire deflation Instrument cluster
TPMS message display request Instrument cluster
Diagnostics
The CJB has a diagnostic connection via the medium speed CAN to enable system status and faults to be retrieved
using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
Additionally, an on-board diagnostic routine within the CJB constantly monitors the system and alerts the driver to
system faults by illuminating the amber warning indicator and/or displaying a message in the instrument cluster
message center.
Fault Detection
If a sensor fails, the amber warning indicator in the instrument cluster will be illuminated. A message 'XX Tyre Not
Monitored' will be displayed in the message center in addition to the amber warning indicator.
NOTE: 'XX' is the tire position on the vehicle, e.g. FL (front left), FR (front right), RL (rear left) or RR (rear
right).
If more than one sensor fails or the CJB develops a fault, the amber warning indicator will be illuminated. A message
'Tyre Monitoring System Fault' will be displayed in the message center in addition to the amber warning indicator.
This fault could also be caused if RF interference near the vehicle affects the system signal reception. When the
interference has ceased, the fault will be automatically cancelled and the TPMS will operate normally.
If a tire pressure sensor battery voltage becomes low, the sensor transmits a message to the CJB. The CJB stores
the low battery condition as a fault flag in its memory with no other visual warnings displayed. If the battery fails, the
sensor will stop transmitting and the CJB will transmit a message to display 'FL Tyre Not Monitored' for example in
the message center. The dealer should interrogate the CJB for the fault flag using a Land Rover approved diagnostic
system to determine the cause of the message. If the battery has failed, the sensor must be replaced and the stored
fault flags removed using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system. The CJB will learn the identification of the new
sensor when the vehicle is driven. If the replaced sensor is fitted to the spare wheel (if fitted), its identification must
be manually programmed into the CJB using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system or by using it as a 'running'
wheel for 15 minutes at more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h), then replacing it to the spare wheel position.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; B = K-Bus; F = RF Transmission; N = Medium Speed CAN Bus; W = LF Transmission

1 - Battery
2 - RH rear initiator
3 - LH rear initiator
4 - RH front initiator
5 - LH front initiator
6 - Spare tire pressure sensor
7 - RH rear tire pressure sensor
8 - LH rear tire pressure sensor
9 - RH front tire pressure sensor
10 - LH front tire pressure sensor
11 - TPMS RF receiver
12 - Instrument Cluster
13 - CJB
14 - EJB
Wheels and Tires - Wheels and Tires
Principles of Operation
For a detailed description of the wheels and tires, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Wheels and Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Description and Operation) /
Wheels and Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Description and Operation).
1. Verify the customer complaint. As much information as possible should be gathered from the driver to
assist in diagnosing the cause(s). Confirm which of the following two warning types (A or B) exist for the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System when the ignition status is switched from 'OFF' to 'ON'
(A) Check Tire Pressure Warnings. A low tire pressure warning will continuously illuminate
the low tire pressure warning lamp. This warning may be accompanied by a text message such as
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE (refer to owner literature). The manufacturer approved diagnostic system
does NOT need to be used. Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are not generated with this type of
warning. To extinguish this warning it is essential that, with the ignition 'ON', all vehicle tires
(including the spare) are to be set to the correct pressure as stated in the vehicle handbook or as
indicated on the placard label in the passenger/driver door aperture. It is not necessary to drive
the vehicle to clear 'check tire pressure' warnings - just changing the tire pressure
causes the tire low pressure sensor to transmit new data.
NOTES:
The tire pressures should be set by:
Using a calibrated tire pressure gauge

With 'cold' tires (vehicle parked in the ambient temperature for at least one hour, not in a
garage with an artificial ambient temperature)
If the tire pressure warning does not clear within two minutes, it is likely that the gauge is
not correctly calibrated or the tires are 'warm'. Carry out the following steps until the warning has
cleared:
Rotate wheels approximately 180 degrees

Increase the tire pressures by 3psi
Wait a further two minutes
When the tires are at ambient temperature and a calibrated gauge is available, reset the
tire pressures to the correct pressure.
Tire pressure adjustments are part of routine owner maintenance. Tire pressure adjustments
that are required due to a lack of owner maintenance are not to be claimed under vehicle
warranty.
(B) System Fault Warnings. When a system fault is detected, the low tire pressure warning
lamp will flash for approximately 75 seconds prior to being continuously illuminated. Visually
inspect wheel arch Tire Pressure Monitoring System Antennas and check for system DTCs. External
visual damage to the tire low pressure sensors and air leaks will not cause system fault warnings
(note: nut and seal system should be replaced at each tyre change using the available service kit).
Check for the presence of tire low pressure sensors on all four wheels (note: a tire low pressure
sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a rubber one).
2. Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Central Junction Box (CJB) (100-00 General Information,
Description and Operation).
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : U201F11 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER

DATA LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
TEST CONDITIONS DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
A1: U201F11 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
1 Ignition OFF.
2 Disconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Receiver electrical connector, C2875.
3 Measure the resistance between
C2875, harness side Battery

Pin 1 Negative terminal
Is the resistance less than 5 Ohms?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
GO to A3.
A2: U201F11 CHECK THE EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Disconnect the Body Control Module electrical connector, C0580.

Pin 1 Negative terminal
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit in wiring harness.
No
GO to A4.
A3: U201F11 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER FOR SHORT
CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Reconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Receiver electrical connector, C2875.
2 Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system run On Demand Self Test (0x0202).
Is the DTC U201F11 set?
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.
No
Investigate possible cause of intermittent failure.
A4: U201F11 CHECK THE BODY CONTROL MODULE FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Reconnect the Body Control Module electrical connector, C0580.
Yes
Replace Body Control Module.
No
PINPOINT TEST B : U201F12 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER

DATA LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO POWER
B1: U201F12 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO POWER
1 Ignition OFF.

Pin 1 Positive terminal
Yes
GO to B2.
No
GO to B3.
B2: U201F12 CHECK THE EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER

Pin 1 Positive terminal
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit in wiring harness.
No
GO to B4.
B3: U201F12 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER FOR SHORT
CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.
No
B4: U201F12 CHECK THE BODY CONTROL MODULE FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST C : U201F87 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER

DATA LINE MISSING MESSAGE
C1: U201F87 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE MISSING MESSAGE
Yes
GO to C2.
No
C2: U201F87 CHECK EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT
1 Ignition OFF.
C2875, harness side C0580, harness side

Pin 1 Pin 25
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
REPAIR the high resistance/open circuit in wiring harness.
C3: U201F87 CHECK EXTERNAL RECEIVER
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.GO to C4.
No
C4: U201F87 CHECK BODY CONTROL MODULE.
Yes
No
Test is complete. No further action is required.
PINPOINT TEST D : C1A5693, C1A5893, C1A6093, C1A6293 DEFECTIVE RUNNING TIRE LOW
PRESSURE SENSOR OR RECEIVER
TEST DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
CONDITIONS
D1: C1A5693, C1A5893, C1A6093, C1A6293 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL DTCS
1 Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system check for additional DTCs C1A5693,
C1A5893, C1A6093, C1A6293, with identical time stamps.
Have all four DTCs logged with identical time stamps in the Body Control module?
Yes
Diagnose and fix DTCs related to the tire pressure monitoring receiver.
No
Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform diagnostic routine to verify
reception of all tire low pressure sensors, by carrying out 'TPMS wheel unit & receiver
reception test' from set up and configuration application and complete remedial actions.
PINPOINT TEST E : C1D1800 LOCALIZATION FAILURE

CONDITIONS
E1: C1D1800 ESTABLISH THE LOCATIONS OF THE TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR LOCALIZATION
FAILURES
NOTE: To clear or reset information read in datalogger signal 'Unsuccessful wheel position
triggering statistic' (0x4149) Use manufacturer approved diagnostic system and carry out 'Reset/
Clear Specified Function' (0x040E) from Special Applications.
1 Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system read datalogger signal 'Unsuccessful wheel
position triggering statistic' (0x4149) to establish the locations of the tire low pressure sensor
localization failures.
Have the locations of the tire low pressure sensor localization failures been identified?
Yes
GO to E2.
No
E2: C1D1800 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LF INITIATOR CIRCUIT DTCS
C1A5714, C1A5912, C1A5914, C1A6112, C1A6114, C1A6312, C1A6314.
Are any of the following DTCs logged C1A5712, C1A5714, C1A5912, C1A5914, C1A6112,
C1A6114, C1A6312, C1A6314?
Yes
Refer to the DTC Index. Check for possible causes for each of the logged DTCs and carry out
the repair operations specified.
No
GO to E3.
E3: C1D1800 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR DTCS
C1A5893, C1A6093, C1A6293, C1D2105.
Are any of the following DTCs logged C1A5693, C1A5893, C1A6093, C1A6293, C1D2105?
Yes
Refer to the DTC Index. Check for possible causes for each of the logged DTCs and carry out
the repair operations specified.
No
GO to E4.
E4: C1D1800 CHECK INITIATORS ARE CORRECTLY INSTALLED
1 Check for correct installation of Initiators for the locations identified. REFER to: (204-04
Wheels and Tires)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna (Removal and Installation),
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna (Removal and Installation).
Are the Initiators correctly installed?
Yes
GO to E5.
No
Install Initiators to the correct locations.
E5: C1D1800 CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT IN INITIATOR HARNESS
1 Ignition OFF.
2 Disconnect the Body Control Module electrical connector, C0584 (Front LF Initiators).
3 Disconnect the Body Control Module electrical connector, C0586 (Rear LF Initiators).
4 Measure the resistance of Front Right Hand Initiator.

Pin 1 Pin 2
5 Measure the resistance of Front Left Hand Initiator.

Pin 14 Pin 15
6 Measure the resistance of Rear Right Hand Initiator.

Pin 30 Pin 31
7 Measure the resistance of Rear Left Hand Initiator.

Pin 18 Pin 19
Are any of the Initiator resistance measurements less than 1 Ohm?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit as required.
No
Install the correct tire low pressure sensor, of correct frequency, in accordance with that
defined in the manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor
application, to the position(s) identified.
REFER to: Tire Low Pressure Sensor (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
PINPOINT TEST F : C1D2105 MISSING, INCOMPATIBLE OR DEFECTIVE RUNNING TIRE LOW
PRESSURE SENSOR(S) OR RECEIVER
CONDITIONS
F1: C1D2105 CHECK FOR CORRECT WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY AND TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSORS
NOTE: As a visual check, a tire low pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a
rubber one and cannot be installed to a mini or space saver spare wheel.
1 Check that all full size running wheel and tire assemblies have tire low pressure sensors
installed.
Is a full size wheel and tire assembly with tire low pressure sensor installed to all running wheel
positions?
Yes
Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform diagnostic routine to verify
reception of all tire low pressure sensors, by carrying out 'TPMS wheel unit & receiver
reception test' from set up and configuration application and complete remedial actions.
No
If agreed with the customer, install the correct wheel and tire assembly or tire low pressure
sensor(s), of correct frequency, in accordance with that defined in the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor application.
(Note: If the datalogger signal 'Number Of Missing Tire Pressure Wheel Units' is 4 and the Instrument Panel Cluster displays
text message 'Tire Pressure Monitoring Unavailable', the system has detected winter tire installation, as detailed in the owner's
manual. Confirm why the vehicle has non-TPMS wheel & tire assemblies installed before installing tire low pressure sensors,
which are not to be claimed under vehicle warranty.)
Component Tests
Wheels and Tires
For wheel and tire specification information (pressures, torques, etc).

REFER to: Specifications (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Specifications).
When replacing wheels or tires, local legislation regarding health and safety must be complied with.
If the vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitoring System installed, only manufacturer approved wheels and tires
should be used. If the wheel and tire size is changed (for example from R18 to R20) the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System module should be updated with the correct pressure information appropriate to the new
wheel and tire set. Update the Tire Pressure Monitoring System module using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system.
As a general guideline, only replace tires in pairs or as a set, and only with tires of equivalent size and
specification.
Confirm the symptoms of the customer complaint.
As much information as possible should be gathered from the driver to assist in diagnosing the cause(s).
1. Before a road test, carry out a basic inspection to make sure the vehicle is safe and legal to drive.
Basic inspection
Correct tire inflation.

REFER to: Specifications (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Specifications).
Legal tire tread depth
Cuts/Bulges in tire sidewall(s)
Tire ply separation
Embedded objects
Wheel rim damage
Correct tire installation (specification, direction of rotation, etc)
Any obvious distortion of the tire (flat/high spots)
Worn/Damaged steering or suspension components
Road test
If the results of the basic inspection are acceptable, carry out a road test to confirm the symptoms.
To reproduce the symptoms, test the vehicle on similar roads to those on which the fault occurs and at similar
speeds (provided it is legal to do so).
If the vibration or noise can be reproduced, note the speed at which it occurs and see if it is possible to drive
through the symptom, meaning, is it possible to alter the fault by driving faster or slower than the speed at
which it occurs?
If it is possible, it is likely that the fault is caused by an imbalance in the wheel or tire.
If the vibration or noise gets worse as the vehicle speed increases, it is likely that the fault is caused by
distortion in the wheel or tire, or worn or damaged components.
Distortion checks
Check for distortion by raising the vehicle so that the wheels are free and placing an axle stand or similar fixed
object next to each wheel in turn.
If the stand is placed at the tread of the tire, the tire can be checked for ovality by turning the wheel by hand
and checking for high or low spots where the gap between the tread and the stand increases or reduces.
If the stand is placed next to the wheel rim or tire sidewall, the wheel and tire can be checked for run-out in a
similar way.
Wheels and Tires - Tire Low Pressure Sensor
Removal
NOTE: It is strongly recommended that the valve seal and steel washer is replaced each time a tire is
changed to avoid a seal failure. The seal and washer must be replaced if the sensor is removed. Removal of the
sensor retaining nut must be regarded as sensor removal. The valve cap must always be in place except when
inflating, releasing pressure or checking pressure.

safety stands.
3. CAUTION: To avoid damage to the tire low pressure

sensor, release the tire bead from the rim, 180 degrees
from the valve.
Remove the tire from the wheel.
4. CAUTIONS:
Do not push on the valve.
If the tire low pressure sensor is to be re-

installed, a new washer, seal and nut must be
installed.
If the tire low pressure sensor is to be re-

installed, a new washer, seal, nut and silver
coloured nickel valve core must be installed.
Remove the tire low pressure sensor.

Remove the nut.
Release and withdraw the sensor along
the valve axis.
5. If necessary, install a new seal and washer.

Remove and discard the seal and
washer.
Install a new washer and seal, making
sure the valve remains pressed fully
onto its seat.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Do not use compressed air to clean the

sensor. Do not clean the sensor with solvents or cleaning
agents of any type, use a clean dry cloth.
Clean the component mating faces.
2. CAUTION: Do not apply any lubricant to

the new valve.
NOTE: If the sensor is replaced on a

'running' wheel, the new sensor identification
will be learnt when the vehicle is first driven. If
a new sensor is fitted to the spare wheel the
identification for that sensor must be
programmed into the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) module using T4. The
identifcation code is provided on a label with
the complete assembly and is also printed on
the casing of each sensor.
Install the tire low pressure sensor.

Install and hand tighten the nut whilst
keeping the sensor in place.
Tighten the nut to 6.5 Nm (4.8 lb.ft).
3. Install the tire and balance the wheel.

Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front
Antenna
Removal

safety stands.

3. Remove the tire pressure antenna.

Remove the 2 retainers.
Installation
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
2. Initiate a new tire pressure antenna using T4.

Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear
Antenna
Removal
1. Remove the fender moulding.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Quarter Panel
Moulding (501-08, Removal and Installation).

Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the tire pressure antenna.

Installation
2. Initiate a new tire pressure antenna using T4.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension -
Air Suspension - General Specification
Item Specification
Ride height:
Off road 55 mm (2.1 in) above standard
Access - reselectable whilst 50 mm (1.9 in) below standard
vehicle is moving
Trim height Configured using approved diagnostic equipment
Height sensors:
Location 4 per vehicle - one sensor for each wheel
Height sensor arm colour
coding:
Left hand side, front and rear WHITE
Right hand side, front and BLACK
rear
Height sensor operating
voltages:
Supply voltage 5 volts - supplied by air suspension ECU
Output voltage Left hand front and right hand rear - Decreases to 0.5 volts with bump travel.
Right hand front and left hand rear - Decreases to 4.5 volts with bump travel
Spring/damper modules:
Type Guided air spring surrounding twin tube damper
Pressures:
Normal - Front 800 to 1000 kPa (8.0 to 10.0 bar) (116.0 to 145.0 lbf/in²)
Normal - Rear 500 to 800 kPa (5.0 to 8.0 bar) (72.5 to 116.0 lbf/in²)
Burst pressure 3500 kPa (35 bar) (507.5 lbf/in²)
Maximum spring pressure - Approximately 2700 kPa (27 bar) (391.5 lbf/in²)
Full bump at gross vehicle
weight
Air compressors: Supplied with air drier, electrically switched, pilot operated exhaust valve and
double temperature sensors
Old type Hitachi
*New type AMK
Controlled by Electronic Control Unit (ECU)
Maximum pressure 1680 kPa (16.8 bar) (243.6 lbf/in²)
Air reservoir:
Volume 9 litres (0.31 cu.ft)
Working pressure 1750 kPa (17.5 bar) (253.75 lbf/in²)
Maximum operating pressure 2300 kPa (23 bar) (333.5 lbf/in²)
Reservoir valve block Incorporates pressure sensor to monitor spring and air reservoir pressures
Valve blocks:
Front 2 corner valves, 1 cross link valve - all mounted on front bumper armature
Rear 2 corner valves, 1 cross link valve - all mounted on left hand rear spring tower
* If an AMK air compressor is installed to replace an Hitachi air compressor then a new
corresponding air compressor relay must also be installed.
Item Specification
Gap between underside of the toe link rubber boot and the chassis bracket 10.0 mm (0.393 in)
Air suspension compressor bolts 10 7
Air suspension compressor lower cover bolts 10 7
Voss connector to the front solenoid valve block 2.5 1.7
Voss connector to the front and rear air springs 3.5 2.6
Voss connector to the rear solenoid valve block 2.5 1.7
Voss connector to the air suspension reservoir 5 4
Voss connector to the air suspension reservoir solenoid valve block 2.5 1.7
Air suspension control module bolt 10 7
Air suspension reservoir bolts 23 17
Toe link inner ball joint retaining nut 133 98
Toe link nut 103 76
Toe link adjustment locking nut 130 96
Lower front arm camber adjusting bolt 275 203
Lower arm rear castor adjusting bolts 275 203
Track rod end locking nuts 53 39
Front and rear air spring/shock absorber to the suspension turret nuts 63 46
Front and rear air spring/shock absorber to the lower suspension arm nut and bolt 300 221
* Front and rear air spring/shock absorber top nut 98 72
Heat shield bolts 10 7
Wheel speed sensor bolt 10 7
Wheel hub bolts 115 85
* Lower arm ball joint retaining nut 115 85
* Tie-rod end ball joint 76 56
Suspension height sensor Torx bolts 2.2 1.5
+ Stake nut on completion of tightening

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
Air Suspension - Component Location

1 - Front right shock absorber assembly
2 - Air suspension control module
3 - Air suspension switchpack (air suspension vehicles only)
4 - Rear right height sensor
5 - Rear right shock absorber assembly
6 - Rear axle valve block
7 - Air supply unit silencer
8 - Air supply unit filter
9 - Rear left shock absorber assembly
10 - Rear left height sensor
11 - Pipe - Compressor inlet
12 - Pipe - Reservoir valve block to rear axle valve block
13 - Pipe - Compressor exhaust
14 - Air supply unit
15 - Pipe - Air supply unit to reservoir valve block
16 - Pipe - exhaust
17 - Reservoir valve block
18 - Air reservoir
19 - Hill Descent Control (HDC) and transfer case control switchpack
20 - Front left height sensor
21 - Front left shock absorber assembly
22 - Front right height sensor
23 - Front axle valve block
AIR SUSPENSION
General Information
The air suspension system is a four corner system which is fitted to all models.
The system is electronically controlled by an air suspension control module which controls the air supply unit, reacts
to inputs from four height sensors and distributes air around the system via valve blocks.
The main air suspension system components are:
Air suspension control module

Air supply unit
Four height sensors
Three valve block assemblies
Reservoir
Air harness
Two front shock absorber assemblies incorporating dampers
Two rear shock absorber assemblies incorporating dampers
Air suspension switch
The four corner air suspension system maintains the vehicle height under all operating conditions by controlling the
mass of air in the air springs. The air suspension control module uses signals from the four height sensors to
maintain the correct suspension height, irrespective of vehicle load. Additionally, the system allows the driver to
request ride height changes to improve off-road performance or ease access or loading. The system automatically
adjusts the ride height to improve the vehicle handling and dynamics when speed increases or decreases. This is
achieved by operating pneumatic control valves to increase or decrease the mass of air in the air springs.
The air suspension system has three driver selectable, pre-determined ride heights and an automated high speed
ride height. A driver interface indicates the selected ride height and height change movement. Additional information
is also relayed to the driver via the Instrument Cluster (IC) message center and by audible warnings also transmitted
by the IC.
Most height changes can only be made when the engine is running and the driver and passenger doors are closed.
The air suspension can be controlled manually by the driver using a switch on the floor console to select the required
height change.
The system will temporarily inhibit height adjustments when the vehicle is subject to cornering, heavy acceleration or
heavy braking. The inhibit function prevents unsettling of the vehicle.
Height changes are also restricted for safety reasons, when a door is opened and the vehicle is stationary for
example.
The air suspension system is controlled by the air suspension control module which is located on the driver side 'A'
pillar. The control module monitors the height of each corner of the vehicle via four height sensors, which are
mounted in-board of each road wheel. The control module also performs an 'on-board diagnostic' function to perform
'health checks' on the system. If faults are detected, codes are stored in the control module and can be retrieved
using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
Ride Height Tolerance Control
The air suspension control module has two ride height tolerance bands; normal tolerance and tight tolerance.
The control module considers the vehicle to be at target height if the current height is within the appropriate
tolerance band. Height adjustments are not made until the vehicle height falls outside of the tolerance band for a
pre-determined time. The time period is different depending on if the vehicle is moving or stationary. The tolerance
bands are as follows:
Normal ± 10 mm
Tight ± 3 mm.
The tight tolerance band is only used if set by the Land Rover approved diagnostic system for diagnostic purposes or
when the vehicle has been stationary for more than 5 minutes.
OPERATING MODES
The driver can manually select, using the air suspension switch, one of four ride states:
ON-ROAD - this height is the normal operating height of the vehicle

OFF-ROAD - this height is higher than the on-road height and provides improved ground clearance, approach,
departure and breakover angles
ACCESS - this height is lower than the on-road height and makes entering and exiting the vehicle easier for
the occupants
CRAWL (Locked at access) - this mode allows the vehicle to be driven at the access height at low speeds to
provide increased roof clearance in low car parks etc.
HIGH SPEED - A non-selectable, automatic high speed mode is provided which lowers the vehicle height to improve
vehicle handling.
NOTE: Vehicle height changes are restricted if the air suspension control module receives a 'Door Open' signal
and the speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
A complete vehicle delivery mode is available but is only selectable using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
When this mode is active most vehicle systems, in addition to the air suspension, are inhibited or restricted to a
minimal functionality. In this mode the air suspension is set to the Transit Mode.
If the air suspension control module senses that the vehicle has grounded and lost traction, the control module can
temporarily increase and/or redistribute the volume of air supplied to the affected air spring(s) to maximize the
available traction. This is known as extended mode and will be indicated to the driver by the lamps on the air
suspension switch flashing and an 'EXTENDED MODE' message being displayed in the IC.
If a fault is detected by the air suspension control module, the control module will reduce the system functionality
dependent on the type and severity of the fault. The control module will also store a fault code which can be
retrieved using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system. If a severe fault occurs, the control module will attempt
to put the vehicle in a safe condition. A fault is relayed to the driver by the IC message center and an audible
warning emitted from the IC.
All information messages will be displayed for four seconds.
Air Suspension Switch Pack

1 - Raise/lower switch
2 - Off-Road Mode
3 - On-Road Mode
4 - Access Mode
5 - Crawl mode
The air suspension switchpack is located in the floor console, behind the transmission selector. The switch is a three
position, non-latching switch which allows selection of the following driver selectable modes:
Off-road mode
On-road mode
Access mode
Crawl mode.
The air suspension switch can be rocked from its central position. The switch is non-latching and returns to the
central position when released. The switch completes an earth path to the air suspension control module when
operated. This earth path is completed on separate wires for the raise and lower switch positions, allowing the control
module to determine which selection the driver has made.
The switch has six symbols which illuminate to show the current selected height and the direction of movement. The
raise and lower symbols will flash and a warning tone will be emitted from the IC sounder when a requested height
change is not allowed, i.e. vehicle speed too fast.
A flashing symbol indicates that the air suspension system is in a waiting state or that the system will override the
driver selection because the speed threshold is too high.
The driver can also ignore the system's warnings signals and allow the height to change automatically. For example,
increasing the vehicle speed to more than 25 mph (40 km/h) when locked to access height will cause the control
module to automatically change the ride height from access mode to on-road mode.
Hill Descent Control and Transfer Case Control Switchpack
NOTE: Coil spring vehicles only.

1 - Hi range switch
2 - Low range switch
3 - HDC switch
On-Road Mode
This is the normal ride height for the vehicle.
Off-Road Mode
Off-road mode will only be selectable if the vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h). The vehicle will be raised
55mm (2.2 inches) to provide additional body clearance and improved approach, departure and breakover angles. If
the vehicle speed exceeds 31 mph (50 km/h), the air suspension control module will automatically lower the vehicle
to the on-road mode height. At 25 to 28 mph (40 to 45 km/h) a message is displayed in the message center to warn
the driver to slow down or the vehicle will lower.
Access Mode
Access mode lowers the vehicle body height and provides easier entry, exit and loading of the vehicle.
Access mode can be selected at any vehicle speed. When access mode is selected, the response of the air suspension
system will depend on the vehicle speed:
If the vehicle speed is more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h), the air suspension control module will wait for up to
one minute for the vehicle speed to be reduced. The access mode light emitting diode (LED) and the lowering
LED will flash while the air suspension control module waits for the vehicle speed to be reduced, the on-road
mode lamp will remain illuminated. If the vehicle speed is not reduced sufficiently, the access mode request
will be cancelled after 1 minute.
If the vehicle speed is less than 12.5 mph (20 km/h), the air suspension control module will lower the
suspension to a part lowered height and will remain at this height for up to one minute. The on-road mode
lamp will extinguish as the air suspension control module lowers the suspension to the part lowered height.
The access mode lamp and the lowering LED will illuminate. When part lowered is reached, the lowering LED
will flash. If the vehicle speed is not reduced to less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in the one minute period, the
access mode request will be cancelled.
If the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), the suspension will be lowered to access mode immediately.
The access mode LED and the lowering LED will illuminate. When the access mode height is reached, the
lowering LED will be extinguished.
Access height may be selected up to 40 seconds after the ignition is turned off, provided that the driver door has not
been opened within this time.
The suspension will automatically rise from access mode when the vehicle speed exceeds 6.2 mph (10 km/h). If
access mode was selected directly from off-road mode then the system will return to off-road mode when the vehicle
speed exceeds 6.2 mph (10 km/h). Otherwise the system will lift the suspension to On-road height.
Selecting Access Mode Directly from Off-Road Mode
When the suspension is in off-road mode height, pressing the 'Access' height change switch once, or pressing the
lowering switch twice before the lowering LED is extinguished, the control module will lower the suspension to access
mode height. The control module will remember to return the suspension to off-road height automatically if the
vehicle speed increases above 6.2 mph (10 km/h).
Crawl mode
Crawl mode allows the vehicle to be driven at low speeds with the suspension locked at the access mode height. This
allows the vehicle to be driven in low car parks etc. with increased roof clearance.
Crawl mode can be selected up to 21.7 mph (35 km/h) with a long press of the switch in a down direction. The
access mode lamp and the crawl mode lamp will be illuminated. When the control module is in crawl mode, on-road
mode height will be selected automatically if the vehicle speed exceeds 24.8 mph (40 km/h). At 18.6 to 21.7 mph
(30 to 35 km/h) a message is displayed in the message center to warn the driver to slow down or the vehicle will
rise. Crawl mode can also be manually cancelled by moving the switch in the up direction for 1 second. The crawl
mode lamp will now be extinguished.
High Speed Mode
High speed mode is a non-selectable, automatic mode which lowers the vehicle height to improve vehicle handling.
This feature is fully automated and is 'invisible' to the driver.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 100 mph (160 km/h) for more than five seconds, the air suspension control module
initiates the high speed mode. When the vehicle speed reduces to less than 80 mph (130 km/h) for more than 30
seconds, the vehicle returns to the On-Road height. This function is cancelled if a trailer is connected to the trailer
socket.
Automatic Height Change Warnings
When the suspension is in off-road mode, access mode or crawl mode height, the air suspension control module will
change the suspension height automatically when the vehicle speed exceeds a predetermined threshold.
When the suspension is at off-road mode or crawl mode height, the control module issues a warning to advise the
driver that the vehicle is approaching the speed threshold. The IC sounder will emit a chime, a message will be
displayed in the message center and the on-road mode LED and either the raising or lowering LED will flash.
The off-road mode or crawl mode height speed warning is removed when the vehicle speed is reduced.
SPECIAL MODES
Door Open Inhibit Mode
If one or more of the vehicle doors are opened during a height change when the vehicle is stationary, the air
suspension control module will restrict further height change.
The LED on the air suspension LED display for the target mode height will remain illuminated and the raising or
lowering LED will flash.
If all of the doors are closed within 90 seconds, the height change will resume. If the 90 second period is exceeded,
the message 'CONFIRM REQUIRED SUSPENSION HEIGHT' will be displayed in the IC.
Extended Modes
Raise Inhibit Mode Raise inhibit mode is a reactive mode invoked when the following conditions are satisfied,
vehicle speed below 10kph and vehicle raising very slowly. Raise inhibit mode is normally invoked when vehicle is
lifting against an obstacle, it can also be used when the vehicle is winching or is tethered down.
Jacking Mode Jacking mode is a reactive mode invoked when the following conditions are satisfied, vehicle
stationary, system attempts to level the vehicle down and rate of vehicle lowering is below a predefined threshold for
a predefined time. Jacking mode is normally invoked under the following conditions, vehicle jacking mode or vehicle
grounded and stationary
Lower Inhibit Mode Lower inhibit mode is a reactive mode invoked when the following conditions are satisfied,
vehicle stationary, rate of vehicle lowering is below a predefined threshold for a predefined time. Lower inhibit mode
is normally invoked under the following conditions, vehicle lowered onto an obstacle during a height change.
Extended Mode Extended mode is a pro-active mode invoked when the following conditions are satisfied, vehicle
moving and speed is below 50kph, traction activity is induced on axle pairs for fixed period of time and wheel heights
above a predetermined threshold on coinciding axle pairs for the same fixed period of time. Extended mode is
normally invoked under the following condition, vehicle is attempting to move and with low levels of traction and
supported by an obstacle.
If the vehicle becomes grounded and the traction control becomes operational, the air suspension control module
automatically increases the mass of air in the air springs to raise the vehicle clear of the obstruction. Extended mode
is activated automatically and cannot be selected manually.
When the air suspension control module has activated the extended mode, the off-road mode lamp will flash if the
suspension is above off-road mode height. The off-road mode and on-road mode lamps will flash if the suspension is
between off-road mode and on-road mode heights. The on-road mode and access mode lamps will flash if the
suspension is between on-road mode and access mode. A message will also be displayed in the message center.
To exit the extended mode, press the air suspension switch briefly in the up or down position or alternatively drive
the vehicle at a speed of more than 2 mph (3 km/h) for 45 seconds.
Additional Lift in Extended Mode
When extended mode has been invoked and the automatic lifting of the vehicle is complete, the driver can request
an additional lift of the vehicle. This can be particularly useful when extended mode has been activated on soft
surfaces.
The additional lift can be requested once the height change LED has extinguished. Press and hold the air suspension
switch in the up position for 3 seconds whilst simultaneously depressing the brake pedal. A chime from the IC will
sound to confirm that the request has been accepted. The raising LED will be illuminated while the vehicle is being
lifted.
Periodic Leveling Mode
When the vehicle is parked, the air suspension control module 'wakes up' two hours after the ignition was last
switched off and then once every twenty four hours. The vehicle height is checked and if the vehicle is not level
within a pre-set tolerance, small downwards height adjustments may be made automatically.
Transit Mode
Transit mode is a factory set mode which locks the suspension to enable the vehicle to be safely lashed to a
transporter. The suspension transit mode is automatically set when the vehicle is configured for delivery mode using
the Land Rover approved diagnostic system. Delivery mode also affects other vehicle systems which are inhibited or
restricted to a minimal functionality.
When the ignition switch is switched off, the vehicle will be lowered to access mode. This ensures that the securing
straps do not become loose should air leak from the air springs.
When transit mode is active, the air suspension switches are disabled. Periodic re-leveling is also disabled.
When the engine is started, the air suspension control module will cause the vehicle to rise allowing sufficient ground
clearance for the vehicle to be loaded. While the height is changing, all the LED's in the air suspension switchpack
will flash and a chime will be emitted by the IC. When the sufficient height reached, all the LED's will illuminate
continuously and the chime will stop.
When the engine is switched off, the air suspension control module will cause the vehicle to lower allowing the
vehicle to be strapped down. While the height is changing, all the LED's in the air suspension switchpack will flash.
When the height of –50mm is reached, all the LED's will illuminate continuously.
Calibration Mode
This mode is used when the air suspension control module has been replaced or a height sensor or suspension
component has been dismantled or replaced.
The following conditions apply when the vehicle is in calibration mode:
The ride height is set to tight tolerance

Fault reaction to vehicle identification number (VIN) mis-match with the Car Configuration File (CCF) is
disabled
The raise, lower, access and hold switches are disabled
Message "Air suspension not in customer mode" is displayed in the instrument pack.
Remote Operation
1 - Hold
2 - Raise vehicle
3 - Lower vehicle
The switches on the smart key may be used to operate the air suspension system, allowing the vehicle to be raised
or lowered remotely. This may be useful in attaching a trailer or loading the vehicle.
To change the suspension height using the smart key, the vehicle must be stationary, all the doors closed and the
hazard warning lamps switched on.
To raise the vehicle suspension switches 1 and 2 to are to be press simultaneously.
To lower the vehicle suspension switches 1 and 3 to are to be press simultaneously
Air Harness
The air harness comprises ten separate nylon pipes which are connected between the system components with Voss
connectors. The pipes have the following diameters:
Pipe Diameter
High pressure pipes 6 mm
Compressor inlet pipe 8 mm
Inlet filter to silencer 8 mm
Compressor exhaust pipe 10 mm
Silencer exhaust pipe 19 mm
If a pipe becomes damaged, an in-line connector is available for repair purposes. The pipes are secured to the body
and chassis with a number of plastic clips.
LEAK DETECTION
Leak detection can be carried out using a Land Rover approved leak detection spray.
If the vehicle appears to be leaking, perform a leak check on all aspects of the system, i.e.; air spring hose fittings
and the associated connections on the valve blocks, air springs and reservoir. Failure to correctly diagnose leakage
will result in unnecessary exchange of serviceable components and recurrence of original problem.
AIR SUSPENSION COMPONENTS
Valve Blocks
Front and Rear Valve Blocks

1 - Isolation rubber mounts (3 off)
2 - Location slots
3 - Front valve block, valves and solenoid assembly
4 - Front bumper armature
5 - Electrical connector
6 - Left shock absorber assembly air harness connection
7 - Air inlet/outlet connection
8 - Right shock absorber assembly air harness connection
9 - Rear valve block, valves and solenoid assembly
10 - Right shock absorber assembly air harness connection
11 - Air inlet/outlet connection
12 - Left shock absorber assembly air harness connection
13 - Rear suspension turret
Reservoir Valve Block
1 - Chassis mounting bracket
2 - Location slot
3 - Isolation rubber mounts (3 off)
5 - Reservoir valve block, valves and solenoid assembly
6 - Reservoir connection
7 - Rear valve block connection
8 - Front valve block connection
9 - Air supply unit connection
10 - Pressure sensor
Front and Rear Valve Blocks
The front and rear axle valve blocks are similar in their design and construction and control the air supply and
distribution to the front or rear pairs of shock absorber assemblies respectively. The difference between the two
valves is the connections from the valve block to the left and right hand shock absorber assemblies and the valve
size. It is important that the correct valve block is fitted to the correct axle. Fitting the incorrect valve block will not
stop the air suspension system from functioning but will result in slow raise and lower times and uneven raising and
lowering between the front and rear axles.
The front valve block is attached to the right end of the front bumper armature assembly. The valve block has three
attachment lugs which are fitted with isolation rubber mounts. The rubber mounts locate in slots in the armature. The
valve lugs locate in the holes above the slots and are pushed downwards into positive location in the slots.
The rear valve block is located on the forward face of the left hand rear suspension turret. The valve block has three
attachment lugs which are fitted with isolation rubber mounts which locate in a bracket with three slotted holes. The
bracket is attached to the left hand side of the chassis. The isolation rubber mounts locate in the 'V' shaped slots and
are pushed downwards into positive location in the slots.
The front and rear valve blocks each have three air pipe connections which use 'Voss' type air fittings. One
connection is an air pressure inlet/outlet from the reservoir valve block. The remaining two connections provide the
pressure connections to the left and right hand air springs.
Each valve block contains three solenoid operated valves; two corner valves and one cross-link valve. Each of the
valve solenoids is individually controlled by the air suspension control module. The solenoids have a resistance value
of 2 Ohms at a temperature of 20°C (68°F).
Reservoir Valve Block
The reservoir valve block is attached to a bracket on the outside of the left hand chassis rail, between the reservoir
and the air supply unit. The valve block is located within the air supply unit air supply housing to protect it from dirt
ingress and damage from stones. The valve block has three attachment lugs which are fitted with isolation rubber
mounts. The rubber mounts locate in the chassis bracket which has three corresponding 'V' shaped slots. The rubber
mounts are pushed downwards into positive location in the slots.
The reservoir valve block controls the storage and distribution of air from the reservoir. The reservoir valve block
also contains the system's pressure sensor.
The valve block has four air pipe connections which use 'Voss' type air fittings. The connections provide for air
supply from the air supply unit, air supply to and from the reservoir and air supply to and from the front and rear
valve blocks. The connections from the air supply unit and the front and rear control valves are all connected via a
common gallery within the valve and therefore are all subject to the same air pressures.
The valve block contains a solenoid operated valve which is controlled by the air suspension control module. The
solenoid valve controls the pressure supply to and from the reservoir. The solenoid has a resistance value of 2 Ohms
at a temperature of 20°C (68°F). When energized, the valve spool moves allowing air to pass to or from the
reservoir.
The valve block also contains a pressure sensor which can be used to measure the system air pressure in the air
springs and the reservoir. The pressure sensor is connected via a harness connector to the air suspension control
module. The control module provides a 5V reference voltage to the pressure sensor and monitors the return signal
voltage from the sensor.
Using this sensor, the control module controls the air supply unit operation and therefore limits the nominal system
operating pressure to 244 lbf/in2 (16.8 bar gage).

A - Output voltage (V)
B - Pressure (kPa)
Removal of the reservoir valve block will require full depressurization of the reservoir. The valve block is a non-
serviceable item and should not be disassembled other than for replacement of the pressure sensor.
Air Supply Unit

1 - Mounting bracket
2 - Air dryer
3 - Pilot exhaust valve solenoid and temperature sensors harness connector
4 - Motor harness connector
5 - Intake port
6 - Pilot exhaust valve
7 - Exhaust valve
8 - Isolation mounting rubber (2 off)
9 - Electric motor
10 - Isolation mounting rubber (1 off)
11 - Pilot air pipe
12 - High pressure supply to the air suspension system
13 - Compressor cylinder head temperature sensor
14 - Compressor
The air supply unit is located on the outside of the left hand chassis rail, forward of the upper control arm. The unit
is attached to the chassis rail with three bolts and is protected by an air supply housing.
Air Supply Housing

1 - Upper cover
2 - Lower cover
3 - Air supply unit
4 - Reservoir valve block
The air supply housing, which comprises of two parts; upper and lower, surrounds the air supply unit. The air supply
housing is a plastic molding which is lined with an insulating foam which controls the operating noise of the air supply
unit. The reservoir valve block is also located in the air supply housing, forward of the air supply unit.
The air supply unit comprises the following major components:
A piston compressor
A 12V electric motor
A solenoid operated pilot valve
An exhaust valve
An air dryer unit
The air supply unit supplies dry, compressed air into the air suspension system where it is directed into the air
springs or the reservoir by solenoid operated valves. Air can be exhausted from the system when required by the
opening of an air spring or reservoir valve in addition to the exhaust valve which is part of the air supply unit.
The compressor operates to pressurize either the reservoir or to inflate one or more of the air springs. Height
changes of less than 20 mm are achieved using the compressor alone. Height changes of more than 20 mm are
achieved using the reservoir and the compressor. The compressor cannot operate without the engine running, with
the following exceptions:
During remote operation to raise the vehicle to allow for the attachment of a trailer
When under control of a Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
The air supply unit can be serviced in the event of component failure, but is limited to the following components; air
dryer, pilot exhaust pipe and the rubber mounts.
The air supply unit is attached to a bracket which is bolted to the chassis. The unit is mounted to the bracket with
flexible isolation mounting rubbers which assist with preventing operating noise being transmitted to the chassis.
Removal of the air supply unit does not require the whole air suspension system to be depressurized. The front and
rear valve blocks and the reservoir valve block are normally closed when de-energized, preventing air pressure in the
air springs and the reservoir escaping when the unit is disconnected.
There are a number of conditions that will inhibit operation of the air supply unit. It is vitally important that these
system inhibits are not confused with a system malfunction. A full list of air supply unit inhibits are given in the
compressor section of this document.
Air Supply Unit - Sectional View

1 - Exhaust valve cap
2 - Plunger
3 - Valve seat
4 - Intake silencer port
5 - Delivery valve
6 - Valve guide
7 - Cylinder head
8 - Dryer case
9 - Desiccant
10 - Pilot exhaust line
11 - Isolation rubber mount
12 - Motor assembly
13 - Crankcase
14 - Crank
15 - Crankcase cover
16 - Connecting rod
17 - Piston
19 - Spring - pressure relief
Electric Motor
The electric motor is a 12V DC (direct current) motor with a nominal operating voltage of 13.5V. The motor drives a
crank which has an eccentric pin to which the compressor connecting rod is attached.
The motor is fitted with a temperature sensor on the brush Printed Circuit Board (PCB) assembly. The sensor is
connected to the air suspension control module which monitors the motor temperature and can suspend motor
operation if the operating thresholds are exceeded.
The following graph shows motor temperature sensor resistance values against given temperatures.
NOTE: This graph is also applicable for the compressor cylinder head temperature sensor.
A - Resistance (kOhms)
B - Temperature (°C)
The following graph shows air suspension control module output voltages against motor temperature sensor
temperatures.
NOTE: This graph is also applicable for the compressor cylinder head temperature sensor.

A - Control module input voltage (V)
B - Temperature sensor (°C)
Compressor
The compressor is used to supply air pressure to the air suspension reservoir. The air suspension control module
monitors the pressure within the reservoir and, when the engine is running, maintains a pressure of 16.8 bar gage
(244 lbf/in2).
The compressor comprises a motor driven connecting rod and piston which operate in a cylinder with a separate
cylinder head. The motor rotates the crank moving the piston up and down in the cylinder bore. The air in the
cylinder is compressed with the up stroke and is passed via the delivery valve through the air dryer and into the
system.
The cylinder head is fitted with a temperature sensor. The sensor is connected to the air suspension control module
which monitors the cylinder temperature and can suspend motor and compressor operation if an overheat condition
occurs.
The compressor will not be allowed to start if the pressure sensor reads greater than 4 bar (absolute).
The following table shows the control module operating parameters for the differing air supply unit functions and the
allowed compressor cylinder head operating temperatures.
Compressor Cylinder Head Operating Temperatures
Leveling Reservoir Filling
OFF 140°C (284°F) 130°C (266°C)
ON 120°C (248°F) 110°C (230°F)
Refer to the motor temperature sensor graph for compressor cylinder head temperature sensor resistance values and
the air suspension control module output voltage / temperature sensor graph.
Air Dryer
Attached to the compressor is the air dryer which contains a Desiccant for removing moisture from the compressed
air. Pressurized air is passed through the air dryer which removes any moisture in the compressed air before it is
passed into the reservoir and/or the system.
When the air springs are deflated, the exhaust air also passes through the air dryer, removing the moisture from the
unit and regenerating the Desiccant.
The air dryer is an essential component in the system ensuring that only dry air is present in the system. If moist air
is present, freezing can occur resulting in poor system operation or component malfunction or failure.
Pilot Exhaust Valve
Attached to the cylinder head is a solenoid operated exhaust pilot valve. This valve is opened when the air springs
are to be deflated or when the system pressure needs to be reduced.
The pilot exhaust valve is connected to the air delivery gallery, downstream of the air dryer. The pilot valve, when
opened, operates the compressor exhaust valve allowing the air springs to be deflated.
When the solenoid is energized, pilot air moves the exhaust valve plunger, allowing pressurized air from the air
springs and/or the reservoir to pass through the air dryer to atmosphere.
Exhaust Valve
The exhaust valve operates when the pilot exhaust valve is opened, allowing air returning from the air springs and/or
the reservoir to be exhausted quickly.
The pilot exhaust valve also provides the system pressure relief function which protects the air springs from over
inflation. The valve is pneumatically operated, responding to air pressure applied to it to overcome pressure from its
internal spring. The valve is connected into the main pressure gallery which is always subject to the system pressure
available in either the air springs or the reservoir. The valve is controlled by a spring which restricts the maximum
operating pressure to between 22 to 27 bar gage (319 to 391 lbf/in2).
The minimum pressure in the system is also controlled by the exhaust valve to ensure that, even when deflated, the
air springs contain a positive pressure with respect to atmosphere. This protects the air spring by ensuring it can still
'roll' over the piston without creasing.
Air Supply Unit Specifications
Description Value
Working pressure 16.8 bar gage
Maximum pressure (stabilized) 22.0 to 27.0 bar gage
Operating voltage 10 to 16.5 Volts (13.5 Volts nominal)
Running current consumption 20-50 Amps depending on load
Maximum start-up current 120 Amps
Pilot Exhaust Valve - Solenoid valve resistance at 20°C (68°F) 4 Ohms ± 10%
NOTE: Resistance values will vary with coil temperature. Resistance of test leads must be measured before any
readings are taken. Resistance value of the test leads must be subtracted from final solenoid resistance value.
There are a number of conditions that will inhibit operation of the air suspension compressor. It is vitally important
that these inhibits are not confused with a system malfunction. A full list of compressor inhibits is contained in the
compressor section of this document.
Reservoir
1 - Front bracket
2 - Reservoir
3 - Air hose connection to reservoir valve block
4 - Rear bracket
The reservoir is an air storage vessel which provides fast air suspension lift times by the immediate availability of
pressurized air into the system.
The reservoir is a steel fabrication and is located on the outside of the left hand chassis rail, in front of the air supply
unit. The reservoir has a bracket at each end which attach to the body mounting brackets on the chassis.
The rearward end of the reservoir has a 'Voss' air fitting which provides for the connection of the air hose between
the reservoir and the reservoir valve block.
The reservoir has a capacity of 9 liters (550 in30). The nominal working pressure of the reservoir is 16.8 bar gage
(243.6 lbf/in2), with a maximum pressure of 35 bar gage (507 lbf/in2).
Air Springs
The air springs on the front and rear suspension are similar in construction. The air springs are manufactured from a
flexible rubber and each air spring forms an air tight cavity which provides the required spring rate for each corner of
the vehicle.
As the air spring is compressed, the rubber material compresses and rolls down the side of the vertical housing
(piston) below the spring. An air connection port is located on the top of each spring and allows air to be added or
removed from each spring. The port is connected via a Voss connector and a plastic tube to the axle valve block.
Replacement of an individual air spring does not require a full depressurization of the air suspension system. Only the
corner concerned need be depressurized. This is achieved using a routine in the Land Rover approved diagnostic
system.
When servicing of an air spring or a full system depressurization is required, the weight of the vehicle must be
supported before the system is depressurized. On reassembly, the air spring must be fully pressurized before the
weight of the vehicle is applied to it.
AIR SILENCER AND INLET AIR FILTER

1 - Exhaust (to atmosphere)
2 - Inlet and exhaust silencer
3 - Air inlet filter
4 - Exhaust air from air supply unit
5 - Air inlet supply to air supply unit
The air silencer is required to limit any noise produced from the air supply unit during inflation or deflation of the air
springs.
The silencer comprises two plastic molded cans, which are bonded together. A silencing foam in the large internal
chamber forms the exhaust silencer. A pipe connection is molded onto each end of the silencer and provides for the
attachment of the exhaust air to atmosphere pipe and the exhaust air pipe from the air supply unit.
A secondary chamber, located around the outside of the exhaust chamber forms the silencer for the inlet air. Pipe
connections are molded onto each end of the intake silencer and provide for the attachment of the air inlet pipe from
the inlet air filter and the air inlet pipe to the air supply unit. The intake air silencer is a hollow chamber with no
noise reduction foam filling.
The air intake filter is connected via a pipe to the intake silencer chamber of the air silencer unit. The filter is located
in the rear left corner of the body, away from possible sources of dirt and moisture.
The filter contains a foam element which removes particulate matter from the inlet air before it reaches the silencer
or the air supply unit.
AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE

2 - Connector C2321
3 - Connector C2320
4 - Connector C2030
5 - Connector C0867
The air suspension system fitted is controlled by the air suspension control module which is located behind the
instrument panel, on the driver side 'A' pillar.
The control module monitors the height of each corner of the vehicle via four height sensors, which are mounted in-
board of each road wheel.
The control module has the following modes of operation:
Calibration
Normal
Periodic Wake-Up.
When a new air suspension control module is fitted, the air suspension system will not function until the air
suspension software is loaded and the system calibrated using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
Calibration
A calibration routine is performed using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system to access the position of each
corner of the vehicle and record the settings in the control module memory. Once set, the calibration is not required
to be performed unless the air suspension control module or adaptive damping module is removed or replaced, a
height sensor or bracket is removed, replaced or disturbed or a suspension arm to which the sensor is connected is
removed or replaced. If the removed height sensor is subsequently refitted, the calibration procedure will have to be
performed to ensure the integrity of the system.
If the air supply unit, the reservoir, a valve block, a damper module or the air harness is removed or replaced, the
system will not require recalibration.
Periodic Wake-Up Mode
When the vehicle is parked, the air suspension control module 'wakes up' two hours after the ignition was last
switched off and once every twenty four hours thereafter. The vehicle height is checked and if the vehicle is not level
within a pre-set tolerance, small downwards height adjustments may be made automatically.
SYSTEM OPERATION
Under normal operating conditions, the air suspension control module keeps the vehicle level at the 'current' ride
height. The incoming height signals from the sensors are passed through filters to remove irregular signals produced
by road noise or other irregularities. When the vehicle is stationary or a height change is in progress, the signals are
passed through a 'fast' filter, which tracks the true rate of change of height. When the vehicle is moving, the signals
are passed through a 'slow' filter. The 'slow' filtered signals remove almost all road noise from the signals and output
a true long term average for each corner height. The 'slow' filtered signals cannot be used to respond quickly during
height changes.
The air suspension control module monitors each corner height signal using the fast filtered signals if the vehicle is
stationary or the slow filtered signals if the vehicle is moving. If the height remains in a 'dead band' which is ±10 mm
from the target height, the control module does not implement any height adjustment changes. When the control
module detects that a corner has moved outside of the 'dead band', the control module operates the compressor
and/or the valves to raise or lower the corresponding corner(s) back into the target height.
SYSTEM INHIBITS
A number of conditions exist where a change in ride height is undesirable. To counter this, the air suspension control
module is programmed with a number of system inhibits. If any of the conditions detailed below exist, the air
suspension control module will suspend height changes and height corrections.
Compressor
System Pressure
The compressor will not start if the system pressure is greater than 4 bar (gage)
Compressor Temperature
Two temperature sensors are located within the compressor to prevent overheating. If the temperature of the motor
brush assembly or the compressor cylinder head rise above pre-set limits, the air suspension control module will
inhibit the compressor operation. The limits are detailed in tables in the Air Supply Unit section of this manual.
Cornering
If the air suspension control module registers a cornering force greater than 0.2g it will inhibit all height changes and
corrections. The system will remain inhibited until the cornering force falls to less than 0.15g. The air suspension
control module receives a message from the lateral acceleration sensor (which is an integral part of the anti-lock
brake system (ABS) yaw rate sensor) on the high speed controller area network (CAN) bus for the cornering force.
Rapid Acceleration
If the air suspension control module registers a rapid acceleration greater than 0.2g it will inhibit all height changes
and corrections. The system will remain inhibited until the rapid acceleration falls to less than 0.15g. Acceleration is
calculated by the control module from a vehicle speed signal received via the high speed CAN bus.
Rapid Deceleration
If the air suspension control module registers a rapid deceleration smaller than - 0.2g it will inhibit all height changes
and corrections. The system will remain inhibited until the rapid deceleration rises above - 0.15g. Deceleration is
calculated by the control module from a vehicle speed signal received via the high speed CAN bus.
Vehicle Jack
The air suspension control module will inhibit all height changes and corrections if it detects a corner lowering too
slowly for more than 1.2 seconds. This is interpreted as the corner identified as moving too slowly being supported
on a jack. In this situation, the corner height will not change when air is released from the air spring because the
jack acts as a mechanical prop.
The system will remain inhibited until any of the following conditions exist:
The air suspension rotary switch is moved to the up or down position

The vehicle speed rises to more than 3 km/h (2 mph) for more than 45 seconds.
Door Open
The air suspension control module will stop all height change requests while any of the doors are open. Vehicle
leveling continues with a door open by keeping the vehicle at the height when the door was opened if the vehicle
load changes. Door open status is ignored when the vehicle speed is above 8 km/h (5 mph).
DIAGNOSTICS
The air suspension control module can store fault codes which can be retrieved using the Land Rover approved
diagnostic system. The diagnostics information is obtained via the diagnostic socket which is located below the
instrument panel, above the driver foot pedals. The socket is protected by a hinged cover.
The diagnostic socket allows the exchange of information between the various control modules on the bus systems
and the Land Rover approved diagnostic system. This allows the fast retrieval of diagnostic information and
programming of certain functions using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
Fault Messages
The air suspension has two methods which it can use to inform the driver of a fault in the air suspension system; the
air suspension switchpack LED's and the IC message center.
If the air suspension control module suffers a major failure and there is no air suspension control, all the control
switch LED's will remain unlit.
If a fault occurs and the control module can determine the ride height and the vehicle is not above on-road height,
the driver will be notified via a message in the message center. If the control module cannot determine the height of
the vehicle, or the vehicle is above on-road height and cannot be lowered, a message is displayed and accompanied
with a maximum speed message.
If a fault is detected within the DSC (dynamic stability control) the message 'SUSPENSION LOWERED FOR SAFETY'
and a chime will be emitted. This is not a fault with the air suspension system. The fault should be investigated and
rectified as soon as possible.
RESERVOIR
The air suspension control module assumes the reservoir has sufficient pressure, which is measured before a vehicle
raise is started. The control module then uses a software model to operate the compressor as required.
SYSTEM PNEUMATIC CIRCUIT
The following schematic diagram shows the connection relationship between the air supply unit, the reservoir, the
reservoir valve block, the cross-link valves and the air springs.
Schematic Pneumatic Circuit

1 - Compressor
2 - Compressor temperature sensor
3 - Air dryer
4 - Reservoir
5 - Front left shock absorber assembly
6 - Front valve block
7 - Cross link valve
8 - Front right shock absorber assembly
9 - Front right corner valve
10 - Front left corner valve
11 - Reservoir control valve
12 - Pressure sensor
13 - Rear right corner valve
14 - Rear right shock absorber assembly
15 - Cross link valve
16 - Rear valve block
17 - Rear left corner valve
18 - Rear left shock absorber assembly
19 - Inlet air filter
21 - Exhaust
22 - Air silencer
23 - Pressure relief and exhaust valve
24 - Motor temperature sensor
25 - Electric motor
CONTROL DIAGRAM - AIR SUSPENSION
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High Speed CAN (controller area network) bus

1 - Battery
2 - Air supply unit
3 - Compressor temperature sensor
4 - Motor temperature sensor
5 - Motor
6 - Exhaust valve solenoid
7 - Reservoir control valve
8 - Air suspension switch
9 - Right front height sensor
10 - Right rear height sensor
11 - Rear control valve
12 - CAN connection to other systems
13 - Front control valve
14 - Left rear height sensor
15 - Left front height sensor
16 - Central Junction Box (CJB)
17 - Battery Junction Box (BJB)
The increased weight of the armoured vehicle has necessitated changes to the air suspension system. These
changes include an increase in the pressure within the air springs and a change to the 'off-road' height setting.
These changes have impacted on the air suspension air supply unit and control module.
Off-road height can be selected at speeds up to 20 km/h (12 mile/h). When the system is at off-road height, the
system selects on-road height if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 km/h (15mile/h).
If a new control module is fitted to the vehicle, the air suspension system will require re-calibrating. The
calibration routine is carried out using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
For a detailed description of the Vehicle Dynamic Suspension System and operation, refer to the relevant
Description and Operation section of the workshop manual.
REFER to: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Description and Operation).
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.

Visual Inspection
Mechanical Electrical
Air leakage Battery
Air springs Fuse(s)
Reservoir Wiring harness physical damage or water ingress
Compressor Loose or corroded electrical connectors
Compressor air filter Air suspension control switch
Pipework and unions Controller Area Network (CAN) circuits
Sensor installation Sensors
Valve block(s) Actuators
Suspension components Valve block(s)
Air suspension control module
Symptom Chart
Possible Possible Other

Symptom Message Warnings Possible Causes Action
Vehicle on bump stops Suspension Two chimes Water ingress to Visually
fault repeated wiring harness or inspect the
regularly, connectors wiring harness
red warning Air leak(s) and
indicator Vehicle in connectors for
permanently transportation water ingress
illuminated mode Visually
System not inspect the
calibrated or system for air
calibration corrupt leakage
Implausible Check the
articulation system mode
symptoms detected and calibration
Failure of multiple using the
height sensors approved
Air suspension diagnostic
control module system
failure Check for
implausible
articulation
symptoms, i.e.
height sensor
or linkage
fault, deflated
air spring,
under inflated
tire etc
Note
implausible
articulation
symptoms
may be caused
by an un-
calibrated
height sensor
Check for
height sensor
DTCs and refer
to the DTC
index
Vehicle does not sit level Suspension Two chimes Water ingress to Visually
fault repeated wiring harness or inspect the
regularly, connectors wiring harness
red warning Air leak(s) and
indicator Calibration corrupt connectors for
permanently cross-link valve water ingress
illuminated fault Visually
Height sensor fault inspect the
Reservoir valve system for air
stuck open leakage and
Exhaust valve refer to the
stuck closed guided
Corner valves diagnostic
stuck open routine on the
Air suspension approved
control module diagnostic
failure system
Check the
system
calibration
using the
approved
diagnostic
system
For front and
rear cross link
valve tests
refer to the
guided
diagnostic
routine on the
approved
diagnostic
system
Check for
height sensor
DTCs and refer
to the DTC
index
For reservoir
and exhaust
valve tests
refer to the
guided
diagnostic
routine on the
approved
diagnostic
system
Check for
corner valve
DTCs and refer
to the DTC
index
Vehicle sits too low Suspension Two chimes, Water ingress to Visually
fault amber wiring harness or inspect the
Hill warning connectors wiring harness
descent indicator Air leak(s) and
control permanently Air suspension connectors for
(HDC) illuminated compressor water ingress
fault, One chime temperature sensor Visually
system not DSC amber fault inspect the
available warning Inlet air filter system for air
Dynamic indicator blockage/restriction leakage
stability permanently Air suspension For air
control illuminated compressor fault compressor
(DSC) Anti-lock Exhaust valve temperature
brake stuck/sticking sensor, inlet
system Air suspension air filter,
warning control module lost exhaust valve
indicator communication and air
permanently with ABS module compressor
illuminated ABS fault. tests refer to
Air suspension the guided
control module diagnostic
failure routine on the
approved
diagnostic
system
For air
suspension
control module
lost
communication
with anti-lock
brake system
control
module, refer
to the lost
communication
codes
statement at
the end of this
table
Check for anti-
lock brake
system DTCs,
refer to the
relevant
section of the
workshop
manual
Vehicle sits too high Suspension Two chimes, Reservoir valve For reservoir
fault amber stuck open valve and
warning Exhaust valve exhaust valve
indicator stuck closed tests refer to
permanently Corner valves the guided
illuminated stuck open diagnostic
Air suspension routine on the
control module approved
failure diagnostic
system
Check for
corner valve
DTCs and refer
to the DTC
index
System detects Suspension Two chimes, Crossed gallery Refer to the

extended mode fault amber and air spring guided
unnecessarily when warning pipes diagnostic
lowering indicator Incorrect valve routine on the
permanently block installed to approved
illuminated front or rear diagnostic
Damage or system
blockage in air
harness
Vehicle leans/tilts after - - Leaking air Refer to the

being left over-night or spring(s) guided
for some days Leak from corner diagnostic
valve to gallery routine on the
Exhaust valve approved
stuck open diagnostic
system
After vehicle left over- Suspension - Leaking air Refer to the

night or for some days vehicle spring(s) guided
system regularly raising Leaking reservoir diagnostic
indicates "Suspension slowly routine on the
vehicle raising slowly" approved
when first driving off diagnostic
system
DTC Index
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Air Suspension Control Module (100-00 General
Air Suspension Deflation Exit Routine
1. Key on, engine off.
2. Key off.
3. Press and release raise switch.
4. Press and release lower switch.
5. Key on, engine off.
6. Key on, engine running.
7. Press and release raise switch twice.
8. Press and release lower switch twice.
9. Press and release raise switch.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension System Depressurize
and Pressurize
General Procedures
WARNINGS:
A small amount of air pressure will be left in the air suspension system.
Eye protection must be worn.
Wear protective gloves.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure tailgate, hood and all doors are closed.
Make sure the vehicle is in a clear working area.
1. WARNING: The air suspension is pressurised. Make

sure dirt or grease does not enter the system. Always wear
hand, eye and ear safety standard protection when working
on the system.
Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system,

depressurize the air suspension.
Follow the on-screen prompts.
2. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system,

pressurize the air suspension.
Start and run the engine.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Ride Height Adjustments
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Gauge, Ride height
204-557B
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the wheels and tires, tie rod ends, suspension joints and wheel bearings are free from damage,
wear and free play.
Make sure there are no heavy objects in the vehicle.
The ride height must be measured with the vehicle weight supported by the suspension.
With the engine running and all vehicle doors closed, make sure the air suspension is functioning and the
vehicle height can be raised and lowered using the air suspension switch.
Drive the vehicle on to a flat, level surface.
Make sure the steering wheel is in the straight ahead position.
NOTE: This procedure must be carried out after replacement of the air suspension control module, removal
or replacement of a height sensor, removal or replacement of the front or rear suspension arms, replacement of
body panels incorporating suspension fixing points.
1. CAUTION: Make sure the vehicle is not moved once it

has been positioned to take measurements.
Position the vehicle on a flat level surface.
2. Connect the diagnostic tool to the vehicle data link

connector (DLC).
Connect the vehicle data link cable into the vehicle
communications module.
Connect the diagnostic tool USB Lead into the vehicle
communications module.
Connect the data link cable to the data link
connector.
Connect the diagnostic tool USB lead to the
diagnostic tool USB port.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the ignition switch is turned off,

the park brake is on and the selector lever is in park.
NOTE: IDS already loaded with the latest issue of

software.
Switch IDS on and navigate to the vehicle identification

number (VIN) input screen.
4. Enter the vehicle identification number (VIN) and navigate

to the vehicle configuration menu.
Select setup and configuration.
Select air suspension height calibration and read all
warnings and cautions.
5. CAUTION: The diagnostic tool will cause
the vehicle height to change during some parts
of the calibration process.
NOTES:
Do not install the special tool over a

locking wheel nut.
Make sure the special tool is square to the

wheel face with the measuring rod in a vertical
position.
Take the measurement from the top edge

of the slider on the special tool.
Make sure the fender splash shields are

correctly fitted.
Once in the suspension height measurement

screen, use the special tool to measure and
record the height setting from each wheel
center to the wheel arch.
6. After successful calibration of the air suspension switch off

the diagnostic tool and return to its original position.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Leaks
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Hose Cutter
204-494 (LRT 60-002)
1. CAUTION: Any leak detection spray used must have a

corrosion inhibitor, and must not cause damage to
paintwork, plastics, metals or plastic lines.
NOTE: The recommended leak detection spray is

GOTEC LDS, Landrover part number STC 1090.
The recommended leak detection spray should be used to

identify any suspected leaks. This procedure should also be
used where any of the air suspension components have
been disturbed.
2. Clean around the area of the suspected air leak.
3. Using the recommended leak detection spray, spray around

all of the air suspension components, working
systematically until the source of the air leak has been
found.
4. If any of the air suspension components are found to be

leaking e.g. air spring, compressor, reservoir or a solenoid
valve block, repair is effected by replacement only.
5. Using T4, depressurize the air suspension system.

For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension System
6. CAUTIONS:
Different air lines in the air suspension

system have different material properties and
wall thicknesses. It is important, in order to
prevent subsequent air line failure, that the
new air line material and wall thicknesses are
identical to those of the air line being
removed.
Replacement air line must be cut from a

new air line with the equivalent Land Rover
part number as the one being replaced. Do not
use air line cut from a roll or coil.
Any existing heatsleeves and abrasion

sleeves must be replaced as part of the repair.
Air line connectors should be positioned in

areas away from heat sources such as the
exhaust system, and away from any section of
air line with a heat shield installed.
Do not trim air line ends. If the end of

the air line is damaged, the air line must be
cut and a new section added using a Land
Rover approved air line connector, or the air
line must be renewed completely.
NOTES:
Air lines must only be cut using either

Hose cutter 204-494 (LRT 60-002), available
from SPX LTD or Hose cutter YA1000A,
available from Snap-On Tools. Make sure the
cut air line end is free from damage or burrs.
Only Land Rover approved air lines have

been tested to the correct pressure and
temperature specifications.
Only the Land Rover approved air line

connector, RYC500210, has been tested to the
correct pressure and temperature
specifications.
If the markings or tape adjacent to the

air line connections are removed when cutting
air lines, the cut end of the air line must be
clearly marked with a suitable colored tape or
paint mark.
If the source of the air leak is found to be an

air line connection, renew the Voss connector
and, if required, the end of the air line. Using
the special tool, cut off the damaged end of
the air line and replace with new Land Rover
approved air line and air line connectors as
required.
7. If the source of the air leak is found to be in a section of air

line, either; renew the air line, or, using the special tool,
cut out the damaged section of air line and replace with
new Land Rover approved air line, and air line connectors,
as required.
8. NOTE: If the repair has been unsuccessful repeat the

above steps until the air leak is rectified.
Using T4, pressurize the air suspension system.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Suspension Height Sensor
Removal
NOTES:
This procedure covers removal and installation of both the front and rear suspension height sensors.
The right hand sensor has a black colored lever and the left hand sensor has a white colored lever.

safety stands.
2. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force to

disconnect the height sensor link.
Remove the suspension height sensor.

Disconnect the height sensor link.
Remove the 2 Torx screws.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the Torx screw is not over

tightened. Failure to follow this instruction will result in
damage to the vehicle.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Tighten the screws to 3 Nm (2 lb.ft).
2. Using Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment, calibrate

the ride hight.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Reservoir
Removal

safety stands.
2. Using T4, depressurize the air suspension.

Depressurize and Pressurize (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic
Suspension, General Procedures).
3. CAUTIONS:
Before the disconnection or removal of

any components, ensure the area around joint
faces and connections are clean. Plug any open
connections to prevent contamination.
The air line must only be disconnected by

removal of the voss connector. Do not remove
the air line retaining boss from the air
suspension reservoir. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the
vehicle.
Visually inspect the air line ends for

damage or wear. Repair or replace the air line
as necessary.
Disconnect the air line from the air suspension

reservoir.
4. Remove the air suspension reservoir.

Remove the 4 bolts.
5. Remove the Voss connector from the air line.

Remove and discard the collet and the union.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the new Voss connector is

installed and fully tightened with the alignment plug
installed.
Install a new Voss connector to the air reservoir.

Tighten the new Voss connector to 5 Nm (4 lb.ft).
2. Install the air suspension reservoir.

Locate the air reservoir to the chassis brackets, fit
the bolts and tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb.ft).
Fully seat the air line into the Voss connector.
Pull on the air line to make sure it is fully installed
into the Voss connecter.
3. Using T4, pressurize the air suspension.
Depressurize and Pressurize (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic
Suspension, General Procedures).
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Control Module
Removal
1. Driver side: Remove the cowl side trim panel.
For additional information, refer to: Cowl Side Trim Panel
2. Remove the closing trim panel.

Release the clip.
3. Remove the air suspension control module.

Disconnect the 4 electrical connectors.
Remove the bolt.
Release from the 2 clips.
Installation
1. Install the air suspension control module.
Secure with the clips.
Connect the electrical connectors.
2. Install the closing trim panel.

Connect the electrical connector.
Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.
3. Install the cowl side trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Cowl Side Trim Panel
4. Initiate a new control module using T4.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Reservoir Solenoid Valve
Block
Removal

safety stands.

3. Remove the air suspension compressor lower

cover.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Release the 5 clips.
4. Move the air compressor electrical connector

aside.
5. CAUTIONS:
Before the disconnection or removal of

any components, ensure the area around joint
faces and connections are clean. Plug any open
Visually inspect the air line ends for

damage or wear. Repair or replace the air line
as necessary.
NOTE: Note the air line fitted positions.
Remove the air suspension reservoir solenoid

valve block.
Disconnect the 4 air lines.
Release the valve block 3 rubber
insulators.
6. Remove the Voss connectors.

Remove and discard the collets and the unions.
Installation

installed.
NOTE: New air suspension components are supplied

with new Voss connectors tightened to the correct torque.
Do not install new voss connectors if a new component is
being installed.
Install new Voss connectors to the air suspension reservoir

solenoid valve block.
Tighten to 2.5 Nm (1.7 lb.ft).
2. NOTE: Make sure the valve block does not become

detached during connection of the air lines.
Install the air suspension reservoir solenoid valve block.

Secure the 3 valve block rubber insulators.
Connect the air lines into the Voss connector.
Pull on each air line to make sure it is fully installed
3. Secure the air compressor electrical connector.
4. Install the air suspension compressor lower cover.

Install the bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Compressor Drier
Removal
CAUTION: If a new air suspension compressor, air compressor drier or air compressor delivery valve kit is
installed due to failure, an air compressor relay must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the air suspension system components.

safety stands.
2. Remove the air suspension compressor.

For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension
Compressor (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Removal
and Installation).
3. CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing the

components, ensure the area around the joint faces and
connections are clean and dry. Plug open connections to
Disconnect the air line from the air suspension compressor

drier.
Release the air line from the retaining clip.
4. NOTE: If equipped, note the position of

the air suspension compressor retaining cable.
Remove the air suspension compressor drier.

Remove the retaining screw.
Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
Installation
1. Install a new O-ring seal.
Lubricate the O-ring with a lithium based grease.
2. NOTE: If equipped, make sure the air suspension

compressor retaining cable is correctly routed around the
compressor cylinder head.
Install the air suspension compressor drier.

Install the retaining screw and tighten to 3 Nm (2.2
lb.ft).
3. CAUTIONS:
Visually inspect the air line ends for damage or wear.

Replace the air line as necessary.
Pull on the air line to make sure it is securely intalled

in the connector.
Connect the air line to the air suspension compressor drier.

Attach the air line to the retaining clip.
4. Install the air suspension compressor.
Compressor (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Removal
and Installation).
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Front Solenoid Valve
Block
Removal

safety stands.
2. Remove the RH fender splash shield.


4. CAUTIONS:
Before the disconnection or removal of any

components, ensure the area around joint faces and
connections are clean. Plug any open connections to

Repair or replace the air line as necessary.
Disconnect the 3 air lines from the air suspension front

5. Remove the air suspension front solenoid valve

block.
Release the valve block 3 rubber
insulators.
6. Remove the Voss connectors from the air lines.

Installation

installed.
NOTE: New air suspension components are supplied

being installed.
Install new Voss connectors to the air suspension front


detached during connection of the air lines.
Install the air suspension front solenoid valve block.


4. Install the RH fender splash shield.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Rear Air Spring
Removal
NOTE: Only the air spring being removed needs to be depressurised.

safety stands.
3. Using T4, depressurise the air suspension.

4. Disconnect the rear air spring from the lower

arm.

Disconnect the air line.
6. Using a trolley jack, support the rear air spring assembly.
7. Remove 3 rear air spring retaining nuts.
8. Remove the rear air spring.

Remove the collet and the union.
Installation
1. Install a new Voss connector to the air spring.
Tighten to 3.5 Nm (2.6 lb.ft)
2. Install the rear air spring.

Connect the air line into the Voss connector.

lower arm.
4. Using T4, pressurise the air suspension.


Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Muffler
Removal

safety stands.
2. Remove the muffler assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Muffler (309-00B
Exhaust System - 4.4L, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the evaporative emissions canister.

For additional information, refer to: Evaporative Emission
Canister (303-13B, Removal and Installation).
4. Remove the air suspension compressor.

Compressor (204-05, Removal and Installation).
5. Remove the air suspension compressor upper

cover.
6. Disconnect the air suspension intake filter pipe.
7. Remove the air suspension muffler.

Release clip from the air suspension
muffler pipe.
Release the air suspension compressor
to air suspension silencer pipes.
Installation
1. Install the air suspension muffler.
Locate the air suspension muffler pipes.
Secure the clip.
2. Connect the air suspension intake filter.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the air suspension compressor

upper cover is correctly positioned.
Install the air suspension compressor upper cover.

4. Install the air suspension compressor.
Compressor (204-05, Removal and Installation).
5. Install the evaporative emissions canister.

For additional information, refer to: Evaporative Emission
Canister (303-13B, Removal and Installation).
6. Install the muffler assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Muffler (309-00B
Exhaust System - 4.4L, Removal and Installation).
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Rear Solenoid Valve
Block
Removal

safety stands.
2. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire.

4. CAUTIONS:


Repair or replace the air line as necessary.
Disconnect 3 air lines from the rear valve block.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
6. Remove the rear valve block.

Release the valve block 3 rubber insulators.
7. Remove the Voss connectors from the air lines.

Remove and discard the collets and the
unions.
Installation
1. NOTE: New air suspension components are supplied

being installed.
Install new Voss connectors to the rear valve block.

2. Install the rear valve block.



Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Air Filter
Removal
1. Open the liftgate and tailgate.
2. Remove the spare wheel and tire.
3. Remove the 4 nuts securing the LH rear tail

pipe heat shield.
4. Reposition the LH rear tail pipe heat shield.
5. Disconnect the air suspension intake filter pipe.
6. Detach the air suspension intake filter.

Release the grommet.
Release from the clip.
7. Remove the LH lower rear quarter trim access

panel.
8. Remove the air suspension intake filter.
Installation
1. Install the air suspension intake filter.
Install the grommet.
2. Install the LH lower rear quarter trim access panel.
3. Attach the air suspension intake filter.

4. Connect the air suspension intake filter.
5. Reposition the LH rear tail pipe heat shield.

Install the nuts.
7. Close the liftgate and tailgate.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Front Air Shock Absorber
Special Tool(s)
Air spring tester
204-538
Remover front air shocker absorber spindle nut
204-700
Removal
NOTE: This procedure should also be used to remove the front air spring.
1. Remove the front shock absorber and air spring assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Front Shock Absorber
and Air Spring Assembly (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic
2. NOTE: If no leak is detected, investigate other areas

of the air suspension for faults.
Check the assembly for leaks.

Inflate the module to 4 bar and check for pressure
loss using leak detector spray.
If a leak is suspected, immerse the shock absorber
and air spring assembly in a tank of water to locate
the source of the leak and mark the area.
3. Remove the nylon retaining pin.
4. Using the special tool, remove the nut.

5. Remove the rebound washer.
6. CAUTIONS:
Make sure protective jaws are installed to

the vice. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the component.
Do not clamp the shock absorber tube.

Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the component.
Position the front shock absorber and air spring

assembly in a vice.
7. Remove and discard the 3 spacers and 2 O-ring

seals.
8. Remove the air spring.
Using a soft faced mallet, gently tap the
sleeve support upwards to release it
from the O-ring seals.
9. NOTE: Note the fitted position.
Remove the bump plate and spring aid.

10. Remove and discard the 2 large black O-ring
seals from the lower seal carrier.
11. Remove the front shock absorber and air spring assembly
from the vice.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure protective jaws are installed to

the vice. Failure to follow this instruction may
Do not clamp the shock absorber tube.

damage to the component.
Position the front shock absorber and air spring
assembly in a vice.
2. CAUTION: Use compressed air and lint free non-

flocking material.
Clean the components.
3. Lift the seal carrier to expose the O-ring seal

stack.
Make sure that the damper body O-ring
seals and spacers are fully seated to the
spring seat.
4. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the

O-ring seals during installation.
Install new O-ring seals to the seal carrier.

Apply loctite 8021 (silicon-based oil) to
the O-ring seals.
5. NOTE: Make sure that these components

are installed to the noted removal position.
Install the bump plate and spring aid.
6. Install the air spring.

Align the sleeve support with the first
O-ring seal making sure that the
location tag is correctly aligned with the
spring seat cut-out.
7. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the threads of the front air

shock absorber are covered with protective
tape.
Take care not to damage the O-ring seals

during installation.
Install the components in the following order:

1. O-ring seal
2. Spacer
3. O-ring seal
4. Spacer
5. Spacer
8. NOTE: The "T5" stamp on the upper face
of the rebound washer must be visable after
assembly.
Install the rebound washer.
9. Install a new nut and using the special tool,

and tighten to 98 Nm (72 lb.ft).
10. CAUTIONS:
The air supply must be free of any
moisture.
If during disassembly the air sleeve is

unrolled, the air sleeve may inflate incorrectly
(to one side). If this occurs, release the air
pressure, and insert a suitable tool that will not
damage the air sleeve or piston (a screw driver
handle), into the side opposite the bulge.
Inflate and deflate until the air sleeve inflates
correctly (the air sleeve will be uniform inside
the shroud).
NOTE: To prevent damage when seating

the sleeve support over the large black O-
rings, compressed air should be used to inflate
the air spring.
Using the special tool coupled to a tire inflator

with a gauge, apply approximately 2 bar of air
pressure to the air spring to fully seat the
sleeve support over the O-ring seals.
11. Check the assembly for leaks.

loss using leak detector spray.
If a leak is suspected, immerse the shock absorber
and air spring assembly in a tank of water to locate
the source of the leak.
12. Depressurize and remove the special tool from the shock
absorber and air spring assembly.
13. Install the nylon retaining pin.
14. NOTE: Install a new air spring pipe connector.
Install the front shock absorber and air spring assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Front Shock Absorber
and Air Spring Assembly (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Rear Air Shock Absorber
Special Tool(s)
Air spring tester
204-538
Band-it Thrift tool
100-050 (LRT-99-019)
Removal
NOTE: This procedure should also be used to remove the rear air spring.

safety stands.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Shock Absorber
and Air Spring Assembly (204-05, Removal and
Installation).
4. Remove the gaiter.

Remove and discard the 2 straps.
5. Remove the nut, rebound washer and rubber

bushing.
Discard the nut.
6. Remove and discard the O-ring seals and
spacer.
7. Remove the nylon retaining pin.
8. Remove the rebound plate and spring aid.
9. Remove the air spring.

Using a soft faced mallet, gently tap the
sleeve support upwards to release it
from the O-ring seals.
Remove and discard the 2 O-ring seals.
10. Remove the shock absorber from the vise.
Installation
1. Install the shock absorber in the vise.
3. Lubricate and install new O-rings to the seal carrier.
4. Install the spring aid and rebound plate.
5. Install the air spring.

Align the piston with the first O-ring
seal, making sure the location tag is
correctly aligned.
6. Install the new O-ring seals and spacer, taking care not to
damage the seals.
7. Install the rubber bushing and rebound washer.

Make sure the formed insert on the
bushing is located against the O-ring
seal.
8. Install and lightly tighten the nut.
9. CAUTIONS:
The air supply must be free of any moisture.
If during disassembly the air sleeve is unrolled, the air

sleeve may inflate incorrectly (to one side). If this occurs,
release the air pressure, and insert a suitable tool that will
not damage the air sleeve or piston (a screw driver handle),
into the side opposite the bulge. Inflate and deflate until the
air sleeve inflates correctly (the air sleeve will be uniform
inside the shroud).
Install the air spring piston over the O-ring seals.

Using the special tool coupled to a tire inflator with a
gauge, apply approximately 2 bar of air pressure to
the air spring to fully seat the piston over the O-ring
seals.
10. Tighten the top nut to 98 Nm (72 lb.ft).
11. Check the assembly for leaks.

loss.
If a leak is suspected, immerse the spring and shock
absorber assembly in a tank of water to locate the
source of the leak.
12. Install the gaiter.

Using the special tool, install new
straps.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Shock Absorber
and Air Spring Assembly (204-05, Removal and
Installation).
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Front Shock Absorber and Air Spring
Assembly
Removal
NOTE: Only the air spring being removed needs to be depressurized.

safety stands.

depressurize the air suspension.
4. Disconnect the shock absorber and air spring

5. Release the shock absorber and air spring

assembly.
Remove the 3 nuts.
6. CAUTION: Always plug any open

Reposition the shock absorber and air spring

assembly.
Disconnect the air line.
7. Remove the shock absorber and air spring assembly.

Installation

installed.
Install a new Voss connector to the air spring.

2. NOTES:
Remove and discard the blanking caps.
Install the shock absorber and air spring assembly.

Pull on the air line to make sure it is fully installed
into the Voss connector.
Install the nuts and tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb.ft).
3. Connect the shock absorber and air spring assembly to the

lower arm.

pressurize the air suspension.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Rear Shock Absorber and Air Spring Assembly
Removal
NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH is similar.
1. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, depressurize the air suspension.
For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension System Depressurize and Pressurize
2. Remove the
loadspace floor
panel.
3. Remove the jack and wheel brace.
4. Remove the spare wheel/tool compartment cover.
5. Lower the spare wheel and tire.

6. Remove the spare wheel.
Disconnect the spare wheel release strap and position aside.
7. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a jack. Always

support the vehicle on safety stands.
8. CAUTION:
Make sure that all
openings are
sealed. Use new
blanking caps.
Remove the Voss

connector from
the air line.
Remove
and
discard
the collet
and the
union.
Disconnect
the active
damping
wiring.
10. Disconnect the shock absorber and air spring assembly from the lower arm.
11. Remove the three shock absorber and air spring retaining nuts.
Remove the shock absorber and air spring assembly.
Installation
1. Install the shock absorber and air spring assembly.
Make sure the shock absorber and air spring assembly top mounting to body mating
faces are clean.
Pull on the air line to make sure it is fully installed into the Voss connecter.
2. Connect the shock absorber and air spring assembly to the lower arm.
Do not fully tighten at this stage.
3. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, pressurize the air suspension.
For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension System Depressurize and Pressurize
4. Tighten the shock absorber and air spring assembly to the lower arm.
5. CAUTION: Make sure the new Voss connector is installed and fully tightened with the
alignment plug installed.
Install a new Voss connector to the air spring.

Attach the active damping wiring.

7. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
8. Connect the spare wheel release strap to the spare wheel and tire.

Raise the spare wheel and tire.
10. Install the spare wheel/tool compartment cover.
11. Install the jack and wheel brace.
12. Install the loadspace floor panel.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Pressure Sensor
Removal

safety stands.
2. Remove the air compressor housing cover.

Remove the 3 bolts.


detached during removal of the air pressure sensor.
5. CAUTION: Before the disconnection or

removal of any components, ensure the area
around joint faces and connections are clean.
Plug any open connections to prevent
contamination.
Remove the air pressure sensor.

Installation

detached during installation of the air pressure sensor.
Install the air pressure sensor.

Install a new O-ring seal.
Tighten to 5 Nm (4 lb.ft).
2. Connect the electrical connector.

4. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the air suspension compressor upper cover
is correctly positioned.
Make sure the air suspension exhaust pipe is correctly

located in to the air suspension upper cover.
Install the air compressor housing cover.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Compressor
Removal
WARNING: Steps 1 and 2 must be carried out within 10 minutes of each other. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing components, make sure the area around the joint faces and connections are clean. Plug
open connections to prevent contamination.
1. CAUTION: Make sure the ignition switch is turned off, the park brake is on and
the selector lever is in park.
Open the front door.
2. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a jack. Always

support the vehicle on safety stands.
Raise and support the vehicle. Make sure at least one of the wheels is off the ground.
3.
4. CAUTION: Always plug any open connections to prevent

contamination.
5. CAUTION: Always plug any open connections to prevent

contamination.
6.
NOTE:
Note the
orientation
of the
component
prior to
removal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Check the air compressor type. If an AMK air compressor is installed to
replace an Hitachi air compressor then a new corresponding relay must also be
installed.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic

Suspension, Specifications).
2. CAUTION: Using a suitable tap, cut a starting thread to align the

self tapping bolts.
3. CAUTIONS:
Make
sure that
these
components
are
installed to
the noted
removal
position.
Make
sure that
the self
tapping
bolts
remains
aligned
during the
tightening
process.
TORQUE:
10 Nm
4.
5.
6. TORQUE: 9 Nm
Ride and Handling Optimization - Ride and Handling Optimization
Component Location

1 - Instrument Cluster (IC)
2 - Hill Descent Control (HDC) and Range Control switchpack (coil spring vehicles)
3 - Terrain Response (TR) switchpack (air suspension vehicles)
4 - Rear differential
5 - Rear Differential Control Module (RDCM)
7 - Transfer case (center differential and high/low range)
8 - Engine Control Module (ECM)
9 - Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) control module
10 - Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM)
GENERAL
NOTE: Coil spring vehicle are not equipped with TR system.
The TR system allows the driver to select a program which aims to provide the optimum settings for traction and
performance for the prevailing terrain conditions. The system cannot be switched off. The 'special programs off' is
the default program and covers all general driving conditions. Four specific terrain programs are selectable to cover
all terrain surfaces.
The system is controlled by a rotary control located on the center console, rearward of the selector lever (automatic
transmission) or gearshift lever (manual transmission). The rotary control allows the selection of one of the following
five programs:
Special programs off

Grass/Gravel/Snow
Mud-Ruts
Sand
Rock crawl.
The rotary control can be rotated through 360 degrees or more in either direction and selects each program in turn.
When TR is fitted to a vehicle, a hi-line IC will also be fitted which will display the selected program in the message
center.
The TR system uses a combination of a number of vehicle subsystems to achieve the required vehicle characteristics
for the terrain selected. The following subsystems make up the TR system:
Engine management system

Automatic transmission (if fitted)
Transfer case (center differential)
Rear differential (electronically controlled)
Brake system (ABS/DSC/ETC/HDC functions)
Air suspension.
A TR control module is located below the rotary control. The control module detects the selection made on the rotary
control and transmits a signal on the high speed CAN (controller area network) which is received by each of the
subsystem control modules. Each of the affected control modules contain software which applies the correct
operating parameters to their controlled system for the TR program selection made. Each control module also
provides a feedback for the selected program so that the TR control module can check that all systems have
changed to the correct operating parameters.
Information is displayed in the IC message center which informs the driver of improvements which can be made to
the vehicle operating parameters to optimize the vehicle for the prevailing conditions. Inexperienced off-road drivers
may benefit from the automatic assistance of the TR system and the driver information. Experienced off-road drivers
can select the specific programs for extreme conditions to access control over the vehicle systems (e.g., throttle shift
maps or traction settings) which are not accessible on vehicles without TR.
TERRAIN RESPONSE SWITCHPACK
NOTE: Air suspension vehicles.

A - TR switchpack - Transmission Selector Lever
B - TR switchpack - Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
C - Air suspension switch
D - Hill Descent Control (HDC) switch
1 - General program (special programs off)
2 - Grass/Gravel/Snow
3 - Mud-Ruts
4 - Sand
5 - Rock crawl
6 - Raise/lower switch
7 - Off-Road Mode
8 - On-Road Mode
9 - Access Mode
10 - Crawl (Locked at Access) Mode
11 - HDC switch
NOTE: Coil spring vehicles only.

1 - Hi range switch
2 - Low range switch
3 - HDC switch
Each program is denoted by a symbol which represents the terrain encountered. The rotary control can be rotated to
select the required program. The control will only select the last program in its direction of rotation. Further rotation
of the control once the last program in either direction has been selected, will have no effect, e.g. once rock crawl
has been selected, further rotation in a clockwise direction will have no effect.
The TR control module is located below the rotary control. The module is connected via a harness connector which
also contains the wiring for the HDC switch, the Transfer case high/low range switch, the air suspension switch and
the switch illumination circuits. The control module and switch uses four of these wires for a 12V battery supply
when the ignition switch is in ignition position II, a ground and high speed CAN positive and negative.
TERRAIN RESPONSE OPERATION
The following vehicle subsystem control modules are used for the TR system:
Engine management (engine control module)

Transmission control (TCM - automatic transmission only)
Transfer case control (TCCM)
Rear differential control (RDCM - if fitted)
Air suspension control (air suspension control module)
Brake system (ABS/DSC/ETC/HDC functions) (ABS (anti-lock brake system) control module)
Each subsystem operates in different ways in relation to the selected TR program to achieve the optimum traction,
stability and ease of control for the terrain encountered. The system has a safety factor built in which ensures that
any program can be safely used on any surface, even when an inappropriate program selection has been made.
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE
The ECM (engine control module) varies the throttle pedal response to control the engine torque output. The ECM
can change the throttle maps to change the amount of torque per percentage of pedal travel. The ECM can also
change the throttle response to control the allowed torque change relative to the percentage pedal travel.
Each terrain program uses a combination of operating parameters for each subsystem. Changing between terrain
programs initiates a different set of operating characteristics which will be noticeable to the driver. The driver will
notice differences in engine and throttle response when, for example, the throttle pedal is held in a constant position
and the terrain program is changed from grass/gravel/snow to sand, the driver will notice the torque and engine
speed increase. If the terrain program is changed from sand to grass/gravel/snow the driver will notice a reduction in
torque and engine speed.
NOTE: The change in torque and engine speed can take approximately 30 seconds and care must be taken not
to confuse the TR system operation with an ECM fault.
Transmission Control
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) changes the shift maps for the TR program selected. This changes the shift
points providing early or late upshifts and downshifts.
On slippery surfaces the transmission will select 2nd gear in high range or 3rd gear in low range for starting from a
standstill to minimize wheel slip. In muddy conditions the transmission will provide maximum torque output from the
transmission. In sand the transmission will provide an output which passes maximum engine power from the
transmission.
In rock crawl special program (low range) the transmission will select 1st gear for driving off.
Sport mode is only available when the general program is selected and the transfer case is in high range. Sport
mode is disabled in low range and all TR special programs. CommandShift™ is available in any program and also in
high or low range.
If the transmission is in 'Sport' mode and a special program is subsequently selected, the transmission will
automatically change to manual 'CommandShift™' mode. If a special program is already selected and the
transmission selector lever is moved from drive 'D' to the 'Sport' mode position, the transmission will automatically
change to 'CommandShift™' mode.
Transfer case and Rear Differential Control
The Transfer case electronically controlled differential and the rear electronically controlled differential (if fitted) are
treated as one system. The electronic rear differential is an optional fitment on vehicles fitted with the TR system.
The differential control has two operating strategies; pre-emptive and reactive.
The pre-emptive strategy anticipates and predicts the locking torque value required for each differential to minimize
slip and maximize stability. Each TR program has a different threshold and input criteria for the pre-emptive
strategy. The pre-emptive strategy improves vehicle traction and composure by avoiding wheel spin. This is achieved
by anticipating the amount of differential lock required for the program selected. For example, a high locking torque
would be applied for rock crawl or slippery surfaces.
The reactive strategy varies the amount of locking torque in response to the actual slip level and the dynamic
behavior of the vehicle. Each TR program has a different threshold and input for the reactive strategy. The reactive
strategy improves vehicle traction and composure by eliminating any wheel spin which has occurred after the pre-
emptive strategy was applied. The locking response applied is applicable to the terrain program selected, for
example, very sensitive on slippery surfaces to provide maximum traction and minimize surface damage.
The locking torque calculations use various signals from other subsystems, for example, engine torque, throttle
position, selected gear, steering angle, vehicle speed, lateral acceleration, yaw behavior.
The Dynamic Stability Control function of the ABS system can override the TR differential control and reduce any
applied locking torque during DSC action.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control (206-09A, Description and Operation).
Air Suspension Control
The air suspension control module contains a strategy which provides automatic switching between normal and off-
road heights. Changes in vehicle height settings will be relayed to the driver via the IC message center and LED
(light emitting diode) illuminated icons on the switch. The automatic selection and deselection of the vehicle height
provides automatic increase and decrease in ground clearance and aims to provide maximum benefit to the selected
terrain program.
On a vehicle fitted with a correctly installed, Land Rover approved trailer socket, if an electrical load is sensed on the
trailer socket, height changes are prohibited and the message center displays a message advising that a trailer is
connected and off-road height is not automatically selected. The driver can raise the suspension manually using the
air suspension switch.
NOTE: The prohibiting of the automatic ride height selection is only operational if a Land Rover approved trailer
socket is fitted and an electrical load is sensed on the socket.
Anti-Lock Brake System Control
The ABS control module controls several vehicle functions and adjusts the operating parameters of these functions to
optimize the selected TR program.
Traction control uses different slip/acceleration thresholds to improve traction and vehicle composure. For example,
the system sensitivity is increased on slippery surfaces to reduce wheel spin.
If DSC is switched off (with the DSC switch on the instrument panel) when using a TR special program, if the special
program is subsequently changed for a different program DSC is automatically switched back on.
The stability control uses different threshold values for the selected program to automatically reduce DSC
intervention, removing the requirement for the driver to disable the DSC system in order to reduce engine
intervention which is sometimes induced in extreme off-road conditions. In extreme sand conditions, there may be an
additional benefit of disabling the DSC function using the DSC switch on the instrument panel in addition to selecting
the sand program.
HDC is automatically switched on or off and target speeds are adjusted in response to the TR program selected. The
responsiveness of the HDC function is also increased where required.
Automatic operation of HDC aims to assist the driver by switching the system on or off when it is of most benefit.
Target speeds for HDC operation are also adjusted according the vehicle operating conditions.
Incorrect Program Usage

Selection of an inappropriate program is discouraged in the following ways:
The active program icon is continually displayed in the IC message center

The TR control module 'locks' out certain functions in some programs, e.g.
- cruise control is only available with the special programs off or grass/gravel/snow program
- transmission 'Sport' mode is deactivated in all special programs.
In any special program, except the grass/gravel/snow program, when the ignition has been in the off position
continually for more than 6 hours, the TR system defaults to the Special Programs Off
When in the grass/gravel/snow program, the TR system will never default to the Special Programs Off. This is
to allow for drivers in cold climates where continuous use of the grass/gravel/snow program would be
beneficial.
The rock crawl program is only available with the Transfer case in low range.
Selection of an inappropriate program for the terrain conditions will not endanger the driver or cause damage to the
vehicle. Continued use of an inappropriate program may reduce the life of some components. The driver may notice
reduced vehicle response, with the engine and transmission being less responsive than in the special programs off.
Also, in some programs, HDC will remain on, signified by illumination of the HDC indicator in the IC. The driver may
also notice torque 'wind-up' in the center and rear differentials causing a 'braking' effect when the vehicle is
maneuvered in some special programs.
The use of the special programs in the TR system is monitored by the TR control module which records the mileage
and time the vehicle has operated in a specific program in high and low range. This information can be retrieved
using T4 and used by the dealer technician to check customer concerns, e.g. high fuel consumption which may be
due to continued use of a certain program.
Driver Information
The high specification IC fitted to all vehicles with TR, contains a message center which displays vehicle information
to the driver. The message center contains the TR program icons which display the currently selected program. If no
symbol is displayed, no special program is selected and the system is in special programs off.
Any required changes to the subsystems are also passed to the driver in the form of indicator illumination in the IC
or appropriate messages in the message center, HDC off or air suspension height change for example.
In certain operating conditions, the TR system also displays advice or warning messages to ensure the driver is using
the vehicle to its full potential, e.g.:
steering angle is displayed in the message center to avoid driving in deep ruts with steering lock applied
gear information is displayed to recommend a gear for slippery conditions
if the system automatically provided off road ride height, but the driver subsequently lowers the vehicle to
normal height, then the system may advise that this will cause a risk of grounding.
The messages which can be displayed in the IC message center are detailed in the Information and Message Center
section.
DIAGNOSTICS
The TR control module stores information on detected TR faults and CAN errors which can be interrogated using T4.
The TR sub-systems and the IC also store fault information relating to CAN errors from the TR control module.
The control module also stores the miles travelled and time elapsed in high range for the individual programs and in
low range for use of all programs which can also be retrieved using T4. This information aids diagnosis of the TR
system and also provides an indication of TR system abuse by the driver which can lead to premature component
failure.
Terrain Response System Fault Diagnosis
TR relies on the correct functionality of the five sub-systems. If one of the sub-systems develops a fault, the TR
system will not function, even though the fault is not in the TR system. The TR control module and rotary control
should only be investigated if there are no apparent faults in any of the sub-systems. If a fault in a sub-system is
subsequently corrected, the TR system will function normally after an ignition on and off cycle.
Terrain Response Sub-System Faults
If a fault occurs in a sub-system, the driver is alerted by the illumination of a warning indicator and/or an
appropriate message for that sub-system in the IC message center. There will be no warning of a TR system fault.
When a sub-system fault is present and the driver attempts to select a different TR program using the rotary control
or at the next ignition on cycle, a message 'SYSTEM FAULT SPECIAL PROGRAMS NOT AVAILABLE' will appear in the
message center. This implies that the TR system has a fault, but only because a sub-system fault is preventing its
operation. This message will be displayed for 5 seconds per ignition cycle, but is repeated if a further selection is
made by the driver using the TR rotary control or at the next ignition on cycle.
NOTE: The message 'SYSTEM FAULT SPECIAL PROGRAMS NOT AVAILABLE' can also be generated by a fault in
the TR rotary control or control module. See following section for details of rotary control or control module faults.
It is not possible for the TR control module to cause any fault behavior (warning indicator illumination or message
generation) in any of the five sub-systems. Illumination of a sub-system warning indicator and/or a sub-system
related message will never be associated with a TR control module or TR system fault.
The sub-system control modules can detect a fault with the CAN signal from the TR control module. If a fault in the
TR system is detected, the sub-system control modules will operate in the 'special programs off' setting. The sub-
system control modules will record a fault code for a failure of the TR CAN signal. These faults can be retrieved using
T4 and will provide useful information to indicate investigation of the TR control module or the CAN network.
Terrain Response Rotary Control or Control Module Fault
If a fault occurs in the TR rotary control, all rotary control icon amber LED's will be turned off (background
illumination will remain on) and rotation of the rotary control is ignored. The IC message center will display a
message 'SYSTEM FAULT SPECIAL PROGRAMS NOT AVAILABLE' when the fault occurs, if the fault is present and the
driver attempts to select a special program (if the control module is able to do this) or at the next ignition on cycle.
If a failure of a rotary control icon amber LED occurs, the TR system will still function. Any selected special program
will default to 'special programs off' at every ignition on cycle, with the exception of the grass/gravel/snow program.
The TR rotary control and the control module are an integral unit. If a fault occurs in either component, the whole
unit will require replacement.
CAN Faults
If a CAN fault exists and prevents TR system operation, all of the TR rotary control icon LEDs will be illuminated and
rotation of the rotary control is ignored.
If the IC does not receive a TR system CAN message from the TR Control module, the message 'SYSTEM FAULT
SPECIAL PROGRAMS NOT AVAILABLE' will be displayed when the fault occurs and will be repeated at every ignition
on cycle.
User Error
The following incorrect usage of the system may be misinterpreted as a system fault:
Engine not running - Program changes and driver advisory messages are only available with the engine
running
Rock crawl program selected but transfer case in high range
Special program change attempted with DSC or ABS active (this includes ABS cycling which is operational
when HDC is being used on slippery or loose surfaces).
Special program change attempted with overheat condition present on center or rear differential.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High Speed CAN bus

1 - Battery
2 - RDCM
4 - ECM
5 - ABS control module
6 - IC
8 - Transfer case (center differential and high/low range)
9 - Hill Descent Control (HDC) and Range Control Switchpack (coil spring vehicles)
11 - TR switchpack (air suspension vehicles)
12 - TCCM
13 - Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Terrain Response allows the driver to select a program which provides the optimum settings for traction and
performance for the prevailing terrain conditions. The Terrain Response system fitted to armoured vehicle has
reduced functionality compared to that of the standard vehicle.
The system is controlled by a rotary control located on the floor console, rearward of the transmission selector
lever. The rotary control allows the selection of one of the following special programs:
Grass/ gravel /snow (also includes ice)

Mud / ruts
Sand
The ‘Rock Crawl’ option has been disabled on the armoured vehicle and the icon deleted.
Rotary control minus ‘Rock Crawl’ option
NOTE: Do not fit a standard rotary control to an armoured vehicle.
The principles of operation of the Terrain Response system are the same as that for the standard vehicle.
For additional information, refer to: Ride and Handling Optimization (204-06, Description and Operation).
Ride and handling optimization incorporates the terrain response system which links a number of modules around
the vehicle to give the best combination of settings in the different systems.
For a detailed description of the Ride and Handling System and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual.
REFER to: Ride and Handling Optimization (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Tire condition, pressures, etc Fuses
Driveline components (correct installation, damage, Harnesses/connectors
etc) Terrain response switchpack
Engine components (correct installation, damage, etc) Engine Control Module (ECM)
Transmission components (correct installation, Transmission Control Module (TCM)
damage, etc) Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM)
Suspension components (correct installation, damage, Anti-lock Braking System control module
etc) (ABS)
Controller Area Network (CAN) circuits
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
Symptom Chart
Because the overall function of the system is dependent on sub-systems, it is possible to misinterpret displays in
the message center as being terrain response faults when they are actually a result of a fault in one of the sub-
systems.
Refer to the table below for help in deciding when to investigate terrain response faults and when the fault is
likely to be in a sub-system.
Symptom Description Possible Causes Action

Message centre The message centre indicates to Any sub- For details of the
display indicating a the driver that a fault has system fault available messages, refer
sub-system fault occurred and in which sub-system supported by to the relevant section of
the message the workshop manual.
centre Carry out a complete
vehicle DTC read and
follow the diagnostic
routine(s) indicated
Message centre This message will display when a Any sub- For details of the
display: System sub-system fault has occurred if system fault available messages, refer
fault special the driver attempts to change the supported by to the relevant section of
programs not special program, and at each the message the workshop manual.
available, terrain ignition on cycle for 5 seconds centre Carry out a complete
response switch until the fault is rectified vehicle DTC read and
operation normal follow the diagnostic
routine(s) indicated
Message centre CAN circuit errors CAN circuit: Carry out a complete
display: System short circuit to vehicle DTC read and
fault special ground follow the diagnostic
programs not CAN circuit: routine(s) indicated
available, all terrain short circuit to
response switch LEDs power
illuminated CAN circuit:
high resistance
Special program User error Engine not Refer to the relevant

changes not available running section of the workshop
Rock crawl manual. Make sure that
selected with the driver is familiar with
transfer box in the correct operation of
high range the system
Special
program
change
attempted
with anti-lock
brake system
or dynamic
stability
control active
- This
includes
anti-
lock
brake
system
cycling
as part
of hill
descent
control
Special
program
change
attempted
with an
overheat
condition
present in the
centre or rear
differential
DTC Index
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Terrain Response Switchpack (TR) (100-00 General
Switch
Removal
NOTE: Automatic transmission shown. Manual transmission is similar.
1. WARNING: The gear lever knob will be

released suddenly, keep face clear during
removal.
Remove the selector lever knob.

Pull the knob upwards.
2. Release the ride and handling optimization

switch assembly.
3. Release the selector lever panel.

4. Remove the ride and handling optimization

switch assembly.
5. Remove the selector lever panel.
Installation
1. Install the selector lever panel.
2. Install the ride and handling optimization switch assembly.

Secure the selector lever trim panel.
3. CAUTION: Only fit the selector knob when the selector

lever is in the 'P' position.
Install the selector lever knob.

Engage the locating tang of the knob with the slot in
the selector lever.
Push the knob fully onto the selector lever.
Switch
Removal
NOTES:
Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.
Make sure that the gear selector lever is in position N before removing any components.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Installation

Driveshaft -
Front Drive (Propeller) Shaft
Item Specification
Type One piece, variable length steel tube.
Constant velocity joints Plunging type, fitted at front and rear.
Rear Drive (Propeller) Shaft
Item Specification
Type Two piece, variable length steel tube with isolated centre bearing and swaged front section to
provide controlled collapse of the shaft during a crash.
Constant Plunging constant velocity joints are positioned at the front and centre of the shaft with a fixed,
velocity joints Hookes type universal joint at the rear.
* Front driveshaft to front axle drive flange Torx bolts:
Stage 1 45 33
Stage 2 Further 90° Further 90°
* Front driveshaft to transfer case drive flange Torx bolts:
Stage 1 45 33
* Rear driveshaft to rear axle drive flange Torx bolts 150 110
Rear driveshaft to transfer case drive flange Torx bolts 73 54
Rear driveshaft center bearing bolts 30 22
Fuel tank heat shield bolts 5 4
Fuel tank heat shield nuts 3 2
* New 'Patched' Torx bolts must be installed
Driveshaft - Driveshaft
Drive shaft Component Location

1 - Front drive shaft
2 - Rear drive shaft
GENERAL
Drive shafts are used to transmit drive from the transfer box to the front and rear differentials.
The front drive shaft is a one-piece unit, connected to the transfer box and front differential unit via Constant
Velocity (CV) joints.
The rear drive shaft is a two-piece unit, supported on a central bearing due to its increased length. The rear drive
shaft is connected to the transfer box via a CV joint and the rear differential with a universal joint. These joints allow
for angular deviations of the drive shaft due to acceleration and braking.
The front and rear drive shafts are not serviceable items and a failure will require the replacement of the complete
drive shaft assembly.
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT

1 - CV joint
2 - Front drive shaft
The front drive shaft is constructed from 1.7 mm wall tubular steel. A CV joint is attached to each end of the drive
shaft (see 'Halfshaft Joint' section for more information on CV joints). The shaft has an overall nominal length of 713
mm.
Each CV joint has six holes, which allow for attachment to the input flange of the front differential and the front
output flange of the transfer box. The CV joints are secured to the front differential and transfer box with six Torx
head adhesive retained bolts.
Three compression link washers are fitted under each pair of bolts. The washers are required to prevent compression
of the CV joints attachment flange.
A shroud is pressed over the CV joint. The shroud seals to the joint body using an internal gasket and to the front
output flange of the transfer box using an end cap and internal gasket. This prevents the ingress of dirt and
moisture. The CV joints allow for movement of the drive shaft caused by small movements in the transmission and
transfer box mountings.
REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY

1 - CV joints
2 - Collapsible crash section
3 - Front shaft assembly
4 - Support bearing
5 - Rear shaft assembly
6 - Universal joint
The rear drive shaft assembly comprises front and rear shaft assemblies and a centrally mounted shaft bearing. The
rear drive shaft assembly has an overall nominal length of 1309 mm.
Front Shaft Assembly
The front shaft assembly incorporates a crash feature within the tube, which controls the collapse of the drive shaft
during a crash.
The front shaft assembly comprises a CV joint at each end (see 'Halfshaft Joint' section for more information on CV
joints).
The front CV joint (transfer box end) has six radial holes, which provide for the attachment to the transfer box rear
output flange. The joint is secured to the output flange with six torx bolts, which screw into threaded holes in the
flange. Three compression link washers are fitted under each pair of bolts. The rear splined shaft mates with splines
in the rear shaft CV joint hub and is pressed in and fixed with Locktite. A machined surface on the shaft accepts the
shaft bearing, which is a press fit.
Rear Shaft Assembly
The rear shaft assembly comprises a Hookes type universal joint at the rear (rear differential end).
The universal joint is welded to the rear shaft tube and is secured to the input shaft of the rear differential with four
flanged nuts. The opposite end of the rear shaft tube is welded directly to the CV joint body.
Shaft Bearing Assembly
The shaft bearing assembly comprises a pressed steel housing, a rubber diaphragm and a ball bearing. The
diaphragm is bonded into the housing. An internal metal ring, bonded to the bush, allows for the bearing to be press
fitted into it. The rubber bush allows for small deviations in alignment and also absorbs vibrational forces. The shaft
bearing assembly is located by screws, which pass through plain holes in the bearing assembly and locate into nuts
welded on the inside face of the chassis cross-member.
Driveshaft - Universal Joints
A Hookes type universal joint is used to connect the rear drive shaft assembly to the rear differential, allowing for
angular deviations of the drive shafts due to acceleration and braking.
The joint is bolted to the input shaft of the rear differential with four flanged adhesive screws and is lubricated during
manufacture and sealed for life.
Driveshaft - Front Driveshaft V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Removal
NOTES:
Note the orientation of the driveshaft to aid installation
A small amount of oil may weep from the driveshaft joints during storage. The loss of this oil will not affect the
operation or durability of the joint.

2. Refer to: Transmission Support Crossmember - V6 S/C 3.0L

Petrol (502-02 Full Frame and Body Mounting, Removal and
Installation).
3.
4. CAUTIONS:
Mark the position of the driveshaft flange in

relation to the drive pinion flange.
To avoid damage to the joint or gaiter, do not

allow the driveshaft to hang.
Make sure that the driveshaft is supported with

suitable retaining straps.
Remove the 6 Torx bolts and washers,

discard the bolts.
5. CAUTIONS:
Mark the position of the driveshaft flange in
relation to the drive pinion flange.
To avoid damage to the joint or gaiter, do not

allow the driveshaft to hang.
Make sure that the driveshaft is supported with

suitable retaining straps.

discard the bolts.
6.
Compress the joints to disengage the drive flanges.
Installation
1. Clean all the mating faces and reusable parts thoroughly and
check for damage.
2. NOTE: A small amount of oil may weep from the driveshaft

joints during storage. The loss of this oil will not affect the
operation or durability of the joint.
Compress the joints to engage the drive flanges.

3. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that new bolts are installed.
The component must be aligned with the

installation markings.
Tighten the bolts in a diagonal sequence.
Torque:
Stage 1 45 Nm
Stage 2 90°
4. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that new bolts are installed.
The component must be aligned with the

installation markings.
Tighten the bolts in a diagonal sequence.
Torque:
Stage 1 45 Nm
Stage 2 90°
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6. Refer to: Transmission Support Crossmember - V6 S/C 3.0L
Petrol (502-02 Full Frame and Body Mounting, Removal and
Installation).
Driveshaft - Front Driveshaft TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
CAUTION: It is possible to fit the driveshaft incorrectly. Note the orientation before removal.
NOTE: A small amount of oil may weep from the driveshaft joints during storage. The loss of this oil will
not affect the operation or durability of the joint.

safety stands.
2. Remove the transmission crossmember.

For additional information, refer to: Transmission Support
Crossmember - 3.0L Diesel (502-02, Removal and
Installation).
3. NOTE: If equipped.
Remove the transmission heat shield.

Remove the 4 bolts.
4. CAUTIONS:
Mark the position of the driveshaft flange

in relation to the drive pinion flange.
To avoid damage to the joint or gaiter, do

not allow the driveshaft to hang.
Release the driveshaft from the transfer case

drive flange.
discard the bolts.
5. CAUTIONS:


Release the driveshaft from the front axle drive

flange.
discard the bolts.
6. Remove the front driveshaft.

Compress the joints to disengage the
drive flanges.
Installation
1. NOTE: A small amount of oil may weep from the

driveshaft joints during storage. The loss of this oil will not
affect the operation or durability of the joint.
Install the driveshaft.

Clean the components.
Compress the joints to engage the drive flanges.
2. CAUTION: Make sure that new bolts are installed.
Secure the driveshaft to the front axle drive flange.

Stage 1: Tighten the bolts to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft).
Stage 2: Tighten the bolts a further 90 degrees.
Secure the driveshaft to the transfer case drive flange.

4. Install the transmission heat shield.

5. Install the transmission crossmember.

For additional information, refer to: Transmission Support
Crossmember - 3.0L Diesel (502-02, Removal and
Installation).
Driveshaft - Rear Driveshaft
Removal
NOTE: A small amount of oil may weep from the driveshaft joints during storage. The loss of this oil will
not affect the operation or durability of the joint.

safety stands.
2. Remove the fuel tank heat shield.

Remove the 3 bolts and 2 nuts.
3. CAUTIONS:


Release the driveshaft from the transfer case

drive flange.
Remove the 6 Torx bolts and washers.
4. CAUTIONS:


Release the driveshaft from the rear axle drive

flange.
Remove and discard the 4 Torx bolts.
5. With assistance, remove the driveshaft.

Remove the 2 driveshaft center bearing
mount bolts.
Installation

Attach the driveshaft to the rear axle drive flange.

Tighten the new Torx bolts to 150 Nm (110 lb.ft).

Attach the driveshaft to the transfer case drive flange.

Tighten the Torx bolts to 73 Nm (54 lb.ft).
3. CAUTIONS:
Align the driveshaft center bearing mount by moving

the floating front section of the shaft backward or forwards
until the bolt holes in the mount align with the holes in the
chassis.
Make sure the center bearing mount is not under

tension.
Install the driveshaft center bearing mount bolts.

Align the center bearing mount.
Tighten the driveshaft center bearing retaining bolts
to 30 Nm (22 lb.ft).
4. Install the fuel tank heat shield.

Rear Drive Axle/Differential -
Lubricants
NOTE: Do not use any lubricant other than that specified
Item Specification
Recommended lubricant:
'Open' differential Castrol SAF-XO - 75W/90
Differential with locking motor Castrol SAF Carbon Mod Plus
Capacities
Unit Capacity
'Open' differential 1.25 litres (1.32 US quarts)
Differential with locking motor 1.76 litres (1.86 US quarts)
Rear 'Open' Differential
Item Specification
Reduction ratio:
V6 Diesel engine - 8HP70 Automatic transmission 3.21:1
V8 Petrol engine - 6HP28 Automatic transmission 3.54:1
Rear Differential with Locking Motor
Item Specification
Range Up to 2500 Nm (98.5 lbf/ft)
Differential locking motor Operates the ball/ramp mechanism and wet clutch. Motor incorporates a
temperature sensor and is controlled by a module
Differential type 4 pin
Reduction ratio:
V6 Diesel engine - 8HP70 3.21:1
Automatic transmission
V6 Diesel engine - 6HP28 3.54:1
V8 Petrol engine - 6HP28 3.54:1
Oil drain plug 29 21
Oil filler plug 29 21
Oil temperature sensor 22 16
++ Differential locking motor bolts 10 7
Differential front mounting bolts 275 203
Differential rear mounting bolts 175 129
* Driveshaft to rear axle drive flange Torx bolts 150 110
Lower arm to wheel knuckle 275 203
Stabilizer bar link nuts 115 85
**+ Halfshaft retaining nut 350 258
* New patchlok torx bolts must be installed
** New nut must be installed
+ Stake nut on completion of tightening operation
++ Apply sealant to flange of locking motor

Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential
GENERAL

A - Electronic rear differential
B - Open rear differential
1 - Rear driveshaft
2 - Electronic rear differential
3 - RH rear drive halfshaft
4 - Actuator (locking) motor assembly
5 - LH rear drive halfshaft
The open rear differential converts the 'angle of drive' through 90° and distributes drive, via the rear drive halfshafts,
to the rear wheels.
The differential unit is mounted to the chassis via rubber bushes and bolts; two mounting points at the rear of the
unit and one at the front.
OPEN REAR DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
Open Rear Differential - Exploded View

1 - Cap
2 - Seal
3 - Bearing assembly, without race
4 - Bearing pre-load spacer
5 - Bearing
6 - Roller bearing cup
7 - Cover
8 - Seal
9 - Differential carrier
10 - Gear and pinion assembly
11 - Bearing
13 - Shim
14 - Collapsible spacer
15 - Pinion nut
16 - Retainer
17 - Flange
18 - Outer deflector
19 - Inner deflector
20 - Oil seal
21 - Bearing
23 - Roll pin
24 - Breather cap
25 - Breather
26 - Case
27 - Data location
28 - Mounting bush
29 - Bearing
32 - Plug
33 - Drain plug
34 - Thrust washer
35 - Planet gears
36 - Crosspin shaft
37 - Sunwheel
38 - Thrust washer
39 - Bolt, 10 of
40 - Bolt, 12 of
The cast iron casing comprises two parts; a cover and a carrier. The carrier provides locations for all the internal
components. The carrier is sealed to the cover via an O-ring seal and secured with twelve bolts. The cover and
carrier have cast fins, which assist mobility. A breather tube is fitted to the top of the carrier. This allows a plastic
tube to be fitted and routed to a high point under the vehicle body, preventing the ingress of water when the vehicle
is wading.
The carrier contains an oil drain plug. The differential unit contains a specified oil.
The differential is a conventional design using a hypoid gear layout, similar to the front differential. The open rear
differential is available in various ratios depending on engine installation.
Changing the number of teeth between the crown wheel drive gear and pinion gear changes the ratio.
The differential comprises a pinion shaft and hypoid pinion-gear and a crown wheel drive-gear with an integral cage,
which houses two planet gears. Two sun wheels are also located in the cage and pass the rotational drive to the drive
shafts.
The pinion shaft is mounted on two opposed taper roller bearings, with a collapsible spacer located between them.
The spacer is used to hold the bearings in alignment and also collapses under the pressure applied to the pinion
flanged nut. This allows the flanged nut to be tightened to a predetermined torque, which collapses the spacer,
setting the correct bearing preload.
The pinion shaft has an externally splined outer end, which accepts and locates the input flange, which is retained by
the pinion nut and retainer. The input flange has four threaded holes and mates with the rear drive shaft. Four bolts
secure the rear drive shaft to the input flange. An oil seal is pressed into the pinion housing and seals the input
flange to the pinion housing. The pinion shaft has a hypoid gear at its inner end, which mates with the crown wheel
drive gear.
The crown wheel drive gear is located on the differential case and secured with ten screws. The differential case is
mounted on taper roller bearings located in machined bores on each side of the pinion housing. Shims are retained in
the casing behind the bearing cups, the shim thickness is selected to apply the correct bearing preload and hypoid
backlash.
The differential carrier has a through hole, which provides location for the shaft. The shaft is supported by a sun gear
and a needle roller bearing. The shaft is fitted with a snap ring at one end, which locates in a machined groove in the
sun gear, locking the shaft in position.
The sun gears are located in pockets in the carrier cage and mesh with the planet gears. Spacers are fitted between
the sun wheels and the carrier and set the correct mesh contact between the planet gears and the sun wheels. Each
sun wheel has a machined bore with internal splines and machined groove near the splined end. The groove provides
positive location for a snap ring fitted to the end of each output flange.
Each output shaft has a spline, which locates in each sun wheel. A snap ring fitted to the splined shaft locates in the
groove the sun wheel bore and positively located the output shaft. Oil seals are pressed into each side of the pinion
housing and seal the seal the output shaft.
Differential Operation
The operating principles of the front and rear differentials are the same. Rotational input from the drive shaft is
passed via the input flange to the pinion shaft and pinion gear. The angles of the pinion gear to the crown wheel
drive gear moves the rotational direction through 90°.
The transferred rotational motion is now passed to the crown wheel drive gear, which in turn rotates the differential
casing. The shaft, which is secured to the casing, also rotates at the same speed as the casing. The planet gears,
which are mounted on the shaft, also rotate with the casing. In turn, the planet gears transfer their rotational motion
to the left and right hand sun wheels, rotating the drive halfshafts.
When the vehicle is moving in a forward direction, the torque applied through the differential to each sun wheel is
equal. In this condition both drive halfshafts rotate at the same speed. The planet gears do not rotate and effectively
lock the sun wheels to the differential casing.
If the vehicle is turning, the outer wheel will be forced to rotate faster than the inner wheel by having a greater
distance to travel. The differential senses the torque difference between the sun wheels. The planet gears rotate on
their axes to allow the outer wheel to rotate faster than the inner one.
ELECTRONIC REAR DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
Electronic Rear Differential - Exploded View

1 - Cap
2 - O ring
4 - Bearing
5 - Bearing cup
6 - Bolt, 4 of
7 - Housing and motor assembly
8 - Damper
10 - Bearing
11 - Bearing cup
12 - Shim
14 - Pinion nut
15 - Retainer
16 - Flange
17 - Deflector, outer
18 - Deflector, inner
19 - Seal
20 - Bearing
21 - Bearing cup
22 - Breather cap
23 - Breather
24 - Case
25 - Data location
26 - Mounting bush
27 - Bearing
28 - Bearing assembly without race
29 - Bearing cup
30 - Filler plug
31 - Drain plug
32 - Electronic differential assembly
33 - Bolt, 10 of
34 - O ring
35 - Cover
36 - Bolt, 12 of
37 - Temperature sensor
The electronic rear differential has the same functionality as the open rear differential but incorporates a locking
feature.
An electronically controlled multi-plate clutch provides a rear differential lock and torque biasing function to give
improved traction performance and vehicle dynamic stability.
A strategy to electronically control the rear differential multi-plate clutch assembly, has been developed to provide:
a pre-loading function, increasing locking torque with increased driving torque

a slip controller to increase locking torque under off-road conditions and decrease locking-torque for optimum
comfort, for example when parking the vehicle.
The unit receives a torque input from the transfer box output-shaft, which is passed through the unit to two outputs
for the rear drive halfshafts.
The unit detects wheel-slip via various vehicle system inputs to the differential locking module and locks the
differential accordingly.
1 - Actuator
2 - Clutch pack
3 - Differential
The electronic rear differential locking and biasing feature is actuated via a DC motor, which is controlled by the
differential locking module, via a PWM (pulse width modulation) signal.
Multi-plate Clutch Assembly

1 - Pressure disc
2 - Clutch plate assembly
3 - Pressure disc
4 - Thrust race
5 - Output actuator
6 - Actuator balls
7 - Input actuator
9 - Reduction gearset
10 - Actuator motor
The multi-plate clutch assembly for both centre (transfer box) and electronic rear differentials act in a similar way.
The aim of the multi-plate clutch assembly is to prevent excessive differential slip and therefore maximize the
traction performance of the vehicle. This is fundamentally different from the 'braked' traction control, which can only
counter act differential slip when it occurs.
A certain amount of differential slip is required to allow the vehicle to turn corners and to remain stable under
control of the ABS (anti-lock brake system). The transfer box control module monitors the driver's demands through
primary vehicle controls and automatically sets the slip torque at the rear differential via the differential locking
module. The system is completely automatic and does not require any special driver input.
The multi-plate clutch assembly actively controls the torque flow through the rear differential and optimizes the
torque distribution in the driveline. The clutch assembly biases the torque from the differential to the wheels with the
higher grip and prevents the wheels with the lower grip from spinning.
By turning the input actuator disc, via the motor shaft, the output actuator is rotated. This movement acts on 5 balls
in a ramp mechanism between the input and output actuators and gives a defined axial movement. The movement
forces the pressure disc to induce friction between the sun gear and differential case via the clutch plates supported
by the sun gear and the plates supported by the clutch basket on the differential case. This frictional force inhibits the
differential rotation; the differential case and left hand differential side gear are locked together.
Differential Locking Module
The differential locking module controls the multi-plate clutch actuation. The locking module is mounted on a bracket
located on the LH C-pillar, behind the trim.
The module is connected on the high-speed CAN (controller area network) bus and controls the differential operation
using CAN messages from other control modules on the network.
The module uses three connectors for all inputs and outputs. It receives a permanent power supply from the EJB
(engine junction box), and an ignition supply from the CJB (central junction box).
The module memorizes the position of the differential actuator motor when the engine is switched off.
The locking module controls the closed-loop position sensing system within the motor and regulates the power supply
to the motor.
If any of following components are replaced:
differential locking module

differential actuator motor
differential assembly.
An approved diagnostic system must be connected to the vehicle and the differential locking module self-calibration
procedure performed.
If a fault occurs with the electronic differential, the locking module or one of the required input signals, for example;
road speed signal, the locking module records an error code and a warning lamp, in the instrument cluster,
illuminates permanently.
CAN Bus Messages
The high-speed CAN is a broadcast network connected between various vehicle control modules. It allows the fast
exchange of data between control modules every few microseconds.
The differential locking module is connected on the high-speed CAN bus, via the transfer box control module, and
controls differential operation using CAN messages from other control units on the network. Wheel speed, steering
angle, automatic transmission speed, temperature information, vehicle configuration, axle ratios and mode inputs, are
some of the main signals received by the locking module.
The locking module also sends messages via the CAN bus to tell other control modules on the network, the status of
the electronic rear differential. The clutch torque and default mode status are some of the main signals sent out by
the locking module.
The following table shows the messages that can be displayed in the message centre of a high-line instrument cluster
relating to the electronic rear differential:
Message Description Chime

'TRANSMISSION Rear differential temperature has reached or is approaching the overheat threshold. None
OVERHEAT'
'SLOW DOWN'
'TRANSMISSION Transfer box control module has stopped transmitting CAN bus messages. Defaults to None
FAULT' open centre differential.
'TRACTION REDUCED' Message also displayed when fault occurs with electronic rear differential.
'TRANSMISSION Fault has occurred with electronic rear differential. Stop vehicle at earliest opportunity. Single
FAULT'
'STOP SAFELY'
On vehicles fitted with the low line instrument cluster, in place of the message centre there will be a status lamp,
which has the following logic:
Amber - Over temperature

Red - Failure, stop vehicle
DIAGNOSTICS
The electronic rear differential locking module can store fault codes, which can be retrieved using an approved
diagnostic system.
The information is communicated via a diagnostic socket. The diagnostic socket allows the exchange of information
between the various control modules on the bus systems and the diagnostic equipment. The information is
communicated to the socket via the CAN bus. This allows the retrieval of diagnostic information and programming of
certain functions using the diagnostic equipment.
The electronic differential locking module uses DTC (diagnostic trouble code), which relate to electronic rear
differential electrical faults.
ELECTRONIC DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = high-speed CAN bus.

1 - Battery
2 - EJB
3 - CJB
4 - Actuator motor
5 - Oil temperature sensor
6 - Differential locking module
7 - High- speed CAN to other vehicle systems
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential
For a detailed description of the Rear Drive Axle and Differential and operation, refer to the relevant Description
and Operation section of the workshop manual.
REFER to: Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Differential oil leakage Power
Sensor installation Fuse(s)
Wiring harness physical damage or water ingress
Loose or corroded electrical connectors
Controller Area Network (CAN) circuits
Sensors
Symptom Chart
Possible Possible Other

Symptom Message Warnings Possible Causes Action
Running at Rear Driveline overheat Water ingress Visually inspect the
reduced differential warning lamp to wiring wiring harness and
capability fault illuminated harness or connectors for water
with fault Rear connectors ingress
present differential/driveline Rear Install a new rear
fault warning lamp differential differential as necessary
illuminated internal failure Install a new Rear
Rear Differential Control
Differential Module (RDCM) as
Control Module necessary
(RDCM)
internal failure
Rear Rear Driveline overheat Rear Refer to the relevant

differential differential warning lamp differential oil section of the workshop
overheat overheat illuminated level incorrect manual and test the rear
slow down Rear differential oil level
differential oil Refer to the relevant
incorrect section of the workshop
specification manual and test the rear
Rear differential oil
differential specification
temperature Refer to the electrical
sensor circuit circuit diagrams and test
short circuit to the rear differential
ground, short temperature sensor
circuit to circuit for short circuit to
power, open ground, short circuit to
circuit, high power, open circuit, high
Rear Install a new Rear
Differential Differential Control
Control Module Module (RDCM) as
(RDCM) necessary
internal failure
DTC Index
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Rear Differential Control Module (RDCM) (100-00 General
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Draining and Filling
General Procedures
CAUTION: Do not fill the differential with lubricant up to the filler plug. The filler plug is only used to fill the
differential with lubricant, and not to act as a level indicator.
NOTE: The only way to check the fluid level in the differential is to drain all the fluid out and refill with the
correct quantity, shown in the specification section.

safety stands.
2. CAUTION: Do not undo or remove the

large protruding hexagon on the differential
casing.
Remove the differential case lubricant filler

plug.
Clean the area around the lubricant filler
plug.
Position container to collect fluid loss.
3. Drain the differential lubricant.

Clean the area around the drain plug.
Remove the fluid drain plug.
4. CAUTION: There has been 2 different types of fixings

used for the drain plug. Note the type and make sure the
correct torque is applied, see below.
Install the lubricant drain plug.

Clean the drain plug.
Up to differential serial number 254325: Tighten the
hexagonal drive drain plug to 54 Nm (40 lb.ft).
From differential serial number 254326: Tighten the
3/8'' square drive drain plug to 28 Nm (21 lb.ft).
5. CAUTIONS:
There have been 2 different types of fixings used for

the drain plug. Note the type and differential serial number,
and make sure the correct torque is applied, see below.
Make sure the correct specification and quantity of oil

is used.
Fill the differential with the correct amount of lubricant.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (205-02
Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Specifications).
6. Install the differential filler plug.

Clean the filler plug.
Tighten the filler plug to 34 Nm (25 lb.ft).
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Locking Motor
In-vehicle Repair
Removal

safety stands.
2. Remove the differential locking motor.

Remove the 4 bolts.
3. Remove the 4 bolts.
4. Discard the motor.

5. Check the gear set for damage to the gears.
Installation
1. Clean the component mating faces.
2. Install the new motor with new O ring seal.
3. Install the 4 bolts 12 Nm.

4. Clean the component mating faces and apply
continuous bead of sealant to the motor
mating face on the differential.
5. Install the differential locking motor.

Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm.
7. Calibrate the differential locking motor using the diagnostic

tool.
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Axle Oil Temperature Sensor
In-vehicle Repair
Removal

safety stands.

For additional information, refer to: Differential Draining and
Filling (205-02, General Procedures).

Release the wiring harness retaining
clip.
4. Remove the oil temperature sensor.

Installation
2. Install the oil temperature sensor.

3. Connect the electrical connector.

Secure the wiring harness clip.
4. Fill the differential with the correct amount of lubricant.

Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Drive Pinion Seal
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Flange holding tool
205-053
Adapter for
205-053
Impulse extractor
100-012(LRT-99-004)
Installer drive pinion oil seal
205-821
Remover drive flange
205-824
Remover drive pinion seal
205-823
Seal installer, adaptor
205-821-01
Removal
CAUTIONS:
The input flange must not be change for one from another unit.
The drive pinion seal must only be renewed for 1 repair.

safety stands.



driveshaft flange in relation to the drive pinion
flange.

pinion flange.
5. Measure the depth of the pinion nut on the

pinion shaft.
Note measurement for installation.
6. CAUTION: This step must be carried out
to make sure that the drive pinion nut is
correctly tightend on assembly.
Accurately scribe a line to mark the drive

pinion shaft to the drive pinion nut and pinion
flange.
7. Remove the drive pinion flange retaining nut.

Using the special tool, counter hold the
drive pinion flange.
Note number of turns for installation.
8. Using the special tool, remove the drive pinion

flange.
Check flange seal journal for any
damage.

seal.
Installation
1. Clean the drive pinion flange.
2. Clean the drive pinion seal mating faces.
3. Using the special tool, install the new drive

pinion seal.
4. Remove the special tool.

Install special tool 205-821-01 to the
seal face.
5. CAUTION: Make sure adaptor is removed

or damage to the vehicle may occur.
Using the special tool, install the new drive

pinion seal.
Remove the special tools.
6. CAUTION: Make sure the drive pinion flange scribed

marks are aligned.
Install the drive pinion flange.
7. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the mark on the drive pinion

nut is never tightened short of the scribed
mark on the drive pinion shaft.
Make sure the drive pinion flange has no

end float and is free to rotate.
Make sure the scribed mark on the drive

pinion nut is no more than a maximum of 5
degrees past the scribed mark on the drive
pinion shaft.
Install the drive pinion flange retaining nut.

Install nut to previously noted number
of turns.
Measure the depth of the pinion nut on
the pinion shaft.
8. Attach the driveshaft to the rear axle drive flange.


Tighten the bolts and nuts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
10. CAUTION: Make sure the correct specification and

quanity of oil is used.

Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Locking Module
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00,
Specifications).
2. Remove the rear quarter trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Quarter Trim Panel
3. Release the parking aid module.

Remove the 2 nuts.
4. Remove the differential locking module.

Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the differential locking module.
Connect and secure the electrical connectors.
2. Install the parking aid module.

3. Install the rear quarter trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Quarter Trim Panel
4. Connect the battery ground cable.

Specifications).
5. Use T4 to calibrate a new differential locking module.

Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Axle Assembly
Removal
CAUTION: Do not undo or remove the large protruding hexagon on the differential casing.

safety stands.

For additional information, refer to: Front Muffler (309-00B
Exhaust System - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation) /
Front Muffler (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,
4. Remove the RH rear halfshaft.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Halfshaft (205-05
Rear Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).

Remove the LH rear stabilizer bar link.


arm.
7. Disconnect the LH rear toe link.

Remove the bolt.
Release the LH rear wheel knuckle from the

lower arm.
Remove the bolt.
Using a suitable stand, support the LH
rear wheel knuckle.
9. NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH is

similar.
Release the LH rear halfshaft from the axle

assembly.

driveshaft flange in relation to the drive pinion
flange.

flange.
Remove and discard the 4 bolts.
Tie aside.
11. Vehicles with differential locking motor:
Release the 2 wiring harness clips.
12. Using a transmission jack, support the rear axle assembly.
13. CAUTION: Before disconnecting or

removing the components, make sure the area
around the joint faces and connections are
clean. Plug open connections to prevent
contamination.
With assistance, remove the rear axle

assembly.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Disconnect the breather line.
Installation
1. With assistance, install the rear axle assembly.
Connect the breather line.
Tighten the front mounting bolt to 275 Nm (203
lb.ft).
Tighten the rear mounting bolts to 175 Nm (129
lb.ft).
2. Vehicles with differential locking motor: Connect the

electrical connectors.
Secure the wiring harness clips.
Secure the driveshaft to the rear axle drive flange.

4. Install a new snap ring to the LH halfshaft.
5. NOTE: Do not fully engage the halfshaft until

the oil seal protector has been removed.
Secure the LH halfshaft in the axle assembly.

1. Open the halfshaft seal protector and
install the halfshaft.
2. Release the halfshaft seal protector from
the halfshaft seal.
3. Break the halfshaft seal protector in to two
pieces and remove the halfshaft seal
protector.
4. Fully install the halfshaft.

of the joint.
Connect the LH rear wheel knuckle to the lower arm.

7. Connect the LH rear toe link.

8. Secure the parking brake cable to the lower arm.
9. Install the LH rear stabilizer bar link.

10. Install the RH halfshaft.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Halfshaft (205-05
Rear Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).

For additional information, refer to: Front Muffler (309-00B
Exhaust System - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation) /
Front Muffler (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Axle Housing Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Remover rear differential rear bush
502-009/2
Hydraulic two legged puller
211-294
Adaptor/button
205-825/4
Installer rear differential front bush
205-825/3
Receiver cup rear differential front bush
205-825/5
Bearing Housing
205-825/6
Bearing Set for 16mm Bolt 51203

Remover/Installer long 16mm bolt
205-825/7
Nut for long 16mm bolt
205-825/8
Removal

safety stands.

For additional information, refer to: Muffler (309-00,

4. CAUTIONS:



flange.
5. CAUTION: Make sure the weight of the

axle is always supported.
Using a suitable jack, lower the front of the

axle.
Remove the axle front retaining bolt.
6. Using the special tools, remove the axle

housing bushing.
Installation
1. Using the special tools, install the axle housing
bushing.
2. CAUTION: Make sure the weight of the axle is always

supported.
Using a suitable jack, raise the front of the differential.

Install the axle front retaining bolt.
3. Attach the driveshaft to the rear axle drive flange.

Tighten the bolts and nuts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

For additional information, refer to: Muffler (309-00,
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Axle Housing Support Insulator
Special Tool(s)
502-009/5
Bearing set for 14mm and 16mm bolt, 51203
Receiver cup rear differential rear bush
502-009/1
502-009/2
Installer rear differential rear bush
502-009/3
Removal

safety stands.
3. Remove the rear differential.

For additional information, refer to: Axle Assembly (205-02,
4. NOTE: Take note of the fitted position of
the bush.
Using the special tools, remove the rear axle

housing support insulator.
Installation
1. Using the special tools, install the rear axle
2. Install the rear differential.


Front Drive Axle/Differential -
Lubricants
NOTE: Do not use any lubricant other than that specified
Item Specification
Recommended lubricant Castrol SAF-XO - 75W/90
Capacities
Item Capacity
Front differential 0.61 litres (1.07 pints) (0.64 US quarts)
Front Differential
Item Specification
Reduction ratio:
V8 Petrol engine - 6HP28 Automatic transmission 3.54:1
Oil drain plug 29 21
Oil filler plug 29 21
Differential case mounting bolts:
Front mounting bolt 105 77
* Rear mounting bracket to differential casing bolts
Stage 1 80 59
Front axle crossmember bolts 115 85
** Driveshaft to front axle drive flange Torx bolts:
Stage 1 45 33
* New bolts must be installed
** New patchlok torx bolts must be installed

Front Drive Axle/Differential - Front Drive Axle and Differential
GENERAL

1 - RH front drive halfshaft
2 - Front differential assembly
3 - Front driveshaft
4 - LH front drive halfshaft
The front differential converts the 'angle of drive' through 90° and distributes drive, via the front drive halfshafts, to
the front wheels.
The front differential for the V6 and V8 petrol variants have the same output ratio, but the output ratios for the TdV6
are different, depending on whether automatic or manual transmission is fitted.
The front differential is mounted on the LH side of the chassis.
FRONT DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
Front Differential - Exploded View

1 - Protection cap
2 - Mounting bush assembly
3 - Seal
4 - Bearing assembly
5 - Front tube
6 - Bolt, 4 of
7 - O-ring
8 - Drain plug
9 - Bolt, 14 of
10 - Cover assembly
11 - Cover seal
13 - Bearing preload spacer
14 - Taper roller bearing
15 - Bolt, 10 of
16 - Differential case
17 - Roll pin
21 - Shim
25 - Oil seal
26 - Inner deflector
27 - Outer deflector
28 - Flange
29 - Pinion nut retainer
30 - Pinion nut
32 - Axle mounting bracket
33 - Data label
34 - Breather tube
35 - Cap
36 - Fill plug
37 - Bolt, 3 of
39 - Bearing preload spacer
41 - Thrust washer
42 - Planet gear
43 - Shaft
44 - Sunwheel
45 - Thrust washer
The casing comprises two halves with machined mating faces. When assembled, the cast iron casing halves are
sealed with a thin film of Loctite 5999 sealant and secured together with fourteen bolts. A breather tube is fitted to
the casings. This allows a plastic tube to be fitted and routed to a high point in the engine compartment, preventing
the ingress of water when the vehicle is wading.
The RH casing is fitted with a drain plug. The front differential unit contains approximately 0.7 litre of oil for a dry fill.
The differential is a conventional design using a hypoid gear layout. This employs a hypoid bevel pinion gear and
crown wheel, with the pinion offset above the centre line of the crown wheel. This design allows for a larger pinion
gear to be used, which has the advantages of increased gear strength and reduced operating noise.
The front differential is available in three ratios. V8 and V6 petrol engine vehicles use a front differential with a final
drive ratio of 3.73:1 and TdV6 diesel engine vehicles use a final drive ratio of 3.07:1, for vehicles with manual
transmission, and 3.54:1 for vehicles with automatic transmission. Changing the number of teeth between the crown-
wheel drive gear and pinion gear changes the ratio.
The differential comprises a pinion shaft and hypoid bevel gear, a crown wheel drive gear with an integral cage,
which houses two planet gears. Two sun wheels are also located in the cage and pass the rotational drive to the drive
shaft shafts.
The pinion shaft is mounted on two opposed taper roller bearings with a collapsable spacer located between them.
The spacer is used to hold the bearings in alignment and also collapses under the pressure applied to the pinion nut.
This allows the nut to be tightened to a predetermined torque, which collapses the spacer, setting the correct bearing
preload.
The pinion shaft has an externally splined outer end which accepts and locates the input flange, which is retained by
the pinion nut. The opposite end of the output flange has an internal spline which provides positive location for the
front propeller shaft. The flange has an external O-ring seal which seals against the front propeller shaft shroud
preventing the ingress of dirt and moisture into the splines. An oil seal is pressed into the LH casing and seals the
input flange to the differential unit. The pinion shaft has a hypoid bevel gear at its inner end which mates with the
crown wheel drive gear.
The crown wheel drive gear is located on the carrier and secured with ten screws. The carrier is mounted on taper
roller bearings located in each casing half. The bearings are press fitted into the casing and a spacer is located on the
outside face to set backlash and apply preload to the bearing.
The carrier is fitted with a shaft onto which the two planet gears are mounted. The shaft is secured in the carrier with
a roll pin. The sun wheels are located in pockets within the carrier and mesh with the planet gears. Thrust washers
are located between the carrier and the sun wheels and hold the sun wheels in mesh with the planet gears. Each sun
wheel has a machined, splined, bore to accept the drive shaft. A groove is machined in the bore to locate the snap
ring fitted to the drive shaft, providing positive drive shaft location.
Differential Operation
The operating principles of the front and rear differentials are the same. Rotational input from the propeller shaft is
passed via the input flange to the pinion shaft and pinion gear. The angles of the pinion gear to the crown wheel
drive gear moves the rotational direction through 90°.
The transferred rotational motion is now passed to the crown wheel drive gear, which in turn rotates the carrier. The
shaft, which is secured to the carrier, also rotates at the same speed as the carrier. The planet gears, which are
mounted on the shaft, also rotate with the carrier. In turn, the planet gears transfer their rotational motion to the left
and right hand sun wheels, rotating the drive shafts.
When the vehicle is moving in a forward direction, the torque applied through the differential to each sun wheel is
equal. In this condition both drive shafts rotate at the same speed. The planet gears do not rotate and effectively
lock the sun wheels to the carrier.
If the vehicle is turning, the outer wheel will be forced to rotate faster than the inner wheel by having a greater
distance to travel. The differential senses the torque difference between the sun wheels. The planet gears rotate on
their axes to allow the outer wheel to rotate faster than the inner one.
SERVICE
The oil used in the front differential is Castrol SAF-XO. The oil contains unique additives, which enhance the
differentials operation. No other oil must be used in the front differential.
Front Differential Serviceable Components
Halfshaft seals
Needle roller bearing assemblies
Chassis bush/fixings
Lubricant.
Front Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Draining and Filling
General Procedures
CAUTION: Do not fill the differential with lubricant up to the filler plug. The filler plug is only used to fill the
differential with lubricant, not to act as a level indicator.
NOTE: The only way to check the fluid level in the differential is to drain all the fluid out and refill with the
correct quantity, shown in the specification section.

safety stands.

3. Remove the differential case lubricant filler

plug.
Clean the area around the lubricant filler
plug.
Position container to collect fluid loss.

Clean the area around the drain plug.
Remove the fluid drain plug.
5. CAUTION: There have been 2 different types of fixings

used for the drain plug. Note the type and differential serial
number, and make sure the correct torque is applied, see
below.
Install the lubricant drain plug.

Clean the drain plug.
Up to differential serial number 254845: Tighten the
hexagonal drive drain plug to 54 Nm (40 lb.ft).
From differential serial number 254846: Tighten the
3/8'' square drive drain plug to 28 Nm (21 lb.ft).
6. CAUTION: Do not fill the differential with lubricant up

to the filler plug. The filler plug is only used to fill the
differential with lubricant, not to act as a level indicator.
Front Drive Axle/Differential, Specifications).
7. Install the differential filler plug.

Tighten the filler plug to 34 Nm (25 lb.ft).

Front Drive Axle/Differential - Drive Pinion Seal
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Flange holding tool
205-053
Remover drive flange
205-824
Installer - drive pinion oil seal
205-820
Impulse extractor
100-012(LRT-99-004)
Removal
CAUTION: The drive pinion seal must only be renewed once.

safety stands.

Filling (205-03 Front Drive Axle/Differential, General
Procedures).
3. Remove the front driveshaft.

For additional information, refer to: Front Driveshaft - V6
S/C 3.0L Petrol (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and
Installation) /
Front Driveshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (205-01 Driveshaft,
4. Measure the depth of the pinion nut on the

pinion shaft.
Note measurement for installation.
5. CAUTION: This step must be carried out
to make sure that the drive pinion nut is
correctly tightened on assembly.
Accurately scribe a line to mark the drive

pinion shaft to the drive pinion nut and pinion
flange.
6. Remove the drive pinion flange retaining nut.

Discard the drive pinion nut retainer.
7. CAUTION: Make sure only a bolt is used

with the special tool, to draw the drive pinion
flange off the drive pinion shaft.
Using the special tool, remove the drive pinion

flange.
seal.
Installation
1. Clean the drive pinion flange.
2. Clean the drive pinion seal mating faces.
3. Using the special tool, install the new drive

pinion seal.
4. CAUTION: Make sure the drive pinion flange scribed

marks are aligned.
Install the drive pinion flange.
5. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the mark on the drive pinion

nut is never tightened short of the scribed
mark on the drive pinion shaft.
Make sure the drive pinion flange has no

end float and is free to rotate.
Make sure the scribed mark on the drive

pinion nut is no more than a maximum of 5
degrees past the scribed mark on the drive
pinion shaft.
Install the drive pinion flange retaining nut.

Install nut to previously noted number
of turns.
Measure the depth of the pinion nut on
the pinion shaft.
6. Install the front driveshaft.

For additional information, refer to: Front Driveshaft - V6
S/C 3.0L Petrol (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and
Installation) /
Front Driveshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (205-01 Driveshaft,
7. CAUTION: Make sure the correct specification and

quantity of oil is used.

Procedures).
Front Drive Axle/Differential - Front Axle Housing Support Insulator
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Bearing Housing
502-009/6
Bearing set for 14mm bolt 51204
Installer rear axle front bush
205-825/3
502-009/2
502-009/5
502-009/4
Receiver cup front axle front bush
205-825/1
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure the bush is correctly aligned.

safety stands.
3. Remove the front differential.


the bush.
Using the special tools, remove the front axle

Installation

aligned.
Using the special tools, install the front axle

2. Install the front differential.


Front Drive Axle/Differential - Axle Tube
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
1. Remove the RH halfshaft.
For additional information, refer to: Front Halfshaft RH
(205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the axle tube.

Remove the bolt from the bushing.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Rotate and remove the axle tube.
Early models: Remove and discard the
O-ring seal.
Later models: Remove the sealant.
Installation
1. Install the axle tube.
Early models: Install a new O-ring seal.
Later models: Apply sealant to the mating face.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications
(205-03, Specifications).
Tighten the 4 axle tube bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb.ft).
Tighten the axle tube bushing bolt to 63 Nm (46
lb.ft).

For additional information, refer to: Front Halfshaft RH
(205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
Front Drive Axle/Differential - Axle Assembly
Special Tool(s)
205-754(LRT-54-027)
Front Stabilizer Bar Bushing Tightening Tool
204-703
Front Stabilizer Bar Bushing Tightening Tool
204-705
Removal
All vehicles

stands.

For additional information, refer to: Axle Tube (205-03
Front Drive Axle/Differential, In-vehicle Repair).
4. Remove the LH splash shield.

Remove the 4 clips.
5. Release the LH stabilizer bar link.

6. Release the LH brake hose bracket from the
wheel knuckle.
Remove the bolt.

Using the special tool, release the LH tie-rod

end ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
8. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the ball joint seal is not

damaged. A damaged seal will lead to the
The lower arm ball joint can be damaged

by excessive articulation. The wheel knuckle
must be fully supported at all times. Do not
allow the wheel knuckle to hang on the lower
arm. Failure to follow this instruction will result
in damage to vehicle.
Using the special tool, release the LH upper

arm ball joint.
9. Release the LH halfshaft from the axle

assembly.
Using a suitable tie strap, support the
LH halfshaft.
10. CAUTIONS:


Release the driveshaft from the front axle drive

flange.
discard the bolts.
Using a suitable tie strap, secure the
driveshaft end plate.
Vehicles with Active Stabilization

Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the clamp.
Remove the stabilizer bar bushing.
Vehicles with diesel engine

12. Release the fuel cooler.
Remove the bolt.
Vehicles with 5.0L engine

13. Release the automatic transmission fluid cooler.
Remove the 4 bolts.
14. Remove the transmission fluid cooler mounting
bracket.
Release the transmission fluid cooler
pipe bracket.
Remove the nut.
Remove the 3 bolts.
All vehicles
15. Remove the front axle crossmember.
Remove the 4 bolts.
16. CAUTION: Before the disconnection or
removal of any components, make sure the
area around joint faces and connections are
clean. Plug any open connections to prevent
contamination.
Disconnect the breather line.

Release the clip.
17. Using a transmission jack, support the front axle assembly.
18. With assistance, remove the front axle

assembly.
Remove and discard the 3 axle
assembly rear mounting bolts.
Remove the front axle assembly front
mounting bolt.
Installation
All vehicles
1. With assistance, install the front axle assembly.
With assistance, raise and manoeuvre the front final
drive unit.
Tighten the 3 new bolts in the front axle assembly to
80 Nm (59 lb.ft), then a further 60 degrees.
Tighten the front axle assembly front mounting bolt
to 105 Nm (77 lb.ft).
2. Connect the breather line.
3. Install the front axle crossmember.


4. Install the transmission fluid cooler mounting bracket.
Tighten the 3 bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft.).
Secure the transmission fluid cooler coolant pipe to
the coolant hose bracket.
Tighten the nut to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).
5. Install the automatic transmission fluid cooler.
Tighten the 4 bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft.).
Vehicles with diesel engine

6. Secure the fuel cooler.
Vehicles with Active Stabilization

7. Install the stabilizer bar bushing.
Install the clamp.
Install the bolts.
All vehicles
8. NOTE: Make sure that new bolts are installed.
Secure the driveshaft to the front axle drive flange.

Remove and discard the tie strap.
9. Install a new snap ring to the LH halfshaft.

10. NOTE: Do not fully engage the halfshaft until

the oil seal protector has been removed.
Secure the LH halfshaft in the axle assembly.

1. Open the halfshaft seal protector and
install the halfshaft.
2. Release the halfshaft seal protector from
the halfshaft seal.
3. Remove the halfshaft seal protector.
4. Fully install the halfshaft.
11. WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is installed.
Secure the LH upper arm to the wheel knuckle.

12. WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is installed.
Secure the LH tie-rod end ball joint to the wheel knuckle.

13. Secure the LH brake hose bracket to the wheel knuckle.

14. Secure the LH stabilizer bar link.
15. Install the LH splash shield.

Install the clips.

For additional information, refer to: Axle Tube (205-03
Front Drive Axle/Differential, In-vehicle Repair).
17. If a new differential is installed, fill with the recommended

fluid. For additional information, refer to: Differential
Draining and Filling (205-03, General Procedures).

Front Drive Axle/Differential - Axle Carrier Bushing
Special Tool(s)
205-825/3
Receiver cup rear differential front bush
205-825/5
502-009/2
Removal
NOTES:
Take note of the fitted position of the bush.

safety stands.
2. Remove the exhaust system.

For additional information, refer to: Exhaust System (309-
00B Exhaust System - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation) /
Exhaust System (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L
3. Using a jack, support the axle assembly.
4. Remove the axle carrier bushing heat shield.

Remove the two retaining bolts.
5. CAUTION: The bolts must only be used
once.
Remove the axle carrier.

Remove and discard the three bolts
retaining the axle carrier to the axle.
Remove the axle carrier bushing bolt.

the bush.
Using the special tools, remove the axle carrier

bushing.
Installation

aligned.
Using the special tools, install the axle carrier

bushing.
2. Install the axle carrier.
Tighten the M14 bolt to 105 Nm (77 lb.ft).
Tighten the new axle carrier bracket bolts to 80 Nm
(59 lb.ft), then a further 60 degrees.
3. Install the axle carrier bushing heat shield.
4. Remove the axle support.
5. Install the exhaust system.

For additional information, refer to: Exhaust System (309-
00B Exhaust System - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation) /
Exhaust System (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L
Front Drive Axle/Differential - Axle Tube Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Remover/installer - Front axle extension support bush
308-625/1
308-625/2
308-625/3
Removal
Specifications).
2. Raise and support the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to: Axle Tube (205-03, In-
vehicle Repair).
Using the special tools, remove the bushing.

Installation
Using the special tools, install the bushing.

For additional information, refer to: Axle Tube (205-03, In-
vehicle Repair).

Specifications).
Front Drive Axle/Differential - Axle Cover Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Bearing Housing
502-009/6
Bearing set for 14mm bolt
51204
205-825/3
502-009/2
502-009/5
502-009/4
Receiver cup front axle front bush
205-825/1
Removal

safety stands.
3. Remove the front differential.


the bush.
Using the special tools, remove the front axle

Installation

aligned.
Using the special tools, install the front axle

2. Install the front differential.


Front Drive Halfshafts -
Item Specification
Type Fully floating, fixed length, solid shafts incorporating constant velocity joints at each end of shaft
Lubricant
Item Specification
Outboard joint Use grease supplied with replacement boot kit (Optimol MS139G)
Inboard joint Use grease supplied with replacement boot kit (1 Luber C MS132G)
Item Specification
Type Fully floating, solid shafts incorporating 'plug-in' constant velocity joint at inboard end and fixed constant
velocity joint at outboard end of shaft
* Stabilizer bar link nut 115 85
* Stabilizer link nut 115 85
* Tie rod end ball joint nut 76 56
*+ Halfshaft retaining nut 230 169
* New nut must be fitted

Front Drive Halfshafts - Front Drive Halfshafts
Front Drive Halfshaft Component Location

GENERAL
The front drive shafts are handed components with the RH drive shaft being longer than the LH drive shaft. Both
shafts are of similar construction with Constant Velocity (CV) joints at each end to allow for steering and suspension
movement.
FRONT DRIVE HALFSHAFT ASSEMBLY

1 - RH outer CV joint
3 - RH inner CV joint
4 - LH inner CV joint
6 - LH outer CV joint
The front drive shafts are similar in their construction. The only difference is the lengths of each shaft, the LH drive
shaft is a longer shaft with an extended stem.
The outer CV joints have a target wheel on the outer diameter. This is used by the ABS wheel speed sensor for
vehicle and wheel speed calculations.
Each drive shaft comprises two CV joints (inner and outer), boots, an outer tube and a solid barshaft, which is
retained in the front differential by a circlip (see 'Halfshaft Joint' section for more information on CV joints).
Front Drive Halfshafts - Halfshaft Joint
Front Drive HalfShaft – Sectional Views

A - Front outboard halfshaft joint
B - Rear outboard halfshaft joint
C - Rear inboard halfshaft joint
D - Front inboard halfshaft joint
The outboard and rear inboard CV joints are of the Birfield design. This design uses longitudinal, elliptical grooves,
which retain six steel balls. The balls are further retained by a cage. The constant velocity is achieved by the position
of the steel balls. If a centre line is drawn through the balls and the driven hub or differential shaft, the two centre
lines always bisect each other at the angle of drive. This condition allows the rotational speed of the driven shaft to
be passed to the driven hub or differential shaft with no loss of rotational speed regardless of the shaft angle. The CV
joints are packed with grease, which is retained in the joint by a synthetic rubber gaiter. The gaiter is retained at
each end by a metal clamp, which provides a water tight seal to prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture. The CV
joints are retained on their respective shaft or tube by an internal snap ring. The snap rings are located in a groove
on each shaft or tube end and locate in a mating groove in the CV joint.
CAUTION: The inner hub is not retained in the joint body on this type of joint. The joint is held together in it's
unfitted state only by the boot. Pulling on the barshaft can therefore pull the hub out of the joint body. For this
reason care must be taken when handling and fitting the front driveshafts.
The shaft is a sliding fit inside the outer tube, which allows for the small length changes, which occur with
articulation of the suspension. The shaft is located in a ball cage, which is retained inside the outer tube. The ball
cage ensures that the shaft is held rigidly in the outer tube whilst allowing it to freely move in and out of the tube as
necessary. A sealing plug is pressed into the outer tube and retains grease around the balls in the cage.
The inner CV joints are similar in design and operation to the outer joints except that the inner joints use rollers
rather than balls to transmit the drive.
A - Inner CV joint
B - Outer CV joint
1 - Tulip outer race
2 - Trunions (3 of)
3 - Spider
4 - Rollers (3 of)
5 - Outer race
6 - Steel balls (6 of)
7 - Cage
8 - Inner race
The front inboard joint is a 'tripode joint', having three 'feet' or 'podes'. The torque is transmitted from the outer race
to the connecting shaft by means of rollers running on needle rollers around the trunions of the tripode spider. The
roller tracks of the outer race enable the tripode assembly to move angularly and axially within the joint.
The inner CV joint shaft is splined and mates with splines in the front differential. There is no internal retaining
mechanism for this type of joint so care must be taken during service as the shaft and CV joint can separate.
Front Drive Halfshafts - Front Halfshaft LH
Special Tool(s)
205-754(LRT-54-027)
204-506/1(LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/3(LRT-60-030/3)
Halfshaft installer adapter (L319 up to VIN 671700, L320 up to VIN 810673)
204-506-01(LRT-60-030/4)
Halfshaft installer adapter (L319 from VIN 671701, L320 from VIN 810674)
JLR-204-506-01
204-506/5(LRT-60-030/5)
Axle oil seal remover
308-005(LRT-37-004/2)
Impulse extractor
100-012(LRT-99-004)
Installer/Guide halfshaft oil seal
308-626/2
Installer halfshaft oil seal
308-626/1
Removal
CAUTIONS:
Do not store or install halfshafts with joints at maximum articulation or damage may occur to the joint.
Do not allow halfshafts to hang unsupported at one end or joint damage will occur.
Angularly Adjusted Roller (AAR) joints, used at the inboard end of some halfshafts have no internal
retaining mechanism and can separate.

safety stands.

Procedures).

Discard the nut.
Disconnect the RH stabilizer bar link.




knuckle.
Remove the bolt.

Using the special tool, release the tie-rod end

Discard the nut.
10. CAUTION: To prevent the wheel knuckle falling

outwards and disconnection of the halfshaft inner joint,
support the wheel knuckle.

Using the special tool, release the upper arm

ball joint.
12. CAUTIONS:

Do not use a hammer to detach the

halfshaft from the hub assembly, failure to
follow this instruction may result in damage to
the halfshaft.

from the wheel hub.
13. Release the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle.
14. Release the halfshaft from the differential

housing.
15. Remove the halfshaft.

Raise the stabilizer bar to allow removal
of the halfshaft.

halfshaft oil seal.
Installation
2. Using the special tools, install a new halfshaft

oil seal.
The halfshaft oil seal protector must be
left in place, until the halfshaft is fully
installed.
3. CAUTION: Do not fully engage the

halfshaft until the oil seal protector has been
removed.
NOTE: The oil seal protector is designed

to break into two pieces.
Install the halfshaft.

Lubricate the seal and the bearing
running surfaces with clean axle oil.
Open the halfshaft oil seal protector.
Partially install the halfshaft.
Remove and discard the halfshaft oil
seal protector.
Make sure the snap ring is fully engaged
and retains the halfshaft.
4. CAUTIONS:
Use tool 204-506-01(LRT-60-030/4) for

L319 up to VIN 671700, L320 up to VIN
810673. Use tool number JLR-204-506-01 for
L319 from VIN 671701, L320 from VIN
810674. Failure to follow this instruction will
Using the special tools, install the halfshaft in

the wheel hub.




knuckle.
10. Secure the RH stabilizer link.


the component.

lb.ft).


differential with lubricant, and not to act as a level
indicator.

Procedures).
Front Drive Halfshafts - Front Halfshaft RH
Special Tool(s)
205-754(LRT-54-027)
204-506/1(LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/3(LRT-60-030/3)
204-506-01(LRT-60-030/4)
204-506/5(LRT-60-030/5)
308-005(LRT-37-004/2)
Impulse extractor
100-012(LRT-99-004)
308-626/2
308-626/1
Halfshaft bearing installer
205-819
Removal
CAUTIONS:

safety stands.

Procedures).

Discard the nut.
Disconnect the stabilizer bar link.



knuckle.
Remove the bolt.

Using the special tool, release the tie-rod end

Discard the nut.
10. CAUTION: To prevent the wheel knuckle falling

outwards and disconnection of the halfshaft inner joint,
support the wheel knuckle.

Using the special tool, release the upper arm

ball joint.
12. CAUTIONS:

Do not use a hammer to detach the

halfshaft from the hub assembly, failure to
follow this instruction may result in damage to
the halfshaft.

from the wheel hub.
13. Release the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle.
14. Position a container to collect the oil spillage.
15. Release the halfshaft from the differential

housing.
16. CAUTION: Keep the halfshaft horizontal to

avoid damaging the oil seal.
Remove the halfshaft.

Raise the stabilizer bar to allow removal
of the halfshaft.

halfshaft oil seal.
Installation

oil seal.
installed.
3. NOTE: Do not fully engage the halfshaft until the oil

seal protector has been removed.
Install the halfshaft.

Lubricate the seal and the bearing running surfaces
with clean axle oil.
Make sure the snap ring is fully engaged and retains
the halfshaft.
4. NOTE: The oil seal protector is designed

Remove and discard the halfshaft oil seal

protector.
5. CAUTION: The lower arm ball joint can be
damaged by excessive articulation. The wheel
knuckle must be fully supported at all times.
Do not allow the wheel knuckle to hang on the
lower arm. Failure to follow this instruction will
Using the special tools, install the halfshaft in

the wheel hub.




knuckle.
11. Secure the LH stabilizer link.


the component.

lb.ft).


indicator.

Procedures).
Front Drive Halfshafts - Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Removal

safety stands.

For additional information, refer to: Front Halfshaft LH (205-
04 Front Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
4. Clamp the halfshaft in a vise.
5. Remove and discard the CV joint boot retaining

clamps.
6. Slide the CV joint boot along the halfshaft to gain access to

the joint.
7. Using a drift against the inner part of the CV

joint, remove the CV joint from the halfshaft.
8. Remove the outer CV joint boot.
Installation
2. Install the CV joint boot.
3. Install the outer CV joint.

Position the CV joint on the halfshaft, press the snap
ring into it's groove and push the CV joint fully on to
the halfshaft.
Pull on the CV joint to ensure the snap ring has fully
engaged.
4. Pack the CV joint with the grease supplied.

5. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the CV boot is not pushed too

far onto the drive shaft and the recess is
exposed, failure to follow this instruction may
After the clamps have been secured do

not adjust them, failure to follow this
component.
Install the CV joint boot to the CV joint.

Using a suitable tool, secure the CV
joint boot with the new clamps.
6. Install the halfshaft.


Front Drive Halfshafts - Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint
Removal

safety stands.


clamps.

the joint.

Installation

the halfshaft.
engaged.

5. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the CV boot is not pushed too

far onto the drive shaft and the recess is
exposed, failure to follow this instruction may
After the clamps have been secured do

not adjust them, failure to follow this
component.
Install the CV joint boot to the CV joint.

Using a suitable tool, secure the CV
joint boot with the new clamps.


Front Drive Halfshafts - Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Removal

safety stands.

For additional information, refer to: Halfshaft LH (205-04,

clamps.
6. Slide the CV joint boot along the halfshaft to

gain access to the joint.

8. Remove the inner joint boot.
Installation
2. Install the inner joint boot.
3. Install the inner joint.

Install a new snap ring.
the halfshaft.
engaged.
4. Pack the joint with the grease supplied.
5. Install the CV joint boot to the CV joint.

Secure with the new clamps.


Front Drive Halfshafts - Halfshaft Seal LH
Special Tool(s)
Ball joint separator (LRT-54-027)
205-754
Halfshaft remover/replacer (LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/1
204-506/3
204-506-01
Retainers - halfshaft remover/replacer (LRT-60-030/5)
204-506/5
Axle oil seal remover (LRT-37-004/2)
308-005
Impulse extractor (LRT-99-004)
100-012
308-626/2
308-626/1
Removal
CAUTIONS:
Do not store or install halfshafts with joints at maximum articulation or damage may occur to the joint

safety stands.
2. Remove the LH halfshaft.


halfshaft oil seal.
Installation
oil seal.
installed.
2. Install the LH halfshaft.

Front Drive Halfshafts - Halfshaft Seal RH
Special Tool(s)
Ball joint separator (LRT-54-027)
205-754
204-506/1
204-506/3
204-506-01
Retainers - halfshaft remover/replacer (LRT-60-030/5)
204-506/5
Axle oil seal remover (LRT-37-004/2)
308-005
Impulse extractor (LRT-99-004)
100-012
308-626/2
308-626/1
Removal
CAUTIONS:

safety stands.
2. Remove the RH halfshaft.

For additional information, refer to: Halfshaft RH (205-04,

halfshaft oil seal.
Installation
oil seal.

For additional information, refer to: Halfshaft RH (205-04,
Rear Drive Halfshafts -
Recommended Lubricant
Item Specification
Outboard joint Use grease supplied with replacement boot kit (Optimol MS139G)
Inboard joint Use grease supplied with replacement boot kit (Thermax MS141G )
Item Specification
Type Fully floating, solid shafts incorporating plunging constant velocity joint at inboard end and fixed constant
velocity joint at outboard end of shaft
* Lower arm to wheel knuckle nut 275 203
Road wheel nuts Stage 1: 4 Stage 1: -

Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Drive Halfshafts
Rear Drive Halfshaft Component Locations

GENERAL
The rear drive halfshafts are identical in their construction with a Constant Velocity (CV) joint at each end to allow for
suspension movement.
REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY

1 - RH outer CV joint
3 - RH inner CV joint
4 - LH inner CV joint
6 - LH outer CV joint
Each outer CV joint has a target wheel on the outer diameter. This target is used by the ABS wheel speed sensor for
vehicle and wheel speed calculations.
Each rear drive halfshaft comprises two CV joints (inner and outer), boots and a solid barshaft, which is retained in
the rear differential by a circlip.
The CV joints used on the rear drive halfshafts share the same design and operating principles as the front drive
halfshafts CV joints (see 'Halfshaft Joint' section for more information on CV joints). The rear drive halfshaft inner
joint hubs are retained by peening over the lip of the joint body.
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Halfshaft
Special Tool(s)
204-506/1(LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/5(LRT-60-030/5)
204-506/3(LRT-60-030/3)
204-506-01(LRT-60-030/4)
308-005(LRT-37-004/2)
Impulse extractor
100-012(LRT-99-004)
308-626/1
308-626/2
Removal
CAUTIONS:
Do not undo or remove the large protruding hexagon on the differential casing.

safety stands.

Filling (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, General
Procedures).

Discard the nut.
5. Remove the stabilizer bar link.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Stabilizer Bar Link
(204-02 Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).

arm.
Remove the bolt.
8. Remove and discard the halfshaft retaining nut.


Remove the bolt.


from the wheel hub.
11. Position a container to collect the oil spillage.
12. Release the halfshaft from the differential housing.
13. With assistance, remove the halfshaft.

halfshaft oil seal.
Installation

oil seal.
installed.
3. With assistance, install the halfshaft.

Make sure the snap ring is fully engaged and retains
the halfshaft.
4. NOTE: The oil seal protector is designed
Remove and discard the halfshaft oil seal

protector.

the wheel hub.

of the joint.

Tighten the new nut to 275 Nm (203 lb.ft).

9. Secure the parking brake cable to the lower arm.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Stabilizer Bar Link
(204-02 Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).

the component.

lb.ft).

shown:
1. 1. Stage 1: 4 Nm
2. 2. Stage 2: 70 Nm
3. 3. Stage 3: 140 Nm
indicator.

Filling (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, General
Procedures).
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Removal

safety stands.

For additional information, refer to: Halfshaft (205-05,

clamps.

the joint.

Installation

the halfshaft.
engaged.

5. Install the CV joint boot to the CV joint.


Rear Drive Halfshafts - Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Removal

safety stands.


clamps.

the joint.

8. Remove the inner CV joint boot.
Installation
2. Install the inner CV joint boot.
3. Install the inner joint.

Install a new snap ring.
the halfshaft.
engaged.
4. Pack the joint with the grease supplied.

5. Install the boot to the joint.


Rear Drive Halfshafts - Halfshaft Bearing
Special Tool(s)
308-005 (LRT-37-004/2)
Impulse extractor
100-012 (LRT-99-004)
Halfshaft bearing installer
205-819
Removal

safety stands.
3. Remove and discard the halfshaft oil seal.

4. Using the special tool, remove and discard the

halfshaft bearing.
Installation
bearing.
2. Install a new halfshaft oil seal.


Brake System - General Information -
Brake Hydraulic Fluid
Item Specification
* Recommended hydraulic fluid SHELL DONAX YB DOT4 ESL FLUID
CAUTION: * If the above fluid is not available, use a low viscosity DOT 4 brake fluid meeting ISO 4925
Class 6 and Land Rover LRES22BF03 requirements.
Item Specification
Footbrake type:
Vehicles without Hydraulic, servo assisted, self-adjusting with front/rear split hydraulic system, twin piston
Brembo brakes sliding calipers to the front and single piston sliding calipers to the rear
Vehicles with Hydraulic, servo assisted, self-adjusting with front/rear split hydraulic system, opposed six
Brembo brakes piston calipers to the front and single piston sliding calipers to the rear
Parking brake Twin shoe (leading/trailing) operating on rear wheels and controlled from park brake lever in
type floor console via twin cables
Brake System - General Information - Brake System
For a detailed description of the Brake System and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual.REFER to:
Front Disc Brake (206-03, Description and Operation),

Front Disc Brake (206-03, Description and Operation),
Rear Disc Brake (206-04, Description and Operation),
Rear Disc Brake (206-04, Description and Operation),
Parking Brake (206-05, Description and Operation),
Parking Brake (206-05, Description and Operation).

If a road test is necessary make sure the vehicle is safe to do so.

Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Brake pad(s) condition and installation
Brake caliper(s) condition and installation
Brake disc(s) condition and installation
Parking brake disc(s)/parking brake drum(s) condition and installation
Parking brake shoes condition and installation
Parking brake cable(s) condition and installation
Brake booster condition and installation
Brake booster vacuum hose condition and installation
Brake master cylinder condition and installation
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
Brake fluid leaks
Brake warning indicator
Symptom Chart
Brake noise Debris Remove the debris
Brake pads Install new brake pads as necessary
Brake disc(s) Install new brake discs as necessary
Brake vibration Suspension components Check the installation of the suspension

Brake disc(s) components
workshop manual and test the brake disc
runout
Excessive brake Brake pads Install new brake pads as necessary. Road
pedal travel/brake - Worn brake pads may test to bed in the brake pads
pedal spongy make the pedal travel Check for a cause for air ingress, rectify as
excessive necessary
- New brake pads may make Install a new brake master cylinder as
the pedal spongy necessary
Air in the brake system Rectify the brake fluid leak as necessary
- If the pedal "pumps-up",
suspect air in the system
Brake master cylinder
- If the pedal sinks to the
floor when held under
pressure when there are
no external leaks, suspect
a master cylinder fault
Brake fluid leak (see visual
inspection)
Excessive brake Brake pipe(s) Check for damaged brake pipes

pedal effort/brake Brake caliper slide(s) Check the brake caliper slides
pedal hard Brake caliper piston(s) Check the brake caliper pistons
Brake vacuum hose Check the brake vacuum hose for air leaks
Brake vacuum pump Check the brake vacuum pump operation
Brake booster Check the brake booster
Low foot brake Brake pipe(s) Check for damaged brake pipes
efficiency / brakes Brake pads Check the brake pads
pulling / sticking / Brake caliper piston(s) Check the brake caliper pistons
binding Brake caliper slide(s) Check the brake caliper slides
Brake disc(s) Check the brake discs
Parking brake will Electric park brake cables Check the electric park brake cable(s) for
not engage or Electric park brake shoes operation/condition. Check that the cable
release Electric park brake adjusters end connector(s) are correctly installed to
Low parking brake Rear brake disc(s)/drum(s) the operating lever(s)
efficiency / parking Electric park brake actuator Check the electric park brake shoes for
brake sticking / malfunction wear
binding Check the electric park brake shoes for
correct adjustment
Check the rear brake disc(s)/drum(s)
Check the electric park brake actuator for
damage and/or excessive noise in normal
operation
Brake warning Brake reservoir fluid level Check the brake fluid level, top up if
indicator staying Brake pads required
illuminated Brake pad wear sensor circuit Check the brake pads
short circuit to ground, short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to power, open circuit, high test the brake pad wear sensor circuit for
resistance short circuit to ground, short circuit to
Brake fluid level sensor circuit power, open circuit, high resistance
short circuit to ground, short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to power, open circuit, high test the brake fluid level sensor circuit for
resistance short circuit to ground, short circuit to
DTC Index
00.
Brake System - General Information - Front Brake Disc Runout Check
General Procedures
NOTES:

stands.
Raise the front of the vehicle.
2. Remove the road wheel.
3. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper

to hang on the brake hose.
Release the brake caliper and tie aside.
4. CAUTION: Brake discs must be renewed

in pairs, unless one disc requires changing
before 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) from new.
At 4 points around disc, measure disc

thisckness using a micrometer; renew disc if
less than service limit or if variation is
exceeded: Disc thickness, NEW 30 mm, Service
limit = 27 mm. Thickness variation maximum
= 0.01.
5. Mount a Dial Test Indicator (DTI) to and

secure to inboard side of hub using caliper
assembly upper bolt hole
6. Position DTI probe 5 mm in from outer edge of disc.
7. Install spacer washers under the wheel nuts.

Tighten the road wheel nuts to 140 Nm
(103 Ib.ft).
8. Zero DTI and rotate road wheel one complete revolution to

measure disc runout. Disc runout must not exceed 0.05 mm
(0.002 in).
9. If disc runout is outside limits:
10. Remove the wheel hub nuts.

Remove the spacers.
11. Remove Allen screw securing brake disc to drive flange.
13. Ensure mating surfaces of disc and drive flange are clean.

15. Install spacer washers under the wheel nuts.

Tighten the road wheel nuts to 140 Nm (103 Ib.ft).
16. Check disc runout as detailed above.
17. If runout is still outside limits, renew disc and/or hub.

Remove the spacers.
19. Remove the DTI.
20. Install the brake caliper and tighten the bolts. TORQUE: 275
Nm
21. Install the road wheel(s) and tighten nuts to 140Nm (103
lb-ft).
22. Depress brake pedal several times to set brake pads.

Brake System - General Information - Rear Brake Disc Runout Check
General Procedures
NOTES:
RH illustration shown, LH is similar.
It is not necessary to carry out the parking brake shoe 'bedding-in procedure' if the rear brake discs or
parking brake shoes have been removed for access to other components.
1. CAUTION: Do not turn the ignition on when the

parking brake service mode has been set, this will result in
the parking brake being released from the service mode.
Enter the parking brake into the service mode.

Turn the ignition on.
Apply, and hold, the footbrake.
Apply, and hold, the parking brake switch to the
RELEASE position.
Turn the ignition off.
Release the footbrake.
Release the parking brake switch.

stands.
Raise rear of vehicle.
3. Remove road wheel.
4. CAUTION: The brake pad wear indicator

sensor is easily damaged. Do not use a lever
to remove the sensor. Use fingers only.
RH side rear only: Disconnect the brake pad

wear indicator sensor lead.
5. Remove 2 bolts securing brake caliper to hub.

Release caliper from hub and tie aside.
6. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations
may occur, but the essential information is
always correct.
At 4 points around the disc, measure disc

thickness using a micrometer; renew disc if
exceeded: Disc thickness, NEW = 20 mm
Service limit = 18 mm. Thickness variation
maximum = 0.01 mm.

always correct.
Mount a Dial Test Indicator (DTI) to and

assembly upper bolt hole.

always correct.

Install spacer washers under the wheel
nuts.
10. Zero DTI and rotate wheel one complete revolution to

(0.003 in).

Remove the spacer washers.
14. Remove brake disc.
15. Ensure mating surfaces of disc and drive flange are clean.

17. Tighten the wheel nuts to 140 Nm (103 lb.ft).

Install spacer washers under the wheel nuts.
19. If runout is still outside limits, renew disc and/or hub.

Remove the spacer washers.
21. Remove the DTI.
22. Install the brake caliper anchor bolts

23. Tighten the wheel nuts to 140 Nm (103 lb.ft).
25. Remove stands and lower vehicle.

Brake System - General Information - Brake System Bleeding
General Procedures
WARNING: If any components upstream of the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU), including the HCU itself are
replaced, the brake system must be bled using Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment. This will ensure that
all air is expelled from the new component(s).
NOTES:
Bleeding of the complete brake system must be carried out using Land Rover approved diagnostic
equipment. Where only the primary or secondary brake circuits have been disturbed in isolation, it should only
be necessary to bleed that circuit. Partial bleeding of the hydraulic system is only permissible if a brake tube or
hose has been disconnected with only minimal loss of fluid.

stands.
2. Check that the brake fluid lines are secure and that there
are no signs of a brake fluid leak. If a brake fluid leak is
detected, investigate and rectify the cause of the leak
before bleeding the brakes.
3. WARNING: Do not allow dirt or foreign

liquids to enter the reservoir. Use only new
brake fluid of the correct specification from
airtight containers. Do not mix brands of brake
fluid as they may not be compatible.
CAUTIONS:
Brake fluid will damage paint finished

surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the
fluid and clean the area with water.
The brake fluid reservoir must remain full

with new, clean brake fluid at all times during
bleeding.
Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX mark.

Disconnect the brake fluid reservoir
electrical connector.
Remove the brake fluid reservoir cap.
4. Conduct the bleed procedure with the engine running.
5. Connect the diagnostic tool to the vehicle, select diagnostic

and proceed as directed for bleeding the brake system.
6. Starting at the brake caliper furthest away

from the brake master cylinder, loosen the
bleed screw by one-half to three-quarters of a
turn.
7. Install the bleed tube to the brake caliper bleed screw and
immerse the free end of the bleed tube in a bleed jar
containing a small quantity of approved brake fluid.
Hold the bleed container at least 300 mm above the
Caliper that is being bled.
8. CAUTION: The brake fluid reservoir must remain full

with new, clean brake fluid at all times during bleeding.
With assistance, depress the brake pedal steadily through

to 2/3 of its full stroke.
9. With the brake pedal held down, close bleed screw and then
return the brake pedal to 1/3 of its full stroke and hold.
10. Repeat steps 8 and 9, 28 times for the rear brake and 10
times for the front brake.
11. At the end of the bleed process, depress and hold the brake
pedal down.
12. CAUTION: Make sure the bleed screw cap

is installed after bleeding. This will prevent
corrosion to the bleed screw.
With the brake pedal fully depressed, tighten

the bleed screw to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
13. Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX mark.
14. WARNING: Braking efficiency may be seriously

impaired if an incorrect bleed sequence is used.
Repeat the brake bleeding procedure for each brake caliper,

following the above sequence.
16. Apply the brakes and check for leaks.
17. Install the brake fluid reservoir cap.

Connect the brake fluid reservoir electrical
connector.
18. On completion, road test the vehicle and check the brake
pedal operation. The pedal travel should be short with a
firm feel.
Brake System - General Information - Brake System Pressure
Bleeding
General Procedures

stands.
3. WARNING: Do not allow dirt or foreign liquids to enter

the reservoir. Use only new brake fluid of the correct
specification from airtight containers. Do not mix brands of
brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
CAUTIONS:
Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If

spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean the area
with water.
The brake fluid reservoir must remain full with new,

clean brake fluid at all times during bleeding.
Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX mark.

Disconnect the brake fluid reservoir electrical
connector.
4. Conduct the bleed procedure with the engine running.
5. Starting at the brake caliper furthest away

from the brake master cylinder, loosen the
bleed screw by one-half to three-quarters of a
turn.
6.
Install the bleed tube to the brake caliper bleed
screw and immerse the free end of the bleed tube in
a bleed jar containing a small quantity of approved
brake fluid.



pedal down.
11. CAUTION: Make sure the bleed screw cap is installed

after bleeding. This will prevent corrosion to the bleed
screw.
With the brake pedal fully depressed, tighten the bleed

screw.
On vehicles with high performance brakes, tighten
the front caliper bleed screw to 19 Nm (14 lb.ft).
On vehicles with standard brakes, tighten the front
caliper bleed screw to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
Tighten the rear caliper bleed screws to 10 Nm (7
lb.ft).
13. WARNING: Braking efficiency may be seriously

impaired if an incorrect bleed sequence is used.
Repeat the brake bleeding procedure for each brake caliper,

following the above sequence.

connector.
firm feel.
Brake System - General Information - Component Bleeding
General Procedures
WARNING: If any components upstream of the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU), including the HCU itself are
replaced, the brake system must be bled using Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment. This will ensure that
all air is expelled from the new component(s).
CAUTION: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
NOTES:
Bleeding of the complete brake system must be carried out using Land Rover approved diagnostic
equipment. The following manual procedure covers bleeding the brake system for components down stream of
the HCU, where only the primary or secondary brake circuits have been disturbed in isolation. Partial bleeding of
the hydraulic system is only permissible if a brake tube or hose has been disconnected with only minimal loss of
fluid.

stands.
3. Pump the brake pedal until the brake vacuum assistance is

exhausted.
4. WARNING: Do not allow dirt or foreign

liquids to enter the reservoir. Use only new
brake fluid of the correct specification from
airtight containers. Do not mix brands of brake
fluid as they may not be compatible.
CAUTIONS:
Brake fluid will damage paint finished

surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the
fluid and clean the area with water.
The brake fluid reservoir must remain full

with new, clean brake fluid at all times during
bleeding.

Disconnect the brake fluid reservoir
Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX
mark.
5. Install the bleed tube to the brake caliper bleed screw and
immerse the free end of the bleed tube in a bleed jar
containing a small quantity of approved brake fluid.
6. Loosen the bleed screw by one-half turn to three-quarters

of a turn.



pedal down.
11. CAUTION: Make sure the bleed screw cap

is installed after bleeding. This will prevent
corrosion to the bleed screw.
With the brake pedal fully depressed, tighten

the bleed screw.
On vehicles with high performance
brakes, tighten the front caliper bleed
screw to 19 Nm (14 lb.ft).
On vehicles with standard brakes,
tighten the front caliper bleed screw to
10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
Tighten the rear caliper bleed screws to
10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

connector.
firm feel.
Brake System - General Information - Front Brake Disc Runout Check -
With Wheel On
General Procedures
NOTES:

stands.
Raise the front of the vehicle.
2. NOTES:
Take care not to contact back plate with

DTI probe.
DTI probe extension maybe required.
Use magnetic base stand to mount Dial Test

Indicator (DTI) gauge gauge as shown 5 mm in
from edge of disc.
3. Zero DTI and rotate the wheel one full complete revolution
to measure disc runout. Disc runout must not exceed 0.03
mm.
4. NOTE: The following steps must be

followed if the runout exceeds 0.03 mm.
Remove and rotate the wheel 2 stud holes and

install the wheel and tire in the new position.
Tighten the road wheel nuts in sequence
as shown above to the following:
Stage 1: 4 Nm.
Stage 2: 70 Nm.
Stage 3: 140 Nm.
5. Check runout as detailed above.
NOTE: If the runout still exceeds 0.03
6. Check hub drive flange runout.

For additional information, refer to: Front Wheel Bearing
and Wheel Hub Runout Check (204-00, General
Procedures).

Tighten the road wheel nuts in sequence
as shown above to the following:
Stage 1: 4 Nm.
Stage 2: 70 Nm.
Stage 3: 140 Nm.
Brake System - General Information - Rear Brake Disc Runout Check -
With Wheel On
General Procedures
NOTES:
It is not necessary to carry out the parking brake shoe 'bedding-in procedure' if the rear brake discs or
parking brake shoes have been removed for access to other components.
1. CAUTION: Do not turn the ignition on when the

parking brake service mode has been set, this will result in
the parking brake being released from the service mode.
Enter the parking brake into the service mode.

Turn the ignition on.
Apply, and hold, the footbrake.
Apply, and hold, the parking brake switch to the
RELEASE position.
Turn the ignition off.
Release the footbrake.
Release the parking brake switch.

stands.
Raise rear of vehicle.
3. Remove road wheel.

RH side rear only: Disconnect the brake pad

wear indicator sensor lead.
5. Remove 2 bolts securing brake caliper to hub.

Release caliper from hub and tie aside.
6. NOTES:
Some variation in the illustrations may

occur, but the essential information is always
correct.
Wheel and tire shown removed for clarity
At 4 points around the disc, measure disc

thickness using a micrometer; renew disc if
exceeded: Disc thickness, NEW = 20 mm
Service limit = 18 mm. Thickness variation
maximum = 0.01 mm.

always correct.
Mount a Dial Test Indicator (DTI) to and

assembly upper bolt hole.
9. CAUTION: Take care not to trap the calliper.
Install the wheel.

Tighten the road wheel nuts in sequence to the
following
Stage 1: 4 Nm.
Stage 2: 70 Nm.
Stage 3: 140 Nm.

(0.003 in).
12. Remove the wheel.

14. Remove brake disc.
15. Make sure the mating surfaces of disc and drive flange are
clean.
17. CAUTION: Take care not to trap the calliper.
Install the wheel.

following
Stage 1: 4 Nm.
Stage 2: 70 Nm.
Stage 3: 140 Nm.
19. If runout is still outside limits.
20. NOTE: Take care not to trap the calliper.
Remove and rotate the wheel 120 degrees and install the
wheel in the new position
following:
Stage 1: 4 Nm.
Stage 2: 70 Nm.
Stage 3: 140 Nm.

(0.003 in).
22. Remove the DTI.
23. Install the brake caliper anchor bolts

24. Install the wheel.

following:
Stage 1: 4 Nm.
Stage 2: 70 Nm.
Stage 3: 140 Nm.
26. Remove stands and lower vehicle.

Brake System - General Information - Brake Pad Bedding-In
General Procedures
NOTE: This procedure is to gradually increase the temperature in the braking components without inducing
thermal shock and to mate the brake pad and disc friction surfaces.
1. With the vehicle stationary, pump the brake pedal until the
pedal is firm.
2. Drive the vehicle and make sure that the braking system
operates correctly.
3. NOTE: The following steps must be done without

excessive traffic.
Using light to medium deceleration and varying speeds,

leave at least 0.5 mile (0.8 Km) between each brake
application.
4. Drive the vehicle, performing 30 brake applications, with a

duration of 3 seconds for each application.
Front Disc Brake -
Item Specification
Disc type Ventilated
Disc diameter:
Vehicles with 4.0L or 2.7L diesel engine 317 mm (12.6 in)
Disc thickness:
New 30.0 mm (1.18 in)
Service limit 27.0 mm (1.063 in)
Maximum disc run-out - disc installed 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
Caliper type Sliding pin, twin piston
Piston diameter 48.0 mm (1.8 in)
Pad minimum thickness 3.0 mm (0.12 in)
Brake pad wear warning lead:
Location Front left hand brake pad
Activates at 75% of pad life utilised
Brake caliper bleed screw 10 7
Brake disc Torx screw 16 12
Brake caliper anchor plate bolts 275 202
Brake caliper housing bolts 35 26
Brake hose union 32 24
Front Disc Brake - Front Disc Brake
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Dust shield
2 - Dust shield screw (5 off)
3 - Brake pad
4 - Brake disc retaining bolt
5 - Brake disc
6 - Guide pin (2 off)
7 - Caliper body
8 - Brake pad wear sensor lead
9 - Caliper carrier
10 - Caliper bolt (2 off)
11 - Wheel hub bolt
12 - Wheel hub bolt
13 - Wheel knuckle
14 - Wheel speed sensor
15 - Wheel speed sensor bolt
16 - Wheel hub
17 - Guide pin dust cover (2 off)
19 - Bleed screw
20 - Dust cover
21 - Piston (2 off)
OVERVIEW
Each front brake each consists of a twin piston brake brake caliper, a ventilated brake disc and a dust shield. All
models the same brake caliper, disc and dust shield.
The brake brake caliper is attached to the rear of the wheel knuckle. The brake pads are made from an asbestos
free material. The inboard brake pad of the left front brake incorporates a wear sensor.
When hydraulic pressure is supplied to the brake caliper, the pistons extend and force the inner pad against the disc.
The brake caliper reacts and slides on the guide pins to bring the outer pad into contact with the disc.
The front brake pad wear sensor is connected in series with the rear brake pad wear sensor, between the Instrument
Cluster (IC) and ground. When a brake pad incorporating a brake pad wear sensor is approximately 75% worn, the
brake pad wear sensor goes open circuit. When the IC detects the open circuit, it illuminates the amber Light
Emitting Diode (LED) in the brake warning indicator and displays an appropriate warning in the message center and
sound a warning chime.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01, Description and Operation).
At the beginning of each ignition cycle, the IC performs a bulb check on the brake warning indicator: the indicator is
illuminated amber for 1.5 seconds, red for 1.5 seconds, then goes off.
Front Disc Brake - Front Disc Brake
The braking system has been modified to compensate for the additional weight of the armoured vehicle.
Heavy-duty calipers are mated to larger diameter discs. The discs are ventilated with directionally curved veins for
increased airflow and consequently optimum cooling. The inboard side of the disc is protected by a one piece dust-
shield.
The front monobloc calipers are attached to the vehicle’s wheel knuckles, and comprise three pairs of horizontally
opposed pistons. With each pair of pistons being a different diameter to the other pairs of pistons:
the smallest pair of pistons are at the leading edge of the pad, and
the largest pair of pistons furthest from the leading edge.
This staggered piston arrangement provides a progressive braking force and even wear by reducing tapered wearing
of the brake pads.
The brake pads also provide a firm consistent pedal with excellent cold performance for start-up and low-speed
driving and are specially formulated for resistance to fade at high temperatures.
Heavy-duty caliper and large diameter brake disc
Each front brake caliper has two bleed screws fitted with tamper proof protective covers to prevent unauthorized
access.
Bleed screw covers

Front Disc Brake - Brake Disc Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal
WARNING: If installing a new brake disc, install new brake pads.
CAUTION: Brake discs must be renewed in pairs.
NOTES:
The brake pad wear warning indicator sensor must be replaced each time the brake pads are serviced.

stands.
2. Remove the front wheel and tire.
3. CAUTIONS:

the brake hose.

lead.
Remove the brake caliper and anchor plate.

Remove the brake caliper anchor bolts.
Tie the brake caliper aside.
4. Remove the front brake disc.

Installation
clean.

4. NOTE: Tighten the wheel nuts in the

sequence shown:
Install the wheels and tires.

Stage 1 : 4Nm
Stage 2 : 70Nm
Stage 3 : 140Nm
necessary.
6. For additional information, refer to: Brake Pad Bedding-In

Procedures).
Front Disc Brake - Brake Pads Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal
WARNINGS:
Brake pads must be renewed in axle sets only, otherwise braking efficiency may be impaired.
If the brake pad wear warning light has been activated, the pad wear sensor must be replaced.

stands.

LH side front: Disconnect the brake pad wear

indicator sensor wiring harness.
4. NOTE: This step is only required if a new wear

indicator harness is installed.
Remove the front LH fender splash shield.

5. NOTE: This step is only required if a new

wear indicator harness is installed.
LH side front: Release and disconnect the

brake pad wear indicator wiring harness.
6. NOTE: Use an additional wrench to

prevent the component from rotating.
Remove the brake caliper lower bolt.

7. NOTE: Note the orientation of the brake
pads including the position of the small mass
on the outer pad.
Remove the brake pads.

Rotate the brake caliper upwards.
Remove the 2 clips.
8. Repeat the above 2 steps for the other side.
Installation

inhaled.
Clean the brake caliper housing and anchor plate using

brake cleaning fluid.
2. Inspect the caliper piston and slide pin seals for damage.
3. CAUTIONS:
The brake caliper should move freely on both slide

pins.
If necessary, renew the components.
Make sure that the plain slide pin is installed to

the upper part of the caliper and the bushed slide pin
is installed to the lower part.
Check the slide pins for correct operation.
4. CAUTION: Check the brake fluid reservoir level before

pushing the piston back, failure to follow this instruction
may result in damage to the vehicle.
NOTE: As the piston is pushed back into the caliper

housing, the brake fluid level in the reservoir will rise. Do
not allow the reservoir to overflow.
Press the pistons into the caliper housing.
5. CAUTION: Make sure that the plain

clip is installed to the bottom part of the
caliper and the rubber coated clip is
installed to the upper part.
Install the 2 clips
6. Apply a suitable amount of the supplied grease

to the caliper, as illustrated.
7. NOTE: Make sure the brake pads are installed in the

correct orientation.
Install the brake pads.

8. Rotate the brake caliper downwards.
Tighten the bolt to 35 Nm.
9. Repeat the above procedure for the other side.

LH side front: Connect the brake pad wear indicator wiring

harness electrical connection.

Install the front LH fender splash shield.

12. LH side front: Connect the brake pad wear indicator wiring
harness.

shown:
1. Stage 1: 4 Nm
2. Stage 2: 70 Nm
3. Stage 3: 140 Nm
necessary.

Procedures).
Front Disc Brake - Brake Caliper Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal
CAUTION: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
NOTES:

stands.

LH side only: Disconnect the brake pad wear

indicator sensor.
4. WARNING: Be prepared to collect

escaping fluid.
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or

removing components, ensure the area around
the joint faces and connections are clean. Plug
Disconnect the brake hose from the brake

caliper.
Remove the union.
Remove and discard the two sealing
washers.
Install blanking caps to the exposed
ports.
5. NOTE: Note the orientation of the brake pads.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles
With: Standard Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal
and Installation).
Remove the brake caliper housing.

Remove the brake caliper upper bolt.
Installation
1. NOTES:
Use an additional wrench to prevent the component

from rotating.
Make sure the brake caliper guide pins are installed in

the correct orientation.
Install the brake caliper.

Tighten the brake caliper upper bolt to 35 Nm (26
lb.ft).


For additional information, refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles
With: Standard Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal
and Installation).
Apply a suitable amount of the supplied grease to
the mating faces of the brake pads and brake
calipers.
3. Connect the brake hose to the brake caliper.

Remove the blanking caps from the ports.
Install new sealing washers.
Tighten the brake hose union to 32 Nm (24 lb.ft).
4. LH side only: Connect the brake pad wear indicator sensor.
5. Bleed the brake caliper.

Procedures).

sequence shown:

Stage 1 : 4Nm
Stage 2 : 70Nm
Stage 3 : 140Nm
Rear Disc Brake -
Item Specification
Disc type Ventilated
Disc diameter:
Disc thickness - All engines:
New 20.0 mm (0.78 in)
Service limit 18.0 mm (0.71 in)
Maximum disc run-out - disc installed 0.09 mm (0.003 in)
Caliper type Sliding pin, single piston
Piston diameter 45.0 mm (1.7 in)
Pad minimum thickness 3.0 mm (0.12 in)
Brake pad wear warning lead:
Location Rear right hand brake pad
Activates at 75% of pad life utilised
Brake caliper bleed screw 10 7
Brake caliper housing to anchor plate bolts 35 26
Brake hose union 32 24
Brake disc Torx screw 16 12
Brake caliper anchor plate to wheel knuckle bolts 115 85
Rear Disc Brake - Rear Disc Brake
COMPONENT LOCATION

2 - Wheel knuckle
3 - Wheel speed sensor holder
4 - Wheel speed sensor holder bolt
5 - Wheel knuckle
6 - Wheel speed sensor bolt
7 - Wheel hub
8 - Dust shield
9 - Brake pad wear sensor
10 - Dust shield screw (3 off)
11 - Brake disc retaining bolt
12 - Brake pad retainers
13 - Caliper body
14 - Brake pad
15 - Caliper carrier
16 - Guide pin dust cover (2 off)
18 - Piston
19 - Bleed screw and bleed screw dust cap
OVERVIEW
Each rear brake consists of a single piston brake caliper, a ventilated brake disc and a dust shield (integrated as part
of the parking brake). TDV6 3.0L DIESEL models feature a different brake caliper and disc than the V6 3.0L S/C
PETROL, TDV8 4.4L DIESEL and V8 S/C 5.0L PETROL models. The dust shield and parking brake are common on all
derivatives.
The brake brake caliper is attached to the wheel knuckle. The brake pads are made from an asbestos free material.
The inboard brake pad of the right rear brake incorporates a wear sensor.
When hydraulic pressure is supplied to the brake caliper, the piston extends and forces the inner pad against the
disc. The brake caliper body reacts and slides on the guide pins to bring the outer pad into contact with the disc.
The rear brake pad wear sensor is connected in series with the front brake pad wear sensor, between the Instrument
Cluster (IC) and ground. When a brake pad incorporating a brake pad wear sensor is approximately 75% worn, the
brake pad wear sensor goes open circuit. When the IC detects the open circuit, it illuminates the amber Light
Emitting Diode (LED) in the brake warning indicator and also displays an appropriate warning in the message center
and sound a warning chime.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01, Description and Operation).
At the beginning of each ignition cycle, the IC performs a bulb check on the brake warning indicator: the indicator is
illuminated amber for 1.5 seconds, then red for 1.5 seconds.
Rear Disc Brake - Rear Disc Brake
The braking system has been modified to compensate for the additional weight of the armoured vehicle.
Heavy-duty calipers are mated to larger diameter discs. The discs are ventilated with directionally curved veins for
increased airflow and consequently optimum cooling. The inboard side of the disc is protected by a one piece dust-
shield.
The rear monobloc calipers are attached to the vehicle’s wheel knuckles, and comprise two pairs of horizontally
opposed pistons. With each pair of pistons being a different diameter to the other pair of pistons:
the smallest pair of pistons are at the leading edge of the pad, and
the largest pair of pistons furthest from the leading edge.
This staggered piston arrangement provides a progressive braking force and even wear by reducing tapered wearing
of the brake pads.
The brake pads also provide a firm consistent pedal with excellent cold performance for start-up and low-speed
driving and are specially formulated for resistance to fade at high temperatures.
Heavy-duty caliper and large diameter brake disc
Each rear brake caliper has two bleed screws fitted with tamper proof protective covers to prevent unauthorized
access.
Bleed screw covers

Rear Disc Brake - Brake Disc
Removal
WARNING: If installing a new brake disc, install new brake pads.
CAUTION: Brake discs must be renewed in pairs.
NOTES:
If the parking brake shoes or the brake discs have been removed for access to other components then DO
NOT carry out the bedding in procedure.
1. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, drive the

parking brake to the 'mounting position'.

stands.
3. Remove the rear wheel and tire.
4. Remove the brake caliper and anchor plate.
5. NOTE: Rotate the rear brake disc to

locate the parking brake shoe adjuster.
Release the parking brake shoe adjustment.

Remove the parking brake shoe adjuster
access plugs.
Rotate the parking brake shoe adjuster.
6. Remove the rear brake disc.
Installation
1. Make sure that the rear brake disc and hub mating surfaces
are clean.
2. Install the rear brake disc.


4. Adjust the parking brake.

For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake Shoe and
Lining Adjustment (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation,
5. Install the rear wheel and tire.


(206-00, General Procedures).
Rear Disc Brake - Brake Pads
Removal
WARNING: Brake pads must be renewed in axle sets only, otherwise braking efficiency may be impaired.
NOTES:

stands.
3. RH side rear: Disconnect the brake pad wear

4. RH side rear: Disconnect the brake pad wear

5. RH side rear: Release and disconnect the brake

pad wear indicator wiring harness electrical
connector.
Remove the brake caliper lower bolt.
7. NOTES:
Note the orientation of the brake pads.
Note the orientation of the clips.

Rotate the brake caliper upwards.
Remove the 2 clips.
8. Repeat the above 2 steps for the other side.
Installation

inhaled.
Clean the brake caliper housing and anchor plate using

brake cleaning fluid.
2. Inspect the caliper piston and slide pin seals for damage.
3. CAUTIONS:

pins.
Check the slide pins for correct operation.
4. CAUTION: Check the brake fluid reservoir level before

pushing the piston back, failure to follow this instruction
NOTE: As the piston is pushed back into the caliper

housing, the brake fluid level in the reservoir will rise. Do
not allow the reservoir to overflow.
Press the piston into the caliper housing.
5. CAUTION: If installed, the adhesive strips covering the

outer brake pads must be removed before installation.
the vehicle.
If installed, remove the adhesive strips from the 2 outer

brake pads.
6. NOTES:
Make sure the brake pads are installed in the correct

orientation.
Make sure that the clips are installed in the correct

orientation.

7. Rotate the brake caliper downwards.

Tighten the brake caliper lower bolt to 35 Nm (26
lb.ft).
9. RH side rear: Connect the brake pad wear indicator wiring

harness electrical connection.
10. RH side rear: Connect the brake pad wear

11. RH side rear: Connect the brake pad wear

sequence shown:

Stage 1 : 4Nm
Stage 2 : 70Nm
Stage 3 : 140Nm
necessary.

Procedures).
Rear Disc Brake - Brake Caliper
Removal

stands.

RH side only: Disconnect the brake pad wear

indicator sensor.
4. NOTE: Note the orientation of the brake pads.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Pads (206-04,

removing components, ensure the area around
the joint faces and connections are clean. Plug
Disconnect the brake hose from the brake

caliper.
Remove the union.
Remove and discard the two sealing
washers.
Install blanking caps to the exposed
ports.


Installation
1. NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the

component from rotating.

lb.ft).


3. Connect the brake hose to the brake caliper.

Tighten the brake hose union to 32 Nm (24 lb.ft).
4. Connect the brake pad wear indicator sensor.
5. Bleed the brake caliper.

For additional information, refer to: Component Bleeding -
Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-00, General
Procedures).

Rear Disc Brake - Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Removal

stands.

RH side only: Disconnect the brake pad wear

indicator sensor.
4. Remove the rear brake pads.



6. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate.

7. NOTE: Note the orientation of the brake
caliper guide pins.
Remove the guide pins and seals.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

pins.
NOTE: Make sure the brake caliper guide pins are

installed in the correct orientation.
Install the brake caliper guide pins.

Check the condition of the caliper guide pin seals.
Check for correct operation.
2. Install the brake caliper anchor plate.

3. NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the

component from rotating.

lb.ft).
4. Install the rear brake pads.

5. Connect the brake pad wear indicator sensor.

Parking Brake and Actuation -
Item Specification
Make Continental Teves
Model/type N5528001
Operation Twin cable operation to park brake with emergency cable release located in
passenger compartment
Minimum brake lining material 2.0 mm (0.078 in)
thickness
Wedge adjuster Allen screw 7 5
Rear brake disc Torx screw 35 26
Brake caliper anchor plate to wheel knuckle bolts 115 85
Brake caliper to anchor plate bolts 35 26
Parking brake actuator and cable assembly nuts 5 4
Parking brake actuator mounting bracket bolts 22 16
* LH/RH parking brake cable bolts 22 16
Parking brake cable coupling 8 6
* New nuts/bolts must be installed
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Parking brake indicators (NAS only)
2 - Parking brake indicators (all except NAS (north American specification))
3 - Parking brake module
4 - Drum brake
5 - Parking brake cable
6 - Emergency release cable
7 - Parking brake switch
GENERAL
The parking brake is an electrically actuated system that operates drum brakes integrated into the rear brake discs.
The parking brake system consists of:
A parking brake switch.

Left and right drum brakes.
Left and right brake cables.
An emergency release cable.
A clutch pedal position sensor (manual transmission models only).
Two parking brake indicators.
A parking brake module.
The parking brake is operated by the parking brake module, which adjusts the tension of the brake cables to apply
and release the drum brakes. Operation of the parking brake module is initiated by the parking brake switch.
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
Parking Brake Switch - Electronic Transmission Shifter
The parking brake switch is used by the driver to apply and release the parking brake, and is installed in the center
console adjacent to the gear lever.
Slots on the sides of the parking brake switch engage with the top panel of the center console, and a screw secures
the parking brake switch in position. An electrical connector on the back of the switch provides the interface with the
vehicle wiring. A brake symbol on the switch illuminates when the exterior lamps are selected on.
There are three states for the parking brake switch:
Apply request, when the handle of the parking brake switch is pulled up.
Release request, when the handle of the parking brake switch is pushed down.
Idle, when the handle of the parking brake switch is in the central or rest position.
Microswitches, incorporated into the parking brake switch, are activated by the handle of the parking brake switch. To
determine the operating state of the parking brake switch, the parking brake module scans the circuits containing the
microswitches.
DRUM BRAKES
NOTE: LH (left-hand) brake shown, RH (right-hand) brake similar

1 - Wedge adjuster screw
2 - Return spring
3 - Cross strut
4 - Backplate
5 - Brake shoe
6 - Shoe locating pin and clip
7 - Adjuster spring
8 - Toothed wheel adjuster
9 - Dust shield
10 - Rear brake disc
11 - Adjuster access plug
Each drum brake consists of a pair of brake shoes installed on a backplate attached to the rear hub carrier. The
brake shoes operate on the drum integrated into the rear brake disc. The orientation of the brake shoes differ by
180° between the LH and RH brakes.
When the parking brake module tensions the brake cables, the movement is transmitted to an operating lever on one
of the brake shoes. The operating lever pivots against a cross strut, which forces the brake shoes apart and into
contact with the drum in the rear brake disc. Brake shoe to drum clearance is set with two manual adjusters, which
are accessed through a hole in the brake disc. One of the adjusters is a conventional toothed wheel adjuster. The
second adjuster is a wedge adjuster operated by an Allen screw.
After replacement of the brake shoes or brake discs, a bedding in procedure must be performed to ensure the drum
brakes operate satisfactorily.
Prior to removing a brake disc from a vehicle, power should be disconnected from the parking brake module.
Operation of the parking brake switch while a brake disc is removed can cause the actuating mechanism in the
parking brake module to seize.
BRAKE CABLES

1 - Gearbox
2 - Parking brake module housing
3 - Cable nut
4 - Sealing collar
5 - Threaded connector
6 - Spline shaft
7 - Force sensor
8 - Shoe
9 - Locking cover
10 - Sealing collar
11 - Cable nut
The brake cables consist of Bowden cables installed between the parking brake module and the drum brakes. Nuts,
on the ends of the outer cables, secure the brake cables to the parking brake module and the backplate of the
related drum brake. In each drum brake, the inner cable is located in the guide spring and connected to the brake
shoe operating lever by a nipple on the end of the cable. In the parking brake module, the two inner cables are
joined together via the force sensor and the spline shaft.
The inner cable of the RH brake cable is connected to a nipple on the force sensor by a 'shoe' on the end of the
cable; a locking cover keeps the shoe engaged with the nipple.
The inner cable of the LH brake cable is connected to the spline shaft by a threaded connector (LH thread); a
squared flange at the end of the threaded connector locates in the housing of the parking brake module, to prevent
the threaded connector from turning with the spline shaft.
When the spline shaft turns, the threaded connector of the LH brake cable is screwed into or out of the spline shaft,
which changes the effective length of the inner cables and operates the drum brakes. The ability of the spline shaft
to move axially in the gearbox equalizes the load applied by the inner cables to the two drum brakes.
Prior to disconnecting a brake cable, power should be disconnected from the parking brake module. Operation of the
parking brake switch while a brake cable is disconnected can cause the actuating mechanism in the parking brake
module to seize. In addition, the parking brake may not switch off until 20 minutes after Power mode 0 selected.
Automatic re-apply cannot be eliminated until this period has expired.
EMERGENCY RELEASE CABLE

1 - Pull ring
2 - Quick release fitting
4 - Sealing collar
5 - Spring
6 - Inner cable
7 - Nipple
8 - Pulley wheel
Emergency Park Brake Release
The emergency release cable allows the parking brake to be mechanically released if:
The parking brake cannot be electrically released because of a system fault.

The battery is disconnected or battery voltage decreases below 7.5 volts while the parking brake is applied, so
that the parking brake cannot be electrically released.
The parking brake is mechanically released by disconnecting the force sensor from the spline shaft in the parking
brake module. During normal operation, the force sensor and the spline shaft are locked together by a lever operated
pawl on the end of the spline shaft, which engages with a spigot on the force sensor.
The emergency release cable is a Bowden cable installed between the parking brake module and the center console.
The emergency release cable is held in clips along the underside of the vehicle and enters the passenger
compartment below the center console through an aperture in the transmission tunnel. A quick release fitting seals
the emergency release cable in the aperture. At the parking brake module, a sealing collar on the outer cable is a
push fit in the housing of the parking brake module.
In the center console, a pull ring is installed on the end of the inner cable. The pull ring is designed to fit the hook on
the end of the jack handle which, in combination with a screwdriver shaft, can be used to pull on the cable.
The pull required to release the latch is approximately 200 N (45 lbf). When the pull ring of the emergency release
cable is released, the spring in the parking brake module retracts the inner cable and the nipple moves away from
the pawl operating lever.
After the emergency release cable has been used to release the parking brake, the next time an apply selection is
made with the parking brake switch, the parking brake module automatically runs through a latching procedure to
reconnect the spline shaft with the force sensor. The parking brake module turns the spline shaft so that it moves
towards the force sensor. The pawl of the spline shaft then re-engages with the spigot of the force sensor. A second
apply selection with the parking brake switch is required to apply the parking brake.
PARKING BRAKE INDICATORS

1 - Red or amber warning indicator (NAS only)
2 - Red or amber warning indicator (all except NAS)
The parking brake has two warning indicators, one amber and one red, located in the speedometer of the instrument
cluster (same symbol, illuminated in either red, or amber).
Amber Parking Brake Warning Indicator
The amber parking brake warning indicator is continuously illuminated if there is a parking brake system fault.
Operation of the indicator is controlled by a high speed CAN (controller area network) bus signal from the parking
brake module to the instrument cluster.
Red Parking Brake Warning Indicator
When the parking brake is applied, the red parking brake warning indicator is continuously illuminated while the
ignition is on and for 3 minutes after the ignition is switched off. If the system is unable to comply with an apply or
release request, due to a system fault, the indicator flashes.
When the ignition is on and the indicator is not flashing, operation is controlled by a high speed CAN bus signal.
When the ignition is off or when the indicator is flashing, operation is controlled by a hardwired signal from the
parking brake module to the instrument cluster.
Text Messages
On vehicles with the high line instrument cluster, when there is a fault condition, illumination of the warning
indicators is accompanied by a text message displayed in the message center.
PARKING BRAKE MODULE
The parking brake module monitors external and internal inputs and adjusts the tension of the brake cables to
operate the drum brakes and provide the required parking brake function.
The parking brake module is installed on a support bracket attached to the front of the spare wheel carrier. Two
rubber mounts, installed on lugs on the underside of the parking brake module, locate in holes in the support
bracket. The top corners of the parking brake module are secured to the support bracket with rubber mounts and
flanged nuts.
The main components of the parking brake module are:
A PCB (printed circuit board) incorporating the ASIC (application specific integrated circuit) for control of the
parking brake.
An electric motor.
A gearbox.
A spline shaft.
A force sensor.
The spline shaft and the force sensor are connected together by a latch on the end of the spline shaft. The spline
shaft rotates on the latch and moves axially in the gearbox. The latch and the force sensor slide in a channel in the
body of the parking brake module.
To apply or release the drum brakes, the parking brake module runs the electric motor, which drives the gearbox.
The gearbox turns the spline shaft to increase or decrease the tension in the brake cables. The parking brake module
monitors the load exerted by the brake cables using the input from the force sensor.
Interior of Parking Brake Module

2 - Housing
3 - Electric motor
4 - PCB (Printed Circuit Board)
5 - Spline shaft
6 - Gearbox
7 - Force sensor
Inputs and Outputs
A 32 pin electrical connector on the RH side of the parking brake module provides the interface between the PCB and
the vehicle wiring.
The parking brake module is powered by two permanent battery power feeds from the EJB (engine junction box).
Two connections with the CJB (central junction box) provide battery voltage signals in Power mode 0 and Power
mode 6. Other hardwired inputs consist of those from the parking brake switch and, on manual transmission models,
the clutch pedal position sensor.
In addition to the hardwired connections, the parking brake module is connected to the medium speed CAN bus to
enable communication with other vehicle systems.
Parking Brake Module Harness Connector C2178

Parking Brake Module Harness Connector C2178 Pin Details
Pin No. Description Input/Output
A1 Not used -
A2 Medium speed CAN bus low out Input/Output
A3 Medium speed CAN bus high in Input/Output
A4 Medium speed CAN bus low in Input/Output
B1 Not used -
B2 Medium speed CAN bus high out Input/Output
B3 Parking brake switch SW1 Input
B4 Parking brake switch SW4 Input
C1 and C2 Not used -
C3 Parking brake switch SW2 Input
C4 Parking brake switch SW5 Output
D1 to E1 Not used -
E2 Clutch pedal position sensor ground Input
E3 Clutch pedal position sensor signal Input
E4 Clutch pedal position sensor power supply Output
F1 Not used -
F2 Not used -
F3 Ignition power supply Input
F4 Red parking brake indicator Output
G1 Not used -
G2 Ground Output
G3 Not used -
G4 Battery power supply Input
H1 Not used -
H2 Ground Output
H3 Not used -
H4 Battery power supply Input
PARKING BRAKE OPERATION
The parking brake can be applied at any time provided sufficient battery power is available. For the parking brake to
be released, various pre-conditions are required. The parking brake has manual and automatic operating modes, to
cater for different operating circumstances, as detailed in the following table:
Operating Modes
Mode Pre-Conditions Driver Action
Static apply Vehicle speed less than 2.5 km/h (1.6 mph). Pull up parking brake switch.
Static release 1. Vehicle speed less than 2.5 km/h (1.6 mph). Press down parking brake switch.
2. Engine running.
OR
Ignition is ON and brake pedal or clutch pedal
pressed (manual transmission).
OR
Ignition is ON and brake pedal or accelerator pedal
pressed (automatic transmission).
Ignition OFF apply 1. Vehicle speed less than 10 km/h (6.25 mph). Switch the ignition OFF.
2. Ignition is OFF.
3. Selector lever is not in position 'P'. (automatic
transmission).
Igniton OFF apply inhibit 1. Vehicle speed less than 2.5 km/h (1.6 mph). Switch the ignition OFF while
2. Ignition is OFF. pressing down parking brake
3. Selector lever is not in position 'P'. (automatic switch.
transmission).
Dynamic apply Vehicle speed more than 2.5 km/h (1.6 mph). Pull up parking brake switch as
required.
Dynamic release Vehicle speed more than 2.5 km/h (1.6 mph). Release (to neutral position) or
press down parking brake switch.
DAR (drive away release) 1. Ignition is ON. None. Parking brake released
(automatic transmission 2. Transmission in gear 1, 2 or R (with high range automatically on drive away.
only) selected) or 1, 2, 3 or R (with low range selected).
3. Accelerator pedal pressed more than 2%.
4. Seatbelt is fastened.
5. Drivers door is closed.
Operating Voltages
Actuation of the parking brake (apply or release) is only started if the power supply to the parking brake module is
within 9 to 18 volts. At any voltage in this range, the parking brake module is able to tighten the brake cables to the
maximum, to fully apply the parking brake, although at voltages between 9 and 10.5 volts the actuation time may
exceed 1.0 second.
During a parking brake actuation:
If the power supply to the parking brake module decreases to less than 8.3 volts, the parking brake module
continues the actuation, but stores a related fault code. If the ignition is on, the parking brake module also
signals the instrument cluster to illuminate the amber parking brake warning indicator and flash the red
parking brake warning indicator. On vehicles with the high line instrument cluster, a message advising there is
a parking brake fault is shown in the message center. The warning indications are discontinued if the power
supply voltage increases to 8.3 volts or more.
If the power supply voltage decreases to less than 7.5 volts, the parking brake module discontinues the
actuation. Actuation is automatically resumed if the power supply voltage subsequently increases to 7.5 volts
or more and the parking brake switch request is still valid.
If the power supply voltage decreases below 6.5 volts, the parking brake function is disabled for the
remainder of the ignition cycle.
If the power supply voltage increases to more than 18.0 volts, the parking brake module immediately disables
the parking brake function and stores a related fault code. If the ignition is on, the parking brake module also
signals the instrument cluster to illuminate the amber parking brake warning indicator and flash the red
parking brake warning indicator. On vehicles with the high line instrument cluster, a message advising that
the parking brake has a fault and is not functioning is shown in the message center. The parking brake
function remains disabled until the power supply voltage is within 9 to 18 volts again. When the power supply
voltage is within 9 to 18 volts again, the warning indications are cancelled and actuation is automatically
resumed if the parking brake module is in a dynamic mode of operation with a valid parking brake switch
request.
NOTE: The instrument cluster shuts down below 8 volts, so warning indications and messages are not displayed
below 8 volts. CAN transmission stops if battery voltage drops below 7.0 volts and re-starts when voltage goes above
7.5 volts.
Sleep Mode
To reduce quiescent drain on the vehicle battery, the parking brake module incorporates a sleep mode. The parking
brake module enters the sleep mode, provided the ignition is off and there are no signals from the wheel speed
sensors, when one of the following occurs:
20 minutes elapse after the last actuation of the parking brake.

If no actuation occurred, 20 minutes elapse after the ignition is switched off.
The parking brake module wakes up from the sleep mode when on of the following occurs:
An apply or release request is made with the parking brake switch.

The ignition is switched on.
A key out apply is activated.
The parking brake module wakes up within 500 ms. The high speed CAN bus is activated within 200 ms maximum.
When the parking brake module is woken with a release request from the parking brake switch, the parking brake
module ignores the request but illuminates the red brake warning indicator. The parking brake module extinguishes
the red brake warning indicator and goes back to sleep immediately the switch is released to the neutral position.
When the parking brake module is woken with an apply request from the parking brake switch, if the parking brake is
already applied the parking brake module ignores the request but illuminates the red brake warning indicator. The
parking brake module extinguishes the red brake warning indicator and goes back to sleep immediately the switch is
released to the neutral position. If the parking brake is in the released condition when the apply request is made, the
parking brake module illuminates the red brake warning indicator and applies the parking brake. The parking brake
module extinguishes the red brake warning indicator and goes back to sleep 3 minutes after the apply activation, or
immediately after the switch is released to the neutral position, whichever occurs last.
Dynamic Apply
In the dynamic apply mode, if the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/h (6.25 mph) when the parking brake switch is
selected to apply, the parking brake module requests the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module to activate the disc
brakes on all four wheels. When the vehicle comes to a standstill, the parking brake module statically applies the
parking brake. Once the static load is achieved, the hydraulic pressure is removed. If the parking brake switch is
released to the neutral position, or pressed down to the release position, during dynamic apply, braking is cancelled.
The ABS module monitors the deceleration rate using the wheel speed sensor signals, and adjusts the hydraulic
pressure to the disc brakes as required to achieve the required rate. All of the anti-lock control - traction control
system brake functions remain enabled in the dynamic apply mode.
The parking brake module incorporates two fallback functions for the dynamic apply mode.
Fallback 1 is invoked if vehicle speed is between 2.5 km/h (1.25 mph) and V max when the parking brake
switch is selected to apply and the ABS module is unable to fulfill a hydraulic request. When fallback 1 is
invoked, the parking brake module decelerates the vehicle, using only the parking brake. The parking brake
module monitors the deceleration rate using the wheel speed information from the ABS module, and adjusts
the tension of the brake cables to achieve the required rate. During deceleration the parking brake module
also uses the wheel speed inputs from the ABS module to operate an anti-lock function for the rear wheels.
When vehicle speed decreases to 2.5 km/h (1.25 mph) the parking brake module switches to the static apply
mode.
Fallback 2 is invoked if there is a loss of communication between the parking brake module and the ABS
module or the CAN bus has failed. When fallback 2 is invoked, the parking brake module decelerates the
vehicle using only the parking brake. The parking brake module tightens the brake cables under the control of
the driver, no anti-lock function is available.
While dynamic apply is active, including fallback 1 and fallback 2, the parking brake module also outputs high speed
CAN bus signals to:
The ABS module, to apply the stoplamps.

The instrument cluster, to sound an intermittent warning buzzer, at 0.5 second on, 1.0 second off.
The instrument cluster, to illuminate the red parking brake warning indicator. The indicator is permanently
illuminated except in fallback 2, when it flashes.
DAR Pre-arming
The DAR pre-arming function operates when the transfer box is in high range to reduce the parking brake release
time during DAR and to provide a smooth take-off. DAR pre-arming is invoked when:
The ignition is ON.

The transmission is in gear 1, 2 or R.
The vehicle is stationary.
No failsafe tighten actuation has occurred.
Automatic Load Adjustment
While the ignition is on, the parking brake module constantly monitors the input from the force sensor. If the tension
of the brake cables goes outside the limits for a given operating mode, the parking brake module automatically
restores the tension within limits.
Failsafe Tighten. If, during pre-arming, the vehicle moves, then the maximum cable force is reinstated for the
remainder of that ignition cycle.
Automatic Apply. While the parking brake is applied, if the tension of the brake cables decreases by a prescribed
amount from the initial setting, the parking brake module automatically restores the tension to the initial setting.
Automatic Release. While the parking brake is released, if the tension of the brake cables increase to a prescribed
amount, the parking brake module automatically reduces the tension to zero.
Parking Brake Switch Monitoring
The parking brake module monitors for the following types of fault in the parking brake switch system. If a fault is
detected, the parking brake module stores a related fault code:
Short circuits between a pull-down transistor in the parking brake module and battery voltage.
Broken wires and microswitches.
Plausibility.
The parking brake switch has a degree of in-built redundancy. If a single microswitch fault is detected the parking
brake module can still determine the operating state of the parking brake switch. Short circuits or multiple failures
cause the parking brake module to disable the parking brake switch for the remainder of the ignition cycle. The
parking brake module also disables the parking brake switch if a plausibility fault occurs. However, since plausibility
faults are usually caused by incomplete operation of the parking brake switch, the parking brake switch is re-enabled
if the parking brake module subsequently establishes a plausible operating state.
If a single microswitch fault is detected, the parking brake module signals the instrument cluster to illuminate the
amber parking brake warning indicator. On vehicles with the high line instrument cluster, the parking brake module
also signals the instrument cluster to display a message advising there is a parking brake fault. During an apply
actuation, the parking brake module also signals the instrument cluster to flash the red parking brake warning
indicator.
For all other fault types, the parking brake module signals the instrument cluster to illuminate the amber parking
brake warning indicator, and, on vehicles with the high line instrument cluster, to display a message advising the
parking brake has a fault and is not functioning. If it makes an apply actuation, the parking brake module signals the
instrument cluster to flash the red parking brake warning indicator for the remainder of the ignition cycle.
On the next ignition cycle, the warning indicators and the messages are only activated if the fault is still present,
although the fault code is retained by the parking brake module until cleared by T4.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired connection; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus
1 - Battery
2 - Parking brake switch
5 - Medium speed CAN bus connection to other systems
6 - High speed CAN bus connection to other systems
8 - Engine Junction Box (EJB)
Overview
The armoured vehicle has an electrically operated parking brake.
The parking brake is operated by the parking brake module, which adjusts the tension of the brake cables to
apply and release the drum brakes. Operation of the parking brake module is initiated by the parking brake
switch.
The parking brake system fitted to armoured vehicles is the same as that fitted to the standard vehicle.
For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake (206-05, Description and Operation).
For a detailed description of the Parking Brake System and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (206-05)
Parking Brake (Description and Operation),

Parking Brake (Description and Operation).
CAUTIONS:
guarantee confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or the
donor vehicle.
Please note this is a sealed unit and no attempt must be made to open the actuator as it will invalidate any
warranty claim.

Visual Inspection
Electric park brake cable(s) condition and installation Electric park brake warning indicators
Electric park brake shoes condition and fitment Fuses
Electric park brake drums (integrated into rear brake discs) Wiring harness / electrical connectors
Electric park brake actuator module condition and - Check for bent/corroded pins
installation Controller Area Network (CAN)
circuits
Electric park brake switch
Electric park brake actuator
Symptom Chart

Electric park brake will not Electric park brake Check the electric park brake cables for
engage or release cables fouled, trapped fouling, trapping or damage
Low electric park brake or damaged Check the electric park brake cables for
efficiency / electric park Electric park brake correct routing
brake sticking/binding cables incorrectly Check that the electric park brake cable end
routed or fixed fitting connector(s) are correctly installed to
Electric park brake the operating lever(s)
shoes, linings Inspect the electric park brake shoes and
worn/contaminated drums for condition/wear/contamination
Electric park brake Check the electric park brake shoes for
drums (integrated into correct adjustment
rear brake discs) Check the operation of the electric park
Electric park brake brake actuator, check for damage and/or
shoes incorrectly excessive noise during operation
adjusted following Check for electric park brake control
replacement module DTCs
Electric park brake
actuator malfunction
DTC Index
For a complete list of all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to
Section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Electric Park Brake Control Module (EPBCM) (100-00,
Brake Bedding Mode
Bedding mode is a special mode available in the Electric Park Brake Control Module (EPBCM) that disables the
stability assist system and allows the parking brake to provide the braking force rather than the conventional
braking system whilst the vehicle is moving at a velocity of >3kph. This mode is entered via a series of brake
pedal presses and switch applications, full details on this procedure is available in the relevant section of the
workshop manual. If brake bedding mode is entered accidentally by the driver the RED warning lamp will flash in
the instrument cluster, the electric park brake control module will return to normal operational mode when the
ignition has been cycled. This DTC (C1104-68) is intended to highlight the fact that although the RED lamp was
illuminated there was no fault present in the control module.
Drive Cycles
Drive Cycle 1 Description
Ignition On
Make sure that no electric park brake activation (diagnostic command or switch input) is attempted for a
minimum of 3 seconds
Retest for functionality
Ignition On
Drive vehicle at a constant speed of 20kph (13mph) or slightly above in 2nd gear
At a constant speed of 20kph (13mph) or slightly above, apply the electric park brake via the electric
park brake switch
Press the brake pedal
Ignition On
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the electric park brake is released
Operate the electric park brake switch to the apply position and hold in this position until the electric park
brake motor has stopped (this may take up to 5 seconds)
Release the electric park brake switch to the idle position, leave in the idle position for 2 seconds
Operate the electric park brake switch to the release position (while pressing the brake pedal) and hold in
this position until the parking brake motor has stopped (this may take up to 5 seconds)
Release the electric park brake switch to the idle position
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Shoe and Lining
Adjustment
General Procedures
Check
NOTE: This procedure must be carried out if the vehicle has been mud wading (not water) for more than 50
miles or if the park brake is adjusted as part of a vehicle service.
1. Check the park brake for correct operation.
2. CAUTIONS:
When the vehicle is in the mounting position a red flashing

light may appear on the instrument cluster. This indicates that
the park brake actuator is in the mounting position. It does not
indicate a vehicle fault.
The warning lamp on the instrument cluster will flash

whilst the park brake is being driven into the mounting position.
Using Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment, drive the park

brake to the mounting position.
3. Place the vehicles transmission into NEUTRAL.

6. NOTES:
LH shown.
Align the access hole in the position shown.
Locate the park brake lever cable attachment point.

Remove the access plug.
Rotate the brake disc.
7. NOTES:
RH shown.
Align the access hole in the position shown.
Locate the park brake lever cable attachment point.

Remove the access plug.
8. CAUTIONS:
The park brake shoe lever should be visible as

shown.
There should be clearance between the park

brake shoe lever and the park brake cable cap as
shown.
NOTES:
LH shown.
The step must be carried out on both sides.
Observe the position of the park brake shoe lever

and the park brake cable cap.
If the park brake shoe lever and park brake
cable cap are not as shown, proceed to the
next step.
If the park brake shoe lever and park brake
cable cap are as shown, proceed to step 11.
9. NOTES:
LH shown.
Using a suitable tool, check that the park brake

shoe lever will move easily in the direction shown
and returns to its original position.
If the park brake shoe lever moves easily,
proceed to the next step.
If the park brake shoe lever does not move
easily, rectify any concerns before
proceeding.
10. NOTES:
LH shown.
Using a suitable tool, check that the park brake

cable moves easily as shown.
If the park brake cable does not move
easily, rectify any concerns before
proceeding.
Adjust
NOTE: This procedure must be carried out if new park brake shoes are installed, new rear brake discs are
installed, or if the vehicle has been mud wading (not water) for more than 50 miles or if the park brake is adjusted
as part of a vehicle service.
1. NOTE: Align the access hole with the

indicators located on the back plate.
Locate the park brake shoe adjuster.

2. CAUTION: Failure to follow this step may cause damage to

the park brake system. Failure to displace the park brake shoes,
as shown, will result in incorrect clearance when carrying out
the adjustment step.
NOTES:
The movement of the park brake shoe will be small and

may not be felt when levering.
LH shown.
Using a flat blade screwdriver, lever the brake shoes as
indicated.
3. CAUTION: Failure to follow this step may cause damage to

the park brake system. Failure to displace the park brake shoes,
as shown, will result in incorrect clearance when carrying out
the adjustment step.
NOTES:
The movement of the park brake shoe will be small and

may not be felt when levering.
RH Shown.
Using a flat blade screwdriver, lever the brake shoes as

indicated.
4. CAUTION: Do dot apply excessive force on the
park brake shoe adjuster. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the park brake
system.
Using a flat bladed screwdriver rotate the brake

shoe adjuster to extend it until the brake disc is
locked hand tight.
5. CAUTION: The following steps sets the

running clearance for the park brake shoes, failure
to adhere to the paint marking process may cause
damage to the park brake system when the
adjustment steps are carried out.
Using suitable marker, mark the position of the

park brake shoe adjuster.
6. CAUTION: The park brake adjuster must be rotated back
EXACTLY one full revolution (10 clicks). Failure to follow
this instruction may result in damage to the park brake system.
Rotate the adjuster back one revolution (10 clicks)until paint

mark is visible.
7. CAUTION: The wedge adjuster must be

correctly seated to make sure the park brake cable
is correctly adjusted. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the park brake
system.
Loosen the wedge adjuster Allen screw half a turn.

Tap the brake disc lightly with a soft faced
mallet, around the park brake shoe location
within the brake disc.
Tighten the wedge adjuster Allen screw to 6
Nm (5 lb.ft).
9. Take the vehicle out of the mounting position by operating the

park brake twice.
10. CAUTION: The next step should only be carried out
when new park brake shoes or brake disc have been
installed.
Carry out the park brake shoe bedding-in procedure.

For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake Shoes
Bedding-In (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, General
Procedures).
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Shoes Bedding-In
General Procedures
NOTE: This procedure must be carried out if, new parking brake shoes are fitted, new rear brake discs are
fitted or if the vehicle has been mud wading (not water) for more than 50 miles.
1. Carry out the parking brake shoe bedding-in procedure.
2. NOTE: The electronic parking brake 'Service Bedding-

in Procedure mode' will be active for the remainder of the
igntion cycle, or until the vehicle speed exceeds 31 mph (50
kph). If the procedure needs to be re-entered, the entry
actions must be repeated.
To enter 'Service Bedding-in Procedure' mode.

Start and run the engine.
Apply the footbrake 3 times within 10 seconds and
hold applied after the 3rd application.
Apply the electronic parking brake switch 4 times,
followed by 3 release applications within 10 seconds.
3. Once the Service Bedding-in procedure mode has been

entered, the electronic parking brake linings can be bedded-
in by conducting 10 repeated stops from 30 - 35 kph (19 -
22 mph), followed by a 500 metre (547 yard) interval
between each stop to allow the brakes to cool, using the
electronic parking brake control switch.
The electronic parking brake brake force will be
increased up to the dynamic maximum so long as
the switch is held in the applied position.
If the switch is released to either the NEUTRAL or
OFF positions, the electronic parking brake will be
released.
The electronic parking brake MUST be allowed to
cool between applications, either by driving at 19
mph (30 kph) for 500 metres (547 yards) or
remaining stationary for 1 minute between each
application.
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable LH
Removal
CAUTION: To avoid accidental operation of the parking brake, and possible damage to the parking brake
actuator, remove Fusible link 8, located in the engine compartment fuse box before commencing work.
NOTE: If the parking brake system has completed less than 50,000 cycles it is permissible to replace the
parking brake cables. If over 50,000 cycles have been completed, then the cables can only replaced as part of
the parking brake actuator and cable assembly. The parking brake cycle count can be checked using using the
Land Rover approved diagnostic system, (ON/OFF = 1 cycle). If a cable breaks or becomes detached whilst the
vehicle is being driven, a 'parking brake actuator unjaming procedure' may be required using the Land Rover
approved diagnostic system.

2. Isolate the parking brake electrical circuit.

Remove fuse number 8 from the BJB.

safety stands.
4. Remove both rear wheels and tires.
5. Release the parking brake shoe adjustment.

Loosen the screw.

Reposition the LH rear brake caliper.

Remove the 2 bolts.
brake caliper.
7. Remove the LH rear brake disc.
Remove the screw.
8. Disconnect parking brake cable from the wheel

hub.
Fully loosen the nut.
Disconnect the inner cable from the
brake shoe.
9. Release the LH parking brake cable.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Release the cable from the clip on the
chassis.
11. Remove the LH parking brake cable.

Release the retaining nut.
Release and remove the cable.
Installation
1. Install the LH parking brake cable.
LH cable: Screw the cable in 5 complete turns.
Tighten the retaining nut.
2. Locate and secure the LH parking brake cable.

Secure the wiring harness.
Secure the cable grommet to the integrated body
frame bracket.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the brake cable

circlip is positioned as shown.
Connect the parking brake cable to the wheel

hub.
Connect the cable to the brake shoe
lever.
Locate the cable to the backplate.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the component is clean, free
of foreign material and lubricant.
Install the LH rear brake disc.

5. Secure the LH rear brake caliper.

6. NOTE: The adjustment procedure must be carried out

in full.
Adjust the parking brake shoes.

Lining Adjustment (206-05, General Procedures).
7. Install the rear wheels and tires.

8. Install fuse number 8 into the BJB.

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable RH
Removal
CAUTION: To avoid accidental operation of the parking brake, and possible damage to the parking brake
actuator, remove Fusible link 8, located in the engine compartment fuse box before commencing work.
NOTE: If the parking brake system has completed less than 50,000 cycles it is permissible to replace the
parking brake cables. If over 50,000 cycles have been completed, then the cables can only replaced as part of
the parking brake actuator and cable assembly. The parking brake cycle count can be checked using using the
Land Rover approved diagnostic system, (ON/OFF = 1 cycle). If a cable breaks or becomes detached whilst the
vehicle is being driven, a 'parking brake actuator unjaming procedure' may be required using the Land Rover



safety stands.

Loosen the screw.

Reposition the RH rear brake caliper.

Remove the 2 bolts.
brake caliper.
7. Remove the RH rear brake disc.
Remove the screw.
8. Disconnect parking brake cable from the wheel

hub.
brake shoe.
9. CAUTION: The fuel tank breather line

bracket can be easily damaged when releasing
it from the chassis.
Release the fuel tank breather line bracket.

Remove the plastic insert.
10. Release the RH parking brake cable.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Release the parking brake cable from
the 2 pipe clips.
chassis.
12. CAUTION: Make sure that no dirt or

moisture enters the actuator during cable
replacement.
Remove the RH parking brake cable.

Release the retaining nut.
Release the cable retaining clip.
Release and remove the cable.
Installation
1. Install the RH parking brake cable.
Install the cable.
Install the cable retaining clip.
Tighten the retaining nut.
2. Secure the fuel tank breather line bracket.

Install the plastic insert.
3. Locate and secure the RH parking brake cable.

Secure the parking brake cable to the 2 pipe clips.
frame bracket.

Connect the parking brake cable to the wheel

hub.
lever.

Install the RH rear brake disc.

6. Secure the RH rear brake caliper.

7. NOTE: The adjustment procedure must be carried out

in full.
Adjust the parking brake shoes.

8. Install the rear wheels and tires.


Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Switch
Removal
1. Refer to: Floor Console Upper Section (501-12, Removal

and Installation).
2.
3.
4.
5.
Installation

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Actuator
Removal


safety stands.

Remove the plug from the access hole
in the brake disc.
Using a suitable tool, rotate the brake
shoe adjuster to release the adjustment.

Reposition the RH rear brake caliper.

Remove the 2 bolts.
brake caliper.
7. Remove the RH rear brake disc.

Remove the screw.
Reposition the LH rear brake caliper.

Remove the 2 bolts.
brake caliper.
9. Remove the LH rear brake disc.

Remove the screw.
10. Disconnect both parking brake cables from the

wheel hubs.
brake shoe.
Remove the 2 bolts.
chassis.
13. CAUTION: The fuel tank breather line

bracket can be easily damaged when releasing
it from the chassis.
Release the fuel tank breather line bracket.

Remove the plastic insert.
14. Raise the RH side of the rear stabilizer bar.
Loosen the 2 bolts.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Release the parking brake cable from
the 2 pipe clips.
chassis.

18. CAUTION: Inspect the parking brake
emergency release cable to body seal and
replace if damaged.
NOTE: Note the fitted position of the

parking brake emergency release cable to body
seal.
Release the parking brake emergency release

cable.

contamination.
RH side rear: Disconnect the brake line.

Position an absorbent cloth to collect
fluid spillage.
Disconnect the line union.
Remove the clip.
20. NOTE: Note the routing of the parking

brake emergency release cable.
Displace the parking brake actuator and cable

assembly.
Remove the 2 nuts.
21. NOTE: Brake cable shown removed for

clarity.
Remove the parking brake actuator and cable

assembly.
Withdraw from the RH rear wheel arch
aperture.
Installation
1. NOTE: Note the routing of the parking brake

emergency release cable.
Install the parking brake actuator and cable assembly.

Install the 2 nuts.
2. NOTE: Remove and discard the blanking caps.
RH side rear: Connect the brake line.

Secure the clip.
Tighten the brake line union to 16 Nm (12 lb.ft).
3. CAUTION: Make sure the parking brake emergency

release cable to body seal is installed correctly.
Locate and secure the parking brake emergency release

cable.

5. Secure the fuel tank breather line bracket.

Install the plastic insert.
6. Locate and secure the RH parking brake cable.

Secure the parking brake cable to the 2 pipe clips.
frame bracket.
7. Locate and secure the LH parking brake cable.

frame bracket.

Connect the parking brake cables to the wheel

hubs.
lever.

Install the LH rear brake disc.

10. Secure the LH rear brake caliper.


Install the RH rear brake disc.

12. Secure the RH rear brake caliper.

13. Adjust the parking brake shoes.

14. Bleed the brake system.

(206-00, General Procedures).

17. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, calibrate

the parking brake actuator on an even surface.
18. Apply and release hand brake to confirm operation.

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Shoes
Removal
NOTE: If the parking brake shoes or the brake discs have been removed for access to other components then
DO NOT carry out the bedding in procedure.



5. Release the brake caliper.

Remove the brake caliper anchor bolts.
6. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang on the

brake hose.
Tie the brake caliper aside.
7. Release the park brake shoe adjustment.

Remove the plug from the access hole in the
brake disc.
Using a suitable tool, rotate the brake shoe
adjuster to release the adjustment.
9. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the green bias spring is installed to the

right hand parking brake shoes and the red bias spring is
installed to the left hand parking brake shoes.
Make sure the brake shoe spring is not over stretched.
NOTE: If equipped.
Remove the bias spring(s).

10. Remove the adjuster and return spring.
Release the parking brake shoe adjuster to
the minimum adjustment.
11. Remove the primary brake shoe.

Remove the hold-down spring and retaining
pin.
Pivot the shoe to release it from the
spreader plate and return spring.
12. Remove the spreader plate and spring.
13. Remove the return spring.
14. Remove the secondary brake shoe.

Remove the hold-down spring and retaining
pin.
Disconnect the parking brake cable retaining
spring from the brake shoe lever.
Release the parking brake cable.
Installation

inhaled.
Clean the backing plate and apply grease to the brake shoe
contacts.
2. Clean the adjuster and set it to its minimum extension.
3. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the brake shoe spring is not over

stretched.
Make sure the closed end of the retaining clip

is installed facing the brake shoe adjuster. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.
Illustration 'A' is the LH side and 'B' is the RH

side.
Install the secondary brake shoe.

Connect the parking brake cable.
Connect the parking brake cable retaining
spring to the brake shoe lever, making sure
the spring is not twisted.
Install the hold-down spring and retaining
pin.
4. Install the spreader plate and the spring.
Using a tie strap, tie back the spreader plate spring.
5. WARNING: Make sure the return spring and

the adjuster spring are correctly installed to the
primary shoe.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the brake shoe spring is not over

stretched.
Make sure the closed end of the retaining clip

is installed facing the brake shoe adjuster. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.
Illustration 'A' is the LH side and 'B' is the RH

side.
Install the primary brake shoe.

Install the return spring.
Connect the primary brake shoe to the
return spring.
Locate the primary brake shoe to the
spreader plate.
Install the hold-down spring and retaining
pin.
6. CAUTION: Make sure the brake shoe spring is not over

stretched.
Install the brake shoe adjuster and the retaining spring.
7. Remove and discard the spreader plate spring tie strap.

8. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the green bias spring is installed to the

right hand parking brake shoes and the red bias spring is
installed to the left hand parking brake shoes.
Make sure the brake shoe spring is not over stretched.
NOTE: If equipped.
Install the bias spring(s).
9. Make sure the brake disc and hub mating surfaces are clean.

11. Install the brake caliper.

13. Adjust the parking brake.

Lining Adjustment (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, General
Procedures).


Hydraulic Brake Actuation -
Item Specification
Master cylinder bore diameter:
Primary 27 mm (1.1 in)
Secondary 20.6 mm (0.8 in)
Stroke 36 mm (1.4 in)
Brake pedal nut and bolt - Automatic gearbox 45 33
Brake pedal bracket Torx bolts - Automatic gearbox 10 7
Brake booster to brake pedal bracket nuts - Automatic gearbox 25 18
Brake master cylinder nuts 26 19
Brake pipe unions 18 13
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Hydraulic Brake Actuation
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
NOTE: RHD shown, LHD similar

1 - Brake pedal (automatic shown)
2 - Brake warning indicator (NAS)
3 - Brake warning indicator (all except NAS)
4 - Brake pipes and hoses
5 - Brake master cylinder and reservoir
GENERAL
Hydraulic brake actuation consists of the brake pedal, the brake master cylinder and the hydraulic pipes and hoses.
BRAKE PEDAL
NOTE: Automatic gearbox model shown, manual gearbox model similar

1 - In-vehicle cross beam
2 - Brake pedal buffer
3 - Stoplamp switch
4 - Brake pedal
5 - Clevis pin and clip
6 - Brake pedal bracket
The brake pedal is mounted in a bracket attached to the rear side of the engine bulkhead. On Left Hand Drive (LHD)
manual gearbox models, the brake pedal shares a bracket and pivot bolt with the clutch pedal. On Right Hand Drive
(RHD) manual gearbox models, the brake pedal has a separate bracket. A clevis pin and clip connect the brake pedal
to the push rod of the brake booster. A brake pedal buffer is installed on the in-vehicle cross beam to restrain
rearward movement of the brake pedal in an accident.
The stoplamp switch is mounted in the brake pedal bracket and operated by the brake pedal.
Control, Description and Operation).
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER AND RESERVOIR
NOTE: RHD version shown, LHD version similar

1 - Reservoir
2 - Clutch outlet spigot and sealing cap
3 - Primary outlet spigot
4 - Reservoir to master cylinder seal, primary inlet
5 - Primary outlet port
6 - Reservoir securing lug
7 - Secondary outlet port
8 - Cylinder housing
9 - Reservoir to master cylinder seal, secondary inlet
10 - Reservoir securing straps
11 - Secondary outlet spigot
12 - Filter
13 - Float
14 - Magnet
15 - Reservoir cap and level switch
The brake master cylinder and reservoir is attached to the front of the brake booster, on the driver side of the engine
compartment.
Master Cylinder
The brake master cylinder consists of a cylinder housing containing two pistons in tandem. The rear piston produces
pressure for the primary circuit and the front piston produces pressure for the secondary circuit. The pistons
incorporate center valves with a high flow rate to ensure there is always sufficient fluid available at the hydraulic
control unit for stability control operations.
When the brake pedal is pressed, the front push rod in the brake booster pushes the primary piston along the bore of
the cylinder housing. This produces pressure in the primary pressure chamber which, in conjunction with the primary
spring, overcomes the secondary spring and simultaneously moves the secondary piston along the bore. The initial
movement of the pistons, away from the piston stops, closes the primary and secondary center valves. Further
movement of the pistons then pressurizes the fluid in the primary and secondary pressure chambers, and thus the
brake circuits. The fluid in the chambers behind the pistons is unaffected by the movement of the pistons and can
flow unrestricted through the feed holes between the chambers and the reservoir.
When the brake pedal is released, the primary and secondary springs push the pistons back down the bore of the
cylinder housing. As the pistons contact the piston stops, the primary and secondary center valves open, which
allows fluid to circulate unrestricted between the two hydraulic circuits and the reservoir, through the center valves,
the chambers behind the pistons and the cylinder housing inlets.
Should a failure occur in one of the brake circuits, the remaining brake circuit will still operate effectively, although
brake pedal travel and vehicle braking distances will increase.
Reservoir
The reservoir is installed on top of the master cylinder to provide a supply of brake fluid for the primary and
secondary circuits of the brake system. On manual gearbox models, the reservoir also provides a supply of brake
fluid for the clutch.
For additional information, refer to: Clutch Controls (308-02 Clutch Controls - 2.7L Diesel, Description and
Operation).
Two straps, integrated onto the sides of the reservoir, engage with lugs on the master cylinder to secure the
reservoir in position. Two outlet spigots on the underside of the reservoir locate in seals installed in the inlet ports of
the master cylinder. An outlet spigot is installed on the left side of the reservoir for the clutch hydraulic circuit, if
required. On automatic gearbox models, the clutch outlet spigot is sealed with a cap, formed during manufacture of
the reservoir, which is only removed if the reservoir is installed on a manual gearbox model.
The reservoir is internally divided to isolate the circuits from each other at low fluid levels, and so prevent a leak in
one circuit from disabling the other circuit(s). The dividing walls support a central well and divide the area around the
well into a further eight separate compartments. The well forms an extension of the filler neck and contains the filter
and the fluid level switch.
The well and the surrounding compartments are interconnected by slots in the dividing walls. The slots are positioned
such that when the reservoir is full, fluid can move between the well and all of the surrounding compartments, but at
low fluid levels the interior forms separate reservoirs for each circuit. The following figure shows the separate
reservoirs for each circuit and the amount retained in each reservoir if there is a leak from one of the other circuits.
Reservoir Interior
NOTE: A = Clutch reservoir; B = Primary circuit reservoir; C = Secondary circuit reservoir

1 - Primary outlet
2 - Clutch outlet
3 - Secondary outlet
The filler neck of the reservoir is sealed with a cap incorporating the level switch. The level switch is operated by a
magnet, which is installed in the float on the bottom of the switch. The switch reacts to the influence of the magnetic
field surrounding the magnet.
When the reservoir is full, the float rests against the bottom of the switch and holds the level switch open. When the
fluid level decreases, the float moves down and the switch closes to connect a ground to the instrument cluster.
When the ground is made, the instrument cluster illuminates the red Light Emitting Diode (LED) in the brake warning
indicator. Vehicles with the high line instrument cluster also display an appropriate warning in the message center.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Description and Operation).
At the beginning of each ignition cycle, the instrument cluster performs a bulb check on the brake warning indicator;
the indicator is illuminated amber for 1.5 seconds, then red for 1.5 seconds.
The instrument cluster broadcasts the status of the brake fluid level, on the high speed Controller Area Network
(CAN) bus, to the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module.
Control, Description and Operation).
BRAKE PIPES AND HOSES
The brake pipes and hoses connect the master cylinder to the wheel brakes via the hydraulic control unit. The pipes
are arranged to provide a front and rear split braking system. The brakes on the front axle are operated by the
primary system; the brakes on the rear axle are operated by the secondary system.
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Fluid Reservoir
Removal
CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean
the area with water.
All vehicles

stands.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Position an absorbent cloth to collect fluid spillage.
4. Disconnect the low brake fluid warning indicator switch

Vehicles with manual transmission

Disconnect the clutch master cylinder supply line.
All vehicles
6. CAUTION: Always plug any open

Remove the brake fluid reservoir.

Remove and discard 2 brake fluid
reservoir seals.
Installation
All vehicles
2. Install the brake fluid reservoir.

Install new brake fluid reservoir seals.

3. Connect the clutch master cylinder supply line.
All vehicles
4. Connect the low brake fluid warning indicator switch
5. Bleed the brake system using T4.

For additional information, refer to: Brake System Bleeding
Procedures).

6. Bleed the clutch system.
For additional information, refer to: Clutch System Bleeding
(308-00 Manual Transmission/Transaxle and Clutch -
General Information, General Procedures).
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Master Cylinder
Removal

stands.
2. Remove the brake fluid reservoir.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Fluid Reservoir
(206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and
Installation).
3. CAUTION: Before the disconnection or removal of any

components, make sure the area around joint faces and
Disconnect the brake master cylinder brake tubes.
4. Remove the brake master cylinder.

Remove the 2 nuts.
Installation
1. Install the brake master cylinder.
2. Connect the brake tubes.

3. Install the brake fluid reservoir.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Fluid Reservoir
(206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and
Installation).
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Pedal
Removal
1. Remove the headlamp switch.
For additional information, refer to: Headlamp Switch (417-
01, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the stoplamp switch.

For additional information, refer to: Stoplamp Switch (417-
3. Remove the instrument panel access panel.

4. Remove the brake pedal bracket.

Release the wiring harness clip.
Remove the 4 Torx bolts.
5. Remove the brake pedal clevis pin.

Remove the clip.
6. Remove the brake pedal.

7. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the
component is removed for access only.
Remove the brake pedal pad.
Installation
1. Install the brake pedal pad.
2. Install the brake pedal.

3. Install the brake pedal clevis pin.

Install the clip.
4. Install the brake pedal bracket.

5. Install the instrument panel access panel.

6. Install the stoplamp switch.

7. Install the headlamp switch.

Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Pedal and Bracket
Removal
1. Remove the headlamp switch.
2. Remove the stoplamp switch.


4. Remove the brake pedal bracket.

Release the wiring harness clip.
5. Remove the brake pedal clevis pin.

Remove the clip.
6. Release the stoplamp wiring harness.

7. Remove the brake pedal assembly.
Remove the 6 nuts.
Position the brake booster forward to
aid the removal of the brake pedal
assembly.
Installation
1. Install the brake pedal assembly.
Position the brake booster to the brake pedal
bracket.
2. Secure the wiring harness.

Secure the clips.
3. Install the brake pedal clevis pin.

Install the clip.
4. Install the brake pedal bracket.

Tighten the Torx bolt to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

6. Install the stoplamp switch.

7. Install the headlamp switch.

Power Brake Actuation -
Sealant
Application Land Rover Part No.
Brake vacuum pump - 2.7 Litre engine 8510302
Item Specification
Brake booster type Twin chamber 228 and 254 mm (9.0 and 10.0 in)
Boost ratio 7:1
Brake vacuum pump make and type:
V6 - 2.7 litre diesel engine Bosch 240cc SWP
V6 - 4.0 litre and V8 - 4.4 litre petrol engine Hella UP28
Brake booster nut 23 17
Brake master cylinder nuts 26 19
M12 brake pipe unions 16 12
M14 brake pipe unions 18 13
Brake pedal buffer bolts 10 7
Brake vacuum pump nuts - 4.0 and 4.4 litre engines 5 4
Brake vacuum pump bolts - 2.7 litre engine 23 17
Brake vacuum pump retaining stud - 2.7 litre engine 13 10
Brake vacuum pump retaining nut - 2.7 litre engine 13 10
High pressure fuel supply line retaining bolt - 2.7 litre engine 10 7
* Exhaust cross-over pipe nuts 2.7 litre engine 22 16
Exhaust cross-over pipe support bracket bolts - 2.7 litre 25 18
Exhaust manifold heatshield bolt - 2.7 litre 10 7
* New nuts must be fitted
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Booster
COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 5.0L NA
NOTE: LHD shown, RHD similar

1 - Vacuum pipe connection to intake manifold
2 - Brake Booster
3 - Vacuum pump
4 - Vacuum pipes
COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 3.0L DIESEL
NOTE: LHD shown, RHD similar

1 - Vacuum pipe connection to brake booster
2 - Brake booster
3 - Oil Scavenger pipe
4 - Vacuum pump
GENERAL
Power assistance for the brakes is provided by a vacuum operated brake booster. The vacuum is supplied by an
engine mounted vacuum pump.
VACUUM PIPES
Plastic vacuum pipes connect the brake booster to the vacuum source. Check valves are incorporated into the
vacuum pipes. On petrol models there are two in-line check valves, to maintain the vacuum in the brake booster
when the throttle is open and the vacuum pump is not running, and prevent fuel vapor entering the brake booster.
On diesel models there is a single check valve integrated into the vacuum pipe connection with the brake booster, to
maintain the vacuum in the brake booster when the vacuum pump is operating at less than the optimum.
BRAKE BOOSTER
The brake booster is installed in the driver side of the engine compartment, on the engine bulkhead.
The brake booster is a dual diaphragm unit with a boost ratio of 8.0 : 1 and 28 bar loop-in in all engine variants. The
input push rod is connected to the brake pedal. The output push rod locates in the primary piston of the brake
master cylinder. A vacuum pipe, installed in a grommet in the front face of the housing, connects the brake booster
to the intake manifold and electric vacuum pump (petrol models) or the engine driven vacuum pump (diesel models).
VACUUM PUMP (5.0L NA)

1 - Air vent
2 - Vacuum pump inlet
3 - Pump drive
On 5.0L (NA) petrol models the vacuum pump supplements the main vacuum supply from the engine manifold.
The vacuum pump is a radial vane pump which is attached to the end of the auxiliary drive camshaft and driven by
crankshaft via the auxiliary drive chain. The vacuum pipe from the brake booster connects to an elbow on the rim of
the vacuum pump.
The vacuum pump is lubricated and cooled by engine oil supplied from the gallery in the block, through the auxiliary
shaft, to the oil pick up tube (see small hole in green shaft in picture above!). The oil return is through twin outlet
ports in the front face of the pump into a drain cavity in the sump. Air extracted from the brake booster is vented
into the drain cavity along with the returning engine oil.
VACUUM PUMP (3.0L DIESEL)

1 - Vacuum connection (turbo control)
2 - Vacuum connection for brake booster
3 - Oil inlet port
4 - Air vent
5 - Drive dog
6 - Oil return/scavenge pipe
The vacuum pump is a combined vacuum and oil scavenge pump. The scavenge pump is g-rotor type pump that
drains oil from the secondary turbocharger to accommodate vehicle tilt. The pump is located at the rear of the RH
side cylinder head and is driven from the exhaust camshaft.
The vacuum pump is a radial vane pump. The vacuum pipe from the brake booster connects to an elbow on the rim
of the vacuum pump.
The vacuum pump is lubricated and cooled by engine oil supplied to a port in the front face of the vacuum pump
from a gallery in the cylinder head. The oil return is through a vent in the front face of the pump into a drain cavity
in the cylinder head. Air extracted from the brake booster is vented into the drain cavity with the returning engine oil.
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Booster
Removal
1. Pump the brake pedal until the brake vacuum assistance is
exhausted.
2. Remove the auxiliary battery cover.

3. If installed, remove the auxiliary battery.
4. Detach the automatic transmission module

bracket and position it to one side.
Remove the 2 bolts.
5. Remove the auxiliary battery compartment side

wall.
Release the four clips.
6. Release the Air Conditioning (A/C) pipes.

Remove the retaining screw.
7. Remove the auxiliary battery tray.
Remove the 3 bolts.
8. Release the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

module.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Release the brake tubes from the clip.
9. Disconnect the low brake fluid warning indicator switch

10. CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint finished

surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean
the area with water.
Position an absorbent cloth to collect fluid spillage.
11. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose

from the brake booster.
12. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that excessive force is not

used. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the vehicle.
Make sure the wings and trim panels are

covered and protected, failure to follow this
vehicle.
Make sure the brake pipes are not

damaged when displacing the brake master
cylinder and ABS module. Failure to follow this
vehicle.
Displace the brake master cylinder and ABS

module as a complete assembly.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Discard the master cylinder seals.
13. Remove the outer plenum base.

Remove the 3 nuts.
14. Remove the driver side closing trim panel.

Release the clip.
15. NOTE: The cover is shown removed for

clarity.
Remove the brake booster push rod clevis pin.
Remove the retaining clip.
16. Remove the brake booster.

Remove the 4 nuts.
Installation
1. Install the brake booster.
2. Install the brake booster push rod clevis pin.

Install the retaining clip.
3. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose.
4. Install the outer plenum base.

Carefully lift the anti-lock brake system modulator
for access.
Install the 3 nuts.
5. CAUTION: Make sure the master cylinder is correctly

aligned.
NOTE: Install new seals and nuts.
Install the the brake master cylinder and ABS module.

6. Secure the anti-lock brake system modulator.

Install the 3 nuts.
Secure the brake tubes to the clip.
7. Connect the low brake fluid warning indicator switch

8. Install the auxiliary battery tray.

9. Install the auxiliary battery compartment side wall.

Secure with the four retaining clips.
10. Secure the A/C pipes.

Install the retaining screw.
11. Secure the automatic transmission module bracket

12. If installed, install the auxiliary battery.
13. NOTE: This step is to check the tightness of the

retaining nuts after the initial tighten to make sure that
torque has not relaxed.
Check the brake booster retaining nuts.


Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.
15. Start engine and check the brake booster operation.

Power Brake Actuation - Brake Vacuum Pump TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Body - Diesel (502-02, Removal and Installation).
2.
3.
4. Torque: 23 Nm
5. Torque: 13 Nm
6. NOTE: Discard the O-ring seal.
Torque: 10 Nm
7. Torque: 23 Nm
8.
Installation
1. NOTES:
Install a new gasket.
Apply silicone gasket sealant or equivalent

meeting Land Rover specification.
The application of sealant must be 10 mm

square in two places. Install the brake vacuum
pump immediately after applying the sealant.
The brake vacuum pump should be fitted

directly to the engine without smearing the
sealant.
Make sure that the drive coupling is

aligned with camshaft coupling.

Power Brake Actuation - Brake Vacuum Pump V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Removal

stands.
2. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02, Removal and

Installation).
3. Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01D, General

Procedures).
4.
5. NOTES:
Discard the seal.
Some variation in the illustrations may

occur, but the essential information is always
correct.
Torque: 12 Nm
Installation
1. NOTE: Install a new seal.

Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control -
Item Specification
System Bosch 8.0 Anti-lock braking system with Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD), Corner Brake Control
make/type (CBC), Electronic Traction Control (ETC), Hill Descent Control (HDC), Anti-roll Mitigation (ARM),
Emergency Brake Assist (EBA), and Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
Wheel
speed
sensors:
Make/type Bosch DF11i
Location Front and rear knuckles with the active directional sensor acting on the driveshaft pole wheel
Yaw rate Bosch DRS MM1.OR
sensor
make/type
Front road wheel speed sensor bolt 9 7
Front brake caliper anchor plate bolts 275 203
Front brake caliper housing bolts 32 24
Front brake hose retaining bracket to wheel knuckle bolt 25 18
Rear road wheel speed sensor to wheel knuckle bolt 9 7
ABS module mounting bracket nuts 8 6
ABS module to mounting bracket nuts 23 17
M10 Brake tube union nuts 15 11
M12 Brake tube union nuts 15 11
M14 Brake tube union nut 17 13
Yaw rate sensor bolts 7 5
Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control - Anti-Lock Control - Traction
Control
COMPONENT LOCATIONS - SHEET 1 OF 2

1 - Hydraulic control unit with attached anti-lock brake system (ABS) module
2 - Stoplamp switch
3 - Steering angle sensor
4 - RH (right-hand) rear wheel speed sensor
5 - LH (left-hand) rear wheel speed sensor
6 - Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor
7 - LH front wheel speed sensor
8 - RH front wheel speed sensor
COMPONENT LOCATIONS - SHEET 2 OF 2
1 - DSC (dynamic stability control) system active warning lamp
2 - ABS warning lamp
3 - EBA (emergency brake assist) warning lamp
4 - DSC (dynamic stability control) system off warning lamp
5 - HDC (hill decent control) warning indicator
6 - DSC (dynamic stability control) system on/off switch
7 - HDC (hill decent control) system on/off switch
8 - Transmission selector.
OVERVIEW
The anti-lock control - traction control system features a modulator, which is an integrated four-channel HCU
(hydraulic control unit) and ABS (anti-lock brake system) module.
The ABS module is connected to the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus, and actively interacts with other
vehicle system control modules and associated sensors to receive and transmit current vehicle operating information.
When required, the ABS module will actively intervene and operate the HCU during braking or vehicle maneuvers to
correct the vehicle attitude, stability, traction or speed. During incidents of vehicle correction, the ABS module may
also request the ECM (engine control module) to control engine power in order to further stabilize and correct the
vehicle.
To provide full system functionality, the anti-lock control - traction control system comprises the following
components:
DSC switch.
HDC switch.
Four wheel speed sensors.
Steering angle sensor.
Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor.
Stoplamp switch.
Instrument cluster warning indicators.
Integrated HCU and ABS module.
The anti-lock control - traction control system provides the following brake functions that are designed to assist the
vehicle or aid the driver:
ABS.
ARM (active roll mitigation).
CBC (corner brake control).
DSC.
EBD (electronic brake force distribution).
Electronic brake prefill.
ETC (electronic traction control).
EBA.
EDC (engine drag-torque control).
EUC (enhanced understeer control).
Gradient acceleration control.
Gradient release control.
HDC.
Hill start assist.
Trailer stability assist.
The HDC function is enabled either manually using the HDC switch, or automatically by the terrain response system,
in the ignition on and engine running power modes. All of the other brake functions are automatically enabled in the
ignition on and engine running power modes. The DSC function can be selected off using the DSC switch.
DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL SWITCH
The DSC switch allows the DSC function to be selected off. Although Land Rover recommend that DSC is selected on
for all normal driving conditions, it may be beneficial to de-select DSC to maximize traction under the following
conditions:
If the vehicle needs to be rocked out of a hollow or a soft surface.

Driving on loose surfaces or with snow chains.
Driving in deep sand, snow or mud.
On tracks with deep longitudinal ruts.
The DSC switch is a non-latching switch installed in the center console switch pack. Pressing the DSC switch connects
an ignition power feed to the ABS module. With the first press of the DSC switch, the ABS module disables the DSC
functions. When the DSC switch is pressed again, the ABS module re-enables the DSC functions. The DSC switch
must be pressed for a minimum of 0.3 s for the ABS module to react. The DSC function is re-enabled at the
beginning of each ignition cycle.
The status of the DSC switch selection is shown by the DSC OFF warning indicator. The DSC OFF warning indicator is
extinguished while DSC is selected on, and continuously illuminated while DSC is selected off.
A DSC switch request to disable DSC is ignored by the ABS module if the air suspension system has failed, or is in
off-road height at speeds above 60 km/h (37.5 mph).
To guard against incorrect operation or a broken switch, if the input from the DSC switch is held high for more than
one minute, a DTC (diagnostic trouble code) is stored in the ABS module.
Even if DSC is deselected, driving maneuvers with extreme yaw or lateral acceleration may trigger DSC activity to
assist vehicle stability.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH

1 - HDC switch
The HDC switch controls the selection of the HDC function.
The HDC switch is a non-latching switch installed on the floor console, forward of the gear selector. Pressing and
releasing the HDC switch momentarily connects an ignition power feed to the ABS module. With the first press and
release of the HDC switch, the ABS module enables operation of the HDC function. When the HDC switch is pressed
and released again, the ABS module disables operation of the HDC function.
To guard against incorrect operation or a broken switch, if the switch is pressed for more than 10 seconds no change
of state occurs. If the input from the HDC switch is held high for more than one minute, a DTC is stored in the ABS
module.
HDC RELAY
The HDC relay is used to illuminate the stoplamps when the brakes are activated during HDC operation and during
dynamic application of the parking brake.
The HDC relay is a non-serviceable, solid state relay on the circuit board of the central junction box (CJB). Operation
of the HDC relay is controlled by the ABS module switching the coil to ground. The ABS module monitors brake
system hydraulic pressure and energizes the HDC relay during active braking. A pressure threshold and time filter
prevent the stoplamps from flickering when HDC is braking.
STOPLAMP SWITCH
The stoplamp switch is mounted in the brake pedal bracket and operated by the brake pedal. The stoplamp switch is
a two pole switch: The Brake Switch (BS) pole supplies a brake pedal status signal to the ABS module; the Brake
Lamp Switch (BLS) pole operates the stoplamps and also supplies a brake pedal status signal to the ABS module and
to the engine control module (ECM).
While the brake pedal is released:
The BS contacts are closed, and connect an ignition power feed from the CJB to the ABS module.
The BLS contacts are open.
When the brake pedal is pressed:
The BS contacts open.

The BLS contacts close, and connect an ignition power feed from the CJB to the three stoplamps, the ABS
module and the ECM.
The ABS module monitors the status inputs from the stoplamp switch and broadcasts the brake pedal status and an
associated quality factor on the high speed controller area network (CAN) bus.
WHEEL SPEED SENSORS

1 - Cable clip
2 - Hub assembly
4 - Screw
An active wheel speed sensor is installed in each wheel hub to provide the ABS module with a rotational speed signal
from each road wheel. The head of each wheel speed sensor is positioned close to a toothed sensor ring on the outer
diameter of the constant velocity joint of the drive halfshaft. A flying lead connects each sensor to the vehicle wiring.
The wheel speed sensors each have a power supply connection and a signal connection with the ABS module. When
the ignition switch is on, the ABS module supplies power to the wheel speed sensors and monitors the return signals.
Any rotation of the drive halfshafts induces current fluctuations in the return signals which are converted into
individual wheel speeds and the overall vehicle speed by the ABS module.
The ABS module outputs the individual wheel speeds and the vehicle speed on the high speed CAN bus for use by
other systems. The quality of the vehicle speed signal is also broadcast on the high speed CAN bus. If all wheel
speed signals are available to calculate vehicle speed from, the quality of the vehicle speed signal is set to 'data
calculated within specified accuracy'. If one or more wheel speed sensors is faulty, the quality of the vehicle speed
signal is set to 'accuracy outside specification'.
The ABS module monitors the wheel speed sensor circuits for faults. If a fault is detected the ABS module stores a
DTC and illuminates the appropriate warning indicators, depending on the system functions affected (DSC/ETC, ABS,
EBA/EBD, HDC). A warning chime sounds and a related message is shown in the message center.
Since the wheel speed sensors are active devices, a return signal is available when the road wheels are not turning,
which enables the ABS module to check the sensors while the vehicle is stationary. In addition, the direction of travel
of each wheel can be sensed. This information is broadcast on the high speed CAN bus for use by other systems.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

1 - Gear wheel
The steering angle sensor measures the steering wheel angle, and the rate of steering wheel angle speed. The
measurements are output on the high speed CAN bus together with a quality factor signal, and are used by the ABS
module and the rear differential control module for ARM, CBC and DSC operation.
The steering angle sensor is fixed to the pivot bracket of the steering column by three screws. A gear wheel in the
steering angle sensor engages with a plastic drive collar fixed onto the lower shaft of the column. Inside the steering
angle sensor, the gear wheel meshes with a gear train containing magnets. A multipin electrical connector provides
the interface between the vehicle wiring and integrated circuits in the steering angle sensor.
The steering angle sensor operates with the MR (magneto resistive) effect to evaluate the direction of magnetic
fields, and measure the angular position of the lower shaft to provide the steering wheel angle. When the steering
wheel turns, the steering column lower shaft rotates the gear wheel within the steering angle sensor. The gear wheel
drives the gear train and rotates the magnets located on the gears. The direction of the magnetic field is constantly
monitored by the steering angle sensor and is converted into a steering wheel angle, and steering wheel angle speed.
The steering angle sensor performs a plausibility check of the steering wheel angle each time the following conditions
co-exist:
The vehicle is traveling in a straight line.

The vehicle speed is between 20 and 25 km/h (12.5 and 15.6 mph).
The transfer box is in high range.
The brake pedal is not pressed.
There is no ABS, DSC or ETC activity.
The steering angle sensor uses inputs of wheel speed, yaw rate and lateral acceleration to determine when the
vehicle is traveling in a straight line. When all of the conditions co-exist, the steering angle sensor checks the
steering angle is between 0 ± 15°. If the steering angle is outside the limits on two successive checks, the steering
angle sensor changes the quality factor signal to 'outside specification' for the remainder of the ignition cycle and
stores a DTC. At the beginning of each ignition cycle the quality factor signal is reset to 'within specified accuracy'.
The status of the steering angle sensor is able to be determined using Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
If the steering angle sensor is renewed, the new sensor must be calibrated using Land Rover approved diagnostic
equipment. The steering angle sensor must also be re-calibrated any time it is disturbed from the steering column, or
if the upper and lower steering columns are separated.
YAW RATE AND LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR
The yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor is located beneath the floor console and provides information of vehicle
yaw rate and lateral acceleration to the ABS module. The sensor is internally damped to isolate it from body
vibrations and is secured to the transmission tunnel with two bolts.
When the ignition is on, the yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor receives a power feed from the CJB (central
junction box). Yaw rate and lateral acceleration values are transmitted to the ABS module on a private high speed
CAN bus. In addition to using the inputs for brake control functions, the ABS module also broadcasts the yaw rate
and lateral acceleration values on the vehicle high speed CAN bus for use by other systems.
The ABS module monitors the yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor for faults and can be interrogated using Land
Rover approved diagnostic equipment. If a fault is detected, the ABS module stores a related DTC and transmits a
high speed CAN bus signal to the instrument cluster to illuminate the DSC, HDC and brake warning indicators. The
instrument cluster will also sound a warning chime and display a DSC fault message in the message center.
STOPLAMP SWITCH
The stoplamp switch is mounted in the brake pedal bracket and operated by the brake pedal. The stoplamp switch is
a hall effect switch with dual status outputs. Both of the outputs are supplied to the ECM. One of the outputs is also
supplied to the CJB, for operation of the stoplamps. The ECM broadcasts the status of the stoplamp switch on the
high speed CAN for use by other systems.
Power for the stoplamp switch is provided by an ignition feed from the CJB. The power circuit is completed by a
ground connection from the stoplamp switch to a ground on the body.
WARNING INDICATORS
A - ROW instrument cluster
B - NAS instrument Cluster
1 - Brake system warning indicator (amber)
2 - DSC OFF warning indicator (amber)
3 - Brake system warning indicator (red)
4 - DSC warning indicator (amber)
5 - HDC warning indicator (green)
6 - HDC warning indicator (green)
The instrument cluster contains two types of warning indicator to display the operating status of the selected anti-
lock control/traction control functions. The warning indicators provide a visual notification of either a system warning
or system information to the driver.
HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT (HCU)
The HCU is a four-channel unit that modulates the supply of hydraulic pressure to the brakes under control of the
ABS module.
The HCU is installed in the engine compartment. Hydraulic pipes connect the HCU to the master cylinder and the
brake calipers.
For additional information, refer to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06, Description and Operation).
The primary and secondary outlets of the master cylinder are connected to the primary and secondary circuits within
the HCU. The primary circuit in the HCU has separate outlet ports to the front brakes. The secondary circuit in the
HCU has separate outlet ports to the rear brakes. Each of the circuits in the HCU contains the following components
to control the supply of hydraulic pressure to the brakes:
A normally open, solenoid operated, pilot valve, to enable active braking.

A normally closed, solenoid operated, priming valve, to connect the brake fluid reservoir to the return pump
during active braking.
A return pump to generate hydraulic pressure for active braking, and return brake fluid to the reservoir.
Normally open, solenoid operated, inlet valves and normally closed, solenoid operated, outlet valves, to
modulate the hydraulic pressure in the individual brakes.
An accumulator and a relief valve to allow the fast release of pressure from the brakes.
Filters to protect the components from contamination.
The primary circuit also incorporates a pressure sensor to provide the ABS module with a hydraulic pressure signal.
Contact pins on the HCU mate with contacts on the ABS module to provide the electrical connections from the ABS
module to the return pump motor and the pressure sensor. The solenoids that operate the valves are installed in the
ABS module.
A replacement HCU is supplied pre-filled. After installation on the vehicle, the Land Rover approved diagnostic system
must be used to operate the solenoid valves and the return pump to ensure correct bleeding of the HCU and brake
circuits.
Schematic of Hydraulic Control Unit

1 - Master cylinder
2 - Reservoir
3 - Brake booster
4 - Brake pedal
5 - HCU
6 - Pressure sensor
7 - Priming valve
8 - Pilot valve
9 - Return pump motor
10 - Return pump
11 - Inlet valve
12 - Relief valve
13 - Accumulator
14 - Outlet valve
15 - Left front brake
16 - Right front brake
17 - Right rear brake
18 - Left rear brake
The HCU has three operating modes: Normal/EBD, ABS braking and active braking.
Normal Braking/Electronic Brake Force Distribution Mode

Initially, all of the solenoid operated valves are de-energized. Operating the brake pedal produces a corresponding
increase or decrease of pressure in the brakes, through the open pilot valves and inlet valves. If the ABS module
determines that EBD is necessary, it energizes the inlet valves for the brakes of the trailing axle, to isolate the brakes
from any further increase in hydraulic pressure.
ABS Braking Mode
If the ABS module determines that ABS braking is necessary, it energizes the inlet and outlet valves of the related
brake and starts the return pump. The inlet valve closes to isolate the brake from pressurized fluid; the outlet valve
opens to release pressure from the brake into the accumulator and the return pump circuit. The reduced pressure
allows the wheel to accelerate. The ABS module then operates the inlet and outlet valves to modulate the pressure in
the brake to apply the maximum braking effort without locking the wheel. Control of the valves for each wheel takes
place individually.
Active Braking Mode
The active braking mode is used to generate and control hydraulic pressure to the brakes for functions other than
ABS braking, for example: DSC, EBA, ETC, HDC and dynamic application of the parking brake.
For active braking, the ABS module energizes the pilot valves and priming valves, starts the return pump and
energizes all of the inlet valves. Brake fluid, drawn from the reservoir through the master cylinder and priming valve,
is pressurized by the return pump and supplied to the inlet valves. The ABS module then operates the inlet valves
and outlet valves, as required, to modulate the pressure in the individual brakes. Some noise may be generated
during active braking.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM MODULE
The ABS module controls the brake functions using the HCU to modulate hydraulic pressure to the individual wheel
brakes.
The ABS module is attached to the HCU, on the driver side inner fender in the engine compartment. A multipin
connector provides the electrical interface between the ABS module and the vehicle wiring.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; J = Diagnostic ISO 9141 K line; V = Private CAN bus.
1 - Battery
2 - BJB (battery junction box)
3 - CJB
4 - Terrain response rotary control module
5 - HDC switch
6 - Stoplamp switch
7 - Yaw-rate and lateral acceleration sensor
8 - ECM
9 - TCM (transmission control module)
16 - ABS module
17 - DSC switch
18 - EJB (engine junction box)
19 - Diagnostic socket
OPERATION
Anti-lock Brake System
ABS controls the speed of all road wheels to ensure optimum wheel slip when braking at the adhesion limit. This
prevents the wheels from locking in order to retain effective steering control of the vehicle.
On the front axle, the brake pressure is modulated separately for each wheel. On the rear axle, brake pressure is
modulated by select low. Select low applies the same pressure to both rear brakes, with the pressure level being
determined by the wheel on the lower friction surface. This maintains rear stability on split friction surfaces.
Active Roll Mitigation
The ARM function uses the brake system and engine torque control to attempt to restore vehicle stability if the
vehicle is forced into such a harsh manoeuver that it risks tipping over.
The ABS module monitors driver inputs and vehicle behavior using various powertrain signals and inputs from the
wheel speed sensors, steering angle sensor and the yaw-rate and lateral acceleration sensor. These are compared
with modeled behavior and, if vehicle behavior reaches a given risk level, the ABS module initiates a reduction in
engine power, or brakes one or more wheels sufficiently to correct the vehicle stability and assist the driver remain in
control.
While the ignition is on, ARM is permanently enabled, even when DSC is selected off.
Corner Brake Control
CBC influences the brake pressures, below the DSC and ABS thresholds, to counteract the yawing moment produced
when braking in a corner. CBC produces a correction torque by limiting the brake pressure on one side of the vehicle.
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC uses the brakes and engine torque control to help maintain the lateral stability of the vehicle. While the ignition
is on the DSC function is permanently enabled unless selected off by the DSC switch. Even if DSC is deselected,
driving maneuvers with extreme yaw or lateral acceleration may trigger DSC activity to assist vehicle stability.
DSC enhances driving safety in abrupt maneuvers and in understeer or oversteer situations that may occur in a bend.
The ABS module monitors the yaw-rate and lateral acceleration of the vehicle, and the steering input, then selectively
applies individual brakes and signals for engine torque adjustments to reduce understeer or oversteer.
In general: in an understeering situation, the inner wheels are braked to counteract the yaw movement towards the
outer edge of the bend. In an oversteering situation, the outer wheels are braked to prevent the rear end of the
vehicle from pushing towards the outer edge of the bend.
The ABS module monitors the tracking stability of the vehicle using inputs from the wheel speed sensors, the steering
angle sensor and the yaw-rate and lateral acceleration sensor. The tracking stability is compared with stored target
data and, whenever the tracking stability deviates from the target data, the ABS module intervenes by applying the
appropriate brakes. When the DSC function is active, the ABS module also signals the TCM to prevent gear shifts, and
the instrument cluster to flash the DSC warning indicator.
If necessary, the ABS module also signals:
The ECM, to reduce engine torque.

The transfer box control module, to adjust the locking torque of the center differential.
The active on-demand coupling module, to adjust the locking torque of the rear differential.
The DSC function overrides the differential locking torque requests from the terrain response system.
If DSC is selected off, a DSC system off message is displayed in the message center.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution
EBD limits the brake pressure applied to the rear wheels. When the brakes are applied, the weight transfer of the
vehicle reduces the adhesion of the rear wheels on the road surface. This may cause the rear wheels to slip and
make the vehicle unstable.
EBD uses the ABS hardware to automatically optimize the pressure of the rear brakes, below the point where ABS
intervention is normally invoked. Only the rear wheels are under EBD control.
Electronic Brake Prefill
Electronic brake prefill senses any rapid throttle lift off, activating a small brake hydraulic pressure build-up of
approximately 3 to 5 bar (43.5 to 72.5 lbf/in2) in anticipation of the brakes being applied. This gives a quicker brake
pedal response and consequently slightly shorter stopping distances.
When the ABS module detects rapid throttle lift off (from the signals received from the ECM over the high speed CAN
bus), it controls the HCU to apply a low brake pressure to assist in a quicker brake application.
Electronic Traction Control
ETC attempts to optimize forward traction by reducing engine torque or braking a spinning wheel until traction is
restored.
ETC is activated if an individual wheel speed is above that of the vehicle reference speed (positive slip) and the brake
pedal is not pressed. The spinning wheel is braked, allowing the excess torque to be transmitted to the non spinning
wheels through the drive line. If necessary, the ABS module also transmits a high speed CAN bus message to the
ECM requesting a reduction in engine torque.
Torque reduction requests are for either a slow or fast response. A slow response requests a reduction of throttle
angle; a fast response requests an ignition cut-off.
When the DSC function is selected off with the DSC switch, the engine torque reduction feature is disabled.
When the ETC function is active the ABS module also signals the TCM to prevent gear shifts.
Emergency Brake Assist
EBA assists the driver during emergency braking situations by automatically maximizing the braking effort. There are
two situations when the ABS module will invoke EBA:
When the brake pedal is pressed very suddenly.

When the brake pedal is pressed hard enough to bring the front brakes into ABS operation.
When the brake pedal is pressed very suddenly, the ABS module increases the hydraulic pressure to all of the brakes
until the threshold for ABS operation is reached. This applies the maximum braking effort for the available traction.
The ABS module monitors for the sudden application of the brakes using the stoplamp switch status broadcast on the
high speed CAN by the ECM, and from the pressure sensor within the HCU. With the brake pedal pressed, if the rate
of increase of hydraulic pressure exceeds the predetermined limit, the ABS module invokes emergency braking.
When the brake pedal is pressed hard enough to bring the front brakes into ABS operation, the ABS module increases
the hydraulic pressure to the rear brakes up to the ABS threshold.
EBA operation continues until the driver releases the brake pedal enough for the hydraulic pressure in the HCU to fall
below a pre-determined threshold value stored in the ABS module.
Engine Drag-torque Control
EDC prevents wheel slip caused by any of the following:
A sudden decrease in engine torque when the accelerator is suddenly released.

A downshift using the CommandShift™.
When the ABS module detects the onset of wheel slip without the brakes being applied, it transmits a message to the
ECM via the high speed CAN bus to request a momentary increase in engine torque.
Enhanced Understeer Control
Understeer logic control monitors the vehicle for understeer by comparing signals from the yaw rate and lateral
acceleration sensor with signals from the steering angle sensor and wheel speed sensors.
When the ABS module detects the onset of understeer, it signals the ECM via the high speed CAN bus to request a
decrease in engine torque. If required the ABS module will control the HCU to apply brake pressure to the inside rear
wheel to correct the understeer. If the vehicle continues to understeer, enhanced understeer control is activated and
uses multiple brakes (maximum of three brakes) to rapidly reduce the vehicle speed.
Gradient Acceleration Control
Gradient acceleration control is an automatic feature and is always available when HDC is not selected.
When HDC is not selected, gradient acceleration control will intervene to limit downhill acceleration on a steep
descent.
The feature uses generated brake pressure to control acceleration in situations where the driver could lose control of
the vehicle on a steep incline.
Gradient acceleration control keeps the vehicle to a speed and throttle pedal dependant acceleration limit when the
vehicle is moving in the intended direction of travel, for example:
Descending an incline forwards, with D (drive) selected.

Descending an incline backwards, with R (reverse) selected.
When the vehicle is moving against the intended direction of travel, for example: descending a slope, but facing
uphill with D selected, gradient acceleration control will prevent the vehicle accelerating above 5 km/h (3 mph) for up
to 20-30 seconds to aid the driver in re-establishing control of the vehicle.
Gradient Release Control
Gradient release control is an automatic feature which is always available when HDC is selected.
If the vehicle is brought to a standstill on a slope using the foot brake, gradient release control will become active
(except in the terrain response, sand program). Subsequently, when the foot brake is released gradient release
control will automatically delay and graduate the brake release. This allows time for the foot to be moved from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal so that the vehicle can move smoothly away.
When descending a hill, a similar brake hold and gradual release is employed to provide a smooth transition into
HDC. Gradient release control operates in forward and reverse gears and requires no driver intervention.
Hill Descent Control
HDC uses brake intervention to control vehicle speed and acceleration during low speed descents in off-road and low
grip on-road conditions. Generally, equal pressure is applied to all four brakes, but pressure to individual brakes can
be modified by the ABS and DSC functions to retain stability. Selection of the HDC function is controlled by the HDC
switch and the terrain response rotary control located on the floor console. HDC operates in both high and low
ranges, at vehicle speeds up to 50 km/h (31.3 mph).
WARNING: Incorrect use of the HDC function may compromise the stability of the vehicle, resulting in a
dangerous and uncontrolled hill descent. Driving with the transmission in neutral while HDC is active will prevent
engine braking from assisting the vehicle. The brakes will overheat and induce the HDC fade out strategy. In this
condition there will be no control over the vehicle during a descent.
NOTE: With the HDC function selected, HDC is operative even when the transmission is in the neutral. It is not
recommended to drive the vehicle further than is absolutely necessary with HDC selected and the transmission in
neutral.
HDC may be used in D, R and CommandShift 1 in high range, and in D, R and all CommandShift gears in low range.
When in D, the TCM will automatically select the most appropriate gear.
HDC can be selected at speeds up to 80 km/h (50 mph), but will only be enabled at speeds below 50 km/h (31.3
mph). When HDC is selected:
At speeds up to 50 km/h (31.3 mph), the HDC information warning indicator is permanently illuminated if a
valid gear is selected.
At speeds from between 50 to 80 km/h (31 to 50 mph) the HDC information warning indicator flashes and a
message advising that the speed is too high is displayed in the message center. If the HDC switch is pressed
while vehicle speed is more than 80 km/h (50 mph), the HDC information warning indicator will not illuminate
and HDC will not be selected.
If the speed increases to 80 km/h (50 mph), the HDC function is switched off, the information warning
indicator is extinguished, a warning chime sounds and a message advising that HDC has been switched off is
displayed in the message center.
When HDC is enabled, the ABS module calculates a target deceleration value by comparing the set speed to the
actual vehicle speed. The ABS module then operates the HCU in the active braking mode as required to achieve and
maintain the target speed.
During active braking for HDC, the ABS module sends a high speed CAN message to the CJB to operate the
stoplamps.
For additional information, refer to: Exterior Lighting (417-01, Description and Operation).
Applying the foot brake during active braking may result in a pulse through the brake pedal.
The target speed varies between minimum and maximum values for each gear and transmission range, depending on
driver input with the accelerator pedal. If the accelerator pedal is not operated, the ABS module adopts a default
target speed.
Low Range Target Speeds
Speed, km/h (mph)
Target Speed Gears 1, R Gears D, 2 to 6
Default 3.5 (2.19) 6 (3.75)
Minimum 3.5 (2.19) 3.5 (2.19)
Maximum 20 (12.5) 20 (12.5)
High Range Target Speeds
Speed, km/h (mph)
Target Speed Gears 1, R Gears D, 2 to 6
Default 6 (3.75) 10 (6.25)
Minimum 6 (3.75) 6 (3.75)
Maximum 20 (12.5) 20 (12.5)
As well as varying the target speed with the accelerator pedal, the target speed may also be varied by pressing the
speed control '+' and '-' buttons (where fitted). For additional information, refer to:
Speed Control (310-03A, Description and Operation),

Speed Control (310-03B, Description and Operation).
During changes of target speed, the ABS module limits deceleration and acceleration to -0.5 m/s2 (-1.65 ft/s²) and
+0.5 m/s2 (+1.65 ft/s²) respectively.
To provide a safe transition from active braking to brakes off, the ABS module invokes a fade out strategy that
gradually releases the braking effort during active braking. The fade out strategy occurs if any of the following
conditions are detected during active braking:
HDC selected off with the HDC switch.

Failure of a component used by HDC, but not critical to the fade out function.
Accelerator pedal pressed when transmission is in neutral.
Brake overheat.
If fade out is invoked because of deselection or component failure, the HDC function is cancelled by the ABS module.
If fade out is invoked because the accelerator pedal is pressed with the transmission in neutral, or because of brake
overheat, the HDC function remains in standby and resumes operation when the accelerator pedal is released or the
brakes have cooled.
The fade out strategy increases the target speed, at a constant acceleration rate of 0.5 m/s² (1.65 ft/s²), until the
maximum target speed is reached or until no active braking is required for 0.5 s. If the accelerator pedal is
positioned within the range that influences target speed, the acceleration rate is increased to 1.0 m/s² (3.3 ft/s²).
When fade out is invoked because of component failure, a warning chime is sounded, the HDC information warning
indicator is extinguished and a message advising there is a fault is displayed in the message center.
When fade out is invoked because of brake overheat, a message advising that HDC is temporarily unavailable is
displayed. At the end of fade out, the HDC information warning indicator flashes. The message is displayed, while
HDC remains selected, until the brakes have cooled.
To monitor for brake overheat, the ABS module monitors the amount of braking activity and, from this, estimates the
temperature of each brake. If the estimated temperature of any brake exceeds a preset limit, the ABS module
invokes the fade out strategy. After the fade out cycle, the HDC function is re-enabled when the ABS module
estimates that all of the brake temperatures are at less than 64% of the temperature limit.
When HDC is selected off, the instrument cluster message center displays a system off message.
Hill Start Assist
Hill start assist is an automatic feature that operates in a similar manner to gradient release control, but does not
require HDC to be active. The feature is not driver selectable and there is no indication to the driver when in
operation.
On steep slopes, hill start assist will hold a portion of the driver generated brake pressure for a short time to allow
the driver to move their foot from the brake pedal to the throttle pedal without the vehicle rolling back.
The system will release the brake pressure in a controlled manner, either after the timer has expired or if the driver
has generated sufficient drive-torque to move the vehicle forward up the hill.
The timer function is controlled by the ECM and transmitted to the ABS module on the high speed CAN bus.
Trailer Stability Assist
When the trailer electrical socket is connected, trailer stability assist operates automatically to enhance the existing
DSC and terrain response functions of the vehicle when towing. The system detects sway movements caused by
trailer oscillations at speeds in excess of 60 km/h (37 mph) and acts to eliminate them. It does this through braking
and engine management. Braking management counterbalances the sway movement through symmetric and
asymmetric braking, thereby slowing the vehicle and eliminating the oscillations. Engine management adapts engine
torque output to support the braking management in stabilizing the vehicle and trailer.
Typical conditions when sway can occur include:
Changing highway lanes.

Traversing a lengthy bend.
Acceleration.
Braking.
The capability of trailer stability assist to respond early to the beginning of trailer-sway makes the system almost
unnoticeable under normal driving conditions and keeps the vehicle and trailer under safe control. Trailer stability
assist requires no input from the driver and operates up to the maximum vehicle speed.
Trailer stability assist will not operate while DSC is switched off.
Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control - Anti-Lock Control - Traction
Control
For a detailed description of the Anti-Lock Control- Traction Control System and operation, refer to the relevant
Description and Operation section of the workshop manual.
REFER to: Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control (206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control, Description and
Operation).

Visual Inspection
Tire size, condition and installation Fuses
Wheel speed sensor condition and installation Harnesses and connectors
Steering Angle Sensor Module (SASM) condition and installation Warning indicator operation
Yaw rate sensor and accelerometer condition and installation Wheel speed sensors
Hydraulic control unit (with attached anti-lock brake system control Central Junction Box (CJB)
module) condition and installation Hill Descent Control (HDC)
switch
Dynamic Stability Control
(DSC) switch
Brake pedal switch
Yaw rate sensor and
accelerometer
Steering Angle Sensor
Module (SASM)
Anti-lock Brake System
control module (ABS)
Controller Area Network
(CAN) circuits
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC
Index.
DTC Index
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Anti-Lock Brake System Control Module (ABS) (100-00
General Information, Description and Operation).
Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control - Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Module
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure the ignition switch is in position 0.
1. Remove the cover.
3. CAUTIONS:
Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If

spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean the area
with water.

Disconnect the 6 brake tubes.

Position an absorbent cloth to collect fluid spillage.
4. Remove the ABS module from the mounting

bracket.
Loosen, but do not remove, the 2 nuts
securing the ABS module to the bracket.
Installation
1. NOTES:
Make sure the ABS module locating grommet is

correctly seated in the bracket before installing the ABS
module.
Make sure the ABS module locating pin is correcly

located in the grommet, and the 2 front isolators are fully
seated in the bracket slots.
Install the ABS module.
Tighten the 2 ABS module retaining nuts to 8 Nm (6
lb.ft).
Tighten the two M10 and three M12 brake tube
unions to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).
Tighten the M14 brake tube union to 17 Nm (13
lb.ft).
Remove the ABS module from the mounting bracket.
2. Using T4, bleed the braking system.

For additional information, refer to: Brake System Pressure
Bleeding (206-00, General Procedures).
3. Install the cover.
4. If a new ABS module has been installed, interrogate the

ABS system using T4.
Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control - Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Removal

safety stands.


knuckle.
Remove the retaining bolt.

Release the brake caliper anchor plate from the

wheel knuckle and tie the caliper aside.
Remove the two retaining bolts.

knuckle.
Remove the bolt.
6. Remove the wheel speed sensor.

Release the wiring harness from the 5
clips.
Installation
1. Make sure the wheel speed sensor location in the wheel
knuckle is free of dirt.
2. NOTE: Make sure the electrical connector retaining clip

is attached to the body wiring harness.
Install the wheel speed sensor.

Attach the wiring harness to the 5 clips.
3. Secure the brake caliper and anchor plate to the wheel

knuckle.

knuckle.
5. Install the fender splash shield.


necessary.
8. If a new wheel speed sensor has been installed, interrogate

the ABS system using T4.
Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor
Removal

safety stands.
3. Disconnect the anti-lock brake system (ABS)

sensor electrical connector.
Release the wiring harness retaining
clip.

knuckle.
Release the wiring harness.
Remove the retaining bolt.
5. Remove the wheel speed sensor.

Release the wiring harness from the 4
clips.
Installation
1. Make sure the wheel speed sensor location in the wheel
knuckle is free of dirt.

Attach the wiring harness to the 4 clips.
3. Secure the wheel speed sensor to the wheel knuckle.

Attach the wiring harness to the clip.
4. NOTE: Make sure the electrical connector retaining clip

is attached to the body wiring harness.
Connect the ABS sensor electrical connector.

Attach the wiring harness.
5. If a new wheel speed sensor has been installed, interrogate

the ABS system using T4.
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Yaw Rate Sensor
Removal
Battery and Charging System - General Information,
Specifications).
2. Remove the floor console.

For additional information, refer to: Floor Console (501-12,
3. Remove the instrument panel center reinforcement.

For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel Center
Reinforcement (501-12, Removal and Installation).
4.
5.
6. Remove the yaw rate sensor.

Installation
1. Install the yaw rate sensor.
Install the 2 bolts and tighten to 7 Nm
(5 lb.ft).
2.
3.
4. Install the instrument panel center reinforcement.

For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel Center
Reinforcement (501-12, Removal and Installation).
5. Install the floor console.

For additional information, refer to: Floor Console (501-12,

Specifications).
Steering System - General Information - Steering System
For a detailed description of the Steering System and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual.
REFER to: Power Steering (211-02 Power Steering, Description and Operation) /
Steering Linkage (211-03 Steering Linkage, Description and Operation) /
Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Description and Operation).

If a road test is necessary make sure the vehicle is safe to do so.

Visual Inspection
Check the tires for correct pressure, size and tread pattern Steering Angle Sensor Module
Check for wheel rim and tire damage (SASM) and circuits
Check road wheel security Controller Area Networks (CAN)
Check the power steering fluid level and the hydraulic circuit circuits
for oil leaks
Check the power steering pump drive belt condition and
tension
Check the power steering pump for security, wear, damage
and excessive noise
Check the steering gear assembly for damage, wear and
security
Check the hydraulic pipes and cooler lines for damage and
correct routing
Check the steering joints for damage, excessive play, wear
and security
Check the steering column and joints for damage, excessive
play, wear and security
Symptom Chart

Steering Excessive Check for excessive movement or play in the steering system with the
wanders free play in engine running. Check for play at several different steering positions.
the steering Carry out steering geometry and alignment checks. Refer to the relevant
system section of the workshop manual
Steering
geometry
incorrectly
aligned
Steering pulls to Steering Carry out steering geometry and alignment checks using a four wheel
the left or right geometry alignment system.
incorrectly REFER to: Four-Wheel Alignment (204-00 Suspension System - General
aligned Information, General Procedures).
Ensure that the tire direction of rotation is correct for the position on the
vehicle (where directional tires are installed)
Steering feels Steering or Disconnect the steering gear from the suspension. Check for freedom of
notchy when suspension movement in the suspension. Disconnect the steering column from the
turning from lock swivel joints steering gear. Check the steering column and universal joints for freedom
to lock seized of movement. Check the steering gear for freedom of movement. Rectify
Steering feels Steering tie as necessary
tight and does rod end
not self-center joints or
track rod
inner joints
seized
Steering
column or
universal
joints seized
Steering gear
internal
components
misaligned,
worn or
damaged
Power steering Power Check and top-up the power steering fluid level if required, using the
hydraulics noisy steering fluid correct specification of fluid.
operation level low or REFER to: Specifications (211-00 Steering System - General Information,
contaminated Specifications).
Incorrect Check for contaminated fluid. Drain the fluid from the reservoir and
specification visually inspect the filter for obstructions/blockage. Repair/renew as
of power necessary. Check for air ingress into the system. Check the power
steering fluid steering hoses for twisting or restrictions. Rectify as necessary
Filter in the
power
steering
reservoir
blocked
Power
steering fluid
aerated
power
steering
hoses twisted
or restricted
Power steering Power Check and top-up the power steering fluid level if required.
pump noisy steering fluid REFER to: Power Steering System Filling and Bleeding (211-00 Steering
level low or System - General Information, General Procedures).
contaminated Check for contaminated fluid. Drain the fluid from the reservoir and
Filter in the visually inspect the filter for obstructions/blockage. Repair/renew as
power necessary. Check for excessive pump noise. Rectify as necessary
steering
reservoir
blocked
Pump
internal
components
worn or
damaged
Power steering Power Check and top-up the power steering fluid level if required. Refer to the
gear noisy steering fluid relevant section of the workshop manual. Check for contaminated fluid.
level low or Check for excessive steering gear noise. Rectify as necessary
contaminated
Steering gear
internal
components
worn or
damaged
Steering column Steering Check the steering column and universal joints. Rectify as necessary
noisy column
fouling or
universal
joints dry
Power steering Lack of Check the power steering pump pressure. Check the steering column has
feels heavier power no damage and rotates freely
than normal assistance
through its
operating range
Power steering
feels too light at
speed
Power steering
feels too heavy
at standstill and
low speed
DTC Index
00.
Steering System - General Information - Power Steering System Filling
and Bleeding
General Procedures
1. Check the power steering fluid level.
2. CAUTION: Fluid must always be present

in the reservoir during bleeding.
Remove the filler cap and fill to the MAX level

mark.
Install the reservoir filler cap.
3. Start the engine and allow to run for 10 seconds, stop the
engine.
Check the power steering fluid, if aerated, wait until
fluid is free from bubbles then top-up reservoir to
UPPER level mark with recommended fluid.
4. CAUTION: Do not hold steering on full lock for longer

than 10 seconds.
Start the engine and turn steering fully lock to lock, stop
the engine.
Check and top-up power steering fluid level.
5. Start and run the engine for 2 minutes, turn the steering
fully lock to lock.
Check and top-up power steering fluid level.
Steering System - General Information - Power Steering System
Flushing
General Procedures
NOTES:
If heavy steering or contamination within the power steering system is found, it is necessary to carry out
the system flush procedure as detailed below. If any components have been replaced in the power steering
system the procedure below must be carried out in full.
1. Remove the power steering fluid reservoir cap.
2. Using a suitable syringe, remove the power steering fluid

from the power steering fluid reservoir.
3. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping

fluids.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the clip.
Detach the power steering fluid reservoir.

Detach but do not remove the power
steering fluid reservoir.
Release the power steering fluid return
hose from the power steering fluid
reservoir.
If a quick release coupling is fitted to
the power steering return hose, release
the power steering fluid return hose
from the coupling by removing the clip.

fluids.
NOTE: Make sure that all openings are

sealed. Use new blanking caps.
Using a suitable blanking cap, cap the power

steering reservoir return pipe.

fluids.
NOTE: Make sure the extended pipe is not

kinked or twisted and is correctly secured with
hose clips.
Attach a suitable pipe to the power steering

return hose to allow the fluid to drain.
6. NOTES:
The suitable funnel should have the a

capacity of 4 litres and O-ring seal
The suitable funnel must be tightly sealed

to the power steering fluid reservoir to avoid
fluid leakage.
Install a suitable funnel onto the power

steering fluid reservoir.

safety stands.
Raise and support the vehicle with the wheels just clear of
the ground.
8. CAUTIONS:
Steps 8 and 9 must be carried out within 2 - 3 seconds

of each other. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the power steering system.
Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.
Using the suitable funnel, top up the power steering system

with the specified fluid. Make sure the fluid level is
maintained at two thirds full in the funnel.
9. CAUTIONS:

Do not allow the power steering fluid level
in the power steering fluid reservoir to fall
below the minimum power steering fluid level.
damage to the power steering system.
Make sure the engine is switched off as

soon as the full 4 litres of power steering fluid
has entered the power steering fluid reservoir.
Flush the power steering system.

Start the engine
With assistance turn the steering slowly
lock to lock 3 times at approximately 1
revolution every 5 seconds.
Continue to flush the power steering
system until 4 litres of power steering
fluid has been added to the power
steering reservoir. This should take
approximately 30 seconds.

fluids.
Remove the suitable funnel.

fluids.
Remove the suitable pipe to the power steering

return hose.
12. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the clip.
If a quick release coupling is fitted to the power steering

return hose, connect the power steering fluid return hose to
the coupling by installing the clip.
13. Install a new power steering fluid reservoir.

For additional information, refer to: Power Steering Fluid
Reservoir (211-02, Removal and Installation).
Power Steering -
Power Steering Fluid
Item Specification
Recommended power steering fluid Texaco Cold Climate Fluid 33270
Capacity
Item Capacity
System capacity - Maximum - Fill to mark on reservoir 0.89 litre (1.5 pints) (0.9 US quarts)
Item Specification
Type Power assisted rack and pinion, speed proportional with belt driven pump, remote
hydraulic fluid reservoir and fluid cooler
Steering wheel diameter 395 mm (15.5 in)
Number of turns - lock to 3.32
lock
Turning circle 11.45 m (37.5 ft)
System ratio 17.8:1
System operating pressure 110 bars (11000 kPa)(1595 lbf/in²)
Pump relief valve operating 114 ± 4 bar (11400 ± 400 kPa) (1653 ± 58 lbf/in²)
pressure
Fluid flow rate - constant 8.8 ± 0.5 litre/min (15.4 ± 0.8 pints/min) (9.2 ± 0.5 US quarts/min)
Steering rack travel 166 mm (6.22 in)
Piston diameter 52 mm (1.9 in)
Rack bar diameter 30 mm (1.12 in)
Steering angle sensor Panasonic ECS64SUKX
make/part number
Power steering pump bolts - All engines 25 18
High pressure line to power steering pump - All engines 25 18
Power steering pump bolts - All engines 25 18
High pressure line to power steering pump - All engines 25 18
Low pressure line to power steering pump - All engines 25 18
Steering angle sensor Torx screws 3 2
* Steering column intermediate shaft nut 22 16
++ Steering column intermediate shaft to the lower shaft bolt 25 18
Horn nut 10 7
Coolant expansion tank bolts 10 7
A/C condenser refrigerant line bolts 25 18
++ Power steering fluid lines bolt - 2.7 litre 25 18
+ Power steering gear to cross member bolts 175 129
High pressure line to steering gear bolt 25 18
Power steering line suppport bracket bolt 10 7
High pressure line union nut 30 22
* Tie rod end ball joint nuts 76 56
** Universal joint to steering gear bolt 25 18
Radiator access panel bolts 10 7
Oil filter 18 13
* New nut(s) must be fitted
+ New cage nuts must be fitted
** New 'Patchlok' bolt must be fitted
++ New bolt must be fitted

Power Steering - Power Steering
COMPONENT LOCATION
NOTE: 5.0L RHD shown.

1 - Power steering pump
2 - Banjo bolt
3 - Spring clip
4 - Suction hose - reservoir to pump
5 - Spring clip
6 - Reservoir
7 - Spring clip
8 - Fluid cooler and hose assembly - fluid return
9 - Hose assembly - Steering gear to cooler - return
10 - Screw
11 - Steering gear
12 - Caged nut (2 off)
14 - Bolt (2 off)
15 - Hose - pump to steering gear - pressure
16 - Pipe clip
17 - Screw
18 - Cooler
GENERAL
The steering system comprises a TRW manufactured rack and pinion steering gear, a power steering pump, a
reservoir, a fluid cooler and fluid hoses. The steering gear is a conventional end take-off rack and pinion power
assisted unit.
The steering gear rack has a travel of 166 mm (6.53 in). Lock to lock requires 3.33 revolutions of the steering wheel,
which gives a ratio of 45 mm (1.77 in)/revolution at the center position and 52.6 mm (2.07 in)/revolution at end of
lock.
STEERING GEAR

1 - Tie-rod end
2 - Locknut
3 - Tie-rod
4 - Gaitor
5 - Pressure/return connection from/to pump
6 - Valve unit housing
7 - Input shaft
8 - Pressure/return pipes
9 - Steering gear casing attachment lugs
10 - Pinion housing
The steering gear is located at the front of the engine, below the accessory belt drive. The gear is attached to two
brackets on the chassis and is secured to the brackets with flanged bolts and caged nuts. The cage prevents the nuts
from turning when the bolts are loosened or tightened. The cage nuts can only be used once and must be replaced
when the gear is removed. For service, M12 Nylock nuts are available as a replacement for the cage nut.
The steering gear comprises an aluminium, cast, one piece housing which contains a mechanical steering rack, a
valve unit and an integrated hydraulic power unit.
The steering gear uses a rack with an integrated piston which is guided on plain bearings within the rack housing.
The pinion, which is attached to the valve unit, runs in bearings and meshes with the rack teeth. The rack is pressed
against the pinion by a spring loaded yoke which ensures that the teeth mesh with the minimum of play. The pinion
is connected to the valve unit via a torsion bar. The rotary motion of the steering wheel is converted into linear
movement of the rack by the pinion and is initiated by the valve unit. This movement is transferred into movement of
the road wheels by adjustable tie-rods.
The 49 mm (1.92 in) diameter piston of the hydraulic power unit is located at one end of the gear housing. Each side
of the piston is connected to fluid pressure or fluid return via external metal pipes which are connected to the valve
unit.
Each end of the gear has a threaded hole which provides for the fitment of the tie-rod. The external ends of the gear
are sealed with gaitors which prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture. The tie-rod has a long threaded area which
allows for the fitment of the tie-rod end. The thread allows for the adjustment of the steering toe. When the correct
toe is achieved, a locknut is tightened against the tie-rod end preventing inadvertent movement.
The gear has a central hole machined along its length. The hole allows the air in the gaitors to be balanced when the
steering is turned. The gaitors are serviceable items and are retained on the gear housing and the tie-rod with zip
ties.
Valve Unit

1 - Rack
2 - Pinion shaft
3 - Outer sleeve
4 - Oil sleeve
5 - Dirt seal
6 - Input shaft
7 - Torsion bar
8 - Circlip
9 - Oil seal
10 - PTFE ring
11 - Steering gear casting
12 - Slots
13 - Pin - Pinion shaft to outer sleeve
14 - Oil seal
15 - Pinion shaft
16 - Bearing
17 - Pinion shaft nut
The valve unit is an integral part of the steering gear. The principle function of the valve unit is to provide maximum
power assistance (i.e. when parking) with minimum effort required to turn the steering wheel.
The pinion housing of the valve is an integral part of the main steering gear casting. The pinion housing has four
machined ports which provide connections for pressure feed from the power steering pump, return fluid to the
reservoir and pressure feeds to each side of the cylinder piston.
The valve unit comprises an outer sleeve, an input shaft, a torsion bar and a pinion shaft. The valve unit is co-axial
with the pinion shaft which is connected to the steering column via the input shaft. The valve unit components are
located in the steering gear pinion housing which is sealed with a cap.
The outer sleeve is located in the main bore of the pinion housing. Three annular grooves are machined on its outer
diameter. PTFE rings are located between the grooves and seal against the bore of the pinion housing. Holes are
drilled radially in each annular groove through the wall of the sleeve. The bore of the outer sleeve is machined to
accept the input shaft. Six equally spaced slots are machined in the bore of the sleeve. The ends of the slots are
closed and do not continue to the end of the outer sleeve. The radial holes in the outer sleeve are drilled into each
slot.
The input shaft has two machined flats at its outer end which allow for the attachment of the steering column
intermediate shaft yoke. The flats ensure that the intermediate shaft is fitted in the correct position to maintain the
optimum phase angle. The inner end of the input shaft forms a dog-tooth which mates with a slot in the pinion shaft.
The fit of the dog-tooth in the slot allows a small amount of relative rotation between the input shaft and the pinion
shaft before the dog-tooth contacts the wall of the slot. This ensures that, if the power assistance fails, the steering
can be operated manually without over stressing the torsion bar. The central portion of the input shaft has equally
spaced longitudinal slots machined in its circumference. The slots are arranged alternately around the input shaft.
The torsion bar is fitted inside the input shaft and is an interference fit in the pinion shaft. The torsion bar is
connected to the input shaft by a drive pin. The central diameter of the torsion bar is machined to a smaller
diameter in its central section. The smaller diameter allows the torsion bar to twist in response to torque applied
from the steering wheel in relation to the grip of the tyres on the road surface.
The pinion shaft has machined upper teeth on its central diameter which mate with teeth on the steering gear rack. A
slot, machined in the upper end of the pinion shaft mates with the dog-tooth on the input shaft. The pinion shaft
locates in the pinion housing and rotates on ball and roller bearings.
Power Steering Hydraulic Operation

1 - Reservoir
2 - Cooler
3 - Valve unit
4 - Steering rack and pinion
5 - Flow control/pressure relief return
6 - Flow control/Pressure relief valve
7 - Output port
8 - Power steering pump
9 - Low pressure suction line
When the engine is started the power steering pump draws fluid from the reservoir into the low pressure suction line.
The fluid passes through the pump and emerges as pressurised fluid at the outlet port. The attenuated high pressure
hose passes the pressurised fluid to the steering gear valve unit.
If no steering effort is applied, there is minimal restriction within the system and the supply pressure from the pump
is low. Minimal pressure is applied, via the valve unit, to each side of the piston in the hydraulic cylinder and the full
flow from the power steering pump returns to the reservoir via the fluid cooler.
When steering effort is applied in either direction, the return flow of fluid to the reservoir is restricted, causing the
supply pressure from the pump to increase. The pressurised fluid is directed to the applicable side of the piston in the
hydraulic cylinder, via the valve unit, providing the power assistance required to reduce the steering effort. Fluid
displaced from the low pressure side of the cylinder is returned via the valve unit and fluid cooler to the reservoir.
The fluid cooler reduces the fluid temperature which prolongs the life of hoses and seals in the system.
POWER STEERING PUMP

1 - 4.0L V6
2 - 5.0L V8
3 - 2.7L, 3.0L TdV6
The power steering pumps used on the four engine variants are basically the same pump with different connection
fittings. The pump is a positive displacement, vane type pump which supplies hydraulic pressure to the steering gear
valve unit. The pump is driven by a Poly Vee belt from the crankshaft pulley and output from the pump increases
proportionally with engine speed. A self-adjusting tensioner is fitted to maintain the correct tension on the belt.
The pump has an internal flow control valve which also incorporates a pressure relief valve. The pressure relief valve
limits the maximum pressure supplied to the steering gear to 114 bar (1653 lbf in2) ± 4 bar (58 lbf in2) on V6 petrol
engines, and 115 bar (1667 lbf in2)± 4 bar (58 lbf in 2) for V8 petrol, and V6 diesel models. The flow control valve
regulates the flow to a constant value of 8.8 l/min (1.93 gal/min) ± 0.5 l/min (0.1 gal/min) regardless of engine
speed. The pump has a displacement of 9.6 cc/rev (0.58 in3/rev) on V6 petrol, and V6 diesel, but 11 cc/rev (0.67
in3/rev) for V8 petrol.
A shaft runs longitudinally through the pump. One end of the shaft is fitted with a pressed-on drive pulley, the
opposite end of the shaft is closed by a cover. The shaft runs in bearings located in the body and oil seals at each
end of the shaft prevent leakage of hydraulic fluid.
The pump contains ten vanes on petrol models, and eleven vanes on diesel models which rotate within a cam ring
and are driven by the shaft. As the vanes rotate, the cam ring causes the space between the vanes to increase. This
causes a depression between the vanes and fluid is drawn from the reservoir via the suction hose into the space
between the vanes.
As the shaft rotates, the inlet port is closed to the vanes which have drawn in fluid, trapping the fluid between the
vanes. The cam ring causes the space between the vanes to reduce and consequentially compresses and pressurises
the hydraulic fluid trapped between them.
Further rotation of the shaft moves the vanes to the outlet port. As the vanes pass the port plate the pressurised
fluid passes from the pump outlet port into the pressure hose to the steering gear.
The pressurised fluid is subject to control by the flow control and pressure relief valve. The flow control valve
maintains a constant flow of fluid supplied to the steering gear irrespective of engine speed variations. The pressure
relief valve limits the pressure on the output side of the pump. A metering orifice is included in the discharge port of
the pump. If the pressure in the orifice reaches a predetermined level, a spring loaded ball in the center of the flow
control valve is lifted from its seat and allows pressurised fluid to recirculate within the pump.
The pressure relief valve will operate if the discharge from the pump is restricted, i.e.; steering held on full lock. If
the output from the pump is blocked, all output is recirculated through the pump. In this condition, as no fresh fluid
is drawn into the pump from the reservoir, the fluid temperature inside the pump will increase rapidly.
Consequentially, periods of operation of the steering gear on full lock should be kept to a minimum to prevent
overheating of the pump and the fluid within it.
RESERVOIR
The fluid reservoir is located on a bracket in the left hand side of the engine compartment, behind the radiator. The
reservoir comprises a body, cap and filter. The purpose of the reservoir is to contain a surplus of the hydraulic fluid
in the system to allow for expansion and contraction of the fluid due to temperature variations. The fluid level
ensures that the supply connection on the bottom of the reservoir is covered with fluid at all operating vehicle
attitudes. Any air which is present in the system is exhausted from the system in the reservoir.
The body is a plastic moulding with two ports at the bottom which provide for the connection of the suction supply
and return hoses. Moulded markings on the side of the reservoir denote the upper and lower fluid levels. A non-
serviceable, 100 micron nylon mesh filter is fitted in the body. The filter removes particulate matter from the fluid
before it is drawn into the pump supply connection.
The cap is rotated counterclockwise for one quarter turn to release from the body. The cap is fitted with an O-ring to
prevent fluid leakage. The cap incorporates a breather hole to allow for changes in fluid level during operation and
prevent vacuum or pressurisation of the reservoir.
HIGH PRESSURE HOSE
The high pressure hose connecting the pump to the steering gear valve unit contains two attenuators. Each
attenuator comprises a bullet shaped restrictor which is secured inside the hose. The restrictors damp pressure
pulses from the pump, consequently reducing noise and strain on downstream components. The attenuators are an
integral part of the hose and cannot be serviced separately.
FLUID COOLER
NOTE: Diesel engine vehicles are not fitted with a fluid cooler.
The fluid cooler is located in the return line from the steering gear to the reservoir. The cooler comprises a flexible
hose and a solid pipe which connect between the reservoir and the return pipe from the steering gear. The cooler is
an integral part of the pipe and cannot be replaced as a separate component.
The cooler is a fabricated aluminium tube, through which the power steering fluid passes. The outer diameter of the
cooler tube has aluminium loops attached to it which dissipate heat. Cool air entering the front of the vehicle passes
over the cooler and flows through the loops. The loops act as heat exchangers, conducting heat from the fluid as it
passes through the tube.
Power Steering - Power Steering Pressure Test TDV6 3.0L Diesel
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Adaptor, power steering pressure test
211-011-14
Hose - power steering pressure test
211-011-02(LRT-57-002)
Hose - power steering pressure test
211-011-02(LRT-57-002)
Valve block power steering test
211-011-01(LRT-57-001)
Hose and gauge - power steering pressure test
211-287(LRT-57-005)
CAUTION: If power steering fluid comes into contact with the paintwork, the affected area must be
immediately washed down with cold water.

safety stands.

Specifications).
3. Siphon the fluid from the power steering

reservoir.
Remove the filler cap.
4. Remove the front LH splash shield.
Remove the 4 clips.
5. Release the steering gear high-pressure line.

Remove the bolt.
6. Remove the front LH fender splash shield.

7. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use

new blanking caps.
Make sure that the area around the

component is clean and free of foreign material.
Disconnect the power steering pump supply hose.

Release the clip.
Position a container to collect the fluid.
8. CAUTION: Make sure that the area around

the component is clean and free of foreign
material.
Disconnect the power steering pump high-

pressure line.
Remove the bolt.
9. Install the special tools.
Tie the pressure gauge aside.
Connect the power steering pump supply hose.

Secure with the clip.
11. Fill the power steering reservoir.

Specifications).
13. NOTES:
Make sure the steering components and test

equipment are free from leaks.
Maintain the maximum fluid level during the test.
Make sure the steering is in the straight ahead

position.
Under no circumstances must the low pressure spigot

be removed from the steering pump.
With the test valve open start the engine.

Start the engine and turn steering fully lock to lock,
stop the engine.
Top-up the power steering fluid reservoir.
14. For correct power steering pressures, refer to the steering

specification section.
Power Steering, Specifications).
15. CAUTION: Do not hold steering at full lock for longer

than 10 seconds.
With the engine at idle, slowly turn the steering wheel and
hold on full lock.
Record the pressure reading.

17. With the engine at idle, release the steering wheel. The
pressure should be, at or below, the pressure specified.
18. Pressure outside this tolerance, indicates a fault.

19. CAUTION: Pump damage will occur if test valve is
closed for longer periods.
To determine if the fault is in the steering pump or the

steering rack, close the test valve for a maximum of 5
seconds.
20. If the pressures recorded fall outside the given values,

replace the power steering pump.
21. If the maximum pump pressure is correct, check the hoses

for correct routing and condition, if correct suspect the
steering gear.
22. On completion of the test stop the engine, disconnect the

battery ground cable and siphon the steering fluid from the
reservoir.
23. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new

blanking caps.
Make sure that the area around the component is

clean and free of foreign material.
Disconnect the power steering pump supply hose.

Release the clip.
24. Disassemble the test equipment.
25. Connect the power steering pump high-pressure line.

Connect the power steering pump supply hose.

Secure with the clip.
Remove the container.
27. Secure the steering gear high-pressure line.

28. Install the front LH splash shield.

Install the clips.
29. Install the front LH fender splash shield.

31. Fill and bleed the power steering system.

For additional information, refer to: Power Steering System
Filling and Bleeding (211-00 Steering System - General
Information, General Procedures).
Power Steering - Power Steering Pressure Test V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Adapter, power steering test
211-313 (LRT-57-035A)
Hose, power steering test
211-011-02 (LRT-57-002)
Hose, power steering test
211-011-11
Valve block, power steering test
211-011-01 (LRT-57-001)
Hose and gauge, power steering test
211-287 (LRT-57-005)
Adapter, power steering test
211-325 (LRT-57-042)

safety stands.

Specifications).
3. Remove the radiator access panel.
Remove the 4 bolts.

Remove the 4 clips.

6. Siphon the fluid from the power steering

reservoir.
Install the filler cap.
7. Position an absorbent cloth to collect fluid spillage.
8. CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing the

components, ensure the area around the joint faces and
connections are clean. Plug open connections to prevent
contamination.
NOTES:
Some fluid spillage is inevitable during this operation.
Care must be taken to avoid contamination of the

drive belt.
Disconnect the power steering high-pressure pipe union.

Remove the bolt.
Remove and discard the 2 sealing washers.
Position a container to collect the fluid.
9. Install the special tools to the power steering high-pressure
port.
Install the O-ring seal.
Tie the pressure gauge aside under the hood.
10. Install the special tool to the high-pressure

union.
Install the O-ring seals.
Connect the special tool line, to the
special tool valve block assembly.
11. Refill the power steering reservoir.


Specifications).
13. NOTES:
Ensure the steering components and test equipment

are free from leaks.
Maintain the maximum fluid level during the test.
Make sure the steering is in the straight ahead

position.
Under no circumstances must the low pressure spigot

be removed from the steering pump.
With the test valve open start the engine.

Start the engine and turn steering fully lock to lock,
stop the engine.
Top-up the power steering fluid reservoir.
14. For correct power steering pressures, refer to the steering

specification section. For additional information, refer to:
Specifications (211-02, Specifications).
15. With the engine at idle, slowly turn the steering wheel and
hold on full lock.

17. With the engine at idle, release the steering wheel. The
pressure should be, at or below, the pressure specified.
18. Pressure outside this tolerance, indicates a fault.
19. To determine if the fault is in the steering pump or the

steering rack, close the test valve for a maximum of 5
seconds.
20. If the pressures recorded fall outside the given values,

replace the power steering pump.
21. If the maximum pump pressure is correct, then suspect the

power steering rack.
22. On completion of the test stop the engine, disconnect the

battery ground cable and siphon the steering fluid from the
reservoir.
Install the filler cap.
23. Disassemble the test equipment.
24. Connect the high-pressure line to the power steering pump.

Install the new O-ring seals.


27. Install the radiator access panel.

Tighten the M6 bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
Tighten the M10 bolts to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft).

Specifications).
29. Refill and bleed the power steering.

Filling and Bleeding (211-00, General Procedures).
Power Steering - Steering Gear TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
NOTES:
LHD illustration shown, RHD is similar.

safety stands.
2. CAUTION: Do not turn the steering wheel with the

steering column lower shaft disconnected as damage to the
clockspring and steering wheel switches may occur.
Center the steering wheel.
3. Remove the radiator splash shield.

Remove the 4 bolts.

5. Remove the front RH splash shield.

Remove the 4 clips.

Remove the 4 clips.
7. NOTE: LH illustration shown, RH is
similar.
Release both tie-rod end ball joints.

Loosen the locknut.
Release both track rods from tie rod
ends, note the number of turns for
installation.
Disconnect the lower steering column from the

steering gear.
9. Remove the steering gear high-pressure line.

Remove the bolts.
10. Disconnect the steering gear control valve

actuator electrical connector.
11. Release the transmission fluid cooler.
Remove the 4 bolts.
12. Release the fuel cooler.

Remove the bolt.
13. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the area around the

component is clean and free of foreign material.

new blanking caps.
Disconnect the power steering high pressure line

and return line from the steering gear.
Remove and discard the 2 O-ring seals.
14. Release the steering gear.

Remove the 2 bolts.
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler and fuel
cooler support bracket.
Remove the bolt.
Release the coolant line.
16. Remove the steering gear.
Installation
1. Install the steering gear.
2. Install the transmission fluid cooler and fuel cooler support

bracket.
Secure the coolant line.
3. Secure the steering gear.

4. NOTES:
Remove and discard the blanking caps.
Lubricate the seals with clean power steering fluid.
Connect the power steering high pressure line and return

line to the steering gear.
Install new O-ring seals.
5. Secure the fuel cooler.

6. Secure the transmission fluid cooler.

Tighten the nuts and bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
7. Connect the steering gear control valve actuator electrical

connector.
8. Install the power steering line support bracket.

9. Connect the lower steering column shaft to the steering

gear.
10. Connect the tie-rod end ball joints.
Attach both tie rods to previously noted positions.
Tighten the tie-rod locking nut.

Install the clips.
12. Install the front RH splash shield.

Install the clips.

14. Install the radiator splash shield.


16. Adjust the front wheel alignment.

Power Steering - Steering Gear V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
205-754A
Removal

stands.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the steering is in the straight ahead position.
Do not turn the steering wheel with the steering column

lower shaft disconnected as damage to the clockspring and
steering wheel switches may occur.
Discard the bolt.
Torque: 25 Nm
7. NOTES:
Loosen but do not fully remove .
Torque: M14, 150 Nm

Torque: M12, 76 Nm
8. CAUTION: Discard the nuts.
NOTE: The step must be carried out on both

sides.
9. Torque: 10 Nm
10. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
Torque: 22 Nm
11.
12. NOTES:
Do not disassemble further if the component

is removed for access only.
Note the number of turns when removing the

tie rod end to aid installation.
Torque: 55 Nm
Installation
1. NOTE: Remove and discard all blanking caps.
2. For additional information, refer to: Power Steering System

Power Steering - Power Steering Fluid Reservoir TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V6
S/C 3.0L Petrol
Removal

Specifications).
2. Siphon the fluid from the power steering reservoir.
3. Release the power steering fluid reservoir from

the bracket.

contamination.
NOTE: Some fluid spillage is inevitable

during this operation.
Remove the power steering fluid reservoir.

Position an absorbent cloth to collect
fluid spillage.
Release the hose clips and disconnect
the hoses.
Installation

Power Steering - Power Steering Fluid Cooler V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
Disconnect Tool, Fuel Line (5/16")
310-040
Removal
1.
2. For additional information, refer to: Coolant Expansion Tank

(303-03B Engine Cooling - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
3. Siphon the fluid from the power steering reservoir.
4. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
5. CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are
6. Remove the special tool.
7. Torque: 10 Nm
8.
9.
Installation
1. NOTE: Remove and discard all blanking caps.
2. For additional information, refer to: Power Steering System

Power Steering - Power Steering Pump TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
Refer to: Specifications (414-00, Specifications).

stands.
3. Refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery,

Evacuation and Charging (412-00, General Procedures).
4. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05, Removal and

Installation).
5. Remove the LH front wheel and tire.
Torque: 140 Nm
6.
7.
8.
9. Torque:
Nuts 6 Nm
10. Torque: 9 Nm
11. Torque: 9 Nm
12. Torque: 9 Nm
13.
14.
15. NOTE: Make sure that all openings are

Torque: 18 Nm
16. WARNING: Fluid loss is unavoidable, use

absorbent cloth or a container to collect the
fluid.
CAUTION: Make sure that the mating

faces are clean and free of foreign material.

17. WARNING: Fluid loss is unavoidable, use

absorbent cloth or a container to collect the
fluid.
CAUTION: Make sure that the mating

faces are clean and free of foreign material.

Torque: 24 Nm
18. Torque: 25 Nm
19. Torque: 25 Nm
Installation
2. Refer to: Power Steering System Filling and Bleeding (211-

00, General Procedures).
Power Steering - Power Steering Pump V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Removal
Refer to: Specifications (414-00 Battery and Charging

System - General Information, Specifications).

stands.
3. Refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery,

Evacuation and Charging (412-00 Climate Control System -
General Information, General Procedures).
4. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05B Accessory Drive -

V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
5. Remove the LH front road wheel.
Torque: 140 Nm
6.
7. Torque: 10 Nm
8. CAUTION: Note the fitted position of the

component prior to removal.
Torque: 25 Nm
9. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that all openings are sealed.

Use new blanking caps.
A new O-ring seal is to be installed.
Torque: 18 Nm
10. CAUTIONS:
Fluid loss is unavoidable, use absorbent

cloth or a container to collect the fluid.
Make sure that all openings are sealed.

Use new blanking caps.
Torque: 25 Nm
11. Torque: 25 Nm
12. CAUTION: Note the fitted position of the

component prior to removal.
Torque: 25 Nm
Installation
2. Refer to: Power Steering System Filling and Bleeding (211-

00 Steering System - General Information, General
Procedures).
Power Steering - Steering Angle Sensor
Removal
Specifications).

Release the clip.
3. Disconnect the steering angle sensor electrical

connector.
4. Disconnect the steering column intermediate

shaft from the steering column.
Note the fitted position.
Remove the special bolt and discard the
nut.
5. Remove the steering angle sensor.

Installation
1. Install the steering angle sensor.
Tighten the Torx screws to 3 Nm (2 lb.ft).
2. Connect the steering column intermediate shaft.

Install the special bolt and tighten the new nut to 22
Nm (16 lb.ft).
3. Connect the steering angle sensor electrical connector.

Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.

Specifications).
6. Initiate a new steering angle sensor using T4.

Power Steering - Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure
Line
Removal
NOTES:
RHD shown, LHD is similar.
All vehicles

stands.
2. Remove the front RH splash shield.

Remove the 4 clips.

4. Remove the radiator access panel.

Remove the 4 bolts.

contamination.
Disconnect the high pressure line from the

power steering pump.
Loosen and release the power steering
pump line.
Allow the fluid to drain into a container.
Remove and discard the 2 sealing
washers.
6. Release the power steering line support
brackets.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Release the hose.
All other engine types

7. Release the power steering line support
bracket.
Remove the nut.
Release the hose.
All vehicles

contamination.
Disconnect the high pressure line from the

power steering gear.
Remove the bolt.
Release the power steering gear line.
9. Remove the steering gear high-pressure line.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Install the steering gear high-pressure line.
2. Connect the high-pressure line to the power steering gear.

Install the O-ring seal.
Attach the power steering gear high-pressure line.

3. Install the power steering line support brackets.
Secure the hose with the clip.
All other engine types

4. Install the power steering line support bracket.
Secure the hose with the clip.
All vehicles
5. Connect the high-pressure line to the power steering pump.
Connect the power steering pump high-pressure line.
6. Install the radiator access panel.


8. Install the front RH splash shield.


Steering Linkage -
* Tie-rod end nut - Vehicles fitted with an M12 nut 76 56
* Tie-rod end nut - Vehicles fitted with an M14 nut 150 111
Tie-rod locking nut 55 40
Steering Linkage - Steering Linkage
Steering Linkage Component Location

1 - Steering gear
2 - Steering gear boot
3 - Tie rod
4 - Locknut
5 - Tie rod end
6 - Ball joint
GENERAL
The steering linkage comprises the tie rod which provides the connection between the steering gear and the front
wheel knuckle.
Each end of the steering gear has a threaded hole which provides for the fitment of the tie rods. The external
ends of the tie rods are sealed with steering gear boots to prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture into the
steering gear.
The outer ends of the tie rods are threaded to allow the fitment of the tie rod ends. The tie rod ends are
screwed onto the tie rods and locked with locknuts to prevent inadvertent movement. The thread on the tie rod
allows the position of the tie rod end to be adjusted in order to set the correct toe angle for each front wheel.
The tie rod end comprises a forged housing with a threaded bore for attachment to the tie rod. The tie rod end
incorporates a non-serviceable tapered ball joint which locates in a tapered hole in the front wheel knuckle and is
secured with a self-locking nut. The ball joint has an internal hexagonal drive which enables the joint to be held
stationary when the self-locking nut is tightened.
Steering Linkage - Tie Rod End
Special Tool(s)
205-754 (LRT-54-027)
Removal

safety stands.
2. Remove the front wheel.
3. Loosen the tie rod end ball joint retaining nut.
4. Loosen the tie rod end lock nut.

Remove and discard the tie rod end
retaining nut.
6. Remove the tie-rod end, note the number of

turns for installation.
Installation
1. Install the tie rod end, note the number of turns until
adjacent to the locknut.
2. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the tie rods, use an

additional wrench when loosening or tightening the
components.
Connect the tie rod end ball joint.

For vehicles fitted with an M12 nut, install a new nut
3. Tighten the tie rod locking nut.

4. Install the front wheel.

6. Using only four wheel alignment equipment approved by

Steering Linkage - Steering Gear Boot
Removal
1. Remove the tie-rod end.
For additional information, refer to: Tie-Rod End (211-03,
Remove the locknut.
3. Remove the steering gear boot.

Installation
1. Install the steering gear boot.
2. Install the locknut.
3. Install the tie-rod end.

For additional information, refer to: Tie-Rod End (211-03,
Steering Linkage - Tie Rod
Special Tool(s)
205-754(LRT-54-027)
Removal

safety stands.
2. Remove the front wheel.
3. Loosen the outer tie-rod end ball joint retaining nut.
4. Loosen the outer tie-rod end lock nut.

Remove and discard the tie rod end
retaining nut.
6. Remove the outer tie-rod end, note the

number of turns for installation.
7. Remove the outer tie-rod end lock nut.
8. Remove the steering gear boot.

9. Remove the inner tie-rod end.
Loosen the nut.
Installation
1. Install the inner tie-rod end.
2. Install the steering gear boot.

3. Install the outer tie-rod end lock nut.
4. Install the tie rod end, note the number of turns until
adjacent to the locknut.
5. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the tie rods, use an

additional wrench when loosening or tightening the
components.
Connect the tie-rod end ball joint.

6. Tighten the tie-rod locking nut.

7. Install the front wheel.

9. Using only four wheel alignment equipment approved by

Steering Column -
Item Specification
Type Two piece, articulated with flexible coupling to steering rack; fitted with energy absorption system
and having a 120 mm (4.7 in) ride down capability with a 4.5 kN (0.45 ton force) maximum
decoupling load on the intermediate shaft and a 77 mm (3.0 in) collapse stroke on the lower shaft.
Upper
column
adjustment:
Reach 40 mm (1.57 in)
Rake 6°
Steering angle sensor Torx screws 3 2
* Steering column intermediate shaft to lower shaft bolts 30 22
* Steering column intermediate shaft to steering column nut 22 16
Steering column switch assembly Torx bolts 3 2
Steering wheel bolt 63 46
* New bolts/nut must be installed
Steering Column - Steering Column
Component Location

1 - Steering wheel
2 - Electronic steering lock
3 - Electric motor
5 - Bulkhead mounting
6 - Lower collapsible shaft yoke
7 - Lower collapsible shaft
8 - Intermediate shaft
9 - Gaitor
10 - Upper steering column assembly - Electric
11 - Upper steering column assembly - Manual
Overview
The steering column comprises the upper column assembly, the intermediate shaft and the lower collapsible shaft.
The three components are positively connected together to pass driver rotary input from the steering wheel to a
linear output of the steering rack.
The upper steering column assembly is electronically adjustable for steering wheel reach and rake and is controlled
by the CJB (central junction box). The upper steering column assembly also provides the location for the electronic
steering lock mechanism and the steering angle sensor.
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High-speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN (local interconnect
network) bus

1 - Battery
2 - Driver seat module
3 - Driver memory switch pack
6 - ABS module
8 - Reach/rake motor
9 - Reach solenoid and clutch
10 - Rake solenoid and clutch
11 - Potentiometer
12 - Steering column switch
13 - CJB
14 - EJB
Component Description
Upper Column Assembly - Manual

1 - Attachment holes
2 - Roof bracket
3 - Screw
4 - Locating hook
5 - 'U' bracket
6 - Steering wheel splines
7 - Main body
9 - Adjustment lever
10 - Clamp plate assembly
11 - Adjustment balance spring (2 off)
12 - Shearing capsule (2 off)
14 - Swing yoke
The steering column is attached to the in-vehicle crossbeam and secured with four, 8 mm thread forming, pan head
Torx drive screws. The two forward attachment screws are fixed through the column mounting bracket, the two
rearward mounting screws also pass through the shearing capsules. In the event of a high energy frontal impact, the
shearing capsules remain fixed to the crossbeam, but the 'U' bracket (with the main body) disengages from the
capsules, allowing the column to shorten axially (collapse), with the coiled straps absorbing energy to reduce
occupant loading.
WARNING: Take care when handling the column not to trap fingers if releasing the adjustment lever at any
point during the removal procedure when the column is not in the vehicle. The balance springs will cause the column
to rapidly move to its uppper-most position.
The column comprises a cast magnesium roof bracket which is attached to the in-vehicle crossbeam. Attached to the
roof bracket is a pivot housing, a 'U' bracket, upper and lower shafts and a main body. The roof bracket has two
hooks which locate in slots in the in-vehicle crossbeam. The hooks assist in supporting the weight of the column
during removal or installation.
The pivot housing is attached to the forward end of the roof bracket with two pivot pins. The pivot housing allows for
adjustment of the column rake and contains a bearing which supports the column lower shaft.
The 'U' bracket is attached to the roof bracket by a screw, bush and plastic washer assembly (third fixing) located in
a slot in the top of the roof bracket. When the column is assembled into the vehicle, the shearing capsules, which are
attached to the 'U' bracket, are clamped up against the roof bracket by the fixing screws, preventing movement of
the 'U' bracket. The bolts also pass through rectangular section steel straps, which at one end, have coils that locate
around a plastic bush (positioned on the shearing capsule). The straps are used to control the rate of column
collapse, in the event of a high energy frontal impact.
The main body is positioned in the 'U' bracket via the lever bolt. The bolt is captive within the vertical slots in the 'U'
bracket and the horizontal slots in the main body. The bolt also passes through the clamp plate assemblies (one on
either side of the 'U' bracket). The body houses the middle and upper bearings through which the upper shaft is
located. Two offset holes in the main body provide for the attachment of the electronic steering lock assembly.
The upper and lower shafts are located through the length of the column assembly. The upper shaft is supported in
two bearings in the main body and the lower shaft is located in the upper shaft and supported in a bearing in the
pivot housing. The lower shaft has a tubular section with external splines. These mate with the internal splines in the
upper shaft. The purpose of the splines is to transmit rotational movement of the upper shaft to the lower shaft, but
allowing the two components to telescope into each other in the event of a collision. The length of the splined
sections allow for 120 mm (4.72 in) of linear movement. The lower shaft is fitted with a universal joint spider to
which a swivel yoke is attached. The swivel yoke attaches to the intermediate shaft of the steering column on the
interior side of the bulkhead using a special cam bolt and self-locking nut.
A steering angle sensor is attached to the pivot housing of the column and its centre gear is rotated by a drive collar
which is attached to the lower shaft and rotates with movement of the steering wheel. The sensor transmits steering
angle data on the high speed CAN bus which is used by various systems on the vehicle. The steering angle sensor is
designed to become detached from the column in the event of a frontal impact. Care must be taken when handling
the column assembly to prevent accidental damage to the sensor.
The upper steering column assembly houses the electronic column lock mechanism and control module.
The steering column is adjustable for reach and rake. The column can be adjusted for 40 mm (1.57 in) of reach
adjustment and 6º of rake adjustment. The adjustment mechanism comprises an adjustment lever, a cam plate, a
lever bolt and nut, two brake pads and two clamp plate assemblies.
A plastic adjustment lever is located on the underside of the column assembly and is attached to a cam plate. When
the lever is pulled downwards, the cam plate rotates and releases tension in the lever bolt. The lever bolt also passes
through two sets of clamp plate assemblies. When the lever is moved upwards, the cam plate rotates applying
tension to the lever bolt, which applies pressure to the brake pads which in turn apply pressure to the clamp plate
assemblies (which lock the column in the desired position). The lever bolt is retained by a self-locking lever nut,
which abuts a thrust bearing.
WARNING: Under no circumstances should the lever nut torque be reduced, as this will reduce the clamping
efficiency of the adjustment mechanism possibly affecting the stability of the column during a frontal impact.
The pivot housing is attached to the roof bracket with two pivot pins. When the rake adjustment is operated, the
pivot housing rotates around the pivot pins to allow for the up and down adjustment, but maintains a positive
location to the roof bracket. An adjustment spring is fitted between the 'U' bracket and the main body, to counteract
the weight of the main body, upper shaft, steering wheel and airbag, preventing the steering wheel from dropping
rapidly when the adjustment lever is released.
In the event of a high energy frontal impact, the upper column assembly is designed to axially collapse reducing
impact injury to the driver. A number of components interact together to ensure that the collapse of the column is in
a controlled manner. The following components control the column collapse:
Pressure washer and bush (third fixing)

Shearing capsules
Straps
Upper and lower shaft (splined) connection
The shearing capsules have a central hole through which the rearward attachment bolts pass through into the roof
bracket. The capsules are located in the 'U' bracket by tapered slots, which have small cut-outs in the inside faces.
The shearing capsules have a number of small holes which align with the cut-outs in the 'U' bracket. When the
capsules are installed, plastic is injected into the holes and cut-outs. This plastic retention of the capsules provides
the initial controlled break-out force for the column in the event of a collision. After 10 mm of displacement, the 'U'
bracket is no longer located by the shearing capsules. When handling the column, care should be taken that the
shearing capsules are not impacted or dislodged.
The tension in the 'Third Fixing' screw, applies a clamp load to the roof bracket (via the bush and compression
washers). In the event of a collision, this clamp load (supplementary to the shearing capsules) must be overcome
before the column can collapse. When this load has been exceeded (and the fixing has been displaced 20 mm (0.79
in)) it slides easily within the roof bracket slot, providing directional control to the column, as it collapses. Under no
circumstances should the screw torque be adjusted.
The straps are rectangular section steel, which at one end, have coils that locate around a plastic bush (positioned on
the shearing capsule). The other end is formed into a hook which locates within a slot in the 'U' bracket. When a
collision has occurred, and the 'U' bracket has been displaced from the shearing capsules by 8 mm (0.3 in), the
straps begin to un-roll due to the displacement of the 'U' bracket. The straps provide the main element for energy
absorption as the column collapses. The cross section of the straps change after approximately 40 mm (1.6 in) of
extension, changing the amount of energy that they absorb.
Upper Column Assembly - Electric

1 - Pivot housing
2 - Roof bracket
3 - Locating hook
5 - Rake solenoid
6 - Rake clutch
7 - Reach solenoid
8 - Reach clutch
9 - Potentiometer
10 - Electric motor
11 - Outer profile
12 - Rake lever
14 - Pivot pin
16 - Swing yoke
The steering column is attached to the in-vehicle crossbeam and secured with four, 8mm, thread forming, pan head
Torx drive screws. In the event of a high energy frontal impact, a strap and shear pin on the underside of the column
provides a controlled collapse of the outer housing on the inner housing, allowing the column to shorten axially
(collapse), absorbing energy to reduce occupant loading.
The column comprises a cast magnesium roof bracket which is attached to the in-vehicle crossbeam. Attached to the
roof bracket is a pivot housing, a outer housing and upper and lower shafts. The roof bracket has two hooks which
locate in slots in the in-vehicle crossbeam. The hooks assist in supporting the weight of the column during removal or
installation.
The rake lever locates the aluminum outer profile, into which is fixed the electronic steering lock adaptor. The inner
profile is located within the outer profile, by 2 linear bearing assemblies, which allow a telescopic action for the reach
adjustment.
The assembly of the upper and lower shafts is located within the column by the bearings in the electronic steering
lock adaptor and the pivot housing. Both shafts are tubular. The lower shaft has external splines (which are over
molded with nylon), and these mate with the internal splines in the upper shaft. The purpose of the splines is to
transmit rotational movement of the upper shaft to the lower shaft, yet allow telescopic movement during column
axial collapse. The lower shaft is fitted with a universal joint spider to which a swivel yoke is attached. The swivel
yoke attaches to the intermediate shaft of the steering column on the interior side of the bulkhead using a special
cam bolt and self-locking nut.
A steering angle sensor is attached to the pivot housing of the column and its centre gear is rotated by a drive collar
which is attached to the lower shaft and rotates with movement of the steering wheel. The sensor transmits steering
angle data on the high speed CAN bus which is used by various systems on the vehicle. The steering angle sensor is
designed to become detached from the column in the event of a frontal impact. Care must be taken when handling
the column assembly to prevent accidental damage to the sensor.
The upper steering column assembly houses the electronic column lock mechanism and control module.
The steering column is adjustable electrically for reach and rake. The adjustment mechanism comprises an electric
adjustment motor, a lead screw, a rake solenoid, a reach solenoid, a rake clutch and a reach clutch.
The column adjustment is controlled by the driver using a joystick switch located on the left hand side of the column
cowl. The joystick can be moved forward and backward to adjust the column reach in and out and moved up and
down to adjust the rake. The single electric motor is used for both adjustment ranges. The switch selection uses the
applicable solenoid, engaging the applicable clutch on the lead screw.
When the auto function is activated, the steering column will adjust to the uppermost tilt position with ignition off,
and re-adjust to the previous set position, with ignition on.
For the reach adjustment, the lead screw drives the outer housing in or out as required. For the rake adjustment, the
lead screw drives a rake lever which moves the column up or down as applicable.
The pivot housing is attached to the roof bracket with two pivot pins. When the rake adjustment is operated, the
pivot housing rotates around the pivot pins to allow for the up and down adjustment, but maintains a positive
location to the roof bracket.
The electric steering column is linked to and controlled by the memory control module. The memory control module
provides storage of three separate memory positions which are stored against three individual vehicle keys.
For additional information, refer to: Seats (501-10, Description and Operation).
. The electric column also has an easy egress feature which lifts the column to its maximum rake to allow easier
access to the vehicle.
In the event of a high energy frontal impact, the upper column assembly is designed to collapse reducing impact
injury to the driver. A number of components interact together to ensure that the collapse of the column is in a
controlled manner. The following components control the column collapse:
Shear pin
Strap
Upper and lower shaft (splined) connection
The strap is rectangular section steel, which is secured by two Allen screws to the outer housing and by a shear pin
to the strap guide. The strap provides the main element for energy absorption as the column collapses. To initiate
axial movement of the column, the shear pin has to be severed, friction between several column interfaces has to be
overcome, and an axial load applied sufficient to initiate strap guide deformation. Once the column is telescoping,
deformation of the strap guide, and sliding friction between column interfaces, absorbs the energy of the occupant in
a controlled manner, as the column collapses.
WARNING: Do not attempt to dismantle the steering column. The crash safety of the unit will be compromised.
Intermediate Shaft
1 - Load limiter pins
2 - Cam bolt
4 - Retention spring
5 - Attachment hole
6 - Seal sleeve
CAUTION: Care should be taken when handling the intermediate shaft, to ensure that it is not subject to
impacts or that the retention spring is not displaced.
The non-handed, intermediate shaft is attached at its upper end to the swivel yoke on the lower shaft of the steering
column assembly. The intermediate shaft comprises two main parts; the upper and lower axis which are joined
together with a shear joint.
The upper axis has a cut-out in the shaft which allows for the fitment of the cam bolt. Only when the shaft is located
correctly in the swivel yoke, can the cam bolt be inserted. A self-locking nut is fitted to the cam bolt. The torque
applied as the nut is tightened, rotates the bolt, forcing the cam against the shaft, positioning it correctly in the
swivel yoke prior to the joint being clamped.
NOTE: If the self-locking nut is removed for any reason, it is recommended that a new, correct nut is fitted to
maintain the optimum torque on the cam bolt.
The lower axis is fitted with a plastic molded seal sleeve which provides a suitable surface for the location of the
plastic bearings within the two bulkhead seals. The bottom of the lower axis is machined to a double 'D' shape which
tapers at the end. One side of the taper has a slot which is used to align the intermediate shaft and the lower
collapsible shaft to ensure that the correct orientation of the steering wheel to steering gear is maintained. A hole is
drilled through the double 'D' shape and provides for attachment of the intermediate shaft to the lower collapsible
shaft.
The upper and lower axis, are joined together via a load limiter. The load limiter is designed to disconnect the upper
and lower axis in the event of a high energy frontal impact preventing an excessive load being applied to the steering
column (causing intrusion into the passenger compartment or an unstable airbag deployment).
The load limiter comprises two plates which are part of the upper and lower axis. The plates have a central 'guide'
pin, and two retention pins, which pass through bushes in the plates, onto which a rubber and steel washer are
staked in position. The size of the staking controls the load at which the lower axis separates from the upper axis. A
wire 'retention' spring is also fitted to the load limiter.
Lower Collapsible Shaft

1 - Bolt
2 - Heat shield
3 - Female shaft
4 - Male shaft
5 - Plastic spacer
6 - Flexible coupling
7 - Universal joint
8 - Torx bolt
The lower collapsible shaft is a handed component and the correct component must be fitted to ensure that the
steering phase angle is maintained. The shaft is attached at its upper end to the intermediate shaft and at its lower
end to the valve unit pinion on the steering gear. These attachment joints can only be fitted in one orientation to
ensure the correct alignment of the steering wheel to the steering gear. The shaft comprises two female and male
shafts which are a telescopic fit on each other. The male shaft can slide up to 77 mm (3.03 in) within the female
shaft in the event of a frontal impact, to minimize the effect of frontal intrusion. The sliding fit also allows for
dynamic displacement between the chassis and the body during severe off-road driving. A plastic spacer is fitted to
the male shaft which is only used as an assembly aid during vehicle production and serves no function once the shaft
is assembled to the vehicle.
The female shaft is a triangular section tube which is formed to a double 'D' hole at its upper end which mates with
the intermediate shaft. An indentation pressed in the wall of the tube ensures the correct alignment between the
intermediate shaft and the lower collapsible shaft. A captive nut, clinched to one side of a hole in the double 'D'
section, allows for the fitment of a patchlock bolt to secure the intermediate shaft. Clamped around the end of the
female shaft is a dust seal which prevents the ingress of dirt and moisture into the sliding joint, and a heat sleeve is
also fitted to reflect radiant heat from the exhaust.
The male shaft is a triangular section tube which is staked at its lower end into a flange. A cage and curved 'spring
plates' are fitted to its upper end, which slide in the female shaft. A pin is fitted into the side of the female tube, to
secure the male tube in the bore. The lower end of the male shaft is fitted with a flexible coupling to absorb vibration
and steering 'kick back', transmitted from the steering gear. A 'stabilizing pin' is fitted through the coupling to
prevent coupling articulation (acting as a universal joint), while still allowing rotational flexing and plunge movement.
The coupling is a rubber molding within which are nylon fibres wound around the attachment holes to transmit
torque applied to the steering. The coupling is attached to a drive flange (which is part of the male shaft), and to the
'U' yoke which in turn is connected to the pinion yoke, by the universal joint assembly.
Electronic Steering Column Lock

1 - Electronic steering column lock
With the passive start system, a conventional steering lock mechanism cannot be used. An electronic system was
developed which comprises a steering column assembly locking unit with an integrated control module. The steering
lock is operated with the door locks when the vehicle is locked or unlocked. A control module, located inside the
steering column, controls a motor, releasing the steering lock when appropriate.
The upper steering column assembly houses the column lock mechanism and control module. The components are
assembled with non-removable pins for security reasons and are therefore non-serviceable. Failure of any steering
lock components will require replacement of the upper steering column assembly.
The steering column lock comprises a locking motor and locking bolt. The locking motor drives a cam, which moves
the locking bolt into and out of engagement with the locking sleeve on the steering column. The locking motor is
fitted with a Hall effect sensor, which informs the control module of the position (locked/unlocked) of the steering lock
mechanism.
Steering Column - Steering Column
Removal
WARNING: Take care if releasing the adjustment lever when the column has been removed from the
vehicle. The spring is under a high tension, and if released, could cause personal injury. Make sure fingers are
clear from any areas, likely to be trapped.
CAUTION: Air tools MUST NOT be used on steering column bolts.
All vehicles
1. Fully extend the steering column for access.
2. Remove the steering wheel.

For additional information, refer to: Steering Wheel (211-
3. Remove the drivers side register trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Driver Side Register
Trim Panel (412-01, Removal and Installation).

Release the clip.

6. Remove the steering column upper shroud.

7. Remove the steering column lower shroud.
8. Remove the steering column side trim panel.

Disconnect 2 tabs.
9. Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors from the
steering column multifunction switches.

clockspring.
11. Remove the steering column switch assembly.

12. Remove the steering column gaiter panel.
13. Disconnect the smart key antenna.
14. Disconnect the steering column lock electrical

connector.
15. Disconnect the steering angle sensor electrical
connector.
Vehicles with electric steering column

16. Disconnect the steering column adjustment
motor electrical connector.

nut.
18. WARNING: Take care if releasing the
adjustment lever when the column has been
removed from the vehicle. The spring is under
a high tension, and if released, could cause
personal injury. Make sure fingers are clear
from any areas, likely to be trapped.
CAUTION: If the steering angle sensor is

damaged upon removal of the steering column,
the sensor MUST be replaced.
With assistance, remove the steering column.

19. Remove the steering angle sensor.

Installation
1. CAUTION: The potentiometer adjustment

values are unique for each steering column.
Failure to enter the correct code during
calibration may result in damage to the
vehicle.
Note the potentiometer hexadecimal code on

the new steering column label for future
reference.
All vehicles
2. Install the steering angle sensor.
Tighten the Torx screws to 3 Nm (2.2 lb.ft).
3. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the bolt holes are clean and free of swarf.
The steering column bolts must by tighted by hand a

minimum of 3 revolutions.
Air tools MUST NOT be used on steering column bolts.
With assistance, install the steering column.

Tighten the bolts in sequence to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
4. Connect the steering column intermediate shaft.

Nm (16 lb.ft).
5. Secure the wiring harness to the steering column.

6. Connect the steering column adjustment motor electrical
connector.
All vehicles
7. Connect the steering angle sensor electrical connector.
8. Connect the steering column lock electrical

connector.
9. Connect the smart key antenna.
10. Install the steering column gaiter panel.

Tighten the Torx screws.
11. Install the steering column switch assembly.

12. Connect the clockspring and multifunction switch electrical

connectors.
13. Install the steering column side trim panel.

14. Install the steering column shrouds.


Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.
17. Install the steering wheel.

18. Install the drivers side register trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Driver Side Register
Trim Panel (412-01, Removal and Installation).
19. Calibrate the steering angle sensor using the Land Rover
approved diagnostic tool.
20. If a new electric steering column is fitted re-calibrate the
steering column potentiometer using the Land Rover
Steering Column - Steering Column Shaft
Removal
Specifications).

Release the clip.

nut.

shaft from the lower shaft.
5. Remove the steering column intermediate shaft.

Release the 2 grommets.
6. NOTES:
Do not disassemble further if the

Remove the 2 intermediate shaft grommets.
Installation
1. Install the steering column intermediate shaft.
Install the grommets.
2. Connect the steering column intermediate shaft to the lower

shaft.
3. Connect the steering column intermediate shaft to the

steering column.
Nm (16 lb.ft).
4. Install the driver side closing trim panel.

Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.

Specifications).
Steering Column - Steering Column Lower Shaft
Removal
CAUTION: Do not turn the steering wheel with the steering column lower shaft disconnected as damage to
the clockspring and steering wheel switches may occur.

Specifications).
2. Turn the steering wheel to the straight ahead position.
3. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the steering wheel is in the

straight ahead position.
Do not turn the steering wheel with the

steering column lower shaft disconnected as
damage to the clockspring and steering wheel
switches may occur.
NOTE: Note the fitted position.
Remove and discard the steering column lower

shaft upper bolt.

safety stands.
5. CAUTION: Make sure that the brake hose

and the wiring harnesses are not damaged
during the removal and installation of the heat
shields.
Remove the upper suspension arm heat shield

for access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
6. CAUTION: Do not turn the steering wheel with the

steering column lower shaft disconnected as damage to the
Disconnect the steering column lower shaft from the

intermediate shaft.
7. Remove the fender splash shield lower trim.

Remove the 4 clips.
8. CAUTION: Make sure that the steering is correctly
positioned using the road wheels. Do not turn the steering
wheel. Failure to follow this instruction my result in damage
to the vehicle.
Turn the steering until access can be gained to the steering

column lower shaft bolt.
9. CAUTION: Do not turn the steering wheel

with the steering column lower shaft
disconnected as damage to the clockspring and
steering wheel switches may occur.
Remove and discard the steering column lower

shaft bolt.
10. Remove the steering column lower shaft.

Disconnect the steering column lower shaft from the
steering gear.
Installation
2. CAUTION: Make sure that the road wheels are in the

straight ahead position.
Install the steering column lower shaft.

Connect the steering column lower shaft to the
steering gear.
Connect the steering column intermediate shaft to
the lower shaft.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that a new bolt is installed.
Install the steering column lower shaft upper bolt.

Install a new bolt and tighten to 30 Nm (22 lb.ft).
5. Raise the vehicle on the lift.
6. CAUTIONS:
Do not turn the steering wheel with the steering

column lower shaft disconnected as damage to the
Make sure that the steering is correctly positioned

using the road wheels. Do not turn the steering wheel.
Failure to follow this instruction my result in damage to the
vehicle.
Turn the steering until access can be gained to the steering

column lower shaft bolt.
7. Install the steering column lower shaft to steering gear bolt.

Install a new bolt and tighten to 30 Nm (22 lb.ft).
8. Install the fender splash shield lower trim.

9. Install the upper suspension arm heat shield.

Install the 3 nuts.

Steering Column - Steering Wheel
Removal
1. Refer to: Important Safety Instructions (100-00, Description

and Operation).
3. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and

possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any air bag
supplementary restraints system (SRS) components. To
deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the
battery ground cable and wait for one minute. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20, Removal and

Installation).
4.
5.
6. NOTE: Note the steering wheel to column

alignment marks.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Installation
1.
2.
3.
4. Torque: 6 Nm
5. Torque: 3 Nm
6. Torque: 3 Nm
7. NOTE: Note the steering wheel to column

alignment marks.
Torque: 63 Nm
8.
9.
10. Refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20, Removal and
Installation).

Steering Column Switches -
Steering column switch Torx screws 3 2
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Switches
For a detailed description of the steering column switches, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to:
Exterior Lighting (417-01, Description and Operation),

Exterior Lighting (417-01, Description and Operation),
Wipers and Washers (501-16, Description and Operation).
tested and/or the donor vehicle
1. Verify the customer concern
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and system integrity

Visual Inspection
Switches Fuse(s)
Electrical connector(s)
Wiring harness
proceeding to the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for DTCs and refer to the DTC Index
DTC Index
For a list of diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Central Junction Box (CJB) (100-00, Description and
Operation).
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Lock and Ignition Switch
Housing
Removal
CAUTION: If the ignition lock cylinder and switch are both removed from the ignition switch assembly, the
assembly shaft MUST NOT be rotated. Failure to comply will cause the incorrect operation of the lock, and the
assembly must be replaced.
2. Remove the steering wheel.



Release the steering column adjustment
lever.

steering column multifunction switches.

clockspring.
7. Remove the steering column switch assembly.
8. Remove the passive coil.

9. Remove the ignition switch assembly.

Remove and discard the 2 shear bolts.
10. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the
Remove the ignition lock cylinder.

Turn the ignition key to position 1.
Insert a pin, not exceeding 2 mm
diameter, through the access hole in the
ignition lock cylinder housing to depress
the plunger, and release the ignition
lock cylinder.
11. Remove the ignition switch.

Depress the 2 clips.
Installation
1. Install the ignition switch.
2. Install the ignition lock cylinder.

Turn the ignition key to position 1.
Locate into guides and depress the
plunger.
3. Install the passive coil.
Secure the clips.
4. Install the ignition switch assembly.

Tighten the shear bolts until the heads shear off.
5. Install the steering column switch assembly.

6. Connect the clockspring and multifunction switch electrical

connectors.
8. Install the steering wheel.

Steering Column Switches - Ignition Switch
Removal


Release the steering column adjustment
lever.
4. CAUTION: The ignition key must be

removed prior to the removal of the ignition
switch.
Remove the ignition switch.

Depress the 2 clips.
Installation
1. Install the ignition switch.

Tighten the Torx screws.
Secure the clips.
Secure the adjustment lever.
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Multifunction Switch RH
Removal


4. Remove the steering column multifunction

switch.
Installation
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Multifunction Switch LH
Removal


4. Remove the steering column multifunction

switch.
Installation
Engine System - General Information - Engine TDV6 3.0L Diesel
For a detailed description of the 3.0L Diesel engine, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (303-01 Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel)
Engine (Description and Operation),

Engine (Description and Operation),
Engine (Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Coolant level Wiring harness
Coolant leaks Electrical connector(s)
Oil level Injectors
Oil leaks Glow plugs
Visibly damaged or worn parts 5V sensor supply
Loose or missing nuts or bolts Sensor(s)
Cooling fan control module and motor
Engine Control Module (ECM)
If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
3. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the relevant Symptom Chart.
Symptom Charts have been separated into Leaks and Noise Vibration and Harshness (NVH) for ease
of use. Alternatively, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
Symptom Charts
Symptom Chart, Leaks
Symptom Possible Cause Action
External coolant leaks Damaged hose(s) Refer to the relevant section of the
Damaged workshop manual and test the cooling
expansion tank system for leaks
Damaged radiator
Leaking
seals/gaskets
Cracked/damaged
casings
Internal coolant leaks Note: This Leaking Refer to the relevant section of the
may be indicated by the production seals/gaskets workshop manual and test the cooling
of white smoke from the exhaust Cracked/damaged system for leaks
casings
Engine overheats Insufficient Refer to the relevant section of the

coolant workshop manual and test the cooling
Insufficient oil system for leaks
Pressure cap fault Check the engine oil
Thermostat not Test the operation of the thermostat
opening Test the operation of the coolant pump
Coolant pump Test the operation of the cooling fan
failure
Cooling fan
failure
Engine takes too long to reach Thermostat stuck Test the operation of the thermostat
operating temperature open
External oil leaks Gaskets Clean and confirm the area of the leak.
Seals Check the visual condition of oil carrying
Oil pipes components
Oil filter Check the crankcase ventilation system
Oil cooler Carry out a compression test, GO to
Damaged/cracked Pinpoint Test A.
casings
Crankcase
ventilation
system
Piston ring blow-
by
Internal oil leaks (leaks into coolant Gaskets Check for traces of oil in the coolant. Check
or combustion chamber) Note: This Seals for evidence of oil in the combustion
may be indicated by the production Damaged/cracked chambers (deposits on the glow plugs, etc).
of blue smoke from the exhaust casings Confirm oil consumption and vehicle usage
Worn valve with the owner/driver. Carry out an oil
guides consumption test, GO to Pinpoint Test B.
Worn cylinder
bores/pistons
Broken piston
rings
Symptom Chart, NVH
NOTE: As the checks suggested here are open to interpretation, they should be used as a guide only.
Descriptions of noises, etc, are in general terms, so depend on a degree of experience on the part of the
technician.
Symptom Possible Cause Action

Rattle/ticking from top of Valve gear noise Check the engine oil pressure, GO to Pinpoint Test
engine Camshaft bearing C.
noise Check the function of the hydraulic tappets and the
Timing belt noise camshaft condition. Check the camshaft bearings
Tensioner noise Check the timing belt and tensioner
Vacuum pump Check the vacuum pump
noise Check the high pressure fuel pump
High pressure
fuel pump noise
Growl from top of engine High pressure Check the high pressure fuel pump belt
fuel pump belt Check the high pressure fuel pump belt tensioner
noise
High pressure
fuel pump belt
tensioner noise
Squeaking/creaking/squeal Auxiliary drive Check the auxiliary drive belt

from front of engine belt Check the auxiliary drive belt tensioner
Auxiliary drive Check the driven components
belt tensioner
Driven
components on
auxiliary drive
belt
Whine/slap/growl from Auxiliary drive Check the auxiliary drive belt

front of engine belt Check the auxiliary drive belt tensioner
Auxiliary drive Check the driven components
belt tensioner Check the timing belt
Driven Check the timing belt tensioner
components on
auxiliary drive
belt
Timing belt noise
Timing belt
tensioner noise
Knock from lower half of Piston slap Check the engine oil pressure, GO to Pinpoint Test
engine (often worse with a Piston pin noise C. . Check piston, cylinder bore, piston pin and
cold engine) Connecting rod connecting rod bearing for excess wear
bearing noise
Knock/rumble from lower Main bearing Check the engine oil pressure, GO to Pinpoint Test
half of engine (often worse noise C. . Check connecting rod bearing for excess wear
on overrun)
Misfire/rough running Engine Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
management check the Engine Control Module (ECM) for related
system DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Fuel charging and Carry out a compression test, GO to Pinpoint Test A.
controls Check for excess wear in engine components
Exhaust Gas
Recirculation
(EGR) system
Burnt/sticking
valves
Worn valve
guides
Worn cylinder
bores/pistons
Broken piston
rings
Damaged/cracked
casings
DTC Index
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, DTC: Engine Control Module (PCM) (100-00,
Pinpoint Tests
NOTE: Where reference is made to 'suitable equipment', this refers to standard workshop equipment. Refer
to the operating instructions for your own equipment when performing any tests.
PINPOINT TEST A : CHECK THE CYLINDER COMPRESSIONS
WARNING: Only compression testers able to read the higher compression pressures found in diesel engines
should be used. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
NOTE: Where possible, compression testing should be carried out on an engine at operating temperature.
CONDITIONS
A1: CARRY OUT A DRY CYLINDER COMPRESSION TEST
1 Make sure the parking brake is applied and that the selector lever is in park.
2 Set the ignition status to OFF.
3 Remove the starter relay.
4 Disconnect the starter motor solenoid connector.
5 Connect a suitable remote starter device to the starter motor solenoid.
6 Remove the glow plugs.
7 Install adaptor 303-1131 in place of the glow plug in the first cylinder to be tested.
8 Connect a suitable compression tester to the adaptor. See warning above.
9 Using the remote starter device, crank the engine a minimum of five revolutions.
10 Record the compression figure and the number of revolutions taken to reach it.
11 Repeat steps 7 - 10 above for the remaining cylinders, cranking the engine for a similar
number of revolutions each time.
12 Compare the compression figures across all the cylinders.
Are the compression figures within 10% of each other?
Yes
Unless the compression figures are universally very low (experience will indicate this), check
for other causes for the customer complaint.
No
GO to A2.
A2: CARRY OUT A WET CYLINDER COMPRESSION TEST
CAUTION: If engine oil is introduced into the cylinders, run the engine at 2,000 rpm for a minimum of ten
minutes after completing testing to prevent damage to the catalytic converters. Failure to follow this instruction
NOTE: There is a combustion chamber in the top of each piston. Make sure that the oil is not allowed to
run into this chamber.
1 Using a suitable oil can with a flexible spout, introduce a small amount of clean engine oil
into the cylinder just before testing, such that the oil is able to run between the piston and
the cylinder bore.
2 Repeat steps 7 - 10 from the test above, introducing oil into each cylinder just before testing.
3 Compare the compression figures across all the cylinders.
Is the compression figure higher than the dry test?
Yes
A higher figure following the introduction of oil may indicate a worn or damaged cylinder
bore, piston and/or piston rings. Disassembly would be required to confirm this.
No
If the compression figure is unaffected by the introduction of oil, but the figure is still less
than 90% of the other cylinders, this may indicate a burnt and/or sticking valve, leaking
head gasket, etc. Disassembly would be required to confirm this.
Clear any DTCs which may have been induced by the test.
PINPOINT TEST B : OIL CONSUMPTION TEST
NOTE: Oil consumption will vary, depending on a number of factors. New engines will normally use more
oil than 'run-in' engines, although a guideline would be to expect 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) per liter.
CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK FOR EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
1 Start the engine and allow it to run until it reaches normal operating temperature.
2 Make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface and set ignition status to OFF.
3 Allow to settle for at least five minutes.
4 Check the oil level.
5 Correct the level, if necessary, and record the reading and mileage in the vehicle history.
6 Make sure that the owner/driver is aware that a test is being carried out, and that they
should not top-up their oil level for the duration of the test, but should check the level every
160-240 Km (100-150 miles).
7 When the oil level reaches the ADD mark, the customer should bring the vehicle in to be
checked.
8 Top-up the oil to the level at the beginning of the test and record the amount of oil needed
to do so, and the mileage covered in the course of the test.
9 From this, the consumption can be calculated, and a decision made as to whether or not the
consumption is considered excessive.
Is the consumption excessive for the mileage and/or use?
Yes
Disassembly will be required to check the components indicated in the symptom chart.
No
No further action is required.
PINPOINT TEST C : CHECK THE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

NOTES:
Check and, if necessary, top-up the engine oil level before beginning this test.
Where reference is made to 'suitable equipment', this refers to standard workshop equipment. Refer to the
operating instructions for your own equipment when performing any tests.
CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK FOR LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
1 Remove the oil pressure sensor.
2 Connect a suitable oil pressure gauge in place of the oil pressure sensor.
3 Start the engine and check for leaks at the gauge connection.
4 Allow the engine to idle and monitor the oil pressure.
5 Raise the engine speed to 2,500 rpm and monitor the oil pressure.
Is the oil pressure less than 0.50 bar (7.25 psi) between idle and 2,500 rpm?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
GO to C3.
C2: CHECK FOR LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE AT ENGINE SPEEDS GREATER THAN 2,500 RPM
1 Raise the engine speed to above 2,500 rpm and monitor the oil pressure.
Is the oil pressure less than 1.0 bar (14.5 psi) at engine speeds greater than 2,500 rpm?
Yes
Pressure this low may indicate a problem with: oil pump, filtering, clearances within the
engine. Check if there are any other indications of engine faults (noise, etc), refer to the
symptom chart above.
No
GO to C3.
C3: CHECK FOR HIGH ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
1 Monitor the engine oil pressure at varying engine speeds.
Does the oil pressure reach 4.0 bar (58 psi)?
Yes
Pressure this high may indicate a blockage in the lubrication system. If this is not resolved,
high oil pressure will lead to engine oil leaks and other failures.
No
If the oil pressure stays in the band between 0.50 bar (7.25 psi) and 1.0 bar (14.5 psi) this
would be considered normal.
Engine System - General Information - Engine V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
Oil pressure testing adaptor, 303-1451
Oil pressure testing gauge, 303-871
For a detailed description of the 3.0L engine, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual. REFER to:
Engine (303-01B Engine - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol, Description and Operation),

Engine (303-01D, Description and Operation),
Engine (303-01D, Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Engine oil level
Coolant level
Transmission fluid level
Fuel level
Coolant leaks
Oil leaks
Fuel leaks
Visibly damaged or worn parts
Loose or missing nuts or bolts
Fuel contamination/grade/quality
Sensor installation/condition
Viscous fan and solenoid
Symptom Chart
NOTES:
If an engine is suspect, and the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty refer to the Warranty
Policy and Procedure manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior
to the installation of a new engine.
Due to the possibility of loose carbon, that has become trapped between the valve face and seat, effecting
the pressure readings, when carrying out a compression test and some cylinders are found to have low
pressures, install the spark plugs, road test the vehicle and re-test the suspect cylinders. If the correct pressures
are restored, no further action is required.
Symptom Action
All engine related Check ECM for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to DTC Index.
issues
Difficult to start Carry out general engine checks:
hot and cold - Compression test. Refer to component tests in this section.
- Valve clearances
- Spark plug condition and color
Poor idle Ensure the air intake system is free from leaks
Carry out general engine checks:
- Compression test. Refer to component tests in this section.
- Valve clearances
Check for collapsed catalytic converter/blocked exhaust system
Check long and short term fuel trim datalogger signals
- Readings up to 10%: may be considered as acceptable if the readings are equal
bank to bank
- Positive readings of between 10-20%: check for air leaks in air intake system
- Negative readings of between 10-20%: check for over fuelling e.g. leaking
injectors, high fuel pressure
- Readings above 20%: check for DTCs and refer to DTC Index.
Carry out a vacuum gauge check. Refer to component tests in this section
Insufficient Ensure the air intake system is free from leaks

power/Insufficient Carry out general engine checks:
compression - Compression test. Refer to component tests in this section.
- Valve clearances
Check for collapsed catalytic converter/blocked exhaust system
Check long and short term fuel trim datalogger signals
- Readings up to 10%: may be considered as acceptable if the readings are equal
bank to bank
- Positive readings of between 10-20%: check for air leaks in air intake system
- Negative readings of between 10-20%: check for over fuelling e.g. leaking
injectors, high fuel pressure
- Readings above 20%: check for DTCs and refer to DTC Index.
Carry out a vacuum gauge check. Refer to component tests in this section
Oil consumption Carry out oil leak check followed by an oil consumption test. Refer to the component
tests in this section
If oil consumption is excessive:
Check the integrity of the engine breather system
Carry out general engine checks:
- Compression test. Refer to component tests in this section.
- Valve clearances
Noise Refer to the Special Service Messages on the Electronic Product Quality Report (EPQR)
system for sound files. If the symptom does NOT compare to any of the sound files,
contact Dealer Technical Support (DTS)
DTC Index
For a complete list of all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to
Section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: V6 3.0L S/C Petrol, DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM)
(100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
Component Tests
Engine Oil Leaks
NOTE: Before installing new gaskets or oil seals, make sure that the fault is clearly established.
If the oil leak cannot be identified clearly by a visual inspection, carry out an Ultraviolet test:
Fluorescent Oil Additive Method
1. Clean the engine with a suitable cleaning fluid (brake cleaner).

2. Drain the engine oil and refill with recommended oil, premixed with Diesel Engine Oil Dye or equivalent.
Use a minimum 14.8 ml (0.5 ounce) to a maximum 29.6 ml (1 ounce) of fluorescent additive to all
engines. If oil is not premixed, fluorescent additive must first be added to the crankcase.
3. Run engine for 15 minutes. Stop the engine and inspect all seal and gasket areas for leaks using a 12
Volt Master UV Diagnostic Inspection Kit or equivalent. A clear bright yellow or orange area will identify
leak. For extremely small leaks, several hours may be required for the leak to appear.
4. As necessary, pressurize the main oil gallery system to locate leaks due to incorrectly sealed, loose or
cocked plugs. If the flywheel bolts leak oil, look for sealer on the threads.
5. Repair all leaks as necessary.
Compression Test
General Remarks
NOTES:
Removing fuses and disconnecting electrical components may cause the Engine Control Module (ECM) to log
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). After the measurements have been carried out, DTCs should be cleared from
memory by connecting to the Manufacturer Approved Diagnostic System.
Only check the compression pressure with the valves set to the prescribed clearance (if this can be
adjusted).
The compression pressure should be checked with the engine at normal operating temperature.
Check the Compression Pressure
WARNING: Move gear selector lever to 'P' position. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal
injury.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay.
2. Start the engine - the engine will start, run for a few seconds then stall.
3. Remove the spark plugs.
4. Install the compression tester.
5. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch OFF, using the auxiliary
starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of five compression strokes and record the highest reading.
Note the approximate number of compression strokes required to obtain the highest reading.
6. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression
strokes.
7. Install the removed components in reverse order, observing the specified tightening torques.
8. Clear all DTCs from the ECM.
Interpretation of the Results
NOTE: Due to the possibility of loose carbon that has become trapped between the valve face and seat
effecting the pressure readings, when carrying out a compression test and cylinder

L319 Discovery 4 SDV6-SCV6 Workshop Manual MY2013-2015

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

L319 Discovery 4 SDV6-SCV6 Workshop Manual MY2013-2015

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

L319 MK4 - Discovery 4 MY2013-2015

© 2016 - Outback Engineering Ltd

Important Safety Instructions

Warnings, Cautions and Notes in This Manual

Trustmark Authoring Standards (TAS) Removal and Installation Procedures

NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

Colors used in the graphic are as follows:

Blue - Indicates the target item, item to be removed/installed or disassembled/assembled

There may be multiple steps assigned to one illustration.

How to use This Manual

Workshop Manual Organization

Section 1 - General Information.

Important Safety Instructions

Warnings, Cautions and Notes which appear in this manual

Warnings, Cautions and Notes have the following meanings:

Note: Gives helpful information.

Fault Diagnostic Equipment

This manual is produced as a reference source to supplement T4.

Features of the equipment include:

a. Fully upgradeable support for the technician

b. Structured diagnostics to accommodate all skill levels

c. Direct print-out of screen information and test results

Testing the vehicle

Repairs and Replacement Parts

When working on a vehicle in the workshop always make sure that:

Jump Starting a Vehicle

General installation Instructions

Blank off openings exposed by component removal.

WARNING: Suitable eye protection must be worn.

General inspection of components

All components should be inspected for wear or damage before reassembling.

Joints and Joint Faces

Do not allow sealant to enter tapped holes or oilways.

Always install new roll pins of the correct size.

Woodruff keys may be re-used provided there is no indication of wear or distortion.

Remove any burrs from edges of keyways using a fine file.

Check that threads are undamaged.

Bolt and Nut Identification

Encapsulated ('Patched') bolts and screws

Self-locking bolts and screws

Trilobular bolts should not be used as a substitute for patched bolts.

Ball and Roller Bearings

Brake Pads and Linings

WARNING: Do not intermix brake fluid of different specifications.

Pipes and Hoses

WARNING: Suitable eye protection must be worn.

Fuel system hoses

Fuel system hose clips

Cooling system hoses

Hose orientation and connection

High voltage circuits

Vehicles installed with Bi-Xenon headlamp bulbs

Safety goggles and gloves must be worn.

Connectors and harnesses

Having confirmed that a component is faulty, carry out the following:

Switch off the ignition and disconnect the battery.

Fuel Handling Precautions

Make sure that suitable warning signs are exhibited.

Fuel tank and system draining

Fuel tank repairs

Never use a seal which has been improperly stored or handled.

Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) Precautions

Steering wheel airbag, clock spring.

Making the system safe